ETAP User Guide 7.5.2

ETAP 7.5.
2
User Guide
Operation Technology, Inc.

Registered to ISO 9001:2008
Certification No. 10002889 QM08
April 2011
Copyright 2011
All Rights Reserved
This manual has copyrights by Operation Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Under the copyright
laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Operation
Technology, Inc. The Licensee may copy portions of this documentation only for the exclusive use of
Licensee. Any reproduction shall include the copyright notice. This exception does not allow copies to
be made for other persons or entities, whether or not sold. Under this law, copying includes translating
into another language.
Certain names and/or logos used in this document may constitute trademarks, service marks, or trade
names of Operation Technology, Inc. or other entities.
Access, Excel, ODBC, SQL Server, Windows Vista, Windows XP, Windows 7, Windows 2003,
Windows 2008 and Microsoft Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
AutoCad is a registered trademark of Autodesk.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
PowerPlot is a registered trademark of Jackson & Associates.
Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Seagate Software.
MATLAB and Simulink are registered trademarks of MathWorks
Screen shot(s) reprinted by permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Operation Technology, Inc. believes that the information contained herein is accurate as of its publication
date, and such information is subject to change without notice. This information is provided as is
without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including but not limited to the implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. Operation
Technology, Inc. assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this publication or any other
documents referenced in this publication.
The current revision includes modifications from Version ETAP 7.5.0 Release to ETAP 7.5.2 Release.
The modifications are marked in blue for easy identification. Note: ETAP 7.5.0 may also be referred to as
ETAP 7.5 in this document.

Southern California
(949) 462-0100 Sales

(949) 462-0200 Fax
(949) 462-0400 Technical Support
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description
1.1 Specification........................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Capabilities........................................................................................................................... 23
1.3 ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) ................................................................................. 24
1.4 File Structure ........................................................................................................................ 25
1.5 Libraries ............................................................................................................................... 28
1.6 Help ...................................................................................................................................... 29
1.7 Automatic Backup of ETAP Projects................................................................................... 32
Chapter 2 Setup
2.1 System Requirements ............................................................................................................. 2
2.2 ETAP 7.5.0 Installation .......................................................................................................... 3
2.3 ETAP User Guide Installation ............................................................................................. 15
2.4 ODBC Configuration ........................................................................................................... 18
2.5 ETAP License Wizard.......................................................................................................... 20
2.6 ETAP License Information .................................................................................................. 26
2.7 ETAP Licensing .................................................................................................................. 28
2.8 License Manager Server ....................................................................................................... 30
2.9 License Manager Installation ............................................................................................... 31
2.10 License Manager Verification .............................................................................................. 35
2.11 Installation Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 39
2.12 User Guide Removal ............................................................................................................ 41
2.13 License Manager Removal ................................................................................................... 43
2.14 System Optimization ............................................................................................................ 45
Chapter 3 Overview
3.1 System Toolbar ...................................................................................................................... 6
3.2 Project View ........................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Network Systems ................................................................................................................... 9
3.4 Mode Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 10
3.5 Star Systems ......................................................................................................................... 15
3.6 Underground Raceway Systems (UGS) ............................................................................... 17
3.7 Ground Grid Systems ........................................................................................................... 20
3.8 Panel Systems ...................................................................................................................... 24
3.9 Cable Pulling Systems.......................................................................................................... 27
3.10 Real-Time Systems (PSMS) ................................................................................................ 29
3.11 GIS Systems ......................................................................................................................... 36
3.12 Control Systems ................................................................................................................... 37
3.13 System Dumpster ................................................................................................................. 40
3.14 Library .................................................................................................................................. 43
3.15 Cable Systems ...................................................................................................................... 45
3.16 Project Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 48
3.17 Study Case Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 57
3.18 Message Log ........................................................................................................................ 58
3.19 Tutorial ................................................................................................................................. 59
Operation Technology, Inc. ii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 4 Options (Preferences)
4.1 Options (Preferences) Editor .................................................................................................. 2
4.2 PSGRID.INI ........................................................................................................................... 5
4.3 OTIGraph.INI ........................................................................................................................ 6
4.4 Themes (OTH file) ................................................................................................................. 8
4.5 ETAPS.INI ........................................................................................................................... 10
Chapter 5 Database and Project Management

5.1 Presentations .......................................................................................................................... 3
5.2 Configuration Status .............................................................................................................. 6
5.3 Revision Data ....................................................................................................................... 24
5.4 ETAP Wizards ..................................................................................................................... 33
Chapter 6 User Access Management

6.1 Access Levels ......................................................................................................................... 3
6.2 User Management ................................................................................................................ 14
6.3 Creating A New Project File ................................................................................................ 18
6.4 Opening An Existing Project File ........................................................................................ 19
Chapter 7 Printing and Plotting

7.1 Schedule Report Manager ...................................................................................................... 3
7.2 Library Report Manager ......................................................................................................... 4
7.3 Printing One-Line Diagrams .................................................................................................. 7
7.4 Printing Star Views .............................................................................................................. 23
7.5 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 33
7.6 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 38
Chapter 8 Engineering Libraries

8.1 Library Utility Tools .............................................................................................................. 3
8.2 Convert ETAP DOS Libraries ............................................................................................. 10
8.3 Cable .................................................................................................................................... 11
8.4 Cable Fire Coating ............................................................................................................... 19
8.5 Cable Fire Stop..................................................................................................................... 22
8.6 Cable Fire Wrap ................................................................................................................... 25
8.7 Transmission Line Library (Phase Conductors) .................................................................. 28
8.8 Motor Nameplate ................................................................................................................. 34
8.9 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model................................................................................................. 39
8.10 Motor Characteristic Model ................................................................................................. 43
8.11 Motor Load Model ............................................................................................................... 46
8.12 Fuse ...................................................................................................................................... 49
8.13 Relay .................................................................................................................................... 62
8.14 Recloser ................................................................................................................................ 92
8.15 Electronic Controller .......................................................................................................... 113
8.16 HV Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 137
8.17 LV Circuit Breaker............................................................................................................. 142
8.18 Solid State Trip Device Library ......................................................................................... 157
8.19 Thermal Magnetic Trip Library ......................................................................................... 194
Operation Technology, Inc. iii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

8.20 Electro-Mechanical Trip Device Library ........................................................................... 208
8.21 Motor Circuit Protector Library ......................................................................................... 227
8.22 Overload Heater Library .................................................................................................... 239
8.23 Harmonic Library ............................................................................................................... 250
8.24 Interruption Cost Library ................................................................................................... 254
8.25 Reliability Library .............................................................................................................. 257
8.26 Battery ................................................................................................................................ 261
8.27 Control System Device Contact ...................................................................................... 266
8.28 Control System Device Control Relay ............................................................................ 270
8.29 Control System Device - Solenoid ..................................................................................... 285
Chapter 9 One-Line Diagram GUI

9.1 Edit A One-Line Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3
9.2 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 61
9.3 Default Display Options....................................................................................................... 68
9.4 Annotation Font ................................................................................................................... 69
9.5 Result Annotation ................................................................................................................ 70
9.6 Text Box ............................................................................................................................... 71
Chapter 10 Menu Bars

10.1 Start-Up Menu Bar ................................................................................................................. 2
10.2 One-Line Diagram Menu Bar ................................................................................................ 3
10.3 Project View Menu Bar ........................................................................................................ 89
10.4 Underground Raceway System Menu Bar ........................................................................... 91
10.5 Dumpster Menu Bar ............................................................................................................. 95
10.6 Cable Pulling Menu Bar ....................................................................................................... 96
10.7 Ground Grid Menu Bar ........................................................................................................ 98
Chapter 11 AC Elements
Part 1
11.1 Bus ......................................................................................................................................... 2
11.2 Transformer, 2-Winding ...................................................................................................... 36
11.3 Transformer, 3- Winding ..................................................................................................... 71
11.4 Cable .................................................................................................................................... 97
11.5 Transmission Line .............................................................................................................. 144
11.6 Reactor ............................................................................................................................... 178
11.7 Impedance .......................................................................................................................... 187
11.8 Power Grid ......................................................................................................................... 197
11.9 Generator ............................................................................................................................ 212
11.10 Wind Turbine Generator - WTG ........................................................................................ 251
Part 2
11.11 Inductiion Machine ............................................................................................................ 262
11.12 Synchronous Motor............................................................................................................ 316
11.13 Lumped Load ..................................................................................................................... 372
11.14 Motor Operated Valve ....................................................................................................... 392
11.15 Static Load ......................................................................................................................... 419
11.16 Capacitor ............................................................................................................................ 445
11.17 Power Panel ....................................................................................................................... 463
11.18 Harmonic Filter ................................................................................................................. 464
Operation Technology, Inc. iv ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

11.19 Remote Connector ............................................................................................................. 479
11.20 Phase Adapter .................................................................................................................... 481
11.21 Static Var Compensator ..................................................................................................... 486
11.22 High Voltage DC Link (DC Transmission Line) .............................................................. 497
11.23 AC Composite Motors ....................................................................................................... 504
11.24 DC Composite Motors ....................................................................................................... 506
11.25 Composite Networks .......................................................................................................... 507
11.26 Fuse .................................................................................................................................... 511
11.27 Contactor ............................................................................................................................ 531
11.28 HV Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 539
11.29 LV Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 552
11.30 Recloser ............................................................................................................................. 599
11.31 Overload Heater ................................................................................................................. 657
11.32 In-line Overload Relay ....................................................................................................... 674
11.34 Single-Throw Switch ......................................................................................................... 691
11.34 Double-Throw Switch ........................................................................................................ 700
11.35 Ground Grid ....................................................................................................................... 709
Chapter 12 Instrumentation Elements

12.1 Current Transformer............................................................................................................... 2
12.2 Potential Transformer........................................................................................................... 10
12.3 Voltmeter ............................................................................................................................. 16
12.4 Ammeter............................................................................................................................... 21
12.5 Multimeter ............................................................................................................................ 26
12.6 Protective Relay ................................................................................................................... 33
12.7 Voltage Relay Editor Overview ........................................................................................... 86
12.8 Frequency Relay .................................................................................................................. 93
12.9 Reverse Power Relay ......................................................................................................... 100
12.10 MV Solid State Trip Relay ................................................................................................ 107
12.11 Tag Link ............................................................................................................................. 127
Chapter 13 AC-DC Elements

13.1 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)..................................................................................... 2
13.2 VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) ........................................................................................ 22
13.3 Charger ................................................................................................................................. 35
13.4 Inverter ................................................................................................................................. 54
Chapter 14 DC Elements
14.1 DC Bus ................................................................................................................................... 2
14.2 DC Cable ................................................................................................................................ 9
14.3 DC Impedance...................................................................................................................... 40
14.4 DC Converter ....................................................................................................................... 46
14.5 Battery .................................................................................................................................. 54
14.6 DC Motor ............................................................................................................................. 68
14.7 DC Static Load ..................................................................................................................... 80
14.8 DC Lumped Load................................................................................................................. 91
14.9 DC Composite CSD ........................................................................................................... 103
14.10 DC Composite Motor ......................................................................................................... 113
14.11 DC Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................ 114
Operation Technology, Inc. v ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

14.12 DC Fuse.............................................................................................................................. 150
14.13 DC Single-Throw Switch ................................................................................................... 168
14.14 DC Double-Throw Switch ................................................................................................. 175
Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Analysis

15.1 ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar ................................................................................................... 2
15.2 IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar...................................................................................................... 6
15.3 Study Case Editor................................................................................................................. 10
15.4 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 34
15.5 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods ........................................................................................ 42
15.6 IEC Calculation Methods ..................................................................................................... 58
15.7 AC-DC Converter Models ................................................................................................... 71
15.9 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 72
15.10 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 76
15.11 Alert View ............................................................................................................................ 84
Chapter 16 STAR Device Cordination Analysis

16.1 Star Mode Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 2
16.2 Study Case Editor................................................................................................................... 9
16.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 22
16.4 Star Sequence-of-Operation ................................................................................................. 33
16.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 37
16.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 42
Chapter 17 STAR View

17.1 Star Systems ........................................................................................................................... 2
17.2 Star TCC View ....................................................................................................................... 5
17.3 Star View (TCC) Toolbar..................................................................................................... 17
17.4 Relay Test-Set Interface ..................................................................................................... 121
17.5 Star Tutorial ....................................................................................................................... 128
17.6 ARTTS Tutorial ................................................................................................................. 173
Chapter 18 Arc Flash Analysis

18.1 Bus Editor .............................................................................................................................. 3
18.2 Short-Circuit Study Case...................................................................................................... 24
18.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 35
18.4 Arc Flash Alert ..................................................................................................................... 42
18.5 Running Arc Flash Analysis ................................................................................................ 44
18.6 Calculation Methodology ..................................................................................................... 46
18.7 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 91
18.8 NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002 ................................................................................. 96
18.9 Arc Flash Reports................................................................................................................. 99
18.10 Arc Flash Labels ................................................................................................................ 115
18.11 Arc Flash Report Analyzer ................................................................................................ 153
Chapter 19 Load Flow Analysis

19.1 Load Flow Toolbar................................................................................................................. 2
19.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 21
Operation Technology, Inc. vi ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

19.4 Calculation Methods ............................................................................................................ 33
19.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation .................................................................................. 38
19.6 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 40
19.7 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 44
19.8 Alert View ............................................................................................................................ 54
19.9 Load Flow Result Analyzer ................................................................................................. 56
19.10 Load Analyzer ...................................................................................................................... 76
Chapter 20 Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis

20.1 Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar............................................................................................. 3
20.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 23
20.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation .................................................................................. 43
20.6 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 45
20.7 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 49
20.8 Alert View ............................................................................................................................ 58
Chapter 21 Motor Starting Analysis

21.1 Motor Starting Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 2
21.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 27
21.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 41
21.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 44
21.7 One-Line Diagram Displayed Results ................................................................................. 52
21.8 Alert View ............................................................................................................................ 53
21.9 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 54
Chapter 22 Transient Stability Analysis

22.1 Transient Stability Toolbar .................................................................................................... 3
22.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 30
22.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 52
22.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 60
22.8 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 71
22.9 Action List............................................................................................................................ 78
Chapter 23 Generator Start-Up

23.2 Calculation Methods .............................................................................................................. 5
23.3 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 11
Chapter 24 Dynamic Models

24.1 Induction Machine ................................................................................................................. 3
24.2 Synchronous Machine .......................................................................................................... 12
24.3 Power Grid ........................................................................................................................... 30
Operation Technology, Inc. vii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

24.4 Excitation System ................................................................................................................ 31
24.5 Governor-Turbine ................................................................................................................ 85
24.6 Power System Stabilizer (PSS) ......................................................................................... 157
24.7 Mechanical Load ................................................................................................................ 163
24.8 Static Var Compensator Models ........................................................................................ 165
24.9 Dynamic Lumped Motor Load Model ............................................................................... 173
24.10 Wind Turbine Generator .................................................................................................... 174
Chapter 25 User Defined Dynamic Models

25.1 UDM Template File ............................................................................................................... 2
25.2 Select UDM Models............................................................................................................... 6
25.3 Compile UDM Equation File ............................................................................................... 11
25.4 System Variable Name Mapping ......................................................................................... 14
25.5 Test Model ........................................................................................................................... 21
25.6 Advanced Topics.................................................................................................................. 28
Chapter 26 Parameter Estimation

26.1 Start Parameter Estimation ..................................................................................................... 2
26.2 Parameter Estimation Editor .................................................................................................. 3
26.3 Motor Parameter Update Editor ............................................................................................. 9
26.4 Calculation Method .............................................................................................................. 13
26.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 15
26.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 16
Chapter 27 Harmonic Analysis

27.1 Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 4
27.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 22
27.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 38
27.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 44
27.8 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 56
Chapter 28 Optimal Power Flow

28.1 Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3
28.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 28
28.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 38
28.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 43
Chapter 29 Optimal Capacitor Placement

29.1 Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 4
29.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 21
29.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 33
Operation Technology, Inc. viii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

29.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 35
Chapter 30 Reliabitliy Analysis

30.1 Reliability System Analysis Toolbar...................................................................................... 3
30.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 14
30.4 Modeling and Calculation Method....................................................................................... 24
30.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 29
30.6 Output Report ....................................................................................................................... 32
30.7 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 44
Chapter 31 Transformer MVA Sizing

31.1 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing .................................................................................... 2
31.2 Calculation Method ................................................................................................................ 8
31.3 Required Data ........................................................................................................................ 9
Chapter 32 Transformer Tap Optimization

32.1 Transformer Tap Optimization .............................................................................................. 2
32.2 Tap Optimization Page........................................................................................................... 3
32.3 Calculation Method ................................................................................................................ 9
32.4 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 10
32.5 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 11
Chapter 33 DC Short-Circuit Analysis

33.1 Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3
33.3 Display Options...................................................................................................................... 8
33.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 20
33.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 24
Chapter 34 DC Load Flow Analysis

34.1 Study Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 3
34.3 Display Options...................................................................................................................... 8
34.5 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 22
34.6 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 26
Chapter 35 Battery Sizing and Discharge

35.1 Battery Sizing Toolbar ........................................................................................................... 3
35.3 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 26
35.4 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 48
35.5 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 51
35.7 Plots...................................................................................................................................... 64
Operation Technology, Inc. ix ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 36 Panel Systems
36.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI) ............................................................................................. 3
36.2 Panel Schedule Editor ............................................................................................................ 7
36.3 Panel Schedule Editor - Info Page ......................................................................................... 8
36.4 Panel Schedule Editor - Rating Page ................................................................................... 12
36.5 Panel Schedule Editor - Schedule Page................................................................................ 24
36.6 Panel Schedule Editor Summary Page .............................................................................. 36
36.7 Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page ............................................................................... 39
36.8 Panel Schedule Editor Comment Page .............................................................................. 41
36.10 Panels in System Studies ..................................................................................................... 53
36.11 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 54
Chapter 37 Ground Grid Systems

37.1 Ground Grid Systems Presentation ........................................................................................ 3
37.2 FEM Editor Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 8
37.3 IEEE Editor Toolbar .............................................................................................................. 9
37.4 Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar .................................................................................... 10
37.5 Edit A GGS .......................................................................................................................... 15
37.7 Ground Short-Circuit Current Values .................................................................................. 21
37.8 Soil Editor ............................................................................................................................ 24
37.9 IEEE Group Editor ............................................................................................................... 26
37.10 FEM Group Editor ............................................................................................................... 30
37.11 Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM) .............................................................................................. 32
37.13 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 38
37.14 Output Report....................................................................................................................... 40
37.15 Ground Grid Systems Report Manager ................................................................................ 41
37.16 Plot Selection ....................................................................................................................... 50
Chapter 38 Underground Raceway Systems

38.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI) ............................................................................................. 3
38.2 Study Toolbar ....................................................................................................................... 10
38.4 Display Options.................................................................................................................... 17
38.5 Editing a UGS ...................................................................................................................... 21
38.6 Underground System Editor ................................................................................................. 28
38.7 Raceway Editor .................................................................................................................... 31
38.8 External Heat Source............................................................................................................ 36
38.10 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 43
38.11 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 45
38.12 Plots ..................................................................................................................................... 52
38.13 Tutorial................................................................................................................................. 54
Operation Technology, Inc. x ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 39 Cable Pulling
39.1 Presentation ............................................................................................................................ 2
39.2 Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 3
39.4 Create a New Presentation ..................................................................................................... 8
39.5 Cable Pull Editor .................................................................................................................... 9
39.6 Pull Path Geometric View .................................................................................................... 13
39.7 Conduit Cross-Section View ................................................................................................ 17
39.8 3-D View .............................................................................................................................. 25
39.9 Cable Pulling Analysis ......................................................................................................... 26
39.10 Display Options ................................................................................................................... 28
39.12 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 31
39.13 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 32
Chapter 40 ETAP DataX (Data Exchange)

40.1 DataX Levels of Exchange..................................................................................................... 2
40.2 ETAP Data Exchange Services .............................................................................................. 3
40.3 PowerPlot to ETAP Star Migration........................................................................................ 5
40.4 Import IEEE Format............................................................................................................. 25
40.5 Import Raw Format .............................................................................................................. 27
40.6 Import a Ground Grid in AutoCAD to ETAP ...................................................................... 31
Chapter 41 CSD Elements

41.1 Pointer .................................................................................................................................... 2
41.2 Display Options...................................................................................................................... 3
41.3 DC Bus Editor ........................................................................................................................ 7
41.4 Node Editor .......................................................................................................................... 12
41.5 Fuse Editor ........................................................................................................................... 13
41.6 Circuit Breaker Editor .......................................................................................................... 31
41.7 Switch Editor........................................................................................................................ 66
41.8 Push Button Editor ............................................................................................................... 72
41.9 Control Relay Editor ............................................................................................................ 77
41.10 Solenoid Editor .................................................................................................................... 94
41.11 Light Editor ........................................................................................................................ 111
41.12 General Load Editor ........................................................................................................... 120
41.13 Contact Editor .................................................................................................................... 130
41.14 Macro Controlled Contact .................................................................................................. 132
41.15 Control Cable Schedule...................................................................................................... 139
41.16 Wire Editor ......................................................................................................................... 146
41.17 Impedance Editor ............................................................................................................... 156
Chapter 42 Control System Diagram (CSD)

42.1 Control System Diagram Presentation ................................................................................... 2
42.2 Edit Mode ............................................................................................................................... 5
42.3 Voltage Drop Mode (Study Mode) ...................................................................................... 11
42.4 Required Data ...................................................................................................................... 36
42.5 Output Reports ..................................................................................................................... 39
Operation Technology, Inc. xi ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 43 ETAP DataX (Data Synchronization)
43.1 Accessing the DataX Tools .................................................................................................... 2
43.2 Access Database ..................................................................................................................... 3
43.3 Excel - Fixed Format............................................................................................................ 16
43.4 Excel - Open Format ............................................................................................................ 28
43.5 e-DPP ................................................................................................................................... 45
43.6 SmartPlant Electrical............................................................................................................ 57
Chapter 44 ETAP DataX (GIS Map)

44.1 GIS Map ................................................................................................................................. 2
44.2 Activating the GIS Map Module ............................................................................................ 4
44.3 Creating a New GIS Presentation .......................................................................................... 5
44.4 GIS Map Toolbar ................................................................................................................... 7
44.5 Data Transfer from GIS Map to ETAP ................................................................................ 10
44.6 Data Synchronization ........................................................................................................... 13
44.7 Auto Layout Generation ....................................................................................................... 18
44.8 Performing System Studies .................................................................................................. 19
44.9 Updating GIS Maps with Results ......................................................................................... 20
Chapter 45 References
45.1 Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................................ 1
Operation Technology, Inc. xii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 1
Product Description
ETAP is a fully graphical Enterprise package that runs on Microsoft Windows 2003, 2008, XP, Vista,
and 7 operating systems. ETAP is the most comprehensive analysis tool for the design and testing of
power systems available. Using its standard offline simulation modules, ETAP can utilize real-time
operating data for advanced monitoring, real-time simulation, optimization, energy management
systems, and high-speed intelligent load shedding.
ETAP has been designed and developed by engineers for engineers to handle the diverse
discipline of power systems for a broad spectrum of industries in one integrated package with
multiple interface views such as AC and DC networks, cable raceways, ground grid, GIS, panels, arc
flash, WTG, protective device coordination/selectivity, and AC and DC control system diagrams.
ETAP users must be proficient in using basic operations of Windows environment. Use of
ETAP does not require training. However, to facilitate the learning process, OTI provides
workshops throughout the year in several locations. (Refer to www.etap.com for the up-to-date
training schedule.)
ETAP allows you to easily create and edit graphical one-line diagrams (OLD),
underground cable raceway systems (UGS), three-dimensional cable systems,
advanced time-current coordination and selectivity plots, geographic information
system schematics (GIS), as well as three-dimensional ground grid systems (GGS).
The program has been designed to incorporate to three key concepts:
Virtual Reality Operation
Operation Technology, Inc. 1-1 ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Product Description Introduction
The program operation emulates real electrical system operation as closely as possible. For example,
when you open or close a circuit breaker, place an element out of service, or change the operating status
of motors, the de-energized elements and sub-systems are indicated on the one-line diagram in gray.
ETAP incorporates innovative concepts for determining protective device coordination directly from the
one-line diagram.
Total Integration of Data

ETAP combines the electrical, logical, mechanical, and physical attributes of system elements in the same
database. For example, a cable not only contains data representing its electrical properties and physical
dimensions, but also information indicating the raceways through which it is routed. Thus, the data for a
single cable can be used for load flow or short-circuit analyses (which require electrical parameters and
connections) as well as cable ampacity derating calculations (which require physical routing data). This
integration of the data provides consistency throughout the system and eliminates the need for multiple
data entry for the same element, which can be a considerable time savings.
Simplicity in Data Entry

ETAP keeps track of the detailed data for each electrical apparatus. Data editors can speed up the data
entry process by requiring the minimum data for a particular study. In order to achieve this, we have
structured the property editors in the most logical manner for entering data for different types of analysis
or design.
ETAPs one-line diagram supports a number of features to assist you in

constructing networks of varying complexities. For example, each element can
have individually varying orientations, sizes, and display symbols (IEC or ANSI).
The one-line diagram also allows you to place multiple protective devices
between a circuit branch and a bus.
ETAP provides you with a variety of options for presenting or viewing your electrical system. These
views are called presentations. The location, size, orientation, and symbol of each element can be shown
differently in each presentation. Additionally, protective devices and relays can be displayed (visible) or
hidden (invisible) for any particular presentation. For example, one presentation can be a relay view
where all protective devices are displayed. Another presentation may show a one-line diagram with some
circuit breakers shown and the rest hidden (a layout best suited for load flow results).
Among ETAPs most powerful features are the composite network and motor elements. Composite
elements allow you to graphically nest network elements within themselves down to an arbitrary depth.
For example, a composite network can contain other composite networks, a feature that provides the
capability to construct complex electrical networks while still maintaining a clean, uncluttered diagram
that displays what you want to emphasize - yet the next level of system detail is within easy reach of your
mouse. ETAP puts the power at your fingertips.
We consider ETAP to be the foremost-integrated database for electrical systems, allowing you to have
multiple presentations of a system for different analysis or design purposes.

Product Description Specification
1.1 Specification
Modeling
Virtual reality operation
Total integration of data (electrical, logical, mechanical, and physical attributes)
Looped and radial systems
Unlimited isolated sub-systems
No system connection limitations
Multiple loading conditions
Multi-level nesting of sub-systems
Advanced sparse matrix techniques
User access control and data validation
Asynchronous calculations, allow multiple modules to calculate simultaneously
Database transitioning reduces the risk of database loss during a power outage
True 32-bit or 64-bit programming designed for Windows XP/2003/2008/Vista/7
3-phase and single-phase modeling including panels and sub-panels
Features
Five levels of automatic error checking
Dynamic help line and error messaging
Message logger to track program usage and access
Multiple user access levels
ODBC (open database connectivity) - use Microsoft Access, SQL, Oracle, etc.
Manages maintenance data via info, remarks, and comment pages
Merge independent ETAP project files
Convert project files between databases such as Microsoft Access, SQL, and Oracle
Integrated 1-phase, 3-phase, and DC systems
Integrated one-line diagram and underground raceway systems
Integrated one-line diagram and device coordination/selectivity module
Common database for all studies
Simplicity in data entry
Multiple sub-systems and swing machines
User-controlled auto save and transaction
User-controlled default settings for all components
Typical data for motors, generators, transformers, reactors, governors, and exciters
Individual LTC time delays (initial and operating)
No voltage limitations
Unlimited protective and metering device connections to branches and loads
Unlimited load connections to a single bus
Any system frequency
English and metric unit systems
25 character component IDs
Raw manufacturer data entry
Individual and global load demand and diversity factors
Temperature sensitive cable resistance for all studies
Element navigator

Lumped loading
Equipment cables for loads, eliminating requirement for terminal buses
Edited by and checked by data stamping
Date stamping of all data changes
Intelligent editors with user-defined data fields
Analysis-dependent data entry requirements
Multiple user network support
Compatible database with ETAP Real-Time for real-time monitoring, simulation, and supervisory
control
Toolbar accessible Preferences pane for preference modification while ETAP is running
One-Line Diagrams
Unlimited one-line diagram presentations
Single-phase system (2 and 3 wires)
Panel systems
Unlimited status configurations/scenarios (switching devices, motors, loads, etc.)
Multiple engineering properties (base and revision data)
Three-dimensional (3-D) database
Integrated Ground grid systems
Multiple loading categories (conditions) with individual percent loading
Unlimited one-line diagram nesting for sub-systems, MCCs, etc.
Simultaneous view of one-line diagram presentations
Simultaneous view of system configurations
Simultaneous view of different study results
Phase adapters to convert from three phase to mixed single phase networks
One-Line Templates
Automatic bus/node insertion
Find elements from editors or the project window
Graphical Auto Select
Grouping/ungrouping of elements
Change size, symbol, color, orientation, and alignment of elements and text, individually and globally
Themed color schemes provide the flexibility to customize each one-line presentation independently
Symbol Library
ActiveX (programmable objects)
Graphically fault/clear fault from buses
Selectable zoom-to-fit
State-of-the-art built-in graphic user interface
Drag and drop, cut and paste, undo and redo, zooming, etc.
Built-in ETAP CAD system
XML data exchange
Export one-line diagrams to third party CAD systems via .dxf and metafile formats
Import OLE objects (text, pictures, spreadsheets, GIS maps, etc.)
Import ETAP DOS project files
Import ASCII project files
Execute external programs
Customizable graphical display of results annotations
Customizable graphical display of nameplate data annotations

Interchangeable ANSI and IEC element symbols

Multiple sizing and rotation of element symbols
Multi-color symbols and annotations
Supports True Type fonts
Hide and show protective devices per presentation
Remote connectors for better one-line diagram layout
Graphical operation (open/close) of switching devices in edit or study modes
Dynamic continuity check shows de-energized devices as semi-transparent images and graphically
displays current system configuration
Configuration manager to easily compare open/close status for all switching devices
Display of fixed tap and load tap changer (LTC) positions on the one-line diagram
Direct device coordination from the one-line diagram
Build elementary diagrams within the same project and integrate with one-line diagram
Comprehensive printing/plotting capabilities
Individual and global section of elements, objects, and composites
Schedule manager for system components (input data)
Customizable output reports (Crystal Reports) with find functionality
Categorized output report manager for Crystal Reports
Access database output reports
Crystal Reports for library data
Comprehensive summary reports
Customizable output plots
Report status of loads and protective devices for all configurations
System dumpster with unlimited cells for storage and retrieval of deleted components
Resizable, floating/attachable toolbars for each study
Keyboard Shortcuts
Time-Current Device Coordination/Selectivity Plots (ETAP Star)

Sequence-of-Operation
Graphically adjustable device settings
Extensive device library (verified and validated)
Auto-update short-circuit current
Time-current device coordination
Auto-coordinate devices
Integrated with one-line diagrams
Drag or calculate time differences
Multi-function (universal) relays
Built-in ARTTS hardware interface
Display of actual transient response
Device Settings Report
Ground Grid
3-D, cross sectional, and top graphical interface views
IEEE 80 and 665 Methods
Finite element method
Rods and conductors in any 3-D direction
Rod and conductor optimization

3-D touch, step, and absolute potential plots

Graphical display of over limits
Underground Raceway Systems

Graphical user interface
Multiple duct banks, direct buried, and external heat sources
Non-uniform placement of ducts and direct buried conduits
Transient cable temperature plotting
External heat sources
Grounded/ungrounded shielding
One-line diagram database integration
Place both AC and DC cables in raceway
Cable Pulling
3-D isometric view
Pull multiple cables
Pull different size cables
Vertical and horizontal levels
Checks for NEC requirements
Forward and reverse tension
Sidewall pressure
Transformer Sizing
Transformer MVA Sizing

Sizing based on the actual connected or operating load
Includes ANSI and IEC standard types, classes, and ratings
Considers ambient temperature, altitude, growth and load factors, etc.
Transformer Tap Optimization

IEEE CSF.116 Standard
Optimize transformers tap setting or turns ratio
Considers transformers primary and secondary side cables
Considers system voltage variation
Plot generator Mvar output vs. system voltage
Motor Parameter Estimation

Estimate dynamic parameters of induction machines
Include parameter variations due to speed and/or deep-bar effects
Requires most readily-available characteristics published by MFRs
Calculate input parameters using estimated results and report deviations
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)

Utilize any database for which an ODBC driver exists (Microsoft Access, Oracle, and SQL Server)
Access the database from third party database managers
Integrate other project data into the same database

3D-Database
Within each project, ETAP provides three major system components. These system components are
organized in an orthogonal fashion (independent from each other) to provide you with the ultimate power
and flexibility when developing ETAP projects.
Graphical display of one-line diagrams (presentation)

Engineering properties (data revisions)
Operating status (configuration status)
Convert to EMF, WMF, and DXF Files

Export ETAP one-line diagrams to Enhanced MetaFiles (EMF), Windows MetaFiles (WMF), and
AutoCAD DXF files. These files can be imported into AutoCAD, Microsoft Word, etc.
Printing/Plotting of One-Line Diagram

The following options are available for each presentation including composite motors and composite
networks:
Print options
Printer setup
Zoom level for print size
Print coordinates and scrolling
Customizable print preview
Batch printing
OLE Client
OLE is a program-integration technology used to share information between programs. Many Windows
applications including Microsoft Office are OLE capable. Within ETAP, you can dynamically embed
OLE objects such as bitmaps, text, spreadsheets, tables, and metafiles directly into your one-line
diagrams.
Active Error Viewer

ETAP provides five levels of error checking. The active error viewer appears when you attempt to run a
study with missing or inappropriate data. Double-click on each individual error message to locate and
open the component editor associated with the cause of the error message.
Alert View
ETAP displays this view to summarize possible problems with the electrical system including overloads,
under/over voltage bus conditions, stressed devices, etc.
Application Message Logging

Track ETAP usage and access by using the application message logger. It keeps track of who opens a
project, which level of access they have, and how long they were in the project.

Crystal Reports
Crystal Reports are full-color, printable reports for a variety of ETAP analyses. Each Crystal Report is
pre-configured for commonly requested output formats. The Crystal Reports browser/printer is available
within ETAP. Users can create and modify existing Crystal Reports using a Crystal Reports editor.
Crystal Reports can be exported to many other popular formats like MS-Word, Adobe PDF, MS-Excel,
etc. without any loss of information and formatting.
Output Report Manager

Provides more than 250 Crystal Reports for different studies including the following subsections:
Complete report Results Customizable subsections

Input data Summary reports
Schedule Report Manager

When using Crystal Reports, it can provide different schedules such as bus, branch, load, and cable with
the following options:
Base and revision data Elements in the dumpster

Energized/de-energized elements
Annotation Display Options

With independent display options for each ETAP mode (Edit, Load Flow, Short-Circuit, etc.), you can
display certain types of information in one mode and other types of information when in another mode.
Display ID, rating, kV, ampacity, and impedance of elements

Display Delta-Y connection and tap setting of transformers
Display winding connection of generators and motors
Display conductor size, type, and length of cables
User-selectable fonts for different groups of annotations (size, bold, font type, etc.)
Set default positions of annotations for each element
Independently rotate each annotation
Option to display different sets of study results including units (A, kW+jkVar, kVA, etc.)
AC Elements, One-Line Diagram

Bus/node Induction motor/generator
Transformer, 2-winding Synchronous motor
Transformer, 3-winding Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Cable Static load
Transmission line Lumped load
Reactor, current-limiting Capacitor
Impedance Panel systems
Power grid (utility system) Harmonic filter
Synchronous generator Remote connector
Wind Turbine Generator Phase adapter

Static Var Compensator (SVC) Reclosers

High voltage DC link Switch, single-throw
Fuse Switch, double-throw
Circuit breaker, high voltage Ground grid systems
Circuit breaker, low voltage
Contactor
Instrumentation Elements, One-Line Diagram

Current Transformer (CT) Reverse power relay
Potential (voltage) Transformer (PT) Frequency relay
Voltmeter Motor relay
Ammeter Solid state trip relay
Multi-meter Overcurrent relay
Voltage relay Overload heater
Differential Relay In-line relay
Nested Sub-Systems, One-Line Diagram

AC composite motor
DC composite motor
Composite network
DC Elements, One-Line Diagram

Bus/node Static load
Cable Elementary diagram
Impedance Circuit breaker
DC-DC converter Fuse
Battery Switch, single-throw
Motor Switch, double-throw
Lumped load
DC Elements, Control Circuit Diagram

Bus Macro-controlled contact
Node Wire
Fuse Impedance
Circuit breaker General load
Switch, single-throw Light
Push button Control relay
Contact Solenoid
Form C contact
AC-DC Elements, One-Line Diagram

Charger UPS
Inverter VFD

Elements, Underground Raceway System

Cable, one-line Duct bank raceway
Cable, equipment Direct buried raceway
Cable, UGS Conduit (duct bank)
External heat source Location (direct buried)
Elements, Ground Grid System

Rectangular shaped grid Triangular shaped grid
T shaped grid Rods
L shaped grid Conductors
Elements, Cable Pulling System

Cable, one-line Cable, CP
Cable, equipment Segments
Cable, UGS Bends
Libraries
Cable (NEC, ICEA, and Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Coating (Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Stop (Manufacturer Published Data)
Cable Fire Wrap (Manufacturer Published Data)
Motor Nameplate
Motor Circuit Model (Single and Double Cage Motors)
Motor Characteristic Model
Motor Load Model
Fuse (Manufacturer Published Data)
Relay (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
HV Circuit Breaker (Manufacturer Published Data)
LV Circuit Breaker (Manufacturer Published Data )
Solid State Trip (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Thermal Magnetic Trip (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Electro-Mechanical Trip (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Motor Circuit Protector (Manufacturer Published Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Reclosers
Electronic Controllers
Harmonic (IEEE and Manufacturer Published Data)
Motor Overload Heater (Manufacturer Published Data)
Overload Heater (Manufacturer Published Data + Time-Current Characteristic Curves)
Reliability Index Library
Interruption Cost Library
Battery
Merge Data from Different Libraries
Export Library Data to MS Access File with Report Manager & Crystal Reports
50,000+ device time-current characteristic curves

Transformer Typical Data

Typical impedance data and X/R ratio based on transformer BIL level, MVA, and kV rating
Base Modules
ICEA P-55-440 Cable Tray Ampacity Calculator (Stolpe Method)
General power calculator
Transmission line constants
Transformer LTCs/regulator setting calculator
Motor nameplate data calculator
Motor inertia calculator
Generator nameplate data calculator
Power grid short-circuit data calculator
Cable Sizing
Cable Ampacity
Detailed equipment reports for buses, breakers, & loads
Device libraries
Load Flow Analysis

Newton-Raphson, fast decoupled, and accelerated Gauss Seidel
New double-precision Newton-Raphson Method with current injection
Advanced solution techniques for fast convergence
Voltage drop calculations
Load forecasting
New alert view to display critical and marginal limit violations
Bus/transformer/cable overload warning
Single phase load flow display
Option to select any loading category
Global and individual bus diversity factors
Individual demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare operating conditions
Option to update the database from load flow solutions
Lumped loads
Phase-shifting transformer
Power factor correction
Automatically adjust transformer tap and LTC/regulator settings
Generator governor/exciter control settings
New summary output report on bus loadings and overload conditions
Multi-Report Result Analyzer
Load Analyzer
Panel and Single-Phase Systems

3-phase 3-wire and 4-wire panels
1-phase 2-wire and 3-wire panels
Graphic user interface
Unlimited circuits with or without external connections
Unlimited sub-panel connections
External (graphical) load and branch connections

Load flow display

Spreadsheet load modeling
Column and standard layouts
ANSI and IEC standard panels
Extensive switching device libraries
Comprehensive circuit feeder/cable libraries
User-configurable defaults and layouts
Dynamic sub-panel and main-panel systems updates
User selectable load types (LCL, NCL, warehouse, receptacle, hospitals, etc.)
User modifiable demand and diversity factors (NEC and others)
Ten loading categories per circuit
Customizable panel system reports using Crystal Reports format
Intelligent panel calculations
Detailed panel loading summary
Customizable panel reports in MS-Excel
Short-Circuit Analysis
Complete compliance with ANSI/IEEE C37 series
Complete compliance with IEC 60056, 60282, 61363, 60781, 60909, 60947
IEEE Standard 141 and 399, UL 489
New Arc Flash Analysis module (NFPA 70E-2000) for determining incident energy and flash
protective boundary (ANSI and IEC)
Extensive manufacturer data for fuses, LV and HV breakers
Automatic crest and interrupting duty comparison
Automatic peak and breaking duty comparison
New alert view to display critical and marginal limit violations
3-phase, line-line, line-ground, and line-line-ground faults
Single Phase System Duty
cycle to 30 cycle faults including 2, 3, 5, and 8 cycle breakers
Generator Circuit Breaker IEEE Standard C37.013
Breaking duty as a function of breaker time delay
Interrupting duty as a function of breaker cycle time
Fault impedance (Z1 and Z0)
User-definable voltage c factor for IEC analysis
Complete grounding modeling for motors, generators and transformers
CB duty calculation based on the maximum-through fault current (ANSI)
Phase-shifting transformer for ANSI unbalanced faults
Check making and breaking capabilities of protective devices against fault currents
Cable temperature adjustment
User-selected bus faulting
Report fault current contributions (IA and 3 I0) and voltage profiles (va, vb, and vc)
User-selected fault current contribution level reporting
Option to include motor delays
Option to include feeder and overload heater elements
Option to set pre-fault voltages (fixed values or load flow results)
Option to use different X/R methods and c factors
Option to consider motor contributions based on loading categories

Updates directly to device coordination

Calculation of Tie PD current
Load Terminal Short Circuit Calculation
Time-Current Device Coordination/Selectivity (Star)

Sequence-of-Operation (SQOP) with device highlighting
3 Phase, Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, Line-to-Line-to-Ground fault types
Extensive device library (verified and validated)
Auto-update short-circuit current
Time-current device coordination
Auto-coordinate devices
Integrated with one-line diagrams
Drag or calculate time differences
Multi-function (universal) relays
Minimum short-circuit clipping (ANSI/IEC)
Short-circuit clipping for relay in ground distribution transformer
Append devices to existing Star views
User curve
Automatic curve shift for SQOP (S-TCC)
Crosshair to read out current and time
Minimum short-circuit current clipping fault arrow
Automatic color sequence for plotting curves
Fault arrow labels Min/Max clipping
Labels displayed front/behind curve
Extensive tooltips
Relay curves extendable up to pickup
Batch printing Star views or TCCs
Export any view to metafile
Built-in ARTTS hardware interface
Display of actual transient response
Device Settings Report
Panel Main Disconnect and internal circuit plotting
Arc Flash IEEE 1584

IEEE 1584-2002 Standard
Integrates with Short-Circuit and Device Coordination
3 phase and 1 phase Arc Flash Calculations
PPE categories based on NFPA or user-defined
Automatically generate customizable arc hazard labels (including Avery)
User-defined fault clearing times
Incident energy summary reports
Automatic source protective device search algorithms
NFPA 70E-2000, 2004, 2009
Use with both ANSI and IEC
Cubic box and open air
Load Terminal Faults

Arc Flash Report Analyzer

Work permits
Data sheets
Global data entry for equipment
Low voltage equipment handling
Motor Acceleration Analysis

Dynamic motor acceleration
Static motor starting
Multi-motor starting, stopping, and restarting in a single run
Group starting/acceleration of motors and loads using starting categories
Option to select any loading category for pre-start condition
Option to accelerate motors and loads by load transition (loading categories)
Option to use global or individual LTC time delays
Dynamic simulation of LTCs and regulators
Induction/synchronous motor/generator dynamic models
Single-cage, single-cage with deep-bars, double-cage, and double-cage with independent circuits
Start motors, loads, capacitors, MOV, etc.
Comprehensive MOV closing and opening operation
MOV voltage limit check during complete stroke time
Comprehensive motor starting alerts with critical and marginal settings
Motor load modeling
Consider various starting devices including autotransformer, resistor, reactor, and capacitor
Time-slider toolbar for continuous display of results on the one-line diagram
User-customizable plots with option to overlay
Harmonic Analysis
IEEE 519A Standard
Harmonic load flow
Harmonic resonance and frequency scan
Model harmonic sources using harmonic library
Model harmonic sources using converter firing angle and commutation reactance
Filter overloading
Filter design
User-definable frequency range (0 to 6000 Hz)
Generator and transformer saturation
Harmonic distortion limits
Total Root Mean Square Value (RMS)
Total Arithmetic Summation Value (ASUM)
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)
I*T Index (I*T)
Customizable output reports using Crystal Reports format
Graphical display of harmonic characteristics for components

Harmonic-slider toolbar for display of harmonics on the one-line diagram

Frequency-slider toolbar for display of frequency scan results on the one-line diagram
Long line model for transmission line and cable
Transient Stability Analysis

Simulate any combination of system disturbances and operations
Induction/synchronous motor/generator dynamic models
Frequency dependent machine models
Frequency dependent network models
Extensive dynamic machine models
IEEE and selected manufacturer exciter, governor, and power system stabilizer models for generator
IEEE Standard Synchronous Motor Models (2.1 and 2.2)
Remote voltage control bus for all exciters
Synchronous motor exciter/avr system
User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM) interface for:
3 Exciter/AVR
3 Governor - turbine
3 Power system stabilizer
Complete integration with User-Defined Dynamic Models for the Generator Start-Up Analysis
Unlimited time events and actions
Segment (fractional) faults for cables and transmission lines
Time-slider toolbar for continuous display of results on the one-line diagram
Automatic CB operation based on instantaneous relay settings:
3 Overcurrent (50)
3 Voltage (59/27)
3 Frequency (81)
3 Directional overcurrent (67)
3 Reverse power (32)
3 Motor overcurrent (50M)
3 Solid state trip (SST)
New plots for machine terminal impedance (for out-of-step relay setting)
New plots for branch flows (MW, Mvar, MVA, and Amps)
MOV starting
Motor acceleration
Motor load modeling
Loss of excitation action
Critical fault clearing time and system islanding time
Fast bus transfer studies
Impact loading and generator rejection
Combined action list and time slider for stepping through events
Configuration playback using dynamic continuity check
Voltage limits applied to MOV open and close stages
User-Defined Dynamic Modeling

Build your own governor/turbine, exciter/AVR, and power system stabilizer control block diagrams
for Transient Stability Analysis
Large selection of control blocks and elementary functions
Stand-alone test model performance including isolated step response
Complete integration with Generator Start-Up analysis
Run-time compile within ETAP
Utilize models within the Transient Stability Analysis
Select user-built models within generator editors
Utilizes block diagrams generated by Simulink
Implement system-wide operations such as load shedding, fast bus transfer, islanding, etc.
Requires Transient Stability Analysis
Generator Start-Up Analysis

Start generators from a cold state
Load generators prior to synchronous speed
Connect motors and loads at any desired frequency and voltage
Generator and motor frequency dependent models
Frequency dependent models for network components
Requires Transient Stability Analysis and User-Defined Dynamic Modeling
Cable Derating Analysis

Neher-McGrath Method and IEC 287
Steady-state cable temperature analysis
Transient cable temperature analysis
Cable ampacity optimization uniform ampacity
Cable ampacity optimization uniform temperature
Cable sizing
Options to keep cable size and loading fixed
Ground Grid Systems

Analysis includes four different methods:
3 IEEE 80 1986, IEEE 80 2000, and IEEE 665 1995
3 Finite Element
Graphic user interface for conductors and rods
Graphic soil view
Copy and paste grid
Export to AutoCAD
Handles irregular configurations of any shape
Allows a two-layer soil model in addition to the surface material
Unlimited conductors and rods
Conductor segments can be oriented in any possible 3-D direction
Complete integration with one-line diagram for elements placed on the grid and short-circuit values
Calculates tolerable step and touch potentials
Calculates Touch and Step potential outside the parameter
Compares calculated step and touch potentials with tolerable limits
Optimizes number of conductors with fixed rods
Optimizes number of conductors and rods based on cost

Calculate the maximum allowable current for conductors

Compares allowable currents against fault currents
Calculates ground system resistance
Calculates ground potential rise (GPR)
User-expandable conductor library
Tabulates absolute, step, and touch potentials throughout the grid
3-D plot of grid configuration showing conductors and rods
3-D plots of absolute, step, and touch potentials
Optimal Power Flow

Comprehensive objectives and constraints
Determine all control settings
Ensure all controls are within limits
Ensure all bus and branch constraints are met
Ensure all objectives are met
Minimize system operating cost
Maximize system performance
Minimize real and reactive power losses and circulating reactive power
Minimize real power exchange with other systems (utilities or power grids)
Maximize voltage security index
Maximize branch loading security index
Minimize series and shunt compensation
Minimize load shedding
Minimize control movements/actions
Minimize generation fuel cost
Generator fuel cost minimization
Utility electricity cost minimization
Advanced load forecasting
Transmission line flow constant
DC Load Flow and DC Short-Circuit Analysis

IEEE 308, 446, 485, 946 Standards
DC Short-Circuit
DC Load Flow
Voltage drop
DC-DC converter elements
Battery charger, inverter, and UPS elements
DC Battery Sizing and Discharge Analysis

Calculate battery discharge using an existing battery or using a battery that is automatically sized by
ETAP
Battery discharge using DC Load Flow method or load summation method
Generate plots and reports using Crystal Reports
Use different diversity and correction factors such as, temperature, aging, initial capacity, and initial
conditions
Plots for battery duty cycle, voltage, capacity, current, power and characteristics

Plots for branch flow, bus voltage, and bus loading

Use CSD options in battery discharge and sizing calculation
Control System Diagram

Drag and drop control relays, solenoid, cables, etc.
Control logic simulation (breakers, contacts, etc.)
Voltage drop calculation including inrush currents
Automatic alert for pickup and dropout voltages
Validate voltage requirements of controlling devices
Use either duty cycle or inrush and burden rating for flexible device modeling
Automatic overloading alerts
Observe detailed steps of operating sequences with event viewer
Comprehensive device library (verified and validated)
Reliability Analysis
Analysis includes protective device effects on fault isolation and load restoration such as replacement
and alternative supply
Analysis also includes single and double contingency effects.
Radial, looped, and multiple isolated system configurations
Model each component with its own reliability characteristics
Implements the user-defined parameters and settings
Calculate load point and bus reliability indices:
3 Average Failure Rate []
3 Average Outage Duration [r]
3 Annual Outage Duration []
Calculate system reliability indices:
3 System Average Interruption Frequency Index [SAIFI]
3 System Average Interruption Duration Index [SAIDI]
3 Customer Average Interruption Duration Index [CAIDI]
3 Average Service Availability Index [ASAI]
3 Average Service Unavailability Index [ASUI]
Calculate reliability cost/worth indices for load points, buses, and system:
3 Expected Energy Not Supplied [EENS]
3 Expected Interruption Cost [ECOST]
3 Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate [IEAR]
Rank element contributions to the cost/worth indices
Sensitivity analyses for EENS and ECOST:
3 Element contributions to the EENS and their rankings
3 Element contributions to the ECOST and their rankings
Unbalanced Load Flow

Unbalanced power flow
Phase and sequence voltage and current
Demand load and voltage drop
Transmission line coupling
Power factor correction

Automatic device evaluation

Automatic temperature correction
Real and reactive power losses
Transmission Line Sag, Tension, and Ampacity

Overhead line parameters and coupling
Sag/tension vs. temperature
Conductor ampacity vs. temperature
Physical parameter to impedance calculator
Multiple spans between dead-end structures
Level spans of unequal length
Solve spans of unequal length on different horizontal planes
Include effects of wind, temperature, and k factor
High Voltage DC Systems

Detailed converter modeling
Composite AC/DC inverter/AC systems
Combined transformer model
Automatic harmonic spectrum calculation
Built-in control schemes
Easy-to-use dynamic modes
Optimal Capacitor Placement

Calculate most cost-effective installation locations
Calculate best bank size
Generate reports and plots of capacitor operating profit
Voltage support and power factor correction
Handle unlimited network configurations
Use only user selected installation locations
Constrain maximum capacitors installed at a location to user specified quantity
Utilize individual and global constraints
GIS Interface (ESRI ArcGIS)

Database mapping via a graphic user interface
Display unlimited GIS presentations
Perform add, modify, or delete actions
View modifications and accept/reject actions
Use map tools zoom in/out/extent, pan, etc.
Control of analysis results displayed on GIS map
Map attributes of GIS to ETAP elements
Synchronize GIS data to ETAP projects
Consistency checks during synchronization
Substitute missing information with ETAP data
Electrical Data Processing Program (e-DPP)

Simplify/standardize data entry process

Create data sheet and schedule templates

Auto-generate data sheets and schedules
Standard/user designed form sheets
Unlimited project size
ETAP e-DPP Interface

Map attributes of e-DPP to ETAP elements
Synchronize e-DPP data to ETAP projects
Consistency checks during synchronization
ETAP - Excel Interface

Import from Excel spreadsheet with free style format of input data
Map attributes of Excel to ETAP elements
Customize logic for data dictionary
Add customized captions and headers to the spreadsheet
SmartPlant Electrical Interface (Intergraph SPEL)

View modifications and accept/reject actions via graphic user interface
Map attributes of SPEL to ETAP elements
Synchronize SPEL data to ETAP projects
Map attributes of ETAP to SPEL elements
Synchronize ETAP data to SPEL projects
Data consistency checks during synchronization
Data range checking
Library data addition
Typical data substitution for missing parameters
Log all mapping actions
Integrate with ETAP projects
Real-Time Advanced Monitoring

Continuous real-time monitoring
On demand data retrieval
State estimator and load distributor
Data reconciliation and consistency check
Bad data detection and correction
Alarm management and processing
Energy cost monitoring

Multi-console with multi-screen monitoring

Graphical monitoring via ETAP one-line diagram
Visual monitoring via Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
Alarm annunciation with graphical interface
Alert of equipment out-of-range violations, de-energized, etc.
Real-Time Trending of electrical & non-electrical parameters
Pseudo measurements (override measured data)
OPC interface layer
Message logging
User-definable scan rates
User-access levels
Online control
Real-Time Event Playback

Replay archived data at different speeds
Improve operator knowledge
Improve system operation
Investigate cause and effect
Explore alternative actions
Replay "what if" scenarios
Real-Time Energy Management System (EMS)

Shared decision making process
Generator Controller
Load Frequency Control
Chain of logic controls and action validations
Automatic steady-state optimization control
Energy cost assessment
Online control and automation
Generator Load Sharing
Demand Side Management
Intelligent generation control & load distribution
Autocontrol overload, overvoltage, undervoltage, etc.
Autocontrol LTCs, circuit breakers, relays, valves, etc.
Generation averaging with cost constraints
Minimize MW & Mvar losses
Peak shaving
Minimize power factor penalties
Intelligent inhibitive & permissive controls
Optimize spin reserve
Maximize voltage security index
Supervisory & advisory control
User-friendly logics & macros
Real-Time Intelligent Load Shedding

Optimize load preservation
Reduce downtime for critical loads

Redundancy with backup contingencies

Simulate various disturbances and display the results
Simulate and test ILS recommendations
Robust calculation methods
Response to mechanical & electrical disturbances
Display required minimum MW & selected loads
Trigger & time dependent load shedding
User-definable control logics & macros
Neural network knowledge base
User-definable system triggers
Operator friendly graphical interface
Display operating & recommended spin reserve MW
Log & view ILS recommended load shedding
Log & view system load shedding actions
Unlimited load shedding schedules
User-defined load priority & groups
Link to annunciation systems (pagers, etc.)
Generate electrical and non-electrical output tags
Post updating load shedding report in XML to a web URL
Wind Turbine Generator (WTG)

Model wind turbine generators individually or in unlimited groups
Model detailed turbine and controller characteristics for dynamic stability analysis
Calculate MW and Mvar generation based on wind speed and turbine characteristics
Create multiple generation categories for predictive what if studies
Define the turbine model manually or based on a library
Define the wind model manually or based on a library
Run a one instance or continuous steady-state calculation in analysis mode
Perform individual or zone based actions in stability analysis

Product Description Capabilities
1.2 Capabilities
Elements
Buses (License Dependent) Unlimited *
Load Terminal Nodes Unlimited
Branches Unlimited
Equipment/Feeder Cables Unlimited
Transformers with Tap Setting Unlimited
Motors, Loads, MOVs, Capacitors, Filters, etc. Unlimited
Nested Composite Networks Unlimited
Nested Composite Motors Unlimited
Presentations/Configurations/Data Revisions
One-Line Diagram Unlimited
Underground Raceway System Unlimited
Control System Diagrams Unlimited
Ground Grid Diagrams Unlimited
Time-Current Characteristic Plots Unlimited
Geographical Presentations (GIS Interface) Unlimited
Configuration Status Unlimited
Data Revisions (Base and Revision Data) Unlimited
Loading Categories
Each Motor, MOV, Load, etc. 10
Generation Categories
Each Generator and Power Grids 10
Short-Circuit Program (AC and DC)

Faulted Buses Unlimited
Motor Starting Program

Motors Started Simultaneously Unlimited
Starting Categories Unlimited
Time Events Unlimited
Transient Stability Program

Dynamically Modeled Machines Unlimited
Time Events Unlimited
DC System
Duty Cycle Categories 5
Libraries
Headers and Records Unlimited

Product Description ODBC
1.3 ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)

ETAP organizes and accesses its database using the latest industry standard - Microsoft ODBC (Open
Database Connectivity). This allows ETAP to use any database for which an ODBC driver is available.
ODBC drivers are readily available for Microsoft Access, Microsoft SQL Server, and Oracle, among
others. Thus, data can be integrated into the ETAP database using a commercially available DBMS
(Database Management System).
ODBC is the database connectivity component of Microsoft Windows Open Services Architecture
(WOSA) and is based on a Call Level Interface specification, which was developed by a consortium of
over 40 companies (members of the SQL Access Group and others). ODBC provides a single system
level interface for connecting front-end applications (like ETAP) with back-end services (such as DBMS).
ETAP does not access the various different databases through each databases native protocol or
Application Program Interface (API). Instead, ETAP accesses all database activities through ODBC API.
Database vendors, such as Microsoft, Oracle Corporation, etc., provide the execution components for
ODBC (ODBC drivers), allowing ETAP to directly communicate with many DBMS.
Residing between ETAP and the DBMS is the ODBC Driver Manager. The ODBC Driver Manager
allows you to configure various data sources (databases or database descriptions) for ETAP (or other
applications) to allow exchange data. This configuration provides several benefits to you, the ETAP
user. It allows you to work with any of several DBMS, those which you may already be familiar with or
are already use in your facility. Additionally, you may use your existing DBMS to interrogate or browse
the database of an ETAP project.
ODBC enables you to access your ETAP databases by means of third party software such as Microsoft
Access. This allows you to manage your data and provides a simple method of transferring the data from
ETAP into other media. You may also insert additional fields (along with values provided by ETAP) into
the ETAP database tables. Certain limitations seen by various third party programs, such as Microsoft
Access, may exist. For example, Microsoft Access only allows 256 columns per table. Inserting further
columns may cause conflicts. Integration of the ETAP database at this level provides you with enhanced
opportunities to integrate ETAP, and its engineering analysis capabilities, into other programming or
database systems that possess additional functionality, which you may already employ.
The ETAP database tables can be added to an existing database in a future release of ETAP. For example,
you will be able to integrate ETAP into your electrical project database.
This release of ETAP has been tested with Microsoft Access, Microsoft SQL Server, and Oracle
DBMS. Additionally, ETAP provides all database components you require, allowing you to directly
construct and edit Microsoft Access databases so that they may be used with ETAP.

Product Description File Structure
1.4 File Structure

Project Database
When you construct an ETAP project it builds a new database, which contains all required ETAP tables.
In addition to the actual DBMS database constructed (e.g., PROJECTNAME.MDB for Microsoft
Access), ETAP creates a project control file named PROJECTNAME.OTI. The project control file is an
OTI-proprietary file, which contains relevant project control information, including all user information.
Each ETAP project creates two basic files for Microsoft Access:
PROJECTNAME.OTI
PROJECTNAME.MDB
In addition, there may be other files associated with your project:
PROJECTNAME.LDB Present only when using early versions of Microsoft Access (pre-8.0 or
Office 97) or while the project is opened via A Microsoft Access or ETAP
PROJECTNAME.PSO Present when you have placed OLE objects in your ETAP Project
PROJECTNAME.GRD Present when a Ground Grid System has been created
PROJECTNAME.CPX Present when a Cable Pulling System has been created
Note: The .MDB and .LDB extensions will be different if you are using SQL Server or Oracle DBMS.
An ETAP project can be copied and renamed outside of ETAP if it does not require a password. To do
this, make copies of all four files (if your project has created them): *.OTI, *.MDB, *.LDB, *.PSO. Then
rename all four files to the new name. The first time this new project is opened, ETAP will update the
internal name of the project to its new name. The best way to copy a project file is within ETAP.
WARNING: If you delete any of these files after ETAP has created them, you may not be able to open
and retrieve your project database.
A bus property table for the Microsoft Access database is shown below. In this table, the first row
represents the bus default properties (IID=32). The next four rows represent the four buses that exist in
this project.

A Bus Table as seen from Microsoft Access
ETAP copies a pre-built database with default values for Microsoft Access when you create a new project
file. ETAP uses a template database named DEFAULTE.MDB for the English unit system and
DEFAULTM.MDB for the Metric unit system. In contrast, ETAP executes a series of SQL statements
that inserts and populates all required tables when you are using SQL Server or Oracle.
Modifying the ETAP Database

When viewing the ETAP database via a DBMS (such as Microsoft Access), it is very important that
certain fields in the database are not changed. General rules for modifying the ETAP project database are
given below:
You cannot change any database field labeled IID, Revision, Issue, ID (Name), or any field, which
contains Check, Alter, or Rev as part of its name.
NEVER alter any field whose type is BLOB (binary large object), Stream, or OLE object. Modifying
any of these fields may invalidate your database and cause you to lose the valuable time spent
constructing the database.
You may change the engineering data and comments of elements in the database. However, many
engineering data fields are related because of the engineering logic built into ETAP editors. For
example, the motor fields HP, FLA, PF, EFF, and kVA are all related. Changing only one of these
fields may cause problems in ETAPs editors because it calculates some fields based on values in
other fields.
You cannot add or delete records in any table created by Microsoft Access, Oracle, or SQL Server.
Records with an IID equal to 32 contain the default values for that element. You should change these
default values directly from ETAP and not from the third party software.

Operation Technology, Inc. cannot guarantee the repair of a database if you have made modifications in
some of the above-mentioned fields and problems occur.
Inserting Additional Columns into the ETAP Database

General guidelines for inserting additional columns/fields into the ETAP project database are given
below:
Construct the database using ETAP.

Add all system elements using ETAPs graphical one-line diagram and underground raceway system
design tools. ETAP internally allocates the correct database identifiers (IIDs) for all components. IIDs
CANNOT be changed or allocated by the user.
Add any new column you may want to embed in ETAPs tables. ETAP will NOT directly utilize the
columns nor assign default values to them. ETAP will not remove the additional columns.
Adding Elements and Data to a ETAP Project Database

This section describes how to modify data for existing elements in an ETAP project file or to transfer data
from a third party software such as Microsoft Access, Excel, etc.
Open an ETAP project file or create a new one.

Add (drag and drop) the new elements (buses, transformers, motors, etc.) graphically to the one-line
diagram.
Save your ETAP project and exit ETAP.
Open your ETAP database from the third party software. For example, with Microsoft Access,
projectname.mdb (where project name is the name of your project file).
For each existing field in ETAP, you can copy the contents of that field from your existing database
into the appropriate field of the ETAP record. This can be accomplished by copying and pasting
individual fields or columns. For large databases, SQL commands can be used to do this
programmatically.
Save your project database while inside the third party software.
Start ETAP; load your project and check the changed data.
These precautions must be adhered to while conducting this procedure:
The structure of your database and the ETAP database do not need to match. However, corresponding
fields must be of the same type. ETAP stores data in one of three types of fields: double, character, or
OLE Stream [BLOB]. All numerical data (including integer, float, or double) are stored in double fields.
Textual data are stored in character fields. This restriction is due to limitations imposed by some
databases that ETAP must support through ODBC.
ETAP sometimes splits an equipment record across two or more tables. The table names of these records
are related and easily identified. For example, static loads appear in two tables named StaticLoad and
StaticLoadH1. The records in the StaticLoad and StaticLoadH1 tables are associated by the element IID
and ID (name) fields.
Do not modify the contents of tables whose names are suffixed with "_R". These tables are used for
revisions and, therefore, their contents should not be altered.

Product Description Libraries
1.5 Libraries
ETAP libraries use Microsofts compound storage file structure (binary format). The contents of these
files may be viewed using any DOC file viewer (DOC files, in this context, refer to compound storage
files, not Microsoft Word.DOC files). DOC file viewers are intended to allow you to view, but not alter
the libraries in any way other than through ETAP.
ETAP library files (or portions thereof) may be exported. (Refer to the Engineering Libraries section for
details on how to do this.)
Example of an ETAP library structure:

Product Description Help
1.6 Help
The complete contents of this User Guide are included in the online Help file. There are several methods
for displaying Help contents in the ETAP program.
Help Search
Help for all Editors
Help Line
Function Key <F1> Help
Help from the Project Toolbar
Help Search
Click on Help on the ETAP menu bar to conduct a Help search by using the Index or by doing a word
search. The Help Search Editor contains Contents, Index, and Search pages. The Contents page allows
you to browse the Help file chapter-by-chapter, just as in the ETAP User Guide.
From the Index page you can view the Help index and display the contents of any item listed. To
facilitate your search, type in the first few letters of the word or subject you are looking for. The index
listing highlights the index item closest to what you have entered.
The Search page enables you to look for words and phrases in the Help Topics instead of searching for
information by category. Use this page to type or select the word(s) to define your search.

Help for Editors

Help buttons are provided for all editors. Click on the Help button to display the description for all pages
of the selected editor.
Help Line
Help lines for all entry fields are available in ETAP. To view the Help line, click in any entry field. Its
description will be displayed at the bottom of your screen. For example, this image has the Generator
Saturation Factor field selected.

Function Key <F1> Help

Press <F1> to display Help in the currently active window. For example, open the Bus Editor and select
the Load page, then press <F1>. The Load page Help screen will be displayed.
Help on the Project Toolbar

Click on the Help button located on the Project toolbar to display Help screens. The Help button is
indicated by a question mark. Click once on the Help button. A question mark (?) will appear beside the
cursor. Move the cursor to any item that you need more information about, and then click again. The
Help screen for that item will be displayed.

Product Description Backup Projects
1.7 Automatic Backup of ETAP Projects

In order to maximize protection of the ETAP projects and prevent loss of data, ETAP is enhanced to
maintain backup copies of the project files. Backup files are created when any of the following actions
are performed:
Conversion from a previous version of ETAP

Opening of a project
Saving of a project
Backup During Conversion

When you open a project that was created with a previous version of ETAP, the program automatically
creates a backup of the project. During this process, the following message is displayed:
When you click on Yes, the program automatically creates a backup of the project, and then performs the
conversion. The backup copy of the project is created inside a directory named BACKUP, which is a
subdirectory of the project directory.

The backup project name is the project name with the version number of the original file appended. For
instance, if you are converting a project from ETAP 4.0.4 named EXAMPLE, then the backup file is
named: EXAMPLE-v404 as seen on the image below:
Note that only the ETAP project files are backed up (*.OTI, *.MDB, *.PSO, *.GRD, and *.CPX).
Output report files must be backed up manually.
During the backup process, ETAP logs the files that are backed up in the message log as seen on the
image below:
(Provide Image)
Backup During Opening

When you open a project file, ETAP automatically creates a backup of your project. This is saved in the
backup directory as ProjectName~ as seen on the image below. If the project ProjectName~ already
exists, then ETAP overwrites the previous version with the latest backup.
This feature allows you to keep a backup copy of your project every time you open the project.
Backup During Saving

When you save your project, ETAP creates a backup copy of the project files in the backup directory.
The backup copy is named ProjectName~~ as seen on the image below.
These project files are temporary. Every time you save the project, ETAP overwrites the files, allowing
you to keep a previously saved project. However, when you decide to close the project, ETAP clears the
temporary backup whether you save the project or not.

In the case that ETAP is shutdown abnormally, the temporary backup files will not be cleared; therefore,
you will have the last saved copy of your project. In addition, the backup copy of the project created
when you first opened the project is also available.
Disabling/Enabling Backup Function

By default, ETAP is set up to create and update backup files during the opening of the project and before
every save. To disable the backup feature, go to Options (Preferences) under the Project Database section
and across from the Automatically Create Project Backup and change True to False. When this entry is set
to False, ETAP does not create backup files of the current version. However, it does create backup files
when converting from a previous version.
Opening Backup Files

Backup projects are opened the same as any ETAP project. However, when you open a backup project, a
backup directory is created within the backup directory. The Backup function operates inside the backup
file, and the backup operates until the limit of 128 characters is reached. When you try to open a project
with a path longer than 128 characters, ETAP displays the following message:

Chapter 2
Setup
This chapter describes how to install ETAP for stand-alone systems and network licenses. It contains the
following sections:
System Requirements for ETAP includes minimum and recommended settings.

ETAP installation provides a step-by-step procedure for installing ETAP and the License Manager.
ETAP User Guide installation provides a step-by-step procedure for installing ETAP User Guide.
ODBC Configuration provides detailed instructions on the successful installation of SQL Server and
Oracle drivers. SQL server and Oracle require an advanced knowledge of Windows networking,
application installation, and a licensed copy of SQL Server or Oracle.
ETAP Startup illustrates how to start the program after successful installation.
ETAP Licensing describes security hardware keys and different ETAP licensing configurations,
where they are applied, how they work, and which operating systems are required.
License Manager Installation describes the installation of the ETAP License Manager for network
licensing of ETAP.
License Manager Verification shows how to verify the ETAP License Manager installation.
Installation Maintenance (Uninstall) describes how to remove or modify the currently installed
version of ETAP.
User Guide Removal describes how to uninstall the ETAP User Guide.
License Manager Removal describes how to uninstall the ETAP License Manager.
System Optimization describes the computer hardware, virtual memory file size, and ODBC DSN
buffer size requirements to increase the speed of ETAP operation.

Setup System Requirements
2.1 System Requirements
2.1.1 Operating System (32-bit or 64-bit)

Microsoft Windows 7 (Home Premium, Professional, Ultimate)
Microsoft Windows Vista (Home Premium, Business, Enterprise)
Microsoft Windows XP (Service Pack 3) Professional or Home Edition
Microsoft Server 2003 (Service Pack 2), Microsoft Server 2003 R2 (Service Pack 2)
Microsoft Server 2008
2.1.2 Other Software Requirements

Internet Explorer 5.01 or higher (or minimum version level as specified by the Operating System)
Microsoft .NET Framework v1.1, Service pack 1
Microsoft .NET Framework v2.0, Service pack 1
Java 2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition Version 1.4.2_3
2.1.3 PC Configuration Requirements

USB port (if stand-alone licensing required)
Ethernet port w/network access (if network licensing required)
DVD Drive
10 to 80 GB hard disk space (based on project size, number of buses)
Note: An additional 5 GB may be required if additional language support is installed
19" monitors recommended (dual monitors highly recommended)
Minimum display resolution -1024x768
2.1.4 Recommended Hardware Requirements

100 Bus Projects
Intel Dual/Quad core 2.0 GHz or better (or equivalent)
2 GB of RAM
500 Bus Projects

Intel Dual/Quad core 2.0 GHz or better (or equivalent)
4 GB of RAM
1,000 Bus Projects

Intel Dual/Quad core 3.0 GHz with Hyper-Threading, or better, with high speed bus (or
equivalent)
8 GB of RAM (high-speed)
64-bit Operating System
10000 Bus Projects and Higher

Intel Dual/Quad core 3.0 GHz with Hyper-Threading, or better, with high speed system bus (or
equivalent)
12 GB RAM - (high-speed)
64-bit Operating System
Setup ETAP 7.5.2 Installation
2.2 ETAP 7.5.2 Installation

This section describes the installation procedure for Windows XP/Vista/Windows 7 and Windows Server
2003/2008, of ETAP 7.5.2 using a Microsoft Access, SQL Server, or Oracle database. ETAP provides all
the necessary tools to build and maintain the Microsoft Access databases used for your ETAP projects.
Other database formats such as Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle require a separate license from the
appropriate software developer/distributor.
2.2.1 Uninstalling Previous Versions of ETAP

The ETAP 7.5.2 installation can coexist with earlier releases of ETAP and it is not necessary to remove
older versions of ETAP to run the latest version.
If you would like to uninstall earlier versions of ETAP go to the Control Panel and select Add or Remove
Programs. Then select and uninstall any earlier ETAP installations. Any user-created files, as well as the
ETAPS.INI file and the ETAPLIBX.LIB file (where X is 4, 5, 6, and 7 depending on the version) will not
be removed by the uninstall procedure.
ETAP Setup uses the uninstaller of the previous versions to uninstall them.

2.2.2 Installing ETAP

The installation program installs ETAP and all of its components including libraries, example and help
files. It also installs the ETAP License Manager since all stand-alone and network keys use this service to
provide authorization for ETAP 7.5.2.
In this installation procedure, your DVD drive is designated as the D: drive. If this is not the case, replace
the letter D with the correct designation of your DVD drive.
The same installation procedure is used to install ETAP regardless of the licensing method (stand-alone
system or network).
1. To install ETAP, you must have administrative access to your computer.
For Windows Vista Operating Systems, in addition to the administrative access, we recommend to
turn the User Account Control (UAC) off during this installation. You can do so by going to the
Control Panel\User Accounts and Family Safety\User Accounts\Turn User Account Control ON or
OFF and uncheck the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer option. The
Firewall must be turned off as well.
2. Close all applications and insert the ETAP DVD into your DVD drive.
3. For Windows Vista Operation Systems, the installer will start up and present the following screen.
Select the Run ETAPINSTALLER.exe option.
4. The ETAP Installer Program will then appear.
In the Installations section, select the ETAP 7.5.2 option to install ETAP and the License Manager
or select the ETAP License Manager option to install the License Manager only.
For the Stand-Alone licenses ETAP 7.5.2 and ETAP key reside on the same PC.

For the Network licenses ETAP 7.5.2 shall be installed on the client machines and the ETAP
License Manager shall be installed on a PC designated as the License Manager Server. In this
configuration the ETAP key will be located at the License Manager Server.
5. ETAP 7.5.2 requires installation of Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1, SP1, Microsoft .NET Framework
2.0, SP1, and Java 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition Version 1.4.2_03. If these installations
are not available on your operating system, ETAP proceeds with installing them. If prompted to
restart the machine during the installation of these programs, select to restart the machine later.
If a 1603: Error installing Microsoft .NET Framework message appears, click OK to stop the
installation. From the ETAP DVD subfolder named DotNet1.1sp1, run the dotnetfx.exe executable
file. This file will install Microsoft .NET Framework v1.1. Once this installation has been
completed run NDP1.1sp1-KB867460-X86.exe executable file to install Service Pack1 for
Microsoft .NET Framework v1.1. After the successful installation of these two files continue with
the ETAP installation.

6. Click Next on the Welcome screen to continue.
7. The installation and use of ETAP is governed by the terms and conditions of the ETAP License Grant
and Agreement. These terms must be accepted before the installation can continue. Click Next.

8. The Information screen displays hardware and software requirements as well as other useful
information. Click Next to continue with the installation.
9. For Stand-Alone licenses, select "Stand-Alone Key" and insert the ETAP Security Key in the same
computer. With this option, ETAP and the ETAP License Manager will be automatically installed on
your computer.
For Network licenses, select "Network Key" to install ETAP on the client computer. Then install the
"ETAP License Manager" on a computer designated as the ETAP License Manager Server. In this
configuration, the ETAP Security Key must be located at the ETAP License Manager Server.

10. By default, the output reports are created in English. Select each box to create output reports in
different languages.
Verify the correct language package settings are installed with an English Operating System to
properly view the translated output reports. The settings for each operating system are provided
below:

OperatingSystem LanguagePackageSettings
WindowsXPProfessional Installthemultilanguageuserinterface(MUI)
1.ControlPanel/RegionalandLanguageOptions
Vista Enterprise 2.Browsetothelanguagepackageyouwanttouse
1.ControlPanel/WindowsUpdate/RestorehiddenUpdates/
VistaUltimate Selectthelanguage
1.ControlPanel/WindowsUpdate/RestorehiddenUpdates/
Win7Ultimate&Enterprise Selectthelanguage
Note: The operating systems listed above are required to properly view Japanese and Chinese Output
Reports with an English operating system.
For more information on Windows Language Package Settings, view Microsoft Technical Support for
Language Package Settings.
11. Reports created in previous versions of ETAP were created in a different format. If this option is not
selected, output reports created in previous versions will not display. The user must re-run each study
in ETAP 7.5.2 to activate any output reports created in an earlier version of ETAP. Note that the
output report formats installed include formats from ETAP 5.0 and above.
12. Setup requires the name of a destination folder on your hard drive where you would like the ETAP
application to be installed. The default destination folder is C:\ETAP 7.5.2. To install the program in
a different location, click Browse and select or type a new destination folder. Click Next.

13. The next screen provides the opportunity to verify the setup information. If the setup information is
correct, click Next to start copying files.
The following is an example of typical folders created by ETAP:

14. The installation program then continues with installing the License Manager. You will see several
messages stating that the License Manager is being installed followed by a License Manager 7.5.2
Welcome screen. Click Next to continue.
Note: If a License manager for a previous version is detected, the installer will remove it before
installing the updated License Manager.

15. The installation and use of ETAP License Manager is governed by the terms and conditions of the
ETAP License Grant and Agreement. These terms must be accepted before the installation can
continue. Click Yes.
Due to the nature of virtual machines, it is possible to replicate the ETAP License Manager in
violation of its intended number of users as per the ETAP License Grant and Agreement; therefore,
ETAP prevents the operation of the License Manager on a virtual machine.

16. When the installation of ETAP License Manager is complete, the installer displays the ETAP 7.5.2
License Manager Installation Setup Complete screen. Click Finish to continue with the
installation.
17. The installer displays the Setup Status screen and starts copying files to your installation of ETAP.
The installer also adds an ETAP shortcut to the program folder. By default, the Setup program will
create a program folder named ETAP 7.5.2.
Billboards will be shown during the file transfer period. These billboards highlight some of the latest
features and technologies of ETAP.
18. When the installation is complete, the installer displays the ETAP 7.5.2 Installation Complete
screen. You can check the Launch ETAP 7.5.2 option and click Finish to automatically run ETAP.
If you choose not to run ETAP automatically, leave the box unchecked.
Depending on your operation system and your system configuration, the installer might display the
ETAP 7.5.2 Installation Complete screen and ask you to restart the machine. Select to restart the
machine so that any configuration changes that were made can take effect.

2.2.3 Installing the ETAP Library File

If the installation folder chosen during the ETAP installation contains an ETAP library with the name
ETAPLIB752LIB, the installation program will preserve the existing ETAP library.
The installation program renames the existing ETAP library to OLDETAP752.LIB before installing the
new library ETAPLIB752.LIB. If an OLDETAP752.LIB already exists on the target computer, the
installation program directs you to make a backup copy of the old file or move the old file into a different
subfolder. Otherwise, the installation program will overwrite the current OLDETAP752.LIB with a copy
of the existing ETAPLIB752.LIB.
2.2.4 Registering Data Source Name

The installation program automatically sets up and registers the ODBC Data Source Names (DSNs)
otiaccess and otireport. Three additional DSNs, otisql and otioracle, otioracle2 (required for reporting),
can be added by the user to support SQL and Oracle databases, respectively.
2.2.5 Completing the ETAP Installation

When the ETAP installation is completed, an ETAP program shortcut is automatically placed on your
desktop. The Setup program also creates an ETAP program shortcut in the Start menu under All
Programs.

Setup ODBC Configuration
2.3 ETAP User Guide Installation

The installation program also installs ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide along with other documents such as: ETAP
Product Overview, ETAP 7.0.0 New Features, ETAP Real-Time Overview, System Requirements,
Installation Guide, and ReadMe. The ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide and related documents can be viewed
through the Installer Program without having to install the User Guide. This can be done by simply
clicking on the User Guide option below the Documentation (PDF) section of the Installer Program.
1. To install the ETAP User Guide, select the ETAP User Guide option that appears below the
Installations section of the Installer Program.
2. Click Next on the Welcome screen to continue.

3. Setup requires the name of a destination folder on your hard drive where you would like the ETAP
User Guide application to be installed. The default destination folder is C:\ETAP User Guide 752. To
install the program in a different location, click Browse and select or type a new destination folder.
Click Next.
4. Setup displays the Setup Status of the ETAP User Guide installation process.

5. When the installation is complete, the installer displays the ETAP User Guide Installation
Complete screen. Click Finish, to complete the installation of the User Guide.
When the ETAP User Guide installation is completed, the Setup program also creates an ETAP User
Guide program shortcut in the Start menu under All Programs.

2.4 ODBC Configuration

A System Data Source Name (DSN), versus a User DSN, gives any user logged into the computer access
to this driver. By default, the ETAP Setup program will configure and register two system DSNs
necessary to run ETAP with Microsoft Access (otiaccess and otireport). Three additional DSNs can be
setup to allow ETAP to run with SQL Server (otisql), and Oracle (otioracle, otioracle2) databases.
2.4.1 SQL Server Database

SQL Server requires a custom installation with information specific to your network and the SQL Server
setup. ETAP requires you to already have SQL Server 6.5 or higher installed on your network.
1. In the Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Data Sources (ODBC) or (ODBC 32-
bit Administrator). Windows displays the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box.
2. Click the System DSN page, and then click the Add button.
3. Select the SQL Server entry in the Name column. Click Finish.
4. In the Name text box, enter otisql.
5. In the Description text box, type a description of this data source that you will recognize.
6. In the Server text box, type the name of the server you will be using. Consult your network
administrator or SQL Server administrator for this information.
7. Click Next twice, and then make sure the following options are selected (ETAP runs at least four
times faster if selected):
Note: The SQL Server may require some system-dependent installation procedures. Contact your
network administrator or Operation Technology, Inc. for technical assistance.
2.4.2 Oracle Database

ETAP requires Microsoft ODBC for Oracle (version 2.576.1830.00) to work with Oracle databases. The
Oracle in OraHome92 or Oracle 10g driver is also required for reporting through Crystal Reports. The
Microsoft ODBC Driver for Oracle and the Oracle in OraHome92 or Oracle 10g drivers should be present
on the PC before continuing with these instructions.
1. From the Control Panel, open Administrative Tools, and then open Data Sources (ODBC) or (ODBC
32-bit Administrator). Windows displays the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box.
2. Click the System DSN page, and then click the Add button.
3. Select the Microsoft ODBC for Oracle driver. Click Finish.

4. Windows displays the Microsoft SQL Server DSN Configuration dialog box.
5. In the Name text box enter otioracle.
6. Complete the following:
a. In the DBQ text box, enter the name of the Oracle database with which you will be connecting.
Consult your network or Oracle administrator for this information.
b. In the UserID text box, enter your Oracle Logon ID. Consult your Oracle administrator for this
information.
c. In the User Password text box, enter the password associated with your Oracle UserID. Consult
your Oracle administrator for this information.
Repeat steps 1-6 except replace steps 3 and 5 with steps 7 and 8 below.
7. Select the Oracle in OraHome92 or Oracle 10g driver. Click Finish.
8. In the Data Source Name box enter otioracle2.
There will be no password box asked for in 6c, so disregard this.

Setup ETAP License Wizard
2.5 ETAP License Wizard

After the complete installation, launch ETAP using the ETAP shortcut on your desktop or go to the Start
menu and select All Programs, ETAP 7.5.2.
When ETAP is launched for the first time, it may generate the ETAP License Wizard. The ETAP License
Wizard allows you to setup the location of the ETAP licenses. This Wizard was introduced in ETAP
5.5.0. For previous license setups refer to their appropriate documents.
1. Upon launching ETAP, the ETAP License Wizard prompts you with the ETAP License Path
Selection Editor. In this editor the first option is automatically selected to be your computer. If
the Stand-Alone or the ETAP Network key is located on your computer, click OK to continue.
2. If the ETAP Network key is located on a server machine, then select another path option and
enter the server name or the IP address in the provided field. The five entries are designed to
easily switch between ETAP Network keys. You may have several network keys with different
configurations. ETAP keys must be installed on separate PCs. Click OK to continue.

Refer to section 2.8, License Manager Server, for details on installation.
ETAP Key is Found Successfully

If the installation is done properly, the ETAP License Wizard displays a message that the ETAP key is
found successfully!
Click OK.
ETAP Key is Not Found

If the ETAP license key is not found at the port that was previously specified, the ETAP License Wizard
displays a message that the ETAP key is not found or the License Manager is not ready.
ETAP License Manager Service (Etaps Lic Mgr)

In that case, verify that the License Manager is installed on the specified location and that the service is
started. You can do so by going to the Control Panel\Administrative Tools\Services. Find the Etaps Lic
Mgr entry from the listing of services. This entry should exist and the Status should show as Started.

If this service does not exist you must install the License Manager from the ETAP 7.5.2 DVD.
If the Etaps Lic Mgr is not started then right-click on the entry and Start it. You can also double-click on
this service and Start it.
Firewall
If the service starts but the client machine fails to receive authorization, check the server machine to
ensure that the Windows firewall is not blocking incoming traffic.
To do this, go to the server machine and select Run/Control Pane/Windows Firewall. On the General
page, note whether the Firewall is On or Off. If it is on, go to the Exceptions page and see if the License
Manager is listed and checked. If not, select the Add Port... button. Enter the Etaps Lic Mgr for the
Name and enter 6260 as the Port Number. Ensure that TCP is selected. Also check the checkbox that
requests a notification if a program is blocked and click OK. Click OK on the previous pages until you
return to the Control Panel. You may have to coordinate with your IT department to open this port.
Next, go to the client machine and select Run/Control Pane/Windows Firewall. If it is on, go to the
Exceptions page and check the checkbox that requests a notification if a program is blocked and click OK
on all pages until you return to the Control Panel. This should cause Windows to notify you if it blocks a
request from ETAP to access the License Manager.
ETAP License Manager Uses TCP/IP

To determine if you have TCP/IP installed, go to Control Panel/Network Connections.
1. It should list all network connections for your computer. Locate the appropriate connection under
LAN or High-Speed internet.

2. Right-click on the connection and select properties.
3. If you have TCP/IP installed, there will be an item listed and checked "Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)".
4. If you do not have TCP/IP installed, the item may be listed but NOT checked. In such case, there
is no need to continue with this procedure, since you do not have TCP/IP installed.
5. If it is checked, select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click on properties. The resulting
Properties will have a general tab. I need to know the settings on this page. Generally, most
companies use Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically.
Now that we know you have TCP/IP installed, please do the same thing (exact same procedure) on the
computer running the License Manager.
If both your computer and the License Manager computer have TCP/IP installed, do the following on the
computer running the License Manager:
1. Open a Command Prompt (Start/All Programs/Accessories/Command Prompt).
2. Type the following in the Command Prompt (without the quotes of course) "netstat -a". (This will
tell us what ports are set up on the Etaps lic mgr server).
3. You should see an entry that lists "TCP the_server_computer_name:6260 ... LISTENING" which
shows that the computer is listening for a TCP connection on port 6260. Port 6260 is the License
Manager default port.
4. Next enter the following in the Command Prompt - "ipconfig". You should see a listing which
contains the IP address of the computer. Note the address to ensure that it matches the address
that you have entered at the ETAP client computer.
Next, go to your client computer, open a Command Prompt, and enter "ping ip_address" where
ip_address is a placeholder for the IP Address that you obtained above from your License Manager
computer. The ping results should indicate the time that it took to ping the computer. If the ping is not
successful, it will print a timeout message.
You should also use ping to check address translation from your computer by entering "ping
lic_manager_computer" where lic_manager_computer is a placeholder for the computer name on which
you have installed the License Manager. If both pings pass, you can enter either the name of the License
Manager computer *or* its IP Address in the ETAP client. Both should succeed. Otherwise, make sure
that you have entered the IP address of the License Manager computer in the ETAP client License
Wizard.
ETAP Activation Code

If this is the first time you are launching ETAP 7.5.2, ETAP prompts you for an Activation Code. Enter
the 36 character Activation Code (case sensitive).
The following entries are generated in the ETAPS.INI file and the Activation Code is saved as shown
below.
[Etap PowerStation]
LicIndex=0

[AppVariables]
LicPath0=Your Server Name or IP Address
LicKeyCode0=Your ETAP Activation Code
When authorization is received, it generates the License Administrator dialog box. It shows the total
number of licenses and what users are connected to the License Manager Server and displays a message
that the ETAP key is found successfully.

The following entries are generated in the ETAPS.INI file and the Activation Code is saved as shown
below.
[Etap PowerStation]
LicIndex=1 to 5 depending on LicPath
[AppVariables]
LicPath1= to LicPath5=
LicKeyCode1= to LicKeyCode5=
The ETAP License Wizard may be launched when opening an existing ETAP project. The ETAP Logon
Editor includes an ETAP License Wizard button to launch the Wizard. The ETAP Logon Editor is the
first editor that appears when you open a project. This option may be used to get ETAP license
authorization from different locations.

Setup ETAP License Information
2.6 ETAP License Information

To view information regarding your ETAP license, launch ETAP, go to Help on your main toolbar and
select About ETAP.
Selection of the About ETAP option opens the ETAP Enterprise dialog box. ETAP Enterprise consists of
three pages: About, Capabilities and License.
About
The About page includes the following information regarding your ETAP:
- ETAP version
- Copyright information
- OTI address and web site
- ETAP support contact information
- Sales contact information
- Licensee information
Licensee name
ETAP serial number

Setup ETAP License Information
Number of buses
Configuration (Network/Stand-alone)
License type (Nuclear, Commercial, Advantage, Educational)
Capabilities
This page of the ETAP Enterprise lists all the available ETAP modules. Modules included in your
package will be shown in black letters. Modules not included in your packaged will be grayed out.
License
In the License page, information regarding your license usage is displayed.
Stand- Alone Licenses

For the stand-alone licenses, the port used for your hardware key and your ETAP Activation Code is
displayed. You can update the ETAP Activation Code from this page. You may need to change your
ETAP Activation Code if you have purchased new modules/capabilities or you wish to switch to another
key which has a different configuration than your current one.
The Display License Managers button allows you to view any network licenses that you have specified as
options for connection. This feature also provides information regarding the selected network license such
as the following:
Server name
Total number of licenses
Number of users connected
Connected computer name
User name
Login time
Ticket number (ETAP assigns a unique ticket number to each connection and for duration of that
connection.)
To connect to a specific network license, you must open your project and from the ETAP Logon Editor
click on ETAP License Wizard. The ETAP Logon Editor is the first editor that appears when you open a
project.

Setup ETAP Licensing
2.7 ETAP Licensing
2.7.1 Security Hardware Keys

Starting with ETAP 7.5.2, ETAP will utilize the following type of security hardware key to license the
use of the software:
Stand-Alone Hardware Key Placed and resides on the back of your computer
Network Hardware Key Placed and resides on a License Manager Server
OTI will provide an ETAP key for USB ports.
ETAP-OTI 1600
The driver for the ETAP-OTI-1410 key is located in the following path:
32-bit machines:
C:\Program Files\Operation Technology Inc\ETAP License Manager 752\haspdInst.exe
64-bit machines:
C:\Program Files (x86)\Operation Technology Inc\ETAP License Manager 752\ haspdInst.exe
Please contact sales at sales@etap.com or 949-900-1000 for any key replacement. Please note ETAP will
no longer support the black parallel keys and the blue USB-1410 keys.
2.7.2 Stand-Alone System Version of ETAP Licensing

A stand-alone system hardware key is placed directly on the USB or parallel port of the computer that
will be running the software. Starting from ETAP 6.0.0, the ETAP License Manager will be automatically
installed for the stand-alone systems. The ETAP License Manager program and the stand-alone key
provide authorization for ETAP operation.
2.7.3 Network Version of ETAP Licensing

A network security hardware key requires a Windows XP, Professional/Vista Business/Windows 7 or
above, or Server 2003/2008 workstation or server. Place the network hardware key on the back of the
computer/server designated to license ETAP. This will be the permanent location of the key do not
remove it once it is operational.
Installation on Windows must be performed by a user account with Windows Administrative privileges.
The network installation can be done with the License Manager 7.5.2 Setup program provided on the
ETAP 7.5.2 DVD, started from the ETAP Installer program, or installed manually. Regardless of how the
network installation is done, the steps to be performed are the same.

Setup License Manager Server
2.8 License Manager Server

For the purpose of running ETAP, the computer containing the network hardware key is called the
License Manager Server. The License Manager Server needs to be on and running to issue authorization
for client computers to run ETAP. Each computer running ETAP (Windows XP/Vista/7, Server
2003/2008) requests authorization from the License Manager Server via a LAN or WAN. If the License
Manager Server does not issue the requested authorization, ETAP will not run.
The License Manager Server computer does not need to have the ETAP program software installed.
2.8.1 ETAP License Manager

The ETAP License Manager is a Windows XP/Vista/7, Server 2003/2008 workstation/server program
that assists the network security hardware key in licensing the use of ETAP. The network hardware key
provides licensing of up to 254 simultaneous users of ETAP via a local area network (LAN) and/or a wide
area network (WAN). The ETAP License Manager manages the administration of simultaneous ETAP
users as set forth in the terms of your ETAP license agreement.
Due to the nature of virtual machines, it is possible to replicate the ETAP License Manager in violation of
its intended number of users as per the ETAP License Grant and Agreement; therefore, ETAP prevents
the operation of the License Manager on a virtual machine.
Note: Proper operation of ETAP requires the installation of the ETAP License Manager on the License
Manager Server and, during each user system ETAP installation, entering the License Manager Server
name or IP address.
To connect to a specific network license you must open your project and from the ETAP Logon Editor
click on ETAP License Wizard. The ETAP Logon Editor is the first editor that appears when you open a
project.
The network hardware key and the ETAP License Manager use minimal processor time and do not
require more than 10MB of free disk space for proper operation. Make sure the system meets the ETAP
minimum hardware requirements.

Setup License Manager Installation
2.9 License Manager Installation

ETAP 5.0 or higher will use this method of installation. Earlier versions will use the manual installation
method described in the following section. You can also use the manual installation procedure if the
ETAP License Manager Installation program does not successfully install the ETAP License Manager.
2.9.1 Automated ETAP License Manager Installation

On the ETAP DVD, a separate Setup program is provided to install the ETAP License Manager. To
install the License Manager on a Windows XP/Vista/7, Server 2003/2008 workstation or server, do the
following:
1. Insert the ETAP DVD into the DVD drive. The installer displays ETAP Installer dialog box.
Select ETAP License Manager.

2. ETAP Setup displays the ETAP License Manager Welcome dialog box for version 7.5.2. Click Next.
3. The ETAP License Agreement is displayed. Click Yes to accept the terms of the agreement.

Due to the nature of virtual machines, it is possible to replicate the ETAP License Manager in
violation of its intended number of users as per the ETAP License Grant and Agreement; therefore,
ETAP prevents the operation of the License Manager on a virtual machine.
4. When the installation of ETAP 7.5.2 License Manager is complete, the installer displays the ETAP
7.5.2 License Manager Installation Setup Complete screen. Click Finish to complete the
installation.
2.9.2 Installing ETAP for Network Licensing

For each client machine, install ETAP per installation instructions in section 2.2 of this document.
To run ETAP, each user must be a registered user on the License Manager Server. As a minimum, each
user must be a member of the Users group on the License Manager Server. If you use Domain
Administration as provided by the Windows server, it is sufficient to add the Domain Users group to the
License Manager Servers User Manager/Policies/User Rights/Access.
In addition, during each user system ETAP installation, proper operation of ETAP requires entering the
License Manager Server name. You can change the key selection and License Manager Server name
setting on a user system at any time after the installation.
To change the server name launch ETAP, open your project and from the Logon Editor, click on the
ETAP Key Wizard and change the Server Name.
To change your key from one model to another, insert the new key, click on the Start\All Programs\Reset
License Manager. This program configures the License Manager for the key model you have selected.
2.9.3 Updating the ETAPS.INI File

For each computer that needs permission from the License Manager Server to run ETAP, you can update
the ETAP.INI file manually to indicate the location of the License Manager Server.

ETAP License Manager Uses TCP/IP Protocol

Update the ETAPS.INI file by doing the following:
1. Using Notepad or a similar text editor, open the ETAPS.INI file in C:\ETAP 752. If the ETAPS.INI
file is not in the application folder then ETAP will use the ETAPS.INI file in the C:\WINDOWS
folder.
2. Add the LicPath1= line In [AppVariables] section and Add LicIndex=1 in [Etap PowerStation]
section.
3. Insert the name of the License Manager Server with domain information (for example, LicPath1=
tcplm.oti.com).
4. To use an IP address instead, add the line LicPath1=, and then insert the IP address of the License
Manager Server (for example, LicPath1=10.10.10.191).
5. After the TCP Server or IP address is set, you may configure to use a specific port by appending the
port number after the LM server name separated by :, that you would like to use (for example,
LicPath1=tcplm.oti.com:2526). Furthermore, you have to verify if your target LMServer having the
same TCP Port setup. Check with your IT department before you do so.

Setup License Manager Verification
2.10 License Manager Verification
2.10.1 Verifying ETAP License Manager Installation

1. Restart the License Manager Server system.
2. Open a Command Prompt window, type in regedit, and then Enter. Windows displays the Registry
Editor.
3. For the 1600 USB key, if the device is installed properly, you can find the following device entry
from the Control Panel\System\Hardware\Device Manager.
4. In the Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon then the Services icon.
5. Find the Etaps Lic Mgr service, and then verify that the service status is started. If you cannot find the
Etaps Lic Mgr, you have not installed ETAPSLMT.EXE properly. The Etaps Lic Mgr Status value
should be Started or blank.

6. If the status is blank, right-click the ETAPS Lic Mgr icon, and then select Start.
2.10.2 Verifying ETAP License Manager Operation

1. In the Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon then the Event Viewer icon. The
Event Viewer window is displayed.
2. Click on the Application icon. The ETAP License Manager program logs all licensing events to the
applications log, so you should find a License Manager Application logs to view.
3. When the ETAP License Manager starts, you will see several events in the log identified as Source
Etaps LMService. The ETAP License Manager uses this source when it writes event information to
the Applications log.

4. Double-click the first ETAP License Manager event to view the Event Properties dialog box. The
message references a description similar to the following:
Etaps LMService message: 0, ETAPS License Manager starting
5. The next ETAPS LMService message indicates that ETAPSLM has detected a valid security
hardware key.
6. For the next message you should see a message indication similar to the following:
Key SN: 3087007744-345610626 Licensed to: <Your Company Name> Version: 020000 Users: 5.
(Your serial number, the licensee, version, and number of users will be specific to your network
hardware key.)
You have now verified your ETAP License Manager is correctly installed and running properly. The
latest issue of ETAP License Manager is version 7.5.2 and is intended to work with ETAP 4.7.0 to 7.5.2
versions. The earlier ETAP releases require version 5.2.3.102601 either TCP/IP version or Named piped
version depending on selected protocol by ETAP, see early ETAP version documentation for details.
You can check your version of the ETAP License Manager by viewing Properties in the file; C:\Program
Files\Operation Technology Inc\ETAP License Manager 752\Etapslmt.exe or
C:\WINDOWSSYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETAPSLM.EXE if you have installed the License Manager
manually. The file version is displayed at the top of the Version sheet.
2.10.3 Network License Manager Troubleshooting

If you get the message Could Not Find the Security Key or Failed to Receive Authorization, verify that
the following statements are true:
The latest ETAP License Manager is installed.

Network hardware key is installed on the License Manager Server.
The License Manager Server is turned on.
The License Manager Server has user permissions set correctly.
LicIndex=1 and LicPath1= is in the ETAPS.INI file on the local computer and it has been modified to
include the location of the License Manager Server.
The local computer and the License Manager Server are connected to the network.
If ETAP is still not running, contact Operation Technology, Inc. technical support at:
(949) 462-0400 or support@etap.com

Setup Installation Maintenance
2.11 Installation Maintenance

You can modify, repair, or remove your ETAP installation as required. To access these options, do the
following:
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the Add or Remove Programs icon.
2. Select ETAP 7.5.2 in the list of currently installed programs.
3. Click the Change/Remove button. ETAP Setup displays the ETAP 7.5.2 Maintenance Wizard.
Select the type of installation maintenance you want, and then click the Next button. Each maintenance
option is discussed below. Note that: both the Repair and Modify options will require that you insert the
ETAP DVD during the installation maintenance.
2.11.1 Modify
This is the default setting for the installation maintenance of ETAP. If you select this option and click
Next, ETAP Setup will display the Select Features step of the Maintenance Wizard. Use this step to
remove some of the components you installed during installation.

2.11.2 Repair
The Repair Installation Maintenance option reinstalls any program files that are missing from your
original installation. ETAP Setup displays the Setup Status step of the Maintenance Wizard while it
makes the changes.
2.11.3 Remove
This option lets you remove all ETAP files you have installed onto your computer. Select OK when asked
whether you want to remove ETAP completely.
Note: During the uninstall process you may be asked to remove files installed as shared files. Generally,
you should not remove these files to avoid disruption of other programs.

Click Finish after modification, repair, or uninstall is complete.
Note: Depending on the modifications to your ETAP installation, you may be prompted to restart your
computer for the changes to take effect.

Setup User Guide Removal
2.12 User Guide Removal

You can remove the ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide, by following the steps below:
2. Select ETAP User Guide 7.5.2 in the list of currently installed programs.
3. Click the Uninstall/Remove button. Setup displays the ETAP User Guide 7.5.2 Setup Wizard.
4. When asked whether you want to remove the application and all of its features, click OK.
5. When the ETAP User Guide Setup Wizard displays the Uninstall Complete dialog box, click
Finish.

Setup License Manager Removal
2.13 License Manager Removal

There may be instances when you want to remove the ETAP License Manager from your system. For
example, to install a new version of the ETAP License Manager, you need to remove the previous one
first. Use the following procedure to remove the ETAP License Manager from your Services list.
2.13.1 Removing ETAP License Manager

2. In the list of currently installed programs, select ETAP License Manager 7.5.2.
3. Click the Change/Remove button. Setup prepares the ETAP License Manager Setup Wizard.
4. When asked whether you want to remove the application and all of its features, click OK.
Note: During the uninstall process, you may be prompted to remove the files installed as shared files.
Generally, you should not remove shared files to avoid disruption of other applications.
5. When the ETAP Setup Wizard displays the Maintenance Complete dialog box, click Finish.

Setup License Manager Removal
2.13.2 Removing ETAP License Manager Manually

1. Logon to the computer you are using as your License Manager Server. Make sure to use an account
that has Administrator privileges in Windows.
2. Make sure that no one is currently using ETAP. Removing the ETAP License Manager may disrupt
their activities.
3. In the Control Panel, double-click the Administrative Tools icon then the Services icon. The Services
window is displayed.
4. If the Etaps Lic Mgr status is started, select Etaps Lic Mgr in the Services list and (with it
highlighted) click the Stop Service button in the toolbar. In a few moments, Etaps Lic Mgr status will
change from Started to blank.
5. Open a Command Prompt, and then go to the folder in which ETAPSLMT.EXE is installed (usually
C:\Program Files\Operation Technology Inc\ETAP License Manager 752\Etapslmt.exe).
6. In the prompt line, type Etapslmt remove and press the Enter key. You should receive the message
Etaps Lic Mgr removed.
The ETAP License Manager is now removed from your system.

Setup System Optimization
2.14 System Optimization

If ETAP takes a long time to load or save a project file (more than several minutes), you can modify your
system settings to optimize program speed. There are several system attributes that control the speed at
which ETAP loads and processes a project database, including the following:
Computer CPU speed ODBC DSN Buffer Size
Computer RAM Size ODBC DSN Page Timeout
Operating System Virtual Memory File
Size
2.14.1 Computer CPU Speed

We recommend Intel Dual/Quad core or faster processors.
2.14.2 Computer RAM Size

We recommend a minimum of 2 GB of RAM. For very large network databases within ETAP, 4 GB of
RAM is recommended.
2.14.3 Operating System Virtual Memory File Size

This can be changed through the System icon in the Control Panel. Note that your Virtual Memory file is
stored on your hard disk. Therefore, if you increase the size of this file, it will use a proportional amount
of space on your hard disk. You should consult your system administrator before changing this setting.
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the

System icon. Windows displays the
System Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Advanced tab, and then click
the Settings button in the Performance
group. Windows displays the
Performance Options dialog box.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Make sure you have at least 200MB of

disk space free, and then change the
Initial Size and Maximum Size to at
least 200 MB.
6. Click OK. Windows returns you to the
Performance Options dialog box.
7. Click OK, and restart your computer
when prompted. Once your computer
restarts, the virtual memory will be
changed.
4. In the Virtual Memory group, click the

Change button.

Setup ODBC DSN Buffer Size
2.14.4 ODBC DSN Buffer Size

The Data Source Name (DSN) buffer size is the internal buffer, in kilobytes, that is used to transfer data
to and from ETAP to the associated project database. The Microsoft Access default is 2048; however,
ETAP's otiaccess and otireport drivers are defaulted to 4096. 4096 or larger should be used for all
Microsoft Access ETAP databases.
1. In the Control Panel, double-click the

Administrative Tools icon. Windows 6. Make sure that otiaccess is the Data
displays the Administrative Tools Source Name, and then click the
window. Options button. This will expand the
2. Double-click the Data Sources (ODBC) ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog
icon. Windows displays ODBC Data box to show the advanced options. The
Source Administrator dialog box. buffer size is defaulted to 2048.
3. Click the System DSN tab.

4. Select otiaccess, and then click the
Configure button. 7. Change the buffer size to 4096 and click
OK. This will return you to the ODBC
Note: If the entry otiaccess is not Data Source Administrator.
present, run ETAP once and it will place
it there. If otiaccess is still not present Note: The Data Source Name (DSN)
after running ETAP, then add it in page Timeout specifies the period of
manually. time, in tenths of a second that an
unused page of data remains in the
5. Click Add. Windows displays the buffer before being removed. The
ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog Microsoft Access default is 5, or 0.5
box. seconds. ETAP projects are optimized
for a setting of 5 when using Microsoft
Access as the project database.
8. Click OK.

Chapter 3
Overview
ETAP is the most comprehensive solution for the design, simulation, and analysis of generation,
transmission, distribution, and industrial power systems.
ETAP organizes your work on a project basis. Each project that you create provides all the necessary
tools and support for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. A project consists of an
electrical system that requires a unique set of electrical components and interconnections. In ETAP, each
project provides a set of users, user access controls, and a separate database in which its elements and
connectivity data are stored.

Overview Introduction
Your access to an existing project file is through a special project file with an .OTI extension. The ETAP
database is stored in an ODBC compliant database file such as Microsoft Access (*.MDB). These files
work together to provide access control and storage for each project and use the project name. ETAP
places all output reports from your project into the same sub-directory where this database resides.
ETAP has been designed and developed by engineers for engineers to handle the diverse discipline of
power systems in one integrated package with multiple interface views such as AC and DC networks,
cable raceways, ground grid, GIS, panels, protective device coordination/selectivity, and AC and DC
control system diagrams.
Encompassing all these systems and views in one package allows engineers to model and analyze all
aspects of an electrical system from control system diagrams to panel systems, as well as large
transmission and distribution systems.
All interface views are completely graphical and the engineering properties of each circuit element can be
edited directly from these views. Calculation results are displayed on the interface views for your
convenience.

Project Toolbar
Files, Printing, Cut, Copy, Paste, Pan, Zoom In and Out, Back and Forward, Undo and Redo,
Zoom Fit to Page, Text Box, Grid Lines, Theme, Continuity Circuit Check, Hyperlinks, Get
Template, Add to Template, Power Calculator, Find, and Help
Select ETAP System
Select interface views or systems
AC Elements
(Edit Toolbar)
Drag-and-drop
AC elements.
DC Elements
(Edit Toolbar)
Place DC elements
including UPS, VFD,
Charger, and Inverter.
Instruments
(Edit Toolbar)
Place PT, CT,
Relays, and Meters.
Select Project Revision Select Presentations Select Configuration Status
Unlimited Revisions to save Unlimited Presentations to set Unlimited Configurations to

multiple sets of engineering different views of the same save status of switching
properties system devices/loads

Select Analysis Mode
Edit Mode: Drag-and-Drop Connect Elements

Study Mode: For example, Load Flow or Short-Circuit
Menu
Includes commands for files, printing, conversions, project standards, settings, options,
editing libraries, setting defaults, selecting annotation fonts, printing libraries, base and
revision data, setting for Real-Time Modules, etc.
Base & Revision

Toolbar
Project View One-Line Diagram

Create new and In Edit Mode
manipulate one-line
diagram
presentations,
underground cable Schedule Report
raceways, ground Manager
grid systems, Print bus, branch, and
configurations, and load schedules using
study cases; access Crystal Reports.
System Dumpster,
libraries, and all
elements.
Display Options
MSG Logger
Dumpster Options to display
View the latest messages Nested annotations of
related to ETAP projects. Composite Network Can have
elements on the one-
These can be expanded or unlimited
line diagram for Edit
reduced. cells.
Mode

All ETAP systems take advantage of a common database. For example, a cable not only contains data
representing its electrical properties but also contains the physical routing information to indicate the
raceways through which it is routed. A relay not only contains information pertinent to analysis like load
flow and short-circuit but also contains time current characteristic information that allows the engineer to
perform protection or coordination studies.
Trip times set in these studies are also used by transient analysis to determine the total operating time of a
breaker during a transient condition when the relay pickup value is reached. ETAP can therefore simulate
automatic relay actions based on the relay settings. This type of integration makes ETAP a true power
system simulator program.
ETAP also contains built-in libraries that are accessible from project files. New libraries can be created or
existing libraries can be modified to include custom manufacturer data.
ETAP systems and interface views can be accessed using the System toolbar.

Overview System Toolbar
3.1 System Toolbar

The System toolbar is a convenient and efficient method of switching between ETAP systems.
Project View
Network Systems (AC or DC One-Line Diagrams)
Star Systems (Star Views)
Underground Raceway Systems (UGS)
Ground Grid Systems (GGS)
Cable Pulling Systems
ETAP Real-Time Systems (PSMS)
Geographical Information Systems (GIS Map)
Control System Diagrams (CSD)
System Dumpster
Scenario Wizard
Study Wizard
Project Wizard
When navigating from one ETAP system to another using this toolbar, ETAP will open the last accessed
presentation for the selected system. For example, if you are switching from Network Systems to Star
Systems, ETAP will check for an existing Star View. If Star Views exist, ETAP will open the last
accessed Star View and make it the active window.
If there are no existing presentations ETAP will prompt you to create a new presentation. With the
Exeption of Ground Grid. The button for Ground Grid will be disabled if not presentation has been
created. See Ground Grid Systems Chapter 3.7 for instructions on how to create Ground Grid
presentations.

Overview System Toolbar
3.1.1 Existing Views

If you are switching from Network Systems to Star Systems, ETAP will check for an existing Star View.
If Star Views files do exist, ETAP will open the last accessed Star View and make it the active window.
3.1.2 New Views

If you are switching from Network Systems to Cable Pulling Systems and ETAP does not find any
existing Cable Pulling Systems, it will then prompt you to create a new interface view for this system.

Overview Project View
3.2 Project View

ETAP provides a special view of your project called the Project View. The Project View is a graphical
tree representation that includes the presentations, configurations, study cases, libraries, and components
associated with your project.
Click the Project View button on the System toolbar
The project tree can be expanded to display these items. Clicking a "+" icon (inside a square) increases
the tree expansion, showing more details. Clicking a "" icon (inside a square) decreases the tree
expansion, showing fewer details. Selecting an item by right-clicking it will display a context-sensitive
command menu that allows you to perform actions on the selected item.
User ID and access level
Project filename
One-line diagram presentations.

Right-click to create new presentations.
Double-click to view a presentation.
UGS presentations can be created from the Project View.
Dumpster can be accessed from the Project View.
Configurations can be created from the Project View.

Right-click to rename, purge, or duplicate configurations.
Right-click to create new study cases.
Right-click to Open, Save, Save As,

Create, and Purge libraries.
Right-click to find an
element or edit its
Right-click to properties. You can find
View, Copy/Merge, elements in the last active
and Purge Motor one-line diagram
Characteristic presentation, or in any
library. desired presentation.

Overview Network Systems
3.3 Network Systems

ETAP provides a graphical editor to construct your one-line diagram. You can graphically add, delete,
move, or connect elements by using the one-line diagram Edit toolbar; zoom in or out; display grid on or
off; change element size, orientation, symbol, or visibility; enter properties; set operating status; etc.
Click here to access

AC Network Systems
You can use composite networks and motors with

unlimited nesting capabilities to create uncluttered and
easy to follow one-line diagrams. Composite networks
allow up to 20 connections from outside
the network, making them very flexible
so they can be used in a variety of
configurations.
Note: The nesting capabilities of a one-

line diagram do not affect the
calculation results in any way.
Calculation programs consider all one-
line diagram components nested to any
level.

Overview Mode Toolbar
3.4 Mode Toolbar

When you click the One-Line Diagram (Network Systems) button on the System toolbar, the Mode
toolbar becomes available that contains all the study modules related to the one-line diagram.
In general, ETAP has three modes of operation under Network Systems; Edit, AC Study, and DC Study.
The AC Study mode consists of analyses such as Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor Acceleration,
Transient Stability, and Protective Device Coordination.
Mode Toolbar with Motor Acceleration Mode Selected
3.4.1 Edit Mode

Edit Mode enables you to build your one-line diagram, change system connections, edit engineering
properties, save your project, and generate schedule reports in Crystal Reports formats. You can select
this mode by clicking the Edit button (graphically represented by a pencil). The Edit toolbars for AC
Elements, DC Elements, and Instrumentation Elements will be displayed to the right side of the ETAP
window.
Mode Toolbar with Edit Mode Selected
This mode provides access to editing features that include:
Dragging and Dropping Elements

Connecting Elements
Changing IDs
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Elements
Moving Items from System Dumpster
Inserting OLE Objects
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting OLE Objects
Merging Two ETAP Projects
Hiding/Showing Groups of Protective Devices
Rotating Elements
Sizing Elements
Changing Symbols
Editing Properties
Running Schedule Report Manager

3.4.2 Study Mode

Study Modes enable you to create and modify study cases, perform system analysis, view alarm/alert
conditions, and view output reports and plots. When a Study Mode is active (selected), the toolbar for the
selected study is displayed on the right side of the ETAP window. By clicking the buttons on the Study
toolbar, you can run studies, transfer data, and change display options. The available Study Modes and
associated Study toolbars are shown in the table below.
Study Mode Toolbar Study Mode Toolbar
Load Flow Unbalanced Load Flow
Short-Circuit Motor Stating

ANSI Short-Circuit Duty Dynamic Acceleration
ANSI 30 Cycle Faults Static Starting
ANSI Unbalanced Faults
IEC Short-Circuit Duty
IEC 909 Short-Circuit
IEC Unbalanced Faults
IEC 363 Short-Circuit
Arc Flash Analysis

Harmonics Transient Stability

Harmonic Load Flow Transient Stability
Harmonic Frequency Scan Generator Start-Up
Protective Device Coordination Optimal Power Flow

Sequence of Operation
Max and Min SC
Optimal Capacitor Placement Reliability Assessment
DC Load Flow DC Short-Circuit

Battery
Battery Sizing
Battery Discharge
In addition to the Study toolbar, a Study Case toolbar is displayed automatically when one of the Study
Modes becomes active. The Study Case toolbar allows you to control and manage the solution parameters
and output reports. The Study Case toolbar is available for all ETAP configurations.

Motor Starting Study Case Toolbar
Select and edit Motor Starting study cases, set output report file name, and
select to view a report of Motor Starting results in Crystal Reports format.
Time Slider
Display study results on the one-line diagram at

different simulation times.
Nested Networks
Open Composite Motors
or Networks to see the
results in various units.
Motor Starting Study

The Study toolbar changes
according to the selected
Study Mode.
Run
Run dynamic
acceleration or
static starting
studies.
Display Options
Display results and
info annotations.
Get
Get online or
archived data.

Overview STAR Systems
3.5 Star Systems

The ETAP Star systems allow you to perform steady-state and dynamic device coordination, protection,
and testing. Star systems utilize intelligent one-line diagrams, comprehensive device libraries, and an
integrated three-dimensional database.
The ETAP library database provides comprehensive and up-to-date protective device information. The
ETAP device libraries are validated and verified using the published manufacturer data and industry
standards. In addition, ETAP allows you to create and add new device TCC curves using state-of-the-art
digitization points and formulation techniques.
Click here to access Star systems.
Star systems enable system engineers to efficiently perform protective device coordination studies. The
intelligent features provide informed and reliable recommendations regarding the feasibility of the
devices under consideration. This helps system engineers and planners quickly identify possible design

Overview STAR Systems
issues and make informed decisions to improve system reliability, increase system stability, and realize
cost savings.
3.5.1 Key Features & Capabilities

Sequence-of-operation
Embedded analysis modules
Verified and validated device libraries
Multi-function and multi-level relays
Built-in interface with relay hardware
Display Actual Relay Transient Response
User-definable device library database
Illustrate system wide coordination
Automatic layout of the one-line diagram in Star TCC View
Click & drag curves to adjust settings
Phase & ground coordination modes
Automatic current & voltage scaling
Integration of short-circuit analysis with protective devices
Motor starting curves based on motor acceleration studies
Comprehensive relay interlocks
User-definable display options
Graphical time-difference calculator
Fixed point/damage curve modeling
Graphical printing/plotting
Comprehensive print functionality, legends, & device labeling
Customizable reports
Not only can you work with the time-current curves with ETAP Star, you can also determine the
operating time of protective devices simply by placing a fault on the one-line diagram.
Coordinate via One-Line Diagram

Graphically place a fault anywhere on the one-line diagram
Automatically calculate and display the fault current contributions on the one-line diagram
Determine the operating time and state of all protective devices based on the actual fault current
contribution flowing through each individual device
Globally view post fault actions and associated operating time via a tabulated event viewer
Graphically examine the operation of protective devices via the one-line diagram
Drag & Drop a Fault

One Action Resulting in a Complete Solution
3-phase and ground faults
Display fault currents on the one-line diagram
Illustrate system wide coordination
Tabulate operating times via an event viewer
Customizable reports

Overview Underground Raceway Systems
3.6 Underground Raceway Systems (UGS)

ETAP provides graphical Underground Raceway Systems (UGS). Each ETAP project supports multiple
views of the underground raceway systems. Each view is a conceptual cross-section of desired raceways
and heat sources that are in the same vicinity.
Click here to access underground raceway systems.
The figure above shows how to access underground raceway systems. Use the underground raceway
systems Edit toolbar to add raceways (duct bank and direct buried), conduits for duct bank raceways, and
locations for direct buried raceways, external heat sources, and cables to the underground raceway
system. From underground raceway systems presentations, you can graphically arrange raceways,
conduits, cables, and external heat sources to represent cable routing and provide a physical environment
to conduct cable ampacity derating studies. These studies include cable temperature calculation, ampacity
optimization, cable sizing, and transient cable temperature calculation.
Underground Raceway System
When working with the underground raceway system presentations, the Mode toolbar changes as shown
below.

3.6.1 Edit Mode

Edit Mode enables you to build your underground raceway system, change system
configurations, edit engineering properties, and save your project. This mode allows
access to editing features including drag-and-drop, copy, cut, paste, size elements, as
well as the Edit Properties command.
Note: Elements can be added directly to the system from the underground raceway
system Edit toolbar.
3.6.2 Study Mode

The Study Mode enables you to create and modify solution parameters (study cases), perform steady-state
and transient temperature calculations, optimize cable ampacities, size cables, and view output reports and
plots.
Study Toolbar for Underground Cable Raceway Systems
3.6.3 Features & Capabilities

Neher-McGrath Method
IEC 287 method
Steady-state temperature
Ampacity optimization
Automatic cable zizing
Transient temperature
Graphical manipulation of raceways, cables, conduits, etc.
Drag & drop cables from one-line diagrams
Cable of different sizes in the same raceway
Separate phases into different conduits or locations
Unsymmetical positioning of raceways
Transient calculations use a dynamic thermal circuit model
Option to fix cable size and/or loading
Calculate thermal R, dielectric losses, Yc, Ys, etc.
User-defined armor cables
Unbalanced load factors
Multiple duct banks & direct buried cables
Place raceways in multiple cross-sections

Flexible Operation
Multiple raceways
Multiple external heat sources
Optimization of new cables in existing raceways
Cross-sectional analysis
Duct banks & direct buried raceways
Integrated with cables in one-line diagrams
Integrated with load flow results
Integrated with cable pulling analysis
Plotting
Transient temperatures calculations based on load profile

Option to display multiple cables simultaneously
Zoom to any detail level
Export data to Microsoft Excel
Line, bar, 3-D, and scatter plots
Customize text and axes
Reporting
Flag critical & marginal cable temperatures

Reports all physical & calculated data
Use Crystal Reports for full color, customizable reports
Export output reports to your favorite word processor
Graphical display of raceway results

Overview Ground Grid Systems
3.7 Ground Grid Systems

The safety of people who work and live around electric power installations is of paramount concern. The
proper design of a grounding system is key to improving safety conditions and protecting the lives of all
individuals who are in close proximity of electrical power systems. During unbalanced faults, the ground
potential rise of a grounded structure presents a risk of electrocution to anyone who comes in contact with
the grounded structure. ETAP provides a three-dimensional, fully graphical tool that allows for the design
of a ground grid system that adheres to IEEE or Finite Element Method (FEM) standards.
Ground Grid
To begin working with the ground grid systems, you must first insert a ground grid on the one-line
diagram. To do so, click the Ground Grid button located on the AC Edit toolbar. After choosing the
standard (IEEE or FEM) you will use for the design, you can access the Ground Grid Editor by double-
clicking the ground grid on the one-line diagram. To open an existing ground grid view, use the Ground
Grid Systems button from the System toolbar.
Click here to access existing ground grid systems.

Some of the design features of the Ground Grid Systems module include:
Calculation of the safe step and touch potentials for any type of ground grid shape
Generation of three-dimensional graphic profiles and tabular results from the step and touch
voltage values
Optimization of the numbers of parallel ground conductors and rods
Calculation of ground resistance and ground potential rise
Calculation of cost of conductors and rods used
Inclusion of soil type and configuration in calculations
Ground Grid Systems Plot Sample
When working with a ground grid presentation, the Mode toolbar changes as shown below.
3.7.1 Edit Mode

Edit Mode enables you to build your ground grids based on the
IEEE (regular shapes) or FEM (Irregular shapes) standard.
3.7.2 Study Mode

Study Mode enables you to create and modify solution parameters
(study cases), perform calculations, optimize the number of conductors,
optimize the number of conductors and rods, and view
output reports and plots.

IEEE 80 Method
IEEE 665 Method EDIT and Calculation
Finite Element Method Toolbars
Rod and conductors in any 3-D direction

Rod and conductor optimization

Two-layer soil configuration plus surface material
Table of potentials at the earth surface
External boundary extensions
Handle irregular configurations of any shape
Variable weight and temperature options
Compare allowable currents against fault currents
Ground grid configurations showing conductor and rod plots
Flexible Operation
Automatically use short-circuit results

Optimize number of conductors with fixed rods
Optimize number of conductors and rods based on cost
Check the allowable current for grid conductors
Standards & Methods
IEEE: 80-1986, 80-2000, 665-1995

Finite Element
Calculate
Reflection factor (K)

Decrement factor (Df)
Ground potential rise (GPR)
Ground system resistance (Rg)
Surface layer derating factor (Cs)
Compare potentials to tolerable limits
Step, touch, and absolute potentials inside and outside grid
Plot Options
Rotation animation
Rotation increment (-15 to 15 degrees)
Rotation detail - wire frame/plotting style/full detail
Viewing style - color/monochrome
Shading style - white/color
Font size - small/medium/large
Numeric precision - 0, 1, 2, 3 decimals
Grid lines - no grid, X and/or Y axes
Plotting method - wire frame/surface/surface with frame/surface with contouring/pixels
Show bounding box - while rotating always/never
2-D contour
Off

Lines on top/bottom
Color on top/bottom
Plotting/Reporting
3-D touch potential plots

3-D step potential plots
3-D absolute voltage plots
Color coded contour plots
Graphical display of overlimit voltages
Conductor segments oriented in any 3-D direction
Output results in Microsoft Access databases format

Overview Panel Systems
3.8 Panel Systems

ETAP allows you to model the electrical panels used in electrical power systems directly on the one-line
diagram. The number of panels that can be represented is unlimited, since ETAP supports the nesting of
panels. Therefore, a panel can be connected to a sub-panel, and in turn, a sub-panel can be connected to
yet another downstream panel elsewhere in the circuit. Each panel can be modeled as either a 3-phase or a
single-phase panel. The 3-phase panels can be either 3-wire or 4-wire configurations, while single-phase
panels can be 2-wire or 3-wire configurations. Internally, each panel is comprised of protective devices
and a collection of circuits that supply system loads.
Panel Systems
Panels are added to the one-line diagram by clicking the Panel Systems button located on the AC Edit
toolbar, and placing the panel anywhere on the one-line diagram. Once added to the diagram, double-
clicking the panel symbol will open the Panel Editor, and allow for panel and circuit information to be
specified. The user can customize useful information such as panel ID, phase connections, panel rating,
number of circuits, circuit schedule, and load summary.



Panel design and analysis Panel Code Factors
1-Phase and 3-Phase
ANSI and IEC standards NEC load demand factors
NEC load factors Customizable multiplying factors
Automatic update of upstream panels Reporting
3-Phase 3-Wire
3-Phase 4-Wire Customizable panel schedules in Crystal
1-Phase 2-Wire Reports format
1-Phase 3-Wire Comprehensive load summary for panel
Column and standard layouts sizing
Unlimited branch circuits Customizable reports for branching
Unlimited sub-panel connections circuit evaluation
External network representation Export one-line diagrams with results to
Internal (spreadsheet) load modeling third party CAD systems
Detailed panel loading summary
Dynamic panel schedule updates
Continuous and non-continuous load
calculations
Flexible Operation
Diverse operating conditions

Multiple loading categories
Multiple demand factors
Unlimited configurations
Different nameplate data
Global and individual bus load diversity
factors
Study Options
Ten loading categories per circuit

User-definable load types and factors
Libraries
Extensive protection and control device

libraries
Comprehensive feeder and cable
libraries
Customizable libraries
User-configurable defaults and layouts

Overview Cable Pulling Systems
3.9 Cable Pulling Systems

The accurate prediction of cable pulling force is essential for the design of underground cable systems.
This knowledge makes it possible to avoid overly conservative design practices and to achieve substantial
capital savings during construction.
ETAP Cable Pulling Systems is used to determine the forward tension, reverse tensions, and sidewall
pressures a cable is subjected to when pulled through conduits. The module can account for cables of
different sizes and permits complex pulling path geometry. A point-by-point calculation method is
performed at every conduit bend and pull point. Both the forward and reverse pulling tensions are
calculated for determining the preferred direction of pull.
To begin working with Cable Pulling Systems, click the Cable Pulling Systems button on the System
toolbar.
Click here to access Cable Pulling Systems
Once created, double-click the cable pulling (CP) symbol to access the CP presentation. The CP
presentation is divided into three different views: the schematic configuration view, conduit cross-section
view, and 3-D pulling path view. The conduit cross-section view is primarily to edit the properties of the
cables and the conduit (which the cables will be pulled into).The 3-D pulling path view applies only to the
three-dimensional display of pulling path geometry. The CP presentation allows you to graphically
arrange cables, segments, and bends, to provide a physical environment to conduct cable pulling design
studies.

Overview Cable Pulling Systems
3.9.1 Features and Capabilities

Integrated with one-line diagram cables
Integrated with underground raceways cables
Pull multiple cables
Allow any pull geometry
Full ETAP cable library integration
Display 3-D pulling path geometry
Provide reduction factors for calculating allowable tension when pulling multiple cables
Evaluate possible conduit jamming
Allow segments to have non-zero slopes as well as horizontal bends (non-planer segments)
Account for the equivalent tension for cables pulled from reels
Provide tolerance for cable weights and outside diameters
Summary and alert windows
Flexible Operation
Calculate forward and reverse pulling tensions

Calculate pulling tensions at all bend points
Calculate the maximum tension limited by sidewall pressures
Calculate the maximum allowable pulling tension
Compare the maximum tension limitations against the calculated pulling tensions
Calculate the conduit percent fill
Calculate the total length of run (pull)
Cradled and triangular cable configurations
Reporting
Fundamental cable pulling results

Flag cable tensions that exceed limits
Flag conduit percent fill limits
Flag non-conforming NEC code requirements
Graphical display of cable pulling results
Report sidewall tension, forward pull, and reverse pull including violation flags
Pulling schematic showing segment and bend plots
Conduit cross-section showing conduit and cable plots

Overview Real-Time Systems
3.10 Real-Time Systems (PSMS)

ETAP Real-Time (PSMS) is an intelligent PC-based
energy management software application that runs as an
operator workstation to monitor, control, and optimize the
operation of your power system. While monitoring your
system, the workstation can simultaneously be used to
perform full spectrum power system analyses on real-time
data.
ETAP Real-Times unique combination of supervisory and

simulation capabilities provides a powerful new set of
management tools for more effective operation of your
power system. ETAP Real-Time simulation capabilities
also provide an environment for operator training and
assistance. Compared to traditional training methods,
operator training is accelerated and becomes an ongoing
process.
ETAP Real-Time is an online extension to ETAP power system analysis software. By combining
Windows NT/2000 client-server modular architecture with state-of-the-art remote monitoring, simulator,
and supervisory control applications, Real-Time can interface with any combination of computer
workstations, data storage devices (historians), IEDs, and other SCADA systems.
ETAP Real-Time enables you to connect your existing power system to your ETAP model; collect,
monitor, and log live data; set alarms; simulate system responses; execute control actions; run What if"
studies; and view output reports and plots.
While Real-Time monitors and maintains logs in the background, you can simulate load flow, short-
circuit, motor Starting, transient stability, optimal power flow, or operation of the system with data that
reflects the current status and loading of the system. Previously stored system configuration data and
loading can also be used for simulations.
You access the ETAP Real-Time System on the System toolbar as shown in the example below.
Click this button to access ETAP Real-Time Systems.
When working with ETAP Real-Time Systems, the toolbar changes to allow access to the following Real-
Time capabilities:
Advance Monitoring
Real-Time Simulation
Event Playback

On-Line Control
Advisory and Supervisory Control
Intelligent Load Shedding
3.10.1 Advanced Monitoring

Click the On-Line Monitoring button on the Real-Time toolbar to put the active one-line diagram
(presentation) into on-line monitoring mode. ETAP acquires real-time data from the electrical system via
the monitoring devices while in monitoring mode, processes the data (using State Estimator and Load
Distributor), resets the alarms, stores all parameters, and then graphically displays the data on the one-line
diagram.
Advanced Monitoring provides intuitive, intelligent, and integrated real-time monitoring via a state-of-
the-art graphical user interface. Monitoring functions include checking the condition of the network,
estimating missing system states, detecting network abnormalities, and initiating alarms based on
operating conditions and status changes.
Features and Capabilities
Continuous real-time monitoring

On demand data retrieval
State estimator and load distributor
Data reconciliation and consistency check
Bad data detection and correction
Alarm management and processing
Energy cost monitoring
Multi-console and multi-screen monitoring
Graphical monitoring via intelligent one-line diagrams
Visual monitoring via watch windows (MMI)
Dynamic coloring of de-energized and overload elements
Archived (historical) data retrieval and display
Pseudo measurements (override measured data)
OPC interface layer
Message logging
User-definable scan rates
User-access levels
Energy Usage and Cost Analysis
Predict system-wide energy usage and cost

User-definable cost functions and heat rates
Track energy related costs
Cost of energy calculations
State Estimator
Extended estimations of non-observable sub-systems

Rule-based comparison of measured vs. estimated values

Dependable and fast convergence solution
Minimum system measurements requirement
State-of-the-art estimation techniques
Data consistency checking
Bad data and error detection
Load distribution
Alarms & Warnings
Annunciate local and system-wide alarms and warnings based on equipment ratings
Alarm priority setting and event triggering
Annunciate out-of-range measurements
Graphical, tabulated, and audible annunciation
Predict abnormal conditions and critical failures
3.10.2 Real-Time Simulation

ETAP Real-Time Simulation is a powerful analysis tool that allows for prediction of system behavior in
response to actions and events via the use of real-time and archived data. Virtual testing of operator
actions prior to implementation can reveal potential problems, hence reducing human errors and the risk
of service interruptions. ETAP Real-Time Simulation assists operators, engineers, and planners to make
informed and logical decisions to reduce operating costs and improve system reliability.
Real-time simulation
Predict system behavior
Perform "What If" operating scenarios
Simulate archived offline data
Built-in training tool for engineers and operators
Full spectrum AC and DC analysis modules
Emulate response of protective devices
Evaluate protection and control systems
Get online data on demand
Retrieve archived data for system analysis
One-touch simulation
Graphical display of simulation results
Intelligent interactive graphical user interface
Operator friendly interface
Online simulation alerts
Customizable reports via Crystal Reports
Integrated database with ETAP
Automatic scenario simulation using project wizard
Power analysis techniques

3.10.3 Event Playback

On the Real-Time toolbar, click the Playback button to put the active one-line diagram (presentation) into
playback mode. Once in Playback Mode, ETAP Real-Time retrieves data from the historian and displays
it on the one-line diagram.
The Event Playback Mode provides seamless retrieval of data from the ETAP Real-Time Playback
Historian for any events from any ETAP Real-Time Console. ETAP Real-Time can be configured to
provide a complete picture of the electrical system from the stored data. This includes playback of a
previously recorded monitored data, calculated system parameters, sequence of events, and message log.
The Event Playback feature is especially useful for root cause and effect investigations, improvement of
system operations, exploration of alternative actions, and replay of "What if" scenarios. ETAP Real-Time
Event Playback capabilities translate into reduction of maintenance costs and prevention of costly
shutdowns.
The system operator can control playbacks to re-run at original or accelerated speeds, single-step, fast-
forward, or rewind through the message log. Playback resolution is operator controlled and determined by
the scan rate of field devices. Since full simulation capabilities are available to the system operator at any
point during the replay, the operator can explore the effects of alternative actions at any point of recorded
data.
Additionally, the event log can be synchronized and displayed while the playback is in progress. This
allows the operator to precisely determine, at a specific time, what events were occurring in the power
system, what was being reported to the operator, and what operator action resulted, if any.
The playback data is stored in an ODBC/SQL database as a binary stream and can be transferred to any
user with the appropriate authorization and software. Stored information can be accessed from any ETAP
Real-Time Console. There is no requirement that the Playback Console be online or connected with
ETAP Real-Time Server.

Improve operator knowledge
Improve system operation
Investigate cause and effect
Explore alternative actions
Replay "What if" scenarios
3.10.4 On-Line Control

This mode allows the user to open or close circuit breakers and receive status confirmations.
ETAP Online Control Mode gives the operator full remote access over system elements such as motors,
generators, breakers, and other switching devices. Subsystems that operate independently within the load
area under ETAP Online Control will need device coordination through either hardware or software
interlocks with the ETAP Real-Time Server to ensure safety and stable operations.

Automation
ETAP Real-Time provides user-definable actions that can be added or superimposed on the existing
system for automating system control. This is like adding PC-based processors/controllers (kV, kW, kvar,
PF, etc.) or simple breaker interlocks to any part of the system by means of the software.
3.10.5 Advisory and Supervisory Control

ETAP Real-Time offers a range of state-of-the-art control and real-time optimization capabilities for your
electrical power system. ETAP Real-Time optimization algorithms assist energy consumers to
automatically operate their system and minimize system losses, reduce peak load consumption, or
minimize control adjustment. For energy producers ETAP Real-Time can minimize generation fuel cost,
optimize system operation, optimize power exchange, or maximize system security.
ETAP Real-Time can dynamically manage your system to respond to disturbances faster than standard
hardware time-delay operations. The appropriate system response can be determined for a variety of
changes and disturbances by using electrical and physical parameters, loading and generation levels,
network topology, and control logic. In addition, ETAP Real-Time can determine the source of a potential
problem and advise on corrective actions to avoid interruption.
The optimization of a power system through the utilization of available controls including:
Voltage/var Control
MW Control
Transformer LTC Control
Shunt Compensation Control
Series Compensation Control
Switching Capacitor Control
Load Shed Control
Furthermore, the appropriate application of ETAP Real-Time leads to a more reliable and economical
operation, while maintaining system voltages and equipment loading within the required range and
constraints. ETAP Real-Time provides intelligent load flow solutions to minimize system operating costs
and maximize system performance. ETAP Real-Time maximizes the value of your energy investment.
ETAP Real-Time pays for itself through an immediate realization of savings in operating and
maintenance costs.
Reduce kWh Costs

Reduce Peak kWh Costs
Reduce kvar/Power Factor Penalties
Increase Equipment Life Time
Increase System Capacity
ETAP Real-Time allows you to monitor, analyze, control, coordinate, and predict load/generation
demands, real-time costs, and other system parameters while maintaining proper reliability levels
throughout the system.

Supervisory Control mode provides automatic implementation of recommended settings to achieve

continuous optimum system operation. Advisory Control mode allows the systems operator to implement
the ETAP Real-Time recommendations.

Advisory and/or automatic control
Shared decision making process
Chain of logic controls and action validations
Steady-state optimization control
Energy cost assessment
Online control and automation
3.10.6 Intelligent Load Shedding

The Intelligent Load Shedding (ILS) uses a neural network to dynamically determine the best load
shedding priority. The decision is made based on the actual operating condition of the system and location
of the disturbance. ILS provides faster execution of load shedding, as compared to conventional
frequency relays thus further reducing the load relief requirements.
Fast and reliable response

Optimize load preservation
Reduce downtime for critical loads
Training of neural network
User-defined load priority tables (LPT)
Load shedding scheme redundancy with back-up contingencies
Redundancy with backup contingencies
Simulate various disturbances and display the results
Robust calculation methods

Fast Corrective Control Based on a Neural Network

The load shedding operation of ETAP Real-Time is based on maintaining system stability (transient and
steady-state) with minimum load shed. Load shedding can be initiated by under frequency, over
frequency, circuit breaker status, reverse power, ground current, etc. In response to electrical or
mechanical disturbances in the system, load shedding will commence based on a user-defined Load
Priority Table (LPT) and a pre-constructed Stability Knowledge Base (SKB). SKB is constructed from a
number of transient stability studies for determining the stability limits of the system.

Overview GIS Systems
3.11 GIS Systems

The ETAP graphical user interface integrates GIS data and maps.
The GIS Data Exchange module enables you to visualize GIS maps
and sub-maps, as well as utilize the associated data to run power
system simulations.
This sophisticated data exchange module always keeps the latest GIS
data within ETAP, thereby providing consistent and viable results.
ETAP automatically updates the GIS database with analysis results
ensuring that the most current information is available for all users.
Click here to access GIS map files.

View GIS maps in ETAP
Display analysis results on GIS map
Synchronize GIS data to ETAP projects
GUI database mapping
Use GIS map tools
Map attributes of GIS to ETAP elements
Consistency checks for data synchronization
Display unlimited GIS presentations
Perform add, modify, or delete actions for data synchronization
View modifications and accept/reject actions via graphical user interface
Use map tools - zoom in, zoom out, full extent, pan, etc.
Full control of analysis results displayed on the GIS map

Overview Control Systems
3.12 Control Systems

ETAP seamlessly integrates the analysis of power and control circuits within one electrical analysis
program. The Control System Diagram (CSD) simulates the sequence-of-operation of control devices
such as solenoids, relays, controlled contacts, multi-sequence contacts, and actuators including inrush
conditions. CSD has the capability of determining pickup and dropout voltages, losses, and current flows
at any time instance as well as overall marginal and critical alerts. A large library of equipment enables
engineers to quickly model and simulate the action of relays associated with control interlocks after given
time delays.
Click here to access Control Systems

Diagram (CSD)

Simulation-of-operation sequence
Pickup and dropout voltage calculation
Automatic alerts
Burden and inrush modes
Controlled contacts
Integrated with battery discharge calculation
Detailed representation of control systems

Step-by-step simulation of control system operation sequence

Simulation of logic interlocks between controlling devices and contacts
Calculation of device operating voltage and current
Modeling of device burden and inrush modes
Alert violations for operating voltage, current, and voltage pickup
Built-in logic between control devices and contacts
Multiple sources to a control system
User's selectable modeling of protective device and contact resistance
Coil/solenoid resistance temperature adjustment
Cable/wire length adjustment
Battery discharge calculation using sequence-of-operation control diagrams
Study Cases
Saves solution control parameters for each scenario

Make changes to your system and re-run studies instantly
Conduct unlimited "what if" studies within one database
Option to update initial conditions, voltage profiles, and duty cycles
Elements
Extensive libraries
Control relay
Coil
Solenoid
Light
Generic load
Wire
Fuse
Circuit breaker
Single-throw and double-throw controlled contacts
Single-throw and double-throw switches
Macro-controlled contacts
Display Options
Dynamically adjust the display of calculation results

Customize display of device names and ratings
Customize display of equipment impedance
Customize font types, sizes, styles, and colors
Customize display of voltage drop calculation results directly on the one-line diagram
Reporting
Customize output reports using Crystal Reports

Generate output reports in any language
Voltage drops, losses, power flows, etc.

Sequence-of-operation action summary log

Input data, detailed voltage drop, and summaries
Flag device pickup/dropout voltage violations
Flag element current violations
State-of-the-art graphic display of results
Export outputs to your favorite word processing program
Export one-line diagrams including results to third party CAD systems

Overview System Dumpster
3.13 System Dumpster

The System Dumpster consists of a number of cells that contain elements that you have deleted or copied
from the one-line diagram or underground raceway systems. When you initially cut an element or group
of elements from the one-line diagram or an underground raceway system, ETAP places these in a
dumpster cell. These cells are kept within the System Dumpster until you explicitly purge them. When a
cell is purged from the System Dumpster, ETAP automatically deletes all elements in the cell from the
projects database. While an element or groups of elements are inside a dumpster cell, you may move or
paste copies of the contents of the cell back into the one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Therefore, the System Dumpster provides a convenient holding location for elements while you are
actively constructing a one-line diagram or an underground raceway system. The System Dumpster
presentation can be accessed using the System toolbar or the Project View.
Click here to access the System Dumpster.
What Happens to IDs When Elements are Copied or Cut into the System Dumpster?
Elements that are copied into the System Dumpster using the Copy command will have new IDs.
Elements that are copied into the System Dumpster using the Paste command will retain their original
IDs.
IDs of the elements purged from the System Dumpster are reusable.
What Happens to IDs when Elements are Pasted or Moved from the System Dumpster?
Elements that are cut and pasted from the System Dumpster will have new IDs.

Elements that are moved from the System Dumpster will retain their original IDs.
Purging Elements from a Project
When you purge a dumpster cell, elements within that cell are removed from the project database
completely and permanently.
All the dumpster cells (entries) may be removed from the project using the Purge All command.
Editing Within the System Dumpster
You cannot copy, size, rotate, or change symbols of elements inside the System Dumpster.
Elements may be relocated inside the System Dumpster.
You can hide or show protective devices (PDs) inside the System Dumpster.
Status of PDs and loads cannot be changed inside the System Dumpster.
Navigators within the editors are not functional for elements in the System Dumpster.
Elements cannot be reconnected inside the System Dumpster.
Controlled Dumpster
The Controlled Dumpster is a mechanism for locking information into the System Dumpster and is used
only when the ETAP project is password-enabled.
When ETAP cuts any elements from an underground raceway system (UGS) or a one-line diagram, the
dumpster cell to which the elements are assigned is designated as a controlled dumpster cell, unless the
element is newly created and has never been seen by the checker. When the dumpster cell is designated as
a controlled dumpster, the designation has no meaning unless the project is password-enabled.
Two INI file entries have been added to override the option of not making a cell a controlled cell when
the elements being cut and pasted into the System Dumpster are newly created:
[Etap PowerStation]
Relax UGS Dumpster Controls=1
Relax OLD Dumpster Controls=1
The default for both entries is 1, which does not allow the cell to become controlled if the element is
newly created. If you change the entry to 0, the cells become controlled if the elements you cut and paste
into them are newly created.
When passwords are enabled, the Controlled Dumpster is treated as a special entity with the following
attributes:
1. The controlled dumpster is displayed as a Controlled Dumpster by displaying the designation (C) or
(CC) as part of its title in the System Dumpster list window.
The designation C (Controlled Dumpster cell) is used to indicate that this is a controlled dumpster
cell that is not checked. These cells cannot be purged until they are checked.
The designation CC (checked Controlled Dumpster cell) is used to indicate that this is a
controlled dumpster cell that has been checked. A user with Project or Base editor permissions
can purge these cells.

2. The background color of a (C) Controlled Dumpster cell is set by Options (Preferences) command
line Controlled Dumpster Background Color (UGS Elements) or (One-Line Elements). The
background is colored only when the project setting has Project/Options/Display Changed Data in red
selected or the project user is a checker.
3. When moving a cell from a Controlled Dumpster cell to the one-line diagram or UGS, two behaviors
are exhibited:
If the Controlled Dumpster cell is a (C) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal. That is, no
special action is taken to flag elements as checked or unchecked.) The dumpster cell is then
destroyed as normal.
If the Controlled Dumpster cell is a (CC) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal but, in
addition, all property values are forced dirty and are flagged as unchecked (displayed in red in the
editors). This is the same as placing a new element on the one-line diagram or UGS. The
dumpster cell is then destroyed as normal.
4. When in Checker Mode, the Controlled Dumpster cells appear in the checkers list and can be
checked like any other element. The act of checking a Controlled Dumpster changes its designation
from (C) to (CC). This also sets the dumpster background color to normal.
5. A Project Editor (or Base Editor) cannot purge a Controlled Dumpster with the designation (C). The
Project Editor can purge a Controlled Dumpster with the designation (CC). The checker must check a
Controlled Dumpster cell before it can be purged.

Overview Library
3.14 Library
ETAP provides the library structure for the The ETAP library file is named ETAPLIB.LIB
following circuit elements: cable, cable fire and is located in the Lib folder. Using Library
protection (coating, stop, wrap), transmission Quick Pick you can view and retrieve library
line (ground wire, phase), control system data from the element editors in your project.
devices (button, coil, contact, and solenoid),
motor (nameplate, model, characteristic, and To edit or add library data, double-click the
load), low voltage circuit breaker, high voltage Libraries folder in Project View to expand the
circuit breaker, fuse, relay, trip devices (electro- folder. Then double-click the library of your
mechanical, motor circuit protector, solid state, choice to open its editor. From a library editor
thermal magnetic), overload heater, harmonic you can add, edit, copy, and delete library data.
sources, load interruption cost, device reliability, You can also access and edit library data from
and battery. the Library menu in the menu bar. You can
create an unlimited number of library headers
and data entries for each library.

Overview Library
You can also create new libraries by right-

clicking the Library folder in Project View and
selecting the Create command. Use the right-
click menu options to locate and open other
ETAP library files, or to Save, Save As, or
Purge the library currently in use.
To convert ETAP DOS library files, select the

Convert ETAP DOS Lib command from the
Library menu, select the library type to be
converted, and then locate and convert the
ETAP DOS library file.
Each ETAP project file can be attached

(associated with) one library only. To attach a
project file to a different library, use the Open
command from the Project View (right-click
Libraries) or from the Library menu in the menu
bar.
There are a number of libraries available for

many devices in ETAP. Each library is
customized for a specific device.

Overview Cable Systems
3.15 Cable Systems

Data integration between the one-line diagram and underground raceway system (UGS) includes
electrical properties, routing, and physical attributes of cable. For example, a cable contains data used for
load flow studies representing its electrical properties and bus connections. The cable also contains the
physical data and routing information associated with the raceways through which it is routed.
Cables in ETAP are categorized in three groups: One-Line, Equipment, and UGS
3.15.1 One-Line Cable

One-line cables, cables that are placed in the one-line diagram, appear as a graphical element in the one-
line diagram or System Dumpster presentations. This is a cable that you add to the one-line diagram as a
branch to connect buses. To route a one-line cable through a raceway, click the Existing Cable button on
the Edit toolbar in an underground raceway presentation, select a cable from the drop-down list, and then
place it inside a raceway conduit or location. You can also route a one-line cable through a raceway from
the Routing page in the Cable Editor.
Note: This action will attach (assign) the cable to the raceway but will not place it in a specific conduit or
location.
3.15.2 Equipment Cable

An equipment cable is a cable that is placed in an editor as a feeder for a load. Equipment cables are
attached to equipment such as motors and static loads as a feeder cables, but do not appear graphically as
branch elements on the one-line diagram. You add these cables to equipment from the Property editors
(Cable/Vd page) of static load and motors. To route an equipment cable through a raceway, do the
following:

1. Click the Existing Cable button on the Edit toolbar in an underground raceway presentation.
2. Select a cable from the drop-down list.
3. Drop the cable inside a raceway conduit or location.
You can also route an equipment cable through a raceway from the Routing page in the Cable Editor.
Note: This action will attach (assign) the cable to the raceway but will not place it in a specific conduit or
location.
3.15.3 Underground Raceway System (UGS) Cables

UGS cables are cables that are placed only in underground raceways. These cables are used exclusively
within the underground raceway system. They are routed through an underground duct bank or direct
buried raceway, but do not exist in the one-line diagram or as an equipment cable. Raceway cables can be
graphically placed in raceway conduits or locations by clicking the New Cable button on the Edit toolbar
in underground raceway presentations. To make it into a one-line cable, raceway cables can be
graphically dragged to a one-line diagram. However, a raceway cable cannot become an equipment cable.

Neher-McGrath method
IEC 287 method
Temperature analysis
Ampacity optimization
Automatic cable sizing
Transient temperature analysis
Multiple duct banks and direct buried cables
External heat sources
Graphical manipulation of raceways, cables, conduits, etc.
Drag and drop cables from one-line diagrams
Cable of different sizes in the same raceway
Separate phases into different conduits or locations
Unsymmetical positioning of raceways
Transient calculations use a dynamic thermal circuit model
Option to fix cable size and/or loading
Calculate thermal R, dielectric losses, Yc, Ys, etc.
User-defined armor cables
Unbalanced load factors
Multiple duct banks and direct buried cables
Place raceways in multiple cross-sections
Flexible Operation
Multiple raceways

Multiple external heat sources

Optimization of new cables in existing raceways
Cross-sectional analysis
Duct banks and direct buried raceways
Integrated with cables in one-line diagrams
Integrated with load flow results
Integrated with cable pulling analysis
Plotting
Transient temperatures calculations based on load profile

Option to display multiple cables simultaneously
Zoom to any detail level
Export data to Microsoft Excel
Line, bar, 3-D, and scatter plots
Customize text and axes
Reporting
Flag critical and marginal cable temperatures

Reports all physical and calculated data
Graphical display of raceway results
3.15.4 Cable Ampacity

ETAP calculates cable ampacity based on NEC and ICEA P.54-440 Methods for U/G duct banks, U/G
direct buried, A/G cable trays, A/G conduits, and air drops. The process is systematic and simple. For
example, for A/G trays, simply enter the tray height, width, and percent fill, ETAP calculates the derated
ampacity based on user specified ambient and conductor operating temperatures. For duct banks, specify
the number of rows, columns, ambient temperature, and soil thermals resistivity, ETAP calculates the
derated ampacity based on the hottest location not exceeding the maximum operating temperature.
3.15.5 Cable Sizing

ETAP provides optimal and alternative cable sizes based on voltage drop and load current requirements.
Load current can be based on the full-load amp of any element on the one-line diagram or as a user-
specified value.You can size cables (motor feeders, transformer cables, etc.) instantly based on the cable
derated ampacity for any type of installation (direct banks, trays, conduit in air, etc.).

Overview Project Toolbar
3.16 Project Toolbar
The Project toolbar contains buttons that allow you to perform shortcuts using many commonly used
commands in ETAP. All of these commands are described in detail in different parts of this manual (e.g.,
Section 5.2, One-Line Diagram Menu Bar and Chapter 6, One-Line Diagram GUI both describe the
graphical user interface of the one-line diagram).
Command Command Function

New Create a new project file.
Open Open an existing project file.
Save Save the project file.
Print Print active interface views like one-line diagrams or underground raceways.
Print Preview Preview the print layout of the active interface view.
Cut Cut the selected elements from an active interface view.
Copy Copy the selected elements from an active interface view.
Paste Paste elements from a dumpster cell to an active interface view.
Pan Pan the one-line diagram or underground raceway view using a mouse.
Zoom In Magnify the one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Zoom Out Reduce the one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Back Undo zoom level for the one-line diagram.
Forward Redo the zoom level for the one-line diagram.
Zoom to Fit Page Resize the one-line diagram to fit the window.
Undo Undo previous task on the one-line diagram excluding removing an element.
Redo Redo a task that was undone.
Text Box Click to place a textbox on an active interface view.
Show Grid Lines Display the grid lines on the one-line diagram.
Check Circuit Continuity Check the system continuity for non-energized elements.
Theme Editor Customizes the look of the One Line Diagram presentations.
Get Template Select pre-developed one-line diagrams to insert.
Add OLV Template Create and save templates to the template library.
Hyperlinks Click to add a hyperlink to a device or one-line diagram.
Power Calculator Activate Power Calculator.
Find Click to find a device on the one-line diagram.
Help Point to a specific area to learn more about ETAP.

New
Click the New tool to start a new project. This opens the
Create New Project File dialog box, as shown below.
From the dialog box, enter a project file name with a maximum of 32 characters that is suitable for your
project. For the purpose of this manual, name the new project Test and click OK. This will open the User
Information dialog box. For more details on user information, see Chapter 5, User Access Management.
User Information Dialog Box
When you create a new project, ETAP automatically gives you all access level privileges. If you click on
OK and ETAP logs you on as a Project Editor (i.e., you have full access to all editors including Base
Data, Revision Data, Libraries, etc.), administrative functions such as adding and deleting users to the
project are not available to a Project Editor. To access these functions, you must log on as Admin.
For projects on which security is not an issue or if you are a single user of ETAP, we recommend that you
do not require a password for projects and that you give yourself full access privileges. You can change
the password requirement at any time.
If you forget your User Name or your password, log on as Admin. Type password as the password. We
recommend that you do not change the password for Admin unless you record it for later use. If you
forget your User Name or your password, this may be the only way you can access this project.
Enter your User Name (maximum 20 characters) in the User Name field. User Name is a mandatory field.
For the purpose of this manual, enter OTI and then click on OK. ETAP will create a one-line diagram
presentation named OLV1. You can start adding elements and editing the one-line diagram. Each time a

new project is created, the presentation displayed in the window will be named OLV1 (OLV1 is the
default name for the one-line diagram presentation). You can change the name of the one-line diagram
presentation at any time.
Open
You can open an existing (previously saved) project file by clicking on the Open toolbar. If you are
editing a project and you want to open a previously saved project, you will be prompted to save the
current project.
In order to open a previously saved project while you are editing a project, the currently opened project
must be in Edit or Study Mode. Note: you CANNOT save or close a project when you are in Revision
Data (i.e., you must first change to Base Data).
A file named Example.OTI is included in the ETAP installation program. To open this file, click on Open
toolbar. This will open the Open Project File dialog box, as shown here.
Open Project File Dialog Box
The file Example.OTI is located in the folder in the ETAPS\PowerStn directory called Example. Select
the file and click on Open.
The Example file contains a sample project complete with a one-line diagram and sample values entered
into the component editors. Performing the actions described in the remainder of this user guide will help
you to become familiar with ETAP.
Look in
Select a network, drive, and directory, where the ETAP project file that you want to open is located.
File Name
Type or select the file name you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List
Files of Type box.

Files of Type
ETAP project files have an extension of .OTI.
Save
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or a Study Mode. If you have logged on as a
Project Editor or Base Editor, you CANNOT save a project while the project is in a revision level of data.
Saving a project can be done by clicking the Save tool.
Print
The Print tool will print the active interface views to your default printer.
To access the print options, open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu on the menu
bar.
Print Preview
Click the Print Preview tool to preview the print layout of the active interface view.
There are a variety of tools available to modify the print layout in the Print Preview dialog box.
Print Preview Dialog Box
Close
Click on this button to save the settings and layout, close, and return to the one-line diagram.
Print
Click on this button to bring up the Print Dialog box to start a print job.
Print Setup

Click on this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to select
the destination printer and its connection.
Print Options
Click on this button to display the Print Options dialog box.
Next/Previous Page
If the extent of a one-line diagram exceeds one page you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next/Previous Page buttons.
Toggle Display
Click on this button to toggle between a preview of one or two pages at once.
Zoom In/Out View

Zoom In/Out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your one-line diagram prior to
printing. Zoom In/Out View does not affect the print results.
Fit to Page
Fit the extent of the one-line diagram into the selected page size and orientation.
Zoom In/Out
Zooms in/out of the one-line diagram so that the size of the diagram changes with respect to the page size.
Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels in the Print
Preview are independent of zoom levels in the one-line diagram. The default magnification level is 10
units. You can enter a specific magnification factor in the field provided.
Scroll
Scroll the one-line diagram to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll functions are provided for centering and/or adjusting the location of the one-line
diagram with respect to the selected paper size for this one-line diagram. Once you print or close Print
Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of
scrolling in the one-line diagram. The default scroll factor is 10 units. However, you can specify the scroll
length in the fields provided.
Cut
The Cut tool will delete selected elements from the one-line diagram and place them in the Dumpster.
You can cut elements in Edit Mode only.
Copy
The Copy tool will copy selected elements from the one-line diagram and place them in a Dumpster with
new ID Names while all other data and properties are preserved. You can copy elements in Edit Mode
only.
Paste
To paste an element or a group of elements from the Dumpster, select a cell from the Dumpster and
activate the view (one-line diagram or underground raceway) you want the element to be pasted into, then
click the Paste tool.

If more than one element is pasted, the pasted one-line diagram will be grouped to facilitate dragging the
one-line diagram to the desired location. To ungroup the one line diagram, right-click on the pasted
elements and select ungroup from the menu.
You can paste elements in Edit Mode only. When an element is pasted from the Dumpster, ETAP assigns
a new ID to it while all other data and properties are preserved.
Pan
Use the Pan tool to move the project around in the window without changing the scale of the view. Click
the Pan tool and drag the project to the desired view. Press the Esc key to release the Zoom In tool.
Zoom In
The are several ways to use the Zoom In tool to enlarge the view of your project.
Click the Zoom In tool once and click the location on the project where you want to magnify the
view. The view magnifies once and the tool is released.
Double-click the Zoom In tool to magnify your view many times. Press the Esc key to release the
Zoom In tool.
Click the Zoom In tool and drag an area on your project to magnify.
Zoom Out
Click the Zoom Out tool to reduce the view of your project. Continue to click the Zoom Out tool to the
desired reduced view.
Back
Click on the Back button to return to the previous Zoom level. The button will be grayed when you first
open the project or you have reached the first zoom level.
Forward
Click on the Forward button to return to the next Zoom level. The button will be grayed out when you
first open the project or you have reached the last Zoom level.
Zoom to Fit Page

Use the Zoom to Fit Page tool to view the entire project in the window. If all the elements will not fit
within the window, the window will be set to maximum reduction with the view located to the windows
upper left-hand corner.
You can select an area of the one-line diagram or select elements by holding down the Control button and
clicking on the element(s), then click the Zoom to Fit tool to fit only the selected elements to the window.
Undo
Undo hiding an element or undo the movement of an element. Also undo moving, adding or deleting a
connection. You may not use Undo to remove an element.
Redo

When undo is used, graphical Redo allows user to redo undone tasks.
Text Box
Click and move to the OLV, UGS, or Star presentation to drop a text box. Double click on the text box
to add text or fields from the editors to display in this box.
Show Grid Lines

Click on the Show Grid Lines tool to display grid lines on the one-line diagram. The grid is zoom-
dependent and will be enlarged or reduced proportionately with the elements when they are enlarged or
reduced. The grid size can be changed in the Edit Display Options.
Check Circuit Continuity

Use the Check Circuit Continuity tool to activate or de-activate this feature. If the Continuity Check is on,
ETAP determines which element in a presentation is energized. An energized element is an element,
which is connected by an uninterrupted path to a swing source (generator or utility). Elements, which are
not energized, are displayed in gray (grayed out) on your screen.
Out of Service elements are displayed grayed out if the Continuity Check is on, otherwise only their
annotations are displayed in gray. Motors and loads with Spare status are always shown with gray
annotations.
ETAP determines whether every branch in your system is energized or hot. An energized branch has an
uninterrupted path from an energized bus to another bus. A branch that is not connected to one energized
bus is considered de-energized. A branch is considered hot if it has one uninterrupted path to an energized
bus but its other terminal is not connected to another bus. When you run studies only energized buses,
branches, and loads are considered. De-energized elements, along with their connections, can be printed
in gray, black, or not printed at all. You can choose to print de-energized elements from Print Options.
Themes
Use this tool to customiza the look of the One Line Diagram presentations. In the Theme Editor you
create customized themes and change element color squemes, annotations colors, background, grid color,
and grid size. You can also change the connectors wire type and colloe for single phase systems. Also
create customized themes based on voltage ratings.
Get Template
Select pre-developed one-line diagrams to insert into the presentation. Template files can be created
manually using the Add to OLV Templates icon or can be taken from the ETAP default templates. The
template files are created in a .xml format and are saved under the template folder located in the main
ETAP directory. Select any .xml template file in the folder and place the one-line diagram template in the
presentation. Select the template using the exact template IDs and/or properties or the default IDs and/or
properties. Templates are saved in the directory and therefore can be added to any project.
Add to Template
After creating a one-line diagram, the user can save the whole one-line or any section of the one-line
diagram to a template. The template will contain all electrical properties and IDs for the elements
included. The user can use this template in any project created. The saved template will save as a .xml
file.

Hyperlinks
Hyperlinks give you the flexibility of linking any document or web page to the ETAP project. Datasheets,
tables, pictures, manufacturer web pages, maintenance schedules, and much more information can be
linked directly to specific devices on the one-line diagram, raceways system, or to different presentations.
Click on the Hyperlinks tool. Drag-and-drop the hyperlink on any device on the one-line diagram,
raceway, or presentation including composite motors and networks.
Once you drop the hyperlink, the Hyperlinks Editor opens.
Enter the description, address, and tool tip.
Click on the Add button. If you want to add more hyperlinks, enter the information again and click the
add button to add the hyperlink to the list. When you complete entering the Hyperlinks, click on the OK
button.
If you placed the hyperlinks on the presentation background, the description text is displayed on the
diagram in black and the tool tip is displayed when you place your mouse cursor over the link. Your
cursor changes when you are over a hyperlink.
If you placed the hyperlink on a device, the tool tip is added to the device tool tip. In the image below, the
tool tip was entered as "Energy Cost Documents."
Using Hyperlinks
To activate a hyperlink placed on the presentation background, double-click on the hyperlink. To activate
a device hyperlink(s), right-click on the device and select the hyperlink(s). A menu is displayed listing the
hyperlinks for the selected device.
Editing\Removing Hyperlinks
To edit or remove a hyperlink, you need to access the Hyperlink Editor. To access the Hyperlink Editor,
click on the Hyperlink tool and drop it on the device you want the link to be edited\removed from or on
the link text on the presentation background.
To edit a hyperlink, click on the hyperlink in the list. The address, description, and tool tip appear on the
editor. Edit the necessary information and then click on the Add button. The hyperlink is edited.
To remove a hyperlink, select the hyperlink from the hyperlink list and click on the Delete button. The
hyperlink is removed.
Power Calculator
The Power Calculator relates MW, Mvar, MVA, kV, Amps, and %PF together for 3-phase systems and
displays them in either kVA or MVA units. You have the option to keep one of the four variables (MVA,
MW, Mvar, or %PF) fixed and calculate the rest.

Find
Use the Find tool to locate a device on the one-line diagram. Click on the Find tool and enter the ID of an
element to be found.
Help
Click on the Help tool and click any where on the screen to access help about the item you clicked on.
Double-click on the Help tool to access the ETAP Help files.

Overview Study Case Toolbar
3.17 Study Case Toolbar

This toolbar is displayed automatically when you are in one of the study modes. The Study Case toolbar
allows you to control and manage the study solution parameters and output reports.
New Study Case

Click this button to create new study cases. You can create unlimited study cases for each type of
analysis. New study cases can either be copied from a default study case or copied from any other
existing study case.
Study Case
The Study Case drop-down list lets you select a previously created study case name to display. The
solution parameters specified in the displayed study case are used when you run a new study. To create a
new study case, select Study Cases from the Project View and right-click the desired study case type such
as load flow, short-circuit, motor starting, transient stability, or underground raceway systems.
Edit Study Case

Click the Edit Study Case button to edit the selected study case. Study Case Editors include Load Flow,
Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, Transient Stability, and underground Raceway System, for example.
Output Report
The Output Report drop-down list lets you select a previously created output report and display it. When
you run a study, the displayed file name will be used for the output report and plot. To create a new file
name for your reports, select Prompt from the Output Report drop-down list and perform a study. ETAP
will prompt you to enter a new file name for the output report and plots.
List Output Reports

Click this button to list all ETAP output reports. From this drop-down list, you can preview all previously
created output reports, which can be in the Crystal Reports format or text reports.
Report Format
From this drop-down list, select a complete report or a particular part of a complete report to view.
View Report Manager

Click the View Report Manager button to display the contents of the current output file. Crystal Reports
format is used to browse and print your customized report.

Overview Message Log
3.18 Message Log

ETAP uses the message log to record activities when you are working with your ETAP project. For
example, ETAP records an entry whenever you open or close a project. In addition, ETAP records entries
when you delete OLE objects or update OLE links and whenever some internal errors are encountered.
The majority of use for the message log is reserved for the online operations (ETAP Real-Time Systems).
Message Logger
The display size of the message log can be changed by pulling the top end up or down. For most
applications you can minimize the display size of the message log to zero.
The operation of the message log is completely transparent. ETAP automatically maintains the log. You
may, however, customize the log by setting the maximum number of entries that ETAP can display in the
message log at any given time. Additionally, you may set the size of the text logs generated by ETAP. To
customize the message log, see Section 1.6, INI File. The default entries for MsgLog Size and Max
Display Msgs are:
MsgLog Size=128
Max Display Msgs=255

Overview Tutorial
3.19 Tutorial
This tutorial provides a brief overview of the basic operation of the ETAP program. Once you finish this
tutorial, you will be familiar with some the key features and capabilities of the program and the various
modules available for performing power system analysis.
Starting ETAP
1. Start ETAP by double-clicking the icon on your desktop.
Opening the Example Project File

Follow these steps to open the EXAMPLE project file:
1. Type your User Name in the Logon Editor, and select the Project Editor option in the Select
Access Level Editor.
As previously mentioned, ETAP organizes all work as projects. Each project provides all the necessary
tools and support for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. Projects consist of electrical
systems that require unique electrical components and interconnections. The Example project includes a
one-line diagram of an electrical system. Notice the toolbars on the top and the right-hand side of the one-
line diagram.
One-Line Diagram and Editors

ETAP provides a fully graphical user interface for constructing your one-line diagram. There are many
command options in the interface, including the following:
Graphically add, delete, relocate, and connect elements.

Zoom in or out.
Display grid off or on.
Change element size and orientation.
Change symbols.
Hide or show protective devices.

Overview Tutorial
Enter properties.
Set operating status.
The ETAP one-line diagram is a one-line representation of a power system. The one-line diagram is the
starting point for all studies. You can graphically construct your electrical system by connecting the
buses, branches, motors, generators, and protective devices in any order from the one-line diagrams Edit
toolbar. You can connect the elements to the buses graphically or from their editors. You can double-click
elements to open their editors and edit the engineering properties, such as ratings, settings, and loading,
connections.

Overview Tutorial
Editors
1. Double-click the Power Grid (Utility) symbol on the one-line diagram and view the Utility
Editor. This is where you enter data for the utility machine model.
2. Select different pages of this editor and look over the type of information that you can provide to
model a utility machine.
3. Click OK and close the editor.
4. Double-click other elements and explore their editors. Each available element has a customized
editor.
5. Double-click the synchronous motor Syn1 and view its editor. This is where you enter data used
for synchronous motor models.

Overview Tutorial
Editors are designed so that you can enter a minimum amount of information and still be able to run
different studies. Voltage and HP data are all you need to perform most studies. If you are interested in
modeling a motor dynamically for motor acceleration or transient stability studies, you need to enter more
detailed information such as the motor model, inertia, and load model.
An exercise that illustrates this point is included at the end of this tutorial.
6. Click OK and close the editor.

Overview Tutorial
Composite Networks
A composite network is an aggregate of all components in a subsystem, since it can contain buses,
branches, loads, sources, and even other composite networks or composite motors. You can nest your
subsystems to an unlimited number of layers. This allows you to construct systems and nest elements by
their voltage levels, by physical layout, by the geometrical requirements of elements, by study
requirements, by relays and control device requirements, by logical layout of elements, etc. You have full
control over how the system should be nested.
1. Double-click the composite network Sub3 Net. The Sub3 Net view, which is a one-line diagram
nested inside the main one-line diagram, is displayed.
2. To change the number of pins, right-click Sub3 Net and select Pins.

Overview Tutorial
Composite networks can have 4, 8, 12, 16, or 20 external connection points (pins). These include
the top pin (~Top1), left pins (~Left1 to ~Left9), right pins (~Rt1 to ~Rt9), and bottom pin
(~Bot1).
3. Right-click the background of the composite network Sub3 Net to hide or show unconnected
pins.
Composite Network Sub3 Net with 8 Pins
The pins for the composite motors can be connected to any bus, branch, load, or protective device. Once a
pin is connected internally or externally to an element, it becomes a proxy for that element and all
connection rules for the element apply to the connected pin. To illustrate this, both AC and DC elements
are added to Sub3 Net and are displayed here.

Overview Tutorial
The number of levels where you can nest composite networks inside of other composite networks is
unlimited. There is no limitation on the number of elements that you can include inside a composite
network. The user interface characteristics of composite networks are the same as the one-line diagram
where you can include both AC and DC elements.
Composite Motors
1. Double-click the composite motor Comp Mtr1. The Comp Mtr1 view, which is a one-line
diagram nested inside the main one-line diagram, appears.
Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors in the system. The elements that you can
include inside a composite motor are:
AC Composite Motor DC Composite Motor

Induction Motor DC Motor
Synchronous Motor DC Lumped Load
Lumped Load DC Static Load
Static Load DC Elementary Diagram
MOV DC Composite Motor
Composite Motor DC Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker (LV and HV) DC Fuse
Fuse
Contactor
Switch
Instrument Transformers
Relays
You can nest composite motors inside each other for an unlimited number of levels.

Overview Tutorial
One-Line Diagram Menu
The One-Line Diagram menu bar above is displayed when a one-line diagram is active. The One-Line
Diagram menu bar contains a list of menus, each of which contain a drop-down list of commands. Some
of the menu commands also have pulldown submenus (an arrow pointing to the right denotes a submenu).
For example, you can select Project, point to Settings, then select the Data Type command.
Project Toolbar
The Project toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts for many of the commonly used commands in
ETAP.
Mode Toolbar
In general, ETAP has three modes of operation: Edit, AC Study, and DC Study. The AC Study Mode
consists of the following:
Balanced Load Flow

Unbalanced Load Flow
Short-Circuit
Motor Starting
Harmonics
Transient Stability
Protective Device Coordination (ETAP Star)
Optimal Load Flow
Reliability Analysis
The DC Study mode consists of DC Load Flow, DC Short-Circuit, and Battery Sizing Analysis.

Overview Tutorial
Edit Mode
Edit Mode enables you to build your one-line diagram, change system connections, edit engineering
properties, save your project, and generate schedule reports in Crystal Reports formats. The Edit toolbars
for both AC and DC elements will be displayed to the right side of the ETAP window when this mode is
active.
To Add Elements on the One-Line Diagram View
1. Click any of the elements on the AC Edit or DC Edit toolbars. The mouse pointer changes to the
element button icon.
2. On the one-line view, move the pointer to the desired location and click. The element is added to
the one-line view.
To Connect Elements in the One-Line View

For this example, add a bus and a transformer to the one-line view by doing the following:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the top pin of the transformer so that a red square is displayed.
2. Left-click and drag the transformer to the bus so that the bus is displayed red.
3. Release the mouse button. The connection is completed.

Overview Tutorial
Study Modes
Study Modes allow you to create and modify study cases, perform system analysis, and view output
reports and plots. When a study mode is active (selected), the Study toolbar for the selected study is
displayed on the right side of the ETAP window.
You can run studies, transfer data, and change display options by clicking the buttons on the Study
toolbar. As an example, Load Flow Analysis Mode is described next.
Working in Load Flow Analysis Mode
1. Go to Load Flow Mode by clicking the Load Flow Analysis button on the Mode toolbar.
Note: The Load Flow toolbar is now displayed on the right side of the ETAP. Also, the top
toolbar becomes the Study Case toolbar.
2. Click the Run Load Flow button on the Load Flow toolbar.
The study results will be displayed on the one-line diagram.
3. Review the calculation results and familiarize yourself with the type of
information displayed on your one-line diagram.
4. Click the Display Options button and explore the variety of options available for the displayed
results.
5. Click the Alert button to display critical and marginal limit violations for the selected output
report.
6. Click the Report Manager button to view or print any part of the output report.

Overview Tutorial
7. Click the Edit Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar and study the solution parameters and
alert settings available for load flow analysis.

Overview Tutorial
After you run load flow, results are displayed on the one-line diagram.
Operating
Bus Voltage
Capacity
Exceeded
Motor
Terminal
Voltage
Marginal
UnderVoltage Bus
(color defined by user)

Overview Tutorial
ETAP Program Tutorial

Complete this tutorial to familiarize yourself with how the program works. In this tutorial, you will add a
new 13.2 kV induction motor to the system and run a Load Flow study. This tutorial also shows the
minimum data required to perform studies for a motor.
1. Click the Edit Mode button of the Mode toolbar.
2. Add an induction motor to the one-line diagram.
3. Connect the motor to the bus Sub2B.
4. Double-click the motor. The motors editor is displayed.
5. Go to the Nameplate page of the Motor Editor.
Note: The motor voltage is automatically set to 13.2 kV since it was connected to a 13.8 kV bus.
You can change the voltage.
6. Enter 2000 in the HP text box and click in any other text box. The program automatically enters
typical nameplate data for the specified motor size.

Overview Tutorial
7. Click OK.
8. On the Mode toolbar, click the Load Flow Analysis button. ETAP changes to Load Flow Mode.

Overview Tutorial
9. On the Load Flow toolbar, click the Run Load Flow button.
Note: The study case (solution parameters) for this run is LF 100A and the output report file name is
LF100RPT.
10. Compare the results displayed below for before and after Mtr2 is added. In ETAP, use the Display
Options to change the display.

Overview Tutorial
Energized Branch Required for System calculation

In ETAP, all system calculations, such as Load Flow, Short-Circuit, and Motor Starting, require to set up
the system Y matrix. In order to set up this matrix, the energized system must include at least one branch.
A branch in ETAP is a two-terminal or three-terminal element that has non-zero impedance values, such
as a cable, line, two-winding transformer, and three-winding transformer, etc. A tie circuit breaker is not
considered as a branch since it has zero impedance value.
Considering the system given in Figure 1 below, it has two buses but no branches. CB-1 is a tie
circuit branch with zero impedance value. When you run the Load Flow calculation in ETAP, it
will give you a message indicating the system has no energized branches.
Figure 1. System without Energized Branch
In case you need to perform system calculations on a system that has no energized branches, you
can add a dummy branch and a dummy bus to the system as shown in Figure 2. ETAP will then
carry out system studies on the system. Please note that addition of this dummy branch does not
affect calculations and it will provide the same results as your original system.

Overview Tutorial
Figure 2. System with An Energized Dummy Branch

Chapter 4
Options (Preferences)
ETAP contains initialization files (INI files) that are used to set various preferences and parameters for
the local PC where the software resides. These changes can be as simple as defining a favorite project to
open automatically, or as varied as selecting Arc Flash analysis results to be also sent to MS Excel format.
ETAP automatically maintains a PSGRID.INI and an ETAPS.INI file in your application folder (ETAP
700 or current version). Normally, you would not need to make any changes in this file. However, you
may want to manipulate certain fields to customize ETAPs behavior.

Preferences Options (Preferences) Editor
4.1 Options (Preferences) Editor

Entries in ETAPS.INI can be changed by using the Options (Preferences) Editor. The advantage of using
this interface is that the majority of the changes are applied to ETAP without requiring the software to
restart.
This editor can be accessed from the Tools Menu within the ETAP environment as shown below.

Sorting
By default the entries for ETAPS.INI are shown in a categorized view based on the analysis module, one-
line diagram, printing or any other functionality.
If the name of the entry is known, then you may also search for it alphabetically by sorting the list of INI
entries as shown below.
Description
Click on the INI entry to view a brief description as well as ranges and default values for that field.

The following categories have been included to allow quicker access to a particular entry.
CATEGORY NAME DESCRIPTION

Battery Sizing / Discharge This group contains INI entries that affect Battery
Sizing and Discharge calculation
Control Circuit Diagram This group contains INI entries that affect Control
Circuit Diagram Load Flow calculation
ETAP Application This group contains INI entries that control the
ETAP application
Harmonic Analysis This group contains INI entries that affect
Harmonic Load Flow calculations
Load Flow This group contains INI entries that affect Load
Flow calculations
Motor Starting This group contains INI entries that affect Motor
Starting calculations
One-Line This group contains INI entries that change the
behavior of the ETAP one-line diagram
Optimal Capacitor This group contains INI entries that affect Optimal
Placement Capacitor Placement calculations
Optimal Power Flow This group contains INI entries that affect Optimal
Power Flow calculations
Printing / Plotting This group contains INI entries that changes the
print style of the ETAP one-line diagram
Project Database This group contains INI entries that sets how ETAP
handles ODBC compliant databases
Real-Time This group contains entries that are used when
ETAP is running in Real-Time Mode
Reliability This group contains INI entries that affect
Reliability Assessment calculations
Short Circuit This group contains INI entries that affect ANSI
and IEC Short-Circuit calculations
Star This group contains INI entries that affect display
and behavior of ETAP Star and ARTTS
Transient Stability This group contains INI entries that affect Transient
Stability calculations
UGS This group contains INI entries that affect
Underground Raceway System calculations
Unbalanced Load Flow This group contains INI entries that affect
Unbalanced Load Flow calculations
If you are manually editing the ETAPS.INI file, you will notice that there are four sections in this file
[ETAP], [AppVariables], [Colors] and [Recent File List]. You are permitted make entries in three of
these sections [ETAP], [AppVariables], and [Colors]. The allowable entries below are listed by section.
Default values for the indicated entries are shown below. You will NOT find all of these entries in your
INI file since ETAP automatically use the default values without making an entry in the INI file.

Preferences PSGRID.INI
4.2 PSGRID.INI
This initialization file referred to Ground Grid Systems. If a Ground Grid is created within ETAP, the
PSGRID.INI file will be automatically created.
The first entry in the INI file is:
[Grid]
Initialized=1
If this entry is set to 1, then ETAP recognizes that Ground Grid Systems have been activated on the local
PC.
FEM Timeout=1800
FEM Timeout indicates the maximum time allowed (in seconds) for a FEM calculation to be completed.
Minimum allowable time is 0. Maximum allowable time is 86400 (twenty four hours). The default
setting allows 30 minutes.
IEEE Timeout=60
IEEE Timeout indicates the maximum time allowed (in seconds) for an IEEE calculation to be completed.
Minimum allowable time is 0. Maximum allowable time is 86400 (twenty four hours). The default
setting allows 60 seconds.

Preferences OTIGraph.INI
4.3 OTIGraph.INI
The default Star View Plot Options settings (Defaults Plot Options Star View) are saved in the
OTIGraph.INI file. The location of OTIGraph.INI file can be specified in Options (Preferences) editor
(Tools Options) by setting ETAP Star TCC Plot Options Path located in ETAP Application
category. The location of the INI file can be set to App, User, Common, or Local.
App
Select App to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in ETAP application folder (i.e. ETAP 7.0.0 or
current version). The ETAP application folder is set the path chosen during installation.
User
Select User to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Application Data folder. For example, if a
user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John
Smith\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Common
Select Common to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in All Users Application Data folder. The
OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0
(or current version).
Local
Select Local to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Local Settings Application Data
folder. For example, if a user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and
Settings\John Smith\Local Settings\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Application Data and Local Settings are hidden folders. Windows folder options should be set
accordingly to view these folders and the OTIGraph.INI file

Changing the OTIGraph.INI file location in Options (Preferences) editor requires ETAP to be restarted
for the changes to take effect. When ETAP application is restarted, a new OTIGraph.INI file, with
default ETAP settings (factory settings) is created in the new location (if it does not already exist).
Note: In order to use your existing/customized Star View Plot Option defaults, it is necessary to manually
copy the OTIGraph.INI file from the old location to the new location.
For more details on the default Star View Plot options settings, refer Chapter 17 Star View.

Preferences Themes
4.4 Themes (OTH file)

The Theme Manager allows (Project Toolbar) changing color and line styles for devices, device
connectors and one-line background. New themes created are saved as .OTH files (i.e. Theme1.oth). The
location of theme files can be specified in Options (Preferences) editor (Tools Options) by setting
Theme File Location located in ETAP Application category. The location of the OTH file can be set to
App, User, Common, or Local.
App
Select App to access the theme files located in ETAP application folder (i.e. ETAP 7.0.0 or current
version). The ETAP application folder is set the path chosen during installation.
User
Select User to access the theme files located in users Application Data folder. For example, if a user
logs in as John Smith, the theme files are saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John Smith\Application
Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Common
Select Common to access the theme files located in All Users Application Data folder. The theme
files are saved in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current
version).
Local
Select Local to access the theme files located in users Local Settings Application Data folder. For
example, if a user logs in as John Smith, the theme files are saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John
Smith\Local Settings\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Application Data and Local Settings are hidden

folders. Windows folder options should be set
accordingly to view these folders and the theme
files.
Changing the theme file location in Options

(Preferences) editor requires ETAP to be restarted
for the changes to take effect. Note: In order to
use your existing/customized themes, it is
necessary to manually copy the theme files from
the old location to the new location.
For more details on the Theme Manager settings,

refer Chapter 9 One-Line Diagram GUI.
Notes:
1. The location of mslog.txt and psrept.log files can also be set in the Options (Preferences)
editor to App, User, Common or Local as explained above for OTIGrpah.INI and Themes.

Preferences Theme
2. If older versions of ETAP do not exist (new installation of ETAP 7.0 or current version), the
default locations for Themes, OTIGraph.ini, Msglog.txt and Psrept.log files set in the ETAP
Preferences editor are:
Themes - App
OTIGraph - User
Msglog.txt - User
Psrept.log - User
3. If one or more versions of ETAP exist (upgrade to ETAP 7.0 or current version), the default
locations for Themes, OTIGraph.ini, Msglog.txt and Psrept.log files set in the ETAP Preferences
editor are:
Themes - App
OTIGraph - App
Msglog.txt - User
Psrept.log - User

Preferences ETAPS.INI
4.5 ETAPS.INI
[ETAP PowerStation]
AllowProjectRename=1
A default value of 1 indicates automatic renaming of project files when they are copied outside of ETAP.
ArcFlashMaxDuration=2
This entry specifies the number of plotted points in the Arc-Flash Analysis Tabulated Report. The default
value is 2 (120 Cycles) which equals 2 sec @ 60 Hz and 2.4 sec @ 50 Hz. Two extra points for every
second past the default value will be added. The maximum value is 999 seconds.
AutoRecover=1
This entry creates a temporary entry in each subsequent project database that is opened by your local PC.
This entry tells ETAP that there is an unregistered One-Line-Element. This allows ETAP to deal with the
element. Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to report the error and shut down the application rather
than dealing with the unregistered One-Line-Element.
AverageSourceBranchNumber=10
This entry indicates the average source contributing branches on a faulted bus. A source contributing
branch contains short-circuit current from a power grid or a synchronous machine. The range for this
entry is 5 999.
Calc3CCableG1ByIECMethod=1
When the NeherMcGrath Method is selected in the Cable Derating Study Case for UGS calculations,
this entry indicates to ETAP to use the same method specified in IEC 60287 to calculate the geometric
factor G1 for insulation thermal resistance calculation for 3/C cable.
ConversionY=40
ConversionX=20
Shown above are the conversion default factors for setting element layout in a one-line diagram when
converting ETAP DOS database files into ETAP. Reduction of the Conversion Y value results in a
vertically compressed bus distance. Reducing the Conversion X value results in horizontally compressed
bus distances.
CzNetPins=4
This controls the number of pins initially assigned to a new-style composite network when the network is
newly created. Valid values are 4-20.
DrawDown=1
DrawLeftRight=1
DrawArrow=1
These values indicate the default values for the position of the branch flows (power and current) and
arrows on the one-line diagram. DSN Version=2
ETAP maintains and updates the ODBC System Data Source Name version for 'otiaccess' automatically.
This value will be set to 2 during the installation of ETAP. Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to

create an ODBC System Data Source 'otiaccess' during startup. Setting the value to 1 will cause ETAP to
reconfigure the ODBC System Data Source 'otiaccess'.
Dump OL IncX=15
Dump OL IncY=15
Dump OL MaxX=3000
When a database audit is performed, ETAP may recover orphaned database items to a Dumpster cell.
The recovered one-line diagram elements are placed in rows with Dump OL IncX distance apart up to a
maximum width of Dump OL MaxX with Dump OL IncY distance between the rows, i.e., Dump OL
IncX controls the X-interval, Dump OL IncY controls the Y-interval, and Dump OL MaxX is the
maximum X of successive elements recovered to the Dumpster. For example, given the default values
(above), ETAP would place the first element at X=15, Y=15; the second at X=30, Y=15, etc., until the
3000 logical units is encountered. At that point, the next elements would be placed at X=15, Y=30, and
next at X=30, Y=30, etc.
Dump UGS IncX=20

Dump UGS IncY=20
Dump UGS MaxX=3000
When a database audit is performed, ETAP may recover orphaned database items to a Dumpster cell.
The recovered UGS elements are placed in rows with Dump UGS IncX distance apart up to a maximum
width of Dump UGS MaxXwith Dump UGS IncY distance between the rows, i.e., Dump UGS IncX
controls the X-interval, Dump UGS IncY controls the Y-interval, and Dump UGS MaxXis the maximum
X of successive elements recovered to the Dumpster. For example, given the default values (above),
ETAP would place the first element at X=20, Y=20; the second at X=40, Y=20, etc., until the 3000
logical units is encountered. At that point, the next elements would be placed at X=20, Y=40, next at
X=40, Y=40, etc.
EstimateAtFixedAmp=1
This entry is used to interpolate points from battery characteristic curves for battery sizing and discharge
calculations. If this entry is set to 1, the interpolation will be done at a fixed amp value; otherwise, it is
done at fixed AH or Time depending the value of UseAH_AmpCurve entry also in the INI file.
IncludeFLAInSCMaxThrough=1
This entry indicates to the Short-Circuit program to include (or exclude) the rated Full Load Amps (FLA)
of induction/synchronous machines in the calculation of the maximum through short-circuit current duty
(momentary or interrupting) of protective devices directly connected to those machines. If this entry is set
to 0, the FLA will not be considered (this includes generator circuit breakers). This entry only applies for
ANSI Short-Circuit calculations (IEC Short-Circuit does not consider the FLA and thus is not affected by
this option).
Initialized=1
If this entry is set to 1, then ETAP has been activated on your local PC.
LoadBusKVMatch=40
LoadBusKVMatch is the percent deviation allowed between load voltages and the bus kV to which the
load is attached. The allowable range is 1 to 99.
MaxBusAngMismatch=1
This entry defines the maximum angle mismatch at a bus. When the transformer angle shift is considered
in a calculation, it can cause angle mismatch in a looped system if angle shifts of transformers involved in

a loop are not compatible, which will cause circulating power flow in the loop. ETAP identifies such a
situation and informs the user before a system study. The value defined by this entry is used as the
threshold for checking bus angle mismatch. The allowable range is 0 to 360.
MaxBusIniAngDiff=10
This entry defines the maximum difference between the bus initial voltage angle from the Bus Editor and
the angle calculated with consideration of transformer angle shift, for determining the initial voltage angle
used in load flow calculation. In load flow calculation, if the Apply XFMR angle shift option is
checked and the bus voltage is used as the initial value, ETAP calculates bus voltage angle considering
transformer angle shift. The calculated bus angle is referenced at the angle of first swing machine. Then
this calculated voltage angle is compared with the bus initial voltage angle displayed in the Bus Editor. If
the difference between the two angles is smaller than the MaxBusIniAngDiff value, the angle from the
Bus Editor is used as the initial bus voltage angle in the calculation; otherwise, the calculated angle is
used as the initial bus voltage angle.
MaximumPhaseShift=1
The continuity check will determine whether a looped transformer (2W or 3W) has a mismatched phase
angle shift by comparing the phase shifts with the allowable shift specified in this entry. ETAP checks
for the violation when running the following studies: SC ANSI Max, 4 Cycle, Min, IEC 60909, and 1Ph
Device Duty. This is also checked for Sequence of Operation and 1Ph ANSI Arc Flash.
MaxIterForAmpCalc=200
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations for the Underground Raceway System
(UGS) for Uniform-Temperature and Uniform-Ampacity calculations.
MaxIterForCableSizeCalc=1000
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations performed by the Underground System
(UGS) for Cable Sizing calculations.
MaxIterForTempCalc=50
This is the default value for the maximum number of iterations performed by the Underground Raceway
System (UGS) for Steady-State and Transient Temperature calculations.
Max Open LightRS=10

Max Open HeavyRS=10
These values indicate the default number of database handlers kept open at any time by ETAP in the
current session. The default values should be sufficient for most cases involving ODBC drivers for
Microsoft Access and Microsoft SQL Server.
Due to the limitation imposed on the Microsoft ODBC Driver for Oracle (driver version 2.00.006325),
Oracle users may need to reduce the aforementioned values to 5 (set Max Open LightRS=5 and Max
Open HeavyRS=5).
MaxSourcelfLevel=3
This entry defines the number of levels of source contributing branches for a faulted bus. A source
contributing branch contains short-circuit current from a power grid or a synchronous machine. The
short-circuit currents for these branches are calculated by the Arc Flash program to determine arcing
current clearing time. The range for this entry is 1 20.
MaxTransientStep=5000

This is the default value for the maximum number of steps for the Underground System (UGS) for the
Transient Temperature calculations.
MinOLVScale=1
Some video cards may have difficulties drawing ETAPs one-line diagrams at their minimum scaling
factors. These difficulties may even cause application errors on some computers. If you experience these
difficulties, try setting the MinOLVScale to a higher number. Allowable values are 0 through 16. A
value of 16 effectively disables scaling and zooming on the one-line diagrams.
Mouse Wheel Timer=400

The Mouse Wheel scrolling is driven by a timer whose value is set by this INI entry. Normally, this value
does not need to be changed. If, however, you want to increase or decrease the initial speed, it may be
changed within the following bounds (minimum = 10ms, maximum=1000MS)
MsgLogInitialSize=12
MSSoftStarterConstSOnly=0
When this value is 1, the soft starter input load (to terminal bus) is always treated as constant power.
When this value is 0, it is modeled as constant power load if the bus voltage is higher than the control
settings, otherwise it is modeled as constant Z load.
MSSoftStarterLFEpsilon=0.005
This is the threshold value used to check convergence of load flow calculations for adjusting soft starter
operating values at a given time. The value is in pu for voltage. (Range is from 0.0000001 to 1.0)
MSSoftStarterLFMaxIterNo=100
This is the maximum iteration number used in Load Flow calculations for adjusting soft starter operating
values at a given time.
NonLoadBusKVMatch=40
The nominal kV of the two terminal buses (From Bus and To Bus) of a branch, excluding a transformer,
should be the same or very close. This field defines the maximum difference allowed between the
nominal kV values of such two buses. If the difference is more than this limit (defaulted to 40%), an error
message will be given and ETAP exits the calculation. User can set it to a different value to tighten or
relax the error checking.
For transformers this limit is used to compare transformer rated kV with the nominal kV of the terminal
bus on the same side.
OLDSpaceManagerCols =10
OLDSpaceManagerRows=10
CxSpaceManagerCols=10
CxSpaceManagerRows=10
These entries dimension the internal space manager used by the one-line diagram views or composite
network views to speed up redrawing. The columns and rows define the internal resolution for the space
manager. Higher values of columns and rows will result in faster redrawing, but requires additional
memory. Additional memory is allocated on the basis of Rows * Columns.
ReloadLastProject=0
When set to 1, ETAP will automatically load the last project that was open.

Report Font / Report Scaling Factor

When viewing a localized version of ETAP, make sure the following settings are applied:
Localized ETAP Report Font Scaling Factor (%) Report Font

ReportFontTypeFace= ;
Chinese 90 OLVPrintFooterFontTypeface=
ReportFontTypeFace= ;
OLVPrintFooterFontTypeface=;
Japanese 90 PlotGraphFontTypeface=
Spanish 90 Times New Roman
If installing multiple language output reports, also including Portuguese and German, with the English
version, the default Report Font Scaling Factor will be set to 90. If only English output reports are
selected, the default will be set to 100.
Note: To view any output reports in a language other than English, make sure the operating system
contains the proper language package settings for that selection. Refer to Chapter 2 - ETAP Installation -
Step 10 for details regarding the language package settings for each type of operating system.
Save Initial Bus Updates=0

The initial bus updates obtained from Load Flow calculations are not written to the database by default.
Setting this value to 1 will cause ETAP to write the values to the project database when it is saved.
Scrub Database=0
When this is set to 0, ETAP will not automatically scrub the database during startup.
Scrub Database=1
When this is set to 1, ETAP will scrub the Database Automatically during startup.
The Scrub Database function uses the Compact Database utility provided by Microsoft Access. As you
change data in a database, the database file can become fragmented and use more disk space than is
necessary. Additionally, items deleted, from your one-line diagram and Dumpster, are retained within the
database file until the database is Scrubbed. The Compact Database utility will compact your database
to de-fragment existing data and remove deleted data from the database file. Compacted databases are
usually smaller in size and generally run faster.
The Scrub Database function is only available for Microsoft Access 7.0 and higher databases. ETAP will
automatically scrub the database when converting 1.4.1 project files to 2.0 project files.
SerializeAudit=1
This entry verifies all elements in the serialized stream and reports errors on unexpected elements found
in the stream. Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to skip the verification process.
SpanDischDutyCycleToOneMinute=1
IEEE Standard 485 requires that when sizing a battery, is a discrete sequence load can be established, the
load for a one minute period should be assumed to be the maximum current at any instant within that
minute. Hence, the maximum load is expanded to the whole minimum time span of one minute.

In ETAP Calculation of battery discharge, if SpanDischDutyCycleToOneMinute=1, the minimum span

of 1 minute will be applied to the battery duty cycle. If SpanDischDutyCycleToOneMinute=0, the
actual battery duty cycle will be used in the discharge calculation. The default value is set to 1. This
gives more conservative results. Please note that for battery sizing calculations, the minimum time span
of 1 minute is used for calculations.
Star FitMaxScaleFactor
Integer value, default = 400
This is the maximum scale factor that will be used by Star when Zooming the one-line diagram elements
to fit in the lower corner of the Star View.
Star FitBottomPercent
This is the percent of the graph width and height that will be used to display the one-line diagram
elements when zooming in on the one-line diagram to fit in the lower corner of the Star View.
Star GroupByDefault
If 1, elements are grouped when they are dropped on a Star View. If 0, they are not grouped.
SVCCoefficient=0.01 //0.01 is default

SVCCoefficient is used to control SVC adjustment step. The default value is 0.01. You may set it to a
smaller value to improve load flow convergence or a bigger value to increase load flow converging speed.
Time-outs
The following entries are calculation time-out defaults in seconds:
CDTimeOut=60
HATimeOut=60
LFTimeOut=60
MSTimeOut=600
OPFTimeOut=600
RATimeOut=60
SCTimeOut=60
TSTimeOut=600
TS_Flag1=0
If entry is set to zero (default) the ETAP Transient Stability Module uses the frequency dependent model
for the induction machines and calculates bus frequency based on weighted machine speed.
If this entry is set to 1, the ETAP Transient Stability Module uses a non-frequency dependent model for
induction machines and bus frequency is calculated based on bus voltage phase angle.
UseWeightedFrequency=1
The default setting for this field in the ini file is UseWeightedFrequency =1. This ini entry is used for
Transient Stability to select Use Weighted Machine Frequency. To change Synchronous Machine
Damping to Use Nominal System Frequency set the ini entry UseWeightedFrequency =0. The system
frequency will affect the synchronous machine damping effect.
SwingEquation=1

Ifthisparameterissetto1,whichissetbydefault,TransientStability
programwilluseanenhanceintegrationmethodforsynchronousgeneratorswing
equations.
tsSVCInitialLoadFlowMethod=1
If this parameter is set to 1, which is set by default, Transient Stability program will employ a method to
automatically adjust SVC reference voltage (Vref) to achieve the best possible voltage regulation by SVC
during the initial load flow solution. If this parameter is set to 0, Transient Stability program will keep
SVC reference voltage (Vref) to the editor defined value during the initial load flow solution. Depending
on the system configurations and SVC locations and parameters, the automatically adjusting Vref method
sometimes may experience difficulty in initial load flow convergence. When this occurs, the parameter
can be set to 0.
VoltageAnnotation orientation=15
These values determine the slope for display of annotation results for bus voltages. Some video cards
may not be able to draw the rotated annotations used by ETAP. If this is the case at your site, set the
orientation entries to 0.
CurrentAnnotation orientation=15
These values determine the slope for the displays of annotation results for short-circuit currents. Some
video cards may not be able to draw the rotated annotations used by ETAP. In that case, set the
orientation entries to 0.
UGS MaxX=10000
UGS MaxY=10000
These values determine the maximum size of the Underground Raceway System (UGS). These values
can range from 5000 to 50000. However, this value should be altered only on Windows 2000 or NT since
Win 98 or Me do not have enough resources.
UseAH_AmpCurve=1
This entry determines the type of battery characteristic curves used for battery sizing and discharge
calculations. The battery characteristic curves entered in the Battery Library describe the relationship
between the discharging current and the time of the discharging with respect to a certain cell voltage,
referred to as the Time-Amp curve. If this entry is set to 1, the Time-Amp curve is converted to an AH-
Amp curve and then used in the calculation; otherwise the Time-Amp curve is used in the calculation.
UTAmpAccelFactor=0.7
This parameter is used in the Uniform-Temperature Ampacity calculation in the Underground Raceway
System (UGS). The allowable range is 0.0 to 2.0. The value can be set higher than the default setting of
0.7 to speed up the calculation; however, the calculation may diverge.
SQL_TextSize 79152
This establishes the maximum length of a binary stream that can be written to SQL Server. If you get
SQL Server errors when writing a large project to SQL Server, you may need to increase the size of this
variable.
UpdateConnections=0
If set to 1, ETAP will automatically update the connections for all of the elements in the project database
every time the project database is saved.

Message Log
The following entries are related to the ETAP message log.
Max Display Msgs=255

ETAPs message log, displayed within ETAP, shows up to 255 messages. The maximum value that can
be entered is 16384.
MsgLogInitialSize=12
This entry sets the initial height of the log window displayed at the bottom of the screen in logical units.
ETAP will save the height of the log window into this entry during the shutdown process.
MsgLog Size=128
ETAP maintains a text message log on disk that records all messages sent to the message log. This file is
named ~msglog.tmp. ETAP maintains the last completed messages up to the maximum file size as set
by this INI file entry. The size of the message log files is in kilobytes, i.e., 128 is 128 kb. Setting
MsgLogSize=0 will disable message text logging. The maximum size you can set for the message.log
file is 1024 kb.
Bus and Node Drawing and Printing

The following entries are related to the width of a vertical bus, or height of a horizontal bus, and diameter
of the nodes. These entries will define how the bus and the node are printed.
INI Entry Default value Valid values and notes

Print Bus Substitutes 0 Not limited. This enables the use of the following entries if
non-zero.
Bus 1 Print 0 0-5. Disabled if 0
Print Node Substitutes 0 Not limited. This enables the user of the following entries if
non-zero.
Node 1 Print 0 0-5. Disabled if 0
These INI entries allow the user to over-ride the automatic selection provided by the tables in the
following manner. If the Print Bus Substitutes, or Print Node Substitutes entry is non-zero, the print draw
routines consult the appropriate Bus n Print, or Node n Print (n stands for the symbol size). If the Bus n
Print, or Node n Print, value is 0, that entry is disabled and the standard table look-up is used. If that
value is 1-5, ETAP treats the bus, or node, as using the symbol size specified by value.
For example, if the Print Node Substitutes is set to 1, ETAP will retrieve the values from Node 1 Print .
Node 5 Print as each node of the specific symbol size is printed. If Node 1 Print is set to 5, all nodes of
symbol size 1 are printed as if they were of symbol size 5. If Node 1 Print is set to 0, ETAP disregards
the Node 1 Printing substitution and prints the node with its normal size (symbol size 1).

Print Gray Line=1

Some printers cannot print a gray line. Setting this value to 0 will cause the printer to print a black line
instead of a gray line for de-energized connectors.
Relax UGS Dumpster Controls=1

Relax OLD Dumpster Controls=1
The controlled dumpsters provide security for a password-protected ETAP project by prohibiting the
deletion of elements on the dumpster unless the dumpster has been checked by the checker. Subsequent
to normal operation, the checker is presented with the controlled dumpster to check. If the checker
checks the dumpster, the dumpster may then be safely deleted by the engineer.
This revision modifies the controlled dumpster logic in the following manner. When an element(s) is cut
to the dumpster, the dumpster checks the element to determine if the Checked by Name is blank. If so,
this is taken to indicate that the element is a newly created element that has never been seen by the
checker. In such conditions, the element is placed on a non-controlled dumpster when it is deleted from
the OLD or the Underground.
When any elements are cut from the OLD, or UGS, the newly created dumpster must recursively check
all elements involved in the cut to determine if there is any element that has been previously seen by the
checker. If so, the dumpster is designated a controlled dumpster and the normal checker controls are
applied. If the recursive check passes, the dumpster is left in an un-controlled state. Recursively
checking the elements means that the dumpster must check every element, not only on the OLD, but in
any nested composites regardless of depth. This same logic applies to the UGS.
The two INI entries are established to over-ride this behavior. Both entries default to 1, which implements
the revised behavior. Changing the entry to a 0 causes the dumpster to ignore the revised logic (uses the
old behavior).
PanelSystemLFMaxIteration=200
This entry gives maximum number of iterations for panel system load flow calculation.
PanelSystemLFPrecision=0.00001
This entry gives the precision value for checking panel system load flow convergence. The precision is
applied on bus per unit voltage values.
Name Type default Min Max

PanelSystemLFMaxIteration Int 200
PanelSystemLFPrecision Float .00001 .0000001 .001
ConvertToMSAccess2000Format=1
Due to support of the features available later to the international version, ETAP needs to convert the
project databases (*.MDB, *.GRD, and *.CPX files in the current project location) to the format of the
database engine (Jet engine) used in the Microsoft ACCESS 2000 program. Setting this value to 0 will
cause ETAP to skip the conversion. The default setting for this entry is 1.
AutoConversion = 0
Setting this value to 0 will cause ETAP to ask for user permission to convert the project databases
(*.MDB, *.GRD, and *.CPX files in the current project location) each time ETAP opens a project. Set
this value to 1 means ETAP will no longer ask for permission to convert. The permission to convert the

project databases itself is based on the setting in the entry "ConvertToMSAccess2000Format". The
default setting is 0.
CompactDBIni = 1
The value of this setting determines the value of the checkbox "Compact Database When Saving" in the
Logon dialog when opening the next project. Upon closing the current project, ETAP will update this
setting in the configuration file (ETAPS.INI). The default value is 1.
[AppVariables]
DCSC LFPrecision=.0001
This is the default precision for load flow resolutions in DC Short-Circuit. Valid range is .0000001 to
0.1.
DefaultStandard=English
ETAP uses English units as a default for all new projects created. This may be changed to metric by
replacing English with Metric.
LastLibrarySubDir=C:\etaps\powerstn\lib
ETAP stores the location of the library file associated with a project.
LastProject=C:\etaps\powerstn\example\example.oti
ETAP stores the name of the last project opened.
LastSubDir=C:\etaps\powerstn\example
ETAP stores the location of the last project opened.
Project Default Path=C:\etaps\powerstn

ETAP will use its own directory as the default project path unless this entry is placed into the ETAPS.INI
file. The ETAP default path is C:\etaps\powerstn if ETAP is installed using default settings. For
example, if you set: Project Default Path=D:\temp\testproj, then a new ETAP project named userproj will
have a folder created with the name of the project. ETAP will store all associated project files, output
reports, plots, etc. in the subdirectory shown: Project Default Path=D:\temp\testproj\userproj
KeyAdapter=U
Use this entry if you are using an USB Key.
KeyAdapter=P
Use this entry when using a Parallel port key. This is the default configuration.
KeyAdapter=S[, [COMx][, [nnnn]]]
1. COMx means COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4. Default is COM1 if it is not provided.
2. nnnn means bauds rate. Default is 9600 if it is not given.
3. For Example, KeyAdapter=S, or KeyAdapter=S, COM2, 9600
License Manager Server

Two options are available for the licensing of ETAP. The primary option utilizes Microsoft Name Pipes
(text names for PCs). The secondary option is direct TCP/IP communication where the Name Pipe
service is not available, for example, Novell networks.

The Named Pipe License Manager is named ETAPSLM.exe.

The TCP/IP License Manager is named ETAPSLMT.exe.
ETAPSLMT and ETAPSLM cannot run simultaneously on the same License Manager Server.
LM Port=
LM Port=<Communication Port>
<Communication Port> specifies the port number that ETAP uses to communicate with the TCP/IP
server. If this entry does not exist, the port number defaults to 6260. However, this can be configured by
modifying the following registry entry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Operation Technology, Inc.\LM\Port
LM Server=
LM Server=<Server Name>
This entry identifies the location of the License Manager Server where the ETAP License Manager and
network hardware key are installed. Default <Server Name> is blank. This entry is required if you are
using a network hardware key for simultaneous usage of ETAP, i.e., this entry is not required if you have
a stand-alone license.
When LM Server=<Server Name> is available, ETAP will ignore the values of <TCP/IP Server Name>,
<Servers IP Address>, and <Communication Port>. In such a case, Named Pipes are used for
communications.
When <Server Name> does not exist, ETAP will find the value of <TCP/IP Server Name> and try to
connect to it. If <TCP/IP Server name> is also missing, ETAP seeks to connect to the server with IP
Address found in <Servers IP Address>. In the event when none of <Server Name>, <TCP/IP Server
Name>, and <Servers IP Address> exist, ETAP will try local license authentication.
LM Server IP=
LM Server IP=<Servers IP Address>
<Servers IP Address> allows the user to enter the License Manager Servers IP address when <TCP/IP
Server Name> is not available. This entry can only be made if the Server is using a fixed IP address.
LM TCP Server=
LM TCP Server=<TCP/IP Server Name>
<TCP/IP Server Name> indicates the License Manager Servers TCP/IP address. The name is resolved to
an IP address using any available Domain Name Service (DNS) or the HOSTS file can be used to point to
a fixed IP address.
Examples of different License Manager Server INI setups:
CD Key=XXX-YYY-ZZZ
ETAP automatically creates this entry when you enter the Activation Code provided with your ETAP
CD-ROM. This sequence of letters and numbers needs to match with your companys specific license.
This sequence changes with each major release.
LM Server=lm
LM TCP Server=tcplm.oti.com
LM Server IP=10.10.10.191
LM Port=5000
Specifies that the host lm will be used as License Manager through Named Pipes. All TCP/IP entries are
ignored.

Specifies that the host with IP address 10.10.10.191 will be used as License Manager through TCP/IP via
default port number 6260.
LM TCP Server=tcplm.oti.com
LM Port=5000
Specifies that the host tcplm.oti.com will be used as License Manager through TCP/IP via port number
5000.
ReportProcessor=C:\program files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe

ETAP uses Notepad by default to view the output report of calculations. You can change this entry to use
your preferred viewer. In most cases, you must enter the fully qualified path and application name as
shown above for Microsoft Word.
%N=String
Enter a customized macro (string) to be used within the ETAP INI file. You can set up to 10 macros (%0,
%1%9).
The following is a list of macros available for use within the ETAP INI file:
%o ODBC connect string including the path and name of the project source database
%p Fully qualified path (path+project name) of the currently open ETAP Project
%d Path of the currently open ETAP Project
Note that macros can only be used for arguments for the Tool entry. In all cases, the trailing \ is not
provided by macro expansion. Expansion does wrap the appropriate phrases in "" to allow for long
filenames and spaces, etc.
ETAP provides a mechanism allowing you to define external programs (external tools) in the ETAPS.INI
file. ETAP lists external programs on its Tools menu bar allowing you to launch and execute the external
programs. You may define up to 20 external programs (menu entries).
You can define each external programs menu entry in ETAP, the name and location where the program
resides, and arguments to be passed. Overall, this mechanism provides a flexible interface to external
programs from ETAP.
Tool1=text|path|argument1|argument2|argument3|argument4
Tool1 Up to 20 external tools (Tool1, Tool2, Tool20)
text Text to be displayed in ETAP submenu Tools
path Fully qualified path (path + program name) of the external program
argument Arguments to be passed to the external program
Macros may be entered into the path and arguments (argument 1, argument 2 etc.). The macros are
expanded when the tool is invoked according to the following rules:
MACRO expansion
%p expands to the fully qualified project path and project name
e.g. -f%p.MDB expands to -fD:\fullProjDir\ProjName.MDB
%d expands to the fully qualified project path

e.g. |%d\pdconfig.exe|... expands to d:\FullProjDir\pdconfig.exe

%o expands to the full ODBC connect string which would be utilized to allow
an external program to make an ODBC connection to the project database.
%0...%9 expands to the contents of ETAPS.INI entry 0...9 as defined in the

ETAPS.INI
[AppVariables]
0=string0
1=string1
...
9=string9
In all cases, the trailing \ is not provided by macro expansion

Expansion does wrap the appropriate phrases in ""
Using Tools examples:
Start Microsoft Word from ETAP:
Tool1=MS Word| C:\program files\Microsoft Office\Office\Winword.exe
Launch PDConfig as an external tool within ETAP:
Tool2=Configuration Report|C:\ETAPS\PowerStn\PDConfig.exe|%o|C:\etaps\powerstn\target.mdb
PDConfig is an external program that creates an MS Access database that contains the status of all
protective devices, motors, and loads for each Configuration Status you have defined. In this example,
PDConfig.exe requires an argument for the ETAP project file (including ODBC connect string) and an
argument for the target file where the results are saved. Macros may be used to simplify the entries.
Tool2=Config Tables|C:\ETAPS\PowerStn\PDConfig.exe|%o|%d\Target.mdb
Oracle database users have three additional entries in the INI file. These entries store the name, user ID,
and password of the associated Oracle database.
ORACLE Database=MyOracleDB
Name of the Oracle database (default 2: for local Oracle)
ORACLE UserID=MyOracleID
Oracle user ID (default SCOTT for local Oracle)
ORACLE UserPassword=MyPassword
Oracle user valid password (default TIGER for local Oracle)
Wizard Path="" //NULL is default

This entry defaults to "". Typically, the ETAP Wizard is located in the ETAP directory and ETAP
directory is used if the Wizard Path entry is blank (its default). If you want to relocate the ETAP Wizard
to another directory, set Wizard Path="d:\someotherDirectory" where d:\someotherDirectory is the
directory where you want to place the ETAP Wizard file.

[Colors]
Refer to the Theme Manager for details on using colors for the one-line diagram.
[Recent File List]

ETAP stores the last nine ETAP project names and locations for easy access directly from the File Menu
inside ETAP.
File1=C:\etaps\powerstn\example\example.oti
File2= C:\etaps\powerstn\sample\sample.oti
File3= C:\etaps\powerstn\userproj\userproj.oti
File4= C:\temp\example\example.oti
File5= D:\powerstn\example\example.oti
File6= D:\powerstn\sample\sample.oti
File7= D:\powerstn\userproj\userproj.oti
File8=D:\temp\projfile\sample\sample.oti
File9= D:\temp\projfile\example\example.oti

Chapter 5
Database and Project Management
ETAP organizes an electrical system into a single project. Within this project, ETAP creates three major
system components:
Presentation - Unlimited, independent graphical presentations of the one-line diagram that

represent design data for any purpose (such as impedance diagram, study results, or plot plan).
Configuration - Unlimited, independent system configurations that identify the status of

switching devices (open and closed), motors and loads (continuous, intermittent, and spare),
Generator Operating Modes (swing, voltage control, reactive power control, power factor control)
and MOVs (open, closed, throttling, and spare).
Revision Data - Base Data and unlimited Revision Data IDs that keep track of the changes and
modifications to the engineering properties (for example, nameplate or settings) of elements.
These three system components are organized in an

orthogonal fashion to provide great power and
flexibility in constructing and manipulating your
ETAP project. Using this concept of Presentation,
Status Configuration, and Revision Data, you can
create numerous combinations of networks of
diverse configurations and varying engineering
properties that allow you to fully investigate and
study the behavior and characteristics of the
electrical networks using one database. This means
that you do not need to copy your database for
different system configurations, What If studies,
etc.

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard Status Configurations
ETAP relies on a three-dimensional database concept to implement all Presentations, Configurations, and
Base and Revision Data. The use of this multi-dimensional database concept allows you to independently
select a particular Presentation, Configuration Status, or Revision Data within the same project database.
These selections can be used in conjunction with multiple loading categories and multiple Study Cases to
quickly and efficiently perform system design and analysis, while avoiding inadvertent data discrepancies
created when multiple copies of a single project file are used to maintain a record of various system
changes.

5.1 Presentations
When a new project is created, a one-line diagram presentation named OLV (one-line view) is be created
and displayed in your ETAP window. This is where you build a one-line diagram presentation of your
electrical system. ETAP supports the creation of an unlimited number of presentations of a one-line
diagram. This powerful feature provides you with the ability to customize each one-line diagram
presentation to generate different graphical representations, as shown below. One presentation may have
some or all protective devices visible, while another presentation may have a completely different layout
best suited for displaying load flow results, and so on.
Four Different Presentations of the same One-Line Diagram
5.1.1 Presentation Customization Features

One-line diagram presentations have the following features:
Graphical location of elements and connectors

Graphical representation of connectors based on Phase type (i.e. 3-Phase, 1-Phase)
Sizing of elements (five sizes)
Sizing of buses (five sizes)
Colors of elements and connectors
Ground grid elements
Symbols (ANSI and IEC Standard symbols for AC and DC elements)
Element grouping including connectors
Element orientation (0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees)
Annotation orientation (-90, -45, 0, 45, and 90 degrees)
Visibility options (hide and show) for switching and protective devices
Display options of Annotations (results, AC, AC-DC, and DC elements)
Display options for each Operating Mode (for example, Edit, Load Flow, or Short-Circuit)
Grid display and size option
Continuity check option (on or off)
Status configuration association
Print options (such as print size, centering, printer type, or paper size)

OLE objects independent of each presentation

ActiveX object independent of each presentation
Themed Appearance
Additionally, each presentation stores the last configuration, Operating Mode, zoom ratio, view location,
print setup, etc.
5.1.2 Adding Elements to a Presentation

When you add an element to one presentation, the same element with identical engineering properties will
automatically be added to each of your other presentations. Modification of the engineering properties of
an element in one presentation will be reflected in all presentations, because all presentations share a
common database.
5.1.3 Creating New Presentations

You can create new one-line diagram presentations by copying any one of the existing one-line diagram
presentations.
1. You can make a copy of a presentation by using one of these two techniques:
Click the New Presentation button on the Presentation toolbar. ETAP displays the Create
Presentation dialog box, or:
In the Project View window, right-click the One-Line Diagrams folder (under the
Presentations folder), then select the Create New command. ETAP displays the Create
Presentation dialog box.
OR
2. In the From drop-down list, select the existing one-line diagram presentation that you want to
copy. The new presentation will be assigned OLV1 by default, or you can enter a new name in
the To text box.

3. Click OK. ETAP displays the new presentation.
5.1.4 Changing Presentation Names

A presentation name can be changed at any time by double-clicking the one-line diagram windows
background while you are in Edit Mode. Using the One-Line Diagram dialog box, enter the new name in
the Name text box. You can change the presentation name to any name that is 25 or less alphanumeric
characters in length.
5.1.5 Purging Presentations

The purging of a presentation can only be accomplished from the Project Editor. Once you purge a
presentation, it is permanently deleted from the project, so use caution. To purge a presentation, do the
following:
1. In the Project View window under the Presentations folder, expand the folder that contains the
presentation you want to purge.
2. Right-click the presentation folder you want to purge, and then select the Purge command. ETAP
will require you to confirm that you want to purge the presentation.

5.2 Configuration Status

ETAP possesses a powerful configuration capability that allows you to configure the operating status of
each of the various electrical elements included in the one-line diagram of your project. Electrical
components such as circuit breakers, fuses, and switches can be set to open or closed status. Loads and
motors may be operating continuously, intermittently, or can be assigned as spares. Power sources can be
operating in swing, voltage control, Mvar control, or power factor control modes. Implementation of this
configuration concept follows the guidelines described below:
When you attach a configuration to a one-line diagram presentation, all elements in that
presentation assume its predefined status, just as if they have been saved under that configuration.
Each configuration is independent of all others since the status of elements can be set
independently for each configuration.
Any configuration can be attached to any one-line diagram presentation. Conversely, any or all
one-line diagram presentations can be attached to the same configuration simultaneously.
You can create an unlimited number of configurations.
To attach or associate a configuration to a presentation, make the presentation window active, and
select a configuration status from the Configuration toolbar. The figure below shows the changes
in presentation when changed from Normal to TSEvents configuration.
.
Switching Status Configuration from Normal to Stage 1
By using this status configuration feature, it becomes unnecessary to maintain several copies of one
project to perform electrical system studies for different configurations. In addition, when you modify
engineering properties or add new elements to the one-line diagram, the changes will be automatically
saved for all configurations.

5.2.1 Changing the Status of Devices

The status of switching devices (fuse, contactor, HV circuit breaker, LV circuit breaker, switch, double-
throw switch, and the panels main disconnect) can be changed from their editors, the configuration
manager or from the menu displayed when you right-click the device on the one-line diagram.
Status Change of a Switching Device for Configuration Normal
The status of load devices (synchronous motor, induction motor, lumped load, MOV, static load,
capacitor, and filter) can be changed from their editors, as shown in the figure below.
Status Change of Load Devices for Configuration Stage1

The status of source devices (power grids and synchronous generators) can be changed from their editors,
as shown in the figure below.
5.2.2 Configuration Manager (Project Editor Access Level)

The purpose of the configuration manager is to provide an interface for the following capabilities:
Viewing the configuration status of each device in the active project in a tabular fashion
Ability to change the configuration status of any PD / Source / Load in the project
Ability to track changes in the configuration status of any PD / Source / Load in the project
Ability to check (checker) configuration status any PD / Source / Load in the project
The configuration manager can be accessed by clicking on the Configuration Manager button on the main
ETAP interface, as shown below.

The configuration manager may also be accessed from Project View as shown below.
The configuration manager interface is shown below:

Configuration List
This list contains all existing configurations in the project. If the Project Editor has deleted checked
configurations they will not show up in this list because they have been hidden. The configuration view
will show the configuration status for only the selected configurations from the configuration list.
The following devices (AC and DC) are considered by the configuration manager and tracked for the
checker
a. HVCB
b. LVCB
c. SPST Switch Protective / Switching Devices
d. SPDT Switch
e. Fuse
f. Contactor
g. Induction Motor
Motors
h. Synchronous Motor
i. Lumped Load
j. MOV
k. Static Load Loads
l. Capacitor
m. Panels
n. Harmonics Filters
o. Phase Adapter
p. UPS
q. Charger AC / DC
r. Inverter
s. Synchronous Generator Sources
t. Utility
Device Selection
Devices shown in the configuration view may be filtered based on the following categories:
a. AC
b. DC
c. AC & DC

Based on your selection, the following device lists are displayed. By default, AC elements are always
shown in the configuration view.
AC DC AC & DC
All AC Elements All DC Elements All Elements
All Protective Devices All DC Protective Devices All Protective Devices
All Loads All DC Loads All Loads
All Motors DC Circuit Breakers All Motors
All Sources DC Fuses All Sources
All AC/DC DC Lumped Loads All AC/DC
Circuit Breaker, HV DC Motors Circuit Breaker, HV
Circuit Breaker, LV DC Static Loads Circuit Breaker, LV/DC
Switches, Single-Throw DC Switches, Double-Throw Switches, Single-Throw
Switches, Double-Throw DC Switches, Single-Throw Switches, Double-Throw
Fuses Fuses
Contactors Contactors
Induction Motors Induction Motors
Synchronous Motors Synchronous Motors/DC
Lumped Loads Motors
MOVs Lumped Loads
Panels MOVs
Phase Adapters Panels
Harmonic Filters Phase Adapters
Static Loads Harmonic Filters
Capacitor Static Loads
Generators, Capacitors
Synchronous Generators, Synchronous
Power Grids, Utility Power Grids, Utility
UPSs UPSs
Charger Charger
Inverter Inverter
Configuration View
When a device is selected from the device selection list, corresponding device IDs are shown in the
configuration view (column 1). For example, if All Devices is selected then all device IDs will be
shown that are included and controlled by your various configurations.
Clicking on the device ID will trigger an automatic search for that device on the active one-line diagram.
ETAP will show the selected device in Red even if it exists in nested / composite networks. This can be
accomplished without having to close the configuration manager.

Since the configuration view lists the status of each device, the user can change the status of any device
from the configuration manager rather than having to go to the individual Device Editor. Select the
required status (open or close in case of circuit breaker) and click OK to apply the changes. An example
of this is shown below.


Show Normal Status

Selecting this option causes the normal status of all devices to be displayed in the configuration view.
Unselecting this option will filter the configuration view and show the off-normal or alternate status for
all selected devices. The table below lists devices displayed in the configuration view based on their
operating status.
Show Normal Status (Checked) Show Normal Status (Unchecked)

Circuit Breakers - Closed Circuit Breakers Open
DT Switches Position A DT Switches Position B
Switches Closed Switches Open
Fuses Closed Fuses Open
Generator Voltage Control Generator Swing / Mvar Control / PF Control
Power Grid Swing Power Grid Voltage Control / Mvar Control/ PF Control
Load Demand Factor Continuous Load Demand Factor Intermittent / Spare
MOVs Open MOVs Closed / Throttle / Spare
Panel Closed Panel Open
Phase Adapter Closed Phase Adapter Open
Harmonic Filter Continuous Harmonic Filter Intermittent / Spare

Show Differences
Selecting this option will compare the selected configurations from the configuration list and show only
those devices with differences between their configurations. For instance, the example below shows that
three configurations have been selected (Normal, Stage 1 and TSEvents). When Show Difference is
selected, based on your device selection (All AC Elements), ETAP will be displaying the differences
across all selected configurations, and CB2 and CB10 have different status across at least two of the four
selected configurations.

The results of selecting Display Changed Data in Red and Show Normal Status logic are summarized in
the table shown below:
Device ID Config 1 Config 2 Config 3 Config 4

CB1 Open Open Open Open
CB2 Closed Closed Closed
CB3 Closed Closed
CB4 Open Open Open Open
M1 Continuous Continuous
M2 Intermittent Intermittent Intermittent Intermittent
G1 Swing Swing Swing Swing
G2 VoltControl VoltControl VoltControl VoltControl
Config Open Close Open Close Open Close Open Close
Change
Show Normal Status Show Normal Status Dont Show Normal Dont Show Normal
Dont display Display changed data Status Status
changed data in Red in Red Dont Display Display changed data
changed data in Red in Red
Creating New Configurations

You can create new status configurations in the follow manner:
On the Configuration Manager, click the New button. ETAP then displays the New Configuration
dialog box. From this dialog box you can create a new configuration using default settings, as
shown in the following figure:
In the Project View, right-click the Status folder under Configurations folder, and select Create
New. ETAP displays the New Configuration dialog box along with the status of the elements for
your new configuration.

Create a New Status Configuration
Copying Existing Configurations

You can copy existing status configurations using one of the two following methods:
On the Configuration Manager, click the Copy button. The Copy From option allows you to copy
an existing configuration. From the drop-down list, select the configuration you want to duplicate.
The Create a New Configuration with Default Settings option allows you to create a new
configuration with the default settings listed in the dialog box. Enter a name for the new
configuration in the To text box.
If you right-click the specific configuration you want to duplicate and select the Duplicate
command, ETAP displays the Copy From option and allows you to create a new configuration
based on an existing one.
Delete Configurations
Click to delete the selected configuration(s) from the project. If these configurations were previously
checked then they will be hidden in access levels other than checker access level. If the configurations
were not checked previously, then they will be deleted permanently. Confirmation dialog is provided
when deleting a configuration.
Once you choose to accept the delete action, the configuration will be permanently removed and another
configuration with the same name can be created once the configuration manager is closed and reopened.
Note that if the configuration was checked then it will not be permanently removed from the system even
if the project is closed. Such a configuration can only be deleted if the checker approves the delete action.

Rename Configurations
Clicking the Rename button will bring up the Rename Configuration Editor, as shown below.
Print Configurations
Click OK to export the configuration settings to an Access Database.

5.2.3 Configuration Manager (Checker Access Level)

When the checker access level is accessed, the following screen will appear. Checking information for
configurations can be accessed by selecting Configuration option. Make sure the Display
Configuration Manager option is selected to display configuration manager in checker access level. The
purpose of the configuration checker is to validate changes made to configuration settings of various
devices in a project. This is similar to the checker for engineering properties. The Configuration Manager
Editor is similar to the one described for Project Editor Access Level with just a few limitations and
modifications, as shown in the figure below.
Edited By
The previous user name (ID) and the Date are displayed here for the selected configuration.
Checked By
Clicking on the Check button will insert your user name (ID) and the date in the Checked By area for the
selected configuration.
Skip Checked Configurations

Use this filter if checked configurations should not be included in the configuration list.
Display Configuration Manager

Click this checkbox to display the configuration manager. All changes or modifications of individual
configuration status are displayed in red by the configuration manager.

Check / Uncheck Data
When you click on the Check button, the color changes to blue, and a red check mark appears in the
corner. If you click again, the selected element will be unchecked.
Restore
The Restore function will only be active for configurations that were previously checked and then deleted.
These configurations have been hidden from the Project Editor (because they were deleted) however they
are visible in Checker Access Level. The Checker can choose to permanently delete these configurations
by checking them, i.e. accepting the delete action or by clicking on the restore button to unhide them in
Project Editor Access Level.
In the example below BatterySize is a checked configuration that has been deleted by the Project
Editor.
When you (as checker) log into this project, ETAP will display all configurations (Normal, NewConfig,
and Stage 1) that must be checked in addition to the BatterySize configuration since this was a checked
configuration that was deleted by the Project Editor.

You can check the BatterySize configuration, in which case this configuration will be permanently
deleted from the project, or you can chose to restore this configuration name along with the status for
every device. To restore a configuration, click on the BatterySize configuration column and then click
Restore. ETAP will prompt you with the confirmation dialog shown below:

5.2.4 Reserved Configurations

Some status configurations are reserved for ETAP Real-Time and cannot be renamed or purged. These
configurations are active when ETAP is online and include the following:
Reserved Configurations Mode
On-Line On-line Monitoring
Playback Playback
Advisory Advisory Control
Supervisory Supervisory Control

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard Revision Data
5.3 Revision Data

Revision Data is the third orthogonal system component provided by ETAP. The engineering data
associated with the elements in your project are stored in the project database. ETAP provides ready
access to an unlimited number of unique engineering Revision Data associated with each element.
ETAP establishes a revision level of zero for the data used as Base Data. You may assign a revision at
any time to distinguish the engineering parameters associated with any or all of the elements on the one-
line diagram without impacting or changing the Base Data. An element cannot exist in Revision Data
without also existing in the Base Data. ETAP constrains your project to using the engineering data in one
Revision Data ID (name) at a time. You must be working with the Base Data to add or delete system
elements or to make connectivity changes to your one-line diagram. Also, the Base Data must be active
(instead of Revision Data being active) for you to be able to save or close a project.
5.3.1 Using What If Studies

The primary use for Revision Data is to enable you to run What If studies for an electrical system
where you vary the engineering data of the networks components and compare these results with the
Base Data or other Revision Data. For example, you can change the impedance of a transformer in the
Revision Data (leaving the Base Data untouched) and compare the short-circuit results with the Base
Data.
Other applications of Revision Data allow the creation of future modifications of the system without
changing your Base Data. For example, you can add a new substation to an existing system and keep all
of your modifications in Revision Data. In this example, the Base Data represents your existing system
and the Revision Data represents your design for future modifications.
To take this example further, first add the new elements for the substation to the Base Data and flag them
as Out of Service so they will not affect the study results of the existing system. In the Revision Data, you
then set the flag to In Service and enter all other required properties. When the new substation is
commissioned, merge the Revision Data to Base Data to implement and save the modification.
5.3.2 Changing Engineering Data in Revisions

To exchange engineering data for Revision Data, you need to activate the Revision Data in your system.
This is accomplished through the Revision toolbar (located on the top left hand corner of the ETAP
window by default). From the Revision toolbar drop-down list, select the Revision Data ID (name) you
want to modify. By default, there are only 15 Revision Data IDs, but you can add an unlimited number of
new IDs to your project.

After selecting the Revision Data ID, you can modify device data just as you would while in the Base
Data. The changes you make will not affect the Base Data, unless they are changes common to all
Revision Data (such as configurations, Study Cases, and presentations).
Revision Data is integrated with user access control to keep users from manipulating Base Data. Only
users with the access level of Project Editor or Base Editor can manipulate Base Data. User access
restrictions insure that specific sections of the project can only be altered by those authorized to make
changes.
ETAP keeps track of delta differences between Revision Data and the Base Data. The delta is zero when
you activate a Revision Data ID for the first time. When you are in Revision Data and you change a single
property of an element, that element (with its new engineering properties) is saved for that Revision Data
ID. In our future substation example, the delta between this Revision Data ID and the Base Data is one
element only. Any subsequent change to the properties of this element in the Base Data will not affect the
elements properties in the Revision Data. However, any changes to the Base Data for other elements that
have not been altered in this Revision Data will be used when you run studies with this Revision Data ID
active.
5.3.3 Identifying Changed Elements

The ETAP Project Editor displays the delta difference between Revision Data and the Base Data.
Changed elements and the folders in which they are stored are colored green. In the example below, Gen3
is flagged as an element that has parameters that differ from the Base Data. Also note that the Cable
folder is colored green with the integer 2 added to it, meaning that there are two cables under this
Revision Data ID that are different from the Base Data.
5.3.4 Creating Revisions

You can add new revisions by creating Revision Data IDs (names) from the Revision toolbar or from the
RevControl menu. All data in a new revision is identical to the Base Data (delta is equal to zero), until
you begin to make changes.

1. You can create a new Revision Data ID by selecting either one of the two actions listed below:
From the left of the Revision toolbar, click the New Revision button.
From the RevControl menu, select the Create command.
ETAP displays the Create version of the Project Revision Control dialog box. In this dialog box,
you can create a new Revision Data ID or copy an existing one and use it as a base for your new
revision. For information about copying revision data for a new revision, see the Copying
Revision Data Section below.
Project Revision Control Dialog Box Create Version
2. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the New option is selected.
3. In the New option text box, enter the new Revision Data ID.
4. Enter the revision information in the text boxes on the right, including Change # (design change
notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description, Schedule, and
Remarks.
Note: When you want to merge Revision Data, you can merge by specifying the Revision Data
ID, Change #, or Group # entered in this dialog box. For more information about merging
Revision Data, see the Merging Revision Data Section below.
5. Click OK. ETAP adds the Revision Data ID to the Revision toolbars drop-down list.

5.3.5 Copying Revision Data

You can create new revisions by copying Revision Data from existing Revision Data IDs (names). All
data in a copied revision is identical to the revision from which it was copied, until you begin to make
changes.
1. From the RevControl menu, select the Create command.
ETAP displays the Copy version of the Project Revision Control dialog box. In this dialog box,
you can also create a new Revision Data ID by copying the Base Data. For information about
copying the Base Data for a new revision, see the Creating Revisions Section above.
2. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the Existing option is selected.
3. Select the Revision Data ID you want to copy from the drop-down list.
4. In the text box under the To Revision Data group, enter the name of the new Revision Data ID.
5. Edit the revision information as required in the text boxes on the right, including Change #
(design change notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description,
Schedule, and Remarks. Change # and Group # can be any alphanumeric combination up to 36
characters.
Note: When you want to merge Revision Data, you can merge by the Revision Data ID, Change
#, or Group # entered in this dialog box. For more information about merging Revision Data, see
the Merging Revision Data Section below.

5.3.6 Edit Revision Data ID Name and Information

You can rename a Revision Data ID and edit any of its information by doing the following:
1. From the RevControl menu, select the Edit command. ETAP displays the Edit version of the
Project Revision Control dialog box.
Project Revision Control Edit Version
2. Edit the Revision Data ID name and information as required, and then click OK to save the
changes.
Note: The Revision Data ID information includes Change # (design change notification number) and
Group # (design group number), which may be used to merge Revision Data. For more information
about merging Revision Data, see the Merging Revision Data Section below.
5.3.7 Merging Revision Data

You can merge Revision Data to study the effects of multiple revisions changes and modifications on the
project simultaneously. When you merge Revision Data, the combined revision will consist of the
elements and engineering properties from the Base Data, except where properties of the Revision Data
have been changed. In those cases, the merged revision uses the Revision Data properties instead. Where
the same changed properties differ between two revisions, the revision that is being merged into is the one
that has its properties overwritten.
You can use the following three Revision Data types to merge Revision Data:
Revision Data ID (name)

Change # (design change notification number)
Group # (design group number)

5.3.8 Merging by Revision Data ID

You can merge one revision into another revision by using their Revision Data IDs. Where the same
changed properties differ between two revisions, the revision that is being merged into is the one that has
its properties overwritten. However, the merged revision keeps the Revision Data Info values of the
revision that is being merged into.
You can also merge Revision Data into the Base Data, if you have project, base, or Revision Editor logon
access. When you merge Revision Data into the Base Data, that Revision Data is deleted because there is
no longer any delta difference between it and the Base Data.
Note: You cannot merge the Revision Data of one ID into the same ID (for example, Revision 1 into
Revision 1).
To merge one revision into another revision, follow these steps:
1. From the RevControl menu, select Merge. ETAP displays the Merge version of the Project
Revision Control dialog box.
Project Revision Control Merge Version
2. In the From Revision Data group, select the ID option.
3. In the To Revision Data group, select the name of the Revision Data ID into which you want to
merge the selected Revision Data.
4. Click OK to merge.

5.3.9 Merging by Change # or Group #

The Change # (design change number) and Group # (design group number) options are used to merge
together phases of design projects. Each Revision Data ID can have both a Change # and a Group #
assigned and each can be considered a phase of a project.
For example, you can use Change # to associate the revisions of a project. If you want to study how the
phases (revisions) of the project are working together, you can merge all the revisions assigned to that
particular Change #. Then, you can use Group # to merge common revisions between one or more
projects to study how the projects work together.
In the above example, Group # is a meta-variable of Change #. However, you can use Change # and
Group # interchangeably to match the needs of a design project and the structure of your design group.
Either one can be used for any level of projects that have more than one design revision associated with
them, as long as you are consistent with the project levels where you are using them.
To merge revisions by Change # or Group #, do the following:
1. From the RevControl menu, select Merge. ETAP displays the Merge version of the Project
Revision Control dialog box.
Project Revision Control Merge Version
2. In the From Revision Data group, select the Change # or Group # option. Depending on your
option selection, ETAP displays one of the following versions of the Project Revision Control
dialog box.

Change # Option Group # Option
3. In the Change # or Group # drop-down list, select the change number or group number whose
associated revisions you want to merge. ETAP displays the Revision Data IDs of all the revisions
that have the selected change or group number in the Revision Data box.
Note: Since both Revision 1 and Revision 2 were assigned Change # 1 and Group # A, both
revisions appear in the Revision Data box of the figures above when either Change # 1 or Change
# A is selected.
4. In the To Revision Data group, select the Revision Data ID of the revision into which you want to
merge the displayed Revision Data.
5. Click OK to merge.
5.3.10 Deleting Revision Data

If you are logged on at the project, base, or Revision Editor access level, you can delete Revision Data by
specifying the Revision Data ID. You cannot delete the Base Data.
Note: Once you have deleted Revision Data, it is not retrievable. Deleted Revision Data is not put into the
dumpster.
To delete a Revision Data ID, follow these steps:
1. From the RevControl menu, select the Delete command. ETAP displays the Delete version of the
Project Revision Control dialog box.

2. From the Revision Data Info drop-down list, select the Revision Data ID you want to delete.
3. Click OK to delete.

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard ETAP Wizards
5.4 ETAP Wizards

ETAP includes time-saving project management tools called the ETAP Wizards, which allow you to
record and run any study at any time. The ETAP Wizards include the Scenario Wizard, Study Wizard,
and Project Wizard. All three are described in more detail below.
Using the ETAP Wizards, you will be able to combine the orthogonal tools (Presentations,
Configurations, and Revision Data), study types, Output Reports, and Study Cases (the loading and
generation system operation factors together with solution parameters) to perform a complete system
study with the click of a button.
Scenario Wizard
The three ETAP Wizards are located on the lower Study Wizard
portion of the System toolbar.
Project Wizard

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard Scenario Wizard
5.4.1 Scenario Wizard

A scenario allows you to group all study options into one place. For this reason, scenarios are useful
anytime you want to record a study for execution. Every project file contains a Scenario Wizard.
Scenarios are created and recorded in the Scenario Wizard and can be run individually at any time. A
project can have an unlimited number of scenarios. Scenarios are composed of the following parameters:
System (Network Analysis or CSD Analysis)

Presentation (for example, one-line diagram, UGS, or CSD)
Revision Data (Base or Revision Data)
Configuration Status (for example, Normal, Stage 1, or TSEvents)
Study Mode (for example, LOAD FLOW or SHORT-CIRCUIT)
Study Case (loading and generation system operation factors and solution parameters)
Study Type (vary depending on Study Mode)
Output Report (vary depending on Study Mode)
When a scenario is run in a project, it will automatically create an Output Report or overwrite an existing
report with the same name.

Scenario Wizard Editor
You can create a scenario either by selecting parameters in the Scenario Wizard or by recording options
you have already selected for your study in the one-line view. To record the options already selected in
your study in the one-line view, follow these steps:
1. Open the Scenario Wizard

2. Click on the New button
ETAP sets up the options in the Scenario Wizard based on the selected Study Case, report, presentation,
revision, and Study Mode.
Scenario
Scenario ID
The Scenario ID is displayed in this text box. You can rename a scenario by deleting the old ID and
entering a new one. The Scenario ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters long. Use the navigator
buttons at the lower left of the dialog box to page through the existing scenarios.
New
Click the New button to save the current setup of the editor as a new study. In effect, a new scenario will
be created based on the existing System, Presentation, Revision Data, Config. Status, Study Mode, Study
Case, and Output Report settings. If there are multiple Study Types under the same Study Mode
parameter, the Study Type will default to the first type.
Note: When you click the New button, the Scenario ID is incremented by one to maintain an unique ID.
You can navigate to the previous or next scenario by using the navigator buttons at the lower left of the
editor.
Copy
Click the Copy button to copy the existing scenario. The Scenario ID is incremented by one to preserve
ID uniqueness. After copying the scenario you can modify and save any of the settings.
Delete
Click the Delete button to delete the selected scenario. There is one exception to this, you cannot delete
the last scenario in the project. There must be at least one scenario in a project.
Rename
Click the Rename button to rename the selected scenario. ETAP will save the System, Presentation,
Revision Data, Config. Status, Study Mode, Study Case, Study Type, and Output Report settings
specified in the Scenario Wizard under the new scenario name.
Run
Click the Run button to execute the selected scenario. ETAP will use the System, Presentation, Revision
Data, Config. Status, Study Mode, Study Case, Study Type, and Output Report settings specified in the
current scenario.

Project & Library
Project File
The path to where the project is stored.
ETAP Default Library

Path to where the ETAP default library is located. Please note that this path location will be dynamically
updated for every release of ETAP once this option is selected. This means that if this option is selected,
the program will automatically select the library provided with the current release of ETAP being used
run the project file (i.e., C:\ETAP 700\LIB\Etaplib700.lib).
Project Specific Library

Path to where the library being used for this project is stored. The program will always look in the
specified path for the library to be used to run this project file.
Parameters
In this group you can select the parameter values ETAP will use when you execute this scenario.
System
This parameter is accessible from the drop-down list. Use it to select either the Network Analysis or CSD
Analysis system. The system selected determines the Study Mode and Study Type parameters that are
available.
Presentation
Use the drop-down list to select any of the presentations available under the system selected. The selected
presentation will be used when the scenario is executed.
Revision Data
Use the drop-down list to select any of the Revision Data IDs available under the system selected. The
selected Revision Data will be used when the scenario is executed.
Config. Status
When you select the Network Analysis System, use the drop-down list to select any of the available
configurations. This option is only available under Network Analysis, since it is the only system that uses
configurations.
Study Mode
Use the Study Mode drop-down list to select one of the available values. The Study Modes available are
dependent on the system selected. If you select CSD Analysis under the System parameter, only CSD is
available under the Study Mode parameter. If you select Network Analysis under the System parameter,
the figure below shows the available Study Modes (and the available study types for each):

Study Case
Study Cases include the loading and generation system operation factors in combination with solution
parameters. Use the drop-down list to select any of the Study Cases available under the selected Study
Mode.
Study Type
Use the Study Type drop-down list to select one of the available values. These study types are dependent
on the System and Study Mode values selected. If you select CSD Analysis under the System parameter,
only Voltage Drop is available under the Study Type parameter. If you select Network Analysis under the
System parameter, the available Study Type parameters depend on the Study Mode parameter selected, as
shown in the figure in the Study Mode Section above.
Output Report
Enter an Output Report name or select a Study Mode and choose one from the drop-down list of reports
that are available there. When a scenario is executed in a project, ETAP will automatically create the
Output Report or overwrite an existing report of the same name.
Remarks
Enter any remarks you want saved with the current scenario.

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard Study Wizard
5.4.2 Study Wizard

Macros reduce the time it takes to run several scenarios. Every project file contains a Study Wizard. The
Study Wizard enables you to sequentially group existing scenarios into study macros. You must have
created the scenarios that will be included in the study macro before you can create the macro. You create
these scenarios using the Scenario Wizard. (See the Scenario Wizard Section above for additional
information.)
A project may include an unlimited number of study macros. When you run a study macro, all of the
scenarios included in it are run, and create new Output Reports or overwrite existing Output Reports,
much the same way as if they were run individually. For example, it is possible to group scenarios related
to load flow or a specific type of load flow into one study macro.
Study Wizard Editor

To create a study macro, follow these steps:
1. Open the Study Wizard.

2. Click in the Scenario box, and then select the scenario you wish to run first.
3. Repeat Step 2 for the next empty row and repeat for each scenario you wish to include.
4. When you are finished selecting scenarios, click OK to save the study macro.
Study Macro
New
Click the New button to create a new study macro.
Note: When you click the New button, the macro ID is incremented by one to maintain a unique ID. You
can navigate to the previous or next scenario by using the navigator buttons at the lower left of the editor.
Delete
Click the Delete button (located at the top of the dialog box) to delete a selected macro. There is one
restriction, you cannot delete the last macro in the project. There must be at least one macro in a project.
Copy
Click the Copy button to copy the existing study macro. A new macro is created with the selected macro
settings. The macro ID is incremented by one to maintain an unique ID. Once you have copied the macro
you can modify and save any of its settings.
Rename
Click the Rename button to rename the selected study macro. ETAP will save the current settings under
the new macro name.
Run
Click the Run button to execute the selected macro. ETAP will use the System, Presentation, Revision
Data, Configuration Status, Study Mode, Study Case, Study Type, and Output Report settings specified in
the first scenario and then move to the next scenario according to the sequence recorded in the macro.
Parameters
Order
This defines the sequence in which the macros will be executed.
Active
Select this to activate the row. Any scenario not activated will be skipped during the execution of the
macro.
Scenario
Select one of the scenarios available in the project from the drop-down list.
Pause
Select Pause to cause macro execution to stop at the current scenario. This option allows you to
automatically stop the execution of the macro when you want to review the results after running the
scenario.

UP / DOWN
Select a row and click the Up and Down buttons to change the sequence in which the scenarios are
executed.
Add
The Add button allows you to add a new row so that a new scenario can be added to the current study
macro.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected scenario from the current study macro. Please note that this
action simply removes the scenario from the current study macro list, but does not remove the scenario
from the project.
Insert
This button allows you to insert a new row above the selected one. This allows you to insert an scenario at
any point in the study macro list.

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard Project Wizard
5.4.3 Project Wizard

The Project Wizard is project independent and is saved within the ETAP folder. It enables the user to
group existing study macros into project macros. You should use a project macro when you have several
projects from which you want to run multiple study macros and their scenarios simultaneously. This
feature automates opening and closing project files and individually executing study macros and their
scenarios.
You create a project macro in the following manner:
1. Open the Project Wizard.

2. Click the macro field, and then select the study macro you want to execute first.
3. Repeat Step 2 for the next empty row and repeat for each study macro you wish to include.
4. When you are finished adding study macros, to save the project macro, click OK.

Project Wizard Editor
Project Wizard
New
Click the New button to create a new project Wizard.
Note: When you click the New button, the Project Wizard ID is incremented by one to maintain a unique
ID. You can navigate to the previous or next project macro by using the navigator buttons at the lower left
of the editor.
Delete
Click the Delete button located at the top of the dialog box to delete the selected project wizard. There is
one restriction, you cannot delete the last project wizard (i.e. there must be at least one project wizard in
the list).
Copy
Click the Copy button to copy the existing project wizard. A new project wizard is created with the
current settings. The project wizard ID is increased by one to preserve ID uniqueness. After copying the
project wizard you can modify it and save any of the its settings.
Rename
Click the Rename button to assign a new name to the selected project wizard. ETAP will save the current
settings under this new project wizard name.

Run
Click the Run button to execute the selected project wizard. ETAP will run the scenario settings specified
in the first study macro then move to the next one according to the sequence recorded in the project
macro.
Study Wizard Selection
Order
Defines the sequence in which the study macros will be executed.
Active
Select Active to activate the row. Uncheck this box if you want to skip the execution of this study macro
for the current project wizard.
Path
Enter the path to the project that contains the study macro you wish to run. If you do not know the path,
use the Browse button on the right to locate the project wizard and the desired study macro.
Project
Enter the name of the project that contains the study macro you wish to run. If you do not know the
project name, use the Browse button on the Right to locate the project wizard and the desired study
macro.
Macro
From the Macro drop-down list, select one of the study macros available in the selected project wizard.
Pause
Select to pause at the current study macro. This option allows you to automatically stop the execution of
the project macro when you want to review the results after running the study macro.
Note: If you include study macros that contain scenarios that have been set to pause during execution of
the study macro, the project macro will also pause after that scenario.
UP / DOWN
Select a row and click these buttons to change the sequence in which the study macros are executed.
Browse
If you do not know the project name that contains the study macro you wish to run, use the Browse button
on the Right to locate the project wizard and the desired study macro.
Delete
The Delete button on the right side of the dialog box will delete the selected row.
Insert
Select a row and click the Insert button to insert a row above the selected row.

Add
Click on this button to add a new row to the current project wizard. This will allow you to specify a new
study macro.
Add Multiple
Click on this button to add multiple study macros to the current project wizard. The following editor
allows you to specify the path of the study macros you want to add. The Include Subfolders allows the
program to search all the subdirectories within the path specified. If there is any study macro in the
subdirectories, it will be added to the current project wizard.

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard Wizard Example
5.4.4 Wizard Example

This example illustrates how you can create macros for previously executed Load Flow, Short-Circuit
(Three-Phase Duty), and Reliability Study Cases and save yourself time later on. For this example, the
project file contains the following items:
Two sets of data (Base and Revision1)

Three configurations
Two different generation categories
Two different loading categories
According to these parameters, the example includes 24 different scenarios for each study.
Scenario Setup
As a first step, you would create the 72 scenarios (24 for each Study Case) using the Scenario Wizard. For
example, one of the scenarios would be a load flow analysis using Base Data, Config1 status, and
maximum loading and generation categories. To create this scenario, you would set it up normally from
within the one-line view, and then open the Scenario Wizard and click New. ETAP will automatically
capture all of the parameters and conditions related to the study.

You would then create the remaining scenarios by repeating the above actions, or by selecting New from
the Scenario Wizard and then specifying the parameters manually.
For example, you would run this load flow study with the following options:
2 Loading Conditions (Summer Load and Winter Load)

2 Two optional settings on Generation (Generators set to Power Factor Control or Voltage
Control)
2 Two options for a Transformer Size (10MVA and 30 MVA)
For the above conditions, you would set up the following options in ETAP:
Two Study Cases:

LF-Case1 set to use Summer Load
LF-Case2 set to use Winter Load
Two Configurations:
Config-1 with generators set to Power Factor Control
Config-2 with generators set to Voltage Control
Two Revisions:
Revision-1 with Transformer set to 10 MVA
Revision-2 with Transformer set to 30 MVA
Given the above settings, in the Load Flow Mode you would select one case from the following, or any
other combination:
LF-Case1, Config-1, Revision1, and name the Output Report (Case1)

If you were to repeat the setup of these cases without the Study Wizard, you would have to remember all
of this setup information. Using the Study Wizard you can create multiple scenarios for each case. For the
example above, there would be one scenario for each combination of options.
Next, using the Study Wizard, you would organize the 72 scenarios into three study macros based upon
Analysis Type. For example, the first study macro would contain the 24 Load Flow scenarios and be
named LF_Study. To create the LF_Study macro, you would open the Study Wizard, click New, and then
add the 28 Load Flow scenarios.

The other two study macros can be created by clicking New and adding the respective scenarios.
Next, you would link the three study macros, by opening the Project Wizard and adding the three study
macros.

After completing all of the required steps for the ETAP Wizard, you have the choice of running all
scenarios using the Project Wizard, running only the scenarios related to a specific study using the Study
Wizard, or running one or more scenarios individually using the Scenario Wizard.
The more configurations and studies you have within a project, the more valuable ETAP Wizards will
become for you in terms of increased efficiency and time savings, time that might otherwise be expended
performing repetitive setup tasks.

Multi-Dimension Database & Wizard Output Database Comparison
5.4.5 Output Database Comparison Program

The Output Database Comparison Program (DB Compare Program) is a console designed to compare two
Microsoft Access Database (MDB) files as instructed by a third MDB file (instruction database). This
console has been designed to interface with the scenarios in ETAP to allow the comparison of current
ETAP output database results against results from a benchmark Output Report database. The benchmark
results could have been generated using a previous version or the same version of ETAP.
This comparison console can be used for different purposes:
1) It can be used as a raw database comparison utility. In this form, it can compare all the tables
inside a database (current results) against the same tables in another database (benchmark).
Depending on the results of the comparisons, the program will generate pass/fail reports for each
table/database being compared.
2) It can be used as an automatic validation tool to compare ETAP results generated in one computer
against the same results generated from a different machine. This can be the case with the
installation tests required for ETAP under a high impact software program (i.e. nuclear grade
software application ETAP installation tests).
3) It can be used to compare the deviation on ETAP results between different scenarios (i.e.
deviation caused by using different Study Case parameters, configurations, revisions, preferences
(options) etc.
The DB compare program has the following components:
1) The Output Report database file: This Output Report database file is created by ETAP upon
execution of the current scenario.
2) The benchmark report database file: This Output Report database is the benchmark file. The DB
compare console compares the output database against this database to create the comparison
results.
3) The comparison instruction database file: This database contains instructions on the comparison
that should be executed. This instruction database tells the DB compare console what tables to
compare and/or which tables to skip. It also has command instructions on how each table should
be compared as well as what deviation is allowed.
4) The comparison results databases: These databases are created at the time the output database and
the benchmark database are compared. They contain the specific results of the comparison
including pass/fail items and the reasons for the failures (deviation report and global summary
report databases).
Output Data Comparison Editor

The Compare Output (Output Database Comparator) Editor can be accessed from the Scenario Wizard
window.

Output Data Comparison Checkbox

You must check the Output Data Comparison checkbox in order to enable the Edit button. Clicking
on the Edit button will bring up Compare Output Editor:
Compare
The Output Report comparison is launched automatically from this button. You can launch the
comparison by clicking on this button once you have setup the Compare Output Editor options and you
have specified which Output Report Microsoft access database is to be considered the benchmark in the
comparison.
Edit
The edit button opens the Compare Output Editor window. This is where all the comparison
preferences and instruction databases can be specified.
View
The view button allows you to quickly open the Output Report comparison result database. This database
contains the results of the comparison.
Benchmark File Path

This path shows the name and directory which contains the benchmark Output Report database. This path
is display only and can be changed from the Compare Output Editor window.

Compare Output Editor (DB Compare Console)
Database Comparison
The Compare Output Editor allows you to setup the DB compare program so that it can automatically
compare the newly generated Output Report database from the scenario against the benchmark database.
Selected Report
This is the path of the current output result database to be generated by the current scenario. Once the
scenario finishes generating this report database, it will be compared to the benchmark database. This
path is automatically selected by the program once the scenario is configured and you have selected an
Output Report name for the particular scenario.
Benchmark Report
This is the Output Report database which serves as the benchmark in the comparison. This means that the
comparison is taken as:

View (selected report)

This button allows you to open the selected Output Report database. Once this button is clicked, the
program opens the report database using Microsoft Access. This serves as a quick way to open the
selected Output Report database (instead of using windows explorer and/or launching it directly from MS
access).
Browse (for benchmark report path)

This button opens a browse window so that the path to the benchmark Output Report database can be
specified.
View (benchmark report)

This button allows you to open the selected benchmark Output Report database. Once this button is
clicked, the program opens the report database using Microsoft Access. This serves as a quick way to
open the selected benchmark Output Report database (instead of using windows explorer and/or
launching it directly from MS access).
Comparison Results
This section allows you to specify the name and location of the databases which contain the results of the
Output Report database comparisons.
Deviation Report (Comparison Results Database)

This path points to the location of the database which contains the detail results of the comparison
between the output and benchmark report databases. This path is automatically selected by the program
faster setup; however, it can be modified by specifying a new path and name by clicking on the Browse
button.
Browse (deviation report)

This button opens a browse window in which you can specify the name and location of the Deviation
Report database (comparison results database).
View (deviation report)

This button allows you view the Deviation Report (comparison results database) using Microsoft Access.
Global Summary (Pass/Fail) Report

This path points to the location of the database which contains the global results of the comparison
between the output and benchmark report databases. This path is automatically selected by the program
and it defaults to the ETAP installation directory under a file called GlobalSummaryReport.mdb. The
DB Compare Console will write the location path of the Global Summary Report Database into the
ETAPS.ini file. Once this is done, all the global comparison results for each scenario will be created in
that location. This means that if you set this path and report name, the program will utilize it for any
scenario unless it is changed again.
Browse (Global Summary)

This button opens a browse window in which you can specify the name and location of the Global
Summary (Pass/Fail) Report Database.
View (Global Summary)

This button allows you view the Deviation Report (comparison results database) using Microsoft Access.

Options
This section has the purpose of providing global comparison options for the DB Compare Console. These
options allow you to skip comparing some parameters such as project names, database versions, and dates
which do not need to be compared since they are not part of any calculation results.
Skip Records that Pass with Deviation < 0.1%

If this box is selected, The DB Compare Program will not report any comparison result whose deviation
is less than 0.1%. This means that all records with a percent deviation less than 0.1% automatically will
pass and will not be reported in the deviation report. The records with a deviation percentage higher than
0.1 % will be reported as failures in the deviation report. It is recommended to use a default value of 0.1%
as the default for the comparison values to allow for different calculation precision and small deviations
in significant figures.
Skip Project Information

The project information for the load flow Output Report database will not be compared. Please note that
this option only applies to load flow Output Report database. The project information is typically
included inside a table called Header. This checkbox instructs the program to automatically skip the
comparison of the fields inside this table. However, for some other modules, the project information may
be contained inside of a table with slightly different name like HeaderRA, HeaderTS, etc. and thus this
option only applies to LF Output Report databases.
The instruction database provided with ETAP 7.0.0 (or current version) already provides specific
instructions for skipping the comparison of the project information for all modules including load flow.
Because of this situation, this option may not have any impact on the comparison results.
Instructions Database
This section allows you to specify the name and location of the specific comparison instructions for the
DB Compare Console. The comparison instructions are provided in the form of a Microsoft Access
Database and also certain comparison instructions can be entered directly through the command-line
instructions (for advanced users)
Instruction Database Path

The instruction database contains the instructions for comparing the Output Report databases. The DB
Compare program has a default comparison instruction database provided with ETAP 7.0.0 (or current
version). It is located under C:\ETAP 700 (or current version)\ DB_CompareInstr.mdb. This
instruction comparison database has been configured by ETAP engineers to assist in the comparison of
ETAP results.
Browse (Instruction database)

This button opens a browse window in which you can specify the name and location of the Comparison
Instruction Database. This path only needs to be specified once since the DB Compare program stores this
location in the ETAPS.INI file. The program will use the same set of instructions for all the scenarios that
are executed (from the Study Wizard or Project Wizard).
Command-Line Instructions
This command line input field allows you to provide specific instructions to the DB Compare Console for
comparing the results and benchmark databases.
The following command can be added in this version of the DB Compare Console:

-daction = Instructs the DB Compare program to compare only the tables listed in the comparison
instruction database Comparator Table. If a table is not listed in the Comparator table, then the program
will not compare it. This command can be very useful when you do not want to specify each table in the
comparator table (either to skip or compare), and you only want to compare the tables for which you add
specific instructions.
Comparison Instruction Database Setup

This section describes the commands which can be setup inside of the comparison instruction database.
This database contains two tables. The first table is called the Comparator table and it contains the
specific comparison instructions. The second table is called the LookupTable and it contains
translations for each of the table column headers (field names). These translations attempt to give a more
meaningful description of the data in each field (since the database may be abbreviated or has not so
meaningful names which may be hard to understand).
Comparator Table
This table has the following fields: TableName, FieldName, Action, CompType,
CompMethod, CompVariance and DoOrderBy.
The structure of the table and the possible commands which can be entered into this table are shown
below:
Comp Comp
TableName FieldName Action CompType DoOrderBy
Method Variance
Name of the N/A (leave C (Compare) N/A (leave N/A N/A fieldname1, fieldname2,
table in the blank) S (Skip) blank) (leave (leave fieldname3
database to CSN blank) blank)
which this (compare Applies to table entry only.
entry skip new) Specifies the sort order of the
applies. table in the Results and
Benchmark database. If no
entry, the primary key is used if
there is one. If no primary key,
the program guesses. Add
NOSORT for side-by-side
comparison.

The following is a sample database comparison instruction Comparator table:
The following indicates how you would interpret the instructions on the second line of the Comparator
table:
The table name field specifies the name of the table for which the specific instructions apply. The action
field indicates that the AlertDeviceSum table will be compared based on CSN criteria. CSN stands for
compare but skip new. This means that this table will be compared but any new fields in the results table
which do not exist in the benchmark table will be ignored. Only the fields that exist in both the results and
benchmark Output Report database Alert table are to be compared.
The DoOrderBy field indicates which fields can be used by the program to create unique records to be
compared. In this case, the DeviceID and DeviceType fields can be used to establish unique records
for the comparison. If no unique records can be created (i.e. the table does not contain any fields which
can be used as unique keys to identify each row in the table), then the DB compare program cannot make
a comparison and the end result will be a failure in comparing this table. However, another command
called NOSORT can be added along with any field name to tell the DB compare program to continue
the comparison of this table on a record by record basis without establishing unique keys.
The NOSORT command will work in most cases as long as the sorting of the rows in the result and
benchmark tables remains the same. If the sorting is different, then this will result in a failure in
comparing the table.
Actions:
C = Compare = specifies that a table is to be compared. If there is any new field in the results database
which does not exist in the benchmark database, then the comparison will result in a failure.
CSN = Compare Skip New = Specifies that a table is to be compared, but any new fields which exist only
in the results database and do not exist in the benchmark database will be skipped. This may help to
compare tables between different versions of ETAP. In newer versions of ETAP, new fields may have
been added to a particular table. Since these fields do not exist in previous versions, there is no need to
compare them (or there is nothing to compare against).
S = Skip = specifies that this table is not to be compared. This can be specified for any table which
contains project information or data which is not calculation related.

Field Name = Specifies the name of the table for the specific instructions
CompType = Specifies the type of comparison to be performed. This value can be left blank. Numbers
are treated as float comparisons and text as string comparisons.
CompMethod = Specifies the method of specifying the deviation results. This value can be left blank.
The default for this value is percent.
CompVariance = Specifies the deviation allowed for this table. This value can be left blank. The
variation allowed can be specified globally from the Compare Output Editor for each scenario. The
default is 0.1%.
DoOrderBy = DoOrderBy applies to tables only. The Do Order By field allows you to specify which
columns can be used to establish unique records in a table. If DoOrderBy includes an entry of NOSORT,
a different algorithm is used for selecting what rows to compare. NOSORT causes the DB Compare
program to start at the top of the table and compare the rows of each table in order, as if it were looking at
side-by-side printouts of the two tables. The purpose of the NOSORT instruction is to handle table
comparisons that have no unique keys.
LookupTable
The lookup tables in the comparison instruction database serve the purpose of translating the field names
(column names) to more meaningful descriptions.
As you can see in the image above, the LookupTable contains different output names for the field names
in different ETAP Output Report database. As an example, the table called BusArcFlash in the report
database is called Arc Flash Analysis and Summary in the Comparison Results Reports.
You can fully customize the comparison instruction table or the lookup table to whatever preferences you
may have by simply replacing the values.
Deviation Report (Comparison Result Database)

This deviation results or comparison results database contains the results of all the comparisons
performed by the DB Compare program. This database is divided into three tables and reports:
Summary Results

Table Results
Detail Results
The DB compare program names the deviation report by default using the name of the result database
being compared. For example if the results database being compared is called LFReport, then the
deviation report will be automatically named LFReport_DBCompare.mdb. The browse button next to
the deviation report path can be used to change the name and location of the Deviation Report.
Summary Results
This table/report contains a summary of the comparisons for this test case. It indicates an overall pass or
failure for the comparison on the result and benchmark Output Report databases.
Summary Report

Test Results Summary Table
This table/report can be accessed from the view button on the Compare Output and/or Scenario Wizard
Editors.
Table Results
This table/report contains a summary of pass/fail results for each compared table.
Table Comparison Summary Report
Table Comparison Results
This table/report can be accessed from the view button on the Compare Output and/or Scenario Wizard
Editors.

Detail Results
This table/report contains detailed summary results for each comparison performed for each field in every
table compared. This summary can be shortened to only include the results with a deviation higher than
the specified value. This can be accomplished by selecting the option to skip records that pass with a
deviation < %Dev. This option is located in the Options section of the Compare Output Editor.
Detailed Results Report
Detailed Results Table
Global Summary Report Database

The Global Summary Report database contains the results of the comparison for the entire database. If all
the tables compared in the Output Report database for a particular scenario match the benchmark tables,

then a Pass result will be written in the global summary database for this scenario. In the same fashion,
if any the tables in the database fails the comparison, then the overall result will be a **FAIL**.
The Global Summary Report can be accessed directly once the comparison process is complete by
clicking on the View button next to the Global Summary (Pass/Fail) Report path.
The image below shows the global summary report and table:
Global Summary Results Report
Global Summary Results Table
Setup of DB Compare for Example-Ansi

ETAP 7.0.0 (or current version) has a sample project called Example-ANSI. This project has been
configured to run for multiple scenarios on different ETAP modules. This section shows you step by step
how to configure the DB Compare program to compare all the scenarios in this example against the
benchmark reports contained within a directory called output. This example assumes that ETAP has been
installed under the default installation directory C:\ETAP 700 (or current version).
1) Open the Example-Ansi project:

2) Open the Scenario Wizard Editor and open the Output Compare Editor by clicking on the Edit
button for any scenario. In this case 30Cyc-Un:
3) The Database comparison section has been configured to automatically compare the selected
report 30Cyc-Unbal.SA2 against the benchmark report with the same name inside of the
Output directory as shown in the image below:

4) By default the deviation report should also be named 30Cyc-Unbal_DBCompare.mdb.
5) By default the Global Summary Report field will be blank. Click on the Browse button next to the
path for the global summary and name as follows: C\ETAP 700 (or current
version)\GlobalSummaryReport.mdb.
6) The options to skip records that pass with deviation less than 0.1% and to skip project
information should be selected.
7) The name and location of the instruction database may be blank. Click on the Browse button to
specify the following name and location C:\ETAP 700 (or current
version)\DB_CompareInstructions.mdb.

8) At this point you can close the Output Compare Editor and Scenario Editor. Click OK to save all
of your changes.
9) Open the Study Wizard. Select Phase-1 Macro and execute it (click on Run button). You must
wait until all the scenarios finish running and all the comparisons have completed. The DB
Compare program places some icons on the task bar during execution. You should also wait until
all the icons have been removed from the task bar before opening the global summary or
deviation results databases. The comparisons could take a considerable amount of time depending
on the size of the Output Report databases being compared.
You should wait until all the scenarios

have been executed and all the DB
compare comparisons have completed
(i.e. there is no more DB Compare
icons on the task bar)
10) You can reduce the number of scenarios to be executed by creating a new study macro or by
simply de-activating the scenarios that do not apply to your license. For example, you may only
want to run load flow and short-circuit calculation in one study macro.
11) If your installation directory is different from C:\ETAP 700 (or current version), then you may
need to reselect the name and location of the benchmark Output Report databases for each
scenario you want to run with the DB Compare tool. To do this, simply click on the Browse

button and click on select the name of the benchmark report. The best way to setup the
comparisons is to place all the benchmark reports inside of a directory called output inside of
the current project that contains the reports you want to compare.
Click on this button to select the benchmark report to compare against the currently selected Output
Report.

Chapter 6
User Access Management

ETAP provides program security by relying on two tiers of user access control. The first level is
controlled by the operating system under which ETAP is running (Windows 2003, 2008, XP, Vista, and
Windows 7). In Windows 2003, 2008, XP, Vista, and 7 the user must be an authorized user as determined
by the operating system administrator.
ETAP provides the second level of access control by assigning one or more of the nine access level
permissions to an authorized user for each individual project. These access levels are listed in the
following table.

User Access Management Overview
Access Level Off-Line On-Line

User Access Management User Access Management
(ETAP) (ETAP Real-Time)
Administrator X X
Project Editor X X
Base Editor X -
Revision Editor X -
Checker X -
Browser X -
Librarian X -
Controller - X
Operator - X
Users may be assigned one, all, or any combination of access level permissions, but each user must have
at least one of the access level permissions to open a project. The level of access and responsibility are
different for each access level. A user may access a project under only one permission level at a time.
If a password is not required for a project, ETAP will automatically default to the highest assigned
permission level for that user and open the project. While passwords are recommended for optimal
security, they are not required.
The administrator is responsible for assigning and maintaining the status of the other users and their
permissions and passwords. As an administrator, you do not have access to the project one-line diagram,
underground system, or editors. The first level of authority on a given project is project editor, which has
access to all functions except disabling accounts and changing passwords.
Note: Project Editors and Base Editors cannot serve as checkers for engineering (equipment) data that
they have added or modified. You can have access to the same project as a checker (providing checker
access level permission has been assigned to you), but you cannot check any data that you have modified
under your user name.
The ETAP libraries, which are stored in Microsoft compound files, are opened in read-only mode for all
access levels except project editor and librarian. A project editor and librarian can open these libraries in
read/write mode. Consequently, only one user can access a library at any given time. Changes made to the
ETAP libraries are not permanent until the user saves the entire library, either explicitly or when
prompted while exiting the program.
ETAP project data are stored via ODBC (in non-exclusive mode) and cannot have multiple readers or
writers at the same time. ETAP data is structured in such a way so that transactioning support by the
database is not required.
This chapter consists of the following sections:
Access Levels
User Management
Creating a New Project File
Opening an Existing Project File

User Access Management Access Levels
6.1 Access Levels

When an ETAP project file is created or opened, several functions can be performed on each device or the
entire project. The use of these functions varies for different access levels. These functions are
categorized into three groups in the following tables.
Group 1 Functions Group 2 Functions

Move elements Add (place) elements
Change element sizes Cut (delete) elements to dumpster
Change element symbols Copy elements to dumpster
Change element annotation orientation Paste elements from dumpster
Edit engineering properties Move elements from dumpster
Change operating status Connect elements
Hide or show protection devices Purge elements from dumpster

Auto route connections Re-sizing elements (UGS)
Change bus to node symbols or the reverse Merge data revisions to base data
Delete data revisions Graphical adjustment of Star Views
Merge data revisions to other revisions
Group 3 Functions
Change Phase/Ground mode in Star View.
Compute Time Difference in Star View.
View Alerts.
View Device Setting Reports.
6.1.1 Administrator
The administrator access level is dedicated to user management only. When you are logged on as an
administrator, you cannot access projects for editing. An administrator can access any project file for
administration purposes, but is unable to edit the project. The administrator is in effect the project
supervisor responsible for establishing and maintaining all user access control on a specific project by
project basis. The administrator can add, modify, or delete user accounts, passwords, and access levels.
Administrators cannot delete themselves, or another user, while they have a project open and running.
Once assigned, only the default administrator, Admin, may delete a user from the administrator
permission.

Note: If two or more administrators have been assigned to a project, one can delete the other.
Every project must have at least one user with administrator access. This is a permanent administrator
with the user ID Admin and they cannot be deleted from the project. The password for Admin defaults to
password when you create a new project.
Note: If a project requires a password, Admin is the only administrator, and if you have changed and then
forgotten the Admin password, you cannot add, delete, or modify user access levels for this projectthat
is, you cannot open the project. ETAP has no backdoor method for circumventing this access level
lockout. Therefore, either do not require an Admin password, do not change the password, or make sure
you have multiple administrators and keep a record of all project passwords in a secure location for future
reference.
6.1.2 Project Editor

The Project Editor has the highest access level to project files. When a new project file is created, ETAP
will automatically log you on as a Project Editor.
In the On-line Mode (ETAP Real-Time), the Project Editor can construct the project database, create and
audit field equipment software interfaces, and upload the database to the ETAP Real-Time server. The
Project Editor can perform any function involved with the engineering, installation, or operation of ETAP
Real-Time, including taking the system off-line and performing control operations (if equipped). The
Project editor is the highest access level for editing project files.
Function Can Change Cannot Change

User access management X
Project data/defaults X
Base data X
Revision data X
Group 1 changes X
Group 2 changes X
Group 3 changes X
Configuration status X
Library data X
Library path X
6.1.3 Base Editor

The Base Editor has read/write access to the base revision of the project. Base Editor access is more
restricted than Project Editor access, however. The Base Editor cannot change the library data or access
the user access management functions.

Base data X
Revision data X


Group 1 changes X
Group 2 changes X
Group 3 changes X
Library data X
Library path X
6.1.4 Revision Editor

Revision Editor access is more restricted than Base Editor access. The Revision Editor can change
revision data only. The Revision Editor cannot change base revision data. And, similar to base editors,
revision editors cannot change the library data or access the user access management functions.

Base data X
Revision data X
Group 1 changes X
Group 2 changes X*
Group 3 changes X
Library data & path X
Note: You must access a project as a Project Editor or Base Editor to add or rearrange the one-line
diagram or the underground raceway systems. Revision data reflects the difference (delta) between the
engineering properties in the base and revision data. Therefore, if a new substation needs to be added and
studied for future installation, you need to be logged on as a Base Editor to add it to the system. The
elements in this substation can be flagged Out of Service for the base data so they will not affect the
calculation results of the existing system. *Note: an exception to this is that Star Views can be graphically
adjusted for revision data and not for base data in Revision Editor.
6.1.5 Checker
The checker access level is provided to allow verification of changes to project engineering properties and
libraries for both base and revision data.
Function Can Check Can Change Cannot Change

Base data Yes X
Revision data Yes X
Group 1 changes X
Group 2 changes X

Function Can Check Can Change Cannot Change

Group 3 changes X
Library data X
Library path X
When you log on as a checker, ETAP displays the Checking Information dialog box. (See the figure on
the left below.) You use this dialog box to verify that all changes to the engineering properties and library
data are correct.
Note: If you are the user who inserted data or made changes to the data, you cannot also be the checker
for that data. Another user with a different user ID will have to check your changes.
Checker Dialog Box for Cable 11 Before and After Checked by a User
Edited By
This group displays the user ID (Name field) and the date that the selected element properties or libraries
were last changed (Date field). In this example, the last user who modified the element Cable11 was OTI
on 4-17-2000.
Note: The user OTI might have changed one or a number of properties of Cable11.

Checked By
Once you click the Check button, your user ID and the date are entered in the Name and Date fields as the
checker for this element. If you edited the element or library data, you cannot also be the checker for the
data. Another user with a different user ID will have to logon and check the changes.
Project
Select the Project option to verify the changed element properties of the currently opened project. When
you select this option, the Element Type, Skip Checked Elements, and Date options are displayed in the
Filter By group.
Library
Select the Library option to verify changed libraries in the project library. When you select this option for
the first time you will open the project as a checker, and ETAP displays the Select a Project Library
dialog box.
Once you select and open a project library, its libraries are displayed in a window adjacent to the
Checking Information dialog box. Once you have selected a project library, ETAP displays the library
window automatically when you logon as a checker and select the Library option.

When viewing the Library window, libraries that are colored red have been changed but have not been
checked. Libraries with magenta colored icons have been checked, but have changed sub-libraries. To
find changed sub-libraries, expand magenta colored libraries until you find libraries with red icons. For
descriptions of the different icons in the Library window, see the table below:
Icon Library Status Sub-library Status

Magenta with gray box Unchanged At least one not checked
Magenta with blue check Checked At least one not checked
Magenta with green check Just checked (can still be unchecked) Checked or not checked
Red Unchecked Checked or not checked
Red with green check Just checked (can still be unchecked) Checked or not checked
White with black check Checked No unchecked sub-libraries
White with gray box Unchanged Checked
When you select a library in the Library window, ETAP will display that librarys information in the
Checking Information dialog box. Also, if you have selected a library with no sub-libraries and the
Display Editors option is selected, ETAP will display the editor for the library.

The data and options that have been changed for that library are displayed in red in the Library Editor, so
that you know what the last editor changed. If you have verified the changes for the selected library, click
the Check button in the Checking Information dialog box. ETAP changes the display of the data and
options in the editor from red to black and the Library icon in the Library window according to the table
above.
If you wish to uncheck the library, click the Check button again. You cannot uncheck a library after you
have selected another library in the Library window, however.
Note: If ETAP is not displaying changed data in red, you need to edit the project setup. Select Options
from the ETAP Project menu. In the Editor Options group of the Project Options dialog box, check the
Display Changed Data in RED option box, and click OK.
Filter By
You can select the project elements that you wish to check using the options in this group. The options in
this group only display when you select the Project option. If you select the Library option, use the
Library window to verify changed libraries.
Element Type
Select the element type you wish to display in the list box above the Check and Check All buttons. The
list of element types includes the following:
All AC&DC Elements Dumpster

All DC Elements Individual AC Elements
All CSD Elements Individual AC-DC Elements
All Cable Pulling Systems Individual DC Elements
All Ground Grids Individual UGS Elements
All Generators & Loads Composite Motors

All Branches Composite Networks

All Protective Devices
All Meters
If you have the Display Editors option (see below) selected, ETAP displays the editor dialog box for the
specific project element you have selected in the list box above the Check and Check All buttons.
Skip Checked Elements

If you do not want to view elements that have already been checked just select this option.
Date
Select this option to display a range of dates during which changes have been made. You can change the
date ranges by clicking Select Dates and entering new dates, as shown in the dialog box below:
Display Editors
Use this command to display the editors for the project elements or libraries that you are checking.
Changes or modifications that have been made to individual fields are displayed in red in the editor dialog
box.
Note: If ETAP is not displaying changed data in red, you need to change the project setup. From the
ETAP Project menu, select Options. In the Editor Options group of the Project Options dialog box, check
the Display Changed Data in RED option box and click OK.
Check/Uncheck Data
When you click the Check button, the color of the check icon changes to blue and a red check mark
appears inside the corner box. If you click again, the selected element or library will be unchecked.
However, once you select another project element or library, you will no longer be able to uncheck the
previously checked item.
Check All
Click this button to check all the changed project elements or libraries. ETAP displays the dialog box
shown below that allows you to confirm that you wish to check them all.

If you are checking project elements (Project option selected), clicking this button checks all the elements
for your selected element type. If you are checking libraries (Library option selected), clicking this button
checks the library selected in the Library window and all its sub-libraries.
Controlled Dumpster
The controlled dumpster is a mechanism for locking information into the dumpster. This feature becomes
active only when the ETAP project is password-enabled.
When ETAP cuts any elements from a UGS or OLV, the dumpster cell to which the elements are
assigned is designated as a controlled dumpster cell. But, this controlled dumpster cell designation has no
meaning unless the project is password-enabled.
When passwords are enabled, the controlled dumpster is treated as a special entity with the following
attributes:
1. The controlled dumpster is identified as a controlled dumpster by the designation (C) or (CC) in its
title (in the Dumpster list window). These designations have the following meanings:
The designation C (Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a controlled
dumpster cell which is not checked. These cells cannot be purged until they are checked.
The designation CC (Checked Controlled Dumpster Cell) is used to indicate that this is a
controlled dumpster cell that has been checked by a checker. A user with project or base editor
permissions can purge these cells.
2. The background color of a (C) controlled dumpster is the color set in the command line Controlled
Dumpster Background Color (UGS Elements) or (One-line Elements). The background displays this
specified color only when the project setting has Display Changed Data in RED selected in the
Project Options dialog box or the project user is a checker.
3. When moving a cell from a controlled dumpster to the one-line diagram or UGS, two behaviors are
exhibited:
If the controlled dumpster cell is a (C) dumpster, the elements are moved as normalno special
action is taken to flag elements checked or unchecked. The dumpster cell is then destroyed
normally.
If the controlled dumpster cell is a (CC) dumpster, the elements are moved as normal but, in
addition, all element property values are flagged as unchecked, (and will be displayed in red in
the editors.) This is, for all practical purposes, identical to placing a new element on the one-line
diagram or UGS. The dumpster cell is then destroyed normally.
4. When in checker mode, the controlled dumpster cells appear in the checkers list and can be checked
as any other element can be checked. The act of checking a controlled dumpster changes its
designation from (C) to (CC). This also sets the dumpster background color back to normal.
5. A Project Editor (or Base Editor) cannot purge a controlled dumpster with designation (C). The
Project Editor can purge a controlled dumpster with designation (CC). The checker must check a
controlled dumpster cell before it can be purged.

6.1.6 Browser
Working at the Browser access level does not allow any modification of the project or library data. When
you have this access level you can view the one-line diagram and underground raceway systems, browse
the editors, and print, but the attached libraries cannot be opened. If you try to access Star Views with this
access level, only fixed-point curves will be displayed.

Base data X
Revision data X
Group 1 changes X
Group 2 changes X
Group 3 changes X
Library data X
Library path X
6.1.7 Librarian
The librarian can browse the project file and modify library data.

Base data X
Revision data X
Group 1 changes X
Group 2 changes X
Group 3 changes X
Library data X
Library path X
6.1.8 Operator
Operator access level is used for On-line Mode (Real-Time). Operator access level allows you to
acknowledge alarms, playback system actions, and run simulation studies (predicting system response to
operator actions) based on the latest system or stored data.

6.1.9 Controller
Controller access level is used for On-line Mode (ETAP Real-Time). Controller access level authorizes
you to control, take elements out of service, set operating limits, set alarm levels, and set ETAP Real-
Time to supervisory control. The controller possesses all the permissions of an operator.
Acting as a controller, you can perform operations for monitoring and control of the electric system, but
you are restricted from reloading the ETAP Real-Time server database. A controller can take the ETAP
Real-Time system off-line, save the console database, perform electric system control operations, and set
pin protective devices and meters.

User Access Management User Management
6.2 User Management

ETAP displays the User Manager dialog box when you log on as an administrator.
As an administrator you can add, modify, and delete user accounts, but you cannot access the project
itself. To access the project, you must close the User Manager dialog box and re-open the project with
another access level. There is a permanent administrator with the user ID Admin that cannot be deleted
from the project. The password for Admin defaults to password when you create a new project.
6.2.1 Change Password

Click this button to change the password of a user. Passwords can be up to 12 characters long.

6.2.2 Disable Passwords

Click this button to enable, disable, or change the password requirements for this project.
Project files can be set up with or without user password requirements. Passwords are recommended for
optimal security. If a password is required, every user must enter their user name and password before
accessing the project. If a user forgets their user name or password, the project administrator must reset
the passwords. If a password is not required for a project, ETAP will automatically add the user name to
the user list for the project and default to the highest assigned permission level (Project Editor) and open
the project.
Every project must have at least one user with administrator access. This permanent administrator is
assigned a user ID Admin that cannot be deleted from the project. When you create a new project, the
default password for Admin is password. You can log on at any time as Admin to open the User
Manager dialog box to disable or enable the password requirement.
6.2.3 User Info

Clicking the User Info button displays the User Information dialog box. This dialog box allows you to
add new users or modify the status of existing users (full name and password), and assign various
combinations of access level permissions. This dialog box is similar to the new project dialog box, except
that this version has added features that allow you, as administrator, to delete users and disable user
accounts.
User Name
The log on name of the user is displayed here. The user name cannot be changed in this field.

Full Name
Enter or modify the full name of the user here. This information will not be printed in any report and is
only available to the project administrator. It allows you to identify the users currently using ETAP.
Description
This field describes the type of user to allow further identification by the project administrator. The
information will not be printed in any report. For projects that do not require a password, the default for
this field is Instant User.
Access Level Permission

This allows you to assign the access levels permitted for this user, which could be as few as one level, or
access to all available levels.
OK
Saves the information you have entered on the page to the access list.
Delete
This button is active when you bring up the User Information dialog box from the User Manager dialog
box. The Delete button is used to delete a specified user from the user list.
Add User
The Add User dialog box is similar to the User Information dialog box except you use it to enter a new
users name and password and assign permission levels.
6.2.4 ODBC Parameters

Driver Options
Buffer Size
The Buffer Size option allows you to set the capacity of the internal buffer, in kilobytes, that is used to
transfer data to and from ETAP to an associated project database. The ETAP project default for the Buffer
Size is 4096.
Page Timeout
The Page Timeout option allows you to specify the time (in tenths of a second) that an unused page of
data remains in the buffer before being removed. The ETAP project default for the Page Timeout is 600.
Database
The User ID and Password are associated with the database itself. If you open the database using a third
party database manager (such as Microsoft Access), the User ID and Password is needed to open the
database. This User ID and Password are different from the ETAP logon and password, which enable you
to open and edit the ETAP project.
User ID
Enter the User ID in this field that the third party database manager will need to access the ETAP project
database.
Password
Enter the Password in this field that the third party database manager will need, in combination with the
User ID, to gain access to the ETAP project database.
Oracle Database
Enter the Connect String (DBQ) in this field to associate the ETAP project database with your Oracle file
server system. The default DBQ is setup for a personal Oracle database. If your Oracle database is
different, then you must specify the correct DBQ here. Contact your database administrator for these
parameters.

User Access Management Creating a New Project File
6.3 Creating a New Project File

To create a new project, select New Project from the File menu, or click the first button on the Project
toolbar.
Project File
Name
Enter a name for the new project file, which can be up to 30 characters long. ETAP will not allow you to
enter illegal characters in the project name.
Directory
ETAP automatically sets up a subdirectory in the ETAP directory for your new project. If you wish to
place your project in a different subdirectory, click Browse to locate and specify the directory.
Unit System
Select English or Metric as the default unit system for your project.
Note: you can change the unit system default from English to Metric, or vice versa, for a project at any
time. However, the defaults for each element type must then be changed individually. .
Password
Project files can be set up with or without passwords, but the use of passwords is recommended for
optimal security. When a password is required, all users must enter their user names and passwords before
accessing the project. If a password is not required for a project, ETAP will automatically add a new user
name to the user list when they open that project and assign them the highest permission level (project
editor). If you store project files locally on your computer and you can control access to your computer
and project files, you do not need to use the password function.
ODBC
Driver
Select MS Access, Oracle, or SQL Server from the list box.
Note: The ODBC driver must be installed on your computer with the data source set to otiaccess.
Advanced Parameters
See Section 5.2.5, Advanced ODBC Parameters.

User Access Management Opening an Existing Project File
6.4 Opening an Existing Project File

1. To open an existing project file, select Open from the File menu, or click the second button on the
Project toolbar.
2. In the Open Project File dialog box, select a file with an .OTI extension. ETAP displays the Log on
dialog box.
6.4.1 Logon
Enter your user name and password (if required) in the log on dialog box. The user name which you used
to log on to Windows (XP or 2003 or Vista) is placed here as the default. If you have changed your user
name for this project, you will need to use that name to log on to this project.

If this project does not require a password and you are accessing it for the first time, you will be logged in
automatically as a project editor and will be added to the project user list as an Instant User. If your user
name is listed in the project user list (because you have opened this project before or the administrator has
added your name to the user list), then you will be logged in with the highest access level that is available
to you (for example, project editor, base editor, revision editor, or checker).
Project File
Name
Enter the file name of the project you wish to work on.
Path
This is the complete path to the project file you wish to open.
Compact Database when Saving

The Compact Database feature will optimize the database, removing discarded information and all
elements that have been deleted from the Dumpster, as well any data that is no longer being used by
ETAP.
When deleting or updating a Microsoft Access database, the database will become fragmented. This
feature is used to defragment and compact the database. In most cases the size of the database is reduced.
Compacting a database will not remove columns of information added to the ETAP database through a
third party database manager such as Microsoft Access.
You may also compact a Microsoft Access database by accessing the ODBC Data Source Administrator
dialog box through the ODBC Control Panel in Windows. For more information, see Section 2.3,
Configuring ODBC. When you select the Compact Database option, the ODBC Data Source
Administrator automatically compacts your Microsoft Access database when the project is closed.
If your project requires a password, ETAP prompts you to open the project file with one of the access
levels available to you. Only those access levels assigned to you by the project administrator are available
for selection; the others are grayed out and unavailable. Select an access level (with the exception of
administrator, if it is available) in the Select Access Level dialog box. Click OK. ETAP will then open the
project file.

Note: If you have only one access level permission, ETAP does not prompt you for access level selection
and automatically logs you on with your access level.

Chapter 7
Printing and Plotting
ETAP provides you with a variety of options for printing and plotting one-line diagrams, Star device
coordination plots, underground raceway systems (UGS), control system diagrams (CSD), output reports,
plots, input data, and libraries.

Printing & Plotting Overview
The table below provides an overview of how to use the printing and plotting features described in this
Section.
This section Describes how to Using
Schedule Report View and print project (input) The Schedule Report Manager
Manager data directly from the database button from the AC Edit toolbar in
and in Crystal Reports format Edit mode
7.2 Library Report View and print library data in The Export command under the
Manager Crystal Reports format Library menu in the ETAP menu bar
7.3 Printing One-Line Preview, print, or batch print one- Print Preview, Print, and Batch Print
Diagrams line diagrams while adjusting commands from the File menu in the
setup, scale, and other options for ETAP menu bar and the right-click
each one-line diagram and its menus in the Project Editor and the
nested composite networks and one-line diagram
motors
7.5 Output Reports Preview and print output reports Report Manager button on the study
of calculation results from toolbar for the analysis mode and the
analysis modules in Crystal Study Case toolbar
Reports format
7.6 Plots Preview and print plots generated Plots button on the study toolbar for
by module studies, after adjusting the analysis mode and double-
the plot graphs for optimal clicking elements in the plot
presentation windows

Printing & Plotting Schedule Report Manager
7.1 Schedule Report Manager

The Schedule Report Manager is provided to allow you to preview and print the input data, as entered on
the Branch page, using the Crystal Reports formats.
Schedule Report
Manager Button
To print the input data:
1. Go to Edit Mode.
2. Click the Report Manager button on the AC Edit toolbar.
3. Open the report format of your choice to preview or print.
The Project database is used to generate these reports.
The Report Manager provides a variety of options for printing input data including:
Using Base Data or any revision level of data.

Using Base and Revision Data or only Revision Data (the differences with respect to the Base Data).
Including or excluding energized, de-energized, and dumpster elements in your print selection.
Using any configuration.
Note: The impedance data on the Cable Data Schedule report originates from the Cable Editors. If the
cable is linked to a library, the impedance data will be extracted from the library. This may cause
differences between the reported data and the Cable Editor.

Printing & Plotting Library Report Manager
7.2 Library Report Manager

Library data can be printed using the Crystal Reports formats.
To print library data:
1. Select Library on the ETAP menu bar.

2. Select the Export command.
3. Select all or a number of libraries, from the Export Library Editor.
4. Use the Library Report Manager to open the format of your choice to preview or print.
5. Print with or without page breaks.

Library data is not stored in the Project database. The Export feature exports your selected library data to
an MS Access file named LIBS.LB1. This file resides in the same directory as the project files being
used. The exported file is then used in Crystal Reports formats.
The Library Report Manager allows you to select your choice of report format.
Report for Motor Model Library Data

Report for Cable Library Data

Printing & Plotting Printing One-Line Diagrams
7.3 Printing One-Line Diagrams

When you are ready to print one-line diagrams in ETAP, you can select from any of the following
options:
View Print Preview

Print
Setup printing
Select print options
Batch print
One-line diagrams can be printed (in black & white or color) on any printer or plotter supported by your
operating system. Before printing, you can use the ETAP Theme Editor to customize the text, element,
bus, and background colors to your specific requirements. The zooming scale inside ETAP (for a one-line
diagram) is independent of the print scale.
Note: Every one-line diagram, including nested composite networks and motors, has an independent print
setup, print options, and print scale. This allows you to set the print zooming scale independently and
print each one-line diagram to a different printer or plotter.
The Print button always prints the currently active view. You may have several views displayed in your
ETAP window; however, only one view can be active at a time. The title bars of the active and inactive
windows are displayed in unique colors as specified in the Windows Control Panel. To activate a view,
click any part of its window.
Note: Unless you have rubber-banded or selected a specific portion of your presentation, your entire one-
line diagram or underground raceway system will be printed.
To print a one-line diagram, follow these steps:
1. Go to the File menu, and select Print Preview

2. Make the desired adjustments
3. Print
A variety of options are available for printing one-line diagrams and underground raceway systems, such
as the following:
Print all or a selected portion of your one-line diagram or underground raceway system.
Preview and print only energized elements.
Print or exclude OLE objects on the one-line diagram.
Print or exclude AC elements, DC elements, and AC-DC interface elements.
Print in color or black and white.
Print annotations such as element IDs and ratings.
Print study results as displayed in your ETAP window.
Include or eliminate the header or footer from the printed one-line diagram or underground raceway
system (the capability to edit header or footer information is not currently available).

ETAP includes tools with print functions for convenience, flexibility, and control, which include:
Select any printer or plotter supported by your operating system.

Choose any paper size supported by your printer.
Select Portrait or Landscape for paper orientation.
Preview your diagram before printing.
From Print Preview, center or adjust the one-line diagram with respect to the page.
From Print Preview, increase or decrease the size of the printed one-line diagram by zooming in or
out on the diagram.
Batch Print your selection of one-line diagrams or any composite networks or motors.
Automatically save print preview adjustments so you can reprint using your final print layout.
35
30
25
20 Food
Gas
15 M ot el
10
Utility 5
R J an Feb M ar A pr M ay J un
Main Bus
SSD T1
15/10/5 MVA
-2.5% TapP
T2 S Gen1
DS
10 MVA
Sub 3
Sub2A Sub2B
NO DS T4
1.5 MVA
Syn1
Bus1 Sub3 Net1
Sub2A-N CAP1
DCSystem
Revised DCN # 99-1692 FSP KAG DSN

Revised DCN # 99-1456 DSN KAG JRB
One-Line Diagram
Revised DCN # 98-1689 DSN KAG JRB Legend
Revised DCN # 92-0035 JFD JRB JRB
REVISION DESCRIPTION ENGR CHKD APPVD Lake Forest, CA
E001-MAIN-0000315
Printout of a One-Line Diagram with OLE Objects

Utility
2500 MVAsc
R
412
Main Bus j2390 100%
3244 2832
j1439 -j950
-2.5% TapP T1
Gen1 15/10/5 MVA
DS T2 7.5 MW
10 MVA SSD
S
% 6300 5302 2466 1%

101
.52 -j676 -j60 j727 Sub 3 99.6
Sub2A Sub2B
3240 998 1808 0 658
j1357 -j616 100% j775 j446 j398
NO T4
DS 1.5 MVA
Y Bus1 7%
97.7
Sub2A-N Syn1 CAP1 654
1250 HP 450 kvar j375
Sub3 Net1
DCSystem
Printout of a One-Line Diagram with Load Flow Results
7.3.1 Print Preview

Select this option to preview the print layout of the active one-line diagram.
Note: All print layout (print setup, options, zoom factors, and position) information entered here relates to
the selected one-line diagram only. Other diagrams have their own layouts.
You can access Print Preview from the File menu on the menu bar.

The tools available for this option allow you to modify the layout of your one-line diagram prior to
printing. Print Preview adjustments and settings are saved when you print or close Print Preview. In
addition, each view has its own separate Print Preview adjustments and settings. This means that you can
have different settings for different views and use the Batch Print option to print a number of views at
once.
The Print Preview option is also available from the right-click menu on the one-line diagram or the right-
click menu from the Project View window in the one-line diagram and U/G Raceway views.


ETAP provides a variety of tools that allow you to modify the print layout of your one-line diagram.
Zoom in for Viewing Zoom in

(Enlarge One- Fit to Page
Print Setup Line Diagram)
Scroll up
Print Options
Scroll Left
Next Page
Single/Two Page View
Close
Click this button to save the settings and layout, close, and return to the one-line diagram.
Print
Click this button to bring up the Print dialog box to start a print job.
Print Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to select the
destination printer and its connection.
Print Options
Click this button to display the Print Options dialog box.

Next Page/Previous Page

If the extent of a one-line diagram exceeds one page, you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next Page and Previous Page buttons.
Single-Page/Two-Page View
Click this button to toggle quickly between the previews of one or two pages.
Zoom In/Zoom Out View

Zoom In or Zoom Out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your one-line diagram prior
to printing. Zooming in on the view does not affect print results.
Fit to Page
Zoom In/Zoom Out

Zooms In or Zoom Out of the one-line diagram so that the size of the diagram changes with respect to the
page size. Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels in
the Print Preview are independent of zoom levels in the one-line diagram. The default magnification level
is 10 units. You can enter a specific magnification factor in the field provided.
Scroll
Scroll the one-line diagram to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll functions are provided for centering and adjusting the location of the one-line
diagram with respect to the selected paper size for this one-line diagram. Once you print or close Print
Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of
scrolling in the one-line diagram. The default scroll factor is 10 units. However, you can specify the scroll
length in the fields provided.
7.3.2 Print Setup

Printer
Select the printer you wish to use. You can choose the Default Printer or select one of the currently
installed printers from the Name list. To install printers and configure printer ports, use the Windows
Control Panel folder.
Paper
Size
Select the paper size on which you want to print the document.
Source
Select the paper tray here, providing your printer offers multiple trays for paper sources.
Orientation
Choose Portrait or Landscape.
Print Preview with Printer Orientation in Landscape
Network
Click this button to connect to a network location, assigning it a new drive letter.

Printing & Plotting One-Line Diagram Printouts
7.3.3 Print Options

Click this button to display a dialog box that allows you to specify additional printing choices.
Include
Select the elements you wish to print in the Include group.
AC Elements
Select this option to preview and print the AC elements in your one-line diagram.
DC Elements
Select this option to preview and print the DC elements in your one-line diagram.
AC-DC Interface Elements

Select this option to preview and print the AC-DC interface elements in your one-line diagram. These
elements include UPS, VFD, inverter, and charger/converter. Composite networks, which can be AC or
DC, are included in this category.
OLE Objects
Select this option to preview and print OLE objects inserted in your one-line view.
Text Boxes
Select this option to preview and print text boxes that have been added to your one-line view.
Print
De-energized Elements
Select this option to preview and print the de-energized elements of your one-line diagram. De-energized
elements are displayed as grayed out images on one-line diagram presentations if the Continuity Check is

on. Unless you select this feature, ETAP will suppress the printing of any branch with de-energized
elements in it and display only the active electrical components in your system.
Un-selected Elements
Select this option to preview and print both selected and un-selected elements in your one-line diagram.
Header
Select this option to print the name of the one-line diagram presentation at the top of each page. The
capability to modify header information is currently not available.
Footer
Select this option to print the page number, time, date, and project file name at the bottom of each page.
The capability to modify footer information is currently not available.
7.3.4 Print
Open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu on the menu bar or by right-clicking on
the one-line diagram, selecting Print Preview, and clicking the Print button. The following options allow
you to specify how the document will be printed:
Printer
This is the active printer and printer connection. Click the Setup button to change the printer and printer
connection.
Print Range
Entire diagram
Select this option to print the entire document.

Selected elements only

Select this option to print the currently selected items.
Pages
Select this option to print the range of pages you specify in the From and To boxes; for example, From: 1 To:
4; From: 3 To: 6.
Print Quality
Select the quality of printing. Generally, lower quality printing requires less time for the computer to set-
up and produce.
Copies
Specify the number of copies you wish to print.
Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box. The options in the Print Setup dialog box allow
you to select the destination printer and its connection. For information about print setup, see Section
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Click this button to display the One-Line Diagram Print Options dialog box. For information about print
options, see Section 7.3.3, Print Options.
7.3.5 Batch Print

Select this command to print any number of views at once. Views include any presentation and any
number of composite networks/motors that are nested in that presentation. Batch print allows you to print
without individually activating and printing each view. For best results, adjust each view in Print Preview,
and then perform a batch print. You can access Batch Print from the File menu on the menu bar.

Batch Print Setup

The Batch Print dialog box displays a nesting tree that shows all the composite networks and composite
motors included in the one-line diagram. The nesting tree also shows the composite network or motor
path.
This is where you select all or a specified number of views to be printed. You can make your selection by
clicking the box provided for each view or clicking the selection buttons. Selection buttons are provided
for global selection.
Select All Composites

Clicking the Networks, AC Motors, and DC Motors buttons selects these views for printing.
De-Select All Composites

Clicking the Networks, AC Motors, and DC Motors buttons de-selects these views for printing.
Print Options
In the Print Options group, select the Save While Printing option to save any changes made to the Print
Options while making a batch print.
Batch Printing
The dialog box below appears after you click OK in the Batch Print dialog box.

Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Print Range
You have the option to print the entire one-line diagram, selected elements only, or a range of pages.
When you select a range of pages, the entire diagram is printed for the selected pages.
OK
Press OK to proceed with printing of the next one-line diagram.
OK ALL
Print all one-line diagrams in the batch without confirmation.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will cancel the print action for the currently queued one-line diagram in the
batch without confirmation, and moves to the next diagram in the batch. The currently queued diagram is
specified in the title bar.
Cancel ALL
Cancel printing for all one-line diagrams in the batch without confirmation.
Print Quality
up and produce.
Copies

Printing & Plotting Batch Printing CSDs
7.3.6 Batch Print for CSDs

Select this command to print any number of CSDs at once. Batch Print
allows you to print without individually activating and printing each CSD.
For best results, adjust each CSD file in Print Preview, and then perform a
batch print. You can access Batch Print from the File menu on the menu
bar.
Batch Print Setup

The Batch Print dialog box displays the projects CSDs.
This is where you select all or a specified number of CSDs to be printed.

You can make your selection by highlighting the CSD name(s) in the list
or clicking on the Select All or Deselect All buttons or by using <Ctrl> or
<Shift> key in the keyboard.
Print Options
In the Print Options group, select the Save While Printing option to save
any changes made to the Print Options while making a batch print.
Select All
Clicking the Select All button selects all the listed CSDs.
Deselect All
Clicking the Deselect All button deselects all the selected CSDs.
Help
Clicking on the Help button sends you to
the Help Text topic for printing CSDs.
OK
Press OK to proceed with printing of the
selected CSDs.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button cancels any
selections you have made and closes the
CSD Batch Print pane.

Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Click this button to display the CSD Print Options dialog box. For information about print options, see
Section 7.3.3, Print Options.
Print Range
You have the option to print the entire CSD, selected elements only, or a range of pages. When you select
a range of pages, the entire diagram is printed for the selected pages.

OK
Press OK to proceed with printing of the next one-line diagram.
OK ALL
Print all CSDs in the batch without confirmation.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will cancel the print action for the currently queued CSD in the batch
without confirmation, and moves to the next diagram in the batch. The currently queued diagram is
specified in the title bar.
Cancel ALL
Cancel printing for all CSDs in the batch without confirmation.
Print Quality
up and produce.
Copies

Printing & Plotting Printing Star Views
7.4 Printing Star Views

When you are ready to print Star Views
in ETAP, you can select from any of the
following options:
View Print Preview

Print
Setup printing
Select print options
Batch print
Star Views can be printed (in black &

white or color) on any printer or plotter
supported by your operating system.
Note: Every view has an independent

print setup, print options, and print scale.
This allows you to set the print zooming
scale independently and print each view
to a different printer or plotter.
The Print button always prints the

currently active view. You may have
several views displayed in your ETAP
window; however, only one view can be
active at a time. The title bars of the
active and inactive windows are
displayed in unique colors as specified in
the Windows Control Panel. To activate
a view, click any part of its window.
To print a Star View, follow these steps:
1. Go to the File menu, and select Print Preview. Alternatively, you can access the print preview right
from the selected Star View toolbar menu
2. Make the desired adjustments
3. Print
7.4.1 Print Preview

Select this option to preview the print layout of the active Star View.
Note: All print layout (print setup, options, zoom factors, and position) information entered here relates to
the selected Star View only. Other Star Views may have their own layouts.
You can access Print Preview from the File menu on the menu bar or from the Star View toolbar menu.

The tools available for this option allow you to modify the layout of your Star View prior to printing.
Print Preview adjustments and settings are saved when you print or close Print Preview. In addition, each
view has its own separate Print Preview adjustments and settings. This means that you can have different
settings for different Star Views and use the Batch Print option to print a number of Star Views at once.
ETAP provides a variety of tools that allow you to modify the print layout of your Star View.
Zoom in for Viewing

Zoom in
Print Setup (Enlarge One- Fit to Page
Line Diagram) Scroll up
Print Options
Next Page Single/Two Page View
Scroll Left

Close
Click this button to save the settings and layout, close, and return to the Star View.
Print
Click this button to bring up the Print dialog box to start a print job.
Print Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options that allow you to select the
Print Options
Click this button to display the Print Options dialog box.
Next Page/Previous Page

If the extent of a one-line diagram exceeds one page, you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next Page and Previous Page buttons.
Single-Page/Two-Page View
Click this button to toggle quickly between the previews of one or two pages.

Zoom In or Zoom Out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your one-line diagram prior
to printing. Zooming in on the view does not affect print results.
Fit to Page
Zoom In/Zoom Out

Zooms In or Zoom Out of the Star View so that the size of the diagram changes with respect to the page
size. Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels in the
Print Preview are independent of zoom levels in the Star View. The default magnification level is 10
units. You can enter a specific magnification factor in the field provided.
Scroll
Scroll the Star View to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll functions are provided for centering and adjusting the location of the Star View
with respect to the selected paper size for this one-line diagram. Once you print or close Print Preview, all
settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of scrolling in the Star
View. The default scroll factor is 10 units. However, you can specify the scroll length in the fields
provided.

7.4.2 Print Setup
Printer
Select the printer you wish to use. You can choose the Default Printer or select one of the currently
Control Panel folder.
Paper
Size
Source
Select the paper tray here, providing your printer offers multiple trays for paper sources.
Orientation

Print Preview with Printer Orientation in Landscape
Network
7.4.3 Print Options

Click this button to display a dialog box that allows you to specify additional printing choices.

Include
Select the elements you wish to print in the Include group.
One-Line Diagram
Select this option to preview and print the one-line diagram in your Star View.
Text Boxes
Select this option to preview and print text boxes that have added to your Star View.
7.4.4 Print
Open the Print dialog box by selecting Print from the File menu on the menu bar or selecting Print
Preview from the Star View toolbar menu and clicking the Print button. The following options allow you
to specify how the document will be printed:
Printer
This is the active printer and printer connection. Click the Setup button to change the printer and printer
connection.
Print Range
Entire diagram
Select this option to print the entire document.
Selected elements only

Select this option to print the currently selected items.

Pages
Select this option to print the range of pages you specify in the From and To boxes; for example, From: 1 To:
4; From: 3 To: 6.
Print Quality
up and produce.
Copies
Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
7.4.5 Batch Print

Select this command to print any number of Star Views at once. Batch Print allows you to print without
individually activating and printing each Star View. For best results, adjust each Star View in Print
Preview, and then perform a batch print. You can access Batch Print from the File menu on the menu bar
when a Star View is active.

Batch Print Setup

The Batch Print dialog box displays all available Star Views and their associated components.
This is where you select all or a specified number of Star Views to be printed. You can make your
selection by selecting each Star View in the list or clicking on the Select All or Deselect All buttons or by
using <Ctrl> or <Shift> key in the keyboard.
Star Views
The Star Views column lists all the Star Views in the project. Multiple Star Views can be selected by
using the Shift or Ctrl keys.
Select All
Select all the Star Views from the list to print.
Deselect All
Deselect all the Star Views from the list to print.
Components
The Components column lists the IDs of the element(s) that are included in the selected Star View(s).
When the Filter Star View list by selected component(s) is checked the Components column will list the
IDs of all elements in the project.

Filter Star View list by selected component(s)

Checking this option will list the IDs of all the components (elements) in the project. This allows
selection of Star Views based on the elements that are contained within them.
Phase Mode
Check this option to print the Star View(s) in the Phase Mode.
Ground Mode
Check this option to print the selected Star View(s) in the Ground Mode.
Normalized TCC
Check this option to print the Star Views in Normalized TCC Mode. This check box is unchecked by
default. Normalized TCC option is a filter for Phase and Ground modes to allow you to print the Star
View(s) that have a valid Sequence-of-Operation output report associated with it. Checking this option
prints the selected Star Views in Normalized TCC Mode depending on the Phase / Ground Mode
selection above. This option is disabled (grayed out) if both Phase Mode and Ground Mode check boxes
are unchecked.
Skip Blank Star Views

Check this option to skip blank Star Views (without plots) from being printed.
Save while Printing

Check this option to save the print options for the selected Star View(s) while printing.
Batch Printing
The dialog box below appears after you click OK in the Batch Print dialog box.

Setup
7.3.2, Print Setup.
Options
Click this button to display the Star Print Options dialog box. For information about print options, see
Section 7.3.3, Print Options.
Print Range
You have the option to print the entire Star View or a range of pages. When you select a range of pages,
the entire diagram is printed for the selected pages.
OK
Click OK to proceed with printing of the next Star View.
OK ALL
Click OK ALL to print all Star Views in the batch without confirmation.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will cancel the print action for the currently queued Star View in the batch
without confirmation, and moves to the next diagram in the batch. The currently queued Star View is
specified in the title bar. In the Print dialog box above, Bus 1 - TCC is queuing.
Cancel ALL
Click Cancel ALL to cancel printing for all Star Views in the batch without confirmation.
Print Quality
up and produce.
Copies

7.5 Output Reports

ETAP allows you to view and print all calculation results of your project or study case in output reports
using Crystal Reports formats.
These reports can contain varying levels of detail, depending on your study case requirements. The report
header is printed on the top of each page of the output report and contains general information about the
project. This general information is entered in the Project Information Editor. The report header also
contains specific information related to the study case.
To view and print output report files, click the Report Manager button, included on all study toolbars,
then make your selection from the displayed report formats.
ETAP uses the Crystal Reports program to generate output reports. Crystal Reports is a reporting tool
with superior capabilities and presentation-quality output. Crystal Reports is a Business Objects product.
For more information, go to http://www.businessobjects.com.
ETAP provides you with report formats for input data (device schedule), library data, and output reports.
However, using Crystal Reports you can also customize the output reports. You can add or remove fields,
change fonts and sizes, include your company information and logo, add plots, even export your reports
to HTML format so you can publish your reports on the World Wide Web, etc.
Note: You must use your copy of Crystal Reports for any output report modifications.
7.5.1 Output Report Access File

After you run a study, ETAP generates an Access database file that contains data associated with the
study case, input, calculation results, and summary tables. Then Crystal Reports uses the data stored in
the Access database for producing output reports. Crystal Reports output reports are provided for all
ETAP analysis modules.
The Access database files for output reports are located in the same directory as your ETAP project files.
The database files have different extensions depending on the analysis type and include the following:
*.AAF Arc Flash (ANSI)

*.CA1 Optimal Capacitor Placement
*.CD1 Cable Derating Analysis
*.CP1 Cable Pulling
*.DB1 Battery Sizing Analysis
*.DL1 DC Load Flow Analysis
*.DS1 DC Short-Circuit Analysis
*.GR1 Ground Grid Systems
*.HA1 Harmonic Analysis
*.IAF Arc Flash (IEC)
*.LF1 Load Flow Analysis
*.MS1 Motor Starting Analysis
*.OP1 Optimal Power Flow
*.PE1 Parameter Estimation
*.PN1 Panel Analysis
*.RA1 Reliability Analysis

*.SA1 Short-Circuit Analysis, ANSI, Device Duty

*.SA2 Short-Circuit Analysis, ANSI, Unbalanced Faults
*.SA3 Short-Circuit Analysis, ANSI, 30 Cycle, Balanced
*.SI1 Short-Circuit Analysis, IEC (909), Device Duty
*.SI2 Short-Circuit Analysis, IEC, Unbalanced Faults
*.SI3 Short-Circuit Analysis, IEC (363), Transient
*.SQ1 Sequence of Operation (ANSI)
*.SQ2 Sequence of Operation (IEC)
*.TS1 Transient Stability
*.UAF Arc Flash (User-Defined)
*.UL1 Unbalanced Load Flow
*.VD1 Control Systems Diagram
*.XS1 Transformer Tap Optimization
For example, if you run a Load Flow study with the output report name LFresult, ETAP generates a file
named LFRESULT.LF1, which is the Access database file for Load Flow Report.
Crystal Reports Formats

Crystal Report formats have an extension of .RPT and are located in the ETAP 700\FORMATS700 (or
current version) folder. Crystal Reports output formats are divided into four categories: Complete, Input,
Result, and Summary, therefore, the directory for each study is categorized accordingly. The reports
stored here are displayed in each modules Report Manager Editor. Copies of report formats are also
added directly to a study folder, which can be viewed from the Study Case toolbar.

7.5.2 View Output Reports

Output reports from the analysis modules can be viewed directly from ETAP. You can view output
reports by clicking the Report Manager button on the Study toolbar or on the View Output File button on
the Study Case toolbar.
Report Manager
Click the Report Manager button, which is provided for every Study toolbar, to view the Report Manager
Editor.
Report Manager Button
The Report Manager Editor for the output reports consists of four tabs: Complete, Input, Results, and
Summary. Output report formats are sorted into these categories. To view an output report, select a report
template and format and then click OK. The Complete output report is the compilation of input, results,
and summary reports.
Using the Report Manager you can view output reports in Crystal Reports Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich
Text Format, and MS Excel. The default format is set to the Crystal Reports Viewer. However, you can
set the default to other formats by selecting a format and checking the Set As Default option.
Note that PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, and MS Excel formats are exported from the report
templates created with Crystal Reports. In some cases the exported formats may not appear exactly as the
Crystal Reports templates.
The output filename, project name, and path are also displayed in this dialog box.

View Output File

Another method of viewing the output reports is from each Study Case toolbar. Click the View Output
Report button on any study case toolbar to view output reports. A list of all output files in the project
directory is provided. This list only includes the output reports associated with the active study mode. To
view any of the listed output reports in Crystal Reports Viewer, select the output report name, select any
of the report templates from the list box, and then click the View Output File button on the Study Case
toolbar.
View Output
Report Viewer Report Button
The Report Viewer allows you to view reports, navigate to different pages, find by text search or element
ID, print, and export to a variety of formats.
Viewer Toolbar
The Crystal Reports Viewer toolbar contains the following features: Find, Navigate, Print, Export, and
Zoom.
Find
To activate the Find feature click on the Find icon on the top toolbar or go to View on the main toolbar.
Find allows you to search by element ID or by text.
To find by Element ID, select the Element option in the Find dialog box. Then select an element type
from the Type list box. Based on the selected type IDs of the existing elements will be displayed in the
ID list box. Select the ID of your choice and click on the Find button. Find searches for all occurrences

of the selected ID and highlights them one by one. Note that for a complete search you must start your
search from the first page.
To find by Text, select the Text option in the Find dialog box. Then type in the text of your choice and
click on the Find button. Find searches for all occurrences of the specified text and highlights them one
by one. Note that for a complete search you must start your search from the first page.
Note that the Find option is not case sensitive.
Navigate
To view all report pages, click the navigation buttons (arrow icons) to move forward or backwards. Also,
you can type in a page number and click on enter to go the specified page.
Print
The Print option allows you to print all or a selected number of pages, to specify the number of copies to
be printed, and the capability to collate them.
You can also set up the printer to be used, the paper size and source, and the paper orientation by clicking
the Printer Setup button.
Export
You can export your reports to a number of popular spreadsheet and word processor formats, into PDF,
HTML, ODBC, and a number of common data interchange formats as well. To achieve the best text
format results, use the Rich Text Format option.
Click the Export button to view a list of all available formats.
Zoom
Use the Zoom drop-down list to zoom in and out on your report. You can view your report from 25% to
400% of its actual size. The zooming capability relates to viewing only and does not affect the printed
results.

Printing & Plotting Plots
7.6 Plots
The plot format is also available for viewing and printing. To preview and print plots, click the Plot
button on the Study toolbar.
Plot Button
Plots generated as a result of ETAP calculation modules such as motor starting analysis, transient stability
analysis, and transient temperature of cables can be printed to any printer supported by your Windows
platform. To view plots from motor starting or cable derating studies, click the Plot button from the Study
toolbar.
Plot views can be divided into two portions. The upper portion is the plot is generated using the axis
limits directly from the program parameters. The lower portion is designed to show a zoomed view of the
upper portion. You may display the zoomed view by moving the mouse pointer to the bottom edge of the
view until the Divide View pointer appears. Click and hold down the left mouse button, then drag the
divider upwards until the Zoom View is displayed to your satisfaction. Now use the right mouse button to
rubber band the area of the plot on which you wish to zoom in. The Zoom View is then displayed in the
lower section of the window.
ETAP offers a split-screen view of plots for motor starting, harmonics, and transient stability studies
where the lower window is an enlarged (zoomed) view and can be sized to your specific needs. Either
view can be printed independently, but you cannot print both views simultaneously.

7.6.1 Modifying Plot Parameters

Parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the Plot View. For
example, to modify plot line type, double click the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameters Editor.
Plot Parameters
Double-click the plot line to open the Plot Parameters Editor. Using this editor you can specify line type,
attributes, and curve fitting algorithm.
Line Attributes
Click the LINE ATTRIBUTES button to modify line color, style, and width.

Export Plot Data

You can also display the plot data by clicking the Data button. If you want to use the data in another
program, click the Copy option on the menu bar and paste the data into the other application. Copied data
has a tab-separated format.
Plot Data in ETAP Plot Data Copied into MS Excel
Text Parameters
To modify horizontal and vertical axis titles or the plot title, double-click each cell to open the Text
Parameters Editor. Using this editor you can change the text, font, color, size, and style of the selected
title.

Vertical & Horizontal Axis Parameters

To modify vertical and horizontal axis parameters, double-click either axis to open the Axis Parameter
Editor. Using this editor you can change the axis limits, interception point, line attributes, tick marks, grid
line, and scale type.
Axis Labels
To open this editor, double-click the axis label of the horizontal or vertical axis. This editor allows you to
modify the label position, format, text parameters, and precision.

Legend Parameters
Double-click any displayed legend to open the Legend Parameters editor. This allows you to modify
legend parameters such as the legend rectangle size and color, text, text parameters, and border (providing
you have clicked on the Border check box).
7.6.2 Printing Plots

The Plot View must be the active view in the window for you to be able to print a plot. You can have
several plot views displayed in your ETAP window; however, only one view can be active at any time.
The title bars of the active and inactive windows are displayed in unique colors, as specified in the
Windows Control Panel. To activate a view, click any part of it.
To print a plot, display the Plot View, make formatting modifications, if required, and print. The printed
plot size will be set to the size of the paper on which it is being printed.
To print plots with a split view, click the view you wish to print, make any necessary print modifications,
then print. Either view can be printed independently, but you cannot print both views simultaneously.
7.6.3 Printing Ground Grid Plots

You can use the Export Function of the 3D Plots to print these plots and
selecting printer in the export destination.
Export Plot Data

The data from the Ground Grid plots can be exported using a metafile, bitmap or
text file format by right-clicking on the 3D plot and selecting the export dialog
option.
Export
Plot data can be exported using either image file formats like metafile (.wmf) or
bitmap (.bmp). The data can also be exported using the text (.txt) or data (.dat)
file formats.

Export Destination
Once the file format is selected, the export destination option can be used to select the location of the
exported data. The data can be placed either on the clipboard (system memory) to be used later by some
other program, physical file, or sent directly to a default printer.
Object size
Use this option to adjust the size of the exported image file. When metafile format is used, the image can
be scaled during export by adjusting in millimeters, inches or points. When bitmap format is used, the
image can be scaled during export by adjusting the pixels only.

Chapter 8
Engineering Libraries
ETAP provides customized libraries for many devices for which typical, standard, and manufacturer
information has been compiled. Additional devices may be added to each library through ETAPs Library
editors. This chapter provides an overview of each library and description of all the data and functions
available that allow you to create new libraries and access existing ones.

Engineering Libraries Overview
ETAP library files have the extension .lib and by default are located in the Lib folder within the ETAP
application folder. ETAP displays this path along with the name of the current library in the Project View.
The Lib folder in ETAP includes two types of library files Complete and Incremental. These are
briefly described below:
Complete Library file

Complete Library file is designated with the prefix etaplib followed by the ETAP release number (i.e.,
etaplib5.lib, etaplib503.lib, etaplib550.lib). It includes all issued ETAP device libraries.
Incremental Library file

Incremental Library file is designated with the prefix Libchanges followed by a library release date. (i.e.
Libchanges_2005-86.lib, Libchanges_2005-232.lib). It includes only the changes made between library
releases.

Engineering Libraries Utility Tools
8.1 Library Utility Tools

ETAP provides a number of utility tools to manage your libraries.
Open
This option allows you to associate a library with your current ETAP project. When you open a new
library, the association between the ETAP project and its existing library will be disconnected. For
example, Motor Characteristic Model and dynamically linked cable library data associated with the
previous library, which does not exist in the new library, will be missing. A warning message as shown
below is issued.
There are two ways to retrieve this missing data:
1) Reselect the old library file

2) Merge the old library file into the new library file
To open a library, select Open from the Library menu and click Yes on the above warning message to
continue. The Select Library File to OPEN dialog appears. Navigate to the appropriate directory, select
the new library file, and then select Open. This library is now attached to the ETAP project.
Open a Read-Only Library File

When you to open a library file that is read-only, you will receive a message that restricts you from
opening the file. Select one of the three options in the editor, which are shown below:
Remove Read-Only attribute

Remove the read-only property from the library file and select the library file for the project. The library
file will be open to read and write capabilities.

Degrade access level to Base Editor

Base editor allows the user to have all the same rights to the project as the project editor except for library
data. All other rights are active to the base editor but the library list is disabled, making the library file
still locked from write capabilities.
Select another Library file

Open the Windows open dialog to select another library file that has write privileges.
Note: This option is available if this is the first time the user is selecting a library file after opening the
project.
Go back to previous selection

If there is a library file that was previously used and is not a read-only file, the user can select to go back
to that library file. The third option will change as shown below:
Open a Network Library File already in use

Library files may be shared over a public network. When a second user tries to open a library file that is
currently in use, ETAP will display a message that will alert the user of the sharing violation.
Degrade access level to Base Editor

Base editor allows the user to have all the same rights to the project as the project editor except for library
data. All other rights are active to the base editor but the library list is disabled, making the library file
still locked from write capabilities.

Select another Library file

Open the Windows open dialog to select another library file that has write privileges.
Note: This option is available if this is the first time the user is selecting a library file after opening the
project.
Go back to previous selection

If there is a library file that was previously used and is not used by another user, the user can select to go
back to that library file.
Copy/Merge
The Copy/Merge function can be accessed on the following two menus:
(a) Library menu on the main toolbar

(b) Right-click menu on the Library folder in the Project View
The Copy/Merge function allows you to merge partial (selected device libraries) or complete library file
from one library (source) to another library (sink). The Copy/Merge function is enabled only for the
Project Editor and Librarian access levels. The source library overwrites any duplicate information found
in the sink library during the merge process.
Selecting the Copy/Merge option brings up the following editor:

Library files to Copy/Merge

Click on the File button to navigate and select the library files you wish to copy/merge data to and
from. Note: The project is not required to be connected to a library to select library files for copy/merge.
However, if the project is connected to a library, the first selection displays the path of the connected
library file. If this is not the library file you wish to copy/merge, click on the File button to select
another library file. If a library selected (source or sink) has not been converted to the latest version,
ETAP asks you to convert the library.
If you select OK Library is converted to the latest version

If you select Cancel Select a different library

Release Number
The release number is displayed when a library is selected. Note: Libraries released before ETAP version
5.0.1 displays a release number 2005-0. Also, for newly created library files the release number is
displayed as 2005-0. The final merged library will have the same release number as the source library.
The Release Number is an internal revision designation issued by OTI for the purpose of tracking the
library file generations.
Copy/Merge Direction
The copy/merge direction can be controlled by clicking the arrow button. The arrow points to the sink
library file to which data will copy/merge.
The default direction of library merge is from the library with latest Release Number (i.e. 2006-126) to an
older Release Number (i.e. 2005-232). Thus, the merge arrow points to the older library file. Note:
Certain library merge functionalities are dependent on the Project Access Level.
For Project Editor Access Level, the direction of the merge arrow is always pointing from the
older to the newer Release Number library file. The arrow button is grayed out and the direction
cannot be changed.
For Librarian Access Level, the direction of the merge arrow can be changed in any direction.
For library files with same Release Number, the direction of copying/merging is user-selectable. The
direction of the merge arrow can be changed by clicking on the arrow button.
Connect the project to the merged library

Select this option to connect the project to the library where the data is merged to (sink library). This box
is unchecked by default.
Available Libraries List

The list of available library devices in the Source library file is provided in a tree structure. Devices
containing library data are marked as checked by default, and those without library data are displayed as
unchecked and grayed out. Note: Certain library merge functionalities are dependent on the Project
Access Level.
For Project Editor Access Level, only complete merge of the device libraries is allowed. The
status of the available source library list checkboxes cannot be changed with this Access Level.
For Librarian Access Level, partial merging of the device libraries is allowed. The status of the
available source library list can be changed to allow for partial library merge.
Note: The Trip Device library tree checkbox can be unchecked only if LV Breaker is unchecked.
Library Copy/Merge Confirmation

Clicking the OK button displays a Library Copy/Merge confirmation message in order to reconfirm your
Copy/Merge selections. The confirmation message displayed for different scenarios as described below.

Clicking OK begins the merge process and clicking Cancel takes you back to Library Copy/Merge Editor
to change your merge selections.
Save
Select this option to save the entire associated library file. The Save option in the Library menu only
saves the associated library file and is independent of the ETAP Save Project function in the File menu.
Save As
Select this option to save the current library file as a new library file. This new library file contains all the
information in the current library file but now has a new name in an independent location. If the name for
the new library file already exists in the selected location, it will request permission to overwrite the old
library file, and then do so if you click Yes. The new library must have a .lib extension.
Create
This option allows you to create a new library and associate it with the current project file. The old
library file will be disconnected. Motor Characteristic Model and dynamically linked cable library data
associated with the previous library, which does not exist in the new library, will be missing.
There are two ways to retrieve this missing data:
1) Reselect the old library file

2) Merge the old library file into the new library file

Purge
This action will permanently delete all data from the current library file. Be certain that you no longer
require the library data prior to clicking on the Purge button. Motor Characteristic Model and
dynamically linked cable library data associated with the previous library, which does not exist in the new
library, will be missing.
Export
This option allows you to export the current device library data. You can select all or a portion of the
device libraries to be exported. ETAP exports the library data to an external MS Access database,
Libs.lb1. This file is created in your ETAP project folder. The selected libraries are exported and
displayed in Crystal Reports format. For more information on Crystal Reports, see Chapter 7, Printing
and Plotting.

Engineering Libraries Convert ETAP DOS
8.2 Convert ETAP DOS Libraries

You can convert your ETAP DOS libraries for Cables, Motor Nameplates, Motor Circuit Models, Motor
Characteristic Models, and Overload Heaters for use with current versions of ETAP.
Convert DOS Cable Library

Select this option to convert an ETAP for DOS Cable Library to ETAP. ETAP DOS Cable libraries
contain the extension .elb for English data and .mlb for metric data. Locate and select the files on your
hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Nameplate Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Nameplate Library to ETAP. ETAP
DOS Motor Nameplate Libraries contain the extension .emt for English data and .mmt for metric data.
Locate and select the file on your hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Model Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Model Library to ETAP. ETAP DOS
Motor Model Libraries contain file names similar to mtrparam.lib. Locate the file on your hard drive or
local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Motor Characteristic Model Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Motor Characteristic Model Library to ETAP.
Motor Characteristic Model Libraries contain file names similar to mtrtsc.lib. Locate the file on your
hard drive or local area network and click on Convert.
Convert Overload Heater Library

Select this option if you wish to convert an ETAP for DOS Overload Heater Library to ETAP. Overload
Heater Libraries contain file names similar to oh.lib. Locate the file on your hard drive or local area
network and click on Convert.

Engineering Libraries Cable
8.3 Cable
The Cable Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have unlimited cable
headers (Cable Types) within the library and unlimited cable sizes for each header as shown below.
Cable Library Cable Header

Cable Header Cable Size
Cable Header Cable Size
Cable Size

Cable Header

Cable Size
8.3.1 Cable Library Header

Cable headers are used to indicate the type and construction of a cable. Cable headers consist of the
following items:
Unit System Metric or English unit system; used for all cable physical dimensions
Frequency Rated base frequency of the cable in Hz
Conductor Type Copper or Aluminum
Installation Magnetic or non-magnetic conduit installation
kV Rated voltage of the cable in kV
% Class Voltage Class in percent of rated kV. 100, 133, & 173%

- 100 Percent Level: Cables in this category may be applied where

the system is provided with protection such that ground faults will
be cleared as rapidly as possible, but in any case within 1 minute.
- 133 Percent Level: This insulation level corresponds to that
formerly designated for ungrounded systems. Cables in this
category may be applied in situations where the clearing time
requirements of the 100 percent level category cannot be met, and
yet there is adequate assurance that the faulted section will be de-
energized in one hour or less.
- 173 Percent Level: Cables in this category should be applied on
systems where the time required to de-energize a grounded section
is indefinite. Their use is also recommended for resonant grounded
systems.
Source Library source name such as ICEA, NEC etc., up to 12 characters
Insulation Insulation type such as Rubber, XLPE, PE, XHHW, etc.
#/Cable Single conductor cables (1/C), 3 conductor cables (3/C), etc.
U/G Ampacity Ta, Tc & RHO for base ampacity in U/G raceway installation
Ta Ambient temperature of the Underground raceway in degree C
Tc Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degree C
RHO Soil thermal resistivity in degree C-cm/Watt
A/G Ampacity Ta, Tc for base ampacity in A/G raceway installation
Ta Ambient temperature of the above ground raceway in degree C
Tc Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degree C
Impedance
Ohms per Unit of length for cable impedance, /1000 ft, /km, /mile, etc.
Temperature Base temperature of the conductor resistance in degrees C
Magnetic/Non-magnetic Installation
Magnetically installed cables imply that there is a continuous raceway (conduit) around the cables with
circulating current due to the magnetic field of the cables. This circulating current will cause the cable
reactance (X1 and X0) to increase by up to 15% for smaller size cables, and 5 to 10% for larger size
cables. The following table shows when to use cable libraries designated as Magnetically and Non-
magnetically installed cables:
Cable Library Header

Magnetically Installed Non- Magnetically Installed
U/G Duct PVC Conduits X
U/G Duct Mag. Conduits X
U/G Buried X
A/G Tray No Cover X
A/G Tray Solid & Mag. Material X
A/G Conduit - PVC X
A/G Conduit Mag. Conduit X
Air Drop X

8.3.2 Cable Library Selector
The Cable Library selector allows you to add new cable headers, or select existing cable headers to edit,
delete, or copy. To edit a Cable Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a cable, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will request a
confirmation before deleting the selected cable.
All available cable headers are displayed in the selector. Cable sizes are displayed for your convenience
for each cable header. Cable size is in AWG or kcmil for English cable data and in mm2 for metric cable
data.
Add & Copy

This dialog box is used to add a new cable header (type) or copy an existing cable header.

A new cable header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new cable
header by changing any one of the items in the cable header information.
8.3.3 Cable Library Editor

To edit the Cable Library data, select a cable type from the Cable Library and click on the Edit button.
Each cable type (header) can contain an unlimited number of cable sizes. This Spreadsheet Editor allows
you to view and edit Cable Library data for a selected cable type. The name of the cable type is displayed
on top of the spreadsheet. Each cable record (row) is a unique set of data for each cable size. Each cable
record must have a unique identifier: conductor size. Duplicate records, which have the same data, are
overwritten. The conductor size must contain at least one character, which is different from the other
sizes. If a row of data duplicates a previous one, it will overwrite it.
Available
Enter Y (yes) or N (no) for availability of the cable size. Use this option to flag the cables you want to be
used for this project. ETAP selects cables from the library for cable sizing (Cable Editor). When you are
picking a cable from the library (Cable Library Quick Pick), you can pick from available cables only or
from all cables in the library. Note: When you use the drop-down list for Cable Sizes (in the Cable Type
section of Cable Editors), you can only select library cables that are flagged as available.
Size
Cable size is specified in AWG or kcmil for English cable data and in mm2 for metric cable data. English
cable sizes range from #12 to #1, 1/0 to 4/0, and 250 to 1000 kcmil. Metric cable sizes range from 6 to
400 mm2.
Duct Bank
Duct Bank refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in an isolated duct
bank with an ambient temperature of 20C (Ta), a conductor temperature of 90C (Tc), and soil (earth)
thermal resistivity of 90 (RHO). The base ampacity is selected from the library when Duct Bank
Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the
specified installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified
for the specified cable type and size.
Buried
Buried refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is directly buried underground with an
ambient temperature of 20C (Ta), a conductor temperature of 90C (Tc), and soil (earth) thermal

resistivity of 90 (RHO). The base ampacity is selected from the library when Direct Buried Installation
Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified
installation type, a different cable should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified for the
specified cable type and size.
Free Air
Free Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in free air or trays with
an ambient temperature of 40C (Ta) and conductor temperature of 90C (Tc). The base ampacity is
selected from the library when Cable Tray or Air Drop Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page
of the Cable Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable
should be selected or the Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
Cond. Air
Conduit in Air refers to the cable base ampacity (in amperes) when a cable is installed in a conduit in air
with an ambient temperature of 40C (Ta) and conductor temperature of 90C (Tc). The base ampacity is
selected for the library when Conduit Installation Type is selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable
Editor. If the base ampacity is zero for the specified installation type, a different cable should be selected
or the Cable Library should be modified for the specified cable type and size.
R
R is the positive-sequence cable resistance in ohms per unit length. The resistance must be entered at the
base temperature specified for this cable header (type).
X
X is the positive-sequence cable reactance in ohms per unit length.
Y
PY is the positive-sequence cable charging susceptance in Siemens per unit length.
R0
This is the zero-sequence cable resistance in ohms per unit length. The resistance must be entered at the
base temperature specified for the cable header (type).
X0
This is the zero-sequence cable reactance in ohms per unit length.
Y0
This is the zero-sequence cable charging susceptance in Siemens per unit length.
RDC (25C)
DC resistance is calculated at 25 degrees C in micro-ohms per ft or m.
Cond. O.D.
This is the conductor outside diameter in inch or cm.
Ins. Thick
This refers to the thickness of the cable insulation layer in mil or mm.
Shielding
Cable shielding type. Right-click to select Non-Shielded or Shield Duct type from the list.

Sheath/Armor
Cable sheath/armor type. Right-click to select from the drop-down list.
Examples of Sheath/Armor type definitions:
Type Definition
St Armor/30dg/15w Steel Armor with 30 Degree deviation from cable axis; 15 wires
Armor Thick
Thickness of cable sheath/armor in mil or mm
Jacket Type
Cable jacket type. Right-click to select from the drop-down list.
Jacket Thick
Thickness of cable jacket in mil or mm
Cable O.D.
Cable outside diameter in inch or cm
Cond. Const.
Cable Conductor Construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for
calculating the AC to DC ratio parameters. Several choices of conductor construction are available from
the list box provided. These are:

ConRnd Concentric Round None Coated None Treated

ConRnd-Coated Concentric Round Coated None Treated
ConRnd-Treated Concentric Round None Coated Treated
CmpRnd-Treated Compact Round None Coated Treated
CmpSgm Compact Segmental None Coated None Treated
CmpSgm-Coated Compact Segmental Coated None Treated
CmpSgm-Treated Compact Segmental None Coated Treated
CmpSct-Treated Compact Sector None Coated Treated
Coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to a
drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.
Cable Weight
Weight of the cable in units of lbs/kft or kg/km
Max. Tension
Maximum allowable cable tension in lb/kcmil or kg/mm2. In case of a multiple-conductor cable, the
entered permissible maximum pulling tension is for each conductor. In the Cable Pulling calculation, the
cable permissible maximum pulling tension will be computed by multiplying this value by the number of
conductors.
Max. SW Pres.
Maximum allowable sidewall pressure in lb/ft or kg/m
8.3.4 Library Quick Pick - Cable

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box by clicking on the Library button inside the Editor Info page.
The Library Quick Pick displays all of the cable information in the associated library file.
From this dialog box, select a Unit system, Frequency, Conductor Type, and Installation. This will
narrow the choice of available library selections to a group that you are interested in. Then, select a
voltage and class rating, a cable type (header) and cable size from the Cable Library. The Library Quick
Pick dialog box allows you to choose a cable size from all cable sizes in the library file or only cables
flagged as Available.

8.3.5 Source
ETAPs Cable Library data is obtained from the following standards and manufacturers:
National Electric Code (NEC)

Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
Okonite Cable Manufacturer
Kerite Cable Manufacturer
AmerCable Manufacturer
General Cable Manufacturer

Engineering Libraries Cable Fire Coating
8.4 Cable Fire Coating

The Cable Fire Coating Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited fire coating types for each
manufacturer, as shown below.
A fire coating header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer. You can have
unlimited manufacturers for each installation type. The source for existing libraries is TVA. Three
installation types are available:
Tray Specifies cables located in cable trays

Conduit Specifies cables placed in conduits
Air Drop Specifies cables installed as air drop cables
8.4.1 Fire Coating Library Selector
The Cable Fire Coating Library allows you to add new fire coating types, select existing fire coating types
for editing, deleting, or copying. To edit a Fire Coating Library, double-click on the item or click on the
Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire coating, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
selection. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire coating.
Add
Click on the Add button to specify the name of the manufacturer you wish to add to the library. Edit the
new library header, by selecting it, and then clicking the Edit button.

Copy
Click on the Copy button to copy the data from one library header to a new library header name. This
function can be used to change specifications in the library without modifying the original data. Edit the
new library header by selecting it, and then clicking the Edit button.
8.4.2 Fire Coating Library Editor
This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Cable Fire Coating Library data. Each library
record is a unique set of data for each cable fire coating type. Appending two columns,
Material+Configuration, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is
repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields

must contain at least one different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP
will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before adding any library data.
Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire coating. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire coating. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Enter the Ampacity Correction Factor (ACF). The ACF is used to calculate the derated ampacity of
cables in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor.
Remarks
Enter general remarks regarding the fire coating for the selected Cable Library coating type. Remarks are
a description only (The word default is used if the cable fire coating is part of the original ETAP
Library.)
8.4.3 Cable Fire Coating - Quick Pick

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Coating by checking the box next to Fire
Coating. The Fire Coating box only appears if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air
Drop. Click on the Coating Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.
Select a Manufacturer and a cable fire protection type from the dialog box. The cable fire protection type
includes the material, configuration, and Ampacity Correction Factor (ACF).

Engineering Libraries Cable Fire Stop
8.5 Cable Fire Stop

The Cable Fire Stop Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. There are unlimited
headers (manufacturers) included within the library and unlimited fire stop types for each manufacturer,
as shown below.
A fire stop header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer. You can have unlimited
manufacturers for each installation type. The source for existing libraries is TVA. The three installation
types available are:

8.5.1 Fire Stop Library Selector
The Cable Fire Stop Library allows you to add new fire stop types or select existing fire stop types so that
you can edit, copy, or delete them. To edit a Fire Stop Library, double-click on the item or click on the
Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire stop, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
selection. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire stop.
Add
new library header, by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.

Copy
new library header by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.
8.5.2 Fire Stop Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Cable Fire Stop Library data. Each library
record is a unique set of data for each cable fire stop type. Appending two columns,
Material+Configuration, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is
repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields
will request confirmation before overwriting it.
Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire stop. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire stop. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Remarks
Enter general remarks concerning the fire coating for the selected Cable Library coating type. Remarks
are a description only (The word default is used if the cable fire coating is part of the original ETAP
Library.)
8.5.3 Library Quick Pick - Fire Stop

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Stop by checking the box next to Fire Stop. The
Fire Stop box only appears if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air Drop. Click on the
Stop Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.

Select a Manufacturer and a cable fire protection type from the dialog box. Cable fire protection type

Engineering Libraries Cable Fire Wrap
8.6 Cable Fire Wrap

The Cable Fire Wrap Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library and unlimited fire wrap types for each manufacturer,
as shown below.
Fire Wrap Library Header

Header Fire Wrap Type
Header Fire Wrap Type

Fire Wrap Type

Header

Fire Wrap Type
Fire wrap adjustment factors are used for cables routed through conduits, trays, etc. that have been
wrapped with a fire barrier. A fire wrap header consists of the installation type and the manufacturer.
You can have unlimited manufacturers for each installation type. The source for existing libraries is TVA.
The three installation types available are:

8.6.1 Fire Wrap Library Selector
The Cable Fire Wrap Library allows you to add new fire wrap types or select existing fire wraps for
modification, deletion, or copying. To edit a Fire Wrap Library, double-click on the item or click on the
Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a fire wrap, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
selection. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected cable fire wrap.

Add
new library header, by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.
Copy
new library header by selecting it, and clicking the Edit button.
8.6.2 Fire Wrap Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit Cable Fire Wrap Library data. Each library record is
a unique set of data for each cable fire wrap type. Appending two columns, Material+Configuration,
forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns is repeated, that row is deleted,
i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields must contain at least one
different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP will display a frame
requesting that you confirm this request before adding any library data.
Material
Enter the type of material used in the construction of the fire wrap. Material type is a description only.
Configuration
Enter the thickness of the fire wrap. Configuration is a description only.
ACF
Remarks
Enter general remarks concerning the fire coating for the selected Cable Library coating type. Remarks
are a description only (The word default is used if the cable fire coating is part of the original ETAP
Library.)

8.6.3 Library Quick Pick - Fire Wrap

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box for Cable Fire Wrap by checking the box next to Fire Wrap.
The Fire Wrap box appears only if the installation type is A/G Trays, A/G Conduit, or Air Drop. Click on
the Wrap Lib button to select a specific Manufacturer and ACF.
Select a Manufacturer and a cable fire protection type from the dialog box. Cable fire protection type

Engineering Libraries Transmission Line
8.7 Transmission Line Library (Phase Conductors)

The Line Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have unlimited line
headers (Line Types) within the library and unlimited line sizes for each header as shown below.
8.7.1 Library Header
Unit System Metric or English unit system; used for all line physical dimensions
Frequency Rated base frequency of the line in Hz
Conductor Type Available conductor types for the line
Temperature
o Base T1 Base temperature of the conductor resistance in degrees C
o Base T2 Base temperature of the conductor resistance in degrees C
o Ta Ambient temperature of the line in degree C
o Tc Maximum allowable conductor temperature in degree C
Code Transmission Line Code Name. Used by different standards to identify
sizes
Size Size of the transmission line in Kcmil or mm2
Strands Number of strands for the main conductor of the line

8.7.2 Transmission Line Library Selector
The Transmission Line Library selector allows you to add new Transmission Line headers, select
existing Transmission Line headers to edit, delete, or copy Transmission Lines. To edit a Transmission
Line Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a
Transmission Line, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will request confirmation to
delete the selected Transmission Line.
All available Transmission Line headers are displayed in the selector. Transmission Line sizes are
displayed on each Transmission Line header for your convenience. The transmission Line size is in kcmil
for English Transmission Line data and in mm2 for metric Transmission Line data.
Add and Copy

This dialog box is used to add a new transmission line header (type) or copy an existing transmission line
header.

A new transmission line header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create
a new cable header by changing any one of the items in the cable header information.
Editor
To edit the Transmission Line data, select a Transmission Line type from the Transmission Line Library
and click on the Edit Properties button. Each Transmission Line type (header) can contain an unlimited
number of Transmission Line sizes. This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit Transmission
Line Library data for a selected Transmission Line type. The name of the Transmission Line type is
displayed on top of the spreadsheet. Each Transmission Line record (row) is a unique set of data for each
Transmission Line size. Each Transmission Line record must have a unique identifier: Code and size.
Duplicate records, which have the same data, are overwritten. The conductor size must contain at least
one character, which is different from the other sizes. If a row of data duplicates a previous one, it will
overwrite it.

Avail
Enter Y (yes) or N (no) for availability of the line size. Use this option to flag the lines you want to be
used for this project. When you are picking a line from the library (Line Library Quick Pick), you can
pick from available lines only or from all lines in the library. Note: When you use the drop-down list for
Line Sizes (in the Line Type section of Transmission Line Editors), you can only select the library lines
that are flagged as available.
Code
Depending on the standard, transmission line sizes can be identified by different codes. Some standards
use bird names, flower names, cities, fruit names, animals, etc. The name specified in this field must be
unique up to 16 alphanumeric characters in length.
Size
Cable size is specified in kcmil for English transmission line data and in mm2 for metric cable data.
Ampacity
This is the maximum allowed current for the transmission line in amps when the line is installed at a
temperature Ta and a conductor temperature of Tc.
Strands
Enter the number of strands for the conductor of the transmission line. In the case of a composite line
such as ACSR, the number of strands entered in this field would be the number of strands of the
aluminum conductor.
Strand Dia.
Enter the diameter of the conductor strands in inches for English transmission lines and centimeters for
metric transmission lines.
Steel Strand
Enter the number of strands for the reinforcement conductor of the transmission line. In the case of a
composite line such as ACSR, the number of strands entered in this field would be the number of strands
of the steel conductor.
Strand Dia., Steel

Enter the diameter of the reinforcement conductor strands in inches for English transmission lines and
centimeters for metric transmission lines.
OD
Specify the Overall Transmission Line Diameter in inches for English lines and centimeters for metric
lines.
GMR
Specify conductor Geometric Mean Radius in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius.
Ra T1
This is the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile for English lines and
ohms per kilometer for metric lines. This value and Ra T2 will be used to calculate the impedance
variation of the line with respect to temperature using the methods of interpolation and extrapolation.

Ra T2
This is the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile for English lines and
ohms per kilometer for metric lines. This value and Ra T1 will be used to calculate the impedance
variation of the line with respect to temperature using the methods of interpolation and extrapolation.
Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per conductor per unit length at 1ft spacing.
Xa
Enter the conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per conductor per unit length at 1 ft spacing.
Rdc
Enter the conductor DC resistance in ohms per conductor per unit length.
Weight
Enter the weight of the cable in units of lbf/ft or N/m.
Strength
Enter the breaking strength capacity of the line in pounds.
Comment
Enter any notes or comments about this line.
8.7.3 Transmission Line Library Quick Pick

Access the Library Quick Pick dialog box by clicking on the Library button inside the Editor Parameter
page for ground wires and phase conductors. The Library Quick Pick displays all of the line information
in the associated library file.
From this dialog box, select a Unit system, Frequency, Conductor, and Source Name. This narrows the
choice of available library selections to a group you are interested in. Then, select a Conductor type and
line size. The Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to choose a line size from all line sizes in the
library file or only lines flagged as Available.

Engineering Libraries Motor Nameplate
8.8 Motor Nameplate

The Motor Nameplate Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. Select the desired
frequency and unit. Units are converted automatically during calculations so the selection of either kW or
HP provides complete information to ETAP. Unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the library may
be specified. Within each header, various voltage levels are available. Motor nameplate types for each
voltage level can be selected, as shown below.
Header Record
Motor Nameplate 60 Hz HP kV Manufacturer Type
Library 50 Hz kW kV Manufacturer Type
kV Manufacturer
Type

kV Manufacturer Type
A motor nameplate header consists of the frequency, unit system, voltage level, and the manufacturer.
There can be unlimited manufacturers for each header.
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
kW/HP Select unit type
Manufacturer Up to 12 characters long
Voltage In kV
8.8.1 Motor Nameplate Library Header

The Motor Nameplate Library allows you to add motor nameplate models or modify existing motor
nameplate models. Click on the Edit button to edit a motor nameplate model within the Motor Nameplate
Library. Click on the Delete button to delete a selected motor nameplate model. ETAP will display a
frame requesting that you confirm this request before removing any library data.
Add
Select this option to enter the manufacturer name and kV rating of the motor nameplate you wish to add
to the library. You can edit the properties of the new motor nameplate selection by highlighting it in the
provided list, then clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name and kV rating to a new manufacturer
name and kV rating. This function can be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in a library
entry while retaining the original data. You can edit the properties of the new nameplate selection by
highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
8.8.2 Motor Nameplate Editor
This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Motor Nameplate Library data. Select the motor
design operating frequency and units for motor mechanical rating of the selected motor. Appending two
columns, HP/kW+Frame Size, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these two columns
is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination of both fields
will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before adding any library data.
HP/kW
Enter the motor nameplate power (HP or kW).

Frame Size
Enter the motor frame size.
Design Letter
Enter the motor NEMA design letter.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the motor.
Syn. Speed
Enter the motor rated synchronous speed (RPM).
kVA
Enter the motor rated kVA.
Phase
Enter the number of phases for the motor.
SF
Enter the motor service factor.
LRC
Enter the locked-rotor current as a percentage of the rated full load current.
FLA
Enter the motor full load current in amperes.
Pflr
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent.
PF50%
Enter the motor power factor at 50% loading in percent.
PF75%
PF100%
EFF50%
Enter the motor efficiency at 50% loading in percent.
EFF75%
EFF100%

Tlr
Enter the motor locked-rotor torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Tmax
Enter the motor maximum torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Tfl
Enter the motor full load torque in lb-ft or kg-m.
Slip@Tmax
Enter the motor slip at maximum torque in percent.
Xsc Cycle
Enter the subtransient reactance of the motor in percent (machine base) to be used in short-circuit studies.
Xsc 1.5-4 Cycle

Enter the transient reactance of the motor in percent (machine base) to be used in short-circuit studies.
X
Enter the motor steady-state reactance in percent (machine base) to be used in the IEC 363 method.
X2
Negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base).
X0
Zero sequence reactance (machine base).
X/R
Induction motors X/R (X/Ra).
Td
Enter the motor transient time constant in seconds:
Td = X/(2 f Rr) (Rr = rotor resistance)
This value is used in the IEC 363 short-circuit method.
Char. Model
Enter the characteristic model ID from the Motor Characteristic Model Library.
CKT Model
Enter the CKT model ID from the Motor Model Library; CKT models include types Single1, Single2,
DBL1, and DBL2.

8.8.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Nameplate

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a motor in the one-line diagram,
and then clicking on the Library button in the Nameplate page of the Motor Editor. The Library Quick
Pick options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
Select a motor nameplate from the library from this dialog box. Specify HP tables or kW tables, and then
select the appropriate voltage level, manufacturer, and design from the Motor Nameplate Library. Motor
nameplate design includes the HP/kW, frame size, letter, poles, and synchronous speed (RPM).

Engineering Libraries Motor Circuit (CKT) Model
8.9 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model

The Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can
have unlimited headers (design classes) within each model type (Single1, Single2, or DBL1/DBL2), and
unlimited motor model IDs for each header, as shown below.
Motor Circuit Single1 Design Class

Model ID
Model Library Single2 Design Class
Model ID
DBL1/ Design Class
Model ID
DBL2

Design Class
Model ID
A motor circuit model header consists of the model type and design class. You can have unlimited model
IDs for each header.
8.9.1 Motor Circuit Model Selector
The Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library allows you to add new motor model design classes or select
existing motor model design classes, based on the selection made for Model Type, for modification,
deletion, or copying. To edit a motor model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a motor model design class, click on the Delete button after highlighting a
model. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting the selected
design class.

Add
Select this option to enter the design class of the motor model you wish to add to the library. You can
then edit the properties of the new motor model selection by highlighting it from the list provided, then
clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one design class to a new design class. This function can be
useful if you wish to change a few specifications in a library entry while retaining the original data. The
properties of the new model library selection can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, then
clicking on the Edit button.
8.9.2 Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the Motor Circuit (CKT) Model Library data. Each
library record is a unique set of data for each motor model type. A unique record is obtained by the
Model ID. If this name is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. If a row
(record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this
request before adding any library data.
Model Type (Single1)

This is an equivalent circuit (CKT) model of a single cage motor where the rotor resistance and reactance
are constant.
Model ID
Select an existing model ID. Model IDs are unique names with up to 12 characters.
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio.
X
Enter the transient reactance (= Xs+XmXr / (Xm+Xr) in percent (machine base).
Xoc
Enter the open circuit reactance (= Xs+Xm) in percent (machine base).
Tdo
Enter the open circuit time constant (= (Xr+Xm)/2fRr) in seconds.
Model Type (Single2)

This is a circuit (CKT) model of a single cage motor where the rotor resistance and reactance change as
functions of motor speed to represent deep-bar effects of the rotor.
Model ID
Rs
Enter the motor stator resistance in percent (machine base).
Xs
Enter the motor stator reactance in percent (machine base).
Xm
Enter the motor magnetizing reactance in percent (machine base).
Rr,fl
Enter the motor rotor resistance at full load in percent (machine base).
Rr,lr
Enter the motor rotor resistance at locked-rotor in percent (machine base).
Xr,fl
Enter the motor rotor reactance at full load in percent (machine base).
Xr,lr
Enter the motor rotor reactance at locked-rotor in percent (machine base).
Model Type (DBL1/DBL2)

This is a circuit (CKT) model of a double cage motor having two rotor cages.
Model ID
Rs
Enter the motor stator resistance in percent (machine base).
Xs
Enter the motor stator reactance in percent (machine base).

Xm
Enter the motor magnetizing reactance in percent (machine base).
Rr1
Enter the motor rotor resistance for the first rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Rr2
Enter the motor rotor resistance for the second rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Xr1
Enter the motor rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
Xr2
Enter the motor rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit in percent (machine base).
8.9.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Model

and then clicking on the Library button in the LR Model page of the Motor Editor. The Library Quick
Pick options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
Select a motor model from the library from this dialog box. Specify whether you would like a Single1,
Single2, or Double-Cage (DBL) model, then select the appropriate design class and model ID from the
library.

Engineering Libraries Motor Characteristic Model
8.10 Motor Characteristic Model

The Motor Characteristic Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can
have unlimited headers, and each header is defined by a motor model ID specified within a design class,
as shown below.
Motor Characteristic Header Model ID
Model Library Header Model ID
Header Model ID

Header Model ID
A motor characteristic header consists of a design class and a model ID. You can have unlimited records
for each header.
8.10.1 Motor Characteristic Model Library Selector
Motor characteristic model libraries shipped with ETAP contain several design classes that are named
according to the following three criterions:
Voltage HV (High Voltage) LV (Low Voltage)

Slip HS (High Slip) LS (Low Slip)
Torque HT (High Torque) LT (Low Torque)
For example, HV-LS-HT means High Voltage, Low Slip, and High Torque.
These naming criterions are based on NEMA definitions:

NEMA Class A&B - Normal Torque Low Slip
NEMA Class C - High Torque Low Slip

NEMA Class D - High Torque High Slip

NEMA Class E&F - Low Torque Low Slip
Low voltage is considered to be devices rated at less than 1 kV.
The Motor Characteristic Model Library allows you to add new motor characteristic design classes and
models or select existing motor characteristic design classes and models for modification, deletion, or
copying. To edit a motor characteristic model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after
highlighting it. To delete a motor characteristic model design class, click on the Delete button after
highlighting a model. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting
the selected design class.
Add
Select this option to input the name of the manufacturer and choose the design class you wish to add to
the library. You can edit the properties of the new Motor Characteristic Model Library selection by
highlighting it in the provided list, and then clicking on the Edit button.
Copy
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name and design class to a new one. This
function can be useful if you wish to change a few specifications in the library entry while retaining the
original data. The properties of the new Motor Characteristic Model Library selection can be edited by
highlighting it from the list provided, then clicking on the Edit button.
8.10.2 Motor Characteristic Model Editor
This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit selected motor characteristic design classes and
models. Each library record is a unique set of data for each motor characteristic design class. A unique
record name is defined by Slip. If the record is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are

overwritten. If a row (record) of data duplicates a previous one, ETAP will display a frame requesting
that you confirm this request before overwriting any library data.
Model
Slip
Enter the motor slip as a percentage.
Torque
Enter the machine torque as a percentage of full load torque.
I
Enter the motor current as a percentage of full load current.
PF
Enter the motor power factor as a percentage.
8.10.3 Library Quick Pick - Motor Characteristic Model

then clicking on the Library button in the Model page of the Motor Editor. The Library Quick Pick
options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
Pick a motor torque slip characteristic curve from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate
design class and model ID from the Motor Characteristic Model Library.

Engineering Libraries Motor Load Model
8.11 Motor Load Model

The Motor Load Model Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. You can have
unlimited models within the library, as shown below.
Motor Load Model

Model Library
Model
Model

Model
8.11.1 Motor Load Model Selector

The Motor Load Model Library selector is used to add, modify, and select mechanical load models based
on torque curve characteristics.
Model Type
Polynomial
The Motor Load Library allows you to model the load based on the Polynomial equation:
T = A0 + A1 * + A2 * 2 + A3 * 3

Where is the per unit speed of the load and torque T is in percent of the rated torque of the driving
motor. For convenience, ETAP displays the load curve and prints the values of percent torque at 0, 25%,
50%, 75%, and 100% speed.
Curve
You can specify the model based on a torque slip curve by selecting this option.
Motor Load Model Library Editor

You can enter the model ID of the motor load selection you wish to add to the library in the editor. You
can also edit the properties of the new motor load selection by highlighting it from the list provided, and
then clicking on the Edit button.

Model ID
Select any one of the existing model IDs. Model IDs are unique names with up to 12 characters.
Coefficients (Polynomial)
While in Edit mode, you can change the values of A0, A1, A2, & A3 coefficients by entering a value
directly or by clicking the Up/Down arrows next to the coefficient. Note: The lower limit of the
coefficients is reached when the load torque becomes zero. The upper limit is reached when the load
torque is 999%.
The Motor Load selector window allows you to add new motor load types or select one from the existing
library for modification or deletion. To edit a load model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit
button after highlighting it. You may then change the coefficients. To delete a motor load model, click
on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this
request before deleting the selected load model.
%Speed, %Slip, %Torque (Curve)

Use the Torque-Slip or Torque-Speed Curve to read and enter the points in these fields. Speed is in
percentage, based on the Synchronous speed. Torque is in percentage, based on the Rated Machine
Torque.
The Motor Load selector window allows you to add new motor load types or select one from the existing
library for modification or deletion. To edit a load model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit
button after highlighting it. You may then change the coefficients. To delete a motor load model, click
on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this
request before deleting the selected load model.

Engineering Libraries Fuse
8.12 Fuse
The Fuse Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library structure
stores levels or headers (i.e. Standard, AC/DC, Manufacturer, Model, etc.) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is as shown below.
Header Record
Fuse Library
Library ANSI AC Manufacturer Model Max. kV Speed Size Amps,
Manufacturer Model Max. kV Speed Size Short
IEC DC* Speed circuit,
Manufacturer Model Max. kV Size
Curve

points

Manufacturer Model Max. kV Speed Size
* - DC fuse will have Max. Volts in the header
The Fuse Library header consists of Standard AC/DC Manufacturer Model Max. kV (Max. Volts
for DC) Speed. For each header, you can have unlimited records of fuse size, for which ampere value,
short-circuit data and minimum melting / total clearing points curve points can be defined.
8.12.1 Fuse Library editor

The Fuse Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select the Library from
the menu bar and select Fuse. This will bring up the Fuse Editor. The fields of this Library Editor are
described in this section.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for fuse filtered by the selected standard and AC/DC.
Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-
specified).
Link
Displays a manufacturer web link or URL address.
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of a fuse manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Enter the manufacturer name you wish to add to the library. This field is a required library parameter.
Reference
Enter the reference, if available, for the manufacturer. This field is provided for reference only and may
be left blank.
Link
Enter the manufacturer web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank
Lock
specified).

Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and
then clicking on Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited.
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
To delete a selected fuse manufacturer and all models provided by that manufacturer, select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. ETAP will
display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting the selected manufacturer.
Locked entries cannot be deleted from the library. If you attempt to delete a locked entry the following
message is displayed.
Copy
To copy the selected fuse manufacturer and all models provided by that manufacturer, select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on Copy button. All models and
parameters for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer name.

Model
Model
Model lists all the Model-Max kV (Max V for DC)-Speed, for the selected fuse manufacturer.
Lock
specified).
Class, Type
Displays the class and type for the selected fuse model.
Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Application
Displays the reference for the selected fuse model.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the fuse model you wish to add to the library.

Manufacturer
Displays the manufacturer name.
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library. This field is a required library parameter.
Max kV (Max V for DC fuse)

Enter the Max kV (Max V for DC fuse) for the fuse. This field is a required library parameter.
Speed
Select the speed of the fuse from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
Class, Type
Select the class and type of the fuse from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
CLF (checkbox)
Check if the fuse is a current limiting fuse. This field is a required library parameter.
Reference
Enter the reference, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.

Catalog #, Issue Date

Enter the catalog number and catalog issue date. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Brand Name
Enter the brand name, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Description
Enter the description for the fuse model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Application
Enter the application for the fuse model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Link
Enter the model web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
You can edit properties of the new or existing model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
clicking on the Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited. The model link field is not displayed for
locked models.

Delete Model
Delete
To delete a specific fuse model select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on
the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm the request.

Copy
Copy a fuse model by selecting the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then clicking on
the Copy button. The selected model will be copied to the user-specified Model name, Max kV, and
Speed.
Help
Open the Help file for the Fuse Library.
Close
Close the Fuse Library Editor and save all changes.
Edit Parameters
Select a model and click on the Edit Parameters button to open the Parameters Editor. The Parameters
Editor allows you to specify available sizes for the selected fuse model, along with short-circuit data and
curve points. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you
can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows. Locked entries
cannot be edited or deleted, but can be copied.
The different fields in the Parameters Editor for entering data for ANSI fuse are described below.

Standard
Displays the selected standard.
Manufacturer
Displays the selected manufacturer name.
Model
Displays the selected model name.
Speed
Displays the speed of the selected fuse model.
Max. kV (Max. V for DC fuse)

Displays the maximum voltage for the selected fuse model.
Size
Enter a size identification number up to 12 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
Cont. Amp
Enter the continuous ampere value in amperes for the selected size. This field is a required library
parameter.

Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting value in kA for the selected size. This is an essential field; however, it
can be left blank if information is not available.
Test PF, Test X/R

Enter the Test PF or Test X/R for the short-circuit kA. Entering the Test PF will calculate the Test X/R
value and vice versa. These are essential fields; however, they can be left blank if information is not
available.
TCC
Click on the Points button to define the Minimum Melting, Total Clearing and Peak Let-Thru curves for
the selected size. The TCC points buttons are not available for locked entries.
Construction
Enter the construction type for the fuse size. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Note
Enter notes if required for the selected fuse size. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Lock
specified).
The parameters for IEC fuse are identical to ANSI fuse with the exception of short-circuit data, which is
described below.

Breaking kA
Enter the short-circuit breaking kA for the selected size. This is an essential field; however, it can be left
blank if information is not available.
Test X/R
Enter the Test X/R for the short-circuit breaking kA. This is an essential field; however, it can be left
blank if information is not available.
TRV
Enter the Transient recovery voltage (TRV) in kV, for the selected fuse size. This is an essential field;
however, it can be left blank if information is not available.
Fuse TCC Curve

Click on the Points button for ANSI / IEC fuse size to open the Fuse TCC curve window. The Fuse
TCCCurve Editor allows you to define the Minimum Melting, Total Clearing and Peak Let-Thru curves
for the selected fuse size. The TCC points are not available for locked entries.

The header for the Fuse TCC curve displays details of the fuse model and size selected for defining the
curve points.
TCC ID, Revision

Enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the Minimum Melting and Total Clearing curves, for the
selected fuse size.
Notes
Enter notes for the TCC curve of the selected fuse size.
TCC Points
Enter the time in seconds and current in amperes for minimum melting and total clearing curves. You can
Add, Edit and Delete data using the Add and Delete buttons. Check Apply Smoothing to smooth the
minimum melting and total clearing curves.

Peak Let-Thru
The Peak Let-Thru page is available only if the fuse is defined as a current limiting (CLF) fuse. Enter the
short-circuit RMS and Instantaneous peak values in kA. You can Add, Edit and Delete data using the Add
and Delete buttons. Check Apply Smoothing to smooth the Peak Let-Thru curve.

Engineering Libraries Relay
8.13 Relay
The Relay Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library
structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Function, etc.) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, CT inputs, etc.). The library header structure is as
shown below.
Header
Relay L ibrary
Library M anufacturer Model Overcurrent
M anufacturer Model O verload
M anufacturer Model Differential
Distance

Manufacturer Model
The Relay Library header consists of Manufacturer Model Function. A relay model can be single
function (i.e. ABB CO relay with overcurrent function only) or multiple functions (i.e. ABB SPAM 150C
with overcurrent, overload, voltage, frequency, etc.). You can have unlimited functions for a relay model
in the Relay Library. Each relay function has its own header classification, which is explained further in
this section.
8.13.1 Relay Library Editor

The Relay Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select a library from
the menu bar and then select Relay. This will bring up the Relay Editor. The fields of the Library Editor
are described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for relays.
Lock
specified).
Link
Displays the manufacturer web link or URL address.
Add
Click the Add button to input the name of relay manufacturer you wish to add to the library.

Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Enter the manufacturer web link. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Lock
specified).
Edit Info

Delete Manufacturer
Delete
This selection allows you to delete a relay manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
manufacturer will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
Locked entries cannot be deleted from the library. If you attempt to delete a locked entry, the following
message will be displayed.
Copy
Copy the relay manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by
highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and parameters for
the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer name.
Filter
The Filter allows you to view all relay models for the selected manufacturer, based on the filter selected.
You can view all relay models or filter your selection by Protection Type and Function Type.

Model
Model
Lists all relay models for the selected manufacturer based on the filter selected.
Lock
specified).
Functions
Displays the functions (Overcurrent, Overload, etc.) for the selected relay model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected relay model.
Brand Name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected relay model.
Application
Displays the application for the selected relay model.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the relay model you wish to add to the library. An example of an
Overcurrent relay (ABB DPU-2000R) being added to the library is shown below.

Manufacturer
Model
Protection type
Select the protection type(s) of for the model by checking the box. This field is used for filtering the
model based on protection type and may be left blank, if no information is available.
Single Function
Select this option to define the model as a single-function relay. This option allows you to select the
function from a drop-down list.

Multiple Functions
Select this option to define the model as a multiple-function relay. This option allows you to select
different functions available for the relay.
Note: The available trip elements vary based on the relay function. Selecting the relay function(s) is a
required relay library parameter.
Trip Elements
Check the applicable trip elements for the selected relay function. This field is a required library
parameter.
The available trip elements for the Overcurrent function are Instantaneous, Time Overcurrent,
Directional, Voltage Control / Restraint, Short Time, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground, and Negative
Sequence.
The available trip elements for the Overload and Overload Inline functions are Thermal, Acceleration
Curve, Jam, Instantaneous, and Ground.
I2 Operates on
Select the multiples of negative sequence current (I2), which the relay uses to operate the negative
sequence element.

I0 Operates on
Select the multiples of zero sequence current (I0), which the relay uses to operate the neutral, ground, and
sensitive ground elements.
Differential Type
For the Differential function, select High Impedance or Percentage Type.
# of TOC Levels
Select the number of TOC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected relay model (Available only for
Overcurrent function).
# of IOC Levels
Select the number of IOC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected relay model (Available only for
the Overcurrent function).
Independent TOC/IOC
Check to indicate if the TOC and the IOC curves for the relay model are independent (Available only for
the Overcurrent function).
Brand name, Reference

Enter the model brand name and reference, if available. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.

Enter the catalog number and catalog issue date. These fields are provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Current Rating
Select a current rating for the relay from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
OC CT Inputs
Select the number of overcurrent (OC) CT inputs for the relay from the list box. Note: The CT input
number selected for the relay indicates the types of overcurrent CT terminals that are available for the
relay for CT inputs, not the number of connections. For example, if you select OC CT Inputs as 2, it
indicates that the relay has Phase and Ground terminals available for OC CT inputs. This field is a
required library parameter.
PT Inputs
Select the number of PT inputs for the relay from the list box. Note: The PT input number selected for
the relay indicates the types of PT terminals that are available for the relay for PT inputs, not the
number of connections. For example, if you select PT Inputs as 2, it indicates that the relay has Phase and
Ground terminals available for PT inputs. This field is a required library parameter.
DIF CT Inputs
Select the number of differential (DIF) CT inputs for the relay from the list box. Note: When the
Differential Type is High Impedance, this selection is fixed to a value of 1.

Link
blank.
Description
Application
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
clicking on Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited. The model link field is not displayed for
locked models.

Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected relay model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after confirmation.

Copy
Copy a selected relay model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on
the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the user-specified
model name.
Help
Open a Help topic for the Relay Library.
Close
Close the Relay Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
To access the function parameters for a model, select a relay model along with desired function and click
on the Parameters button. Note: The Parameters Editor is not available for the Differential function.
Parameters (Overcurrent Function)

The library header structure for Overcurrent function is as shown below.

Header Record
Relay Library
Overcurrent Curve Type Overcurrent 51 Settings Settings 1, Settings2,
Function
Curve Type
51V (C/R)
Curve Type Settings 1, Settings2,
Settings

Instantaneous 50 Settings Settings 1, Settings2,

Curve Type
Short Time
Settings 1, Settings2,
Settings
The Parameters Editor allows you to specify different relay characteristic curves, along with settings
associated with trip elements available for overcurrent function. The Parameters Editor for ABB DPU-
2000R relay is shown below.
Curve (51/ST) Tab
Manufacturer

Model
Function
Displays the selected function type.
Curve Type
Define different relay characteristic curves by equation or points.
Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
Assign
Assign the relay characteristic curve to selected trip element. You can assign the curves to Time
overcurrent or Short-Time elements or both (OC/ST). This field is a required library parameter.
Type
Select the type of curve (defined by equation or defined by points) from the list. This field is a required
library parameter.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the curve here.
Lock
specified).
Add, Delete, Copy, Paste

You can Add, Delete and Copy curves using the Add, Delete, Copy, and Paste buttons. Locked entries
cannot be deleted, but can be copied.
Edit
Click on the Edit button to enter the TCC Equation or TCC Points data depending on the type of the
selected relay curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries.

TCC Equation Data

TCC Equation Data Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by equation. The parameters
that are available are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Curve
Displays the selected curve name.
Equation
Enter the equation for the selected curve. You can enter the equation using basic math operators +, -, *, /.
You can also nest expressions using parentheses. The math functions can be entered in C# math syntax.
The equation is defined based on the following variables:

TD Time Dial
M Pickup Multiples

For example: An equation for Trip time = (80/(M^2-1))*TD
The C# syntax for this function is:
(80/(Math.Pow(M,2)-1))*TD
For more information on C# functions please visit the msdn website and search for math members.
Time Dial
Enter the time dial range for the curve type. You can enter the time dial as continuous (i.e. Min, Max, and
Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons.
Min Multiple / Max Multiple

Enter the minimum and maximum current multiple for the selected curve.
Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve is plotted as definite time curve beyond the max multiples.
Help
Open the Help topic for the TCC Equation Data Editor.
OK
This selection closes the TCC Equation Data Editor, saving all changes.
Cancel
This closes the TCC Equation Data Editor, discarding all changes.
TCC Points
The TCC Points Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by points. The different
parameters available are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Curve

Time Dial, Time, Multiples

Enter the Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples to define the curve for the specified
time dial. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can
select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows.
Time Dial
Enter the time dial range for the curve type. You can enter the time dial as continuous (i.e. Min, Max, and

Definite
Help
OK
Close the TCC Equation Data Editor, saving all changes.

Cancel
Close the TCC Equation Data Editor, discarding all changes.
Curve Parameters
Enter the settings for Time Overcurrent (51) trip element. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using
the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete,
insert, copy and paste rows. The different parameters available are described below.
51 (Time Overcurrent) Tab

Enter pick up settings for the Time Overcurrent trip element for the selected curve type.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for Time Overcurrent pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
Min Trip, Max Trip, Trip Step

Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip, and Trip Step
values for the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Trip
Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for
the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the drop-down list.
Assign
Assign the selected pickup range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence,
Ground, etc. or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G
assigns the Time Overcurrent pickup range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the Time
Overcurrent pickup range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns the pickup
range to Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other assignments.
Burden, Burden unit

Enter the Burden value and Burden unit (VA or Ohm) for the selected pickup range.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the trip range here.

51 V(C/R) Tab
Enter the settings for Voltage control and restraint elements.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for voltage, i.e. Volts, Multiples or Percent from the list box. When the unit is selected as
Multiples or Percent, then the range entered is actually in multiples or percent of PT-sec.
Vmin, Vmax, VStep

Define the voltage setting as continuous values by entering Vmin, Vmax and VStep values for the
selected voltage unit (Volts, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Volts
Define the voltage setting as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Volts field, for the
selected voltage unit (Volts, Multiples or Percent).
Characteristic
Select a voltage restraint characteristic from the list box.
Notes
Short Time Tab

Enter the pickup settings for the Short Time trip element for the selected curve type.

Unit
Select the unit for Short Time pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list.

Define the Short Time pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values
for the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Trip
Define the Short Time pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the
selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the list box.
Assign
assigns the Short Time pickup range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the Short Time pickup
range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns the pickup range to Phase, Neutral,
Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other assignments.
Notes
Instantaneous (50) Tab

Enter the settings for Instantaneous (50). You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and
Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy
and paste rows. The available parameters are described below.

Instantaneous Trip Parameters

Enter the pickup settings for the Instantaneous trip element.
Unit
Select the unit for Instantaneous pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.

Define the Instantaneous pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step

Discrete Trip
Define the Instantaneous pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the list.
Assign
assigns the Instantaneous Overcurrent pickup range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the
Instantaneous Overcurrent pickup range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns
the pickup range to Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other
assignments.
Notes
Instantaneous Delay Parameters

Enter the settings for the Instantaneous Time Delay.
Unit
Select the unit for Time Delay i.e. seconds or cycles from the list.
Min Delay, Max Delay, Delay Step

Define the Time Delay as continuous values by entering Min Delay, Max Delay and Delay Step values
for the selected unit (seconds or cycles).
Discrete Delay
Define the Time Delay as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Delay field, for the selected
unit (seconds or cycles).
Assign
Assign the selected time delay range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence,
assigns the Instantaneous time delay range only to Ground element, selecting Q assigns the
Instantaneous time delay range only to Negative Sequence element and selecting 51/G assigns the time
delay range to Phase, Neutral, Negative sequence and Ground elements and similarly for other
assignments.

+Delay
Enter the built-in additional delay associated with the instantaneous operation here.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the delay range here.
Points (Instantaneous)
The Instantaneous Points Editor allows you to define the Instantaneous as a curve by points. You can
Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row
(highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows. The different parameters available
are described below.
Multiples, tmin, tmax

Enter the pickup multiples and corresponding minimum and maximum time in seconds. If the
Instantaneous curve does not have tolerance (i.e., line curve) then you can enter the same time interval
value for tmin and tmax.
Parameters (Overload and Overload Inline Function)
Curve (49/Accl.) Tab

Manufacturer
Model
Function
Displays the selected function type.
Curve Type
Define the different relay characteristic curves by equation or points.

Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library
parameter.
Assign
Assign the Overload relay characteristic curve to either 49 or Acceleration. This field is a required library
parameter.
Amb. Temp.
Enter the Ambient Temperature in degree Celsius for the selected curve type.
Type
Select the type of curve (defined by equation or defined by points) from the list. This field is a required
library parameter.
Notes
Enter details about the curve type up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.
Lock
specified).

Edit
selected relay curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries.
TCC Equation Data

The TCC Equation Data Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by equation. The
parameters that are available are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Curve

Equation

TD Time Multiplier
M Multiples of pickup or FLA based on selection for Current Multiplier.
K k Multiplier
For example: An equation for Trip time = 60.00*TD*LN((((M*M)/(K*K))/(K*K)))/(((M*M)/(K*K))-1))
60.00*TD*Math.Log(((M*M)/(K*K))/(((M*M)/(K*K))-1))
Current Multiplier
Select the current multiplier from the drop-down list (FLA or pickup).

Time Multiplier
Enter the time multiplier range for the selected curve type. You can enter the time multiplier as
continuous (i.e. Min, Max, and Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons.
Display
Check to display and use the time multiplier for the selected curve type.
Label
Enter a name for the time multiplier up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
k Multiplier
Enter the k multiplier range for the selected curve type. You can enter the k multiplier as continuous (i.e.
Min, Max, and Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) separated by semicolons. When used in the relay
equation, the k Multiplier shifts the curve similar to a time dial (time multiplier). The k Multiplier can
also alter the starting point of the relay curve depending on the type of the multiplier used in the equation
(K, E, or C) as described below.
For K multiplier , the min multiple (where the curve begins) of is shifted by 1.0001 * K (where K is the
value selected in the Overload Relay Editor). The relay curve starting point is shifted by (Current
Multiplier*Min Multiple*K).
For E multiplier, the min multiple is shifted by 1.0001 * sqrt(E/100) (where E is the value selected in
the Overload Relay Editor). The relay curve starting point is shifted by (Current Multiplier *Min
Multiple*sqrt(E/100)).
For C multiplier, the min multiple does not get shifted.
Display
Check to display and use the k multiplier for the selected curve type.
Label
Enter a name for the k multiplier up to 30 alphanumeric characters. The default label is k Factor.

Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve goes definite after the max multiples.
Help
OK
Cancel

TCC Points
The TCC Points Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by points. The different
Manufacturer
Model
Curve
Points
Current Multiplier
Select the current multiplier from the drop-down list (FLA or pickup).

Min Curve
Enter the Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples to define the min curve. You can Add,
Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row and right-
click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows.
Max Curve
Enter the Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples to define the max curve. You can Add,
Edit and Delete the data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row and right-
click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows.
If the Overload curve does not have tolerance (i.e. line curve), then you have to just enter the points for
the Max curve alone.

Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve goes definite after the max multiples.
Help
OK
Cancel
Curve Parameters
Enter the settings for the selected curve type. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the Add and
Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste
rows. The different parameters available are described below.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for Overload pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the drop-down list.


Define the Overload pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values
for the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Discrete Trip
Define the Overload pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the
Burden, Burden unit

Enter the Burden value and Burden unit (VA or Ohm) for the selected pickup range.
Notes
Enter details about the Overload pickup range up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.
Jam / GND / 50 Tab
Trip Parameters
The pickup settings for the Jam/Ground/Instantaneous element is defined here.

Unit
Select the unit for the pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
Base
Select a base for the pickup from the list.
Min, Max, Step

Define the pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values for the
Discrete
Define the pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the selected trip
unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Notes
Enter details about the pickup range up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.
Delay Parameters
The time delay settings for the Jam/Ground/Instantaneous element are defined here.
Unit
Select the unit for time delay i.e. seconds or cycles from the list.
Min, Max, Step

Define the time delay as continuous values by entering Min Delay, Max Delay and Delay Step values for
the selected unit (seconds or cycles).

Discrete Delay
Define the time delay as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Delay field, for the selected
+Delay
Enter the built-in additional delay associated with the operation of the Jam/Ground/Instantaneous here.
Notes
Enter details about the time delay range up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is optional.

Engineering Libraries Recloser
8.14 Recloser
The Recloser Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical library
structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Standard, Manufacturer, Type, Model, etc.) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library header structure is shown below.
The Recloser Library header consists of Standard Manufacturer Device Type Model. You can have
unlimited records of short-circuit data and curve assignments defined.
Recloser device types available are:
Recloser Hydraulic
Recloser Electronic
HV Circuit Breaker

8.14.1 Recloser Library Editor
The Recloser Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select the library
from the menu bar and select Recloser. This will bring up the Recloser Library Editor. The different fields
in the Library Editor are described in this section.
Standard
Click on either ANSI or IEC option to select that standard.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for recloser filtered by the selected standard.
Lock
specified).
Link

Add
Select Recloser Standard and then click on the Add button to input the name of the recloser manufacturer
you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Lock
specified).
Edit Info

Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Delete the selected recloser manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
Copy
You can copy a selected recloser manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and
Model
Device Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the recloser type. The recloser types include
Recloser-Electronic, Recloser-Hydraulic, and HV Circuit Breaker.
Model
Lists all the models for the selected recloser manufacturer.
Lock
specified).
Type
Displays the type, single or three phase, for the selected recloser model.

Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Application
Displays the application for the selected recloser model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of a recloser model you wish to add to the library.
Standard
Displays the standard (ANSI or IEC) of the manufacturer.
Manufacturer
Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected manufacturer is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-
specified).

Device Type
Displays the type (Recloser-Electronic, Recloser-Hydraulic, or HV Circuit Breaker) of the new model.
Note: The new model will be of the type selected in the main Recloser Library window.
Model
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library.
Max kV
Select from the list box or enter the Max kV for the recloser.
Max Amps
Select from the list box or enter the Max amps for the recloser.
Interrupting (Break) Time

Enter the interrupting time is cycle or milliseconds. Note: When the standard is IEC this field is labeled
as Break time.
Time Unit
Select from the list box the unit (cycle or millisecond) for the interrupting time.
Rating Std.
Select the circuit breaker standard as Sym or Tot rated from the list box. Note: This is field is only
available when the device type is ANSI HV Circuit Breaker.
Sym Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis
Tot Rated AC high voltage circuit breaker rated on a total current basis
Model Info
Brand Name, Reference

Enter the model brand name and reference if available. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.
Int. Medium
Select from the list box the interrupting medium used in the recloser model. Available selections are Oil,
Vacuum, Gas, and Other.
Type
Select the operating type (single or three-phase) of the recloser model.
Ground Trip
Check the Ground Trip box if the recloser model has a ground trip. This field is only available when the
recloser device type is Recloser-Hydraulic and operating type is Three Phase.

left blank.

Link
Enter the model web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Description
Enter the description for the recloser model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Application
Enter the application for the recloser model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
locked models.

Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected recloser model. Select model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
Copy
Use this selection to copy the selected recloser model. Select model by highlighting it from the list
provided and then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be
copied to the user-specified model name.
Help
Open the Help topic for the Recloser Library.
Close
Close the Recloser Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
Click on the Parameters button to enter the short-circuit data for the recloser model. The short-circuit
parameters are different depending on the recloser device type and standard.
You can Add, Edit and Delete the short-circuit data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you

ANSI/IEC Recloser-Electronic
When the ANSI or IEC standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Electronic, you can enter the
applied kV, interrupting kA, test X/R, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical),
short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, impulse withstand rating, and notes.
kV
Enter the applied voltage in kV.
Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting capability in rms kA. Note: If the standard is IEC this field is labeled
Breaking kA.
Test X/R
Select from the list box or enter the test X/R rating. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the interrupting kA is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the following
table.
Inter. kA X/R
kA <= 1.25 8
1.25 < kA <= 2 10
2 < kA <= 4 12
4 < kA <= 7 14
7 < kA <= 12 15
12 < kA < 20 16
kA >= 20 17

Making kA rms
Enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating in kA. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the
following equation.
Making kA Peak
Enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA. Note: If the value in this field is
initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a
value according to the following equation.
Short-Time kA
Enter the short-time withstand rating for the recloser in kA.
Tkr
Enter the short-time withstand duration for the recloser in seconds.
BIL
Enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the recloser in kV.
Notes
Enter notes pertaining to the rating.
ANSI/IEC Recloser-Hydraulic
When the ANSI or IEC standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic, you can enter the coil
ID, continuous amps rating, minimum trip, and maximum amps for a coil. For each coil you can enter the
applied kV, interrupting kA, test X/R, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical),
short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, impulse withstand rating, and notes.

Size
Coil ID
Enter the ID of the coil.
Amps
Enter the continuous rating of the coil in amps.
Min Trip
Enter the minimum trip rating of the coil in amps. This value is usually two times the coils continuous
rating.
Max Amps
Enter the maximum current rating of the coil in amps. This value is usually equal to the interrupting
current.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the coil here.
Short-Circuit Rating
The short-circuit rating for the selected coil is entered here. Note: This information is not required for
ground element.

kV
Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting capability in rms kA. Note: If the standard is IEC this field is labeled
Breaking kA.
Test X/R
Select from the list box or enter the test X/R rating. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the interrupting kA is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the following
table.
Inter. kA X/R
kA <= 1.25 8
1.25 < kA <= 2 10
2 < kA <= 4 12
4 < kA <= 7 14
7 < kA <= 12 15
12 < kA < 20 16
kA >= 20 17
Making kA rms
Enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating in kA. Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when
the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a value according to the
following equation.
Making kA Peak
Enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA. Note: If the value in this field is
initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field will automatically update to a
value according to the following equation.
Short-Time kA

Tkr
BIL
Notes
ANSI HV Circuit Breaker

When the ANSI standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, you can enter the applied kV,
interrupting kA, close and latch rms, close and latch peak, short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand
duration, impulse withstand rating, and notes.
kV
Int. kA
Enter the short-circuit interrupting capability in rms kA.
C & L rms
Enter the closing and latching capability of the breaker in asymmetrical rms kA. This value is equal to
1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.

C & L Peak
Enter the closing and latching capability of the breaker in peak kA. This value is equal to 2.7 times the
maximum interrupting capability.
Short-Time kA
Tkr
BIL
Notes
IEC HV Circuit Breaker

When the IEC standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, you can enter the applied kV,
breaking kA, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), FPC factor, short-time
withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, impulse withstand rating, transient rated voltage, and notes.
kV

Breaking kA
Enter the short-circuit breaking capability in rms kA.
Making kA rms
Enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating in kA.
Making kA Peak
Enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser in kA.
FPC Factor
Select from the list box the first pole to clear factor.
Short-Time kA
Tkr
BIL
TRV
Enter the rated transient recovery voltage in kV.
Notes
Curve Assignment
Select a recloser model entry, by highlighting it and clicking on the Curve Assignment button to assign
curves to the selected recloser model. The Curve Assignment Editor is different depending on the recloser
device type.
ANSI/IEC Recloser-Electronic and HV Circuit Breaker

For Electronic Recloser or HV Circuit Breaker, the TCC curves can be assigned to the selected model(s).

Assign All / Assign Individual

Select Assign All to assign all the curves of a controller when moving it from Available to Assigned.
Select Assign Individual if you want to assign specific curves from the controller.
Controller
The curves which the recloser uses can be assigned and unassigned here.
Available
The Available section will display all the units in the Electronic Controller Library which are under the
same manufacturer as the recloser. Check Show all to display all electronic controllers in the library.
Select the controller Manufacturer Model from the Available section and click on the Assign button
(<<), to assign the selected trip unit to the recloser. Once assigned, the trip unit Manufacturer Model
will be displayed in the Assigned section. Note: If Assign Individual is selected, curves must be selected
from the Curve list.
Assigned
Controllers that have been assigned to the recloser are displayed in the Assigned section. Controller can
be unassigned by selecting the Manufacturer Model of the controller and clicking on the Unassign
button (>>).
Assignment and unassignment of controllers to and from a locked recloser entry is allowed, since the
recloser manufacturer may allow retrofits and modifications of the controller.
Refer to the Electronic Controller Library section to learn more about electronic controller types and
specifications.

ANSI/IEC Recloser-Hydraulic
For Hydraulic Recloser, the TCC curve parameters are directly entered in the editor.
Curve Type
The name of the curve, trip element assignment, speed, and type are defined here.
Name
Enter the name of the curve.
Assign
Assign the selected curve to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, or a combination of elements by
selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the curve only to Ground element, and
selecting P/G assigns the curve to Phase and Ground elements.

Speed
Assign the speed, fast or delayed, of the curve.
Type
Select the type of curve (defined by equation or defined by points) from the list.
Lock
specified).
Current Unit
Select the current unit, Ampere or Multiples, the points are defined using. Note: If the curve type is
equation this can only be Multiples.
Clearing Curve
The points or equation of the clearing curve can be defined here.
Time, Multiples/Amperes
If the curve type is Points then enter Time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples or amperes,
depending on the Current Unit selection, to define the curve. You can Add and Delete the data using Add
and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert,
copy and paste rows.
Equation
If the curve type is Equation then enter the equation for the clearing curve. You can enter the equation
using basic math operators +, -, *, /. You can also nest expressions using parentheses. The math
functions can be entered in C# math syntax.

M Pickup Multiples
For example: An equation for Trip time = (80/(M^2-1))
(80/(Math.Pow(M,2)-1))

Enter the minimum and maximum current multiple for the selected curve. Note: This is hidden if the
Current Unit is Amperes.
Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve is plotted as definite time curve beyond the max multiples. Note:
This is hidden if the Current Unit is Amperes.

Clearing Curve
Select whether to calculate the response curve using the clearing curve and interrupting time, or to define
the response curve.
Calculated Response Curve

Select the Calculated Response Curve to calculate the response curve using the clearing curve and
interrupting time. This is done by subtracting the interrupting time from the clearing curve.
Define Response Curve

Select the Define Response Curve to enter the response curve. If this is selected the response curve must
be entered using the method described above for the clearing curve. Note: The curve type and current unit
are the same for the response and clearing curves, i.e. if the clearing curve is points-based with amperes as
the unit, then the response curve will also be points-based with amperes as the units.
Curve Info
Enter the curve TCC ID, revision date, and notes here.
TCC ID
Enter the manufacturer TCC ID.
Revision
Enter the revision date of the TCC.
Notes
Enter notes for the TCC curve.
Library Quick Pick - Recloser

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a Recloser in the one-line diagram,
and then clicking on the Library button in the Rating tab of the editor. The Library Quick Pick options
are a compilation of all the information you have specified for this element.
Pick a recloser from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate manufacturer and
specifications for the recloser, which is associated with this project file. The recloser specifications
include Model, Max kV, Rated Int. kA, Test X/R, Making kA rms, and Making kA Peak.


Engineering Libraries Electronic Controller
8.15 Electronic Controller

The Electronic Controller Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The hierarchical
library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Type, Model, etc.) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library header structure is as shown below.
The Electronic Controller Library header consists of Manufacturer Type Model. A manufacturer can
have microprocessor or static models depending on the models type. Each type has its own header
classification, which is explained further in this section. Furthermore, each model can be assigned
different trip elements (phase overcurrent, ground high current, etc.).
8.15.1 Electronic Controller Library Editor

The Electronic Controller Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select
the library from the menu bar and then select Electronic Controller. This will bring up the Electronic
Controller Library Editor. The fields of the Library Editor are described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for controllers.
Lock
specified).
Link
Add
Click on the Add button to input the name of relay manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Lock
specified).

Edit Info
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
This selection allows you to delete a controller manufacturer and all models provided by the
manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the
Delete button. The manufacturer will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
Copy
Copy the controller manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the manufacturer
by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and parameters for

Type
The Type allows you to view all controller models for the selected manufacturer, based on the controller
type selected. Available selections are Microprocessor and Static.
Microprocessor
Select this option to view the models provided by the selected manufacturer that are of microprocessor
type.
Static
Select this option to view the models provided by the selected manufacturer that are of static type.
Model
Model
Lists all controller models for the selected manufacturer based on the type selected.
Lock
specified).
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected controller model.
Brand Name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected controller model.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the controller model you wish to add to the library.

Manufacturer
Lock
specified).
Controller Type
Displays the type, Microprocessor or Static, selected.
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library.
Trip Elements
Check the applicable trip elements for the selected controller function.

The available trip elements are Phase TOC, Phase HC, Ground TOC, Ground HC, Sensitive Ground
TOC, Sensitive Ground HC, and Alternate Trip, where TOC stand for time overcurrent and HC for high
current.
# of TOC Levels
Select the number of TOC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected controller model. Available
only for Microprocessor Type.
# of HC Levels
Select the number of HC Levels from the drop-down list for the selected controller model. Available only
for Microprocessor Type.
Independent TOC/HC
Check to indicate if the TOC and the HC curves for the relay model are independent Available only for
Microprocessor Type.
Enforce same setting for all TOC levels

Check to indicate if all levels share the same TOC pickup setting. Available only for Microprocessor
Type.
Enforce same setting for all HC levels

Check to indicate if all levels share the same HC pickup and delay setting. Available only for
Microprocessor Type.
Label
Click on the Label button to assign specific names for the OC level.

Enter the model brand name and reference, if available.


Enter the catalog number and catalog issue date.
Current Rating
Select a current rating for the controller from the list box.
Link
Enter the model web link or URL address.
Description
Enter the description for the fuse model.
Application
Enter the application for the fuse model.
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
locked models.

Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected controller model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then
click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after confirmation.

Copy
Copy a selected controller model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the user-specified
model name.
Help
Open the Help topic for the Controller Library.
Close
Close the Controller Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
Select a model and click on the Parameters button to open the Parameters Editor. The Parameters Editor is
available for both Microprocessor and Static type controllers and the editor is different depending upon
the model type.
Parameters
The Parameters Editor allows you to define different overcurrent curves, high current trip and delay
ranges, and modifier ranges.
Pickup Tab (Static)

Enter the settings for Time Overcurrent trip elements. This is for a static controller type.

Manufacturer
Model
Type
Displays the controller type.
Pickup (Min Trip Rating)

Define different pickups available for the controller model.
Label
Enter a label for the pickup.
Amps
Enter the value of the pickup in amps.
Assign
Assign the selected pickup to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground or a
combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the pickup

only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup to Phase and Ground, and similarly for other
assignments.
Note
Enter any notes pertaining to the selected pickup.
Lock
specified).

Curve Tab (Static)

Enter the curves for static controller type.
Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters.

Assign
Assign the controller characteristic curve to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive
Ground, or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns
the curve only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and Ground
elements, and similarly for other assignments.
Speed
Select the speed, Fast or Delayed, to assign the curve to.
Type
Lock
specified).

Edit
selected controller curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries. More information on TCC
equation and points entry will be given below.
Curve Tab (Microprocessor)

Enter the curves microprocessor controller type.

Manufacturer
Model
Type
Displays the controller type.
Curve Type
Define different controller characteristic curves by equation or points.

Name
Enter a name for the curve type up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Assign
Assign the controller characteristic curve to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive
Ground, or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns
the curve only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and Ground
elements, and similarly for other assignments.
Type
Group1-8
Curves can be associated to a curve group number (1-8) where applicable.
Lock
specified).

Edit
selected controller curve. The Edit button is disabled for locked entries.
TCC Equation Data

The TCC Equation Data Editor allows you to define the relay characteristic curve by equation. The
parameters that are available are described below:
Manufacturer
Model
Curve

Current Unit
Select the current unit, Amperes or Multiples. Equation based curves can only be specified in multiples of
the pickup.
Response Curve
Equation

TD Time Dial
M Pickup Multiples

Time Dial
Check the box and enter the time dial range. You can enter the time dial as continuous (i.e. Min, Max, and

Definite
Clearing Curve
Calculating Clearing Curve

Select this option to calculate the Clearing curve based on the Response curve. Clearing Time is
calculated by adding the interrupting time defined in the Recloser Editor to the response curve.
Define Clearing Curve

Select this to define the clearing curve. Use the same methods described for the response curve above.

TCC ID
Enter the TCC ID of the curve as defined by the manufacturer.
Revision
Enter the revision date of the curve.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the curve.
Help
OK
Cancel
TCC Points
The TCC Points Editor allows you to define the controllers characteristic curve by points. The different
Manufacturer
Model
Curve

Current Unit
Select the current unit of the points, Amperes or Multiples.
Response Curve
Time and Multiples/Amperes

Enter the time in seconds and corresponding current in multiples or amperes (depending on the current
unit selection) to define the response curve. You can add and delete the data using the Add and Delete
buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and
paste rows.

Definite
Clearing Curve
Calculating Clearing Curve

Select this option to calculate the Clearing curve based on the Response curve. Clearing Time is
calculated by adding the interrupting time defined in the Recloser Editor to the response curve.

Define Clearing Curve

Select this to define the clearing curve. Use the same methods described for the response curve above.
TCC ID
Enter the TCC ID of the curve as defined by the manufacturer.
Revision
Enter the revision date of the curve.
Notes
Enter any notes pertaining to the curve.
Help
OK

Cancel
Time Overcurrent Parameters

Enter the settings for Time Overcurrent trip element. You can Add, Edit and Delete the data using the
Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete,
insert, copy and paste rows. The different parameters available are described below.
Trip Unit
Select the unit for Time Overcurrent pickup. This is currently fixed to Amps.

Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step
Discrete Trip
Define the Time Overcurrent pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for
the selected trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Assign
Assign the selected pickup range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground or a
combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the Time
Overcurrent pickup range only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and
Ground, and similarly for other assignments.
Base
Select a base for the pickup. This is currently fixed to Primary.
Note
Enter any notes pertaining to the trip range.
High Current (HC) Tab

Enter the settings for High Current (HC). You can add and delete the data using the Add and Delete
buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-click to add, delete, insert, copy and
paste rows. The available parameters are described below.

High Current Trip Parameters

Enter the pickup settings for the HC trip and HC lockout element.
Unit
Select the unit for HC pickup i.e. Amps, Multiples or Percent from the list box.

Define the HC pickup as continuous values by entering Min Trip, Max Trip and Trip Step values for the

Discrete Trip
Define the HC pickup as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Trip field, for the selected
trip unit (Amps, Multiples or Percent).
Assign
Assign the selected pickup range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground, or a
combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the HC pickup
range only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the pickup range to Phase and Ground elements
and similarly for other assignments. To assign a range to the HC lockout element, select Lockout Phase,
Lockout Ground, and Lockout Sensitive Ground, or a combination of these.
Base
Select a base for the pickup. Currently this is fixed to Primary for a unit of Amps, and xTOC Pickup for
units of Multiples and Percent.
High Current Delay Parameters

Enter the settings for the HC Time Delay.
Unit
Select the unit for Time Delay i.e. seconds or cycles from the list.
Min Delay, Max Delay, Delay Step

Define the Time Delay as continuous values by entering Min Delay, Max Delay and Delay Step values
for the selected unit (seconds or cycles).
Discrete Delay
Define the Time Delay as discrete values separated by semicolons in Discrete Delay field, for the selected
Assign
Assign the selected time delay range to different trip elements, i.e. Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground,
or a combination of elements by selecting from the list box. For example, selecting G assigns the HC
time delay range only to Ground element, selecting P/G assigns the time delay range to Phase and
Ground elements, and similarly for other assignments.
Note
Enter any notes pertaining to the delay range.

Modifiers Tab
Enter the settings for the constant time adder, minimum response time, and vertical shift modifiers. The
available parameters are described below.
Curve Modification Parameters

Check to indicate that this controller model contains modifiers.
Title
Displays the modifier type. CTA stands for constant time adder, MRT for minimum response time, and
VSM for vertical shift multiplier.
Label
Enter a name for the respective modifier, if one is given by the manufacturer. Leaving this blank will
result in the Title to be used.
Avail
Check to indicate that the respective modifier is available in the model.
Unit
Select the unit for Time Delay i.e., seconds or cycles from the list for CTA and MRT.

Min, Max, Step

Define the modifier as continuous values by entering Min, Max and Step values.
Discrete Delay
Define the modifier as discrete values separated by semicolons in the Discrete field.
Discrete Label
Enter labels for the discrete value as applicable. .
Use Discrete Label

Check this box to use the Discrete Labels for the modifier settings instead of the discreet values.
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a Recloser in the one-line diagram,
and then clicking on the Library button in the Controller tab of the editor. The Library Quick Pick
options are a compilation of all the information you have specified for this element.
Pick an electronic controller from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate manufacturer
and specifications for the device, which is associated with this project file. The electronic controller
specifications include Type and Model.

Engineering Libraries HV Circuit Breaker
8.16 HV Circuit Breaker

The High Voltage Circuit Breaker (HVCB) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory
system. ANSI or IEC libraries are available, depending upon which standard is selected for each
individual circuit breaker. The library header is defined by Standard and Manufacturer information. You
can have unlimited manufacturers within the library for each standard. Unlimited model/classes are
available within each manufacturer, as shown below.
Header Record
High Voltage Circuit Breaker

Library ANSI Manufacturer Model / Class
Manufacturer Model / Class
IEC

High voltage circuit breaker headers consist of Standard and Manufacturer information. You can have
unlimited Models/Classes for each header.
8.16.1 HV Circuit Breaker Library Selector
The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library allows you to add new high voltage circuit breaker models or
select existing high voltage circuit breaker models and edit, copy or delete them. To edit a high voltage
circuit breaker model, double-click on the item or click on the Edit button after highlighting it. To delete
a high voltage circuit breaker model, click on the Delete button after highlighting a model. ETAP will
display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before deleting the selected model.

Add Manufacturer
Select this option to enter the name of the manufacturer for the element you wish to add to the library.
You can edit the properties of this new element by highlighting it from the list provided, and then clicking
on the Edit button.
Copy Library
Select this option to copy the data from one manufacturer name to a new name. This function is useful if
you wish to change specifications in the library entry while retaining the original data. The properties of
the new element can be edited by highlighting it from the list provided, and then clicking on the Edit
button.
8.16.2 HV Circuit Breaker Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library data. Each
library record is a unique set of data for each high voltage circuit breaker header. Appending three
columns, Model+Continuous Amp+Max kV, forms a unique record name. If the combined name of these
three columns is repeated, that row is deleted, i.e., duplicate records are overwritten. The combination
of all three fields must contain at least one different character. If a row (record) of data duplicates a
previous one, ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before overwriting the
record.
ANSI Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or class name.
Std.
Select the circuit breaker standard as Sym or Tot rated from the list box.

Cy
Select the rated interrupting time for AC high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.
CB Cycle Description
2 2-cycle AC high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle minimum contact parting time
3 3-cycle AC high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle minimum contact parting time
Continuous
Enter the continuous current rating of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from
the list.
Max. kV
Enter the rated maximum kV of the high voltage circuit breaker in rms kV or select the rating from the
list.
Rated Int.
Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA or
select the rating from the list box.
The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker is calculated by ETAP as:
(rated short-circuit current) X (rated maximum kV)/(operating kV)
The limit for this calculated interrupting capability is the rated maximum interrupting capability of the
circuit breaker. This value is then used to compare with the calculated short-circuit duty of the breaker.
Note: The value of the prefault voltage is not used in determining the interrupting capability, i.e., if Vf =
105%, the short-circuit duty is increased by 5%; however, the interrupting capability is not decreased by
5%.
C & L rms
Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in asymmetrical rms kA. This value is equal to
1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
C & L Peak
Enter the closing and latching capability of the HV CB in peak kA. This value is equal to 2.7 times the
maximum interrupting capability.
TRV T1
Enter the transient recovery voltage delay time in micro-seconds.
TRV T2
Enter the transient recovery voltage time to peak value in micro-seconds.
TRV R
Enter the transient recovery voltage rated increase rate in kV/micro-second.

IEC Standard
Model
Enter the manufacturer designated model or class.
FPC Factor
Select the first-pole-to-clear factor of the high voltage circuit breaker from the list box.
Rated A
Enter the rated normal current of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from the
list.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the high voltage circuit breaker in kV or select the rating from the list.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the high voltage circuit breaker in kV.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the high voltage circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from the
list box. The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by the evaluation of the maximum
possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the high voltage circuit breaker in kA or select the rating from the
list.
AC Breaking
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA or select the rating from the list.
Min. Delay
Enter the minimum time delay, including the circuit breaker and relays, in seconds, or select the rating
from the list.
8.16.3 Library Quick Pick - HV Circuit Breaker

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a HV Circuit Breaker in the one-
line diagram, and then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a
compilation of all the information you have specified for this element.
Pick a high voltage circuit breaker from the library from this dialog box. Select the appropriate
manufacturer and specifications for the high voltage circuit breaker, which is associated with this project
file. The high voltage circuit breaker specifications include Model/Class, Test Std., Continuous Amp,
Cycle, Max kV, Rated Int. kA, Max Int. kA, C&L rms, and C&L Peak.


Engineering Libraries LV Circuit Breaker
8.17 LV Circuit Breaker

The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker (LVCB) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system.
The hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Standard, AC/DC, Type, Manufacturer,
Model, etc.) each containing a set of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library
structure is as shown below.
Header Record
LV Circuit Breaker Library

Library ANSI AC Molded Case Manuf. Model Max. kV Pole Size Amps,
Power CB Manuf. Model Max. kV Pole Size Short
IEC DC* Pole circuit,
Insulated Case Manuf. Model Max. kV Size
Trip

unit

Manuf. Model Max. kV Pole Size
* - DC breaker will have Max. Volts in the header.
The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker (LVCB) Library header consists of Standard AC/DC Breaker Type
Manufacturer Model Max. kV (Max. Volts for DC) Pole. You can have unlimited records of
breaker size for each header, for which ampere value, short-circuit data and trip units can be defined.
Low voltage circuit breaker types available are:
Molded Case
Power CB
Insulated Case

8.17.1 LV Circuit Breaker Library Editor
The LV Circuit Breaker Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar. Select
library from the menu bar and select LV Circuit Breaker. This will bring up the LVCB Editor. The
different fields in the Library Editor are described in this section.
Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the breaker type. The LV Circuit Breaker types
include Molded Case, Power and Insulated Case breakers.
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard.
AC/DC
Click on either the AC or DC option, to select AC / DC breakers.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for LVCB filtered by the selected standard, AC/DC and breaker type.

Lock
specified).
Link
Add
Select the breaker standard, AC/DC and the type, then click on the Add button to input the name of
LVCB manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Lock
specified).
Edit Info

Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Delete the selected LVCB manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
Copy
You can copy a selected LVCB manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the

Model
Model
Lists all the Model-Max kV (Max V for DC)-Pole records for the selected LVCB manufacturer.
Lock
specified).
Brand name
Displays the brand name, if available, for the selected LVCB model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected LVCB model.
Trip Device Type

Displays the trip units that are defined for the selected LVCB model.
Application
Displays the application for the selected LVCB model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of LVCB model you wish to add to the library.

Manufacturer
Model
Pole
Select the number of poles for the breaker from the list box. This field is a required library parameter.
Max kV (Max V for DC breaker)

Select from the list box or enter the Max kV (Max V for DC breaker) for the breaker. This field is a
Trip Device
Check the boxes to define the trip device types for the breaker. The trip device types are Thermal
Magnetic, Solid State, Motor Circuit Protector and Electro-Mechanical. The selection of trip devices will
define the type of trip device that the selected breaker will accept. This data is a required library
parameter.

Enter the model brand name and reference if available. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.

left blank.

Frame Type, Frame Size

Enter the frame type and size, for the breaker model. These fields are provided for reference only and
may be left blank.
Certification
Enter the certification standard (UL, IEC, etc.) for the model. This field is provided for reference only
and may be left blank.
Description
Application
Link
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
locked models.

Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected LVCB model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
Copy
Use this selection to copy the selected LVCB model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list
provided and then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be
copied to the user-specified model name.
Help
Open the Help topic for the LVCB Library.
Close
Close the LVCB Library Editor and save all changes.
Edit Short-Circuit Info

Click on the Edit Short-Circuit Info button to enter the short-circuit data for the low voltage breaker
model. The short-circuit parameters are different depending on breaker type, standard and if the breaker is
AC or DC.
You can Add, Edit and Delete the short-circuit data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you

ANSI Short-Circuit data (AC breaker)

When the ANSI standard is selected for AC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in kV
Short-circuit interrupting current in kA
Non-Instantaneous trip in kA
Close and Latch (C&L) current in kA
Short-time withstand current in kA
Withstand time Tkr in seconds
Test power factor in % or select from the list box
Notes
Note: Non-Instantaneous trip, Close and Latch (C&L) current, Short-time withstand current, and
Withstand time Tkr are not utilized by ANSI short-circuit duty analysis for ANSI rated Molded case and
Insulated case circuit breaker types.
Check the Fused checkbox if the circuit breaker is integrally fused.
IEC Short-Circuit data (AC breaker)

When the IEC standard is selected for AC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in kV
Ultimate breaking capacity in kA (Icu)
Service breaking capacity in kA (Ics)
Making capacity in kA (Icm)
Short time withstand in kA (Icw)
Withstand time Tkr in seconds

Tripping time or delay in seconds

Notes
ANSI Short-Circuit data (DC breaker)

When ANSI standard is selected for DC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in Volts

Short-circuit interrupting current in kA
Time constant in milliseconds
Notes

IEC Short-Circuit data (DC breaker)

When IEC standard is selected for DC breakers, you can enter the following parameters:
Applied voltage in Volts

Ultimate breaking capacity in kA (Icu)
Service breaking capacity in kA (Ics)
Time constant in milliseconds
Notes

Assign Trip Device

Select a circuit breaker model entry (Model, Max. Voltage, Pole), by highlighting it and clicking on the
Assign Trip Device button to enter available sizes for the circuit breaker model and assign the applicable
trip device for each size. The editor for entering the breaker sizes and assigning trip units is shown below.

Size
Enter available sizes for the circuit breaker model in amperes. This field is a required library parameter.
You can Add, Edit and Delete data using the Add and Delete buttons. Add Notes for the size, if required.
Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Trip Device
For a highlighted size, select the applicable trip device type and model (Thermal Magnetic, Solid state,
Motor Circuit Protector, Electro-Mechanical) to be assigned. Note: Trip device types are displayed in the
list box only if they are defined for the model.
Once the trip device type is selected, the Available section will display all the applicable trip units,
based on a search for identical breaker and trip device manufacturer and/or model. If no match between
the breaker and trip unit manufacturer and/or model is found, the Available section remains empty.
Check Show all to display all manufacturers and models for the selected trip device type.
Select the trip device Manufacturer Model ID from the Available section and click on the Assign
button (<<), to assign the selected trip unit to the breaker size. Once assigned, the trip unit Manufacturer
Model ID will be displayed on the Assigned to this CB section. Multiple trip unit IDs can be selected
for assignment by clicking on the IDs.
Trip units can be unassigned by selecting the Manufacturer Model ID of the trip device and clicking
on the Unassign button (>>).
Assignment and unassignment of trip devices to and from a locked size entry is allowed, since the circuit
breaker manufacturer may allow retrofits and modification of the trip device.
Refer to the Trip Device Library section to learn more about low voltage trip device types and
specifications.
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a LV Circuit Breaker in the one-line
diagram, then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a
compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
From this dialog box, pick a low voltage circuit breaker from the library. Select the appropriate
manufacturer and specifications for the low voltage circuit breaker which is associated with this project
file. The low voltage circuit breaker specifications include Model, Max kV, Pole number, Continuous
Amp, Rated kV, Interrupting kA, Test PF, and Fused/Unfused.


Engineering Libraries Trip Device Solid State
8.18 Solid State Trip Device Library

The Low Voltage Solid State Trip (LVSST) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory
system. The hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.)
each containing a set of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is
as shown below.
H eader Record
Low Voltage Solid State Trip

Library Manufacturer M odel Sensor ID Sensor, Plugs,
Manufacturer M odel Sensor ID Long-Time,
Manufacturer M odel Sensor ID Short-time,
Instantaneous,
Override,
Ground,
Manufacturer M odel Sensor ID Maintenance Mode
The Low Voltage Solid State Trip (LVSST) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and Sensor
ID. For each header i.e. Manufacturer Model Sensor ID, you have a unique record consisting of the
Sensor, Plugs, Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, Override, Ground, and Maintenance Mode
settings.
8.18.1 Solid State Trip Device Library (LVSST) Editor

The Solid State Trip Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu bar.
Select library from the menu bar, and then select Trip Device and Solid State. This will bring up the Solid
State Trip Library Editor.

The fields of the Library Editor are described in this section.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists of all manufacturers for the LVSST device.
Lock
specified).
Link
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of LVSST manufacturer you wish to add to the library.

Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Enter the manufacturer web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of a new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and

Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Delete the selected LVSST manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by
highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The manufacturer will be
deleted from the list after confirmation.
Copy
Copy the selected LVSST manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select a manufacturer by
highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All models and parameters for
Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected LVSST manufacturer.
Lock
specified).

Reference
Displays cross-reference to another model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of the LVSST model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model
Reference
blank.
Description
Enter the Description, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Label
Select from the Pull-Down menu the model/sensor frame data.
Link
blank.

Lock
specified).
Edit Info
locked models.
Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected LVSST model. Select a model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click

Copy
Copy the selected LVSST model. Select a model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to user-specified
model name.
Help
Open the Help topic for the LVSST Library.
Close
Close the LVSST Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
Select a model and click on the Parameters button to open the Parameters Editor. The Parameters Editor
allows you to specify the sensors and applicable plugs for the selected model, along with settings for
Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, Override, Ground trip, and Maintenance elements for each
sensor.
Note: The Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, Override, Ground, and Maintenance Mode tabs are
hidden for locked sensor entries.

The different fields in the Parameters page for entering data are described below.
Manufacturer
Model

Rating
Add, edit, copy or delete sensors, rating plugs and units for the selected model.
Sensor ID
Enter a Sensor size identifier up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library parameter.
Sensor
Enter the ampere value for the Sensor ID. This field is a required library parameter.
Plug
Enter plugs, if available, separated by semicolons for the selected Sensor ID. If no plugs are available,
you can leave the field blank.
Unit
Select unit for plugs i.e. Amperes, Multiples or Percent from the list box.
Lock
specified).
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete sensors using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted but can be copied.
TCC ID
Enter the TCC curve ID for the selected Sensor ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Revision
Enter the revision date for the selected Sensor ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Notes
Enter notes for the selected Sensor ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Long Time
Enter the settings for Long-Time trip element for the selected Sensor ID.

Long Time (checkbox)

Check this box to indicate the Long-Time element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for long time pick up settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is LT Pickup.
LT Pickup
Discrete / Continuous
Select LT pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select the LT pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, or ST Pickup).

Discrete LT Pickup
Label
Enter a LT Pickup name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter a LT pickup value in the multiples column.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Enter minimum and maximum pickup tolerance in percent. Note: Minimum tolerance can be specified as
a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To model a pickup offset, the minimum
tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
Add
Add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Delete the selected pickup entry.
Continuous LT Pickup
Low
Enter the Low setting LT pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter the High setting LT pickup value in multiples.

Steps
Enter a LT pickup step value in multiples.
% Tolerance Min. / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum pickup tolerance as a percentage. Note: Minimum tolerance can be
specified as a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To model a pickup offset, the
minimum tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
LT Band
Label
Enter the label name tag for long time band settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is LT Band.
The following options are available to use when entering the long time band:
- Line (with Discrete and Continuous options)
- Curve (with Equation and Points options)
LT Band with Line Option

Add the long time band as a straight line without using an equation.
Select a LT band as discrete or continuous.
Discrete LT Band
Label
Enter a LT Band name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

Multiple
Enter a current value in the multiple column at which the LT band is defined.
Min. Clearing / Max. Clearing

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the LT band, at the current multiple, in seconds.
Add
Add a new discrete band.
Delete
Delete the selected band.
Track Pickup
Check this box to enable the LT band to track the LT pickup.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the slope value for LT band.
To calculate the slope in a Log-Log chart, find two points on the band and use the equation:
LogY 1 LogY 2
Slope =
LogX 1 LogX 2

Continuous LT Band
Multiple
Enter a pickup value in multiples at which the LT band is defined.
Calibration
Select the calibration reference for continuously adjustable LT band from the list box as Maximum,
Average or Mimimum. The calibration reference is set to Maximum by default. The calibrartion reference
for continuously adjustable LT Band is typically defined on the OEM TCC curve. For example,
Westhinghouse, Amptector I-A model has a continuously adjustable LT Band calibrated at 4, 12, 20, 28
and 36 seconds in reference to the Maximum LT Band curve.
Low (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Low band setting in seconds.
High (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the High band setting in seconds.
Steps
Enter the LT Band step value in seconds.
Track Pickup
Check to enable LT band to track the LT pickup.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the slope value for LT band.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of the Long-Time Band
and the Short-Time pickup.

The smoothing radius is found by the equation below:
LT Band with Curve Option

Select the Equation or Points base option for the long time band curve that you need to model.
Equation
Name
Enter the long time band curve name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Notes
Enter the notes for the long time band curve name up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Add
Click to add the new curve name to the list.

Delete
Click to delete the selected curve name.
Edit
Click to open the equation curve editor window.
Copy
Click to copy the selected curve.
Paste
Click to paste the copied curve to the selected curve name.
Solid State Trip: TCC Curve - Equation Data
Equation

TD Time Dial
M Pickup Multiples

Current (Horizontal)
Enter the minimum and maximum current tolerance values in percent. The positive current tolerance
value shifts the equation curve band to the right and the negative current tolerance value shifts the curve
band to the left side.
Time (Vertical)
Enter the minimum and maximum time tolerance values in percent and /or in seconds. The positive time
tolerance value shifts the equation curve band to up side and the negative time tolerance value shifts the
curve band to down side. The time tolerance value entered in seconds adds up to the percent time
tolerance.
Time Dial (Band)

Check the box and enter the time dial range. You can enter the time dial (band) as continuous (i.e. Min,
Max, and Step) or as discrete values (Discrete) as individual settings time dial bands.
Label
Enter the label name tag for time dial (band) in this field up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag displays in LVCB editor next to the same field.

Definite

Solid State Trip: TCC Curve - Points

Select the Points option and click on Edit button to add the Long Time band by points.

Min/ Max Curve

Enter the curve points for the minimum and maximum clearing curves in these tables. Enter the time in
seconds and the current in multiples of the pickup multiplier unit. If you have the band curve points in
Excel format, you can copy and paste the data here in this list as well.

Definite
Check to indicate that the selected curve is plotted as definite time curve beyond the last points entered in
this list.

Short-Time
Enter the settings for Short-Time trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
Short Time (checkbox)

Check the box to indicate the Short-Time element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for short time pick up settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is ST Pickup.
ST Pickup
Select a ST pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select a ST pickup multipler (i.e., Sensor, Rating Plug, etc.).

Discrete ST Pickup
Label
Enter a ST Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter a ST pickup value in the multiples column.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
This button allows you to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
This button allows you to delete a selected pickup entry.
Continuous ST Pickup
Low
Enter a Low setting ST pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter a High setting ST pickup value in multiples.

Steps
Enter an ST pickup step value in multiples.

ST Band
Label
Enter the label name tag for short time band settings. This field can have up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. The label name tag is displayed in the LVCB editor. Default name is ST Band.
Following options are available to enter the short time band:

ST Band with Line Option

Select an ST band as discrete or continuous.
I^xt (checkbox)
Check the box to enable and enter settings for Ixt for the Short-time band. If the Ixt is checked, then the Ixt
related fields are displayed.
Discrete ST Band
Label
Enter a ST Band name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.


Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
(I^x)t Multiples
Enter the current value in multiples at which the Ixt band is defined.
(I^x)t Type
Select Ixt band type for each band as IN, OUT or IN/OUT.
Min. (I^x)t Clearing / Max. (I^x)t Clearing

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Ixt band, at the current multiple, in seconds.
Min / Max (I^x)t Slope

Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing short time band (only if the I^xt option is checked).
Add
Click this button to add a new discrete band.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected band.
Track Pickup
Check the box to enable ST band to track the ST pickup.
Continuous ST Band
Low
Enter the low value of clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
High
Enter the high value of clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
Steps
Enter the ST horizontal Band step value in seconds.

Tolerance
Enter the minimum and maximum time band tolerances in percent. These tolerances apply from Low to
High settings.
I^2t Multiples
Enter the current value in multiples at which the I2t band is defined.
I^2t Min / Max Clearing time

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time, at current multiple, in seconds.
Type
Select the Short Time band type can be I^2t as IN or IN/OUT.
Slope
Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing short time band (only if the I^2t option is checked).
Track Pickup
Smoothing Radius
For the Line band option, enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection
of the Short-Time Band and the Short-Time pickup.
ST Band with Curve Option

Apply the same method used when adding the long time band as a curve, to adding a short time band with
a curve. See the section for LT Band with Curve Option for more details on adding this section of the
TCC curve.

Instantaneous
Enter the settings for the Instantaneous trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
Instantaneous (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate the Instantaneous element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for instantaneous pick up in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Inst. Pickup
Select Instantaneous pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select Instantaneous pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, etc.)

Discrete Instantaneous Pickup
Label
Enter an Instantaneous pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Click this button to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected pickup entry.

Continuous Instantaneous Pickup
Low
Enter the Low setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter the High setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
Steps
Enter the Instantaneous pickup step value in multiples.

Band
Following options are available to model the instantaneous band:
- Definite
- Points
Definite
Clearing Time
Enter the clearing time value in seconds.
Opening Time
Enter the opening time value in seconds.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the clearing time Band for Instantaneous.
Inst. Band Points

The instantaneous opening and clearing band points can be entered in amperes or multiples.

Current Multiplier
This filed is available if the Amperes option is selected and track pickup option is unchecked.
The value entered in this filed applies to the Amperes current data entered to the instantaneous band
points table.
Track Pickup
Check this option if instantaneous band is shifted as instantaneous pickup changes.
Open - Clearing Curve

Click on Opening-Clearing Curve button to open the Inst. band points editor window:
Opening Curve/Clearing Curve

Enter the opening and clearing value time in seconds and current (in amperes or multiples of
instantaneous pickup). Data points from excel can be copied and pasted into this table.

Override
Enter the settings for the Instantaneous override trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
Override (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate the Override element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Multiplier
Select the Override pickup multipler (iSensor, Rating Plug, Amps and CB Withstand).
If the CB Withstand option is selected, then override pickup sees the LVCB editor, Rating page and
applies the ST Withstand kA value as base for the Override pickup current.
Override
Enter the Instantaneous override value pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating
plug and in amperes when the multiplier is Amps.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Clearing Time
Enter the clearing time value in seconds.

Opening Time
Enter the opening time value in seconds.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the clearing time Band for Override.
Ground
Enter the settings for the Ground trip element for the selected Sensor ID.
Ground (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate the Ground element is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for ground pick up in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag displays in LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Ground Pickup

Allow Pickup above 1200 Amps (checkbox)

Check the box to allow the Ground pickup ampere value to exceed 1200 Amps. If unchecked, the Ground
pickup will be limited to 1200 Amps.
Ground Pickup
Select the Ground pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select the Ground pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, and Amps).
Discrete Ground Pickup
Label
Enter a Ground Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the Ground pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in amperes
when the multiplier is Amps.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Delete the selected pickup entry.

Continuous Ground Pickup
Low
Enter the low Ground pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in
amperes when the multiplier is Amps.
High
Enter the high Ground pickup value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in
Steps
Enter the Ground pickup step value in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating plug and in

Ground Band
Label
Enter the label name tag for ground band in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric characters.
This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Ground Band
Following options are available to enter the ground band:

Ground Band with Line Option

For the Ground band select either the Discrete or Continuous button.
I^xt (checkbox)
Check the box to enable and enter settings for Ixt for Ground band. If the Ixt is checked, then the Ixt
related fields are displayed.

Discrete Ground Band
Label
Enter a Ground Band name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Ground horizontal band in seconds.
I^xt Multiples / Amps

Enter the current value at which the Ixt band is defined, in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating
(I^x)t Type
Select Ixt band type for each band as IN, OUT or IN/OUT.
Min. (I^x)t Clearing / Max. (I^x)t Clearing

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Ixt band, at the current value in seconds.
Min / Max (I^x)t Slope

Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing ground band (only if the I^xt option is checked).
Add
Delete
Track Pickup
Check the box to enable Ground band to track the Ground pickup.

Continuous Ground Band
Low
Enter low value of clearing time for the Ground horizontal band in seconds.
High
Enter high value of clearing time for the Ground horizontal band in seconds.
Steps
Enter the Ground horizontal band step value in seconds.
I^xt Multiples / Amps

Enter the current value at which the Ixt band is defined, in multiples when the multiplier is Sensor / Rating
I^xt Min / Max Clearing time

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time, at current value, in seconds.
Track Pickup
Check the box to enable the Ground band to track the Ground pickup.
Type
Select the Ground band type can be I^xt as IN or IN/OUT.
Slope
Enter the slopes for minimum / maximum clearing ground band (only if the I^xt option is checked).
Ground Band with Curve Option

Apply the same method used when adding the long time band as a curve, to adding a ground band with a
curve. See the section for LT Band with Curve Option for more details on adding this section of the TCC
curve.

Maintenance Mode
Enter the settings of the Maintenance Mode for the selected Sensor ID.
Maintenance Mode (checkbox)

Check the box to indicate the Maintenance Mode is available for the selected Sensor ID.
Phase (Maintenance)
Phase
Check the box to indicate the Phase Setting for the Maintenance Model will display for the selected
Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for Phase Maintenance Mode in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Maint Phase

Multiplier
Select the phase pickup multipler (i.e. Sensor, Rating Plug, LT Pickup, and ST Pickup).
Label
Enter a Phase pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters for the Maintenance Mode.
Multiples
Enter the phase value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Add a new entry.
Delete
Delete the selected entry.
Clearing Time
Enter the Phase clearing time value in seconds.
Opening Time
Enter the Phase opening time value in seconds.
Ground (Maintenace)
Ground
Check the box to indicate the Ground Setting for the Maintenance Model will display for the selected
Sensor ID.
Label
Enter the label name tag for Ground Maintenance Mode in this field using up to 15 alphanumeric
characters. This tag is displayed in the LVCB editor next to the same field. Default tag is Maint Ground
Multiplier
Select the Maintenance Mode pickup base multipler.
Label
Enter a Ground pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters for the Maintenance Mode.
Multiples
Enter the Ground value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max


Add
Add a new entry.
Delete
Delete the selected entry.
Clearing Time
Enter the Ground clearing time value in seconds.
Opening Time
Enter the Ground opening time value in seconds.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the opening and clearing band corners.
Help
Click on the Help button to open the Help topic for the Parameters page.
OK
Click on the OK button to close the Parameters window and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the Parameters window and discard all changes.

Engineering Libraries Trip Device Thermal Magnetic
8.19 Thermal Magnetic Trip Library

The Thermal Magnetic Trip (TM) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The
hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.) each
containing a set of attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is as
shown below.
Header Record
Thermal Magnetic Trip

Library Manufacturer Model TM ID Amps,
Manufacturer Model TM ID Thermal,
Manufacturer Model TM ID Magnetic
settings

Manufacturer Model TM ID
The Thermal Magnetic Trip (TM) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and TM ID. For each
header i.e. Manufacturer Model TM ID, ETAP provides you with a unique record consisting of TM
Amps, Thermal and Magnetic settings.
8.19.1 Thermal Magnetic Trip Library (TM) Editor

The Thermal Magnetic Trip Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar, then select Trip Device and Thermal Magnetic. This will bring up
the Thermal Magnetic Trip Library Editor.

Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for the TM device.
Lock
specified).
Link
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of TM manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
Enter the manufacturer web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Lock
specified).

Edit Info
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Clicking the Delete button allows you to delete a selected TM manufacturer and all models provided by
that manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the
Delete button. The manufacturer will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
Copy
Clicking this button allows you to copy a selected TM manufacturer and all models provided by this
manufacturer. Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy
button. All models for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer name.

Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected TM manufacturer.
Lock
specified).
Link
Displays the model web link or URL address.
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of the TM model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer

Model
Reference
blank.
Link
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
clicking on the Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited. The model link field is not displayed for
locked models.
Delete Model
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected TM model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list
provided and then click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm
the action.

Copy
Click this box to copy a selected TM model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and
then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the
model name that you specify.
Help
Clicking this button opens the Help topic for the TM Library.
Close
Clicking this button closes the TM Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify the sizes (TM ID) available for the selected model, along with settings for Thermal
and Magnetic trip elements for each size.
Note: For locked TM ID entries, the Thermal and Magnetic tabs are hidden.

The different fields in the Parameters page for entering data are described below.
Manufacturer
This field displays the selected manufacturer name.
Model
This field displays the selected model name.
Rating
This area allows you to add, edit, copy or delete sizes for the selected model.

TM ID
Enter a TM size identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library parameter.
Amps
Enter the ampere value for the TM ID. This field is a required library parameter.
Lock
specified).
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete TM IDs using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
Amperes / Multiples
Select Amperes or Multiples to enter the Thermal and Magnetic settings in Amperes or Multiples
respectively for the selected TM ID.
TCC ID, Revision

This field allows you to enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the selected TM ID. This field is
provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Notes
This field allows you to enter notes for the selected TM ID. This field is provided for reference only and
may be left blank.

Thermal
Enter the settings for Thermal trip element for the selected TM ID.
Thermal (checkbox)
Check this box to indicate the Thermal element is available for the selected TM ID.
Temp Shift
Click on the Temp Shift button to enter the shift factor for the thermal curve with respect to temperature
for the selected TM ID. Enter the temperature in degree Celsius and corresponding shift factor. You can
Add, Edit, and Delete shift factors using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or
deleted.
Click on Help to open the Help topic for temperature shift factors. Click on OK to close the Temp. Shift
Factor Editor and save all changes. Click on Cancel to close the Temp. Shift Factor Editor and discard all
changes.

Time, Mult/Amp Min (Minimum clearing curve)

Enter the time for thermal minimum clearing curve in seconds for the selected TM ID. Enter the
corresponding current in amperes or multiples depending on the unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and
Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Time, Mult/Amp Max (Maximum clearing curve)

Enter the time for thermal maximum clearing curve in seconds for the selected TM ID. Enter the
corresponding current in amperes or multiples depending on the unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and
Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Adjustable (checkbox)
Check the box to enable and enter Adjustable thermal trip.
% Trip
Enter the Adjustable thermal trip as a percentage. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the points using the Add
and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Smoothing radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of thermal and magnetic.
Magnetic
Enter the settings for Magnetic trip element for the selected TM ID. The magnetic trip element settings
include magnetic (instantaneous) trip setting and clearing time band.
The Magnetic trip setting can be defined as one of the following:
Fixed Magnetic
Discrete Adjustable Magnetic
Continuous Adjustable magnetic
The Clearing time band can be defined as one of the following:
Clearing time band defined by Slope

Clearing time band defined by Points

Magnetic (checkbox)
Check the box to indicate whether the Magnetic element is available for the selected TM ID.
Fixed / Discrete adjustable / Continuous Adjustable

Select one of the three buttons to define the magnetic trip as Fixed / Discrete Adjustable / Continuous
Adjustable for the selected TM ID.
Fixed Magnetic
Trip
Enter the minimum and maximum trip for the magnetic in amperes or multiples depending on the unit
selected.
Discrete Adjustable
Label
Enter a discrete magnetic trip identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the discrete magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.

% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum trip tolerance in percent. Note: minimum tolerance can be specified as
a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To model a pickup offset, the minimum
tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
Add
Click on this button to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected pickup entry.
Continuous Adjustable
Low
Enter the low continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
High
Enter the high continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum tolerance values for the low and high magnetic trip in percent. Note:
Minimum tolerance can be specified as a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup multiples. To
model a pickup offset, the minimum tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
Band Define by Slope

Select a button to define the magnetic clearing time band using either slope or slope points (given by time
and current).

Time
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the time in seconds for slope point.
Current
Enter the current value for the slope point in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the slope value.
Band Define by Points

Select a button to define the magnetic opening time and clearing time band using either slope or points
(given by time and current).
Select the Points option and click on the Opening - Clearing curve button to define the opening / clearing
time curves by points. Enter the time in seconds and the current in multiples or amperes depending on the
current unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and Delete points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked
entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Click on Help to open the Help topic for Opening / Clearing curves. Click on OK to close the Opening
Clearing Curve Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the Opening Clearing Curve
Editor, discarding all changes.

Smoothing radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of magnetic trip and the
clearing time band. Note: The smoothing radius will not be considered when the band is defined by
points.
Help
Click on the Help button to open the Help topic for the Parameters page.
OK
Click on the OK button to close the Parameters window and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the Parameters window and discard all changes.

Engineering Libraries Trip Device Electro-Mechanical
8.20 Electro-Mechanical Trip Device Library

The Electro-Mechanical trip device (EM) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system.
The hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.) each
shown below.
Header Record
Electro-Mechanical Trip
Library Manufacturer Model EM ID Amps,
Manufacturer Model EM ID Long-Time,
Manufacturer Model EM ID Short-time,
Instantaneous,
settings

Manufacturer Model EM ID
The Electro-Mechanical (EM) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and EM ID. For each
header i.e. Manufacturer Model EM ID, you have a unique record consisting of EM Amps, Long-
Time, Short-Time, and Instantaneous settings.
8.20.1 Electro-mechanical Trip Device Library (EM) Editor

The Electro-Mechanical Trip Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar, then select Trip Device and Electro-Mechanical. This will bring up
the Electro-Mechanical Trip Library Editor.

Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Lists all manufacturers for the EM device.
Lock
specified).
Reference
This field lists a manufacturer reference, if available. If none is available this field is blank.
Link
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of EM manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Use this field to enter the manufacturer name you wish to add to the library. This field is a required
library parameter.
Reference
Use this field to enter the reference, if available for the manufacturer. This field is provided for reference
only and may be left blank.
Link
Use this field to enter the manufacturer web link or URL address. This field is provided for reference only
and may be left blank

Lock
specified).
Delete
Use this button to delete a selected EM manufacturer and all models provided by this manufacturer.
Select a manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
manufacturer will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of a new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and
then clicking on the Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited.
Copy
Click this button to copy a selected EM manufacturer and all models for this manufacturer. Select a

Model
Model
This table lists all models for the selected EM manufacturer.
Lock
specified).
Reference
Displays reference information for the selected model.
Add
Select the Add button to input the name of the EM model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model

Reference
blank.
Link
Lock
specified).
Delete
Select this button to delete selected EM model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided
and then click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after confirmation.
Edit Info
locked models.

Copy
Copy selected EM model. Select model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the
Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to user-specified model
name.
Help
Open the Help file for the EM Library.
Close
Close the EM Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify the EM ID available for the selected model, along with settings for Long-Time,
Short-Time and Instantaneous for each EM ID.
Note: For locked EM ID entries, the Long-Time, Short-Time, and Instantaneous settings are hidden.

The fields of the Parameters page that allow you to enter data are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Rating
Add, edit, copy or delete EM ID for the selected model.

EM ID
Enter an EM size identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Amps
Enter the ampere value for the selected EM ID.
Lock
specified).
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete EM IDs using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
TCC ID, Revision

Enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the selected EM ID. This field is provided for reference
Notes
Enter notes for the selected EM ID. This field is provided for reference only and may be left blank.
Long Time
Enter the settings for Long-Time trip element for the selected EM ID.

Long Time (checkbox)

Check this box to indicate the Long-Time element is available for the selected EM ID.
LT Pickup
Define the LT pickup as discrete or continuous by clicking on the appropriate button.
Multiplier
Select a LT pickup multipler (i.e. Trip, ST Pickup and Inst. Pickup) from the drop-down list.

Discrete LT Pickup
Label
Enter a LT Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter the LT pickup value in multiples.
Add
Delete
Continuous LT Pickup
Low
Enter a Low setting LT pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter a High setting LT pickup value in multiples.
Steps
Enter a LT pickup step value in multiples.

LT Band
Label
Enter a LT Band name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Add
Delete
Curve
Click on the Points button to enter the time and current points for LT Band.

Minimum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band minimum clearing curve. You can Add,
Edit, and Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Maximum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band maximum clearing curve. You can Add,
Click on Help to open the Help topic for LT Band curve. Click on OK to close the LT Band Curve
Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the LT Band Curve Editor, discarding all changes.
Short-Time
Enter the settings for Short-Time trip element for the selected EM ID.
Short Time (checkbox)

Check this box to indicate the Short-Time element is available for the selected EM ID.

ST Pickup
Select a ST pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select a ST pickup multipler (i.e. Trip, LT Pickup and Inst. Pickup).
Discrete ST Pickup
Label
Enter a ST Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter a ST pickup value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Add
Use this button to add a new discrete pickup entry.
Delete
Use this button to delete the selected pickup entry.
Continuous ST Pickup

Low
Enter the Low setting ST pickup value in multiples.
High
Enter the High setting ST pickup value in multiples.
Steps
Enter a ST pickup step value in multiples.

ST Band
Select one of the two buttons to define the ST band as discrete or continuous.
Discrete ST Band
Horizontal / Curve
Choose one of the buttons to define the discrete ST band as a horizontal band or as a curve by points.
Discrete Horizontal
Define a ST band as a discrete horizontal band.
Band

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the ST horizontal band in seconds.
Add

Delete
Discrete Curve
Define a ST band as a curve by points.
Band
Curve
Click on the Points button to enter time and current points for ST Band.
Minimum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band minimum clearing curve. You can Add,
Maximum clearing (Time, Multiples)

Enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for LT Band maximum clearing curve. You can Add,
Click on Help to open the Help topic for LT Band curve. Click on OK to close the LT Band Curve
Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the LT Band Curve Editor, discarding all changes

Add
Delete
Continuous ST Band
Low (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the Low band setting in seconds.
High (Min / Max Clearing Time)

Enter the minimum and maximum clearing time for the High band setting in seconds.

Steps
Enter a ST Band step value in seconds in this field.
Track Pickup
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the intersection of the Short-Time Band
and the Instantaneous.
Instantaneous
Enter the settings for the Instantaneous trip element for the selected EM ID.
Instantaneous (check box)

Check the box to indicate the Instantaneous element is available for the selected EM ID.
Click on the appropriate button to define Instantaneous pickup as discrete or continuous.
Multiplier
Select the Instantaneous pickup multipler (i.e. Trip, LT Pickup and ST Pickup) from the drop-down list.

Discrete Instantaneous Pickup
Label
Enter an Instantaneous Pickup name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Multiples
Enter an Instantaneous pickup value in multiples.
% Tol. Min. / Max

Enter a minimum and maximum pickup tolerance as a percentage. Note: Minimum tolerance can be
Add
Delete
Continuous Instantaneous Pickup
Low
Enter the Low setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples in this field.

High
Enter the High setting Instantaneous pickup value in multiples in this field.
Steps
Enter the Instantaneous pickup step value in multiples in this field.

Band
Define the magnetic clearing time band using slope and slope point (given by time and current).
Current
Enter the current value for the slope point in multiples in this field.
Max Clearing Time

Select a value from the drop-down list or manually enter the time in seconds for slope point.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the slope value.
Smoothing Radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius to smooth the clearing time Band for Instantaneous
Pickup.

Engineering Libraries Trip Device Motor Circuit Protector
8.21 Motor Circuit Protector Library

The Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The
hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model, Setting, etc.) each
shown below.
Header Record
Motor Circuit Protector Trip

Library Manufacturer Model MCP ID Amps,
Manufacturer Model MCP ID Magnetic
Manufacturer Model MCP ID settings

Manufacturer Model MCP ID
The Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Library header consists of Manufacturer, Model and MCP ID. For
each header i.e. Manufacturer Model MCP ID, you have a unique record consisting of MCP Amps,
and Magnetic settings.
8.21.1 Motor Circuit Protector Library (MCP) Editor

The Motor Circuit Protector Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar, then select Trip Device and Motor Circuit Protector. This will
bring up the Motor Circuit Protector Trip Library Editor.

Manufacturer
Manufacturer
This field lists all manufacturers for the MCP device.
Lock
specified).
Link
Displays the manufacturer web link and URL address.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of a MCP manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
specified).
Edit Info

Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected MCP manufacturer and all models for the manufacturer. Select the
manufacturer by highlighting it in the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The manufacturer
will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
Copy
Click this button to copy a selected MCP manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it in the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All
models and parameters for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer
name.

Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected MCP manufacturer.
Lock
specified).
Link
Displays a model web link or URL address.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the MCP model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Model

Reference
blank.
Link
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing model by highlighting it in the list provided and then
clicking on the Edit Info button. Locked entries cannot be edited. The model link field is not displayed
for locked models.
Delete Model
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected MCP model. Select the model by highlighting it in the list
provided and then click on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm
the action.

Copy
Click this button to copy the selected MCP model. Select the model by highlighting it in the list provided
and then click on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to
user-specified model name.
Help
Click this button to open the Help topic for the MCP Library.
Close
Clicking this button will close MCP Library Editor and save all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify the sizes (MCP ID) available for the selected model, along with Magnetic settings
for each size.
Note: The Magnetic tab is hidden for locked MCP ID entries.

The fields for entering data on the Parameters page are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Rating
Use this scrollable list to add, edit, copy or delete MCP sizes for the selected model.

MCP ID
Enter a MCP size identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library parameter.
Amps
Enter the ampere value for the MCP ID. This field is a required library parameter.
Lock
specified).
You can Add, Edit, Copy-Paste and Delete MCP IDs using the Add, Delete, Copy and Paste buttons.
TCC ID, Revision

Enter the TCC curve ID and revision date for the selected MCP ID. This field is provided for reference
Notes
Use this field to enter notes for the selected MCP ID. This field is provided for reference only and may
be left blank.
Magnetic
Enter the settings for Magnetic trip element for the selected MCP ID. The magnetic trip element settings
include magnetic (instantaneous) trip setting and clearing time band.
The Magnetic trip setting can be defined as one of the following:

Continuous Adjustable magnetic
The Clearing time band can be defined as one of the following:
Clearing time band defined by Slope

Clearing time band defined by Points
Magnetic (checkbox)
Check to indicate the Magnetic element is available for the selected MCP ID.

Discrete adjustable / Continuous Adjustable

Select Magnetic trip as Discrete adjustable / Continuous Adjustable, for the selected MCP ID.
Amperes / Multiples
Select Amperes or Multiples to enter the Magnetic trip settings in Amperes or Multiples respectively for
the selected MCP ID.
Discrete Adjustable
Label
Enter a discrete magnetic trip identifier of up to 25 alphanumeric characters in this field.
Multiples
Enter a discrete magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.
% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum trip tolerance as a percentage. Note: Minimum tolerance can be
Add
Delete

Low
Enter the low continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
High
Enter the high continuous magnetic trip value in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit
selected.
% Tol. Min / Max

Enter the minimum and maximum tolerance values for the low and high magnetic trip as a percentage.
Note: Minimum tolerance can be specified as a negative value for tolerance to the left of pickup
multiples. To model a pickup offset, the minimum tolerance can be specified as a positive value.
Band Define by Slope

Define the magnetic clearing time band using slope and slope point (given by time and current).
Time
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the time in seconds for slope point.
Current
Enter a current value for the slope point in multiples or amperes depending on the current unit selected.
Slope
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the slope value.

Band Define by Points

Define the magnetic opening time and clearing time band using points (given by time and current).
Select the Points option and click on the Opening - Clearing Curve button to define the opening / clearing
time curves by points. Enter the time in seconds and the current in multiples or amperes depending on the
current unit selected. You can Add, Edit, and Delete points using the Add and Delete buttons. Locked
entries cannot be edited or deleted.
Click on the Help button to open the Help topic for Opening / Clearing Curves. Click on OK to close the
Opening Clearing Curve Editor, saving all changes. Click on Cancel to close the Opening Clearing
Curve Editor, discarding all changes.
Smoothing radius
Enter the minimum and maximum smoothing radius
to smooth the intersection of magnetic trip and the
clearing time band. Note: The smoothing radius will
not be considered when the band is defined by points.
Help
Click on the Help button to open the Help topic for
the Parameters page.
OK
Click on the OK button to close the Parameters
window and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the Parameters
window and discard all changes.
Library Quick Pick - Trip Device
The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a LV Circuit Breaker in the one-line
diagram, then clicking on the Library button in the editor on the Trip Device tab. The Library Quick Pick
options are a compilation of the information you have specified for this element.
From this dialog box, pick a trip device from the library. Select the appropriate type, manufacturer,
model, and rating for the trip device which is associated with this project file.

Note: You may also select a trip device from the low voltage circuit breaker Quick Pick page, which is
assigned to the selected low voltage circuit breaker.

Engineering Libraries Overload Heater
8.22 Overload Heater Library

The Overload Heater (OLH) Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The
hierarchical library structure stores levels or headers (i.e. Manufacturer, Model) each containing a set of
attributes (i.e. Manufacturer reference, Model Link, etc.). The library structure is as shown below.
Header Record
Overload Heater Library

Library Manufacturer Model Heater ID Starter Application Type Curve,
Manufacturer Model Heater ID Starter Application Type Trip
Manufacturer Model Heater ID Starter Application Type Amps,
Ohms
settings

Manufacturer Model Heater ID Starter Application Type
The Overload Heater (OLH) Library header consists of Manufacturer and Model. For each header i.e.,
Manufacturer Model, you can have unlimited records consisting of Heater ID Starter Type
Application Type. Each record has Curve, Trip Amps and Resistance settings.
8.22.1 Overload Heater Library (OLH) Editor

The Overload Heater (OLH) Device Library Editor can be accessed from the Library menu on the menu
bar. Select library from the menu bar and select Overload Heater. This will bring up the Overload Heater
Library Editor.

The fields of the library editor are described in this section.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
This field lists all manufacturers for the OLH device.
Lock
specified).
Link
This field displays the manufacturer web link or URL address.
Add
Select the Add button to enter the name of the OLH manufacturer you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
Reference
be left blank.
Link
left blank.
Lock
specified).

Edit Info
You can edit the properties of new or existing manufacturer by highlighting it in the list provided and
Delete Manufacturer
Delete
Click this button to delete the selected OLH manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Delete button. The
manufacturer will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.
Copy
Click this button to copy the selected OLH manufacturer and all models provided by the manufacturer.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting it from the list provided and then click on the Copy button. All
models and parameters for the selected manufacturer will be copied to the user-specified manufacturer
name.

Model
Model
Lists all models for the selected OLH manufacturer.
Lock
specified).
Link
This field displays the model web link or URL address, if one is available.
Add
Click on the Add button to enter the name of the OLH model you wish to add to the library.
Manufacturer
This field displays manufacturer name.
Model
Enter the model name you wish to add to the library in this field, which is a required library parameter.

Reference
blank.
Brand Name
Enter the Brand Name, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be
left blank.
Issue Date
Enter the Issue Date, if available, for the model. This field is provided for reference only and may be left
blank.
Description
Enter a description for the model.
Application
Enter the application of the model.
Type
Select a type from the drop-down list, or enter a type for the model.
Link
Lock
specified).
Edit Info
locked models.

Delete Model
Delete
Delete the selected OLH model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Delete button. The model will be deleted from the list after you confirm the action.

Copy
Copy the selected OLH model. Select the model by highlighting it from the list provided and then click
on the Copy button. The selected model and its associated parameters will be copied to the user-specified
model name.
Help
Clicking this button opens the Help topic for the OLH Library.
Close
Clicking this button closes OLH Library Editor and saves all changes.
Parameters
allows you to specify available records i.e. Heater ID Starter Type Application Type for the selected
model, along with settings for the Curve type, Amp range and Ohm range for each record. The curves
applicable for the selected OLH model can be defined in the Curve Type section.
Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted, but can be copied, if the copy-paste tool is available.

The fields for entering data on the Parameters page are described below.
Manufacturer
Model
Curve Type
This frame allows you to add, edit, copy or delete curve types for the selected model.
Name
Enter a name for the curve of up to 12 alphanumeric characters. This field is a required library parameter.

Rated Temp
Enter the rated temperature value in degrees Celsius. This field is a required library parameter.
Note
You can use this field to enter notes for the selected curve type. This field is provided for reference only
and may be left blank.
Lock
specified).
TCC
Click on the Points button to define the hot start / cold start curves by points (given by time and current)
and temperature shift factors. The TCC points are hidden for locked entries.
Cold Start (Maximum Curve) Time, Multiples

Select a value from the scrollable list or enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for the cold
start curve. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons.

Hot Start (Maximum Curve) Time, Multiples

Select a value from the scrollable list or enter the time in seconds and current in multiples for the hot start
curve. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the points using the Add and Delete buttons.
Ambient Temperature Shift

Enter the temperature in degrees Celsius and a corresponding shift factor, to define the curve shift factor
with respect to temperature. You can Add, Edit, and Delete the temperature shift factors using the Add
and Delete buttons.
R Characteristic
Select the format for defining the resistance of heater units. You can choose to define the resistance as a
nominal value with tolerance in percent or enter the minimum and maximum values (range) for the
resistance. Note: If you enter the resistance as nominal value with % tolerance the Min and Max R values
will be calculated and vice versa.
Trip Amp
Click on the appropriate button to define the trip amperes for the selected OLH model as fixed or
adjustable.
Parameters
Clicking the Parameters button allows you to enter new parameters for each Heater ID Starter Type
Application Type record for the selected OLH model. You can also Add, Edit and Delete the short-
circuit data using the Add and Delete buttons. In addition, you can select a row (highlight it) and right-

click to add, delete, insert, copy and paste rows. Locked entries cannot be edited or deleted, but can be
copied. The parameter categories are described below.
Heater ID
Double-click on this field to enter a heater unit identification number of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
This field is a required library parameter.
Starter
Double-click on this field to enter the starter types applicable to the heater unit in this field. This is an
essential field; however it can be left blank if information is not available.
App.
Double-click on this field to enter the application for the heater unit. This is an essential field; however it
can be left blank if information is not available.
Type
Define if the heater unit is an In-Line or CT type by selecting from the drop-down list. This field is a
Min / Max Amp

Enter the minimum and maximum ampere values (ampere range) for the heater unit by double-clicking in
these fields. These are essential fields; however they can be left blank if information is not available.
Trip Amp
Double-click to enter the trip current value for the heater unit in this field. This is an essential field;
however it can be left blank if information is not available.
Min R / Max R (Nom. R / % Tol.)

Double-click to define the resistance as a nominal value with tolerance in percent or enter the minimum
and maximum values (range) for the resistance. Note: If you enter the resistance as nominal value with %
tolerance the Min and Max R values will be calculated and vice versa. This is an essential field; however
it can be left blank if information is not available.
Curve
Select the curve applicable to the heater unit from the drop-down list. Note: The curves are displayed in
the list when defined in the Curve Type section. This field is a required library parameter.
Lock
specified).
Notes
You can enter notes for the selected heater unit in this field, which is provided for reference only and may
be left blank.

Engineering Libraries Harmonic
8.23 Harmonic Library

The Harmonic Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is
defined by Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers (manufacturers) within
the library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as shown below.
Depending upon which harmonic type is selected, both Current and Voltage Sources are available. The
library header is defined by harmonic type and manufacturer information. You can have unlimited
manufacturers within the library for each type. Unlimited models/classes are available within each
manufacturer, as shown below.
8.23.1 Harmonic Library Selector

The Harmonic Library allows you to add new harmonic library headers or select existing harmonic library
headers to edit, copy, or delete. Harmonic Library headers are used to indicate the type, manufacturer,
and model of a harmonic source. To edit a Harmonic Library, double-click on the item or click on the
Edit button after highlighting it. To delete a harmonic model, click on the Delete button after
highlighting it. ETAP will request confirmation to delete the selected harmonic model.

Add
This dialog box is used to add a new Harmonic Library header.
Copy
This dialog box is used to copy an existing Harmonic Library header.

8.23.2 Harmonic Library Editor

This Spreadsheet Editor allows you to view and edit Harmonic Library data.
Harmonic Order
This column is pre-numbered from the 2nd to the 73rd order, based on the applicable harmonic orders.
Mag.
Double-click on the cells in this column to enter the percent magnitude of harmonic current or voltage
based on the selected harmonic type. This value is based on the fundamental current/voltage.
Angle
Double-click on the cells in this column to enter the harmonic current or voltage phase angles in degrees.

8.23.3 Library Quick Pick - Harmonic

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed via the Library button, which is located in the editor of
elements containing a Harmonic page.
From this dialog box, select a harmonic type, manufacturer, and model from the Harmonic Library. For a
selected harmonic header, the Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to pick a harmonic source model
from the list of models in the library.

Engineering Libraries Interrupting Cost
8.24 Interruption Cost Library

The Interrupting Cost Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header
displays a list of all the interrupting cost load sector headers. You may have an unlimited number of
headers (load sectors) within the library. You may only have one set of interrupting cost data per load
sector as shown below.
8.24.1 Interruption Cost Library Selector

The Interrupting Cost Library Selector window provides you with several features that facilitate the
entering and removing of data. The user may add an unlimited number of load sectors, edit, copy, and
delete them. To edit an existing load sector, double-click or highlight and press edit.
Add
The Interrupting Cost Library Add dialog box is used to add a new interrupting cost load sector to the
library header.

Copy
The Interrupting Cost Library Copy dialog box is used to duplicate any desired load sector. The dialog
box will ask you to enter a new name since the load sector names must be uniquely assigned.
8.24.2 Interruption Cost Library Editor

The Interrupting Cost Library Editor is designed as a spreadsheet for the purpose of entering or removing
interrupting cost data. The user may add insert or delete rows at will.

Minute
This column has been pre-labeled and is used to specify the time in minutes for each Interrupting Cost
Data Point.
Cost ($/kW)
This column has been pre-labeled and is used to enter the Interrupting Cost in dollars per kilowatt for
each minute time interval.
8.24.3 Interruption Cost Library Load Sector Drop-Down List

Interrupting Cost Load Sectors are not selected from a Library Quick Pick dialog box. The Interrupting
Cost Load Sectors are selected from the element editors' reliability page. All AC loads have a drop-down
list that allows the user to select the desired load sector.

Engineering Libraries Reliability Library
8.25 Reliability Library

The Reliability Library is setup as a file directory system. The first library header is the ETAP element
for which reliability data is available, for example 2-winding transformers or buses. The first sub-
division after the kind of element is the Source of the Reliability Data (IEEE, industrial maintenance data,
etc, etc). The next subdivision is the device type (in the case of 2-winding transformers the classes would
be dry or liquid type). After the device type the Reliability Data is sorted according to different classes
(kV, kVA ratings, etc).
The following diagram illustrates the way the Reliability Library is organized.
8.25.1 Reliability Library Selector

The Reliability Library Selector window allows the user to add or modify the contents of the Reliability
Library. From this window the user may edit, add, copy, or remove any set of reliability data for all the
different ETAP elements. Double-clicking on a header or class brings up the Add or Edit Reliability Data
dialog boxes.

Add
The Add dialog box is used to insert a new set of Reliability Data for any given ETAP element. Pressing
the add button on the Reliability Library Selector brings up the Add dialog window, which prompts you
for new Source and Class names.
Copy
The Copy dialog window allows you to copy any set of Reliability Library Data for any given element.
The dialog window prompts the user for a new ETAP Element, Source, and Class name for the duplicate
data. If you inadvertently enter the Element, Source, and Class name the same as that of an existing set of
Reliability Data, ETAP displays an error message.

8.25.2 Reliability Library Editor

The Reliability Library Editor is designed as a spreadsheet that allows the user to enter the Reliability
Data Values for a given class. Using this editor, you are able to edit, add, insert, or delete any row or
individual values. All the different columns within the Reliability Library Editor are pre-labeled
according to the kind of Reliability data that is used by the Reliability Analysis Program.
Note: The length unit for branches is per 1000 ft.
Class
This column allows you to enter the different class names under the given source and type for the given
device. The determining value for a class may be for example a voltage level, kVA rating, etc, etc.
Active Failure/yr.
This column is for entering the Active Failure per year rate of the device.
Passive Failure/yr.
This column allows you to enter the Passive Failure per year rate of the device. In ETAP Library, the
passive failure has been set to be same as the active failure, except for breakers for which the passive
failure has been set to 1.5 times the Active Failure rate.
MTTR
This column is for entering the Mean Time To Repair value in hours for the given device.
Switch Time
This column is for entering the device switching time.
Replace Time
This column allows you to enter the time interval required to replace the given device.

8.25.3 Library Quick Pick - Reliability

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed via the Library button, which is located in the editor of
elements containing a reliability page. The Reliability Library Quick Pick is very similar to the
Reliability Library Editor. Using this dialog box the user may select the source, type and class of
reliability data to be used for the given device.
Source
This box allows the user to select the Source of the reliability data to be used for the given device.
Type
This box allows the user to select the type of device for selecting the devices reliability data.

Engineering Libraries Battery Library
8.26 Battery
The Battery Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is defined
by Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers (manufacturers) within the
library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as shown below.
Battery Library Header
Header Battery Model
Header Battery Model

Battery Model

Header

Battery Model
Battery headers are used to indicate the model and type of battery. Battery headers consist of the
following items:
1) Manufacturer Manufacturer Name

2) Model Battery Model
3) Characteristic Type Characteristic Type: Time vs. Amp or Time vs. Kt
4) VPC Nominal Voltage per Cell
5) SG Specific Gravity at Base Temperature
6) Temp. Base temperature in Degrees Celsius
7) Time Constant Battery Time Constant in Second
8) Discharge Time Battery Rated Discharge Time in Hour
8.26.1 Battery Library Selector

The Battery Library allows you to add new battery headers or select existing battery headers so that you
can edit, copy, or delete them. To edit a Battery Library, double-click on the item or click on the Edit
button after highlighting it. To delete a battery, click on the Delete button after highlighting it. ETAP
will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before removing any library data.
Add
This dialog box is used to add a new battery header.
Copy
This dialog box is used to copy an existing battery header.

A battery header consists of all the information you see in this dialog box. You can create a new battery
header by changing any one of the items in the battery header information.
8.26.2 Battery Library Editor

To edit the Battery Library data, select a battery type from the Battery Library and click on the Edit
button. Each battery type (header) can contain an unlimited number of battery sizes. This Spreadsheet
Editor allows you to view and edit Battery Library data for a selected battery type. The name of the
battery type is displayed on top of the spreadsheet. Each battery record (row) is a unique set of data for
each battery size. Each battery record must have a unique identifier: Plates.
Available Size
Plates
Double-click on this field to enter the total number of plates for the selected battery model.
Note: The total number of plates is always an odd number.
Cap
Double-click on this field to enter the nominal amp-hour capacity for the selected battery model.
1 Min SC Rating
Double-click on this field to enter the one minute short-circuit rating for the selected battery model. The
one minute rate is used for DC short-circuit calculations.

K
ETAP uses this value to calculate the constant current source values in DC Short-Circuit Studies. SC
Amps = the 1 Min. A times K. If the SC Amps are entered first, the program will automatically calculate
the K factor.
SCA
The Batterys Short-Circuit Current in Amperes specified by the manufacturer. If the K Factor is entered
first, the SCA is calculated automatically.
Rp
Resistance per Positive Plate in Ohms. Resistance of a battery cell equals to Rp divided by the number of
positive plates.
Performance Data
Enter the performance data for each available battery size in this spreadsheet by double-clicking on each
cell. You can add, insert, and delete rows and columns to the spreadsheet. Double-click on the column
header to enter the end voltage per cell values. Double-click on the row header to enter time value in
minutes. Note: The cell performance data should be entered, on a per positive plate basis.
8.26.3 Library Quick Pick - Battery

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by double-clicking on a battery in the one-line diagram,
then clicking on the Library button in the editor. The Library Quick Pick options are a compilation of the
information you have specified for this element.

From this dialog box, select a battery type (header) and battery size from the Battery Library. The
Library Quick Pick dialog box allows you to pick a battery size from the list of all battery sizes in the
library for a selected battery header.

Engineering Libraries Control System Device - Contact
8.27 Control System Device Contact

The Contact Library is designed to have a flat setup. The library can be opened by selecting the Control
System Device, Contact option from the Library menu. You can add, delete, and modify library data for
a contact by using the Contact Library Editor. The Contact Library is divided into AC contacts and DC
contacts.
8.27.1 Control Circuit Contact Library Editor
AC/DC
In this section, you select AC or DC Contact Library data to display in the contact list.
AC Devices
Select the AC Device option to display all AC contacts in the contact list.
DC Devices
Select the DC Device option to display all DC contacts in the contact list.
Add
Click on the Add button to add a new contact entry at end of the contact list.
Delete
Click on the Delete button to delete the highlighted contact entry.

Help
Click on the Help button to open ETAP Help on the Contact Library topic.
Close
Click on the Close button to save the changes made in the Contact Library and close the Control Circuit
Contact Library Editor.
Contact List
The contact list contains all contact data in the library. Its spreadsheet layout allows easy viewing and
modification of contact data.
Part ID
Double-click on this field to enter up to 25 alphanumerical characters as the ID for a contact. The Part ID
can be used to identify contact manufacture and model of a contact.
Vrated
Double-click on this field to enter a contact rated voltage in volts.
%Vmax
Double-click on this field to enter the maximum allowable voltage applied on a contact. Enter the value
as a percent of Vrated.
R
Double-click on this field to enter contact resistance in milliohms. This value is the combined resistance
of the resistance when the contacts are touching each other, the resistance of the terminals and the contact
spring.
Amp,r
Double-click on this field to enter contact current rating in amperes for a resistive load. This rating is
applicable when the contact is in a circuit that does not contain any inductive coils.
Amp,i
Double-click on this field to enter the contact current rating in amperes for an inductive load. This rating
is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that contains inductive coils. Typically in control systems for
electrical power systems, there are usually control relays or solenoids and hence the inductive current
rating should be used. The inductive current rating is usually less than or equal to resistive current rating.
VAbr,r
Double-click on this field to enter contact breaking capacity in VA (or W) for resistive load. This rating
is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that does not contain any inductive coils.
VAbr,i
Double-click on this field to enter the contact breaking capacity in VA (or W) for inductive load. This
rating is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that contains inductive coils.
VAmk,r
Double-click on this field to enter the contact making capacity in VA (or W) for resistive load. This
rating is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that does not contain any inductive coils.

VAmk,i
Double-click on this field to enter contact making capacity in VA (or W) for inductive load. This rating
is applicable when the contact is in a circuit that contains inductive coils.
Top
Double-click on this field to enter the operating time in milliseconds for the contact. Top is the time it
takes for a contact, initially at its normal state, to change to off-normal state, assuming that during the
period of Top the voltage drop across the controlling device (a control relay or a solenoid) of the contact
is maintained higher than or equal to the pickup voltage of the controlling device.
Trelease
Double-click on this field to enter the release time in milliseconds for the contact. Trelease is the time for
a contact, initially at its off-normal state, to change to normal state, assuming that during the period of
Trelease the voltage drop across the controlling device (a control relay or a solenoid) of the contact is
maintained below the dropout voltage of the controlling device.
Serial No.
Double-click on this field to enter the Serial Number of the contact, using up to 25 alphanumerical
characters.
Remark
Double-click on this field to enter a remark for the contact, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Data Revision
Double-click on this field to enter the data revision of the contact, using up to 25 alphanumerical
characters.
Reference
Double-click on this field to enter a reference for the contact, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.

8.27.2 CSD Library Quick Pick - Contact

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the Contact Library button from the
Contact page of the Control Relay Editor or the Solenoid Editor. The Library Quick Pick lists all contacts
in the library along with contact parameters. You can view contact parameters, retrieve contact data from
the library to the Device Editor, or remove previously selected Contact Library data in the Device Editor.
Help
Clicking on the Help button will display a frame of the Quick Pick Library Help for a contact device.
Help frames typically have a list of additional related topics for other devices and menu functions
displayed in green at the bottom. Click on a topic to view that information.
OK
Clicking on the OK button will substitute the selected Contact Library parameters into a Device Editor.
None
Clicking on the None button will remove the previously retrieved library data for selected contact in the
Device Editor where the CSD Contact Library Quick Pick dialog was invoked.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will close the CSD Contact Library Quick Pick dialog. No data will be
transferred.

Engineering Libraries Control System Diagram Control Relay
8.28 Control System Device Control Relay
The Control Relay Library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is
defined by AC/DC Type, Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers within
the library and unlimited Models for each manufacturer, as shown below.
Control Relay headers are used to indicate the model and type of control relays. Control Relay headers
consist of the following items:
1) AC/DC DC/AC Type

3) Model Control Relay Model
8.28.1 Control Relay Selector

The Control Relay Library allows you to add new control relay headers or select existing control relay
headers so that you can delete, or copy, or edit these entries.
AC/DC
Select an AC or DC Control Relay Library to display in the Control Relay Library Selector.
AC Devices
Clicking this option displays all AC control relay manufactures in the Manufacturer list.
DC Devices
Clicking this option displays all DC control relay manufactures in the Manufacturer list.

Manufacturer
This section displays all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC control relays. You can also add or
delete control relay data for a manufacturer in this section.
Manufacturer List
This list contains all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC control relays. As you click on a
manufacturer in the list, the Model list below will display all the control relay models for that
manufacturer that are included in the library.
Reference
This field displays the Reference for the selected manufacturer. Reference information is entered when
you initially add a manufacturer and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Link
This field displays the internet web address of the selected manufacturer. The Link information is entered
when the manufacturer is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.

Add -- Manufacturer
Click on the Add button to add a new manufacturer for Control Relay Library. The Add dialog box will
appear so that you are able to enter information related to the manufacturer.
AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new control relay manufacturer you are adding.
OTI Created Library

This box can be checked by OTI engineers only. It indicates that this library was created and verified by
OTI, developer of ETAP.
Manufacturer
Enter a name for the new manufacturer, of up to 30 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, of up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Link
Enter an internet web address for the manufacturer, of up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Manufacturer
Click on the Delete button to remove control relay data for the selected manufacturer from the Control
Relay Library. Note: When you remove a manufacturer from the library, the control relay data for all
models under that manufacturer will also be removed. Before removing library data, ETAP will display a
frame asking you to confirm your request.
Edit Info -- Manufacturer

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected manufacturer. The Edit Info
dialog box will appear. It is similar to the Add dialog box. Notice that you can modify the Reference and
Link fields but not the Manufacturer, since Manufacturer is part of the library header information.

If the manufacturer has been created by OTI, you will not be able to modify the Manufacturer information
unless you have requested and been granted an OTI key (access number) that allows you to edit library
information.
Copy -- Manufacturer
Click on the Copy button to copy a selected manufacturer to a new manufacturer name. The Copy
Library dialog box will show up, which displays the selected manufacturer as the From manufacturer and
allows you to enter a name for the To manufacturer.
Note: When an existing manufacturer is copied to a new manufacturer, all device models listed under the
existing manufacturer will be copied to the new manufacturer. If there is a need to modify control relay
data from a manufacturer created by OTI, you can copy the data to a new manufacturer. This type of
modification will not be restricted by an OTI key.
Model
This section displays all models provided by the selected control relay manufacturer. You can also add to
or delete control relay data for a model in this section.

Model List
The list contains all models provided by the selected control relay manufacturer. As you click on a model
in the list, information related to the model, such as Reference, Class, and Description, will be displayed
in the same section.
Reference
This field displays the Reference information for the selected model. Reference information is entered
when the model is added and you can make modifications by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Class
This field displays the Class information for the selected model. Class information is entered when the
model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Description
This field displays Description information for the selected model. The Description information is
entered when the model is added and you can make modifications by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Add -- Model
Click on the Add button to add a new Model for the selected manufacturer. The Add dialog box will
appear and allow you to enter information related to the model.

AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new model that is being added.
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer name of the new model that is being added.
Model
Enter a name of the model, using up to 30 alphanumerical characters.
OTI Created Library

This box can be checked by OTI engineers only. It is an indication that the model has been created and
verified by OTI, developer of ETAP.
Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, of up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Class
Enter the Class information for the model, using up to 32 alphanumerical characters.
Description
Enter the Description for the model, of up to 100 characters.
Certification
Enter certification for the model, using up to 25 characters.
Catalog #
Enter a catalog number for the model, of up to 25 characters.
Issue Date
Enter the issue date for the model, using up to 50 characters.
Link
Enter the internet web address for the model, using up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Model
Click on the Delete button to remove control relay data for the selected model from the Control Relay
Library. Note: When removing a model from the library, control relay data for all devices under that
model name will be removed. Before removing library data ETAP will display a frame requesting that
you confirm this request.
Edit Info -- Model

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected model. The Edit Info dialog
box will appear which is similar to the Add dialog box.
Note: You are not allowed to modify the model name, since it is already being used as part of the header
for a branch of Control Relay Library.
If the Model has been created by OTI, you cannot modify the Model information unless you have an OTI
key that permits this level of access.

Copy -- Model
Click on the Copy button to copy the selected model to a new model name. The Copy Library dialog box
will appear, which displays the selected model as the From model and allows you to enter a name for the
To model.
Note: When an existing model is copied to a new model, all devices under the existing model will be
copied to this new model. If there is a need to modify the control relay data for a model created by OTI,
you can copy this data to a new model, an action that will not be restricted by the OTI key, and you will
be able to modify this model.

Parameters
Clicking on the Parameters button will bring up the Control Circuit Control Relay Library: Parameter
Spreadsheet. Use this frame to add new control relay data or modify existing data. When the spreadsheet
is open, the data for the selected model under the selected manufacturer is listed.
8.28.2 Parameter Spreadsheet

You can add a new control relay entry, delete an existing entry, or modify parameters for an existing
entry from the Control Circuit Control Relay Library: Parameter Spreadsheet.
Heading Information
The header displays information on device type, manufacturer, model and class.
AC/DC Devices
This field displays type of devices, AC or DC.

Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer name of devices.
Model
This field displays the model name of devices.
Class
This field displays the class of devices.
Device Parameters
The Parameter Spreadsheet is where you enter device parameters. This spreadsheet lists all devices for
the manufacturer, the model and its class. You can modify parameters for an existing device entry, add a
new entry or delete an existing entry from the spreadsheet. Double-click on the field to enter or modify
data for that field.
ID
Enter the ID of a device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Vrated
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the device. This value serves as the base for other voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the device. The value is in percent based on the rated
voltage.
%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the device. This value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the minimum voltage across the device required to change the state of controlled contacts from
their normal state to off-normal state when the device becomes energized. If the voltage drop on the
device becomes less than the Vpickup value from the moment that the device becomes energized up to the
operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will fail to operate and stay in the normal state.
%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the maximum voltage across the device that will result in changing the state of controlled contacts
from their off-normal state to normal state. If the voltage drop on the device becomes less than the
Vdropout value for a duration of the release time of a controlled contact, while the device is energized,
the contact will change from its off-normal state to normal state.
VA
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the continuous power rating of a device. For a DC
device, the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the continuous power rating of a device.
Amp
Enter the current rating in Amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a device.

R
Enter the DC resistance in Ohms for a DC device under normal operating condition, that is, when the
rated voltage is applied across the device. For an AC device, this is the AC impedance in Ohms at the
rated frequency.
%Tol.
Enter the burden rating tolerance as a percentage. This value is used to adjust the burden load of a device.
The burden is adjusted in a conservative way in CSD calculations. When a 10% tolerance is entered, the
resistance of a constant Z device will be reduced by 10% and the VA (or I) of a constant VA (or I) device
will be increased by 10%.
PF
Enter the rated power factor of the device as a percentage. For a DC device, this field is display only and
the value is fixed at 100%.
VA,i
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the inrush power rating of a device. For a DC device,
the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W,i
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the inrush power rating of a device.
Amp,i
Enter the current rating in amperes. This is the inrush current rating of a device.
PF,i
Enter the inrush power factor of the device as a percentage. This field is display only for a DC device and
its value is fixed at 100%.
T,i
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds.

Duty Cycle
Select a duty cycle from the list or enter a number in this field. This parameter is applicable only to
solenoids. It is used to characterize the percentage of time that a solenoid is behaving as a functional part
of a circuit. This field is currently not used in CSD calculations.
Tmax
Enter the maximum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is currently not used in CSD
calculations.
Tmin
Enter the minimum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is currently not used in CSD
calculations.
NOfixed
Click on the NOfixed button to assign Normally Open contacts to this device. This will open the Contact
Library Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from the
Contact Library. When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact
data will also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a Device Editor, the
status of NOfixed contacts will be fixed as NO. This status cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
NCfixed
Click on the NCfixed button to assign Normally Closed contacts to this device. This will open the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from
the Contact Library. When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact
status of NCfixed contacts will be fixed as NC. This status cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
Convertible
Click on the Convertible button to assign Convertible contacts to this device. This will open the Contact
Library Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from the
status of Convertible contacts will be initially set as NO. This status can be changed from the Device
Editor.
Form C
Click on the Form C button to assign Form C contacts to this device. This will open the Contact Library
Add-On dialog box and allow you to assign one or multiple contacts to the device from the Contact
Library. When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact data will
also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a Device Editor, the status of
Form C contacts will be initially set as Pos A. This status can be changed from the Device Editor.

Serial Number
Enter the Serial Number of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Remark
Enter a remark for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Data Revision
Enter the data revision of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Contact Library Add-On

When one of the four contact assignment buttons is clicked from the device parameter spreadsheet, the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box will open and allow you to select contacts and assign them to the
device.

Heading Information
The heading information section consists of three display fields: AC/DC device type, device ID, and
contact type. When you click a button the contact type that is displayed will match your selection.
Available Contact List

The Available Contact list shows all contacts in the Contact Library. The contacts to be assigned are
selected and deselected by a mouse click. Note: Multiple contacts can be selected at the same time.
<< Button
Clicking on the << button adds the highlighted contacts from the Available Contact list to the Selected
Contact list. Note: Each time the button is clicked, the highlighted contacts will be added to the Selected
Contact list.
>> Button
Clicking on the >> button removes the highlighted contacts from the Selected Contact list.
Selected Contact List

This list displays contacts that have been assigned and will be assigned to a device. This list shows the
contact ID along with contact parameters. When the Contact Library Add-On dialog is open, the
Selected Contact list displays the contacts that have been assigned to the device. You are able to un-
assign one or more assigned contacts by removing them from the list. You can also expand the list by
adding more contacts from the Available Contact list.
The number column, the first column in the list, can be used to select one or multiple contacts from the
Selected Contact list. When you click on the column for a contact, the contact will be highlighted while
deselecting all previous highlighted contacts. When you click on the column for a contact while pressing
down and holding the Ctrl key, you can select or deselect the contact without changing other previously
selected contacts. Used in combination with the Shift key, you can also create a group of contacts from
the list.
Help
Clicking on the Help button will display an ETAP Help frame.
OK
Click on the OK button to update the device with the newly assigned contacts. This will replace the
previously assigned contact list.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the dialog box without changing the previously assigned contact list.
8.28.3 CSD Library Quick Pick Control Relay

The Library Quick Pick dialog box can be accessed by clicking on the Library button from the Rating
page of the Control Relay Editor. The Library Quick Pick lists all control relays for a specified
manufacturer and model type. You can view control relay parameters and retrieve data from this library
to the Device Editor.

Device Library Type

From the Library Type section of the Control Relay Quick Pick dialog, you can specify manufacturer and
model type for a type of device. All devices from the specified manufacturer under the selected model
will be displayed in the device list for you to select.
AC/DC Device
This display field shows the AC/DC type of the device library, which matches the type of the device
invoked from the Control Relay Quick Pick dialog box.
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the list of all manufacturers that are included in the Control Relay Library.
Once a manufacturer is selected, all models from that manufacturer will be loaded into the Model list.
Model
Select a model in the list of all models from the specified manufacturer. Once a model is selected, all
devices under the selected model will be displayed in the device list.
Class
This display only field shows the class for the selected model.
Device List
The device list shows all devices for the selected control relay manufacturer and model, along with the
device parameters entered in the library. To select a device from the list, click on its row to highlight and
select it.
Buttons for Assigned Contacts

A device in the library can have one or more contacts assigned. You can click on the buttons under the
NOfixed, NCfixed, Convertible, or Form C column in the device list to view contacts assigned to the

device. Once one of the buttons is clicked, the Contact Library Viewer dialog box will appear and
display all assigned contacts of the type according to what button you clicked. The Contact Library
Viewer dialog box also displays all contact parameters in a spreadsheet format.
Help
OK
Clicking on the OK button will substitute your selected device library data into Device Editor. Note: If
the selected library device already has assigned contacts on the Contact page of the Device Editor, the
new contacts will be added (with their contact library data) to match the previously assigned contacts in
the library.
None
Clicking on the None button will remove the previously retrieved library type information from the
Device Editor, without changing any device parameters. If the previously retrieved device library data
includes assigned contacts, new contacts would have been added to the device on the Contact page.
These contacts will be removed from the Device Editor as well, if they have not been associated with
CSD contact elements and their Source is still Relay Lib. When a contact is not associated with a CSD
element, its Contact ID field will be blank.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will close the CSD Control Relay Library Quick Pick dialog without
transferring any data.

Engineering Libraries Control System Diagram - Solenoid
8.29 Control System Device Solenoid
The Solenoid library is set up in a similar manner to a file directory system. The library header is defined
by AC/DC Type, Manufacturer and Model information. You can have unlimited headers within the
library and unlimited models for each manufacturer, as in the example shown below.
Solenoid headers are used to indicate the model and type of solenoids. Solenoid headers consist of the
following items:
1) AC/DC AC/DC Type

3) Model Solenoid Model
8.29.1 Solenoid Selector

The Solenoid Library allows you to add new solenoid headers or select existing solenoid headers so that
you can edit, copy, or delete them.
AC/DC
Select an AC or DC solenoid Library to display in the Solenoid Library Selector.
AC Devices
Clicking this option displays all AC solenoid manufactures included in the Manufacturer list.
DC Devices
Clicking this option displays all DC solenoid manufactures included in the Manufacturer list.
Manufacturer
This section displays all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC solenoids. You can also add or delete
solenoid data for a manufacturer in this section.

Manufacturer List
The list contains all manufacturers for the selected AC or DC solenoids. As you click on a manufacturer
in the list, the Model list below will display all the solenoid models provided by this manufacturer that are
in the library.
Reference
This field displays the Reference for the selected manufacturer. Reference information is entered when
the manufacturer is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Link
This field displays the internet web address of the selected manufacturer. The Link information is entered
when the manufacturer is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.
Add -- Manufacturer
Click on the Add button to add a new manufacturer for Solenoid Library. The Add dialog box will
appear and allow you to enter information related to the manufacturer.
AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new solenoid manufacturer that is to be added.

OTI Created Library

Manufacturer
Enter the name of the new manufacturer, using up to 30 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Link
Enter the internet web address for the manufacturer, using up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Manufacturer
Click on the Delete button to remove solenoid data for the selected manufacturer from the Solenoid
Library. Note: When you remove a manufacturer from the library, solenoid data for all models under the
manufacturer will be removed. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before
removing any library data.
Edit Info -- Manufacturer

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected manufacturer. The Edit Info
dialog box will show up, which is similar to the Add dialog box. You can modify the Reference and Link
fields but not the Manufacturer, since Manufacturer is incorporated as part of the library header
information.
If the manufacturer data was created by OTI, you will not be able to modify the Manufacturer information
unless an OTI key is used.
Copy -- Manufacturer
Click on the Copy button to copy the selected manufacturer to a new manufacturer name. The Copy
Library dialog box will show up, which displays the selected manufacturer as the From manufacturer and
allows you to enter a name for the To manufacturer.

Note: When an existing manufacturer is copied to a new manufacturer, all models included under the
existing manufacturer will be copied to the new manufacturer. If there is a need to modify solenoid data
from a manufacturer created by OTI, you can copy this data to a new manufacturer, and since it will not
be restricted by an OTI key you will be able to make modifications.
Model
This section displays all the models provided by the selected solenoid manufacturer. You can also add or
delete solenoid data for a model in this section.
Model List
The list contains all models for the selected solenoid manufacturer. As you click on a model in the list,
information related to the model, such as Reference, Class, and Description, will be displayed in the same
section.
Reference
This field displays the Reference information for the selected model. Reference information is entered
when the model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button.

Class
This field displays the Class information for the selected model. Class information is entered when the
model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button
Description
This field displays Description information for the selected model. Description information is entered
when the model is added and can be modified by clicking on the Edit Info button
Add -- Model
Click on the Add button to add a new Model for the selected manufacturer. The Add dialog box will
appear and allow you to enter information related to the model.
AC/DC Device
This field displays the AC or DC type of the new model that is to be added.
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer name for the new model that is to be added.
Model
Enter the name of the model, using up to 30 alphanumerical characters.

OTI Created Library

Reference
Enter a reference for the manufacturer, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Class
Enter the Class information for the model, using up to 32 alphanumerical characters.
Description
Enter a Description for the model, using up to 100 characters.
Certification
Enter certification for the model, using up to 25 characters.
Catalog #
Enter the catalog number for the model, using up to 25 characters.
Issue Date
Enter the issue date for the model, using up to 50 characters.
Link
Enter the internet web address for the model, using up to 100 characters.
Delete -- Model
Click on the Delete button to remove solenoid data for the selected model from the Solenoid Library.
Note: When you remove a model from the library, solenoid data for all devices under the model name
will be removed. ETAP will display a frame requesting that you confirm this request before removing any
library data.
Edit Info -- Model

Click on the Edit Info button to modify information related to the selected model. The Edit Info dialog
box will appear which is similar to the Add dialog box. Note: You are not allowed to modify the model
name, since it is already incorporated in the header for a branch of Solenoid Library.
If the Model is created by OTI, you will not be able to modify the Model information unless an OTI key
is used.

Copy -- Model
Click on the Copy button to copy the selected model data to a new model name. The Copy Library dialog
box will appear, and display the selected model as the From model and allow you to enter a name for the
To model.
Note: When an existing manufacturer is copied to a new manufacturer, all models included under the
existing manufacturer will be copied to the new manufacturer. If there is a need to modify solenoid data
from a manufacturer created by OTI, you can copy this data to a new manufacturer, and since it will not
be restricted by an OTI key you will be able to make modifications.

Parameters
Clicking on the Parameters button will bring up the Control Circuit Solenoid Library: Parameter
Spreadsheet, where you can add new solenoid data or modify existing data. When the spreadsheet is
open, the data listed are for the selected model under your selected manufacturer.
8.29.2 Parameter Spreadsheet

You can add new solenoid entry, delete an existing entry, or modify parameters for an existing entry from
the Control Circuit Solenoid Library: Parameter Spreadsheet.
Heading Information
The header displays information on device type, manufacturer, model and class.
AC/DC Devices
This field displays type of device, AC or DC.
Manufacturer
This field displays the name of the manufacturer of the device.
Model
This field displays the model name of the device.
Class
This field displays the class of the device.

Device Parameters
Device parameters are entered in the parameter spreadsheet. This spreadsheet lists all devices according
manufacturer, model and class. You can modify parameters for an existing device entry, add a new entry
or delete an existing entry from the spreadsheet.
To enter or modify data for a field, you must double-click on the field.
ID
Enter ID of a device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Vrated
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the device. This value serves as the base for other voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the
rated voltage.
%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the minimum voltage across the device required to change the state of controlled contacts from
their normal state to off-normal state when the device becomes energized. If the voltage drop on the
device becomes less than the Vpickup value from the moment that the device becomes energized up to the
operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will fail to operate and remain in the normal state.
%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the device. The value is a percentage based on the rated voltage.
This is the maximum voltage across the device that will result in changing the state of controlled contacts
from their off-normal state to normal state. While the device is energized, if the voltage drop on the
device becomes less than the Vdropout value for a duration of the release time of a controlled contact, the
contact will change from its off-normal state to normal state.
VA
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the continuous power rating of a device. For a DC
device, the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the continuous power rating of a device.
Amp
Enter the current rating in Amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a device.
R
Enter the DC resistance in Ohms of a DC device under normal operating condition, that is, when the rated
voltage is applied across the device. For an AC device, this is the AC impedance in Ohms at the rated
frequency.
%Tol.
Enter the burden rating tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the burden load of a device. In
CSD calculations, the burden is adjusted in a conservative way. When a 10% tolerance is entered, for a

constant Z device its resistance will be reduced by 10% and for a constant VA (or I) device its VA (or I)
will be increased by 10%.
PF
Enter the rated power factor of the device as a percentage. For a DC device, this field is for display only
and the value is fixed at 100%.
VA,i
Enter the power rating in Volt-Amperes. This is the inrush power rating of a device. For a DC device,
the VA rating is the same as the W rating.
W,i
Enter the power rating in Watts. This is the inrush power rating of a device.
Amp,i
Enter the current rating in Amperes. This is the inrush current rating of a device.
PF,i
Enter the inrush power factor of the device as a percentage. For a DC device, this field is display only
and the value is fixed at 100%.
T,i
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds.
Duty Cycle
Select a duty cycle from the list or enter a number in the field. It is used to characterize the percentage of
time that a solenoid in on duty. This field is not used in CSD calculations.
Tmax
Enter the maximum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is not currently used in CSD
calculations.

Tmin
Enter the minimum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is not currently used in CSD
calculations.
NOfixed
Click on the NOfixed button to assign Normally Open contacts to this device. This will open the Contact
Library Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the Contact
also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a Device Editor, the status of
NOfixed contacts will be fixed as NO and it cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
NCfixed
Click on the NCfixed button to assign Normally Closed contacts to this device. This will open the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the
status of NCfixed contacts will be fixed as NC and it cannot be changed from the Device Editor.
Convertible
Click on the Convertible button to assign Convertible contacts to this device. This will open the Contact
Library Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the Contact
also be retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a device editor, the status of
Convertible contacts will be initially set as NO. This status can be changed from the Device Editor.
Form C
Click on the Form C button to assign Form C contacts to this device. It will open the Contact Library
Add-On dialog box that allows you to assign one or more contacts to the device from the Contact Library.
When the device library data is retrieved from a Device Editor, the assigned contact data will also be
retrieved at the same time. As the contact data is substituted into a Device Editor, the status of Form C
contacts will be initially set as Pos A. This status can be changed from the Device Editor.

Serial Number
Enter the Serial Number of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Remark
Enter a remark for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Data Revision
Enter the data revision of the device, using up to 25 alphanumerical characters.
Reference
Enter a reference for the device, using up to 50 alphanumerical characters.
Contact Library Add-On

When one of the four contact assignment buttons is clicked from the device parameter spreadsheet, the
Contact Library Add-On dialog box will open and allow you to select contacts to be assigned to the
device.
Heading Information
The heading information section consists of three display field: AC/DC device type, device ID, and
contact type. The contact type displayed is the same as the button clicked.
Available Contact List

The Available Contact list shows all contacts in the Contact Library. Select the contacts for assignment
by a mouse click. Note: Multiple contacts can be selected at the same time.
<< Button
Clicking on the << button adds the highlighted contacts from the Available Contact list to the Selected
Contact list. Note: Every time the button is clicked, the highlighted contacts will be added to the Selected
Contact list.
>> Button
Clicking on the >> button removes the highlighted contacts from the Selected Contact list.

Selected Contact List

This list displays contacts that have been assigned and will be assigned to a device. It shows contact ID
along with contact parameters. When the Contact Library Add-On dialog is open, the Selected Contact
list shows the contacts that have been assigned to the device and you can de-assign one or multiple
assigned contacts by removing them from the list. You can also expand this list by adding more contacts
from the Available Contact list.
The number column, the first one in the list, can be used to select one or more contacts from the Selected
Contact list. When clicking on the column for a contact, this will highlight the contact while deselecting
all previous highlighted contacts. When you click on the column for a contact while pressing down and
holding the Ctrl key, this will select or deselect the contact without changing other previously selected
contacts. In combination with the Shift key, you can also select multiple groups from the list.
Help
Clicking on the Help button will display the ETAP Help frame for this contact list.
OK
Click on the OK button to update the device with the newly assigned contacts. This will replace the
previously assigned contact list.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to close the dialog box without changing the previously assigned contact list.
Add
Click on the Add button to add a new device entry at the end of the Parameter Spreadsheet.
Delete
Click on the Delete button to delete the selected device from the Parameter Spreadsheet.
OK
Click on the OK button to close the Parameter Spreadsheet and save the modified data.
Cancel
Click on the OK button to close the Parameter Spreadsheet without changing any data.
Help
8.29.3 CSD Library Quick Pick Solenoid

The Library Quick Pick dialog box is accessed by clicking on the Library button from the Rating page of
the Solenoid Editor. The Library Quick Pick lists all solenoids for a specified manufacturer and model
type. You can view solenoid parameters and retrieve data from a library to the Device Editor.

Device Library Type

You can specify the manufacturer and model type for a type of device from the Library Type section of
the Solenoid Quick Pick dialog,. All devices provided by the specified manufacturer under this model
name will be displayed in the device list. You can click on a row to select that device.
AC/DC Device
This display field shows the AC/DC type of the device library, according to the type of the device
invoked from the Solenoid Quick Pick dialog box.
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the list of all manufacturers that are included in the Solenoid Library. Once a
manufacturer is selected, all models provided by this manufacturer will be filled in the Model list.
Model
Select a model from the list of all models provided by the specified manufacturer. Once a model is
selected, all devices under your selected model will be displayed in the device list.
Class
This display only field shows the class of the selected model.
Device List
The device list shows all devices provided by the selected solenoid manufacturer and the model, along
with the device parameters entered in the library. To select a device from the list, click on the row
corresponding to the device to highlight your selection.
Buttons for Assigned Contacts

A device in the library can be assigned with one or more contacts. You can click on the buttons under the
NOfixed, NCfixed, Convertible, or Form C column in the device list to view contacts assigned to the

device. Once one of the buttons is clicked, the Contact Library Viewer dialog box will appear, which
displays all assigned contacts of the type according to the button you clicked. The Contact Library
Viewer dialog box also displays all contact parameters in a spreadsheet format.
Help
OK
Clicking on the OK button will substitute the selected device library data into Device Editor.
Note: If the selected library device has assigned contacts, on the Contact page of the Device Editor, new
contacts will be added with contact library data according to the contacts assigned in the library.
None
Clicking on the None button will remove the previously retrieved library type information from the
Device Editor, without changing device parameter. If the previously retrieved device library data
includes assigned contacts, new contacts would have been added to the device on the Contact page.
These contacts will be removed from the Device Editor as well if they have not been associated with CSD
contact elements and their Source is still Relay Lib. When a contact is not associated with a CSD
element, its Contact ID field will be blank.
Cancel
Clicking on the Cancel button will close the CSD Solenoid Library Quick Pick dialog without

Chapter 9
One-Line Diagram GUI
ETAP provides an easy to use, fully Graphical User Interface (GUI) for constructing one-line diagrams.
Here you can graphically add, delete, relocate, connect elements, zoom in or out, display grid off or on,
change element size, change element orientation, change symbols, change equipment/device color, create
personalized viewing themes, hide or show protective devices, enter properties, set operating status, etc.

One-Line Diagram GUI Overview
When you create a new one-line diagram presentation, you are initially in Edit Mode with the
configuration status set to Normal, the default condition. The Grid and Continuity Check are both
switched off. If you open (activate) an existing one-line diagram presentation, it opens with all the
attributes set that were saved last, i.e., mode (Edit, Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Motor Starting, etc.),
configuration status, display options, view size, and view location as the initial condition.
When you create a new project, a one-line diagram presentation is automatically created with an ID
(name) equal to the ID of the default one-line diagram, appended with a unique number. To create a new
one-line diagram presentation within an existing project, click on the New Presentations button on the
Presentation toolbar, as shown below.
You can change the ID (name) of a one-line diagram presentation from within the Project View (to
expand the presentations tree, right-click on the one-line diagram, and select properties from the menu),
or by double-clicking in the background of the one-line diagram presentation.
ETAPs electrical system diagram is a one-line representation of a balanced three-phase system. This
one-line diagram is the starting point for all of your studies. You can graphically construct your electrical
system by connecting the buses, branches, motors, generators, and protective devices in any order from
the One-Line Diagram Edit toolbar. You can connect elements to buses graphically (by dragging lines
from the device element) or by using the Info page of the Device Property Editor (double-click on the
element and its property editor will open). Using these editors you can assign the engineering properties
of the element, such as its ratings, settings, loading, connection, etc. You can also elect to set the defaults
for each element prior to placing them in the one-line diagram to minimize the time required for data
entry.

One-Line Diagram GUI Edit
9.1 Edit a One-Line Diagram

In this section, some of the most common functions of the graphical user interface for the one-line
diagram are explained. The detailed instructions provided here will assist you in creating and editing
your one-line diagram presentation.
9.1.1 Mouse and Keyboard Functions

Key
A key on the keyboard is represented by its name enclosed in a pair of triangular brackets. For example,
the Control key is represented by <Ctrl>.
Click
Place the mouse cursor on an object or button, and then click the left mouse button. Click is used to
select an element in the one-line diagram, add elements from the toolbars, etc.
Right-Click
Place the mouse cursor on the object, and then click the right mouse button. For example, right-
clicking on an element in the one-line diagram brings up a menu.
Double-Click
Place the mouse cursor on an object or button, and then click the left mouse button twice rapidly. For
example, double-clicking on an element in a one-line diagram brings up the Property Editor for that
element. For composite networks and motors, double-clicking brings up the nested one-line diagram for
that composite element.
<Ctrl> + Click
Place the mouse cursor on the object, then, while pressing the <Ctrl> key down, click the left mouse
button. Use <Ctrl> + click to select or deselect one-line diagram elements.

<Shift> + <Ctrl> + Click

Place the mouse cursor on a cable; then, while pressing the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys down together,
click the left mouse button to drag a cable from the one-line diagram to an Underground Raceway
System (UGS) or vice versa. Use <Shift> + <Ctrl> + click to place one-line cables in conduits or
locations in the underground raceways.
Drag
Place the mouse cursor on an element, click and hold the left button down, drag the mouse to the
required position while keeping the left button down, then release the left button to place the element.

Selecting
Make sure the mouse cursor is not on any element; click and hold the left button down. Drag the
mouse to the required position while keeping the left button down, and then release the left button. You
will see a rectangle marked with dotted lines indicating the area that you have selected. This is used for
selecting a group of elements.

Drag and Drop

Drag and Drop is the ability to copy elements using the mouse within an ETAP project and, in one mouse
motion, paste the elements onto an accepting location within ETAP. Drag and Drop is used in ETAP
only for copying elements (but not for cutting or purging elements).
Drag and Drop is implemented in the following manner:

1. Select the elements to be dragged and dropped.
2. Using Shift + Ctrl + Left-Mouse depressed, drag the elements to the desired location.
3. Release the element in the desired location by releasing the Mouse-Left button.
Drag and Drop can be performed between the following ETAP views:
OLV to OLV
OLV to Dumpster
Dumpster to OLV
UGS (Complete Raceway) to Dumpster
OLV to ETAP Star
ETAP Star to OLV
OLV to UGS
UGS to OLV
OLV to Composite Network
Composite Network to OLV
Note: Elements cannot be dropped onto an OLV view that is in Study Mode.

9.1.2 Add Elements

Every element in ETAP requires a unique ID. ETAP includes a Name Manager, which insures that the ID
of all elements, presentations, Star Views, configuration status, study cases, underground raceway
systems, etc. are unique. When you add a new element, the Name Manager automatically assigns an ID
to it by appending a number to the default ID of that element. Device elements are numbered sequentially
by type (Fuse 1, Fuse 2, etc.). When an element is deleted from the OLV it is moved to the Dumpster, but
its ID will still be in use until it is purged from the Dumpster.
Bus ID = (Default ID) + (A Unique Number) = Bus + 1 = Bus1
When you add an element, it is initialized with the default values. You can modify the default values for
each element either by selecting Defaults from the menu bar or from the components list in the Project
View.

Add One Element

Left-Click on an element symbol on the Edit toolbar, then move the cursor to the one-line diagram and
click again to drop it. It is unnecessary to hold the mouse button down when moving the cursor.
Add Multiple Elements

To add an element to your one-line diagram, click on any of the device element buttons on the Edit
toolbar. Notice how the cursor changes its shape to that of the elements icon. Now you can drag and
drop that element in any position on the one-line diagram by clicking the mouse. After dropping the
element, the cursor returns to its original arrow shape.
Double-click on an element on the Edit toolbar to add multiple copies of the same element to the one-line
diagram. As you click the mouse, a copy of the selected element will be placed at each location.
Rules
Elements can be added only in Edit Mode, i.e., they CANNOT be added in any Study Mode.
Elements can be added when Base Data is active, i.e., they CANNOT be added when any Revision
Data is active.
9.1.3 Select & Deselect Elements

Click on an element to select it. Click anywhere in the one-line diagram or in an underground raceway
system to deselect the element. Use <Ctrl>+Click to select or deselect any element.
To select an element, click the left mouse button while the cursor (arrow shape) is on top of the element.
When an element is selected, it is shown in red. To select multiple elements, you can either press
<Ctrl>+Click to add or delete elements to the selected group, or rubber band a group of elements.

To select a group of elements, click the left mouse button where there is no element and drag the mouse.
It will show you a dotted rectangle. When the mouse is released, all elements completely inside the
rectangle will turn red.
To select a group of elements, highlight the elements or the entire one-line diagram using the mouse.
<Ctrl>+Click to select other elements or deselect elements from the highlighted group.
When an element is selected, its color is shown in red. Deselected AC elements are displayed in black
and DC elements in blue.
9.1.4 Auto Select

ETAP implements an intelligent and proactive auto select feature that is time saving and intuitive. Use
the Alt button and the left mouse click together to select multiple elements in an instant.
Alt + Left Mouse Click on a bus

If a bus is selected and the ALT key is pressed, then ETAP will automatically select all the loads
connected to the bus. All protective devices connected to those loads will also be selected. If there are
branches connected to the bus, the branch components within a bounding box will be selected as well. In
the below example, the purple text box shows the bounding box for a low voltage bus. There is a breaker
and transformer T3 that fall within the bounding box, hence they will be selected. Note: The bounding
box is configured to be the same distance around the element as the element ID's adjustable radius.
Alt + Left Mouse Click on a load

When the ALT key is pressed and a load is selected, ETAP will automatically select all devices connected
to the load up to the bus.

Alt + Left Mouse Click on a load PD

The Auto select function can also be used on any load protective device. All elements in a straight line
with the protective device will be highlighted when Alt + left mouse click is used on the protective
device. The picture below shows the Auto Select function used when the devices are not in a straight
line. ETAP highlighted the breaker and the contactor after Alt + Click was used on the breaker. This
gives the user the ability to quickly select those two elements and drag them in line with the overload
heater, cable and motor.
Alt + Left Mouse Click on a branch or branch PD

If the ALT key is pressed and a branch is selected, then ETAP will automatically select all the
components connected to the branch in a straight line between the from bus and to bus of the branch.
If the elements are not in a straight line, ETAP will stop the auto select function at the last inline element
as done with the load pd shown above. Note: Using the Auto Select function on a branch pd will perform
the same results as using the Auto Select function on a branch.

Page Up
Jump from the selected element to the upstream bus, selecting and highlighting all elements in between.
When parallel paths exist, all elements in the parallel path will be selected.
Page Down
Jump from the selected element to the downstream bus, selecting and highlighting all elements in
between. When parallel paths exist, all elements in the parallel path will be selected.
9.1.5 Element & Connector Colors

You can customize the colors of all elements and connectors by assigning their colors in the Preferences
Manager or by using the Theme Editor (see 9.1.5).
For example, if you want to color code regions of your system based on voltage level then you can
identify various voltage levels in the system and highlight the first voltage level components. Right-click
anywhere in the blank space around the one-line diagram and the following menu will be available.
Click on Custom and select the appropriate color you wish to use for this voltage level.

Continue with other regions of the system in a similar manner.

9.1.6 Theme Editor

The Theme Editor is used to change color and line styles for device connectors as well as device color
and background. Select from template themes or you can create custom themes that can be applied
globally or according to the presentation. The advantage of using a Theme Editor is that unlimited custom
styles may be stored on one computer and these styles are project independent so they are available when
switching from one ETAP project to another. Themes created using the Theme Editor can be easily
transported from one computer to another.
Note: Themes can be applied to one-line diagram and control circuit diagram presentations. Also, colors
applied manually using the right-click context menu will override theme colors.
Select the presentation for which you want to create and apply a custom theme. The Theme Editor can be
accessed from the Project toolbar, as shown below.
The Theme Editor appears as shown below. When ETAP is first installed, the standard theme applied to
all presentations is ETAP (Default) theme.

Note: Annotation Colors for an existing and new system are based on User-Defined Colors specified in
the Display Options for the presentation selected. Switch to Global Theme to use Annotation colors
specified in the Theme Editor.
Theme
This is controlled by a drop-down box that allows you to switch between themes. Colors are switched in
the Theme Editor when switching between different themes. Colors and/or styles are not applied until you
click Apply or OK. If the default colors are changed a new theme is created automatically Modified
Default xx.
Save As
Click on this button to rename the selected theme. The dialog box shown below will be displayed. It
allows you to assign a new theme name.

Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected theme. Note that ETAP (Default) theme cannot be deleted.
Set Global
If Set Globally is clicked then the following dialog is displayed.
From these presentations, select those that should be displayed in the ETAP (Default) theme or your
custom theme. Theme settings can also be applied to your entire project, including all the selected
presentations (excluding Ground Grid, Cable Pulling, GIS, and Star).
3 Phase AC & DC
User-Defined
Select user-defined colors for the elements and annotations on your one-line diagram. User-defined
colors are based on colors defined within the 3 Phase AC & DC section.

kV Based
Select kV Based to define colors by their kV ratings. When kV based is selected, define colors under the
kV Based tab.
One Phase AC
This tab will bring up the Energized conductors editor so that you can change colors and line styles for
connectors that mate with instrumentation, ground and single phase equipment. Note that the advanced
color settings are also included as part of the current theme.
kV Based
Define colors based on the kV rating of the elements on your one-line diagram. This section is used when
kV Based is selected under 3 Phase AC & DC. Each color incorporates all kV ratings lower than or equal
to the listed rating until the next specified rating is reached.

Sort
Click Sort to view your ratings in ascending or descending order.
Add
Click Add to add a new kV rating with a selected color.
Delete
Click Delete to delete an existing kV rating and its selected color.

The following default colors are used for different operating modes:
Energized AC Color
Continuity
Mode Element Condition Color Comment
Check
All AC Device On Energized Black
All AC Device On De-Energized Gray
All AC Device Off Any Black
All DC On Energized Blue

All DC On De-Energized Gray
All DC Off Any Blue
(Composite /
All On Energized Black
Remote connector)
(Composite /
All On De-Energized Gray
Remote connector)
(Composite /
All Off De-Energized Fuchsia
Remote connector)
All AC Pins Any Any Fuchsia

Continuity
Mode Element Condition Color Comment
Check
All DC Pins Any Any Cyan
(Composite /
All Any De-Energized Lime
Remote connector)
AC/DC/Composite
All Any Any Red
Selected Elements
All AC Annotation - Display Blue

Options -
Themes
All 1-Phase 2 Wire On Energized Teal Dash-Dot
Phase A
All 1-Phase 2 Wire On Energized Teal Dash Dot-Dot
Phase B
Phase C
Phase C
All 1 Branch On Energized Green Dotted Line

All 1 Branch On De-Energized Gray Solid Line
All 1 Branch Off Any Black Solid Line
All 1, 3 Wire Branch On Energized Bright Green Dotted Line

All 1, 3 Wire Branch On De-Energized Gray Solid Line
All 1, 3 Wire Branch Off Any Black Solid Line
Run Bus On/Off Error Magenta Base kV

Studies Problem
Load Bus, Cable, Line, On/Off Alarm Red Critical Limits,
Flow Reactor, Overload
Transformer, Panel,
PD, Generator
Load Bus On/Off Warning Magenta Marginal Limits
Flow
Short- Bus On/Off Fault Dark Red Faulted Bus
Circuit
Short- PD On/Off Alarm Red Overstressed
Circuit

9.1.7 Relocate Elements

To drag an element or group of elements to a new location, first select the elements that you wish to
move. Selected elements are indicated in red. Move the cursor on top of the selected elements, click and
hold the left mouse button as you place them in the desired position, and then release the mouse button.
Relocate a Single Element

Select an element and move the cursor over it; the cursor changes shape to a move symbol. Drag the
element to a new position and release the left button.
Relocate a Group of Elements

Select the elements that you wish to relocate, move the cursor on top of the selected elements so it
becomes a move symbol, and then drag the selected elements to a new position.
9.1.8 Connect Elements

Each element has one or more (up to 20) pins. A pin is a graphical tool (represented by a small, red
square indicating the connection point) to connect elements together. The following is a list of elements
and their pins:
Sources (synchronous generator, power grid, and battery) have one pin.
Loads (synchronous motors, induction machines, DC motors, static loads, MOVs, capacitors, filters,
etc.) have one pin.
Branches (2-winding transformers, lines, cables, impedances, reactors, etc.), protective devices (high
& low voltage circuit breakers, fuses), and relays have two pins.
Three-winding, potential, and current transformers have three pins.
Switching devices have two pins.
Double-throw switches have three pins.
Overcurrent relays and ammeters have two pins.
Voltmeters, voltage relays, and frequency relays have one pin.
Composite motors have one pin.
Composite networks have up to 20 (4, 8, 12, 16, & 20) pins.
Converters (DC converters, chargers, inverters) have two pins.
Buses are considered to be one long pin (continuous pins along their length).
Connect Element to Bus

Place the cursor over the pin of an element (pin appears in red). Click and drag the mouse to a bus.
When the bus turns red, release the left button.
Drag an element and place its pin on a bus.
Drop a new element with its pin on top of a bus.
Buses are considered to be one long pin. Connections are always made from elements to buses.
Relays cannot be connected to buses.
Only one pin of an element can be connected to the same bus.

Connect Element to Element

You can graphically connect elements by moving the cursor to the end of an element until the connection
pin is highlighted in red. Click and drag the mouse to a bus or protective device and release the mouse
button when the bus or the connecting pin also turns red.
Place the cursor on the pin of an element. Click and drag the mouse to the element you wish to
connect. When the latter elements pin turns red, release the left button.
Drag & drop a protective device with its pin placed on top of the pin of any branch or load element.
Drag & drop a protective device onto a connection.
Branches CANNOT be connected to each other; ETAP automatically inserts a bus between them.
Branches CANNOT be connected to loads, utilities, composite motors, and composite networks.
Relays can only be connected to current transformers (CT) or other relays.

You CANNOT directly connect two buses with a connector or current transformer.

9.1.9 Voltage (kV) Propagation

Whenever two elements are connected together ETAP will identify all devices in the connection path that
have a null value for nominal / rated kV. Once identified, ETAP will automatically update them based on
the upstream or downstream voltage. Voltage (kV) propagation considers any remote connectors in the
system during the propagation. The following are some examples of voltage propagation throughout the
one-line diagram.
Connecting a Transformer to a Bus
Since Bus4 Nominal kV = 0, then Bus Nominal kV is set equal to connecting Transformer Rated kV =
4.16 kV, in this case. ETAP will continue propagating the voltage through the rest of the system starting
from Bus4. The result of this connection is shown below.
Connecting a Branch (Cable, Line, X, or Z) to a Bus

OR
Since Bus8 Nominal kV on one side of the branch is zero and the other side is non-zero, ETAP will set
Bus8 kV = Bus4 kV. Voltage will not be propagated from the primary side of the transformer to the
secondary side since ETAP does not know upfront the turn ratio of the transformer. For DC systems, DC-
to-DC converters behave in the same manner as transformers.

Shown below is an example that uses AC and DC components to illustrate the most efficient points to
start kV propagation.

The Remote Connector

Two sections, section 1 and section 2, form the Remote Connector element. This Remote Connector
allows you to connect elements together that are located in widely separated areas of the project, without
having to run a long, continuous branch circuit cable connector between them, as indicated in the figure
below.
The Remote Connector Find Feature

The Find Other End feature associated with the Remote Connector allows the user to quickly locate all
elements connected to either section 1 or section 2 of the Remote Connector. Right-click on either
section of the Remote Connector, and select Find Other End from the menu. The Program will
automatically locate the other section of the Remote Connector, regardless of its location in the one-line
diagram.

Insert Protective Devices (PD)

You can insert a protective device on any connector path by dragging and dropping it on top of the
connector. There is no limit to the number of protective devices that can be inserted and connected
together. If a connector element icon is horizontal, the orientation of the protective device is
automatically changed to 180 degrees and inserted in the connector path. If you later wish to change the
orientation, right-click on the element and select Orientation from the menu that appears. You can select a
new orientation from 0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees.
In this example, a circuit breaker and fuse are inserted between Bus1 and T1.

9.1.10 Cut, Copy & Paste

Cut (Delete)
Elements, along with their connectors, can be cut (deleted) from the one-line diagram and placed in the
Dumpster. There are four methods to cut selected elements:
Select Cut from the right-click menu.

Click on Edit on the menu bar and select Cut.
Click on the Cut button in the Project toolbar.
Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
Cutting a Transformer using the Right-Click Menu
Rules
Elements can be cut in Edit Mode only when Base Data is active.
Elements have to be selected before cutting.
To cut a connection, the connection has to be selected (click on it).
When a protective device in a connecting path is cut, the connector remains intact.
Hidden protective devices become visible when a connector is cut.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be cut at the same time.
When an element or group of elements is placed in the Dumpster, ETAP creates a new Dumpster Cell to
hold them. ETAP assigns the name of the Dumpster Cell. When you cut an element or a group of
elements, they are deleted from the one-line diagram and placed in the Dumpster with the same ID. The
connections, properties, and status of the deleted elements are preserved.

Copy
Elements, along with their connectors, can be copied into the Dumpster by one of three methods:
Right-click on an element and select Copy.

Click on Edit in the Menu bar, and select Copy.
Click on the Copy button on the Project toolbar.
Rules
Elements can be copied in Edit Mode only when Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT be copied in a Revision Data.
You CANNOT copy a connector with hidden protective devices.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be copied at the same time.
When an element or group of elements is placed in the Dumpster, ETAP creates a new Dumpster Cell to
hold them. ETAP assigns the name of the Dumpster Cell. When you copy an element or group of
elements, they get copied into the Dumpster with new IDs. The connections, properties, and status of the
duplicated elements in the Dumpster are preserved.
Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram. Elements
can be pasted from the Dumpster by three methods:
Right-click on the one-line diagram and select Paste at the cursor location.
Click on Edit in the menu bar and select Paste at the cursor location.
Click on the Paste button on the Project toolbar to paste at the top left corner of the one-line diagram.
Rules
Paste can be done only in Edit Mode when the Base Data is active.
Paste CANNOT be executed if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
Paste will copy the active Dumpster Cell into the one-line diagram. You can change the active Cell
by opening the Dumpster presentation (from the Project View) and clicking on the Cell ID. When
you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the active Cell.
Dumpster Cells are not deleted after pasting.
You cannot copy part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are pasted.
You can paste the contents of any Dumpster Cell into any Composite Network. However, you cannot
paste Cells that contain buses and branches into Composite Motors.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be pasted at the same time.
When you paste a Dumpster Cell, it gets copied into the one-line diagram with a new ID. The
connections, properties, and status of the pasted elements are preserved.
Move From Dumpster

Elements can be moved from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram with the same IDs by two methods:
Right-click on the one-line diagram and select Move From.

Click on Edit on the menu bar and select Move From.
Rules

Move From Dumpster can be done only in Edit Mode when Base Data is active.
Move CANNOT be done if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
When you move a Dumpster Cell to the one-line diagram, the desired Cell needs to be active and it
gets deleted from the Dumpster after being moved.
You can move any Dumpster Cell you desire by making it active from the Dumpster presentation.
When you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the active
Cell.
You cannot move part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are moved.
You can move any Dumpster Cell into any Composite Network. However, you cannot move Cells
that contain buses and branches into a Composite Motor.
Section 1 and section 2 of the Remote Connector must be moved from the Dumpster at the same time.
When you move the contents of a Dumpster Cell into the one-line diagram, the IDs of the moved
elements, along with the connections, status, and properties are preserved.

9.1.11 Size and Service

Element Size
When an element is added into the one-line diagram, its default size is 3. To assign it another size, right-
click on the element to bring up a menu. Use the Size command to select a size (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5). The
drawing below shows a 3-winding transformer that is changed from size 1 to size 5.
Alternatively, element size can be changed globally by highlighting an area of the one-line diagram and
right-clicking anywhere on the blank space of the presentation, selecting size and picking the new element
size. This procedure is illustrated below.
Bus Size may be controlled independently from all other components by using the Bus Size option in the
menu shown in the figure above.

Element In / Out Service

To change the state of any device from In Service to Out of Service or vice versa, double-click on the
element to access it properties and toggle between In and Out of Service.
Alternatively, you can globally change a group of elements from In Service to Out of Service or vice
versa by highlighting a group of elements, right-clicking anywhere on the blank portion of the one-line
diagram and selecting Service.

9.1.12 Element Symbols

There are two families of graphic symbols (ANSI & IEC) available for one-line diagram elements. The
symbols of some elements, such as buses, are the same for both standards. Symbols can be assigned for
newly added elements or changed for any existing element.
Symbol of New Elements

When you add elements to the one-line diagram, ETAP uses the Project Standard for the ANSI or IEC
symbol of the new element. Note that the Edit toolbar also reflects the selected Project Standard.
Change Symbol of Existing Elements

Right-click on an element to bring up the menu, use the Symbols command, and then select ANSI or IEC.
Alternatively, element symbols can be changed globally by highlighting an area of the one-line diagram
and right-clicking anywhere on the blank space of the presentation, selecting symbol and picking the new
element size. This procedure is illustrated below.

Global Substitution
Alternative symbols are included in the symbols folder under C:\ETAP 700. These symbols can be
viewed and applied from the Symbols Quick Pick editor located under the Tools - Symbols drop down list
from the menu toolbar as shown below:
Alternatively, the global substitution editor can be accessed by right-clicking anywhere on the blank
space of the presentation, selecting symbol and clicking Global Substitution.
Select Global Substitution to activate the Symbols Quick Pick editor. This editor allows the user to
globally substitute alternative symbols for a selected element. Symbols cannot be substituted to a selected
group of elements.

Symbols
This section displays a list of all the elements that provide alternative symbols. Each element folder
contains the default ETAP symbols for ANSI and IEC along with alternative element symbol folders.
Select All Sizes

Select to enable symbol substitution for each size and substitute the symbol for all sizes.
Size 1 - 5
Individually select which symbol size to substitute. If size 1 and size 3 are checked, with sizes 2,4, and 5
unchecked, then the symbol substitution will only change the currently used symbols for sizes 1 and 3.
To view the new symbol, make sure the element symbol is on the correct size in the one-line diagram.
New Symbols
Display the symbol that will be used to replace the existing symbol. The five pictures represent the
symbol for each size.

Currently Used
Display the symbol currently used on the one-line diagram. The five pictures represent the symbol for
each size. After Substitute is clicked, the new symbol will replace the previous currently used symbol in
this section.
Project Standard
Displays the standard used for the project. To change the project standard, go to Project - Standards.
Change
Select which element standard symbol to replace after substituting a new symbol. To view the new
symbol, make sure the element symbol is on the correct standard in the one-line diagram.
Substitute
Click Substitute to accept the substitution.
OK
Click OK to accept the substitution and close the Symbols Quick Pick editor.
9.1.13 Rotation and Orientation

Element Rotation
To rotate an element, you need to right-click on the element to bring up a menu. Use the Rotate
command and then select one of the rotations (-90, 90, 180, or Orientation). The illustration below shows
the various rotate positions of the top pin of the 3-winding transformer.
Rules
When an element is added, its orientation is based on the system default as follows:
Buses are added at 0 degrees.

Composite networks are added at 90 degrees and do not rotate.

Protective devices are added or inserted based on the orientation of the connections.
All other elements are added at 90 degrees.
Element Orientation
To change the orientation of an element, you need to right-click on the element to bring up a menu. Use
the Rotate command, then select Orientation and use one of the orientations (0, 90, 180, or 270). The
illustration below shows the various orientation positions of the top pin of the 3-winding transformer.

9.1.14 Element Alignment

Alignment tools provide functionalities to arrange elements. To align the elements, you need to first select
the elements you want to align. Right-click on the one-line diagram, select alignment and choose from
one of the alignment options. There are 10 total features: Straight Align, Space Align, Align Center, Align
Middle, Align Top, Align Bottom, Align Left, Align Right, Distribute Horizontal, and Distribute Vertical.
The alignment is based on an anchor element. An anchor element is defined upon user selection. The
anchor element is shown with four blue corners surrounding the element.
Straight Align Application
Space Align Application
Align Center Application
Align Middle Application
Align Top Application
Align Bottom Application
Align Left Application
Align Right Application
Distribute Horizontal Application

Distribute Vertical Application
Straight Align
Use the straight alignment tool to vertically and horizontally align elements in a straight line. This tool
can be used to align all elements connecting a load to a bus. Select a load as your anchor element and use
the straight align tool to align the protective devices in a straight line between the load and the bus. You
may also select the bus as your anchor element and all the devices will be aligned in a straight line based
on the center of the bus. Also this tool is used to align all elements between two buses. When you have
multiple elements between two buses and they are not aligned, select one element as your anchor element
and align the other elements in a straight line with the selected element.
Space Align
Use the space alignment tool to vertically and horizontally align elements in a straight line while creating
an equal space between the elements. Select a load as your anchor element and use the space align tool
to align the protective devices in a straight line with equal spacing between the load and the bus. The
space before the load is double the space between two protective devices. This spacing is used for any
equipment cables that are in your one-line diagram. You may also select the bus as your anchor element
and all the devices will be aligned in a straight line with equal spacing based on the center of the bus.
Also this tool is used to align and space all elements between two buses. When you have multiple
elements between two buses and they are not aligned and spaced properly, select one element as your
anchor element and align and space the other elements in a straight line with the selected element. Using
the bus as anchor element, you may also equally space branches horizontally, as well as vertically, to
create an equal separation between branches on the same bus.

Align Center
Select multiple buses and horizontally align them in a straight line, based on the bus used as the anchor
element, using the Horizontal Center Alignment option. You may also use this option to horizontally
align different loads through the center of the anchor element. Two or more elements must be selected to
activate Align Center.
Align Middle
Align elements downstream from the bus in a straight line through the center of the selected elements
based on the anchor element. Also align multiple elements between two buses in a straight line. Two or
more elements must be selected to activate Align Middle.

Align Top
Align selected elements horizontally at the top location of the anchor element. Two or more elements
must be selected to activate Align Top.
Align Bottom
Align selected elements horizontally at the bottom location of the anchor element. Two or more elements
must be selected to activate Align Bottom.

Align Left
Align selected elements at the left side location of the anchor element. This tool can be used to align
multiple buses to their left most side with reference to the anchor element. It can also be used to align
elements at their bottom location if the elements are rotated to the right. If the elements are rotated to the
left, then it can be used to align the elements to the top side. Two or more elements must be selected to
activate Align Left.
Align Right
Align selected elements at the right side location of the anchor element. This tool can be used to align
multiple buses to their right most side with reference to the anchor element. It can also be used to align
elements at their bottom location if the elements are rotated to the left. If the elements are rotated to the
right, then it can be used to align the elements to the top side. Two or more elements must be selected to
activate Align Right.

Distribute Horizontal
Distribute selected elements horizontally with equal spacing in between each element. Use this tool when
you have three or more elements on different lines that need to be equally spaced across from each other.
One example of this is when you have multiple loads coming down from one bus, use this tool to equally
space all the loads.
Distribute Vertical
Distribute selected elements vertically with equal spacing in between each element. Use this tool when
you have three or more elements along the same vertical line that need to be equally spaced.

9.1.15 Protective Devices

Protective Device Status
Circuit breakers, fuses, relays, potential transformers, and current transformers are considered protective
devices. However, only switching devices (circuit breakers, switches, contactors, and fuses) have status
(open or closed). Note that when you change the status of a circuit breaker, you are changing it for the
active Configuration Status. When you switch to another configuration, the status may be different. This
statement is also true for the status of motors, MOVs, and loads.
Status can be changed by using the right-click menu, or from the editor.
From the right-click menu

Right-click on a circuit breaker in the one-line diagram to open the menu, and use the Closed
command. The check mark ( ) means the status of the circuit breaker is closed. If you click on it,
the check will disappear and the status of the circuit breaker will become Open. For a normally open
protective device, a NO (Normally Open) annotation is shown in the one-line diagram.
To close an open circuit breaker, use the Close command. The check will appear next to Closed in
the menu and NO will disappear from the one-line diagram.
From the Editor

To change the status of a circuit breaker from its editor, open its editor and click on Closed or Open in
Configuration Status.

Mirror
Relays and Current Transformers are the only two protective devices that can be mirrored. Mirror allows
the user to view the relay or current transformer from the reflective view point of its original position. To
mirror a relay or current transformer, right-click on the device and select Mirror.
To mirror both the Relay and Current Transformer you must mirror each one separately.
Reverse Polarity
Current Transformer is the only protective device that allows reverse polarity. There are two ways to
reverse the polarity of a current transformer, from the right-click menu or selecting Reverse Polarity in
the info page of the current transformer.

From the Right-Click Menu

Select the Current Transformer, right-click and select Reverse Polarity.
From the Info Page

Double-click on the Current Transformer and check the Reverse Polarity box.

Hide Protective Devices (PD)

Protective devices (circuit breakers, fuses, current transformers, switches, contactors, potential
transformers, meters, and relays) can be made invisible for each individual one-line diagram presentation.
For example, one presentation could be your relay view where all protective devices are displayed.
Another presentation might be for load flow studies, and you may not want to show any protective
devices.
Protective devices can be hidden (so that they are invisible in the one-line diagram) individually or in
groups.
Hiding Protective Devices

Select a protective device from the one-line diagram and right-click on it to open the menu, and then click
on Visible. The protective device will become hidden and will be shown as a red diamond on the
connector when the connector is selected. The red diamond is an indicator for hidden elements and
appears whenever you click on the connector.
Select one or more protective devices, right-click on the background then select Hide All PDs to hide all
selected protective devices.
Rules
A protective device with one end open (a pin not connected to any element) cannot be hidden.

You CANNOT copy a one-line diagram with hidden protective devices.

A potential transformer (PT) can be hidden only if both pins located on the primary (line) side of the
PT are connected to elements.
If a one-line diagram with hidden protective devices is cut or deleted, the protective devices will be
visible in the Dumpster.
Protective devices CANNOT be hidden in the Dumpster.
Protective devices can be hidden or visible regardless of their status.
Showing Protective Devices

Select a connection with a hidden protective device. The hidden protective device will be shown as a red
diamond on the connector. Right-click on the hidden protective device (switch S1) to open the menu and
select Show PD.
After selecting one or more connectors with hidden protective devices, right-click anywhere on the one-
line diagram where there is no element, then click on Show All PDs.

Sometimes there are two or more hidden protective devices on one connection. If you decrease the length
of the connection, the hidden protective devices will be shown as two small, red diamonds next to each
other. In this case, if you repeat one of the above methods, all the protective devices will be made visible
on this connection. To avoid this, stretch the connection by separating the two elements connected to
these protective devices.
Rules on Show All PDs

For a connection with one or more hidden protective devices, there is no need to select or rubber-band
the connection. Place the cursor on the connection and right-click to open the menu, and then click
on Show All PDs.
If there are any composite networks or motors within the rubber-banded area, the protective devices
inside of these composites will not be affected.
Hide or Show all PDs is specific to each one-line diagram presentation.

9.1.16 Group & Ungroup

To group elements; first select the elements, then right-click, and select Group. To ungroup, click on
grouped elements, then right-click, and select Ungroup.
9.1.17 Get Template and Add to Template

Get Template
Select pre-developed one-line diagrams to insert into the presentation of the current project. Template
files can be created manually using the Add to OLV Templates icon or can be taken from the ETAP
default templates. Select any .xml template file in the folder and place the one-line diagram template in
the presentation. Select the template using the template IDs and properties and/or the default IDs and
properties. To select a template, right click on the presentation background in edit mode and select Get
From Template.

After Get From Template is selected, choose the template to add to the one-line diagram from the
Template Quick Pick editor.
Template
Displays the folder and file names the templates are saved under. Click the file name to view the
template.
IDs
This section allows the user to select whether to use the template with the template IDs or the project
default IDs.
Template
Select Template to place the elements on the presentation with the same IDs as the IDs used when the
template was created. If an element has the same ID as one currently in the one-line diagram the template
ID will show a sequence number. For example, if an element ID in the template is shown as T2 and there
is an element with T2 in the project, the ID for the element from the template will be placed as T2-2.
Defaults
Select Defaults to place the elements on the one-line diagram with default ETAP IDs. These IDs will be
created the same way as dropping any element to the one-line from the Edit toolbars.
Properties

This section allows the user to select whether to use the template with the template properties or the
default properties.
Template
Select Template to place the elements on the presentation with the same properties as the properties used
when the template was created.
Defaults
Select Defaults to place the elements on the one-line diagram with default ETAP properties.
Description
Add a description to the template selected.
Save
Click Save to save the description.
Refresh
Changes made from Windows explorer to the template files, such as renaming or deleting, can be updated
in the template quick pick editor by clicking Refresh.
Add to Template
Add any section of the one-line diagram to the template quick pick list. Select the section of the one-line
diagram to add, right click and click Add to Template. Templates can be created and added from base
mode or any revision mode.
Create a template file name and save the file name in the template folder which is located in the ETAP
directory.

9.1.18 Nodes & Buses

The connecting point between two branches or a motor and branch requires a bus. If this bus is not a
MCC switchgear, or if you simply do not desire to emphasize the bus on your one-line diagram, change
the symbol of the bus from a bar shape to a dot shape. Note that nodes have separate annotation options
than buses, and power flows and current are not displayed into or out of nodes.
You can use the right-click menu to change a bus to a node or vice versa.
Right-click on a Bus to open the menu and use the Node command.
To change from Node to Bus, right-click on the node in the one-line diagram. Deselect Node to
change to Bus.
9.1.19 Composite Networks

Among ETAPs most powerful features are its composite networks. Composite networks allow you to
graphically nest network elements within themselves to any arbitrary nesting depths, i.e., a composite
network can contain, within itself, other composite networks. This feature provides you with the
capability to construct complex electrical networks while still maintaining a clean, uncluttered diagram
that displays what you wish to emphasize - and the next level of details are still within easy reach of your
mouse.
Composite Networks (PowerStation 2.0 and Prior Release)

These networks have only four pins for external and internal connections. Externally, these pins can only
be connected to buses. Internally, these pins can be connected to branches.
Old Composite Network Network1 with top pin connected to bus Sub3
You can replace the old composite networks with new ones by following these steps:

Cut all the elements inside of the old composite network.

Add a new composite network in place of the old one.
Open the new composite network.
Move the elements from the Dumpster into the new composite network.
Composite Networks (PowerStation 3.0 and Newer Release)

Composite networks have up to 20 entry points (pins). These are the top pin, left pins, right pins, and the
bottom pin. Externally, these pins can only be connected to elements. Once a pin gets connected to an
element, it becomes a proxy for that element, i.e., you can connect the internal pin just like you were
connecting the element to other elements.
The external pins and internal pins are the same points. They represent the connecting points of the
composite network to the outside and inside.
The internal pin of the composite network is the starting point for the composite network internal
connection. This element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the
outside system. This connecting point is not considered as an element for studies.
When you open a composite network for the first time, all pins are shown in their relative positions. You
can move these internal pins anywhere inside the composite network. If there is an external connection to
a pin, the ID of the connected element is displayed. If there is no external bus connection, the pins
indicate its position (Left1, Rt5, Bot, etc.). If there is an external connection, the ID of the externally
connected element is displayed.
A Composite Network with 12 pins

You can hide the uncounted internal pins by using the right-click menu and selecting Hide Unconnected
Pins.

You may place composite networks anywhere on a one-line diagram or within other composite networks.
These nested composite networks are part of the overall one-line diagram of the system. All studies that
are run include all the elements and connections nested within all composite networks and composite
motors.
Note: When you are working with a particular one-line diagram presentation, display attributes of
composite networks and composite motors are saved along with the one-line diagram presentations, i.e.,
composite networks are treated the same as the one-line diagram.
The ID (name) of a composite network can be changed by three methods:
<Ctrl>+Double-Click on the composite network symbol from the one-line diagram.

Open the composite network and double-click on the background where no device exists.
Double-click on it from the Project View (under Components, Networks Composite) to bring up the
Composite Network Editor.
You can change the ID to any unique 12-character name from the Composite Network Editor.

The following steps are used to move a subsystem (group of elements and connections) from the one-line
diagram to a composite network:
Select the desired elements including their connections using rubber band and <Ctrl>+Click.
Press Delete to cut the elements into a Dumpster Cell.
Activate the composite network by double-clicking on it.
Right-click inside the composite network and select Move From.
9.1.20 Composite Motors (AC & DC)

Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements you can
include inside the AC Composite Motors are:
3 Induction Motors Fuses

3 Synchronous Motors Current Transformers
1 Induction Motors Potential Transformers
Static Loads Voltmeters
MOV Ammeters
3 Lumped Loads Multi-meters
1 Lumped Loads Overcurrent Relays
Capacitors Frequency Relays
Filters Voltage Relays
Circuit Breakers Composite Motors
Contactors MVSST
Switches, Single Pole Single Throw Multi-Function Relay
The elements you can include inside the DC Composite Motors are:
DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Lumped Loads
DC Elementary Diagrams
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Fuses
DC Switches, Single Throw
DC Composite Motors

One-Line Diagram Edit
The number of levels that you can nest inside composite motors is unlimited.
Composite motors have 2 single pins that can be connected externally to buses only, i.e., directly
connected to buses or indirectly through protective devices. Internally, this pin looks and behaves like the
external bus. Other than this limitation and the types of elements that you can include inside a composite
motor, the user interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as composite networks.
Here is an example of composite motor Mtr C1, which is connected to bus MCC 1 inside the composite
network Sub2.
AC Composite Motor Mtr C1 with four motors, one static load, and one composite motor
9.1.21 Grounding Symbols

Grounding elements like resistors, reactors and transformer grounding can be displayed on the one-line
diagram. These grounding elements are like other AC elements. You can modify existing grounding
connections to create new configurations.
By default, the grounding is displayed as a font as shown below. The grounding font can be displayed via
the Display Options.

To display the grounding symbols for transformer or generator go to the grounding page and select
Symbol as the Display Type.

Editing Grounding Symbols

Grounding Symbols can be edited just like other elements on the one-line diagram. For example if a
transformer grounded symbol was to be changed to a resistor grounded symbol, you can either change the
selection from the editor or simply edit the grounding symbol as shown below.

One-Line Diagram Display Options
9.2 Display Options

ETAP allows different display options for the one-line diagram when you are working in different modes.
Here we describe the display options for Edit Mode. The display options for Study Modes are described
in their respective sections.
9.2.1 AC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC elements.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ID of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Show Eq. Cable

This checkbox displays or hides equipment cables from the one-line diagram. Equipment cables are
specified as part of the loads. Double-clicking on the equipment cable will bring up the Equipment Cable
Editor.

Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC elements on the one-
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Generator kW/MW
Power Grid (Utility) MVAsc
Motor (Synchronous and Induction) HP/kW
Load/Panel kVA/MVA and HP/kW and kvar/Mvar and Panel Phase
Bus kA Bracing (Asymm. RMS)

Node Bus Bracing (Asymm. RMS kA)
CB Rated Interrupting (kA)

Fuse Interrupting (kA)
PT & CT Transformer Rated Turn Ratio
Branch (Impedance and Reactor) Base MVA and Continuous Amps

Transformer Rated kVA/MVA
Cable(Size) # of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable - Size
Line (Size) Line Phase Conductor Code
Relay Display Tag for OC, Multi-Function and MTR Relays
kV
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements
on the one-line diagram.
For transformers, the kV checkbox is replaced by %Tap checkbox which displays both transformer rated
kV as well as total % Tap (Fixed Tap + LTC setting) for both 2-winding and 3-winding transformers.

For cables/lines, the kV checkbox is replaced by type checkbox. This checkbox displays the cable/line
conductor type (CU/AL) on the one-line diagram.
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings (continuous or full-load ampere)
of the selected elements on the one-line diagram.
For cables/lines, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display
the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
For transformers, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the Tap checkbox. Select this checkbox to display the
Fixed Tap value on the one-line diagram.
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the winding connection types of the selected elements
For circuit breakers, fuses and switches, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with the N.O. checkbox. When
checked, switching devices that are normally open have a N.O. designation on the one-line diagram.
For relays, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with the Tag checkbox. When checked, it displays user-defined
tag for OC, Multi-Function and Motor Relays.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated impedance of the selected AC elements on
the one-line diagram.
Device Type Impedance

Generator Subtransient reactance Xd
Power Grid (Utility) Positive Sequence Impedance in % on 100 MVA base (R + j X)
Motor % LRC
Branch (Impedance Impedance in % (R+jX) or Ohms
and Reactor)
Transformer Positive Sequence Impedance PS (%Z) for 2-winding transformer
and PS/PT/ST (%Z) for 3-winding transformer
Cable Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in ohms or per unit length)

Line Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in ohms or per unit length)

Use Default Options

Click on this checkbox to use ETAPs default display options.
AC-DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC and DC elements.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC and DC elements on
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC and DC elements
Device Type Rating

Charger AC kVA & DC kW (or MVA/MW)
Inverter DC kW & AC kVA (or MW/MVA)
UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
Battery Ampere Hour

Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kW/MW
Composite CSD kW/MW
Converter kW/MW
Cable (Size) # of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable -
Size
kV
Click on the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected
elements on the one-line diagram.
For DC elements, voltage units are changed from kV to V. For cables, the Voltage checkbox is replaced
with the Type checkbox. When this checkbox is selected, cable conductor type (CU/AL) is displayed on
A
Click on the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Charger AC FLA & DC FLA
Inverter DC FLA & AC FLA
UPS Input, output, & DC FLA
Motor FLA
Load FLA
Composite CSD FLA
Converter DC-DC Converter Input/Output FLA
For cables, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the Length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display the
DC cable length (one way) on the one-line diagram.
For CB, Fuse and Switch, the N.O. checkbox displays the N.O annotation on the one-line diagram when
the switching devices are in normally open state.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the cables and impedance
branches on the one-line diagram.
Use Default Options


9.2.2 Colors Page

This page allows you to set up the colors used for displaying annotations on the one-line diagram.
Color Theme
Select the annotation colors specified in the Theme Editor by selecting the appropriate theme name.
Theme
Click this button to access the Theme Editor in order to quickly change the theme colors for annotations.
Annotations

Select the source of colors to be used for displaying annotations. Annotation colors can be used from the
Display Options Editor or from the Theme Editor. By default, ETAP will use user-defined (Display
Option Editor) colors to display annotation colors. Switch to Global Theme to use the selected theme
annotation colors.
Colors
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

One-Line Diagram Default Display Options
9.3 Default Display Options

ETAP allows different display options for the one-line diagram in different modes. These are the display
options for Edit Mode. Display options for Study Modes are described in their respective sections.
Default display options are set by selecting the Defaults Menu Display Options One-Line Diagram.

One-Line Diagram Annotation Font
9.4 Annotation Font

From the One-Line Diagram toolbar, select Default, and then click on Fonts to arrive at the Annotation
Font dialog box. This dialog box allows for the customization of font type, style, and size of the text used
to ID and describes elements on the one-line diagram.
ID
Select the font type, style, and size to display all IDs selected in display options.
Ratings
Select the font type, style, and size to display all ratings selected in display options.
Voltage
Select the font type, style, and size to display all voltages selected in display options.
Impedance
Select the font type, style, and size to display all impedance selected in display options.
Current
Select the font type, style, and size to display all currents selected in display options.
Delta-Y
Select the font type, style, and size to display all connection types selected in display options.
Bus kV & A
Select the font type, style, and size to display study results selected in their respective display options
such as bus operating voltages for load flow studies and bus short-circuit currents for short-circuit
analysis.
Branch
Select the font type, style, and size to display all branch flows selected in their respective display options.

One-Line Diagram Result Annotation
9.5 Result Annotation

In the ETAP one-line diagram, the direction of the arrows for power flow results matches the positive
direction of the real power flows (kW). In the output reports, however, the printed power flow values
indicate flows from the From Bus to the To Bus.
For 3-winding transformers, the arrow indicates the positive direction of the real power flow (kW), i.e.,
positive kW can be going into or coming out from each winding. However, in the output reports the
printed power flow values indicate flows from the From Bus to the To Bus.
A 3-winding transformer may be represented as a star or a delta circuit in the calculation modules.
In the ANSI Short-Circuit Device Duty calculation, a 3-winding transformer is represented as a star
circuit. A center bus is added to the system that takes the transformer ID as its bus ID and the primary
winding kV as its nominal kV. In this case, the output report prints the short-circuit current contributions
between the three terminal buses and the center bus.
Contributions
=========================
From Bus To Bus
ID ID
------------ ------------
Bus P Total
XFMR 1 Bus P
Bus S XFMR 1
Bus T XFMR 1
For the above example, the following fault current contributions are printed for a fault at Bus P.
From Bus To Bus

ID ID
------------ ------------
Bus P Bus S
Bus P Bus T
Bus S Bus T
In all the other calculation modules, a 3-winding transformer is represented as a delta circuit. The printed
power flows (or currents) are reported between two of the three terminal buses of the transformer.

One-Line Diagram Text Box
9.6 Text Box

Custom text can be entered directly on the one-line diagram by using the Text Box feature. The text box
eliminates the need to use OLE Objects when you add notes to the one-line diagram. Many device
properties can also be displayed directly in the text box and are dynamically linked to the device property
in the database.
Text boxes can be added to the following ETAP Views:

One-Line View (OLV)
Underground Raceway View
Star View
To drop a text box on one of the views, select the text

box from the Project toolbar as shown.
Double-click on the text box to access the Text Box

Editor.
The text box includes two pages of properties:

Text Page
Format Page
9.6.1 Text Page

Using the text box you can define custom text as well as properties to be displayed from the ETAP
database for any element on the single line.

Selection
This section is used to select the element and its properties to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Device Type
Select the device type or element type from the drop-down list. Note that this list will only display those
types of devices that exist on the one-line diagram. Elements in the Dumpster will not be displayed in this
list.
Device ID
Based on the Device Type selected, ETAP will list all available device IDs that exist on the one-line
diagram.
Properties
The properties in this list are displayed based on the Device Type and Device ID selected in the Text Box
Editor. Using these properties it is possible to display engineering data stored inside the device editor.
ETAP ensures that once the property is selected in the text box, it will always be dynamically linked with
the text box. The illustration below shows selection of some of the properties for a 2-Winding
Transformer.

Click OK to close the text box and save changes, or Apply to save changes but keep the editor open. The
following text will be displayed in the text box.
If changes are made to the transformer properties selected, the text box will be dynamically updated as
shown below.

Note that for checkboxes or radio buttons the database returns either a value of 1 or 0. A value of 1
indicates yes or available, while a value of 0 indicates no or not available.
Multiplier
When a property is selected from the database to be displayed in the text box, the multiplier field can be
used to manipulate the data being retrieved from that property. For example, for the MW property, if the
data stored in the database is in MW units then you can use a multiplier of 1000 to display the same data
in kW units.
Precision
Move up or down to either increase or decrease the precision of the data being retrieved from the
database.
Insert
Click to display the selected property inside the text box. The property will be inserted at the location of
the cursor within the preview text region.
Text
Custom text or data from database property can be entered or setup in this section.
Editing Tools
Basic editing tools are available for the text region in this editor. They include Font, Cut, Copy, and Paste.

9.6.2 Format Page

This page may be used to control the display format for the text box. Text box border, shape, margins,
and colors can be controlled from this page.
Fill
Color
A color palette is available in the drop-down list to select a fill color for the text box.
Transparent
Select to apply transparency to the text box fill color.
Transparency Level
Select to adjust the amount of transparency for the fill color.

Border
Select this to change the border style including color, line style, line thickness, and line shape.

Internal Margin
This is the padding or spacing the text box will have when text is added to it.

Chapter 10
Menu Bars
ETAP menu bars provide a list of menu options that may include drop-down lists of commands when
they are selected. Menu commands with an arrow icon pointing to the right denote the existence of a
drop-down menu that offers access to additional commands. For example, select the Project menu option
and then select Settings to view more menu options, as in the example below.
The contents of the menu bars will vary depending on the type of window or view that is active. Five
different types of menu bars exist in ETAP, as listed below:
Start-Up Menu Bar

One-Line Diagram Menu Bar
Project View Menu Bar
U/G Raceway System Menu Bar
Dumpster Menu Bar

Menu Bars Start-Up
10.1 Start-Up Menu Bar
The Start-Up menu bar is displayed when you start ETAP and have not yet opened a project file. This
menu bar contains a limited number of menu options.
The Start-Up menu bar offers the following menu options:
File Open a new or existing project file

View Show or hide Help Line
Help ETAP Help
10.1.1 File Menu
Select the File menu option from the Start-Up menu bar to create new project files, open existing project
files, or to exit ETAP.
The File menu offers the following commands:
New Project Creates a new project file

Open Project Opens an existing project file
Exit Exits ETAP
10.1.2 View Menu
Select the View menu option from the Start-Up menu bar to show or hide the Help Line at the bottom of
your screen where the help message, error message, and revision data are displayed.

Menu Bars One-Line Diagram
10.2 One-Line Diagram Menu Bar

The One-Line Diagram menu bar is displayed when a One-Line Diagram presentation is active. The One-
Line Diagram menu bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options.
The One-Line Diagram menu bar offers the following menu options:
Menu Description
File File management and conversions
Edit Cut, copy, and paste
View Display different toolbars
Project Project standards and settings
Library Library access and management
Defaults Fonts and default settings of elements
Tools Global sizing/symbols and element grouping
Rev Control Base and revision data control
Real Time EMS, ILS, Tag File, and Active X operations
Window Window Management
Help Help access
10.2.1 File Menu

The File menu option on the One-Line Diagram menu bar provides commands to open/close project files,
log off/on users, save/copy project files, print/print preview one-line diagrams, convert one-line diagrams
to WMF/EMF files, convert ETAP DOS or CSV files to ETAP files, and export to and import from the
clipboard. The File menu for One-Line Diagram offers the following commands:
New Project Create a new project file

Open Project Open an existing project file
Close Project Close an opened project
Log Off Log off or onto an open project as a different user
or change access levels
Save Project Save the project file
Copy Project Save an open project to a specified file name and
To continue to function within the original project
Save Library Save Library file
Print Setup Select a page layout as well as a printer and printer
connection
Print Preview Display the one-line diagram on-screen as it will
appear when printed
Print Print the one-line diagram
Batch Print Print all or any number of views that belong to a
presentation at once. Views consist of the main
one-line diagram and nested composite networks
and composite motors

Data Exchange
Export DXF Export your one line diagram directly to AutoCAD Format
Export Metafile Convert the one-line diagram into a WMF or EMF file
Export Protective Device Export protective device library information from the project to excel
Import Object (OLE) Insert an OLE object onto the one line diagram
Import ETAP DOS Convert an ETAP DOS file into a ETAP project file
Import CSV File Convert a comma separated file into a ETAP project file
Import IEEE Format File Import a file to ETAP in IEEE format
Import Raw Data File Import a raw data file to ETAP
Import PowerPlot Project Import PowerPlot project to convert the project to star
Clipboard Import or Export selected One-line diagram elements
XML File Import or Export project database via XML format
Status Configuration Import or Export the project configuration to a new project
Access Database Import from a MS Access database
Excel Fixed Format Import from a MS Excel file
Excel Open Format Import generic Microsoft Excel files with data arranged in columns for
different elements
e-DPP Import from an e-DPP exported MS Access database
SmartPlant Electrical Import or Export project data or cable data between ETAP and SPEL
E-Mail Project Files Zip and E-mail, FTP, or store your project files to a remote location
Convert old OC Relay Migrate old overcurrent relays to new format
Exit Exit ETAP
New Project
To start a new project, click on File and select New Project. This opens the Create New Project File
dialog box, as shown below.

Create New Project File Dialog Box
From the dialog box, enter a Project File Name with a maximum of 30 characters that is suitable for your
project. For more information about this dialog box, see Create a New Project File.
User Information Dialog Box
For the purpose of this manual, name the new project Test and click on OK. This will open the User
Information dialog box. For more details on User Information, see User Access Manager.
When you create a new project, ETAP automatically gives you all access level privileges. Project Editor
provides you with full access to all editors including Base Data, Revision Data, and Libraries.

Administrative functions such as adding and deleting users to the project are not available to a Project
Editor. To access these functions, you must log on as Administrator.
We recommend that you do not require a password for projects if you are a single user of ETAP or
security is not an issue. You can change the password requirement at any time.
If you forget your user name or your password, log on as Admin and type password as the password. We
recommend that you do not change the password for Admin unless you record it for later use. Do not
forget your User Name or password, as this may be the only way you can access this project.
Enter your user name (maximum 20 characters) in the User Name field. User Name is a mandatory field.
For the purpose of this manual, enter OTI, and then click on OK. ETAP will create a one-line diagram
presentation named OLV1. You can start adding elements and editing the one-line diagram. Each time a
new project is created, the presentation displayed in the window will be named OLV1. You can change
the name of the one-line diagram presentation at any time.
Project View and One-Line Diagram Presentation OLV1

Open Project
You can open an existing project file by clicking on Open Project in the File menu. You can also select
Open Projects from the menu by right-clicking on the project name in the Project View.
If you are editing a project and you wish to open an existing project, you will be prompted to save the
current project.
In order to open an existing project while you are editing a project, the currently opened project must be
in Edit or Study mode. You CANNOT save or close a project when you are in Revision Data. You must
first change to Base Data.
An example project file is included in the ETAP installation program named Example.OTI. To open this
file, click on Open Project from the File menu. This will open the Open Project File dialog box. Locate
the folder in the ETAPS directory called Example. The file Example.OTI is located in this folder. Select
the file and click on Open.
The example project file contains a sample project complete with a one-line diagram and sample values
entered into the component editors. Performing the actions described in the remainder of the manual will
help you to become familiar with ETAP.
Open Project File Dialog Box

The following options allow you to specify which file to open:
Look in
Select a network, drive, and directory, where the ETAP project file that you want to open is located.
File Name
Type or select the file name you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you select in the List
Files of Type box.
Files of Type
ETAP project files have an .OTI extension.
Close Project
A project can be closed when you are in Edit or Study mode. However, you CANNOT close a project file
when you are in Revision Data. A project must be in Base Data. It is recommended that you save the
project prior to closing it. Closing a project can be done by clicking on Close Project in the File menu or
on Close in the pop-up menu by right-clicking on the project name in the Project View.
Before a project file is closed, you are promoted to save the project file.

If you click on Yes, all data is saved when the project is closed.
Save Project
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or Study mode. If you have logged on as a Project
Editor or Base Editor, you CANNOT save a project while the project is in a revision level of data. Saving
a project can be done by clicking on Save Project in the File menu or on Save in the menu by right-
clicking on the project name in the Project View.
You can schedule a project to save for any pre-defined time interval. This may be done from the Project
Options dialog box, as shown below. To open the Project Options dialog box, click on Project in the
menu bar and click on Options or click on Options from the menu by right-clicking on the project name
in the Project View.
Click on AutoSave and enter a time interval (maximum 999 minutes). The number 30 has been entered
here as an example. Your current project will be saved automatically every 30 minutes from this point on.
If you have selected Prompt before saving project in this dialog box, ETAP will request your
confirmation before saving the project. This is required if you want to save the connections between
elements in your database.
When AutoSave is active, the following dialog box appears:

The AutoSave Project dialog box allows you to:
Change the scheduled autosave time period

Disable autosave
Save element connections in the project database
Note: Every time the program autosaves your project, it will backup to your projectname~~ file.
Copy Project To
This command makes a copy of the project file but does not open that copy. The copied file does not
contain the passwords and user information of the original project file. A copy of the project file can be
made only when you are in Edit mode or Study mode. You CANNOT make a copy of your project if you
are not in Base Data. You may copy a project file to a new project file name or to a previously saved
project file name. In order to copy the project file to a new one, click on Copy Project To from the File
menu, as shown below:

From this dialog box, select a directory for the new file name. Enter the new name Example-1 or a
previously saved project file name for the new File Name, and click on Save. A message will confirm
that the copy has been successfully saved. The new project file name will be saved as Example-1.oti.
Note: ETAP uses file transitioning for saving project files. When you copy projects, ETAP prompts you
with the following dialog box confirming your request to save the project file before copying.
Select Yes to save the project file and then copy it to a new name. Select No to copy the project file
without saving.
Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, and Batch Print

ETAP allows you to preview and print/plot one-line diagrams, underground raceway systems, text output
reports, motor starting plots, transient stability plots, and cable temperature plots. For more details on
Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, Batch Print, and Plot capabilities, see the Printing and Plotting chapter.

Print Setup
Every one-line diagram view, including composite networks and composite motors, has their own
individual print setup and print options. This menu bar item opens the Print Setup dialog box for the
active view.
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog box allows you to change the printer setup, options, print size (zooming), and
print adjustment (moving the OLV graphic up, down, left, and right). All settings are only associated with
the displayed view and are saved for that view.

Print
This item will display the Print dialog box for the active view. You can change the Setup and Options
from this dialog box.
Batch Print
Batch printing allows you to print all views associated with one presentation. Each one-line diagram
(including composite networks and motors) will be printed based on the last saved print setup, options,
and zooming. You can globally select or deselect all composite networks, composite AC motors, and
composite DC motors.

Export DXF File

The Export DXF File command can be invoked by going to the File \ Data Exchange\ Export DXF.
When this function is invoked, ETAP will create a one-line diagram file in AutoCAD (Release 2000)
DXF format. The DXF file is compatible with AutoCAD or any other software supporting DXF format
file.
ETAP View
AutoCAD View
The Export DXF File command exports all ETAP elements including their annotations as displayed
on the one-line diagram. The DXF file when opened in AutoCAD represents an exact replica of the one-
line diagram as seen in ETAP.
Note: When opening the exported DXF file in AutoCAD, it is necessary to Zoom Extents to view the
schematic.

The location and name of the DXF file is specified in the Save As dialog box as shown below:
Composite Networks and Composite Motors

Separate DXF files are created for each composite motor and composite network in the one-line diagram
along with a DXF file for the main one-line diagram (henceforth referred as the Main DXF file).
Therefore, a set of DXF files may be created for an ETAP project. The name of the DXF files
representing composite networks and composite motors in a one-line diagram depends on the name used
to save the Main DXF file. The location of the DXF files representing composite networks and composite
motors in a one-line diagram is the same as the location of the Main DXF file.
For example, consider the case when an ETAP one-line diagram has a composite network Net1 and a
composite motor CM1, which in turn have a composite network Net2 and composite motor CM2. If the
Main DXF file is saved as C:\Example\Main.DXF, the name and location of the DXF files representing
composite networks and composite motors will be:
C:\Example\Main_Net1.DXF
C:\Example\Main_CM1.DXF
C:\Example\Main_Net1_Net2.DXF
C:\Example\Main_CM1_CM2.DXF

It may not be necessary to know the location of all the DXF files created for an ETAP project as the
composite motors and composite networks in the DXF files contain hyperlinks. The composite motor and
composite network hyperlinks point to the DXF files representing the one-line diagram within them. Use
the following steps for opening composite motor / composite network DXF files from another DXF file:
Select the composite motor / composite network

Right-click on the selected composite motor /
composite network
Click on the Open command in the Hyperlink
menu
The ETAP DXF Converter gives you an option to

create DXF files for one or more composite networks
and/or motors in addition to the main one-line
diagram.
Presentation, Configuration
The DXF file created by the Export DXF File command in ETAP represents the active Presentation
and Configuration. For example if a relay is hidden in the active presentation it is not displayed in the
DXF file. If the status of a breaker is open in the active configuration, it is shown as open in the exported
DXF file.

Note: For small size projects, dashed and dotted lines in the ETAP presentation set from the theme editor
will remain as dashed and dotted lines in the exported .DXF files; however, for larger ETAP projects,
they will appear as solid lines in the exported .DXF files.
Analysis Results
The results of an analysis performed in ETAP may be exported to the DXF File. To export the results,
perform the analysis and display the results on the one-line diagram as required, use the Export DXF
File command while the results are displayed on the one line diagram. The DXF file(s) created will
include the results as displayed on the ETAP one-line diagram.
For example in order to export power flows and the voltage profile perform the load flow analysis before
using the Export DXF File command. Note: you may use the Display Options editor to select the
information displayed on the ETAP one-line diagram and hence the exported DXF files.
Conversion Progress
The time taken to export an ETAP one-line diagram to a DXF file is proportional to the number of
elements in the one-line diagram, especially on the number of composite networks and composite motors.
During the process of conversion, an icon is displayed in the System Tray.

Grounding Grids
When you convert an ETAP file into a DXF file, the buses are hidden behind the ground grids. The figure
below shows the DXF file with the buses hidden behind the ground grids.
The buses can be made visible by performing the following steps in AutoCAD. Select the Ground Grid.
Click on the Tools menu, select Display Order, and then select Send to Back.
Export Metafile
ETAP can convert the contents of one-line diagrams into disk-based Enhanced Metafiles (EMF format) or
16-bit Windows Metafiles (WMF format). To convert a one-line diagram into a metafile, select the
Export Metafile option.

The Enhanced Metafile format (EMF) improves the drawing scalability and accuracy by adding more
extensive information into the metafile header along with new drawing instructions. EMF files can be
used for programs such as Microsoft Word. The Windows Metafile (WMF) consists of device-
independent drawing instructions that help Windows to recreate the drawing element and display it on
any display device such as AutoCAD.
Metafile Type
Select the metafile format (EMF, WMF, or both). You must specify at least one format for the conversion
to work. The default setting is Enhanced Metafile format only.
Instruction Set
Select between GDI (Graphic Device Interface) and GDI+. The GDI is responsible of displaying the
graphics in screen and printer. Windows XP and Windows 2003 use GDI+ (successor of GDI). If the
graphics should be displayed in operating systems other that the ones mentioned above, GDI should be
used, otherwise GDI+ should be used.
Element Range
You can convert all elements in the one-line diagram (including OLE objects) or only elements that you
have selected. The default setting is All Elements.
Convert Viewable Area Only

Convert only the area of the one-line diagram that can be seen in the one-line view.
Draw Background
This option allows you to select to include the background of the presentation to the metafile.
ETAP will ask you to specify the path location where the metafile is on your system.

Import WMF Files into AutoCAD

AutoCAD can only support the Windows Metafiles format. To create an AutoCAD drawing from a WMF
file exported from ETAP, make sure that both options Wire Frame and Wide Line in the AutoCAD menu
File/Options/WMF Options are unchecked. To import the metafile into AutoCAD, select the File/Import
menu item and browse or type the name of the WMF metafile complete with path location. Note: the
resolution of the WMF files gets better as you zoom in the one-line diagram.
Export Protective Device

Extract and get a listing of all protective devices in your ETAP project. The extracted information
includes Device ID, Type, Manufacturer, Model, and other information pertaining to the protective device
type. The extracted information is exported to a Microsoft Excel file which is placed in the ETAP project
directory.
Import Object (OLE)

This command inserts an OLE object onto the one-line diagram. This command runs the OLE Insert
Object dialog box.

The OLE Insert Object dialog box displays a list of all the OLE objects registered on your computer. You
may select any object from the list and specify whether to create a new object or use an object that resides
in a file (i.e., a Microsoft Word document). Additionally, you may specify whether to have the object
display an icon for itself in place of its normal visual appearance. The following one-line diagram
includes these OLE objects: a Microsoft Excel chart, Microsoft Word document (legend), and a WordPad
text.
After you have selected the OLE object you wish to insert, ETAP checks the registry to determine if the
selected object is a programmable object. If it is, ETAP will automatically recommend that you NOT
insert a programmable object into ETAP.
Note: inserting a programmable OLE object into ETAP may lead to unpredictable results.

Import ETAP DOS

ETAP provides a tool to convert and insert ETAP DOS files or comma-separated files (CSV) into the
ETAP project that is currently open. The conversion can be initiated from the File Menu or from the
Project View by right-clicking on the project name. When you choose to convert ETAP DOS files, the
Select ETAP DOS Project File to Convert dialog box will be displayed, which lists all the ETAP DOS
project files with a .gen extension, as shown below. You can type a file name in the File Name field and
then click on the Open button or double-click on a file name in the list to start the conversion.

Ensure that the DOS files are located in a path with folder names of 8 characters or less. Also, the path
should not include any illegal characters such as a space, a dash, or a period. After selecting the DOS file
for conversion, a dialog box such as the one shown below will be displayed, allowing you to specify
options for bus coordinates and motor models.
Bus Coordinates
There are two options: using the existing X and Y coordinates assigned in ETAP DOS files or letting
ETAP automatically assign new X and Y coordinates. In the current version of ETAP, only the first
option is available.
Note: If you have never produced a one-line diagram from the DOS version of ETAP, the X and Y
coordinates for buses and branches are set equal to one (1). In order for the ETAP DOS program to assign
the coordinates for all the buses, you need to open the file from ETAP DOS, access the Overall One-Line
module from the Analysis menu, press F3 to enter the Graphical Bus Editor, and then press F9 to save the
X and Y coordinates assigned by the ETAP DOS program.
Design Class for Motor Models

Enter a Design Class from one of the existing Design Classes for motor models. You can select from:
HV-HS-HT
HV-HS-LT
HV-LS-HT
HV-LS-LT
LV-HS-HT
LV-HS-LT
LV-LS-HT
LV-LS-LT

Note: the existing Motor Model Library of ETAP includes Low Voltage, High Voltage, Low Speed, High
Speed, Low Torque, and High Torque models.
The conversion from ETAP DOS files to an ETAP project is implemented in two steps:
Conversion from ETAP DOS files to comma separated files

Conversion from the comma separated files to ETAP project files
In the first step of conversion, the program checks for errors in the ETAP DOS files that may obstruct the
second step of conversion. If any errors are detected, they are printed in a file named ETAP2CSV.ERR,
which is located in the directory where the ETAP DOS files are placed. A message box will be posted to
review the error file first, as shown below. If you click on the Yes button, the error file will automatically
be opened for you to view. If you click on the No button, the conversion process will proceed with the
second step, but there may be errors that will halt the conversion or cause invalid results. It is strongly
suggested that you review the error message file first.
If no error is detected in the first step, the conversion from comma-separated files to ETAP continues,
creating elements and converting engineering properties in the process. If the ETAP DOS file contains
both Bus Editor data and Load Schedule data, there are two sources for motor and static load data and
they may not be in agreement with each other. In this case, the conversion program will open a dialog box
allowing you to specify the source for motor and static load data, as shown below.
The default option is to convert load data from the Load Schedule, because it contains more detailed data.
If you select this option, each motor and static load will be converted to ETAP. If there is only one motor
or a static load connected to a bus, a load will be created and connected to the bus. Otherwise, a
composite motor will be created and all the loads will be contained in the composite motor.
When the Load Schedule option is selected, although motors and static loads in the Bus editor may be in
conflict with the Load Schedule data, they are disregarded. Note: a motor in the Bus editor, in most cases
an equivalent motor for a group of motors in the Load Schedule, and the dynamic model and load model
entered in the Machine editor may not be valid for any of the motors in the group. This model information
is not converted. If motors in the Load Schedule do not have dynamic motors and load models, you will

need to enter the dynamic motor and load model information for each motor. Dynamic models are
required for dynamic motor acceleration studies.
If the second option is selected, a motor will be created for each motor in the Bus editor, the typical
nameplate data will be used, and the dynamic motor and load models (specified from the Machine editor)
will be converted. The percent loading of each motor will be set to match the total bus motor load
according to its rating. If the bus motor loading is nonzero, but there is no machine number for motors
connected to this bus, a motor will be created in ETAP using typical data to match the bus motor loading.
If there is a static load in the ETAP DOS Bus editor, a static load will also be created to match the bus
static load.
Import CSV File

CSV project files are comma-separated files. Contact OTI to provide you with the complete format of the
CSV file. Once you choose to convert CSV files, the Select CSG Files to Convert dialog box will be
displayed which lists all the files with a .csg extension, as shown below. You can type a file name in the
File Name field and then click on the Open button, or double-click on a file name in the list to start the
conversion.

Import IEEE Format

You can import IEEE formatted files into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and
then select Import IEEE Format File. Type in the name of the file you wish converted. Refer to Chapter
40 under section Import IEEE Format for detailed information.
Import RAW Format

You can import raw data files into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and then
select Import Raw Format. Select the raw data file that you wish to convert. Note that the Raw data
conversion is applicable for Version 29 and Version 30 Raw data files. For converting a version other
than these contact Operation Technology, Inc. Refer to Chapter 40 under section Import RAW Format for
detailed information.
Import PowerPlot
You can import the TCCs in an existing PowerPlot project to the ETAP project. From the ETAP File
menu, point to Data Exchange, and then select Import PowerPlot Project.
If a library file has not been associated with the ETAP project prior to using the Import PowerPlot Project
command, ETAP will ask you to select a library file, when the PowerPlot TCCs are imported into an
ETAP project that was associated with user modified ETAP 4.x or lower version library.
Note: the Import PowerPlot Project utility requires an ETAP 5.x library file containing information
related to time current characteristics of protective devices. Lower versions of ETAP library files do not
have this information.

Once a library file is specified, the following editor is displayed.
Select PowerPlot Project

Select the PowerPlot project file, which has the TCCs to be imported into the ETAP project. PowerPlot
project files have the extension .PLT.
Select Location of Project Reports

Select the location of PowerPlot project reports. PowerPlot project reports are CSV files and may be
imported in PowerPlot by selecting the Project Report command from the Tools menu. PowerPlot project
reports are required for importing PowerPlot TCCs into ETAP.

STAR TCC Labels - Label ID

Select this option to show only the ID of different devices on the TCCs in ETAP STAR.
STAR TCC Labels - Label ID + Setting

Select this option to show the ID as well as settings of different devices on the TCCs in ETAP STAR.
System Frequency
Select the system frequency used in the ETAP project. This is used to convert seconds to cycles for time
delays.
Fuse Short-Circuit Ratings Update using ETAP 5.x values

This option is applicable when PowerPlot TCCs are imported into an existing ETAP project. Selecting
this option will overwrite the existing Fuse Short-Circuit ratings with values from ETAP 5.x library. This
will be applied for all fuses in the ETAP project with ID same as that in PowerPlot project.
Fuse Short-Circuit Ratings Keep existing values

this option will preserve the existing Fuse Short-Circuit ratings in ETAP project.
CT Ratios Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot

this option will update the CT ratios of CTs connected to relays with the CT ratio specified on the relay /
motor relay editor in PowerPlot. Note that the motor relay editor does not specify the CT secondary
rating; hence this value is not updated.
CT Ratios Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio

this option will preserve the existing CT ratios in the ETAP project.
Importing Time
The time for importing the TCCs in PowerPlot project into an ETAP project depends on the number of
TCCs and the number of devices in the PowerPlot project. It may range from a minute for small projects
to 25 minutes for large PowerPlot projects with 150 or more TCCs.

Motor / Cable / Transformers

If motors, cables, and transformers with IDs the same as in PowerPlot project exist in an ETAP project,
data in ETAP project for these devices will not be updated from PowerPlot project, since PowerPlot does
not have detailed information.
Clipboard
This option allows the exporting and importing of a selected one-line diagram to and from the clipboard
as a method of merging files. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and then select
Clipboard.
Export to Clipboard
You can export an entire one-line diagram, or a portion of it, to the clipboard as a method to temporarily
save it so that it can be merged into other project files or the same project file.
ETAP only exports the active status and revision data (engineering properties). Before you select the
elements from the one-line diagram, choose the configuration status and revision data that you wish to
have associated with the exported one-line diagram, highlight all of the elements you wish to export to the
clipboard, and then click on Export to Clipboard selection in the File Menus Data Exchange pull down
menu.
The elements exported into the clipboard include elements inside of composite networks and composite
motors, as well as their properties and status.
Import from Clipboard

Importing from the clipboard is another method used to merge ETAP project files. Before you can import
from the clipboard, the export action into the clipboard procedure must have completed. To import the
content of the clipboard, open the ETAP project file you wish to have the exported elements imported
into, and then click on the Import from clipboard. The imported elements include elements inside of
composite networks and composite motors.

The imported elements can now be utilized just like any other elements. ETAP checks for the uniqueness
of elements ID. If an element with the same ID exists, the ID of the importing element will be appended
with -1 or other integers to make it unique.
Merging ETAP Projects

Individual project files within ETAP can be merged together. The process involves the following steps:
1) Open the ETAP project file.

2) Export (temporarily save) the project file or a portion thereof to the clipboard.
3) Close the first project file and open the next project file.
4) Import (merge) the temporarily saved project file into the second project file.
XML File
This option allows the exporting and importing of project database files via XML format. In order to
perform the transfer of files in this format, it is necessary to have a PDE activation code. Please contact
OTI to obtain further information concerning this process.
Status Configuration
This option allows the user to export or import a portion of the project configuration to a new project. The
user may also export or import the complete project configuration. From the ETAP File menu, point to
Data Exchange and then select Status Configuration.
Access Database
You can import data from a MS Access database into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data
Exchange and then select Access Database. Refer to Chapter 43 DataX MS Access for more detailed
information regarding importing data from a Microsoft Access database.

Excel Fixed Format

You can import data from a MS Excel file into ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange
and then select Excel Fixed Format. Refer to Chapter 43 DataX Excel Fixed Format for more
detailed information regarding importing data from a fixed format excel sheet.
Excel Open Format

Import generic Microsoft Excel files with data arranged in columns for synchronous motors, induction
motors, lumped loads, static loads two-winding transformers, cables and buses. Refer to Chapter 43
DataX Excel Open Format for more detailed information regarding importing data from a Open format
excel sheet.
e-DPP
You can import data from an e-DPP exported MS Access database into ETAP. From the ETAP File
menu, point to Data Exchange and then select e-DPP. Refer to Chapter 43 DataX e-DPP for more
detailed information.
SmartPlant Electrical
You can import SPEL project data as an XMF file into ETAP or export ETAP project data for use in
SPEL. From the ETAP File menu, point to Data Exchange and then select SmartPlant Electrical. Refer to
Chapter 43 DataX SmartPlant Electrical for more detailed information regarding transferring project
data between ETAP and SPEL.
E-Mail Project Files

This ETAP function collects licensing, project, and computer information when invoked. It collects the
information into a zip file and offers you options to send the collected data to a remote destination via
e-mail or FTP. Alternatively, you may save the collected information to a disk file.
When this function is invoked, ETAP creates a zip file containing by default the following files (if
present):
*.oti - Operation Technology, Inc. interface file

*.mdb - Project database
*.ldb - Database
*.pso - OLE objects container file (only if you have OLE elements in the project)
*.cpx - Cable pulling project file (only when cable pulling presentation has been created)
*.grd - Ground grid design project file (only when Ground Grid Presentation has been created)
**.lib - Connected project library
Where * = your project name and ** can be any name given to the connected library.
In addition, ETAP also includes a *.oli file. This file includes licensing and computer information. This
file also includes all contents of ETAPS initialization file (etaps.ini) and is intended to help OTI provide
better user support and trouble shooting, as well as data collecting and reporting.
This file will be created in your Project directory and also included in the zip file. For security purposes,
the project .oli OLI file is encrypted.

ETAP provides options that allow the user to exclude the library file and/or output reports to minimize the
size of the generated zipped file. See Send Project Files Dialog for more details.
Send ETAP Project Files Dialog Box

The Send ETAP Project Files dialog box is invoked by selecting File/Data Exchange/Email Project Files.
Options
Select one of the three available options:
Send by E-mail
Select this option if you want to send this project via email.
ETAP will create the zip file containing the project files opens
your default e-mail program, create a new e-mail, and attach the
zip file to it.
Send by FTP
Select this option if you want to upload this project to an FTP
Site. If this option is selected, the Send Project Files by FTP
Dialog is invoked.
Save on Hard Disk

If this option is selected, ETAP will create a zip file of the project files, and then it will prompt you to
Save As:

Save In Select the location in your hard drive or network drive where you wish to save
the Zip file.
File Name Enter a name for the Zip File.
Save as Type Displays Zip Files by default. You can save it as a generic file by selecting all
files, but when you want to open or unzip the file, you will need to add the
extension ZIP to the created file.
Once you have selected a location and named the file, click on the OK button.
Include
Libraries
Check this option to include the project library file into the Zip file. The project library file does not have
to be in the project directory to include it in the zip file.
All Files
Check this option to include all files saved under the same project directory as the ETAP project. This
will allow you to include reports and reference information saved under the same project directory. Sub-
directories will not be included in the zip file.
Zip File Password
Enter Password
Enter a password if you want to add password protection to the zip file, otherwise leave blank.
Confirm Password
After you have entered your password, this field will become editable so you can confirm your password.
Send ETAP Project Files by FTP

This dialog box lets you connect to a FTP site and upload the project zip file.

FTP Site
Address
Enter the FTP Site address. The FTP address should be in FTP URL format such as
FTP://www.etap.com:80 or in IP address format such as 128.121.97.137.
User ID
Enter your FTP User ID. If the User ID is not entered, an anonymous FTP connection would be
established if the FTP site allows for this connection.
Password
If you entered a User ID, then enter your password to the FTP site here. Otherwise leave this field blank.
Connect
Click on this button after entering the FTP address, User ID, and Password. If the connection is
successful, you will see the FTP site directory tree in the dialog box center space.
Zip File
This box displays the location of the project zip file that is being uploaded.
Send
Click on this button to start the uploading of the projects zip file.
Convert Old OC Relay

You can convert relay elements created in earlier versions of ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, point to
Convert old OC Relay. This is a special conversion tool provided to move the "old" overcurrent relays
created in ETAP version 3.0.2 and earlier to the new relay format for relay elements.

Note: if you are importing a PowerPlot project you must first convert the old relay elements to the new
relay format in ETAP prior to converting the PowerPlot project.
Exit
Using this command will save and close your ETAP project file and close the ETAP program.
10.2.2 Edit Menu
The Edit menu on the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar offers the following commands:
Undo Moving or hiding an element and moving, adding, or deleting a

connection is undone.
Redo Redo a task that was undone through Undo
Cut Dumpster Deletes selected element(s) from the one-line diagram and moves it to
the Dumpster
Copy Dumpster Copies selected element(s) from the one-line diagram to the
Dumpster

Paste Dumpster Pastes selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram
Move From Dumpster Moves selected cell from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram
DeSelect All Deselects all elements in the one-line diagram
Cut OLE Deletes selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram to the
clipboard
Copy OLE Copies selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram to the
clipboard
Clear OLE Deletes selected OLE object(s) from the one-line diagram
Paste OLE Pastes object(s) from the clipboard into the one-line diagram
Paste Special OLE Moves selected cell from the Dumpster into the OLV
Insert New Object OLE Inserts new OLE object(s) in the one-line diagram
Links OLE Edit any linked OLE objects on the one-line diagram
Object OLE Placeholder for OLE object verbs
Undo
Undo hiding an element or undo the movement of an element. Also undo moving, adding or deleting a
connection. You may not use undo to remove an element. There are two methods to Undo:
Click on Edit in the menu bar and select Undo

Select Undo from the ETAP main tool bar
Here is an example of moving a transformer back to its original place:
Redo
When undo is used, graphical Redo allows user to redo undone tasks. There are two methods to redo:
Click on Edit in the menu bar and select Redo

Select Redo from the ETAP main tool bar.
Cut
The Cut command on the Edit menu will delete selected elements from the one-line diagram and place
them in the Dumpster. You can cut elements in Edit Mode only. You can also cut selected elements by
right-clicking and selecting the Cut command from the pop-up menu. Another way to cut an element or a
group of elements is to select the elements and click on the Cut button from the toolbar or press the Delete
key. To select a group of elements, click and hold the left mouse button down while dragging the pointer

across the elements you want to select. When you cut an element or a group of elements, they are deleted
from the one-line diagram and placed into the Dumpster.
Copy
The Copy command from the Edit Menu will copy selected elements from the one-line diagram and place
them in a Dumpster cell. You can also copy an element or a group of selected elements by right-clicking
and selecting the Copy command from the pop-up menu. Another way to copy an element, or a group of
elements, is to select the elements and click the Copy button on the toolbar. To select elements, press and
hold the left mouse button down while dragging the pointer across the elements you want to select.
You can copy elements in Edit Mode only. When you copy an element or a group of elements, they are
copied into the Dumpster with new ID Names while all other data and properties are preserved.
Paste
To paste an element or a group of elements from a Dumpster Cell, select a cell from the Dumpster and
activate the view (one-line diagram or U/G raceway) where you wish the element to be pasted. Then
select the Paste command from the Edit menu or click on the Paste button on the toolbar. You can also
right-click and select the Paste command from the pop-up menu.
If more than one element is to be pasted, the pasted one-line diagram will be grouped to facilitate
dragging the one-line diagram to the desired location. To ungroup the one line diagram, right-click on the
pasted elements and select ungroup from the menu.
You can paste elements in Edit Mode only. When an element is pasted from the Dumpster, ETAP assigns
a new ID to it while all other data and properties are preserved.
Move From
This command will move the contents of a Dumpster cell and place them in the one-line diagram. Note:
when you move elements from the Dumpster into the one-line diagram, the element IDs are not changed
as the elements are extracted from the Dumpster.
You can move elements in Edit Mode only. The Move From command is available from the Edit Menu
and also from the pop-up menu generated when you right-click on the one-line diagram or U/G raceway
system. The Move From Dumpster command moves the active Dumpster cell.

DeSelect All
This command deselects all elements in the one-line diagram. Use this feature before you print a one-line
diagram to ensure that the print file will include the entire one-line diagram. If you have selected
elements, only those selected elements will be displayed in the print preview and print.
Cut (OLE)
This command removes the selected OLE object from your one-line diagram and places it on the
clipboard. This command is available only in Edit mode and only if you have selected an OLE object.
Copy (OLE)
This command copies the selected OLE object onto your one-line diagram and to the clipboard. This
command is available if you have selected an OLE object on your one-line diagram.
Clear (OLE)
This command deletes all selected OLE objects onto your one-line diagram. None of the OLE objects are
placed on the clipboard. This command is available only in Edit mode and only when you have selected at
least one OLE object on your one-line diagram.
Paste (OLE)
This command pastes an OLE object from the clipboard onto your one-line diagram. The OLE object is
always pasted in its embedded form (the object is always embedded into ETAP). An embedded object is
always completely inserted into ETAP. The embedded object can be edited only from within ETAP and is
completely contained within ETAP. This command is available only in the Edit mode and only when
there is an OLE object on the clipboard.
Paste Special (OLE)

This command pastes an OLE object from the clipboard onto your one-line diagram. Unlike the Paste
command, you may select any specific format of the OLE object to paste on the one-line diagram. This
command runs the OLE Paste Special dialog box.
The OLE Paste Special dialog box lets you select the format (link, metafile, bitmap, object, or iconic) of
the OLE object to be pasted onto the one-line diagram. The selection is, of course, limited to the formats
supported by the OLE object on the clipboard. In the example shown above, the OLE object is a bitmap.

If a linked format is available, ETAP inserts a linked object onto the one-line diagram. In contrast to an
embedded object, a linked OLE object does not live within ETAP. ETAP contains only a reference to
the object. This allows the linked object to be automatically updated when the original object is changed.
If the object is an embedded object, editing the object from within ETAP is the only way to make a
change.
Some formats, such as metafile or bitmap, are static objects and may not be editable after they are inserted
into ETAP. This command is available only in Edit mode and only when there is an OLE object on the
clipboard.
Insert New Object (OLE)

This command inserts an OLE object onto the one-line diagram. This command runs the OLE Insert
Object dialog box.
The OLE Insert Object dialog box displays a list of all the OLE objects registered on your computer. You
may select any object from the list and specify whether to create a new object or use an object that resides
in a file (i.e., a Microsoft Word document). Additionally, you may specify whether to have the object
display an icon for itself in place of its normal visual appearance. The following one-line diagram
includes these OLE objects: a Microsoft Excel chart, Microsoft Word document (legend), and a WordPad
text.

After you have selected the OLE object you wish to insert, ETAP checks the registry to determine if the
selected object is a programmable object. If it is, ETAP will automatically recommend that you NOT
insert a programmable object into ETAP.
Note: inserting a programmable OLE object into ETAP may lead to unpredictable results.
Worksheet Object (OLE)

This command is a placeholder for the selected OLE object in which the OLE object will place its OLE
verbs. An OLE object must be selected for this function before it becomes active. The specific contents of
this menu location will vary depending upon which verbs are supported by the selected OLE object.
Typically, OLE objects support such verbs as Open, Edit, Replace, etc. When you select one of these
verbs, ETAP will execute the verb for the selected OLE object. In the example shown above, an Excel
worksheet displays two verbs Edit and Open. This command is only available in Edit mode.
Edit OLE Object Document Properties

You can right-click on the OLE object and select Properties to change the OLE object to an icon or to
scale it.

10.2.3 View Menu
The View menu on the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar provides commands for zooming and displaying
toolbars, time-sliders, etc.

The following commands are available from the View menu:
Zoom In Show more detail in the one-line diagram

Zoom Out Show less detail in the one-line diagram
Zoom to Fit Re-size the one-line diagram to best fit the window
Zoom to New Window
Project Toolbar Show or hide the Project Toolbar
System Toolbar Show or hide the System Toolbar
Mode Toolbar Show or hide the Mode Toolbar
Configuration Toolbar Show or hide the Configuration Toolbar
Study Case Toolbar Show or hide the Study Case Toolbar
AC Edit Toolbar Show or hide the AC Edit Toolbar
DC Edit Toolbar Show or hide the DC Edit Toolbar
On-Line Toolbar Show or hide the On-Line Toolbar (ETAP Real-Time)
Supervisory Control Toolbar Show or hide the Supervisory Control Toolbar (ETAP Real-Time)
Online ILS Toolbar Show or Hide the ILS Toolbar
Load Flow Toolbar Show or hide the Load Flow Toolbar
Short Circuit Toolbar Show or hide the Short-Circuit Toolbar
Motor Starting Toolbar Show or hide the Motor Starting Toolbar
Harmonic Analysis Toolbar Show or hide the Harmonic Analysis Toolbar
Transient Stability Toolbar Show or hide the Transient Stability Toolbar
Optimal Power Flow Toolbar Show or hide the Optimal Power Flow Toolbar
Relay Coordination Toolbar Show or hide the Relay Coordination Toolbar
Reliability Analysis Toolbar Show or hide the Reliability Analysis Toolbar
Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar Show or hide the Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar
Capacitor Placement Toolbar Show or hide the Capacitor Placement Toolbar
Star (PD Coordination) Toolbar Show or hide the Star (PD Coordination) Toolbar
Star View (TCC) Toolbar Show or hide the Star View (TCC) Toolbar
Motor Starting Time-Slider Show or hide the Motor Starting Time-Slider
Transient Stability Time-Slider Show or hide the Transient Stability Time-Slider
Harmonic Order-Slider Show or hide the Harmonic Order-Slider
Harmonic Frequency-Slider Show or hide the Harmonic Frequency-Slider
Reliability Slider Show or hide the Reliability Slider
Battery Discharge Slider Show or hide the Battery Discharge Slider
Playback Status Function valid for ETAP Real-Time software only
DC Load Flow Toolbar Show or hide the DC Load Flow Toolbar
DC Short-Circuit Toolbar Show or hide the DC Short Circuit Toolbar
Battery Sizing Toolbar Show or hide the Battery Sizing Toolbar
Help Line Show or hide the Help Line
Grid Show or hide the grid lines in the one-line diagram
Continuity Check Activate or de-activate Continuity Check

Zoom In
Select the Zoom In command from the View menu or click on the Zoom In button to enlarge your one-
line diagram. A magnifying glass appears and can be placed directly over the element(s), which you
would like to enlarge. Clicking the left mouse button will activate the enlargement. All elements in the
window are enlarged and the screen is now centered on the location of the magnifying glass. The
magnifying glass will disappear. Double-clicking on the Zoom In button allows you to enlarge the project
many times. Pressing the escape key stops the Zoom In function and the magnifying glass disappears.
Zoom Out
Select the Zoom Out command from the View menu or click on the Zoom Out button to reduce the size of
the one-line diagram. All elements in the active window are automatically reduced by one magnification
level.
Zoom To Fit
Select the Zoom to Fit command from the View menu or click on the Zoom to Fit button to resize
selected elements of the one-line diagram to fit within the window; i.e., you can rubber-band an area of
the one-line diagram or select elements by holding down the Control key and clicking on the element(s),
then Zoom to Fit. If no element is selected, the entire one-line diagram will be resized, and all the
elements within the project will be shown in the window. The elements may be enlarged or reduced,
depending on the number of elements and their placement. If all the elements will not fit within the
window, the window will be set to maximum reduction with the view located to the windows upper left-
hand corner.

Zoom To New Window
Select this command to zoom in on the Time Current Characteristic (TCC) in a new zoom window. This
function is available for Star View. When this command is selected and you rubber-band a specific area
on the Star View, ETAP will open a new window and display the selected portion there. You can resize
the zoom area by re-sizing the block displayed on the TCC.
Toolbars
The Toolbar commands from the View menu allow you to choose which toolbars, time-sliders, or
frequency sliders are shown or hidden. If the toolbar is available AND it has a checkmark in front of it,
the toolbar is active and available to use. The toolbar will not be visible or available for use when the
checkmark is removed (by selecting the toolbar from the list). Toolbars that are shown as grayed out are
not available in the current mode of operation. For example, if you are in Online ILS mode, then the ILS
toolbar will be active and all other toolbars will be inactive. Toolbars that are active and available may be
moved from their attached location using the mouse. Select the toolbar by clicking and holding the left
mouse button down on an area of the toolbar that does not contain an icon. The toolbar may then be
dragged to a new location.
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the screen. The Help Line may be hidden from view if you
uncheck this option. The three parts of the Help Line are:
Help Message Displays a brief description regarding most functions and properties. Each time you
click on a button, select a function or edit a property, the Help Line displays a brief
description for it.
Error Message Displays the last active error message. ETAP includes a number of error-checking
modules. When you run studies, an output error report is generated if data
inconsistencies are found. From this report, if you double-click on an error message,
ETAP brings up the editor for the element, which generates the error and displays the
error message in the Help Line.
Revision Data The active Revision Data is displayed here for your reference.
Grid
Select the Grid command from the View menu or click on the Grid button to display grid lines on the
one-line diagram. The grid is zoom-dependent and will be enlarged or reduced proportionately with the
elements when they are enlarged or reduced. Use the Theme Manager to change the grid size.

Continuity Check
The Continuity Check can be activated or de-activated from the View menu or by clicking on the
Continuity Check button for individual presentations. If the Continuity Check is on, ETAP determines
which element in a presentation is energized. An energized element is an element, which is connected by
an uninterrupted path to a swing source (generator or utility). Elements, which are not energized, are
displayed in gray on your screen.
Out of Service elements are displayed in a light gray color (grayed out) if the Continuity Check is on,
otherwise only their annotations are displayed in gray. Motors and loads with Spare status are always
shown with gray annotations.
ETAP determines whether every branch in your system is energized or hot. An energized branch has an
uninterrupted path from an energized bus to another bus. A branch that is not connected to one energized
bus is considered de-energized. A branch is considered hot if it has one uninterrupted path to an
energized bus but its other terminal is not connected to another bus. When you run studies only energized
buses, branches, and loads are considered. De-energized elements, along with their connections, can be
printed in gray, black, or not printed at all. You can choose to print de-energized elements from Print
Options.

10.2.4 Project Menu
The options available in the Project menu are used to set parameters and options that affect your whole
project. This includes information such as system frequency, unit system, and names of loading
categories. It is highly recommended that you review and modify this information before you create your
one-line diagram. The Project menu for the one-line diagram and Project View menu bars offers the
following commands:
Information Enter general project information

Standards Select project standards
Settings List of project settings
Options Specify project options
ARTTS Path Specify the location of the ARTTS program
Mutual Coupling Group Add and specify lengths of transmission line coupling groups
Control Cable Schedule Specify control cable schedule settings

Project Information
With the exception of Comments, all project information is printed as part of the header for the output
reports. The Study Case ID and Remarks are obtained from the Study Case editor. An example of an
output report header is shown below.
Any information specified in these fields is for project identification only and is not crucial to performing
any type of analysis. The Remarks field is common to all studies and is printed on all output reports.

Standards
When you select Standards, the following dialog box opens:
Standard
Set the project standard as either ANSI or IEC. Setting the project standard will determine some of the
project defaults. Depending on whether you select ANSI or IEC Standard, ETAP uses different element
symbols by changing the Edit toolbar and sets the defaults for some properties and studies, such as the
short circuit method. Note: after you change the standard, the new standard is used as the default for any
new element that you add to the one-line diagram.
However, you can change the symbols of individual elements or groups of elements from ANSI to IEC or
from IEC to ANSI by right-clicking on the one-line diagram. You can also reset the short circuit study
method (ANSI or IEC Standards) for any study case. The study method can be changed in the Study Case
dialog box.
Frequency
Here you can enter the electrical system frequency in Hertz (Hz). Acceptable values are from 1 to 999 Hz.
The system frequency is used when you run transient stability and harmonic studies. The system
frequency is also used to correct the line and cable reactances and susceptances when these values are
obtained from the libraries. For example, if the system frequency is set to 50 Hz and the frequency of the
cable library is 60 Hz, the cable positive and zero sequence reactances are multiplied by 5/6 and
susceptances are multiplied by 6/5. It is important that you set the system frequency correctly prior to
entering data into ETAP.
Unit System (English, Metric)

The unit system entered here determines the display attributes used for underground cable systems but
will not change the defaults for the one-line elements. The defaults for the system elements are set when
you create a new project. That is why ETAP asks you to select a unit system at the time you are creating a
new project file. Note: you can edit the defaults for any element to meet your specific requirements.
Date Format
You can use any one of the following formats for printing the date on the output report header:

USA mm-dd-yyyy 11-23-2004

Europe dd-mm-yyyy 23-11-2004
Japan, China yyyy-mm-dd 2004-11-23
Literal mm dd, yyyy Nov 23, 2004
Settings
The Project Settings menu option allows you to select one of the following commands from the submenu
to modify:
Loading Categories
By selecting Loading Categories, you can customize the name of any of the 10 loading categories
provided by ETAP. You can change these names at any time when running the project. Each name may
be up to 12 characters.
When you run load flow or motor starting, ETAP uses the percent loading of the specified loading
category to calculate the operating power factor and efficiency of motors and static loads from the values
of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. This is accomplished by using a

curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and efficiency. The calculated power
factor and efficiency are then used to calculate the operating kW and kvar loading, as well as the feeder
losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is specified for the load.
Duty Cycle Categories

Here you can modify (change) the names of duty cycles. ETAP provides five duty cycles for DC loads for
the purpose of battery sizing.
Starting Categories
Motor starting categories provide ETAP with various percent loading at the starting time of motors. From
this dialog box you can customize the name of each starting category for your reference. Each name may
be up to 12 characters.
Starting Categories are a useful tool for group (gang) starting or acceleration of motors. They are also
used for setting the starting and final loading of each individual motor under different starting conditions.

When a motor is started, the general practice is to reduce the load on that motor until it reaches the final
speed and then increase the load to the required operating level. Starting and final percent loading
provides modeling of this adjustment in the motor load. These values are entered as a percent of the motor
full load current in the motor editors.
Load Priority
Motor and load priorities provide you with various options from which motors can be prioritized. Using
this dialog box, you can customize the name of each of the ten load priorities. Each name may be up to 12
characters long.
From the Motor/Load dialog box, you can select and assign a load priority to the motor or static load.
Data Type
There are a total of ten data types. The name of each type can be customized from this dialog box. Each
name may be up to 12 characters.

This field provides a convenient way to track data entry for motors and static loads. Select one of the data
types (such as estimate, typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box and as the data is updated, this field
can be changed to reflect the source of the latest data.
User-Defined Fields
These fields are provided for various elements and can be custom named with a maximum of 12
characters.
User-Defined Fields are available for elements in the Remarks page of their respective editors.
Note: Elements allow for 7 user defined fields.
Cable Ampacity App. MF

Cable Ampacity Application Multiplication Factors are provided for a number of typical applications of
motors, loads, etc.

Using this dialog box you can change the MF for the typical application and for four additional user-
defined applications. You can select one of these applications for cable ampacity and/or voltage drop
calculations from the Ampacity page of the Motor, Static Load, and Cable editors.
Panel Code Factors

The Panel Code Factors are used to specify the continuous code demand load, connected non-continuous
code demand load, and the total connected code demand load parameters.

The Panel Code Factors dialog box includes 14 fixed load type devices and ten user-defined load type
devices that could be customized according to specific user applications. For more details concerning the
calculation of the parameters shown in the dialog box, please see Chapter 36, Panel Systems.
Fuel Cost Profile

The Fuel Cost Profile names are user definable and can be changed from the Project Setting Menu. By
selecting Fuel Cost Profile, you can customize the name of any of the 10 fuel/energy cost profiles
be up to 12 alphanumeric characters long. For more details refer to Chapter 23, Synchronous Generator.

Emergency Handing
The Emergency Handing menu option allows you to select one of the following commands from a
submenu to modify:
Generator Emergency
Generator Emergency provides ETAP with various

Generator Emergency names. From this dialog box you
can customize the name of each Generator Emergency for
your reference. Each name may be up to 20 characters
long. This editor allows you to specify the name of the
Generator Emergency Condition. This feature will only
take effect if in Remote Controlled Auto Simulator mode
in ETAP Real-Time. For more information see the ETAP
Real-Time User Guide or contact OTI.
HVCB Emergency Tripping
HVCB Emergency Tripping provides ETAP with various

HVCB Emergency Tripping names. From this dialog box
you can customize the name of each HVCB Emergency
Tripping for your reference. Each name may be up to 20
characters long. This editor allows you to specify the
name of the tripping emergency condition. This feature
will only take effect if in Remote Controlled Auto
Simulator mode in ETAP Real-Time. For more
information see the ETAP Real-Time User Guide or
contact OTI.
You can customize the name of any of the ten generation categories provided by ETAP by selecting
Generation Categories. You can change these names at any time when running the project. Each name
may be up to 12 characters long.

Arc Flash
The Arc Flash menu option allows you to select one of the following commands from a submenu to
modify:
Hazard/Risk Categories
This editor allows you to view the NFPA 70E category ranges as well as it allows you to specify your
own. PPE requirements can be entered for each hazard/risk category along with disclaimer and user-
defined text. PPE requirements, disclaimer and user-defined text appear on labels generated from ETAP.
The Hazard/Risk Category Levels for PPE window has the following sections
1. Method Selection Section: which includes the two pre-defined sets of hazard
/ risk categories as described in NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and 2009 and the
user-defined categories.
2. PPE requirements section: where you can specify the personal protective
equipment list for each category.
3. Disclaimer section: Where you can enter text that can be used as a disclaimer
about the arc flash analysis results that are printed on a label
4. User-Defined Text: Enter any extra notes or comments you want to display
on the label.

User Defined
ETAP gives you the option to create your own user-defined categories. You can define up to ten
categories. Note: if the User-Defined Hazard/Risk Categories are used, then there will be a message
displayed in the result section that indicates that user-defined levels are being used for the selection of the
equipment. The user-defined levels are interpreted by the Arc Flash module as described in the following
table:
User-Defined Hazard/Risk Category Level Ranges

Category Range (example) Defaults
0 0 < cal/cm2 <C0 2
1 C1 > cal/cm C0
2
4
2 C2 > cal/cm2 C1 8
3 C3> cal/cm C2
2
25
4 C4 > cal/cm2 C3 40
5 C5 > cal/cm C4
2
100
6 C6> cal/cm2 C5 120
7 C7> cal/cm2 C6 0
8 C8> cal/cm C7
2
0
9 C9> cal/cm2 C8 0
The category ranges are always from low values to higher values. For example, this means that the
category 4 value cannot be equal to or higher than the value in category 3. This is true for all the
categories. If any category (6, 7, 8, and 9) is left as zero, it is ignored by the program and it only uses the
5th category for any value higher than the maximum value in the 5th category. This should also apply if
category 6 is the last one and 7, 8, and 9 are left as zero. You cannot skip a category.
NFPA 70E-2000
These ranges are listed on Table 3-2.9.3 of NFPA 70E-2000.
Incident Energy Range for the Determination of Hazard Risk Categories

Incident Energy Hazard Risk
Exposure cal/cm2 Category
2
0 < cal/cm <1.2 0
5 > cal/cm2 1.2 1
8 > cal/cm2 5 2
25> cal/cm 8
2
3
40 > cal/cm 25
2
4
cal/cm2 > 40 N/A
NFPA 70E-2004
These ranges are listed on Table 130.7 (c)(11) of NFPA 70E 2004.

2
Exposure cal/cm Category
0 < cal/cm2 <2.0 0
4 > cal/cm2 2.0 1
8 > cal/cm2 4 2

25> cal/cm2 8 3
40 > cal/cm2 25 4
cal/cm2 > 40 N/A
NFPA 70E-2009

Exposure cal/cm2 Category
0 < cal/cm2 <1.2 0
4 > cal/cm 1.2
2
1
8 > cal/cm2 4 2
25> cal/cm 8
2
3
40 > cal/cm2 25 4
cal/cm2 > 40 N/A
The Hazard /Risk Category Level for PPE Editor have the following properties and behavior:
a) The NFPA 70E 2000, NFPA 70E 2004, NFPA 70E 2009 Hazard/Risk category Ranges are not
customizable and follow the definitions published by NFPA 70E standards. The only items that
can be customized are the list of equipment (requirements) for each category.
b) If you select the User-Defined Values option, then the Category ID fields become editable and
you can define a name for the each category level, which can be composed of up to 12
alphanumeric characters (i.e. a Cat IV or Cat A, etc).
c) If you select the User-Defined Values option, the Incident Energy Range fields become editable
you may type the different limits in cal/cm2.
d) You have the option to type in some text for a disclaimer statement. This disclaimer statement
may appear in some selected label templates. This field holds up to 250 alphanumeric
characters.
e) You have the ability to create a user-defined text field, which may be used to type in custom
information (such as engineering company name and address). This information is included in
certain label templates or is stored in the output report database. This field holds up to 125
alphanumeric characters.
f) You can navigate using the scroll arrows allows you browse the different PPE descriptions for
each category.
g) There are 4 sets of PPE descriptions. One for each of the options NFPA 70E 2000 (5
descriptions), NFPA 70E 2004 (5 descriptions), NFPA 70E 2009 (5 descriptions) and one
for the User-Defined Categories (10 descriptions. The description fields hold up to 250
The Hazard/Risk Category Level for PPE window has some default descriptions based on the simplified
Two-Category Level PPE system published in Table F-1 of NFPA 70E 2000 and Annex H of NFPA 70E
2004 and 2009.

Note: The following descriptions are provided only as examples of PPE requirement descriptions as
described by NFPA 70E standards. These descriptions are not recommendations made by ETAP on how
to protect personnel from Arc Flash or Shock Hazards. Please exercise caution in applying these
descriptions follow all the remaining recommendations made in the PPE matrix tables provided in NFPA
70E 2000, 2004, and 2009.
Table 9: User Defined Hazard/Risk Category Default Descriptions based on NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and
2009

Note: The default values can be fully customized by simply typing in the new description in the
Hazard/Risk Category Levels for PPE description fields for each set of categories.
Arc Flash Analysis Data

This editor allows you to view the type of equipment and working distances to be used by the Arc Flash
program. Select to use the values which are based on IEEE 1584 2002 or select User-Defined Values and
manually adjust the values to user defined settings. After you select User-Defined Values, the Gap and
Working Distance columns become editable. The X-factor is not user definable and is based on the
factors given from IEEE which cannot be changed.

Note: Not all devices listed in the table are listed in the table given in IEEE 1584. Values given for
devices such as switchboard and switchrack are derived from comparable items such as the Switchgear,
whose values are listed in IEEE 1584.
Shock Hazard Analysis Data

This editor displays the typical NFPA 70E 2004 and 2009 settings, or allows you to enter the user-defined
parameters for the different approach boundaries. You can also view or change the class settings given by
the ASTM D 120-02 standard in regards to voltage-rated protective gloves.

The Limited Approach Boundary (LAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E as the approach limit at a
distance from an exposed live part within which a shock hazard exists.
Limited Approach Boundary to Exp. Movable Conductor

The LAB for exposed movable conductors is the distance, which unqualified persons may not cross when
approaching a conductor that is not properly braced in a fixed position.
Limited Approach Boundary to Fixed Circuit Part

The Limited Approach Boundary for Fixed Circuit Parts is the distance, which unqualified persons may
not cross when approaching a conductor that is fixed (not movable).
Restricted Approach Boundary

The Restricted Approach Boundary (RAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E as the approach limit at a
distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due to electrical arc
over combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity to the live part.
Prohibited Approach Boundary

The Prohibited Approach Boundary (PAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E as the approach limit at a
distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making contact with the
live part.
Bus Arc Flash Typical Data

This editor is used to select the data to be used for each bus. The Arc Flash Analysis Data editor and the
Shock Hazard Analysis Data editor are used to view the values or edit the read-only values. The radial

button selection in this editor is used to determine which values are used for each bus. You can view this
editor from the Bus Rating page by clicking Data Options. For more information on selecting typical data
for each bus, refer to Chapter 18 Arc Flash.
Note: PPE Hazard/Risk Categories editor is not selected from this set of Data Options. The standard
used for the Hazard/Risk Categories is defined in the Arc Flash Data tab in the Short Circuit Study Case
editor and is a global selection for all the faulted buses in the project.
Star View Reference kV

Star View Reference kV sets the Plot kV of all TCC Curves based on either the Calculated Base kV or
Nominal Bus kV. The recommended setting is Calculated Base kV where ETAP will automatically take
care of the curve shift due to base voltage transformation.

Options
The Project Options dialog box allows you to select options specific to your project.
AutoSave
AutoSave will save your project automatically every X minutes, where X is the number of minutes you
have specified in this dialog box. The AutoSave default time is 30 minutes and can be changed at any
time.
Prompt Before Saving Project

Selecting this option initiates a message that asks for confirmation before saving your project.
Reload Last Project

If you select this option, ETAP automatically reloads the last project opened whenever ETAP is started.
Confirm Before Saving Editor Changes

This option will display a message asking for confirmation before saving editor changes when you
navigate inside the editors.
Display Changed Data in Red

Changed or modified data appears in red typeface in the property editors if this option is selected. After a
user (with Checker access level) checks (validates) the data, the data is then displayed in black typeface.
Note: Microsoft Vista Display Problem for Certain Drop Lists

MS Vista may not show certain drop lists in red because of the selected theme graphics. However, the
checker function still detects all changes made to these drop lists and still prompts the checker for

acceptance of the changes. The following images show the problem and the suggested workaround for
this issue:
1. GotoProjectOptionstosetEditorOptions
2. Openaneditorandverifywithacombobox.Notethatthecomboboxhasa3Deffect.

Work-around:

1. Disable the visual themes as shown below. Right-click on the ETAP program icon, select the
Property command and then the Compatibility tab. Click on Apply and OK.
2. Run ETAP and verify the solution.

AutoSave Project
ETAP will prompt you before saving the project if you have checked the Prompt before saving option
from the Project Option dialog box.
You can set the time interval for autosaving, disable/enable autosaving, and decide if you want to be
prompted before ETAP saves your project from this dialog box.
Saving connections for external use means that the bus connections for branches, loads, and sources will
be written in the property tables along with the other properties of the elements. If you do not check this
option, the property tables of the elements will not include the bus connections, or they may indicate the
wrong bus connections if you change the connections from the one-line diagram and do not save them
into the property tables again. Note: the bus connection information in the property tables is for external
use and is not read or used by ETAP.
ARTTS Path
Selecting this function allows you to specify the paths for ARTTS and the ARTTS database so that ETAP
is able to find and communication with the ARTTS test set and the relay under test.

Mutual Coupling Group

Selecting this function allows you to add, name, and specify the length of different transmission line
coupling groups. ETAP gives you the flexibility of adding as many groups as needed.
After adding these groups, you can assign different lines to the groups by going to the Transmission Line
editor, Grouping page.
Control Cable Schedule

Selecting this function allows you to add a cable, assign a name, specify connections, add the length and
other variables of the cables used in your Control System Diagram and project.

Click Add to insert a new cable into the schedule, or click Delete to remove it. If you wish to add a cable
the CSD Control Cable Schedule Edit window (shown below) will open and allow you to specify the
cable information.
If you wish to select a cable from the ETAP cable library, click the Cable Library button and the Library
Quick Pick window for cables will appear. Once you have made your selection, click Ok to close the
library window and accept the information, or click Cancel to close the window without inserting the
information into the Control Cable Schedule.
Click Ok to close the CSD Cable Schedule Edit window.
Click the Print Schedule button to make a printout of the CSD Cable Schedule information. Click the
Close button to accept your changes to the CSD Cable Schedule and close the window.

10.2.5 Library Menu

The Library menu for the One-Line Diagram menu bar offers the following commands:
Function Action
Cable Open the Cable Library
Cable Fire Protection Open the Cable Fire Protection Libraries
Transmission Line Open the Transmission Line Libraries
Motor Nameplate Open the Model Nameplate Library
Motor CKT Model Open the Motor Model Library
Motor Characteristic Model Open the Motor Characteristic Library
Motor Load Model Open the Motor Load Library
Fuse Open the Fuse Library
Relay Open the Relay Library
Recloser Open the Recloser Library
Electronic Controller Open the Electronic Controller Library
HV Circuit Breaker Open the High Voltage Circuit BreakerLibrary
LV Circuit Breaker Open the Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Library
Trip Device Open the Trip Device Libraries
Overload Heater Open the Overload Heater Library
Harmonic Open the Harmonic Model Library
Interruption Cost Open Interruption Cost Library
Reliability Open Reliability Library
Battery Open the Battery Library
DC Control System Device Open the Control System Libraries
Open Open a new ETAP Library
Save Save an ETAP Library
Save As Save an ETAP Library as a new library
Create Create an ETAP Library
Copy/Merge Copy or Merge an ETAP Library
Purge Purge an ETAP Library
Convert ETAP DOS Lib Convert ETAP DOS Libraries
Export Export library data for printing.
For more information see Chapter 8, Engineering Libraries.

10.2.6 Defaults Menu
Annotation fonts, default display options, and default properties of elements can be set from this menu
item. It is a good practice to go though your options for each relevant editor in the defaults section before
creating your one-line diagram and underground raceway system.
ETAP maintains default values for each element in the project database. As each new element is created,
ETAP initializes the element with these default values. You may modify the default properties of any
element through the Defaults menu. ETAP will then use the modified values to initialize each new
element.
The Defaults Menu for the One-Line Diagram Menu Bar offers the following commands:
Display Fonts Annotation fonts for element information and study results
Display Options Edit defaults Display Options
Plot Options Edit defaults Plot Options
Text Box Edit Text Box
Presentations Edit defaults Presentation
Bus Edit defaults for Bus properties
Branch Edit defaults for Cable, Impedance, Reactor, Transmission Line,
Transformer, and 3-W transformer properties
Load/Motor Edit defaults for Ind. Machine, Synch. Motor, Lump Load, Static
Load, Capacitor, and MOV properties
Source Edit defaults for Utility and Synch. Generator properties

Panel Edit defaults for panel schedule, load information, panel information.
Phase Adapter Edit defaults for the phase adapter, load connected to Phase Adapter
Switching Device Edit defaults for Fuse, HV Circuit Breaker, LV Circuit Breaker,
Contactor, SPST Switch, SPDT Switch, and Overcurrent Relay properties
Meter Edit defaults for Ammeter, Voltmeter, and Multi-Meter properties
Relays Edit defaults for Relay properties
Overload Heater Edit defaults for Overload Heater properties
Instrument Edit defaults for Current Transformer (CT) and Potential Transformer
Transformer (PT) properties
AC-DC Interface Edit defaults for AC-DC Interface elements
DC Elements Edit defaults for DC Components
Control System Edit defaults for Control System Diagram elements
Elements

10.2.7 Tools Menu

The Tools menu is provided to control and change one-line diagram graphics in a global manner.
Options (Preferences)
Entries in ETAPS.INI can be changed by using the Options (Preferences) Editor. The advantage of using
this interface is that changes are applied to ETAP without requiring a restart.
Size
This command will globally change the size of the selected elements in the one-line diagram. Global size
change can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu.
Bus Size
This command will change the size of the selected bus editor in the one-line diagram. Global size change
can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu.
Symbols
This command will globally change the symbols of the selected elements in the one-line diagram to ANSI
or to IEC symbols.
Orientation
This command will change the orientation of a selected element in the one-line diagram to 0, 90, 180, or
270 degrees.
Service
This command will globally change the status of service of the selected elements in the one-line diagram
to In Service or Out of Service.

Colors
This command will change the color of the selected elements in the one-line diagram.
Group
This command will group the selected elements in the one-line diagram into one group. Grouped elements
can be selected by selecting any one of the elements in the group. Note: each element can belong to one
group only. To add elements to an existing group, click on a member of the group in the one-line diagram,
then select the other elements by holding down the control key and clicking the left mouse button, then
clicking on the Group command. Grouping can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu.
Ungroup
This command will ungroup the selected elements in the one-line diagram. Ungrouping can also be done
using the right-click pop-up menu.
Use Default Annot. Position

This command will set the position of the annotations of the selected elements in the one-line diagram to
their default position. This command can also be done using the right-click pop-up menu. Note: you can
set the default annotation position of each element by selecting the element and using the right-click pop-
up menu.
Miscellaneous Tools
Additional tools may be setup using the Options (Preferences) editor to invoke external programs.
These tools would appear at the bottom of the menu based on the sequence setup in the options editor.

10.2.8 RevControl Menu

This menu item allows you to create, copy, edit, merge, and delete different Revision Data and to manage
them. ETAP provides unlimited different levels of engineering properties for each element. Base Data is
the default data supplied by ETAP. If you wish to modify your project data but do not wish to modify the
Base Data, you may create a revision.
While in a Revision Data level, you cannot save the project. To save the project, switch to Base Data.
Create Create a Revision Data

Copy Copy data to another revision
Edit Edit information for each revision
Merge Merge data to another revision
Delete Delete a revision
Create
ETAP displays the Create version of the Project Revision Control dialog box. Using this dialog box, you
can create a new Revision Data ID or copy an existing one on which to base a new revision.

This option is provided to create any one of the unlimited Revision Data. Once a revision level is selected,
any subsequent modification of engineering properties made from the property editors will be reflected in
that revision level only.
To create a new revision:
1. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the New option is selected.
2. In the New option text box, enter the new Revision Data ID.
3. Enter the revision information in the text boxes on the right, including Change # (design change
notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description, Schedule, and
Remarks.
the Database and Project Management section of this user guide.
Copy
You can create new revisions by copying Revision Data from existing Revision Data IDs (names). All
data in a copied revision is identical to the revision from which it was copied, until you begin to make
changes.

To copy a revision:
1. In the From Revision Data group, make sure the Existing option is selected.
2. Select the Revision Data ID you want to copy from the drop-down list.
3. In the text box under the To Revision Data group, enter the name of the new Revision Data ID.
4. Edit the revision information as required in the text boxes on the right, including Change #
(design change notification number), Group # (design group number), Authorization, Description,
Schedule, and Remarks. Change # and Group # can be any alphanumeric combination up to 36
characters.
the Revision Data Section in Chapter 5.
Edit
You can rename a Revision Data ID and edit any of its information by doing the following:
Edit the Revision Data ID name and information as required, and then click OK to save the changes.
Note: The Revision Data ID information includes Change # (design change notification number) and
Group # (design group number), which may be used to merge Revision Data. For more information about
merging Revision Data, see Chapter 5 Merging and Purging Revisions
Merge
You can merge one revision into another revision using their Revision Data IDs. Where the same changed
properties differ between two revisions, the revision being merged into has its properties overwritten.

However, the merged revision keeps the Revision Data Info values of the revision that is being merged
into.
Note: You cannot merge the Revision Data of one ID into the same ID (for example, Revision 1 into
Revision 1).
See Chapter 5, 3-D Database for more details how to merge revisions.
Delete

You CANNOT delete the Base Data; however, you may delete Revision Data levels. Deleting any
Revision Data will delete all changes that exist in that Revision Data that relates to your project
permanently. Deleting a Revision Data is equivalent to merging the Base Data into the Revision Data. Be
certain you do not need the Revision Data before proceeding.
10.2.9 Real Time Menu
This menu is strictly reserved for use with ETAP Real-Time. ETAP and ETAP Real-Time share menu
bars, but Real-Time selections are for use only with ETAP Real-Time.
Playback Server Enter server name

EMS Enter path to Energy Management System logic editor
ILS Enter path to ILS editor and CB and trigger editors
Tag File Enter the path for a Tag File, and create or audit the file
Active X Insert new Macro or select from existing Macros
Selections unique to ETAP Real-Time will be grayed out unless ETAP Real-Time is installed.
Playback Server
Type-in a server name to assign a server as the playback server.
EMS
This menu item is used to access the ETAP Energy Management System (EMS) logic editor. This logic
editor may be used to setup conditional logic for demand management when using ETAP as real-time
monitoring and analysis tool.
ILS
This menu item is used to access the ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding (ILS) logic editor, CB editor and
load shedding trigger editor.

ILS CB editor
This editor is used to add and assign the circuit breaker order.
Trigger editor
This editor is used to define and associate one-line diagram elements with actual system triggers. These
triggers are events (electrical or non-electrical) that are known or potential reasons for initiating load
shedding in an electrical network.

Tag File
Use this menu to create, audit or specify the location of a tag database for online / real-time operation.
Create
Use this command to create a new tag database in MS Access format. Note that all real-time information
would be automatically entered in the tag database except for the DCS Tag name that must be determined
based on type of connection (directly to relay / directly to meter / via SCADA or DCS system, etc.)
Audit
Audit a previously created tag file to remove or append information based on changes made to the one-
line diagram.
Path
Specify the path and name of the tag database to be loaded into the Real-Time Server when the system is
switched to Online or Real-Time mode.
Active X
Insert New ActiveX
Use this command to insert an ActiveX control directly onto the One-Line Diagram. ActiveX Controls are
primarily used for monitoring purposes using ETAP Real-Time. The following window will appear when
you run this command.

Options - Macro
Select an existing Visual Basic macro to apply from the list, as shown below. These macros are used to
relay electrical or non-electrical information being read from the real system to virtual instruments setup
in ETAP. Virtual instruments are setup using Insert New ActiveX menu item as mentioned above.
Options
Use this page to assign keyboard shortcuts using custom macros

10.2.10 Window Menu
The Window menu offers the following commands, which enable you to arrange multiple views of
multiple projects in the application window:
Cascade Arrange windows in an overlapped fashion

Tile Arrange windows in non-overlapped tiles
Arrange Icons Arrange the icons of closed windows
1, 2, 3... Activates specified window
Cascade
Use this command to arrange multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion.
Tile
Use this command to vertically arrange multiple opened windows in a non-overlapped (side-by-side)
fashion.
Arrange Icons
Use this command to arrange the icons for minimized windows at the bottom of the main window. If
there is an open project window at the bottom of the main window, then some or all of the icons may not
be visible because they are underneath this project window.
1, 2, 3...
ETAP displays a list of currently open project windows at the bottom of the Window menu. A checkmark
appears in front of the project name of the active window. Choose a project from this list to make its
window active.
10.2.11 Help Menu
This option enables you to learn about functions and concepts in ETAP. The Help shortcut button creates
a question mark that can be used to point to an area for which you have a question or would like more

details on. This includes being able to select keywords in the Project menu bar. The entire contents of this
user guide are included in the Help file.
The Help menu offers the following commands, which provide assistance for this application:
Help Search Offers you an index to topics on which you can get help
About ETAP Displays ETAP version, license and usage as well as licensed capabilities
Help Search
Use this command to display the opening screen of Help. From this screen, you can jump to step-by-step
instructions for using ETAP and various types of reference information. Once you open Help, you can
click on the Contents button to return to the opening screen. You can also use Index to search for
information on a specific topic.
About ETAP
This editor provides useful information about how to contact Operation Technology, Inc. In addition,
there is information about the functions activated through your license and other program functions that
can be added to your ETAP package.
When contacting Technical Support, please have this information on hand. This will help support
engineers identify and solve problems much faster. The three pages of About ETAP contain the following
information.

ETAP
This area displays the copyright notice, version number of your copy of ETAP, and OTIs Corporate
Headquarters information.
ETAP User Support

The contact information for the ETAP Technical Support Department is displayed in this group. With a
valid Upgrade and Support Agreement, you may contact this group for any technical support question
about ETAP and ETAP Real-Time.
If you do not have valid Upgrade and Support Agreement and would like to have technical support, please
contact the ETAP Sales for available options on updating your contract.
ETAP Sales
The contact information for the ETAP Sales Department is displayed in this group. Feel free to contact
ETAP Sales for information about upgrades and licensing.
Licensee
This section displays the ETAP license information
Serial Number
This is the serial number for this copy of ETAP.
Number of Buses
Total bus capability purchased for this license of ETAP.
Configuration
Displays license delivery method - Network or Stand Alone
Stand-Alone
The stand-alone hardware key is placed directly on the parallel, USB, or serial port of the computer that
will be running the software. No installation is required other than ETAP itself. Licensing for the
computer will be automatically done by the stand-alone hardware key and the accompanying software
installed by the ETAP setup program.
Network
The network hardware key requires a Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008/ workstation or
server. Place the network hardware key on the back of the computer/server designated to license ETAP.
This will be the permanent location of the key, and therefore it should not be removed once it is installed
and operating. The computers obtaining permission to run ETAP may run Windows XP/Vista/7/Server
2003/Server 2008 operating systems.
Installation on Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008 requires that the installation be performed
by a user account with Windows NT Administrative privileges. The network installation can be installed
with the License Manager 7.0 (or current version) Setup program provided on the ETAP 7.0 (or current
version) DVD, launched from the ETAP Installer Program, or installed manually. In each case, the steps
to be performed are the same.

License Type
Displays the type of ETAP license - Nuclear (N), Commercial (C), Educational (E), or Training (T)
Capabilities
The active ETAP capabilities purchased for the license being used are displayed in black on the
Capabilities page. Capabilities displayed in gray are not active and may be added to ETAP by contacting
ETAP Sales by email sales@etap.com or by phone (949) 462-0100.
License
This page displays a list of users currently using ETAP via a network license. The fields show the type of
license, the number of users online and the number of licenses assigned to your site. This is a useful
feature if you the number of users or workstations where ETAP is installed is greater than the number of
available ETAP licenses.

Click the Refresh button to update the information on the page if it has been open for some minutes.
ETAP License Manager

This section contains information about the license manager being accessed
LAN Local Area Network license type. Note that with a LAN license, it would not be possible to access
the license manager in case it is installed on a server behind a router.
WAN Wide Area Network license type. With a WAN license, it is possible to access the license
manager in case it is installed on a server behind a router. This is particularly useful in case your offices
are in different time zones and you would like to share the license between the offices.
Server Name
Displays the server name on which the ETAP license manager is running and the software is successfully
connected to.
Users Connected
Displays the total number of connected users or the users utilizing ETAP licenses across a LAN or WAN
Total Licenses
Displays the total number of purchased licenses
Display License Manager

This brings up a list of available license managers in a network. This button is disabled if there is only
one license manager in a network.

Activation Code
Alphanumeric code found on the DVD Sleeve used to activate your ETAP license. You can update the
activation code by pressing the Update button. If you add new capabilities, Operation Technology, Inc.
will send you a new activation code. Click on the Update button to change the Activation Code. Note that
you can copy and paste the code into the update dialog box.

Menu Bars Project View
10.3 Project View Menu Bar

The Project View menu bar is displayed when the Project View is active.
The Project View menu bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options, which are almost the
same as those for the One-Line Diagram menu bar. The items that are different in this menu bar are
Change Password in the File menu and Display Options in the Defaults menu. This menu bar offers the
following menus:
File Menu File management and conversions

View Menu Display different toolbars
Project Menu Project standards and settings
Library Menu Library access and management
Defaults Menu Fonts and default settings of elements
RevControl Menu Base and Revision Data control
Window Menu Window management
Help Menu Help access
Note: that most of the menu commands for the Project View menu bar are the same as those for the One-
Line Diagram menu bar. Menu items that are not common with the One-Line Diagram menu bar are
explained here.
10.3.1 File Menu

The File menu option from the Project View menu bar provides commands to open/close project files,
logoff/on users, save/copy project files, and convert ETAP DOS or CSV files to ETAP files.

Menu Bars Project View
The File menu for the Project View menu bar offers the following commands:

Close Project Close an active project
Copy Project To Save an opened project to a specified file name and continue to function
within the original project
Save Library Save the Library File
Convert ETAP DOS File Convert an ETAP DOS file into an ETAP project file
Convert from CSV File Convert a comma separated file into an ETAP project file
Change Password Change the password for the project file
Log Off Logoff and on to an opened project file as a different user or change
access levels
Exit Exit ETAP
Change Password
If the password option for a project in enabled, each user can change their password by using this
command from the File menu on the Project View menu bar. The password requirement for a project is
enabled or disabled from the User Manager dialog box when you logon as an administrator or can be set
when a new project is created.

Menu Bars Underground Raceway System
10.4 Underground Raceway System Menu Bar

The Underground Raceway System (UGS) menu bar is displayed when a U/G raceway presentation is
active.
The UGS menu bar contains a comprehensive collection of menus that are listed here:
File Menu File management and printing

Edit Menu Cut, copy, and paste
View Menu Display different toolbars
Project Menu Project standards and settings
Library Menu Library access and management
Defaults Menu Fonts and default settings of elements
RevControl Menu Base and Revision Data control
Window Menu Window management
Note: many of the menu commands for the UGS menu bar are the same as those for the One-Line
Diagram menu bar. Menu items that are not common with the One-Line Diagram menu bar are explained
here.
10.4.1 File Menu

The File menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:

Close Project Close an existing project file
Log Off Logoff and logon as a different user or change access levels
Copy Project To Save an opened project to a specified file name and continue to function within
the original project
Save Library Save the Library file
Page Setup Select a page layout as well as a printer and printer connection
Print Preview Display the one-line diagram on the screen as it would appear printed
Print Print the one-line diagram
E-mail Project Zip and E-mail, FTP, or store your project files to a remote location
Files
Exit Exit ETAP
10.4.2 Edit Menu
The Edit menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Cut Delete selected element(s) in the UGS and move it to the Dumpster
Copy Copy selected element(s) in the UGS to the Dumpster
Paste Paste selected element(s) from the Dumpster into the UGS
DeSelect All Deselect all elements in the UGS

10.4.3 View Menu
The View menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Zoom In Show more detail

Zoom Out Show less detail
Zoom to Fit Re-sizes objects to best fit the window
Project Toolbar Show or hide the Project Toolbar
Mode Toolbar Show or hide the Mode Toolbar
Study Case Toolbar Show or hide the Study Case Toolbar
Edit Toolbar Show or hide the Edit Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar Show or hide the Analysis Toolbar
Help Line Show or hide the Help Line
10.4.4 Library Menu

The Library menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Cable Library Open the Cable Library

Cable Fire Protection Open the Cable Fire Protection Libraries
Convert DOS Lib Convert ETAP DOS Libraries
Open Open a new ETAP Library
Save Save an ETAP Library
Save As Save an ETAP Library as a new library
Create Create an ETAP Library
Purge Purge an ETAP Library
Export Export library data for printing purposes. Crystal Reports formats are used
for viewing and printing library data.
10.4.5 Defaults Menu
ETAP maintains default values for each element in the project database. As each new element is created,
ETAP initializes the element with these default values. You may modify the default properties of any
element through the Defaults menu. ETAP will then use the modified values to initialize each new
element.
To save time in data entering, it is advisable to go though the defaults for each element before creating
your one-line diagram and underground raceway system.
The Defaults menu for Underground Raceway System offers the following commands:
Display Options Select defaults for Display Options

Cable Cable Editor defaults
Heat Source External Heat Source Editor defaults
Direct Buried Raceway Direct Buried Raceway Editor defaults
Duct Bank Raceway Duct Bank Raceway Editor defaults
Conduit (duct bank) Conduit Editor defaults
Location (direct buried) Location Editor defaults
U/G System Underground Raceway System Editor defaults

Menu Bars Dumpster
10.5 Dumpster Menu Bar

The Dumpster menu bar is displayed when the System Dumpster is active. This menu bar contains the
three menus listed below:
Edit Purge or Purge All elements from the Dumpster

Window Window management
Help Help access
Note that the Window and Help menu items for the Project View menu bar are the same as those for the
One-Line Diagram menu bar. Menu items that are not common with the one-line diagram menu bar are
explained here.
10.5.1 Edit Menu

Purge
This option deletes the selected cell from the Dumpster permanently. All elements in the selected
Dumpster Cell will be erased from the database and cannot be recovered.
Purge All
This option deletes all cells in the system Dumpster from the Dumpster permanently. All elements in all
Dumpster Cells will be erased from the database and cannot be recovered.

Menu Bars Cable Pulling
10.6 Cable Pulling Menu Bar

The Cable Pulling menu bar is displayed when a Cable Pulling Presentation is open and active.
Note: the Cable Pulling Presentation opens in an external window to ETAP.
This menu bar contains the four menus listed below:
File Menu Project Management

Study Case Menu Create New Study Case
View Menu Show/Hide Toolbars
Help Menu Help Access
10.6.1 File Menu

Save
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or a Study mode. If you have logged on as a
Project editor or Base editor, you CANNOT save a project while working with a revision of the project.
The project can be saved by clicking on Save Project in the File menu or the Save button on the Project
toolbar.
Print
reports, motor starting plots, transient stability plots, Ground Grid and cable temperature plots. For more
details on Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, Batch Print, and Plot capabilities, see Printing and Plotting.
Currently the Cable Pulling Printing Options are disabled
Print Preview
Print Setup
Exit
Using this command will save and close your Cable Pulling project file and take you back to the main
ETAP program.
10.6.2 Study Case Menu

Create New
Click to create a new Cable Pulling Study Case. ETAP allows you to have unlimited number of study
cases.

Menu Bars Cable Pulling
10.6.3 View Menu

Toolbar
Click to hide/show the Project toolbar. Functions on this toolbar are Save, Cut, Copy, Paste, Print, Print
Preview, and What is this? Help assistant.
Status Bar
Click to hide/show the Status toolbar. ETAP displays help lines on the Status Bar. The help line provides
brief information about the field where the cursor is placed.
CP Toolbar
Click to hide/show the Cable Pulling toolbar.
Study Toolbar
Click to hide/show the Cable Pulling Study Case.
10.6.4 Help Menu

Help Topics
About Cable Pulling

This editor provides contact information for Operation Technology, Inc. as well contact information for
sales and technical support.

Menu Bars Ground Grid
10.7 Ground Grid Menu Bar

The Ground Grid menu bar is displayed when a Ground Grid Presentation is open and active.
Note: the Ground Grid Presentation opens in an external window to ETAP.
This menu bar contains the four menus listed below:
File Menu Project management

Edit Menu Editing functions
View Menu Show/Hide toolbars
Study Case Menu Create new presentation
Default Menu Set defaults for editors
10.7.1 File Menu

Save Project
A project can be saved only when you are in Edit mode or a Study mode. If you have logged on as a
Project editor or Base editor, you CANNOT save a project while the project is in a revision level of data.
A project can be saved by clicking on Save Project in the File menu or the Save button on the Project
toolbar. Shortcut key is available [Ctrl + S].
Print
reports, motor starting plots, transient stability plots, Ground Grid and cable temperature plots. For more
details on Print Setup, Print Preview, Print, Batch Print, and Plot capabilities, see Printing and Plotting.
Clicking on this command will allow you to print the Ground Grid Top View. The following editor is
brought for selecting the printer, the number of copies, etc.
Print Preview
Clicking on this command activates the print preview for the Ground Grid System. The Top View of the
grid is placed in a report format for you to print. The Project information (Project Name, Location, etc)
is entered through the One-Line Project menu \ Information.
Print Setup
Dialog box to select and setup the printer to be used with this project.
Import from XML File

Allows you to select an Extensible Markup language (XML) file and import its data into a Ground Grid
System. This is useful when importing existing ground grid designs from AutoCAD files.
Export to XML File

This option allows you to export selected areas of a Ground Grid System to an XML file.

Exit
Using this command will save and close your Ground Grid project file and return to the ETAP base
program.
10.7.2 Edit Menu

Cut
This selection allows you to cut selected elements of a Ground Grid System.
Copy
This selection allows you to copy elements of a Ground Grid System.
Paste
This selection allows you to paste elements of a Ground Grid System that have been selected and copied.
10.7.3 View Menu

Toolbar
Clicking on this command will allow you to display the Project toolbar. Clicking again will disable the
display and the toolbar will be hidden. Functions on this toolbar are Save, Cut, Copy, Paste, Print, Print
Preview, and What is this help?
Status Bar
Clicking on this command will allow you to display the Status toolbar. Clicking again will disable the
display and the toolbar will be hidden. ETAP displays help line on the status bar. This help line describes
the field where the cursor is placed.
Grid
This selection is inactive on this version of the Ground Grid System Program.
10.7.4 Study Case Menu

Create New
Clicking on this function will allow you to create a new Ground Grid Study Case. ETAP allows you to
have unlimited number of study cases.

10.7.5 Default Menu

Conductor
The Conductor editor default specifies the values to be placed in the Conductor editor for each new
conductor created. Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the overall
time required to develop the grid.
Rod
The Rod editor default specifies the values to be placed in the Rod editor for each new rod that is created.
Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the overall time required to
develop the grid.
IEEE Grouper
The IEEE Grouper editor default specifies the values to be placed in the IEEE Grouper editor for each
new IEEE grouper created. Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the
overall time required to develop grid.
FEM Grouper
The FEM Grouper editor default specifies the values to be placed in the FEM Grouper editor for each new
FEM grouper created. Changing the defaults to desired settings before creating your grid reduces the
overall time required to develop the one-line grid.
10.7.6 Help Menu

Help Topics
About PSGrid
This editor provides very useful information to contact Operation Technology, Inc. for sales and technical
support.

Chapter 11
AC Elements
This chapter addresses editors for all AC elements in the One-Line Diagram. Except for the element IDs,
bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties,
which are subject to Base and Revision Data. The following table lists all the AC elements in ETAP that
are included on the AC toolbar.
Bus/Node Pointer Bus/Node
Transformer, 2-Winding Transformer, 3-Winding

Branches Cable Transmission Line
Reactor, Current Limiting Impedance
Power Grid (Utility System) Generator, Synchronous
Wind Turbine Generator MG Set (Rotary UPS)
Induction Machine Motor, Synchronous
Lumped Load Motor Operated Valve (MOV)
Sources and Loads
Static Load Capacitor
Panel System Harmonic Filter
Remote Connector Phase Adapter
Static Var Compensator HVDC Transmission Link
Composites Composite Motor Composite Network
Fuse Contactor
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
Protective Devices Recloser
Overload Heater In-line Overload Relay
Single Throw Switch Double Throw Switch
Instrumentation Toolbar Ground Grid

Settings and Reports
Display Options Schedule Report Manager

AC Elements Bus
11.1 Bus
You can enter the properties associated with AC buses (nodes) of the electrical distribution system in this
Data Editor.
The ETAP Bus Editor allows you to model different types of buses in an electrical system. The data
entered in the Bus Editor is used when running all types of system studies.
Note: Specifying bus generation or loading is not done from the Bus Editor. Generators, motors, and
static loads are elements and can be connected to any desired bus. ETAP can display all loads,
generators, and utilities that are directly connected to the bus from the Bus Editor. Protective devices are
ignored when ETAP determines connections to buses.
A bus is defined as a point (node) where one or more branches are connected. A branch could be a cable,
transformer, etc. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus is the bus nominal kV which can
be entered in the Info page of the Bus Editor. Once entered, this value is defined as a unique bus in the
system model, which can be connected to other buses/nodes by placing branches between them.
Buses have two types of graphical presentation, i.e., Bus or Node. You can change a bus to a node or
vice versa at any time. This option gives you the flexibility to display annotation of buses and nodes
differently.
The Bus Editor includes the following ten pages of properties:
Info Arc Flash
Phase V Harmonic
Load Reliability
Motor/Gen Remarks
Rating Comment

AC Elements Bus
11.1.1 Info Page

You use the Info page to specify the bus ID, In/Out of Service, Nominal kV, Initial/Operating Voltage
(Magnitude and Angle), Diversity Factors (Maximum and Minimum), FDR Tag, and Equipment Name
and Description.
Info
ID
This is a unique ID name containing up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each bus. The assigned IDs consist of the default bus ID plus
an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increase. The default bus
ID (Bus) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

AC Elements Bus
Recommendations for assigning buses are as follows:
Every piece of major equipment, such as switchgear, switchrack, and motor control centers
(MCCs).
On the primary side of transformers when the primary line/cable feeder is more than:
250 feet for high voltage cables
100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
Utility and generator terminals when the cable is more than:

250 feet for high voltage cables
100 feet for medium voltage cables
50 feet for low voltage cables
Induction and synchronous motors do not need buses assigned at their terminals since motors can
include equipment cables.
Nominal kV
Enter the nominal voltage of the bus in kilovolts (kV). This input is a required entry, which is used by
ETAP to convert the final bus voltages to the actual values for graphical display and output reports, i.e.,
bus nominal kV is used as the base kV for the reported percent voltages.
Note: The nominal voltage and actual base voltage of a bus can be different values. Actual base voltages
of buses are calculated internally by ETAP, starting from a swing bus. The rest of the base values are
calculated using the transformer turn ratios. A swing bus is defined as a bus that has a power grid and/or
generator (in swing mode) connected to it.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a bus can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus. However, an Out of
Service bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service bus automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All loads and branches that are
energized solely through an Out of Service bus will also be de-energized and become dimmed.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is an engineering property, which is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a bus to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in a Revision
Data.
Bus Voltage
Initial% V
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage as a percentage of the bus nominal kV. This value is used as the
initial bus voltage for load flow studies including motor starting, harmonics, and transient stability
studies. For unregulated buses which do not have any utility or generator connected to them, the
operating voltage is calculated during load flow analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or
initial value. For regulated buses, which have a utility or generator (in swing or voltage control mode)
connected to them, this value is not used. Voltage magnitude defaults to 100%.

AC Elements Bus
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value will
reflect the operating voltage of the bus after you run a load flow study.
For ANSI short-circuit studies, this value is used as the prefault bus voltage if you select the Vmag X
Nominal kV option from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor, Standard page.
Initial kV
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in kV. The %V is calculated if the Nominal kV has already been
entered. This value is used the same as %V, as explained above.
Angle
Enter the phase angle of the bus voltage in degrees. For non-swing buses (buses which do not have any
utility or Generator in Swing Mode connected to them), voltage angles are calculated during load flow
analysis using the values entered here as a first guess. This value is ignored for swing type buses. The
voltage Angle default is 0.0.
Operating Voltage %V / kV / Angle

After you run load flow studies, the operating voltage magnitude in %, kV and phase angle of the bus are
displayed here.
Connection
The phase connection for the bus can be defined by selecting 3 Phase, 1 Phase 2W, or 1 Phase 3W. The
default connection is 3 Phase. You can change the default connection from the Defaults menu or from the
Project View.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the bus to any device. Once the bus is
connected to a device, the phase connection selections will be grayed out. To change the connection type,
you need to disconnect the bus from all devices.
3 Phase
Select to define the bus as a three-phase bus. Three-phase and single-phase loads can be connected to this
bus. Single-phase branches must be connected through a phase adapter before connecting to a three-
phase bus.
1 Phase 2W
Select this to define the bus as single-phase two-wire bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected to
this bus.
1 Phase 3W
Select this to define the bus as single-phase three-wire bus. Only single-phase devices can be connected
to this bus.
Load Diversity Factor
Minimum and Maximum

The minimum and maximum diversity factors (loading limits) of each individual bus can be specified as a
percentage of the bus loading. These values are used when the Minimum or Maximum Loading option is
selected from the Study Case Editor for load flow, motor starting, Harmonic Analysis, Transient Stability,

AC Elements Bus
and Optimal Power Flow Studies. When the Minimum or Maximum Loading option is used for a study,
all motors and static loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied by their diversity factors.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Enter the feeder tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Classification
Zone
Enter the zone where the bus is located, or click the counter arrows to change the values.
Area
Enter the area where the bus is located, or click the counter arrows to change the values.

AC Elements Bus
11.1.2 Phase V Page
Initial Voltage
Line-to-Neutral %V
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in a percentage of Phase A to ground, B to ground or C to ground
kV.
Note: The kV is calculated if the Nominal kV in the Bus Info page has already been entered.
This value is used as the initial bus voltage for unbalanced load flow study. For unregulated buses which
do not have any utility or generator connected to them, the operating voltage is calculated during load
flow analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value.

AC Elements Bus
For regulated buses, which have a utility or generator (in swing or voltage control mode) the internal
voltage per phase is calculated and used to maintain the voltages at that level.
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor,
this value will reflect the operating voltage of the bus after you run a load flow study.
Line-to-Neutral kV
Enter the magnitude of the bus voltage in kV. Notice that the %V is calculated if the Nominal kV in the
info page has already being entered. This value is used same as %V, as explained above.
Line-to-Neutral Angle
Enter the phase angle of the bus voltage in degrees. For non-swing buses (buses which do not have any
utility or Generator in Swing Mode connected to them), voltage angles are calculated during unbalanced
load flow analysis by using the values entered here as a first guess; unless, the angle difference between
the calculated value based on phase-shift is larger than the specified MaxIniAngDiff, in which case the
program would use the calculated value.
The MaxIniAngDiff is defaulted to 10. To modify this default, consult the ETAPS.INI Section.
Line-to-Line %V, kV, Angle

These values are the calculated line-to-line (Phase A to B, B to C, and C to A) voltages based on the
defined Line-to-Neutral voltage magnitudes and angle.
Operating Voltage (Line-to-Neutral and Line-to-Line)

After you run unbalanced load flow studies, the operating voltage magnitude in %, kV, and angle line-to-
neutral and line-to-line of the bus are displayed here.
Voltage Unbalance
%LVUR
Line Voltage Unbalance Rate. This is the maximum voltage deviation from the average line voltage in
percent.
%PVUR
Phase Voltage Unbalance Rate. This is the maximum voltage deviation from the average phase voltage in
percent.
%VUF
Voltage Unbalance Factor. This is a negative sequence to positive sequence voltage ratio in percent.

AC Elements Bus
11.1.3 Load Page

The Load page is used to display the total Constant kVA, Constant Z, Constant I and Generic loads
directly connected to a bus for each loading category. The displayed kW and kvar (or MW and Mvar)
indicate the algebraic sum of the operating load of all loads that are either directly connected to the bus or
connected through composite networks, composite motors, or power panels. These values are obtained
from the actual loads connected to the bus.
Click the individual rows to view the total per phase load directly connected to the bus. ETAP updates
the fields at the bottom of the editor MW, Mvar, %PF, Amp (according to the loading category per phases
A, B, C) and provides a total.

AC Elements Bus
11.1.4 Motor/Gen Page

The Motor/Generator page displays each individual induction motor, synchronous motor, and generator
that is directly connected to the bus you are editing. The motors displayed on this page can be located
inside a composite motor that is directly connected to the bus.

AC Elements Bus
11.1.5 Rating Page

The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e. open air, switchgear, MCC, etc). It also
contains typical data for approach boundaries and equipment gap between conductors based on IEEE
1584 2002. The user also may enter custom data according to equipment manufacturer specifications.
Standard
ANSI
Select this option if the bus is rated under ANSI Standards. By selecting this option, the bus bracing will
change to ANSI Standard fields.
IEC
Select this option if the bus is rated under IEC Standards. By selecting this option, the bus bracing will
change to IEC Standard fields.

AC Elements Bus
Note: There is no IEC Arc Flash Standard, selecting IEC will change the short-circuit parameters for
bracing to peak currents, but the arc flash results are unaffected by this option. This option only applies
for short-circuit 60909-0 2001 device evaluation and not for AF at this point.
Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment that are supported for Arc Flash
Analysis and Short-Circuit. The available equipment types are as follows:
Other Switchrack
MCC Panelboard
Switchgear Cable Bus
Switchboard Open Air
Note: These types come from IEEE 1584-2002 Table 4. The switchboard and switchrack are handled in
the same fashion as the switchgear. The Type drop-down list plays a very important role in the
determination of the incident energy for systems with voltage levels less than or equal to 15 kV. Note that
for voltages above 15 kV the selection of equipment type does not make any difference in the arc flash
calculations since the Lee Method is used for those voltage levels.
For new buses the default value is Other which is handled in the same manner as a cable bus, since in
previous versions of ETAP the Cable Bus option was tied to this selection.
If the option Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data is enabled, the fields in the
bus editor related to arc flash are immediately populated with typical or user-defined IEEE 1584 and
NFPA 70E 2009 parameters depending on the selection on the Data Options for Bus editor default editor.
Note: Bus type is different from the bus symbol that is displayed graphically. A normal bus symbol is a
bar that can be stretched from both ends. You can change the bus to a node, which is displayed as a small
circle. Nodes are provided so you can place them where you do not wish to emphasize a bus and do not
wish to display the current or power flow from or into the element.
Continuous
Enter the continuous current rating of the selected bus in amps. If this value is exceeded during load flow
calculations and the overload settings are set in the Load Flow Study Case, then ETAP will generate an
alert.
Bracing
Symmetrical, Asymmetrical, Peak

When a symmetrical value for low voltage buses is entered, ETAP calculates the asymmetrical value
based on the type of bus and NEMA & UL test power factors. These are just preferred rating factors
based on common standards and practices. If the actual asymmetrical value is available from the
manufacturer, those numbers need to be entered and utilized.

AC Elements Bus
For low voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated symmetrical and
asymmetrical fault currents with the symmetrical and asymmetrical bus bracing entered in this page.
For medium voltage buses, ETAP device duty ANSI fault analysis compares the calculated asymmetrical
and peak fault currents with the asymmetrical and peak (Crest) bus bracing entered in this page.
Under IEC fault analysis, ETAP compares the calculated peak fault currents with the peak bus bracing
entered in this field.
Arc Flash Parameters
Gap between Conductors / Buses

This Gap is defined in IEEE 1584-2002 Section 9.4 as the gap between conductors or buses for the
equipment at the fault location. This value is to be entered in millimeters (mm).
This value entered must be within the specified range in Table 1. Gap values higher than those tested in
the standard are not allowed (i.e. higher than 153 mm). The minimum a gap value is 1 mm, for each
device type.
Table 1 shows the default values used for each device type. There is no gap between conductors for buses
greater than 15.0 kV. This logic is implemented to avoid using equipment gaps that do not follow Table 4
of IEEE 1584; however, the value can be changed to any other value within the specified range.
Distance X Factor
The Distance X Factor field is for display only. The values it displays are selected according to the
equipment type and voltage as described in Table1, under the column X Factor Value. This value is a
constant for each type of device and is used in equation 5.3 of IEEE 1584-2002 as an exponent. There is
no Distance X Factor for buses greater than 15.0 kV.
Typical Gap & Boundary

The Typical Gap & Boundary button brings in default values and ranges for the equipment gap, X-factor,
Limited, Restricted, and Prohibited Approach Boundaries. The defaults and ranges are shown in Tables 1,
2, and 3.
Please refer to the Arc Flash Analysis Data Editor for a complete list of the typical data values used. Of
course if the user-defined options are used as the source of data for the bus, then the bus values will be
populated with the customized values as defined by the user.
The following table summarizes the typical default values for the Conductor Gap under the column Gap
Default Value (mm).
Table 1: Range Values and Default Values for Gaps between Conductors and X Factors
Bus Nominal Equipment Typical Gap Gap Default X Factor
kV Range Type* Range mm. Value (mm) Value
Bus Nominal
kV <= 1.0 Open Air 40 2.000
kV* Cable Bus 1 to 999 13 2.000

AC Elements Bus
Bus Nominal Equipment Typical Gap Gap Default X Factor

kV Range Type* Range mm. Value (mm) Value
MCC 25 1.641
Other 13 2.000
Panelboard 25 1.641
Switchgear 32 1.473
Switchboard 32 1.473
Switchrack 32 1.473
Open Air 102 2.000
Cable Bus 13 2.000
MCC 102 0.973
1.0 kV < Bus Other 13 2.000
Nominal kV 1 to 999
<= 5.0 kV Panelboard 102 0.973
Switchgear 102 0.973
Switchrack 102 0.973
Open Air 153 2.000
Cable Bus 13 2.000
MCC 153 0.973
5.0 kV < Bus Other 13 2.000
1 to 999
Nominal kV
<= 15.0 kV* Panelboard 153 0.973
* Note: Any bus whose nominal voltage is less than 0.208 kV and higher than 15kV has the same default
values as that of a 0.208 kV bus and a 15 kV bus; however the Lee method is used instead of the
empirical IEEE 1584 equations to determine the arc flash result if the voltage is below 0.208 kV and
higher than 15kV. This means that the gaps and x-factors are disregarded for such cases.
Shock Protection

The Limited Approach Boundary (LAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2009, as the approach limit at
a distance from an exposed live part within which a shock hazard exists.
approaching a conductor that is not properly braced in a fixed position. The value should be entered in
feet or meter. The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009.
The module will select this value according to the kV of the bus. NFPA 70E 2004 values may also be
used depending on the selection on the Bus Arc Flash Typical Data default editor.

AC Elements Bus
Defaults for Limited Approach Boundaries

The range and default values for the Limited Approach Boundaries are defined according to the values
listed in NFPA 70E-2009 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock Protection). If you
click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated according to the
values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be reset to the default
ones. Tables 2-3 list the limited approach boundaries for the 2004 and 2009 editions of NFPA 70E.
Table 2: Limited Approach Boundary for Different kV Levels (NFPA 70E 2004)
Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries
Bus Nominal kV Restricted Approach Prohibited Approach
Range Boundary Boundary
Default (ft) Range (ft) Default (ft) Range (ft)
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 10 10 to 30 5 5 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 10 10 to 30 6 6 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV 10.66 10.66 to 30 8 8 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV 11 11 to 30 10 10 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 11.66 11.66 to 30 11.66 11.66 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 13 13 to 45 13 13 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 15.33 15.33 to 45 15.33 15.33 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 19 19 to 45 19 19 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 23.75 23.75 to 45 23.75 23.75 to 45
* Note: If the Bus kV is higher than 800 kV, the boundary distances remain the same as those for the
800 kV
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 10 10 to 30 5 5 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 10 10 to 30 6 6 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30

AC Elements Bus

72.6 kV to 121 kV 10.66 10.66 to 30 8 8 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV 11 11 to 30 10 10 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 11.66 11.66 to 30 11.66 11.66 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 13 13 to 45 13 13 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 15.33 15.33 to 45 15.33 15.33 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 19 19 to 45 19 19 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 23.75 23.75 to 45 23.75 23.75 to 45
800 kV
The units of the limited approach boundary can be set to metric units if the project standards are set to
Metric units.

not cross when approaching a conductor that is fixed (not movable). The value should be entered in feet.
The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009. ETAP will select
this value according to the kV of the bus. This value may be displayed on the Arc Flash Hazard Label if
selected in the appropriate template.
See Table 2 & 3 above for definitions of the range and default values for Limited Approach Boundaries.
Limited Approach Boundary Toggle Radio Button

This Toggle Radio button allows you to select which limited approach boundary to display on the Label.
Depending on the selection, the label from the bus arc flash page or the global arc flash calculation labels
will show the Exposed Movable Conductor or the Fixed Circuit Part limited approach boundary.
This Toggle Radio button basically serves the purpose of telling the program which one of these values
should be passed to the arc flash labels.
This value may be displayed on the Arc Flash Hazard Label if selected in the appropriate template.

The Restricted Approach Boundary (RAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2004 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due to electrical
arc over combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity to the live part.
The value should be entered in feet.
Defaults for Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries

The range and default values of the Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries are defined according
to the values listed in NFPA 70E-2004 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock

AC Elements Bus
Protection). If you click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated
according to the values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be
reset to the default ones.
Table 4: Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundary for Different kV levels (NFPA 70E 2004)
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 2.16 2.16 to 30 0.6 0.6 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 2.58 2.58 to 30 0.8 0.8 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 2.75 2.75 to 30 1.41 1.41 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 3.16 3.16 to 30 2.08 2.08 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV 3.25 3.25 to 30 2.66 2.66 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV 3.58 3.58 to 30 3.08 3.08 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 4 4 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 5.25 5.25 to 45 4.75 4.75 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 8.5 8.5 to 45 8 8 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 11.25 11.25 to 45 10.75 10.75 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 14.91 14.91 to 45 14.41 14.41 to 45
800 kV
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 2.16 2.16 to 30 0.6 0.6 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 2.58 2.58 to 30 0.8 0.8 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 2.75 2.75 to 30 1.41 1.41 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 3.25 3.25 to 30 2.16 2.16 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV 3.33 3.33 to 30 2.75 2.75 to 30

AC Elements Bus

138 kV to 145 kV 3.83 3.83 to 30 3.33 3.33 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 4.25 4.25 to 30 3.75 3.75 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 5.66 5.66 to 45 5.16 5.16 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 9.16 9.16 to 45 8.66 8.66 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 11.83 11.83 to 45 11.33 11.33 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 15.91 15.91 to 45 15.41 15.41 to 45
800 kV.
The units of the Restricted and Prohibited approach boundaries can be set to metric units if the project
standards are set to Metric units.

The Prohibited Approach Boundary (PAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2004 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making contact with
the live part. The value should be entered in feet.
For definitions of the range and default values for Prohibited Approach Boundaries, see Table 4 and 5
above.
Insulating Glove Class

The insulating glove class field shows the insulating glove class and voltage rating determined based on
the bus nominal kV. This information is updated automatically as soon as the bus nominal kV is known.
The following table shows the nominal bus kV ranges and the corresponding insulating glove classes and
voltage ratings according to ASTM D120/IEC903 Standards.
Note: In ETAP 7.0.0 the default values are editable and can be customized to allow only for higher glove
classes than those specified by ASTM D120. To modify the glove classes used by the program you need
to access the user-defined portion of the Shock Hazard Analysis Data editor from the
Project\Settings\Arc Flash menu.
Table 6: ASTM Insulated Glove Voltage Classes: (ASTM D120/IEC903) Standards

Maximum use
ETAP Bus Nominal kV
Types of Insulating Glove voltage rating Class
Range
AC Volts L-L
500 00 Bus kV 0.500
Low Voltage Gloves
1000 0 0.500 kV < Bus kV 1.0 kV
7500 1 1.0 kV < Bus kV 7.5 kV
High Voltage Gloves
17000 2 7.5 kV < Bus kV 17.0 kV

AC Elements Bus
26500 3 17.0 kV < Bus kV 26.5 kV

36000 4 26.5 kV < Bus kV 36.0 kV
No available class per ASTM N/A N/A Bus kV > 36.0 kV
Note: ASTM does not define the insulating glove voltage rating or class for voltage higher than 36000
Volts. As a result of this, the voltage rating is set to the bus nominal kV if the bus nominal voltage is
higher than 36 kV and the glove class is omitted in the labels.
Shock hazard when

The Shock hazard when field may be used to provide additional information about electrocution (shock
hazard) so that it may be printed on some label templates or the MS Excel arc flash report. You can use it
to add a description about when there is a shock hazard present. You can type up to 50 alphanumeric
characters and define your own informational message. The following table contains three possibilities
that have been built into the program.
Note: This information is only to be displayed on certain arc flash label templates and will not cause any
effect on the arc flash results (i.e. effect of covers open or closed, etc). The default for this field is covers
removed
Table 7: Possible additional descriptions of the Shock Hazard for the AF labels
Field Default Comments
covers removed This could read doors are open

Shock Hazard when enclosure doors are closed This could read covers are on
hinged covers are open This could read opening hinged doors
Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data

This option configures the bus editor to automatically update arc flash data every time the bus nominal
kV or the equipment type are modified. Selecting this checkbox saves you an extra click to update the
typical or user-defined values for each bus that is configured. This option is selected by default.
This button opens the default Bus Arc Flash Typical Data editor. This editor allows you to configure the
bus editors data source for the Gaps, X-factors, working distances and protection boundaries. The bus arc
flash typical data editor can also be accessed from the project \settings\Arc Flash\Bus Arc Flash Typical
Data menu. For more details refer to Chapter 18 - Arc Flash Analysis.
Data Options
Data menu. See Chapter 18 - Arc Flash Analysis for more details.

AC Elements Bus
11.1.6 Arc Flash Page

The Bus Arc Flash page contains the quick incident energy calculator, which is a powerful analysis tool
that allows you to perform a quick arc flash analysis at the bus level if you already know some of the
input data necessary to calculate the incident energy. Also, it displays the calculated arc flash analysis
results from the global calculation. The quick incident energy calculator allows you to perform a
hazard/risk assessment for an individual bus. This tool can be particularly useful in some of the following
cases:
The short-circuit results are already known.
The arc fault clearing time is known or can be conservatively estimated.
You need to modify part of the system and want to know the impact of the changes on the
hazard/risk assessment.
You want to perform some What if scenarios to help increase the safety margin of the arc flash
You need to produce a label for the equipment, but do not want to run the global calculation.
This page contains several input parameters needed for the global system calculated arc flash analysis.
(See the Running Global Arc Flash Analysis section for more details.)
The Quick Incident Energy Calculator has the capability to perform arc flash calculations based on purely
user-defined parameters or based on system-calculated results. The fields marked as Calculated have been
updated by the global arc flash calculation to this page (as display only values). Those marked as User-
Defined have been manually entered, except for the fault clearing time (FCT) and source PD arcing
current when you have selected a source PD. The quick incident energy calculator can display the
incident energy and flash protection boundary calculated based on either set of parameters.

AC Elements Bus
Calculated
This section displays the results of the global arc flash calculation. The Bus Editor Arc Flash page uses
the update values to determine the incident energy.
Bus Fault Current

This field shows the total bus bolted (3-Phase/1-Phase) fault current in kA which is calculated by the
Short-Circuit Program {1/2 cycle, 1.5 to 4 cycle (ANSI) or initial symmetrical current (Ik for IEC)}.
This field may be updated from the global arc flash calculation if the option Update Fault Currents is
selected from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please note that this field is not updated if the
fault current decay method is used since there are several short-circuit current values calculated over
time in this case.
Bus Arcing Current

This field shows the total bus arcing current calculated based on the 3-phase short-circuit current (1/2
Cycle Symmetrical RMS or 1.5 to 4 cycle). This field may be updated by the global arc flash calculation
if the option Update Fault Currents is selected from the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case.

AC Elements Bus
Please also note that if the fault current decay method is selected, then this value is not updated since it is
changing over time.
Source PD
This is the ID of the source protective device determined by the global arc flash calculation to be the
device which clears the fault at the bus (last operating device to de-energize the fault). If there are
multiple source branches with protective devices, ETAP will select the one that takes the longer to trip
(clear the fault).
The ID of the source PD is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the update options are selected in the arc
flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It
is only recalculated and updated by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a
successful global arc flash calculation.
Source PD Arcing Current

The fault current shown in this field is the actual arcing current in kA passing through the source PD that
clears the fault. Please note that the current shown here is expressed using the base kV of the location of
the protective device. This means that the current shown here could be the arcing current passing through
the protective device on the primary side of a feeder transformer.
This current value is passed to the bus arc flash page if the option Update Fault Currents is selected in
the Arc Flash Page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. Please note that this value is not calculated inside the
editor, but passed by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a successful
global arc flash calculation. Please also note that this value will not be updated if you are using the fault
current decay method since the current is changing over time.
Fault Clearing Time (FCT)

The arc duration is defined in ETAP as the Fault Clearing Time (FCT). This is the calculated time in
seconds, which is needed by the protective device to completely open and clear the arc fault (extinguish
the arc). The FCT value is calculated by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into this field.
The global arc flash calculation will update this value if the option Update Buses FCT is checked in the
Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor.
Note: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by the
global arc flash calculation.
Grounding
The Calculated system grounding for arc flash calculations is defined as grounded or ungrounded
according to IEEE 1584-2002. Grounded systems are those that have solidly grounded connections.
Ungrounded systems are those that are open (Delta, Wye-open) and those that are high and low resistance
grounded.
This Calculated System grounding is determined by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into
this field if the option Update Grounding is selected in the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study
Case. Its default value is grounded.
Note 1: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by
the global arc flash calculation.
Note 2: As different protective devices operate, the system grounding configuration may change (i.e. if a
source which is solidly grounded trips and the remaining sources are open or resistance grounded). ETAP

AC Elements Bus
assumes that the grounding configuration remains constant during the fault duration. If it is possible that
the system grounding configuration will change during the fault, then assume that the system is
ungrounded. This will yield more conservative results.
Incident Energy
This is the calculated incident energy based on the system calculated parameters. The units for the
incident energy are Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the
empirically derived IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage). This
value is not updated if you are using the fault current decay method. For this method the energy is
determined in multiple stages and it is difficult to represent in this editor as a single value.
The incident energy is used to determine the Hazard/Risk Category and the Flash Protection Boundary
(ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough parameters or the user has no
authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002 Standards.
Note 1: THE RESULTS IN THE CALCULATED SECTION OF THE BUS EDITOR MAY NOT
AGREE WITH THOSE DETERMINED BY THE GLOBAL CALCULATION UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
1) You are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors
and x-factors which do not agree with the values you have (or may not have entered yet) in the
individual bus editor.
2) You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
This option is located in the tools\ Options (Preferences) editor under the Arc Flash section. The
reason is that the updated bolted fault current in the bus represents the total short-circuit current at
the beginning of the fault. If a source trips over time and the current contribution to the energy is
removed, then the value of energy will be less than the one calculated by the bus arc flash page
(since it only calculates based on the total short-circuit current).
Note 2: The incident energy results shown in the bus arc flash page can be determined based on the IEEE
1584 empirical equations or based on the theoretically derive Lee method equations. The Lee method is
used whenever the fault parameters are outside the range of the empirical method. A message indicated
this condition will be shown on the lower left hand side corner of the bus arc flash page.
Protection Boundary
The Flash Protection Boundary is the distance from the arc source at which the onset of a second-degree
burn could occur. This value is determined based on second-degree burn criteria of 1.2 Cal/cm2. This is
determined from the incident energy and fault clearing time. The unit of this field is in feet. This value is
empty unless the calculation is performed and you have logged into the current project with the access
level to run the Arc Flash module.
Note 1: The flash protection boundary calculated in the Bus Arc Flash page may be different from the
global arc flash calculated results if the EB value (AF Data Page of the study case editor) is set to a value
higher than 1.2 cal/cm2 or if notes 1& 2 from the incident energy section apply.
Note 2: The bus Arc Flash page always uses EB = 1.2 cal/cm2 to determine the flash protection boundary.
Please also note that the equations used to determine the flash protection boundary is different for the
empirical method or Lee methods. Depending on which method is used, the program automatically
determines the right equation to use.

AC Elements Bus
Category (NFPA70E 2009)

The hazard/risk category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the system calculated
incident energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C)(11) of NFPA
70E-2009 is used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is
performed and you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash module.
The value may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA
70E 2009 (40 Cal/cm2).
Note: For the bus Quick Incident Energy Calculator, only the NFPA 70E-2009 categories are used.
User-Defined
The user-defined section of the bus arc flash page allows the user to define parameters other than those
automatically calculated by ETAP to perform an arc flash analysis. Some of the user-defined parameters
may also be used for the global arc flash calculation.
Bus Fault Current

This is the total 3-phase bolted fault current value in kA, which may be known before hand. The quick
incident energy calculator does not differentiate between 3-phase and line-to-ground short-circuit currents
for this field so if desired a line to ground short-circuit current value could be entered here. The program
will calculate the user-defined bus arcing current based on this value.
Bus Arcing Current

This field displays the total bus arcing current calculated based on the user-defined Bus Fault Current in
kA. This is a useful field since it shows the arcing current based on the available bolted 3-phase fault
current.
Source PD
This drop-down list allows you to select the protective device which you want to use to determine the
fault clearing time (FCT) for a fault at this bus. The drop-down list contains all the relays, fuses, and low
voltage circuit breakers in the system. The global arc flash calculation will use this protective device as
the source PD to determine the FCT if the option User-Defined Source PD (Bus Editor) is selected in
the arc flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, otherwise, it will be ignored when you run the global
arc flash calculation.
In ETAP, a relay must be interlocked with a breaker, contactor or switch. If you select a relay from this
list then the program will find the current passing through the current transformer connected to the relay
and then proceed to find the breaker from the interlock list that can actually clear the fault (breaker
connected to a source path to the faulted bus). If you select a fuse or a low voltage breaker with its own
trip device, the program will consider it to be the source PD to be used to determine the FCT.
If the Arc Flash program uses a PD from this drop-down list, it will use it to calculate the FCT based on
the actual arcing current passing through it. The arcing current is shown immediately below this drop-
down list as a display only field. The FCT can be found from the reports only (i.e. analysis section or the
summary reports).
Note: If no protective device is selected from this drop list (blank option selected), then the user-defined
fault clearing time field becomes editable and you can define your own value. In previous versions of
ETAP (i.e. 5.0.0 to 5.0.3 running the user-defined source PD calculation would overwrite this value. This
is no longer true in version 5.5.0 since the only way to observe the source PD FCT is through the crystal
reports.

AC Elements Bus

This display only field shows the arcing current (in kA) passing through the protective device selected in
the User-Defined Source PD drop-down list. This value can be updated if the update Buses Fault
Currents option has been selected in the arc flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. If the
global Arc Flash program fails to determine the FCT or the arcing current through this PD, this field will
not be updated.
Fault Clearing Time

This field is the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time in seconds. This value can be defined by the user as
the Fault Clearing Time to be used in the determination of the incident energy for the faulted bus.
The global arc flash calculation will use the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time if it fails to determine the
FCT automatically from the existing Star TCCs. A warning message will be shown on the reports if this
condition is present. This field will be hidden if a User-Defined Source PD has been selected from the
drop list right above this field.
The default value for this field is 0.1 seconds. Table 4 below contains some typical Fault Clearing Times
for different voltage levels:
Table 4: Typical Values for User-Defined Fault Clearing Time*

Bus kV Opening Time at Opening time at Opening Time in
60 Hz (Cycles) 50 Hz (Cycles) Seconds
Buses less than 1000 V 6.0 5 0.100
Between 1.0 kV and 35 kV 6.0 5 0.100
> 35.0 kV 8.0 6.5 0.130
* Note: These typical values were taken from NFPA 70E-2000 Appendix B Section B-2-3.3.
Fixed FCT
If this checkbox is selected, then the global arc flash calculation shall use the user-defined Fault Clearing
Time (FCT) value to determine the incident energy of the faulted bus. The calculation would be the
same as that of the situation when the program does not find the FCT and has to use the user-defined time
from the bus except that in this case, the program does not try to find the faulted bus FCT automatically
but uses the user-defined value instead.
Using the Fixed FCT feature does not imply that the program will use this set time to evaluate the
incident energy of Source Protective Devices connected directly to the faulted bus. The program will
still try to find the energy for faults on the line side of source PDs by searching upstream protective
devices.
If this checkbox is selected, the fields Source PD ID drop List and Source PD Arcing Current will be
hidden since they are not applicable. The program will indicate that it used the Fixed FCT on the reports
by showing a flag next to the bus FCT field.
Grounding
This drop-down list allows you to define the type of grounding to be used at this bus. The default value
for this drop-down list is grounded. From the arc flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, you have
the option to use this selection for the global arc flash calculation.

AC Elements Bus
Incident Energy
This is the incident energy based on the User-Defined parameters. The units for the incident energy are
Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the empirically derived
IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage).
This incident energy value is used to determine the User-Defined Hazard/Risk Category and the User-
Defined Flash Protection Boundary (ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough
parameters or the user has no authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002
standards.
Flash Protection Boundary

determined from the User-Defined Incident Energy and Fault Clearing Time. The unit of this field is in
feet.

The hazard/risk category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the User-Defined incident
energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C) (11) of NFPA 70E-2009 is
used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is performed and
you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash module. The value
may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA 70E 2009
(40 Cal/cm2).
Allowable Incident Energy Exposure

In the Allowable field, you can define the incident energy rating of the personal protective equipment
(PPE). This value should be the rating of the equipment with the least protection. The units are in
Cal/cm2. This value is compared automatically by the global arc flash calculation to the calculated
incident energy. If the calculated value exceeds the available PPE protection, the module generates an
alert.
Working Distance
This group provides information about the working distance to be used for the calculation of the incident
energy.
Enter the distance from the possible arc point to the person in inches. This distance is defined as the
distance between the arc point and the persons face and torso. This value has a range of 1 to 999.99 in.
This is the distance value used to determine the incident energy. The default value is dependent on the
voltage level of the device and the equipment type selected in the rating page of the bus editor. When a
new bus is added to the one line diagram, the default equipment type is Other and the default working
distance is set to 18. Once the equipment type is changed, the default value will change according to the
typical values used which are based on IEEE 1584-2002 Table D.7.4. Open the Arc Flash Analysis Data
table to view the working distance values used for the voltage ratings and equipment types.

AC Elements Bus
Note: The Arc Flash Analysis Data table is located in the Project menu under Settings Arc Flash. Refer
to Chapter 10 Menu Bars Section One-Line Diagram Menu Bars for more details.
TCC Plot / Print Label

This section allows you to generate labels or plot the incident energy curves on ETAP STAR.
Calculated Input
The system calculated radio box determines what data is to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label and
what energy is to be displayed on the TCC plot. If this option is selected all the corresponding calculated
values will be used to create the label.
User-Defined Input
The user-defined radio box allows you to use the user-defined data to generate labels or to show the user-
defined incident energy curve on the TCC. If this option is selected all the corresponding user-defined

AC Elements Bus
Template
This drop-down list allows the user to select the template to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label for
the particular bus. There are several templates available generating the labels. Each one of the templates
has different styles.
Print
The print button starts the Crystal Report viewer. From this viewer, you can a print the generated label for
the same bus.
TCC Plot-Calculated or User-Defined Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the system calculated or user-defined incident energy curve as it
varies over time and fault current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the
corresponding curve will appear on the Star View that contains the same bus.
The curve that appears on the Star View is a function of the incident energy and the parameters that vary
are the time and current. If the incident energy value is kept constant, then any combination of FCT and
bolted fault current that falls below this curve yields an incident energy value that is lower.
TCC Plot-Allowable Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the Allowable Incident Energy Curve as it varies over time and fault
current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the corresponding curve will appear on
the Star View that contains the same bus.
Methodology for Quick Incident Energy Calculator
Method Used
For buses in the range of 0.208 kV to 15.0 kV, the empirically derived IEEE Std. 1584 Method is used.
For buses with kV greater than 15, the Theoretically Derived Lee Method is used. ETAP automatically
determines which method is being used according to the bus nominal voltage (bus info page).
Range of Operation
These calculations follow the methodology described in IEEE 1584-2002. The same limitations of this
method apply to the quick incident energy calculator.
1. If any of the following: the Bus Nominal kV, Bolted Fault Current or Fault Clearing Time are set
to zero the calculation is not triggered, and there are no displayed results. This applies to either
set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
2. If the bus nominal kV is less than 0.208 kV, this message is displayed: Lee Method is used
outside empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and
Calculated).
3. If the bolted fault current is outside the range of 0.7 kA to 106 kA and the bus nominal kV is
between 0.208 and 15 kV the following message is displayed: Lee Method is used outside
empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
4. If the fault current decay method is used (AF page of SC study case), then only the source PD ID
and the FCT are updated into the calculated results section.

AC Elements Bus
5. If the user-defined source PD is selected, then there are no results updated into the calculated
section. The only item which may be updated is the arcing current variation flag (for systems
rated less than 1.0 kV) if applicable.
6. If you are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors
7. You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
If the IEEE 1584-2002 Arc Flash Method is not licensed, the calculation is disabled. To get the
authorization to run this program, contact Operation Technology, Inc.
The printing of labels is ruled by the Crystal Reports viewer, which has different export capabilities. You
may need to export the labels to a different file format that is compatible with your label printer. You may
choose to print the labels as templates that can be provided to a label making company.
The following table shows the parameters required to run an arc flash calculation in the Bus Arc Flash
page.
Table 6: Required Parameters for Bus Arc Flash Calculation

Info Page Rating Page Arc Flash Page
Bus Nominal KV Equipment Type Total 3-Phase Fault Current
Gap Between Conductors Fault Clearing Time(FCT)
X-Factor System Grounding
Working Distance

AC Elements Bus
11.1.7 Harmonic Page

The Harmonic page is used to specify the harmonic limit information on a bus.
Harmonic Limit
Category
Select the appropriate designation from the drop-down list. The available choices are General, Special,
Designated, PCC, and Other. This list specifies the bus harmonic limit category per IEEE Standard. When
Point of Common Coupling (PCC) category is selected then ETAP automatically updates the VTHD and
VIHD limits based on bus nominal kV at PCC. These values are obtained from IEEE 519-1992
Recommended Practices for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems (page 85).
VTHD Limit
Choose a value from the drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus
voltage Total Harmonic Distortion limit. The specified value will be compared with the calculated

AC Elements Bus
VTHD from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the
output report.
VIHD Limit
Choose a value from the drop-down list or enter a value from 0 to 999 here. This field specifies the bus
voltage Individual Harmonic Distortion. The specified value will be compared with the calculated VIHD
from the Harmonic Load Flow calculation and any violation of this limit will result in a flag in the output
report.
11.1.8 Reliability Page

AC Elements Bus
Reliability Parameters
A
This parameter is defined as the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone
around the failed component. Therefore, this setting can cause the removal of other healthy components
and branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are
recluse. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. Note, however, that the
failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can
be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
The Mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
MTTF
The Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/ A).
FOR
Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/ A).
MTTR
This is the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component
outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Replacement
Available
Check this box to enable rP.
rP
This is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is the time in hours for switching to an alternative supply after the device failure.
Library
Library Button
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick Editor for reliability data.
Source
This displays the Source Name of the library data selected

AC Elements Bus
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected
Class
This displays the class of the library data selected.
11.1.9 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. The names of the
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu bar.

AC Elements Bus
UD Field 1 (Eq. Ref.)

This is a number field with the default name Eq. Ref. You can change the name of this field and enter the
equipment reference number or any other number here, using up to five digits.
UD Field 2 (Last Maint.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Last Maint. You can change the name of this field
and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field 3 (Next Maint.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Next Maint. You can change the name of this field
UD Field 4 (Tests Req.)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Tests Req. You can change the name of this field and
enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field A5. You can change the name of this field
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, up to 50
alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, using up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element here, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element here, using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

AC Elements Bus
11.1.10 Comment Page

Enter any additional data or comments regarding the condition, maintenance, tests, or studies associated
with this element. This field can be up to 64kb and the default size is 4kb. To increase the size of this
field, you need to change the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key
combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information.

AC Elements Transformer, 2-Winding
11.2 Transformer, 2-Winding

The properties associated with 2-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in 2-Winding Transformer Editor.
In addition to information regarding the use of fixed taps and load tap changers (LTC), this editor
includes the following ten pages of properties:
Info Protection
Rating Harmonic
Tap Reliability
Grounding Remarks
Sizing Comment
11.2.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the 2-winding transformer ID, whether the transformer is in or out of
service, primary and secondary buses, FDR tag, name, and manufacturers data.

Info
ID
Enter a unique ID having up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of transformers increase. The
default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu or from the Project View.
Prim. and Sec.

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 2-winding transformer are designated as primary and secondary
buses. If the primary or secondary terminal of a transformer is not connected to any bus, a blank entry
will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection, after you click OK.
For 3-phase transformers, only 3-phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For 1-phase
transformers, only 1-phase buses will be displayed. For the Prim. field, only 1-phase 2W will be
displayed. For the Sec. field, if the transformer has Secondary Center Tap selected in the Connection

group, only 1-phase 3W will be displayed in the drop-down list. Otherwise, only 1-phase 2W will be
displayed.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, that is,
you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a transformer is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the

transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus
(as shown in the figure below, where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4).
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the primary and secondary bus IDs.
Single-phase transformers can also be connected to phase adapters. If the transformer is connected to a
phase adapter, then the phase adapter ID will show in the Prim. or Sec. field.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a transformer can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an out of service branch can be edited like an in service branch;
however, an out of service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an out of service branch automatically becomes grayed out on the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through an out of service branch will also be de-energized and
become dimmed.
Note: The In Service and Out of Service options are engineering properties that are independent of the
configuration status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Service in Revision Data.
Connection
The phase connections for a 2-winding transformer are defined by selecting 3-Phase or 1Phase, with or
without Secondary Center Tap. The default connection is 3-Phase and can be changed from the Defaults
menu or from the Project View.
The phase connection must be specified before connecting the 2-winding transformer to any bus or phase
adapter. Once the transformer is connected, the phase connection selections will become unavailable.
You need to disconnect the transformer to change the connector type.
3 Phase
Select this to define the transformer as three-phase. This transformer can only be connected to three-
phase buses.
1 Phase
Select this to define the transformer as single-phase. This transformer can only be connected to single-
phase buses and phase adapter. In the adjacent field, it will display the input connection type. The
primary side of the Transformer is always 1 Phase 2 Wire.
Secondary Center Tap

Check this box to define the Secondary side of the transformer as single-phase 3 wire. By checking this
field, the transformer secondary winding will be grounded at the center. Only 1 Phase 3 Wire buses can
be connected to the secondary winding.

Standard
You can select either ANSI or IEC. The class selections will change based on the standard selected.
Type/Class
Based on the standard selected, the fields below will provide different selection options. The tables
below show those selections:
Type
Select the transformer type from the Type list box. The following transformer types are available for both
ANSI and IEC Standards:
Liquid-Fill
Dry
Liquid-Fill (C57.12.80-02) ANSI only
Sub Type
Select the transformer sub type from the Sub Type list box. The following table shows the subtypes
available based on the standard and type of transformer:
Standard Type Subtype Standard Type Subtype

Mineral Oil Mineral Oil
Flammable Liquid Synthetic Liquid <=300
Liquid Less-Flammable Liquid Liquid Synthetic Liquid >300
Fill Fill Non-Flammable
Non-Flammable Liquid
Synthetic Liquid
Other Other
ANSI IEC
Ventilated Sealed
Non-Ventilated Non-Enclosed
Sealed Enclosed
Dry Dry
Other Totally Enclosed
Vent-Dry
Other
Class
Select the transformer class from the list box. The following transformer classes are available:
ANSI, Liquid Fill transformers for all subtypes:
OA OA/FA OA/FOA/FOA Other

OW OA/FA/FA FOA
OW/A OA/FA/FOA FOW

ANSI, Dry transformers:
Subtype Class Subtype Class Subtype Class

AA ANV ANV
Non-Ventilated
AFA Other AA
AFA
Ventilated Other
AA/FA GA AA/FA
Sealed
Other Other GA
Other
IEC, Liquid Fill:
Subtype Class Subtype Class Subtype Class

ONAN KNAN LNAN
ONWN KNWN LNWN
ONWN/ONAN KNWN/KNAN LNWN/LNAN
ONAN/ONAF KNAN/KNAF LNAN/LNAF
ONAN/ONAF/ONAF KNAN/KNAF/KNAF LNAN/LNAF/LNAF
Mineral Oil ONAN/ONAF/OFAF KNAN/KNAF/KFAF LNAN/LNAF/LFAF
Synthetic Non-Flammable
Synthetic ONAN/OFAF/OFAF KNAN/KFAF/KFAF LNAN/LFAF/LFAF
Liquid Synthetic
Liquid <=300 OFAF KFAF LFAF
>300 Liquid
Other OFWF KFWF LFWF
ODWF KDWF LDWF
ONAN/OFAN/OFAF KNAN/KFAN/KFAF LNAN/LFAN/LFAF
OFAN KFAN LFAN
OFAN/OFAF KFAN/KFAF LFAN/LFAF
ONWF KNWF LNWF
IEC, Dry for all subtypes of transformers:
AN GN GNAN GNAN
AF GF GNAF Other
ANAN GNAF ANAF

Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature (in degrees C) from the list box. The following transformer
operating temperatures are available:
Standard Type Class Temp. Rise

55/65
Liquid Fill
65
80
80/100
ANSI All Classes
80/115
Dry
80/150
100
115/150
Standard Type Class Temp. Rise

Liquid Fill All Classes 65
AN 60
AF 75
ANAN 80
GN 100
IEC GNAF 125
Dry GNAN/GN
150
AF
ANAF 150
GNAN 150
Other 150
MFR
Enter the 2-winding transformer manufacturers name.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description

11.2.2 Rating Page

On the Rating page, specify the 2-winding transformer rating, impedance, variation, and tolerance data.
Rating
Prim and Sec kV

Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the 2-winding transformer in kilovolts.
Note: When a transformer is connected to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal
to the bus nominal kV. ETAP uses the voltage at the lowest-numbered swing system as the base voltage
and calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. ETAP will display an error message
when it detects inconsistent voltage bases in parallel or looped systems during system analysis.
If there are parallel transformers in a system that has different voltage ratios, change the voltage ratio of
one of the transformers to make their voltage ratios equal. At the same time, a fictitious tap setting is

required, using the new voltage ratio to correct its turn ratio. A logical choice would be the transformer
winding with the less common kV rating in the system.
Note: Circulating currents are expected in this condition.
As an example, consider the two parallel transformers in the following diagram. To model the
transformers in ETAP, set the tap of the second transformer in such a way that the resulting turn ratio is
equal to the other transformer. If one transformer is rated 13.8-4.16 kV and the second transformer is
rated 13.2-4.16 kV, then both transformer data should be entered as 13.8-4.16 kV (same turn ratios). To
correct for the second transformer turn ratio, specify a tap setting which is equal to the actual kV rating
divided by the new kV rating as shown below.
% Tap = [(13.2/13.8) - 1.0] * 100 = -4.35 %
This transformer should be modeled with a negative tap setting of 4.35% on the primary side.
Remember that a positive tap setting tends to lower the operating voltage of the secondary bus, while a
negative tap raises it. In this case, the transformer turns ratio modeled in ETAP is larger than the actual
turn ratio, without the introduced tap setting. Because the secondary bus would operate at a voltage, use a
negative tap to raise the voltage at the secondary bus. Use this rule to determine whether the tap
correction should be positive or negative.
Note: If this transformer has an actual tap setting of 2.5%, this value should be added to the off-nominal
tap of -4.35%, i.e., -4.35% + 2.5% = -1.85%.
MVA Rating
This value is used as the base MVA for the transformer impedance. For example, the nameplate
transformer impedance given at the OA 55 C rating should be specified as the MVA rating for a
transformer, which has OA 55 C/FA 65 C ratings.
Max MVA Capability

This value, if non-zero, is used to calculate the overload percentage of the transformer. If the maximum
MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the branch will be flagged on the overload

summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero and this
branch will not be included in the overload summary report. For a transformer with OA 55 C/FA 65 C
ratings, the FA 65 C rating should be used as the MVA capability if fans have been installed on the
transformer.
This value is also used as a base for the transformer flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
FLA
This displays the primary winding and secondary winding full load amperes.
Connected Bus
This displays the bus nominal kVs of the connected primary and secondary terminals.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances

These are the positive and zero sequence impedances at the nominal tap setting, in percent, with the
transformer MVA and kV ratings as the base values. These values correspond to the nominal positive
and zero impedance, which are subject to manufacturer tolerance limits and tap position.
ETAP models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances. ETAP
takes the voltage of the swing bus (a bus with a connected swing machine) as the base voltage. It then
calculates the system base voltages using the transformer turn ratio. If the transformer turn ratio matches
the ratio of the base kVs of the buses between which it is connected, but the actual numbers are not the
same (e.g., the primary bus base kV is 13.8 and the secondary bus is 4.349 kV, while the transformer kV
ratings are 13.2-4.16 kV), ETAP adjusts the nameplate impedance to a new base with the following
formula:
Zt, new = Zt, rated * (Transformer Rated kV/Bus Base kV) 2
In some cases, when you have parallel transformers with different voltage ratings, introduce a fictitious
tap setting so that the calculated base voltage at the load side of the transformers will be the same value
(refer to 2-Winding Transformer kV rating).
X/R Ratio
Enter the transformer X/R ratio. This value is used in ETAP to calculate the transformer winding
resistances and reactances from given percent impedances.
Typical Z and X/R and Typical X/R

Click the appropriate button to obtain the typical 2-winding transformer impedance together with X/R
ration, or X/R ration only. The typical impedance and X/R ratio data for 2-winding transformers are
based on two sources: American National Standard C57.12.10 and Industrial Power System Handbook by
Beeman.
The Industrial Power System Handbook by Beeman (page 96) specifies typical data for transformers that
has rating not larger than 500 kVA and primary voltage not higher than 12.47 kV.
Typical Impedance for Transformer Less Than or equal to 500 kVA:

Group 1* Group 2+
Rating
%Z X/R %Z X/R
kVA 5 2.3 0.88 2.8 0.77
5< kVA 25 2.3 1.13 2.3 1.00
25< kVA 50 2.6 1.69 2.4 1.54
50< kVA 100 2.6 1.92 3.7 2.92
100< kVA 167 4.0 3.45 3.7 3.60
167< kVA 500 4.8 4.70 5.2 5.10
* Group 1: Transformers with high voltage windings of less than or equal to 8.32 kV
+ Group 2: Transformers with high voltages of greater than 8.32 kV and less than or equal to 12.47 kV
American National Standard C57.12.10 specifies impedance values for transformers larger than 500 kVA.
Typical Impedance for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Low Voltage Side Low Voltage Side 2.4 kV

High Voltage Side
< 2.4 kV Without LTC With LTC
kV 13.8 5.75** 5.5**
13.8 < kV 23 6.75 6.5 7.0
23 < kV 34.5 7.25 7.0 7.5
34.5 < kV 46 7.75 7.5 8.0
46 < kV 69 8.0 8.5
69 < kV 115 8.5 9.0
115 < kV 138 9.0 9.5
138 < kV 161 9.5 10.0
161 < kV (230) 10.0 10.5
** Self-cooled transformers with greater than 5000 kVA values are the same as those for 23 kV high
voltage.
Typical X/R Ratios for Transformer More Than 500 kVA:
Rating X/R Rating X/R

MVA 1 5.790 8 < MVA 10 15.50
1 < MVA 2 7.098 10 < MVA 20 18.60
2 < MVA 3 10.67 20 < MVA 30 23.70
3 < MVA 4 11.41 30 < MVA 40 27.30
4 < MVA 5 12.14 40 < MVA 50 29.50
5 < MVA 6 12.85 50 < MVA 100 34.10
6 < MVA 7 13.55 100 < MVA 200 42.00
7 < MVA 8 14.23 200 < MVA 1000 50.00
Z Variation
Use this field to enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values
are not zero, then the final 2-winding transformer impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap

impedance values (entered for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary
and secondary winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance
variation at 5% tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer
impedance.
% Variation @ -5% Tap

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at 5% tap position, in percent of the transformer
impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either
the primary and secondary winding tap changes.
Zt at 5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ 5% Tap)/100
% Variation @ +5% Tap

Use this field to enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position; in percent of the transformer
impedance at nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either
the primary and secondary winding tap changes.
Zt at +5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ +5% Tap)/100
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value in this field. This value
should be zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value. For a new transformer with a
designated impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer.
The value of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the
positive or negative value, which will result in the most conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative Positive
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X

Motor Starting X
Transient Stability X
Harmonics X
Optimal Power Flow X
For instance, if 7.5% tolerance is specified, ETAP will use +7.5% tolerance for load flow, motor starting,
dynamic stability, and harmonic calculations, while using -7.5% for short-circuit calculations.
11.2.3 Tap Page

Within the Tap page, specify the transformer tap data for both fixed taps and LTC taps. Transformer
winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.
Fixed Tap
% Tap and kV Tap

Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage in these fields, while the button is set on % Tap, or click
the Tap button for kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in kV.
Note: In either case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.

You can click the up/down arrows next to the fields. By clicking on the arrows, you will be stepping to
the available tap settings based on the entries on the Prim/Sec Fixed Tap Range Editors. You can
access the editor by clicking on the Prim/Sec buttons on the left of the fields.
ETAP allows modeling of an off-load tap (fixed tap) changer on either side or both sides of transformers.
Standard off-load tap changer transformers typically have 5.0% settings available, with two steps above
and two steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, -
2.5, 0, 2.5, or 5.0.
The transformer is treated as a simple circuit impedance for transformers without voltage taps or where
the tap is set at nominal value (n = 0). ETAP uses the following Pi circuit representation to model
transformer tap settings:
where
Yt = 1/Zt Transformer admittance in per unit
N = 1 + n/100 Turn ratio in per unit
n = 100 ( N - 1 ) Tap setting in percent
Positive (+) tap setting on the primary side (P) decreases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
Negative (-) tap setting on the primary side (P), increases the voltage on the secondary side (Vs).
As this model indicates, placing +10% tap setting (n=+10%, or N=1.1) at the primary side is not
equivalent to -10% tap at the secondary side. ETAP will correctly model a transformer with a tap setting,
as long as the tap setting is indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap
changer). To increase the voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value.
Note: however, that this will only work if current flows from the tap changer bus to the bus where the
voltage is being corrected.
Prim/Sec Buttons
Click these buttons to access the Primary or Secondary Fixed Tap Range Editors and set the maximum
and minimum tap positions as well as the tap step for the transformer fixed taps.
Per Unit Turn Ratio

Display the transformer turn ratio in per unit, using the fixed tap setting.
Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 - %Tap/100

LTC/Voltage Regulator
You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on both transformer
windings. However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on both windings of the transformers.
AVR Prim.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the primary
winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, else it is in manual mode.
AVR Sec.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the secondary
LTC Button
When the associated checkbox is selected, the LTC button is enabled. Click this button to enter LTC
data.
Manual or Operating Tap

Here you can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC
automatic mode by clicking on the up or down arrows.
The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies providing the option for Update Transformer
LTCs is selected in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Note: the tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in automatic
mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is used as the initial value.
Real Time Scanned

When in On-Line monitoring mode, Real-Time will display the Scanned Tap Position value for this
transformer in this field.
Power Station
Unit Transformer for Generator
Check this box to define this transformer as a unit transformer. A drop-down field is displayed to assign
this transformer to a generator.
In addition, the Tap Optimization button is displayed.
Tap Optimization
Clicking the Tap Optimization button will display the Transformer Tap Optimization Editor. In this
editor, you can calculate the optimal tap position. See Transformer Optimization Chapter for more
details.
Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify phase shift associated with the transformer. The phase shift angle is
displayed in the Sec field, which determines the secondary voltage angle with respect to primary voltage

angle. For example, a value of -30 indicates that the secondary voltage leads the primary voltage by -30
degrees or, equivalently, it secondary voltage lags the primary voltage by 30 degrees.
Std Positive Seq.

Select this option to specify positive sequence phase-shift, which means that when the primary and
secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high voltage side leads the
low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec field displays 30
degrees; otherwise, the Sec field shows 30 degrees. When the primary and the secondary have the same
connection type, the phase-shift is zero.
Std Neg. Seq.

Select this option to specify negative sequence phase-shift, which is the opposite of the previous case.
When the primary and secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high
voltage side lags the low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec
field displays 30 degrees; otherwise, the Sec field shows -30 degrees. When the primary and the
secondary have the same connection type, the phase-shift is zero.
Special
When this option is selected, the Sec. Field becomes enabled and you can specify the phase shift in this
edit box. Note that the value your entered is the angle at which the secondary with respect to the primary.
Sec.
This field is for display only when one of the first two options is selected. It shows the angle at which the
secondary winding with respect to the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter
the phase-shift in the field.
11.2.4 Primary/Secondary Fixed Tap Range

Tap Settings
% Tap/kV
Enter the transformer tap settings below in percent, while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap
button for kV tap selection and enter the settings in kV. Note that in either case, ETAP calculates the
equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min.
Enter the minimum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Max.
Enter the maximum tap setting for the transformer Prim/Sec winding.
Step
Displays the step size in percent or kV based on the %Tap/kV.
# of Taps
Enter the number of Taps or click the up/down arrows to increase/decrease the number of taps of the
transformer. Based on this entry and the Maximum and Minimum tap settings, the program calculates the
step size and displays it on the Step field.
11.2.5 Load Tap Changer Dialog Box

Transformer load tap changers (LTC) can be accessed through the editors of either the 2-winding or 3-
winding transformers. To activate an LTC for any transformer winding, click the box on the left side of
the LTC button. Then click the LTC button to access its editor and enter the LTC data.

Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Select the bus ID of an existing bus for which the LTC will be regulating or controlling the voltage. The
default bus is the secondary bus.
Note: The load flow routine may not be able to regulate the voltages of the buses that are not affected by
the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may reach its limit before the desired voltage is reached for the
controlled bus. Possible examples of this are when the regulated bus is not downstream of the
transformer, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in between the two components. When this occurs, the
LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated bus.
Voltage Control
Voltage
Enter the desired voltage of the regulated bus in percent of the bus nominal voltage, i.e., the regulated bus
voltage. In the load flow type analysis; ETAP will adjust the LTC setting until the voltage of the
regulated bus is within the upper or lower bands of the desired voltage.
Upper Band
Enter the upper band value above the desired voltage.
Lower Band
Enter the lower band value below the desired voltage.
The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram,
when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band (green area), the LTC will not move; if
the voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or less than (Desired
Voltage Lower Band), the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus voltage close to its
desired value.
In order for the LTC to work properly, ETAP forces the sum of the upper and lower bands to be larger
than or equal to the LTC step.
Tap
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer load tap changer (LTC) tap setting as a percentage while the button is set on % Tap;
or click the Tap button for kV Tap selection and enter the transformer LTC tap setting in kV. In either
case, ETAP calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min
Enter the lower limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (-15 for 15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV
value of the lower range of the LTC setting.

Max
Enter the upper limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (15 for 15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value
of the upper range of the LTC setting.
Step
Enter the LTC step size in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 0.625 for a
10% range with 33 steps (sixteen steps on each side plus the nominal setting). If the kV Tap is
selected, enter the step size of the LTC in kV.
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. Tap, and Step.
# of Taps
This value is automatically calculated and displayed according to the following formula:
# of Taps = 1 + (%Max Tap - %Min Tap)/(%Step)
You can adjust this value to change Step:
%Step = (%Max Tap %Min Tap)/(# of Taps 1)
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds. This is the time duration from the moment when the
regulated bus voltage goes outside and stays outside the voltage control band to the time when the LTC
triggers the first step change.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds. This is the time duration that the LTC takes to complete a
step change.
11.2.6 Grounding Page

Display
The options Font and Symbols determine how the grounding connection is displayed on the one-line
diagram.
Font
Display connection using ETAP Font. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded
Symbols
Display grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line element
can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the standard. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor Grounded
The benefit in using symbols is that you can place ground CTs to connect protective devices such as
relays.

Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:
Type Description
Open Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded)
Solid Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path
Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path
Reactor A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path
Xfmr-Reactor A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the secondary of
the transformer.
A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the secondary
Xfmr-Resistor
of the transformer.
Resistor \ Reactor Grounding Ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2
Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded generators, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohm)
Ohm
Resistor or Reactor impedance in ohms
Transformer-Resistor \ Transformer Reactor Grounding Ratings

V ln
kV1
Transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms)

Prim Ohms
Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer
kV2
Transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
Secondary current in amps. This calculated based on the primary amps and the transformer turn ratio.
Sec Ohms

Resistor / Reactor impedance in ohms. This is calculated based on the grounding transformer turn ratio
and secondary current. If sec. Ohms are entered first, then the primary amps and ohms will be calculated
automatically.
Transformer kVA
Grounding transformer kVA rating.
11.2.7 Sizing Page

Refer to Chapter 31, Section 31.1 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing for information on this page for
the 2-winding Transformer.
11.2.8 Protection Page

This page contains options for plotting the transformer damage curve on an active Star View. Even
though transformers are the simplest and most reliable devices in an electrical system, transformer
failures can occur due to any number of internal or external conditions that make the device incapable of
performing its proper function.
Some of the common failures are:
Winding failure
Terminal and no-load tap changer failure
Bushing failure
Load tap changer failure
Insulation breakdown
Appropriate transformer protection should be used with the following objectives:

Protect the system in case of a transformer failure
Protect the transformer from system disturbances
Overcurrent protective devices such as fuses and relays have well defined operating characteristics. The
characteristic curves for such devices should be coordinated with transformer through-fault withstand
capability curves or transformer damage curves.

Short-Circuit
Calculated
Three phase short-circuit fault current (kA) is calculated / updated based on the through-fault current as
seen by the transformer for a fault placed on primary and/or secondary side of the transformer. System
impedance is calculated based on 3-phase fault current. The 3-phase fault current is updated automatically
when Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked on the Star (PD Coordination) toolbar in
Star Mode.
The primary / secondary fault kA is calculated based on prefault voltage to the rated primary/ secondary
kV of the transformer, respectively.

Fault on Prim.
When Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar for a fault placed on the
primary side of the transformer, the primary through-fault current (kA) is calculated and updated.
Fault on Sec.
When the Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked on the Star (PD Coordination) toolbar
for a fault placed on the secondary side of the transformer, the primary through-fault current (kA) is
calculated and updated.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on fault placed on
primary or secondary side.
Zs (Fault on Prim.)
Calculated system impedance from short-circuit update. This is the system impedance in percent on the
secondary side of the transformer as seen by the fault on the primary side.
Zs (Fault on Sec.)
Calculated system impedance from short-circuit update. This is the system impedance in percent on the
primary side of the transformer as seen by the fault on the secondary side.

Xs/Rs (Fault on Prim.)

Calculated system X/R ratio. This is the system X/R ratio on the secondary side of the transformer based
on a fault on the primary side of the transformer.
Xs/Rs (Fault on Sec.)

Calculated system X/R ratio. This is the system X/R ratio on the primary side of the transformer based on
a fault on the secondary side of the transformer.
Zs+Zt (Fault on Prim.)

Equivalent percent impedance (system + transformer rated) as seen from the primary side of the
transformer. The Zs+Zt calculation contains the affect of transformer taps as well as impedance tolerance.
Zs is the difference between total impedance (Zs+Zt) and Zt (rated transformer impedance). Hence Zs
may include the affect of transformer tap and tolerance and may not represent true system impedance.
Zs+Zt (Fault on Sec.)

Equivalent percent impedance (system + transformer rated) as seen from the secondary side of the
transformer. The Zs+Zt calculation contains the affect of transformer taps as well as impedance tolerance.
Zs is the difference between total impedance (Zs+Zt) and Zt (rated transformer impedance). Hence Zs
may include the affect of transformer tap and tolerance and may not represent true system impedance.
Xs+t/Rs+t (Fault on Prim.)

Equivalent X/R (system + transformer rated) as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
Xs+t/Rs+t (Fault on Sec.)

Equivalent X/R (system + transformer rated) as seen from the secondary side of the transformer.
User-Defined
If it is not possible to run short-circuit to update fault current for every transformer, user-defined values
for short-circuit current, impedance, and X/R may be used.
Note: Zs+Zt and Xs+t/Rs+t are displayed only for the user-defined option.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on the fault placed on
the primary or secondary side depending on the selection in Plot Options.
Pin (Disable Short-Circuit Update)

Select this option to disable auto update of short-circuit current from 3-phase Short-Circuit Analysis.
When this option is selected and Run / Update Short-circuit Clipping kA button is clicked, Fault on Prim.
And Fault on Sec. values remains unchanged or pinned.
Fault Frequency
Fault frequency determines the shape of the transformer damage curve depending upon the application of
the transformer in an electrical system.
Note: The fault frequency option is not available (is grayed out) if the IEC Transformer Standard is
selected.

Frequent
For applications in which faults occur frequently, the through-fault curve represents the fact that the
transformer is subjected to both thermal and mechanical damage. An example of this is transformers with
secondary side overhead lines.
Infrequent
For applications in which faults occur infrequently, the through-fault curve represents the fact that the
transformer is subjected primarily to thermal damage. An example of this is transformers with secondary
side conductors enclosed in a conduit.
Curve Shift
Apply Curve Shift

Select to apply transformer curve shift. The ANSI curve shift is applied as a multiplier to the current
(horizontal axis) components of the entire transformer damage curve. The curve shift is dependent upon
the connection specified in the Grounding page of the Transformer Editor. The table below describes this
relationship:
Connection Factor
Delta Delta 0.87
Delta Wye Solid Grounded 0.58
Source: IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRY. VOL. 1A-22 JULY/AUGUST 1986
Note: The Curve shift option is not available (is grayed out) if the IEC Transformer Standard is selected.
Magnetizing Inrush
Inrush Curve Type

Select the type of inrush curve to display: Points, Curve Piecewise, or Curve Equation.
Multiplier
Select current multiplier to plot the transformer inrush point on the Star View. Typical multiple values are
6, 8, 10 and 12. These are multiples of FLA of the transformer. The FLA of the transformer is selected

based on Device - Adjustment setting in Star Plot options. For example, if the FLA of the transformer is
1804 Amps based on the secondary winding and magnetizing inrush multiplier is 8, then the magnetizing
current would be 8 times 1804 or 14.4 kA based on secondary side.
Duration\Time Constant
When the inrush curve type is Point or Curve Piecewise, the inrush duration is entered here in cycles.
When the inrush curve type is Curve Equation, the time constant is entered here in cycles.
Damage Curve
Show on TCC
Click to display transformer damage curve on the Star View. Transformer damage curves are always
shown on Star Views by default.
If ANSI is selected as the standard (on the Info page) of the transformer, then the damage curve is based
on the ANSI C57.109 Standard.

If IEC is selected as the standard (on the Info page) of the transformer, then the damage curve is based on
the IEC 76-5 Standard.

Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a
harmonic library needs to be defined here.

Harmonic Library
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Harmonic Editor. Only current harmonic
sources can be added to transformers.

Pick a manufacturer name and a model name (using the current Source harmonic type) from the Library
Quick Pick - Harmonic Editor.
Type
Displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
Displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
Displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic library.
Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)

Prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
Prints the harmonic spectrum.
K-Factor
The transformer K-Factor defines the additional thermal capacity of the transformer to tolerate the heating
affects of harmonic currents.
FLA
Prim.
Transformer full load amps as seen from the primary side.
Sec.
Transformer full load amps as seen from the secondary side.
I Total (%)
Transformer full load current in percent of rated FLA, including additional capacity for harmonic current.
I Total
Prim.
Transformer full load amps including additional capacity for harmonic currents as seen from the primary
side.
Sec.
Transformer full load amps including additional capacity for harmonic currents as seen from the
secondary side.

A
This is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is
around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and
branches from service. When the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are
reclosed, this leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted,
however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed
component) could be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
P
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year. The passive failure rate is associated with
the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does
not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component
will restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent opening of
breakers. Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated
with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore
does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed
component restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.

MTTR
This is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR ( =
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P (MTTF =
1.0/( A+ P)).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/( A+ P)).
Replacement
Available
Check this box to enable rP
rP
This is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library

11.2.11 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, using up to 50
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


Enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with
this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field,
refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key

11.3 Transformer, 3-Winding

The properties associated with 3-winding transformers of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor. In addition to information regarding the use of load tap changers (LTC), the 3-Winding
Transformer Editor includes the following ten pages of properties:
Info LTC Harmonic Comment

Rating Grounding Reliability
Tap Protection Remarks
11.3.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the 3-winding transformer ID, In/Out of Service, Primary, Secondary, and
Tertiary Buses, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and Manufacturers data..
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the default
transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of transformers
increase. The default transformer ID (T) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.

Primary, Secondary and Tertiary

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a 3-winding transformer are designated as Primary, Secondary, and
Tertiary buses. If the primary, secondary, or tertiary terminal of a transformer is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or reconnect a transformer to a bus, select a bus
from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the transformer resides, i.e., you
cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a transformer is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the

transformer to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where T2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Connection
Displays the transformer phase connection type. Currently 3-Winding Transformers are 3 Phase only.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a transformer can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch;
however, an Out of Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads
and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and become
dimmed.
Note: the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property, which is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description
Enter the equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Type/Class
MFR
Enter the 3-winding transformer manufacturer name.
Type
Select the transformer type from the list box. The following transformer types are available:
Cast-Coil Sealed-Dry
Gas-Fill-Dry Vent-Dry
Liquid-Fill Other
Non-Vent-Dry (non-vented dry type)
Class
Select the transformer class from the list box. The following transformer classes are available:
AA OA/FA/FOA NAN FWF ANAN

AA/FA OA/FOA/FOA NWN DWF ANAF
AFA OW NWN/NAN NAN/FAN/FAF GN
FOA OW/A NAN/NAF FAN GF
FOW ANV NAN/NAF/NAF FAN/FAF GNAF
OA GA NAN/NAF/FAF NWF GNAN/GNAF
OA/FA Other NAN/FAF/NAF AN GNAN
OA/FA/FA NAF FAF AF
Temp
Select the transformer operating temperature from the list box. The following transformer operating
temperatures are available:
55 115
60 130
65 150
80
Other temperatures can be typed directly into the temperature box.
BIL
Select the transformer basic impulse level (BIL) in kV from the list box. The following transformer basic
impulse levels are available:
10 95 250 900 2050

20 110 350 1050
30 125 550 1300
45 150 650 1550
60 200 750 1800

11.3.2 Rating Page

Within the Rating page, specify the 3-winding transformer ratings, impedance and its variation and the
tolerance data.
Rating
Prim - Sec - Ter kV Rating

Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary voltage ratings of the 3-winding transformer in kilovolts.
Note: When connecting a transformer to a bus, the kV of the winding (if it is equal to zero) is set equal to
the bus nominal kV. ETAP uses the voltage at the lowest-numbered swing system as the base voltage and
calculates the other base voltages using the transformer ratios. ETAP gives an error message when it
detects inconsistent voltage bases in parallel or looped systems during system analysis.
Prim - Sec - Ter MVA Rating

Enter primary, secondary, and tertiary MVA or kVA ratings of the 3-winding transformer. The MVA
rating of the primary winding is used as the base MVA for all transformer impedances. For example, for
a 20/15/5 MVA transformer with an OA 55 /FA 65 C rating, the nameplate transformer impedances
should be entered in 20 MVA base (OA 55 C rating).
Max MVA Capability

These values, if non-zero, are used to calculate the percent overload of the transformer windings. If the
maximum MVA capability of the transformer is greater than zero, the branch will be listed on the
overload summary page of the load flow output report, i.e., ETAP will ignore this value if it is set to zero
and this branch will not be included in the overload summary report. For a transformer with OA 55 /FA

65 C ratings, the FA 65 C rating should be used as the maximum MVA capability if fans have been
installed on the transformer.
This value is also used as a base for the transformer flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
FLA
This displays the FLA of the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings in amperes.
Connected Bus
This displays the nominal kVs of the connected buses to the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances

For 3-winding transformers, specify three impedance values in percent on the primary winding MVA
base:
Zps = Leakage Z between the Primary and Secondary windings with the Tertiary winding open
circuited.
= Rps + j Xps = Rp + Rs + j ( Xp + Xs ) % (base MVA = MVAp)
Zpt = Leakage Z between the Primary and Tertiary windings with the Secondary winding open
circuited.
= Rpt + j Xpt = Rp + Rt + j ( Xp + Xt ) % (base MVA = MVAp)
Zst = Leakage Z between the Secondary and Tertiary windings with the Primary winding open
circuited.
= Rst + j Xst = Rs + Rt + j ( Xs + Xt ) % (base MVA = MVAp)
These are the nameplate impedances of the transformer; no further calculations are needed to extract the
impedances of the 3-winding representation, as ETAP already does this internally. The following example
is provided to indicate how the impedance parameters of a three-winding transformer must be entered in
ETAP.
30/25/5 MVA
230/13.8/4.16 kV
MVAp = 30 kVp = 230

MVAs = 25 kVs = 13.8
MVAt = 5 kVt = 4.16
Zps = 9.5 % MVAb = 30, X/R ps = 48.2

Zpt = 9.4 % MVAb = 30, X/R pt = 46.9
Zst = 18.1 % MVAb = 30, X/R st = 42.5

ETAP models the transformers in the system using the positive and zero sequence impedances. ETAP
takes the voltage of the swing bus (a bus with a connected swing machine) as the base voltage. It then
calculates the system base voltages using the transformer turn ratio. If the transformer turn ratio matches
the ratio of the base kVs of the buses between which it is connected, but the actual numbers are not the
same (e.g., the primary bus base kV is 13.8 and the secondary bus is 4.349 kV, while the transformer kV
ratings are 13.2-4.16 kV), ETAP adjusts the nameplate impedance to a new base with the following
formula:
Zt,new = Zt,rated * (Transformer Rated kV/Bus Base kV)2
In some cases, parallel transformers with different voltage ratings are present. If this happens, a fictitious
tap setting is required. In order to calculate this setting, refer to 2-Winding Transformer kV rating.
X/R Ratio
Enter the transformer X/R ratios. For 3-winding transformers, three X/R values are needed,
corresponding to the 3-winding impedances Zps, Zpt, and Zst.
X/R ps = Xps/Rps
X/R pt = Xpt/Rpt
X/R st = Xst/Rst
These ratios are used in ETAP to calculate the transformer winding resistances and reactances from given
percent impedances.
Z Variation
Enter transformer impedance variations with respect to the tap settings. If these values are not zero, then
the final transformer impedance will be calculated based on the nominal tap impedance values (entered
for Positive and Zero Sequence Impedances, %Z fields), transformer primary, secondary, and tertiary
winding tap positions (from both the fixed tap and the LTC tap settings), and impedance variation at 5%
tap and +5% tap. A linear interpolation is used to calculate the final transformer impedance.
% Variation @ -5% Tap

Enter transformer impedance variation at 5% tap position, in percent of the transformer impedance at
nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either the primary ,
secondary, or tertiary winding tap changes.
Zt at 5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ 5% Tap)/100

% Variation @ +5% Tap

Enter transformer impedance variation at +5% tap position in percent of the transformer impedance at
nominal tap position. This value is used to adjust the transformer impedance due to either the primary ,
secondary, or tertiary winding tap changes.
Zt at +5% Tap = (Zt at Nominal Tap) * (100 + % Variation @ +5% Tap)/100
Z Tolerance
Enter the transformer impedance tolerance as a percentage of the nominal value. This value should be
zero for an existing transformer with a known impedance value. For a new transformer with a designated
impedance value this should be the impedance tolerance range specified by the manufacturer. The value
of the tolerance must be entered as a positive value and ETAP will automatically use the positive or
negative value, which will result in the most conservative solution.
Tolerance
Negative Positive
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Harmonics X
Optimal Power Flow X
For instance, if 7.5% tolerance is specified, ETAP will use +7.5% tolerance for load flow, motor starting,
dynamic stability, and harmonic calculations, while using -7.5% for short-circuit calculations.
11.3.3 Tap Page

You can specify the 3-winding transformer tap data for both fixed tap and LTC tap within the Tap page.
Transformer winding and grounding connections are also specified in this page.

Fixed Taps
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button for
kV tap selection and enter the transformer tap setting in percent or kV. In either case, ETAP calculates
the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
ETAP allows modeling a tap off-load (fixed tap) changer on all three sides of the transformer. Standard
off-load tap changer transformers typically have 5.0% settings available, with two steps above and two
steps below the nominal tap setting. For these transformers, the value of (n) may be set at -5.0, -2.5, 0,
2.5, or 5.0.
The transformer is treated as a simple circuit impedance for transformers without voltage taps or where
the tap is set at a nominal value (n = 0),.
Placing a +10% tap setting (n=+10% or N=1.1) at the primary side is not equivalent to -10% tap at the
secondary side. ETAP will correctly model a transformer with a tap setting as long as the tap setting is
indicated in the proper field (corresponding to the winding that has the tap changer). To increase the
voltage at the other side of the transformer, use a negative tap value.
Note: This will only work if current flows from the tap changer bus to the bus where the voltage is being
corrected.

Per Unit Turn Ratio

Display the transformer turn ratio in per unit, using the fixed tap setting.
Per Unit Turn Ratio = 1.0 - %Tap/100
Connection
These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and rating of the grounding device in amperes.
Grounding can be placed on any transformer winding.
Prim./Sec./Ter. Buttons
The transformer grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the
desired connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Auto LTC (Load Tap Changer)

You can have both fixed and LTC tap settings (off-load and manual on-load) on all transformer windings.
However, you cannot have LTC automatic actions on more than 2-windings of the 3-winding
transformers.
Prim.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the primary
Sec.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the secondary
winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is in manual mode.
Ter.
Check this box to activate automatic control action of the Load Tap Changer (LTC) for the tertiary
winding, i.e., if selected LTC is in automatic mode, otherwise it is in manual mode.
LTC Button
When the associated checkbox is selected, the LTC button is enabled. Click this button to enter LTC
data.
LTC Tap Position
Operating
You can enter the LTC tap positions for the LTC manual mode or as the initial position for the LTC
automatic mode here.
The LTC tap positions get updated from load flow studies providing the option for Update Transformer
LTCs is selected in the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Note: The tap settings entered here are added to the fixed tap setting for all studies. If LTC is in
automatic mode, this calculated value (fixed tap + LTC Tap Position) is used as the initial value.
OnLine Scanned
If in the On-Line Monitoring mode, Real-Time will display the scanned Tap Position in this field.

Phase Shift
This group allows the user to specify phase-shift associated with the transformer. Phase-shift for a 3-
winding transformer can be uniquely defined by two values. ETAP uses Sec. and Ter. to describe phase-
shift of a 3-winding transformer. The value displayed in the Sec. field is the secondary voltage angle with
respect to primary voltage angle and the value displayed in the Ter. field is the tertiary voltage angle with
respect to primary voltage angle. For example, a value of 30 in the Ter. field indicates that the tertiary
voltage leads the primary voltage by 30 degree, or equivalently it actually lags the primary voltage by 30
degrees. The phase-shift between the secondary and the tertiary windings can be calculated from the
values in the Sec. and Ter. fields.
Std Pos. Seq.

Select this option to specify positive sequence phase-shift, which means that when the primary and
secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high voltage side leads the
low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec field displays 30
degrees; otherwise, the Sec field shows 30 degrees. When the primary and the secondary have the same
connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules apply to the primary and tertiary windings and
the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter field.
Std Neg. Seq.

Select this option to specify negative sequence phase-shift, which is the opposite of the previous case.
When the primary and secondary windings have different connection types (Delta-Y or Y-Delta), the high
voltage side lags the low voltage side by 30 degree. If the primary side has higher rated voltage, the Sec.
field displays 30 degrees; otherwise, the Sec. field shows -30 degrees. When the primary and the
secondary have the same connection type, the phase-shift is zero. The same rules apply to the primary
and tertiary windings and the phase-shift value is displayed in the Ter. field.
Special
When this option is selected, the Sec. and Ter. fields become enabled and you can specify the phase-shift
in these two edit boxes.
Sec.
This field is for display only when one of the first two options is selected. It shows the angle at which the
secondary winding with respect to the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter
Ter.
When one of the first two options is selected, this field is for display only and it shows the angle at which
the tertiary winding with respect the primary winding. When the third option is selected, you can enter

Display
The button options Font and Symbols allow you to determine how the grounding connection is displayed
Font
Display connection using ETAP Font. For Example:
Delta-Wye Resistor-Wye Solid Grounded
Symbols
Display grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line element
can be sized, rotated, deleted, and changed depending on the grounding connection type. For Example:

Delta-Wye Resistor-Wye Solid Grounded
The main purpose of using symbols is to show ground CTs on the one-line and connect them to devices
such as relays.
Primary / Secondary/ Tertiary

These entries specify the transformer connection, type, and rating of the grounding device in amperes.
Grounding can be placed on any transformer winding.
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:
Type Description
Xfmr-Reactor A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the secondary of
the transformer.
Xfmr-Resistor A Transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the secondary
of the transformer.
Resistor \ Reactor Grounding Ratings:
V ln
Amp
Enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes for a resistor or reactor grounded generators.
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohm)
Ohm
This is the resistor or Reactor impedance in ohms.
Transformer-Resistor \ Transformer Reactor Grounding Ratings:

V ln
The line-to-neutral voltage is calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2
kV1
This is the transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms)
Prim Ohms
This is the Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
kV2
This is the transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
This is the secondary current in amps. This calculated based on the primary amps and the transformer
turn ratio.
Sec Ohms
This is the Resistor / Reactor impedance in ohms. This is calculated based on the grounding transformer
turn ratio and secondary current. If sec. Ohms are entered first, then the primary amps and ohms will be
calculated automatically.
Transformer kVA
This is the grounding transformer kVA rating.
11.3.5 Load Tap Changer Dialog Box

Regulated Bus
Bus ID
Select the bus ID of an existing bus for which the LTC will be regulating or controlling the voltage. The
default bus is the secondary bus.
Note: The load flow routine may not be able to regulate the voltages of the buses that are not affected by
the LTC action. In such cases, the LTC may reach its limit before the desired voltage is reached for the
controlled bus. Possible examples of this are when the regulated bus is not downstream of the
transformer, or there is a voltage-controlled bus in between the two components. When this occurs, the
LTC cannot control the voltage of the regulated bus.
Voltage Control
Voltage
Enter the desired voltage of the regulated bus in percent of the bus nominal voltage, i.e., the regulated bus
voltage. In the load flow type analysis; ETAP will adjust the LTC setting until the voltage of the
regulated bus is within the upper or lower bands of the desired voltage.
Upper Band
Enter the upper band value above the desired voltage.
Lower Band
Enter the lower band value below the desired voltage.
The upper band and lower band together define the dead band for the LTC. As shown in the diagram
below, when the voltage of the regulated bus falls within the dead band (gray area), the LTC will not
move; otherwise, if the voltage of the regulated bus is higher than the (Desired Voltage + Upper Band) or
less than (Desired Voltage Lower Band), the LTC will make a step adjustment to control the bus
voltage close to its desired value
Upper Band
Desired Voltage
Lower Band
Tap
% Tap/kV Tap
Enter the transformer LTC tap setting in percent while the button is set on % Tap, or click the Tap button
for kV Tap selection and enter the transformer LTC tap setting in kV. Note: in either case ETAP
calculates the equivalent value for the other tap setting entry format.
Min
Enter the lower limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (-15 for 15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV
value of the lower range of the LTC setting.

Max
Enter the upper limit (range) of the LTC tap setting in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is
selected, enter 10.0 for a 10% range (15 for 15% range). If the kV Tap is selected, enter the kV value
of the upper range of the LTC setting.
Step
Enter the LTC step size in kV or % of the winding kV rating. If the % Tap is selected, enter 0.625 for a
10% range with 33 steps (sixteen steps on each side plus the nominal setting). If the kV Tap is
selected, enter the step size of the LTC in kV.
kV Tap
These three fields will display the corresponding kV values for LTC Min. tap, Max. tap, and Step.
# of Taps
This value is automatically calculated and displayed according to the following formula:
# of Taps = 1 + ( %Max Tap - %Min Tap)/(%Step)
You can adjust this value to change Step:
%Step = (%Max Tap %Min Tap)/(# of Taps 1)
Time Delay
Initial
Enter the LTC initial time delay in seconds.
Operating
Enter the LTC operating time delay in seconds.

This page provides options that allow you to plot the transformer damage curve on an active Star View.
Even though transformers are the simplest and most reliable devices in an electrical system, transformer
failures can occur due to any number of internal or external conditions that make the device incapable of
performing its proper function.
Some of the common failures are:
Winding failure
Terminal and no-load tap changer failure
Bushing failure
Load tap changer failure
Insulation breakdown
Appropriate transformer protection should be employed with the following objectives:
Protect the system in case of a transformer failure

Protect the transformer from system disturbances
Overcurrent protective devices such as fuses and relays have well defined operating characteristics. The
characteristic curves for such devices should be coordinated with the transformer through-fault withstand
capability curve or transformer damage curve.
Short-Circuit
Calculated
Three phase short-circuit fault current (kA) is calculated / updated based on the through-fault current as
seen by the transformer for a fault placed on primary and/or secondary and/or tertiary side of the
transformer. System impedance is calculated based on 3-phase fault current. The 3-phase fault current is
updated automatically when Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked in Star Mode.
The primary / secondary / tertiary fault kA is calculated based on prefault voltage to the rated primary/
secondary kV of the transformer, respectively.

Fault on Prim.
When Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA is clicked from the Star toolbar, the primary through-
fault current (kA) is calculated and updated for a fault placed on the primary side of the transformer.
Fault on Sec.
fault current (kA) is calculated and updated for a fault placed on the secondary side of the transformer.
Fault on Ter.
fault current (kA) is calculated and updated for a fault placed on the tertiary side of the transformer.
The transformer damage curve can then be plotted on Star View and viewed based on the Protection and
Fault selected from Plot Options.
Pin (Disable Short-circuit Update)

Select this option to disable auto update of short-circuit current from 3-phase short-circuit analysis. When
this option is selected and Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button is clicked, Fault on Prim.,
Fault on Sec. and Fault on Ter. values remain unchanged or pinned.

Fault Frequency
Fault frequency determines the shape of the transformer damage curve depending upon the application of
the transformer in an electrical system.
Note: For ANSI Category I and IV, frequent and infrequent curves are considered identical. Curves are
drawn based on transformer Type selected on the Info page. A Liquid-Fill selection is treated as Liquid-
Fill Type transformer. All other Type selections are treated as Dry Type transformer.
Frequent
For applications in which faults occur frequently, the through-fault curve shows how the transformer is
subjected to both thermal and mechanical damage (for example, transformers with secondary or tertiary
side conductors enclosed in conduit).
Infrequent
For applications in which faults occur infrequently, the through-fault curve shows how the transformer is
subjected primarily to thermal damage (for example, transformers with secondary or tertiary side
overhead lines).
Curve Shift
Apply Curve Shift

Select to apply transformer curve shift. The ANSI curve shift is applied as a multiplier to the current
(horizontal axis) components of the entire transformer damage curve. The curve shift is dependent upon
the connection specified on the Grounding page of the Transformer Editor. The table below describes
this relationship:
Connection Factor
Delta Delta 0.87
Delta Wye Solid Grounded 0.58
Source: IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON INDUSTRY. VOL. 1A-22 JULY/AUGUST 1986

For 3-winding transformers, the curve shift is applied based on the connection from Primary Secondary
or Primary Tertiary, depending the of plot side (Secondary or Tertiary).
Magnetizing Inrush
Inrush Curve Type

Select the type of inrush curve to display: Points, Curve Piecewise, or Curve Equation.
Multiplier
Select current multiplier to plot the transformer inrush point on the Star View. Typical multiple values are
6, 8, 10 and 12. These are multiples of FLA of the transformer. The FLA of the transformer is selected
based on Device - Adjustment setting in Star Plot options. For example, if the FLA of the transformer is
1804 Amps based on the secondary winding and the magnetizing inrush multiplier is 8, then the
magnetizing current would be 8 times 1804 or 14.4 kA based on the secondary side. Typical inrush
multipliers for 3-winding transformers are given below.
kVA Multiplier
0 1000 9.5 12
1000 10000 5.9 11.4
10000-100000 3.6 7.5
> 100000 2.5 4.8
Source: Siemens Power Engineering Guide, Transmission and Distribution, 4th Edition
Duration\Time Constant
When the inrush curve type is Point or Curve Piecewise, the inrush duration is entered here in cycles.
When the inrush curve type is Curve Equation, the time constant is entered here in cycles.
Damage Curve
Show on TCC
Check the box to display the transformer damage curve on the Star View. Transformer damage curves are
shown on Star Views by default.


Transformer saturation can be modeled by a current harmonic source. To include the saturation effect, a
harmonic library needs to be defined on this page.

Type
This displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
This displays the selected manufacturer names from the harmonic library.
Model
This displays the selected model names for the selected manufacturer from the harmonic library.
Wave Form
This displays one cycle of the current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)

This prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
This displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
This prints the harmonic spectrum.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Note: Only current harmonic sources can be added to transformers.
From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, pick a manufacturer name and a model name (Current
Source harmonic type).

A
This is the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the
component failure mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone around the failed
component and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
service. When the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this
leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could
P
breakers.
Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated with the
component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore does not
have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the failed component
restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/( A+ P)).
FOR
MTTR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
This displays the class of the library data selected

11.3.9 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info



and enter any extra data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

UD Field A5

UD Field A6
and enter any additional data for this element here, up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


AC Elements Cable
11.4 Cable
The properties associated with cables of the electrical distribution system one-line diagram can be entered
in this Data Editor.
ETAP allows you to place cables in the one-line diagram to connect two elements (two buses, a motor to
a bus, or a static load to a bus) and place the same cable in a cable raceway. However, you can add cables
to the one-line diagram without placing them in a cable raceway, or add cables to the raceway without
adding them to the one-line diagram. To explain this further, here are the definitions of the four types of
cables in ETAP.
1. One-Line Cable appears as a graphical element on the one-line diagram.

This is a cable that you add to the one-line diagram to connect buses, but
has not been previously routed through any cable raceway, i.e., does not
exist in any raceway.
2. Equipment Cable can be attached to equipment such as motors and

static loads, but do not appear graphically as a separate element on the
one-line diagram. This is a cable that you add to equipment from the
Equipment Editor, and has not been placed in any raceway.
3. Raceway Cable is used exclusively within the cable raceway system

only. This is a cable, which is routed through a raceway such as an
underground cable system, but does not exist in the one-line diagram
or as an equipment cable.
4. Compound Cable represents a cable that is included in the cable

raceway system as well as the one-line diagram (either as a one-
line or equipment cable). This cable is added to the one-line
diagram as a one-line or equipment cable, and then is placed
inside a raceway (graphically or from Cable or Raceway
Editors). Or, conversely, the cable is added as a raceway cable,
and then is placed in the one-line diagram as a one-line cable.
Compound Cables
The following paragraphs describe three different methods of changing a one-line or equipment cable to a
compound cable (routing an existing cable through a raceway):

AC Elements Cable
From the underground raceway presentation, click the Existing Cable button on the Edit toolbar and place
the cable in the desired location. Then select the desired one-line or equipment cable from the selection
box provided.
From the Cable Editor, Routing page, route the cable through any raceway that exists in the system.
These cables are attached or associated with the raceways without being placed in a specific location
inside the raceway. From the underground raceway system, you can then graphically move the cable to
the desired location.
To graphically place a one-line cable inside a cable raceway, select the cable from the one-line diagram
and press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button down). The pointer will now have an X over it
indicating that you can only drop it in an underground cable system. Hold the mouse button down until
you have moved the pointer from the one-line view to the UGS view, place the pointer on top of a conduit
or the desired location in a raceway, and then release the mouse button. Since an equipment cable is not
displayed graphically in the one-line diagram, you can only use the first two methods explained above to
route an equipment cable.
Note: a raceway cable cannot be changed to an equipment cable. However, an equipment cable can be
changed to a compound cable.
You can add a raceway cable to the one-line diagram and make it a compound cable in two ways:
1. First select the cable from the raceway and cut it to the Dumpster. Now you can add it back to the
same raceway as an existing cable while a copy of it stays in the Dumpster. To add this cable to the
one-line diagram, use the Move From Dumpster command.
2. Select the cable from the raceway and then press <Ctrl><Shift>+Click (holding the mouse button
down). The pointer will change to a cable shape with an X over it. Hold the mouse button down
until you have moved the pointer from the UGS view to the desired location on the one-line view, and
then release the mouse button.
The Cable Editor includes the following eleven pages of properties.
Info Ampacity
Impedance Sizing
Physical Reliability
Protection Remarks
Routing Comment
Loading
11.4.1 Info Page

You can specify the cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Length, Size, number of
conductors per phase, and Library link from within the Info page of the Cable Editor.

AC Elements Cable
Cable Type
This information is displayed on top of every page of the Cable Editor to reflect the cable type and size
selected from the Cable Library. This is a partial list of the library header which includes the library
source name (ICEA, NEC), rated voltage (0.6, 5, 15 kV), voltage class (100%, 133%), # of conductors
per cable (1/C, 3/C), conductor type (CU, AL), insulation type (Rubber, XLPE), installation type
(Magnetic/Non-Mag.), and cable size (350 kcmil, 180 mm2). The unit for cable sizes will be in
AWG/kcmil for English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables.
Note: ETAP provides list of all available cable sizes from the selected library for quick selection.
If you change the cable size, all library data will be substituted from the cable library into the Cable
Editor. If you modify any data that was extracted from the library, the color of Cable Type will change to
a dark blue color to indicate that there is a conflict between the editor and library data.
Info
ID

AC Elements Cable
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each cable. The assigned IDs consist of the default cable ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of cables increase. The default
cable ID (Cable) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a cable branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of
a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show
the new connection after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you
For 3 Phase Cables, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For Single Phase Cables
only single phase buses will be displayed.
If a branch is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the branch to a
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown here
where Branch X is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses next to the From and To bus IDs for your convenience.
Single Phase Cable can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as such, then the
Phase Adapter ID will be shown in the Primary or Secondary field.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a cable can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch. However, an
Out of Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and

AC Elements Cable
branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and become
dimmed.
status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in the
Revision Data.
Connection
Cables can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase cable by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Defines the cable as a three-phase cable. This cable can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Defines the cable as a single-phase cable.
Library
Library Button
To select cables from the Cable Library, click the Library button and the Cable Library Quick Pick will
appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library type and size at the same time.
Note: After the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to the Cable Editor, the
cable size can be changed directly from the Cable Editor and the cable parameters are refreshed from the
library. Therefore, the most important action is to select the correct Cable Library type from the Cable
Library Quick Pick. When data are transferred from the Cable Library, ETAP automatically corrects the
cable reactance for the system frequency.
Link to Library
A library link is also available to use Cable Library data instead of the stored cable impedance and
dimension parameters that are displayed in the Cable Editor.
Note: Link to Library is only used at the time of execution of studies. For example, when you run a load
flow study, ETAP uses the cable library type and size as an identifier to extract data from the Cable
Library. This option is provided so that you can globally update the cable parameters by changing the
library data only.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description

AC Elements Cable
Length
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
miles, meters, and kilometers.
Note: Every cable in the system can have a different unit.
Tolerance
Enter the percent of tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to
consider +/- % tolerance in line length, effectively increasing or decreasing the impedance based on the
type of study being performed.
# Conductors / Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e. if 2-3/C cables or 6-1/C cables are used (6 conductors
total), then the number of conductors per phase is equal to two (2).
11.4.2 Impedance Page

AC Elements Cable
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R and R0)

Enter positive and zero sequence resistances at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per
conductor. This is for each conductor, not the total resistance per phase. ETAP corrects these resistances
for different studies based on the specified temperature limits. The zero sequence resistance is used only
for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactance (X and X0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence reactance levels, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor.
This is for each conductor, not the total reactance per phase. These reactance levels must be entered at
the system operating frequency specified for this data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or
Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically corrects for the system operating frequency. After this
value is entered here, ETAP will not make any adjustment to this value. The zero sequence reactance is
used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y and Y0)

Enter positive and zero sequence susceptance levels in siemens or siemens per unit length, for each
conductor. If the value of Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the
charging susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the circuit. If Y=0, the cable is treated as a
simple impedance. This susceptance must be entered at the system operating frequency specified for this
data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically
corrects for the system operating frequency. After this value is entered here, ETAP will not make any
adjustment to this value. The zero sequence susceptance is used only for unbalanced fault current
calculations.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a
length should also be designated, including a unit from the list box. Units available are: feet, miles,
meters, and kilometers.
Cable Temperature
Base Temperature
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistances are entered.
Minimum and Maximum Temperature

Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero
sequence resistances (R and R0) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating
temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type. For example:
Temperature Limit
Min Max
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X

AC Elements Cable
If this correction is not wanted, set both minimum and maximum temperature limits equal to the base
temperature. ETAP uses the following equations for temperature corrections:
R = R ( 234.5 + Tc )/( 234.5 + Tb ) Copper Conductors

R = R ( 228.1 + Tc )/( 228.1 + Tb ) Aluminum Conductors
where:
R = Resistance at base temperature Tb
R = Resistance at operating temperature Tc
Tb = Conductor base temperature in C
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in C
When the conductor type is not known (no cable library is selected), ETAP defaults to copper as a
conductor type.
11.4.3 Physical Page

AC Elements Cable
Dimensions
The physical properties of cables entered in this page are only used for calculating engineering data
needed for cable ampacity derating studies (U/G Raceway Systems) only.
Rdc
This is the DC resistance of the cable in micro ohm at 25 degrees C.
Cable OD
This is the overall cable outside diameter including the sheath, armor and/or jacket in inches or
centimeters.
Conductor OD
This is the physical outside diameter of the conductor in inches or centimeters.
Insulator t
This is the thickness of the conductor insulation in mil or mm.
Sheath t
This is the thickness of cable sheath or armor in mil or mm. This value becomes zero if the Sheath/Armor
option is set to None.
Jacket t
This is the thickness of outer cable jacket in mil or mm.
Weight
This is the weight of the cable in lbs/1000ft or kg/km.
Max. Tension
This is the maximum tension that the cable can withstand without damage in lbs/kcmil or kg/mm2.
Max. SW
This is the maximum Side Wall pressure in lbs/ft or kg/m.
Conductor Construction
Conductor construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for calculating the
ac to dc ratio parameters. Several available choices of conductor construction are:

CmpRnd-Treated Compact RoundNone Coated Treated
The coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to
a drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.

AC Elements Cable
Shielding
Choose shielded or not shielded.
Sheath/Shield End Connection

Choose either the open or grounded option. Grounded option implies that the sheath and shield are
grounded at more than one location.
Sheath/Armor Type
None St Armor/45dg/20w St Armor/45dg/80w Cu Concentric Wire
Lead Sheath St Armor/45dg/25w St Armor/45dg/90w Al Concentric Wire
Aluminum Sheath St Armor/45dg/30w St Armor/45dg/100w Copper Sheath
St Armor/30dg/15w St Armor/45dg/40w St Armor/45dg/9999w
St Armor/30dg/20w St Armor/45dg/50w Copper Armor
St Armor/30dg/25w St Armor/45dg/60w Steel Armor
St Armor/45dg/15w St Armor/45dg/70w Aluminum Armor
Type Definition
Jacket Type
Jacket Types available:
None NeoPrene RHH THW

Paper PVC RHW THWN
PE FEP SA TW
XLPE FEPB SIS UF
EPR MI TA USE
SBR MTW TBS V
Rubber PFA TFE XHHW
Rubber1 PFAH THHN
Rubber2 RH THHW
11.4.4 Loading Page

The Loading page provides information regarding cable loading (amp) and other parameters, which are
used in cable ampacity derating (Underground Raceway System) and cable sizing calculations.

AC Elements Cable
Operating Load / Current

The operating load is specified in amps. This value is used for steady-state temperature calculation or as
the initial value of the cable load profile for the transient temperature calculation. The operating Avg.
Phase A, Phase B, and Phase C can be updated with the results from Load Flow Studies. You can do this
by checking the Update Cable Load Amp option in the Info Page of the Load Flow and Unbalanced Load
Flow Study Cases.
Growth Factor (GF)

The Projection Multiplying Factor (MF) must be specified in percent. This value is used to indicate
future load projection (load reduction or growth). You can select the option to use this Projection
Multiplying Factor for cable temperature calculations from the Cable Ampacity Derating Study Case.
Loading Current for Sizing
Operating Current
The operating load current specified for this cable in the Loading page will be used if this option is
selected.

AC Elements Cable
Full Load Amps of Element

The continuous current rating (rated current or FLA) of the selected element will be used for sizing
requirements. The motor ID is displayed here for motor equipment cables and the FLA of the motor is
used.
User-Defined
Use this option to enter any value for the cable current.
NEC 430.6
The ampacity of the equipment cables is based on the motor ratings as determined by section 430.6 of
NEC Code. The current, in Amps, is derived based on the following:
Motor Type Motor Nameplate HP Motor Rated kV Motor Connection NEC Table
(or equivalent in kW) Number
DC Motor 1/4 to 200 0.090 to 0.550 430.247
AC Induction 1/6 to 10 0.115 to 0.23 Phase-to-Ground 430.248
AC Synchronous 1/6 to 10 0.115 to 0.23 Phase-to-Ground 430.248
AC Induction 1/2 to 200 0.115 to 2.3 Phase-to-Phase 430.249
AC Synchronous 1/2 to 200 0.115 to 2.3 Phase-to-Phase 430.249
AC Induction 1/2 to 500 0.115 to 2.3 3-Phase 430.250
AC Synchronous 25 to 200 0.23 to 2.3 3-Phase 430.250
UnderGround Raceway (UGS)
Load Factor
The load factor is the ratio of average load to peak load in percent. Use the following equation to
calculate the load factor:
Load Factor = 100 ( kWi x Ti )/( kWp x Tt ) %

= 100 E/( kWi x Tt ) %
where
i = Interval of time when the load is non-zero
kWi = Load at interval i
Ti = Number of hours of interval i
kWp = Peak load
Tt = Ton + Toff
Ton = Total hours when the load is on
Toff = Total hours when the load is off
E = Energy (kWh) consumed by load over the interval
If the cable carries load (current) at every interval, then the equation can be simplified to the percentage
of time that the cable will be carrying the current:
Load Factor = 100 Ton/Tt %

= 100 % (if it carries the load for 24 hours per day)
IEC 287 Method ignores the load factor. It uses 100% Load factor for the calculation of the conductor
temperature.

AC Elements Cable
Sheath/Armor Current
The sheath/armor current can be specified as a percent of cable load current. This value indicates the
amount of neutral or ground current that is carried by sheath or armor, and is considered only by the
Neher-McGrath Method.
Transient Load Profile

The load profile provides up to 20 time and current entry fields for specifying the loading pattern of the
cable as a function of time.
# Time Current
1 0.0 230
2 3.5 560
3 7.3 400
4 0.0 0.0 (all data from this point are
ignored since time = 0.0)
In this example, the cable loading is changed from the steady-state (initial value) to 230 amperes at time
zero, to 560 amps at time 3.5 hours and finally to 400 amps after 7.3 hours. The steady-state or initial
value can either be 230 amps (value entered at the first time slot) or it can be set equal to the cable
operating load. You can set the option for the initial/steady-state value from the Cable Derating Study
Case Editor.
Time Unit
Select the time units for the load profile.
Optimization Options
These options are for ampacity and sizing calculations for the U/G raceway systems.
Fixed Current
If this box is selected, the cable current will remain unchanged for the ampacity calculations (Uniform
Temperature and Uniform Ampacity). Use this flag for cables that do not require ampacity optimization.
Fixed Size
If this box is selected, the cable size will remain fixed for the cable sizing calculations.

The Protection page provides options related to cable protection. It includes options for plotting the cable
thermal capability (I2t) curve on a Star View, updating short-circuit current, and cable protection
information specifically for cable installations compiling with BS 7671 Standard. Cables do not have
unlimited power handling capability and need protection to prevent operation beyond that capability in

AC Elements Cable
the event of short-circuit conditions. The main cause of reduced cable lifetime is high temperature
generated by continuous overloading or uncoordinated fault protection. Cable protection is required to
protect personnel and equipment.
Thermal Capability
Plot I2t
When this option is selected, a cable thermal capability curve will be plotted on the active Star View.

AC Elements Cable
This option is active only when a cable is selected from the library.
For a new cable, Plot I2t option is unavailable, as shown below.

AC Elements Cable
The thermal capability curve is an I2t characteristic curve that depends on the following parameters:
Conductor temperature
Insulation type
Number of conductors per phase

The ambient temperature of air is assumed to be 40C and the fusing temperature of copper is 1083C.
The thermal capability curve is always drawn between 1 to 10 seconds.
Conductor Temperature
When a cable is selected from the library, the thermal capability curve can be plotted based on operating
conductor temperature or base (manufacturer) conductor temperature. This temperature is the initial
temperature of the cable before a fault or overload condition.
The base conductor temperature (Tc) is available from the library and is displayed on the Ampacity page
of the Cable Editor.
If the cable is applied where the conductor temperature does not match the manufacturer specified base
temperature, then the operating temperature value can be modified to display the appropriate thermal
capability curve. If the operating conductor temperature is lower than the base conductor temperature,
then the cable will have higher thermal capability.

AC Elements Cable
Reference kV
Calculated Base kV
This kV value is automatically updated with terminal bus base kV when you Run/Update Short-Circuit
kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination Mode and at least one cable terminal bus is faulted.
This is a display only field.
Short-Circuit Current (Sym. rms)

This group allows you to specify the maximum and minimum short-circuit current when the terminal bus
of the cable is faulted. These short-circuit current are used for cable sizing as well as for determining the
equivalent system impedance. The short-circuit current can also be updated automatically when you
Run/Update Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination mode.
Calculated
Select Calculated to let ETAP update Max. Fault kA, Min. Fault kA and X/R. These values are updated
by running Run / Update Short Circuit kA in Star mode. Max. kA is updated with Cycle kA for
standard ANSI and Max Short-Circuit Current for standard IEC. Min. Fault kA and X/R is updated with
30 Cycle kA for standard ANSI and Min. Short-Circuit Current for IEC. If both terminal buses of the
cable are faulted the fault kA from the bus that has bigger Max/ Fault kA will be used.
When this option is selected the kA and X/R fields in this group become display only.
User-Defined
You may enter the Max. kA, Min. kA and X/R by selecting the User-Defined option. Once this option is
selected, the kA and X/R fields in this group become editable.
Max. 3 Ph.
Enter or display the maximum short-circuit current in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If
"Calculated" is selected, ETAP will update this field automatically when 1/2 cycle short circuit is run in
STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted. If both of the cable terminal buses are faulted for one run
of short circuit study, the bigger value will be displayed. Based on this current, the positive sequence
impedance of the equivalent system is calculated. It is assumed that the negative sequence impedance of
the equivalent system is the same as that of positive sequence.
Min. L-G
Enter or display the minimum short-circuit current in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. For a three-
phase system, this generally is the short-circuit current for a line-to-ground fault. If "Calculated" is
selected, ETAP will update this field automatically when 30 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and
a cable terminal bus is faulted. If both of the cable terminal buses are faulted for one run of a short-circuit
study, the smaller value will be displayed. Based on this current, ETAP calculates the zero sequence
impedance of the equivalent system.
X/R
This is the X/R for the faulted terminal bus of the cable. This field is automatically updated with Min. L-
G field.
Pin (Disable Update)

This checkbox is enabled only when the Calculated option is selected. When this option is selected, the
Fault kA fields will not be updated when you Run / Update Short Circuit kA in Star Mode.

AC Elements Cable
Protective Device
Overload
This section is used only for BS 7671 and IEC 60364 based cable sizing. You may select the "None",
"User-Defined" or "Device ID" option for overload protection. When the User-Defined option is selected,
the In, I2 and BS 3036 fields will be enabled. When Device ID is selected the Overload ID/Type
dropdown list will be available for selecting a Device ID.
In Nominal current of overload protection device in amperes.

I2 Operating current of overload protection device in amperes.
BS 3630
Check BS 3036 if the overload protection is a Fuse to BS 3036. This field is applicable only when the BS
7671 is selected as the installation standard in the Ampacity page.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overload protection devices (Fuse,
Circuit Breaker, Recloser, Overload Heater and In-Line Overload Relay) for the cable will be
automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the protective devices attached to this cable will be
collected. If either side of the cable does not have a protective device, the collection is extended and will
stop at a bus with more than two connectors, a transformer, a double throw switch, a source or a load.
In and I2
Enter or display the In and I2 values for the selected Overload protection. If User-Defined is selected in
the Overload field, this field is editable and allows user to enter the values. If a protective device is
selected in the ID/Type dropdown list, these values are filled automatically.
Overcurrent
Select "None", "User-Defined" or "Device ID" for overcurrent protection. If User-Defined is selected,
user can enter the Overcurrent Protection Time which is used for cable sizing. If Device ID is selected the
Overcurrent ID/Type dropdown list will be available for selecting a Device ID.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overcurrent protection devices (Fuse,
Circuit Breaker, and Recloser) for the cable will be automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the
protective devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a
protective device the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors, a
transformer, a double throw switch, a source or a load.
Time
Enter or display the maximum three-phase short-circuit time in seconds. This time is used in cable sizing
if Short-Circuit requirement option is checked on the Sizing page. If User-Defined is selected in the
Overcurrent field, this field is editable and allows user to enter the time. If a protective device is selected
in the ID/Type dropdown list, this field is filled automatically. The time is found from the protective TCC
and is based on the Max. 3 Ph. kA in the Short-Circuit Current section. For a fuse, the total clearing time
is used. For a circuit breaker, the time is the relay TCC time plus circuit breaker operating time. Please
refer to Chapter 18 for circuit breaker time determination. Note that if a LVCB has its own trip device and
is interlocked with a relay the longer trip time will be used.

AC Elements Cable
11.4.6 Ampacity Page
Calculation Methods and Standards

Dependent on the cable installation type, different methods can be used to calculate cable ampacity.
IEEE 399
This calculation method is according to the IEEE Std 399, IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems Analysis. It covers installation types of underground duct and directly
buried. The calculation is based on ampacity at a base condition and adjustment factors derived from
detailed calculations using the Neher-McGrath Method.
These factors established a maximum feasible load capacity, which results in no reduction of the cables
expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several components as listed on the
following page.
Fta = Derating factor for ambient temperature

Ftc = Derating factor for maximum allowable conductor temperature
Fth = Derating factor for underground soil thermal resistance
Fg = Derating factor for cable grouping
Fc = Derating factor for A/G tray covers
Fm = Derating factor for A/G tray maintained spacing
Fce = Cumulative effect factor for A/G trays
Fm = Derating factor for A/G conduit (NEC and diversity factor)

AC Elements Cable
Ffc = Derating factor for A/G fire coating

Ffs = Derating factor for A/G fire stop
Ffw = Derating factor for A/G fire wrap
ICEA P-54-440
The method based on ICEA P-54-440 applies to cables in above ground trays using calculated derating
factors based on tray size, cable fill, and environment conditions. The actual values of tray depth, width,
and % fill entries will be taken into account, which gives more accurate results and is based on the
method described in the Stolpe paper (Paper 70 TP 557-PWR)1. However, the Stolpe Method may
provide a smaller ampacity for large cables (for example, 750 mm2) compared to those from ICEA P-54-
440.
In addition, if both the ambient temperature and conductor temperature differ from those shown in the
ICEA Standard (40 0C ambient temperature and 90 0C conductor temperature), the resulting ampacity
values may be smaller because the standard used the product of both correction factors as the temperature
correction. In ETAP calculations, the ambient temperature and conductor temperature values are used
directly in the calculation and, therefore, yield more accurate results.
In the used method, the following AC resistance equations for temperature corrections are employed:
R = R(234.5 + Tc) / (234.5 + Tb) Copper Conductors

R = R(228.1 + Tc) / (228.1 + Tb) Aluminum Conductors
Where:
R = Resistance at the base temperature Tb

R = Resistance at the operating temperature Tc
Tb = Conductor base temperature in OC
Tc = Conductor temperature limit in OC
NEC
This method calculates derating factors for cable trays according to NEC. It applies to cables in above
ground trays, conduits, and air drop. NEC does not provide ampacity derating due to bottom cover or
correction of the ampacity multiplying factors due to the cumulative effects of combinations of tray
covers and fireproofing. In general, cable sizes of 2/0 AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a
randomly filled manner, with a maximum of two cables high.
Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a uniform depth up to the maximum
of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here corresponds to a maximum fill condition
and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal depths.
For NEC standard, the selected cable Base ampacity must be in accordance with the ampacities listed in
the tables from NEC Article 310.
BS 7671 - 16th Edition

This method is based on BS 7671 - 2001 (16th Edition), Requirements for Electrical Installation. It
applies to a number of types of installation, including above ground and underground configurations. This
method can be used for cables at nominal voltages up to and including 1000V a.c. and 1500V d.c.

AC Elements Cable
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30 Co per BS 7671. The cable Base
maximum conductor temperature (Tc) is determined based on cable conductor type and insulation type
corresponding to Tables 4D1A and onwards of BS 7671.
Cable Base Ampacity is from Tables 4DA1 and onwards of BS 7671. Under certain conditions, the base
ampacity may not be available from these tables and the Base Ampacity field will show zero. In this
case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Cable Derated Ampacity is displayed in the Derated Ampacity field. The following derating factors are
considered for cable derating calculation:
Ca Correction factor for ambient temperature. The factor is from Table 4C1 or Table 4C2 of BS
7671 Appendix 4.
Cg Correction factor for grouping. The factor is from Tables 4B1, 4B2 or 4B3 of BS 7671
Appendix 4.
Ci Correction factor for conductors embedded in thermal insulation. Refer to Section 523-04 of
BS 7671 for detailed information.
Cf Correction factor for BS 3036 fuse. A factor of 0.725 is applied for cables protected by a fuse
to BS 3036. Refer to Section 5 of BS 7671 Appendix 4 for detailed information. A BS 3036
Fuse is specified on the Protection page by selecting User-Defined Overload Protection
device.
If a de-rating factor cannot be determined, the Derated Ampacity field on the Ampacity page will show
zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Sheath and Jacket Layer

According to BS 7671, sheath layer is an important factor in ampacity calculation and the sheath layer
can be either metallic or non-metallic. In the current version of ETAP, a sheath layer is only metallic:
lead or aluminum. A Jacket in ETAP is treated as non-metallic sheath for BS 7671 based calculation.
Therefore, for ampacity calculation based on BS 7671, it is considered that the cable has a sheath layer if
the cable has either a sheath layer or a jacket layer. It is required to enter a nonzero thickness value if a
Sheath/Amor or Jacket Type is selected. Note that Paper type Jacket is not treated as a sheath for BS 7671
based calculation.
Flexible cable is not handled in this ETAP release.
IEC 60364-5-52
This method is based on IEC 60364-5-52, Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Wiring
systems. It applies to a number of types of installation, including above ground and underground
configurations. This method can be used for cables with nominal voltages up to and including 1000V a.c.
and 1500V d.c.
The displayed cable Base ambient temperature (Ta) is fixed at 30o C for in air installation and 20 Co for in
ground per IEC 60364-5-52. The cable Base maximum conductor temperature (Tc) is determined based
on cable conductor type and insulation type corresponding to Tables A.52-1 to A.52-13 of Annex A, IEC
60364-5-52.

AC Elements Cable
Cable Base Ampacity is from Tables A.52-2 to A.52-13 of Annex A, IEC 60364-5-52. Under certain
conditions, the base ampacity may not be available from these tables and the Base Ampacity field will
show zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Cable Derated Ampacity is displayed in the Derated Ampacity field. The following derating factors are
considered for cable derating calculation:
Ca Correction factor for ambient temperature. The factor is from Table A.52-14 or Table A.52-15
of IEC 60364-5-52 Annex A. Correction is considered based on Table A.52-16 for soil
thermal resistivities other than 2.5K-m/W (250 C-cm/W). Interpolation or extrapolation is
used if a factor cannot be found directly from the table.
Cg Correction factor for grouping. The factor is from Tables A.52-17 to A.51-21 of IEC 60364-5-
52 Annex A. For a group containing different sizes of insulated conductors or cables are not
considered for this ETAP release.
If a de-rating factor cannot be determined, the Derated Ampacity field on the Ampacity page will show
zero. In this case you may refer to ETAP log pane for more information.
Sheath and Jacket Layer

According to IEC 60364-5-52, sheath layer is an important factor in ampacity calculation and it can be
either metallic or non-metallic. In the current version of ETAP, a sheath layer is only metallic: lead or
aluminum. A Jacket in ETAP is treated as non-metallic sheath for 60364-5-52 based calculation.
Therefore, for ampacity calculation based on 60364-5-52, it is considered that the cable has a sheath layer
if the cable has either a sheath layer or a jacket layer. It is required to enter a nonzero thickness value if a
Sheath/Amor or Jacket Type is selected. Note that Paper type Jacket is not treated as a sheath for 60364-
5-52 based calculation.
Installation
The cable installation type can be specified based on the installation types or the standard used for
calculation.
Standard
If the option of Standard is selected, the Standard list field contains all the calculation standards currently
available in ETAP, including IEEE 399, ICEA P-54-440, NEC, BS 7671 - 16th Edition and IEC 60364-
5-52. When one of these standards is selected from the list, the Installation Type list will contain only the
installation types applicable to the standard. The table below gives all the installation types and applicable
standards.
Note: If NEC standard is selected, the ampacity of the selected cable must be per the ampacities as listed
in the NEC Tables Article 310.
Type
If the option of Installation Type is selected, the Installation Type list field contains all the installation
types currently available in ETAP. When one of these installation types is selected, the Standard list field
will contain only the standards applicable to the selected installation type. The table below gives all the
installation types and applicable standards.

AC Elements Cable
# Installation Type IEEE ICEA P- NEC BS - 7671 IEC Installation Pictures

399 54-440 60364
1 UG Duct X X
2 UG Buried X X
3 Trenches X
4 Embedded Direct X X
5 A/G Trays X X X X
6 Brackets X X
7 Cleats X
8 Ladder X X
10 A/G Conduit X X X
11 Open & Clipped X X

Direct
12 Air Drop X X X
13 Building Voids X X
14 Trunking X X
15 Wire Mesh X
16 Channel X
17 Architrave/ X
Window Frame
18 Masonry X

AC Elements Cable
Sub-Type
When the BS 7671 or IEC 60364 Standard appears in the Standard field, the installation sub-type and
Installation Method will also show up along with the installation type. You can select a different
installation sub-type from the list.
Method
This field displays the Installation Method for the selected sub-type per Table 4A1, BS 7671: 2001,
Requirements for Electrical Installations as shown below.
This field displays the Installation Method for the selected sub-type per Table 52-3, IEC 60364-5-52,
Requirements for Electrical Installations as shown below.
Note: Magnetic/Non-magnetic Installation

magnetically Installed cables:

Magnetically Non- Magnetically
Installed Installed
U/G Buried X
A/G Tray No Cover X
A/G Conduit - PVC X

AC Elements Cable
A/G Conduit Mag. Conduit

Air Drop X
Temperature/RHO
This section includes information about cable temperature and earth thermal resistivity if the installation
type is U/G Duct or U/G Buried.
Base
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius centimeter obtained from the library for the base
ampacity. The ambient temperature is the temperature at a cable installation location when the cable
installation is absent. Base ampacity for U/G cables are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Conductor temperature in degrees Celsius obtained from the library for the base ampacity. This order is
usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt obtained from the library for
the base ampacity. The fields for RHO will be hidden if the installation type is not U/G Duct or U/G
Buried.
Operating
Ta
Ambient temperature for actual underground installations in degrees Celsius. The ambient temperature is
the temperature at the cable installation location when the installation is absent.
Tc
Maximum allowable conductor temperature for actual underground installations in degrees Celsius.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil for actual underground installations in degrees Celsius centimeters per
Watt.

AC Elements Cable
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for comparison of base, derated and, required ampacities. The method
used here is based on a concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity to calculate the
derated ampacity.
Id = F x Ib
FLA / Operating
This field displays the required load current for the cable. For a branch cable, the required current will be
the Average operating current entered or updated by load flow calculations in the Loading page of the
Cable Editor
For an equipment cable, the option of FLA/Operating will be enabled. If the FLA option is selected, the
required current is the full load ampere of the load. If the Operating option is selected, the required
current will be the Average operating current entered or updated by load flow calculations in the Loading
page of the Cable Editor.
Base
The full rated current value in amperes for the chosen cable before any derating occurs. This is the
ampacity stated or specified by the manufacturer or other authoritative sources, such as NEC or ICEA.
Note that if the calculation standard is ICEA P-54-440, this field is hidden, since the base ampacity is not
required for the calculation by the standard.
Derated
The modified base ampacity (maximum allowable current) in amperes for the chosen cable under the
specified installation conditions.
Allowable Ampacity (Alert)

This is the maximum allowable ampacity of the cable. It is used in the load flow output reports to
indicate the percent of cable overloading. This value is also used as a base for the cable flow constraint in
the Optimal Power Flow Studies.
ETAP provides options for selecting the maximum allowable current:
Derated Select this option to make the derated ampacity the

maximum allowable current for this cable.
User-Defined Select this option to enter the maximum allowable
current for this cable
UGS Calculated Select this option to use the ampacity calculated by
the Underground Raceways Systems module.

AC Elements Cable
Tray
This section is enabled when the installation type is A/G Trays and the Standard is either ICEA P-54-440
or NEC.
Top Cover
Select Top Cover if there is a removable top cover on the cable tray.
Bottom Cover
Select bottom cover if there is a bottom cover on the cable tray, whether it is removable or solid, of more
than 6 feet.
Cumulative Effect
Cumulative effect applies correction factors for combinations of barriers, fire coatings, and covers on
cable trays. The following table summarizes the factors ETAP uses:
Fire Coating Fire Stop Fire Wrap Top Cover Bottom Cover PS Uses
X X Fire Wrap
X X Smaller
X X Smaller
X X X Top & Bottom
X X Wrap
X X Wrap
X X X Wrap
Maintained Spacing
Check this box to indicate that cables are kept in the tray with maintained spacing.

AC Elements Cable
Ampacity Adjustment
The Ampacity Adjustment section is enabled when the cable installation type is A/G conduit and the
Standard is NEC. From this section, you can select options to consider grouping effect.
Without Grouping Effect

NEC Standards do not allow for grouping effects (that is, the number of rows and columns) of cables. If
the checkbox is not selected, grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered. Note
that when this box is checked, the Rows and Columns fields and the Fire Protection section will be
hidden.
With 50% Load Diversity and Without Load Diversity

The level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be either 50% or none.
Layout
This section is enabled when the standard is BS 7671 and the installation type is one of the above ground
types.

AC Elements Cable
This section or part of this section is enabled when the standard is IEC 60364-5-52.

AC Elements Cable
Horizontal
Select Horizontal layout with Touching or Spaced if applicable.
Vertical
Select Vertical layout with Touching or Spaced if applicable.
Trefoil
Select Trefoil layout.
Spaced
Select this option if the cables are placed with required spacing (Spaced by a clearance between adjacent
surfaces of at least one cable diameter (De)) between them. Note that this field is hidden if it is not
applicable for the selected installation type.
Touching
Select this option if the cables are placed touching each other in the installation. Note that this field is
hidden if it is not applicable for the selected installation type.

AC Elements Cable
No of Trays
Select No of Trays for determining reduction factor for grouping based on Tables A.52-20 or A.52-21 of
IEC 60364-5-52.
<= 0.3*Cable OD or > 0.3*Cable OD

Switch between these two selections for different Installation Methods. Refer to Table 52-3 of IEC
60364-5-52.
1.5 De <= V < 20 De or V > 20 De

Switch between these two selections for different Installation Methods. Refer to Table 52-3 of IEC
60364-5-52.
Circuit Clearance
This field is enabled when in ground (UG Duct or U/G Buried) installation is selected. Refer to Tables
A.52-18 and A.52-19 of IEC 60364-5-52.
Grouping
This section allows specifying installation information related to calculation of cable grouping factors.
The fields in this section are dependent on the installation type and standard selected.
Parameters in Grouping Section for IEEE 399 Standard, U/G Raceway

Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the ampacity, the number
of rows and columns of the duct bank must be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.
The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on 7.5 inches center-to-center spacing. For more details
see the IEEE Brown Book.
Parameters in Grouping Section for NEC Standard, A/G Conduit

Grouped cables operate at higher temperatures than isolated cables. To derate the cable ampacity, the
number of rows and columns of conduit installed next to each other, as well as the total number of
conductors per location (this conduit), can be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment factor.
# of conductors per location = (# of conductors per cable) x (# of cables per location)

AC Elements Cable
Ampacity Correction Factor

Number of Conductors 50 % Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

Number of Conductors No Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Parameters in Grouping Section for ICEA P-54-440 Standard, A/G Trays

The following items are displayed only when ICEA is selected.
Height
Height of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
Width
Width of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
% Fill
The total amount of cable tray cross-sectional area used by cables placed in the tray, including gap
between cables.

AC Elements Cable
Where ni is the number of cables in the tray with diameter di and l is the number of different sizes of
cables in the tray.
Depth
Depth of cable mass calculated in inches or centimeters using Height*%Fill/100. If the calculated depth is
smaller than the cable diameter, an * sign will be displayed on the right of Depth and above Derated, and
the cable diameter will be treated as the depth for derating calculation.
Fire Protection for ICEA or NEC Standards, A/G Installation

The fire protection area provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices.
Each of the three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with
the cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection
material specifications selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations. Each configuration has an ampacity
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity.
For maintained spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between
adjacent cables or groups to less than the required values, the cable shall be considered to be non-
maintained spacing. On the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable
coating and no other cable can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for a reduction in cable % fill
below nominal value.
Fire retardant coating is not a standard procedure for A/G conduits.

AC Elements Cable
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for cables in
tray routed through fire stops. Note: for A/G conduits, there may not be any reason to derate the cable for
fire stops since typical fire stops are constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is
considered to be insufficient to cause an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
The Fire Wrap Library provides a selection of configurations. Each fire barrier configuration has an
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it. This ACF must be applied whenever the raceway is
wrapped for a length exceeding 6 feet and whenever the raceway has multiple, wrapped segments whose
combined length exceeds 6 feet and which are spaced less than 10 feet apart.
Fire Protection for BS 7671 Standard, A/G Installation

This section is about thermal insulation. Refer to Section 523-04, BS 7671 for detailed information.
According to BS 7671, thermal insulation for fire protection may be considered for all installation types,
except Installation Methods 4 and 6. For Installation Method 4 or 6, cables are in conduits which are in
thermally insulated wall or above thermally insulated ceiling, and the effect of thermal insulation is
already considered in the current-carrying capacity tables.
Thermal Insulation Applied

Check this box if the cable has thermal insulation.
Insulation Length
Enter the length of able thermal insulation in mm.
# of Circuit

AC Elements Cable
This field is enabled when BS 7671 - 16th Edition or IEC 60364-5-52 is selected. This is used for
reduction factor of grouping. The maximum allowable # of circuit is limited based on the standards.

AC Elements Cable
11.4.7 Sizing Page
Standard
The Standard field displays the standard selected in the Ampacity page. When the Load Amp
requirement is selected in the Requirements section, the ampacity calculation in cable sizing will be based
on the standard displayed.
Results
Using the selected cable type from the library, ETAP recommends an optimal cable size along with the
number of conductors per phase that meets the specified requirements. Additionally, ETAP provides one
cable size smaller than the optimal size for your selection. For the voltage results, Vd is in percent based
on bus nominal kV and Vst is in percent based on motor rated kV.
Along with the calculation results, this section also displays the required cable sized, ampacity, percent of
voltage drop, and percent of starting voltage if cable sizing options for the corresponding requirements
are checked. The required cable size is the largest size from Short-Circuit, Overload, and Shock

AC Elements Cable
requirements. The requirement ampacity is the larger value from Load Amp and Overload requirements.
Note that if the Use MF for Ampacity option is selected, the Load Amp used for sizing will be multiplied
by the MF value displayed in the Cable Application section.
Requirements
You can select one or both requirements for determining the recommended size of cable. Note that some
of the options are dependent on the installation type and if the cable is an equipment cable for a motor.
Load Amp
If Load Amp is selected as one of the requirements, sizing will be conducted to meet the load current
requirement based on the cable installation and ambient conditions specified in the Ampacity page. The
load ampere value is displayed here based on the option selected in the Loading Current for Sizing section
in the Loading page.
Voltage Drop (Vd)

If you select Vd, ETAP will size the cable based on the percent voltage drop value you enter here.
Voltage drop is in percent of nominal kV of the bus connected to the cable. If the nominal voltages of the
From Bus and To Bus are different, nominal kV of the From Bus is selected. The following table shows
the methods used for calculating the voltage drop for different types of load currents flowing through the
cable.
Load Type Calculation Method

Motors Constant Power
Static Load Constant Impedance
Bus Constant Current
Circuit Breaker Constant Current
Fuse Constant Current
Transformer Constant Current
Generator Constant Current
MOV Constant Impedance
If the cable is an equipment cable, the cable voltage drop is calculated based on a fixed bus voltage that is
equal to the bus Initial %V multiplied by the bus nominal kV. The load will be treated as given in the
above table. The calculated voltage drop is the magnitude difference between bus voltage and load
terminal voltage values.
If the cable is a branch cable connected between two buses, the voltage drop is calculated by multiplying
the cable impedance by the current.
If the cable is connected with an overload heater, the resistance of the overload heater will be considered
in Vd calculation as well.

AC Elements Cable
Base kV for Vd
This field displays the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus.
Starting Voltage (Vst)

This option is enabled only when the cable is an equivalent cable of a motor, or when the Load Amp is
FLA of a motor.
If the option of Vst is selected, cable sizing calculation considers the motor starting voltage requirement.
At starting, the motor terminal voltage must be higher than the Vst limit, which is in percent based on
motor rated voltage. The motor starting voltage is calculated based on a fixed bus voltage that is equal to
the bus Initial %V multiplied by the bus nominal kV. The motor is represented by its locked-rotor
impedance.
If the cable is connected with an overload heater, the resistance of the overload heater will be considered
in Vst calculation as well.
Base kV for Vst
This field displays the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus.
Short-circuit
Sizing will be based on the cable short-circuit capacity to withstand the short-circuit current magnitude
specified below for the time defined. The Standard used to calculate the cable size based off the Short-
Circuit kA and the Short-Circuit Time can be found in either ICEA Publication P-32-382 or the Buff book
IEEE 242 Standard.
Min. Size for Short-Circuit
The required minimum cable size calculated based on the short-circuit current and duration is displayed in
this field.
Short-Circuit kA
This field displays the Max. Fault kA from the Short-Circuit Current section in the Protection page.
Short-Circuit Time (s)
This field displays the Time value from the Protection Device section in the Protection page.
Overload
This option is enabled only when BS 7671 - 16th Edition or IEC 60364-5-52 is selected as the standard
in the Installation section of the Ampacity page.
If this box is checked, overload protection will be considered for cable sizing. ETAP calculates the
minimum size required by the overload protection conditions. The cable at the Min. Size for Overload
protection must meet the following two conditions:
(i) 1.45 times De-rated Ampacity >= I2

(ii) De-rated Ampacity >= In >= Loading Current

AC Elements Cable
where the De-rated Ampacity is that for the cable at the Min Size. In and I2 are the nominal and operating
current of overload protective devices respectively. Please refer to Sections 5 and 6 in Appendix 4 of BS
7671 - 16th Edition or Section 433 of IEC 60364-4-43 for detailed information.
Overload Min. Size

This field displays the required minimum cable size for overload protection calculated based on BS 7671
or IEC 60364.
Overload kA
This field displays the In current value from the Protective Device section in the Protection page. It is the
nominal current of the protective device.
Cable Application
This section is enabled when the Standard selected in the Installation section of the Ampacity page is not
BS 7671. It allows the user to specify cable application type for cable ampacity and voltage drop
calculation.
MF
This Multiplication Factor (MF) is determined by the application type selected from the drop-down list
provided. You can modify the values of Application MF by selecting Project, Settings, and Cable
Ampacity MF from the menu bar. This Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity
(MF times operating or full load current).
Use MF for Ampacity

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Multiplying Factor (MF)
displayed in the MF field.
Options
Use Motor Service Factor (SF) (Motor Equipment Cables Only)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the motor Service Factor (SF) as
specified for the motor in the Nameplate page.
Use Load Growth Factor (GF)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Growth Factor as specified for
this cable in the Operating Load / Current section of the Loading page.

AC Elements Cable
Cable Library Selection
Use Available Cable Sizes Only

Use only cable sizes which are flagged as Available in the Cable Library for the specified cable type
(cable library header).
Use All Cable Sizes From Library

Use all cable sizes, which exist, in the cable library for the specified cable type (cable library header).
Cable Sizing Algorithm for BS 7671

Cable sizing calculation will select a proper size from the library based on your settings on Loading,
Protection, Ampacity and Sizing pages.
Ampacity Requirement
Cable derated ampacity must be greater than or equal to loading ampacity specified on the Loading page.
If Overload requirement is checked, ampacity requirement is calculated based on Section 6 of Appendix
4, BS 7671.
Vd Max Requirement
Voltage drop (Vd) calculation applies impedance z from Tables 4D1B to 4L4B of Appendix 4, BS 7671.
Voltage drop in kV is calculated as:
Vd = L I Ct z / 1000
where
L Cable length in meter
I Cable loading current in Amp
Ct Temperature correction factor
z Cable impedance value from Tables 4D1B to 4L4B of Appendix 4, BS 7671
Please refer to Section 7.1 of BS 7671 Appendix 4 for Ct calculation. Note that in this ETAP release Ct is
applied for all size of cables.
Overload Requirement
ETAP determines a minimum cable size based on the nominal current and operating current of overload
protection devices of the cable. The minimum size cable must meet the following two conditions:

where the De-rated Ampacity is the current-carrying capacity of the cable. In and I2 are the nominal and
operating current of the protective device respectively. In and I2 are entered or calculated on Protection
page. Please refer to Sections 5 and 6 in Appendix 4 of BS 7671 for detailed information on Overload
Requirement.
Cable Sizing Algorithm for IEC 60364

Cable sizing calculation will select a proper size from the library, based on your settings on the Loading,
Protection, Ampacity and Sizing pages.

AC Elements Cable
Ampacity Requirement
Cable derated ampacity must be great than or equal to loading ampacity specified on the Loading page.
Overload Requirement
ETAP determines a minimum cable size based on the nominal current and operating current of overload
protection devices of the cable. The minimum size cable must meet the following two conditions:

where the De-rated Ampacity is the current-carrying capacity of the cable. In and I2 are the nominal and
operating current of the protective device respectively. In and I2 are entered or calculated on Protection
page. Please refer to Sections 433 of IEC 60364-4-43 for detailed information on Overload Requirement.
11.4.8 Routing Page

The Routing page provides lists of routed raceways and available raceways. The Cable ID and raceway
type are shown for both the routed and available raceways.

AC Elements Cable
This is a list of raceways through which this cable is routed. When you add a raceway to this list (by
using the insert or add buttons), the cable is placed in a container attached to the raceway without being
placed in any specific conduit or location.
When you bring up the Graphical Editor for the underground systems, you will see the cables in a
container of cables that are assigned to this raceway but not assigned to a specific conduit. This container
is attached to the raceway and will disappear when it is empty. You must select and graphically move the
cable from the unassigned cable container to the desired location.
Available Raceways
This is a list of all existing available raceways in this project, i.e., raceways that this cable can be routed
through.
Note: Since you cannot route a cable twice through a raceway, this list does not include the raceways
listed under Routed Raceways.
Insert: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list,
i.e., insert the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Add: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list,
i.e., add the selected raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Cut: Un-route this cable from the selected raceway.

AC Elements Cable
A
branches from service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are
reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted,
P
This is Enter the passive failure rate in number of failures per year f/yr per unit length. The passive
failure rate is associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection
breakers and therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or
replacing the failed component will restores service. Examples of passive failures include opening
circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.

AC Elements Cable
Per
Select the length unit for failure rate length unit from the list box. The units of length available are: feet,
MTTR
Use this field to enter the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a
component outage and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based
on MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR) in Repair/yr.
MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P of
(MTTF = 1.0/( A+ P) in yr for unit length automatically).
FOR
Calculate and display the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability), calculated based on MTTR, A and
P (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/( A+ P)) for unit length automatically.
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library

AC Elements Cable
User-Defined Info





AC Elements Cable
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


AC Elements Cable

AC Elements Transmission Line
11.5 Transmission Line

The properties associated with transmission lines of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
You can perform the following functions within this editor:
Calculate electrical parameters of Lines
Calculate conductor ampacity and temperature
Calculate Sag and Tension
Conductor transposition
The Transmission Line Editor includes the following twelve pages of properties:
Info
Parameter
Configuration
Grouping
Earth
Impedance
Protection
Sag and Tension
Ampacity
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.5.1 Info Page

You can use the Info page to specify the transmission line ID, From and To bus ID and kV, In/Out of
Service, Feeder Tag, Name, Description, and Length.

Line Type
The Transmission Line Editor type displays information from the transmission line header of the library
selected. It is arranged as follows:
Source
Source of the transmission line data for the selected line.
Conductor Type
Conductor material. The current types available are listed in the following table

Type Description
AAAC All Aluminum Alloy Conductor
AAC All Aluminum Conductor
AAC/TW All Aluminum Conductor / Trapwire
AACSR Aluminum Alloy Conductor Steel Reinforced
ACAR Aluminum Conductor Alloy Reinforced
ACCC Aluminum Conductor Composite Core
ACCR Aluminum Conductor Composite Reinforced
ACSR Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
ACSR/AW Single Layer Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Clad Steel
Reinforced
ACSR/COMP Compact round Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced
ACSR/TW Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced / Trapwire
ACSS Aluminum Conductor Steel Supported
ACSS/AW Aluminum Conductor Aluminum Clad Steel Supported
ACSS/TW Shaped Wire Concentric Lay Compact Aluminum
Conductor Aluminum Steel Supported
AHC Anaconda Hollow Copper
AW Aluminum-Clad Steel Conductor
CU Copper
CW Copper Weld
CWC Copper Weld Copper
GTACSR Gas Type Thermal Resistant ACSR
TACIR Thermal Resistant Aluminum Conductor Invar Reinforced
TACSR Aluminum-Zirconium Alloy Conductor, Steel Reinforced
VR Wind Induced Motion Resistant Conductor
Base Temp.1 for R

Base Rated Temperature 1 for the Resistance value in degrees Celsius. This temperature plus the rated
temperature 2 are used to calculate the resistance variation for the line at various temperatures.
Base Temp.1 for R

Base Rated Temperature 2 for the Resistance value in degrees Celsius. This temperature plus the rated
temperature 1 are used to calculate the resistance variation for the line at various temperatures.
Frequency
Line rated frequency in Hz. This value indicates the frequency at which reactance, GMR, and other
parameters are specified by the manufacturer or standard. If the frequency of the system is different,
ETAP will automatically adjust these parameters to the system frequency.

Code
Code name given to a transmission line by the standard or source of data. For most available lines, their
code (for example, bird, flower, city, or sport) has been entered in this field. In the case of T&D book,
since they do not use the bird names, size-strands has been used for the code.
Size
Line size in AWG, kcmil, or mm2.
Con. # of Strands
Main conductor number of strands.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to
each transmission line. The assigned IDs consist of the default line ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of lines increase. The default line ID (Line) can be changed
from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a transmission line are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
For 3 Phase Transmission Lines, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For Single
Transmission Lines only single-phase buses will be displayed.
new bus from the editors will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
Single Phase Transmission lines can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Cable is connected as
such, then the Phase Adapter ID will show in the Primary or Secondary field.

Next to the From and To bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating condition of a transmission line can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads
and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and become
dimmed.
Data.
Connection
Transmission Lines can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase lines by selecting any of the following
selections:
3 Phase
Define the line as a three-phase line. This line can be connected only to three-phase buses.
1 Phase
Define the line as a single-phase line.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Enter the equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description

Units
Length
Enter the length of the transmission line, in the units specified in the Unit field.
Unit
Select the unit from the list box. The units of length available are feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Tolerance
Enter the percent tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to
11.5.2 Parameter Page

On the Parameter page you can select the phase and ground conductors from the library or enter the
conductor properties.

Phase Conductor
Conductor Type
Select the main conductor material (Copper or Aluminum).
R T1
This is the phase conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile or ohms per
kilometer.
R T2
This is the phase conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile or ohms per
kilometer.
Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per mile at 1ft spacing.
Outside Diameter
Specify conductor outside diameter in inches or cm. ETAP calculates the equivalent diameter of the
bundled conductors (d) for bundled conductors by using following the formulas:
Two bundled conductors: d = d * S
Three bundled conductors: d = 3 d *S *S
Four bundled conductors: d = 4 d *S *S * 2 *S
Where d is a single conductor diameter in inches and S is the separation between conductors in inches or
cm.

GMR
Specify conductor geometric mean radius (GMR) in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius. When Xa is entered and GMR has not been entered, the program will calculate GMR
using the following formula:
Two bundled conductors: GMR GMR * S
Three bundled conductors: GMR = 3 GMR * S * S
Four bundled conductors: GMR = 4 GMR * S * S * 2 * S
Where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled conductors in inches or
cm.
Xa
Enter the conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per mile or kilometer.
Conductor Lib
Click the Conductor Lib button to access the Library Quick Pick Transmission Line (Phase Conductor)
dialog box, which allows you to select line data from the library.
Ground Wire
Conductor Type
Select the main conductor material (Aluminum, Copper, or Steel).
R T1
Enter the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T1 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.
R T2
Enter the conductor rated resistance at the rated temperature T2 in ohms per mile or ohms per kilometer.

Xa
Enter the conductor inductive reactance in ohms per mile at 1ft spacing.
Outside Diameter
Specify conductor outside diameter in inches or cm. For bundled conductors, ETAP calculates the
equivalent diameter of the bundled conductors (d) using following the formulas:
Two bundled conductors: d = d * S
Three bundled conductors: d = 3 d * S * S
Four bundled conductors: d = 4 d *S *S * 2 *S
Where d is a single conductor diameter in inches and S is the separation between conductors in inches or
cm.
GMR
Specify conductor geometric mean radius (GMR) in feet or meters. GMR must be less than or equal to the
conductor radius. When Xa is entered and GMR has not been entered, the program will calculate using
the following formula:
Two bundled conductors: GMR = RMR * S

Three bundled conductors: GMR = 3 GMR * S * S
Four bundled conductors: GMR = 4 GMR * S * S * 2 * S
Where GMR is for a single conductor and S is the separation between bundled conductors in inches or
cm.
Xa
Conductor shunt capacitive reactance in megohms per mile or kilometer.
Ground Wire Lib

Click the Ground Wire Lib button to access the Library Quick Pick Transmission Line (Ground Wire)
dialog box, which allows you to select line data from the library.
11.5.3 Configuration Page

Configuration Type
Several types of physical configurations are available for transmission lines to accommodate most setups.
Available options for transmission line placement are:
Horizontal Parallel Vertical

Vertical Parallel Horizontal
Triangular General*
The general configuration allows you to specify the physical location of the conductors with respect to a
reference point. The reference point is located at the same level as the base of the tower or pole. This
defines the height of the lines with respect to the soil level. For example:

For this configuration, the following parameters would be

used:
The spacing is calculated automatically by ETAP. The ground wires are also entered with respect to the
reference point.
GMD
The geometric mean diameter (GMD) is calculated based on the spacing and configuration type. The
value is in feet or meters.
Phase
Height
Enter the height (in feet or meters) of the transmission line from the earth to the highest conductor in the
system.
Spacing
Specify the distance between the phase conductors as three pairs of conductors (AB, BC, and CA) in feet
or meters. This provides the ability to configure the wires to almost any shape. For parallel circuits, you
need to specify the distance between the two circuits. ETAP treats the triangular and parallel
configurations symmetrically (that is, AB = BC and CA<(AB+BC)).

This field is dimmed when General is selected for the Configuration Type. In this case, the fields are
calculated based on the X,Y coordinates of the conductors.
Layout
Layout is a graphical representation of the location of the conductors and ground wires. The image is not
to scale and it does not update with changes in spacing.
d12
This is the distance between the closest conductors from each parallel circuit. It is used to define the
separation between the two circuits as indicated in the image below.
Ground Wires
GG
The distance between ground wires in feet or meters. This field is active if you have more than one
ground wire.
CG
The distance between the ground wires and a phase conductor closest to the ground wire in feet or meters.
The value of CG can be negative if ground wires are located under the phase conductors.
G1 and G2
These fields are available only when you have selected General under the Configuration Type. Check G1
if you have at least one ground wire in the system. Then specify the X, Y coordinate of this wire with
respect to the reference. Check G2 if you have two ground wires in the system.
Conductors
Transposed
Select his option if the 3-phase transmission line is fully transposed. This option affects the calculation of
transmission line impedance values.

Separation
Enter the separation between the adjacent bundled conductors of the same phase in inches or centimeters.
Conductors/phase
You can specify up to four bundled conductors.
11.5.4 Grouping Page

The Grouping page of the Transmission Line Editor allows you to take the effect of mutual coupling into
account.
Group
Name
This is the mutual coupling group name. Click in this field to select a coupling group from the drop-down
list. If you have not created a coupling group, you can create one by clicking on the Mutual Coupling
Group button located below the Tower area.

Length (M)
This is the length of the section in which the lines in the group are coupled. This value is defined in the
Mutual Coupling Group Editor.
X (ft)
Enter the horizontal distance between the reference point of this line and the reference point of the
coupling group. You can set the X value for one of the lines to make it the reference point. Then set the
X value for the rest of the lines with reference to the first line.
Y (ft)
Enter the vertical distance between the reference point of this line and the reference point of the coupling
group. You can take the line that has its pole or tower at the lowest elevation and set the Y of the line
equal to 0. Then for each of the rest of the lines, set Y equal to the difference in elevation between the
line and the first line.
Click this button to switch the start bus and end bus values. This indicates the starting and ending side of
all lines in the coupling group.
Start Bus
This is the bus on the side where the line coupling starts. The starting and ending buses of a line are used
to determine the terminal buses that are on the same side for all the coupled lines in the group. The start
bus affects the calculation of the voltage drops of coupled lines.
End Bus
This is the bus on the side where the line coupling ends.
Tower
Ground Resistance
Specify the value of the grounding resistance through the tower in ohms.
Segmented Earth Wires

Select this option to make the earth wires segmented.
Average Distance
Specify the average distance between each tower in the unit specified in the Unit field.

Unit
Select the units in which the average distance is specified.
Mutual Coupling Group Button

Use this button to access the Mutual Coupling Group Editor. You can define the coupling groups here
and then select it on the group name filed above.
Note: You can also access the Mutual Coupling Group Editor from the Project Menu.
11.5.5 Earth Page

This page allows you to model the earth layers. This information is used to calculate the grounding
resistance of the line.
Earth Layers
This group allows you to specify up to 3 layers of ground and the properties of each layer.

Number of Earth Layers

Select the number of earth layers you want to model. ETAP will display a row to enter properties for
each layer.
P (ohms-m)
Enter the earth resistivity for each layer in ohm-meters (ohms-m).
e
Enter the earth permittivity of each layer.
Enter the earth permeability of each layer.
Depth
Enter the depth of each layer in feet/meters.

Impedance (per phase)
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Resistances (R-T1,R-T2)

ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence resistances in ohms or ohms per unit
length, per phase, and at base temperature T1 and T2, according to the specified configuration and
grounding information of a transmission line. ETAP corrects these resistances for different studies based
on the specified temperature limits in the Operating Temperatures group. You can also specify positive
and zero sequence resistances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, and at base temperatures T1
and T2 specified for this data file.
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Reactances (X)

ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence reactances in ohms or ohms per unit
length, per phase, according to the specified configuration, grounding, and grouping information of a
transmission line. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP corrects
these reactances for the system operating frequency. The user can also specify positive and zero sequence
reactances in ohms or ohms per unit length, per phase, at the system operating frequency specified for this
data file. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Pos., Neg., and Zero Sequence Susceptances (Y)

ETAP automatically calculates the Pos. (positive) and Zero sequence susceptances in microsiemens or
microsiemens per unit length, per phase, according to the specified configuration and grounding
information of a transmission line. If the value is Y>0, the transmission line is treated as a model, with
one half (1/2) of the charging susceptance connected to neutral at each end of the line. If Y=0, the
transmission line is treated as an external impedance. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or
Metric (50 Hz) libraries, ETAP corrects these susceptances for the system operating frequency. The user
can also specify positive and zero sequence susceptances in microsiemens or microsiemens per unit
length, per phase, at the system operating frequency specified for this data file. The zero sequence
susceptance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations.
Calculated
Select the Calculated option if you want ETAP to calculate the impedance of the line according to the
parameters, configuration, grounding, and grouping.
User Defined
Select the User-Defined option if you want to enter the impedance values.
Unit
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. Select a unit for unit length from the list box.
Units available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers. If you select ohms, the impedances calculated or
entered represent the total impedance of the line. ETAP uses ohms per mile as the unit of impedance
calculation.
R, X, Y Matrices
Select Phase Domain or Sequence Domain and click the buttons under this group to display the
Resistance (R), Reactance (X), or the Susceptance (Y) sequence matrixes.

Library Temperatures
Base T1 and Base T2

If you have selected the phase conductors from the library, ETAP displays the temperatures (in degrees
Celsius) at which the resistance values where entered in the library. These temperatures allow ETAP to
determine the impedance variation versus temperature.
If you have selected to specify the impedance, then select or enter the temperatures (in degrees Celsius) at
which you have entered the resistances upstream in the Impedance (per phase) group.
Operating Temperatures
Minimum and Maximum

Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting positive and zero
sequence resistances (R and R0) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating
temperature and the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type.
For example:
Temperature Limit Used by Some Modules
Min. Max.
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
Motor Starting X
Dynamic Stability X
temperature. ETAP uses the Base T1 and Base T2 temperatures to calculate the impedance variation of
the line.
If R-T1 and R-T2 entered on the Parameters page are equal, it indicates that the line resistance does not
vary as conductor temperature fluctuates. In this case, the calculation will use a constant resistance at the
base temperature.

This page contains options to plot transmission line thermal capability curve on a Star View.

Thermal Capability
Transmission line capability curve is an I2t characteristic curve, which depends on the following
parameters:
Conductor area
Number of conductors/phase
The thermal capability curve is always drawn between t = 1 to t = 10 seconds.
Plot Phase Conductor I2t on TCC

Click to plot conductor I2t on Star View. This option will plot or hide phase conductor thermal capability
curve from the Star View. This checkbox is only active when a phase conductor is selected from the
library.

Plot Ground Wire I2t on TCC

Click to plot wire I2t on Star View. This option will plot or hide ground wire thermal capability curve
from the Star View. This checkbox is only active when a ground conductor is selected from the library.
11.5.8 Sag and Tension

It is important to perform a sag and tension calculation for a transmission line to ensure an adequate
operating condition for the line. If the tension applied on the line is beyond its tension limit, the line
conductor will be damaged, which will in turn reduce line capacity and decrease the life span of the line.
If the sag is too great, this may cause a short-circuit between the line and objects below it or a short-
circuit between lines in extremely windy conditions.
ETAP calculates the sag and tension of the line with a series of suspension spans based on the Ruling
Span Method on this page. It gives line sag and tension for the specified operating conditions, including
temperature, wind speed, and ice on the line and is based on the sag and tension under initial conditions
(called Known Conditions in the editor). The initial conditions may be at no load conditions or some
other operating conditions at which line sag or tension can be measured. The sag and tension to be
calculated should be for the worst operating conditions, such as in strong wind conditions and lines
covered with thick ice, etc.

The Ruling Span Method represents a series of suspension spans between two dead-end structures by a
level dead-end span. The level dead-end span, called ruling span, gives the same change in tension from
loading, temperature, and other operating conditions as that of the actual line. The method calculates sags
for each suspended section of the line. But it assumes that the tension of all the suspended sections is the
same as that of the ruling span.
Line Section
You can specify the operating temperature and line sections of suspended spans in this group. ETAP
calculates the length of the ruling span, tension of the ruling span, and sags for each suspended section.
Same Tower Height

Select this option if the towers are at the same level. This option will allow you to calculate the Sag at the
Spans entered in the table below. If this option is not checked, ETAP will calculate the Sag and Tension
as seen from each tower.

Op Temp.
Enter the operating temperature in degrees Celsius or check to use and display the operating temperature.
The operating temperature is calculated on the Ampacity page corresponding to the operating current. To
obtain more conservative tension and sag results, a lower operating temperature should be used.
Horiz. Tension
The calculated line horizontal tension is displayed in this field in lbs/kN.
Ruling Span
The calculated length of the ruling span in ft./m is displayed in this field. This filed is displayed when
Same Tower Height has been selected.
Span
Enter the individual span of suspended sections of the line in ft. or meters.
Height Diff
Enter the height difference between towers in feet or meters.

Span Vs Sag Table
Span (Ft)
Enter the individual span of suspended sections of the line in ft. or meters in this column.
Sag
This field displays the calculated sag in ft. or meters for each suspended section of the line in this column,
Low Tower and High Tower Tension and Sag

These fields display the Sag and Tension seen from the Lower Tower and from the High Tower .when the
Same Tower Height option is not selected.
Loaded Conditions
This group includes operating parameters under loaded conditions that affect the line tension and sag
calculation. The parameters should be entered so as to yield more conservative results, such as higher
wind pressure and thicker ice on the line, etc.
Weight
Enter the conductor weight in lb/ft. or N/m. If you have selected the conductor from the library, the
information from the library automatically updates this field.
k Factor
Enter the constant to be added from NESC table 251-1 under the loaded conditions in lb/ft. or N/m.
Ice
Enter the ice thickness under the loaded conditions in cm/in.
Wind
Enter the NESC horizontal wind force requirement in lb/sq. ft. or N/sq. m under the loaded conditions in
cm/in.
Elongation Coefficient
Enter the coefficient of conductor elongation in 10-6/degrees C. Refer to the table below for nominal or
minimum properties of conductor wire materials. This table can be found in Overhead Conductor Manual
2nd Edition page 1.4.
Property Intl. Commercial Standard Standard Standard Galvanized Aluminum

Annealed Hard-Drawn 1350-H19 1350-0 6201-T81 Steel Core Clad Steel
Copper Copper Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Wire Core Wire
Standard Wire Wire Wire Wire
Elongation
Coefficient
106 per C 16.9 16.9 23.0 23.0 23.0 11.5 13.0

Al/Cu Strands
Enter the number and diameter of the conductor (Copper or Aluminum) strands. Diameter is specified in
inches or centimeters. If you have selected the conductor from the library, the information from the
library automatically updates this field.
Steel Strands
Enter the number and diameter of the reinforcement (steel or composite) strands. Diameter is specified in
inches or centimeters. If you have selected the ground wire from the library, the information from the
library automatically updates this field.
Modulus of Elasticity
Enter the modulus of elasticity for Aluminum / Copper or Steel in 106 psi if using English units or Mpa in
metric units. Refer to the table below for nominal or minimum properties of conductor wire materials.
This table can be found in Overhead Conductor Manual 2nd Edition page 1.4.
Property Intl. Commercial Standard Standard Standard Galvanized Aluminum

Annealed Hard-Drawn 1350-H19 1350-0 6201-T81 Steel Core Clad Steel
Copper Copper Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Wire Core Wire
Standard Wire Wire Wire Wire
Modulus
of
Elasticity
106 psi 17 17 10 10 10 29 23.5
106 Pascal 117,000 117,000 69,000 69,000 69,000 200,000 162,000
Known Conditions
In this group you enter the initial conditions under which line tension or sag value can be provided by
measurement or previous knowledge.
Ice
Enter the ice thickness on the line under the known conditions in cm or inches.
Wind
Enter the known NESC horizontal wind force requirement under the known conditions in lb/sq. ft. or
N/sq. m
k Factor
Enter the known constant to be added from NESC table 251-1 under the known conditions in lb/ft. or N/m
Temperature
Enter the known operating temperature in degrees Celsius.
Tension or Sag
Select to enter the known tension or sag. ETAP will calculate and display the other parameter. These
two values are based on the ruling span of the line.


ETAP determines the current-temperature relationship for transmission lines in this page. The calculation
is based on IEEE Standard 738-1993, IEEE Standard for Calculating the Current-Temperature
Relationship of Bare Overhead Conductors. Conductor surface temperatures are a function of:
Conductor material
Conductor OD
Conductor surface conditions
Ambient weather conditions
Conductor electrical current
Based on the steady-state heat balance equation of a bear overhead conductor, the conductor current and
temperature relationship can be given as the following equation:
qc + q r q s
I=
R(Tc )
Where I is conductor current, qc is the convected heat loss, qr is the radiated heat loss, qs is the heat gain
from the sun, and R is the conductor AC resistance at conductor temperature Tc.
For a bare stranded conductor, if the conductor temperature (Tc) and the steady state weather parameters
are known, the heat losses due to convection and radiation, solar heat gain, and conductor resistance can
be calculated. While the calculation given in IEEE Std 738-1993 can be performed for any conductor
temperature and any weather condition, a maximum allowable conductor temperature and conservative
weather conditions are often used to calculate steady state thermal rating for the conductor.
ETAP calculates the operating temperature corresponding to the user entered operation current for the
specified installation and environment conditions, so that you can determine the maximum operating
temperature for given transmission line loading conditions. It also calculates the derated ampacity for the
conductor temperature limit you enter, so that you can determine the maximum loading current for your
transmission lines.

Wind
Speed
Speed is wind velocity in ft./s. Conservative wind velocity is considered around 2 ft./s. Most wind speeds
obtained from the weather bureau records are often inaccurate, since most of the data has been recorded
by standard cup-type anemometer that has significant starting inertia. Therefore, readings at low wind
speeds are questionable.
Direction
Direction is defined as the direction of the movement of air relative to the line axis. The wind direction
and the line axis are assumed to be in a plane parallel to the earth.

Atmosphere
Ta
Ambient temperature around the conductor in degrees Celsius.
Condition
Select the condition of atmosphere. The two options are Clear and Industrial. The atmosphere condition
affects the solar heat gain.
Sun Time
Local sun time used to calculate total solar heat gain. At different values of local sun time, the altitude
and azimuth of the sun will be different and yield a different solar heat gain.
Installation
In this group, you enter parameters for the installation of the transmission line.
Elevation
Elevation of conductor above sea level in ft./meter. This value is used to determine air density for
calculating convection heat loss. Furthermore, height of conductors above ground is significant in terms
of wind shielding. High voltage lines normally have greater ground clearance and may be less shielded by
trees and terrain than low voltage lines. Select the highest altitude that is applicable at the location of the
line be selected, because this will give the most conservative results.
Azimuth
This represents Azimuth of line in degrees, measured clockwise from the Northern direction to the line
axis.
North Latitude
This represents North latitude of line location in degrees.
Solar Absorptivity
Solar absorptivity is typically 0.23 to 0.91, depending on the age of the line. The exact rate of increase
depends on the level of atmospheric pollution and the lines operating voltage. Absorptivity is usually
higher than emissivity.
Emissivity
Emissivity is typically 0.23 to 0.91, depending on the age of the line. The exact rate of increase depends
on the level of atmospheric pollution and the lines operating voltage. Emissivity is usually lower than
absorptivity.
Ampacity
This group displays conductor ampacity and temperature calculation results, as well as ampacity and
temperature values from the transmission line conductor library.
Lib Ta
This field displays the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius from the conductor library.

Base Ampacity
This field displays the conductor base ampacity in amperes from the conductor library. This ampacity
value is corresponding to the ambient and conductor temperature values from the conductor library.
Operating Ampacity
Enter the conductor operating current in amperes and ETAP will calculate the corresponding conductor
temperature, which is displayed in the Operating Conductor Temp. field.
Derated Ampacity
For the user entered Tc value, ETAP calculates the corresponding conductor ampacity and displays the
result in this field.
Lib Conductor Temp.

This field displays the conductor temperature limit in degrees Celsius from the conductor library.
Top Conductor Temp.

This field displays the calculated operating temperature in degrees Celsius.
Tc Conductor Temp.
Enter the maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. ETAP calculates the derated
conductor ampacity and displays the result in the Derated Ampacity field.
Allowable Ampacity
This is the maximum allowable ampacity of the line. It is used in the load flow output reports to indicate
the percent of line overloading. This value is also used as a base for the line flow constraint in the
optimal power flow studies.
ETAP provides options for selecting the maximum allowable current:
Select this option to make the derated ampacity the

Derated
maximum allowable current for this line.
Select this option to enter the maximum allowable
User-Defined
current for this line
Note: the conductor Temperature Tc is calculated given the allowable ampacity.

A
branches from service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are
P
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and

therefore does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components. Repairing or replacing the
failed component will restores service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and
inadvertent opening of breakers.
Per
Select a length unit from the list box for the failure rate. The units of length available are: feet, miles,
Calculate and display the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year. It is calculated automatically
based on MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR) in repair/yr automatically.
MTTF
Calculate and display the Mean Time To Failure in years. It is calculated automatically based on A and
P of MTTF = 1.0/( A+ P) in yr for unit length automatically.
FOR
Calculate and display the forced outage rate (unavailability). It is automatically calculated based on
MTTR, A, and P (FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/( A+ P)) for unit length.
MTTR
The MTTR (Mean Time To Repair) in hours is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours by for replacing a failed element by a spare one.
Library
Library Button
Source
Type

Class
User-Defined Info





enter any e additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

11.5.12 Comments Page


AC Elements Reactor
11.6 Reactor
The properties associated with current-limiting reactors of the electrical distribution systems can be
entered in this editor.
The Reactor Editor contains the following five pages of properties:
Info Remarks
Rating Comment
Reliability
11.6.1 Info Page
Info
ID
Entering a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each current-limiting reactor. The assigned IDs consist of the
default reactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of reactors
increase. The default reactor ID (X) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.

AC Elements Reactor
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a reactor branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal
of a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect
or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to
show the new connection after you click OK.
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
For 3 Phase Reactors, only 3 Phase buses will be displayed in the drop-down lists. For single-phase
Reactors only single-phase buses will be displayed.
A single-phase reactor can also be connected to Phase Adapters. If the Reactor is connected as such, then
the Phase Adapter ID is displayed in the Primary or Secondary field.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a reactor branch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and
become dimmed.
Data.

AC Elements Reactor
Connection
Reactors can be defined as 3 Phase or 1 Phase by selecting any of the following selections:
3 Phase
Click the button to define the reactor as a 3 Phase. This reactor can be connected only to 3 phase buses.
1 Phase
Click the button to define the reactor as single-phase.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
11.6.2 Rating Page

AC Elements Reactor
Rating
Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the current-limiting reactor in amperes.
This value is also used as a base for the reactor flow constraint in the optimal power flow studies.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the current-limiting reactor in kV.
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Impedance (Z and Z0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence impedance in ohms. The zero sequence impedance is used only for
unbalanced fault current calculations. ETAP will make no adjustments to this value other than tolerance
correction.
Positive and Zero Sequence X/R

Enter the positive and zero sequence X/R of the reactor. This value is used for calculating the resistance
and reactance of the current-limiting reactor.
Typical X/R Button

Use typical X/R.
Tolerance
This is the tolerance of the nominal value of the positive and zero sequence reactance, in percent. This
value should be zero for an existing reactor with a known reactance. For a new reactor with a design
impedance value, this should be the tolerance range for the reactance specified by the manufacturer.
ETAP will automatically select the positive or negative tolerance value, which will result in the most
conservative solution. A negative value is used for short-circuit studies and a positive value for all other
studies.

AC Elements Reactor
A
branches from service, after the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are
P
breakers. Enter the total forced failure rate in f/yr per unit length. The passive failure rate is associated
with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of protection breakers and therefore
component restores service. Examples are open circuits and inadvertent opening of breakers.

AC Elements Reactor
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/( A+ P)).
FOR
It is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library Button
Source
This displays the Source Name of the library data selected.
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected.
Class

AC Elements Reactor
11.6.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of any additional data associated with this component. The names of
the User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu
bar.




AC Elements Reactor

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

AC Elements Reactor


AC Elements Impedance
11.7 Impedance
You can enter the properties associated with impedances of your electrical distribution system in this
editor. Impedance branches are used to specify circuit elements in per unit values. Impedance branches
can be used to represent lines and current-limiting reactors.
The Impedance Editor contains following five pages of properties:
Info Comment
Rating Remarks
Reliability
11.7.1 Info Page
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters in this field.

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch. The assigned IDs consist of the
default impedance ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
impedances increase. The default impedance ID (Z) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
bar or from the Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an impedance branch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a branch, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click OK.
Connection
Select the connection type of the impedance.
3 Phase
Select to setup impedance as three-phase.
1 Phase
Select to setup impedance as single-phase.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of an impedance branch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch.
However, an Out of Service branch will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the
become dimmed.
Data.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
11.7.2 Rating Page
Balanced Model
If Balanced is selected in the Model
group, the Impedance and Units
groups are displayed.

Unbalanced Model
If Unbalanced is selected in the Model
group, the editor displays the R, X, Y,
and Units groups.
Model
Balanced
Select this option to model the impedance as balanced; in other words, the impedance will be equal for all
three phases.
Unbalanced
Select this option to model the impedance as unbalanced; in other words, the impedance at each phase is
different. Selecting this option allows you to express the impedance of the branch in either phase or
sequence domain. These options are available in the Data Format group.
Balanced Model
Impedance
Positive and Zero Sequence Resistances (R and R0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence resistances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified
base MVA or in ohms. The zero sequence resistance is used only for unbalanced fault current
calculations. Note: when these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected
buses as the base; however, this voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when
needed, convert these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally. ETAP uses
the transformer turn ratios for determining the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics,
motor starting, and transient stability analyses.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X and X0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence reactances as a percentage of the circuit element on the specified
base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault current calculations. Note:
when these values are specified, ETAP will use the nominal kVs of the connected buses as the base,

however, this voltage value may be edited in the Impedance Editor. ETAP will, when needed, convert
these values to coincide with the base voltages it has calculated internally. ETAP uses the transformer
turns ratios to determine the base voltages in its load flow, short-circuit, harmonics, motor starting, and
transient stability analyses.
Positive and Zero Sequence Susceptance (Y and Y0)

Enter the positive and zero sequence charging (capacitive) susceptances as a percentage of the circuit
element on the specified base MVA. The zero sequence reactance is used only for unbalanced fault
current calculations. If Y>0, the circuit element is treated as a pi equivalent, with one-half of the charging
susceptance connected to neutral at the end of the circuit. If Y=0, the circuit element is treated as a
simple impedance. These susceptances must be entered at the system operating frequency, which is
specified for this data file.
Units
Percent/Ohms and Bank kV/MVA

This function toggles between percent and ohmic units for impedance values. Upon selection of the
percent unit, the impedance values must be entered in a percent value with the base kV and MVA as
specified in this editor. If ohmic unit is selected, resistance, reactance, and susceptance must be entered
in actual ohms for the impedance branch.
Unbalanced Model
Data Format
Use this area of the rating page to enter the resistance, reactance, and susceptance data in the phase
domain or sequence domain. Depending on your selection, the R, X, and Y groups are updated so you
can enter the values in either domain.
Note: If you have already specified the R, X, and Y values in either domain, switching the option will
recalculate the impedances entered to the domain specified.

R, X, and Y
Enter the phase or sequence matrix R (resistance), X (reactance), and Y (susceptance) values. ETAP
Unbalanced Load Flow and Short-Circuit Modules will use these values for calculations.
Units
Percent/Ohms and Base kV/MVA

This function toggles between percent and ohmic units for impedance values. Upon selection of the
percent unit, the impedance values must be entered in a percent value with the base kV and MVA as
specified in this editor. If ohmic unit is selected, resistance, reactance, and susceptance matrix values
must be entered in actual ohms for the impedance branch.
A

service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are reclosed. This leads
to service being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed
component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be
restored to service only after repair or replacement.
P
This is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year.
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/( A+ P)).
FOR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
This displays the type name of the library data selected.

Class
11.7.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of additional data associated with this component. The names of the





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Power Grid
11.8 Power Grid

Enter properties associated with power grids (utility systems) in this editor. A power grid is represented
with its Thevenins equivalent, a constant voltage source behind a short-circuit impedance. The default
mode of operating for a power grid is swing type.
The Power Grid Editor includes the following seven pages of properties:
Info Reliability Comment

Rating Energy Price
Harmonic Remarks
11.8.1 Info Page

The Info page allows you to specify the utility ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name
and Description, and the power grid Type.

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each power grid. The assigned IDs consist of the default
power grid ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of power grids
increase. The default power grid ID (PG) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the power grid. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a power grid to a bus, select a bus
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the power grid resides, i.e., you
If a power grid is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the power
grid to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next to the bus ID for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a bus can be selected by clicking the button for either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus; however,
an Out of Service bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service bus automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches
status. Therefore, you can set a bus to be In Service for the base data and Out of Service in revision data.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Mode
The power grid mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor for your reference.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing power grid will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the
voltage magnitude and angle of the power grid terminals will remain at the specified operating values.
For motor acceleration and transient stability studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine
initial conditions. For the initial load flow, a swing power grid is represented as an infinite source. At
time 0+, the power grid is modeled as a voltage source behind its short-circuit impedance.
For transient stability studies, one of the swing machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the
reference machine for the entire system.
There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any
isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple swing machines connected to any bus
in the system.
Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line
diagram and will be included in for studies. Also, the rated voltage (kV) of a swing machine is used as
the base kV of the connected bus. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then calculated using
transformer turn ratios. For transient stability studies, a swing power grid becomes the reference machine
for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of the power grid is set to zero, and the voltage
angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this reference machine.
Voltage Control
A power grid can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the power grid
will adjust its Mvar output to control the voltage. Therefore, the terminal voltage magnitude, operating
real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and Min Q)
must be entered for voltage control power grids. A voltage control power grid means that the power grid
is base loaded (fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) controlling the terminal voltage
to a constant value. During load flow studies, if the calculated Mvar falls outside the Mvar capability
limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the value of the Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the power grid
mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
Using this option you can specify the amount of fixed MW and Mvar generation in the Rating page of the
Power Grid Editor. An Mvar control power grid means that the power grid is base loaded (fixed MW)
with a fixed Mvar generation (no AVR action).

PF Control
Setting the power grid in Power Factor (PF) Control allows you to specify the MW output as a fixed value
on the Rating page. The Power Factor is also specified, ETAP calculates the out Mvar of the grid into the
system.
11.8.2 Rating Page
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the power grid in kilovolts (kV). This entry is used by ETAP to convert the
utility short-circuit MVA to percent short-circuit. This value is also used as the power grid base kV.
Base voltages are calculated by ETAP beginning with the swing systems (swing power grids and/or swing
generators) and continuing for the rest of the system, using the rated kV of the transformer windings.
This group is used to assign the different power settings to each of the ten generation categories for this
power grid.. Each grid can be set to have a different operating power level for each generation category.
Depending on the operation mode, some of the values become editable as follows:

Swing Mode: %V and angle

Voltage Control Mode: %V and MW
Mvar Control: MW and Mvar
Power Factor Control: MW and PF
Note: You can select any of the generation categories from the load flow settings in the Study Cases such
as load flow, motor starting, transient stability, and others.
Gen. Cat.
The names of the generation categories. To modify these names, from the Project menu, point at Settings
and then select Generation Categories. Modify the names in the Generation Category dialog box.
% V (Voltage Magnitude)
Enter the magnitude of the power grid voltage as a percentage of the power grid nominal kV. This %
operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for swing and voltage control modes. This value
is used as an initial operating voltage for Mvar control power grids.
Vangle (Voltage Angle)

Enter the angle of the power grid voltage in degrees. This value is used as a reference angle for power
grids in swing mode. This value is used as an initial operating voltage angle for Mvar control power grids.
MW/kW
Enter the megawatt/kilowatt generation (real power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided
for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled power grids. This value will be held fixed for load flow
solutions.
Mvar/kvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) from the power grid. This field is provided for
Mvar controlled power grid types only. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
%PF
This is the power factor setting of the power grid. This column is editable for PF controlled grid types
only. This value will be held fixed for load flow solutions.
QMax and QMin

These entries specify the maximum and minimum limits for reactive power generation in Mvar/kvar.
These limits are required for voltage regulated power grid types only and should be obtained from the
capability curve (Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the specified
MW generation. If the value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at the limit
and the power grid type is changed to Mvar control.
Operating
Based on the latest load flow run, the operating voltage magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar are
displayed here; or, you may enter the operating voltage magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar. ETAP
will utilize these fields depending on the Operating Mode of the Power Grid. See Mode under the Power
Grid - Info page.

Connection
The connection of the power grid can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
connection is displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
SC Rating
MVAsc
Specify the short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) faults. As you enter or
modify MVAsc or X/R, ETAP recalculates the corresponding short-circuit impedance values.
The short-circuit MVA for three-phase and single-phase (line-to-ground) fault currents are calculated
from the following equations:
MVA3P = 3 * kV * I3P
MVA1P = 3 * kV * I1P
Where I3P and I1P are three-phase and single-phase short-circuit currents (kAsc). These values are
calculated and displayed.
kAsc
Enter the short-circuit contribution from the power grid. This value is updated if the MVAsc and X/R are
specified.
X/R
Enter the following X/R ratios for the positive and zero sequence impedances
3-Phase X/R = X/R ratio for positive sequence impedance of the power grid.
1-Phase X/R = X/R ratio for zero sequence impedance of the power grid.
SC Imp (100 MVA base)

Specify short-circuit impedance (resistance and reactance) in percent on a 100 MVA base. Short-circuit
impedance values include positive, negative, and zero sequences. As you enter or modify short-circuit
impedance values, ETAP recalculates the corresponding MVAsc and X/R for three-phase and single-
phase faults.

The Harmonic page provides the information to model the power grid as a harmonic source in harmonic
studies.

The Power Grid (Utility) can be modeled as a voltage harmonic source if it contains significant voltage
harmonic distortion. To model a Power Grid as a voltage harmonic source, a harmonic library needs to
be defined here.
Harmonic Library
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Note: Only voltage harmonic source can be added to power grids.

From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, select a manufacturer name and a model name (Voltage
Type
This displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
This displays Manufacturer name of the selected harmonic library.
Model
This displays the model name of the selected harmonic library.
Wave Form
This displays one cycle of the voltage or current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time
domain.
Print (Wave Form)

This prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)
This prints the harmonic spectrum.

A
service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/ A).
FOR
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A (FOR =
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library Button
Source
Type
Class
This displays the class of the library data selected

11.8.5 Energy Price Page

The Energy Price page contains the information on energy price (electricity price) from power grid, which
is used in optimal power flow, and the energy cost related calculation.
Model Type
Model for power grid energy price curve. Since most utilities bill customers in a fixed price for segment
of electricity usage, a Piecewise model is provided.
Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the power grid.
Note: This number can be negative, in which case, the system is exporting power into the power grid.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the power grid.

Model Parameter
Enter and change points in the list to specify an energy price curve. The data points are specified in pairs:
a MW value and the price of energy in Dollars/MWhr up to the MW value specified. For the example
shown in the graph, from 0 MW up to 1,000 MW, the price is $50 per MW.
Add
Click this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of list.
Insert
Click this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair.
Delete
Click this button to delete the highlighted data point pair.
Price Curve
This displays the curve from the data points entered.
Print
Click this button to print a hard copy of the price curve.
11.8.6 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Synchronous Generator
11.9 Synchronous Generator

The properties associated with synchronous generators of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor. Synchronous generator kV rating, MW rating, and Operating Mode are displayed on top of
each page for your information.
The Synchronous Generator Editor includes the following fifteen pages of properties:
Info Inertia Exciter Harmonic

Rating Governor Reliability
Capability Protection Fuel Cost
Imp/Model PSS Remarks
Grounding Comment
11.9.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the synchronous generator ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Equipment Name and Description, and synchronous generator type.

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous generator. The assigned generator IDs
consist of the default generator ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of generators increase. The default generator ID (Bus) can be changed from the Defaults menu in
the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous generator. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a synchronous generator to a
bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the
synchronous generator resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a synchronous generator is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of

the synchronous generator to a new bus from the editor, will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below, where Gen1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Next to the bus ID, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a bus can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus; however,
an Out of Service bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service bus automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches
status. Therefore, you can set a bus to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Configuration
In ETAP, the Operation Mode of the synchronous generator is dependent on the configuration. This
provides the flexibility of using multiple configurations to take into account different modes of operation.
See the Status Configuration Section in the Overview Chapter for information about creating new
configurations.
Operation Mode
The Generator Mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor.
Swing
For load flow studies, a swing generator will take up the slack of the power flows in the system, i.e., the
voltage magnitude and angle of the generator terminals will remain at the specified operating values.
For motor acceleration studies, an initial load flow study is conducted to determine initial conditions. For
the initial load flow, a swing generator is represented as an infinite source. At time 0+, the generator is
modeled as a voltage source behind its direct-axis transient impedance.
All generators are modeled dynamically from time 0+ for transient stability studies. One of the swing
machines (power grids or generators) is selected as the reference machine for the entire system.
There must be at least one swing machine (power grid or synchronous generator) connected to any
isolated subsystem in the one-line diagram. You can have multiple swing machines connected to any bus
in the system.
Any element that is connected to a swing machine is displayed as an energized element in the one-line
diagram and will be included in studies. Also, the rated voltage (kV) of a swing generator is used as the
base kV of the bus that the generator is connected to. The base kVs of the rest of the system are then
calculated using transformer turn ratios. For transient stability studies, a swing generator becomes the
reference machine for the system, i.e., the angle of the internal voltage source of the generator is set to
zero, and the voltage angle of all of the synchronous machines in the system will be relative to this
reference machine.
Voltage Control
A generator can be selected as a voltage control (regulated) system, which means that the generator will
adjust its var output to control the voltage. Therefore, the generators terminal voltage magnitude,
operating real power (MW), and minimum and maximum allowable reactive power supply (Max Q and
Min Q) must be entered for voltage control generators. A voltage control generator means that the
generator is base loaded (droop mode with fixed MW) with an Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR)
controlling the field excitation for a constant voltage operation. During load flow studies, if the

calculated generator Mvar falls outside the generator Mvar capability limits (Max Q or Min Q limit), the
value of the Mvar will be set equal to the limit and the Generator Mode is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Control
Synchronous Generator Editor. An Mvar control generator means that the generator is base loaded (droop
mode with fixed MW) with a fixed field excitation (no AVR action).
PF Control
In this mode, the governor is operating in Droop Mode, based loaded; therefore, the MW output is fixed
to the MW setting. On the other hand, the exciter AVR adjusts to the Power Factor Setting. The
generators MW and %PF settings must be entered on the Rating page for the generation category
selected when modeled in this mode.
11.9.2 Rating Page

Rating
kW/MW
Enter the rated real power of the synchronous generator in MW or kW. Choose from these two options
by clicking on the MW/kW button.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the synchronous generator in kV. This entry is used by ETAP to convert the
ohmic values of the circuit elements to per unit values for calculations. This value is also used to convert
the final synchronous generator voltage to the actual values for output reports. Base voltages are
calculated by ETAP, beginning with the swing systems (swing power grids and/or swing generators) and
continuing for the rest of the system using the rated kV of the transformer windings.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the synchronous generator in percent.
KVA/MVA
Enter the rated power of the synchronous generator in kVA or MVA.
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the synchronous generator in percent.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the synchronous generator.
% of Bus kVnom
Rated kV as a percent of the nominal kV of the terminal bus.
FLA
The generator full load current is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
RPM
ETAP displays the rated RPM (synchronous speed) of the synchronous generator based on the system
frequency and the number of poles entered (Ws=120 freq/pole).
This group is used to assign the different generation settings to each of the ten generation categories for
this machine. Each machine can be set to have a different operating generation level for each generation
category. Depending on the operation mode, some of the values are editable as follows:
Swing Mode: %V and angle

Voltage Control Mode: %V and MW
Power Factor Control: MW and PF
Note: You can select any of the generation categories from the load flow settings in the Study Cases such
as load flow, motor starting, transient stability and others.

Gen. Cat.
The names of the generation categories. To modify these names, from the Project Menu, point at Settings
and then select Generation Categories. Modify the names in the Generation Category dialog box.
% V (Voltage Magnitude)
Enter the voltage magnitude setting of the regulated bus at the synchronous generator terminal as a
percentage of the bus nominal kV. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value for
swing and voltage control modes. This value is used as an initial operating voltage for Mvar controlled
power grids.
Vangle (Voltage Angle)

Enter the voltage angle setting for the swing bus at the synchronous generator terminal in degrees. This
value is used as a reference angle for generators in swing mode. This value is used as an initial operating
voltage angle for Mvar control generators.
MW
Enter the operating megawatt generation (real power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is
provided for voltage controlled and Mvar controlled synchronous generator types. This value will be held
fixed for load flow solutions.
Mvar
Enter the megavar generation (reactive power supply) of the synchronous generator. This field is
provided for Mvar controlled synchronous generator types only. This value will be held fixed for load
flow solutions.
%PF
Power factor setting of the synchronous generator. This column is editable for PF Controlled
synchronous generator type only. This value is fixed for load flow solutions.
Min and Max Q (Minimum and Maximum Mvar/kvar)

These entries specify the minimum and maximum limits for reactive power generation. These limits are
required for voltage controlled synchronous generator types only and should be obtained from the
generator capability curve (Mvar vs. MW), i.e., the Max and Min Mvar limits should correspond to the
specified MW generation. If the value of the calculated Mvar falls outside this range, the value is fixed at
the limit and the generator type is changed to Mvar control.
Mvar Limits
Enter the Peak Mvar or kvar rating of the Generator. This limit may be User-Defined or obtained from
the Capability Curve. These parameters are used for alerts in the Motor Acceleration Program.
PrimeMover Rating
Enter the Continuous and Peak Horse Power, MW, or kW rating of the Generator Engine (Prime Mover)
in this group. These parameters are used for alerts in the Motor Acceleration program.
Operating
The results of the latest load flow run are displayed here; or, you may enter the operating voltage
magnitude, voltage angle, MW and Mvar. ETAP will utilize these fields depending on the Operating
Mode of the Power Grid. See Mode under the Generator - Info page.

11.9.3 Capability Page
You can specify the steady-state operating capability region of the generator from the Capability page of
the Synchronous Generator Editor. This region is used to determine the maximum and minimum reactive
power (Qmax and Qmin) that a generator can provide for a given reactive power output. When the
generator is operating in Swing Mode or when operating generation values are applied in calculation,
these limits will be used for alert checking.
The steady-state operating capability region is enclosed by four curves: the stator MVA limit curve, the
excitation limit curve, the steady-state stability curve, and the minimum real power output curve. In
ETAP, you define the steady-state operating region by specifying four values: Qa, Qc, Qd, and Pmin,
along with the rated reactive power output, Qb, which is specified on the Rating page.
Parameters
Qa
This is the maximum possible reactive power output (point a) limited by generator excitation and the
generator MVA rating. Point a is at the intersection of the excitation limit curve and the vertical axis.
You can let ETAP calculate the value or enter it yourself. If you select the Calculate Qa option, ETAP

will compute the value, based on generator rated reactive power output (Qb), rated output voltage, and
synchronous reactance (Xd). When Xd is equal to zero, Qa will be set to Qb.
Qb
This is the rated reactive power output (point b) specified on the Rating page. Point b is the rated
operating point of the generator.
Qc
Qc is the reactive power output at point c. Point c is at the intersection of the stator MVA limit curve and
the steady-state stability curve.
Qd
Qd is the reactive power output at point d. Point d is at the intersection of the steady-state stability curve
and the vertical axis. Because it is difficult for you to obtain detailed data to calculate exact steady-state
stability curve, ETAP uses a straight line between points c and d to represent the steady-state limit curve,
which gives a conservative result.
Pmin
This is the minimum real power output that must be delivered by a generator, such as one with a steam
turbine engine.
11.9.4 Imp/Model Page

Impedance
Xd
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xd/Ra
This is the armature X/R ratio (Xd/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both
cycle and 1-4 cycle networks.
Ra (%)
This is the armature resistance in percent (machine base).
Ra (Ohm)
This is the armature resistance in ohms.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for Harmonic
Analysis, short-circuit, and unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X2/R2
This is the negative sequence X/R ratio.
R2 (%)
This is the negative sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R2 (Ohm)
This is the negative sequence resistance in ohms.
Xo
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for unbalanced faults
under ANSI Short-Circuit Studies.
X0/R0
This is the zero sequence X/R ratio.
R0 (%)
This is the zero sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R0 (Ohm)
This is the zero sequence resistance in ohms.
X/R
This is the armature X/R ratio (X/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both

Xd Tolerance
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the
reactance values during short-circuit calculations. The Short-Circuit analysis module uses the negative
tolerance value.
H
This displays the machine total inertia from the Inertia page.
Machine Type
This is the short-circuit designation of the generator is used for ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standard
requirements.
Gen. Type
The generator type is used only for determining the generator reactance for ANSI/IEEE short-circuit
calculations as shown in the following table.
Gen. Type Cycle 1-4 Cycle 30 Cycle

Xsc Xsc Xsc
Turbo X" X" X
Hydro X" X" X
Hydro without Damper Winding 0.75 X 0.75 X X
Rotor Type
Round-Rotor: For machines that are made of round-rotor.
Salient-Pole: For machines that are made of salient-pole.
IEC Exciter Type

Depending on the Rotor type, the IEC Exciter Type is used for determining the max factor for generators
in the calculation of steady-state short-circuit currents per IEC Standard 909. max is proportional to fmax,
which takes different values based on exciter types as shown in the following table.
Rotor Type IEC Exciter Type fmax

Round Rotor Turbine 130% 1.3
Round Rotor Terminal Feed, Cylindrical 130% N/A
Salient Pole Salient-pole 160% 1.6
Salient Pole Terminal Feed, Salient Pole 160% N/A

There is no generator contribution to the steady-state short-circuit current for generator exciter types
specified as terminal fed.
Compound Excitation
Generator exciter fields are designed with instantaneous and short-term overload capability. This is
important so that the field can be overexcited (forced) for short periods of time to provide high levels of
var output to support the power system during disturbances that cause voltage to decay. Field forcing can
help the power system to ride through such disturbances.
IkF
Enter the steady state short-circuit current for a 3-phase terminal short-circuit in percent of FLA.
PG
Enter or select the generators voltage regulation in percent. This filed is used for IEC Shot Circuit
calculations when generator is specified as a unit generator.
Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous generator. All of the
parameters listed under Dynamic Model are used only for Transient Stability Studies. Full descriptions of
these variables are found in Chapter 24, Dynamic Models.
Model Type Description

Equivalent A model that uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and
quadrature-axis reactance.
Transient A more comprehensive model than the Equivalent model, including the
machines saliency.
Subtransient A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine, including
both transient and subtransient parameters.
Xd
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xdu
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xd
This is the direct-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value). This is
used for both motor starting and Transient Stability Studies and It is used for 30-cycle fault analysis and
Motor Starting Studies.
XL
This is the armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base)
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)

Xqu
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (saturated value, machine base)
Tdo
This is the direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tdo
This is the direct-axis subtransient open circuit-time constant in seconds
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds
Sbreak
This is the per unit of terminal voltage at which the generator saturation curve skews from the air-gap line
S100
This is the saturation factor at 100% terminal voltage
S120
This is the saturation factor at 120% terminal voltage
Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:
S100 = If100/If
S120 = If120/1.2If
where:
If = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the air gap line (no saturation)
If100 = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open circuit saturation curve

Sbreak
Damping
This is the shaft mechanical damping term in percent MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed (%
MW/Hz). Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10% (long shaft).

Display
The Font and Symbols options determine how the grounding connection is displayed on the one-line
diagram.
Font
Click on this button to display the grounding connection using the ETAP font. For Example:
Symbols
Display the grounding connection using one-line symbols. These elements, like any other one-line
element, can be sized, rotated, and changed depending on the standard. For Example:
Connection
These entries specify the synchronous generator grounding connections, type, and rating. The generator
grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection button until the desired connection is
displayed. The available connections are Wye and Delta.
Type
For Wye-connected windings, choose from the following grounding types provided in the list box:
Grounding Type Description

Xfmr-Reactor A transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a reactor in the
secondary of the transformer.
Xfmr-Resistor A transformer is used in the neutral grounding path with a resistor in the
secondary of the transformer.
Resistor and Reactor

The Resistor and Reactor connection types have the following grounding ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2.

Amp
For resistor or reactor grounded generators, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes, where
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Ohms).
Ohms
Resistor or reactor impedance in ohms.
Xfmr-Resistor and Xfmr-Reactor

The Xfmr (transformer) Resistor and Reactor connection types have the following grounding ratings:
V ln
Line-to-neutral voltage calculated as the bus nominal voltage of the machine divided by 3^1/2.
kV1
Transformer rated primary voltage in kV.
Amp
Amp Rating = (V ln) / (Prim. Ohms).
Prim. Ohms
Ohm value as seen from the primary side of the transformer.
kV2
Transformer rated secondary voltage in kV.
Amp2
Secondary current in amps. This calculation is based on the primary amps and the transformer turn ratio.
Sec. Ohms
Resistor and reactor impedance in ohms. This calculation is based on the grounding transformer turn
ratio and secondary current. If Sec. Ohms are entered first, primary amps and ohms will be calculated
automatically.
Transformer kVA
Grounding transformer kVA rating.
11.9.6 Inertia Page

Inertia Calculator
PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft.2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when one of them is known and RPM
has been entered based on the following equation:
H = 2.31 * 10-10 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA (for WR2 = Moment of inertia in lb-ft2)
H = 5.48 * 10-9 * WR2 * RPM2 / MVA (for WR2 = Moment of inertia in kg-m2)
Total RPM
The total RPM is equal to the Generator RPM.
Total WR2
The total WR2 is calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
Arithmetic sum of the PrimeMover, Coupling, and Generator H in MW-sec/MVA.

Shaft Torsion
Include Torsion Effect

Select this option to consider torsion effect between turbine, coupling gear, and generator during transient
stability calculation.
D1
This is the damping constant between turbine and coupling gear
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and generator
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of turbine and coupling gear
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and generator
11.9.7 Exciter Page

This Section allows you to define the representation of the excitation systems and automatic voltage
regulators (AVR) for synchronous generators.

The excitation and AVR systems for synchronous generators can be very sophisticated. Complete
modeling of these systems is usually necessary for Transient Stability Studies. The equivalent transfer
functions used for the excitation and AVR systems and their variable/parameter names are either provided
by exciter manufactures or in accordance with the IEEE recommended types as found from the following
references:
IEEE Working Group Report, "Computer Representation of Excitation Systems", IEEE

Transaction on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp.1460/1464.
IEEE Committee Report, "Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981,
pp.494/509.
IEEE Std 421.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992.
In general, exciter manufacturers should be contacted to determine the applicability of the IEEE-type
representations to their excitation systems.
Type
You can specify the excitation/AVR type by selecting one of the following models from the list box.
Refer to the Chapter on Dynamic Models for additional details.
Type Description
1 Continuously acting regulator with rotating exciter system
2 Rotating rectifier exciter with static regulator system
3 Static system with terminal potential and current supplies
1S Controlled rectifier system with terminal voltage
DC1 DC commutator exciter with continuous voltage regulation
DC2 DC commutator exciter with continuous voltage regulation and supplies from terminal
voltage
DC3 DC commutator exciter with non-continuous voltage regulation
ST1 Potential-source controlled-rectifier exciter
ST2 Static system with terminal potential and current supplies
ST3 Compound source-controlled rectifier exciter
AC1 Alternator-rectifier exciter system with non-controlled rectifiers and field current
feedback
AC2 High-initial-response alternator-rectifier exciter system with non-controlled rectifiers
and field current feedback
AC3 Field-controlled alternator-rectifier exciter
AC4 High-initial-response alternator-supplied controlled rectifier exciter
AC5A Simplified rotating rectifier exciter
AC8B IEEE type AC8B
SR8F Basler SR8F and SR125A exciter

Type Description
HPC HPC 840 AVR/exciter model
JEUM Jeumont Industrie excitation/AVR system
ST1D Static system with terminal potential and current supplies
AC1A IEEE type AC1A
ST4B IEEE type ST4B
Fixed Constant excitation (that is, no regulator action). This can be used for generators with
constant excitation or when the machine voltage regulator is operating under PF or
Mvar control.
UDM User defined dynamic model
Some exciter types require that you select a control bus from the dropdown list that appears when they are
specified.
Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of exciter to provide a set of sample data for the
selected exciter and AVR type.
Excitation System Symbols

The following table contains common symbols used to define the parameters of the various excitation
systems. For other exciter parameters not listed, refer to the Help Line for such parameters in the
particular exciter parameter. In most cases, constants and gains are in per-unit and time constants are in
seconds. The base voltage for the excitation system is defined so that one per unit exciter voltage will
produce rated generator voltage on the generator air-gap line.
Term Description
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage (applied to generator field)
FEX Rectifier loading factor
Ifd Generator field current
IN Normalized exciter load current
KA Regulator gain
KB Second stage regulator gain
KC Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance
KD Demagnetizing factor, function of exciter alternator reactances
KE Exciter constant related to self-excited field
KF,KN Regulator stabilizing circuit gains
KG Inner loop feedback constant
KH Exciter field current feedback gain
KI Current circuit gain coefficient

Term Description
KL Gain of exciter field current limit
KLV Gain of exciter low voltage limit signal
KP Potential circuit gain coefficient
KR Constant associated with regulator and alternator field power supply
KV Fast raise/lower contact setting
SE Exciter saturation function
TA, TB, TC Regulator amplifier time constants
TE Exciter time constant
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant
TF1,TF2 Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants (rotating rectifier system)
TR Regulator input filter time constant
TRH Travel time of rheostat drive motor
VA Regulator internal voltage
VERR Voltage error signal
VG Inner loop voltage feedback
VI Internal signal within voltage regulator
VLR Exciter field current limit reference
VLV Exciter low voltage limit reference
VN Rate feedback input variable
VR Regulator output voltage
VR max Maximum value of VR
VR min Minimum value of VR
Vref Regulator reference voltage setting
VRH Field rheostat setting
Vt Generator terminal voltage
Vthev Voltage obtained by vector sum of potential and current signals, Type 3 system
XL Reactance associated with potential source
HV Gate High value gate: If A > B, C = A; if A < B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is
output
LV Gate Low value gate: If A < B, C = A; if A > B, C = B, where A & B are inputs and C is
output

Compile UDM
ETAP gives you the ability to model your own Exciter through UDM (user defined models). If you select
any of the UDM models, this button will appear. By pressing this button, you will be taken to the UDM
Compiler Editor.
You will compile your model and return to this window. ETAP will use this Exciter model for its
calculations.
See the chapter on User-Defined Dynamic Models for more information.
11.9.8 Governor Page

This Section describes the representation of speed governing and engine control systems for synchronous
generators. The majority of models provided here are consistent with the IEEE committee report for
governors and turbines, "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System Studies,"
IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and System, Vol PAS-92, July/Dec 1973, pp.1904-1915. Other
models are vendor specific.
Governor/Turbine Type
You can specify the governor/turbine type by selecting one of the following models from the drop-down
list. Refer to the chapter on Dynamic Models for more information.

Type Description
ST = Steam-Turbine Governor System
ST1 = Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
ST2 = Tandem-Compound, Single-Reheat Steam Turbine
ST3 = Tandem-Compound, Double-Reheat Steam Turbine
STM = IEEE General Steam-Turbine Representation
GT = Gas-Turbine Governor System
GTF = Gas Turbine including Fuel System
GP = General Purpose Governor-Turbine System
DT = Diesel Engine Governor
505 = Woodward 505E PID Governor for Extraction Steam Turbine
UG8 = Woodward Governor
2301 = Woodward 2301A Governor for Diesel Unit
GTH = GE Heavy Duty Gas Turbine Model
GTS = GE Simplified Single Shaft Gas Turbine Model
MARS = Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set
GHH = GHH Brosig Steam Turbine Governor
DDEC = Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine
HYDR = Woodward Hydraulic Governor and Turbine
SGT = IEEE Gas-Turbine
PL-A = Power Logic Governor and Turbine Model A
ST60 = Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
ST70 = Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor
GT-2 = Gas-Turbine Governor System
GT-3 = Gas-Turbine Governor System (Non wind-up limit)
CT251 = Combustion Turbine Governor Model
GGOV3 = GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers
None = No Governor action, i.e., the mechanical power (Pm) is kept constant throughout
the time simulation studies.
Mode
Droop or Isoch Mode of operation.
LS GP#
From the dropdown list
Sample Data
selected governor/turbine type.
Compile UDM
ETAP allows you to model your own Exciter through UDM (user defined models). If you select any of
the UDM models, this button will appear. By pressing this button, you will be taken to the UDM
Compiler Editor.
calculations.

See the chapter on User Defined Dynamic Models, Chapter 20, for more information.

This page provides options to plot the generator (I2)2 t curve and short-circuit decrement curve for a
generator on a Star View.
Thermal Capability
Generator thermal capability curve (I2)2 t is calculated based on the negative sequence current, where the
negative sequence current is expressed in multiples of machine rated stator current or FLA.
Plot (I2)2 t
Check this box to plot (I2)2t characteristic curve of the generator on a Star View.

(I2)2 t Factor
For synchronous generators with a rotor type defined as round rotor, this factor is typically equal to 30,
whereas for salient pole, this factor is typically equal to 40.
The table below lists some of the other common generator types and their (I2)2 t factors.

Model Type Type of Generator (I2)2t product (K)
N/A Turbine Generator 30

N/A Synchronous Condenser 30
N/A Frequency-changer 30
N/A Hydraulic Turbines 40
N/A Engine-Driven Generators 40
Round-Rotor Indirectly Cooled 30
Round-Rotor Directly Cooled 0-800 MVA 10
Directly Cooled 801- 10 (0.00625*(MVA-800))
Round-Rotor
1600MVA Range ~ 5 to 10
Salient-Pole with damper
Salient Pole 40
winding
Salient-Pole without damper
Salient Pole 40
winding
Short-Circuit Decrement
Short-Circuit Plot Decrement Total

Use this selection to draw the generator decrement curve (Sum of AC and DC components) on all Star
Views containing the selected generator.
Plot Decrement AC Only

Use this selection to draw the generator decrement curve (AC component only) on all Star Views
containing the selected generator.
Initial Loading Condition No Load Condition

When No Load Condition is selected, ETAP will use load power factor angle = 0 degrees to calculate
machine internal voltage.
Initial Loading Condition Full Load Condition

When Full Load Condition is selected, ETAP will use power factor angle based on rated load to calculate
machine internal voltage. The magnitude of fault current will be higher for a generator in full load
condition when compared to no load condition.
Compound Excitation
This is the armature current in percent of rated FLA of the generator. If compound excitation (Imp/Model
Page) is checked then its value will be shown on the protection page as a display only field. Including
compound excitation affects the magnitude of the steady state fault current contribution from the
generator.
11.9.10 PSS Page

Power system stabilizer (PSS) is an auxiliary device installed on synchronous generator and tuned to help
with system stability.

ETAP provides two standard IEEE type models:
IEEE Type 1 PSS (PSS1A)

Sample Data
The Sample Data button can be used for each type of PSS to provide a set of sample data for the selected
stabilizer type.
Compile UDM
ETAP allows you to model your own Exciter through UDM (user defined models). If you selected any of
the UDM models, this button will appear. By pressing this button, you will be taken to the UDM
Compiler Editor.
calculations.
See the chapter on User Defined Dynamic Models, Chapter 20, for more information.


The Harmonic page contains the information to model the synchronous generator as a harmonic source in
Harmonic Studies.
Harmonic Library
A synchronous Generator can be modeled as a voltage harmonic source if it contains significant voltage
harmonic distortion. To model a Synchronous Generator as a voltage harmonic source, a harmonic
library must be defined on this page.
Library
Click the Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Note: Only voltage harmonic source can be added to generators.

From the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor, select a manufacturer name and a model name (Voltage
Type
Displays the harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
Displays Manufacturer name of the selected harmonic library.
Model
Displays the model name of the selected harmonic library.
Wave Form
Displays one cycle of the voltage or current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time domain.
Print (Wave Form)

Prints the harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Displays the harmonic spectrum of the selected harmonic library.
Print (Spectrum)
Prints the harmonic spectrum.

A
service, after the actively failed component is isolated, and the protection breakers are reclosed. This
MTTR
Enter the Mean Time To Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Library
11.9.13 Fuel Cost Page

The Fuel Cost page contains the information on generator fuel cost, which is used in optimal power flow
and the energy cost related calculation.

Model Type
Model for generator fuel cost curve. Three models are available:
Piecewise
Equation
V Curve
Profile
Profile list is added to this page and can include up to 10 Fuel Costs ($/Mbtu) (Profile 1 Profile 10).
This is similar to the loading category in ETAP.
The Fuel Cost Profile names are user-definable and can be changed from the Project Setting menu.

By selecting Fuel Cost Profile, you can customize the name of any of the 10 fuel/energy cost profiles
be up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
The 10 cost profiles will keep track of the Fuel Cost for each generator. That is there can be 10 fuel cost
($/MMBtu) per generator (one for each profile).
Optimal Power Flow Study Case includes a selection list for Fuel/Energy Cost profiles. For the selected
cost profile of the generation and power grids, the Optimal Power Flow program will calculate the
minimum fuel source and minimize fuel cost.
Curve Type
The following options are available for the Piecewise model:
Heat Rate vs. Output

Cost vs. Output

The following options are available for the Equation model:
Input vs. Output

Cost vs. Output
The following options are available for the V Curve model:
Cost vs. Output
Depending on the above selection Model Parameters heading and data are changed to reflect the
appropriate heading. The plot is also updated based on the curve type selection.
Model Parameter
Piecewise Model
For this model, data points for series fuel cost ($/hr) and average incremental fuel cost ($/MWh) for
generating the corresponding MW are specified.
Note: The initial cost such as Operation and Maintenance costs can be specified for 0 MW.
The model parameter columns/headings for Cost vs. Output curve type are as follows for the Piecewise
Model:
MW Output MW (x axis)
$/hr Input / Output (y axis)
Incremental $/MWh Average Incremental Cost (y axis)
The model parameter columns/headings for Heat Rate vs. Output curve type are as follows for Piecewise
model:
MW Output MW (x axis)
1000 Btu/hr Input / Output Heat Rate (y axis)
Incremental Btu/kWh Average Incremental Heat Rate (y axis)
Add
Click this button to add a blank new data point pair at the end of model parameter list. This feature is
available with the Piecewise models.
Insert
Click this button to insert a blank new point pair before the highlighted data point pair. This feature is
available with the Piecewise models.
Delete
Click this button to delete the highlighted data point pair. This feature is available with the Piecewise
models.

Equation Model
For equation based model the incremental plot is the instantaneous value (dy/dx) and not the average
incremental. For Cost curve y is defined as $/hr. For Input-Output Curve y is defined as 1000 Btu/hr and
x = MW.
Instantaneous Incremental Cost = dy / dx

Where y = $/hr and x = MW
Instantaneous Incremental Heat Rate = dy / dx

Where y = 1000 Btu/hr, and x = MW
CO, C1, C2, C3, K

Enter the coefficients for the equation based cost curve
Y = C0 + C1*x + C2*x2 + C3*e(K*x)

V-Curve Type
For this model, a desired MW generation point MidPoint is entered in MW and the slope of fuel cost
curve is entered in Weight. This model can be utilized to represent energy cost at various MW output
levels based on pre-defined power generation rate schedules.
For V-Curve Model type, the Curve is set to Cost vs. Output and the list box is disabled (grayed out).
Fuel Cost
Fuel cost is used for the conversion of Heat Rate values to Cost values. The fuel cost is given in $/MBtu.
(Note MBtu = 10-6 Btu) The fuel cost field is displayed for Heat Rate vs. Output curve types only in the
Model Parameter group. There can be up to 10 fuel costs for a given generator (10 profiles).
$ / hr = 1000 Btu/hr * $/MBtu
Min MW
Enter the minimum MW imported from the generator.
Max MW
Enter the maximum MW imported from the generator.

Cost Curve
Displays the curve from the data points entered.
For Piecewise and Equation models:
Curve Type = Cost vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Cost ($)

Y2 Axis: Incremental Cost ($/MWh)
X Axis: Output (MW)
Curve Type = Heat Rate vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Input (1000 Btu/hr)

Y2 Axis: Incremental Heat Rate (Btu/kWh)
X Axis: Output (MW)
For V-Curve model:

Curve Type = Cost vs. Output
Y1 Axis: Cost ($)
X Axis: Output (MW)
Print
Click this button to print a hard copy of the cost curve.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Wind Turbine Generator
11.10 Wind Turbine Generator - WTG

You can enter the properties associated with wind turbine generators of the electrical distribution system
using this editor. Wind turbine generator (WTG) converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. Wind
turbine rotor supplies fluctuating mechanical power (torque) to the connected generator.
The Wind Turbine Generator Editor includes the following ten pages of properties:
Info Rating Imp/Model

Turbine Wind Controller
Inertia Reliability Remarks
Comment
11.10.1 Info Page

You can specify the wind turbine Generator (WTG) ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, Priority, Generator Type, Configuration, Operation
Mode, and Connection within the fields of the Info page.

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each WTG. The assigned IDs consist of the default WTG ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of WTGs increase. The
default WTG ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the WTG. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an induction machine to a bus, select a bus
from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on
OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the WTG resides, i.e., you cannot
connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a WTG is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the wind turbine
to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where WTG is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a WTG can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In Service or
Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service machine can be edited like an In Service
machine; however, an Out of Service machine will not be included in any system studies. When the
continuity check is activated, an Out of Service machine automatically becomes grayed out in the one-
line diagram.
Data.

Equipment
FDR Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate,
Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the drop-down list. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names,
navigate to the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are allowed. To change priority
names, from the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
Generator Type
Select the generator type for this WTG from the drop-down list. ETAP currently models Doubly Fed
Induction Generator (DFIG) connected to a wind driven rotor for analysis purposes.
Configuration
In ETAP, the Operation Mode of the WTG is dependent on the configuration. This provides the flexibility
of using multiple configurations to take into account different modes of operation. For information about
creating new configurations, see the Status Configuration Section in the Overview Chapter.
Select the operating status of the WTG for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Operation Mode
The Generator Mode of operation and its ratings are displayed on the top of the editor.
Mvar Control
Wind Turbine Generator Editor.
Connection
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of similar WTGs in the electrical network. The maximum number is 999 and
the default is 1.

11.10.2 Rating Page

On this page, you can specify the rating of the WTG, its Mvar Limits, the average wind speed, its
operating values, and the WTG categories.
Ratings
MW/kW
You can toggle between these two options by clicking on the MW/kW button. Enter the rated real power
of the WTG in MW or kW.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the WTG in kV. This entry is used by ETAP to convert the ohmic values of the
circuit elements to per unit values for calculations. This value is also used to convert the final WTG
voltage to the actual values used for output reports.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the WTG as a percentage.

% Eff
This is the efficiency of the machine, in percent, at 100% loading. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The
efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when
you change the efficiency at 100% loading, the machine full load current is recalculated. All three values
of the efficiencies are used for determining the machine efficiency under different percent loading, i.e.,
when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder losses for all
loading categories are recalculated.
Poles
Enter the number of poles for the synchronous generator. As the number of poles is changed, the
synchronous speed of the machine is recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per minute).
RPM = 120 * Freq./Poles
RPM
ETAP displays the rated RPM (synchronous speed) of the WTG based on the system frequency and the
number of poles entered (Ws=120 freq/pole).
MVA
ETAP displays the rated power of the synchronous generator in MVA.
% of Bus kVnom
ETAP displays the percentage of nominal bus kV.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the machine calculated and displayed in amperes. This is the current
the WTG will pull from the system when it is fully loaded (that is, when the system is operating at the
rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency). When you modify FLA, the WTG efficiency at 100%
loading is recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot
exceed 100% or be below 10%.
Mvar Limits
Click on one of the two buttons to specify if the Mvar limits are user-defined or set by the Controller.
Wind Speed
This field displays the average wind speed in the Avg Wind Speed field in meters per second (m/s)
This group is used to assign the various generation settings to each of the ten generation categories for
this WTG. Each WTG can be set to have a different operating generation level for each generation
category. Depending on the operation mode, some of the values are editable as follows:
% wind speed will use the Cp curve data to calculate operating kW and kvar for each generation category
to be used by load flow analysis and all other modules that require pre-start generation levels.
Operating Values

%V
Enter the operating terminal voltage magnitude in this field as a percentage, using up to 7 numeric
characters.
Vangle
Enter the operating voltage angle in this field, using up to 5 numeric characters.
MW
Enter the WTG operating real power (MW) in this field, using up to 7 numeric characters.
Mvar
Enter the WTG operating reactive power (Mvar) in this field, using up to 7 numeric characters
11.10.3 Impedance Model Page
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
Enter the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the
motor, using up to 5 numeric characters.

% PF
Enter the locked-rotor power factor in percent, using up to 5 numeric characters.
ANSI Short-Circuit Z
Std MF/Xsc
If you select Std MF, ETAP uses the following ANSI Multiplying Factors for calculating the positive
sequence short-circuit impedances. If you select the Xsc option, you can directly enter the short-circuit
impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base. Note: the IEC Short-Circuit Method does not use
these impedances.
Xsc Xsc
HP kW RPM Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle
Network
> 1000 HP >745.7 1800 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
> 250 HP > 186.4 3600 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
50 HP 37.28 other 1.2/LRC 3.0/LRC
< 50 HP <37.28 1.67/LRC Infinity
Parameters
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base); used for calculating short-circuit currents
for unbalanced faults. Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
X2
This is the negative sequence reactance in percent (machine base); this value is used for Harmonic
Analysis, Short-Circuit, and Unbalanced Load Flow Studies. Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
X/R
This is the induction motors X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra). Enter up to 7 numeric characters.
Td
This is the induction motor transient time constant in seconds. Enter up to 5 numeric characters. This
value is used in the IEC 363 Method.
Grounding
Clicking on the Grounding button makes the Grounding Information box appear. You can use its entries
to specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
The motor grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired

Grounding Type
Choose from these four grounding types provided in the drop-down list:
Open Neutral is not connected to ground (ungrounded).

Solid Solidly grounded, no intentional impedance in the neutral grounding path.
Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.
Reactor A reactor is used in the neutral grounding path.
Model
The Model area provides performance graphs and a field that displays the generator model type. Clicking
on the Lib button causes the Library Quick Pick box to appear. You can select from the provided list of
Design IDs and Models to specify the Model Type, Design Class and Model ID using the Library Quick
Pick.
WTG CKT Model Library

You can access Motor Model Library data by selecting CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to
open the Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor model data from the library can be obtained and
transferred to the Motor Editor by selecting the Model Type (Single1, Single2, DBL1, or DBL2) and then
highlighting a Design Class and model ID. Motor model is used for dynamic motor starting and transient
stability analysis.

After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the WTG CKT Model Editor and the WTG
Parameter Update Editor appears, which displays the updated WTG parameters. Click on the UPDATE
button to apply these parameters or the Cancel button to reject them and close the editor without apply
any changes. ETAP recalculates model parameters after you select a new circuit or characteristic model.
The update occurs when you click OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to
another motor.

11.10.4 Turbine Page
You can use the Turbine page to define the characteristics of the turbine either by selecting turbine data
from a library or by entering the required data manually. Click on the appropriate button to select the
library or user-defined options. If you select data from a library all fields in the aerodynamics group will
be populated. If you later change any parameter in a field the library header text will change to a dark
blue color to indicate a change was made to the library data by a user.
Aerodynamics
This area contains rotor and air density and speed data that are used to generate the curve displayed in the
Power Curve field.
V Rated
This is the turbine rated wind speed in meters-per-second (m/s). Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this
field.

Cut-in Speed
This is the minimum wind speed in m/s required for the turbine to generate power. Enter up to 9 numeric
characters in this field.
Cut-out Speed
This is the maximum wind speed in m/s required for the turbine to generate power. Enter up to 9 numeric
Swept Area
This is the rotor swept area in M2(Pi * CD/2)2 for a horizontal type of turbine. Enter up to 9 numeric
Diameter
This is the rotor diameter in meters. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Pitch Angle
This is the rotor blade pitch and angle in degrees. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Air Density
This is the air density in kg/m3. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
RPM
This is the rotor/turbine rated RPM. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Power Curve
This field displays a graph of the WTG power curve generated from either the Aerodynamics library data
or the user-defined data.
Click on the Print button to print the graph.
Power Coefficient Cp
This area allows you to enter nine numeric constants for the turbine Cp (thrust coefficient) curve.
Clicking the Sample Data button refreshes the nine fields with ETAP default data. These data are used to
generate the graph displayed in the Wind Power Cp Curve field. The Cp curve data is analyzed by the
Transient Stability module to allow you to accurately model system disturbances and events while
performing studies such as impact of wind variation on running turbines.
The 9 fields of the Power Coefficient Cp area make up the coefficients for the equation based Wind
Power Cp Curve. Enter the coefficients for the equation based curve:
C1
This is the numeric constant for the first turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C2
This is the numeric constant for the second turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this
field.
C3
This is the numeric constant for the third turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.

C4
This is the numeric constant for the fourth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C5
This is the numeric constant for the fifth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C6
This is the numeric constant for the sixth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C7
This is the numeric constant for the seventh turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this
field.
C8
This is the numeric constant for the eighth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
C9
This is the numeric constant for the ninth turbine Cp curve. Enter up to 9 numeric characters in this field.
Wind Power Cp Curve

This field displays a graph of the wind power curve generated from the user-defined Power Coefficient
Cp data.
Click on the Print button to print the graph.

11.10.5 Wind Page
You can use the Wind page to enter wind related factors that ETAP can use to create a wind profile for a
wind farm.
Average Base Speed

This is the average wind speed in meter-per-second (m/s). Enter up to 8 numeric characters in this field.
Wind Disturbance
This area allows you to enter wind-related data or load wind-related data from a library. Click on the
appropriate button to load data from a Wind Library, or chose to enter the data manually.
Wind Profile
This field displays an ETAP generated graph of the wind profile based on the supplied data.

Ramp Wind
Use this area to define the ramp characteristics of wind.
Max. Ramp
This is the maximum ramp wind speed in meter-per-second (m/s). Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this
field.
Ramp Start
This is the ramp starting time in seconds. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.
Ramp Stop
This is the ramp stopping time in seconds. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.
Gust Wind
Use this area to define the gust characteristics of wind.
Gust Peak
This is the gust peak wind speed in m/s. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Gust Start
This is the gust starting time in seconds. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.
Gust Period
This is the gust stopping time in seconds. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.
Noise Wind
Use this area to define the drag coefficient, turbulence, mean speed, and frequency characteristics of
wind.
Surface Drag
This is the noise wind surface drag coefficient. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Turbulence Scale
This is the turbulence scale in meters. Enter up to 8 numeric characters in this field.
Mean Speed
This is the mean wind speed in m/s. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Frequency
This is the Noise Fundamental Frequency in Radian per seconds. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this
field.
N
This is the Frequency Component Number. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.

11.10.6 Controller Page
The data on the WTG Controller page is analyzed by the Transient Stability module. Using it, you can
define the Converter Control factors and the Pitch Control factors for each WTG. Click on the Sample
Data button in each area to reload ETAP default data into these fields.
Converter Control
Model Type
Select a model type from the drop-down list.
Rc
Compensating line resistance in ohms.
Xc
Compensating line reactance in ohms.
Ti
Converter time constant in seconds.
Tr
Voltage control time constant in seconds.

Tv
Voltage control time constant in seconds. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Tpc
Power order control time constant in seconds
Kp
Converter proportional gain factor in pu.
Ki
Converter integral gain in pu.
Kpv
Voltage control proportional gain in pu.
Kiv
Voltage control integral gain in pu.
Pmax
Maximum power order in percent
Pmin
Minimum power order in percent
Qmax
Maximum reactive power in percent.
Qmin
Minimum reactive power in percent.
Vmax
Maximum rotor voltage in percent.
Vmin
Minimum rotor voltage in percent.
Rate_max
Maximum power order rate of change in percent/sec.
Rate_min
Minimum power order rate of change in percent/sec.
Pitch Control
Model Type
Select a model type from the drop-down list.
K
This is the control gain in pu (power units). Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.

Ts
This is the control time constant in seconds. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Rmax
This is the rising rate limiter in degrees per second. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Rmin
This is the falling rate limiter in degrees per second. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Theta_max
This is the maximum pitch angle in degrees. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Theta_min
This is the minimum pitch angle in degrees. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
Wmax
This is the maximum wind in meters per second. Enter up to 7 numeric characters in this field.
11.10.7 Inertia Page

Inertia Calculator
Turbine, Gear, and Generator RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
Turbine, Gear, and Generator. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when one of them is known and RPM has
been entered based on the following equation:
or
-9 2 2
H = 5.48 * 10 * WR * RPM / MVA (for WR2 = Moment of inertia in kg-m2)
Total RPM
The Total RPM is equal to the Generator revolutions per minute.
Total WR2
The Total WR2 for Turbine, Gear, and Generator in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on system unit, as calculated
based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
This is the total inertia of the generator shaft including Turbine, Gear, and Generator in MW-sec/MVA.
As noted, some of the below fields accept user-defined data.
RPM/Turbine
This is the turbine rated speed in RPMs.
RPM/Gear
This is the gear rated speed in RPMs. Enter up to 5 numeric characters in this field.
RPM/Generator
This is the Generator rated speed in revolutions per minute RPMs.
WR2/Turbine
This is the Turbine WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters
in this field.
WR2/Gear
This is the Gear WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in
this field.
WR2/Generator
This is the Generator WR2 in lb-ft2 or Kg-m2 based on the system unit. Enter up to 10 numeric characters
in this field.
H/Turbine
This is the Turbine inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
H/Gear
This is the Gear inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.

H/Generator
This is the Generator inertia in MW-sec/MVA. Enter up to 10 numeric characters in this field.
A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this leads
MTTR
This is the Mean Time to Repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick Editor for reliability data.
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the load sector name (or customer type) for the load. In the reliability calculation, the user sector
information is used to get interruption cost from the Reliability Cost library to calculate Expected
Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this element. The names of the User-
Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu bar.





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

Enter any extra data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated with this
element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to
the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.


AC Elements Induction Machine
11.11 Induction Machine

You can enter the properties associated with induction machines of the electrical distribution system
using this editor.
The Induction Machine Editor includes the following thirteen pages of properties:
Info Nameplate Model

Inertia Protection Load Model
Start Dev. Start Cat. Cable/Vd
Cable Amp Reliability Remarks
Comment
11.11.1 Info Page

You can specify the induction machine ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, Name, Description, Load Priority, Data Type, Configuration Status, Quantity of Induction Machines,
Phase Connection, and Demand Factor within the fields of the Info page.

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each induction machine. The assigned IDs consist of the
default induction machine ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
of induction machines increase. The default induction machine ID (Mtr) can be changed from the
Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the induction machine. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an induction machine to a bus,
select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the induction machine resides,
i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If an induction machine is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
induction machine to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where Mtr3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of an induction machine can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the
In Service or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service machine can be edited like an In
Service machine; however, an Out of Service machine will not be included in any System Studies. When
the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service machine automatically becomes dimmed in the one-
line diagram.
Data.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the induction machine(s) for the selected configuration status from the list
box. Options for operating status include the following:
Status Description
Continuous Continuously operating load
Intermittent Intermittently operating load
Spare Spare load (no short-circuit contribution)
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the machine is
determined for Load Flow and Motor Starting Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the machine engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the machine status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a machine
is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the induction machine. Select the phase connection type from the list box.
Options for phase connection include:
Selection Description
3 Phase 3-phase machine
1 Phase Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B or C.
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC, or CA
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of induction machines for this machine ID. This allows you to group
identical machines together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram. View the
explanations below to see how ETAP handles Quantity in Load Flow, Short-Circuit, Arc Flash, and
Sequence-of-Operation.
Load Flow:
Notice in the following example of a load flow calculation the current at Bus 2 is equivalent to the sum of
each current going to each load at bus 4. This occurs because the quantity of Motor 1 is changed to three.
ETAP simulates the effect of what you see in the system powered by U2 without having to display each
load.

In the diagram above, the fuse is red which is showing a critical alert. In the alert view below, Fuse1 is
shown to be operating at 156.569. The critical alert for the protective device used on a load with a
quantity greater than one is based on the operating current calculated by the characteristics of a single
load.
Short-Circuit:
In the following Short-Circuit Analysis Motor 1 is contributing 1.13kA to the system. Because Motor 1
has a quantity of three, that current is three times the current that would be seen with a single motor. The
load terminal fault current is shown as the current for each load.

shown to be operating at 30.645. The critical alert for the protective device used on a load with a quantity
greater than one is based on the operating short-circuit current calculated by the characteristics of a single
load.
You cannot run Sequence-of-Operation if you have a Quantity greater than one. Sequence-of-Operation
is not used to run simultaneous faults on loads.

Arc Flash
In the following Arc Flash example, the bus Arc Flash characteristics of Bus 2 is equal to Bus 4. The
reason is that Motor 1 has a quantity of three which is a quick way of showing what you see in the system
under Utility 2.

The Arc Flash Analysis report shows the incident energy at the terminal of Motor 1 is equal to the
incident energy of the terminal at each motor in the equivalent One-Line View. The incident energy of a
motor with a quantity greater than one is shown as the incident energy calculated by the characteristics of
a single load.

Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Data Type
Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types. To change the data type names,
navigate to the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this machine from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are allowed. To change priority
names, from the Project Menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.
App. Type
Select the application type (either motor or generator) for this induction machine type.
Demand factor
Modify the demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status in the provided entry fields.
Demand factor is the amount of time the induction machine is actually operating. Demand factor affects
the following calculations:
Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
This pertains when the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified
% loading from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.
Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since
demand factors are a part of engineering properties, ETAP uses the same factors for all configurations.
11.11.2 Nameplate Page

On this page, you can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings). Select Motor Library data, specify %
loading, and display motor loading and feeder losses for all Loading Categories.

Ratings
HP/kW
Enter the machine output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two
options by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equations for the nameplate
parameters:
Rated kVA = HP * 0.7457/( PF * Eff ) Rating in HP

= kW/( PF * Eff ) Rating in kW
Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA/(3 * kV ) 3-phase machines

= Rated kVA/kV Single phase machines
where the PF and Eff are at full load condition (100% loading).

MVA/kVA
You can toggle between these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button. The machine rating will
be displayed in MVA or kVA and the machine operating load and feeder losses in (MW + j Mvar) or (kW
+ j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the machine in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for 3-phase machines.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the machine in amperes. This is the current the machine will pull
from the system when it is fully loaded (that is, when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW),
rated kV, and rated frequency). When you modify FLA, the machine efficiency at 100% loading is
recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100%
or be below 10%.
% PF
Enter the machine power factor in percent at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. The power factor at 100%
loading is the rated power factor and is used for calculating the rated values. (That is, when you change
the power factor at 100% loading, the machine full load current is recalculated.) All three values of the
power factors are used for determining the operating power factor of the machine under different percent
loading. (In other words, when you change any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder
losses for all loading categories are recalculated.)
The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. Since induction machines always
take reactive power (kvars) from the system, they have a lagging power factor, which must be entered as a
positive value.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the machine, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. Efficiency cannot
exceed 100%. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated
values, i.e., when you change the efficiency at 100% loading, the machine full load current is
recalculated. All three values of the efficiencies are used for determining the machine efficiency under
different percent loading, i.e., when you change the value of any one of the efficiencies, the operating
load and feeder losses for all loading categories are recalculated.
Rated %Slip and RPM

Enter the rated slip or rated RPM (Speed in revolutions per second) for this machine. Slip is in percent.
When one of these values is entered, the other is calculated based on the following relation:
Rated RPM = (100 - %Slip)*Nominal RPM where Nominal RPM is calculated based on the poles.
The maximum rated speed is used by ETAP to calculate the torque at full load.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the machine is
recalculated and displayed in RPM (revolutions per minute).

SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. Service factor is not used for calculation of
loading or feeder losses. ETAP gives you the option to use the service factor for voltage drop
calculations of the machine feeder.
Library
Access the Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library
Quick Pick - Motor. Motor Nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by
highlighting and double-clicking on the selection. Library data includes motor ratings such as HP/kW,
kV, FLA, PF, Eff, and Pole (transferred to the Nameplate page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR
PF, X, X, X, X2, X0, X/R, and Td (transferred to the Model page). The library selected is displayed
next to the library button.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this machine,
i.e., each machine can be set to have a different operating loading (generator) level for each loading
category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column.
Note: You can select any of these loading categories when conducting Load Flow and Motor Starting
Studies.
ETAP uses the specified percent loading of each loading category to calculate the operating power factor
and efficiency from the values specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. This is accomplished by using
a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and efficiency. The calculated power
factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the operating kW and kvar loading, as well as
the feeder losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is specified for this load.

Note: Although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and feeder losses, the value
of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating power factor and efficiency.
To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project Menu.
Operating Load
Operating Load can be updated from the Load Flow Study Case Editor. The operating load option is
available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Management System) feature.
When the operating load box is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor, the calculation results are
updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP
key does not have the online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the Element Editor;
however, this data cannot be used in a later study.
11.11.2.1 Typical Nameplate Data

You can choose from typical nameplate data, once a voltage and kW/HP are specified in a Machine
Editor.
NEC
NEC data is available for a selected range of machine sizes and voltage levels. NEC specifies an
ampacity. ETAP calculates %Efficiency and kVA using the NEC Ampacity value and a typical %Power
Factor.
MFR
Manufacturer typical data is available for any machine size. Ampacity and kVA are calculated using
typical %Power Factor and %Efficiency.

Existing
A machine is considered to have an existing set of data after NEC or MFR have been selected. You can
decide not to update parameters after changing a size or voltage level by choosing to keep the existing set
of data.
Library Button
This button will bring up the Motor Library Quick Pick.
11.11.3 Model Page
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
This is the machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the
motor.

% PF
ANSI Short-Circuit Z
Std MF/Xsc
impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base.
Note: The IEC Short-Circuit Method does not use these impedances.
Xsc Xsc
HP kW RPM Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network
> 1000 HP >745.7 1800 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
> 250 HP > 186.4 3600 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
50 HP 37.28 other 1.2/LRC 3.0/LRC
< 50 HP <37.28 1.67/LRC Infinity
Parameters
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base); used for calculating short-circuit currents
for unbalanced faults.
X2
Analysis, Short-Circuit, and Unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X/R
This is the induction motors X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra).
Td
This is the induction motor transient time constant in seconds. This value is used in the IEC 363 method.
Torque
LRT
This is the locked Rotor Torque as a percentage of the full load torque.
MaxT
This is the maximum torque as a percentage of the full load torque.

Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection
Grounding Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:

Resistor A resistor is used in the neutral grounding path.)
Amp Rating
Enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes for resistor or reactor grounded motors.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohm Value)
Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the rated voltage of the machine divided by 3.
Parameter Estimation
Clicking on this button will call up the Parameter Estimation module. See Chapter 30, Parameter
Estimation for more information on parameter estimation.
Model
stability analysis.
Note: The data in the Motor CKT model library is sample data. For a specific motor, enter the Motor
CKT Model provided by the manufacturer.

Motor Designs (NEMA MG-1)
Locked Breakdown Locked Relative

Rotor Torque (% Rotor Efficiency
Classification Torque (% Rated Load Current Slip Typical Applications

Rated Load Torque) (% Rated (%)
Torque) Load
Current)
Design B 70-275* 175-300* 600-700 0.5-5 Fans, blowers, centrifugal Medium
Normal locked pumps and compressors, or
rotor torque motor-generator sets, etc., High
and normal where starting torque
locked rotor requirements are relatively
current. low.
Design C 200-250* 190-225* Conveyors, crushers, Medium
High locked 600-700 1-5 stirring machines, agitators,
rotor torque reciprocating pumps and
and normal compressors, etc., where
locked rotor starting torque under load
current. are required.
Design D 275 High peak loads with or Medium
High locked 275 600-700 5-8 without fly wheels such as
rotor torque punch presses, shears,
and high slip. elevators, extractors,
winches, hoists, oil-well
pumping, and wire-drawing
machines.
Design E 75-190* 160-200* 800-1000 0.5-3 Fans, blowers, centrifugal High
IEC 34-12 pumps and compressors,
Design N motor-generator sets, etc.,
locked rotor where starting torque
torques and requirements are relatively
currents. low.
Note: Design a motor performance characteristics are similar to those for Design B except that the locked
rotor starting current is higher than the values shown in the table above.

CKT Model Library

stability analysis.
After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or
navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the following message to update (modify) some of the
nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.
Characteristic Model Library

You can access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and
clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick - Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library
data (slip, torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting
a Model ID. When you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor CKT Model Library data, the
library data is not transferred to the Machine Editor, i.e., a reference to the selected library design class
and model ID is kept with the machine. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run
Motor Starting Studies.
Note: The characteristic data is not considered a dynamic model for Transient Stability Studies.
After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select
another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the message shown above to
update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the selected
library.

Print
Click on this selection to print the torque, current, & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for
the selected model (CKT or characteristic).
11.11.3.1 Update Model Parameter Data

ETAP recalculates model parameters after you select a new circuit or characteristic model. The update
occurs when you click OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or navigate to another
motor. ETAP prompts you with the following message to update (modify) some nameplate parameters
that do not match the calculated values using the selected model.

Inertia Calculator
Motor, Coupling, and Load RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
Motor, Coupling Gear, and Load. ETAP calculates WR2 or H when one of them is known and RPM has
or
-9 2 2
Total RPM
The Total RPM is equal to the Motor RPM.
Total WR2
The Total WR2 is calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
This is the arithmetic sum of the Motor, Coupling and Load H in MW-sec/MVA.

Shaft Torsion

Select this option to consider torsion effect between turbine, coupling gear, and generator during transient
stability calculations.
D1
This is the damping constant between turbine and coupling gear.
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and generator.
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of turbine and coupling gear.
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and generator.


This page contains options to plot the Motor Starting curves, Thermal Limit curves, as well as the Stator
curve on a Star View.
Starting Curves Constant Terminal Voltage

A motor starting curve can be plotted on a Star View for the purpose of determining overload settings for
motor protection devices. Constant Terminal Voltage can be used to plot the motor starting curve based
on a constant voltage at the motor terminal. Multiple approximate motor starting curves can be created
and used in this section in the event that a motor acceleration study was not created. In the %Vt fields, a
constant 100% Vt is given with the option of two more %Vt fields that are entered by the user. The curves
can be plotted on the TCC by selecting the checkboxes next to the %Vt fields. Star plots the acceleration
times using the Acceleration Time fields in the Starting Curve section.

Include Starting Device, OLH, & Equipment Cable

When this option is not selected, the motor starting curve is generated using the rated locked rotor current
(from the Model page) and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any
overload heater, equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is ignored.
Starting Device
(Ignored)
OLH
(Ignored)
Equipment Cable
(Ignored)

When this option is selected, the motor starting curve is generated by recalculating the locked rotor
current and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any overload heater,
equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is considered. A starting device can be
selected from the Start Dev page.
Starting Device
(Considered)
OLH
(Considered)
Equipment Cable
(Considered)

Smooth Corners
Select this option to apply curve smoothing for the locked rotor to FLA transition period of the motor
starting curve.

Starting Curve Study

When a Motor Acceleration study has been performed for a motor (static start or dynamic acceleration),
the current plot can be imported into Star View to use as a more accurate starting curve.

Select
Click the Select Study to view list of available output reports to import data from. In the event a motor
has not been accelerated in a selected report then ETAP displays an alert message as shown below.

If a motor has been accelerated in a selected report, ETAP displays detailed information about the output
report as shown below.
Asymmetrical LRC
Asymmetrical LRC multiplier adjusts the locked rotor current with respect to the adjustment value in the
editable drop-down list. Asymmetrical current decay to symmetrical current is fixed at 0.1 seconds.
LRC Asymmetrical = Asymmetrical Factor * LRC adjustment

Thermal Limit Curve

Motor thermal limit curve is drawn based on the hot stall and cold stall time of the motor. Locked rotor
current used to calculate the thermal limit is always considered on base kV equal to motor rated kV for
both the Constant Terminal Voltage and Motor Acceleration Study options.

Stall Time (Hot Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. Once
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may be damaged. This time is provided by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests on a motor that had been previously started and stopped
while not at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to
Hot Start.
Stall Time (Cold Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. When
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may get damaged. This time is given by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests for a motor that has not been started for duration of time and
is at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Cold
Start.
Stator Curve (Running Overload)

Stator curve defines the thermal limit curve for the stator. This time is provided by the motor
manufacturer. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to Stator Curve.
Stator Curve Points (Running Overload)
The stator curve can be specified in Amperes or as Multiplies of the motor FLA.
Insert
Insert new points above the row selected.
Add
Insert new points to the bottom of the list.
Delete
Click on a number and delete the selected row.


11.11.6 Load Model Page

For starting and braking purposes, also for the choice of a variable-speed motor, the torque curve (load
torque) of the driven machine must be known as a function of the speed. This is the mechanical load
connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third order polynomial of the motor
speed or by points of %slip and %torque versus motor speed.
The third order equation is defined as follows:

T = A0 + A1 + A22 + A33
Load Torque
None, Polynomial, or Curve
Selecting None indicates to ETAP that the load is not being modeled. Transient stability and motor
acceleration analyses will not run without this model.
Selecting Polynomial or Curve will bring up the library quick pick from which you will be able to select a
predefined model from the library.
Load Model Lib

You can access the motor load library data by clicking the Load Model Lib button and opening the library
quick pick. Motor Load Library data can be obtained by double-clicking the selection.
There are four basic torque curves valid for the following main applications:
1. Load Torque practically remains constant or power is directly proportional to speed. This is in the
case of cranes, reciprocating pumps and compressors when pumping against constant pressure,
enclosed blowers, rolling mills, conveyors, mills without fans, machine tools with constant
cutting force.
2. Load Torque rises proportionally with speed or power is proportional to square of speed.
3. Load Torque rises proportionally with square of speed and power rises with the cube of speed.
This applies to centrifugal pumps, blowers, and reciprocating machines feeding in an open tubing
system
4. Load Torque falls in inverse proportion to speed and power remains constant. This applies in case
of lathes, coilers and also for variable speed drives.
Acceleration Time (Static Starting)

Enter No Load (0% Loading) and Full Load (100% Loading) motor acceleration time in seconds.
ETAP uses these values along with the motor percent loading to calculate the acceleration time for static
motor starting (that is, the motor will carry the full LRC for the entire acceleration time). If the motor
percent loading (Defined by the start category selected in the Study Case) is between 0 and 100%, ETAP
interpolates to find the acceleration time. If the motor percent loading is outside this range, ETAP
extrapolates to find the acceleration time.
These parameters are ignored for dynamic motor starting and the motor model, load model, and inertia
are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.

The Full Load Motor Acceleration Time is also used by Star when Constant Terminal Voltage is selected
under the Motor Starting Curve in the Protection Page. Star uses this time in conjunction with the rated
locked rotor current to calculate and display the Starting Curve for this motor.
11.11.7 Start Dev Page

You can select one of thirteen types of motor starting devices from the Starting Dev page and specify the
control scheme for the selected starting devices. ETAP preserves starting device data for all the types you
specified, so that you can experiment with and compare results for different types of starting devices. This
allows you to select the best device type to accomplish your task.
Type
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. ETAP provides the following starting device types:

Type Description
None No starting device
Auto-xfmr Auto-transformer
Stator Resistor Series resistor to the stator
Stator Reactor Series reactor to the stator
Capacitor, Bus Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Capacitor, Terminal Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal
Rotor Resistor Series resistor to the rotor
Rotor Reactor Series reactor to the rotor
Y/D Star - delta
Partial Winding Partial winding
Current Limit Soft starter current limit
Current Control Soft starter current control
Voltage Control Soft starter voltage control
Torque Control Soft starter torque control
There are thirteen types of motor starting devices from which you can select. The last four types (Current
Limit, Current Control, Voltage Control, and Torque Control) are commonly used control modes of soft
starters. To model a soft starter, you can select any of these four types and specify a control scheme as
needed.
A soft starter employs power semiconductors, such as thyristors, to regulate the voltage applied on the
motor according to a predefined scheme. The purpose is to reduce the current drawn by a starting motor
so that it has a soft impact on system operation. A soft starter is normally a reduced voltage starter,
being able to decrease, not to increase, the voltage applied on the motor comparing to the cross-line motor
starting. This behavior is also modeled in ETAP. When the control scheme of a soft starter, such as a
voltage starting, requires a voltage value that is larger than the bus voltage, the bus voltage will be applied
on the motor, as if the soft starter does not exist.
Current Limit
When the starting device type selected is either Voltage Control or Torque Control, this field will be
enabled so that you can enter a Current Limit value in percent of motor full load amperes. This current
limit value will be applied, along with motor voltage control scheme or torque control scheme, to ensure
that the actual voltage applied on the motor will not result in a motor current larger than this value.
Control Scheme
You specify a control scheme in this group for the selected starting device type. The control scheme is a
function of motor speed or time for most of the types, except the Y/D, Partial Winding, and Current Limit
types. When you specify a control scheme in multiple stages, ETAP will list the stages by motor speed or
time, first with all active stages and then followed by inactive stages.
You can add or remove a stage by clicking the Add, Insert, or Delete buttons. When you click the Add
button, a new stage is added before the last one. When you click the Insert button, a new stage is inserted
before the selected stage. When you click the Delete button, the selected stage will be removed. Note that
you cannot remove the first or the last stages.

Active
Check to activate the setting for the device. When you uncheck this box for a stage, ETAP will not
consider that stage in studies, but the data is still saved.
%Ws or Seconds
Select %Ws or Seconds as the variable based on which to specify the control scheme for your starter.
When Speed is selected, it is in percent of synchronous motor speed.
Setting
Enter the setting for a control stage of the starter. The setting type varies by the type of starter you
selected. The table below indicates the setting type and the units:
Starter Setting and Unit

None
Auto-xfmr Tap in percent
Stator Resistor Tap in percent
Stator Reactor Tap in percent
Capacitor, Bus Capacitor at bus in kvar
Capacitor, Terminal Capacitor at motor terminal in kvar
Rotor Resistor Rotor external resistor in Ohm converted to
stator side
Rotor Reactor Rotor external reactor in Ohm converted to
stator side
Y/D N/A
Partial Winding N/A
Current Limit Motor current in percent of FLA
Current Control Motor current in percent of FLA
Voltage Control Motor voltage in percent of rated voltage
Torque Control Motor torque in percent of rated torque
Note: The Ohm values for Rotor Resistor and Reactor starters are the values converted to the stator side
based on the turn ratio of the stator and rotor windings.
Control Type
Select between Ramp and Fixed. If you select Fixed, the control variable will be fixed until the next
setting becomes active. This type is used when defining a control such as step starter.
If you select Ramp, the control variable will vary linearly from the setting in this stage to the setting in the
next stage. This type is used when defining a continuously controlled starter.
Note: The Control Type for the last stage is set as Remove and the Control Type for the stage before the
last one can only be Fixed.

Switching Off Starting Devices

When a motor that employs a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed. In
ETAP, the time to remove the starting device is specified in the last stage of the control scheme.
Depending on the option you selected, the starting device is removed at a specified speed or time.
In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than
the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off time will be set equal to the acceleration time.
This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or
the acceleration time, whichever is smaller.
However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before
the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time specified by the user, regardless of whether it
is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Waveform
Displays the control scheme of the starter device. Click the Print button to print the control scheme plot.
11.11.8 Start Cat Page

Select motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting motor starting categories
tells ETAP which motor(s) to include in that starting category. The starting categories can be selected
from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories can be edited from Project Menu,
under Settings and Starting Categories.

Starting and Final % Loading

When a motor is started, in some cases such as a compressor, the motor is started with a reduced load
until it reaches the final speed and then the load is increased to the required operating level. Starting and
Final percent loading fields provide modeling of this adjustment in the motor load.
When entering a loading percent in the Start or Final loading fields, the value is related to the option of
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Motor Starting or Transient Stability Study Case as well as
the load model curve selected for the motor.
Starting Load Option in Motor Starting Study Case

Considering the two load model curves given below, both curves have exactly the same shape, but the
load percent values at synchronous speed are different in the two models. In Model 1 it is less than 100%
while in Model 2 it is equal to 100%. In the Motor Starting and Transient Stability Studies, depending on
the option selected for the Starting Load of Acceleration Motors, the load model curve is applied
differently.
If the Based on Motor Electrical Load option is selected, the load curve will first be adjusted by
multiplying a constant factor so that at the synchronous speed the torque is equal to 100% and then used
in the calculation. This is assuming that the load torque curve only represents the shape of the load as a
function of speed. When this option is selected, load Model 1 and Model 2 given below will lead to the
same results, since both models have the same shape. If the Based on Motor Mechanical Load option is
selected, the load curve will be used in the calculation as it is entered without any adjustments. Note that
if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two options will make no
difference, since load torque adjustment for the option of Based on Motor Electrical Rating has no effect
on the load curve.
Motor Load Model Curves
Model 1: Load @ Rated Speed < 100% Model 2: Load @ Rated Speed = 100%
Due to the difference in the two options for Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Study Case, the
values in the Start and Final % Loading columns in the Start Cat page may have different bases. If in the
Study Case the option of Based on Motor Electrical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated
output torque of the motor. If the option of Based on Motor Mechanical Load is selected, the %loading is
based on the rated output load torque described by the load curve. Please note that if a load model has a
torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two bases become the same.
For example, lets consider a motor of rated output torque Tr and having a load curve described by Model
1 given above, which has a value of 80% at motor operating speed. When you enter 90% as the Start
%Loading for the motor,
Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Load Selected in Study Case:
Base for Start %Load = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load Selected in Study Case:
Base for Start %Load = Motor Load Torque @ Operating Speed * Tr
= 0.8* Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *0.8 * Tr = 0.72*Tr

Note that for the same motor, if load Curve Model 2 is selected instead, Case 1 and Case 2 will be the
same. Notice that in Model 2 the load torque value is equal to 100% at motor operating speed.
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 1.0* Tr = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *1.0 * Tr = 0.9*Tr
In Transient Stability Studies, only the Start % loading is used. The first starting category is used if the
start event is by a switching action in Transient Stability Studies.
Load Change Time

Specify the beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category in these fields.
The Load Change Time is not used for Transient Stability Studies.
11.11.9 Cable/Vd Page

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable and overload
heater associated with this motor.

Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this motor.
Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and unit are provided here for
editing and displaying.
ID
To add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.

Size Cable
For automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the
equipment Cable Editor.
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this load.
Overload Heater
When there is an Overload Heater directly connected to the motor, ETAP displays the properties as
shown in the example figure above.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking on the OL Editor button.
Heater resistance and % Tolerance are displayed in the group and will be used for voltage drop
calculations, if the heater selected is in-line. Otherwise the resistance and tolerance are ignored.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with motor terminal
voltage (Vt) and starting voltage (Vst) are calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Vd,
Vt, and Vst are displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vst
Vst represents the motor terminal voltage during starting conditions with the bus voltage fixed, i.e., it
includes voltage drop across the equipment cable only.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this load is connected to, if any) is displayed
here for reference.

Vd Calculation
Use App MF
When you select this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for
voltage drop calculations.
Use SF
When you select this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.
11.11.10 Cable Amp Page
Installation
The cable installation type can be specified based on the installation types or the standard used for
calculation. Refer to Chapter 11 Cable - Ampacity Page section for detailed descriptions regarding the
standards used.

Standard
If the option of Standard is selected, the Standard list field contains all the calculation standards currently
available in ETAP, including IEEE 399, ICEA P-54-440, NEC, and BS 7671. When one of these
standards is selected from the list, the Installation Type list will contain only the installation types
applicable to the standard. The table below gives all the installation types and applicable standards.
Type
If the option of Installation Type is selected, the Installation Type list field contains all the installation
types currently available in ETAP. When one of these installation types is selected, the Standard list field
will contain only the standards applicable to the selected installation type. The table below gives all the
installation types and applicable standards.
# Installation Type IEEE 399 ICEA P-54-440 NEC BS 7671 Installation Pictures
1 UG Duct X
2 UG Buried X
3 Trenches X
4 Embedded Direct X
5 A/G Trays X X X
6 Brackets X
7 Cleats X
8 Ladder X
10 A/G Conduit X X
11 Open & Clipped Direct X
12 Air Drop X X

13 Building Voids X
14 Trunking X
Sub-Type
When the BS 7671 Standard appears in the Standard field, the installation sub-type and Installation
Method will also show up along with the installation type. You can select different installation sub-type
from the list.
Method
This field displays the Installation Method for the selected sub-type per Table 4A1, BS 7671: 2001,
Requirements for Electrical Installations.
Note: Magnetic/Non-magnetic Installation

magnetically Installed cables:

Magnetically Non- Magnetically
Installed Installed
U/G Buried X
A/G Tray No Cover X


A/G Conduit - PVC X
A/G Conduit Mag. Conduit
Air Drop X
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for comparison of base, derated and, required (I x MF) ampacities. The
method used here is based on a concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity to
calculate the derated ampacity.
Id = F Ib
FLA / Operating
If the FLA option is selected, the required current is the full load ampere of the load. If the Operating
option is selected, the required current will be the Average operating current entered or updated by load
flow calculations in the Loading page of the Cable Editor.
Derated Ampacity (Id)

This is the modified base ampacity (maximum allowable current) in amperes for the chosen cable under
the specified installation conditions.
Amp x App MF
Current is calculated by multiplying the operating current (or the full load current for equipment cables)
and the Application Multiplication Factor (App. MF) for the specified application type. This value is
displayed so it can be compared with the derated ampacity.
App MF
U/G Duct
This refers to underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W).
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil for
underground installations. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library.
Base ampacity for UG systems are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.

Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for
the base ampacity is obtained from the library. This order is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
number of rows and columns of the duct bank must be specified to determine a cable grouping adjustment
factor.
U/G Buried
This refers to directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is measured in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta
This is the ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where
the cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The
value is usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
number of rows and columns of the cable locations must be specified to determine a cable grouping
adjustment factor. The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on a 7.5-inch center-to-center
spacing. For more details see the IEEE Brown Book.
A/G Trays
This refers to above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the
base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.

Tray Specification
NEC
If chosen, NEC methods of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. NEC does not
provide ampacity derating due to bottom cover or correction of the ampacity multiplying factors due to
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fireproofing.
Top Cover
Select top cover if there is a removable top cover on the cable tray.
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
If cable spacing is maintained within the tray, then the effects of top cover, bottom cover, and fire wrap
are ignored. For 3-phase cables larger than 2/0 AWG in a single layer, the arrangement requires spacing
of 1/4 of overall effective diameter of the grouped circuit.
Cumulative Effect
The cumulative effect applies correction factors for combinations of barriers, fire coatings, and covers on
cable trays.
Grouping
In general, cable sizes of 2/0 AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner,
with a maximum of two cables high. Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at
a uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here
corresponds to a maximum fill condition and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal
depths. Therefore, the actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries are for display only.
Depth Depth of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters

Width Width of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters
% fill The total amount of cable tray cross-sectional area used by cables placed in the tray
Fire Protection
The fire protection area provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices.
Each of the three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with
the cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection
material specifications selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity. For maintained
spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between adjacent cables or
groups to less than the required values, the cable shall be considered to be non-maintained spacing. On

the other hand, if the remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable coating and no other
cable can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.
Fire Stop
trays routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
This refers to above ground cable conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. This is the temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
The maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the
base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Ampacity Adjustment
NEC (No Grouping Effect)
NEC Standards do not provide for grouping effects of cables, i.e., number of rows and columns. If the
checkbox is not selected, grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered.
50% and No Load Diversity

The level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be chosen as either 50% or none.

Grouping

Number of Conductors for 50 % Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

Number of Conductors for No Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection methods. Each of the three
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the conduit. The
fire protection data is used to further derate the cable ampacities based on the fire protection material
specifications selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire protection is
based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
The Fire Coating Library provides a selection of configurations from which to choose. Each
configuration has an ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the
base ampacity. Fire retardant coating is not a standard procedure for A/G conduits.
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for conduits
routed through fire stops.
Note: There may not be any reason to derate the cable for fire stops since typical fire stops are
constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be insufficient to cause
an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it which must be applied whenever the raceway is

Air Drop
This refers to cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable groupings for air drop
cables are considered.
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. The temperature of the air surrounding the area where
the tray is to be installed is in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40
degrees Celsius. For cables in direct sun, the air temperature may be increased by a typical value of 15
degrees Celsius.
Tc
the base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Fire Protection
The Fire Protection area provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection devices. Each of the
three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the air drop
cables. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable based on the fire protection
specifications selected from ETAP library is based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop,
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
The Fire Stop Library provides a selection of configurations with ampacity correction factors for cables
Fire Wrap
ampacity correction factor (ACF) associated with it. The ACF must be applied whenever the cable is

A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, this leads
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/A).

FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Synchronous Motor
11.12 Synchronous Motor

You can enter the properties associated with synchronous motors of the electrical distribution system in
this editor.
The Synchronous Motor Editor includes the following 16 pages of properties:
Info Nameplate Model LR Model Inertia

Protection Exciter Load Model Start Dev. Start Cat.
Staring Mode Cable/Vd Cable Amp Reliability Remarks
Comment
11.12.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the synchronous motor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, load Priority, Name, Description, Data type, Configuration Status, Quantity or number
of synchronous motors, Phase Connection, and Demand Factor.

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each synchronous motor. The assigned IDs consist of the
default synchronous motor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
of synchronous motors increase. The default synchronous motor ID (Syn) can be changed from the
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the synchronous motor. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a synchronous motor to a bus,
click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the synchronous motor resides,
If a synchronous motor is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
synchronous motor to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the
new bus, as shown below where Syn3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a synchronous motor can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service motor can be edited like an In Service breaker.
However, an Out of Service motor will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service motor automatically becomes grayed out the one-line diagram.
Data.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the synchronous motor(s) for the selected configuration status from the list
box.

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the motor is
Note: Status is not a part of the motor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the motor status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a motor is
shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Priority
Select the load priority of this motor from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. The names of
the priorities can be specified from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Data Type
This field provides a convenient way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as estimate,
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types and you can change their name from the
Project menu under Settings and Data Type.

Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this synchronous motor. Select the phase connection type from the list
box. Options for phase connection include:

1 Phase Single-phase machine connected between phase A, B, or C.
Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC, or CA
Quantity
Load Flow:
load.
load.

Short-Circuit:
load.


Arc Flash
under Utility 2.
The Arc Flash Analysis Report shows the incident energy at the terminal of Motor 1 is equal to the
a single load.

Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the following
calculations:
Operating kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Where the PF & RF (power factor and reactive factor) are calculated based on the specified % Loading
from the power factors specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.

You can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings), select Motor Library data, specify % loading, and
display motor loading and feeder losses for all Loading Categories in this page.

Ratings
HP/kW
Enter the motor output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options
by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equations for the nameplate parameters:
Rated kVA = HP * 0.7457/(PF * Eff) Rating in HP

= kW/(PF * Eff) Rating in kW
Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA/(3 * kV) 3-phase motors

= Rated kVA/kV Single phase motors
where the PF and Eff are at the full load condition (100% loading).

MVA/kVA
You can choose from these two options by clicking on the MVA/kVA button to display the motor rating
in MVA or kVA, and the motor operating load and feeder losses in (MW + j Mvar) or (kW + j kvar).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the motor in kV. This is a line-to-line voltage for 3-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the motor in amperes. This is the current the motor would pull from
the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated kV, and rated frequency.
When you modify FLA, the motor rated efficiency and the efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated.
ETAP limits the entry of FLA so that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be below
10%.
Rated PF and Eff

Enter the power factor and efficiency at the rated Horsepower and kV. Based on these two values, the
program will calculate the Full Load Amps (FLA) of this machine. This values will not be used any other
calculation.
% PF (100%, 75%, 50%)

Enter the motor power factor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. All three values of the power
factors are used for determining the operating power factor of the motor under different percent loading,
i.e., when you change any one of the power factors, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading
categories are recalculated.
The sign of a power factor determines whether it is lagging or leading. The values of power factor can
range from -0.01% to -100% for synchronous motors operating at leading power factors (over excited)
and range from +0.01% to +100% for lagging power factor (under excited) operations. The following V-
curve indicates a synchronous motor with a rated (100% loading) power factor of 80% leading (-80%).
% Eff (100%, 75%, and 50%)

This is the efficiency of the motor, in percent, at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading. Efficiency cannot exceed
100%. The efficiency at 100% loading is the rated efficiency, therefore when the rated efficiency is

changed; this field is updated to the same value. All three values of the efficiencies are used for
determining the motor efficiency under different percent loading, i.e., when you change the value of any
one of the efficiencies, the operating load and feeder losses for all loading categories are recalculated.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the motor is
SF
Service factor is the permissible power loading in per unit. The service factor is not used for calculation
of loading or feeder losses. ETAP gives you option to use the service factor for voltage drop calculations
of the motor feeder.
Library (Motor Nameplate)

Access the Motor Nameplate Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library
Quick Pick - Motor. Motor nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by
highlighting and double-clicking on the selection. Library data include motor ratings such as HP/kW, kV,
FLA, PF, Eff, & Pole (transferred to the Nameplate page) and motor parameters such as LRC, LR PF, X,
X, X, X2, X0, X/R, & Td (transferred to the Model page).
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this motor, i.e.,
each motor can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the
values of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note that you
can select any of these loading categories when conducting Load Flow and Motor Starting Studies.
and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.

This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and
efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the
operating kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is
specified for this load. Note that although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load
and feeder losses, the value of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating power factor
and efficiency.
To edit the loading category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu on the menu bar.
Operating Load
available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Management System) feature. When the operating load
box is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor, the calculation results are updated to sources, loads,
and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not have the
online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the Element Editor; however, this data cannot be
used in a later study.
11.12.3 Model Page

This page includes the synchronous machine impedances and time constants.

Impedance
Xd
This is the direct-axis subtransient reactance in percent (machine base, saturated). This reactance is used
for ANSI Short-Circuit Studies.
Xd/Ra
This is the armature X/R ratio (Xd/Ra). For ANSI Short-Circuit Studies, this value is used for both
Ra (%)
This is the armature resistance in percent (machine base).
Ra (Ohm)
This is the armature resistance in ohms.

X2
Analysis, Short-Circuit, and Unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
X2/R2
This is the negative sequence X/R ratio.
R2 (%)
This is the negative sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R2 (Ohm)
This is the negative sequence resistance in ohms.
X0
This is the zero sequence reactance in percent (machine base). This value is used for unbalanced faults
under ANSI Short-Circuit Studies.
X0/R0
This is the zero sequence X/R ratio.
R0 (%)
This is the zero sequence resistance in percent (machine base).
R0 (Ohm)
This is the zero sequence resistance in ohms.
Xd Tolerance
This is the direct-axis sub transient reactance tolerance in percent. This value is used to adjust the
reactance values during Short-circuit calculations. The Short-Circuit Module will use the negative
tolerance value.
H
This displays the machine total inertia from the Inertia page.
Machine Type
Application
Select the application type for this synchronous motor (motor or condenser).
Rotor Type
Round-Rotor For machines that are made of round-rotor.
Salient-Pole For machines that are made of salient-pole.

IEC Exciter Type
Depending on the Rotor type, the IEC Exciter type is used for determining the max factor for generators in
the calculation of steady-state short-circuit currents per IEC Standard 909. max is proportional to fmax,
which takes different values based on exciter types as shown in the following table.
Rotor Type IEC Exciter Type fmax

Dynamic Model
Select equivalent, transient, or subtransient model type for the synchronous machines. Except for Xd,
Tdo, which are also shared by IEC 363 Short-Circuit calculation, all of the parameters listed under
Dynamic Model are used only for Transient Stability Studies. Full descriptions of these variables are
found in Chapter 24, Dynamic Models.
Model Type
Model Type Description

None The machine will not be dynamically modeled in Transient Stability Study.
Equivalent A model that uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and
quadrature-axis reactance.
Transient A more comprehensive model than the Equivalent model, including the
machines saliency.
Subtransient A comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machine, including
both transient and subtransient parameters.
Xd
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xdu
This is the direct-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).

Xd
This is the direct-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value). This is
used for both motor starting and Transient Stability Studies.
XL
This is the armature leakage reactance in percent (machine base).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xqu
This is the quadrature-axis synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, unsaturated value).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Xq
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance in percent (machine base, saturated value).
Tdo
This is the direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tdo
This is the direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds.
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis transient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used for
the equivalent model.
Tqo
This is the quadrature-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant in seconds; this parameter is not used
for the equivalent model.
Sbreak
This is the per unit of Vt at which the generator saturation curve skews from the air-gap line.
S100
This is the saturation factor at 100% terminal voltage.
S120
This is the saturation factor at 120% terminal voltage.
Saturation factors S100 and S120 are calculated from the following equations:
S100 = If100/If

S120 = If120/1.2 If
Sbreak
where:
Damping
This is the shaft mechanical damping term, in percent, and MW change due to 1 Hz deviation in speed (%
MW/Hz). Typical values range from 2% (short shaft) to 10% (long shaft).
A Note on the Synchronous Motor Excitation System

The excitation voltages for synchronous motors are assumed as constants for motors operating within the
speed range of 50% to 110% of the synchronous speed. During the transient, if a motor's speed goes out
of this range, the frequency relay should trip off the contactor to disconnect the motor from the system
and shut down the excitation system simultaneously. Correspondingly, the program sets the excitation
voltage to zero if this condition occurs.
A Note on Synchronous Motor Reactance Values
The saturated reactance values are required to enter in the Synchronous Motor Editor for general studies.
For transient stability study, the reactance values will be adjusted internally based on the motor saturation
factors (S100, S120 and Sbreak) and the terminal voltage or air-gap voltage during simulation.

11.12.4 LR Model Page
Locked-Rotor
% LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the rated full load current of the motor, as specified in the
Nameplate page.
% PF
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the motor.
Connection

Type
For Wye-connected motors, choose from the four grounding types provided in the list box:

Amp Resistor or reactor rating in amperes for resistor or reactor grounded motors.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohmic Value)
Where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by (3)1/2.
LR Model (Starting)
The locked-rotor (LR) model is used only for the purpose of starting (accelerating) synchronous motors.
This model is not used for Transient Stability Studies.
LR Model Library
Access Motor Model Library data by selecting the CKT model and clicking on the Lib button to open the
Library Quick-Pick - Motor Model. Motor locked-rotor model data from the library can be obtained and
highlighting a design class and a model ID. The LR Model is only used for the dynamic starting of a
synchronous motor.
After you select a new model, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select another editor page, or
navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the following message to update (modify) some of the
nameplate parameters which do not match the calculated values using the selected model.

Characteristic Library
You can access library data for torque-slip characteristic curve by selecting the characteristic model and
clicking on the Lib button to open the Library Quick Pick - Characteristic. Motor Characteristic Library
data (slip, torque, current, and power factor) can be selected by highlighting a Design Class and selecting
a model ID. When you select Characteristic Library data, unlike the Motor Model Library data, the
library data is not transferred to the Motor Editor, .i.e., only a reference to the selected library design class
and model ID is kept with the motor. The characteristic data is obtained from the library when you run
dynamic Motor Starting Studies.
After you select new Characteristic Library data, if you click on OK to leave the Motor Editor, select
another editor page, or navigate to another motor, ETAP prompts you with the message shown above to
update (modify) some of the nameplate parameters which do not match the values from the selected
library.
Print
This prints the torque, current & power factor characteristic curves of the machine for the selected model
(CKT or characteristic).

Motor, Coupling Gear, and Load RPM, WR2, and H

Enter the rated speed in revolutions per minute (RPM) and WR2 in lb-ft^2 or H in MW-sec/MVA for the
Motor, Coupling Gear and Load. ETAP calculates WR^2 or H when one of them is known and RPM has
or
-9 2 2
Total RPM
The total RPM is equal to the Motor RPM.
Total WR2
The total WR2 is calculated based on the Total RPM and Total H using the equation above.
Total H
Arithmetic sum of the Motor, Coupling and Load H in MW-sec/MVA.
Shaft Torsion

Select this option to consider torsion effect between motor, coupling gear and load during transient
stability calculation.
D1
This is the damping constant between motor and coupling gear
D2
This is the damping constant between coupling gear and load
K1
This is the spring coefficient between mass of motor and coupling gear
K2
This is the spring coefficient between mass of coupling gear and load

This page contains options to plot the motor starting curves, Thermal Limit curves, as well as the Stator
curve on a Star View.

Starting Curves Constant Terminal Voltage
A motor starting curve can be plotted on a Star View for the purpose of determining overload settings for
motor protection devices. Constant Terminal Voltage can be used to plot the motor starting curve based
on a constant voltage at the motor terminal. Multiple approximate motor starting curves can be created
and used in this section in the event that a motor acceleration study was not created. In the %Vt fields, a
constant 100% Vt is given with the option of two more %Vt fields that are entered by the user. The curves
can be plotted on the TCC by selecting the checkboxes next to the %Vt fields. Star plots the acceleration
times using the Acceleration Time fields in the Starting Curve section.
Include Starting Device, OLH, & Equipment Cable

When this option is not selected, the motor starting curve is generated using the rated locked rotor current
(from the Model page) and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any
overload heater, equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is ignored.
Starting Device
(Ignored)
OLH
(Ignored)
Equipment Cable
(Ignored)
When this option is selected, the motor starting curve is generated by recalculating the locked rotor
current and acceleration time with full load connected (from the Load Model page). Any overload heater,

equipment cable, or starting device connected to this motor is considered. A starting device can be
selected from the Start Dev page.
Starting Device
(Considered)
OLH
(Considered)
Equipment Cable
(Considered)
Smooth Corners

Select this option to apply curve smoothing for the locked rotor to FLA transition period of the motor
starting curve.
Starting Curve Study

When a motor acceleration study has been performed for a motor (static start or dynamic acceleration),
the current plot can be imported into the Star View to use as a more accurate starting curve.

Select
Click the Select Study to view list of available output reports to import data from. In the event a motor
has not been accelerated in a selected report then ETAP displays an alert message as shown below.

If a motor has been accelerated in a selected report, ETAP displays detailed information about the output
report as shown below.
Reference kV
Star will plot the TCC curve based on the Calculated Base kV or the User-Defined kV in reference to the
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system-calculated Base kV value at the connected bus to the
element. The value will be updated when Short-Circuit Update is performed from Star Mode.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-Defined option allows the user to enter the base kV value.

Asymmetrical LRC
Asymmetrical LRC multiplier adjusts the locked rotor current with respect to the adjustment value in the
editable drop-down list.. Asymmetrical current decay to symmetrical current is fixed at 0.1 seconds.
LRC Asymmetrical = Asymmetrical Factor * LRC adjustment
Thermal Limit Curve

Motor thermal limit curve is drawn based on the hot stall and cold stall time of the motor. Locked rotor
current used to calculate the thermal limit is always considered on base kV equal to motor rated kV for
both the Constant Terminal Voltage and Motor Acceleration Study options.

Stall Time (Hot Start)
Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. Once
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may be damaged. This time is provided by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests on a motor that had been previously started and stopped
while not at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to
Hot Start.
Stall Time (Cold Start)

Stall Time is the maximum time a motor can be subjected to locked rotor current or jam condition. When
that time has elapsed, a motor will exceed its thermal limit and may get damaged. This time is given by
the manufacturer of the motor based on tests for a motor that has not been started for a duration of time
and is at ambient temperature. This Curve can be shown on the TCC by selecting the checkbox next to
Cold Start.
Points (Stator Curve)

ETAP users can define their own plots by inserting points. Points require time, and multiples or amperes.
Stator Curve Points (Running Overload)

Insert
Insert new points above the row selected.
Add
Insert new points to the bottom of the list.
Delete
Click on a number and delete the selected row.
11.12.7 Exciter Page

This Section describes the excitation systems and automatic voltage regulators (AVR) for synchronous
motors.
The excitation and AVR systems for synchronous motors can be sophisticated. Complete modeling of
these systems is usually necessary for Transient Stability Studies. The equivalent transfer functions used
for the excitation and AVR systems and their variable/parameter names are either provided by exciter
manufactures or in accordance with the IEEE recommended types as found from the following references:

IEEE Working Group Report, "Computer Representation of Excitation Systems", IEEE Transaction
on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp.1460/1464
IEEE Committee Report, "Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies", IEEE
Transactions on Power Apparatus and Systems, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981, pp.494/509
IEEE Std 421.5-1992, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies", IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992
In general, exciter manufacturers should be contacted to determine the applicability of the IEEE-type
representations to their excitation systems.
Excitation/AVR Type
You can specify the excitation/AVR type by selecting one of the following models from the list box.
Refer to Machine and Load Dynamic Models for details.
Type Description
1 Continuously Acting Regulator With Rotating Exciter System
2 Rotating Rectifier Exciter With Static Regulator System
3 Static System With Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
1S Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage
DC1 DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation
DC2 DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and
Supplies from Terminal Voltage
DC3 DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation
ST1 Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter
ST2 Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies
ST3 Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC1 Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and
Field Current Feedback
AC2 High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non
Controlled Rectifiers and Field Current Feedback
AC3 Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter
AC4 High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter
AC5A Simplified Rotating Rectifier Exciter
SR8F Basler SR8F and SR125A Exciter
HPC HPC 840 AVR/Exciter Model
Jeumont Jeumont Industrie Excitation / AVR System

Type Description
ST1D IEEE Type ST1D
AC8B IEEE Type AC8B
AC1A IEEE Type AC1A
Fixed Constant Excitation (i.e., no regulator action). This can be used for
generators with constant excitation or when the machine voltage regulator
is operating under PF or Mvar control.
UDM User Defined Dynamic Models
Some exciter types require that you select a control bus from the dropdown list that appears when they are
specified.
Sample Data
selected exciter and AVR type.
Excitation System Symbols

The following are some common symbols used to define the parameters of the various excitation systems.
For other exciter parameters not listed, refer to the Help Line for such parameters in the particular exciter
parameter. In most cases, constants and gains are in per-unit and time constants are in seconds. The base
voltage for the excitation system is defined so that one per unit exciter voltage will produce rated
generator voltage on the generator air-gap line.
Term Description
Efdmax = Maximum exciter output voltage (applied to generator field)
FEX = Rectifier loading factor
Ifd = Generator field current
IN = Normalized exciter load current
KA = Regulator gain
KB = Second stage regulator gain
KC = Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance
KD = Demagnetizing factor, function of exciter alternator reactances
KE = Exciter constant related to self-excited field
KF, KN = Regulator stabilizing circuit gains
KG = Inner loop feedback constant
KH = Exciter field current feedback gain
KI = Current circuit gain coefficient

Term Description
KL = Gain of exciter field current limit
KLV = Gain of exciter low voltage limit signal
KP = Potential circuit gain coefficient
KR = Constant associated with regulator and alternator field power supply
KV = Fast raise/lower contact setting
SE = Exciter saturation function
TA, TB, TC = Regulator amplifier time constants
TE = Exciter time constant
TF = Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant
TF1, TF2 = Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants (rotating rectifier system)
TR = Regulator input filter time constant
TRH = Travel time of rheostat drive motor
VA = Regulator internal voltage
VERR = Voltage error signal
VG = Inner loop voltage feedback
VI = Internal signal within voltage regulator
VLR = Exciter field current limit reference
VLV = Exciter low voltage limit reference
VN = Rate feedback input variable
VR = Regulator output voltage
VR max = Maximum value of VR
VR min = Minimum value of VR
Vref = Regulator reference voltage setting
VRH = Field rheostat setting
Vt = Generator terminal voltage
Vthev = Voltage obtained by vector sum of potential and current signals, Type 3
system
XL = Reactance associated with potential source
HV Gate = High value gate: If A > B, C = A; if A < B, C = B, where A & B are
inputs and C is output
LV Gate = Low value gate: If A < B, C = A; if A > B, C = B, where A & B are inputs
and C is output

Compile UDM
ETAP allows you to model your own Exciter through UDM (User Defined Models). If you selected any
of the UDM models, this button will appear. By pressing this button, you will be taken to the UDM
Compiler Editor.
You will compile your model and come back to this window. ETAP will use this Exciter model for its
calculations.
See the chapter on User Defined Dynamic Models for more information.
11.12.7 Load Model Page

This is the mechanical load connected to the motor shaft. The mechanical load is modeled as a third
order polynomial of the motor speed or by points of %slip and %torque vrs motor speed.
The third order equation is defined as follows:

T = A0 + A1 + A22 + A33
None / Polynomial / Curve
Selecting none indicates to ETAP that the load is not being modeled. Transient Stability and Motor
Acceleration will not run without this model.
Selecting Polynomial or Curve will bring up the library quick pick from which you will be able to select a
model that was defined in the library.
Motor Load Library

Access Motor Load Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the library quick pick.
Motor Load Library data can be obtained by highlighting and double-clicking on the selection.
Acceleration Time (Static Starting)

Enter No Load (0% Loading) and Full Load (100% Loading) motor acceleration time in seconds.
ETAP uses these values along with the motor percent loading to calculate the acceleration time for static
motor starting (that is, the motor will carry the full LRC for the entire acceleration time). If the motor
percent loading (Defined by the start category selected in the Study Case) is between 0 and 100%, ETAP
interpolates to find the acceleration time. If the motor percent loading is outside this range, ETAP
extrapolates to find the acceleration time.
These parameters are ignored for dynamic motor starting and the motor model, load model, and inertia
are used to dynamically accelerate the motor.
The Full Load Motor Acceleration Time is also used by Star when Constant Terminal Voltage is selected
under the Motor Starting Curve in the Protection Page. Star uses this time in conjunction with the rated
locked rotor current to calculate and display the Starting Curve for this motor.

11.12.9 Start Dev Page

From the Starting Dev page, you can select one of six types of motor starting devices and specify the
control scheme for the selected starting devices. ETAP preserves starting device data for all the types you
have specified, so that you can experiment with and compare results for different types of starting devices
and select the best one to accomplish your task.
Type
Type
Select the starting device type from the list box. ETAP provides the following starting device types:
Type Description
None No starting device
Auto-xfmr Auto-transformer
Stator Resistor Series resistor to the stator
Stator Reactor Series reactor to the stator

Type Description
Capacitor, Bus Shunt capacitor connected to a motor bus
Capacitor, Terminal Shunt capacitor connected to the motor terminal
Partial Winding Partial winding
Control Scheme
You can specify a control scheme for the selected starting device type in this group. The control scheme
is a function of motor speed or time for most of the types, except the Partial Winding type. When you
specify a control scheme with multiple stages, ETAP will list the stages by motor speed or time, with the
active stages first, and then followed by inactive stages.
You can add or remove a stage by clicking the Add, Insert, or Delete button. When you click on the Add
button, a new stage is added before the last one. When you click on the Insert button, a new stage is
inserted before the selected stage. When you click on the Delete button, the selected stage will be
removed. Note that you cannot remove the first and the last stages.
Active
Check this to activate the setting for the device. When you uncheck this box for a stage, ETAP will not
consider that stage in studies, but the data is still saved.
%Ws or Seconds
Select %Ws or Seconds as the variable on which to base the control scheme for your starter. When Speed
is selected, it is in percent of motor synchronous speed.
Setting
Enter the setting for a control stage of the starter. The setting type varies by the type of starter you
selected. The table below indicates the setting type and the units:
Starter Setting
None
Auto Xfmr Tap in percent
Stator Resistor Tap in percent
Stator Reactor Tap in percent
Capacitor, Bus Capacitor at bus in kvar
Capacitor, Terminal Capacitor at motor terminal in kvar
Partial Winding N/A
Control Type
Select either Ramp or Fixed. If you select Fixed, the control variable will be fixed until the next setting
becomes active. This type is used when defining a control such as step starter.
If you select Ramp, the control variable will vary linearly from the setting in this stage to the setting in the
next stage. This type is used when defining a continuously controlled starter.
Note: The Control Type for the last stage is set as Remove and the Control Type for the stage before the
last one can only be Fixed.

Switching Off of Starting Devices
When a motor that employs a starting device reaches a certain speed, the starting device is removed. In
ETAP, the time to remove the starting device is specified in the last stage of the control scheme.
Depending on the option you selected, the starting device is removed at a specified speed or time.
In the static motor starting calculation, if the switch-off time specified for a starting device is larger than
the acceleration time specified for the motor, the switch-off time will be set equal to the acceleration time.
This means that for static motor starting, a starting device is switched off either at the switch-off time or
the acceleration time, whichever is smaller.
However, for the dynamic motor acceleration calculation, since the acceleration time is unknown before
the calculation, a starting device is switched off at the time specified by the user, regardless of whether it
is larger or smaller than the acceleration time.
Waveform
Displays the control scheme of the starter device. You can click the Print button to print the control
scheme plot.

Select synchronous motor starting categories by clicking on the boxes provided. Selecting synchronous
Motor Starting Categories tells ETAP which synchronous motor(s) to include in that starting category.
The starting categories can be selected from the Synchronous Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The
Starting Categories can be edited from the Project Menu, under Settings and Starting Categories.

Starting and Final % Loading

When a motor is started, in some cases such as a compressor, the motor is started with a reduced load
until it reaches the final speed and then the load is increased to the required operating level. Starting and
Final percent loading fields provide modeling of this adjustment in the motor load.
When entering a loading percent in the Start or Final loading fields, the value is related to the option of
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Motor Starting or Transient Stability Study Case as well as
the load model curve selected for the motor.
Starting Load Option in Motor Starting Study Case

Considering the two load model curves given below, both curves have exactly the same shape, but the
load percent values at synchronous speed are different in the two models. In Model 1 it is less than 100%
while in Model 2 it is equal to 100%. In the Motor Starting and Transient Stability Studies, depending on
the option selected for the Starting Load of Acceleration Motors, the load model curve is applied
differently.
If the Based on Motor Electrical Load option is selected, the load curve will first be adjusted by
multiplying a constant factor so that at the synchronous speed the torque is equal to 100% and then used
in the calculation. This is assuming that the load torque curve only represents the shape of the load as a
function of speed. When this option is selected, load Model 1 and Model 2 given below will lead to the
same results, since both models have the same shape. If the Based on Motor Mechanical Load option is
selected, the load curve will be used in the calculation as it is entered without any adjustments. Note that
if a load model has a torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two options will make no
difference, since load torque adjustment for the option of Based on Motor Electrical Rating has no effect
on the load curve.
Due to the difference in the two options for Starting Load of Accelerating Motors in the Study Case, the
values in the Start and Final % Loading columns in the Start Cat page may have different bases. If in the
Study Case the option of Based on Motor Electrical Load is selected, the %loading is based on the rated
output torque of the motor. If the option of Based on Motor Mechanical Load is selected, the %loading is
based on the rated output load torque described by the load curve. Please note that if a load model has a
torque value equal to 100% at the synchronous speed, the two bases become the same.
For example, lets consider a motor of rated output torque Tr and having a load curve described by Model
1 given above, which has a value of 80% at motor operating speed. When you enter 90% as the Start
%Loading for the motor,
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 0.8* Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *0.8 * Tr = 0.72*Tr

Note that for the same motor, if load Curve Model 2 is selected instead, Case 1 and Case 2 will be the
same. Notice that in Model 2 the load torque value is equal to 100% at motor operating speed.
Start Load = 0.9 Tr
= 1.0* Tr = Tr
Start Load = 0.9 *1.0 * Tr = 0.9*Tr
In Transient Stability Studies, only the Start % loading is used. The first Starting Category is used if the
start event is by a switching action in Transient Stability Studies.
Load Change Time

The beginning and ending of the load change time for each motor starting category can be specified here.
The Load Change Time is not used for Transient Stability Studies.

11.12.11 Starting Mode
Discharge Resistance
Enter the field winding discharge resistor value in ohms in this field. This discharge resistor is first
applied to short the field windings during acceleration of the synchronous motor using Transient Stability
Analysis.
Apply Excitation
Once the motor has reached a sufficient speed, the discharge resistance is automatically removed and field
excitation is applied to synchronize the motor speed with the system speed. The exact value of discharge
resistance and the time/speed of field excitation application should be entered according to the
manufacture data. Users can also enter them by trial and error to ensure that the motor can be started if
there is no manufacture data available.
Excitation can be applied automatically by ETAP based on the following criteria:
Fixed Time
Enter the time in seconds after which, the field excitation will be applied to this motor.

Note: This time duration is counted from the time the motor acceleration action is given in the Transient
Stability Study Case.
Motor Speed
Enter motor speed in seconds after which, the field excitation will be applied to this motor. ETAP
continuously monitors the speed of the machine and once the speed reaches specified value, the excitation
is switched on. Exciters can be selected from the Exciter page of the synchronous motor. Custom exciter
models may be used with the help of UDM Module.

heater associated with this motor.

Equipment Cable
ID
This field allows you to add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Cable Editor
This button brings up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
This field allows you to add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable
Library.
Size Cable
Delete Cable
Overload Heater
When an Overload Heater is directly connected to the motor, ETAP displays the properties as shown in
the example figure above.
You can access the editor of the overload device by clicking the OL Editor button.
Heater resistance and % Tolerance are displayed in the group and will be used for voltage drop
calculations if the heater selected is in-line; otherwise the resistance and tolerance are ignored.
Voltage Drop

Vst
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus this load is connected to, if any) is displayed here for
reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
By selecting this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage
drop calculations.
Use SF
By selecting this option, the motor Service Factor (SF) is used for voltage drop calculations.

Installation
Five raceway installation types are available to choose from.
U/G Duct Bank
U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Each type uses a variety of conditions to determine its overall characteristics and determine the derated
ampacity of the cable installed under the specified raceway conditions.
Application MF
Ampacity
Id = F x Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)


Overall Derating Factor (F)

Adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual installation
conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load capacity, which
results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several
components as listed below.

Fm = Derating factor for A/G conduit (NEC & diversity factor)

Ffw= Derating factor for A/G fire wrap
Allowable Ampacity
ETAP provides a user-defined field to enter the maximum allowable ampacity for one-line and raceway
cables. This field is not provided for equipment cables. The maximum allowable ampacity is used in the
load flow output reports to indicate the percent of cable overloading.
I x MF
U/G Duct
This refers to underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
Ta
Tc
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
This refers to directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is measured in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
Ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where the cable is
installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is
usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc

Grouping
A/G Trays
This refers to above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
a uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3- or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here

Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices. Each of
the three libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
cable tray. The fire protection data is used to further derate cables based on the fire protection material
Fire Coating
correction factor (ACF) associated with it, which is applied against the base ampacity. In respect to
maintained spacing trays, if the fire retardant coating results in a reduction of the spacing between
adjacent cables or groups to less than the required values, the cable shall be considered to be non-
maintained spacing. On the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable
coating and no other cable can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill
below nominal value.
Fire Stop
tray routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the air surrounding the
area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the

Tc
The maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the
base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Ampacity Adjustment

Grouping

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection method. Each of the three

Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables is
considered.
Ta
degrees Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Protection provides optional libraries to choose various fire protection devices. Each of the three
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the air drop
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop

Fire Wrap
A
service. After the actively failed component is isolated and the protection breakers are reclosed, service is
restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed component itself
(and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to service
only after repair or replacement.
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element in this field, using up to 8 alphanumeric characters.



AC Elements Lumped Load
11.13 Lumped Load

The properties associated with lumped loads can be entered in the Lumped Load Editor. This editor
includes the following seven pages of properties:
Info
Nameplate
Short-Circuit
Dyn Model
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.13.1 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each lumped load. The assigned IDs consist of the default
lumped load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of lumped
loads increase. The default lumped load ID (Lump) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the lumped load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a lumped load to a bus, select a bus
OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the lumped load resides,
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a lumped load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service load can be edited like an In Service branch;
however, an Out of Service load will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service load automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.
Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the lumped load for the selected configuration status from the list box.

Spare Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the lumped load
is determined for Load Flow and Motor Starting Studies.
Note that status is not a part of the lumped load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the lumped load to indicate that this is the lumped load
status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a lumped load is shown to be Continuous under
Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Priority
Select the load priority of this lumped load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Names
of the priorities can be specified from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Data Type
Typical, Vendor, Final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types, which can be specified from the Project
menu under Settings and Data Type.
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this lumped load. Select the phase connection type from the list box.

Single-phase machine connected line-to-line between phases AB, BC or CA
Demand Factor
You can modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry
fields. Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the
following calculations:
Operating kW = Rated kW * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = Rated kvar * % Loading * Demand Factor

Demand factors for continuous, intermittent, and spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since

The Nameplate page of the Lumped Load Editor allows for the specification of rating and loading. Since
the lumped load is designed to model a combination of different loads into one, several model types are
available to accomplish this task.
Model Type
The following models are available through the drop-down list:
Conventional Exponential Comprehensive

Unbalanced Polynomial
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the lumped load in kV.
Based on the Model Type, the rest of the page is adjusted to accommodate the parameters required for
each model.

Conventional Load Model
Ratings
Click on the MVA/kVA button to choose from MVA and kVA units for entering and displaying
MVA/kVA, MW/kW, and Mvar/kvar data.
ETAP uses the following equations to calculate kVA, kW, kvar, PF, Amps, and kV when one of the
variables is changed:
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the lumped load in kV.

Amps
Enter the lumped load rated current in amperes.
%PF
This is the power factor of the lumped load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of
the power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging
and -80% indicates leading.
Motor/Static load
Select the percent motor and static loading of the lumped load by shifting the slider position.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this lumped
load, i.e., each lumped load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading
category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column.
Studies.
Operating Load
available if your ETAP key has the online (ETAP Real-Time System) feature. When the operating load
box is checked in the Load Flow Study Case Editor, the calculation results are updated to sources, loads,
and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies. If your ETAP key does not have the
online feature, you can see the operating P and Q data in the Element Editor; however, this data cannot be
used in a later study.
Unbalanced Load Model

The Unbalanced Load Model is used to model unbalanced loading for three different types:
Motor Load, Static Load, and Constant Current Load.

Ratings
kVA, kW, kvar, %PF, and Amp.

For Delta Connected load, you can specify the Line-to-Line (AB, BC, and CA) Ratings of the
total connected load.
For Wye- Solid Connected Load, you can specify the Phase A, B, C Ratings of the total
connected load

Motor/Static Load
% Motor Load, % Static Load, and % Current Load

Specify the Motor Load and Static Load of the Lumped Load. ETAP automatically calculates the %
current load by subtracting the %motor plus static load from 100%.
Loading
When Unbalanced Load is selected, the Motor Load, Static Load, and Constant Current Load kW and
kvar are calculated based on the %Loading entered for the category.
Select Loading Category from the Project menu to edit the loading category names.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow or Unbalanced Load Flow, ETAP updates this field with the total per phase
resultant load.
Exponential Load Model

The Exponential model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and
reactive power components of the load:
where P and Q are active and reactive components when the bus voltage magnitude is V and where f is
the frequency deviation (f fo)/fo.
Ratings
P0
This is the initial operating real power in MW / kW.
Q0
This is the initial operating reactive power in Mvar / kvar.
a, b
These exponents define the characteristic of the load as follows:
0 = Constant Power
1 = Constant Current
2 = Constant Impedance
Kpf,
This is the real power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf
This is the reactive power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 2.0 to 0
Loading
When Exponential Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on the
%Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load.

Polynomial Load Model
The Polynomial model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and
where P and Q are the real and reactive components of the load when the bus voltage magnitude is V and
where f is the frequency deviation (f fo)/ fo.
Ratings
P0

Q0
p1, q1, p2, q2, p3, q3

The polynomial model is composed of constant impedance, constant current, and constant power
components. Each portion is defined by these constants respectively.
Kpf,
This is the real power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf
This is the reactive power equation constant. This constant typically ranges between 2.0 to 0
Loading
When Polynomial Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on the
%Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
After Running Load Flow ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load.

Comprehensive Load Model

The Comprehensive model of the Lumped Load uses the following equations to determine the real and
Where:
The expression for the reactive component of the load has a similar structure. The reactive power
compensation associated with the load is represented separately.
Ratings
P0
Q0
p1, q1, p2, q2, p3, q3, p4, q4, p5, q5

The Comprehensive model is composed of Polynomial and Exponential components. These constants
define the constant impedance, constant current, constant power, and exponential components of the load.
Kpf1, Kpf2
These are real power equation constants. This constant typically ranges between 0 and 3.0
Kqf1, Kqf2
These are reactive power equation constants. This constant typically ranges between 2.0 to 0
Loading
When Comprehensive Load is selected, the Total Load, kW, kvar, PF, and Amps are calculated based on
the %Loading entered for the category.
Operating Load
ETAP updates this field with the total resultant load after running Load Flow.
11.13.3 Short-Circuit Page

Enter the short-circuit parameters for the motor load portion of the lumped load here.

Note: All data in this page is based on the motor percentage of the total lumped load rating.
Short-Circuit Contribution
LRC
This is the locked-rotor current in percent of the motor load share of the lumped load current. For
example, a lumped load with 120 amperes at 80% motor loading will have a motor current of 96 amperes;
therefore, at 600% LRC, the actual LRC will be 576 amperes (600% * 96 A).
Short-circuit contribution levels are defined individually for ANSI and IEC methods.
ANSI Method short-circuit contributions are categorized per the following table:
Short-Circuit Low Voltage ( 600 Volts) High Voltage (> 600 Volts)
Contribution
High Large (HP > 1000)
Large (100 < HP < 250)

Medium Medium (50 HP 100) Medium (250 HP 1000)

Low Small (HP < 50) Small (HP < 250)
IEC method short-circuit contribution are categorized per the following table:
Short-Circuit Contribution HP Speed

High Large High RPM
Medium Medium Intermittent RPM
Low Small Low RPM
Grounding
These entries specify grounding connection, type, and rating of the lumped motor.
Connection
The grounding connection can be selected by clicking on the connection buttons until the desired
Type
For Wye-connected lumped motors, choose from these four grounding types provided in the list box:

Amp Rating
For resistor or reactor grounded lumped motor, enter the resistor or reactor rating in amperes.
Amp Rating = (Line-to-Neutral Voltage)/(Resistor Ohmic Value)
where the line-to-neutral voltage is the bus nominal voltage of the motor divided by 3.
X/R Ratio
X/R
Lumped motors X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra)
Typical
If Typical is selected, typical X/R value will be substituted in the X/R field.

ANSI Short-Circuit
Std MF / Xsc
impedances in percent with motor ratings as the base. Note that the IEC Short-Circuit Method does not
use these impedances.
Motor Size Xsc Xsc

HP kW Equivalent RPM Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network
> 1000 HP > 745.7 1800 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
> 250 HP > 186.4 3600 1.0/LRC 1.5/LRC
50 HP 37.28 other 1.2/LRC 3.0/LRC
< 50 HP < 37.28 1.67/LRC Infinity
IEC Short-Circuit
X
This is the motor subtransient reactance in percent (machine base)
m
This is the m factor.
Td'
This is the motor transient time constant in seconds; this value is used in the IEC 363 method.
Td' = X/(2 f Rr) (Rr = rotor resistance)
11.13.3.1 Dyn Model Page
Dynamic Power-Frequency Relationship for an Induction Motor

The dynamic model page provides a means to establish a dependency of real power absorbed by the
motor on the frequency of the power system.
This dependency is of the following form:
Pn
Pe := ( + Ta) f
fn
A

MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
No of Loads
This is the number of loads (customers) represented by a lump load. This number is used to calculate
number of customer interrupted under a fault.
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Motor Operated Valve
11.14 Motor Operated Valve

The properties associated with a motor operated valve (MOV) can be entered in this editor.
The MOV Editor includes the following nine pages of properties.
Info
Nameplate
Loading
Start Cat
Cable/Vd
Cable Ampacity
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.14.1 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each MOV. The assigned IDs consist of the default MOV ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of MOVs increase. The
default MOV ID (MOV) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the MOV. Connection for MOV is identical to that of induction
motors. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To
connect or reconnect an MOV to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the MOV resides, i.e., you
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a MOV can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service load can be edited like an In Service load; however, an Out
of Service load will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out
of Service load automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.
Data.
Configuration
Initial Status
Select the initial status of the MOV for the selected configuration from the list box.
Open MOV is initially in open position

Close MOV is initially in close position
Throttle Throttle or jog control (provides flow control to achieve a desired valve position)
Spare Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the MOV is
Note: Status is not a part of the MOV engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the MOV status under a specific configuration, i.e., you can have
a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status of an MOV is
shown to be continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Priority
Select the load priority of this MOV from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priorities may
be chosen from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types where you can change their name from the
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of this MOV. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options
for phase connection include:

Quantity
Load Flow:

load.
load.

Short-Circuit:
load.

Arc Flash
under Utility 2.

a single load.

Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for Closing, Opening, Throttling, and Spare status in the entry fields.
Demand factor is the amount of time the load is actually operating. Demand factor affects these
calculations:
Operating kW = kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Operating kvar = kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
kVA, PF, and RF are the normal operating values.
HP/kW
Enter the MOV rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on
the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equations for the nameplate parameters:
Rated kVA = HP * 0.7457/(PF * Eff) Rating in HP

= kW/(PF * Eff) Rating in kW
Full-Load Amp = Rated kVA/(3 * kV)3-phase motors

= Rated kVA/kV Single phase motors
where the PF and Eff are at full load condition (100% loading).
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the MOV in kV. This is the line-to-line voltage for 3-phase motors.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the MOV in amperes. This is the current, which the MOV would pull
from the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated
kV, and rated frequency. When you modify FLA, the efficiency at 100% loading is recalculated. ETAP
limits the entry of FLA in such a way that the efficiency at 100% loading cannot exceed 100% or be
below 10%.
% PF
Enter the MOV rated power factor in percent at full loading.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the MOV in percent at full loading.
Poles
Enter the number of poles. As the number of poles is changed, the synchronous speed of the MOV is
Rated T
Enter the MOV rated torque (optional) in lb.-ft. or N-M.

Library
Access Motor Library data by clicking on the Library button and opening the Library Quick Pick -
Motor. MOV nameplate data can be obtained and substituted from the library by highlighting and
double-clicking on the selection. Library data includes MOV ratings such as HP/kW, kV, FLA, PF, Eff,
& Pole (transferred to the Nameplate page).
Hammer Blow
Check this box if the MOV is provided with the hammer blow feature. If hammer blow feature is
unchecked, the full speed stage (no load) stage is skipped (tnl = 0.).
Micro Switch
Check this box if a micro switch is used to control the operation of the MOV. The limit switch controls
the MOV by interrupting power to the motor contactor when the valve actuator has completed its preset
number of revolutions. If the micro switch feature is selected, the stall stage is skipped. For each
operating stage, the corresponding current, PF, and time should be specified.
Characteristics
% Current/Current
Toggle between %Current (percent of the rated current) or Current (in amperes). You can choose from
these two options by clicking on this button. Enter the corresponding value for each specified operating
stage.
% PF
Enter the MOV power factor in percent for the specified operating stage.
Time
Enter the time duration in seconds for the specified operating stage.
The characteristics of the MOV are defined in terms of the various operating stages of the valve. The
following operating stages are provided based on the MOVs initial status (open, close, throttle, and
spare) and selected features (micro switch and/or hammer blow).
Start
Full Speed
Travel
Seated or Unseated
Stall
MOVs, which are initially in the Open status travel, the following stages based on the selected features.
Note that without the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is set to zero value. Also, if micro
switch is used, the stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.

The following stages are provided for an MOV, which is initially in the Closed status. Note that without
the hammer blow feature the no-load time (tnl) is set to a zero value. Also, if a micro switch is used, the
stall time (tsl) stage is set to a zero value.
For MOVs with throttle control, only the travel stage is displayed.

11.14.3 Loading Page

This page is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for this MOV, i.e.,
each motor can be set to have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the
values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Studies.

ETAP allows you to specify which MOV are included in a given starting category. The starting
categories can be selected from the Motor Starting Study Case Editor. The starting categories can be
edited from the Project menu under Settings and Starting Categories. Note that starting categories are
particularly useful for group starting motors as opposed to specifying individual motors to start.

%Voltage Limit
Start
Enter the MOV voltage limit for normal operation, in percent of the MOV rated kV. If the MOV terminal
voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will maintain current drawn to %LRC for the duration of the
voltage limit violation for MOV start period.
Seating/Unseating
voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will switch current drawn to %LRC for the duration of the
voltage limit violation during Seating or Unseating period.
Travel
voltage drops below this limit then ETAP will switch current drawn to %LRC for the duration of the
voltage limit violation during travel period.


Equipment Cable
ID
To add a cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
This button will bring up the equipment Cable Editor.
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a motor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable

Delete Cable
Overload Heater
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms. The Library button for selecting and retrieving
overload heaters from the Overload Heater Library is not active for this version.
Voltage Drop
Vst
Vbus
here for reference.
Vd Calculation
Use App MF
By selecting this option, the cable ampacity Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) is used for voltage
drop calculations.

11.14.6 Cable/Amp Page
Installation
U/G Duct Bank

U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Application MF
Ampacity

Id = F Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)



Adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual installation
conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load capacity, which
results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is composed of several
components as listed below.

Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
These are underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
Ta

Tc
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
These are directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
This is the ambient temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding
soil where the cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
Tc
Maximum allowable conductor temperature is in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for the base
ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
A/G Trays
These are above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of
the air surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
Tray Specification

NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
the other hand, if remaining space in a randomly filled tray is used up by cable coating and no other cable
can be installed in the tray; credit may be taken for reduction in cable % fill below nominal value.

Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the air surrounding the
area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
Tc
Ampacity Adjustment

This is the level of load diversity used in calculating correction factors can be chosen as either 50% or
none.
Grouping

Number of Conductors Ampacity Correction Factor

for 50 % Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %
Number of Conductors Ampacity Correction Factor

for No Load Diversity
4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables
are considered.

Ta
degrees Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

A
being restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the failed component
itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) could be restored to
service only after repair or replacement.
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF

FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Static Load
11.15 Static Load

The properties associated with static loads of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
The Static Load Editor includes the following eight pages of properties.
Info
Loading
Cable/Vd
Cable Amp
Harmonic
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.15.1 Info Page

You can specify the static load ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag,
load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, Quantity or number of static loads,
Phase connection, and Demand Factor within the Info page.

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each static load. The assigned IDs consist of the default static
load ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of static loads
increase. The default static load ID (Load) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the static load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a static load to a bus, select a bus from the
list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note
that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides, i.e., you
If a static load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the static
load to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a static load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service load can be edited like an In Service load. However,
an Out of Service load will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service load automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.
Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the static load for the selected configuration status from the list box.
Options for operating status include:


Spare Spare load
Note: Status is not a part of the static load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the static load to indicate that this is the static load status
under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different
configurations. In the following example, status of a static load is shown to be Continuous under Normal
configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types, which can be specified from the Project
menu under Settings, and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of the static load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Connection

Phase
This is the phase connection of the static load. Select the phase connection type from the list box.

Quantity
Load Flow:
load.
load.

Short-Circuit:
load.

Arc Flash
under Utility 2.

a single load.

Demand Factor
Modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields.
calculations:

11.15.2 Loading Page
Ratings
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the static load in kV. If this static load is a 3-phase load, kV is the line-to-line
voltage. For single-phase loads, kV load rated voltage must be consistent with the way this load is
connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A
and neutral, then the rated voltage of the load must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the

bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this load is connected between phase A and phase B, then the rated voltage of
the load must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
MVA/kVA Button
kVA = kW 2 + kvar 2
PF = kW kVA Negative PF means leading PF
MVA/kVA
Enter the rated apparent power of the static load in MVA or kVA.
MW/kW
Enter the rated real power of the static load in MW or kW.
Mvar/kvar
Enter the rated reactive power of the static load in Mvar or kvar. To specify a capacitor, enter 0.0 for
MW and a negative value for the Mvar field.
%PF
This is the power factor of the static load in percent with a range from -100% to +100%. The sign of the
power factor determines whether it is a lagging or leading power factor, e.g., +80% indicates lagging and
-80% indicates leading.
Amps
Enter the static load rated current in amperes.
Calculator
ETAP Power Calculator is set up to calculate complex power, power factor, and current. The following
equations are used to calculate these variables:
kVA = kW 2 + kvar 2
PF = kW kVA Negative PF means leading PF
Amps = 1000 * kVA / ( kV * 3 ) 3-phase
Amps = 1000 * kVA / kV Single-Phase

To use the calculator, select the variable units as kVA or MVA, and change one of the variables. For
example, if kW is changed and the value of the kvar is changed, new values of kVA, %PF, and Amp (if
kV is specified) will be calculated. If the value of PF is changed, new values of kvar and kVA are
calculated.
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for this static load, i.e.,
each static load can have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the values
of percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Studies.
and efficiency from the values of power factor and efficiency specified at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading.
This is accomplished by using a curve fitting technique with a maximum of 100% for power factor and
efficiency. The calculated power factor and efficiency are then used to calculate and display the operating
kW and kvar loading as well as the feeder losses, if an equipment cable with a non-zero length is
specified for this load. Note: although the demand factor is used for calculating the operating load and
feeder losses, the value of the demand factor is not used in determining the operating power factor and
efficiency.

heater associated with this static load.

Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this load. Partial
cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and Unit are provided here for
ID
Use this field to add a cable to a static load, select and retrieve the cable from the Cable Library on this
page.
Cable Editor
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a static load, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
Click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the equipment Cable Editor for automatic sizing of the
equipment cable.

Delete Cable
Overload Heater
Enter the resistance of the overload heater in ohms. The Library button for selecting and retrieving
overload heaters from the Overload Heater Library is not active for this version.
Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable and overload heater along with static load
terminal voltage (Vt), are calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Both Vd and Vt are
displayed in percent values with a base kV equal to the bus nominal kV.
Vbus
here for reference.
Vd Calculation
By selecting this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for
11.15.4 Amp Page

Installation
U/G Duct Bank

U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Application MF
Ampacity
Id = F Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)



This is the adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual
installation conditions from the base conditions. This factor establishes a maximum feasible load
capacity, which results in no reduction of the cables expected lifetime. The overall derating factor is
composed of several components as listed below.



Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
Ta
Tc
ampacity is obtained from the library. This order is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)

Ta
This is the ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where
the cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The
value is usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Grouping
A/G Trays
These are above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries is used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the
air surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature in degrees Celsius. The conductor temperature for
Tray Specification
NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.

Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping

Fire Protection
Fire Coating

Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
This is above ground cable conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
Maximum allowable conductor temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature for
Ampacity Adjustment


Grouping

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %


4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for airdrop cables are
considered.
Ta
This is ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. The temperature of the air surrounding the area where the
tray is to be installed is in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees
Celsius. For cables in direct sun, the air temperature may be increased by a typical value of 15 degrees
Celsius.

Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature measured in degrees Celsius. Conductor
temperature for the base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Fire Protection
libraries may be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the airdrop
and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

Static Load can be modeled as either a harmonic voltage source or a harmonic current source.

Harmonic Library
Library
Click on Library button to bring up Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.
Specify a harmonic type: Current Source or Voltage Source, a manufacturer name and a model name
using the Harmonic Library Quick Pick Editor.

Type
This displays the selected harmonic source type.
Manufacturer
This displays Manufacturer name of the selected harmonic library.
Model
This displays the model name of the selected harmonic library.
Wave Form
This displays one cycle of the voltage or current waveform of the selected harmonic library in time
domain.
Print (Wave Form)

Select this to print harmonic waveform.
Spectrum
Print (Spectrum)
Select this to print harmonic spectrum.

A
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF

FOR
It is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Capacitor
11.16 Capacitor
The properties associated with a shunt capacitor can be entered in this editor.
The Capacitor Editor includes the following seven pages of properties.
Info
Rating
Cable/Vd
Cable Amp
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.16.1 Info Page

Specify the capacitor ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, load
Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, Phase connection, and Demand Factor
within the Info page.

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each capacitor. The assigned IDs consist of the default
capacitor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of capacitors
increase. The default capacitor ID (CAP) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the capacitor. Connection for capacitors is identical to that of
static loads. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To
connect or reconnect a capacitor to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the capacitor resides, i.e., you
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a capacitor can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service capacitor can be edited like an In Service capacitor;
however, an Out of Service capacitor will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity
Check is activated, an Out of Service capacitor automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.
Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the capacitor for the selected configuration status from the list box.

Spare Spare load
Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the capacitor is
determined for Load Slow and Motor Starting Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the capacitor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the capacitor to indicate that this is the device status
configurations. In the following example, status of a capacitor is shown to be Continuous under Normal
configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types that can be specified from the Project
Priority
Select the load priority of the capacitor from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Connection
Phase
This is the phase connection of the capacitor. Select the phase connection type from the list box. Options
for phase connection include:

Demand factor
Modify the demand factors for the continuous, intermittent, and spare status in the provided entry fields.
calculations:


11.16.2 Rating Page
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the capacitor in kV. If this capacitor load is a 3-phase load, kV is the line-to-
line voltage. For a single-phase capacitor, kV rated voltage must be consistent with the way this capacitor
is connected to the system, i.e., if the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected between
phase A and neutral, then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 2.4 kV
(4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this capacitor is connected between phase A and phase B
(AB), then the rated voltage of the capacitor must be in the neighborhood of 4.16 kV.
Max. kV
Enter the maximum rated voltage of the capacitor in kV. Typically this value is 110% of capacitor rated
kV.

kvar/bank
Enter the capacitor reactive power per bank. This reactive power is the capacitive var to the system.
# of Banks
Enter the number of capacitor banks. ETAP automatically calculates the total kvar based on the
kvar/bank and # of banks.
Mvar = (Mvar/Bank) (# of Banks)

kvar = (kvar/Bank)(# of Banks)
Mvar/kvar Button
Click on the Mvar/kvar button to choose from Mvar and kvar units for entering and displaying
Mvar/kvar data.
ETAP calculates and displays the amps and capacitor reactance as well as the capacitor size in
microfarads. The following equations are used to calculate these variables:
kvar
Amps =
3 kV 3-phase
kvar
Amps = Single-Phase
kV
kV 2
Xc = 10 kvar
3
Ohms
10 6
microfarad =
Xc 2f
Loading
This group is used to assign a percent loading to each of the ten loading categories for the capacitor, i.e.,
each capacitor can have a different operating loading level for each loading category. To edit the values
of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column. Note: You can
select any of these loading categories when conducting Load Slow and Motor Starting Studies.

This page is used to display voltage drops and to add, delete, or edit the equipment cable associated with
this capacitor.

Equipment Cable
This group provides capabilities for adding, deleting, or editing the equipment cable for this capacitor.
Partial cable information such as the cable ID, Type, #/Phase, Size, Length, and Unit are provided here
for editing and displaying.
ID
You can add a cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library on this page.
Cable Editor
Cable Library
To add an equipment cable to a capacitor, select and retrieve a cable from the Cable Library.
Size Cable
To set up automatic sizing of the equipment cable, click on this button to bring up the Sizing page of the
Delete Cable
Click on this button to delete the equipment cable associated with this capacitor.

Voltage Drop
The total voltage drop (Vd) across the equipment cable, along with capacitor terminal voltage (Vt) are
calculated and displayed here for all loading categories. Both Vd and Vt are displayed in percent values
with a base kV equal to the rated kV of the capacitor.
Vbus
The operating voltage of the connected bus (the bus which this capacitor is connected to, if any) is
displayed here for reference.
Vd Calculation
When you select this option, the Application Multiplying Factor (App MF) for cable ampacity is used for
Installation
U/G Duct Bank

U/G Direct Buried

A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop
Application MF
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for comparison of base, derated, and required (I x MF) ampacities. The
Id = F x Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)

This is the full rated current value in amperes for the chosen cable before any derating occurs. This is the


This is the adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual
composed of several components as listed below.


Allowable Ampacity
I x MF
U/G Duct
RHO
This is the thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
Tc
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is measured in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt (C cm/W)
Ta
This is the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil where the
cable is installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value
is usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.

Tc
The maximum allowable conductor temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. Conductor temperature
for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
A/G Trays
These are above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries are used for cables
installed in trays.
Ta
The ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is measured in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air
surrounding the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is
Tc
Tray Specification
NEC
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.

Grouping

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

A/G Conduit
This is above ground cable conduit.
Ta
This is the ambient air (atmospheric) temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The temperature of the
air surrounding the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity
is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The conductor
temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is usually specified at 90
degrees Celsius.
Ampacity Adjustment


Grouping

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %

Fire Protection
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
routed through fire stops. Note: There may not be any reason to derate the cable for fire stops since
typical fire stops are constructed with expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be
insufficient to cause an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
These are cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for air drop cables is
considered.
Ta
This is ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. The temperature of the air surrounding the area where the
tray is to be installed is in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees
Celsius. For cables in direct sun, the air temperature may be increased by a typical value of 15 degrees
Celsius.
Tc
This is the maximum allowable conductor temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The conductor
temperature for the base ampacity is 90 degrees Celsius.
Fire Protection
and Fire Coating.

Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

A
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Select a load sector name (or customer type) for the load from the Interruption Cost pull-down list. In the
reliability calculation, the user sector information is used to get the interruption cost from the Reliability
Cost library to calculate Expected Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 18 alphanumeric
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

Enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies that are
associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb, with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size
of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information on the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key

AC Elements Power Panel
11.17 Power Panel

You can enter the properties associated with panel schedule of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. Every panel and subpanel can have unlimited circuits. Each circuit can be
comprised of a load, protective device, and/or a feeder. Circuits are displayed in the Panel Editor in
standard or column layout.
ETAPS Power Panel provides spreadsheet and graphical representations of the

panel loads. The graphical panel provides a quick review of loads via the one-line
diagram.
The Panel Schedule Editor contains six pages of properties.
Info page, Rating page, Schedule page, Summary page, Remarks page, and
Comment page.
Within the Schedule page, there are five tabs: Description tab, Rating tab,
Loading tab, Protective Device tab, and Feeder tab
For details on Panel Schedule, refer to Chapter 36 of the ETAP User Guide.

AC Elements Harmonic Filter
11.18 Harmonic Filter

The Harmonic Filter Editor contains the following five pages of properties:
Info
Parameter
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
In addition, a Harmonic Filter Sizing Editor is available through the Parameter page.
11.18.1 Info Page

You can specify the harmonic filter ID, connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, load Priority, Name and Description, Data Type, Configuration Status, and Phase connection within
the Info page.
Info
ID

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each harmonic filter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
filter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of filters increase.
The default filter ID (HF) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the harmonic filter. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a harmonic filter to a bus, select a bus
OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the static load resides,
If a harmonic filter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
harmonic filter to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where Load1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a harmonic filter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service filter can be edited like an In Service filter.
However, an Out of Service filter will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service filter automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram.
Note that the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property, which is independent of the
configuration status. Therefore, you can set a filter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the harmonic filter for the selected configuration status from the list box.

Spare Spare load

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the filter is
determined for Load Flow, Motor Starting, and Transient Stability Studies.
Note that status is not a part of the harmonic filter engineering properties. For this reason, the name of
the configuration status is shown above the status of the harmonic filter to indicate that this is the
harmonic filter status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under
different configurations. In the following example, status of a harmonic filter is shown to be Continuous
under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types that can be specified from the Project
Priority
Select the load priority of the static load from the list box. This field can be used for load priority,
Connection
Grounding
Specify the grounding connection type of harmonic filter. Y grounded connected filters are considered as
solidly grounded.

11.18.2 Parameter Page

Within the Parameter page, specify the filter type and its parameters. For the Single-Tuned filter, you
also can use the filter sizing facility to automatically size the filter.
Filter Type
Choose a pre-defined filter type from the dropdown list. Four types of filter structures are available.
By-Pass
A filter type that has by-pass frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Damped)
A filter type that has high-pass with damped frequency characteristic.
High-Pass (Undamped)
High-pass undamped filter. A filter type that has high-pass with undamped frequency characteristic
Single-Tuned
A filter type that has a single tuned frequency point.
3rd Order Damped

Special high-pass damped filter where the inductance is replaced with a series LC Circuit to provide zero
losses at the fundamental frequency and therefore avoiding parallel resonance.
3rd Order C-Type

Special high-pass undamped filter where the inductance is replaced with a series LC Circuit to provide
zero losses at the fundamental frequency and therefore avoiding parallel resonance.

Capacitor C1
kvar
This is 1-phase kvar for capacitor C1.
Rated kV
This is rated kV in rms for capacitors C1.
Max. kV
This is maximum kV in peak for capacitor C1.
In ETAP it is assumed that a harmonic filter is installed on a single phase. Therefore the capacitor
parameter value for kvar needs to be entered as single-phase. Since the harmonic filter may have a Wye
or Delta connection, the rated kV needs to be entered accordingly. For example, if a harmonic filter has a
Wye connection and it is connected to a 3-phase bus, then, the rated kV to be entered should be VL-L/3
(or if Delta connection then VL-L). Refer to the following examples for details.
Case 1: Wye Connection.
For demonstration purposes a harmonic filter with capacitor parameters only is used. It has a Wye
connection and it is connected to a 3-phase bus with a nominal kV = 4.16 kV. Note that the rated kV =
2.4 kV. Since each phase should provide 100 kvars, the load flow calculation shows that the 3 phases
should provide about 300 kvars.

Harmonic filter connection Harmonic filter parameters Load flow results
Case 2: Delta Connection
Same harmonic filter is used with Delta connection and rated kV = 4.16 kV. Note that the load flow
calculation shows similar results for the harmonic filter (about 300 kvars.)
Harmonic filter connection Harmonic filter parameters Load flow results
Capacitor C2
kvar
This is 1-phase kvar for capacitor C2.
Rated kV
This is rated kV in rms for capacitors C2.
Max. kV
This the maximum kV in peak for capacitor C2.
Inductor L1
XL1
This is XL1 in ohms for inductor L1.
Q Factor
This is the Q factor (XL1/RL1) for inductor L1.

Max. I
This is the maximum I in rms for inductor L1.
Inductor L2
XL2
This is the XL2 in ohms for inductor L2.
Q Factor
This is the Q factor (XL2/RL2) for inductor L2.
Max. I
This is the maximum I in rms for inductor L2.
Resistor R
This is the external resistance of the filter in ohms.
Sizing Button
When single-tuned is specified as the filter type, click on this button to activate the Harmonic Filter
Sizing Editor. (See the Harmonic Filter Sizing Section.)

A
MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).

Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Interruption Cost.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



11.18.5.1 Harmonic Filter Sizing Editor
Harmonic Info
Harmonic Order
Use this filed to specify a harmonic order for sizing the filter.
Harmonic Current
Use this field to provide harmonic current for the specified harmonic order in amps.
Include Filter Overloading

Click on this checkbox to include filter overloading checking. Filter ratings that will be checked are the
capacitor maximum peak voltage and inductance maximum rms current.
Sizing Option
Click one of the buttons to define the filter sizing criteria per the following:
PF Correction
Size the filter based on the power factor correction criteria.
Minimize Initial Cost

Size the filter based on minimal initial cost.

Minimize Operating Cost

Size the filter based on minimal operating cost.
Initial Installation Cost

Specify the initial installation costs for the capacitor and inductor.
Capacitor
Use this field to enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the capacitor.
Inductor
Use this field to enter the unit cost in $/kvar for the inductor.
Operating Cost
Specify the operating cost for the capacitor.
Capacitor Lost Factor

Enter the capacitor loss factor in percent of the capacitor total rating in this field.
PF Correction
Use this area to specify system operating conditions. These values are used only if PF Correction is
selected as sizing option.
Existing PF
Enter the existing PF in percent for the load connected to the filter terminal bus in this field.
Desired PF
Enter the desired PF in percent after the filter is installed on the filter terminal bus in this field.
Load MVA
Enter the 1-phase load MVA on the filter terminal bus in this field.
Size Filter Button

Click on this button to size the filter based on the selections and data entered.
Substitute Button
Click on this button to substitute the calculated parameters (results) back to the Harmonic Filter
Parameter page.
Result
This area displays results from the sizing calculation.
1-Phase kvar
This is the filter 1-phase capacitor kvar.

Xl
This is the impedance of XL1 in ohm/phase.
Vc
This is the computed capacitor peak kV (ASUM) using the sized filter parameters.
IL
This is the computed inductor current (rms amps) using the sized filter parameters.

AC Elements Remote Connector
11.19 Remote Connector

The Remote Connector is a tool that allows two or more distinct elements to be connected to each other,
while located in separate areas of the One-Line Diagram. The Remote Connector Editor contains one
page of informationthe Info page. Section 8.17.3 illustrates how the Remote Connector is used in the
One-Line Diagram.
11.19.1 Info Page

The Info page displays the Remote Connector ID, Protective Devices, and Elements connected to Side 1
and Side 2 of the Remote Connector.
Remote Connector
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Remote Connector. The assigned IDs consist of the
default Remote Connector ID (CL) plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the
number of connectors increase.
Side Connection (Side 1 and Side 2)
This displays the IDs of the Protective Device and Element connected to each side of the Remote
Connector.
Protective Device
This displays the ID of the Protective Device connected to each side of the Remote Connector.
Element
This displays the ID of the Element connected to each Side of the Remote Connector.

AC Elements Remote Connector
11.19.1.1 Editing the Remote Connector

When using the Remote Connector, the following tips are helpful to remember:
The Remote Connector is composed of two sides, Side 1 and Side 2

Each side can be located in a different area of the One-Line Diagram
When one side is deleted, the other end of the Remote Connector is also deleted, and cannot be
recovered from the system Dumpster.
Right click on either Side 1 or Side 2 of a Remote Connector and select Find Other End, to locate
the other side of the connector
Double-clicking on one end of the remote connector will prompt ETAP to find the corresponding
end
Copying the Remote Connector to a Composite Network

The Remote Connector can be used inside Composite Networks. To copy one side of the Remote
Connector to a Composite Network, follow these steps:
Select the Remote Connector from the Toolbar, and place it in the One-Line Diagram
Double-click on the Composite Network you wish to copy one side of the Remote Connector to.
The Composite Network window must be open.
Press and hold the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys, click on one side of the Remote Connector, and drag
it to its new location inside the Composite Network. Release the keys and buttons to place the
connector.
Add Elements to each side of the connector.
11.19.1.2 Remote Connector in the One-Line Diagram

AC Elements Phase Adapter
11.20 Phase Adapter

The Phase Adapter is a tool that allows a 1-phase element to be connected to a 3-phase bus. The Phase
Adapter Editor contains the following two pages of information:
Info
Load
The 1-phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter cannot be directly connected to a 1-phase load. It must
first be connected to a transformer. The figure in Section 8.18.4 illustrates how a Phase Adapter is used
in the One-Line Diagram.
11.20.1 Info Page

Specify the Phase Adapter ID, In/Out of Service, 3-Phase Primary Side Bus ID, Phase Connection, 1-
Phase Secondary Side Element ID, 1-Phase Feeder Name/Description, Configuration and Status within
the Info page.
Info
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to
each Phase Adapter. The assigned IDs consist of the default Phase Adapter ID plus an integer, starting
with the number one and increasing as the number of adapters increases. The default Phase Adapter ID
(PA) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a Phase Adapter can be selected by choosing the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service Adapter can be edited like an In Service Adapter. However,
an Out of Service Adapter will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service Adapter, and all elements downstream from it are automatically dimmed in
the One-Line diagram.
status. Therefore, an adapter can be set to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
3-Phase Primary Side
Bus ID
This displays the ID and the voltage of the 3-Phase Bus that the Primary Side of the Phase Adapter is
connected to.
Phase Connection
This allows for the selection of a specific phase for the 1-Phase output from the Phase Adapter to the
load. The choices are: Phase A, B, C, AB, AC, and BC. Each of these selections is uniquely color-coded.
1-Phase Secondary Side
Element ID
This displays the ID of the element connected to the 1-Phase Secondary Side of the Phase Adapter.
1-Phase Feeder
Name
Use this field to specify a customized name to the Phase Adapter, which differs from the ID.
Description
Use the field to specify a unique description for the Phase Adapter.
Configuration
Normal
Select the operating status of the Phase Adapter from the list below:
Close Provides a continuous connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.
Open Provides no connection between the 3-Phase bus and the 1-Phase Load.
Note: Status is not a part of the Phase Adapters engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration is shown above the actual status of the Phase Adapter to indicate that this is the Phase
Adapter status under the specific configuration.

11.20.2 Load Page

The Load page displays information about the characteristics of the load connected to the Phase Adapter.
The following information is displayed within the Load page: Phase Adapter Primary 3-phase voltage,
Total Connected Load kW and kvar, Total Operating Load kW and kvar. The Loading Category can be
chosen from the Loading Category list box.
3-Phase Voltage
This field displays the 3-phase voltage level of the bus that the Phase Adapter Primary Side is connected
to.
Total Connected Load
Constant Power and Constant Impedance

This field displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total amount
of load that is connected to the Phase Adapter.
Total Operating Load
Constant Power and Constant Impedance

This field displays the constant power and constant impedance values in kW and kvar of the total
operating load amount that is connected to the Phase Adapter.
Loading Category

This pull-down list allows the user to select the Loading Category condition for the Total Operating load
connected to the Phase Adapter.
11.20.2.1 The Phase Adapter in the One-Line Diagram
11.20.2.2 Phase Adapter in System Studies

This Section describes how the Phase Adapter is considered in System Studies. In the current version of
ETAP, the elements downstream from a Phase Adapter are not considered in detail in a system study.
Instead, all the loads connected downstream from the Phase Adapter are summed up to the Phase
Adapter.
Load Flow Type System Studies And Reliability Study

The load flow type System Studies are ones that require performing load flow calculations, including load
flow, motor starting, harmonic load flow, transient stability, optimal power flow. In these studies as well
as in the reliability study, the downstream loads connected to a Phase Adapter are aggregated to get the
total load. Each Phase Adapter is considered as a single load in the System Studies.
Radial System
In order to sum up the load for a top panel in the current version of ETAP, it is required that the system
powered by a Phase Adapter must be a radial system. It is not allowed for downstream elements from a
Phase Adapter to form any loops. Furthermore, the Phase Adapter must be the only source for all the
downstream elements. Before carrying out a system study, ETAP checks if loops are involved in any
Phase Adapter. If a loop is detected, an error message will be displayed and the calculation is stopped.

Top Panel Load

The load aggregated to a Phase Adapter includes all downstream loads. Since downstream connections
may involve any elements except 3-winding transformers, utilities, and generators, it can form a full
radial system. In summing up the load for the Phase Adapter, ETAP considers all the loads connected.
Because no load flow calculations are conducted, the load summation does not include losses on the
branches and equipment cables.
The aggregated load values are displayed in the Phase Adapter Editor. Depending on the Study Case
options, appropriate load diversity factors can also be applied.
Short-Circuit Type System Studies

In the current version of ETAP, it is assumed that Phase Adapters do not make any short-circuit
contributions to any fault occurred in the system.

AC Elements Static Var Compensator
11.21 Static Var Compensator

The properties associated with High-Voltage Static Var Compensators (SVCs) can be entered in this
editor.
The Static Var Editor includes the following seven pages of properties:
Info Rating Model

Harmonic Reliability Remarks
Comment
11.21.1 Info Page
Info
ID
This is a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each SVC. The assigned IDs consist of the default SVC ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of SVCs increase. The default
SVC ID (SVC) can be changed from the ETAP Defaults menu or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the SVC. Connection for SVC is identical to that of static loads.
If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or
reconnect an SVC to a bus, select a bus from the list box, and then click OK. The one-line diagram will
be updated to show the new connection.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the SVC resides. In other words,
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the bus next to the Bus ID.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of an SVC can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service SVC can be edited like an In Service SVC; however, an Out
of Service SVC will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out
of Service SVC is automatically dimmed in the one-line diagram.
Note: The In Service/Out of Service option is an engineering property which is independent of the
Equipment
Tag #
Enter a feeder tag number, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter an equipment name, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter an equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Data Type
This field provides a way to track data entry. Select one of the data types (such as Estimate, Typical,
Vendor, Final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the
source of the latest data. There are a total of ten data types. To modify them, navigate to the Project
menu, point to Settings and select Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of the SVC from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided. To modify the names of the
priorities, navigate to the Project menu, point to Settings and select Load Priority.

11.21.2 Rating Page

The Rating page defines the control region of the Static Var Compensator (SVC).
Voltage Rating
kV
This is the rated Voltage of the SVC in kV.
Vmax
This is the maximum voltage in percent of rated voltage. This value is used to calculate the maximum
current of the SVC.
Vmin
This is the minimum voltage in percent of rated voltage. This value is used to calculate the minimum
current of the SVC.
Vref
This is the voltage setting as a percentage of rated voltage. When the SVC is in control range, the SVC
will maintain this voltage at its terminal.

Inductive Rating
These are the ratings of the inductive component of the SVC. The relation between the ratings is
governed by the following equations:
QL
The rated inductive reactive power in Mvar.
IL
The rated inductive current in kA.
BL
The rated inductive susceptance in Siemens.
BL is calculated by the following equation:
QLmax
BL =
V
( max ) 2
100 * kV
Capacitive Rating
These are the ratings of the capacitive component of the SVC. The relation between the ratings is
governed by the following equations:
Qc
This is the rated capacitive reactive power in Mvars.
Ic
This is the rated capacitive current in kA.
Bc
This is the rated capacitive susceptance in Siemens.
BC is calculated by the following equation:
QC max
BC =
Vmin
( )2
100 * kV

Max Inductive Rating and Slope
QLMax
This is the maximum inductive reactive power in Mvars.
ILMax
This is the maximum inductive reactive current in Amps.
SLL
This is the slope of the operating terminal voltage in the inductive region. This is calculated as follows:
Vmax Vref
%SLL := 100 2
Vrated
3I Lmax Z rated where Z rated =
QL
Max Capacitive Rating and Slope
Qc Max
This is the maximum capacitive reactive power in Mvars.
Ic Max
This is the maximum capacitive reactive current in Amps.
SLC
This is the slope of the operating terminal voltage in the capacitive region. This is calculated as follows:
where Error! Objects cannot be created from editing field codes.
11.21.3 Static Var Compensator Models

The Static Var Compensator Control model can be accessed from the Static Var Editor, Model page. It is
imperative to model this control when performing Transient Stability Studies to determine the dynamic
response of the SVC under different conditions.
ETAP contains the following SVC control models:
Type1SVC_Control_Model_Type1
See the Dynamic Models Chapter for more details.


The Harmonic page of the Static Var Editor allows you to specify the generation of Harmonics of this
device.
Harmonic Library
Select this option to define the content of the harmonics of this device by selecting a model from the
library (by clicking the Library button). When this option is selected, the Library group is activated while
the Parameters group is grayed out.
Static Var Parameters

Select this option to define the content of harmonics of this device by the pulse level and the rectifier
injection angle of the device. When this option is selected the Library group is grayed out and the
Parameters group is active.
Library
This group displays the properties of the library selected such as type, manufacturer, and model.

Parameters
Pulse #
Select the Thyristor pulse modulation. This selection has a direct impact on the modeling of the harmonic
generation of the SVC.
For 6 pulse, the harmonic generation of the SVC is defined by the following equation:
where:
Ih = Harmonic current at h harmonic order produced by the delay of the thyristors.

h = Harmonic order
= Advance angle in degrees
V = Line-to-line rated voltage
For higher pulse modulation, the harmonic generation is modeled using a converter model.
Shift Angle
Enter the transformer shift phase angle. ETAP enters the standard shift angles for different pulse
modulation when the pulse number is selected:
Pulse Shift Angle

12 30
24 15
48 7.5
For 6 pulse, the phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model.
Alpha
Enter the advance angle in degrees.
Xc%
Enter the commutation reactance in percent of the rated reactive reactance.
Max Order
This is the maximum harmonic order to be modeled.


A
A is the active failure rate in number of failures per year. The active failure rate is associated with the
component to fail and can therefore cause the removal of the other healthy components and branches from
restored to some or all of the load points. However, the failed component itself (and those components
that are directly connected to this failed component) can only be restored to service after repair or
replacement.
MTTR
MTTR is the mean time to repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
and restore the system to its normal operating state.
is the mean repair rate in number of repairs per year, calculated automatically based on MTTR ( =
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
MTTF is the mean time to failure in years calculated automatically based on A (MTTF = 1.0/A).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate that is, unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A (FOR =
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
rP is the replacement time in hours for replacing a failed element with a spare one.
Library
Click on the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick dialog box for reliability data.

Interruption Cost
Load Sector
information is used to get interruption cost from the reliability cost library to calculate expected
interruption cost.
User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to keep track of extra data associated with this component. You can change the
names of the user-defined (UD) fields from the Project menu by pointing to Settings and selecting the
User-Defined Fields command.





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date


When entering information on the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key

AC Elements High Voltage DC Link
11.22 High Voltage DC Link (DC Transmission Line)

The properties associated with High-Voltage DC Link (HVDC) can be entered in this editor.
The HVDC Editor includes the following 11 pages of properties:
Info Rating Rectifier Control

Inverter Control AC Control Shut-Restart Control
Harm-Rect Harm-Inv Reliability
Remarks Comment
11.22.1 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC Link. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC Links increase. The
default transformer ID (DC_LINK) can be changed from the Defaults menu by pointing to Branch and
selecting High-Voltage DC Link or from the Project View.
FromBus, ToBus
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC Link are designated in the From Bus and To Bus drop-down
lists. If the DC Link is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a DC Link to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to
show the new connection, after you click OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the DC Link resides. In other
words, you cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a DC Link is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC Link
to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus. This is
shown in the figure below, where T1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Next to the From Bus and To Bus lists, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses.
In Service or Out of Service

The operating condition of a DC Link can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service branch can be edited like an In Service branch; however, an
Out of Service branch will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service branch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and
branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and become
dimmed.

Note: The In Service or Out of Service option is an engineering property that is independent of the
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the feeder tag number in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description
11.22.2 Rating Page

The DC Link model includes the following components whose ratings can be defined on the Rating page
of the DC Link Editor.

Rectifier (Input)
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the input of the rectifier in kilovolts.
Note: When a DC Link is connected to a bus, the rated voltage is set equal to the bus nominal kV.
Hz
Enter the rated input frequency of the rectifier in Hertz.
Rectifier Transformer
Prim. kV and Sec. kV

Enter the primary and secondary voltage ratings of the rectifier transformer in kilovolts. ETAP will use
the voltage ratio to calculate the DC voltage output of the rectifier.

MVA
Enter the MVA rating of the rectifier transformer. This value is used as the base MVA for the
transformer impedance calculation.
Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage.
Xc
Enter the rectifier transformer reactance as a percentage of rated reactance.
Tap Setting
Click this button to specify the Max%, Min%, and Step% settings of the rectifier transformer tap in the
Transformer Tap Setting dialog box.
Inverter (Output)
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the output of the inverter in kilovolts.
Note: When a DC Link is connected to a bus, the rated voltage is set equal to the bus nominal kV.
Hz
Enter the rated output frequency of the inverter in Hertz.
Inverter Transformer
Prim. kV and Sec. kV
Enter primary and secondary voltage ratings of the inverter transformer in kilovolts. ETAP will use the
voltage ratio to calculate the DC voltage output of the inverter.
MVA
Enter the MVA Rating of the inverter transformer. This value is used as the base MVA for the
transformer impedance calculation.
Tap
Enter the transformer tap setting as a percentage.
Xc
Enter the inverter transformer reactance as a percentage.
Tap Setting
Click this button to specify the Max%, Min%, and Step% settings of the inverter transformer tap in the
Transformer Tap Setting dialog box.

DC Link
# of Bridges
Enter the number of bridges series.
Configuration
Select a configuration type for the DC link. The selections available are Bipolar, Monopolar, and
Homopolar.
Resistance
Enter the DC resistance of the DC link in ohms.
Rating
Imax
Enter the maximum DC current rating in percent.
Vdc
Enter the DC voltage rating of the DC link. This rating can be determined using the following equation:
3 2 Sec _ kV
Vdc = kVRe ctifier BridgeNumber
Pr im _ kV (1 + Tap )
Idc
Enter the DC current in kiloamps.
Pdc
Enter the DC power rating of the DC Link in megawatts.
Min Alpha
Enter the minimum rectifier ignition angle in degrees.
Max Alpha
Enter the maximum rectifier ignition angle in degrees.
Min Gamma
Enter the minimum inverter extinction angle in degrees.
Max Gamma
Enter the maximum inverter extinction angle in degrees.
Operating
ETAP updates the Vdc, Idc, Pdc, Alpha, and Gamma results in this group.

11.22.3 Rectifier Control Page

The Rectifier Control model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Rectifier Control page.
Note: Contact OTI for information on the usage of this page.
11.22.4 Inverter Control Page

The Inverter Control model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Inverter Control page.
11.22.5 AC Control Page

The AC Control model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, AC Control page.

Shutdown-Restart Control Page
The DC Link Shutdown and Restart model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Shut-Restart
Control page.
11.22.6 Harmonic-Rectifier Page

The Harm-Rect model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Harm-Rect Control page.
11.22.7 Harmonic Inverter Page

The Harm-Inv model can be accessed from the DC Link Editor, Harm Inv page.

AC Elements AC Composite Motors
11.23 AC Composite Motors

AC Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements that can
be included inside an AC composite motor are:
Induction and Synchronous motors Uninterruptable Power Supply

Static loads Variable Frequency Drive
MOVs Lumped loads
Circuit breakers (LV & HV), contactors, Capacitors & filters
fuses, ST switches, Reclosers, Overload Instrument transformers (current &
Heaters potential)
AC composite motors Relays (overcurrent, frequency, voltage,
Voltmeters, Ammeters, and Multi-Meters power, In-Line Overload, solid state trip
and motor)
The number of levels that you can nest composite motors inside composite motors is unlimited. Other
than the limitation on the types of elements that you can include inside a composite motor, the user
interface characteristics of composite motors are the same as the one-line diagram.
To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the
composite motor and double-click on the background where there are no elements
To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.

AC Elements AC Composite Motors

AC Elements DC Composite Motors
11.24 DC Composite Motors

DC Composite motors are used as a tool to group DC motors and loads. The elements that you can
include inside a DC composite motor are:
DC Motors
DC Loads (Static, Lumped, & Elementary Diagram)
Circuit Breakers, Fuses, & ST Switches
DC Composite Motors
To change the ID (name) of a composite motor, <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite motor, or open the
composite motor and double-click on the background where there are no elements.
To open a composite motor, double-click on that composite motor.

11.25 Composite Networks

You can consider a composite network an aggregation of all components in a subsystem since it can
contain buses, branches, loads, sources, and even other composite networks or composite motors. You
can nest your subsystems to an unlimited number of layers. This allows you to construct systems and nest
them by their order of importance, by physical layout, by the geometrical requirements of elements, by
study requirements, by relays and control device requirements, by logical layout of elements, etc. You
have full control as to how the system should be nested.
You may place composite networks anywhere on a one-line diagram or within other composite networks.
These nested composite networks are part of the overall one-line diagram of the system. All studies that
are run include all the elements and connections nested within all composite networks and composite
motors.
11.25.1 Old Composite Networks (ETAP 2.0.8)

Composite networks in ETAP 2.0.8 and earlier versions have four entry points (pins). These are top pin,
left pin, right pin, and bottom pin. Externally, these pins can only be connected to buses (directly or
through protective devices). They represent the connecting points of the composite network to the
outside. Internally, these pins cannot be directly connected to buses, i.e., they can be connected to
branches, motors, fuses, etc.
The bus-like element seen in the old composite network is the starting point for the composite network
(internal pin). This element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the
outside system. This connecting point is not considered as a bus for the studies.
When you open an old composite network for the first time, all of the four pins are shown in their relative
positions. You can move these internal pins anywhere inside the composite network. If there is an
external connection to a pin, the ID of the connected bus is displayed. If there is no external bus
connection, the pins indicate No Ext Bus. If there is an external bus connection, the bus ID is displayed.
Old Composite Network Network1 with top pin connected to bus Sub3

11.25.2 New Composite Networks

These composite networks are available in ETAP 3.0 or later versions. The new composite networks can
have up to 20 pins. The default number of pins is 4 and can be change from the right mouse click as
shown below.
Changing Number of Pins from 4 to 20
You can hide the unconnected pins inside a composite motor by using the right mouse click as shown
below.
Hiding Unconnected Pins

The pins for the new composite motors can be connected to any bus, branch, load, or protective device.
Once a pin is connected internally or externally to an element, it becomes a proxy for that element and all
connection rules for the element apply to the connected pin.
Composite Network Connections
ETAP does not automatically convert the old composite networks to the new type. This can be done by
first cutting all elements from the old composite network, and then use the Move From Dumpster
command to place them in a new composite network.
The number of levels that you can nest composite networks inside composite networks is unlimited.
There is no limitation on the elements that you can include inside a composite network, i.e., the user
interface characteristics of composite networks are the same as the one-line diagram where you can
include both AC and DC elements.
Note: When you are working with a particular one-line diagram presentation, display attributes of
composite networks and composite motors are saved along with the one-line diagram presentations, i.e.,
composite networks are treated the same as the one-line diagram.
To change the ID (name) of a composite network, you can:
1) <Ctrl>+double-click on the composite network symbol from the one-line diagram.

2) Open the composite network and double-click on the background where no device exists.
3) Double-click on the composite network from the Project View (under Components, Networks
Composite).

You can change the ID to any unique 25-character name.
The following steps are used to move a subsystem (group of elements and connections) from the one-line
diagram to a composite network:
1) Select the desired elements, including their connections, by rubber banding, and <Ctrl>+click.
2) Click Delete to cut the elements into a Dumpster Cell.
3) Activate the composite network by double-clicking on it.
4) Right-click inside the composite network and select Move From.
Adding A Composite Network

This describes how to add a composite network to the one-line diagram. The ID will automatically
default to Network1. To change the ID, press <Ctrl>+double-click. To construct a one-line diagram
inside this composite network, double-click on the composite network to bring up a composite network
View, which is just like another one-line diagram. Therefore, the steps required for constructing a
composite network are the same as those for constructing the main one-line diagram.
When you open the composite network and it is not connected to any bus in the system, you get a view
that indicates there is no external bus connection. When you open the composite network and it is
connected to a bus, you get a view that indicates the connecting bus for the composite network.
The bus-like element seen in the composite network is the starting point for the composite network. This
element graphically represents the connecting point of the composite network to the outside system. This
connecting point is not considered as a bus for studies.
In order to move elements from one view to another (for example, from OLV1 to Network1), first select
the desired elements, including their connections, from OLV1. Select Delete to cut the elements into the
Dumpster, activate the view you want the elements to be moved into Network1, then click on Move
From.

AC Elements Fuse
11.26 Fuse
The properties associated with fuses of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
Fuse protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.
The Fuse Editor contains the following eight pages of properties with header information.
Info
Rating
TCC kA
Model Info
Reliability
Checker
Remarks
Comment
11.26.1 Header Information

The header displays the information in the figure below for the selected fuse model on each page of the
AC Fuse Editor.
Manufacturer Size ID
Max. kV Lock Icon
Model Speed Short-Circuit Data
Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the fuse selected from the library.
Max. kV
This displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected fuse in kV.
Size ID
This displays the selected size ID for the fuse.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified).
Model
This is the model name of the fuse selected from the library.

AC Elements Fuse
Speed
This displays the speed classification of the selected fuse.
Short-Circuit data
This displays the short-circuit interrupting kA for the selected fuse size.
11.26.1.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each fuse. The assigned IDs consist of the default fuse ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of fuses increase. The default
fuse ID (Fuse) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

AC Elements Fuse
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a fuse
From or To is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of a fuse is
connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the terminal
connection. To connect or reconnect a fuse to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram
will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect a fuse
to buses that reside in the same view where the fuse resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides
in the Dumpster or in another composite network.
If a fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the fuse to a new
bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Fuse1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a fuse can be selected by clicking the buttons for either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service fuse can be edited like an In Service fuse; however,
an Out of Service fuse will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service fuse automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and
branches energized solely through an Out of Service fuse will also be de-energized and become dimmed.
status. Therefore, you can set a fuse to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent manipulation
of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.
Note: Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration
status is shown above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status under the specific

AC Elements Fuse
configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a fuse is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open under
Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Real-Time Status
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of the ETAP Real-Time module only.
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either closed or open status. This option is provided to
overwrite the actual status received from the real-time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real-Time will request
confirmation.

AC Elements Fuse
11.26.1.2 Rating Page
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC button option to select that standard. Once the fuse is selected from the
Library Quick Pick - Fuse, the standard is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Rating, ANSI Standard

Click on ANSI Standard to enter the ratings for Fuse in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards.
When a Fuse is selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the value(s) after
selecting a fuse from Library Quick Pick will turn the header to blue color indicating that the substituted
library data has been modified.

AC Elements Fuse
kV
Select from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the Fuse in kV. When a Fuse is selected,
the Rated kV value will be set equal to the Max. kV selected from Library Quick Pick.
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from Library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the Fuse in amperes. The
Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from Library Quick Pick.
Interrupting
Select from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for selected
fuse size from Library Quick Pick.
Test PF
Enter the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the fuse has been established. When a fuse
is selected, the Test PF is set to the Test PF value selected from Library Quick Pick.
Rating, IEC Standard

Click on IEC Standard to enter the ratings for Fuse in accordance with the IEC Standards. When a Fuse is
selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values
chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a fuse from
Library Quick Pick will turn the header to blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been
modified.
kV
Select a rating from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the Fuse in kV. When a Fuse is
selected, the Rated kV value will be set equal to the Max. kV selected from Library Quick Pick.
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected fuse. Note that the Size
field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from Library Quick Pick.

AC Elements Fuse
Continuous Amp
Select from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the Fuse in amperes. The
Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from Library Quick Pick.
Breaking
Select from the drop-down list or enter the AC breaking for the Fuse in kA. Note: When a Fuse is
selected, the breaking value will be set equal to the kA value for selected fuse size from library Quick
Pick.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the fuse in kV.
Library Quick Pick - Fuse

To select a fuse from the library, click the Library button and the Library Quick Pick Fuse dialog box
will appear. From the dialog box, select a fuse by selecting the Manufacturer name and the desired fuse
Model, Max kV, and Speed. This represents a unique record. Select the desired size and short-circuit
interrupting kA. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to
the editor.
Note: When you select library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name, along with other details, are
displayed in the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library
header will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the Fuse Library Quick Pick is described below.

AC Elements Fuse
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard. The Standard selection in the Library Quick
Pick - Fuse (and hence the fuse models displayed) will default to the selectEd Standard on the Rating
page. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box if desired.
AC/DC
Displays that the Fuse is AC. This option is grayed out and unavailable.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Names
Displays a list of all AC fuse manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard. Choose a
manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.
Lock Icon
When a library is locked, the lock icon is selected.

AC Elements Fuse
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, Siemens is
the reference manufacturer for ITE.
Link
Displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
The Model column displays list of all fuse models for the selected standard and fuse manufacturer. The
models are displayed in the form of Model Max kV Speed, which forms a unique record name in the
fuse library. Select a Model Max kV Speed row by clicking it.
Lock
When a library is locked, the lock icon is selected.
Size and Short-Circuit Data
Size
Displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model Max. kV Speed record for the fuse. To
select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight its row.
Note: The sizes listed for the selected fuse model are not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere
value as provided by the manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.
Int. kA (ANSI Standard)

This displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA corresponding to each size for the selected ANSI
fuse model.
Breaking kA (IEC Standard)

This displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected IEC fuse model.

AC Elements Fuse
Lock
The Lock column indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-
specified). If the lock icon is displayed in the Lock column, the entry is locked.
Model Info
Class
This displays the class (E-rated, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This displays the type (Power Fuse, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected fuse model.
11.26.1.3 TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page

AC Elements Fuse
TCC kA
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system-calculated 3-phase and line-ground short-circuit
current values at the connected bus to the element. The values will be updated when you run Short-
Circuit Clipping kA from Star Mode.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-Defined option allows the user to enter the short-circuit 3-phase and line-ground kA
values. By default, the user-defined kA values are set to calculated kA where available.
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.

AC Elements Fuse
Calculated
User-Defined
TCC Clipping Current

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the device curve in Star View are specified in the TCC
Clipping Current section.
Sym. rms and Asym. rms

These options are displayed only when the Calculated option is selected. The default is set to Asym. RMS
option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the ANSI cycle symmetrical or IEC Maximum /
User-defined symmetrical current as specified in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS
option will display the corresponding asymmetrical current values.
3-Phase Fault (Show on TCC)

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow and clip the curve in Star View.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical short-circuit
current. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.
Line-Ground Fault (Show on TCC)

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in Star View.
kA (Line-Ground Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground symmetrical or asymmetrical short-circuit
current. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
TCC Minimum Current (Sym)

The minimum short-circuit currents are specified in the TCC Minimum Current (Sym) section.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase minimum fault arrow in Star View.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase ANSI 30 cycle short-circuit current in kA or IEC
minimum initial symmetrical or IEC minimum steady state current based on the selection for minimum
short-circuit current in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-Defined option, the minimum 3-
Phase Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the minimum line-ground fault arrow in Star View.

AC Elements Fuse
For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground ANSI 30 cycle short-circuit in kA or, IEC
short-circuit current in Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault
kA field is editable.

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated, short-circuit kA values for the selected
element. Note that calculated Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.
11.26.1.4 Model Info Page
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected fuse model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available for selected fuse model.

AC Elements Fuse
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected fuse model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected fuse model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected fuse model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected fuse model.
Class
This displays the class (E-rated, for example) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This displays the type (Power Fuse, for example) for the selected fuse model.

AC Elements Fuse
11.26.1.5 Reliability Page
A
around the failed component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and
branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the protection breakers are
reclosed, and service is restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
P
failed component will restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and

AC Elements Fuse
8760/MTTR).
FOR
MTTR/(MTTR+8760/(A+P)).
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Library
Source
This displays the source of the selected fuse reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type of fuse selected.
Class
This displays the class selected for reliability data.

AC Elements Fuse
11.26.1.6 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
This field displays the name of the last person who changed any data.
Date
This field displays the date of change. The format for the date can be changed from the Projects menu in
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
This field displays the name of the person who logs in as a Checker and checks the data.

AC Elements Fuse
Date
This field displays date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed from the
Projects menu in the menu bar.
11.26.1.7 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
UD Field 1 (Num. Field)

This is a number field with the default name Num. Field. You can change the name of this field and enter
the equipment reference number or any other number here, using up to five digits.
UD Field 2 (Install Date)

This is an alphanumeric field with the default name Install Date. You can change the name of this field

AC Elements Fuse


UD Field 5
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field 5. You can change the name of this field
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

AC Elements Fuse
11.26.1.8 Comment Page


AC Elements Contactor
11.27 Contactor
The properties associated with a contactor of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Contactor Editor contains the following four pages of properties.
Info
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.27.1 Info Page
Info
ID

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each contactor. The assigned IDs consist of the default
contactor ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of contactors
increase. The default contactor ID (Cont) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a contactor are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
contactor (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. If a
terminal of a contactor is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a contactor to a bus, select a bus from the
list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you
If a contactor is connected to a bus from this editor through a number of other protective devices,
reconnection of the contactor to a new bus will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where CONT3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a contactor can be selected by clicking on the button for either the In Service
or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service contactor can be edited like an In Service
contactor; however, an Out of Service contactor will not be included in any System Studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service contactor automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line
diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service contactor will also be de-
energized and become grayed out.
Note that the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property, which is independent of the
Configuration Status
You can change the status of a contactor (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
of the status of an element (contactor, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.

Note that the status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown above the status of the contactor to indicate that this is the contactor status
configurations. In the following example, status of a contactor is shown closed under Configuration
Status Normal and open under Configuration Status Emergency.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the contactor in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the contactor in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
Interrupting
Enter the rated short-circuit interrupting of the contactor in kA or select from the list box.
Dropout Time
Enter the dropout or operating time for the contactor in seconds or select a time from the list box.
When plotted in Star View, contactor curves show as a definite time plotted at the dropout time between
continuous amps and interrupting kA. This line is plotted at the entered dropout time. The contactor line
is plotted using the calculated base kV of the connected bus, where available.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
OnLine Status
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real time module only.

Scanned
Displays the scanned status (Scanned or Not Scanned) of the switching device.
Pin
Click this button to pin the switching device to either closed or open status. This option is provided to
allow you to overwrite the actual status received from the real-time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real-Time will request
confirmation.
Note for Star: When a contactor is plotted on a Star View, it is plotted as a straight line between
continuous amps and interrupting kA. This line is plotted at the entered dropout time. The contactor line
is plotted using the base kV of the connected bus, if available.

A
reclosed, and service is restored to some or all of the load points. It should be noted, however, that the
P
8760/MTTR).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate or unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A, and P FOR =
MTTF
MTTF is the mean time to failure in years calculated automatically based on A and P (MTTF =
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
This is the mean time to repair in hours. It is the expected time for a crew to repair a component outage
Replacement
Available
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time

Library
Source
This displays the source of the selected contactor reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type of contactor selected.
Class
User Defined Info



This is a numeric field with the default name Num. Field. You can change the name of this field and
enter the equipment reference number or any other number here, using up to five digits.



UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name

Purchase Date


AC Elements Circuit Breaker, HV
11.28 High Voltage Circuit Breaker

The properties associated with high voltage circuit breakers of the electrical power system can be entered
in this editor. High voltage circuit breakers include all breakers above 1000V.
The High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains the following five pages of properties:
Info
Rating
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.28.1 Info Page
Info
ID

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the default
circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of circuit
breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the
menu bar or from the Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a high voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses.
If a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus
ID. If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e.,
If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where CB3 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a circuit breaker can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service breaker can be edited like an In Service breaker.
However, an Out of Service breaker will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service breaker automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service breaker will also be de-energized and
become dimmed.
Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or
Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent

manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under
the specified configuration.
status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under the
specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a circuit breaker is shown to be closed under Normal configuration and open
under Open Tie configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Real Time
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time (Real-Time).
Scanned
Displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP will request confirmation.
Alert
Select this option for ETAP Real-Time to report an alarm when the breaker opens or closes.

11.28.2 Rating Page
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option button to select that standard.
Application/Association
Generator CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a generator circuit breaker. When verifying circuit breaker
capability in ANSI short-circuit device duty calculation, for a generator circuit breaker, ETAP always
uses the maximum through symmetrical fault current, even if the Short-Circuit Study Case may have a
different option selected. When calculating the asymmetrical and peak short-circuit currents, the X/R used
is based on separate X and R networks for the whole system, which is in all practical cases more
conservative than the X/R obtained for the system with the generator removed.
A symmetrically rated generator circuit breaker has different rating for dc component of asymmetrical
interrupting capability from regular symmetrically rated circuit breaker. For a generator circuit breaker,

the time constant for dc component decay is equal to 133 ms, while for a regular circuit breaker it is 45
ms.
Feeder CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a feeder circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP
Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Power Grid CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a utility/power grid circuit breaker. This information is used by
ETAP Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Load CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a load circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP
Intelligent Load Shedding System.
Islanding CB
Check this box to indicate that this CB is a tie circuit breaker. This information is used by ETAP
Intelligent Load Shedding System for correctly identifying subsystems or islanded systems.
TRV
Clicking on the TRV button will open the Transient Recovery Voltage Editor. The following variables
can be entered in this editor:
T1 Enter the rated delay time of transient recovery voltage in micro-seconds.

T2 Enter the rated time to peak value in micro-seconds.
R Enter the rate of rise of the transient recovery voltage in kV/micro-seconds.
Library Info
To access ANSI Standard library data, click on the ANSI selection, and then click on the Library button.
Use the same procedure for accessing IEC Standard library data. As you change the standard from ANSI
to IEC, the data fields change accordingly.
To select a circuit breaker from the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Library, click on the Library button and
the Library Quick Pick - HV Circuit Breaker will appear. From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit
breaker by highlighting the manufacturer name and model/class ID. Then click on the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor. Note that upon selection of library

data, the manufacturer name and model number is displayed in the fields directly below the Library
button.
Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library manufacturer name and model ID
will change to a dark blue color to indicate that the library data has been modified.

Click on ANSI to enter high voltage circuit breaker ratings according to the ANSI Standards.
Max kV
Enter the rated maximum kV of the high voltage circuit breaker in rms kV or select the rating from the
list box.
Continuous Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the high voltage circuit breaker in amperes or select the rating from
the list box.
Standard
Select the high voltage circuit breaker type as Symmetrical or Total rated from the list box.
Cycle
Select the rated interrupting time for AC high voltage circuit breakers in cycles from the list box.
CB Cycle
Description
2 2-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 1.5-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time
3 3-cycle ac high voltage circuit breakers with 2-cycle Minimum Contact Parting Time

CPT (Contact Parting Time)

You can either select a typical contact parting time from this field, or enter a value for your existing
circuit breaker. The typical values are based on the available curves for multiplication factors from
Annex A, IEEE Std C37.010-1999, which are dependent on the Cycle of a circuit breaker. The value you
can enter in the CPT field is also limited by the available curves from the standard. For example, for a 5-
cycle circuit breaker, since Figure A.10 in IEEE Std C37.010-1999 only provides curves for 3, 4, 5, and 6
cycles of contact parting time, the range for contact parting time is between 3 and 6 cycles.
Rated Interrupting
Enter the rated short-circuit current (rated interrupting capability) at the rated maximum kV in rms kA or
select the rating from the list box.
Note: The rated interrupting kA is applied at maximum voltage. Adjust the rated interrupting kA if the
maximum voltage is changed.
Maximum Interrupting
Enter the maximum symmetrical interrupting capability in rms kA or select the rating from the list box.
The interrupting capability of the circuit breaker is calculated by ETAP as:
(Rated Short-Circuit Current) X (Rated Maximum kV)/(Bus Nominal kV)
The limit for this calculated interrupting capability is the rated maximum interrupting capability of the
circuit breaker. This value is then used to compare with the calculated short-circuit duty of the breaker.
Note: The value of the prefault voltage is not used in determining the interrupting capability, i.e., if Vf =
105 percent, the short-circuit duty is increased by 5 percent; however the interrupting capability is not
decreased by 5 percent.
C & L RMS
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in asymmetrical rms kA. This
value is equal to 1.6 times the maximum interrupting capability.
C & L Peak
Enter the closing and latching capability of the high voltage circuit breaker in peak kA. This value is
equal to 2.7 times the maximum interrupting capability.
Time Constant
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. It displays the time
constant for the dc component of asymmetrical capability of a circuit breaker. The value displayed equals
45 ms for a regular high voltage circuit breaker, based on IEEE Std C37.010-1999, and 133 ms for a
generator circuit breaker based on IEEE Std C37.013-1997.
S Factor
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The displayed S
factor reflects the symmetrically rated, high voltage, circuit breakers ability to interrupt fault current with
dc component. It is defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over symmetrical
interrupting rms rating of a circuit breaker.

% dc
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The %dc
interrupting capability of a circuit breaker is calculated based on the contact parting time and the time
constant of dc component.

Click on the IEC button to enter the ratings of the high-voltage circuit breaker according to the IEC
Standards.
Rated Amps
Enter the rated normal current of the circuit breaker in amperes, or select the rating from the list box.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the circuit breaker in kV, or select the rating from the list box.
FPC Factor
Select the first-pole-to-clear factor of the circuit breaker from the list box.
Min Delay
from the list box.
Making Peak
Enter the rated making capacity of the circuit breaker in peak kA or select the rating from the list box.
The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluating the maximum possible peak
value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the circuit breaker in kV. If this voltage limit is exceeded, the arc
may re-ignite due to the voltage exceeding the dielectric capability of the contact gap developed across
the open contacts of the breaker and the heat from the previous arc. Note that this limit is not currently
used in ETAP.
AC Breaking
Enter the AC component of the rated short-circuit breaking current in kA or select the rating from the list
box.
Ithr
Enter the short-time rated withstand current in kA.
Tkr
Enter the short-time rated withstand time in seconds.

A
reclosed, and service is restored to some or all of the load points.
It should be noted, however, that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly
connected to this failed component) could be restored to service only after repair or replacement.
P

MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
FOR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Circuit Breaker, LV
11.29 Low Voltage Circuit Breaker

The properties associated with low voltage circuit breakers of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. Low voltage circuit breakers include power, molded, and insulated case breakers up
to 1000V.
The Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor contains the following nine pages of properties with header
information for each page:
Info
Rating
Trip Device
TCC kA
Model Info
Reliability
Checker
Remarks
Comment
11.29.1 Header
The header displays the selected breaker model and trip device information on each page of the Low
Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor.
Breaker Breaker Max. Breaker

Manufacturer kV Interrupting Data Lock Icon
Breaker Model
and Pole Available
breaker sizes
Trip device
Manufacturer
Trip device
Trip device ID
Model
Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the breaker selected from the library.
Max. kV
This displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected breaker in kV.
Interrupting data
This displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the breaker.

Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified)
depending on whether the icon is selected
Pole
This displays the breaker pole selected from the library.
Size
Select from drop-down list and display the sizes in amperes that are available for the selected breaker.
Trip Device Manufacturer

This displays the manufacturer name of the selected trip device.
Trip Device Model

This displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Trip Device ID
This displays the trip ID selected from the library.

11.29.1.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the default
circuit breaker ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of circuit
breakers increase. The default circuit breaker ID (CB) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the

From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a low voltage circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If
a terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID.
If a terminal of a breaker is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a breaker to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the circuit breaker resides, i.e.,
If a breaker is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the breaker to a
new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where CB2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a circuit breaker can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In
Service or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service breaker can be edited like an In
Service breaker. However, an Out of Service breaker will not be included in any System Studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service breaker automatically becomes grayed out in the one-
line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be
de-energized and become grayed out.
Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on either the
Close or Open option. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
status is shown above the status of the circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under the

specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the
following example, status of a circuit breaker is shown closed under Normal configuration and open
under Emergency configuration.
Real Time Status

Scanned
This displays the scanned status (Scanned or Not Scanned) of the switching device.
Pin
Click this button to pin the switching device to either the closed or open status. This option is provided to
Control
Click this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real Time will request
confirmation.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

Standard
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the
library entry and is display only.

Type
Select a type from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. Low voltage circuit breakers
include Molded Case, Power, and Insulated Case breakers. Once the breaker is selected from the breaker
Library Quick Pick, the LVCB type is set based on the library entry and is display only.
CB and Trip Device library

The low voltage circuit breaker data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the
Library button.
Exclude Trip Device

Select this option to exclude the trip device selection from LVCB Library Quick Pick. The breaker
Library Quick Pick will be launched without the trip device information. The Exclude Trip Device option
setting is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to deselect once the Rating page is
refreshed.
LV Circuit Breaker Library Quick Pick

To select a circuit breaker from the low voltage circuit breaker library click the Library button. ETAP
displays the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker dialog box. From the Library Quick Pick, select a
circuit breaker by highlighting the Manufacturer name and breaker Model-Max kV-Pole, which is a
unique record. Select the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the size and
the desired trip device for that size. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library
and transfer it to the editor.
After selection of the library data, the breaker manufacturer and model and trip device details are
displayed in the editor header. If any changes have been made in the retrieved library data, the library
header will be displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the breaker Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.

Standard
Select either the ANSI or IEC option. The Standard selection in the breaker Library Quick Pick (and
hence the breaker models displayed) will default to the selection made for the standard on the Rating
page. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
AC/DC
Displays that the LV breaker is AC. This option is grayed out and is not available for editing.
Type
Select from the drop-down list to display the breaker type. The LV breaker types include Molded Case,
Power, and Insulated Case breakers.
Note: That the Type selection in the breaker Library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed)
will default to the selection made for the breaker type on the Rating page. The breaker type selection can
be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of all AC LV breaker manufacturers included in the library for the selected breaker
standard and type. Choose a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.

Reference
This displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example,
Westinghouse is the reference manufacturer for Cutler Hammer.
Link
This displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Lock Icon
The icon is selected if the entry is locked.
Model

Model Name
The Model group displays a list of all models for the selected standard, breaker type, and breaker
manufacturer. The models are displayed in rows with values for Model, Max kV, and Pole. These values
make up a unique record name in the breaker library. Select a Model, Max kV, and Pole row by clicking
on it.
Lock Icon
specified). Locked entries have selected lock icons.
Short-Circuit Data
ANSI Short-Circuit Data

When ANSI Standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit
interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA, and test power factor in %, for all breaker types. The
short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and
the short-circuit data by clicking the row.
IEC Short-Circuit Data

When the IEC Standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, ultimate
breaking capacity in kA (Icu), service breaking capacity in kA (Ics), making capacity in kA (Icm), short
time withstand in kA (Icw), short time in seconds (Tkr), and tripping time or delay in seconds, for all
breaker types. The short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an
applied voltage and the short-circuit data by highlighting it.

Fused/UnFused
This field displays whether the breaker is fused for unfused.
Size
Size
This displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model, Max. kV, and Pole record for the breaker.
To select a size from the Library Quick Pick, highlight the size.
Lock Icon
Locked entries have selected icons.
Model Info
Additional information about the selected breaker is displayed using the parameters described below.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected breaker model.
Trip Device
The trip device(s) assigned to the selected breaker, can be chosen by selecting the trip device type,
manufacturer name, model name, and ID. The trip device types for LV breaker include Thermal
Magnetic, Solid state, Motor Circuit Protector, and Electro-Mechanical.
Trip Device Type

Select from drop-down list and display the trip device type for the selected breaker.
Note: A circuit breaker may include different trip device types.


Highlight an item to select the trip device manufacturer from the drop-down list, for the selected trip
device type.
Trip Device Model

Highlight an item to select the trip device model from the list, for the selected trip device manufacturer.
ID
Select the desired trip device ID from the list for the selected Model, Max kV, and Pole.
Note: The ID is labeled as TM ID for Thermal Magnetic trip, Sensor ID for Solid State Trip, MCP ID for
Motor Circuit Protector trip, and EM ID for Electro-Mechanical trip.
When the Exclude Trip Device option is selected on the Rating page, the breaker Library Quick Pick is
displayed as shown below.
Note: The trip device assignment group is not displayed.

Ratings, ANSI Standard

Click on ANSI Standard button and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for LV circuit breaker in
accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards. When a breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, all
parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the
exception of Size, changing the values after selecting a breaker from Library Quick Pick will turn the
header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the low voltage circuit
breaker in amperes. The Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is
selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Rated kV
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the low voltage circuit breaker in
kV. When a breaker is selected, the rated kV value will be set equal to the applied kV selected from
Library Quick Pick.
Test PF
This is the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the circuit breaker has been established.
When a breaker is selected, the Test PF is set to the Test PF value selected from Library Quick Pick.
If a breaker is not selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick, the Test PF value changes depending on
the breaker type. The values for Test PF used for different breaker types are described below.
For Molded Case and Insulated Case breakers, per UL 489:

If Interrupting kA <= 10, Test PF = 50%
If Interrupting 11<= kA <= 20, Test PF = 30%
If Interrupting kA > 20kA, Test PF = 20%
For Power Breakers, per ANSI C37:

If breaker is fused, Test PF = 20%
If breaker is unfused, Test PF = 15%
Fused
For all breaker types, select either fused or unfused by selecting or clearing the checkbox. When a
breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the status as selected from the
Quick Pick. The value of Test PF will change appropriately for fused or unfused type, in case of power
breakers.

Interrupting kA
Select from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the low voltage circuit breaker in
kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for
selected applied kV from Library Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short time (Tkr) in seconds. Note that
when a breaker is selected, the Tkr value will be set equal to the Tkr value for the selected applied kV
from the Library Quick Pick. Default is one second.
ST Withstand
The rated short-time withstand current of a device is the kA value of the short-time withstand provided by
the manufacturer that the device (breaker) can carry without damage, under specified test conditions.
Enter the value of the short-time withstand for the low voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when the
associated trip device has a solid state unit with an override multiplier selected as CB Withstand, the
rating ST Withstand kA in this field applies as base for override pickup current.

Click on IEC Standard and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for LV circuit breaker in
accordance with the IEC Standards. When a breaker is selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters
shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of
Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a breaker from Library Quick Pick will turn the header blue
color to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is chosen from the breaker Library Quick Pick.
Rated Amps
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated ampere rating of the low voltage circuit breaker
in amperes. The Rated Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is selected from
Library Quick Pick.

Rated kV
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in
kV. When a breaker is selected, the Rated kV value will be set equal to the applied kV selected from
Library Quick Pick.
Min. Delay
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the minimum time delay, including circuit breaker and
relay operating time, where available, in seconds. When a breaker is selected, the Min. Delay value will
be set equal to the Tripping time of the circuit breaker selected from Library Quick Pick.
Making
The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum possible
peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Select from the drop-down list or enter the peak value of the making capacity of the low voltage circuit
breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the making kA value will be set equal to the Icm (making capacity) kA
value for selected applied kV from Library Quick Pick.
Ultimate Breaking
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of short-circuit breaking
capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under specified test conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the ultimate breaking capacity for the low
voltage circuit breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the ultimate breaking kA value will be set equal to the Icu (breaking
capacity) kA value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Service Breaking
The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of service short-circuit
breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under specified test
conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the service breaking capacity for the low
voltage circuit breaker in kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the service breaking kA value will be
set equal to the Ics (service capacity) kA value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short time (Tkr) in seconds. Note that
when a breaker is selected, the Tkr value will be set equal to the Tkr value for selected applied kV from
the Library Quick Pick.

ST Withstand
The rated short-time withstand current of equipment is the kA value of the short-time withstand provided
by the manufacturer that the equipment (breaker) can carry without damage, under specified test
conditions.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the value of the short-time withstand for the low voltage
circuit breaker in kA. Note that when a breaker is selected, the short-time withstand kA value will be set
equal to the Icw (ST withstand) value for selected applied kV from the Library Quick Pick.
Fused
Select fused or unfused for all breaker types by selecting or clearing the Fused checkbox.
Note: The checkbox is displayed only when no breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick.
11.29.1.3 Trip Device Page

The trip devices for low voltage circuit breaker include Thermal Magnetic, Solid-State, Motor Circuit
Protector, and Electro-Mechanical types. The trip device version of the Library Quick Pick allows
selection and setting of these trip units.
Library Quick Pick - Trip Device

The Library Quick Pick - Trip Device dialog box is described in this section.

Type
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types.
LVCB Info Box

This displays the circuit breaker information for the selected trip device when circuit breaker is already
selected in the LVCB Editor. For example, the Library Quick Pick shown above displays Solid-State Trip
units assigned to a Cutler-Hammer DS-416 power breaker. If a breaker is not selected, the breaker
information is not displayed.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of manufacturer names for the selected trip device. Choose a manufacturer by
selecting the manufacturer name.
Lock Icon
A library entry is locked if the lock icon is selected.

Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. In the figure above,
for example, Cutler Hammer is the reference manufacturer for Westinghouse.
Link
This displays the manufacturers web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
This displays a list of model names for the selected manufacturer. Choose a model by selecting the model
name.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for a selected model.
Trip ID
This displays a list of trip IDs (label depending on the trip device type) for the selected model. Select the
trip ID by highlighting the ID. For example, the Quick Pick Library shown above displays Sensor ID
1600 for model RMS 510 Series DS.
LVCB & Trip Device Selection

ETAP provides several options to retrieve circuit breaker and/or trip device from the library. The
selection of the circuit breaker on the Rating page affects the trip device selection and the data displayed
on the Trip device Library Quick Pick. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 Circuit Breaker and Trip Device

When a circuit breaker is selected along with its associated trip unit from the Library Quick Pick on the
Rating page of the Circuit Breaker Editor, the Trip Device page displays the selected trip unit
(Manufacturer, Model, and ID).

Since the circuit breaker and its trip units are selected as a combination, the Trip Device Library Quick
Pick list will be limited to trip devices assigned to the selected circuit breaker size. Thus, clicking on the
Library button to access the Trip Device Library Quick Pick will display only the pre-assigned trip units.

Case 2 Circuit Breaker Only (Exclude Trip Device)

When a circuit breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page with Exclude
Trip Device box checked, the Trip Device page will not include the trip device information. No Trip
device selected message would appear in the Trip Device page status line.
To retrieve the pre-assigned trip device units for the selected circuit breaker, click on the Library button to
launch the Library Quick Pick - Trip Device. Since the circuit breaker is previously selected, the Library
Quick Pick - Trip Device is limited to the trip units assigned to the breaker.

Case 3 Trip Device Only

When a circuit breaker is not selected from the circuit breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, the
Trip Device page is blank and status line will display: No trip device is selected.
The Library Quick Pick - Trip Device can be accessed by clicking on the Library button. Since no circuit
breaker is selected, all trip device unit types, manufacturers, and models will be available for selection.


This Section describes the settings available for Thermal Magnetic trip unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the trip device types. In this case, Thermal Magnetic
trip type is selected.
TM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the manufacturer name for Thermal Magnetic trip
type.

TM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
TM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display TM ID for the selected Thermal Magnetic trip model.
Next to TM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected TM ID.
Thermal
The Thermal element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed or adjustable trip. The settings
available are described below.
Fixed
Fixed thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve shape that cannot
be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the Thermal group displays FIXED in the thermal Trip field.
Adjustable
Adjustable thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve shape that
can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the Thermal group displays a drop-down list of the
available adjustable thermal trip in percent of trip device ampere rating. Also, next to the adjustable Trip
drop-down list, the actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable, or
continuous adjustable. The settings available are described below.
Fixed
Fixed magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by fixed minimum and
maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed, the Magnetic group displays
FIXED in the magnetic Trip field.

Discrete Adjustable
Discrete adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by discrete
values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a drop-down list of the
available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable Trip drop-down list.
Continuous adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by
continuously adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is continuously
adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a Trip field to enter the magnetic setting in multiples trip device
ampere rating or in actual amperes. Next to the Trip field, the actual value of the trip in amperes is
displayed. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.
Note: The Trip field is bounded by the Trip Range.
Low Voltage Solid State trip (LVSST) unit

This Section describes the settings available for low voltage Solid State Trip unit (LVSST) on the Trip
Device page.

Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Click on the drop-down list to display the trip device types. In this case, the Solid State Trip type is
selected.
SST Manufacturer
Click on the drop-down list to display the manufacturer names for the Solid State Trip type.

SST Model
Click on the drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
Sensor ID
Click on the drop-down list to display the Sensor ID for the selected Solid State Trip model. The actual
value of trip in amperes is displayed next to the Sensor ID field for the selected Sensor ID. If the
selected solid state unit is labeled as Frame, then the tag for this field would be Frame ID instead.
Rating Plug
The Rating Plug field is displayed only if the selected Sensor ID has rating plugs defined in the library.
Rating plugs can be defined in amperes, multiples, or percent. Click the drop-down list to display the
Rating Plug for the selected Sensor ID. The rating plug unit (amperes/multiples/percent) and the actual
value of trip in amperes are displayed next to the Rating Plug field for the selected Rating plug. An
example of rating plugs in multiples and the actual trip displayed is shown below.
Phase Settings
The Phase settings for Solid State trip unit include three elements: Long-Time, Short-Time, and
Instantaneous (or Override). Each element is defined by its pickup and band settings. The settings
Long -Time
Click on the Long-Time button to enable the Long-Time element for the selected Sensor ID. If the Long-
Time element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then long-time settings are not
displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the long-time pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual long-time
pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-
Time Pickup field.

Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the long-time band setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable long-
time band, the range of the band, the multiple at which the band is defined, the calibration reference for
band setting (Average, Minimum or Maximum) and band step are displayed next to the Long-Time Band
field.
If the selected LVSST has a long time band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows
as a subset of the long time band curve. The time dial setting can be either discrete or continuous
adjustable, and this would shift the long time band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the
time dial field is continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial
field.
Short -Time
Click on the Short-Time box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected Sensor ID. If the Short-
Time element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then short-time settings are not
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the short-time pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Next to the Short-Time
Pickup field, the actual short-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable
pickup) are displayed.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the short-time band setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable
short-time band, the band step is displayed next to the Short-Time Band field.
If the selected LVSST has a short time band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows
as a subset of the short time band curve. The time dial setting can be either discrete or continuous
adjustable, and this would shift the long time band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the

time dial field is continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial
field.
IxT
Select the short-time IxT band setting from the IxT drop-down list. The short-time IxT band has IN and
OUT settings., the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the short-time band curve inward
(sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the short-time band curve outward (L-shaped).
Instantaneous
Select to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected Sensor ID. If the Instantaneous element is not
selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the
editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the instantaneous pickup setting for the selected
Sensor ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual
Instantaneous pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next
to the Instantaneous pickup field.
Instantaneous Override
For LVSST models with Instantaneous Override function, the instantaneous pickup ampere value is
displayed based on the circuit breaker rating. This function of the LVSST is activated when the
Instantaneous pickup is disabled or not available.
Ground Tab
The Ground element settings for Solid State trip unit includes the Ground Pickup, Band, and IxT settings.
These settings are described below.

Ground
Click the Ground box to enable the ground element setting for the selected Sensor ID. If the Ground
element is not selected in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Ground tab is not displayed in the
editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the ground pickup setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Next to the Short-Time pickup
field, the actual short-time pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are
displayed.
Band
Select an item from the Band drop-down list or enter the ground band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Ground
band, the band step is displayed next to the Ground band field, for your convenience.
If the selected LVSST has a ground band as a curve shape with equation base, the time dial field shows as
a subset of the ground band curve. The time dial setting can be either discrete or continuous adjustable,
and this would shift the ground band curve vertically in Star TCC view. If the setting of the time dial
field is continuously adjustable, then the increment steps are displayed next to the time dial field.

IxT
Select the ground IxT band setting from the IxT drop-down list. The Ground IxT band has IN and OUT
settings, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the ground band curve inward (sloped line)
and the OUT setting shifts the ground band curve outward (L-shaped).
Maintenance Tab
The primary application for the Maintenance Mode is, applying the low setting temporarily in order to
reduce the short-circuit level specially the arc flash incident energy level during the initially energizing
the system and maintenance as well. So device coordination study is not the main concern for applying
Arc Flash Study would evaluate the Maintenance Mode curves independent from the Standard LVSST
curve. In this case, the report will show the FCT and the incident energy with the Maintenance mode
curve and with the Standard curve for the same LVCB. Similarly, the Maintenance Mode curves re
handled as separate curves from the Standard curves in Star Sequence-of-Operation analysis.
Phase
Click the Phase checkbox to enable the phase element setting for the Maintenance Mode.
Ground
If the Ground setting is provided for the Maintenance Mode then the Ground section will be displayed.
Click the Ground checkbox to enable the ground element setting for the Maintenance Mode.
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The
pickup settings are discrete values. Next to the pickup field, the actual pickup in amperes is displayed.
Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) unit

This Section describes the settings available for Motor Circuit Protector trip device type on the Trip
Device page.

Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types. In this case, the Motor Circuit
Protector type is selected.
MCP Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Motor Circuit Protector.
MCP Model
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.

MCP ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the MCP ID for the selected Motor Circuit Protector
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed next to the MCP ID field for the selected MCP ID.
Magnetic (Instantaneous)
The Motor Circuit Protector unit can be set as discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The settings
Discrete Adjustable
Discrete adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by discrete values. When the
magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a drop-down list of the available discrete
magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes.
Continuous adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by continuously adjustable
values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is continuously adjustable, the Magnetic
group displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in multiples of trip device ampere rating
or in actual amperes. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.
Electro-Mechanical Trip unit

This Section describes the settings available for Electro-Mechanical trip device type on the Trip Device
page.

Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Select an item from the drop-down list and display the trip device types. In this case, the Electro-
Mechanical trip type is selected.
EM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Electro-Mechanical trip
device type.
EM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.

EM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display the EM ID for the selected Electro-Mechanical trip
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed next to the EM ID field for the selected EM ID.
Long-Time
Long -Time
Click the Long-Time checkbox to enable the Long-Time element for the selected EM ID. If the Long-
Time element is not selected in the library for the selected EM ID, then long-time settings are not
Pickup
Select an item from the Pickup drop-down list or enter the long-time pickup setting, for the selected EM
ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. Next to the Long-Time Pickup
field, the actual long-time pickup in amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are
displayed.
Band
Select the Long-Time band curve label from the Band drop-down list, for the selected EM ID. Each label
for the long-time band is associated with a fixed point based curve that defines the shape of the long-time
band curve.
Short-Time
Short -Time
Click the Short-Time checkbox to enable the Short-Time element for the selected EM ID. If the Short-
Time element is not selected in the library for the selected EM ID, then short-time settings are not
Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the short-time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID. The
pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual short-time pickup in amperes
and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time Pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the short-time band setting for the selected EM ID. The
band settings can be discrete or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable short-time band, the
band step is displayed next to the Short-Time Band field.

When the short-time band is discrete, it can be defined as a horizontal band (minimum/maximum clearing
times) or as a point based curve. The example below shows discrete short-time band defined as a
horizontal band.
Note: The field is labeled Horizontal Band.
Another example with discrete short-time band defined as a curve is shown below. Note that the field is
called Band.
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Check the Instantaneous box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is not selected in the library for the selected EM ID, then instantaneous
settings are not displayed in the editor.
Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the instantaneous pickup setting for the selected EM ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual instantaneous pickup in
amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous
Pickup field.

TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined

Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined


User-defined symmetrical current as selected from the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS

kA (3-Phase Fault)



kA (3-Phase Fault)



11.29.1.5 Model Info page

Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is accessed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected breaker model.

Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected breaker model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected breaker model.
11.29.1.6 Reliability page

A
A is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is
reclosed. This leads to service being restored to some or all of the load points. However, the failed
component itself (and those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can be
P
P is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is
8760/MTTR).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate (unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
MTTR is the mean time to repair in hours. This is the expected time for a crew to repair a component
outage and restore the system to its normal operating state.
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Reliability Data dialog box.

Source
This displays the source of the selected breaker reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type (for example, Fixed or Metal Clad) of breaker selected.
Class
Replacement
Available
Select this option to enable rP.
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time

Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.

Checked by
User Name
Date
This field displays the date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed from the

User-Defined Info




UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.

Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Recloser
11.30 Recloser
The properties associated with reclosers of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
The Recloser Editor contains the following nine pages of properties with header information for each
page:
Info
Rating
Controller
Reliability
TCC kA
Model Info
Checker
Remarks
Comment
11.30.1 Header
The header displays the selected recloser model and controller device information on each page of the
Recloser Editor.
Recloser
Recloser Recloser SC
Device Type Lock Icon
Manufacturer Interrupting Data
Recloser Model
Phase Type
Controller
Manufacturer
Controller
Model
Recloser Manufacturer
This is the manufacturer name of the recloser selected from the library.
Recloser Model
This is the model name of the recloser selected from the library.
Recloser Device Type

This displays the recloser type (Electronic, Hydraulic, or HVCB) of the selected model.
Phase Type
This displays the number of phases the selected recloser is designed to protect (Single Phase or Three
Phase).

SC Interrupting data
This displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the recloser.
Lock Icon
The lock icon indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified)
depending on whether the icon is selected
Controller Manufacturer
This displays the manufacturer name of the selected controller.
Controller Model
This displays the model name of the selected trip device.
11.30.1.1 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each recloser. The assigned IDs consist of the default
recloser ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of reclosers
increase. The default recloser ID (REC) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a recloser are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
recloser (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of
a recloser is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a recloser to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-
line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the recloser resides, i.e., you
If a recloser is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the recloser to
a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where REC2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a recloser can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In Service
or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service recloser can be edited like an In Service
recloser. However, an Out of Service recloser will not be included in any System Studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service recloser automatically becomes grayed out in the one-
line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be

Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a recloser (for the selected configuration) by clicking on either the Close or
Open option. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, recloser, motor, or static load) will be saved
under the specified configuration.
status is shown above the status of the recloser to indicate that this is the recloser status under the specific
following example, status of a recloser is shown closed under Normal configuration and open under
Real Time Status

Scanned
This displays the scanned status (Scanned or Not Scanned) of the switching device.
Pin
Click this button to pin the switching device to either the closed or open status. This option is provided to
Control
Click this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. ETAP Real Time will request
confirmation.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

Standard
Note: Once the recloser is selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the

Type
Select a type from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. The recloser library includes
RecloserHydraulic, RecloserElectronic, and HV Circuit Breaker. Once the recloser is selected from the
Recloser Library Quick Pick, the recloser type is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Recloser and Controller Library

The recloser data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library button.
Exclude Controller
Select this option to exclude the controller selection from Recloser Library Quick Pick. The Recloser
Library Quick Pick will be launched without the controller information. The Exclude Controller option
setting is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to deselected, once the Rating page is
refreshed.
Note: This will have no effect if the recloser type is set to RecloserHydraulic.
Recloser Library Quick Pick

To select a recloser from the recloser library click the Library button. ETAP displays the Library Quick
Pick - Recloser dialog box. From the Library Quick Pick, select a recloser by highlighting the
Manufacturer name and recloser Model, which is a unique record. Select the desired applied voltage and
short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the desired controller for that model. Then click the OK button to
retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Note: If the recloser type is RecloserHydraulic after selecting the model, the desired coil size needs to
selected, followed by the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Furthermore, no
controller information needs to be selected.
After selection of the library data, the recloser manufacturer, model, and controller details are displayed in
the editor header. If any changes have been made in the retrieved library data, the library header will be
displayed in blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.

The information available in the recloser Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.
Standard
Select either the ANSI or IEC option. The Standard selection in the breaker Library Quick Pick (and
hence the recloser models displayed) will default to the selection made for the standard on the Rating
page. The Standard selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of all recloser manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard. Choose
a manufacturer by selecting the manufacturer name.

Reference
This displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, Asea
Brown Boveri is the reference for ABB.
Link
Lock Icon
The icon is selected if the entry is locked.
Model
Device Type
Select from the drop-down list the recloser type to display. The recloser device types include Recloser-
Hydraulic, Recloser-Electronic, and HV Circuit Breaker.
Note: That the Device Type selection in the Recloser Library Quick Pick (and hence the recloser models
displayed) will default to the selection made for the device type on the Rating page. The device type
selection can be changed in the Library Quick Pick dialog box, if desired.
Model Name
The Model group displays a list of all models for the selected standard, manufacturer, and device type.
Choose a model by selecting the model name.
Reference
This displays the reference, if available, for selected recloser model.
Type
This displays the number of phases the selected recloser model is designed to protect (Single Phase or
Three Phase).
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected recloser model.
Lock Icon
specified). Locked entries have selected lock icons.
Rating

Coil
This displays the available coils for the selected recloser model.
Note: This only appears if the Device Type is set to Recloser-Hydraulic.
Lock Icon
Locked entries have selected icons.
Note: This only appears next to the Coil ID.
ANSI Short-Circuit Data

When ANSI Standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic or Recloser-Electronic, the short-
circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in
kA, test X/R, Making kA rms (asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). These short-circuit
parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the short-
circuit data by clicking the row.
When ANSI Standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, the short-circuit data shows the
applied voltage in kV, short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA, C&L rms, and C&L
Peak. These short-circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied
voltage and the short-circuit data by clicking the row.
IEC Short-Circuit Data

When the IEC Standard is selected and device type is Recloser-Hydraulic and Recloser-Electronic, the
short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in kV, short-circuit breaking current for the applied voltage in
kA, test X/R, Making kA rms (asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). The short-circuit

parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the short-
circuit data by highlighting it.
When the IEC Standard is selected and device type is HV Circuit Breaker, the short-circuit data shows the
applied voltage in kV, short-circuit breaking current for the applied voltage in kA, Making kA rms
(asymmetrical), and Making kA Peak (asymmetrical). The short-circuit parameters are explained in more
detail in the Ratings Section. Select an applied voltage and the short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Controller
The controller(s) assigned to the selected recloser model, can be chosen by selecting the manufacturer
name, controller type, and model. The controller types include Microprocessor and Static.
Note: This portion of the Recloser Library Quick Pick windows is not visible when the device type is set
to Recloser-Hydraulic.
Controller Manufacturer
Highlight an item to select the controller manufacturer from the list.
Controller Type
Select from drop-down list and display the controller type for the selected recloser.
Note: Selection is limited according to the controller assigned to the recloser model.

Controller Model
Highlight an item to select the controller model from the list, for the selected controller manufacturer.
Operation Intervals
Select a standard and device type to enter the operating intervals for the recloser in accordance to these
selections. When a recloser is selected from Library Quick Pick, the Time Unit and Interrupting Time
fields will be filled in with the values defined in the library. Changing these values after selecting a
recloser from Library Quick Pick will turn the header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has
been modified. The Opening Time, Release Delay, and CPT are user-defined and can be edited without
turning the header blue.
Note: A relationship of Opening Time + Release Delay = CPT is always maintained, therefore, changing
one of these values will cause the others to be updated.
Time Unit
Select the time unit (Cycle or Millisecond) according to which the Interrupting Time, Opening Time,
Release Delay, and CPT are entered. When a recloser is selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick
the time unit is set based on the library entry and is display only.
Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is fixed
Cycle.
Interrupting Time
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting time for the recloser. When a recloser is
selected from the Library Quick Pick the interrupting time is set to the value in the library. The
interrupting time cannot be less than the opening time. When the standard is set to IEC this field is
labeled as Break Time.
Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is
limited to the values in the drop-down list.
Opening Time
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the opening time for the recloser. This is nonessential data
and is not stored in the library. The opening time cannot be greater than the interrupting time. When the
standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as Top.
Release Delay
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the release delay for the recloser. This is nonessential data
and is not stored in the library. When the standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as Tr.
Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the field is labeled
as Tripping Delay.
CPT
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the contact parting time (CPT) for the recloser. This is
nonessential data and is not stored in the library. When the standard is set to IEC this field is labeled as
Min. Delay.

Note: When the standard is ANSI and the recloser Type is set to HV Circuit Breaker the selection is
limited to the values in the drop-down list.
Ratings
Select a standard and device type to enter the ratings for the recloser in accordance with these selections.
When a recloser is selected from Library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. Changing the values after selecting a recloser from
Library Quick Pick will turn the header blue to indicate that the substituted library data has been
modified.
When ANSI or IEC is selected as the standard and device type is set to Recloser-Hydraulic or Recloser-
Electronic, the rating data will display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse withstand
rating, interrupting kA, test X/R, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), short-
time withstand kA, and short-time withstand duration.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the recloser in kV. The rated kV
value will be set equal to the applied kV defined in the library when selected from Library Quick Pick.
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the recloser in
amperes. The Max. Amp value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the recloser in
kV. The BIL Limit value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the
Library Quick Pick.
Interrupting kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting kA rating for the recloser in kA. When
the IEC Standard is selected this field is renamed to Breaking kA. The Interrupting kA value will be set
equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.

Test X/R
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the test X/R rating for the recloser. The Test X/R value
will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA is changed this field will
automatically update to a value according to the following table.
Inter. kA X/R
kA <= 1.25 8
1.25 < kA <= 2 10
2 < kA <= 4 12
4 < kA <= 7 14
7 < kA <= 12 15
12 < kA < 20 16
kA >= 20 17
Making kA rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating for the recloser in
kA. The Making kA rms value will be set equal to the value defined in the library selected from the
Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field
will automatically update to a value according to the following equation.
Making kA Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA peak asymmetrical rating for the recloser
in kA. The Making kA Peak value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or Test X/R is changed this field
will automatically update to a value according to the following equation.

ST Withstand
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the recloser in kA. The
ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when the recloser is selected from
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration for the recloser in
seconds. The Tkr value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
When ANSI is selected as the standard and device type is set to HV Circuit Breaker, the rating data will
display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse withstand rating, interrupting kA, close and
latch rms, close and latch peak, short-time withstand kA, short-time withstand duration, time constant,
percent dc, and S factor.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the breaker in kV. The rated kV
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the breaker in
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the breaker in
Library Quick Pick.
Rating Std.
Select symmetrical (SYM) or total (TOT) from the drop-down list to specify the breaker type. Select
SYM if the breaker is rated on a symmetrical current basis, or TOT if the breaker is rated on a total
current basis. The Rating Std. value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when elected from

Interrupting kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the interrupting kA rating for the recloser in kA. When
the IEC Standard is selected this field is renamed to Breaking kA. The Interrupting kA value will be set
equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
C&L rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the close and latch (C&L) rms asymmetrical rating for the
breaker in kA. The C&L rms value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when a breaker is
selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or C&L Peak is changed this
field will automatically update to a value according to the following equations.
When Int kA is entered the C&L rms will be automatically calculated as

C&L rms = Int kA * 1.6
When C&L Peak is entered the C&L rms will be automatically calculated as
C&L rms = C&L Peak * 1.6/2.7
C&L Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the close and latch (C&L) peak asymmetrical rating for
the breaker in kA. The C&L Peak value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when the
breaker is selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Note: If the value in this field is initially zero, when the Interrupting kA or C&L rms is changed this field
will automatically update to a value according to the following equations.
When Int kA is entered the C&L Peak will be automatically calculated as

C&L Peak = Int kA * 2.7
When C&L rms is entered the C&L Peak will be automatically calculated as
C&L Peak = C&L rms * 2.7/1.6
ST Withstand
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the breaker in kA. The
ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration in seconds. The Tkr
value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
Time Constant
This field is available only for a breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. It displays the time
constant for the dc component of asymmetrical capability of a circuit breaker. The value displayed equals
45 ms for a regular high voltage circuit breaker, based on IEEE Std C37.010-1999, and 133 ms for a
generator circuit breaker based on IEEE Std C37.013-1997.

S Factor
This field is available only for a circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The displayed S
factor reflects the symmetrically rated, breakers ability to interrupt fault current with dc component. It is
defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over symmetrical interrupting rms rating of a
breaker.
% dc
This field is available only for a breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. The %dc interrupting
capability of a breaker is calculated based on the contact parting time and the time constant of dc
component.
When IEC is selected as the standard and device type is set to HV Circuit Breaker, the rating data will
display the rated kV, maximum continuous amps, impulse withstand rating, transient recovery voltage,
breaking kA, making kA rms (asymmetrical), making kA peak (asymmetrical), first-pole-to-clear factor,
short-time withstand kA, and short-time withstand duration.
kV
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated kV rating for the breaker in kV. The rated kV
Max. Amp
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the maximum continuous current rating for the breaker in
BIL Limit
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the rated basic impulse withstand rating for the breaker in
Library Quick Pick.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage for the breaker in kV. The TRV value will be set equal to the value
defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.

Breaking kA
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the breaking kA rating for the recloser in kA. The
Breaking kA value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
Making kA rms
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA rms asymmetrical rating for the breaker in
kA. The Making kA rms value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the
Library Quick Pick.
Making kA Peak
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the making kA peak rating for the breaker in kA. The
Making kA Peak value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
FPC Factor
Select a value from the drop-down list for the first-pole-to-clear (FPC) factor of the breaker. The FPC
Factor value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick
Pick
ST Withstand
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand rating for the breaker in kA. The
ST Withstand value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library
Quick Pick.
Tkr
Select a value from the drop-down list or enter the short-time withstand duration in seconds. The Tkr
value will be set equal to the value defined in the library when selected from the Library Quick Pick.
11.30.1.3 Controller Page

The controllers for recloser include Hydraulic, Static, and Microprocessor types. The layout and settings
available on this page will depend on the type of controller selected.
Controller Info
The recloser data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library button.

Controller Type
When a controller is selected from the Library Quick Pick, the controller type is displayed here. The
possible values are Hydraulic-Three Phase, Hydraulic-Single Phase, Electronic-Microprocessor, and
Electronic-Static.
Info
Information about the controller and curves can be obtained by clicking on the Info button.
Controller Lib
To select a controller from the controller library click the Controller Lib button. ETAP displays the
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller dialog box.
Note: This button is hidden when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the drop-down list to select the manufacturer of the controller.
Note: The manufacturers in this list are limited to those which have controller models assigned to the
recloser selected from the Library Quick Pick. This field is hidden when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Model
Select a model name from the drop-down list to select the model of the controller.
Note: The models in this list are limited to those which are assigned to the recloser selected from the
Library Quick Pick. This field is hidden when a hydraulic recloser is selected.
Control Info
To view further information about the controller selected click on the Info button. ETAP displays the
Control Info dialog box. The manufacturer name, model, controller type, model reference, brand name,
catalog number, issue date, description, and application of the controller are displayed. Furthermore, the
manufacturer TCC ID, revision, and notes can be obtained for different curve types available in the model
selected.

Controller Info
The controller type, reference, brand name, catalog number, issue date, description, and application of the
selected controller model are displayed here.
Type
This displays type of controller selected. Possible values are Electronic-Static, Electronic-Microprocessor,
Hydraulic-Single Phase, and Hydraulic-Three Phase.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected controller model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected controller model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected controller model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected controller model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected controller model.

Application
This displays the application for the selected controller model.
TCC Curve Info

The TCC ID, revision, and notes of the curves entered for this model are displayed here.
Note: Any changes made to the curve selection do not affect the selected curve on the main controller
page.
Curve Type
Select a curve from the drop-down list to display the TCC ID, revision, and notes for.
TCC ID
This displays the time-current characteristic (TCC) curve ID assigned by the manufacturer for the curve
selected.
Revision
This displays the revision date for the curve selected.
Notes
This displays any notes for the curve selected.
Controller Library Quick Pick

To select a controller from the controller library click the Controller Lib button. ETAP displays the
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller dialog box. From the Library Quick Pick, select a controller
by highlighting the Manufacturer name, the controller type (microprocessor or static), and Model, which
is a unique record. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to
the editor.
Note: If a recloser is already selected the manufacturer and model lists will be limited to those assigned to
that recloser.
After selection of the library data, the controller manufacturer and model are displayed in the editor
header.
The information available in the recloser Library Quick Pick dialog box is described below.

Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays a list of manufacturer names available for selection. Choose a manufacturer by selecting
the manufacturer name.
Note: If a recloser is already selected this list will be limited to those manufacturers that have a model
assigned to the selected recloser.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. In the figure above,
for example, Cooper Power Systems is the reference manufacturer for Cooper.
Link
This displays the manufacturers web link or URL address.
Model

Type
Select the controller type, Microprocessor or Static, from the drop-down list to display the models of that
particular type.
Note: If a manufacturer does not have a model for a type, that type will not be available for selection.
Model Name
This displays a list of model names for the selected manufacturer and type. Choose a model by selecting
the model name.
Note: If a recloser is already selected this list will be limited to those models that are assigned to that
recloser.
Lock Icon
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for a selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected model.
Recloser & Controller Selection

ETAP provides several options to retrieve recloser and/or controller from the library. The selection of the
recloser on the Rating page affects the controller selection and the data displayed on the Controller
Library Quick Pick. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 Recloser and Controller

When a recloser is selected along with its associated trip unit from the Library Quick Pick on the Rating
page of the Recloser Editor, the controller page displays the selected controller (Manufacturer, Model,
and Type).

Since the recloser and its controller are selected as a combination, the Controller Library Quick Pick list
will be limited to controllers assigned to the selected recloser. Thus, clicking on the Controller Lib button
to access the Controller Library Quick Pick will display only the pre-assigned trip units. The
manufacturer and model drop-down lists on the controller page will also exhibit the same behavior.
Case 2 Recloser Only (Exclude Controller)

When a recloser is selected from the recloser Library Quick Pick on the Rating page with Exclude
Controller box checked, the Controller page will not include the controller information. No controller is
selected message would appear in the Controller page status line.
To retrieve the pre-assigned controllers for the selected recloser, click on the Controller Lib button to
launch the Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller. Since the recloser is previously selected, the
Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller is limited to the controllers assigned to the recloser.

Case 3 Controller Only

When a recloser is not selected from the Recloser Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, the Controller
page is blank and status line will display: No controller is selected.
The Library Quick Pick Electronic Controller can be accessed by clicking on the Controller Lib button.
Since no recloser is selected, all controller types, manufacturers, and models will be available for
selection.

When a controller is selected from the Controller Library Quick Pick, the controller page displays the
selected controller (Manufacturer, Model, and Type), and status line will display: Controller is selected,
but recloser is not specified.
Operation
The settings available in the Operation section of the Controller page are described below.

Enabled (checkbox)
This field is displayed if the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor. Check this box to
enable the parameters for selected level.
Link TOC + IOC for this level (checkbox)

This field is displayed only if the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor and Independent
TOC/HC checkbox is checked in the Model Info page of the Electronic Controller Library. Check this
box to link the TOC and HC for the selected level (This applies for all available trip elements in the
level). When checked, this will override the independent TOC/HC checkbox in the relay library and will
have the TOC and HC curves displayed as one curve.
For example in the Cooper 4C curve shown below, Link TOC + HC for this level is unchecked in the
Recloser Editor. Hence, the TOC and HC curves are shown as two independent curves.

For the curve shown below, Link TOC + HC for this level is checked. Hence, the TOC and HC curves are
linked.
Sequence
Click on this button to open the Sequence Editor where the number of operations performed on the first
enabled curve and the total number of operations for each trip element can be defined.
Coordination
Click on this button to open the Coordination Editor where there a number of coordination curves that be
shown on the Star View.
Note: This button is not available for microprocessor controllers that have more than two levels, and/or
have Enforce same settings for all HC levels unchecked in the library.

Sequence
To set the operating sequence of the controller selected click on the Sequence button. ETAP displays the
Sequence dialog box. The number of operations on the fast curve (or first enabled curve) and total number
of operations for each trip element can be set here. Furthermore, the reclosing duration, and reset time can
also be set here.
Note: These settings are not part of the library and must be entered properly for Sequence-of-Operation
Analysis.
Operation
The number of operations the fast curve or first enabled level and the total number of operations for each
trip element are defined here.
Operation 1st TCC

Select an item from the drop-down list for the number of operation(s) on the first enabled level or fast
curve. The available values are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. This selection must be made for each trip element. The
value selected will affect the Sequence-of-Operation Analysis. For example, if 2 is selected for phase,
then for the first two operations the phase fast curve will be considered. If 0 is selected then the phase fast
curve will be ignored for all operations.
Operation to Lockout
Select an item from the drop-down list for the operation at which the recloser will go to lockout if the
specific trip elements curves are used for tripping. The available values are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. This
selection must be made for each trip element. When running Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, if any of
the trip elements curves are used for the operation selected then the controller will go to lockout.
For controllers of type Electronic-Static, Hydraulic-Single Phase, and Hydraulic-Three Phase the number
selected for Operation 1st TCC will equal the number of operations the fast curve will be considered for
that trip element. The delayed curve will be considered for the remaining operations until the value
selected for Operation to Lockout is reached. For example if Operation 1st TCC is 1 and Operation to

Lockout is 4, then the fast curve will be considered for the first operation, and the delayed curve will be
considered for the second, third and fourth operations.
For controllers of type Electronic-Microprocessor, the number selected for Operations 1st TCC will equal
the number of operations the first enabled level will be considered for that trip element. The second
enabled level will be considered once, and so on until the last enabled level is reached which will be
considered for any remaining operations. For example, suppose a microprocessor controller is selected
with four levels, and the second, third and fourth levels are enabled. The value selected for Operation 1st
TCC is 1 and Operation to Lockout is 4. The second level will be considered for the first operation, the
third level will be considered only for the second operation, and the fourth level will be considered for the
third and fourth operations.
Duration
The time the recloser should remain open between operations, and the time after the fault has been
removed the recloser should reset its operations counter are defined here.
Reclosing Duration #1
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the first operation. This value is reported in
the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the first operation.
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the second operation. This value is reported
in the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the second operation.
Enter the time in seconds the recloser should stay open after the third operation. This value is reported in
the Sequence Viewer, and hence, it affects Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.
Note: This is assuming the recloser does not lockout after the third operation.
Reset Time
Enter the time in seconds after the fault has been removed the recloser should close and reset its
operations counter.
To see the effect of the Operation and Duration settings on the Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, consider
the following example settings in the Sequence Editor shown below.

When an L-G fault is placed and Sequence-of-Operation ran on the system with a recloser, the result in
normalized view with the phase clearing curves visible in ground mode is shown below.

Due to the settings in the Sequence Editor, the first operation will compare the Phase-Fast and Ground-
Fast curves, with the one tripping fastest being used. The recloser will then experience its first reclosing
duration (2 secs). The second operation will compare the Phase-Fast and Ground-Delayed curves, and trip
using the fastest curve. The recloser will then experience its second reclosing duration (2 secs). The third
operation will compare the Phase-Delayed and Ground-Delayed curves, and trip on the faster of the two.
The recloser will then experience its third and final reclosing duration (5 secs). The fourth operation will
then compare the Phase-Delayed and Ground-Delayed curves again, and tripping and locking out on the
faster of the two. Below is the result in the Sequence Viewer.

Note: During Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, the fault cannot be removed, hence, the recloser will not
reset. Furthermore, other elements upstream or downstream may trip while the recloser is open, since they
still experience the fault.
Coordination
To view coordination curves in the recloser Star View click on the Coordination button. ETAP displays
the Coordination dialog box. The K Factor, Cumulative Sequences, or User-Defined coordination curve
can be enabled and set from here.
Note: Only one type of coordination curve can be enabled. Coordination Editor is not available for
Microprocessor Controllers having more than two levels, or having Enforce same settings for all HC
levels unchecked in the library.
K Factor
Coordination between a recloser and fuse links can be achieved by viewing the time-current curves
adjusted by a multiplying factor known as the K Factor. The K Factor coordination curves can be used for
source side or load side fuse coordination (Source: Electrical Distribution System Protection; 2005 - by
Cooper Power Systems). The fast or delayed clearing curve is multiplied by a factor found by considering
the number of operations on the first TCC, the total number of operations, and the reclosing durations.
Note: The coordination curve for phase and ground curves are independent from each other.

Show Load Side

Check this box to calculate and display the coordination curve for load side fuse links. For Show Load
Side the fast clearing curve will be shifted vertically (time multiplier) by the applicable K Factor as
shown in the table below. The intersection of the coordination curve with fuse minimum melting time
curve determines the maximum coordinating current. The settings which affect the K Factor selected are
the number of Operation to Lockout, Operation 1st TCC, and Reclosing Duration #1.

For Operation to Lockout 0 and Operation 1st TCC > 0, the following K Factors apply:
Reclosing Duration #1 One Fast Operation Two or More Fast Operations

(Cycles) (Operation 1st TCC = 1) (Operation 1st TCC >1
t < 60 1.25 1.80
60 t < 90 1.25 1.35
90 t < 120 1.25 1.35
t 120 1.25 1.35
For Operation 1st TCC = 0 or Operation to Lockout = 0 the coordination curve is not displayed in Star
View.

Show Source Side

Check this box to calculate and display the coordination curve for source side fuse coordination. For
Show Source Side the delayed clearing curve will be shifted vertically (time multiplier) by the
applicable K Factor as shown in the table below. The intersection of the coordination curve with fuse
minimum melting time curve determines the maximum coordinating current. The settings which affect
the K Factor selected are Operation to Lockout, Operation 1st TCC, and Reclosing Duration.
Note: The reclosing duration used depends on the value of Operation 1st TCC.

For Operation to Lockout = 4, the following K Factors apply:
Column 1 Column 2 Colum 3

Reclosing
No Fast Operations One Fast Operation Two Fast Operations
Duration
(Operation 1st TCC = 0, (Operation 1st TCC = 1, (Operation 1st TCC = 2,
(Cycles)
Reclosing Duration #1) Reclosing Duration #2) Reclosing Duration #3)
t < 30 3.7 3.2 2.7
30 t < 60 3.5 3.1 2.6
60 t < 90 2.7 2.5 2.1
90 t < 120 2.2 2.1 1.85
120 t < 240 1.9 1.8 1.7
240 t < 600 1.45 1.4 1.4
t 600 1.35 1.35 1.35
For Operation to Lockout = 4, the K Factors in Columns 1, 2, and 3 of the above table apply.
For Operation to Lockout = 3, Columns 1 and 2 apply.
For Operation to Lockout = 2, only Columns 1.
For Operation to Lockout < 2, no coordination curve is plotted in Star View.
Cumulative Sequences
The cumulative sequence is defined as the fast and delayed curves multiplied (time shifted) by the
number of operations assigned to the respective curves. This will only be done on the clearing curves. The
resulting curves can be displayed individually or summed together to display a total clearing curve. The
number of operations assigned to each curve is defined in the Sequence Editor.
When Show Fast and Slow and/or Show Total Time (Fast + Slow) are checked in the Phase Curves
section the cumulative sequence coordination curves will appear for the Phase trip element.

When Show Fast and Slow and/or Show Total Time (Fast + Slow) are checked in the Ground Curves
section the cumulative sequence coordination curves will appear for the Ground and Sensitive Ground
trip elements.
Show Fast and Slow

When Show Fast and Slow is checked, two coordination curves will appear in Star. One will be the fast
curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it, the other will be the delayed curve multiplied
by the number of operations assigned to it.
Fast cumulative sequence coordination curve:

Fast curve * Operation 1st TCC
Delayed cumulative sequence coordination curve:

Delayed curve * (Operation to Lockout Operations 1st TCC)
Show Total Time (Fast + Slow)

When Show Total Time (Fast + Slow) is checked, coordination curve will appear in Star. This will be
the summation of the fast curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it and the delayed
curve multiplied by the number of operations assigned to it.
Total clearing coordination curve:

(Fast curve * Operations TCC#1) + (Fast curve * (Operations to Lockout Operations TCC#1))

User-Defined
The user-defined coordination curve is created by defining a current shift, time shift, and constant time
adder, which are applied to either the clearing or response curve of the fast and delayed curves.

The settings entered in the Phase Curves section will be applied to the Phase trip element. The settings
entered in the Ground Curves section will be applied to the Ground and Sensitive Ground trip elements.
Current Multiplier
Enter a value for the current multiplier which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain the
coordination curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve which is the selected curve shifted
horizontally (in amps) by the factor entered.
Time Multiplier
Enter a value for the time multiplier which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain the coordination
curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve which is the selected curve shifted vertically (in
time) by the factor entered.
Constant Time Adder

Enter a value, in seconds, for the constant time adder which will be applied to the selected curve to obtain
the coordination curve. This has the affect of creating a coordination curve which is the selected curve
with the time entered added to it.
Note: The constant time adder is applied after the time multiplier.
Apply to Clearing Curve

When selected the coordination curve will be created by applying the settings entered to the clearing
curve of the selected speed/level.
Apply to Response Curve

When selected the coordination curve will be created by applying the settings entered to the response
curve of the selected speed/level.

Overcurrent Elements
The different elements for the overcurrent function are Phase, Ground, and Sen. Ground (Sensitive
Ground). These elements are defined as separate tabs on the Overcurrent page. The selection of controller
determines the overcurrent element tabs that will be displayed.
Phase
The Time Overcurrent, High Current, and High Current Lockout for the Phase trip element can be entered
in the Phase element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where
applicable can be entered here as well.

Ground
The relay has a Ground element if the device provides ground fault protection. The Time Overcurrent,
High Current, and High Current Lockout for the Ground trip element can be entered in the Ground
element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where applicable can be
entered here as well.
Sen. Ground
Sensitive Ground elements are typically used for detecting low level ground faults. The Time
Overcurrent, High Current, and High Current Lockout for Sensitive Ground trip element can be entered in
the Sensitive Ground element tab. Alternate Trip, Modifiers, and High Current operating sequence where
applicable can be entered here as well.
Overcurrent (51) Settings

The Time overcurrent settings available for Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground are described below.
When the selected controller type is Hydraulic-Single Phase or Hydraulic-Three Phase the fast curve,
delayed curve, and the coil ID can be assigned to the overcurrent protection of a trip element.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for selected trip element.
Fast Curve
Select from the drop-down list the fast time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Delayed Curve
Select from the drop-down list the delayed time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Coil
Select from the drop-down list the Coil ID for the selected curves.
Note: This is an ID which represents the coils amps and minimum trip amps to use for the curves.
Coil Amps
The coil rating in amps for the selected Coil ID is displayed.

Trip Amps
The minimum trip (or pickup) for the selected Coil ID is displayed. This will be the pickup of the selected
fast and delayed curves.
When the selected controller type is Electronic-Static the fast curve, delayed curve, and the trip plug can
be assigned to the overcurrent protection of a trip element. Furthermore, the alternate trip and/or
modifiers, if available, can be defined.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for selected trip element.
Fast Curve
Select from the drop-down list the fast time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Delayed Curve
Select from the drop-down list the delayed time overcurrent curve type for the selected model and trip
element.
Trip Plug
Select from the drop-down list the Trip Plug ID for the selected curves.
Note: This is an ID which represents the trip plug amps to use for the curves.
Trip Plug Amps

The minimum trip (or pickup) for the selected Trip Plug ID is displayed. This will be the pickup of the
selected fast and delayed curves.
Alternate Trip
Click on this button to open the Alternate Trip Editor for the selected trip element where the alternate trip
can be selected.
Note: This button is hidden if Alternate Trip is unchecked in the library of the selected controller
model.

Modifiers
Click on this button to open the Modifiers Editor for the selected trip element where the vertical shift
multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if available, can be defined.
When the selected controller type is Electronic-Microprocessor the curve type, trip range, trip, and time
dial can be defined for the selected level and trip element. Furthermore, the alternate trip and/or
modifiers, if available, can be defined.
Note: If Enforce same setting for all TOC levels is checked in the library then any changes made to the
trip range or trip settings in one level will be reflected to all levels.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the time overcurrent settings for the selected level and trip element.
Curve Type
Select from the drop-down list the time overcurrent curve type for the selected level and trip element.
TCC Group
Select from the drop-down list the TCC group to use. This will limit the curve types to those assigned to
the selected group.
Note: If All is selected then curve type will contain all curves available in the controller. If a curve is
not assigned to any group in the library then when All is selected it will be listed in curve type.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the time overcurrent trip range for the selected curve. The trip range is
specified in amperes of the primary current.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the time overcurrent trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. This value represents the pickup of the recloser curve.
Time Dial
Select and display the Time Dial for the selected curve type. The time dial can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable.

Alternate Trip
Click on this button to open the Alternate Trip Editor for the selected level and trip element where the
alternate trip can be selected.
Note: This button is hidden if Alternate Trip is unchecked in the library of the selected controller
model.
Modifiers
Click on this button to open the Modifiers Editor for the selected level and trip element where the vertical
shift multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if available, can be defined.
Alternate Trip
To select an Alternate Trip for the selected trip element, click on the Alternate Trip button. ETAP
displays the Alternate Trip dialog box. The alternate trip can be enabled and selected from here.
Note: This editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types,
and if Alternate Trip is unchecked in the library of the selected Electronic-Static or Electronic-
Microprocessor types.
Alternate Trip Rating / Setting

Check this box to enable the alternate trip to be applied to the time overcurrent settings for the selected
trip element.
Alternate Trip
Select the Alternate Trip to be applied to the time overcurrent curves for the selected trip element.
Modifiers
To apply Modifiers to the time overcurrent curves of the selected trip element, click on the Modifiers
button. ETAP displays the Modifiers dialog box. The modifiers can be enabled, and the vertical shift
multiplier, constant time adder, and minimum response time, if available, can be defined.
Note: This editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types.

Constant Time Adder

Select or enter the Constant Time Adder, in seconds or cycles, to be applied to the time overcurrent
curves of the selected level and trip element. The constant time adder can be discrete values or
Note: The vertical shift multiplier is applied to the curve first.
Minimum Response Time

Select or enter the Minimum Response Time, in seconds or cycles, to be applied to the time overcurrent
curves of the selected level and trip element. The minimum response time can be discrete values or
Note: The vertical shift multiplier and constant time adder have no affect on this value.
Vertical Shift Multiplier

Select or enter the Vertical Shift Multiplier to be applied to the time overcurrent curves of the selected
level and trip element. The vertical shift multiplier can be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Note: The vertical shift multiplier is applied before the constant time adder.
High Current (50) Settings

The High Current settings available for Phase, Ground, and Sensitive Ground are described below.
Note: If the controller type of the selected controller is Hydraulic-Single Phase or Hydraulic-Three Phase
then these settings will not be available.
Note: If Enforce same setting for all HC levels is checked in the library then any changes made to the
high current setting in one level will be reflected to all levels.

High Current
Check this box to enable the High Current settings for the selected trip element.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current trip range for the selected trip element. The trip range is
specified in amperes of the primary current or multiples/percent of the overcurrent pickup.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the high current trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable.
Delay Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current delay range for the selected trip element. The delay range
is specified in seconds or cycles.
Delay
Select or enter the intentional delay for the high current. The delay can be in seconds or cycles, depending
on the selection of the delay range. The delay can be in the form of discrete values or continuously
adjustable.
Oper./Lockout
Click on this button to open the High Current Operation / Lockout Editor for the selected level and trip
element. The operations the high current is considered and the high current lockout settings can be
defined here.
High Current Operation / Lockout

To define the operations the high current is considered for a level and trip element, and the high current
lockout settings, click on the Oper. / Lockout button. ETAP displays the High Current Operation /
Lockout dialog box.
Note: This editor is not available for Hydraulic-Single Phase and Hydraulic-Three Phase controller types,
and if the selected trip element does not have high current defined.

Active Trip Number to Operate

Enter the operations the high current for the selected level and trip element is to be considered. For
example, if 3,4 is entered then the high current for that level and trip element will be considered for
tripping during the third and fourth operations.
Note: If this field is blank then the high current will be considered for all operations.
HC Lockout
Check this box to enable the High Current Lockout settings for the selected trip element.
Note: The settings entered below affect all levels of the selected trip element.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list the high current lockout trip range for the selected trip element. The trip
range is specified in amperes of the primary current or multiples/percent of the overcurrent pickup.
Lockout Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the high current lockout trip setting. The trip setting can be
discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Active Trip Number to Lockout

Select from the drop-down list the operation from which to start considering the high current lockout. For
example, if 3 is selected then the high current lockout will be considered for the third and remaining
operations.
11.30.1.4 Reliability page

A
A is the active failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The active failure rate is
branches from service. After the actively failed component is isolated, the recloser is reclosed. This leads
to service being restored to some or all of the load points. However, the failed component itself (and
those components that are directly connected to this failed component) can be restored to service only
after repair or replacement.
P
P is the passive failure rate in number of failures per year per unit length. The passive failure rate is
associated with the component failure mode that does not cause the operation of reclosers and therefore

component will restore service. Examples of passive failures include opening circuits and inadvertent
opening of reclosers.
8760/MTTR).
FOR
FOR is the forced outage rate (unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A and P (FOR =
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
MTTR
MTTR is the mean time to repair in hours. This is the expected time for a crew to repair a component
outage and restore the system to its normal operating state.
Library
Click the Library button to bring up the Library Quick Pick - Reliability Data dialog box.
Source
This displays the source of the selected recloser reliability data.
Type
This displays the Type (for example, Fixed or Metal Clad) of recloser selected.
Class
Replacement
Available
Select this option to enable rP.
rP
Alternative Supply
Switching Time

TCC kA
Calculated

User-Defined
Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined


User-defined symmetrical current as specified in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS

kA (3-Phase Fault)




kA (3-Phase Fault)



11.30.1.6 Model Info page
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected recloser model is accessed on this page.
Control
This displays the recloser type (Recloser-Hydraulic, Recloser-Electronic, or HV Circuit Breaker) for the
selected recloser mode.
Type
This displays the number of phases (Single Phase or Three Phase) the selected recloser operates on.

Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected recloser model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected recloser model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected recloser model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected recloser model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected recloser model.

Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name

Date
This field displays the date when the data was checked. The format for the date can be changed from the
User-Defined Info





UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Overload Heater
11.31 Overload Heater

The properties associated with Overload Heater of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
Note: The editor for a overload heater connected to induction motor, synchronous motor, static load or
MOV, can also be accessed from the Cable/Vd page of the respective Motor/Load Editor.
The Overload Heater Editor includes seven pages of properties and header information.
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.31.1 Header
The header displays the selected overload heater Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of
the Heater Editor.
11.31.1.1 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Overload heater. The assigned IDs consist of the default
Overload heater ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
Overload heaters increase. The default Overload heater ID (OL) can be changed from the Defaults menu
in the menu bar or from the Project View.
To
The Overload heater can be connected in between a bus and a load (Motor load, Static load or MOV)
only. The connection from the overload heater to the load is displayed by the To field. If the overload

heater is not connected to any load, a blank entry will be shown for To field. If the overload heater is
connected to a load (directly or indirectly), the ID of the load will be displayed in the To field.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a Overload heater can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service heater can be edited like an In Service heater;
however, an Out of Service heater will not display results of any System Studies. When Continuity
Check is activated, an Out of Service heater automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set an Overload heater to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

Library Info
Starter
Displays the starter type for the selected heater model.
FLA Range
Displays the range of full load amperes for the selected heater model.
Type
Displays the type (In-Line or CT) for the selected heater model.

Application
Displays the application for the selected heater model.
Heater Unit
Select and display from the drop-down list the heater unit for the selected heater model. The heater units
available are displayed in the format Heater ID_Starter_Application_Type (FLA Range).
Library
To access the Overload Heater library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
displays the Overload Heater library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the Overload Heater
by highlighting the Manufacturer name, Model name and desired heater unit. Then click on the OK
button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.
Library Quick Pick

The information available in the Overload Heater Quick Pick is described below.

Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays list of all overload heater manufacturers included in the library. Select a manufacturer by
highlighting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference, if available for the selected manufacturer. For example,
Rockwell Automation in the reference manufacturer for Allen-Bradley.
Link
This displays the web link for the selected manufacturer or URL address.
Lock
Model
Model Name
This displays list of available models for the selected manufacturer. Select a model by highlighting
model name.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available for selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available for selected model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected model.
Lock
ID
This displays the heater ID for the selected heater unit.
Starter
This displays the starter type for the selected heater unit.
App
This displays the application for the selected heater unit.

Nom. R
This displays the nominal value of resistance for the selected heater unit.
%Tol.
This displays the available tolerance for resistance in percent, for the selected heater unit.
Min Amp
This displays the minimum value of ampere range for the selected heater unit.
Max Amp
This displays the maximum value of ampere range for the selected heater unit.
Resistance
Ohm
Enter the resistance value in ohm for the selected heater unit.
Note: When a heater is selected form the library, the ohm value is set to the nominal value of resistance
for the selected heater unit. If a range is available for the resistance value, then the ohm value entered is
bounded by the range displayed.
When no overload heater is selected from the Quick Pick, the ohm field is user-editable and a resistance
value can be entered.
Range
Displays the range of the resistance value in the form Min R Max R in ohms for the selected heater
unit. If the range is available, then the ohm value entered should be within the range displayed. This field
is non-editable and is blank when no heater is selected from library.
%Tolerance
Enter the tolerance for the resistance in percent.
Note: When a heater is selected form the library, the tolerance value is set to the % Tolerance of the
selected heater unit. Changing the tolerance after selecting a heater from library Quick Pick will turn the
header to blue color, to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
Thermal Curve
Thermal (Checkbox)
Check to enable the thermal curve data.
Library Curve
Select this option to display the curve data for the selected heater from library. The default selection for
thermal curve is set to library curve.

Typical Curve
Select this option to display curve data for typical overload heater curves (Class 10, Class 20, etc.).
Curve
Displays the thermal curve type for the selected overload heater.
If Library Curve is selected, the Curve field is blank when no heater is selected and displays the name of
curve, when a heater is selected. In some cases, the name of the curve is displayed as Not available,
indicating that the curve data is not available for selected heater unit.
If the Typical Curve is selected, the Curve field changes to a list box and you can select a Class 10 or
Class 20 curve.
Trip Amps
Display or enter the trip current in amperes for the selected overload heater. The Trip amps field functions
as described below.
If no overload heater model is selected from the library, the Trip amps field is editable and you can enter
a value of trip current. Default value is 0.
If no overload heater model is selected from the library, and if the heater is connected to a motor/load,
then the full load amperes for the connected motor/load is displayed in the Trip amps field. The field is
editable, so the current value can be changed if desired.
If an overload heater is selected from the library, and the Library Curve option is selected, the Trip amps
field displays the value of the Trip Amps in the library for the selected heater unit. Furthermore, the Trip
amps field is non-editable or editable, depending on the Fixed or Adjustable option selected in the library
for the heater unit.
If an overload heater is selected from the library, and the Typical Curve is selected, the Trip Amps field is
editable and you can enter a value of trip current.

11.31.1.3 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined

Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the OLH curves in Star View are specified in the TCC

option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI Standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for short-circuit current for IEC
Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS option will display the corresponding
asymmetrical current values.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical -cycle short-
circuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
Standard. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.

For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground symmetrical or asymmetrical -cycle
short-circuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for
IEC Standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.


Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in Star View.

kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase 30 cycle short-circuit current in kA for ANSI
Standard and minimum initial symmetrical or minimum steady state current based on the selection for
minimum short-circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-
Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star View.
Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated, short-circuit kA values only for the
selected OLH. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.

11.31.1.4 Model Info Page
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected Overload Heater model is displayed on this page.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected Overload Heater model.
Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected Overload Heater model.

Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected Overload Heater model.
Thermal Unit
This displays the thermal unit type for the selected Overload Heater model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected Overload Heater model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected Overload Heater model.

Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date

User-Defined Info





UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



AC Elements In-Line Overload Relay
11.32 In-line Overload Relay

The properties associated with the In-line Overload relay can be entered in this editor. The In-line
Overload Relay Editor includes seven pages of properties.
Info Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
11.32.1 Header
The header displays the selected In-line overload relay Manufacturer name and Model name on every
page of the Heater Editor.
11.32.1.1 Info Page

ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each In-line relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of relay increase. The
default In-line relay ID (OL) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View. Note that In-line Overload Relay and Overload Heater elements use the same default properties.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of an In-line Overload relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or
Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service relay can be edited like an In Service relay;
however, an Out of Service relay will not display results of any System Studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service relay automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a relay to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.

Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Enter equipment description, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters

11.32.1.2 Setting Page
Library Info
Library
To access the In-line Overload library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
displays the relay library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the relay by highlighting the
Manufacturer name and Model name. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the
library and transfer it to the editor.

Integrated Curves
Check this box to integrate the Thermal and Instantaneous curves.
Load Parameters
The parameters such as full load amperes and lock rotor current, for a connected load or a user-defined
load can be defined in this section, the default being set to the Connected load option.
Connected load
The Connected load option retrieves the parameters for the connected load protected by the overload
relay.
Load ID
The load ID field is displayed only when the Connected Load option is selected. It displays the ID of the
connected load protected by overload relay.
FLA
The FLA field displays the full load amperes for the Connected load or entered full load amperes in case
of User defined load. The FLA field is non-editable when the connected load option is selected.
%LRC
The % LRC field displays the locked rotor current in percent for the Connected load or entered % locked
rotor current for User defined load. The %LRC field is grayed out and non-editable when the connected
load option is selected. For Connected loads, the % LRC field is displayed only for motor loads.

Library Quick Pick
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays a list of all relay manufacturers included in the library. Select the manufacturer by highlighting
Lock
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer.
Link

Model
Model Name
Displays a list of all relay models or models filtered as per selection criteria, for the selected
manufacturer.
Lock
Functions
This displays all functions associated with selected relay model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected relay model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected relay model.
Thermal Settings
The settings for thermal trip unit can be entered in the Thermal element tab.
Thermal
Check the box to enable the parameters for the thermal trip unit.

Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the thermal curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the thermal element. The trip ranges can be
specified in amperes.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the Thermal trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values
or continuously adjustable.
Trip Amps
This field displays the relay current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Acceleration Settings
The settings for Acceleration trip unit can be entered in the Acceleration element tab.
Acceleration
Check the box to enable the parameters for the acceleration trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the acceleration curve type for the selected relay.

Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the acceleration element. The trip ranges can
be specified in amperes.
Instantaneous
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the selected element. The trip ranges can be
Trip
Select or enter the element trip setting for the selected trip range. The trip setting can be discrete values or
Trip Amps
This field displays the relay secondary current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Prim. Amps
This field displays the relay primary current in amperes, for the selected trip setting.
Time Delay
Select and display the Time Delay in seconds or cycles. The time delay can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is specified in the library, it will be added to
the value selected.

Jam (50)
Trip Range
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the trip range for the selected element. The trip
ranges can be specified in amperes.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the element trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
the value selected.

Ground Settings
Trip Range
Trip
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
Select and display the Time Delay in seconds. The time delay can be discrete values or continuously
adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is specified in the library, it will be added to the value
selected.

11.32.1.3 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined

Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the trip device curves in Star View are specified in the TCC

option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI Standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for short-circuit current for IEC

kA (3-Phase Fault)
circuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC

short-circuit current in kA for ANSI Standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for
IEC Standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.



Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in Star View.
kA (3-Phase Fault)

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star View.
Star

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated, short-circuit kA values only for the
selected trip device. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.

Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by

User Name
Date
User-Defined Info




UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



AC Elements Single-Throw Switch
11.33 Single-Throw Switch

The properties associated with a single-throw switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.
The Single-Throw Switch Editor contains the following four pages of properties:
Info
Remarks
Reliability
Comment
11.33.1 Info Page
Info
ID

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default switch
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of switches increase. The
default switch ID (SW) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal of
a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-
line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you
If a switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the switch
to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where SPST10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Next to the From and To bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal kV of the buses for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service switch can be edited like an In Service switch; however, an
Out of Service switch will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service switch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the loads and
branches energized solely through an Out of Service branch will also be de-energized and become grayed
out.
Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on Closed or Open
of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the specified
configuration.

status is shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the switch status under the specific
configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations.
In the following example, status of a switch is shown to be closed under Configuration Status Normal
and open under Configuration Status Open Tie.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV.
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) short-circuit rating of the switch in kA.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (Real-Time).
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.

Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. Real-Time will request
confirmation.
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name

Purchase Date

A
P

MTTR
8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
FOR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library


AC Elements Double-Throw Switch
11.34 Double-Throw Switch

The properties associated with a single pole double-throw (DT) switch of the electrical distribution
system can be entered in this editor.
The Double-Throw Switch Editor contains the following four pages of properties:
Info
Reliability
Remarks
Comment
11.34.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default switch
ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of switches increase. The

default switch ID (2SW) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project
View.
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an SPDT switch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal
of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a
terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection.
To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the switch resides, i.e., you
If an SPDT switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where SPDT10 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus2.
Unlike SPST switch, the SPDT switch has to be connected to a bus before being connected to loads and
branch elements.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a double-throw switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service switch can be edited like an In Service switch;
however, an Out of Service switch will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service switch automatically becomes dimmed in the one-line diagram. All the
become grayed out.
Data.

Configuration
Status is not a part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration status is
shown above the status of the switch to indicate that this is the switch status under the specific
following example, status of a switch is shown to be in position A under Configuration Status Switch A
and position B under Configuration Status Switch B.
Status
You can change the status of an SPDT switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Position
A or Position B. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved under the
specified configuration.
Rating
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the SPDT switch in kV or select the rating from the list box.
Cont. Amps
Enter the rated continuous current of the SPDT switch in amperes or select the rating from the list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse level in kV.
Momentary
Enter the momentary (bracing) short-circuit rating of the switch in kA.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (Real-Time).
Scanned Status
This displays the scanned status (Position A or Position B) of the switching device.
Pin
Click on this button to pin the switching device to either Position A or Position B status. This option is
provided to allow you to overwrite the actual status received from the Real-Time system.
Control
Click on this button to control the status (Position A or Position B) of the device. Real-Time will request
confirmation.

A
P
MTTR

8760/MTTR).
MTTF
1.0/(A+P)).
FOR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library

User-Defined Info





enter any extra data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



AC Elements Ground Grid
11.35 Ground Grid

The properties associated with ground grid design of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor. The ground grid system (GGS) has its own presentation composed of Top View, Soil View,
and 3D View.
To create a GGS presentation, a ground grid must first be added to the One-Line Diagram. Click on the
Ground Grid component located on the AC toolbar, and drop the GGS symbol anywhere on the One-
Line Diagram.
Right-click on any location inside the ground grid box, and select Properties to bring up the Grid Editor.
The Grid Editor dialog box is used to specify grid information, grid styles, equipment information, and to
view calculation results. Click on the Grid Presentation button to bring up a GGS presentation.
For more information, see the Ground Grid Systems Chapter.

Chapter 12
Instrumentation Elements
This chapter addresses editors for all Instrumentation elements in the One-Line Diagram. Except for the
element IDs, bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors are considered
engineering properties, which are subject to Base & Revision Data. The following table lists all the
Instrumentation elements in ETAP as seen from the Instrumentation (Inst) toolbar.
Transformers Current Transformer Potential Transformer
Voltmeter Ammeter
Meters
Multimeter
Voltage Relay Power Relay

Relays Frequency Relay MV Solid State Relay
Motor Relay Overcurrent Relay
Differential Relay Multi-Function Relay
Tag Link

Instrumentation Elements Current Transformer
12.1 Current Transformer

You can enter the properties associated with current transformers (CT) of the electrical distribution
system can be entered in this editor. The Current Transformer Editor contains five pages of properties.
Info Page
Rating Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.1.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each current transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the
default current transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
of current transformers increase. The default current transformer ID (CT) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.

From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a current transformer are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of current transformer (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for
bus ID. If a terminal of a current transformer is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of
the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a current transformer to
a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click on OK. Note that you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the
current transformer resides, i.e., you cannot connect to a bus that resides in Dumpster or in another
composite network.
If a current transformer is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection
of the current transformer to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where CT2 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
Reverse Polarity
Check the Reverse Polarity box to change the polarity of the current transformer.
In/Out of Service
Operating condition of a current transformer can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service current transformer can be edited like an In Service
current transformer; however, an Out of Service current transformer will not be included in any system
studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service current transformer automatically
becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a current transformer to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.
Standard
Select from either ANSI or IEC standard.

Type
Current transformers can be defined as Phase or Ground type.
Note: Phase CT can detect the phase and ground currents whereas Ground CT detects only the ground or
3I0 component of the current (i.e. zero-sequence CT).
The symbol for current transformer changes when the type is changed from Phase to Ground. A CT
placed in the grounding element of a transformer or generator is by default a ground CT.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

12.1.2 Rating Page
Ratio
Primary
Enter the primary rating of current transformer in amperes.
Secondary
Enter the secondary rating of current transformer in amperes.
Ratio
This field displays the current ratio of current transformer.
Burden
Burden
Enter the burden of current transformer in VA or ohm. This value is use for CT sizing and calculating CT
saturation.
Designation
Select the burden designation of current transformer from the list-box.
Note: The CT burden value is updated based on the burden designation selection.

12.1.3 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
Date
This field displays the date of change. The format for the date can be changed from the Projects Menu in
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
Projects Menu in the menu bar.

12.1.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu in the Menu bar.




UD Field 5

UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

12.1.5 Comment Page


AC Elements Potential Transformer
12.2 Potential Transformer

The properties associated with potential transformers (PT) of the electrical distribution system can be
The Potential Transformer Editor contains three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.2.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each potential transformer. The assigned IDs consist of the
default potential transformer ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the

number of potential transformers increase. The default potential transformer ID (PT) can be changed
from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
From & To
The primary terminal of the potential transformer has two pins as From and To which can be connected
directly to buses or in between branch elements. These primary pins are located on top of each other.
Also, if the primary terminal of a potential transformer is connected to a From bus, the ID of the To bus
will be hidden and visa versa. To connect or reconnect a potential transformer to a bus, select a bus from
the list box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: you can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the branch resides, i.e., you
cannot connect to a bus that resides in Dumpster or in another composite network.
The secondary terminal of a PT has only one pin, which can be connected to voltmeters, multimeters,
overcurrent relays, multi-function relays, motor relays, frequency relays, and voltage relays.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a potential transformer can be selected by choosing either In Service or Out of
Service. The properties of an Out of Service potential transformer can be edited like an In Service
potential transformer; however, an Out of Service potential transformer will not be included in any system
studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service potential transformer automatically
becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a potential transformer to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Rating
Primary
Enter the primary rated voltage of potential transformer in kV or select from list box.

Secondary
Enter the secondary rated voltage of potential transformer in Volts or select from list box.
Connection
This is the type of connection of the potential transformer. Select the connection type from the list box.
L-G Line-to-ground connection
L-L Line-to-line connection
Ratio
This field displays the turn ratio of the potential transformer based on the primary and secondary voltages.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

12.2.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

12.2.3 Comment Page


AC Elements Voltmeter
12.3 Voltmeter
The properties associated with voltmeters can be entered in this editor.
The Voltmeter Editor contains three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.3.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each voltmeter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
voltmeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of voltmeters
increase. The default voltmeter ID (VM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or

PT
Voltmeters have one pin, which can be connected to a potential transformer (PT). A blank entry will be
shown for the PT if the terminal of the voltmeter is not directly connected to a PT. If the terminal of a
voltmeter is connected to a PT, the ID of the PT will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This is the turn ratio of the potential transformer connected to the voltmeter.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a voltmeter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service voltmeter can be edited like an In Service voltmeter;
however, an Out of Service voltmeter will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service voltmeter automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a voltmeter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Voltage
Operating
This field displays the operating voltage in volts. This field is updated when used with the ETAP Real-
Time module.
Set Point
Enter the set point value of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time module only.
Std. Deviation
Enter the standard deviation of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time module only.
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time module.
Scanned
Displays the scanned value of the meter as it is obtained from the system.
Pinned
In ETAP Real-Time, you can pin a value for the meter that may be different from the real-time data. This
option is provided to overwrite the actual scanned value for the system.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
12.3.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

12.3.3 Comment Page


AC Elements Ammeter
12.4 Ammeter
The properties associated with ammeters can be entered in this editor.
The Ammeter Editor contains three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.4.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each ammeter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
ammeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of ammeters
increase. The default ammeter ID (AM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.

AC Elements Ammeter
CT
Ammeters have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the other pin
can be connected to other relays and/or meters. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the terminal of
the ammeter is not connected directly to a CT or indirectly through other relays and/or meters. If the
terminal of an ammeter is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the CT
will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This is the turn ratio of the current transformer connected to the ammeter.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of an ammeter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service ammeter can be edited like an In Service ammeter; however,
an Out of Service ammeter will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service ammeter automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set an ammeter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Current
Operating
This field displays the operating current in amperes. This field is updated when it is used with the ETAP
Real-time module.
Set Point
Enter the set point value of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Std. Dev.
Enter the standard deviation of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Real-Time Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time Module.
Scanned
Pinned
When used with ETAP Real-time, you can pin a value for the meter that may be different from the real-
time data. This option is provided to overwrite the actual scanned value for the system.
Equipment
Tag #
Name

AC Elements Ammeter
Description
12.4.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




AC Elements Ammeter

UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

AC Elements Ammeter
12.4.3 Comment Page


AC Elements Multimeter
12.5 Multimeter
The properties associated with multimeters of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Multimeter Editor includes three pages of properties.
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.5.1 Info Page
Info
ID

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each multimeter. The assigned IDs consist of the default
multimeter ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of multimeters
increase. The default multimeter ID (MM) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or
Multimeters have three connection pins: two current pins that can be connected to a current transformer
(CT) and relays/meters, and a voltage pin, which can be connected to a PT.
CT
A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the CT terminal of the multimeter is not directly connected to a
CT or indirectly through other relays and/or meters. If the CT terminal of a multimeter is connected to a
CT or to a relay/ammeter, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the CT will be displayed for the terminal
connection.
PT
A blank entry will be shown for the PT if the PT terminal of the multimeter (bottom pin) is not directly
connected to a PT. If the terminal of a multimeter is connected to a PT, the ID of the PT will be displayed
for the terminal connection.
Ratio
The turn ratio of the current and/or potential transformer connected to the multimeter is shown here.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a multimeter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service multimeter can be edited like an In Service
multimeter. However, an Out of Service multimeter will not be included in any system studies. When
the continuity check is activated, an Out of Service multimeter automatically becomes grayed out in the
one-line diagram.

status. Therefore, you can set a multimeter to be In Service for the base data and Out of Service in
revision data.
Reverse Polarity
Check this box to reverse the voltage potential polarity.
Type
Voltage
Check this box to select a voltmeter function. A PT connection is required for this function.
Current
Check this box to select an ammeter function. A CT connection is required for this function.
kW/MW
Check this box to select a wattmeter function. Both CT and PT connection are required for this function.
Click on the kW/MW button to toggle between kilo and Mega units for Watt and var values for entering
and displaying multimeter data.
kvar/Mvar
Check this box to select a varmeter function. Both CT and PT connection are required for this function.
PF
Check this box to meter the Power factor. A CT connection is required for this function.
Freq.
Check this box for frequency measurement.
Operating
Displays the operating/metered values for selected multimeter functions.
Set Point
Enter the set point value of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Std. Dev.
Enter the standard deviation of the meter. This is used for ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Real Time Data

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time Module.
Scanned
Pinned
For ETAP Real-Time, you can pin a value for the meter that may be different from the real-time data.
This option is provided to overwrite the actual scanned value for the system.

Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
12.5.2 Associations Page

The Associations page allows the association of various device types to the Multimeter. This feature is
mainly used by ETAP Real-Time application to provide link between the meter and the one-line diagram
elements.
12.5.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info


UD Field 2 (Install Date.)



UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

12.5.4 Comment Page


AC Elements Protective Relay
12.6 Protective Relay

The properties associated with protective relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
Protective relay is classified in two categories: single or multiple functions. A single function relay
consists of only one protective feature such as overcurrent (i.e. ABB CO relay) where as a multi-function
relay may include several protective features such as overcurrent, overload, voltage, frequency, etc (i.e.
ABB SPAM 150C).
In addition to functional classification of the protective relays, the application must be considered when
selecting the relay type. For the above reasons, ETAP provides several protective relays categorized based
on their functionalities and applications: Multi-Function relay (R), Overcurrent relay (OCR), Motor relay
(MR), and Differential Relay (87).
Relay Editor
Relay Types Function / Application
Page(s)
Multi-Function Relay All applicable functions OCR / OLR, etc.
Overcurrent Relay Overcurrent OCR
Motor Relay Overload OLR
Differential Relay Differential DIF
It should be noted that the various protective relay types share common editor properties and library data.
A multi-function relay can be modified to an overcurrent or a motor relay type or vice versa based on the
Relay Library Quick Pick selection.
The Relay Editor includes ten pages of properties and header information for each page.
Info Page
Input Page
Output Page
OCR Page
OLR Page
DIF Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.6.1 Header
The header displays the selected relay Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of the Relay
Editor.

12.6.2 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default relay ID
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of relay increase. The default
relay ID (Relay) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Display Tag
Enter a display tag for the relay up to 12 alphanumeric characters in length.
The display tag can be utilized to show a user-definable annotation on the one-line diagram for the
selected relay such as relay trip element designations (i.e. 50/51/49). The relay display tag can be
displayed on the one-line diagram via the Display Options Editor.

In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
options. The properties of an Out of Service relay can be edited like an In Service relay; however, an Out
of Service relay will not display results of any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service relay automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a relay to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

12.6.3 Input Page
The Current and Voltage inputs to the relay are specified in Input page. Relays have three pins, i.e.
Current In, Current Out, and Voltage.
The Current In pin can be connected to current transformers (CT) or Current Out of other current/power
relays. Current Out pin can be connected to Current In of other current/power relays. The Voltage Pin
can be connected to potential transformers (PT).

Current
Terminal
The Terminal column displays the names of terminals of the Relay for assigning CT inputs. The selection
of the relay determines the names and number of terminals displayed in the Terminal column.
Note: The current terminal represents the number of terminal types (i.e., Phase, Ground, etc.) and not the
total number of current terminal connections.
Multiple CT input relays

For multiple current input relays, the current terminals are internally labeled as Phase, Ground and,
Sen. Ground (Sensitive Ground), etc. The number of current terminals is controlled by the relay library
selection.
Single CT input relays

For relays with one current transformer input (i.e. ABB CO relay), the current terminal is internally
designated as CT Input. Therefore, a single CT input relay can be assigned to a Phase or Ground type
current transformer.
A single CT input relay can be connected to detect the residual current (3I0) by checking Residual
checkbox. By definition, a residually connected relay detects ground/earth fault currents.

Current Summer
Check the current summer box to connect the phase CT terminal to a set of CTs connected in parallel. The
overcurrent relay element will then use the sum of the current of the paralleled CTs to operate on. This
feature can be used for modeling a partial differential relay. Note: The current summer CTs must have the
same ratio as the phase CT.
ID
The ID column displays the current transformers identifier that can be assigned to the selected terminal of
the relay. If the terminal is not connected to any CT, a blank entry will be shown for the terminal ID. To
connect or reconnect a Relay to a CT, select a CT from the list box.
Note: The terminal ID list box only displays those CTs that are connected to the relay on the one-line
diagram.
Once a terminal ID is selected the type and ratio of the connected CT is displayed for the selected
terminal. By default, the first connected CT is assigned to applicable current terminals of the relay.
Type
The Type column displays the type of the connected CT (Phase or Ground).
The following logic is used to allow connection of CT types to various Current Terminals.
Terminal Phase Type CT Ground Type CT

CT Input Allowed Allowed
Phase Allowed Not Allowed
Ground Allowed Allowed
Sen. Ground Allowed Allowed

Note: By definition, a Ground or Sen. Ground terminal of a relay connected to a Phase type CT will
detect the residual current of the phase CT.
Prim. Amp
Prim Amp column displays the primary rating of the connected current transformer.
Sec. Amp
Sec. Amp column displays the secondary rating of the connected current transformer.
If a relay is not graphically connected to any CT via the one-line diagram, the Prim, Amp and Sec. Amp
values are user-definable
.
Differential
The differential section provides the user interface for defining the CT connections for either of the
following cases.
Note that for both cases the first row of the Differential Terminal is set to the same CT ID as specified in
the Phase CT Terminal.
Parallel CT Connection
Single CT input terminal which allows for summation (parallel connection of multiple connected CTs).
This is typically applies to High Impedance and Partial differential relays where multiple CTs can be
paralleled and their currents are summed. Note that the number of CTs in parallel is user-definable.

When Current Summer is checked, the CT ratios of the summation CTs must be the same as the CT
selected for the phase input. If a CT is connected that does not meet this requirement, then it will be
ignored during the summation, and a message will appear in the editor.
Multiple Differential CT Connection

Multiple differential CT input terminals are used for Percentage differential relay. Note that the number of
CTs in parallel is user-definable when DIF relay is not selected from the library, otherwise this field is
display only.
Voltage
Terminal
The Terminal column displays the names of terminals of the Relay for assigning PT inputs. The selection
of the relay determines the names and number of terminals displayed in the Terminal column.
Multiple PT input relays

For relays that have multiple potential transformer inputs, the terminal names are internally designated as
Phase and Sync. If the relay selected allows two inputs for potential transformers, then both the
Phase and Sync terminals are displayed.

Single PT input relays

For relays, which have only one potential transformer input, the terminal name is internally designated as
PT Input.
ID
The ID column displays the ID of the potential transformers that can be assigned to the terminals of the
Relay. If the terminal is not connected to any PT, a blank entry will be shown for the terminal ID. Select
a PT form the pull-down list to connect or reconnect a Relay to a PT.
Note: The terminal ID pull-down list only displays those PTs that are connected to the relay on the one-
line diagram.
Once a terminal ID is selected the type and ratio of the connected PT is displayed for the selected
terminal. By default, the first connected PT is assigned to applicable current terminals of the relay.
Type
The Type column displays the type of the potential transformer assigned to the terminals of the Relay.
Prim. kV
Prim. kV column displays the primary rating of the connected potential transformer.

Sec. Volts
Sec. Volts column displays the secondary rating of the connected potential transformer.
If a relay is not graphically connected to any PT via the one-line diagram, the Prim. KV and Sec. Volts
values are user-definable.
Note: When the PT ratio is entered manually, the connection type is assumed to be L-L.
Current Summer Handling for SQOP

The Current Summer function can be enabled from the relay editor Input page where the current
transformer (CT) assignment for differential / current summer are specified. The relay operation is
determined through vector summation of the through current for each valid Current Summer CT.
Note the following when modeling the current summer:
The flow of current with respect to the Current Transformer (CT) polarity will determine how the
currents are added. If the currents are entering into the CT on the same side as the polarity
indicator, then the currents can be considered as positive. If the currents are entering into the CT
on the opposite side as the polarity indicator, then the currents can be considered as negative. The
currents are then summed up taking into account the polarity.
In the example below, the direction of current flow in CT1 is the opposite of CT2 with respect to
their polarities. Therefore, the current summation is the difference between the currents through
CT1 and CT2.

CTs connected to the relay should be assigned as current summing CTs in the relay editor Input
page.
Switching device (i.e. circuit breaker) interlocks should be specified in the relay editor Output
page.
All summing CTs must have the same ratio. CTs that do not have the same ratio as the Phase
Terminal CT are not considered for summation.
The phase elements (i.e. Phase, Thermal, Acceleration, Jam, and Instantaneous) operate on
highest summed phase current (IA, IB, or IC).
The neutral element will trip on the summation of zero sequence currents.

When a phase CT is assigned to the Ground / Sensitive Ground Terminal of the relay (i.e. residual
ground) and is also assigned as the first summing CT, then the ground elements will trip on the
summation of the zero sequence current. Note: If a summing CT, which is not the first one, is
assigned to Ground / Sensitive Ground Terminal, then the Ground / Sensitive Ground element
will not operate.
In the example below, CT10 is assigned to both the Phase and Ground Terminals. Since current
summer is enabled and CT10 is a summation CT, the ground will operate on the zero sequence
calculated from the sum of current flow through CT10 and CT9.

12.6.4 Output Page
Interlock
Add
Click on this button to open the Relay Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new control interlock,
including Relay element, Relay level/zone, Device type, device ID, and control Action.
Edit
Click on this button to open the Relay Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing control
interlock.

Delete
Click on this button to delete the selected control interlock.
Interlock Editor
Relay Element
Select the relay element for the desired tripping action.
Note: the Relay Element field is updated based on the library selection.
Relay Level/Zone
Select the relay level/zone for the desired tripping action. Note that the Level/Zone field is updated based
on the library selection.
Device
Select the device type for control interlock data.
ID
Select and display the ID of the interlocked device.
Action
Select interlock action (Open, Close, or None).

12.6.5 Overcurrent (OCR) Page
Library
To access the overcurrent relay library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button

OC level
Overcurrent relays can have multiple Time overcurrent (TOC) and/or Instantaneous overcurrent (IOC)
elements that can be simultaneously and independently set in the relay library. The OC level displays a
Drop-down list of the maximum number of overcurrent levels that are available for the selected relay.
For example, the Schweitzer 551 relay has 2 Phase TOC and 6 Phase IOC elements and only 1 Ground
TOC and 2 Ground IOC levels. In this case, the maximum number of OC levels set to 6, as these levels
are applicable to the model as a whole, and not to individual trip elements.
Enabled (checkbox)
Check this box to enable the parameters for selected OC level.
Link TOC + IOC for this level (check box)

This field is displayed only if Independent TOC/IOC checkbox is checked in the Model Info page of
the Relay Library. Check this box to link the TOC and IOC for the selected OC level (This applies for all
available trip elements). When checked, this will override the independent TOC/IOC checkbox in the
relay library and will have the curve displayed in Star as it used to be in ETAP 5.0.3 version.
For example in the ABB DPU-2000R curve shown below, Link TOC + IOC for this level is unchecked in
the OCR editor. Hence, the TOC and IOC curves are shown as two independent curves.

For the curve shown below, Link TOC + IOC for this level is checked. Hence, the TOC and IOC curves
are linked.

Integrated Curves (check box)

Check this box to enable the integration of all active OC level curves to a single curve in Star view. For
relay models with multiple OC levels, you may integrate curve levels to display one single curve. Also,
for relay models with single OC level, you may integrate the TOC with the IOC to display one single
curve.
For example in the Alstom P121 curve below, Integrated curves is disabled and the Link TOC + IOC are
unchecked for both OC1 and OC2. Hence all the curves are shown as independent curves.

For the curve shown below, the Integrated Curves is enabled and Link TOC + IOC are unchecked for
both OC1 and OC2. Hence, the curve is shown as single integrated curve. When an integrated curve is
unselected on the Star view, Star will display a single integrated curve based on the lowest time at each
value of current.

When an integrated curve is selected on the Star view, all individual OC level curves are displayed,
allowing you to graphically adjust their settings as shown below.

Note that, when both Link TOC + IOC for this level and Integrated Curves checkboxes are both
checked for relay models with single OC level, then Link TOC + IOC for this level takes precedence
over the Integrated Curves for all cases except for the case when the IOC is defined as a Short Time.
The curve below shows such a case wherein the short time curve is integrated and linked with TOC.

When Link TOC + IOC for this level is checked for all available OC levels and Integrated Curves is
also checked, then all the linked TOC/IOC curves are combined into a single curve.
Overcurrent Elements
The different elements for the overcurrent function are Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sen. Ground (Sensitive
Ground) and Neg. Seq. (Negative Sequence). These elements are defined as separate tabs on the
Overcurrent page. The selection of relay determines the overcurrent element tabs that will be displayed.
Phase

The Time overcurrent, Instantaneous and directional settings for Phase trip element can be entered in the
Phase element tab. Voltage restraint (51V) settings are applicable and can be entered only for the Phase
element.
Neutral
The relay has a Neutral element if the residual current is calculated internally by the device from the
phase current transformers, for ground fault protection.
The Time overcurrent, Instantaneous and directional settings for Neutral trip element can be entered in the
Neutral element tab.
Ground
The relay has a Ground element if the device has a separate input for the ground current, for ground fault
protection.
The Time overcurrent, Instantaneous and directional settings for Ground trip element can be entered in
the Ground element tab.
Sen. Ground
Sensitive Ground elements are typically used for detecting low level ground faults. The Time overcurrent,
Instantaneous and directional settings for Sensitive Ground trip element can be entered in the Sensitive
Ground element tab.
Neg-Seq
Negative Sequence elements are used for detecting negative sequence currents. The Time overcurrent,
Instantaneous and directional settings for Negative Sequence trip element can be entered in the Negative
Sequence element tab.
Overcurrent (51) Settings

The Time overcurrent settings available for Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative
Sequence are described below.
Overcurrent
Check this box to enable the Time overcurrent settings for selected element.
Curve Type
Select from drop-down list and display the Time overcurrent curve type for the selected model.

Pickup Range
Select from drop-down list and display the Time overcurrent Pickup range for the selected curve. The
pickup range can be specified in amperes of the secondary or primary current rating. It can also be in
multiples/percent of the CT secondary.
Pickup Setting
For the selected pickup range, select or enter the Time overcurrent pickup setting. The pickup setting can
be discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Relay Amps
This field displays the relay secondary current in amperes, for the selected pickup setting.
Prim. Amps
This field displays the relay primary current in amperes, for the selected pickup setting.
Time Dial
Select and display the Time Dial for the selected curve type. The time dial can be discrete values or
Instantaneous (50) Settings

The Instantaneous settings available for Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative
Sequence are described below.
Instantaneous
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous settings for selected element.
Instantaneous / Short time

Some relays like ABB DPU-2000R have the capability to set a level between the Time overcurrent and
Instantaneous, in addition to the Instantaneous settings. This element is referred to as Short time and
provides a curve-based instantaneous operation. If the relay selected has the Short time feature, you can
choose between Instantaneous or Short time element using the drop-down list.

Curve Type
This field with a drop-down list of curves is available only if the selected relay has Short time feature and
if the Short time is selected. Select from the drop-down list and display the Short time curve type for the
selected model.
Pickup Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the Instantaneous Pickup range (for the selected curve in case
of Short time). The pickup range can be specified in amperes of the secondary or primary current rating.
It can also be in multiples/percent of the CT secondary or 51 pickup.
Pickup Setting
For the selected pickup range, select or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting. The pickup setting can be
discrete values or continuously adjustable.
Relay Amps
This field displays the relay secondary current in amperes, for the selected pickup setting.
Prim. Amps
Delay Range
This field is available only if the relay has Instantaneous function. Select from the drop-down list and
display the Instantaneous Delay range. The delay range could either be in seconds or cycles.
Delay
Select or enter the intentional delay for the instantaneous. The Delay can be in seconds or cycles,
depending on the selection of relay. The delay can be in the form of discrete values or continuously
adjustable. Note: If an additional built-in delay is specified in the library, it will be added to the value
selected.
Time Dial
This field is available only if the selected relay has Short time feature and if the Short time is selected.
Select or enter the Time Dial for the selected curve type. The time dial can be discrete values or
Directional (67) Settings

The Directional settings available for Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive Ground and Negative Sequence
are described below. These settings are used if a specific relay function is set as a directional element.
Directional
Check this box if the relay pickup current is directional. If checked, the Sequence-of-Operation and Arc
Flash Analysis will consider the direction of the current flow through the CT when calculating the trip
time.
Direction
Select the relay pickup current direction either in Forward or in Reverse.
Note: If the value selected here does not match the direction of the flow of current through the CT (when
running Sequence of Operation or Arc Flash), then the 51/50 curve will be ignored for the selected trip
element.
Maximum Torque Angle

Select the lead or lag maximum torque angle.
Polarizing
Select the polarizing input used to provide directional control. The inputs listed are Voltage, Current and
Dual.
Voltage Restraint / Control (51V) Settings

Relays with Voltage Restraint / Control are primarily used for backup protection of generator. Their
application is essential in cases where it is difficult to differentiate between normal overloads (no fault
condition) and abnormal operating conditions (faults), on the basis of current sensing only. Since the
system voltage drops considerably during faulted conditions, the system voltage along with the current
would give a clear indication of the operating state of the system.
Relays with Voltage Restraint / Control have a voltage input (from a PT) and a current input (from a CT).
The operating characteristics of these devices are a function of both voltage and current. Depending upon
the sensed voltage, the TCC of the device is modified to adjust the sensitivity of the relay.

Note: The connection type of the PT (L-L or L-G) and the fault type affect the value of the voltage sensed
from the input.
The settings for voltage-controlled and voltage-restrained overcurrent relay types are described below.
Voltage
Check this box to enable Voltage Restraint / Control element.
Voltage Setting
Select and display the setting in volts, multiples or percent based on library selection.
Voltage Control
Enter the voltage control setting for the selected voltage setting. The voltage setting can be discrete values
or continuously adjustable. The units can be in volts or multiples/percent of the PT secondary rating.
In these types of devices, the operating torque is controlled by the voltage element. The voltage setting on
this element can be adjusted over a range. When the input voltage (from the system) is above the voltage
setting, the relay does not operate, regardless of the current magnitude. When the voltage falls below the
setting, the overcurrent relay operates according to its normal TCC. A clear distinction can thus be made
between normal no-fault conditions and abnormal, faulted conditions.
During the Sequence of Operation Analysis, the voltage measured through the PT input will be compared
to the Voltage Control settings. If the measured voltage is below the setting, the relay will use the 51
curve. However, if the measured voltage is above the setting, the relay will ignore the 51 curve.
Note: If no PT is connected or no PT ratio defined, then the 51 operation will ignore the voltage control
settings.
Voltage Restraint

Enter the voltage restraint setting for the selected voltage setting. The voltage setting can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. The units can be in volts or multiples/percent of the PT secondary
rating.
A restraining coil takes the voltage input in these types of devices. The voltage on this restraining coil, as
the name suggests, produces a (restraining) torque that opposes the operating torque produced by the
current coil. This restraining torque is proportional to the voltage on the restraining coil and it effectively
controls the pickup current of the relay. The current required to operate the relay for a particular tap
setting drops with a corresponding drop in the restraining voltage. During faulted conditions, the system
voltage drops significantly, with a subsequent drop in the restraining voltage, thus making the relay more
sensitive.
The voltage setting on the restraining coil can be varied over a range. The relation between the voltage on
the restraining coil (as percentage of the setting) and the pickup current of the relay (as percent of the tap
setting) is typically piecewise linear. These characteristics are pre-defined and selectable in the
overcurrent relay library. A typical restraint characteristic is shown below.
Typical Restraint characteristic
110
Pickup as % of Tap setting
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Voltage as % of setting
During the Sequence of Operation Analysis, the voltage measured through the PT input will be compared
to the Voltage Restraint settings and the percentage is calculated. The pickup of the 51 curve will then be
adjusted according to the linear characteristic of the device, and the trip time will be determined using this
adjusted curve.
Note: If no PT is connected or no PT ratio defined, then the 51 operation will ignore the voltage restraint
settings.
An example of Voltage restraint characteristic plotted in STAR View for GE Multilin 750/760 relay is
shown below.


12.6.6 Overload (OLR) Page
Library Info
Library
To access the Overload/Motor relay library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button

Curve Display
Integrated Curves
Check this box to integrate the Thermal and Instantaneous curves.
Load Parameters
The parameters such as full load amperes and lock rotor current, for a connected load or a user-defined
load can be defined in this section, the default being set to the Connected Load option.
Connected load
The Connected Load option retrieves the parameters for the connected load protected by the overload
relay.
Load ID
The Load ID field is displayed only when the Connected Load option is selected. It displays the ID of the
connected load protected by overload relay.

User Defined
The User Defined option allows the user to enter parameters for defining the load.
FLA
The FLA field displays the full load amperes for the Connected Load or entered full load amperes in case
of the User Defined load. The FLA field is grayed out and is non-editable when the connected load option
is selected.
%LRC
The % LRC field displays the locked rotor current in percent for the connected load or entered % locked
rotor current for the User-defined load. The %LRC field is grayed out and non-editable when the
connected load option is selected. For Connected loads, the % LRC field is displayed only for motor
loads.
Overload Elements
The different elements for overload function are Thermal, Acceleration, Instantaneous, Jam and Ground.
These elements are defined as separate tabs on the Overload page. The selection of relay determines the
overload element tabs that will be displayed.
Thermal (49) Settings
The settings for thermal trip unit can be entered in the Thermal element tab.

Thermal
Check the box to enable the parameters for the thermal trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the thermal curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the thermal element. The trip ranges can be
specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating or the full load
amperes of the protected device.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the Thermal trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Multiplier
Select and display the Time Multiplier for the selected curve type. The time multiplier can be discrete
Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the time multiplier
can be specified as Heating Time constant, t6x time, Curve multiplier, Stall time, etc. If the time
multiplier data is not defined for a selected relay from the relay library, then the time multiplier field is
not displayed.
k Multiplier
Select and display the k Multiplier for the selected curve type. The k multiplier can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. Based on the value defined for the k multiplier in the OLR editor, the min
multiple for the curve in Star will be shifted by 1.0001 * K.
Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the k multiplier can
be specified as k factor, Overload Constant (k) etc. If the k multiplier data is not defined for a selected
relay from the relay library, then the k multiplier field is not displayed.
Acceleration Settings
The settings for Acceleration trip unit can be entered in the Acceleration element tab.

Acceleration
Check the box to enable the parameters for the acceleration trip unit.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the acceleration curve type for the selected relay.
Trip Range
Select from the drop-down list and display the trip range for the acceleration element. The trip ranges can
be specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating or the full
load amperes of the protected device or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
For the selected trip range, select or enter the Acceleration trip setting. The trip setting can be discrete
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Multiplier
Select and display the Time Multiplier for the selected curve type. The time multiplier can be discrete
Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the time multiplier
can be specified as Heating Time constant, t6x time, Curve multiplier, Stall time, etc. If the time
multiplier data is not defined for a selected relay from the Relay Library, then the time multiplier field is
not displayed.
k Multiplier
Select and display the k Multiplier for the selected curve type. The k multiplier can be discrete values or
continuously adjustable. Based on the value defined for the k multiplier in the OLR editor, the min
multiple for the curve in Star will be shifted by 1.0001 * K.

Note: The field display and name is controlled from the Relay Library. For example, the k multiplier can
be specified as k factor, Overload Constant (k) etc. If the k multiplier data is not defined for a selected
relay from the relay library, then the k multiplier field is not displayed.
Instantaneous
Trip Range
specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating, the full load
amperes of the protected device, or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
Select or enter the element trip setting for the selected trip range. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
the value selected.
Jam (50)

Trip Range
ranges can be specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating,
the full load amperes of the protected device, or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
the value selected.

Ground Settings
Trip Range
ranges can be specified in amperes or as multiples/percent of the relay current rating, CT primary rating,
the full load amperes of the protected device, or Thermal (49) pickup.
Trip
Select or enter the element trip setting from the selected trip range. The trip setting can be discrete values
Trip Amps
Prim. Amps
Time Delay
the value selected.

12.6.7 Differential (DIF) Page Protective
The DIF page provides the means to model a differential relay. The differential trip is considered in Arc
Flash evaluation study as well as Star PD Sequence-of-Operation analysis.
Library

To access the Differential relay library data, click on the Library button. Clicking the Library button
displays the Relay Library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the relay by highlighting the
Differential Type
If not, the differential relay is selected from the library the Differential Type selection can be Percentage
or High Impedance. For relay libraries with Differential element this field will be display only.
Differential
Operating Time
This is a user-definable operating time for differential trip in seconds. Note that the differential
box must be checked in order for the differential relay to be considered in the studies.
Differential Relay Model for SQOP

In ETAP, Differential Relays operate by comparing the difference of currents. The program utilizes the
positive sequence currents I1 to determine if the fault is placed inside the zone of protection of the
differential relay. The program collects the necessary currents from the connected current transformers;
however, it neglects the current transformer turn ratio. If the difference in the positive sequence currents
is zero, then this indicates that the fault is external and the relay does not trip. If the difference in the
positive sequence current is not equal to zero the differential relay will trip. This is the case for internal
faults.
The ETAP Differential Relay model has the capability to operate for unbalanced faults as well (Line-to-
Ground). Since the differential relay model can detect the direction of positive sequence current flows and
also the phase shift angles associated with unbalanced faults, it can determine whether the LG fault is
internal or external as long as there is positive sequence current flow. If the system is ungrounded (i.e. 3Io
= 0 kA), then there is no positive sequence current flow and the relay does not trip. Line-to-Line and
Line-to-Line-ground faults are not considered by the sequence of operation model.

This algorithm can be considered a generic model for simulating the operation of differential relays, and it
will work well for 3-phase and Line-to-Ground faults as long as the following conditions are met:
The Current Transformer (CT) polarities must be pointing away from the element which they
protect. For example, if the relay is a bus differential, then all CT polarity markings must be
pointing away from the protected bus. If the CT polarities are not configured as shown in the
images below, then it is possible that the relay will trip on external faults as may be the case in
real life operation of differential relays.
Bus Differential CT Polarity

Transformer Differential CT Polarity Configuration
All the CTs must be connected to the differential relay and all the circuit breakers must be
interlocked to the device as well. The differential relay will not operate if it only has one current
transformer connected to its input. It needs at least two CT connections to operate.
The differential relay operating time must be specified. The default value is zero seconds.
However, it is recommended that you enter a value between 10 to 30 msec. This value should be
obtained from the relay manufacturer documentation and it should be applied in a conservative
fashion. The differential relay operating time may change depending on the severity of the fault.
The operating time of a differential relay may be a lot higher for unbalanced faults. The longest
possible operating time should be used.

The total fault clearing time for a differential relay will be the sum of the Operating time plus the
breaker time. In the case of three cycle breakers, the FCT = 0.020 + (3/60) = 0.070 sec.
The selection of Percentage or High Impedance from the Differential Type drop-down list does
not make any difference in the way the program determines if the fault is internal or external to
the differential relay. This field will be utilized in future versions of the sequence of operation
program as the internal operation of the differential relay is modeled.
Relay Library Quick Pick
The Relay Library Quick Pick allows the selection and setting of single or multiple function relays with
different protection types. Relays of all function and protection types such as overcurrent relay,
differential relay, overload and motor protection relays are stored in the same library and can be selected

from same Quick Pick. The Quick pick also allows selection of relays by filtering them on basis of
Protection Type and Function Type.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
Displays a list of all relay manufacturers included in the library. Select the manufacturer by highlighting
Lock
Reference
Displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example, GE
Industrial Systems is the reference manufacturer for GE Multilin.
Link
Model
Model Name
Displays a list of all relay models or models filtered as per selection criteria, for the selected
manufacturer.
Lock
Functions
This displays all functions associated with selected relay model.
Reference
Displays the reference, if available, for the selected model. For example model reference for ABB SPAM
150C relay is SPCJ 4D34.
Brand Name
Application
For Multi-Function relay, the relay selection in the Quick Pick is defaulted to Show all models allowing
the selection of relays with multiple functions and protection types. Furthermore, if the relay selected is
only for Overcurrent protection, the Multi-Function relay editor displays only the overcurrent page and
changes the element symbol to an Overcurrent relay (OCR). If the relay selected is only for motor
protection, the Multi-Function relay editor displays only the overload page and changes the element
symbol to a Motor relay (MR).

Alternatively, if you drop an Overcurrent relay (OCR) element on the one-line view, the relay selection in
the Quick Pick is defaulted to filter by Overcurrent function. This allows selection of all overcurrent
function relays.
If you drop a Motor Relay (MR) element on the one-line view, the relay selection in the Quick Pick is
defaulted to filter by Motor protection type. This allows selection of only motor protection relay models.

12.6.8 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined

Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the relay curves in Star View are specified in the TCC

option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for Short Circuit Current for IEC
standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The Asym. RMS option will display the corresponding
Terminal
The Terminal displays the relay terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground, Sen. Ground or CT input) for the selected
relay and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected relay and
is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the relay based on the type and
location of the CT connected to the relay.

kA (3-Phase Fault)
For the Calculated option, this field displays the 3-phase symmetrical or asymmetrical cycle short-
circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
standard. For the User-Defined option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
For the Calculated option, this field displays the line-to-ground symmetrical or asymmetrical cycle
short-circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.

Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the STAR Mode Short-Circuit.
For the User-Defined option Base kV is editable.
Note: The selected device curve is plotted in reference to its base kV value. For example, if a device base
kV equals 4 and the Star View plot kV is set to 4.16, the device curve will be shifted by a factor of Base
kV/Plot kV or 0.962.

Terminal
The Terminal displays the relay terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground, Sen. Ground or CT input) for the selected
relay and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected relay and
is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the relay based on the type and
location of the CT connected to the relay.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
standard and minimum initial symmetrical or minimum steady state current based on the selection for
minimum short circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-Defined
option, the 3-Phase Fault kA field is editable.

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star view.
minimum short circuit current for IEC standard in the Star Mode study case editor. For the User-Defined
option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.
Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the STAR Mode Short-Circuit.
kV equals 4 and the STAR View plot kV is set to 4.16, the device curve will be shifted by a factor of
Base kV/Plot kV or 0.962.

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the
selected relay. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.

12.6.9 Model Info Page
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected relay model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected relay model.
Brand Name

Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected relay model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected relay model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected relay model.
Application

12.6.10 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.

Checked by
User Name
Date
User-Defined Info





UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



AC Elements Voltage Relay
12.7 Voltage Relay Editor Overview

The properties associated with voltage relays are specified in Voltage Relay Editor.
Voltage relays can be used in transient stability study and Star SQOP. According to the specified circuit
breaker control interlock functions and settings, transient stability program will check the monitored
system quantities and compare them with the relay settings. When the control conditions are met, the
associated control actions will be triggered.
For Star SQOP, if the voltage setting and/or the voltage restraint conditions are met, the voltage relay will
trip and the associated tripping information will be displayed in the Output Report.
Voltage relays should be connected to a bus via a potential transformer.
The Voltage Relay Editor contains four pages of information.
Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.7.1 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each voltage relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
voltage relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of voltage
relays increase. The default voltage relay ID (VR) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu
PT
Displays the connected PT ID.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a voltage relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service voltage relay can be edited like an In Service voltage
relay; however, an Out of Service voltage relay will not display results of any system studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service voltage relay automatically becomes grayed out in the
one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a voltage relay to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

12.7.2 Setting Page
OverVoltage (59) Control Interlock

Set and display the over-voltage control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new over-
voltage control interlock.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
over-voltage control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted over-voltage control interlock.
UnderVoltage (27) Control Interlock

Set and display the under-voltage control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new under-
voltage control interlock.

Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
under-voltage control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted under-voltage control interlock.
Voltage Relay Control Interlock Editor
Setting
Enter the setting for overvoltage or undervoltage control interlock in percent of the selected unit.
Voltage relay setting is based on the nominal bus kV.
Unit
Select the unit for relay setting in V% or V/Hz%.
Note: V/Hz% is not considered in Sequence of Operation.
Circuit Breaker ID
Select the ID of the circuit breaker to be controlled.
Action
Select action type of the circuit breaker, i.e., Open or Close.
Time Delay
This is the time delay of the control action in seconds. The relay action will be reset if the operating
voltage falls within the limit during the time delay period.

12.7.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

12.7.4 Comment Page


AC Elements Frequency Relay
12.8 Frequency Relay

The properties associated with frequency relays are specified in Frequency Relay Editor.
Same as voltage relays, frequency relays can be used in Transient Stability Study. According to the
specified circuit breaker control interlock functions and settings, transient stability program will check the
monitored system quantities and compare them with the relay settings. When the control conditions are
met, the associated control actions will be triggered.
Frequency relays should be connected to a bus via a potential transformer.
The Frequency Relay Editor contains four pages of information.
Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.8.1 Info Page

Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each frequency relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
frequency relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of
frequency relays increase. The default frequency relay ID (FR) can be changed from the Defaults Menu
in the menu bar or from the Project View.
PT
Display the connect PT ID.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a frequency relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service frequency relay can be edited like an In Service
frequency relay; however, an Out of Service frequency relay will not display results of any system
studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service frequency relay automatically becomes
grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a frequency relay to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

12.8.2 Setting Page
Over-Frequency Control Interlock

Set and display the over-frequency control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new
over-frequency control interlock.
Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the properties of an
existing over-frequency control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted over-frequency control interlock.
Under-Frequency Control Interlock

Set and display the under-frequency control interlock data.
Add Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new
under-frequency control interlock.

Edit Button
Click on this button to open the Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an
existing under-frequency control interlock.
Delete Button
Click on this button to delete the highlighted under-frequency control interlock.
Frequency Relay Control Interlock Editor
Setting
Enter the setting for under-frequency or over-frequency relay in percent of the selected unit in this field.
Unit
Select the unit for relay setting in Hz% or Hz/sec% from the drop-down list.
Circuit Breaker ID
Select the ID of the circuit breaker to be controlled from the drop-down list.
Action
Select action type of the circuit breaker, i.e. Open or Closed from the drop-down list.
Time Delay
Enter the time delay of the control action in seconds in this field. The relay action will be reset if the
operating voltage falls within the limit during the time delay period.

12.8.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




UD Field 5

UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

12.8.4 Comment Page


AC Elements Reverse Power Relay
12.9 Reverse Power Relay

The properties associated with reverse power relays of the electrical distribution system can be entered in
this editor.
The Reverse Power Relay Editor includes four pages of properties.
Info Page
Setting Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.9.1 Info Page
Info
ID

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each reverse power relay. The assigned IDs consist of the
default reverse power relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number
of reverse power relay increase. The default reverse power relay ID (RP) can be changed from the
Defaults Menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
CT
Reverse power relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the
other pin can be connected to other current/power relays. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the
terminal of the reverse power relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If
the terminal of a reverse power relay is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the
ID of the CT will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This field displays the relay connected CT ratio.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a reverse power current relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service
or Out of Service options. The properties of an Out of Service reverse power relay can be edited like an
In Service reverse power relay; however, an Out of Service reverse power relay will not display results of
any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service reverse power relay
automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a reverse power relay to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.
Interlock
Add
Click on this button to open the reverse power Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new reverse power
control interlock, including Device type, device ID, and control Action.
Edit
Click on this button to open the reverse power Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing reverse
power control interlock.
Delete
Interlock Editor
Device
Select and display the device to be controlled by the reverse power relay.

ID
Select and display the ID of the interlock device.
Action
Select interlock action (Open or Close).
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

12.9.2 Setting Page
Setting
Real Power
Select this option if real power is used as trip setting. Enter the Pickup power base in MW.
Reactive Power
Select this option if reactive power is used as trip setting. Enter the Pickup power base in Mvar.
Over Power
Over Power (check box)
Check to enable over power trip settings.
Pickup
Enter the setting for over power trip. If the measured power exceeds this value, the relay will trip. The
setting is entered in percentage of the pickup power base.

Time Delay
Enter the intentional relay time delay for over power trip in second.
Under Power
Under Power (checkbox)
Check to enable under power trip settings.
Pickup
Enter the setting for under power trip. If the measured power drops below this value, the relay will trip.
The setting is entered in percentage of the pickup power base.
Time Delay
Enter the intentional relay time delay for under power trip in second.
12.9.3 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info




UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

12.9.4 Comment Page

When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start new paragraph. Standard key combinations
such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information.

AC Elements MV Solid State Trip Relay
12.10 MV Solid State Trip Relay

The properties associated with MV Solid-State Trip Relays of the electrical distribution system can be
entered in this editor. The MV Solid State Trip Relay Editor (MVSST) includes nine pages of properties
and header information.
Info Page
Input Page
Output Page
Setting Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
12.10.1 Header
The header displays the selected MVSST Relay Manufacturer name and Model name on every page of
the MVSST Relay Editor.

12.10.2 Info Page
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each MVSST relay. The assigned IDs consist of the default
MVSST relay ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of MVSST
relays increase. The default MVSST relay ID (SST) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the menu

CT
MVSST relays have two pins, one of which can be connected to a current transformer (CT) and the other
pin can be connected to other current/power relays. A blank entry will be shown for the CT if the
terminal of the MVSST relay is not directly connected to a CT or indirectly through other relays. If the
terminal of a MVSST relay is connected to a CT or to a relay, which is connected to a CT, the ID of the
CT will be displayed for the terminal connection.
Ratio
This field displays the relay connected CT ratio.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a MVSST relay can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service options. The properties of an Out of Service MVSST relay can be edited like an In Service
MVSST relay; however, an Out of Service MVSST relay will not display results of any system studies.
When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service MVSST relay automatically becomes grayed out
in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a MVSST relay to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

12.10.3 Input Page
The Input page is used to define Phase and Ground current transformers inputs to the MV Solid-State Trip
Relay.
Current
Terminal
The Terminal column displays the names of terminals of the MVSST relay for assigning CT inputs. The
terminal names are internally designated as Phase and Ground.
ID

The ID column displays the current transformers identifier that can be assigned to the selected terminal of
the MVSST relay. If the terminal is not connected to any CT, a blank entry will be shown for the
terminal ID. To connect or reconnect a MVSST relay to a CT, select a CT from the list box.
Note: The terminal ID list box only displays those CTs that are connected to the MVSST relay on the
one-line diagram.
Once a terminal ID is selected the type and ratio of the connected CT is displayed for the selected
terminal. By default, the first connected CT is assigned to applicable current terminals of the MVSST
relay.
Type
The Type column displays the type of the connected CT (Phase or Ground).
The following logic is used to allow connection of CT types to the Phase/Ground current Terminals.
Terminal Phase Type CT Ground Type CT
Phase Allowed Not Allowed
Ground Allowed Allowed
Prim. Amp
Prim Amp column displays the primary rating of the connected current transformer.
Sec. Amp
Sec. Amp column displays the secondary rating of the connected current transformer.
If a MVSST relay is not graphically connected to any CT via the one-line diagram, the Prim. Amp and
Sec. Amp values are user-editable.

12.10.4 Output Page
Interlock
Add
Click on this button to open the solid state trip Interlock Editor to set parameters for a new MVSST
control interlock, including Device type, device ID, and control Action.
Edit
Click on this button to open the solid-state trip Interlock Editor and edit the settings of an existing
MVSST control interlock.

Delete
Interlock Editor
Relay Element
Select the solid-state relay element (Phase or Ground) for the tripping action.
Device
Select and display the device to be controlled by the MVSST relay.
ID
Select and display the ID of the interlock device.
Action
Select interlock device action (Open or Close).

12.10.5 Setting Page
Library Info
Library
Click on the Library button to access the MV Solid-State Trip Library data. Clicking the Library button
displays the MVSST Library Quick Pick. From the Library Quick Pick, select the MVSST relay by
highlighting the Manufacturer name and Model name. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the
selected data from the library and transfer it to the editor.

Library Quick Pick

The information available in MV Solid-State Trip Relay Library Quick Pick is described below.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This displays list of manufacturers included in the library. To select a manufacturer, highlight the
manufacturer name.
Reference
This displays the manufacturer reference for the selected manufacturer, if available.
Link
This displays the manufacturer web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
This displays list of models for the selected manufacturer. Select a model by highlighting it.
Reference
This displays the reference for the selected model, if available.

Application
This displays the application of the selected model.
Phase Settings
The Phase element of the MV Solid-State Trip Relay can be set using the Phase page.
Long -Time
Check this box to enable the Long-Time element.
Long -Time Pickup

Select from drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting for the selected curve type. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Long-Time pickup,
the pickup step is displayed next to the Long-Time pickup field.
Curve Type
Select the Curve Type (ANSI MOD, FLAT, I2T, etc.) for the Long-Time band.
Long -Time Band

Select from drop-down list or enter the Long-Time band setting, for the selected curve type. The band
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Long-Time band,
the band step is displayed next to the Long-Time band field.
Short -Time
Check the box to enable the Short-Time element.
Short-Time Pickup
Select from drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting. The pickup settings can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Short-Time pickup, the pickup step is
displayed next to the Short-Time pickup field.
Curve Type (I2t)

Select the Curve Type for the Short-Time band.
Short -Time Band

Select from drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting. The band settings can be discrete values
or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Short-Time band, the band step is displayed next
to the Short-Time band field.
Instantaneous
Check to enable the Instantaneous element.
Instantaneous Pickup
Select from drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting. The pickup settings can be discrete
values or continuously adjustable. The pickup step is displayed next to the Instantaneous pickup field for
continuously adjustable Instantaneous pickup.
Ground Settings
The Ground element of the MV Solid-state trip relay can be set using the Ground page. The Ground page
has a Ground checkbox to enable the parameters for Ground element.

The Long-Time, Short-Time and Instantaneous element settings for Ground are identical to Phase, and
can be set as described above for the Phase element.

12.10.6 TCC kA Page
TCC kA
Calculated
User-Defined

Reference kV
Star View Plot kV.
Calculated
User-Defined

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the MVSST curves in Star View are specified in the TCC

option. Selecting the Sym. RMS option will display the cycle symmetrical current for ANSI standard
and Max or User-defined symmetrical current based on the selection for Short-Circuit Current for IEC
Terminal
The Terminal displays the MVSST terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground or CT input) for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the MVSST based on the type
and location of the CT connected to the MVSST.

kA (3-Phase Fault)
circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow and clip the curve in Star view.
short-circuit current in kA for ANSI standard and Max or User-defined short-circuit current in kA for IEC
standard. For the User-Defined option, the Line-Ground Fault kA field is editable.

Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the Star Mode Short-Circuit.

Terminal
The Terminal displays the MVSST terminals (i.e. Phase, Ground or CT input) for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable.
CT ID
The CT ID displays the ID of the current transformers assigned to the terminals for the selected MVSST
and is non-editable. The short-circuit kA of for faulted buses are passed to the MVSST based on the type
and location of the CT connected to the MVSST.

Select the Show on TCC check box to enable the 3-phase fault arrow in STAR view.
kA (3-Phase Fault)
minimum short circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-

Select the Show on TCC checkbox to enable the line-ground fault arrow in Star view.
minimum short circuit current for IEC Standard in the Star Mode Study Case Editor. For the User-
Base kV
The Base kV for the Calculated option is display only and calculated from the Star Mode Short-Circuit.

Select this option to disable updating of the system-calculated short-circuit kA values only for the
selected MVSST. Note Base kV values will be updated regardless of pinned status.
.

Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected MV Solid-State Trip Relay model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This displays the model reference, if available, for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Brand Name
This displays the brand name, if available, for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.

Catalog #
This displays the catalog number for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Issue Date
This displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Description
This displays the description for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.
Application
This displays the application for the selected MV solid-state trip relay model.

Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by

User Name
Date

User-Defined Info




UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



AC Elements Tag Link
12.11 Tag Link
The properties associated with a Tag Link of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor. The Tag Link is an element used by ETAP Real-time module only to display monitored data not
related to state estimation. It can also be used to send commands out to control specific devices.
When you double click on the Tag Link icon, the Real Time Tag Link Database Path editor may appear if
no tag database is associated with this project Otherwise the Tag link editor opens.
The Tag Link Editor includes one page of properties and header information.

12.11.1 Info Page
ID
Enter a unique ID name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Type
Click the check box to specify if the meter or other monitoring device uses control.
Digital or Analog
Click the appropriate button to specify if the monitoring device is digital or analog.
Display
Enter the text to be displayed, using up to 32 characters
Font
These fields display the currently selected font, its style and size.

Font button
Click this button and the Font editor appears, allowing you to specify a font, its style and size. The
Sample area shows the fonts appearance. The Pull-down Script list below Sample allows you to choose a
script option.
Symbol
Type the path to the Tag link device, or click the Browse button to navigate to the device and set the path
in this manner.
DCS Tag
The DCS tag appears in this field.
Digital
If the Digital button is checked, the Digital area appears and allows you to edit the status and alert
indicators.

Online Status
The status of the Tag link device appears in this field.
True
Enter a description of the True condition in this field, using up to 20 characters.
False
Enter a description of the False condition in this field, using up to 20 characters.
Alerts
Use this area to define the alert indicators.
True
Use this area to specify the sound and color to be assigned to this alert condition.
Sound
Type a file name or navigate to .WAV alert sound for the True condition.
Color
Select a color for the True condition from the drop-down list.
False
Use this area to specify the sound and color to be assigned to this alert condition.
Sound
Type a file name or navigate to a .WAV alert sound for the False condition.
Color
Select a color for the False condition from the drop-down list.
Analog
If the Analog button is checked, the Analog area appears and allows you to edit the Upper and Lower
bound ranges and their alert indicators. You can also specify a color for the Between Bounds alert.
Format
Select the format from the drop-down list.
Multiplier

The multiplier appears in this field.
Unit
Check the box to display the unit name and type an identifier in the field, using up to 10 characters.
Online Value
Enter Online value in this field, using up to 20 characters.
Control Value
The Control value will be displayed in this field.
Alerts
Specify the upper, lower, and between bounds ranges, sounds and colors in this area.
Upper Bound
Specify the Upper bound range in this field, using up to 6 characters.
Sound
Color
Select a color for the Upper Bound from the drop-down list.
Lower Bound
Specify the lower bound range in this field, using up to 6 characters.
Sound
Color
Select a color for the Lower Bound from the drop-down list.
Between Bounds
Select a color for the Between Bounds alert from the drop-down list.

Chapter 13
AC-DC Elements
Editors are available for each element type in the one-line diagram and in the underground raceway
system. Except for the element IDs, bus connections, and status, all other data that appear in the editors
are considered engineering properties.
One-Line Diagram Element Editors

Each element available on the One-Line Diagram toolbar has a customized editor. This chapter addresses
the AC-DC Element Editors:
AC-DC Elements
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
VFD (Variable Frequency Drive)
Charger
Inverter

AC-DC Elements UPS
13.1 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)

The properties associated with an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) of the electrical system can be
entered in this editor. A UPS consists of two AC terminals (input & output) and one DC terminal. The
DC terminal is located on the side and can be connected to a DC bus (node).
The UPS Editor contains the following nine pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
SC Imp Page
Duty Cycle Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.1.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the UPS ID, connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, AC Connections, and Demand Factor.

AC-DC Elements UPS
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters. ETAP automatically assigns a unique
ID to each UPS. The default IDs consist of the word UPS plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of UPS increases.
The default ID (UPS) for UPS elements can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
In Bus, Out Bus and DC Bus

These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the UPS. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a UPS to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the UPS to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that reside in the Dumpster.

AC-DC Elements UPS
If a UPS is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the UPS to a new
bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where
Ups1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV in AC terminal buses and nominal V in DC terminal buses next to the bus
ID for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a UPS can be selected by clicking on the button for either the In Service or
Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service UPS can be edited like an In Service UPS;
however, an Out of Service UPS will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service UPS automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is an engineering property and is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a UPS to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the UPS(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options
for operating status include:

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the UPS is
determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the UPS engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the UPS status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a UPS is

AC-DC Elements UPS
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types and you can change their name from the
Priority
Select the load priority of this UPS from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priority names
can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
AC Connection
3-Phase
For this release of ETAP, the connection type for the AC input is set to 3-Phase.
1-Phase
For this release of ETAP, there is no output from the UPS model.
Demand Factor
The Demand factor is the amount of time the UPS is actually operating. The Demand factor affects the
calculation of UPS loads for different Loading Categories.
Load kW = Rated kW * % Loading * Demand Factor
The Demand factors for Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare status have a range from 0% to 100%. Since

AC-DC Elements UPS
13.1.2 Rating Page

You can specify the UPS ratings and select the UPS Operating Mode and type in this page.
AC Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the UPS (output power at full load). Click on the kW/MW button to choose either
kW or MW units for entering and displaying output power ratings of the UPS. When the kW rating is
modified, the rated power factor (including the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories) is
recalculated in order to keep the rated kVA fixed. ETAP limits the entry of kW/MW in such a way that
the power factor cannot exceed 100% or be below 1%.
kVA
Enter the rated output kVA (or MVA) of the UPS. When the kVA rating is modified, the rated kW and
full load current of the UPS are recalculated.
% Eff

AC-DC Elements UPS
Enter the rated efficiency of the UPS in percent. When the efficiency is modified, the full load currents
for the AC input and DC sides are recalculated. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It
defaults to 90%.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the UPS output power. When the power factor is modified, the rated kW
is recalculated. Power factor cannot exceed 100%. It defaults to 85%.
Output
kV
Enter the rated AC output voltage of the UPS in kV. The rated AC output full load current is calculated
based on this value.
FLA
The rated AC output full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
Input
kV
Enter the rated AC input voltage of the UPS in kV. The rated AC input full load current is calculated
based on this value.
FLA
The rated AC input full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
DC Rating
V
Enter the rated DC input voltage of the UPS in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated based
on this value.
FLA
The rated DC full load current of the UPS in amperes is displayed here.
Imax
Enter the maximum DC output current of the UPS in percentage of the rated DC full load current. The
UPS becomes a constant current source when the DC load current exceeds the Imax in DC Load Flow
Studies. ETAP uses Imax as the constant current source value. Imax defaults to 150%.
Operating Mode
Constant Vdc
When you select this option, the rated DC voltage is used as the regulated voltage source of the UPS for
DC Load Flow Studies. With this option, the firing angle is adjusted to keep the DC voltage constant.
Fixed Firing Angle

AC-DC Elements UPS
When you select this option, the DC voltage of the UPS (for DC Load Flow Studies) is calculated using a
fixed value for the firing angle (Alpha) and the input bus voltage.
Vdc
This field displays the DC voltage source of the UPS in volts.
Alpha
Enter the fixed firing angle (Alpha) of the UPS in degrees for the calculation of the voltage source value.
This field allows you to enter a value between 0 and 90 degrees, which means the UPS can only transfer
power from its AC terminal to the DC terminal. The DC output voltage is proportional to cosine of alpha.
Options
Auction Diode
When the Auction Diode option is selected, the UPS is treated as a DC load in the DC system, i.e., DC
power can only flow into the UPS. In this case, the UPS will not provide power to the DC system for
Load Flow or Short-Circuit Studies.
Without the auction diode, DC power can flow in or out of the UPS.
Bypass Switch
The Bypass Switch only affects AC Short-Circuit Studies. When the Bypass Switch is selected, the UPS
is treated as a shorted branch crossed between AC input and output terminals. If Bypass Switch is not
selected, there is no short-circuit current contribution from the AC output side to the input side.

AC-DC Elements UPS
13.1.3 Loading Page

In this page, specify the percent output loading of the UPS for all Loading Categories. The kW and kvar
input load of the UPS based on the specified efficiency and power factor are calculated and displayed
here. Also, the DC operating load and losses in kW are displayed here.
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for AC loading
and DC loading of this UPS, i.e., each UPS can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
Loading Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the
% Loading column. Note that you can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting AC or
DC Load Flow Studies. To edit the Loading Category names, select Loading Category from the Project
menu.
Operating Load
AC Input

AC-DC Elements UPS
This area displays the updated AC input operating load of the UPS in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar when DC
Load Flow Studies are run and Update Operating Load is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case
Editor. These values will also get updated when the UPS output is connected to an AC system and AC
Load Flow Studies are run with Update Operating Load selected in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
AC Output
This area displays the updated AC output operating load of the UPS in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar when
Update Operating Load is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor, or when the UPS output is
connected to an AC system and the Update Operating Load option is selected in the AC Load Flow Study
Case Editor.
DC
This area displays the updated DC operating load of the UPS in kW or MW. It is updated when you run
DC Load Flow Studies and the UPS do not have an auction diode and the Update Operating Load option
is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.

AC-DC Elements UPS
13.1.4 SC Imp Page

Within the SC Imp page, specify the AC and DC short-circuit multiplication factors and the grounding
resistance of the UPS, and view calculated AC and DC short-circuit contribution currents.
SC Contribution to AC System
Kac
Enter the AC short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the output FLA. ETAP uses this value to
calculate short-circuit current contribution from the UPS to the AC output side. The AC multiplication
factor defaults to 150%.
Isc
The AC short-circuit current contribution from the UPS to the output side is calculated and displayed here
in amperes.
SC Contribution to DC System

AC-DC Elements UPS
Kdc
Enter the DC short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of DC FLA. ETAP uses this value to calculate
short-circuit current contribution from the UPS in DC Short-Circuit Studies. The DC multiplication
factor defaults to 150%.
Isc
The DC short-circuit current contribution from the UPS is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
DC Grounding
Grounded
When you select the Grounded option, the UPS is grounded.
R
Enter the UPS grounding resistance in ohms. For a solidly grounded UPS, enter zero for the grounding
resistance.

AC-DC Elements UPS
13.1.5 Duty Cycle Page

Within the Duty Cycle page, specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle.
ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The data in
this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
Based on Amp/%Loading
This option specifies how the duty cycle is specified. When the Amp option is selected, the duty cycle is
specified as amperes and the %Load will be calculated. When the %Load option is selected, the duty
cycle is specified as percentage of FLA and the ampere values will be calculated.
The selection of this option also determines the column to be updated when the load FLA is changed.
When the Amp option is selected, if the load FLA is changed, the %Load column will be updated
according to the Amp values specified. In contrast, when the %Load option is selected, if the load FLA is
changed, the Amp column will be updated according to the %Load values specified.

AC-DC Elements UPS
Duty Cycle Category

Select a Duty Cycle Category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each load can
have up to five Duty Cycle Categories with independent load profiles. You can name the Duty Cycle
Categories from the Project menu bar.
Load Profile
To add a load to the load profile, click on either the Ins or Add button, or click the Insert key to create a
row in the load profile table. Each row represents a segment of the load profile for this duty cycle.
To edit the load profile, click on the button under the Active column, and this segment of load will be
considered in studies. Click on the button under the Random column, and this segment of load will be
treated as a random load in studies. Click on the field under the Type column and pick one of the seven
types in the list box. Enter a load name, current in amperes, start time in seconds, and duration in seconds
for this segment of load. After the data of a row is entered, this segment of load curve will be drawn on
the Non-Random or Random window.
To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking the number of the row, then click on the Del button
or click the Delete key.
Click on either the <-Print or Print-> button, and the displayed load profile curve (random & non-
random) for the selected duty cycle will be printed out.
Note: You can select any of the Duty Cycle Categories when conducting Battery Sizing Studies. To edit
the Loading Category names, select Duty Cycle Category from the Project menu.

AC-DC Elements UPS

Within the Harmonic page, specify the harmonic source type of the UPS and view the harmonic source
waveform and frequency spectrum of the UPS.
Harmonic Library
Library
UPS Parameters
injection angle of the device. When this option is selected, the Library group is grayed out and the
Parameters
Pulse #
Select the converter pulse modulation.
Shift Angle

AC-DC Elements UPS
Pulse Shift Angle

12 30
24 15
48 7.5
Note: The phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model for 6 pulse.
Alpha
Enter the rectifiers firing angle.
Beta
Xc%
Enter the commutation reactance in percent of the rated reactance.
Max Order
Maximum harmonic order to be modeled

AC-DC Elements UPS
A
This is the Active Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Active Failure Rate is associated with
the Component Failure Mode that causes the operation of the primary protection zone around the failed
component and can therefore cause the removal of other healthy components and branches from service.
It should be noted that the failed component itself (and those components that are directly connected to it)
could be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.
This is Mean Repair Rate in number of repairs per year is automatically calculated and based on MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
FOR

AC-DC Elements UPS
This is the Forced Outage Rate (i.e., unavailability) calculated based on MTTR, A
(FOR = MTTR/(MTTR+8760/A).
MTTF
This is the Mean Time To Failure in years is automatically calculated and based on A (MTTF = 1.0/A).
MTTR
This is the Mean Time To Repair in hours is the expected time necessary for a crew to repair a failed
component and/or restore the system to its normal operating state.
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is time in hours necessary to isolate a failure. It is the period of time starting from the moment a
switching operation is requested until the operation is completed.
Replacement
Available
rP
This is the replacement time in hours needed to replace a failed component with a spare.
Library
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the Load Sector name for the load. The Load Sector information is used to obtain interruption cost
information from the Reliability Cost library in order to calculate Expected Interruption Costs.

AC-DC Elements UPS
13.1.8 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




AC-DC Elements UPS

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

AC-DC Elements UPS
13.1.9 Comment Page


AC-DC Elements VFD
13.2 VFD (Variable Frequency Drive)

The properties associated with VFDs (Variable Frequency Drive) of the electrical system can be entered
in this editor.
The Variable Frequency Drive Editor contains the following five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.2.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the VFD ID, Connected Bus and Load IDs, In/Out of Service, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, and Load Priority.

AC-DC Elements VFD
Info
ID
ID to each VFD. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of VFDs increases.
The default ID (VFD) for VFD elements can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Input Bus and Load

These are the IDs of the connecting bus and load for the VFD. If the terminal is not connected to any bus
or load, a blank entry will be shown for the bus or load ID. To connect or reconnect a VFD to a bus,
click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the VFD to AC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.
Note: The output terminal of a VFD can only be connected directly to induction motors, synchronous
motors, and lumped loads. You cannot insert any switching devices between the VFD and the connected
load.
If a VFD is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the VFD to a new
bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below where
Vfd1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV next to the bus ID for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a VFD can be selected by clicking on the button for either the In Service or Out
of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service UPS can be edited like an In Service VFD;

AC-DC Elements VFD
however, an Out of Service VFD will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service VFD automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set a VFD to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types and you can change their name from the
Priority
Select the load priority of this VFD from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating

AC-DC Elements VFD
13.2.2 Rating Page

In this page, you can specify the VFD ratings and select the VFD bypass switch.
Rating
HP/kW
Enter the VFD rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options by clicking on
the HP/kW button.
kV
Enter the rated voltage of the VFD in kV.
% Eff
Enter the efficiency of the VFD in percent. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. ETAP uses this value to
calculate the losses of the VFD. Losses associated with VFDs are included as part of the connected load.
Bypass Switch

AC-DC Elements VFD
The Bypass Switch only affects AC Short-Circuit Studies. When Bypass Switch is selected, the VFD is
treated as a shorted branch (switch) crossed between input and output terminals. If Bypass Switch is not
selected, there is no short-circuit current contribution from the connected motor to the input side.
Rated Load
In this group the kVA, kW, kvar, and %PF are displayed of the motor directly connected to this VFD.

AC-DC Elements VFD

You can specify the harmonic source type of the VFD, and display the harmonic source waveform and
frequency spectrum of the UPS within the Harmonic page.
Harmonic Library
Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the VFD harmonic source data including harmonic source type,
device type, and manufacture/model.

AC-DC Elements VFD
Type
This area displays the VFD harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the VFD device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the VFD Manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This area displays the harmonic source waveform of the VFD.
Spectrum
This area displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the VFD.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the VFD.
VFD Parameters
Parameters
Pulse #
Shift Angle

AC-DC Elements VFD
Pulse Shift Angle

12 30
24 15
48 7.5
For 6 pulse, the phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model.
Alpha
Beta
Xc%
Max Order

AC-DC Elements VFD
A
can be restored to service only after repair or replacement of the failed component.
P
This is the Passive Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Passive Failure Rate is associated with
a Component Failure Mode that does not cause the operation of the primary protection zone around the
failed component, and therefore, does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components and
branches of the system. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.
This is the Mean Repair Rate in number of repairs per year is automatically calculated and based on
MTTR ( = 8760/MTTR).

AC-DC Elements VFD
FOR
MTTF
MTTR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
This is the time in hours necessary to isolate a failure. It is the period of time starting from the moment a
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library

AC-DC Elements VFD
13.2.5 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




AC-DC Elements VFD
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

AC-DC Elements VFD
13.2.6 Comment Page


AC-DC Elements Charger
13.3 Charger
The properties associated with DC chargers of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The Charger Editor contains the following eight pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
SC Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.3.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the Charger ID, Connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder)
Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, Operating Type, and Demand
Factor.

Info
ID
ID to each charger. The default IDs consist of the word charger plus an integer, starting with the number
one and increasing as the number of chargers increases.
The default ID (Charger) for chargers can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
AC Bus and DC Bus

These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the charger. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a charger to a bus, select a bus from
Note: You can connect the terminals of the charger to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view where
it resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.
If a charger is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the charger to a
new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Charger1 is reconnected from Bus10 to Bus4.
ETAP displays the nominal kV of the AC terminal bus and nominal V of the DC terminal bus next to the
bus ID for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a charger can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service charger can be edited like an In Service charger; however, an
Out of Service charger will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service charger automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.

Note that the In/Out of Service option is an engineering property and is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a charger to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the charger(s) for the selected configuration status from the list box.

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the charger is
determined for AC Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the charger engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the charger status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a charger
is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency configuration.
Connection
3-Phase
For this release of Power Station the 3-phase connection type cannot be selected by the user, but it used
by ETAP to model the device.
1-Phase
For this release of Power Station the 1-phase connection type cannot be selected by the user.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type

the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types and you can change their name from the
Priority
Select the load priority of this charger from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
Type
Select operating type as charger or converter.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the charger is actually operating. Demand factors affect the
calculation of the charger load.
Load kW = Rated kVA * PF * % Loading * Demand Factor

Load kvar = Rated kVA * RF * % Loading * Demand Factor
Where the PF & RF are rated power factor and reactive factor of the charger.

13.3.2 Rating Page

In this page, you can specify the charger ratings and DC voltage limits, and select the Charger Operating
Mode.
AC Rating
kVA
Enter the kVA rating of the charger. Click on the kVA/MVA button to choose from kVA and MVA units
for entering and displaying kW/MW and kvar/Mvar data of the charger. When the value of the kVA is
modified, the rated DC power, rated DC full load current, rated AC full load current and the operating
load and losses for all Loading Categories of the charger are recalculated.
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the charger in kV. The rated AC full load current is calculated based on
this value.
FLA

Enter the rated AC full load current of the charger in amperes. When the rated AC full load current is
modified, the rated kVA, rated efficiency and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of
the charger are recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of rated AC full load current in such a way that the
rated efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.
% Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the charger in percent. The rated kVA, rated AC full load current, and the
operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of the charger are recalculated when the efficiency is
modified. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It defaults to 90%.
% PF
Enter the rated power factor of the charger in percent. When the power factor is modified, the rated kVA,
rated AC full load current, rated firing angle, and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories
of the charger are recalculated. Power factor cannot exceed 100%. It defaults to 85%.
Alpha
The rated firing angle of the charger is calculated based on the rated power factor is displayed here in
degrees.
DC Rating
kW
Enter the DC kW rating of the charger. When the rated kW is modified, the rated kVA, rated AC full load
current, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of the
charger are recalculated.
V
Enter the rated DC voltage of the charger in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated.
FLA
Enter the rated DC full load current of the charger in amperes. When the rated DC full load current is
modified, the rated DC kW, rated kVA, rated AC full load current, and the operating load and losses for
all Loading Categories of the charger are recalculated.
Imax
Enter the maximum DC output current of the charger in percentage of the rated DC full load current. The
charger becomes a constant current source when DC load current exceeds the Imax in DC load flow
study. ETAP uses Imax as the constant current source value. Imax defaults to 150%.
Operating Mode
Constant Voltage
When you select this option, a constant voltage is used as the voltage source value of the charger in DC
Load Flow Studies. The constant voltage Vdc is calculated as follows:
Select Float: Vdc = V * %Vfloat/100

Select Equalize: Vdc = V * %Veq/100
Fixed Firing Angle

When you select this radio button, the voltage source value of the charger in DC Load Flow Studies is
calculated using a fixed firing angle (Alpha) and the input bus voltage.
DC Voltage
Vdc
Displays the voltage source value of the charger in volts.
Max Limit
The Max Limit Equalize voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be entered when
Equalize is selected. ETAP limits the entry of Vequalize in such a way that Vequalize cannot exceed the
Max. Limit threshold.
The Max Limit Float voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be entered when Float is
selected. ETAP limits the entry of Vfloat in such a way that Vfloat cannot exceed the Max. Limit
threshold.
Min Limit
When Equalize is selected, the Min. Limit Equalize voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts
can be entered. ETAP limits the entry of Vequalize in such a way that Vequalize cannot be less than the
Min. Limit threshold.
When Float is selected, the Min. Limit Float voltage threshold of the charger in percent or volts can be
entered. ETAP limits the entry of Vfloat in such a way that Vfloat cannot be less than the Min. Limit
threshold.

13.3.3 Loading Page

You can specify loading percentage of the charger for all Loading Categories, and view updated AC and
DC operating load from DC Load Flow Studies in this page.
Loading Category
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for the loading
of this charger, i.e., each charger can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading
Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
Loading column. Note that you can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting AC Load
Flow Studies. Select Loading Category from the Project menu to edit the Loading Category names.
Operating Load
AC
Updated AC operating load of the charger in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar is displayed here when Update
Operating Load is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
DC
Updated DC operating load of the charger in kW or MW is displayed here when Update Operating Load
is checked in the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor.

13.3.4 SC Page
You can select the charger short-circuit model, specify AC system short-circuit capacity and impedance
of the charger, and the grounding data within the SC page.
SC Contribution to DC System
Fixed SC Contribution
When you select the Fixed SC Contribution option, the charger is treated as an ideal constant current
source (K * FLAdc/100) in DC Short-Circuit Studies.
Based on AC System Z
When you select the Based on AC System Z option, the charger is treated as a constant voltage source in
DC Short-Circuit Studies.
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent. ETAP uses this value to calculate the constant
current source value for DC Short-Circuit Studies. The multiplication factor defaults to 150%.

Isc (k*FLAdc)
The constant current source (short-circuit contribution) of the charger is calculated and displayed here in
amperes.
AC System Z
MVAsc
When you enter the AC system short-circuit capacity of the charger in MVA, the system short-circuit
impedance, including %R and %X in 100MVA base, are calculated.
X/R
Enter the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance for calculation of the %R and %X.
%R
Enter the resistance R of the system short-circuit impedance in percent (100 MVA base). When R is
modified, the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance is recalculated.
%X
Enter the reactance X of the system short-circuit impedance in percent (100MVA base). When X is
modified, the X/R ratio of the system short-circuit impedance and the system short-circuit capacity are
recalculated.
DC Grounding
Grounded
When you select the Grounded option, the charger is grounded.
Rg
Enter the grounding resistance of the charger in ohms.


You can specify the harmonic source type of the charger and view the harmonic source waveform and
frequency spectrum of the charger within the Harmonic page.
Harmonic Library
Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the charger harmonic source data including harmonic source type,

Type
This area displays the charger harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the charger device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the charger manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This displays the harmonic source waveform of the charger.
Spectrum
This displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the charger.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the charger.
Charger Parameters
Parameters
Pulse #
Shift Angle

Pulse Shift Angle

12 30
24 15
48 7.5
Note: For 6 pulse, the phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model.
Alpha
Xc%
Max Order

A
MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
FOR

MTTF
MTTR
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library
Interruption Cost
Load Sector
Select the Load Sector name for the load. The Load Sector information is used to obtain interruption cost
information from the Reliability Cost library in order to calculate Expected Interruption Costs.

13.3.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

13.3.8 Comment Page


AC-DC Elements Inverter
13.4 Inverter
The properties associated with inverters of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The DC Inverter Editor contains the following eight pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Loading Page
Duty Cycle Page
Harmonic Page
Reliability Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
13.4.1 Info Page

You can specify the ID, Connected Buses, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, and Status within the Info page.

Info
ID
ID to each inverter. The default IDs consist of the word Inv plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of inverters increases.
The default ID (Inv) for inverters can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
DC Bus and AC Bus

These are the IDs of the connecting buses for the inverter. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect an inverter to a bus, select a bus from
Note: You can connect the terminals of the inverter to AC & DC buses that reside in the same view where
it resides, or you can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that are in the Dumpster.
If an inverter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the inverter to
a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Inv1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
ETAP displays the nominal voltage of DC terminal buses and nominal kV of AC terminal bus next to the
bus ID for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of an inverter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service inverter can be edited like an In Service inverter; however, an
Out of Service inverter will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service inverter automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
status. Therefore, you can set an inverter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.

Configuration
Select the operating status of the inverter for the selected configuration status from the list box. Options
for operating status include:

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the inverter is
determined for DC Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the inverter engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the inverter status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status of an
inverter is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the pull-down list. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types and you can change their name from
the Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this inverter from the pull-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from.
Priority names can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Output Connection
Phase
3-phase connection type is available and displayed in this field.

Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the inverter is actually operating. Demand factor affects the

13.4.2 Rating Page

You can specify the inverter ratings, select the AC Output Voltage model, and display the AC short-
circuit current of the inverter in this page.
DC Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the inverter. Click on the kW/MW button to choose between kW and MW units
for entering rated DC power and displaying data for the inverter. When kW rating is modified, the rated
AC kVA, rated DC full load current, rated AC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all
Loading Categories of the inverter are recalculated.
FLA
Enter the rated DC full load current of the inverter in amperes. When the rated DC full load current is
modified, the rated DC power, rated efficiency, and the operating load and losses for all Loading
Categories of the inverter are recalculated. ETAP limits the entry of rated DC full load current in such a
way that the rated efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%.

Imax
Enter the maximum DC input current of the inverter in percentage of the rated DC full load current. Imax
defaults to 150%.
Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the inverter in percent. When the efficiency is modified, the rated DC
power, rated DC full load current, and the DC operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of the
inverter are recalculated. Efficiency cannot exceed 100% or be below 10%. It defaults to 90%.
V
Enter the rated DC voltage of the inverter in volts. The rated DC full load current is calculated from this
value.
Vmax
Enter the maximum DC voltage of the inverter in percent of the rated voltage. It defaults to 110%.
Vmin
Enter the minimum DC voltage of the inverter in percent of the rated voltage. It defaults to 90%.
AC Rating
kVA
Enter the rated AC kVA of the inverter. When the rated AC kVA is modified, the rated AC full load
current, rated DC power, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and losses for all Loading
Categories of the inverter are recalculated.
FLA
Enter the rated AC full load current of the inverter in amperes. When the rated AC full load current is
modified, the rated DC power, rated AC kVA, rated DC full load current, and the operating load and
losses for all Loading Categories of the inverter are recalculated.
kV
Enter the rated AC voltage of the inverter in volts. The rated AC full load current is calculated.
PF
Enter the rated power factor of the inverter in percent. The rated DC power, rated DC full load current,
and the operating load and losses for all Loading Categories of the inverter are recalculated when the
power factor is modified. ETAP limits the entry of power factor in such a way that it cannot exceed Max.
PF or be below Min. PF. It defaults to 85%.
Min. PF
Enter the minimum power factor in percent. It defaults to 80%.
Max. PF
Enter the maximum power factor in percent. It defaults to 100%.
SC Contribution to AC System

Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent. ETAP uses this value to calculate the short-circuit
current contribution from the inverter for AC Short-Circuit Studies. The multiplication factor defaults to
150%.
Isc
The short-circuit current contribution from the inverter (Isc = K * FLAac/100) is calculated and displayed
here in amperes.
AC Output Voltage
Regulate Vac
When you select the Regulate Vac option, the AC output voltage can be regulated to a value other than
the rated AC voltage of the inverter. The regulated voltage is calculated as follows:
Vac = kV * % Adjustment/100 in kV
otherwise, the AC output voltage is regulated at the rated value.
%
Enter the percentage value (% Adjustment) for the calculation of the regulated AC output voltage Vac.
Vac
The regulated AC output voltage of the inverter is calculated and displayed here in kV.

13.4.3 Loading Page

You can specify the loading percent of the inverter for all Loading Categories, and view updated DC and
AC operating load from AC Load Flow Studies in this page.
Loading Category
Loading Category
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for the loading
of this inverter, i.e., each inverter can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading
Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %loading
column.
Note: You can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting AC Load Flow Studies.
To edit the Loading Category names, select Loading Category from the Project menu.
Operating Load
AC
This area displays the updated AC operating load of the inverter in kW/kvar or MW/Mvar when the
Update Operating Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.
DC
This area displays the updated DC operating load of the inverter in kW or MW when Update Operating
Load is checked in the AC Load Flow Study Case Editor.


Within the Duty Cycle page, specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle.
ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The data in
this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.

Duty Cycle Category

Select a Duty Cycle Category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each load can
have up to five Duty Cycle Categories with independent load profiles. You can name the Duty Cycle
Categories from the Project menu bar.
Load Profile
types in the list box.
Enter a load name, current in amperes, start time in seconds, and duration in seconds for this segment of
load. After the data of a row is entered, this segment of load curve will be drawn on the Non-Random or
Random window.


You can specify the harmonic source type of the inverter, and view the harmonic source waveform and
frequency spectrum of the inverter within the Harmonic page.
Harmonic Library
Library
Library Button
Click on the Library button to pick up the inverter harmonic source data including harmonic source type,

Type
This area displays the inverter harmonic source type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Manufacturer
This area displays the inverter device type picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Model
This area displays the inverter Manufacturer/model picked up from the Harmonic Library.
Waveform
This area displays the harmonic source waveform of the inverter.
Spectrum
This area displays the harmonic frequency spectrum of the inverter.
Print Buttons
Click on the Print buttons to print out the waveform or frequency spectrum of the inverter.
Inverter Parameters
Parameters
Pulse #
Shift Angle

Pulse Shift Angle

12 30
24 15
48 7.5
Note: The phase shift is not taken into consideration for the harmonic generation model for 6
pulseBeta
Xc%
Max Order

A
P
This is the Passive Failure Rate in number of failures per year. The Passive Failure Rate is associated
with a Component Failure Mode that does not cause the operation of the primary protection zone around
the failed component, and therefore, does not have an impact on the remaining healthy components and
branches of the system. Repairing or replacing the failed component will restore service.

MTTR
( = 8760/MTTR).
FOR
MTTF
MTTR
The Mean Time To Repair in hours is the expected time necessary for a crew to repair a failed component
Alternative Supply
Switching Time
Replacement
Available
rP
Library
Library

13.4.7 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

13.4.8 Comment Page


Chapter 14
DC Elements
This chapter addresses editors for DC elements. Except for the elements ID, bus connections, and status,
all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties. Each element available on
the One-Line Diagram toolbar has a customized editor.
Bus
Branches
DC Cable
DC Impedance
DC Converter
Sources & Loads

Battery
DC Motor
DC Static Load
DC Lumped Load
DC Composite CSD
Composites
DC Composite Motor
DC Composite Network
Protective Devices
DC Circuit Breaker
DC Fuse
DC Switch, Single-Throw
DC Switch, Double-Throw

DC Elements DC Cable
14.1 DC Bus
The properties associated with DC buses (nodes) of the electrical system can be entered in this Data
Editor.
The DC Bus Editor helps to model different types of buses in an electrical system. The data entered in
the Bus Editor is used when running all types of System Studies. DC Branches, batteries, converters,
motors, static loads, and DC sides of chargers, UPS, and inverters can be graphically connected to any
desired DC bus. ETAP displays all loads that are directly connected to the bus from the Bus Editor.
Note: Protective devices are ignored when ETAP determines the connections to buses.
A bus is defined as a point (node) where one or more branches are connected. A branch can be a cable,
impedance, converter, etc. The minimum amount of data required to define a bus is the bus nominal
voltage, which can be entered in the Info page of the DC Bus Editor.
Buses have two types of graphical presentation, i.e., Bus or Node. You can change a bus to a node or a
node to a bus at any time. This option gives you the flexibility to display the annotations of buses and
nodes differently.
The DC Bus Editor includes four pages of properties:
Info Page
Loading Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.1.1 Info Page

You can specify the Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Nominal kV, Initial/Operating Voltage (Magnitude &
Angle), Diversity Factors (Maximum & Minimum), FDR Tag, and Equipment Name and Description
within the Info page.

Info
ID
ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID dcBus plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.
The default ID (dcBus) for the DC bus can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Nominal V
Enter the nominal voltage of the bus in DC volts (V) in this field. This is a required input entry, which is
used by ETAP to convert the final bus voltages to the percent values for graphical display and output
reports, i.e., bus Nominal V is used as the base voltage for the reported percent values.
Note: The nominal voltage and actual base voltage of a bus can be different values. ETAP calculates
base voltages of buses internally.
In/Out of Service
The operating condition of a bus can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In Service or
Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited like an In Service bus;
however, an Out of Service bus will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, an Out of Service bus automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads

and branches that are energized solely through an Out of Service bus will also be de-energized and
become grayed out.
Initial Voltage
%V
Enter the initial bus voltage in percent of the bus nominal voltage. This value is used as the initial voltage
for Load Flow Studies including Short-Circuit and Battery Sizing Studies. For unregulated buses which
do not have any charger or UPS connected to them, the operating voltage is calculated during Load Flow
Analysis using the value entered here as a first guess or initial value. Regulated buses that have a charger
or UPS connected to them do not use this value. Voltage defaults to 100%.
If you select the Update Initial Bus Voltage option from the DC Load Flow Study Case Editor, this value
reflects the study result, i.e., it is updated with the operating voltage of the bus after you run a DC Load
Flow Study.
Operating Voltage
After you run Load Flow Studies, the operating voltage of the bus is displayed here. This value will not
change until you run a new Load Flow Study, i.e., the operating voltage of the bus for the last load flow
run are displayed.
Minimum & Maximum

The minimum and maximum diversity factors (loading limits) of each individual bus may be specified as
a percentage of the bus loading. These values are used when the Minimum or Maximum Loading option
is selected from the Study Case Editor for Load Flow Studies. When the Minimum or Maximum Loading
option is used for a study, all loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied by their diversity
factors.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Enter equipment name in this field, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description in this field, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.

14.1.2 Loading Page

The Loading page is used to display the total motor and static loads directly connected to a bus for each
Loading Category. The displayed kW indicate the algebraic sum of the operating load of all constant
kVA and constant Z loads, either directly connected to the bus, or through composite networks or
composite motors. These values are obtained from the actual loads connected to the bus.
Total Bus Loading

Load Category
The Load Categories correspond to the individual Load Categories of the bus.
Const kW
Total constant kW load (in kW) connected directly to the bus. For example, motor loads.
Const R
Total constant resistance (impedance) load (in kW) connected directly to the bus. For example, static
loads.

14.1.3 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

14.1.4 Comment Page


14.2 DC Cable
The DC Cable Editor contains ten pages of properties:
Info Page
Impedance Page
Physical Page
Protection
Routing Page
Loading Page
Ampacity Page
Sizing Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.2.1 Info Page

You can specify the Cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Length, Size, number of
conductors per phase, and library link within the Info page.

Info
ID
ID to each cable. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of cables increases.
The default ID (Cable) for cables can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a cable branch are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of
a branch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. To connect or
reconnect a branch to a bus, select a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated
to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the cable to DC buses that reside in the same view where the
element resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
where Branch X is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses next to the From and To bus IDs for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a cable can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service cable can be edited like an In Service cable; however, an Out
of Service cable will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out
of Service cable automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches
energized solely through an Out of Service cable will also be de-energized and become grayed out.

status. Therefore, you can set a branch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in the
Revision Data.
Connection
In this section, the connection type is displayed. It has been added for future use. Currently it displays
DC for all DC Cables.
Library
To select cables from the Cable Library, click on the Library button and the Cable Library Quick Pick
will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library type and size at the same time.
Note: After the selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are transferred to the Cable Editor, the
cable size can be changed directly from the Cable Editor, and the cable parameters are refreshed from the
library. Therefore, the most important action is to select the correct Cable type from the Cable Library
Quick Pick. When data are transferred from the Cable Library, ETAP automatically converts the cable
reactance to inductance.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Enter the equipment name in this field, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter the equipment description in this field, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.

Units
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the list. The units of length available are: feet,
Note: Every cable in the system can have a different unit.
Tolerance
Enter the percent tolerance in line length. The Adjustments page in the analysis modules can be used to
# Per Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e. if 2-2/C cables or 4-1/C cables are used (4 conductors
total), then the number of conductors per phase is equal to two (2).

Impedance (per Conductor)
R
Enter the cable resistance at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor in this
field. This is for each cable, not the total resistance. ETAP corrects the cable resistance for different
studies based on the specified temperature limits, using the maximum temperature for DC Load Flow
Studies and minimum temperature for DC Short-Circuit Studies.
L
Enter the cable inductances, in henries or henries per unit length, per conductor in this field. This is for
each cable, not the total inductance. When cable data is recalled (substituted) from cable libraries, ETAP
automatically converts reactance to inductance based on library frequency. Once this value is entered
here, ETAP will not make any adjustment to this value.
Units
Z per
When you select Z per option, the cable impedance units are: R in ohms per unit length, and L in henries
per unit length. A unit length should also be specified, including a unit from the drop-down list. Units
available are: feet, miles, meters, and kilometers.
Z
When you select Z option, the cable impedance units are: R in ohms and L in henries.
Cable Temperature
Base
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistance is entered.
Minimum & Maximum Temperature

Two conductor temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered for adjusting the cable resistance
(R) for different studies. The first limit is the minimum operating temperature; the second limit is the
maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most conservative temperature limit for each study
type. For example:
Temperature Limit
Min. Max.
Load Flow X
Short-Circuit X
temperature. ETAP uses the following equations for temperature corrections:
R = R ( 234.5 + Tc )/( 234.5 + Tb ) Copper Conductors

R = R ( 228.1 + Tc )/( 228.1 + Tb ) Aluminum Conductors
where:
R = Resistance at base temperature Tb
R = Resistance at operating temperature Tc
Tb = Base temperature in degrees Celsius
Tc = Operating temperature in degrees Celsius

Dimensions
The physical properties of cables entered in this page are only used for calculating engineering data
needed for Cable Ampacity Derating Studies (U/G Raceway Systems) only.
Rdc
Enter the DC resistance of the cable in micro ohm at 25 degrees C in this field.
Cable OD
Enter the overall cable outside diameter including the sheath, armor, and/or jacket in inches or
centimeters in this field.
Conductor OD
Enter the physical outside diameter of the conductor in inches or centimeters in this field.
Insulator t
Enter the thickness of the conductor insulation in mil or mm in this field

Sheath t
Enter the thickness of cable sheath or armor in mil or mm in this field. This value becomes zero if the
Sheath/Armor option is set to None.
Jacket t
Enter the thickness of outer cable jacket in mil or mm in this field.
Weight
Enter the weight of the cable in lbs/100ft in this field.
Max. Tension
Enter the maximum tension that the cable can withstand without damage in lbs/kcmil in this field.
Max. SW
Enter the maximum Side Wall pressure in lbs/ft in this field.
Conductor Construction
Conductor construction is used for determining ks and kp parameters, which are used for calculating the
ac to dc ratio parameters. Several available choices of conductor construction are:

CmpRnd-Treated Compact RoundNone Coated Treated
Coating is tin or alloy. The term Treated implies a completed conductor, which has been subjected to a
drying and impregnating process similar to that employed on paper power cables.
Shielding
Choose shielded or not shielded.
Sheath/Shield End Connection

Choose either the open or grounded option. Grounded option implies that the sheath and shield are
grounded at more than one location.
Sheath/Armor Type
None St Armor/45dg/20w St Armor/45dg/80w Cu Concentric Wire
Lead Sheath St Armor/45dg/25w St Armor/45dg/90w Al Concentric Wire
Aluminum Sheath St Armor/45dg/30w St Armor/45dg/100w Copper Sheath
St Armor/30dg/15w St Armor/45dg/40w St Armor/45dg/9999w
St Armor/30dg/20w St Armor/45dg/50w Copper Armor
St Armor/30dg/25w St Armor/45dg/60w Steel Armor
St Armor/45dg/15w St Armor/45dg/70w Aluminum Armor

Type Definition
Jacket Type
Jacket Types available:
None NeoPrene RHH THW
Paper PVC RHW THWN
PE FEP SA TW
XLPE FEPB SIS UF
EPR MI TA USE
SBR MTW TBS V
Rubber PFA TFE XHHW
Rubber1 PFAH THHN
Rubber2 RH THHW

The Protection page contains options that allow you to plot the cable thermal capability (I2t) curve on a
Star View. Cables do not have unlimited power handling capability and need protection to prevent
operation beyond that capability in the event of short-circuit conditions. The main cause of reduced cable
lifetime is high temperature generated by continuous overloading or uncoordinated fault protection. .
Cable protection is required to protect personnel and equipment.

Thermal Capability
Plot I2t
When this option is selected, a cable thermal capability curve will be plotted on the active Star View.
This option is active only when a cable is selected from the library.
For a new cable, Plot I2t option is unavailable as shown below.

The thermal capability curve is an I2t characteristic curve that depends on the following parameters:
Conductor temperature
Insulation type
The ambient temperature of air is assumed to be 40C and the fusing temperature of copper is 1083C.
The thermal capability curve is always drawn between 1 to 10 seconds.
Conductor Temperature
When a cable is selected from the library, the thermal capability curve can be plotted based on operating
conductor temperature or base (manufacturer) conductor temperature. This temperature is the initial
temperature of the cable before a fault or overload condition.
The base conductor temperature (Tc) is available from the library and is displayed on the Ampacity page
If the cable is applied where the conductor temperature does not match the manufacturer specified base
temperature, then the operating temperature value can be modified to display the appropriate thermal
capability curve. If the operating conductor temperature is lower than the base conductor temperature,
then the cable will have higher thermal capability.

Short-Circuit Current
This group allows you to specify the maximum and minimum short-circuit current when the terminal bus
of the cable is faulted. These short-circuit current are used for cable sizing as well as for determining the
equivalent system impedance. The short-circuit current can also be updated automatically when you
Run/Update Short-Circuit kA from the Star-Protection Device Coordination mode.
Calculated
Select Calculated to let ETAP update Max. Fault kA, Min. Fault kA and X/R. These values are updated
by running Run / Update Short Circuit kA in Star mode. Max. kA is updated with Cycle kA for
standard ANSI and Max Short-Circuit Current for standard IEC. Min. Fault kA and X/R is updated with
30 Cycle kA for standard ANSI and Min. Short-Circuit Current for IEC. If both terminal buses of the
cable are faulted the fault kA from the bus that has bigger Max/ Fault kA will be used.
When this option is selected the kA and X/R fields in this group become display only.
User-Defined
You may enter the Max. kA, Min. kA and X/R by selecting the User-Defined option. Once this option is
selected, the kA and X/R fields in this group become editable.
Max. 3 Ph.
Enter or display the maximum short-circuit current in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. If
"Calculated" is selected, ETAP will update this field automatically when 1/2 cycle short circuit is run in
STAR mode and a cable terminal bus is faulted. If both of the cable terminal buses are faulted for one run
of short circuit study, the bigger value will be displayed. Based on this current, the positive sequence
impedance of the equivalent system is calculated. It is assumed that the negative sequence impedance of
the equivalent system is the same as that of positive sequence.
Min. L-G
Enter or display the minimum short-circuit current in kA when cable terminal bus is faulted. For a three-
phase system, this generally is the short-circuit current for a line-to-ground fault. If "Calculated" is
selected, ETAP will update this field automatically when 30 cycle short circuit is run in STAR mode and
a cable terminal bus is faulted. If both of the cable terminal buses are faulted for one run of a short-circuit
study, the smaller value will be displayed. Based on this current, ETAP calculates the zero sequence
impedance of the equivalent system.
X/R
This is the X/R for the faulted terminal bus of the cable. This field is automatically updated with Min. L-
G field.
Pin (Disable Update)

This checkbox is enabled only when the Calculated option is selected. When this option is selected, the
Fault kA fields will not be updated when you Run / Update Short Circuit kA in Star Mode.
Protective Device
Overload
This section is used only for BS 7671 and IEC 60364 based cable sizing. You may select the "None",
"User-Defined" or "Device ID" option for overload protection. When the User-Defined option is selected,
the In, I2 and BS 3036 fields will be enabled. When Device ID is selected the Overload ID/Type
dropdown list will be available for selecting a Device ID.
In Nominal current of overload protection device in amperes.

I2 Operating current of overload protection device in amperes.
BS 3630
Check BS 3036 if the overload protection is a Fuse to BS 3036. This field is applicable only when the BS
7671 is selected as the installation standard in the Ampacity page.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overload protection devices (Fuse,
Circuit Breaker, Recloser, Overload Heater and In-Line Overload Relay) for the cable will be
automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the protective devices attached to this cable will be
collected. If either side of the cable does not have a protective device, the collection is extended and will
stop at a bus with more than two connectors, a transformer, a double throw switch, a source or a load.
In and I2
Enter or display the In and I2 values for the selected Overload protection. If User-Defined is selected in
the Overload field, this field is editable and allows user to enter the values. If a protective device is
selected in the ID/Type dropdown list, these values are filled automatically.
Overcurrent
Select "None", "User-Defined" or "Device ID" for overcurrent protection. If User-Defined is selected,
user can enter the Overcurrent Protection Time which is used for cable sizing. If Device ID is selected the
Overcurrent ID/Type dropdown list will be available for selecting a Device ID.
ID/Type
Select a protection device ID from this dropdown list. The available overcurrent protection devices (Fuse,
Circuit Breaker, and Recloser) for the cable will be automatically filled into this dropdown list. All the
protective devices attached to this cable will be collected. If either side of the cable does not have a
protective device the collection is extended and will stop at a bus with more than two connectors, a
transformer, a double throw switch, a source or a load.
Time
Enter or display the maximum three-phase short-circuit time in seconds. This time is used in cable sizing
if Short-Circuit requirement option is checked on the Sizing page. If User-Defined is selected in the
Overcurrent field, this field is editable and allows user to enter the time. If a protective device is selected
in the ID/Type dropdown list, this field is filled automatically. The time is found from the protective TCC
and is based on the Max. 3 Ph. kA in the Short-Circuit Current section. For a fuse, the total clearing time
is used. For a circuit breaker, the time is the relay TCC time plus circuit breaker operating time. Please

refer to Chapter 18 for circuit breaker time determination. Note that if a LVCB has its own trip device and
is interlocked with a relay the longer trip time will be used.

14.2.5 Routing Page

The Routing page provides lists of routed raceways and available raceways. The cable ID and raceway
type are shown for both the routed and available raceways.
This is a list of raceways through which this cable is routed. When you add a raceway to this list (by
using the Insert or Add buttons), the cable is placed in a container attached to the raceway without being
placed in any specific conduit or location.

When you bring up the Graphical Editor for the underground systems, you will see the cables in a
container of cables assigned to this raceway, but are not assigned to a specific conduit. This container is
attached to the raceway and will disappear when it is empty. You will need to graphically move the cable
from the unassigned cable container to the desired location.
This is a list of all existing available raceways in this project, i.e., raceways that this cable can be routed
through.
Note: Since you cannot route a cable twice through a raceway, this list does not include the raceways
listed under Routed Raceways.
Insert: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list, i.e., insert the
selected raceway into the list of routed raceways.
Add: Route this cable through the selected raceway from the available raceway list, i.e., add the selected
raceway to the list of routed raceways.
Unroute: Unroutes this cable from the selected raceway.

14.2.6 Loading Page

The Loading page provides information regarding cable loading (amp) and other parameters, which are
used in cable ampacity derating calculations (Underground Raceway System).
Operating Load / Current

The operating load is specified in amps. This value is used for steady-state temperature calculations or as
the initial value of the cable load profile for transient temperature calculations.
Growth Factor (GF)

The Projection Multiplying Factor (MF) must be specified in percent. This value is used to indicate
future load projection (load reduction or growth). You can select the option to use this Projection
Multiplying Factor for cable temperature calculations from the Cable Ampacity Derating Study Case.
UnderGround Raceway (UGS)

Load Factor
The load factor is the ratio of average load to peak load in percent. Use the following equation to
calculate the load factor:
Load Factor = 100 x ( kWi x Ti )/( kWp x Tt ) %

= 100 x E/( kWi x Tt ) %
where i = Interval of time when the load is non-zero

kWi = Load at interval i
Ti = Number of hours of interval i
kWp = Peak load
Tt = Ton + Toff
Ton = Total hours when the load is on
Toff = Total hours when the load is off
E = Energy (kWh) consumed by load over the interval
If the cable carries load (current) at every interval, then the equation can be simplified to the percentage
of time that the cable will be carrying the current:
Load Factor = 100 x Ton/Tt %

= 100 % ( if it carries the load for 24 hours per day )
Sheath/Armor
Current
The sheath/armor current can be specified as a percent of cable load current. This value indicates the
amount of neutral or ground current that is carried by sheath or armor.
Transient Load Profile

The load profile provides up to 20 time and current entry fields for specifying the loading pattern of the
cable as a function of time.
# Time Current
1 0.0 230
2 3.5 560
3 7.3 400
4 0.0 0.0
(all data from this point are ignored
since time = 0.0 )
In this example, the cable loading is changed from the steady-state (initial value) to 230 amps at time
zero, to 560 amps at time 3.5 hours and finally to 400 amps after 7.3 hours. The steady-state or initial
value can either be 230 amps (value entered at the first time slot), or it can be set equal to the cable
operating load. You can set the option for the initial/steady-state value from the Cable Derating Study
Case Editor.

Time Units
Select the time units for the load profile from the drop-down list.
Optimization Options
Fixed Current
Check this box to have the current of this cable fixed for ampacity optimization/calculation in U/G
Raceway Systems, i.e., ampacity calculations for both Uniform Ampacity & Uniform Temperature
conditions.
Fixed Size
Check this box to keep the size of this cable fixed for cable sizing calculations in U/G Raceway System.

Installation
Type
You can choose from five available raceway installation types in the drop-down list:
U/G Duct Bank

U/G Direct Buried
A/G Tray
A/G Conduit
Air Drop

U/G Duct
This is the underground duct banks encased in concrete.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt.
Ta
Ambient temperature in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil for underground
installations. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. Base ampacity
for UG systems are usually given at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
ampacity is obtained from the library. This value is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Grouping
factor.
U/G Buried
The directly buried underground ducts.
RHO
The thermal resistivity of the soil is in degrees Celsius centimeters per Watt
Ta
Ambient temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the surrounding soil, where the cable is
installed. Ambient soil temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the library. The value is
usually specified at 20 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Grouping
adjustment factor. The cable ampacity adjustment factors are based on a 7.5 inch center-to-center
A/G Trays
Above ground cable trays. The free air base ampacity from the libraries is used for cables installed in
trays.
Ta

Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius, i.e., the temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from the
Tc
base ampacity is obtained from the library. This value is usually given at 90 degrees Celsius.
Tray Specification
NEC
If chosen, NEC Methods of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. NEC does not
the cumulative effects of combinations of tray covers and fire proofing. In general, cable sizes of 2/0
AWG and smaller are installed in cable trays in a randomly filled manner, with a maximum of two cables
high.
Base ampacity of randomly filled trays are based on installations at a uniform depth up to the maximum
of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here corresponds to a maximum fill condition
and does not consider fill conditions exceeding the nominal depths.
ICEA
If chosen, an ICEA P-54-440 Method of calculating derating factors for cable trays will be used. The
actual values of tray depth, width, and % fill entries will be taken into account.
Top Cover
Bottom Cover
than 6 feet.
Maintained Spacing
of 1/4 of the overall effective diameter of the grouped circuit.
Cumulative Effect
cable trays.
Grouping
with a maximum of two cables high. Base ampacity of randomly filled trays is based on installations at a
uniform depth up to the maximum of 30% fill for 3 or 4-inch tray depths. The method applied here
Height Height of cable tray specified in inches or centimeters



Fire Protection
specifications selected from the ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire protection
are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
trays routed through fire stops.
Fire Wrap
A/G Conduit
Above ground cable conduit
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature is in degrees Celsius. This is temperature of the air surrounding
the area where the tray is to be installed. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is obtained from
the library. The value is usually specified at 40 degrees Celsius.

Tc
Ampacity Adjustment
NEC w/o Grouping Effect (No Grouping Effect)

checkbox is not selected, the grouping effects of number of rows and columns will be considered.
NEC w/50% Load Diversity and NEC w/o Load Diversity

Grouping

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 24 70 %
25 through 42 60 %
43 and above 50 %

4 through 6 80 %
7 through 9 70 %
10 through 20 50 %
21 through 30 45 %
31 through 40 40 %
41 through 60 35 %
Fire Protection
Fire protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection methods. Each of
the three libraries can be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
conduit. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable ampacities based on the fire protection
material specifications selected from the ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire
protection are based on 10 CFR 50, Appendix R for Fire Wrap, Fire Stop, and Fire Coating.
Fire Coating

Fire Stop
constructed with an expanded foam depth of 4 inches or less. This is considered to be insufficient to
cause an increase in cable temperature.
Fire Wrap
Air Drop
Cables suspended without the use of trays or conduits. No cable grouping for airdrop cables is
considered.
Ta
Ambient air (atmospheric) temperature. This is temperature of the air surrounding the area where the tray
is to be installed in degrees Celsius. Ambient air temperature for the base ampacity is 40 degrees Celsius.
For cables in direct sun, the air temperature may be increased by a typical value of 15 degrees Celsius.
Tc
Fire Protection
Fire Protection provides optional libraries from which to choose various fire protection devices. Each of
the three libraries can be selected individually to best describe the fire protection associated with the
airdrop cables. The fire protection data is used to further derate the cable based on the fire protection
specifications selected from ETAP library. The ampacity correction factors applied for fire protection are
Fire Coating
Fire Stop
Fire Wrap

App MF
The Multiplication Factor (MF) is determined by the application type selected from the drop-down list.
You can modify the values of Application MF by selecting Project, Settings, and Cable Ampacity MF
from the menu bar. Application MF is used to calculate the required cable ampacity (MF times operating
or full load current).
Ampacity
Ampacity ratings are displayed for easy comparison of base, derated, and required (I x MF) ampacities.
The method used here is based on the concept of a derating factor that is applied against a base ampacity
to calculate the derated ampacity.
Id = F Ib
Base Ampacity (Ib)


Allowable
I x MF
and the application multiplication factor (App. MF) for the specified application type. This value is

This is adjustment or correction factor which takes into account differences in the cables actual
composed of several components, as listed below:


14.2.8 Sizing Page
Requirements
This area allows you to select one or both requirements for determining the recommended size of cable.
Ampacity
If ampacity is selected as one of the requirements, sizing will be based on the cable installation and
ambient conditions specified in the Ampacity page.
Vd
If you select Vd, ETAP will size the cable based on the percent voltage drop value you enter here.
Voltage drop is in percent of the nominal kV of the bus connected to the cable. If the nominal voltages of
the From bus and To bus are different, the nominal V of the From bus is selected. The following table
shows the methods used for calculating the voltage drop for different types of load currents flowing
through the cable:

Load Type Calculation Method

Motor Constant Power
Static Load Constant Impedance
Bus Constant Current
Circuit Breaker Constant Current
Fuse Constant Current
Short-Circuit
Sizing will be based on the cable short-circuit capacity to withstand the short-circuit current magnitude
specified below for the time defined.
Result
Using the selected cable type from the library, ETAP recommends an optimal cable size along with the
number of conductors per phase that meets the specified requirements. Additionally, ETAP provides one
cable size smaller than the optimal size for your selection.
Note: The required ampacity and percent voltage drop are displayed for your reference.
Cable Loading
Operating Current
The operating load current specified for this cable in the Loading page will be used if this option is
selected.
Full Load Amps of Element

The continuous current rating (rated current or FLA) of the selected element will be used for sizing
requirements. For motor equipment cables, the motor ID is displayed here and the FLA of the motor is
used.
User-Defined
Use this option to enter any value for the cable current.
Options
Use Available Cable Sizes Only

Use only cable sizes that are flagged as Available in the Cable Library for the specified cable type (cable
library header).
Use All Cable Sizes From Library

This option allows you to use all cable sizes that exist in the Cable Library for the specified cable type
(cable library header).
Use Load Projection Multiplying Factor

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Projection Multiplying Factor, as
specified for this cable in the Loading page.
Use Application Multiplying Factor (Equipment Cables)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the Application Multiplying Factor
(AMF), as specified for the motor or static load in the Cable/Vd page of the equipment.
Use Motor Service Factor (Motor Equipment Cables)

If you select this option, the cable load current will be multiplied by the motor Service Factor (SF), as
specified for the motor in the Nameplate page.
Short-Circuit
kA
Enter the maximum short-circuit current in kA.
Time (S)
Enter the clearing time at the kA you are sizing this cable.
Tc
This field displays the conductor operating temperature for this cable.
Note: This parameter can be adjusted from the Ampacity page, Tc operating.
Min. Size
Displays the minimum calculated size of the cable calculates based on the short-circuit requirement.

14.2.9 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date



DC Elements DC Impedance
14.3 DC Impedance
The DC Impedance Editor has three pages of information:
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.3.1 Info Page

You can specify the Cable ID, From and To bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment Name and Description,
and Impedance value including resistance and inductance within the Info page.
Info
ID
ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID dcZ plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of impedances increases.
The default ID (dcZ) for the DC impedance can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or

In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of an impedance branch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of Out of Service impedance can be edited like an In Service branch;
however, Out of Service impedance will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check
is activated, an Out of Service branch automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the
loads and branches energized solely through Out of Service impedance will also be de-energized and
become grayed out.
status. Therefore, you can set an impedance to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
From and To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of an impedance branch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of impedance, From or To, is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID.
To connect or reconnect impedance to a bus, select a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram
will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the impedance to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of
the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If impedance is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the

impedance to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown here where DCImp1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description
Impedance
Enter the impedance R & L in ohms and henries.

14.3.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element in this field, using up
to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element in this field, using up to 50
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

14.3.3 Comment Page

DC Elements DC Converter
14.4 DC Converter
The properties associated with DC converters of the electrical system can be entered in this editor. The
DC converter symbols (ANSI & IEC) are shaped to distinguish the DC input side and the DC output side.
The DC Converter Editor contains four pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.4.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC converter ID, Input and Output bus IDs, In/Out of Service, FDR Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, and Priority within the Info page.
Info

ID
ID to each DC converter. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of DC converters increases.
The default ID (dcConv) for DC converters can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Input Bus and Output Bus

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC converter are designated as Input and Output buses. If the
input or output terminal of a DC converter is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for
bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC converter to a bus, select the bus from the drop-down list. The
one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the converter to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a DC converter is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC

converter to a new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where dcConv1 is reconnected from dcBus10 to dcBus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC converter can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC converter can be edited like an In Service DC
converter; however, an Out of Service DC converter will not be included in any System Studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC converter automatically becomes grayed out in the
one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service DC converter
will also be de-energized and become grayed out.
status. Therefore, you can set a converter to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Equipment

FDR Tag
Name
Description
Enter equipment description, up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the drop-down list. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten load types and you can change their name
from the Project menu under Settings and Data Type.
Priority
Select the load priority of this DC converter from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load
priority, operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided for you to
select from. Priorities can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.

14.4.2 Rating Page
Rating
kW/MW
Enter the rated output power of the DC converter in kW or MW in this field. Choose from the two
options by clicking on the kW/MW button.
%Eff
Enter the rated efficiency of the DC converter in percent in this field. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%.
The efficiency is the rated efficiency and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change
the efficiency, the converter input full load current is recalculated.
Input
V
Enter the rated input voltage of the DC converter in DC volts in this field.
FLA
The rated input full load current of the DC converter is calculated and displayed in this field in amperes.
When you modify the input FLA, the converter efficiency is recalculated.

Output
V
Enter the rated output voltage of the DC converter in DC volts in this field.
FLA
The rated output full load current of the DC converter is calculated and displayed in this field in amperes.
When you modify FLA, the rated kW of the DC converter is changed.
Imax
Enter the maximum output current of the DC converter as a percentage of the output full load current.
The DC converter will become constant current source when the output load current exceeds the Imax in
DC Load Flow Studies. ETAP will use Imax as the maximum constant current output value. Imax
defaults to 150%. This value is also used to determine the DC short-circuit contribution of the converter
(Imax = k).
Operating Parameters
Vout
Enter the regulated voltage setting of the DC converter output terminal as a percentage of the rated output
voltage of the converter. This % operating voltage is used as the control (regulated) value in DC Load
Flow Studies. The DC converter will become idle if the output bus voltage is higher than the converter
regulated voltage (Vregulated times output rated voltage) in DC Load Flow Studies. Vout defaults to
100%.
SC Contribution
K
This field displays the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the output FLA. ETAP uses this
value to calculate short-circuit current contribution from the converter in DC Short-Circuit Studies. The
multiplication factor defaults to 150%.
Isc (K*FLA out)

The short-circuit current contribution from the DC converter is calculated and displayed in this field in
amperes.

14.4.3 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

14.4.4 Comment Page

DC Elements Battery
14.5 Battery
The properties associated with batteries of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The Battery Editor contains five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.5.1 Info Page

You can specify the Battery ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Priority, and number of Strings within the Info page.

DC Elements Battery
Header
After selecting a battery from the library (See Rating page Battery Editor), this header information will
be updated with the following information:
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Open-Circuit Voltage per Cell
Rp
This is the resistance per positive plate in ohms. Resistance of a battery cell equals to Rp divided by the
number of positive plates.
Time Const.
Battery time constant in Seconds
Model
Battery Model
Hour
Battery rated discharge time in hours.
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
This is the Rated/Base Temperature in degrees Celsius.
Type
Type of curves specified in the library for this battery
Plates Capacity 1MinA %K SCAmp

Displays: # of Plates, Capacity, 1 Minute SC Amps, percent K, Short-Circuit Amps. You can drop down
and select a different battery size under the same manufacturer and model.
Info
ID
ID to each battery. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number
one and increasing as the number of batteries increases. The default ID (Battery) for batteries can be
changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting DC bus for the battery. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a battery to a bus, select a bus from the
drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.

DC Elements Battery
Note: You can connect the terminal of the battery to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
If a battery is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the battery to a
new bus from the editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below,
where Battery1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a battery can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service battery can be edited like an In Service battery; however, an
Out of Service battery will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated,
an Out of Service battery automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and
branches energized solely through an Out of Service battery will also be de-energized and become grayed
out.
status. Therefore, you can set a battery to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in Revision
Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
reflect the source of the latest data. There are a total of ten data types and you can change their name

DC Elements Battery
Priority
Select the load priority of this battery from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from list and
you can change their name from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Quantity
# of Strings
Enter the number of the battery strings in this field. The number of strings defaults to 1.

DC Elements Battery
14.5.2 Rating Page

Within the Rating page, you can view battery specification (from the Battery Library) and specify the
number of battery cells and battery temperature. This page displays the calculated battery rated voltage in
V and total capacity in AH (Ampere Hour).
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp
Resistance per positive plate in ohms

DC Elements Battery
Time Const.
Model
Battery Model
Hour
Battery rated discharge time in hours.
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
This is the Rated/Base Temperature in degrees Celsius.
Type

Rating
# of Cell
Enter the number of battery cells.
Rated Voc
The battery rated voltage (Open Circuit Voltage) is calculated and displayed here in volts.
Total Capacity
The battery total capacity is calculated and displayed here in AH (Ampere Hour).
Library
Click on this button to associate a battery library with this project.
Temp
Max and Min

Two battery temperature limits (in degrees Celsius) may be entered to adjust the voltage source value in
Short-Circuit Studies and correction factor in Battery Sizing Studies. The first limit is the minimum
operating temperature; the second limit is the maximum operating temperature. ETAP will use the most
conservative temperature limit for each study type. For example:
Temperature Limit
Min Max
Short-Circuit X
Battery Sizing X

DC Elements Battery
14.5.3 SC Page
You can select the battery short-circuit model and open-circuit voltage source value, specify battery
external impedance and grounding data, and view battery data from the Battery Library within the SC
page.
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp

DC Elements Battery
Time Const.
Model
Battery Model
Hour
Discharge Time in Hours
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
Rated Temperature
Type

Short-Circuit Model
Voc Behind Battery Z

When you select the Voc Behind Battery Z option, the battery is treated as a constant voltage source
behind the battery resistance in DC Short-Circuit Studies.
Constant Current
When you select the Constant Current option, the battery is treated as an ideal current source in DC
Short-Circuit Studies. A constant current source means that the battery short-circuit contribution is
constant regardless of the distance of the fault to the battery.
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent. ETAP uses this value to calculate the constant
current source value in DC Short-Circuit Studies. This multiplication factor is updated from the battery
library.
Isc
The constant current short-circuit value of the battery is calculated and displayed here in amperes.
# of PP
Number of positive plates for the selected battery is displayed on this field.
1-min-A/pp
1 Minutes Amps per positive plate is displayed on this field.
1-mim-A/String
1 Minute Amps per String is displayed on this field.

DC Elements Battery
External Impedance
R
Enter the total battery cable and connection resistance in ohms per string in this field.
L
Enter the total battery cable and connection inductance in micro henries per string in this field.
Voc per Cell
Rated Voc (Library)

When you select the Rated V model, the battery rated voltage per cell is used as battery open-circuit
voltage value per cell.
Calculated Value
When you select the Calculated Value model, battery open-circuit voltage per cell is calculated based on
the following formula:
Voc = (0.84 + SG) + (Tmax 25) * 0.0003
Where SG is the specific gravity of the battery and Tmax is the maximum operating temperature
specified in the Rating page.
Voc
The calculated battery open-circuit voltage per cell is displayed in this field in volts.
User Defined Value

Select the User Defined Value option to specify a value for Voc. When this option is selected, an edit
box will appear at right for entering Voc deviation from rated VPC (Voltage per Cell) in percent of VPC.
The rated VPC is from battery library and displayed in the header of the Battery Editor. Once a value is
entered in the Voc Deviation box, the adjusted Voc will be automatically calculated and displayed in the
Voc field.
The Voc deviation value can be either a positive of a negative value. The maximum deviation is defined
in an Options (Preferences) entry under Battery Discharge/Sizing, Max Deviation for Voc Per Cell. The
default value is 10 percent.
Grounding
Grounded
Click on the Grounded checkbox to specify that the battery is to be grounded.
Rg
Enter the battery grounding resistance in ohms in this field. This value represents the total grounding
resistance of this battery system including the cables and connections.

DC Elements Battery
14.5.4 Remarks Page
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp

DC Elements Battery
Time Const.
Model
Battery Model
Hour
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
Rated Temperature
Type

User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7

DC Elements Battery
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

DC Elements Battery
14.5.5 Comment Page
Header
MFR
Manufacturer
VPC
Rp

DC Elements Battery
Time Const.
Battery time constant in Seconds (zero if not specified)
Model
Battery Model
Hour
Battery life in Hours (zero if not specified)
SG
Specific Gravity
Temperature
Rated Temperature
Type


DC Elements DC Motor
14.6 DC Motor
The properties associated with DC motors of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this
editor.
The DC Motor Editor contains six pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.6.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC Motor ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag,
Name, Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, Quantity of DC Motors, and Demand
Factor within the Info page.

Info
ID
ID to each motor. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one
and increasing as the number of motors increases.
The default ID (dcMach) for DC motors can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC motor. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a blank
entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC motor to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can connect the terminal of the motor to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
the composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a DC motor is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC

motor to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where DCMach1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC motor can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service DC motor can be edited like an In Service DC motor;
however, an Out of Service DC motor will not be included in any System Studies. When Continuity
Check is activated, an Out of Service DC motor automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line
diagram.
Data.
Configuration

Select the operating status of the DC motor(s) for the selected configuration status from the drop-down
list. Options for operating status include:

determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the motor engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the motor status under the specific configuration, i.e., you can
have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a motor is
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this motor from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from.

Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of DC motors for this motor in this field. This allows you to group identical
motors together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC motor is actually operating. Demand factor affects the

14.6.2 Rating Page

You can specify the motor nameplate data (ratings) and view motor loading and losses for all Loading
Categories in this page.
Rating
HP/kW
Enter the motor output (shaft) rating in horsepower (HP) or kW. You can choose from these two options
by clicking on the HP/kW button. ETAP uses the following equation for the DC motor full load current:
Full-Load Amp = HP * 0.7457 *1000/ ( V* Eff ) Rating in HP

= kW *1000/ ( V* Eff ) Rating in kW
where the Eff is at full load condition (100% loading).
V
Enter the rated voltage of the motor in volts in this field.
RPM

Enter the motor speed in RPM (Revolutions Per Minute) in this field.
% Eff
This is the efficiency of the motor. Efficiency cannot exceed 100%. The efficiency is the rated efficiency
and is used for calculating the rated values, i.e., when you change the efficiency, the motor full load
current and the operating load for all Loading Categories are recalculated.
FLA
This is the rated full load current of the motor in amperes. This is the current the motor would pull from
the system when it is fully loaded, i.e., when the system is operating at the rated HP (or kW), rated V, and
rated efficiency.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this motor,
i.e., each motor can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading Category. To edit
the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the % Loading column.
Note: You can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting DC Load Flow Studies.

14.6.3 SC Page
You can specify the multiplication factor, impedance and time constant associated with Short-Circuit
Studies within the SC page.
SC Parameters
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the motor FLA. ETAP uses this value to
calculate the short-circuit current of the DC motor for a terminal bus fault. When you change the
multiplication factor, the resistance, inductance, and short-circuit contribution are recalculated. The
multiplication factor defaults to 1000%.
Isc
The short-circuit current (Isc(K*FLA) contribution of the DC motor for a terminal bus fault is calculated
and displayed here in amperes.
Ra

Enter the resistance of the DC motor short-circuit impedance in ohms. When you change the resistance
value, the inductance, multiplication factor and short-circuit contribution is recalculated.
La
Enter the inductance of the DC motor short-circuit impedance in henries. When you change the
inductance value, the time constant is recalculated.
Time Constant
Enter the time constant of the DC motor. When you change the time constant value, the inductance is
recalculated.

You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle. ETAP displays the load
profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The data in this page are used in
Battery Sizing Studies within the Duty Cycle page.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify the load profile to each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.

Duty Cycle Category

Select a Duty Cycle Category from the drop-down list and view the load profile for it in this page. Each
load can have up to five Duty Cycle Categories with independent load profiles. You can name the Duty
Cycle Categories from the Project menu bar.
Load Profile
types in the list. Enter a load name, current in amperes, start time in seconds, and duration in seconds for
this segment of load. After the data of a row is entered, this segment of load curve will be drawn on the
Non-Random or Random window.
or click the Delete key. Click on either the <-Print or Print-> button, and the displayed load profile
curve (random and non-random loads) for the selected duty cycle will be printed out.

14.6.5 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info

equipment reference number or any other number in this field, using up to five digits.

and enter any extra data for this element in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

and enter any extra data for this element in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

enter any extra data for this element in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element in this field, up to 50
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

14.6.6 Comment Page

DC Elements DC Static Load
14.7 DC Static Load

The properties associated with DC static loads of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The DC Static Load Editor contains five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.7.1 Info Page

You can specify the ID, Connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, Quantity, and Demand Factors for DC Static
Loads within the Info page.

Info
ID
ID to each DC static load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of DC static loads increases.
The default ID (dcLoad) for DC Static Loads can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC static load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus, a
blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC static load to a bus, select a bus
from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminal of the load to DC buses that reside in the same view where it resides
or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins of the
composite networks. You cannot connect to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a DC static load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC
static load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as
shown below where DCStLoad1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC static load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC static load can be edited like an In Service DC
static load; however, an Out of Service DC static load will not be included in any System Studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC static load automatically becomes grayed out in the
one-line diagram.
Data.
Configuration
Select the operating status of the DC static load(s) for the selected configuration status from the drop-
down list. Options for operating status include:


Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the DC static
load is determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the DC static load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the DC static load status under the specific configuration, i.e.,
you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, the status
of a DC static load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this DC static load from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load
priority, operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select
from. Priority names can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Quantity
Enter the quantity (number) of DC static loads in this field. This allows you to group identical DC static
loads together without a need for graphical presentation in the one-line diagram.
Demand Factor

Demand factor is the amount of time the DC static load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the

14.7.2 Rating Page

You can specify the DC static load ratings, view loading, and losses for all Loading Categories in this
page.
Rating
kW
Enter the kW rating of the static load in this field. Click on the kW/MW button to choose either kW or
MW units for entering and displaying data. ETAP uses the following equation for the DC static load full
load current:
Full Load Amp = kW*1000/V Rating in kW
= MW *1000000/V Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC static load in volts in this field.
FLA
The DC static load full load current is calculated and displayed here. When the full load current is
changed, the rated power of the DC static load is recalculated.

Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this DC
static load, i.e., each DC static load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each Loading
Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the %
loading column.
Note: You can select any of these Loading Categories when conducting studies.
Select Loading Category from the Project menu to edit the Loading Category names.


You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle. ETAP displays the load
profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing within the Duty Cycle page. The data
in this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify a load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories
Duty Cycle Category

Load Profile
Non-Random or Random window. To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking the number of
the row, then click on the Del button or click the Delete key.

14.7.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

14.7.5 Comment Page

DC Elements DC Lumped Load
14.8 DC Lumped Load

The properties associated with DC lumped loads of the electrical system can be entered in this editor.
The DC Lumped Load Editor contains six pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
SC Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.8.1 Info Page

You can specify the ID, Connected Bus, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder), Tag, Name,
Description, Data Type, Load Priority, Configuration Status, as well as the Quantity and Demand Factors
of DC Lumped Loads within the Info page.

Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters in this field. ETAP automatically
assigns a unique ID to each DC lumped load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC lumped loads increases.
The default ID (dcLump) for DC lumped loads can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar
or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the DC lumped load. If the terminal is not connected to any bus,
a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a DC lumped load to a bus; select a
bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you
click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminal of the lump load to DC buses that reside in the same view where it
If a DC lumped load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the
DC lumped load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new
bus, as shown below where DCLump1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
ETAP displays the nominal V of the bus next to the bus ID for your convenience.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC lumped load can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC lumped load can be edited like an In Service DC
lumped load; however, an Out of Service DC lumped load will not be included in any System Studies.
When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC lumped load automatically becomes grayed
out in the one-line diagram.
Data.
Configuration

Select the operating status of the DC lumped load(s) for the selected configuration status from the drop-
down list. Options for operating status include:

Depending on the demand factor specified for each operating status, the actual loading of the DC lumped
load is determined for Load Flow Studies.
Note: Status is not a part of the DC lumped load engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status is shown, indicating the DC lumped load status under the specific configuration, i.e.,
you can have a different operating status under each configuration. In the following example, status of a
DC lumped load is shown to be Continuous under Normal configuration and Spare under Emergency
configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this DC lumped load from the drop-down list. This field can be used for load
priority, operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select
from. Priority names can be changed from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Demand Factor
Demand factor is the amount of time the DC lumped load is actually operating. Demand factor affects the

14.8.2 Rating Page

You can specify the DC lumped load ratings and select percentages of motor loads and static loads in the
Rating page. You can also display the kW loading (motor and static) for all Loading Categories.
Rating
kW
Enter the total kW loading (motor and static) for the lumped load. Click on the kW/MW button to choose
from either kW or MW units for entering and displaying data. ETAP uses the following equation for the
DC lumped load full load current:
Full-Load Amp = kW*1,000/V Rating in kW

= MW *1,000,000/V Rating in MW

V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC lumped load in volts.
FLA
The DC lumped load full load current is calculated and displayed here. When the full load current is
changed, the rated power of the DC lumped load is recalculated.
Motor/Static Load
Select the percent motor and static loading of the lumped load by shifting the slider position.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this DC
lumped load, i.e., each DC lumped load can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
Loading Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields under the
% loading column.

14.8.3 SC Page
Within the SC page, specify the short-circuit multiplication factor, time constant and impedance,
including resistance and inductance of the DC lumped load. You can view the calculated short-circuit
current of the DC lumped load.
Note: The data in this page are only related to the motor load of the DC lumped load.
SC Parameters
K
Enter the short-circuit multiplication factor in percent of the FLA of the motor part of the lumped load.
ETAP uses this value to calculate the short-circuit current of the lumped load for a terminal bus fault.
When you change the multiplication factor, the resistance, inductance and the short-circuit current
contribution are recalculated. The multiplication factor defaults to 1000%.
Rd
Enter the resistance of the lumped load short-circuit impedance in ohms. When you change the resistance
value, the inductance, multiplication factor, and short-circuit current is recalculated.

Time Constant
Enter the time constant of the lumped load in seconds in this field. When you change the time constant
value, the inductance is recalculated.
Ld
Enter the inductance of the lumped load short-circuit impedance in henries in this field. When you
change the inductance value, the time constant is recalculated.
Isc
The short-circuit current contribution of the motor part of the DC lumped load for a terminal bus fault is
calculated and displayed here in amperes. If a lumped load is 100% static load, there will be no short-
circuit contribution.


You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle within the Duty Cycle
page. ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The
data in this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify a load profile for each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
Duty Cycle Category

Load Profile


14.8.5 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

14.8.6 Comment Page

DC Elements Composite CSD
14.9 DC Composite CSD

The properties associated with DC Composite CSD loads of the electrical distribution system can be
The DC Composite CSD Editor contains five pages of information:
Info Page
Rating Page
Duty Cycle Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.9.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC Composite CSD Load ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, Name, Description, Data Type, and Load Priority within the Info page.

Info
ID
ID to each Composite CSD load. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with
the number one and increasing as the number of Composite CSD loads increases. The default ID
(dcElem) for Composite CSDs can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus for the Composite CSD load. If the terminal is not connected to any
bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a Composite CSD load to a bus,
select a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection
after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminal of the Composite CSD to the DC buses that reside in the same view
where it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to a bus that resides in the Dumpster.
If a Composite CSD load is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of
the Composite CSD load to a new bus in this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to
the new bus, as shown below where DCED1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a Composite CSD load can be selected by clicking the button for either the In
Service or Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service Composite CSD load can be edited
like an In Service Composite CSD load; however, an Out of Service Composite CSD load will not be
included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service Composite CSD
load automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
Data.
Equipment
FDR Tag

Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this Composite CSD load from the drop-down list. This field can be used for
load priority, operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. You can select from ten different priorities.

14.9.2 Rating Page

You can specify the Composite CSD load ratings on the Ratings page. The Composite CSD load loading
for all Loading Categories is displayed.
Rating
kW
Enter the rating (total of all elements within this Composite CSD) in kW in this field. Click on the
kW/MW button to choose either kW or MW units for entering and displaying data. ETAP uses the
following equation for the full load current of the Composite CSD load:
Full Load Amp = kW*1,000/V Rating in kW

= MW *1,000,000/V Rating in MW
V
Enter the rated voltage of the Composite CSD load in volts in this field.
FLA

The full load current of the Composite CSD load is calculated and displayed in this field in amperes.
When the full load current is changed, the rated power of the Composite CSD load is recalculated.
Loading
This section is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten Loading Categories for this
Composite CSD load, i.e., each Composite CSD load can be set to have a different operating loading level
for each Loading Category. To edit the values of the percent loading, click on any one of the edit fields
under the % loading column.


You can specify the Duty Cycle Category and load profile for each duty cycle within the Duty Cycle
page. ETAP displays the load profile for random and non-random loads for viewing and printing. The
data in this page are used in Battery Sizing Studies.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify load profile to each one of the five Duty Cycle Categories.
Duty Cycle Category

Load Profile


14.9.4 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

14.9.5 Comment Page

DC Elements DC Composite Motor
14.10 DC Composite Motor

Composite motors are used as a tool to group motors and loads in the system. The elements that you can
include inside a DC composite motor include:
DC Motors
DC Static Loads
DC Lumped Loads
Composite CSD Loads
DC Circuit Breakers
DC Single-Throw Switches
DC Fuses
DC Composite Motors
To open the DC Composite Motor Editor, open the composite motor by double-clicking on it. Double-
click again on the blank background of the window.

DC Elements DC Circuit Breaker
14.11 DC Circuit Breaker

The properties associated with DC circuit breakers of the electrical power system can be entered in this
editor. DC circuit breaker protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.
The DC Circuit Breaker Editor contains eight pages of information and the header information for each
page:
Header Information
Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.11.1 Header
The header displays the selected breaker model and trip device information on each page of the DC
Circuit Breaker Editor.

Manufacturer Volts Interrupting data Lock Icon
Breaker Model
and Pole Breaker
available sizes
Trip device Trip device Trip device

Manufacturer Model ID
Manufacturer
Manufacturer name of the breaker selected from the library.
V max.
Displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected breaker in Volts.
Interrupting data
Displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the breaker.
Lock
The lock indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified).
Model
Model name of the breaker selected from the library.

Pole
This field displays the breaker pole selected from the library.
Size
Select from a drop-down list and display the sizes in amperes that are available for the selected breaker.
Trip device manufacturer

This field displays the manufacturer name of the selected trip device.
Trip device model

This field displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Trip device ID
Displays the trip ID selected from the library.

14.11.2 Info Page

You can specify the DC circuit breaker ID, connected bus/load, In/Out of Service, Ratings, Equipment
FDR (feeder) Tag, Name, Description, and Configuration Status in the Info page.
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID in this field with a maximum of 25 characters.

ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increases as the number of CBs increases.
The default ID (dcCB) for DC circuit breakers can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If
a terminal of a DC breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC breaker to a bus, select a bus from
the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on
OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the circuit breaker to other dc elements that reside in the same
view where it resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to elements that reside in the
Dumpster.
If a DC breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
DC breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where DCCB1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
Operating conditions of a DC circuit breaker can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC circuit breaker can be edited like an In Service
DC circuit breaker; however, an Out of Service DC circuit breaker will not be included in any System
Studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC circuit breaker automatically
becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out
of Service DC circuit breaker will also be de-energized and become grayed out.
status. Therefore, you can set a DC circuit breaker to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.

Configuration
You can change the status of a DC circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Close or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
status is shown above the status of the DC circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under
the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In
the following example, the status of a DC circuit breaker is shown as closed under Normal configuration
and open under Emergency configuration.
Real Time Status

The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real time module only.
Scanned Status
This field displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description

14.11.3 Rating Page
Standard
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the breaker library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the

Type
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the type of breaker. DC circuit breakers include
Molded Case, Power, and Insulated case breakers.
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the breaker library Quick Pick the LVCB type is set based on the

The DC circuit breaker data for a selected standard and type can be selected by clicking on the Library
button.
Exclude Trip Device

Check this box to exclude the trip device selection from DCCB Library Quick Pick. The breaker library
Quick Pick will be launched without the trip device information.
Note: The Exclude trip device checkbox is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to
unchecked once the Rating page is refreshed.
To select a circuit breaker from the DC Circuit Breaker Library click on the Library button and the
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker window will appear. From the Library Quick Pick, select a DC
circuit breaker by highlighting the Manufacturer name and breaker Model-Max V-Pole, which is a unique
record. Select the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the size and the
desired trip device for that size. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library
and transfer it to the editor.
Note: Upon selection of library data, the breaker manufacturer, model and trip device details are
displayed on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library the

header text will be displayed in a dark blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been
modified.
The information available in the breaker library Quick Pick is described below.
Standard
Note: The Standard selection in the breaker library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed)
will be defaulted to the selection made for the standard on the Rating page. The Standard selection can be
changed on the Quick Pick if desired.
AC/DC
This field displays that the breaker is DC. This option is grayed out and non-editable.
Type
Select from the drop-down list and display the breaker type. The DC breaker types include Molded Case,
Power and Insulated Case breakers.
Note: The Type selection in the breaker library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed) will
be defaulted to the selection made for the breaker type on the Rating page. The breaker type selection can
be changed on the Quick Pick if desired.

Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This field displays a list of all DC breaker manufacturers included in the library for the selected breaker
standard and type. Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Reference
This field displays the Manufacturer reference, if available, for a selected manufacturer. For example,
Link
This field displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Lock
specified).
Model

Model Name
The Model section displays list of all models for the selected standard, breaker type and breaker
manufacturer. The models are displayed in the form of Model Max V Pole, which forms a unique
record name in the breaker library. Select the Model Max V Pole by highlighting it.
Lock
Short-Circuit data
ANSI Short-Circuit data

When the ANSI Standard is selected, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts and the
short-circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA for all breaker types. The short-circuit
parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and short-
circuit data by highlighting it.
IEC Short-Circuit data

When the IEC Standard is selected the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts, ultimate
breaking capacity in kA (Icu) and service breaking capacity in kA (Ics) for all breaker types. The short-
circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and
short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Fused/UnFused
This field displays whether the breaker is fused or unfused.
Size

Size
This displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Pole record for the breaker. To
select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight it.
Lock
specified).
Model Info
Additional information about the selected breaker is displayed using the parameters described below.
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, for selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Application
This field displays the application for the selected breaker model.
Trip Device
The trip device(s) assigned to the selected breaker, can be chosen by highlighting the trip device type,
manufacturer name, model name and trip ID. The trip device types for DC breaker include Thermal
Magnetic, Solid state, Motor Circuit Protector and Electro-Mechanical.
Trip Device Type

Select a type from drop-down list and display the trip device type for the selected breaker.

Highlight a row to select the trip device manufacturer from the list, for the selected trip device type.
Trip Device Model

Highlight a row to select the trip device model from the list, for the selected trip device manufacturer.
ID
Highlight a row to select the trip device ID from the list, for the selected trip device model.
Note: The ID is labeled as TM ID for Thermal Magnetic trip, Sensor ID for Solid-state trip, MCP ID for

When the Exclude Trip Device box is checked on the Rating page the breaker library Quick Pick
appears as shown below.

Click on ANSI Standard and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for DC circuit breaker in
accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards. When a breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, all
parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the
exception of Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a breaker from library Quick Pick will turn the
header text to a dark blue color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select a rating from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.

Continuous Amps
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC circuit breaker in
amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is selected
from library Quick Pick.
Rated V
Select a rating from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker in
Volts. When a breaker is selected, the Rated V value will be set equal to the applied voltage selected
from library Quick Pick.
Fused
You can select fused or unfused for all breaker types by clicking on the provided selection box.
Note: When a DC breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the status as
selected from the Quick Pick.
Max. V
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker
in Volts. When a breaker is selected, the Max.V value will be set equal to the maximum voltage for the
selected breaker.
Interrupting kA
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the DC circuit breaker in
kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for selected
applied voltage from library Quick Pick.

Click on the IEC Standard button and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for DC circuit breaker
in accordance with the IEC Standards. When a breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters
shown below will be set to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of
Size, changing the value(s) after selecting a breaker from library Quick Pick will turn the header to blue
color indicating that the substituted library data has been modified.
Size
Select a rating from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no breaker is chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.

Rated Amps
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the rated ampere rating of the DC circuit breaker in amperes.
The Rated Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is selected from library Quick
Pick.
Rated V
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker in kV.
When a breaker is selected, the Rated V value will be set equal to the applied voltage selected from
library Quick Pick.
Max. V
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker in kV.
When a breaker is selected, the Max.V value will be set equal to the maximum voltage for the selected
breaker.
Ultimate Breaking
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of short-circuit breaking
capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for rated operational voltage under specified test conditions.
Select a rating from drop-down list or enter the value of the Ultimate breaking capacity for the DC circuit
breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the Ultimate breaking kA value will be set equal to the Icu (breaking
capacity) kA value for selected applied voltage from library Quick Pick.
Service Breaking
conditions.
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the value of the Service breaking capacity for the DC
circuit breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected, the Service breaking kA value will be set equal to the Ics (service
capacity) kA value for selected applied voltage from library Quick Pick.
Fused
For all breaker types, select fused or unfused by clicking on the provided selection box.
Note: The Fused checkbox is displayed only when no breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick.

14.11.4 Trip Device Page

The trip devices for DC circuit breaker include Thermal Magnetic, Solid-state, Motor Circuit Protector
and Electro-mechanical types. The Trip device page allows selection and setting of these trip units.
CB & Trip Device selection logic

The selection of the circuit breaker on the Rating page can affect the data displayed on the Trip Device
page. The logic is as described below.
Case 1 DC Circuit Breaker & Trip Device

When a DC circuit breaker is selected along with its associated trip unit from the library Quick Pick on
Rating page of the Circuit Breaker Editor, the Trip Device page displays the selected trip unit
(Manufacturer, Model, ID).
Case 2 Circuit Breaker only (Exclude Trip device)

When a circuit breaker is selected from the breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, with Exclude
Trip Device box checked, the Trip Device page will not include the trip device information. No Trip
device selected message would appear in the Trip Device page status line.


This section describes the settings available for Thermal Magnetic trip unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Trip device types. In this case, Thermal
Magnetic trip type is selected.
TM Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Thermal Magnetic trip.
TM Model
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.

TM ID
Select from drop-down list and display TM ID for the selected Thermal magnetic trip model. The actual
value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected TM ID next to the TM ID field.
Thermal
Fixed Thermal
be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the thermal section displays FIXED in the thermal trip field.
Adjustable Thermal
can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the thermal section displays a drop-down list of the
available adjustable thermal trip in percent of trip device ampere rating. Also, the actual value of the trip
in amperes is displayed next to the adjustable trip drop-down list.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable or continuous
adjustable. The settings that are available to you are described below.
Fixed Magnetic
maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed, the magnetic section displays
FIXED in the magnetic trip field.


values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the magnetic section displays a drop-down list of
the available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable drop-down list.
Continuous Adjustable Magnetic

adjustable, the magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in multiples
trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed is
displayed next to the Trip field. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.

This section describes the settings available for the Low Voltage Solid State trip unit (LVSST) on the
Trip Device page.

Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Trip device types. In this case, the Solid State
SST Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Solid State trip.
SST Model
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the model name for selected manufacturer.
Sensor ID
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Sensor ID for the selected Solid State trip
model. Next to Sensor ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected Sensor ID.
Rating Plug

Rating plugs can be defined in amperes, multiples or percent. Select from drop-down list and display the
Rating Plug for the selected Sensor ID. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed is displayed next
to Rating Plug field, the Rating plug unit (amperes/multiples/percent) for the selected Rating plug. An
example of Rating plugs in multiples and the actual trip displayed is shown below.
Phase Settings
The Phase settings for Solid State trip unit includes three elements Long-Time, Short-Time, and
Instantaneous (or Override). Each element is defined by its pickup and band settings. The settings
Long -Time
Check to enable the Long-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Long-Time
Long -Time Pickup

Select from drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting for the selected sensor ID. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual long-time pickup in amperes and
pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-Time pickup field.
Long -Time Band

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For continuously adjustable Long-
Time band, the range of the band, the multiple at which the band is defined and band step are displayed
next to the Long-Time band field, for your convenience.

Short -Time
Check the box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
If the Short-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Short-Time
Short-Time Pickup
Select from drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time pickup in amperes and
pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For the continuously adjustable
Short-Time band, the band step is displayed next to the Short-Time band field, for your convenience.
Short-Time I2T Band

Make a selection for the Short-Time I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Short-Time I2T band has
two settings, i.e. IN and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Short-Time band
curve inward (sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the Short-Time band curve outward (L-shaped).
Instantaneous
Check the box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then
Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the editor.
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected Sensor
ID. The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Instantaneous
pickup in amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the
Instantaneous pickup field.

Check this box to enable the Instantaneous Override setting. Checking this box displays the actual
instantaneous override in amperes, for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous Override is enabled, Instantaneous pickup is grayed out and vice versa.
Ground Settings
The Ground element settings for Solid State trip unit includes the Ground Pickup, Band and I2T settings.
The settings available are described below.
Ground
Check this box to enable the Ground element setting for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Ground element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Ground tab is not
Ground Pickup
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Ground pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time pickup in
amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time
pickup field.

Ground Band
Make a selection from drop-down list or enter the Ground band setting for the selected sensor ID. The
band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The band step is displayed next to the
Ground band field for the continuously adjustable Ground band, for your convenience.
Ground Band I2T

Select the Ground I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Ground I2T band has two settings, i.e. IN
and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Ground band curve inward (sloped line)
and the OUT setting shifts the Ground band curve outward (L-shaped).

This section describes the settings available for Motor circuit Protector unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the Trip device types. In this case, the Motor
Circuit Protector type is selected.

MCP Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for Motor Circuit Protector.
MCP Model
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
MCP ID
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the MCP ID for the selected Motor Circuit Protector
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected MCP ID next to the MCP ID field.
The Motor Circuit Protector unit can be set as discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The settings
that are available are described below.
Discrete Adjustable
The discrete adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by discrete values. When the
magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the magnetic section displays a drop-down list of the available
discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes.
The continuous adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by continuously
adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is continuously adjustable, the
magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in multiples of trip device
ampere rating or in actual amperes. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.

This section describes the settings available for Electro-Mechanical unit on the Trip Device page.

Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the Trip device types. In this case, the Electro-
EM Manufacturer
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the manufacturer name for Electro-Mechanical trip
unit.
EM Model
Make a selection from drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
EM ID
Make a selection from drop-down list to display the EM ID for the selected Electro-Mechanical trip
model. The actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected EM ID next to the EM ID field.
Long-Time
Long -Time

Check the box to enable the Long-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Long-Time
Long -Time Pickup

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual long-time pickup in
amperes and the pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-Time
pickup field.
Long -Time Band

Select the Long-Time band curve label from the drop-down list, for the selected EM ID. Each label for
the Long-Time band is associated with a fixed point based curve that defines the shape of the Long-Time
band curve.
Short-Time
Short -Time
Check the box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Short-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Short-Time
Short-Time Pickup
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID.
amperes and the pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time
pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected EM ID.
The band settings can be discrete or continuously adjustable. The band step is displayed next to the Short-
Time band field for the continuously adjustable Short-Time band, for your convenience.
When the Short-Time band is discrete, it can be defined as a Horizontal band (Minimum/Maximum
clearing times) or as a point based Curve. The example below shows discrete Short-Time band defined
as a Horizontal band.
Note: The field is termed as Horizontal Band.

Another example with discrete Short-Time band defined as a curve is shown below.
Note: The field is termed as Band.
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Instantaneous
Select from drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected EM ID. The pickup
settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Instantaneous pickup in amperes
and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous pickup field.

14.11.5 TCC kA (Short-Circuit Clipping) Page

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC breaker trip unit curves in Star View are specified in
the TCC kA page of DC Circuit Breaker Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be set to Calculated or
User-Defined, the default being set to User-Defined option.
User-Defined

Selecting the User-defined option allows the user to enter the short-circuit kA values for TCC clipping.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value.
Fault (Show on TCC checkbox)

Check the box to enable the fault arrow in Star View.
Fault kA
This field displays the short-circuit current in kA for the Calculated option. For the User-defined option,
the fault kA field is editable.
Base V
For Calculated option Base V is display only. For User-Defined option Base V is editable.
Note: The selected device curve is plotted in reference to its base voltage value. For example, if a device
base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device curve will be
shifted by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.

Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values for the selected
breaker only.

Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available, for the selected breaker model

Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, for the selected breaker model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number for the selected breaker model.
Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This field displays the description for the selected breaker model.
Application

Edited by
User Name
Date

the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date

User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project in the menu bar.





UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


DC Elements DC Fuse
14.12 DC Fuse
The properties associated with DC fuses of the electrical distribution system can be entered in this editor.
DC fuse protection devices are available for a full range of voltages.
The Fuse Editor contains seven pages of properties and header information displayed on each page:
Header Information
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.12.1 Header
The header displays the selected fuse model on each page of the DC Fuse Editor.
Fuse Selected Fuse

Manufacturer Fuse Max. Volts Size ID Lock Icon
Fuse Model Speed Short-Circuit data

for selected size
Manufacturer
This field displays the manufacturer of the fuse selected from the library.
Max. Volts
This field displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected fuse in Volts.
Size
This field displays the selected size ID for the fuse.
Lock
Model
This field displays the model name of the fuse selected from the library.
Speed
This field displays the speed classification of the selected fuse.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Interrupting data
This field displays the short-circuit interrupting kA for the selected fuse size.
14.12.2 Info Page

Specify the DC fuse ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and
Description, Configuration Status, and view the DC fuse online status in the Info page.
Info
ID
ID to each DC fuse.
The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, which starts with the number one and increases
as the number of DC fuses increases. The default ID (dcFuse) for DC fuses can be changed from the
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
DC fuse (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If a terminal

DC Elements DC Fuse
of a DC fuse is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC fuse to a bus, select a bus from the drop-down list.
The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the fuse to other dc elements that reside in the same view where it
resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal pins
of the composite networks. You cannot make a connection to elements that reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC fuse to
a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown
below where DCFuse1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC fuse can be selected by clicking on the buttons for either the In Service
or Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC fuse can be edited like an In Service
DC fuse; however, an Out of Service DC fuse will not be included in any System Studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC fuse automatically becomes grayed out in the one-
line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service DC fuse will also be
status. Therefore, you can set a DC fuse to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the buttons for the
status is shown above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status under the specific
following example, status of a fuse is shown as closed under Normal configuration and open under Open
Tie configuration.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Equipment
Tag #
Name
Description
Real-Time Status
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP Real-Time Module only.
Scanned Status
This field displays the scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device.

DC Elements DC Fuse
14.12.3 Rating Page
Standard
Note: Once the fuse is selected from the fuse library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the library
entry and is display only.

Click on ANSI Standard to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE Standards.
When a DC Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their

DC Elements DC Fuse
selecting a fuse from library Quick Pick will turn the header text to a dark blue color indicating that the
substituted library data has been modified.
Voltage
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in Volts.
When a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. voltage selected from
library Quick Pick.
Size
Make a selection from the drop-down list to display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amps
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC Fuse in
amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from
library Quick Pick.
Interrupting
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the DC Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for selected
fuse size from library Quick Pick.

Click on IEC Standard to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with the IEC Standards. When a
DC Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
Voltage
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in Volts.
When a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. Voltage selected from
library Quick Pick.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Size
Make a selection from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amp
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC Fuse in
amperes. The Continuous Amp value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from the
library Quick Pick.
Breaking
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the breaking for the DC Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the breaking value will be set equal to the kA value for selected fuse size
from the Library Quick Pick.
Library (Quick Pick)

To select a Fuse from the Fuse Library click on the Library button and the Library Quick Pick Fuse
window will appear. Select a Fuse from the Library Quick Pick by highlighting the Manufacturer name
and fuse Model-Max V-Speed, which is a unique record. Select the desired size and short-circuit
interrupting kA. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it
to the editor.
Note: Upon selection of library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name with other details are
displayed on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library the
header text will be displayed in a dark blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been
modified.
The information available in the Fuse library Quick Pick is described below.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option buttons to select that standard.
Note: The Standard selection in the Fuse library Quick Pick (and hence the fuse models displayed) will
be defaulted to the selection made for the standard on the Rating page. The Standard selection can be
changed on the Quick Pick if desired.
AC/DC
This field displays that the Fuse is DC. This option is grayed out and non-editable.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This field displays a list of all DC Fuse manufacturers included in the library for the selected standard.
Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Lock
Reference
Siemens is the reference manufacturer for ITE.
Link
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays list of all fuse models for the selected standard and fuse manufacturer. The
models are displayed in the form of Model Max V Speed, which forms a unique record name in the
fuse library. Select the Model Max V Speed by highlighting it.
Lock
Size and Short-Circuit data
Size
This column displays a list of all sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Speed record for DC
fuse. To select a size from the Quick Pick, highlight it.
Note: The sizes listed for the selected Fuse model is not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere
value as provided by the manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This column displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.

This column displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA corresponding to each size for the selected
ANSI fuse model.

This column displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected IEC
fuse model.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Lock
Model Info
Class
This field displays the Class (Fuse link, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This field displays the Type (Power Fuse, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, for the selected fuse model.
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
This field displays the application for the selected fuse model

DC Elements DC Fuse

The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC fuse curves in Star View are specified in the TCC kA
page of DC Fuse Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be set to Calculated or User-Defined, the
default being set to User-Defined option.
User-Defined
Clicking the button for the User-defined option allows the user to enter the short-circuit kA values for
TCC clipping.
Calculated
Clicking the button for the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value.

Check the box to enable the fault arrow in Star View.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Fault kA
This field displays the short-circuit current in kA for the Calculated option. If you have selected the User-
defined option, the fault kA field is editable.
Base V
This field under Calculated option Base V is for display only. The option Base V is editable in the User-
defined option.
base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device curve will be
shifted by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.

Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values only for the selected
fuse.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected fuse model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available for selected fuse model.
Brand Name
Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected fuse model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number for the selected fuse model.
Description
This field displays the description for the selected fuse model.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Application
This field displays the application for the selected fuse model.

DC Elements DC Fuse
Edited by
User Name
Date
the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date

DC Elements DC Fuse
User-Defined Info




DC Elements DC Fuse

UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

DC Elements DC Fuse

DC Elements DC Single-Throw Switch
14.13 DC Single-Throw Switch

The properties associated with DC single-throw switch of the electrical distribution system can be entered
in this editor.
The Single-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information:
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.13.1 Info Page

You can specify the DC Single-Throw Switch ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service, Ratings,
Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the online status of
the DC Single-Throw Switch within the Info page.

Info
ID
ID to each DC switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting with the
number one and increasing as the number of DC single-throw switches increases.
The default ID (dcS) for DC single-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
To & From
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC single-throw switch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for bus ID. If
a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the
Note: You can connect the terminals of the switch to other dc elements that reside in the same view
where it resides or can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC single-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,

reconnection of the switch to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device
to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPST1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC single-throw switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or
Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC single-throw switch can be edited like an
In Service DC single-throw switch; however, an Out of Service DC single-throw switch will not be
included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC single-throw
switch automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized
solely through an Out of Service DC single-throw switch will also be de-energized and become grayed
out.

status. Therefore, you can set a DC single-throw switch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC single-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Closed or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved
following example, status of a DC single-throw switch is shown as closed under Normal configuration
and open under Open Tie configuration.
Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC single-throw switch in volts in this field or select the rating from the
drop-down list.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC single-throw switch in amperes in this field or select the
rating from the drop-down list.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV. This value is not used in any calculations at this point.
Momentary
Enter the rated short-circuit withstand capability of the DC single-throw switch in kA or select the rating
from the drop-down list. This value represents the momentary capability (making or bracing) of the
switch and is used in DC Short-Circuit Studies to compare against the calculated fault duty of the
connected bus.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name

Description
OnLine Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (PSMS).
Scanned Status
The scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device is displayed in this field.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. PSMS will request confirmation.
Application/Association
Click the box to assign an association and make a selection from the drop-down lists to choose the
application and the ID for the switch.

User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date


14.14 DC Double-Throw Switch

The properties associated with DC double-throw switches of the electrical distribution system can be
The Double-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information:
Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
14.14.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the DC Double-Throw Switch ID, Connected Bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Ratings, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, and view the online
status of the DC Double-Throw Switch.

Info
ID
ID to each DC double-throw switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, starting
with the number one and increasing as the number of DC double-throw switches increases.
The default ID (dc2S) for DC double-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
From, Pos. A, and Pos. B

Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC double-throw switch are designated as From, Pos. A, and Pos.
B buses. A blank entry will be shown for bus ID if a terminal of a switch (From Pos. A or Pos. B) is not
connected to any bus. If a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of
the branch will be displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select
a bus from the drop-down list. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after
you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the double-throw switch to DC buses that reside in the same view
where it resides or can connect to buses that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to buses that reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC double-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,

to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPDT1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
Unlike a single-throw switch, the double-throw switch has to be connected to a bus before being
connected to loads and branch elements.
Next to the From, Pos. A, and Pos. B bus IDs, ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses for your
convenience.

In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC double-throw switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service
or Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC double-throw switch can be edited like
an In Service DC double-throw switch; however, an Out of Service DC double-throw switch will not be
included in any System Studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC double-
throw switch automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches
energized solely through an Out of Service DC double-throw switch will also be de-energized and
become grayed out.
status. Therefore, you can set a DC double-throw switch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC double-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Position A and Position B options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will be saved
following example, status of a switch is shown to be in position A under Configuration Status Switch A
and position B under Configuration Status Switch B.
Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC double-throw switch in V or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC double-throw switch in amperes or select the rating from the
drop-down list.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV.
Momentary
Enter the rated breaking current of the DC double-throw switch in kA or select the rating from the drop-
down list.

Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
OnLine Data
The data here are associated with the online (real-time) operation of ETAP (PSMS).
Scanned Status
The scanned status (open or closed) of the switching device is displayed.
Pin
Control
Click on this button to control the status (open or closed) of the device. PSMS will request confirmation.

User-Defined Info





enter any extra data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date


Chapter 15
Short-Circuit
The ETAP Short-Circuit Analysis program analyzes the effect of 3-phase, 1-phase, line-to-ground, line-
to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground faults on electrical power systems. The program calculates the total
short-circuit currents as well as the contributions of individual motors, generators, and utility ties in the
system. Fault duties are in compliance with the latest editions of the ANSI/IEEE Standards (C37 series)
and IEC Standards (IEC 60909 and others).
This chapter describes definitions and usage of different tools you will need to run short-circuit studies. In
order to give you a better understanding of the standards applied to short-circuit studies and to interpret
output results more easily, some theoretical background, and standard information are also included.
The ANSI/IEEE Short-Circuit toolbar and IEC Short-Circuit toolbar sections explain how you can launch
a short-circuit calculation, open and view an output report, or select display options. The Short-Circuit
Study Case Editor section explains how you can create a new Study Case, what parameters are required to
specify a Study Case, and how to set them. The Display Options section explains what options are
available for displaying some key system parameters and the output results on the one-line diagram, and
how to set them.
The ANSI/IEEE calculation methods section lists standard compliance information and both general and
detailed descriptions of calculation methods used by ETAP. In particular, definitions and discussion of ,
1.5-4, and 30 cycle networks, calculation of ANSI multiplying factors, and high voltage and low voltage
circuit breaker momentary and interrupting duties are provided. The Required Data section describes what
data are necessary to perform short-circuit calculations and where to enter them. If you perform short-
circuit studies using IEC Standards, the IEC Calculation Methods section provides useful information on
standard compliance, definitions on most commonly used IEC technical terms, and general and detailed
descriptions of calculation methods for all important results, including initial symmetrical short-circuit
current, peak short-circuit current, symmetrical short-circuit breaking current, and steady-state short-
circuit current. Finally, the Short-Circuit Study Output Report section illustrates and explains output
reports and their format.

Short-Circuit Analysis ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar
15.1 ANSI Short-Circuit Toolbar

This toolbar is active when you are in Short-Circuit Mode and the standard is set to ANSI in the Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor.
3-Phase Faults Device Duty
Panel/UPS/ 1-Ph System Device Duty
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults Cycle
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults 1.5-4 Cycle
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults 30 Cycle
Arc Flash Hazard Calculation
Short-Circuit Display Options
Alert View
Short-Circuit Report Manager
Halt Current Calculation
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
3-Phase Faults - Device Duty

Click on this button to perform a 3-phase fault study per ANSI C37 Standard. This study calculates
momentary symmetrical and asymmetrical rms, momentary asymmetrical crest, interrupting symmetrical
rms, and interrupting adjusted symmetrical rms short-circuit currents at faulted buses. ETAP checks the
protective device rated close and latching, and adjusted interrupting capacities against the fault currents,
and flags inadequate devices.
Generators and motors are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactance.

Panel/UPS/ 1-Ph System Device Duty

Click on this button to perform a Device Duty Short-Circuit study per ANSI Standards for the parts of
system below a main panel, a UPS and a phase adapter. These subsystems are mostly single-phase
systems, but there can be three-phase components below a main panel or a three-phase UPS. This study
calculates short-circuit currents in the cycle network to evaluate Phase A, B, C, AB, BC, CA, three-
wire center tap or three-phase using protective device capabilities in these systems. Please note that motor
load contributions below panels, UPS pr phase adapters are not considered in the calculation. Typically,
these contributions are almost negligible for low voltage single phase motor loads and can be ignored.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - Cycle (Max. Short-Circuit Current)
Click on this button to perform line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and 3-phase fault
studies per ANSI Standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values at cycle at
faulted buses, which are considered the maximum short-circuit current values.
Generators and motors are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence subtransient reactance.
Generator, motor, and transformer grounding types and winding connections are taken into consideration
when constructing system positive, negative, and zero sequence networks. Any adjustment for the
impedance is taken as negative in order to produce smaller impedance and thus yield higher short-circuit
currents.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - 1.5 to 4 Cycle

Click on this button to perform 3-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and 3-phase
fault studies per ANSI Standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values between
1.5 to 4 cycles at faulted buses.
Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence subtransient reactance, and motors
are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence transient reactance. Generator, motor,
transformer grounding types, and winding connections are taken into considerations when constructing
system positive, negative, and zero sequential networks. Any adjustment for the impedance is taken as
negative in order to produce smaller impedance and thus yield higher short-circuit currents.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults - 30 Cycle (Min. Short-Circuit Current)
Click on this button to perform 3-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and 3-phase
fault studies per ANSI Standards. This study calculates short-circuit currents in their rms values at 30
cycles at faulted buses, which are the minimum, short-circuit current values.
Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence reactance, and short-circuit current
contributions from motors are ignored. Generator and transformer grounding types and winding
connections are taken into consideration when constructing system positive, negative, and zero sequence
networks. Any impedance adjustment can be applied as negative or positive. You may configure the
impedance tolerance and temperature adjustments to yield higher impedance value (and thus further
minimize the short-circuit current value) by selecting the option Apply Positive Tolerance and Max.
Temperature for ANSI Minimum Short-circuit Calculation. This option is located on the Adjustment tab
of the Short-Circuit Study Case.

See the Display Options section to customize the Short-Circuit Annotation Display options on the one-
line diagram. This dialog box contains options for ANSI short-circuit study results and associated device

parameters. This includes displayed results for 3-phase and unbalanced faults and their individual
contributions (LG, LL, and LLG). The display options also show Arc Flash Results.

Click on this button to perform an Arc Flash Hazard analysis based on the options selected on the Short-
Circuit Study Case Arc Flash page (NFPA 70E or IEEE 1584). The 3-phase fault current used to
determine the Incident Energy is based on ANSI Short-Circuit Standards.
Alert
After performing a short-circuit device duty calculation, you can click on this button to open the Alert
View, which lists all devices with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the Study Case.

Short-Circuit Output Reports are provided in Crystal Report format. The Report Manager provides four
pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report.
Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report Manager for ANSI short-
circuit studies. You can open and save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel format.
If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
You can open the whole Short-Circuit Output Report or only a part of it, depending on the format
selection.
You can also view output reports by clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case
toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for short-circuit calculations.
To view any of the listed output reports, click on the output report name, and then click on the View
Output Report button.


The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a short-circuit calculation has been initiated, this button
becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the calculation.
Get Online Data

When the ETAP Management System is set up and the Sys Monitor presentation is online, you can bring
real-time data into your offline presentation and run a load flow by pressing on this button. You will
notice that the Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the online
data.
Get Archived Data

When ETAPS Playback is set up and any presentation is in Playback Mode, you can bring this data into
your presentation and run a load flow by pressing on this button. You will notice that the Operating
Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the playback data.

Short-Circuit Analysis IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar
15.2 IEC Short-Circuit Toolbar

This toolbar is active when you are in Short-Circuit Mode and the standard is set to IEC in the Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor.
3-Phase Faults Device Duty (IEC 60909)
Panel/UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty
LG, LL, LLG & 3-Phase Faults (IEC 60909)
3-Phase Faults Transient Study (IEC 61363)
Alert View
Short-Circuit Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
3-Phase Faults - Device Duty (IEC 60909)

Click on this button to perform a 3-phase fault study per IEC 60909 Standard. This study calculates initial
symmetrical rms, peak, symmetrical and asymmetrical breaking rms, and steady-state rms short-circuit
currents and their DC offset at faulted buses. ETAP checks the protective device rated making and
breaking capacities against the fault currents and flags inadequate devices.
Generators and motors are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactance.

Note that device duty calculation for protective devices that are connected to single-phase loads is carried
out only when you run the Panel/UPS/1-Ph Device Duty calculation.
Panel/UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty (IEC 60909)

Click on this button to perform a 1-phase device duty short-circuit fault per IEC 60909 Standards. This
study calculates initial symmetrical (Ik) currents for evaluation of protective device capabilities in parts
of the system which are below a main panel, a UPS, or a phase-adapter. These subsystems are mostly
single-phase systems, but there can be three-phase components below a main panel or a three-phase UPS.
Note that when you run the Panel/UPS/1-Ph Device Duty, ETAP also performs device duty calculation on
protective devices that are connected between a single-phase loads and a three-phase system bus. A
three-phase system bus is one that is not below a panel or a UPS.
Note that motor load contributions below panels, UPS pr phase adapters are not considered in the
calculation. Typically, these contributions are almost negligible for low voltage single phase motor loads
and can be ignored.
LG, LL, LLG, & 3-Phase Faults (IEC 60909)

Click on this button to perform line-to-ground, line-to-line, line-to-line-to-ground, and 3-phase fault
studies per IEC 60909 Standard. This study calculates initial symmetrical rms, peak and symmetrical
breaking rms, and steady-state rms short-circuit currents at faulted buses.
Generators are modeled by their positive, negative, and zero sequence reactance, and motors are modeled
by their locked-rotor impedance. Generator, motor, and transformer grounding types, and winding
connections are taken into consideration when constructing system positive, negative, and zero sequence
networks.
3-Phase Faults - Transient Study (IEC 61363)

Click on this button to perform a 3-phase fault study per IEC 61363 Standard. This study calculates
instantaneous values of actual short-circuit current, DC offset, short-circuit current envelope, AC
component, and DC offset in percent for total short-circuit current at faulted buses. The results are
tabulated as a function of time.
Generators are modeled by their positive sequence subtransient reactance, and motors are modeled by
their locked-rotor impedance. Their subtransient and transient time constants and DC time constants are
also considered in the calculation.

See the Display Options section to customize the short-circuit Annotation Display options on the one-line
diagram. This dialog box contains options for IEC short-circuit study results and associated device
parameters.

Click on this button to perform an Arc Flash Hazard analysis based on the options selected on the Short-
Circuit Study Case Arc Flash page (NFPA 70E or IEEE 1584). The fault current used to determine the
incident energy is based on IEC Standards.

Alert View
After performing a short-circuit study, you can click on this button to open the Alert View, which lists all
devices with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the Study Case.

Short-Circuit Output Reports are provided in Crystal Report forms. The Report Manager provides four
pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report.
Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report Manager.
toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for short-circuit calculations.
To view any of the listed output reports, click on the output report name, and then click on the View
Output Report button. You can open and save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel
format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
Short-Circuit Plots
Click on this button to open the IEC 61363 Plot Selection Editor. You can display the following plots:

Total Fault Current (i)

AC Component of Fault Currents (Iac, rms)
DC Component of Fault Current (Idc)
Percent DC Component of Fault Current (Idc %)
Top Envelop of Fault Current (ienv)
Combine Plots
When this box is checked, plots for all selected types will be displayed on the same plot.
Close All Plots

When this button is clicked, all open plots for IEC 61363 calculation will be closed.
Export to COMTRADE
When this button is clicked, all selected plots will be saved to file in COMTRADE format. A window
will open to allow you to specify the directory in which to save the file.

The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a short-circuit calculation has been initiated, this button
becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the calculation.
Get Online Data

You can bring real-time data into your offline presentation and run a load flow by pressing on this button.
You will notice that the Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the
online data. This requires ETAP to be online.
Get Archived Data

You can bring archived data from the ETAP Playback Server into your presentation and run a load flow
by pressing on this button. You will notice that the Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case
Editor will be updated with the playback data. This requires ETAP to be online.

Short-Circuit Analysis Study Case Editor
15.3 Study Case Editor

The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, faulted bus selection, and a
variety of options for output reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study
Cases. Short-circuit calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the Study
Case selected in the toolbar. You can easily switch between Study Cases without the trouble of resetting
the Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you
time.
With respect to the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, Study Cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system components (i.e., for any configuration status, one-line diagram
presentation, and Base/Revision data).
The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor can be accessed from the Study Case toolbar by clicking on the
Study Case button. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Short-Circuit
Study Case folder.
Short-Circuit Study Case Toolbar
To create a new Study Case, go to Project View, right-click on the Short-Circuit Study Case folder, and
select Create New. A new Study Case will be created, which is a copy of the default Study Case, and be
added to the Short-Circuit Study Case folder.
Project View

15.3.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and
entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the navigator button
at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to the next existing Study Case.
XFMR Tap
Two methods are provided for modeling transformer off-nominal tap settings:
Adjust Base kV
Base voltages of the buses are calculated using transformer turn ratios, which include the transformer kV
ratings as well as the off-nominal tap settings. In looped systems, there is a possibility of applying
different base voltage values from two different paths if the transformer tap positions are considered to
adjust the base kV. If this situation is detected, ETAP displays the message shown below:

If this situation is caused by transformer taps, then you may use the Use Nominal Tap as an alternative.
If you click the OK button on this error message window, the program will carry out the calculation
with the Use Nominal Tap method.
Use Nominal Tap

Transformer kV ratings are used as the transformer turn ratios for calculating base voltages of the buses
(i.e., all off-nominal tap settings are ignored and transformer impedances are not adjusted). However,
even if this option is used, in some cases a looped system may still contain transformers with
incompatible voltage ratios. This can lead to two different base voltage values being applied at the same
faulted bus, and this prevents the short-circuit calculation from continuing. An error message similar to
the one below may be generated by the SC program under this situation:
To correct this situation, you need to change the transformer kV rating of one of the transformers
involved in the loop.
Calc. Load Term. SC

Check this box to calculate the short-circuit current at the load terminals. The fault analysis is performed
at the terminals of induction motors, synchronous motors, static loads, capacitors and MOVs. The load
terminal fault calculation is carried out when you run Device Duty studies and is applicable to 3-phase
and 1-phase loads connected to three-phase buses.
Note that the load terminal fault current for three-phase loads is calculated when you run the 3-phase
Device Duty. The load terminal fault current for single-phase loads (connected to a three-phase bus) is
calculated when you run the Panel/UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty. The following images illustrate this
concept:

Panel/UPS/1Ph Subsystem
ETAP allows you to perform short-circuit device duty evaluations for Panel/UPS/1-phase subsystems.
The Info page has three options which allow selecting which type of subsystem to include in the device
duty calculation.
Panel
When this option is selected, all panel subsystems (3-Phase and 1-Phase) are included in device duty
calculations.
UPS
When this option is selected, all UPS subsystems (3-Phase and 1-Phase) are included in device duty
calculations.
1-phase
When this option is selected, all single phase subsystems connected below phase adapters will be included
in device duty calculations.
Please see the ANSI/IEEE calculation methods section for more details on the Panel/UPS/1-Phase Device
Short-Circuit Duty Evaluation.
Cable/OL Heater
Select the appropriate checkboxes in this option group to include the impedance of equipment cable and
overload heaters of medium and/or low voltage motors in short-circuit studies.
Report
Short-Circuit Output Reports have the following options:
Contribution Level
Choose how far away you want to see the short-circuit current contributions from individual buses to each
faulted bus by specifying the number of bus levels away in this section. For large systems, choosing to
report a high number of levels may result in very large output reports (the report grows exponentially with

the number of levels selected). The default is one. It is recommended not to report more than 3 levels
away for large systems unless it is required to report these far-away contributions.
When selecting contribution levels of n buses away, depending on the number of faulted buses, the
calculated results are displayed on the one-line diagram and printed in the output report as follows:
Fault 1 (one) bus Displayed results: whole system

Reported output: n bus levels away
Fault more than one bus Displayed results: 1 bus level away (from the adjacent buses)
Reported output: n bus levels away
Motor Contribution Based on

You can select the following options for considering motor contribution in short-circuit studies.
Motor Status
When this option is selected, motors whose status is either Continuous or Intermittent will make
contributions in short-circuit. Motors with Spare status will not be considered in the Short-Circuit
Analysis.
Loading Category
When this option is selected, you can choose a loading category from the selection box to the right. In the
short-circuit calculation, motors that have non-zero loading in the selected loading category will have a
contribution in short-circuit. Motors with zero loading in the selected loading category will not be
included in the Short-Circuit Analysis.
Both
When this option is selected, a motor will make contribution in short-circuit if it meets either the Motor
Status condition or the Loading Category condition. That is, for a motor to be excluded in the Short-
Circuit Analysis, it has to be in the Spare status and have zero loading in the selected Loading Category.
Bus Selection
ETAP is capable of faulting one or more buses in the same run; however, in the latter case buses are
faulted individually, not simultaneously. Depending on the specified fault type, ETAP will place a 3-
phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground fault at each bus, which is faulted for short-
circuit studies.
When you open the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor for the first time, all buses are listed in the Dont
Fault list box. This means that none of the buses are faulted. Using the following procedures, you can
decide which bus(es) you want to fault for this Study Case.
To fault a bus, highlight the bus ID in the Dont Fault list box and click on the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Fault list box.
To remove a bus from the Fault list box, highlight the bus ID and click on the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Dont Fault list box.
If you wish to fault all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses, select that option and click
on the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Dont Fault list box to the
Fault list box.

To remove all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses from the Fault list box, select that
option and click on the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Fault list box to
the Dont Fault list box.
Note: Single-phase buses below the panel or phase adapter cannot be faulted and therefore will not be
displayed in the list of buses to fault.
Study Remarks 2nd Line

Up to 120 alphanumeric characters may be entered in the Study Remarks 2nd Line field. Information
entered here will be printed on the second line of every Output Report page header line. These remarks
can provide specific information regarding each Study Case. (Note: The first line of the header
information is global for all Study Cases and is entered in the Project Menu field.)
15.3.2 Standard Page

Standard
Both ANSI and IEC Standards are available for short-circuit studies. Select the Short-Circuit Study
Standard by clicking on the standard notation. Different sets of solution control variables (prefault
voltage, calculation methods, etc.) are available for each standard.
When you create a new Study Case, the Short-Circuit Standard is set equal to the project standard you
have specified in the Project Standards Editor, which is accessible from the Project menu. The Study Case
standard can be changed independently of the project standard.
The Short-Circuit Study Case Editor ANSI Standard page is shown below:

ANSI Standard Page
When the IEC Standard is selected, the study options will change and you will see the page shown below:

IEC Standard Page
Prefault Voltage - ANSI Standard

You can select either fixed or variable prefault voltages for all buses.
Fixed Prefault Voltage

This option allows you to specify a fixed prefault voltage for all the faulted buses. This fixed value can be
in percent of bus nominal kV or base kV. Bus nominal kV is the value you enter in the Bus Editor to
represent the normal operating voltage. The bus base kV is calculated by the program and is only reported
in the results section of the short-circuit report for each faulted bus.
The process of computing base kV starts from one of the swing machines, such as a utility or a generator,
by taking its design voltage as the base kV for its terminal bus. It then propagates throughout the entire
system. When it encounters a transformer from one side, the transformer rated voltage ratio will be used
to calculate the base kV for the buses on other sides. If the Adjust Base kV option is selected on the Info
page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor, the transformer tap values will also be used in the base kV
calculation along with transformer rated voltage ratio. It can be seen from this calculation procedure that
the base kV is close to the operating voltage, provided that the swing machine is operating at its design
setting.
Variable Prefault Voltage

If you select the Vmag x Nominal kV (in the Bus Editor) prefault voltage option, ETAP uses the bus
voltages entered in the Bus Editor as the prefault voltage for faulted buses. Using this option, you can
perform short-circuit studies with each faulted bus having a different prefault voltage. For instance, you
can perform short-circuit studies using the bus voltages calculated from a specific load flow study and
calculate fault currents for an actual operating condition. To do so, select Update Initial Bus Voltages
from the Load Flow Study Case Editor and run a load flow analysis.
As the short-circuit current is proportional to the prefault voltage, different options will most likely give
different results. However, with any one of the above options, the calculated fault current is the same as
long as the prefault voltage in kV is the same. The option to be used for a study depends on your
engineering judgment and objective of the study. If you wish to calculate the fault current to size
protective switching devices, apply the maximum possible prefault voltages in the calculation by using
the option of Fixed Base kV. If the bus normal operating voltage is entered in the Bus Editor as the bus
nominal voltage, you may also use the Fixed Nominal kV option.
HVCB Interrupting Capability- ANSI Standard

According to ANSI Standards, the rated interrupting capability entered in the High Voltage Circuit
Breaker Editor corresponds to the maximum kV of the circuit breaker. When the circuit breaker is utilized
under a voltage below this maximum kV, its capability is actually higher than the rated interrupting kA.
In this section, you specify the operating voltage to be used to adjust breaker rating.
Nominal kV
When this option is selected, the nominal kV of the bus, connected to the circuit breaker, is assumed to be
the operating voltage, and breaker, interrupting rating is adjusted to this voltage value.

Nominal kV & Vf
When this option is selected, the operating voltage of the breaker is calculated as the multiplication of the
prefault voltage and the nominal kV of the bus connected to the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker
interrupt rating is adjusted to this voltage value.
Machine X/R - ANSI Standard

Fixed and variable machine X/R options are available for short-circuit calculations. The selection of fixed
or variable machine X/R impacts only the interrupting (1.5-4 cycle) duty calculations of high voltage
circuit breakers.
Fixed X/R
ETAP uses the specified machine X/R ratio (=Xd/Ra) for both cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks. The
intention of this option is to account for the fact that ANSI Standard does not consider variable machine
X/R ratio.
The following example shows Ra calculations when X/R ratio is fixed:
Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network

Input: Xsc 15 25
Input: X/R = 10
Calculated: Ra 1.5 2.5
Variable X/R
ETAP uses the specified machine X/R ratio and subtransient reactance (Xd) to calculate the armature
resistance (Ra). This resistance is then used for both cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks. The motor
reactance for 1.5-4 cycle network is larger than the motor reactance for cycle networks. Therefore, this
option results in a higher machine X/R ratio and a higher short-circuit contribution for the interrupting
fault calculation of a high voltage circuit breaker than the fixed X/R option.
The following example shows Ra and X/R calculations when variable X/R is considered:
Cycle Network 1.5-4 Cycle Network

Input: Xsc 15 25
Input: X/R = 10
Calculated: Ra 1.5 1.5
Final: X/R 10 16.7
LVCB Interrupting Capability

When running ANSI device duty, select to use either the ANSI Standard or a user-defined value to
compare the operating kV against the LVCB rated kV as defined in the LVCB editor.

Note: This option does not apply for Fused LVCB. The %Limit is fixed to 100% of the rated kV of the
LVCB.
C37.13/UL 489
Compare the operating voltage against 105.83% of the rated kV of the LVCB. ETAP will issue an alert to
indicate the operating kV exceeds the LVCB rated maximum kV for the interrupting kA capability.
User-Defined kV
Compare the operating voltage against a user-defined percentage of the rated kV of the LVCB. ETAP will
issue an alert to indicate the operating kV exceeds the LVCB rated maximum kV for the interrupting kA
capability. The allowable range for this field is 100 - 106%.
Protective Device Duty ANSI Standard

You can select to use either the bus total fault current or the maximum current through a protective device
to compare against protective device duty.
Based on Total Bus Fault Current

Check this box to use the total bus fault current to compare against protective device rating. The
Maximum Through Fault Current is always used to compare against the protective device rating for
circuit breakers that are flagged as a generator circuit breaker due to its comparable contributions from
both generator and system sides, even if the Based on Total Bus Fault Current option is selected.
Based on Maximum Through Fault Current

Check this box to use the maximum through fault current to compare against protective device rating. The
Maximum Through Fault Current is determined as the larger value between the fault current contribution
through a protective device and the total bus fault current minus the contribution through the device.
For ANSI Device Duty calculation, if the faulted bus is the terminal bus of a generator or motor, the rated
or Full Load Amps (FLA) of the machine can be considered at the users choice to determine the
Maximum Through Fault c=Current. It is assumed that for a generator, the rated current is flowing out of
the generator, and for a motor, the full load current is flowing into the motor. Therefore, for a generator,
the rated current is added to generator short-circuit contribution to determine the Maximum Through
Fault Current. For a motor, the full load current is subtracted from motor short-circuit contribution to
determine the Maximum Through Fault Current.
There is an ETAP Preference entry which allows you to consider or not consider the FLA for the
calculation of the Maximum Through Fault Current. You can edit the Include Machine FLA Based on
Maximum Through entry by accessing the Options (Preferences) Editor from the Tools menu. It is
located under the short-circuit section.

This entry indicates to the short-circuit program to include (or exclude) the rated Full Load Amps (FLA)
of induction/synchronous machines in the calculation of the maximum through short-circuit current duty
(momentary or interrupting) of protective devices directly connected to those machines. If this entry is set
to 0, the FLA will not be considered (this includes generator circuit breakers). This entry only applies for
ANSI Short-circuit calculations (IEC Short-Circuit does not consider the FLA and thus is not affected by
this option).
C37.010 1999
Check this option to calculate the S factor for symmetrical rated high voltage circuit breaker based on the
contact parting time entered in the Circuit Breaker Editor. In calculating the S factor, the standard time
constant for DC component specified in ANSI Standards are used, 45 ms for regular circuit breaker and
133 ms for generator circuit breaker. Additionally, when calculating asymmetrical fault current, the
multiplication factors for local and remote contribution are also calculated based on the contact parting
time entered in the Circuit Breaker Editor. In case the curve for the specified contact parting time is not
available; the multiplication factor is interpolated based on available curves. See section ANSI/IEEE
Calculation Methods for more information.
C37.010 1979 and Older

When this option is selected, the standard contact parting time and corresponding S factor are used in the
calculation. These standard contact parting time and corresponding S factors are given in group High
Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation. When this option is selected, the contact parting
time entered in high voltage circuit breaker is ignored in the calculation.
MF for HV CB & Bus Momentary Duty

This group provides options for you to select a method to calculate the multiplication factors used for
computation of asymmetrical and peak values for high-voltage circuit breaker and high-voltage bus
momentary duty. Note that the asymmetrical and peak values of momentary duty are calculated based on

the symmetrical duty and X/R. Therefore, this group of options is for selection of X/R used in the
calculation. Figures below graphically show the calculated MF for each method.
Based on Calculated X/R

With this option selected, the multiplication factors used to compute the asymmetrical and peak duty for
high-voltage circuit breakers and high-voltage buses are based on calculated system X/R ratio. This X/R
ratio is calculated from the separate X and R networks for each faulted bus. From the figures given
above, it is seen that at about X/R = 25, the calculated multiplication factor for the asymmetrical duty
(MFm) is about 1.6. At about X/R = 17, the calculated multiplication factor for the crest duty (MFp) is
about 2.6. When the calculated X/R ratio is different from these values, the multiplication factors can be
larger or smaller than 1.6 or 2.6. Since this option provides the most accurate results for momentary duty,
it is the default option.
Set to 1.6 & 2.6 (RMS & Peak) as Min.

high-voltage circuit breakers and high-voltage buses are based on calculated system X/R ratio with
minimum limits. The calculated multiplication factor for the asymmetrical duty (MFm) is limited at no
less than 1.6 and the calculated multiplication factor for the peak duty (MFp) is limited at no less than 2.6.
Note that the values of 1.6 and 2.6 are used in the examples in IEEE Std C37.010.
Set to 1.6 & 2.6 (RMS & Peak)

high-voltage circuit breakers and high-voltage buses are fixed values. The value of 1.6 is used as the
multiplication factor for the asymmetrical duty (MFm) and the value of 2.6 is used as the multiplication
factor for the peak duty (MFp). In this case, system X/R ratio has no effect on the calculation of
asymmetrical and peak duty. Note that the values of 1.6 and 2.6 are used in the examples in IEEE Std
C37.010.
MF for LV CB & (Molded & Insulated) Duty

This group provides options for you to select the method to be used for calculating multiplication factor
for low voltage molded case circuit breaker and insulated case circuit breakers.

Based on Peak Current

This method calculates multiplication factor (MF) based on the peak current, which is the same method
used for calculating MF for an unfused low voltage power circuit breaker.
Based on Asymmetrical Current

This method calculates multiplication factor (MF) based on the asymmetrical current, which is the same
method used for calculating MF for a fused low voltage power circuit breaker.
Higher MF (Peak or Asymmetrical)

When this option is selected, the method that yields higher MF will be used, which provides a more
conservative result. Study results have shown that depending on the sizing of a low voltage molded or
insulated circuit breaker and its testing power factor, either the peak current method or the asymmetrical
method may give a more conservative result. The following table shows results for some typical circuit
breakers.
Breaker Peak Current Asymmetrical Current

Rating Method Method
20 kA
More Conservative
(PF = 20%, X/R = 4.9)
10 -- 20 kA
More Conservative
(PF = 30%, X/R = 3.18)
<=10 kA
Slightly More Conservative
(PF = 50%, X/R = 1.73)
Short-Circuit Current - IEC Standard

In this group, you specify if the maximum or minimum short-circuit current to be calculated and based on
the selection, different c factors will be used to modify source voltage. There are three options available:
Max, User-Defined c Factor, and Min. When the Max option is selected, the maximum values for c factor
as defined in Table I of IEC 60909 Standard is used to calculate maximum fault current:
< 1001 V c Factor = 1.10

1001 to 35000 V c Factor = 1.10
> 35000 V c Factor = 1.10
When the User-Defined c Factor option is selected, ETAP uses the user specified c factor. The ranges for
the c factors are as follows:
< 1001 V c Factor = 0.95 -- 1.10

1001 to 35000 V c Factor = 1.00 -- 1.10
> 35000 V c Factor = 1.00 -- 1.10
When the Min. option is selected, the minimum values for c Factor, as defined in IEC 60909 Standard, are
used to calculate minimum fault current:
< 1001 V c Factor = 0.95

1001 to 35000 V c Factor = 1.00
> 35000 V c Factor = 1.00
In each case, ETAP calculates ip, I"k, and Ik. Additionally, impedance tolerance, length tolerance, and
operating temperature that are used in calculations also vary according to the c Factor options selected.

If either the Max or User-Defined c Factor option is selected:
The negative tolerance value is used for synchronous generator and synchronous motor direct-axis
subtransient reactance (Xd).
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on impedance values, the negative tolerance
value is used for transformer impedance, reactor impedance, and overload heater impedance.
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on length, the negative tolerance value is
used to for line length and cable length.
If the option is set in the Study Case to adjust resistance value by individual operating temperature,
the minimum operating temperature is used to adjust cable and line resistance.
If the Min option is selected:
The positive tolerance value is used for synchronous generator and synchronous motor direct-axis
subtransient reactance (Xd).
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on impedance values, the positive tolerance
value is used for transformer impedance, reactor impedance, and overload heater impedance.
If the option is set in the Study Case to apply tolerance on length, the positive tolerance value is
used for line length and cable length.
If the option is set in the Study Case to adjust resistance value by individual operating temperature,
the maximum operating temperature is used to adjust cable and line resistance.
It should be noted that when the Min option is selected, the IEC Duty button is disabled in the IEC toolbar
to prevent you from accidentally performing device duty calculation with minimum short-circuit current.
Calculation Method - IEC Standard
X/R for Peak Current
Method A Using the uniform ratio X/R in calculating the peak current
Method B Using the X/R ratio at the short-circuit location in calculating the peak current
Method C Using equivalent frequency in calculating the peak current
Protective Device Duty IEC Standard

You can select either the bus total fault current or the maximum current through a protective device to
compare against protective device duty.
Based on Total Bus Fault Current

Check this box to use the Total Bus Fault Current to compare against protective device rating for all
protective device ratings. The High Voltage Circuit Breakers (HVCB) flagged as generators are treated
accordingly only in ANSI short-circuit calculations. For an IEC short-circuit these are still considered as
non-generator HVCB (the generator HVCB only applies under ANSI Standards).

Based on Maximum Through Fault Current

Check this box to use the Maximum Through Fault Current to compare against protective device rating.
The maximum through fault current is determined as the larger value between the fault current
contribution through a protective device and the total bus fault current minus the contribution through the
device.
The rated current of a generator and full load current of a motor are not considered in determining
Maximum Through Fault Current due to the difference in short-circuit calculation methods between
ANSI and IEC Standards.
Report Breaking Duty vs. CB Time Delay

In the IEC Device Duty calculation, this option will report a list of breaking currents for a number of
different delay times in the individual fault calculation result page of the Crystal Report. You can select to
display the breaking duty based on the total fault current or based on the Maximum Through Fault
Current.
The breaking duty is not directly associated with any protective device; therefore the total bus fault
current and the Maximum Through Fault Current options below this checkbox are independent of the
option selected for the Protective Device Duty.
LVCB Breaking IEC Standard

This group allows you to specify what LVCB breaking current rating is used to compare against the
calculated fault current.
Use Ics
If this option is selected, ETAP will use the rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (kA) to compare
against the calculated breaking current by the IEC Duty (909) Short-Circuit Module.
Use Icu
If this option is selected, ETAP will use the rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (kA) to compare
against the calculated breaking current by the IEC Duty (909) Short-Circuit Program.
Cmax for Z Adjustment (<1000 V)

This group allows you to specify which constant value to use in the calculation of the K correction factors
used to adjust the impedance of devices like transformers and generators.
1.05 (+6% V Tolerance)

Use cmax = 1.05 for calculating the impedance correction factors for systems with 6% Voltage Tolerance.

Note: These constants are not used as c Factors for the adjustment of the prefault voltage. They are only
used to calculate the impedance adjustment (i.e. Kt, Kg, etc)

Zero Sequence MDL ANSI Standard and IEC Standard
Include Y for Branch and Static Load

This option allows you to consider the effect of zero-sequence capacitances of lines and cables as well as
shunt admittances of distinct static load elements. Y is considered by both ANSI and IEC LG and LLG
short-circuit calculations. This means that if a cable has a susceptance value specified under the Y field
(impedance page), ETAP will convert this value into the zero sequence capacitance and consider it in the
calculation of 3Io.


The Arc Flash Hazard page allows you to select the analysis method and Study Case options to perform
an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. This page will be discussed in more detail in the Arc Flash Analysis
section in Chapter 18.
15.3.4 AF Data Page

The Arc Flash Data page allows the user to set the options for the selection of global or individual AF
input data for the calculation. Also select a global selection for the standard that defines the hazard risk
categories and PPE ratings you want to use for the arc flash study. This page will be discussed in more
detail in the Arc Flash Analysis chapter.


15.3.5 Adjustments Page

The Adjustments page of the Short-Circuit Study Case applies to both ANSI and IEC Standards. This
page contains different types of adjustments to conductor resistance, cable length, transformer impedance,
and others.
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to equipment resistance and impedance. Each
tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance setting or based
on a globally specified percent value.
Transformer Impedance Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the transformer impedance. The adjustment includes positive, negative, and
zero sequence impedance depending on the type of fault being performed (3-Phase or LG, LLG, and LL).
The net effect of the transformer impedance adjustment in short-circuit calculations is to decrease the
impedance by the specified percent tolerance value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12%
and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used in the short-circuit calculation will be 10.8%
resulting in a higher fault current.

The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by using the tolerance percent value
specified in the Transformer Editor Rating page. A global transformer impedance adjustment can be
specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field
of short-circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global impedance adjustment overrides any
individual transformer tolerance value.
Reactor Impedance Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Short-Circuit Module reduces the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher
fault current. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by using the tolerance percent value
specified in the Reactor Editor Rating page. A global Reactor Impedance Adjustment can be specified as
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of short-
Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any individual
reactor tolerance value.
Overload Heater Resistance Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the overload heater (OH) resistance. The Short-Circuit Module reduces the
OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller resistance and consequently a higher
fault current. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The Resistance Adjustment can be applied to individual overload heaters by using the tolerance percent
value specified in the Overload Heaters Editor Rating page. A global Overload Heater Resistance
Adjustment can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the
corresponding field of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Adjustment overrides any individual overload heater tolerance value.
The adjustments only apply if the Cable/OL Heater option is selected for MV and/or LV motors.
Synchronous Machine Direct-Axis Subtransient Reactance (Xd) Adjustment

The direct-axis subtransient reactance (Xd) for a synchronous generator or a synchronous motor will
always be adjusted by the Xd tolerance value entered in the Impedance/Model page of the Machine
Editor. The Short-Circuit module reduces the Xd value by the specified percent tolerance resulting in
smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the Xd value is 10% and its
tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted Xd value used in the short-circuit calculation is 9.5%.
Impedance Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit current Calculation

In general, in order to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the impedance
tolerance value is taken as a negative value, resulting in a smaller impedance value. However, in IEC
short-circuit current calculation, if the Min option is selected in the short-circuit current group of the
Standard page, the impedance tolerance value will be taken as a positive value. This leads to a larger
impedance value and a lower short-circuit current.

Length Tolerance
This group allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line length. Each
Cable Length Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Short-Circuit module reduces the cable length by the
specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For
example, if the length of the cable is 200 ft. and the tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted cable length used in
the short-circuit calculation is 190 ft.
The Length Adjustment can be applied to individual cables by using the tolerance percent value specified
in the Cable Editor Info page. A global Cable Length Adjustment can be specified as well by selecting
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of Short-Circuit Study Case
Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance value.
Transmission Line Length Adjustment

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Short-Circuit module reduces the
transmission line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and
consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the
tolerance is 2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the short-circuit calculation is 1.95
miles.
The Length Adjustment can be applied to individual lines by using the tolerance percent value specified
in the Transmission Line Editor Info page. A global Transmission Line Length Adjustment can be
of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any
individual transmission line tolerance value.
Length Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit current Calculation

In general, in order to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the length tolerance
value is taken as a negative value, resulting in shorter length. However, in IEC short-circuit current
calculation, if the Min option is selected in the short-circuit current group of the Standard page, the length
tolerance value will be taken as a positive value. This leads to a longer length and a lower short-circuit
current.
Resistance Temperature Correction

This group allows you to consider resistance correction based on the minimum operating temperature for
cable and transmission line conductors. Each temperature resistance correction can be applied based on
the individual cable/line minimum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Resistance Temperature Correction for Transmission Line Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Short-Circuit module adjusts
the conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating
temperature is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the resistance is reduced.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified in the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page. A global temperature
correction can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum temperature value in the
corresponding field of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature

correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page minimum temperature.
Please refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page section in Chapter 11, AC Elements.
Resistance Temperature Correction for Cable Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Short-Circuit Module adjusts the
conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating temperature
is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is reduced.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified in the Cable Editor Impedance page. A global temperature correction can be
specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum temperature value in the corresponding
field of Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature correction value
overrides any individual Cable Impedance Page minimum temperature. Please refer to the Cable Editor
Impedance page section in Chapter 11, AC Elements.
Resistance Temperature Correction for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit current Calculation

In general, in order to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the resistance
temperature correction is conducted according to the minimum operating temperature, resulting in a
smaller resistance value. However, in IEC short-circuit current calculation, if the Min option is selected in
the Short-circuit current section of the Standard page, the resistance temperature correction will be
conducted according to the maximum operating temperature. This leads to a higher resistance value and a
lower short-circuit current.
Fault Zf
You may consider fault impedance in the unbalance fault calculations. In this section, you specify the
fault impedance to be applied to all the faulted buses. Depending on the type of faults applied to a bus, the
specified fault impedance is assumed to be between locations as given below:
For a line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and the ground.
For a line-to-line fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and phase B.
For a line-to-line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between the ground and the
short-circuit point between phases A and B.
Include Fault Impedance Zf

Check this box to include fault impedance in the calculation. You can enter fault impedance in the editor
box below.
Fault Impedance Unit

You can enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent. If the Ohm option is selected, the values in
the R and X Editor boxes are in Ohms. If you select the Percent option, the values in the R and X Editor
boxes are in percent based on 100 MVA and the nominal kV of the faulted bus.
R and X
In these two editor boxes, you enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent, depending on the fault
impedance unit selected. These values apply to all the faulted buses.

Apply Positive Tolerance and Max. Temperature for ANSI Minimum Short-
Circuit Calculation
This checkbox option sets the impedance tolerance, length tolerance and resistance temperature
impedance corrections as positive adjustments instead of negative. This option is considered only when
you run the Minimum short-circuit calculation for ANSI Standards. The net effect of this option on the
calculation results is to increase the impedance/resistance of the elements in order to find the true
minimum short-circuit current.
15.3.6 Alert Page

The Alert page allows you to set up alerts on short-circuit calculation results. The objective is to alert you
to certain conditions of interest in short-circuit studies. The alerts are determined based on predetermined
device ratings and system topology after performing a short-circuit calculation.
Alert
There are two categories of alerts generated by the short-circuit calculations: Critical and Marginal. The
difference between the two is their use of different condition percent values for the same monitored

parameter. If a condition for a Critical Alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the alert view
window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for Marginal
Alerts, with the exception that the overloaded component will be displayed in the color magenta. Also,
the Marginal Alerts checkbox must be selected to display the Marginal Alerts. If a device alert qualifies it
for both Critical and Marginal alerts, then only Critical Alerts are displayed.
Bus Alert
Short-circuit simulation alerts for buses are designed to monitor crest, symmetrical, and asymmetrical
bracing conditions. These conditions are determined from bus rating values and Short-Circuit Analysis
results. The percent of monitored parameter value in the Short-Circuit Study Case Alert page is fixed at
100% for Critical Short-Circuit Alerts. The Marginal alert percent value is user-defined.
Protective Device Alert

The set up of protective device simulation alerts is similar to that of bus alerts. You can enter the
monitored parameter percent values for Marginal Alerts into the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor alert set
up page; however, this value is fixed to 100% for critical level alerts.
For all protective devices the current rating will be compared against the maximum through fault current
or the total bus fault current depending on the selection in the protective device duty in the Short-Circuit
Study Case Standards page.
Marginal Device Limit

ETAP flags all protective devices whose momentary and interrupting duties exceed their capabilities by
displaying the element in red on the one-line diagram and flagging it in the output report. Select the
Marginal Device Limit option and specify the marginal limit in percent of the device capability to flag
devices with marginal capabilities.
For example, consider a circuit breaker with an interrupting rating of 42 kA and a calculated short-circuit
duty of 41 kA. The capability of this circuit breaker is not exceeded; however, if the marginal device limit
is set to 95%, the circuit breaker will be flagged in the output report and will be displayed in purple in the
one-line diagram as a device with marginal capability.
Auto Display
The Auto Display feature of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor Alert page allows you to decide if the
Alert View window should be automatically displayed as soon as the short-circuit calculation is
completed.

Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options
15.4 Display Options

The Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
and Color information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
specific to that study.
15.4.1 Results Page

The Results page of the Display Options is where you select different result annotations to be displayed in
the one-line diagram. Depending on short-circuit study type, ANSI or IEC, this page gives you different
options for 3-phase fault results. If the study type is ANSI Short-Circuit Analysis, you will see the Results
page as shown below:
ANSI Page IEC Page

If the study type is IEC Short-Circuit Analysis, the options in the 3-Phase Faults section are Peak or
Initial Symmetrical rms current. The rest of the groups are the same as that for the ANSI Short-Circuit
Analysis.
Show Units
Check the box to show units for voltage and current on the one-line diagram.
Bus Voltage Unit

Select bus voltage display units in kV or in percent. Bus voltages are only displayed when you fault one
bus in the system.
Fault Current
Select which 3-phase fault current values are displayed on the one-line diagram. The ETAP Short-Circuit
Module provides results on the OLD when running the Duty and 1.5 to 4 cycle calculations.
Symmetrical Cycle or Symmetrical 1.5 to 4 Cycle kA

For the ANSI Short-Circuit Method (3-phase faults), select momentary (symmetrical 1/2 cycle) or
interrupting symmetrical (symmetrical 1.5 to 4 cycle) kA to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Peak or Initial Symmetrical kA

For the IEC Short-Circuit Method (3-phase faults), select peak or initial symmetrical rms kA to be
displayed on the one-line diagram.
Display Motor Contributions
Medium Voltage Motor

Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from medium voltage motors (more than
1kV) on the one-line diagram.
Large Low Voltage Motor

Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from large low voltage motors (motor sizes
equal to or larger than 100 hp or kW) on the one-line diagram.
Small Low Voltage Motor

Select this option to display short-circuit current contributions from small low voltage motors (motor
sizes smaller than 100 hp or kW) on the one-line diagram.

15.4.2 AC Page
This page includes options for displaying information annotations for AC elements.
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating

Gen. (Generator) kW/MW
Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Panel Connection Type (Number of Phases - Number of Wires)
Transformer kVA/MVA
Branch, Impedance Base MVA
Branch, Reactor Continuous Amps
Cable/Line Number of Cables - Number of Conductor/Cable - Size
Bus kA Bracing
Node Bus Bracing (kA)
Fuse Interrupting (ka)
Relay 50/51 for Overcurrent Relays
kV
For cables/lines, click the checkboxes to display the cable/line and the size, length and type on the one-
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z

Power Grid (Utility) Positive Sequence Impedance in % of 100 MVA (R + j X)
Motor % LRC
Transformer Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X per unit length)
Branch, Impedance Impedance in Ohms or %
Branch, Reactor Impedance in Ohms
Cable/Line Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in Ohms or per unit length)
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the connection types of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.

For transformers, the operating tap settings for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings are also
displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of the LTC.
Composite Motor
Click on this checkbox to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
color in which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options

15.4.3 AC-DC Page

This page includes options for displaying information annotations for AC-DC elements and composite
networks.

ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-
line diagram.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC elements on the
one-line diagram.
Device Type Rating

UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Click on this checkbox to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the
Use Default Options


15.4.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements on the one-line diagram.
Color Theme
A previously defined color theme can be selected from the list. The selected color theme will be used
whenever the Theme option button is selected.
Annotations
This area allows you to assign colors to AC and DC elements, composite elements, and displayed results.

Theme
This option allows the global color theme selected in the color Theme list for element annotations to be
applied globally throughout all CSD diagrams. When the option is selected, the name assigned to the
applied color theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.
User-Defined
Select this option to specify a color for CSD element annotations. When this option is chosen, the DC
element annotation color selection list will appear.
Theme Button
Click this button to make the Theme Editor appear.
Theme Editor
The Theme Editor allows you to select existing color themes or define a new color theme. Note that color
themes are applied globally within a project file. Changes made on a color theme displayed on this page
may also affect other modes and presentations if the global color themes option has been previously
selected.

Short-Circuit Analysis ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods
15.5 ANSI/IEEE Calculation Methods

ETAP provides two Short-Circuit Calculation Methods based on ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standards. You can
select the calculation method from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. This section describes the
ANSI/IEEE Standard Method of Calculation.
Standard Compliance
ETAP short-circuit calculation per ANSI/IEEE Standards fully complies with the latest ANSI/IEEE and
UL Standards, as listed below:
Standard Pub. Year Title

IEEE C37.04 1979 (1988) Standard Rating Structure for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers
IEEE C37.04f 1990 Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis and Supplements
IEEE C37.04g 1986
IEEE C37.04h 1990
IEEE C37.04i 1991
IEEE C37.04 1999
IEEE C37.010 1979, 1988,1999 IEEE Application Guide for AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers
IEEE C37.010b 1985 Rated on a Symmetrical Basis and supplements
IEEE C37.010e 1985
IEEE C37.010 1999
IEEE C37.13 1990 Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures
IEEE C37.013 1997 Standard for AC High-Voltage Generator Circuit Breakers Rated
on a Symmetrical Current Basis
IEEE C37.20.1 2002 Standard for Metal Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Switchgear
IEEE Std 399 1990 & 1997 Power System Analysis the Brown Book
IEEE Std 141 1986,1993,2002 Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants the Red Book
IEEE Std 242 1986 & 2001 IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems the Buff Book
UL 489_9 1996,2000,2002 Standard for Safety for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-
Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
General Description of Calculation Methodology

In ANSI/IEEE short-circuit calculations, an equivalent voltage source at the fault location, which equals
the prefault voltage at the location, replaces all external voltage sources and machine internal voltage
sources.

All machines are represented by their internal impedances. Line capacitances and static loads are
neglected. Transformer taps can be set at either the nominal position or at the tapped position, and
different schemes are available to correct transformer impedance and system voltages if off-nominal tap
setting exists. It is assumed that for 3-phase fault, the fault is bolted. Therefore, arc resistances are not
considered. You can specify fault impedance in the Short-Circuit Study Case for single-phase to ground
fault. System impedances are assumed to be balanced 3-phase, and the method of symmetrical
components is used for unbalanced fault calculations.
Three different impedance networks are formed to calculate momentary, interrupting, and steady-state
short-circuit currents, and corresponding duties for various protective devices. These networks are:
cycle network (subtransient network), 1.5-4 cycle network (transient network), and 30 cycle network
(steady-state network).
ANSI/IEEE Standards recommend the use of separate R and X networks to calculate X/R values. An X/R
ratio is obtained for each individual faulted bus and short-circuit current. This X/R ratio is then used to
determine the multiplying factor to account for the system DC offset.
Using the cycle and 1.5-4 cycle networks, the symmetrical rms value of the momentary and
interrupting short-circuit currents are solved first. These values are then multiplied by appropriate
multiplying factors to finally obtain the asymmetrical value of the momentary and interrupting short-
circuit currents.
Definition of Terms
The following terms are helpful in understanding short-circuit calculations using ANSI/IEEE Standards.
Cycle Network
This is the network used to calculate momentary short-circuit current and protective device duties at the
cycle after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its associated duties using the
cycle network.
Type of Device Duty

High voltage circuit breaker Closing and latching capability
Low voltage circuit breaker Interrupting capability
Fuse Interrupting capability
Switchgear and MCC Bus bracing
Relay Instantaneous settings
Cycle Network Duty
The cycle network is also referred to as the subtransient network, primarily because all rotating
machines are represented by their subtransient reactance, as shown in the following table:
Type of Machine Xsc

Utility X
Turbo generator Xd
Hydro-generator with amortisseur winding Xd
Hydro-generator without amortisseur winding 0.75 Xd
Condenser Xd
Synchronous motor Xd
Induction Machine

> 1000 hp @ 1800 rpm or less Xd

> 250 hp @ 3600 rpm Xd
All other > 50 hp 1.2 Xd
< 50 hp 1.67 Xd
Cycle Network Impedance
(Xd = 1/LRC for induction motors)
1.5-4 Cycle Network

This network is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current and protective device duties 1.5-4
cycles after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its associated duties using the 1.5-
4 cycle network.
Type of Device Duty

High voltage circuit breaker Interrupting capability
Low voltage circuit breaker N/A
Fuse N/A
Switchgear and MCC N/A
Relay N/A
1.5-4 Cycle Network Duty
The 1.5-4 cycle network is also referred to as the transient network. The type of rotating machine and its
representation is shown in the following table:
Type of Machine Xsc

Utility X
Turbo generator Xd
Hydro-generator without amortisseur winding 0.75 Xd
Condenser Xd
Synchronous motor 1.5 Xd
Induction machine
> 1000 hp @ 1800 rpm or less 1.5 Xd
> 250 hp @ 3600 rpm 1.5 Xd
All other > 50 hp 3.0 Xd
< 50 hp Infinity
1.5-4 Cycle Network Impedances
(Xd = 1/LRC for induction motors)
30 Cycle Network
This is the network used to calculate the steady-state short-circuit current and duties for some of the
protective devices 30 cycles after the fault. The following table shows the type of device and its
associated duties using the 1.5-4 cycle network:
Type of Device Duty

High voltage circuit breaker N/A

Low voltage circuit breaker N/A

Fuse N/A
Switchgear and MCC N/A
Relay Overcurrent settings
30 Cycle Network Duty
The type of rotating machine and its representation in the 30 cycle network is shown in the following
table. Induction machines, synchronous motors, and condensers are not considered in the 30 cycle fault
calculation.
Type of Machine Xsc

Utility X
Turbo generator Xd
Hydro-generator without amortisseur winding Xd
Condenser Infinity
Synchronous motor Infinity
Induction machine Infinity
30 Cycle Network Impedance
15.5.1 ANSI Multiplying Factor (MF)

The ANSI multiplying factor is determined by the equivalent system X/R ratio at a particular fault
location. The X/R ratio is calculated by the separate R and X networks.
Local and Remote Contributions

A local contribution to a short-circuit current is the portion of the short-circuit current fed predominately
from generators through no more than one transformation, or with external reactance in a series, which is
less than 1.5 times the generator subtransient reactance. Otherwise the contribution is defined as remote.
No AC Decay (NACD) Ratio

The NACD ratio is defined as the remote contributions to the total contributions for the short-circuit
current at a given location.
I remote
NACD =
Itotal
Total short-circuit current Itotal = Iremote + Ilocal
NACD = 0 if all contributions are local.
NACD = 1 if all contributions are remote.

15.5.2 Calculation Methods

Momentary (1/2 Cycle) Short-Circuit Current Calc. (Buses and HVCB)
The momentary short-circuit current at the cycle represents the highest or maximum value of the short-
circuit current before its AC and DC components decay toward the steady-state value. Although the
highest or maximum short-circuit current actually occurs slightly before the cycle in reality, the
cycle network is used for this calculation.
The following procedure is used to calculate momentary short-circuit current:
1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
V pre fault
I mom,rms ,symm =
3Z eq
where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the cycle network
2) Calculate the asymmetrical rms value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
I mom,rms ,asymm = MFm I mom,rms ,symm

where MFm is the momentary multiplying factor, calculated from
2

MFm = 1 + 2e X /R
3) Calculate the peak value of momentary short-circuit current using the following formula:
I mom, peak = MFp I mom,rms ,symm

where MFp is the peak multiplying factor, calculated from

MFp = 2 1 + e / R
X
This value is the calculated Asymmetrical kA Crest printed in the Momentary Duty column of the
Momentary Duty page in the output report.

In both equations for MFm and MFp calculation, X/R is the ratio of X to R at the fault location obtained
from separate X and R networks at cycle. The value of the fault current calculated by this method can
be used for the following purposes:
Check closing and latching capabilities of high voltage circuit breakers

Check bus bracing capabilities
Adjust relay instantaneous settings
Check interrupting capabilities of fuses and low voltage circuit breakers
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation

The interrupting fault currents for high voltage circuit breakers correspond to the 1.5-4 cycle short-circuit
currents, i.e., the 1.5-4 cycle network is used for this calculation.
Contact Parting Time

The magnitude of the DC component of the short-circuit current is dependent on the contact parting time
of the individual circuit breaker. On the Rating page of High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor, you can
specify the contact parting time for a circuit breaker. If the C37.010-1999 option is selected on the
Standard page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, then the contact parting time entered in the High Voltage
Circuit Breaker Editor will be used in the calculation.
If the C37.010-1979 and Older option is selected, then the default contact parting time given in the
following table will be used. The default contact parting time is dependent on the rated cycle of the circuit
breaker. In this case, the contact parting time entered in the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor will be
ignored in the calculation.
Circuit Breaker Contact Parting

Rating in Cycles Time in Cycles
8 4
5 3
3 2
2 1.5
S Factor
The S Factor reflects the ability of a symmetrically rated high voltage circuit breaker to interrupt a fault
current with a DC component. It is defined as the ratio of asymmetrical interrupting rms rating over
symmetrical interrupting rms rating of a circuit breaker.
If the C37.010-1999 option is selected on the Standard page of Short-Circuit Study Case, the S Factor for
a symmetrically rated circuit breaker is calculated using the contact parting time entered in the High
Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor and the standard time constant for the DC component provided in IEEE
Standards. According to IEEE Standard C37.10-1999, the time constant is equal to 45 ms for an AC high
voltage circuit breaker rated on a symmetrical current basis. According to IEEE Standard C37.013-1997,
the time constant is equal to 133 ms for an AC high voltage generator circuit breaker rated on a
symmetrical current basis. The calculated S Factor is also displayed on the Rating page of the High
Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor.
If the C37.010-1979 and Older option is selected, the default S factor given in the following table will be
used. The default S Factor is dependent on the rated cycle of the circuit breaker. In this case, the S Factor
displayed in the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor will not be used in the calculation.

Circuit Breaker
Contact Parting Time S Factor
4 1.0
3 1.1
2 1.2
1.5 1.3
S Factor for AC High Voltage Circuit Breaker
Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis
Calculation Procedure
The following procedure is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current for high voltage circuit
breakers:
1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current using the following
formula:
V pre fault
I int,rms,symm =
3Zeq
where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the 1.5-4 cycle network
2) Calculate the short-circuit current contributions to the fault location from the surrounding buses.
3) If the contribution is from a Remote bus, the symmetrical value is corrected by the factor of MFr,
calculated from
4
t
MFr = 1 + 2e X /R
where t is the circuit breaker contact parting time in cycles
The following table shows the Multiplying Factors for Remote Contributions (MFr) for default contact
parting time.
8 Cycle CB 5 Cycle CB 3 Cycle CB 2 Cycle CB

X/R Ratio
(4 cy CPT) (3 cy CPT) (2 cy CPT) (1.5 cy CPT)
100 1.487 1.540 1.599 1.63
90 1.464 1.522 1.585 1.619
80 1.438 1.499 1.569 1.606
70 1.405 1.472 1.548 1.59
60 1.366 1.438 1.522 1.569
50 1.316 1.393 1.487 1.54

45 1.286 1.366 1.464 1.522
40 1.253 1.334 1.438 1.499
35 1.215 1.297 1.405 1.472
30 1.172 1.253 1.366 1.438
25 1.126 1.201 1.316 1.393

20 1.078 1.142 1.253 1.334

18 1.059 1.116 1.223 1.305
16 1.042 1.091 1.190 1.271
14 1.027 1.066 1.154 1.233
12 1.015 1.042 1.116 1.190

10 1.007 1.023 1.078 1.142
9 1.004 1.015 1.059 1.116
8 1.002 1.009 1.042 1.091
7 1.001 1.005 1.027 1.066
6 1.000 1.002 1.015 1.042

5 1.000 1.00. 1.007 1.023
4 1.000 1.000 1.002 1.009
3 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.002
2 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
1 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
MFr Remote Contributions Multiplying Factors; Total Current Basis CBs
If the contribution is from a Local generator, the symmetrical value is corrected by the factor of MFl,
which is obtained from: ANSI/IEEE C37.010, Application Guide for AC High Voltage. Since the
standard only provides curves for several typical contact parting time values, if a curve exists for the
contact parting time of a circuit breaker, the factor MFl will be obtained from the curve. Otherwise, the
two curves with closest contact parting time values, one on each side, will be used to interpolate MFl. In
the High Voltage Circuit Breaker Editor, you can only enter a contact parting time that is within the range
limited by the curves available in the standard. This ensures that MFl will only be calculated by means of
interpolation on available curves, not extrapolation.
8 Cycle CB 5 Cycle CB 3 Cycle CB 2 Cycle CB

X/R Ratio
(4 cy CPT) (3 cy CPT) (2 cy CPT) (1.5 cy CPT)
100 1.252 1.351 1.443 1.512
90 1.239 1.340 1.441 1.511
80 1.222 1.324 1.435 1.508
70 1.201 1.304 1.422 1.504
60 1.175 1.276 1.403 1.496
50 1.141 1.241 1.376 1.482

45 1.121 1.220 1.358 1.473
40 1.098 1.196 1.337 1.461
35 1.072 1.169 1.313 1.446
30 1.044 1.136 1.283 1.427
25 1.013 1.099 1.247 1.403

20 1.000 1.057 1.201 1.371
18 1.000 1.039 1.180 1.356
16 1.000 1.021 1.155 1.339
14 1.000 1.003 1.129 1.320
12 1.000 1.000 1.099 1.299

10 1.000 1.000 1.067 1.276

9 1.000 1.000 1.051 1.263

8 1.000 1.000 1.035 1.250
7 1.000 1.000 1.019 1.236
6 1.000 1.000 1.005 1.221

5 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.205
4 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.188
3 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.170
2 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.152
1 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.132
MFl Local Contributions Multiplying Factors; Total Current Basis CBs
4) Calculate the total remote contributions and total local contribution, and thus the NACD ratio.
5) Determine the actual multiplying factor (AMFi) from the NACD ratio and calculate the adjusted rms
value of interrupting short-circuit current using the following formula.
Iint,rms,adj = AMFi Iint,rms,symm

where
AMFi = MFl + NACD (MFr MFl)
6) For symmetrically rated breakers, the adjusted rms value of interrupting short-circuit current is
calculated using the following formula:
AMF i Iint,rms,symm
Iint,rms,adj =
S
where the correction factor S reflects an inherent capability of AC high voltage circuit breakers,
which are rated on a symmetrical current basis.
The value of this current is applied to check high voltage circuit breaker interrupting capabilities.
For AC high voltage circuit breakers rated on a total current basis, the interrupting current rating
entered in the circuit breaker editor is the asymmetrical value. The short-circuit current used to
compare against the circuit breaker rating can be calculated by the same formula given above with the
S value equal to 1.0.
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty Calculation

Due to the instantaneous action of low voltage circuit breakers at maximum short-circuit values, the
cycle network is used for calculating the interrupting short-circuit current.
The following procedure is used to calculate the interrupting short-circuit current for low voltage circuit
breakers:
1) Calculate the symmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current from the following
formula:

V pre fault
I int,rms,symm =
3Zeq
where Zeq is the equivalent impedance at the faulted bus from the cycle network
2) Calculate the adjusted asymmetrical rms value of the interrupting short-circuit current duty using the
following formula:
I int,rms,adj = MF I int,rms,symm
where MF is the multiplying factor, considering the system X/R ratio and the low voltage circuit
breaker testing power factors
The following equation is used to calculate the multiplication factor for an unfused power, a molded,
or an insulated circuit breaker when the Based on Peak Current option is selected in the Short-Circuit
Study Case:

2 (1 + e X /R )
MF =

( X / R ) test
2 (1 + e )
The following equation is used to calculate the multiplication factor for an fused power, a molded, or
an insulated circuit breaker when the Based on Asymmetrical Current option is selected in the Short-
Circuit Study Case:
2

1 + 2e X /R
MF =
2

( X / R ) test
1 + 2e
where (X/R)test is calculated based on the test power factor entered from the Low Voltage Circuit
Breaker Editor. The manufacturer maximum testing power factors given in the following table are
used as the default values:
Max Design (Tested)

Circuit Breaker Type % PF (X/R) test
Power Breaker (Unfused) 15 6.59
Power Breaker (Fused) 20 4.90
Molded Case (Rated Over 20,000 A) 20 4.90
Molded Case (Rated 10,001-20,000 A) 30 3.18
Molded Case (Rated 10,000 A) 50 1.73
Maximum Test PF for Low Voltage Circuit Breaker
I
The calculated duty value int,rms,adj can be applied to low voltage breaker interrupting capabilities.

If the calculated multiplication factor is less than 1, it is set to 1 so that the symmetrical fault current is
compared against the symmetrical rating of the device. If the symmetrical fault current is less than the
symmetrical rating of the device, the checking on asymmetrical current will certainly pass.
Fuse Interrupting Short-Circuit Current Calculation

The procedures for calculating the fuse interrupting short-circuit current is the same as those for the
Circuit Breaker Interrupting Duty calculation.
Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Circuit Duty

ETAP compares the rating of protective devices and bus bars with the fault duties of the bus. The
comparison results are listed in the Summary page of the output report. The device rating and fault duty
used in the comparison are shown below.
Device Type Device Capability Calculated Short-Circuit Duty

Momentary Duty
HV Bus Bracing Asymm. KA rms Asymm. KA rms
Asymm. KA Crest Asymm. KA Crest
LV Bus Bracing Symm. KA rms Symm. KA rms
Asymm. KA rms Asymm. KA rms
HVCB C&L Capability kA rms Asymm. KA rms

C&L Capability kA Crest Asymm. KA Crest
Interrupting Duty
HVCB Interrupting kA*** Adjusted kA
LVCB Rated Interrupting kA Adjusted kA

Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Circuit Current Duty
***The interrupting capability of a high voltage circuit breaker is calculated based on the nominal kV of
the connected bus and the prefault voltage (Vf ) if the flag is set in the Short-Circuit Study Case, as shown
below.
Interrupting kA = (Rated Int. kA) * (Rated Max. kV) / (Bus Nominal kV)
or
Interrupting kA = (Rated Int. kA) * (Rated Max. kV) / (Bus Nominal kV * Vf )
The calculated interrupting kA (as shown above) is then limited to the maximum interrupting kA of the
circuit breaker.

Generator Circuit Breakers

Determination of Generator Circuit Breakers
In order for ETAP to evaluate a circuit breaker as a generator CB according to IEEE C37.013 1997, it
must be associated with the corresponding generator, by making the selection from the rating page of the
high voltage circuit breaker. Also, the generator CB must be directly connected to the generator or it must
be located along the connecting path between the generator and the unit step-up transformer (as shown in
Figures A & B below).
Generator Circuit Breakers are only rated on a symmetrical current basis. In calculating the S factor, the
standard time constant for the DC component specified in IEEE Std. C37.013 1997 is 133 ms for a
generator circuit breaker.
If a circuit breaker is connected in a configuration similar to that shown in Figure C below (Gen CB1),
even if the circuit breaker is flagged as a generator circuit breaker in the editor, the program evaluates the
circuit breaker device duty as regular HVCBs. This method yields conservative results in most cases, but
they are not as accurate as the current per IEEE Std. C37.013 1997. Note that, for an HVCB assigned as a
generator CB even if it is handled as a regular HVCB, the time constant will change to 133ms and it is the
value used in the calculation.
Figure C: Gen CB directly connected in a configuration which will cause

the program to use the ETAP 5.5.0 Method

Short-Circuit Current Calculation for Generator Circuit Breakers

For a generator circuit breaker, ETAP calculates short-circuit current according to the guidelines specified
in IEEE Std. C37.013 1997. The short-circuit duty calculated includes symmetrical, asymmetrical, and
peak kA for momentary and interrupting duty, as well as the DC kA and degree of asymmetry for
interrupting duty.
For each circuit breaker, it determines short-circuit current when the system side is faulted (generator-
source) and when the generator side is faulted (system-source). For each fault location it calculates short-
circuit current for three generator pre-fault loading conditions: full load at lagging power factor, full load
at leading power factor and no load. The lagging power factor is the generator rated power factor and the
leading power factor can be set from the ETAP ini file. A default value of 95% is used for the leading
power factor. The calculation of short-circuit current for different loading conditions is necessary to
reveal the worst possible fault current values. For example, for the generator-source fault, the worst
asymmetrical duty occurs under lagging load power factor condition, while the worst degree of
asymmetry occurs under leading power factor condition.
System side network used

to determine X/R
Generator Side Fault System Side Fault
For a fault on the system side of the circuit breaker (generator-source), the short-circuit current through
the circuit breaker is only from the generator. ETAP applies generator full dynamic model in the short-
circuit calculation, including transient and sub-transient impedance and time constant. This complete
model captures the detailed behavior of a generator under short-circuit, including both ac and dc current
decay. Tests have shown that ETAP calculation at no load is within 1% of the value calculated by hand
in Annex C37.013-1997. ETAP is more accurate and more conservative than the hand calculations in the
example based on the standard because ETAP does not ignore the impedances removed from the
equations given in the standard to simplify the hand calculations.
For a fault on the generator side (system-source), the system contribution is the only current flowing
through the circuit breaker. The program uses the system side symmetrical fault current and the X/R
calculated based only on the system side to determine the asymmetrical current. The symmetrical closing
and latching duty is calculated based on the symmetrical and dc fault current at 1/2 cycle.
The plot below displays an asymmetrical generator source short-circuit current and the pattern is identical
to the results shown in Figure A3 from C37.013-1997.

Panel/UPS/1Ph Subsystem Device Duty Short-Circuit Calculation

ETAP can perform device duty short-circuit calculations for 3-phase and 1-phase subsystems. These
subsystems are defined as those connected to the output of a Panel, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
or 1-phase elements connected below a phase adapter. ETAP performs these calculations if the options
are selected on the Info page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. The program faults every single bus in the
subsystem and it displays the fault current at every bus in the subsystem.
3-Phase Subsystems Short-circuit Current

3-phase subsystems can be connected below panels and UPS elements. These elements are just an
extension of the regular 3-phase system and ETAP will perform the device duty for these elements in
similar fashion as if these elements were connected directly to the 3-phase system (i.e. without the 3-
phase panel). The only difference between the two cases is that the regular 3-phase system short-circuit
calculation can consider motor contributions. The short-circuit calculation in 3-phase subsystems neglects
motor contribution. This method is considered to be acceptable since in real life applications the size of
the motors connected below panels is not considered to make significant contribution and can be
neglected.
The following image shows the short-circuit results for a 3-phase Panel and UPS subsystem:

3-Ph Panel A and 3-Ph Panel B are similar buses. The image shows both buses being faulted along with
Panel1, Pnl A and Pnl B. Every location below (and including) Panel1 are faulted when the Run
Panel/UPS/1-Ph System Device Duty button is pressed on the short-circuit toolbar. The program also
determines which device short-circuit ratings (momentary, interrupting, close and latch, etc) are
exceeded and it generates warnings in the alert view window or on the one-line diagram by changing the
color of the overstressed device. This mechanism is similar to the regular 3-phase system alert system.
1-Phase Subsystems Short-circuit current

These systems are classified as those with the following phase types: A, B, C, AB, BC, CA, LL, L1, and
L2 (center-tap 3-wire systems). The calculation method used by the program to determine the short-
circuit current depends on the type of connection and phase being faulted. The program considers the
upstream contributions (from the 3-phase system) towards the faulted elements in the 1-phase subsystem
by considering the impedance networks of the 3-phase system (i.e. positive, negative and zero sequence).
The contributions from 1-phase motor loads connected in the 1-phase subsystem are not considered by the
program. The following image shows examples of 1-phase subsystem faults:

Low voltage Circuit Breaker Device Duty below Panel/UPS/1Ph Subsystem

This calculation is similar to the one for LVCBs connected in a regular three phase system. The cycle
network short-circuit currents are used to evaluate the breaker interrupting and momentary capability.
Low Voltage Fuse Device Duty below Panel/UPS/1Ph Subsystem

This calculation is similar to the one for fuses connected in a regular three phase system. The cycle
network short-circuit currents are used to evaluate the fuse interrupting capability.
Medium Voltage Circuit Breaker Device Duty

The program uses the cycle short-circuit current to determine the momentary and interrupting duty of
medium voltage circuit breakers connected below Panels/UPS/1Ph subsystems. The use of the cycle
currents for evaluating the interrupting capability should yield more conservative results for this device.
This simplification is applicable for both 3-phase and 1-phase medium voltage breakers. If more accuracy
is needed, then the regular 3-phase short-circuit calculation can be used for 3-phase medium voltage
breakers instead.
Device Duty Evaluation on Protective Devices for Panel Internal Circuits

In the Panel/UPS/1Ph Subsystem Device Duty Short-Circuit Calculation, device duty evaluation also
includes protective devices for panel internal circuits. However, in order for ETAP to carry out the
device duty evaluation for an internal circuit, protective device parameters for the circuit must be selected
from the ETAP Library. This can be done from the Protective Device subpage of the Schedule page of
the Panel Editor.

Short-Circuit Analysis IEC Calculation Methods
15.6 IEC Calculation Methods

ETAP provides two Short-Circuit Calculation Methods based on ANSI/IEEE and IEC Standards. You can
select the calculation method from the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. This section describes the IEC
Standard Method of calculation.
Standard Compliance
ETAP short-circuit calculation per IEC Standards fully complies with the latest IEC documentation as
listed below:
Standard Pub. Year Title

IEC 62271-100 2003 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 100: High-voltage
alternating-current circuit breakers
IEC 62271-200 2003 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 200: AC metal-
enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV
and up to and including 52 kV
IEC 62271-203 2003 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 203: Gas-insulated
metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages above 52 kV
IEC 60282-2 1997 High-voltage fuses Part2: Expulsion fuses
IEC 61363-1 1998 Electrical installations of ships and mobile and fixed offshore units
Part 1: Procedures for calculating short-circuit currents in three-
phase a.c.
IEC 60909-0 2001 Short-Circuit Currents in Three-phase a.c. systems - Part 0:

Calculation of Currents (including 2002 corrigendum1)
IEC 60909-1 2002 Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems - Part 1: Factors for
the calculation of short-circuit currents according to IEC-60909-0
IEC 60909-2 1992 Electrical equipment - Data for short-circuit current calculations in
accordance with IEC 909 (1988)
IEC 60909-4 2000 Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems Part 4: Examples
for the calculation of short-circuit currents
IEC 60947-1 2004 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear, Part 1: General rules
IEC 60947-2 2003 Low voltage switchgear and controlgear, Part 2: Circuit breakers
These standards are for short-circuit calculation and equipment rating in AC systems with nominal
voltages operating at 50 Hz or 60 Hz. They cover 3-phase, line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-
ground faults.

IEC 60909 and the associated standards classify short-circuit currents according to their magnitudes
(maximum and minimum) and fault distances from the generator (far and near). Maximum short-circuit
currents determine equipment ratings, while minimum currents dictate protective device settings. Near-to-
generator and far-from-generator classifications determine whether or not to model the AC component
decay in the calculation, respectively.
IEC 61363-1 Standard calculates the short-circuit current as a function of time and displays its
instantaneous values using the machines subtransient reactance and time constants. This provides an
accurate evaluation of the short-circuit current for sizing protective devices and coordinating relays for
isolated systems such as ships and offshore platforms.
General Description of Calculation Methodology

In IEC short-circuit calculations, an equivalent voltage source at the fault location replaces all voltage
sources. A voltage factor c is applied to adjust the value of the equivalent voltage source for minimum
and maximum current calculations.
All machines are represented by their internal impedances. Transformer taps can be set at either the
nominal position or at the tapped position, and different schemes are available to correct transformer
impedance and system voltages if off-nominal tap setting exists. System impedances are assumed to be
balanced 3-phase, and the method of symmetrical components is used for unbalanced fault calculations.
Calculations consider electrical distance from the fault location to synchronous generators. For a far-
from-generator fault, calculations assume that the steady-state value of the short-circuit current is equal to
the initial symmetrical short-circuit current.
Zero sequence capacitances of transmission lines, cables and shunt admittances are considered for
unbalanced fault calculations (LG). This means that the capacitances of static loads and branches are
considered based on IEC 60909-0 2001. This is a new feature of ETAP 5.0.0. The basic model used to
consider these shunt admittances is shown below:
Only the DC component decays to zero, whereas for a near-to-generator fault, calculations count for both
decaying AC and DC components. The equivalent R/X ratios determine the rates of decay of both
components, and different values are recommended for generators and motors near the fault.
Calculations also differ for meshed and unmeshed networks. The factor , which is used to multiply the
initial short-circuit current to get the peak short-circuit current ip, is defined differently for different
system configurations and the methods selected to calculate the R/X ratios.
Definition of Terms
IEC Standards use the following definitions, which are relevant in the calculations and outputs of ETAP.

Initial Symmetrical Short-Circuit current (Ik)

This is the rms value of the AC symmetrical component of an available short-circuit current applicable at
the instant of short-circuit if the impedance remains at zero time value.
Peak Short-Circuit Current (ip)

This is the maximum possible instantaneous value of the available short-circuit current.
Symmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current (Ib)

This is the rms value of an integral cycle of the symmetrical AC component of the available short-circuit
current at the instant of contact separation of the first pole of a switching device.
Steady-State Short-Circuit Current (Ik)

This is the rms value of the short-circuit current, which remains after the decay of the transient
phenomena.
Subtransient Voltage (E) of a Synchronous Machine

This is the rms value of the symmetrical internal voltage of a synchronous machine which is active behind
the subtransient reactance Xd at the moment of short-circuit.
Far-From-Generator Short-Circuit
This is a short-circuit condition during which the magnitude of the symmetrical AC component of
available short-circuit current remains essentially constant.
Near-To-Generator Short-Circuit
This is a short-circuit condition to which at least one synchronous machine contributes a prospective
initial short-circuit current which is more than twice the generators rated current, or a short-circuit
condition to which synchronous and asynchronous motors contribute more than 5% of the initial
symmetrical short-circuit current (Ik) without motors.
Subtransient Reactance (Xd) of a Synchronous Machine

This is the effective reactance at the moment of short-circuit. For the calculation of short-circuit currents,
the saturated value of (Xd) is taken.
According to IEC Standard 60909-0, the synchronous motor impedance used in IEC short-circuit
calculations is calculated in the same way as the synchronous generator.
ZK = KG(R+ Xd)
kVn cmax
KG = kVr(1+Xd sin r))
where kVn and kVr are the nominal voltage of the terminal bus and the motor rated voltage respectively,
cmax is determined based on machine rated voltage, Xd is machine subtransient reactance (per unit in
motor base), and qr is the machine rated power factor angle.
Minimum Time Delay (Tmin) of a Circuit Breaker

This is the shortest time between the beginning of the short-circuit current and the first contact separation
of one pole of the switching device.

The time delay (Tmin) is the sum of the shortest possible operating time of an instantaneous relay and the
shortest opening time of a circuit breaker. Minimum time delay does not include the adjustable time
delays of tripping devices.
Voltage Factor c
This is the factor used to adjust the value of the equivalent voltage source for minimum and maximum
current calculations according to the following table:
Voltage Factor c
For Maximum Short-Circuit For Minimum Short-Circuit
Current Calculation Current Calculation
Nominal Voltage Un cmax cmin
Others < 1001 V 1.1 0.95
Medium voltage: > 1 kV to 35 kV 1.10 1.00
High voltage: > 35 kV to 230 kV 1.10 1.00
ETAP provides three options for you to select the c factors in the Short-Circuit Current Group of the
Standard page of the Study Case: Max, User-Defined c Factors, and Min. If the Max option is selected,
the maximum values given in the cmax column will be used in the calculation. If the User-Defined c Factor
option is selected, the user specified c factor values will be used. The user-defined values must be in the
range between the values given in the cmax and cmin columns. If the Min option is selected, the minimum
values given in the cmin column will be used in the calculation.
Calculation Methods
Initial Symmetrical Short-Circuit Current Calculation

Initial symmetrical short-circuit current (Ik) is calculated using the following formula:
cU n
I"k =
3Z k
where Zk is the equivalent impedance at the fault location
Peak Short-Circuit Current Calculation

Peak short-circuit current (ip) is calculated using the following formula:
i p = 2 kI " k
where k is a function of the system R/X ratio at the fault location
IEC Standards provide three methods for calculating the k factor:
Method A - Uniform ratio R/X. The value of the k factor is determined from taking the smallest ratio
of R/X of all the branches of the network. Only branches that contain a total of 80 percent of the
current at the nominal voltage corresponding to the short-circuit location are included. Branches may
be a series combination of several elements.

Method B - R/X ratio at the short-circuit location. The value of the k factor is determined by
multiplying the k factor by a safety factor of 1.15, which covers inaccuracies caused after obtaining
the R/X ratio from a network reduction with complex impedances.
Method C - Equivalent frequency. The value of the k factor is calculated using a frequency-altered
R/X. R/X is calculated at a lower frequency and then multiplied by a frequency-dependent
multiplying factor.
Symmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current Calculation

For a far-from-generator fault, the symmetrical short-circuit breaking current (Ib) is equal to the initial
symmetrical short-circuit current.
Ib = I"k
For a near-to-generator fault, Ib is obtained by combining contributions from each individual machine. Ib
for different types of machines is calculated using the following formula:
I " k for synchronous machines

Ib =
qI " k for asynchronous machines
where and q are factors that account for AC decay
They are functions of the ratio of the minimum time delay and the ratio of the machines initial short-
circuit current to its rated current, as well as real power per pair of poles of asynchronous machines.
IEC Standards allow you to include or exclude AC decay effect from asynchronous machines in the
calculation.
DC Component of Short-Circuit Current Calculation

The DC component of the short-circuit current for the minimum delay time of a protective device is
calculated based on initial symmetrical short-circuit current and system X/R ratio:
" 2ft min

I dc = I k 2exp
X /R
where f is the system frequency, tmin is the minimum delay time of the protective device under concern,
and X/R is the system value at the faulted bus.
Asymmetrical Short-Circuit Breaking Current Calculation

The asymmetrical short-circuit breaking current for comparison with circuit breaker rating is calculated as
the rms value of symmetrical and DC components of the short-circuit current.
Steady-State Short-Circuit current Calculation

Steady-state short-circuit current Ik is a combination of contributions from synchronous generators and
power grid. Ik for each synchronous generator is calculated using the following formula:

I k max = max I rG
I k min = min I rG
where is a function of a generators excitation voltage, ratio between its initial symmetrical short-circuit
current and rated current, other generator parameters, and IrG is the generators rated current.
The steady-state short-circuit current calculated is dependent on the option selected for Short-circuit
current in the Study Case. If the Max and User-Defined c Factor is selected, the maximum steady-state
current short-circuit is reported. If the Min option is selected, the minimum steady-state short-circuit
current is reported.
This maximum steady-state short-circuit current is used to determine minimum device ratings. The
minimum steady-state short-circuit value is used for relay coordination purposes in preventing the
occurrence of nuisance trips and loading deviations.
Meshed and Non-Meshed Network

According to IEC 60909-0 Standard, short-circuit contributions from meshed and non-meshed sources are
calculated differently regarding various factors and R/X ratio. In ETAP calculations, the short-circuit
contribution in the following cases is considered as from a non-meshed network:
A contributing machine is connected directly to the faulted bus.
A contributing machine is connected to the faulted bus through a radial network in which the machine
is the only source making short-circuit contribution to the faulted bus.
In all other cases, the short-circuit contributions are considered as from a meshed network.
Adjustment of Ib
According to IEC Standard 60909-0, to improve accuracy of Ib calculation for a near-to-generator three-
phase short-circuit in a meshed network, the breaking current can be adjusted for decay in Ib from
synchronous and induction machines based on Equation (75) of the standard. This adjustment will reduce
Ib slightly from Ik.
In ETAP, this adjustment is implemented according to Equation (75) for each sub-network that has near-
to-generator short-circuit contributions to the faulted bus. A sub-network with respect to a given faulted
bus includes all elements that are connected together, except through the faulted bus. When a sub-network
has multiple contributions to a faulted bus, the total Ib adjustment (a phase value) is distributed among all
contributions from the sub-network based on the phase ratio of individual Ik contribution over total Ik of
all the contributions from the sub-network.
Modeling of Power Station Unit

According to IEC Standard 60909-0, sections 3.7, 4.2.13, and 4.2.14, the impedance of a power station
unit needs to be modeled with special considerations. Depending on where the fault location is in the
system and if the unit transformer has on-load tap-changer, the impedance values of the generator and
unit transformer will be adjusted by different factors.

Designation of a Power Station Unit

To specify a synchronous generator and a two-winding transformer as a power station unit, check the
Unit Transformer for Generator option in the Tap page of the 2-Winding Transformer Editor and select
the generator in the list next to this field as the unit generator.
Note: A generator can be selected as a unit generator for only one unit transformer.
In short-circuit calculation, the generator and the transformer specified as a pair for a power unit will be
modeled as a power unit only when both the generator and the transformer are energized. If the
transformer is not energized, the generator will be modeled as a regular generator. If the generator is not
energized, the transformer will be modeled as a network transformer. The generator and the transformer
specified as a pair for a power unit must also be connected either directly or through branches other than
transformers; otherwise, they will be modeled as a regular generator and a network transformer.
Network Bus, Connecting Bus and Auxiliary System Bus for a Power Station Unit
According to IEC Standard 60909-0, the generator and the transformer in a power station unit will be
modeled differently depending on the fault location. In ETAP, a faulted bus can be classified as one of
three types with respect to a power station unit: a network bus, a connecting bus, and an auxiliary system
bus.
A connecting bus for a power station unit is the bus on the shortest connecting path between the unit
generator and the unit transformer. ETAP automatically determines the connecting path and connecting
buses for a power station unit.
An auxiliary bus is a bus that is in the auxiliary system of a power station unit, but not a connecting bus.
The auxiliary system includes all the elements that are connected to the connecting buses without going
across the unit transformer.
Network buses are all the rest of the buses that are neither connecting buses nor auxiliary buses.
Note: Bus type designation is with respect to a given power station unit. For the system given below,
generator Unit-Gen and transformer Unit-XFMR forms a power station unit. For this power station unit,
Gen-Bus is the connecting bus for the power station unit. Auxiliary system buses include Aux-Bus-1 and
Aux-Bus-2. The rest pf the buses are all network buses.

System with a Power Station Unit
IEC Short-Circuit Mesh Determination Method

IEC Standards have published different benchmark sample calculation results based on IEC Standard
60909-0 2001. These calculation examples have been published in IEC Standard 60909-4 2000 and are
described in detail in sections 3.1, 4.1, 5.1 and 6.1 of IEC 60909-4. These examples appear to have been
created mostly for hand-calculation (except for example 4), and one problem which arises because of
these multiple solutions is that they do not establish a single calculation method which produces
consistent results for all four examples for a computer based solution. Because of these inconsistencies in
the standard, certain calculation assumptions have been added to ETAPs short-circuit program in order
for the results to match those published in these four examples.
These calculation preferences affect the selection of calculation methods for Idc, Ib and Ik. One of the
most important causes of the inconsistencies in the standard is the method used to determine the meshed
or non-meshed (radial) parts of the systems. This determination is very important since the results are
affected considerably once this determination is made.
Meshed/Non-Meshed Systems
A meshed system can be considered a looped system or one that has multiple source contributions meshed
together through the same contributing branch. A non-meshed system is defined as a radial system or one

which has only one contribution passing through a branch towards the faulted bus. The following images
illustrate the concept of meshed and non-meshed as described by IEC Standard 60909-0 2001:
IEC 60909-0 Figure 12
IEC 60909-4 Figure 16
The areas enclosed in red color represent the Meshed contributions in this system towards the faulted
buses. The areas enclosed in green color represent the non-meshed (radial) contributions to their
connected bus. In other words, the contributions of G2, G1, G3, M3 and M2 are considered to be non-
meshed as long as the fault is placed at the bus to which they are connected. These same contributions
could be handled as meshed contributions to faults in other parts of the system.
These engineering calculation preferences can be modified by changing the value of the entry IEC Short-
Circuit Mesh Determination Method from the ETAP Options (Preferences) menu.
This entry can take on the value of 0, 1 or 2.
IEC Short-Circuit Mesh Determination Method = 0

For a faulted bus, ETAP checks if any contributions can be classified as Meshed network contributions. If
any contribution to a faulted bus is indeed classified as Meshed, then all contributions to the bus will be

treated as if they are coming from a meshed network. If none of the contributions can be classified as
meshed, then all the contributions are treated as coming from non-meshed parts of the system. In Figure
16 above, all buses can be classified as meshed since meshed contributions are part of every bus faulted
bus in the system. In Figure 12, all the contributions would be considered as non-meshed since none of
them are considered to be meshed.

For a faulted bus, meshed or non-meshed contributions are determined based on individual contributions.
That is, for non-meshed contributions, ETAP uses individual branch R/X ratios. For all the meshed
network contributions it uses the R/X of the equivalent meshed part of the system. For Figure 16, the
program will determine that the contributions of G1 and G2 are non-meshed for a fault at Bus 4 and 3.
The rest of the contributions to these faulted buses will be handled as meshed.

If a faulted bus is part of a PowerStation unit group (generator, unit transformer and auxiliary load
connecting bus), then ETAP will handle this part of the system with the methodology described for option
= 1. If the faulted bus is outside the PowerStation group (network bus), then ETAP will handle the
meshed/non-meshed determination as if option = 0 had been selected.
Impact of the Meshed/Non-Meshed Determination on Ib, Ik and Idc

Once the program has determined the meshed and non-meshed parts of the system, then it makes some
decisions based on this for calculating the value of Ib, Idc and Ik as described throughout IEC Standard
60909-0 2001.
1) Idc: If the branch contribution is considered to be coming from a non-meshed source, then the
R/X of the individual branch is used to determine the value of the Idc coming into the faulted bus.
The equivalent R/X value of the meshed network will be used to determine the value of Idc for
the meshed contributions. Please see sections 4.3.1.1, 4.3.1.2 and 4.4.
2) Ib: If a contribution is non-meshed, then the program will use the method described in section
4.5.2.2 Equations 71 and 72 to determine the contributions of Ib from different non-meshed
components. If the system is meshed, then the program uses a very different approach to
determine Ib, it will use section 4.5.2.3 Equations 74 and 75 to determine the value of Ib.
3) Ik: If the contribution or system is considered to be non-meshed, then the program will use the
method described in section 4.6.2 Equations 82 and 83. If the contribution of the system is
considered to be meshed, then the program will use the method described in section 4.6.3
Equations 84 and 85 to determine Ik. Note that the use of these equations may result in the value
of Ik being higher than Ib as can be observed in the results published in IEC Standard 60909-4
2000 for Example 4.
From the previous description in items 1-3, it becomes apparent that the determination of
meshed and non-meshed parts of the system can have a drastic effect on the results. The
options that ETAP provides are designed to provide choices on how the analysis should be
performed. Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Circuit Duty
In the 3-phase Device Duty calculation, ETAP compares the protective device rating against bus short-
current duty for the devices that are checked as complying with IEC Standard and also have device rating
entered. In case the short-circuit duty is greater than the device duty, ETAP will flag the device as

underrated in both one-line diagram and output reports. The following table lists the device ratings and
short-circuit duties used for the comparison for MVCB, LVCB, and fuses:
Device Type Device Capability Short-Circuit

Current Duty
MVCB ip
Making
AC Breaking Ib,symm
Ib,asymm * Ib, asymm
Idc *
Ithr Ith
LVCB Making Ip
Breaking Ib,symm
Ib,asymm * Ib,asymm
Ithr Ith
Fuse Breaking Ib,symm
Ib,asymm * Ib,asymm
Comparison of Device Rating and Short-Current Duty
*Device capability calculated by ETAP
Calculation of IEC Device Capability

As shown in the above table, some of the device capability values are calculated by ETAP based on
capability provided by users and default parameters given in IEC Standards.
MVCB The asymmetrical breaking and DC current ratings for MVCB are calculated as follows:
( 2 T min )
I b , Asymm = I b, Symm 1 + 2e
t min
I dc = I b , symm ( 2 )e
where tmin is the minimum delay time and Ib,symm is the AC breaking current provided by the user.
Following IEC Standard 62271-100, is equal to 45 milliseconds.
LVCB The asymmetrical breaking current rating for LVCB is calculated as follows:
4ft min
I b,asymm = I b,symm 1 + 2 exp
X /R
where f is the system frequency, tmin is the minimum delay time, and Ib,symm is the breaking current
provided by the user. X/R is calculated based on a testing PF given in IEC Standard 60947-2, Table
11.

Fuse The asymmetrical breaking current rating for fuse is calculated as follows:
4ft min
I b,asymm = I b,symm 1 + 2 exp
X /R
where f is the system frequency, tmin is assumed to be a half cycle, and Ib,symm is the breaking current
provided by the user. X/R is calculated based on the default testing PF of 15 %.
Ithr The thermal withstand short-circuit current capability for LVCB and MVCB is calculated based
on specifications on IEC 60909-0 2001 Annex A as follows:
Tk
i dt = I K ( m + n )TK = I thTK
2 " 2 2
I th = I "K m + n

( ) ( )
2 2
Td' 20TK / Td' I K I K' Td' 20TK / Td' I K
" '
1 + 1 e + 1 e 1 +
20TK K
I I K 2T K IK
'
( ) ( )
2
10TK / Td' I K I K' 2Td' TK / Td' I K
" '
1 Td
n= " 2
1 e + 1 e 1 +
( I K / I K ) 5TK IK IK TK IK

T
( ' I
) I I
' " ' '
d 1 e 11TK / Td K K K 1
5,5TK I K I K I K

m=
1
2 fTK ln(k 1)
[
e 4* fTK ln( k 1) 1 ]
These equations represent the Joule Integral and the equivalent short-circuit current Ith that ETAP
determines in order to compare against the value of Ithr specified on the Circuit breaker rating page
(LV or MV).
Transient Short-Circuit Calculation

In additional to device duty calculations, ETAP also provides transient short-circuit calculation per IEC
Standard 61363-1. The transient short-circuit calculation presents fault current waveforms as a function of
time, considering a number of factors that affect short-circuit current variations at different time after the
fault. These factors include synchronous machine subtransient reactance, transient reactance, reactance,
subtransient time constant, transient time constant, and DC time constant. It also considers decay of short-
circuit contributions from induction motors. This detailed modeling provides an accurate evaluation of the
short-circuit current for sizing protective devices and coordinating relays for isolated systems such as
ships and offshore platforms. The calculation can be conducted on both radial and looped system with one
or multiply sources.

As calculation results, ETAP provides short-circuit current as function of time up to 0.1 second at 0.001
second time increment. It also presents short-circuit current as function of cycles up to 1 cycle at 0.1 cycle
increment. Along with the instantaneous current values, ETAP also furnish calculated AC component, DC
component, as well as top envelope of the current waveform. In the summary page, it also provides the
subtransient, transient, and steady-state fault current for each bus.

Short-Circuit Analysis AC-DC Converter Models
15.7 AC-DC Converter Models

Charger and UPS
When performing AC analyses, chargers and UPSs are considered as loads to their input AC buses. The
rectifiers in these elements block the current from flowing back into the AC system. Therefore, chargers
and UPSs are not included in an AC Short-Circuit Analysis.
Inverter
An inverter is a voltage source to the AC system. Under fault conditions, it will provide fault contribution
to the AC system. When its terminal bus is faulted, the contribution from an inverter is equal to the
multiplication of its AC full load amp by a constant K, which is entered on the Rating page of the Inverter
Editor. This is the maximum possible contribution from the inverter. As the fault location moves away
from its terminal bus, the contribution from the inverter decreases.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

A VFD can only be inserted between a motor and its terminal bus. In the Rating page of the VFD Editor,
there is a checkbox for bypass switch. If this box is not checked, there will be no contribution from the
motor connected to the VFD, due to the fact that the rectifiers in VFD block the current from flowing
back into the system. If this box is checked, it is assumed that the switch is closed as soon as a fault
occurs in the system; hence the motor will make contributions to the fault as if the VFD is not present.
High Voltage DC Link (HVDC)

When a bus on the inverter side of a high voltage DC link is faulted, the DC link will make short-circuit
contribution. Due to the application of Voltage Dependent Current Order Limiter (VDCOL), which is
very common in a DC link, the short-circuit contribution is limited about 150% of rated current and it
lasts only about 1.5 cycle.
In ETAP short-circuit calculations, a DC link is represented as a constant voltage source behind an

equivalent reactance. The voltage source has a constant voltage value equal to the prefault voltage. The
equivalent reactance is determined so that if a 3-phase short-circuit fault occurs at the inverter side
terminal bus, the contribution from the DC link is equal to maximum operating current Imax.
Due to the very short duration of short-circuit current contribution from a DC link, for ANSI Standard,
ETAP considers the contribution only in cycle (momentary) short-circuit current calculation. For IEC
Standard, the contribution is included only in calculation of ip, Ik, Ib, and Idc.

Short-Circuit Analysis Required Data
15.8 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for short-circuit calculation for buses include:
Nominal kV (when the prefault voltage option is set to use nominal kV)
%V (when the prefault voltage option is set to use bus voltage)
Type (such as MCC, switchgear, etc.) and continuous and bracing ratings
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors (i.e., 3-Winding Transformer, 2-Winding Transformer,
Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and Impedance). Required data for short-circuit calculations for
branches include:
Branch Z, R, X, Y, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperatures, if applicable

Cable and transmission line length and unit
Transformer rated kV and MVA
Base kV and MVA of impedance branches
For unbalanced short-circuit calculations you will also need:
Zerosequence impedances
Transformer winding connections, grounding types, and grounding parameters
Power Grid Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for utilities include:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle
3-Phase MVAsc and X/R
For unbalanced short-circuit calculations, you will also need:
Grounding types and parameters

Single-Phase MVAsc and X/R
Synchronous Generator Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous generators include:
Rated MW, kV, and power factor

Xd, Xd, Xd/Ra, X2/R2, X0/R0, Ra, R2, R0.
Generator type
IEC exciter type


X0 (Zero Sequence Impedance)
X2 (Negative Sequence Impedance)
Inverter Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for inverters include:

K factor in the Rating page
Synchronous Motor Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous motor includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV and the number of poles

Xd, Xd/Ra, X2/R2, X0/R0, Ra, R2, R0.
% LRC, Xd, and Tdo for IEC short-circuit calculation

Induction Motor Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for induction motors include:
Rated kW/hp and kV

X/R plus one of the following for ANSI Short-Circuit calculation:
Xsc at cycle and 1.5-4 cycle if ANSI Short-Circuit Z option is set to Xsc, or
%LRC if ANSI Short-Circuit Z option is set to Std MF
% LRC, Locked Rotor RF and Td (IEC 363) for IEC short-circuit calculations

X0
Lumped Load Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for lumped load includes:
Rated MVA and kV

% motor load
% LRC, X/R, and Xsc for cycle and 1.5-4 cycle for ANSI Short-Circuit calculation
% LRC, X, m and Td(IEC 363) for IEC short-circuit calculation

Additional data for unbalanced short-circuit calculations include:
High Voltage Circuit Breaker Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for high voltage circuit breakers include:
ANSI Standard Circuit Breaker:
Max kV
Rated Int. (rated interrupting capability)
Max Int. (maximum interrupting capability)
C & L rms (rms value of closing and latching capability)
C & L Crest (crest value of closing and latching capability)
Standard
Cycle
IEC Standard Circuit Breaker:
Rated kV
Min. Delay (minimum delay time in second)
Making (peak current)
AC Breaking (rms AC breaking capability)
Ithr (short-circuit withstand current)
Tk (duration of short-circuit withstand current)
ETAP calculates the interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker from the rated and maximum interrupting
capabilities. This value is calculated at the nominal kV of the bus that the circuit breaker is connected to.
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for low voltage circuit breakers include:
Type (power, molded case, or insulated case)

Rated kV
Interrupting (interrupting capability)
Test PF

Rated kV
Breaking (rms AC breaking capability)

Fuse Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for fuses include:
Fuse ID
ANSI Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Test PF
IEC Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Test PF
Other Data
There are some Study Case related data, which must also be provided, and you can enter this data into the
Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The data includes:
Standard (ANSI/IEC)
XFMR tap option (transformer tap modeling method)
Prefault voltage
Report (report format)
Machine X/R (machine X/R modeling method)
Faulted buses
Cable/OL Heater (select this option to include cable and overload heater elements)

Short-Circuit Analysis Output Reports
15.9 Output Reports

ETAP provides short-Circuit Study Output Reports with different levels of detail, depending on your
requirements. The following are just some examples that show this flexibility. ETAP 5.0.0 reports show
total and individual fault current contributions for all the different types of faults (3-phase, LG, LL &
LLG).
15.9.1 View Output Reports from Study Case Toolbar

This is a shortcut for the Report Manager. When you click on the View Output Report button, ETAP
automatically opens the output report that is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format. In
the picture shown below, the output report name is short-circuit-Duty and the selected format is
Complete.
15.9.2 Short-Circuit Report Manager

To open the Short-Circuit Report Manager, simply click on the Report Manager button on the Short-
Circuit Study toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary)
representing different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats
available for different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and
buttons common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the output report you want to view.

Project File Name

This field displays the name of the project file based on which report was generated, along with the
directory where the project file is located.
Help
Click on this button to access Help.
OK/Cancel
Click on the OK button to close the editor and open the Crystal Reports view to show the selected portion
of the output report. If no selection is made, it will simply close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to
close the editor without viewing the report.
15.9.3 Input Data Page

This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type,
including Bus, Cable, Cover, Adjustments, Generator, Loads, Reactor, Transformer, UPS, and Utility.


15.9.4 Results Page

This page allows you to select formats to view the Short-Circuit Result portion of the Output Report. If
you run a 3-phase fault, there is only one Short-Circuit Report format shown in the Report Manager. If
you run an unbalanced fault calculation, the results section will include short-circuit reports that include
individual contributions for LG, LL, & LLG faults. The same applies for IEC 3-phase or unbalanced
faults.

Short-Circuit Report
Load Terminal Fault Report

15.9.5 Summary Page

This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the Output Report.

15.9.6 Complete Page

In this page you can select the Complete report in Crystal Reports format, which brings up the complete
report for the Short-Circuit Study. The Complete report includes input data, results, and Summary reports.
You can open and save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text format, or Excel format. If you wish this
selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.


Short-Circuit Analysis Alert View
15.10 Alert View

To make it easier for you to check the device ratings after a device duty calculation, ETAP provides a
Short-Circuit Analysis Alert View that lists all devices that have a critical or marginal rating violation.
Open this view by clicking on the Alert View button. If the Auto Display box is checked in the Study
Case, the Alert View will be automatically open once the device duty short-circuit calculation is
completed.
15.10.1 Alert View Entries

Device ID
The Device Identification group of the Alert View window lists the names of the components that
qualified as alerts after the short-circuit calculation.
Type
The Type group of the Alert View window displays information about the type of the device having the
displayed alert.
Rating
The Rating group of the Alert View window provides the rating information being used to determine
whether an alert should be reported and of what kind of alert was found.

Calculated
The Calculated group of the Alert View window displays the results (duty) from the short-circuit
calculation. The results listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to
determine the operating percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor Alarm page.
%Value
This group displays the percent operating values calculated based on the short-circuit results and the
different device ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of monitored
parameters entered directly into the Study Case Editor Alarm page. Based on the element type, system
topology and given conditions, ETAP uses these percent values to determine if and what kind of alert
should be displayed.
Condition
The Conditions group of the Alert View Window provides a brief comment about the type of alert being
reported. In the case of short-circuit alarms, the different conditions reported are the same as those listed
in the bus and protective device monitored parameters tables.
Phase
In future releases of ETAP, alerts for unbalanced fault conditions will be provided. Currently ETAP only
provides alerts for 3-phase faults (ANSI & IEC Duty).
15.10.2 Parameters Monitored and Conditions Reported

Bus Alert
Short-circuit simulation alerts for buses are designed to monitor crest, symmetrical, and asymmetrical
bracing conditions. These conditions are determined from bus rating values and Short-Circuit Analysis
results. The conditions reported for buses are the same for ANSI and IEC Project Standards. The
following table contains a list of monitored parameters and the conditions that their corresponding alerts
report.
Bus Alerts Monitored Parameters and Condition Reported

Type of Device Monitored Parameter Condition Reported
Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Bracing Asymmetrical
HV Bus (> 1000 Volts)
Momentary Asymmetrical. crest kA Bracing Crest
Momentary Symmetrical. rms kA Bracing Symmetrical
LV Bus (<1000Volts)
Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Bracing Asymmetrical

Short-circuit alerts monitor certain conditions of interest for both ANSI and IEC Project Standards. The
conditions reported by the alerts depend on whether you run ANSI or IEC Short-Circuit Analysis. ANSI
and IEC Standards have different sets of monitored parameters. The following table contains a list of
monitored parameters used for both standards.

Protective Alerts Monitored Parameters

Device Type ANSI Monitored Parameters IEC Monitored Parameters
LVCB Interrupting Adjusted Symmetrical. rms kA Breaking
Momentary C&L Making
HVCB Momentary C&L Crest kA N/A
Interrupting Adjusted Symmetrical. rms kA Breaking
FUSE Interrupting Adjusted Symmetrical. rms kA Breaking
SPDT Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Making
SPST Switches Momentary Asymmetrical. rms kA Making
Short-circuit alerts for protective devices report different conditions depending on the monitored
parameters. The following table contains a list of the corresponding conditions reported in the Alert View
window.
Protective Device Reported Condition

Device Type ANSI Reported Condition IEC Reported Condition
LVCB Interrupting Breaking
Interrupting Breaking
HVCB C&L Making
C&L Crest N/A
Fuse Interrupting Breaking
SPDT C&L Making
SPST Switches C&L Making

Chapter 16
Star Device Coordination Analysis
Star is a fully integrated system protective device coordination and selectivity module within ETAP. Star
represents a new concept in performing steady-state and dynamic device coordination, protection, and
testing. This is achieved by utilizing intelligent one-line diagrams, comprehensive device libraries, and an
integrated multi-dimensional database.
Star enables power engineers to easily and efficiently perform protective device coordination studies. The
built-in intelligent features provide informed and reliable recommendations regarding the feasibility of the
devices under consideration. Engineers can quickly realize possible design issues and make informed
decisions to improve system reliability, increase system stability, and boost financial savings.
This chapter provides an overview of the features and capabilities in Star. By exploring this chapter, you
will become familiar with many of the key concepts and capabilities of the Star module. Each section is
available in an interactive format, allowing you to visualize each step as it is explained in this chapter.
Note: Some of the directory paths shown in the figure below will be different if you have chosen a
custom installation path.

Star Device Coordination Star Mode Toolbar
16.1 Star Mode Toolbar
Create Star View
Append to Star View
Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA
Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation)
Display Options
Report Manager
Device Settings Reports
Sequence Viewer
Create Star View

Click this button to generate a new Star presentation. A Star View is a presentation that may contain
network paths (a set of one or many elements that reside in the one-line diagram) and their specific plots.
To activate the Create Star View toolbar button, select an element or a group of elements on the one-line
diagram. This is called rubber-banding a zone for a selected Configuration. Composites (nested networks)
can be opened up, rubber-banded, and grouped with their external connecting elements for coordination.
Append to Star View

Click this button to append element(s) from the One-Line View to existing Star View(s).
To activate the Append to Star View toolbar button, select an element or group of elements on the one-
line diagram. Click on the Append to Star View button to open the Star View Selection Editor.

Filter Star View list by selected component(s)

Checking this option will list the IDs of all the components (elements) in the project. This allows
selection of Star Views based on the elements that are contained within them.
Star Views
The Star Views column lists all the Star Views in the project. By default, the last accessed Star View will
be selected (highlighted) from the list of Star Views. Multiple Star Views can be selected by using the
Shift or Ctrl keys.
Select All
Select all the Star Views from the list to append the selected element(s).
Deselect All
Deselect all the Star Views from the list to append the selected element(s).
Components
The Components column lists the IDs of the element(s) that are included in the selected Star View(s). The
Components column will list the IDs of all elements in the project.

Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA

Click this button to perform a short-circuit study to update the time-characteristics curve clipping kA and
minimum kA for the applicable elements. This study will calculate symmetrical and asymmetrical rms 3-
phase, as well as line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground fault values per the options
selected in the active Star Mode Study Case. If the output name file is set to prompt, ETAP will prompt
you to specify the output report name. Upon completion of the study, the output report is generated and
the study results are displayed on the one-line diagram.
Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation)

Protective Device (PD) Sequence-of-Operation initiates upon placing a fault on the one-line diagram
using the Fault Insertion button from the Star Mode. The fault insertion icon changes based on the type
of fault selected from the Study Case.
3 Phase Line-to-Ground Line-to-Line Line-to-Line-to-Ground
Once the fault insertion button is selected, the cursor icon changes to a fault symbol which can be
dropped on any valid AC one-line diagram elements (e.g., buses, connectors). As you move the Fault
Insertion cursor over the one-line diagram, the cursor color changes to red (or custom color) indicating an
allowable (valid) fault insertion location. The fault insertion cursor can be dragged and re-dropped on

any valid one-line diagram to initiate a new sequence-of-operation calculation. To cancel the fault
insertion, press the Esc key on the keyboard.
Fault Insertion is not allowed for the following:

De-energized elements
Panel systems
DC elements
Grounding elements
CT / Relay connections
Display Options
Refer to the Display Options section in this chapter for more information about customizing display
annotations and color themes on the one-line diagram. The Display Options Star (PD Coordination)
dialog box contains options for Star Short-Circuit Study and Sequence-of-Operation results, as well as
associated device parameters.
Report Manager
Short-Circuit Output Reports are provided in Crystal Reports format. The Star Report Manager contains
four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different sections of the Output
Report in Crystal Reports.
Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed on each page of the Report Manager for short-circuit
clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation studies.
You can also view output reports by clicking the List Output Reports button on the Study Case toolbar.

List Output Reports Button
A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for the performed calculations. To
view any of the listed Output Reports, click the Output Report name, and then click the View Output
Report button.
The Output Reports for Star Short-Circuit Studies have an extension of .ST1 for ANSI and .ST2 for IEC
standards.
The output reports for Star Sequence-of-Operation studies have an extension of .SQ1 for ANSI and .SQ2
for and IEC Standards.
Device Settings Reports

Click the Device Settings Reports button to display the Device Coordination Reports Manager. The
Report Manager allows you to preview and print the protective device setting data using the Crystal
Reports formats.
To print the device settings:

1. Click the Device Settings Reports button. The Device Coordination Report Manager Editor displays.
2. Select the desired report type for the all or selected element on the one-line diagram.
3. Select the Base or Revision data, and then click OK.
When you select a report, ETAP will ask if you would like to save the project prior to generating the
report.
Clicking the OK button will save the latest changes to the database and launch the selected report. Click
Cancel to exit back to the previous editor. Note that the project database can only be saved in Base
revision.
The report displays device settings for the selected devices or all devices on the one-line diagram
including De-energized and Dumpster elements.


The Halt Current Calculation button is normally disabled. When a Star Study has been initiated, this
button is enabled allowing the user to terminate the current calculation. The display results will not be
shown on the one-line diagram if you terminate the calculation before it completes. The output report will
be incomplete.
Sequence Viewer
The Sequence Viewer button is enabled when you perform a Sequence-of-Operation Study. If you click
the Sequence Viewer button, ETAP displays the Sequence-of-Operation Events dialog box that displays a
tabulated sequence summary list of actions for the applicable protective devices.

Star Device Coordination Study Case Editor

The Star Mode Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, faulted bus selection, and a variety
of options for output reports. ETAP allows you to create and save unlimited number of study cases. Star
Short-Circuit and Sequence-of-Operation calculations are conducted and reported using the settings of the
study case selected in the toolbar. This allows you to switch between Study Cases without having to reset
the study case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you
time.
With respect to the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system components. The system components are configuration status,
one-line diagram presentation, and Base and Revision Data.
You can access the Star Mode Study Case Editor by clicking the Edit Study Case button on the Study
Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by double-clicking the Study Case
name in the Star Analysis folder.
To create a new study case, go to Project View, right-click the Star Analysis Study Case folder, and select
Create New. The program will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default study case, and
add it to the Star Analysis Study Case folder.

16.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
The Study Case ID is displayed in this text box. You can rename the study case by deleting the old ID and
entering a new one. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
buttons at the bottom of the editor to display any of the exiting Study Cases in the editor.
Transformer Tap
The following two methods are provided for modeling transformer off-nominal tap settings:
Adjust Base kV
Base voltages of the buses are calculated using transformer turn ratios, which include the transformer
rated kVs as well as the off-nominal, tap settings.
Use Nominal Tap

Transformer rated kVs are used as the transformer turn ratios for calculating the base voltages of the
buses (that is, all off-nominal tap settings are ignored and transformer impedances are not adjusted).

If a system contains transformers with incompatible voltage ratios (including taps) in a loop, it can lead to
two different base voltage values at a bus, which prevents the short-circuit calculation from continuing. If
this situation occurs, ETAP will post a message to inform you and give you the option to continue the
calculation with the Use Nominal Tap option. If you click Yes, it will carry out the calculation with the
Use Nominal Tap option.
Cable/OL Heater
Select the appropriate checkboxes in this group to include the impedance of equipment cable and
overload heaters of medium (MV Motor) and/or low voltage (LV Motor) motors in Short-Circuit Studies.
Motor Contribution Based on

Select one of the following options for considering motor contribution in short-circuit studies:
Motor Status
When this option is selected, motors with a status of either Continuous or Intermittent will make
contributions in short-circuit. Motors with Spare status will not be considered in the Short-Circuit
Analysis.
Loading Category
When this option is selected, you can select a loading category from the selection box to the right. In the
short-circuit calculation, motors that have non-zero loading in the selected Loading Category will have a
contribution in short-circuit. Motors with zero loading in the selected Loading Category will not be
included in the Short-Circuit Analysis.
Both
When this option is selected, a motor will make a contribution in the Short-Circuit Analysis if it meets
either the Motor Status or the Loading Category condition. That is, for a motor to be excluded from the
short-circuit analysis, it would have to be in the Spare status and have zero loading in the selected
Loading Category.
Bus Selection
ETAP is capable of faulting one or more buses in the same run; however, multiple buses are faulted
individually, not simultaneously. Depending on the specified fault type, the program will place a 3-phase,
line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground fault at each bus that is faulted for Short-Circuit
Studies.
When you open the Star Mode Study Case Editor for the first time, all buses are listed in the Dont Fault
list box. This means that none of the buses are faulted. Using the following procedures, you can decide
which buses you want to fault for this study case.
To fault a bus, highlight the bus ID in the Dont Fault list box and click the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Fault list box.
To remove a bus from the Fault list box, highlight the bus ID and click the Fault button. The
highlighted bus will be transferred to the Dont Fault list box.
If you wish to fault all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses, select the appropriate
options and click the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Dont Fault list
box to the Fault list box.

To remove all buses, medium voltage buses, or low voltage buses from the Fault list box, select the
appropriate options and click the Fault button. The specified buses will be transferred from the Fault
list box to the Dont Fault list box.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this field. Information entered here will be printed on
the second line of every output report page header line. These remarks can be used to provide specific
information about each Study Case.
Note: The first line of the header information must be the same for all Study Cases. To change the first
line, select the Project menu, select Information, and change the Remarks text box.

16.2.2 Standard Page

Standard
Both ANSI and IEC standards are available for Short-Circuit Studies. Select the Short-Circuit Study
Standard by clicking the Standard notation. Different sets of solution control variables (prefault voltage,
calculation methods, etc.) are available for each standard.
When you create a new Study Case, the Short-Circuit Standard is set equal to the project standard you
have specified in the Project Standards dialog box (from the Project menu, select Standards). You can
change the Study Case standard independently of the project standard.
When the ANSI standard is selected, this page will appear as shown below.
When the IEC Standard is selected, the study options will change and you will see the page shown below.

Prefault Voltage - ANSI Standard

You can select either fixed or variable prefault voltages for all buses.
Fixed
This option allows you to specify a fixed prefault voltage for all the faulted buses. This fixed value can be
in percent of bus nominal kV or base kV. Bus nominal kV is the value you entered in the Bus Editor to
represent the normal operating voltage. The bus base kV is calculated by the program and is only reported
in the results section of the Star Mode Short-Circuit Report for each faulted bus.
The process of computing base kV starts from one of the swing machines, such as a utility or a generator,
by taking its design voltage as the base kV for its terminal bus. It then propagates throughout the entire
system. When it encounters a transformer from one side, the transformer rated voltage ratio will be used
to calculate the base kV for the buses on other sides. If the Adjust Base kV option is selected on the Info
page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor, the transformer tap values will also be used in the base kV
calculation along with transformer rated voltage ratio. This calculation procedure demonstrates that the
base kV is close to the operating voltage, provided that the swing machine is operating at its design
setting.
Vmag X Nominal kV (from Bus editor)

If you select the Vmag X Nominal kV (from Bus Editor) prefault voltage option, ETAP uses the bus
voltages entered in the Bus Editors as the prefault voltage for faulted buses. Using this option, you can
perform Short-Circuit Studies with each faulted bus having a different prefault voltage. For instance, you
can perform Short-Circuit Studies using the bus voltages calculated from a specific Load Flow Study and,
therefore, calculate fault currents for an actual operating condition. To do so, from the Info page of the

Load Flow Study Case Editor, select Initial Bus Voltages from the Update group. Then, run a Load Flow
Analysis.
Since the short-circuit current is proportional to the prefault voltage, different options will most likely
give different results. However, with any of the above options, the calculated fault current is the same as
long as the prefault voltage in kV is the same. The options used for a study depend on your judgment and
the objective of the study. If you want to calculate the fault current to size protective switching devices,
you may want to apply the maximum possible prefault voltages in the calculation. This can be done by
selecting the Fixed option with Base kV. If the bus normal operating voltage is entered in the Bus Editor
as the bus nominal voltage, you may also use the Fixed option with Nominal kV.
Cycle kA ANSI Standard

Select the cycle kA option to calculate the short-circuit based on the ANSI Cycle Method
(momentary kA) and update the TCC clipping kA for applicable elements.
30 cycle (Minimum) kA ANSI Standard

Select the 30 cycle (Minimum) kA option to calculate the short-circuit based on the ANSI 30 Cycle
Method (steady state kA) and update the minimum kA for applicable elements.
Zero Sequence Z ANSI Standard
Include Branch Y & Static Load

This option allows you to consider the effect of zero-sequence capacitances of lines and cables, as well as
shunt admittances of distinct static load elements for ANSI LG short-circuit calculations. This means that
if a cable has a susceptance value specified under the Y field (Impedance page), ETAP will convert this
value into the zero sequence capacitance and consider it in the calculation of 3Io.
Short-Circuit Current - IEC Standard

When the IEC Standard is selected, you can specify the maximum or minimum short-circuit current to be
calculated and based on the selection, different c factors will be used to modify source voltage. There are
three options available: Max, User-Defined c Factor, and Min.
When the Max option is selected, the maximum values for c factor as defined in Table I of IEC 60909
Standard are used to calculate maximum fault current:
< 1001 V c Factor = 1.10
1001 to 35000 V c Factor = 1.10
> 35000 V c Factor = 1.10
When the User-Defined c Factor option is selected, ETAP uses the user specified c factor. The ranges for
the c factors are as follows:
< 1001 V c Factor = 0.95 - 1.10
1001 to 35000 V c Factor = 1.00 - 1.10
> 35000 V c Factor = 1.00 - 1.10
When the Min. option is selected, the minimum values for c Factor as defined in IEC 60909 Standard are
used to calculate minimum fault current.
< 1001 V c Factor = 0.95
1001 to 35000 V c Factor = 1.00
> 35000 V c Factor = 1.00

With the Min option selected, there are two options to update the minimum TCC kA:
Ik Min: Steady-state Minimum current.
Ik Min: Initial symmetrical current.
Cmax for Z Adjustment (<1000 V)

This group allows you to specify which constant value to use in the calculation of the K correction factors
used to adjust the impedance of devices like transformers and generators.


Note: These constants are not used as c Factors for the adjustment of the prefault voltage. They are only
used to calculate the impedance adjustment (i.e., Kt, Kg, etc.)
Zero Sequence Z IEC Standard
Include Branch Y & Static Load

This option allows you to consider the effect of zero-sequence capacitances of lines and cables, as well as
shunt admittances of distinct static load elements for IEC 909 LG short-circuit calculations. This means
that if a cable has a susceptance value specified under the Y field (Impedance page), ETAP will convert
this value into the zero sequence capacitance and consider it in the calculation of 3Io.

16.2.3 Seq of Op. Page

This page provides the parameters for performing protective device Sequence-of-Operation analyses.
Fault Value
Select Asymmetrical or Symmetrical value to be considered for phase or ground fault type.
Fault Type
Select from 3 Phase, Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, or Line-to-Line-to-Ground fault type for protective
device sequence-of-operation study. This will change the Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation)
button accordingly.
Protective Devices Considered

Choose the maximum bus level away from the fault, which the study will check for protective device
operation.
Protective Devices Operated

Choose the number of devices to flash on the one-line diagram in chronological order upon performing a
Sequence-of-Operation Analysis. The default is set to 3 with a maximum of 9 devices to flash.

16.2.4 Adjustment Page
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to equipment resistance and impedance.
Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance setting or
based on a globally specified percent value.
Transformer
This adjustment is applied to the transformer impedance. The adjustment includes positive, negative, and
zero sequence impedance depending on the type of fault being performed (3-Phase or LG, LLG, and LL).
The net effect of the transformer impedance adjustment in short-circuit calculations is to decrease the
impedance by the specified percent tolerance value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12%
and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used in the short-circuit calculation will be 10.8%,
resulting in a higher fault current.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by using the tolerance percent value
specified on the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. A global transformer impedance adjustment can
be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding
field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global impedance adjustment
overrides any individual transformer tolerance value.

Reactor
This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher
fault current. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by using the tolerance percent value
specified on the Rating page of the Reactor Editor. A global reactor impedance adjustment can be
on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global impedance adjustment overrides
any individual reactor tolerance value.
Overload Heater
This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces
the OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller resistance and consequently a
higher fault current. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the short-circuit calculation is 0.095 Ohm.
The resistance adjustment can be applied to individual overload heaters by using the tolerance percent
value specified on the Rating page of the Overload Heater Editor. A global overload heater resistance
adjustment can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the
corresponding field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global resistance
adjustment overrides any individual overload heater tolerance value.
The adjustments only apply if the Cable/OL Heater option is selected for MV or LV motors.
Synchronous Machine Direct-Axis Subtransient Reactance (Xd) Adjustment

The direct-axis subtransient reactance (Xd) for a synchronous generator or a synchronous motor will
always be adjusted by the Xd tolerance value entered in the Imp/Model page of the corresponding editor.
The Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces the Xd value by the specified percent tolerance resulting in smaller
impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the Xd value is 10% and its tolerance
is 5%, then the adjusted Xd value used in the short-circuit calculation is 9.5%.
Impedance Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit Current Calculation

In general, to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the impedance tolerance value
is taken as a negative value, resulting in a smaller impedance value. However, in an IEC short-circuit
current calculation, if the Min (Exclude Duty Calc) option is selected in the Short-Circuit Current group
of the Star Mode Study Case Standard page, the impedance tolerance value will be taken as a positive
value. This leads to a larger impedance value and lower short-circuit current.
Impedance Tolerance (Length)

This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line length. Each
Cable Length
If you select this option, the Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces cable length by the specified percent
tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if the
length of the cable is 200 ft. and the tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted cable length used in the short-
circuit calculation is 190 ft.

on the Info page of the Cable Editor. A global cable length adjustment can be specified as well by
selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of Star Mode Study
Case Editor Adjustment page. The global length adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance
value.
Transmission Line Length

If you select this option, the Star Mode Short-Circuit reduces the transmission line length by the specified
percent tolerance resulting in smaller impedance and consequently a higher fault current. For example, if
the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the tolerance is 2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line
length used in the short-circuit calculation is 1.95 miles.
The length adjustment can be applied to individual lines by using the tolerance percent value specified on
the Info page of the Transmission Line Editor. A global transmission line length adjustment can be
on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global length adjustment overrides any
Length Tolerance for IEC Minimum Short-Circuit Current Calculation

In general, to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the length tolerance value is
taken as a negative value, resulting in shorter length. However, in IEC short-circuit current calculation, if
the Min (Exclude Duty Calc) option is selected in the Short-Circuit Current group of the Star Mode Study
Case Standard page, the length tolerance value will be taken as a positive value. This leads to longer
length and lower short-circuit current.

This group allows the user to consider resistance correction based on the minimum operating temperature
for cable and transmission line conductors. Each temperature resistance correction can be applied based
on the individual cable/line minimum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit adjusts the
conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating temperature
is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is reduced.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified on the Impedance page of the Cable Editor. A global temperature correction
can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum temperature value in the
corresponding field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor. The global temperature
correction value overrides any individual Cable Impedance page minimum temperature. For more
information, see the Cable Editor Impedance Page Section in Chapter 11, AC Elements.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Star Mode Short-Circuit
adjusts the conductor resistance based on the minimum operating temperature. If the minimum operating
temperature is less than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the resistance is reduced.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by using the minimum operating
temperature value specified on the Impedance page of the Transmission Line Editor. A global

temperature correction can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global minimum
temperature value in the corresponding field on the Adjustment page of the Star Mode Study Case Editor.
The global temperature correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page
minimum temperature. For more information, see the Impedance Page in the Transmission Line Editor
Section of Chapter 11, AC Elements.
IEC Minimum Short-Circuit Current Calculation

In general, to calculate a more conservative (higher) short-circuit current, the resistance temperature
correction is conducted according to the minimum operating temperature, resulting in a smaller resistance
value. However, in an IEC short-circuit current calculation, if the Min (Exclude Duty Calc) option is
selected in the Short-Circuit Current group of the Star Mode Study Case Standard page, the resistance
temperature correction will be conducted according to the maximum operating temperature. This leads to
a higher resistance value and lower short-circuit current.
Fault Zf
You can consider fault impedance in the unbalanced fault calculations. In this group, you specify the fault
impedance to be applied to all the faulted buses. Depending on the type of faults applied to a bus, the
specified fault impedance is assumed to be between locations as given below:
For a line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and the ground.
For a line-to-line fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between phase A and phase B.
For a line-to-line-to-ground fault, the fault impedance is assumed to be between the ground and the
short-circuit point between phases A and B.
Include Fault Impedance Zf

Select this option to include fault impedance in the calculation. You can enter fault impedance in the R
and X text boxes.
R and X
In these two editor boxes, you enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent, depending on the fault
impedance unit selected. These values apply to all the faulted buses.
Ohm or %
You can enter the fault impedance in either Ohms or percent. If the Ohm option is selected, the values in
the R and X Editor boxes are in Ohms. If you select the percent option, the values in the R and X Editor
boxes are in percent based on 100 MVA and the nominal kV of the faulted bus.

Star Device Coordination Display Options

The Display Options - Star (PD Coordination) Editor consists of a Results page and pages for AC, AC-
DC, DC annotations and color theme information. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each
study are specific to that study.
16.3.1 Results Page

The Results page of the Display Options is where you select different result annotations to be displayed in
the one-line diagram. Depending on short-circuit study type, ANSI or IEC, this page gives you different
options for 3-phase fault results. If the study type is for IEC Short-Circuit Analysis, you will see the
Results page as shown below.

If the study type is for ANSI Short-Circuit Analysis, you will see the Results page as Cycle kA or 30
Cycle kA depending on the option chosen in the Star Mode Study Case.
Fault Type
Select to display the 3-Phase, Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, or Line-to-Line-to-Ground currents on the
one-line diagram for Short-Circuit Clipping Analysis. For PD Sequence-of-Operation Analysis, the
display result is fixed to the applied fault type.

For Line-to-Ground, Line-to-Line, or Line-to-Line-to-Ground fault the currents and voltages displayed
are dependent on the selection as described below.
Fault I & V
For line-to-ground, line-to-line, and line-to-line-to-ground faults you have the options of displaying the
total fault current for every faulted bus, along with the phase and sequence values for both current and
voltage.
You can select to display the value of three times the zero sequence current (3Io) in kA, as well as the
phase B (Vb) Voltage in kV.

You can select to display the positive sequence values for current (I1), negative sequence current (I2)
and zero sequence current (I0) in kA, along with the positive sequence voltage (V1), negative
sequence voltage (V2), and zero sequence voltage (Vo) in kV.
You can select to display the fault current values for phases A, B, and C in kA along with their
corresponding phase voltages in kV.
If multiple buses are faulted, the program shows the individual branch contributions for 3-phase and line-
to-ground-faults only at the faulted bus level. If only one bus is faulted at a time, ETAP shows individual
contributions from the entire system for all types of faults.
16.3.2 AC Page

ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Generator kW/MW

Motor (Synchronous and Induction) HP/kW

Load/Panel kVA/MVA and HP/kW and kvar/Mvar and Panel Phase
Bus kA Bracing (Asymm. RMS)
Node Bus Bracing (Asymm. RMS kA)

Branch (Impedance and Reactor) Base MVA and Continuous Amps

Transformer Rated kVA/MVA
Cable (Size) # of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable - Size
Line (Size) Line Phase Conductor Code
Relay Display Tag for OC, Multi-Function, and MTR Relays
kV
For transformers, the kV checkbox is replaced by %Tap checkbox which displays both transformer rated
kV as well as total % Tap (Fixed Tap + LTC setting) for both two-winding and three-winding
transformers.
A
For cables/lines, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display
the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the winding connection types of the selected elements
For circuit breakers, fuses and switches, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with N.O. checkbox. When
checked, switching devices that are normally open have a N.O. designation on the one-line diagram.
For relays, the D-Y checkbox is replaced with Tag checkbox. When checked, it displays user-defined tag
for OC, Multi-Function, and Motor Relays.

Z

Power Grid (Utility) Positive Sequence Impedance in % on 100 MVA base (R + j X)
Motor % LRC
Branch (Impedance Impedance in % (R+jX) or Ohms
and Reactor)
Transformer Positive Sequence Impedance PS (%Z) for two-winding
transformer and PS/PT/ST (%Z) for three-winding transformer
Cable Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in Ohms or per unit length)

Line Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in Ohms or per unit length)
Use Default Options

Show Eq. Cable

specified as part of the loads. Double-clicking on the equipment cable will bring up the Equipment Cable
Editor.

16.3.3 AC DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC and DC elements.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC and DC elements on
Rating

Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC and DC elements
Device Type Rating

UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
Battery Ampere Hour
Motor HP/kW
Load kW/MW
Composite CSD kW/MW
Converter kW/MW
Cable (Size) # of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable - Size
kV
For DC elements, voltage units are changed from kV to V. For cables, the voltage checkbox is replaced
with Type checkbox. When this checkbox is selected, cable conductor type (CU/AL) is displayed on the
one-line diagram.
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Motor FLA
Load FLA
Composite CSD FLA
Converter DC-DC Converter Input/Output FLA
For cables, the Amp checkbox is replaced by the Length checkbox. Select this checkbox to display the
DC cable length (one way) on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the cables and impedance
branches on the one-line diagram.
For CB, Fuse and Switch, the Z checkbox is replaced by the N.O. checkbox which displays N.O.
annotation on the one-line when the switching devices are in normally open state.
Use Default Options


16.3.4 Colors Page

This page allows you to setup the colors used for displaying annotations on the one-line diagram.
Color Theme
Select the annotation colors specified in the Theme Editor by selecting the appropriate theme name.
Theme
Click this button to access the Theme Editor in order to quickly change the theme colors for annotations.

Annotations
Select the source of colors to be used for displaying annotations. Annotation colors can be used from the
Display Options Editor or from the Theme Editor. By default, ETAP will use user-defined (Display
Option Editor) colors to display annotation colors. Select the color for information annotations for AC,
DC, AC-DC, Composites and Star Mode results to be displayed on the one-line diagram. Switch to
Theme to use the selected theme annotation colors.

Star Device Coordination Star Sequence-of-Operation
16.4 Star Sequence-of-Operation

With ETAP Star, not only can you work with the time-current curves, you can also determine the
operating time of protective devices simply by placing a fault on the one-line diagram. The Sequence-of-
Operations are automatically calculated and listed in an Event Viewer, which is dynamically linked with
the one-line diagram. This one-step concept utilizes the intelligent one-line diagram and performs a
complete set of actions to determine the operation of all protective devices. This includes internal shifting
(normalizing) of each time-current characteristic curve based on the individual fault contribution level.
Sequence-of-Operation provides a system wide solution for an accurate and realistic operating time and
state of protective devices, such as relay, fuse, circuit breaker, trip devices, contactor, etc. The operation
time is calculated for each protective device based on its settings, time current characteristic, and
interlocks for a specified fault location and type.
Features & Capabilities

Graphically place a fault anywhere on the one-line diagram
Automatically calculate and display the fault current contributions on the one-line diagram
Determine the operating time and state of all protective devices based on the actual fault current
contribution flowing through each individual device
Globally view post fault actions and associated operating time via a tabulated event viewer
Graphically examine the operation of protective devices via the one-line diagram
Display / flash the tripped devices in chronological order on the one-line diagram
16.4.1 Protective Device Actions

The Sequence-of-Operation Study is essentially a time-domain simulation of protective devices action
based on a user-specified fault location and type. Protective device actions are determined at different
time instants (events).
When a fault is placed on a valid bus or connector on the selected one-line diagram configuration, a short-
circuit study is performed in accordance with the selected Star Mode Study Case parameters. The
calculated through fault current of each valid protective device is then compared with its settings, time
current characteristic, and applicable interlocks to determine the operating time band.
Protective device tripping actions can be categorized in two main groups:

Integral Trip
Non-Integral Trip
Integral Trip
The action of the integral trip components, such as low voltage circuit breaker (trip device), fuse, and
overload heater, is based on the internal tripping mechanisms or melting elements of the device which in
turn can cause the device to operate by melting or tripping, respectively.
Non-Integral Trip
Non-integral trip action of devices in power system is typically initiated by remote operation via a relay
or shunt tripping by a sensing device. The operation of circuit breakers in power systems are often
controlled via a relay or through a lock-out device. In the case of current sensing relays, the current
transformer will sense the fault current based on its relative location to the fault and the magnitude as well
as the type of the fault current. When the operating current exceeds that of the relay characteristic setting,

the relay will signal its pre-programmed trip contacts to operate accordingly. For instance, a current relay
will trip off circuit breakers once the measured current by relay exceeds a pre-set value. To use relay-
controlled actions, you can add a relay and connect it to the one-line diagram via a PT or CT, depending
on the type of relay. Next in the Relay Editor, the user specifies the relay-controlled device ID, action,
time delay, and other data related to the selected relay operation. During the SQOP simulation, if a relay
setting is met, then its controlled device (i.e., HVCB) will take an action as specified in the Relay Editor.
This method avoids requesting to give a pre-defined action time and is a true resemblance to power
system real operating conditions.
The following table shows the list of relay-interlocked devices as well as their inherent operating time
delay.
Device Type Operating Time

ANSI HVCB Operating cycles as specified in the HVCB Editor
IEC HVCB Min delay as specified in the HVCB Editor
ANSI LVCB (PCB) 3 cycles per IEEE Std 1584-2002
ANSI LVCB (MCCB, ICCB) 1.5 cycle per IEEE Std 1584-2002
IEC LVCB Min delay as specified in the LVCB Editor
SPST No time delay
Contactor Drop out time delay as specified in the Contactor Editor
Note that the operating time for Close and Open actions are assumed to be the same.

16.4.2 Sequence-of-Operation Events Viewer
Header
The first part of the header includes information regarding the type and location of the fault. The second
section of the header includes information on data revision, system configuration, and date for which the
study was performed.
Time
This is the total event time (in milliseconds) from the initiation of the fault in sequential order.
ID
Displays the Protective Device Identifier
If (kA)
Through fault current in kA as seen by the protective device. The fault current component that is used to
determine the operating time of a protective device is based on the current sensing characteristic of that
device. For example, a fuse may operate for phase and ground fault current depending on the fault current
magnitude where as a ground relay will only operate for ground fault. For relays the current sensing
characteristics is defined by the relay trip elements such as Phase, Ground, Neutral, Sensitive Ground,
Negative Sequence, etc. Furthermore, the location and type of the CT connected to a relay determine the
current sensing characteristic of the relay. For example, a Negative Sequence trip element of a relay will
operate for negative sequence current (I2) component of a ground fault. Similarly, for a ground fault, the

ground trip element of a low voltage solid-state trip device will operate for 3I0 current component (where
as a phase trip element of the LVSST will operate for line current (Ia).
T1 (ms)
Operating time event 1 in milliseconds for the protective device. This is the initial tripping or minimum
time of the device where applicable. For example, T1 represents the minimum melting time of the fuse or
the minimum trip time of a thermal-magnetic circuit breaker.
T2 (ms)
Operating time event 2 in milliseconds. This is the final tripping or maximum time of the device where
applicable. For example, T1 represents the total clearing time of the fuse or the maximum trip time of a
thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. Note that T2 will be zero for device with a single band or definite
operating time (i.e., HVCB operating time).
Condition
This column includes pertinent information regarding the device action. For relays this will include the
particular trip function and level for which the relay has operated on.
Footer
Include information on assumption or exception for Sequence-of-Operation Analysis.

Star Device Coordination Required Data
16.5 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculation for buses includes:
Branch Data
Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and Impedance). Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and
Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for branches include:

For unbalanced short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations, you will also need:
Zero sequence impedances

Power Grid Data

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for utilities include:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle

Single-Phase MVAsc and X/R

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for synchronous
generators include:

Xd, Xd, and X/R
Generator type
IEC exciter type


Inverter Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for inverters
include:


Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for synchronous
motor includes:

Xd and X/R
% LRC, Xd, and Tdo for IEC Standard


Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for induction
motors include:
Rated kW/hp and kV

X/R plus one of the following:
% LRC, Xd, and Td for IEC Standard

X0
Lumped Load Data

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for lumped load
includes:
Rated MVA and kV

% motor load
% LRC, X/R, and Xsc for cycle and 1.5-4 cycle
X, X, and Td for IEC Standard
Additional data for unbalanced short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations

include:

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for high voltage
circuit breakers include:

Max kV
Rated Int. (rated interrupting capability)
Max Int. (maximum interrupting capability)
C & L rms (rms value of closing and latching capability)
C & L Crest (crest value of closing and latching capability)
Standard
Cycle

Rated kV
AC Breaking (rms AC breaking capability)
ETAP calculates the interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker from the rated and maximum interrupting
capabilities. This value is calculated at the nominal kV of the bus that the circuit breaker is connected to.

Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for low voltage
circuit breakers include:

Rated kV
Test PF
Rated kV


Trip Device
Trip device type library parameters
Device settings / TCC curves
Fuse Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for fuses include:
Fuse library data including Size and TCC curves
ANSI Standard Fuse:

Fuse rated kV
Test PF
IEC Standard Fuse:
Fuse rated kV
Test PF
Overload Heater/49
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for OLH/49
includes:
Resistance / Tolerance
OLH library parameters
CT/PT Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for CT and PT
includes:
Bus or Branch or Source or Load Connections

Rating (Ratio)
Relay/MVSST Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for Relay includes:
CT/PT Connections / Assignments

Interlocked Devices, Device ID, Action, Delay, Setting, Unit
Relay/MVSST Library parameters including settings and TCC curves
Other Data
There are some study case related data which must also be provided. You can enter this data into the Star
Mode Study Case Editor. The data includes:
Standard (ANSI/IEC)


Prefault voltage
Fault type (Phase / Ground) Sequence-of-Operation
Fault value (Asym/Sym) Sequence-of-Operation
Bus levels to be considered Sequence-of-Operation
Faulted buses
Cable/OL Heater (select this option to include cable and overload heater elements)
Adjustments

Star Device Coordination Output Reports
16.6 Output Reports

ETAP provides short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) clipping kA as well as Sequence-
of-Operation Study Output Reports with different levels of detail, depending on your requirements. The
following are just some examples that show this flexibility. ETAP reports show total and individual fault
current contributions for all the different types of faults.

the picture shown below, the output report name is SM and the selected format is Adjustments.
16.6.2 Star Mode Report Manager

To open the Star Mode Report Manager, simply click on the Report Manager button on the Star Mode
Study toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing
different sections of the Output Report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for
different portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons
common to every page, as described below.
Output Report Name

Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel

of the output report. If no selection is made, it will simply close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to
close the editor without viewing the report.
Select Report Viewer Application

Choose the appropriate application to open the selected report in Crystal Report Viewer, Adobe PDF,
Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel.

This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type,
including Bus, Cable, Cover, Adjustments, Generator, Loads, Reactor, Transformer, UPS, and Utility.

16.6.4 Result Page

This page allows you to select formats to view the short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation)
result portion of the Output Report. The same applies for IEC faults.

16.6.5 Summary Page

This page allows you to select formats to view Summary Reports of the Output Report. Note that if the
Sequence-of-Operation Study Output Report is selected, the Summary page will include an additional
report for the Sequence-of-Operation Summary.


In this page you can select the Complete Report in Crystal Reports format, which brings up the complete
report for the short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) Study. The Complete Report
includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.

Chapter 17
Star View
Chapter 16 describes how to create a new Star View and append elements to an existing Star View from
Star Mode. This chapter details the various tools and features available while working with Star Views.
A Star View is a presentation containing one-line diagram elements and their associated characteristic
curves and diagrams. Star View provides a graphical user interface for viewing, coordinating, and
customizing element curves and diagrams.

Star View Star Systems
17.1 Star Systems

Star Systems provides all the necessary tools for accessing, navigating, and coordinating curves
associated with one-line diagram elements. Clicking the Star Systems button on the Systems toolbar
opens the last accessed Star View and makes it the active window.
Create / Open Star View Navigator
Star View from Create / Copy Star
Star Systems Project Editor Views Star TCC View Star View (TCC) Toolbar
Star Views are saved as presentations in Project Editor under the Star folder. You can create a new Star
View presentation by right-clicking the Star folder and selecting Create New or by clicking the Star New
Presentation button. You can create either a new Star View or copy an existing Star View.

Double-click the Star View name (for example Star1) in the Project Editor to open an existing Star View.
You can also right-click the Star View name to view, save, purge, rename (using Properties command),
and print the view.

You can access an existing Star View by selecting it from the Presentation toolbar while in Star Mode.

Star View Star TCC View
17.2 Star TCC View

The Star Time Current Characteristic (TCC) View, displays the device characteristic curves on the Time
versus Current frame. The Time versus Current frame dimension can be graphically adjusted and re-
positioned.
In Star TCC View, you can graphically add, delete, adjust, zoom in or out, change properties, and more.
The tools from left to right are described below.
Pointer
Click the Pointer button to select one-line diagram elements and curves in Star View.

Zoom In One-Line Diagram

Click this button to zoom in on the one-line diagram in Star View.
Zoom Out One-Line Diagram

Click this button to zoom out the one-line diagram in Star View.

Zoom Fit One-Line Diagram

Click this button to zoom fit the one-line diagram to the left bottom corner of Star View. The scale of the
one-line diagram can be defined in the Options (Preferences) Editor (Tools Options) using the entries
Max. One-line Scaling Factor in Star TCC and One-Line Display Area in Star TCC. Refer to
Chapter 4, Preferences for more details.

Pan
Use the Pan tool to pan around a Star TCC View time-current grid. Hold the left mouse button to grab the
Star View and move the hand pointer to pan the view.
Zoom In, Zoom Out

To zoom in on the Star View, click the Zoom In button. Use the Zoom Out tool to zoom out of a Star
View.

Zoom Fit
To fit entire Star layout in the Star View window, click the Zoom Fit button.

Auto-Scale
Use the Auto-Scale tool to determine the best possible Star View scaling for displaying all plotted curves.
The tool can be used for both phase and ground views. For more details on auto-scaling, see section 17.3,
Star View (TCC) Toolbar.
Star View without Motor, Auto Scale ON Star View with Motor, Auto Scale OFF
Star View with Motor, Auto Scale ON

2nd Axis
Click to show the second X-axis.
Show/Hide Grid
Click to display the grid.
Show/Hide Legend
Click to show legend on the bottom of the Star View.

Hide/Show Range
Device curves can be graphically adjusted in the Star TCC View. Handles are provided on the device
characteristic curves to identify adjustable regions. Available ranges for a selected curve can be displayed
and identified by clicking the Hide/Show Range button. The available ranges are grayed out when an
adjustable curve is selected. The display of ranges is turned off by default.
Print Preview
Click the Print Preview button to view or modify the print layout of the selected Star TCC View.
Close
Click this button to save the settings and layout, close the preview, and return to the Star TCC View.
Print
Click this button to bring up the Print dialog box and start a print job.
Note: Star Views can be printed collectively via Star Batch Print menu. With a Star View open, go to
File menu and select Batch Print
Print Setup
Click this button to display the Print Setup dialog box, which contains options for selecting the
Star Print Options

Click this button to display the Star Print Options dialog box, which contains options for printing (or not
printing) one-line diagram and text boxes.


Next/Previous Page
If the length of a Star View exceeds one page, you can navigate through multiple pages using the
Next/Previous Page buttons.
Toggle Display
Click this button to toggle between previewing one or two pages at once.

Zoom in or zoom out of the view to preview the details or overall layout of your Star TCC View prior to
printing. This zooms in/out does not affect the print results.
Fit to Page
This fits all of the Star View into the selected page size and orientation.
Zoom In/Zoom TCC

Use this tool to zoom in or out of the Star TCC View so that the size of the view changes with respect to
the page size. Once you print or close Print Preview, all settings are saved for future printing. Zoom levels
for the Print Preview are independent of zoom levels for the Star TCC View. You can enter a specific
magnification factor in the field provided. The Star TCC will be printed with the zoom factor specified.
Scroll
Scroll the Star TCC View to the right, left, top, and bottom with respect to the selected page size and
orientation. These scroll capabilities are provided for centering and adjusting the location of the Star View
with respect to the selected paper size for the Star View. Once you print or close Print Preview, all
settings are saved for future printing. Scrolling in the Print Preview is independent of scrolling in the Star
TCC View. However, you can specify the scroll length in the fields provided.
Print Setup
Printer
Select the printer you wish to use. You can choose the default printer or select one of the currently
Control Panel.
Paper Size

Paper Source
Select the tray, if your printer offers multiple trays for paper sources.
Orientation
Network
Help
Click on Help to open the help topic on Print Setup options.
OK
Click on OK to close the Print Setup page and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on OK to close the Print Setup page without saving.
Star Print Options

Include One-Line Diagram
Check this box to include the TCC one-line diagram in the print. This box
is checked by default.
Include Text Boxes

Check this box to include the text boxes in TCC in the print. This box is
checked by default.
Help
Click on Help to open the help topic on Star Print options.
OK
Click on OK to close the Star Print options page and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on OK to close the Star Print options page without saving.
Purge
Delete the active Star View. ETAP asks for confirmation before purging the Star View.

Star View TCC Toolbar
17.3 Star View (TCC) Toolbar

The Star View (TCC) toolbar provides all necessary tools for viewing, coordinating, and plotting
applicable device curves. Star View (TCC) toolbar is displayed and applicable for the active Star View.
This section includes details on the various tools available on the Star View (TCC) toolbar.

Star View TCC Toolbar

Star View Zoom to New Window
17.3.1 Phase/Ground Mode

The Mode tool allows you to view device characteristic curves in Phase or Ground Mode. You can toggle
the Mode button to view the applicable curves for Phase or Ground Mode for the same Star View.
Therefore, the Phase and Ground Modes are essentially sub-views of each Star View. The icon on the
Mode button changes when you toggle between Phase and Ground Modes.
Phase Mode Ground Mode
Phase Mode
Phase Mode, when selected, displays and includes device curves that respond to phase current. By
default, this includes all phase-responsive device curves and device damage curves/fixed points (for
example, motor starting and transformer damage/inrush point).

Ground Mode
When you select Ground Mode, Star View displays device curves that respond to ground and phase
current. By default, this includes ground current responsive device curves (for example, ground trip
functions or residual connected relays).
Note: Phase-responsive devices can be plotted in the Ground Mode from Star View Plot Options.

The table below shows a list of all devices plotted in Star View that can be displayed in Phase and Ground
Modes. X indicates available modes for the given device curve.
ETAP
Device/Function Trip Element Phase Mode Ground Mode
Default
Fuse - X X Phase
Phase X X Phase
Ground - X Ground
Sensitive ground - X Ground
Overcurrent Relay
Negative-sequence X X Phase
Neutral - X Ground
Residual connection - X Ground
Thermal X X Phase
Acceleration X X Phase
Overload Relay
Jam X X Phase
Ground - X Ground
Phase X X Phase
Low Voltage Solid-State trip
Ground - X Ground
Thermal Magnetic trip - X X Phase
Electro-Mechanical trip - X X Phase
Motor Circuit Protector - X X Ground
Overload Heater - X X Phase
In-Line Overload Relay - X X Phase
Phase X X Phase
Recloser Ground - X Ground
Sensitive Ground - X Ground
Medium-Voltage Solid State Phase X X Phase
Trip Ground - X Ground
Transformer (2W, 3W) - X X Phase
Cable - X X Phase
Phase Conductor X X Phase
Transmission Line
Ground Wire - X Ground
Motor Damage / Starting Phase
- X X
(Induction, Synchronous)
Generator - X X Phase
Contactor - X X Phase
Bus (Arc Flash Curve) - X X Phase
Phase &
User Curve - X X
Ground
Note: The default Plot Options for all devices plotted in Star View can be set globally for the project. To set
defaults, from the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View. Refer to section 17.3.7.

17.3.2 Zoom to New Window

Zoom to New Window
To zoom into a region on a Star TCC View, use the Zoom to New Window tool. Click the Zoom to New
Window button and draw a bounding outline around any section of the curve. The Zoomed TCC window
is opened, displaying the selected portion of the curve. The crosshair pointer (+) in the zoomed window
allows you to read the time and current coordinates at the bottom of the zoom window. Once you select a
section of the curve and open a Zoomed TCC window, you can move the selected area to view other
sections of the TCC View.

Star View Time Difference
17.3.3 Time Difference

The time difference tool calculates the graphical time difference at the selected points between any two
device curves plotted in Star View. This tool helps you to display and verify possible mis-coordination or
false operation between various plotted curves.
Time Difference
Handle
Time Difference
Indicator
The time difference can be displayed and graphically adjusted using the following tools:
Time difference measurement pointer

Time difference handle
Time difference indicator
Time Difference Measurement Pointer

The time difference measurement pointer allows you to select the From and To curves between which the
time difference is to be calculated and displayed. Clicking the Time Difference button changes the mouse
pointer to the time difference measurement pointer as shown below. Click the curve to select the From
location. The pointer changes again, indicating you need to select the To location of the second curve.
Once the two locations are selected, the time difference indicator lines are displayed in red.

Time Difference Measurement

symbol Select From point
Time Difference Measurement

symbol Select To point

Time Difference Handle

The time difference handle allows you to graphically adjust and view the time difference along the length
of the two curves. The handle can slide horizontally between the two curves, and the range of the handle
adjustment is determined by the shorter of the two curves with respect to the X (current) axis. The handle
is displayed upon the selection of the time difference location for the selected curves.
Once the mouse pointer is placed on the handle, the symbol changes to a horizontal arrow that indicates
you can adjust the handle to view the time difference along the length of the curves. Click to grab the
handle and adjust the time difference. The time difference value displayed changes as you move the
handle. The time values and current value at which the time difference is measured are indicated by red
lines for the existing time difference and the adjusted time difference.
New Time Difference position

obtained by adjusting handle
New Time Difference value
Existing Time Difference

position
Time Difference Indicator

The time difference indicator displays the value of the time difference measured. When you use the
handle to graphically change the time difference, the value displayed by the indicator changes with the

adjustment. The time difference indicator is displayed after the From and To points are selected for the
two curves or after you click the time difference value already measured. The indicator, when selected,
also displays the time values at which the difference is displayed by red lines.
The position of the indicator can be adjusted horizontally to display the time difference at any desired
location.
Time Difference Indicator displaying

time difference between fuse and relay
curves. Red lines are not shown, as the
indicator is not selected.

Time Difference indicator adjusted to

a different position
Time Difference value adjusted to a

different position
Bringing the pointer near the indicator or handle also displays the time difference in a screen tip. The
screen tip displays the ID of the curves, the time difference, and the current in amperes at which the
difference is measured.
The time difference indicators or handles are added to a selected Star View. You can delete the time
difference by selecting either the indicator or handle and clicking the Delete key on the keyboard.
Note: The time difference is not calculated for two curves that do not have a common current value.
For relay curves that can be integrated or linked, the time difference moves to the nearest point available
on the curve, should the integration or TOC/IOC linking hides the portion of the curve where the time
difference was originally placed.

Star View Crosshair
17.3.4 Crosshair
The Crosshair tool displays the current (in amperes) and time (in seconds) at any location on the Star TCC
View. Clicking on the Crosshair button changes the mouse pointer to a Crosshair cursor (+). The
Crosshair can be dropped at any location on the Star TCC View to indicate the current and time values.
As shown below, the crosshair is displayed with a label indicating the current and time values and an
arrow pointing to the cursor point. The current and time values change with adjustment of the Crosshair
cursor. Crosshair also works independently in Phase and Ground Modes.
Clicking on the crosshair

button changes the mouse to
a crosshair cursor.
Crosshair once dropped on

TCC shows the point at
which current and time are
shown in the label.
To move an existing Crosshair, select the crosshair and move the mouse over the Crosshair cursor. The
mouse pointer changes to a four-way arrow as shown below using which the crosshair can be moved. The
Crosshair can be deleted by simply selecting it and pressing the Delete key on the keyboard.

Star View Crosshair
The mouse pointer changes

to a four-way arrow using
which the Crosshair can be
moved.
The crosshair is dedicated

to Fuse1 curve when it
(Fuse1) is selected prior to
clicking Crosshair button.

Star View Crosshair
The Crosshair can also be assigned to a device curve. This provides a tracking tool for current and time
which can be moved along the device curve. To track a device curve using the Crosshair, first select the
device curve and then click on the Crosshair button. As shown in the figure above, the crosshair moves
only along the Fuse1 curve, (minimum melting curve or total clearing curve depending on the proximity
of the crosshair to the curve) when selected. A tracking crosshair dynamically moves with any curve
adjustment such as change in settings, Base kV (with respect to Plot kV), shift factor, etc. Also, in
Normalized TCC Mode Crosshair displays the current in per unit of the fault current with the actual
ampere value shown in parentheses. For more information on Normalized TCC Mode refer to section
17.3.11.
For relay curves that can be integrated or linked, the Crosshair moves to the nearest visible point available
on the curve, should the integrated or linked portion of the curve becomes hidden where the crosshair was
originally placed.

Star View User Curve
17.3.5 User Curve

The User Curve button enables you to enter a customized curve in Star TCC View. You can enter current
and time points, tolerances, and specify fault arrows. The User Curve parameters once defined and plotted
are saved with the Star View presentation. The User Curve can also be added and saved to the ETAP
library which allows for retrieval of the User Curve for use in other Star Views. User Curves are plotted
in Phase and Ground Modes by default. You can change the default modes for User Curves from the
Default Plot Options. User Curves are not element driven and hence revisions (different properties for
same User Curve ID in base and revision) do not apply.
Clicking on the User Curve button or double-clicking on an existing User Curve opens a Property Editor
as shown below.
Note that the different properties available can be viewed categorically (default) or alphabetically. With
the Categorized view, the properties are categorized into Info, Parameters, Remarks, and Settings.
Header
The header section displays the selected Category and Curve Name when User Curve is selected from the
User Curve Quickpick Library. The header is empty if no User Curve selected from library. The header is
displayed in blue color if the User Curves parameters in the editor are modified and differ from those of
the selected library.

Info
ID
Enter the ID or name for the User Curve up to 30 alphanumeric characters.
Pickup_Amps
Enter the pick up value in amperes (base Amps) for the User Curve. This field defines the base current
value for user curves that have their current Units set to multiples.
Units
Select the unit for the current values as either Amperes or Multiples.
Parameters
Curve_Points_1, Curve_Points_2
Clicking on Curve_Points_1 (or Curve_Points_2) button as shown below opens the Edit Curve_Points_1
(or Curve_Points_2) Editor. Enter the current (in amps or multiples as selected in units) and time (in
seconds). Use Curve Points_1 to specify the lower band (minimum) curve and Curve_Points_2 to specify
the upper band (maximum) curve.

The different tools available are explained below:
Paste from Clipboard

Paste the current and time points copied into Clipboard. To paste the data, click on the first row and select
the Paste from Clipboard button. Note that data from Microsoft Excel cells or Microsoft Word tables
can be copied and pasted directly.
Insert
Click on this button to add a new row or insert a row above an existing row.
Delete
Delete selected rows. Multiple rows can be selected by either using the Shift/Ctrl key or by simply
moving the mouse (left-click) along the first column as shown below.
Left click and move the

mouse along the first
column to select multiple
rows.
Move point Up / Down

The Up and Down arrows can be used to move the points entered to the desired order. The Up arrow is
disabled (grayed out) for the first point and Down arrow is disabled for the last point.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the Curve Points Editor without saving any changes.
OK
Click on OK to close the Curve Points Editor and save any changes.
Curve Style
Choose the curve style from Line, Smoothed curve, or Points.
Percent_Tol_Max
Enter the tolerance in percent (-99.99 to +999%) specified from the nominal curve (as defined by
Curve_Points_1) to the maximum curve. The default value is set to zero. Entering a positive tolerance
draws the band to the right of the nominal curve and negative tolerance draws to the left. The
Percent_Tol_Max is not being applicable when Curve_Points_2 is defined; a Star alert message is issued
when this condition is detected.

Percent_Tol_Min
Enter the tolerance in percent (-99.99 to +999%) specified from the nominal curve (as defined by
Curve_Points_1) to the minimum curve. The default value is set to zero. Entering a positive tolerance
draws the band to the right of the nominal curve and negative tolerance draws to the left. The
Percent_Tol_Min is not being applicable when Curve_Points_2 is defined; a Star alert message is issued
when this condition is detected.
A single line curve can be defined by entering the points in Curve_Points_1 or Curve_Points_2.
A band curve can be defined by any of the following methods:

(a) Define Curve_Points_1 and Curve_Points_2
(b) Define Curve_Points_1 and Percent_Min_Tol / Percent_Max_Tol
Remarks
Additional information on the User Curve can be entered in Remarks. Remarks are provided for reference
Description
Enter the description up to 100 characters, for the User Curve.
Link
Enter the User Curve web link or URL address up to 100 characters.
Reference
Enter the reference, up to 50 characters, for the User Curve.
Settings
Base kV
Enter the User Curve base voltage in kV. Note: The User Curve is plotted in reference to its Base kV
value. For example, if a base kV equals 4 and the Star View Plot kV is set to 4.16, the User Curve will be
shifted by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.962. Default value is set to 0.
Fault_kA
Enter the clipping fault current in kA. Default value is set to 0. You can also define customized fault
arrows by entering only the fault current value in this field and not defining any User Curve points. Note
that when Normalized TCC Mode is enabled, the fault kA entered is taken as the through fault current.
For more information on Normalized TCC Mode, refer to section 17.3.10.
Show_Fault_Arrow
The fault arrow display can be enabled or disabled using the True/False options in this property. Note that
the User Curve is clipped beyond the specified fault kA if the fault arrow is set to True.
Add to Lib
As mentioned previously, the User Curve can also be added and saved to the ETAP library. Click on the
Add to Lib button to open the User Curve Library: Add Editor. Note that that each User Curve record is
saved as a unique category-curve combination. Hence the Category and Curve must be defined and be
unique to add the User Curve to the ETAP library. You can also revise (overwrite) existing User Curve
entries in the library. Note that if you update an existing User Curve library data, the changes
automatically applies to all Star Views that use this User Curve.

Category
Enter a Category name up to 30 alphanumeric characters. Existing category names are available for
selection in the list box.
Curve Name
Enter a Curve name up to 30 alphanumeric characters. Existing curve names are be available for selection
in the list box.
Remarks
Additional information on the User Curve can be entered in Remarks. Remarks are provided for reference
only and may be left blank. By default, information in the User Curve Editor Reference field is entered.
Reference
Enter the reference, if available, for the User Curve. By default, information in the User Curve Editor
Reference field is entered.
Link
Enter the User Curve web link or URL address. By default, information in the User Curve Editor Link
field is entered.
Description
Enter the description for the User Curve. By default, information in the User Curve Editor description
field is entered.
Help
Open the Help topic for User Curve.
OK
Click on OK to close the User Curve Library: Add Editor and save changes. The OK button is enabled
only if both Category and Curve name are specified. On clicking OK, the User Curve Properties Editor
displays the Category and Curve name as header information.

Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the User Curve Library: Add Editor without saving any changes.
Library Quickpick
Click on the Library button to open the Library Quickpick for the User Curve. All User Curves that are
added using the Add to Lib button are displayed in Quickpick. You may pick and retrieve parameters
from the User Curve Quick pick library by selecting a category / curve name.
Category
Display list of all User Curve categories added.
Delete (Category)
Delete the selected category after confirming to warning. Note that all curves under the selected category
will also be deleted.
Curve Name
Display list of all User Curve names under the selected category.
Delete (Curve)
Delete the selected curve after confirming to warning.
Reference
Displays the reference information for the selected curve.
Link
Displays the URL address for the selected curve.
Description
Displays the description for the selected curve.

Help
Open the Help topic for User Curve.
OK
Click on OK to close the Library Quickpick and populate the selected curve in User Curve Editor. On
clicking OK, the User Curve Properties Editor displays the Category and Curve name as header
information.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close Library Quickpick Editor without saving any changes.
None
Click on None to close the Library Quickpick Editor and remove the selected library entry from the
header. Note here that None removes only the header information; the points are retained in the User
Curve Editor.

Star View Plot Options
17.3.6 Plot Options

The Plot Options tool provides all the necessary options to customize the display of the Star Time Current
Characteristic (TCC) curve. You can customize the display of current and time axes, legend, grid, and
curve plotting properties. Plot Options apply to the active Star View and are saved with the Star View
once the options are set. In the figure below, the name of the Star View (Star1) is displayed on the header,
indicating that the options selected apply to Star1 View only. This section describes the different options
available for your plots. The Plot Options Editor consists of the following pages:
General
Axis
Grid
Legend
Devices

These pages can be accessed by using one of the following methods:
Click the Plot Options button and select a page.

Double-click an area of the Star Time Current Characteristic (TCC) View to bring up the relevant
page. For example, double-click the grid space to bring up the Grid page.
Right-click a specific area of the Star TCC View and select the Plot Options command. For example,
right-click the X-axis and select Plot Options to bring up the Axis page. For more information, see the
Axis page section below.
Plot Options for a specific device curve or label can be accessed by right-clicking the device curve or
label.

General Page
The General page allows you to set the following options:
Show Range
Check this box to display the available ranges for a selected curve in Star TCC View. The available
ranges are displayed in gray when an adjustable curve is selected. This checkbox is unchecked by default.
Toggling this checkbox changes the state of the Show/Hide Range button on the Star View tool palette.
Refer to section 17.2, sub-topic Show/Hide Range for more details.

Show Extended Tooltip

Check this box to display the detail settings of device curves, time difference, cross hair, fault arrows, etc.
plotted on the TCC View. The detail settings are displayed when the mouse cursor is moved over the
device curve or label. This box is checked by default. Unchecking this box displays only the ID.
Extend relay curve to pickup

Check this box to connect the relay inverse and/or definite time curves (minimum multiple point of the
relay curve) to the pickup marker on the top X-axis of the TCC. This box is unchecked by default.
Checking the Extend definite time curve connects the definite time curve and the relay pickup with a
straight line. Checking the Extend inverse time curve extrapolates the inverse time curve connects it to
relay pickup.
Note: The connection to pickup is displayed using a dotted line style to indicate that it is not specified in
manufacturer published data. Also note that extend to pickup does not apply for integrated curves
(overcurrent or overload function).

User Curve Default ID

Enter the default Curve ID to be assigned for a new User Curve in Star View. As shown in the General
page figure above, clicking on User Curve button for adding a new User Curve displays the Curve ID as
User Curve followed by number 1, 2, 3
ARTTS Max Test Current

Set the maximum relay amperes for export of relay curve to the ARTTS relay test-set. The default value
is set to 90A and any value between 5 and 250A may be entered. For example, entering a value of 30A
does not export relay curve points greater than 30A (relay amps).
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for the General page. The default options can be changed
globally from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options
and select Star View.) For more information, see section 17.3.7, Default Plot Options.

Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the General page settings to the selected Star View. You can reset to
defaults by clicking the Default button.
OK
Click the OK button to close the Plot Options Editor and save all the changes.
Cancel
Click the Cancel button to close the Plot Options Editor and discard all the changes.
Axis Page
The Axis page allows you to set different options for the X (current) and Y (time) axes. The Axis page
can be accessed by clicking the Plot Options button and then selecting the Axis page from the Plot
Options Editor. Alternatively, you can double-click an axis to display the Plot Options Editor on the Axis
page.
The various options available on the Axis page are described below.

Primary and Secondary X Axis (Current)

Auto-Scale
Star uses an intelligent automatic scaling algorithm to calculate the optimal current and voltage scale
setting for the displayed TCC curve. With the Auto-Scale option selected, whenever a device curve is
adjusted, appended, or deleted from the selected Star View, the current scale is recalculated.
By default, the Auto-Scale option is selected. You can set Auto-Scale separately for each Star View you
create. Auto-Scale works independently for Phase and Ground Modes. You can also change the default
setting for Auto-Scale (ON/OFF) from the Defaults menu by pointing to Plot Options and selecting Star
View.
With Auto Scale turned OFF, the Current Multiplier and Voltage Reference fields are user definable.
Voltage Reference selection list provides a list of Bus ID available on the selected Star View. The
corresponding Plot kV is displayed in the Plot Voltage field. The Plot Voltage is based on either
Calculated Base kV or Nominal Bus kV depending on the Project Setting selection (see Project
Settings Star View Reference kV). With Auto Scale turned ON, the Voltage Reference Bus is
automatically selected where applicable. Uncheck Display kV to hide the Plot kV value on the X-axis.
Voltage Reference can also be set to <User-Defined> selection which allows for direct entry of the Plot
Voltage in kV.
The primary and secondary axes scaling (current multiplier and voltage) can be independently set for
different modes (Phase/Ground/Normalized).
Primary X-Axis (Current Phase): X-axis scaling for the Phase Mode.

Secondary X-Axis (Current Phase): X-axis scaling for the Phase Mode.
Primary X Axis (Current Ground): X-axis scaling for the Ground Mode.
X Axis (Current Ground): X-axis scaling (primary/secondary axis) for the Ground Mode.
X Axis (Current Phase Normalized): X-axis scaling with current in per unit (primary/secondary axis)
for the Phase Mode of a Normalized TCC.

X Axis (Current Ground Normalized): X-axis scaling with current in per unit (primary/secondary axis)
for the Ground Mode of a Normalized TCC.

Primary Axis @ 34.5 kV
Secondary Axis @ 4.16 kV
By default, the Secondary Axis is unchecked (not displayed). It can be enabled from the Axis page or by
clicking the 2nd Axis button on the Star View menu toolbar. Alternatively, the default setting for
Secondary Axis can be changed from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the Defaults
menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View.)
Y Axis (Time)
The Y axis allows you to set the minimum and maximum time scales in seconds for the Y (time) axis of
the Star View. You can set the minimum value of 0.1, 0.01, or 0.001 seconds and a maximum value of
1000 or 10000 seconds.

Maximum time =
10000 sec.
Minimum time =
0.01 sec.
Line/Label
Color
Set the color for axes lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size, and other font effects for the axes label by clicking the Font button.

Tick Mark
Style
Choose the style for tick marks on the axes from the drop-down list. The options available are Cross,
Inside, Outside, and None.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size, and other font effects for axes tick marks and tick numbers by
clicking the Font button.
Minor Tick Numbers

Choose the format for tick numbers on the axes from the drop-down list. The options available are
Standard, All, and None. You can also enter a customized format for minor tick numbers as a series of
numbers separated by commas. (See figure above.) The axis minor ticks for the format 1, 3, 5, 7 are
displayed as shown below.
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for the Axis page. The default options can be changed

Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the axes settings to the selected Star View. You can reset to defaults
by clicking the Default button.
OK
Cancel
Grid Page
Grid page provides all options for customizing the display of the Star View grid. The Grid page can be
accessed by clicking the Plot Options button and selecting the Axis page on the Plot Options Editor.
Alternatively, you can double-click the grid to display the Plot Options Editor with the Grid page already
selected.
Display
Select this option to enable the grid options and to display the grid on the Star View. By default, the
Display option on the Grid page is unchecked. The current setting can be changed either from the Grid
page (select the Display option) or by clicking the Grid button on the Star View menu toolbar.

Alternatively, the default setting for Display Grid can be changed from the Defaults menu by pointing to
Plot Options, and then selecting Star View.
Draw Grid on Top

Select this option to display the grid on top of the device curves.
Keep Grid Square

Select this option to maintain a square grid when resizing Star TCC View.
Major Grid
The settings for Major Grid are enabled if the Display option is selected on the Grid page.
Line Color
Set the color for major grid lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Set the style for major grid lines by selecting a line style from the drop-down list.
Minor Grid
The settings for Minor Grid, with the exception of the Ticks per Decade setting, are enabled if the Display
option is selected on the Grid page.
Line Color
Set the color for minor grid lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Set the style for minor grid lines by selecting a line style from the drop-down list.
Ticks per Decade

Set number of ticks per decade of the log-log grid from the drop-down list.

Background
Set the color and transparency for grid background.
Color
Set the color for grid background lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Transparency
Set the transparency for the grid background color by moving the slider. The positive sign indicates
maximum transparency (white background) and the negative sign indicates minimum transparency (color
fill).
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for Grid page. The default options can be changed globally
from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select
Star View.) For more information, see section 17.3.7, Default Plot Options.
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the grid settings to the selected Star View. You can reset to defaults
by clicking the Default button.
OK
Cancel

Legend Page
The Legend page allows you to customize the legend contents for the Star View. This page can be
accessed by clicking the Plot Options button on the Star View (TCC) toolbar and then selecting the
Legend page. You can also double-click the legend box to display the Plot Options Editor with the
Legend page active.
Display
Select this option to display the legend on the Star View. By default, the legend is enabled for Star View.
You can disable the legend view either on the Legend page or by clicking the Show Legend button on
Star View menu bar. You can also change the default setting for the Display option for the legend from
the ETAP Defaults menu by pointing to Plot Options and then selecting Star View.

Title
Name
Enter a unique name for the Star View with up to 25 alphanumeric characters. If the name option is
selected, the name you enter here is displayed in the Star View legend.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each Star View. The assigned ID consists of the default Star
View ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of Star Views
increase. The default Star View ID (Star) can be changed from the Defaults Menu in the ETAP menu bar.
(From the Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View.)
Font (Name)
Choose the font, font style, font size, and other font effects for Star View name by clicking the Font
button.
Right (Logo or Text)

Click on the checkbox to display logo or text information on the upper right corner of the legend.
Toggle the button to Logo or Text to select a picture logo or enter a text label of up to 25 alphanumeric
characters, respectively. The file containing the logo is not embedded in the legend. The path defined for
accessing the logo picture is relative, so you should use a copy of the logo picture file that is placed in the
project folder.
Left (Logo or Text)

Click on the checkbox to display logo or text information on the upper left corner of the legend.
Toggle the button to Logo or Text to select a picture logo or enter a text label of up to 25 alphanumeric
characters, respectively. The file containing the logo is not embedded in the legend. The path defined for
accessing the logo picture is relative, so you should use a copy of the logo picture file that is placed in the
project folder.
Info
Project Title
Click on the checkbox to display the project title in Star View legend. Project Title must be changed from
Project Information menu and is non-editable in the Legend page.
Location
Click on the checkbox to display the location in the Star View legend. Location can be changed using the
Information command from the Project menu on the ETAP menu bar but cannot be edited on the Legend
page.

Contract #
Click on the checkbox to display the contract number in the Star View legend. Contract # can be changed
using the Information command from the Project menu on the ETAP menu bar but cannot be edited on
the Legend page.
Engineer
Click on the checkbox to display the engineer name in the Star View legend. Engineer name can be
changed using the Information command from the Project menu on the ETAP menu bar but cannot be
edited on the Legend page.
Filename
Click on the checkbox to display the project file name and path in the Star View legend. This is a non-
editable field.
Date / Rev.
Click on the checkbox to display the project date and revision in the Star View legend. These fields are
editable.
Serial #
Click on the checkbox to display the ETAP license serial number in the Star View legend. This is a non-
editable field.
Rev. Data
Click on the checkbox to display the revision name in the Star View legend. This field displays the
revision in which the Star View is created and is non-editable.

Fault
Click on the checkbox to display fault type in the Star View legend. This field displays the fault type
depending on the selected Phase or Ground Mode and is non-editable.
Circuit
Click on the checkbox to display the circuit information in the Star View legend. This field is editable and
accepts up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Project Remarks
Click on the checkbox to display the project remarks in the Star View legend. Project Remarks can be
changed from Projects Information menu and is non-editable in the Legend page.
Study Remarks
Click on the checkbox to display the study remarks in the Star View legend. This field is editable and
accepts up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size and other effects for the fields in the Info section by clicking Font
button.
Default
Click the Default button to set default options for the Legend page. The default options can be changed
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the legend parameters to the selected Star View. You can reset to
OK
Cancel

Devices Page
The Devices page in Plot Options for Star View provides comprehensive and necessary options to
customize device curves plotted in Star View. This page can be accessed by clicking the Plot Options
button and selecting the Devices page. You can also access the Devices page for the selected device curve
or label by right-clicking on the device curve and selecting Plot Options.
The Devices page includes a graphical tree representation that lists the IDs of all elements plotted in
selected Star View. The figure below shows the relay OCR2 plotted in Star1 listed with all trip elements
(Phase, Neutral, Ground, Sensitive ground, etc.), levels (OC1, OC2 under each element), settings (51, 50
under each level), and applicable fault arrows in a tree structure. Time difference and Crosshair used in
Star1 are also listed.
The Devices page includes three sub tabs; Appearance, Preferences, and Label which can be customized
for the selected device curve.

Device List
The Device list provides a graphical tree representation that lists the IDs of all elements plotted in the
selected Star View including crosshairs, time difference, etc. The name of the Star View is displayed at
the top level under which all plotted devices are listed. For devices with sub layers (Relays with several
trip elements), the tree structure is configured to be expanded (by clicking on the + sign) to view the
individual sub elements or collapsed (by clicking on the - sign). When a specific device is selected, the
ID of the device is displayed as the header along with the name of the Star View. In the example, shown,
transformer T1 is selected in Star View Star1; so, the header displays Star1.T1.
The settings in Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs can be applied to the any level in the tree
structure.
If the Star View name (top most level of the device list) is selected, the settings in the Appearance and
Preferences tabs are disabled. For the Label tab, all options with the exception of Label ID color Label

setting color/properties are available. Thus, you can set uniform label display options/fonts for all devices
belonging to the selected Star View.
Multiple trip / Multiple level elements

Elements such as Relays, LV Solid State Trip, MV Solid-State Trip, Transmission Line, etc have several
sub layers. The propagation of properties (in Devices page) between different elements/levels for these
devices is described below.
For devices with multiple trip elements/levels, any setting changes at a top level propagate to all the sub
levels. This feature is illustrated and explained with the following exercise.
Relay OCR2 is plotted in Star View (Star5) with time overcurrent (51) and instantaneous (50)
curves.

Right-click on the 51 curve label and select Plot Options. The Plot Options Editor points to the Label
tab in the Devices page with the 51 curve selected as shown below. Note that the 51 and 50 curves
are under level OC1 in the tree for relay OCR2.

With the 51 curve highlighted, check the Border checkbox.

Move up to select OC1 (top level to 51 and 50). Note that the Border checkbox in an indeterminate
state (checked and grayed out). This is to indicate that the Border setting has been changed at one or
more of the sub levels.
With OC1 level selected, click on Border checkbox. Note that the state of the checkbox changes
from the indeterminate state to an unchecked state.
Now move down to select 51. Note that the Border checkbox is unchecked. The changes in setting at
top level (OC1) propagated to 51 and 50 (sub levels).
The above concept applies to all settings in Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs for devices with
multiple trip elements/levels. For more information refer to the Devices page in section 17.3.7.

Property changed at the top level (OC1); Label Border unchecked for settings 51 and
Label Border unchecked 50 (property propagates to sub levels)

Appearance Tab
The Appearance tab allows you select the curve appearance from a color sequence list or use custom
settings.
Preview
The preview window allows you to preview the selected color sequence or custom settings before
applying them to the curve.
Color Sequence
The color sequence displays a list of 10 preset color settings and, the sequence number used for the
selected device curve is highlighted. As shown in the figure below, color sequence #2 is used for OCR2
OC1 51 curve.
The Color sequence feature uses preset color settings in the sequence (1, 2, 3 10) for multiple curves of
the same device plotted in a Star View. As an example, if you rubber-band five LV breakers and create a

new Star View (or append to an existing Star View), the breaker curves are assigned with color sequence#
1, 2 5.
This automated color sequence functionality facilitates better viewing and also saves time. The color
sequence for each device curve can be set in Default Plot Options. It is important to note that color
sequence functions at a global level and only one sequence (1, 2, 3 10) can be set per device. For
example, multi-function relay device has one color sequence set that applies to all sub-functions,
elements, and settings. If the Star View has more than 10 curves of the same device the sequence is
repeated. For more information on the setting and functionality of color sequence, refer to section 17.3.7.
You can customize the settings of a selected color sequence by simply checking Use custom color/style
which brings up the custom color/style options. As shown in the figure below, note that checking Use
custom color/style for color sequence #2, transfers the color settings used in color sequence #2 to Line
width, style, fill color, etc. which can be customized.

Use Custom color/style

Check this box to enter custom settings for line width, style, fill color, fill style, etc. for the selected
curve. Note that checking this box hides the color sequence list box and displays the custom color/style
options. If a color sequence was selected, the color/style used for the color sequence is transferred to the
corresponding custom options as shown in figure above. Unlike color sequence, custom colors can be set
different for every sub-level in a device. The options available are explained below. Note that for single
line curves (for example, damage curves) the fill style, fill color and foreground color are grayed out as
they do not apply.
Line Width
Select or enter a value for the line width (thickness) of the curve.
Line Style
Select the style for the curve lines by selecting a line style from the drop-down list.
Line Color
Set the color of the curve lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.

Fill style
Select the fill style (Solid, Forward Diagonal, etc.) for the curve from the drop-down list.
Fill Color
Select the fill color for the curve from the drop-down list.
Foreground Color
Select the foreground color for the curve from the drop-down list.
Preferences Tab
The Preferences tab provides options to Show/Hide and apply Shift Factors to device curves.
Phase Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Phase Mode. This box is checked by default for all curves plotted
in Phase Mode. Ground trip elements cannot be displayed in Phase Mode, so this option is grayed out for
those elements. For more information, see section 17.3.1, Phase/Ground Mode.
Ground Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Ground Mode. This box is checked by default for ground trip
elements.

Shift Factor
The selected device curve can be shifted by the specified shift factor. By default, the shift factor
multiplier is set to 1 (no shift). The shift factor is available for all device curves.
2-Winding Transformer Damage Curve Adjustment

For 2-winding transformers, the Preferences tab displays options for transformer damage curves, in
addition to the Show/Hide and Shift Factor options.
The Show Overload option is used to enable or disable the display of the transformer short-time overload
capability curve. This option is selected by default.
The Protection on Primary Side and Secondary Side options allow you to display the transformer damage
curve as seen for a fault on the secondary and primary sides, respectively. The default is set to Protection
on Primary.
3-Winding Transformer Damage Curve Adjustment

The options are similar to the 2-winding transformer except that the Protection on includes the Tertiary
Side. The Fault on side can be any of the other sides, except the protection side. The default is set to the
Protection on Primary Side and fault on Secondary Side option.

Label Tab
The Label tab allows you to customize the label for each device/element plotted in the Star View.
Display
Check this box to display the label for the selected device curve. This box is checked by default. The label
display setting can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and checking/un-checking the
Label option. Refer to the figure below.
Arrow
Check this box to show the label arrow from the device label to the selected device curve. This box is
checked by default. The label arrow setting can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and
checking/un-checking the Arrow option. Refer to the figure below.

Border
Checking this box draws a border around the label with a white background. The color of the label border
is automatically set to the line color of the device curve. Refer to the figure below. This feature makes
identifying labels for the different device curves easy, especially when a TCC has many curves. This box
is unchecked by default. The border setting can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and
checking/un-checking the Border option.
In Front of the Curve / Behind the Curve

Click on the In Front of the Curve or Behind the Curve radio button to bring the label in front/behind
its corresponding curve. Note that this feature applies to the selected label and its corresponding curve
only and not other curves/labels in Star View. The default option is set to Behind the Curve. This setting
can also be changed by right clicking on the device label and checking/un-checking the Show Label in
Front option.
Label ID
Color
Select the color for the selected device/element label ID from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device/element label ID.
Label ID font and

color.
Label setting font

and color.

Label Setting
Check this box to display the Label setting for the selected device curve. Label setting displays an
expanded label with all parameters relevant to the selected device curve. This box is unchecked by
default. The Label Setting can also be turned on/off by right clicking on the device label and checking/un-
checking the Setting option.
Color
Select the color for the selected device/element label from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device/element label by
clicking the Font button.
Edit
Click on Edit to edit the label properties. Clicking the Edit button opens a Label setting window which is
divided into two sections Properties and Label Setting. The Properties lists all applicable parameters
that define the device/element selected. Select a property and click the Insert button to add it to the Label
Setting list. You can add/insert any text before or after a label parameter. Click on OK to save the changes
to label or Cancel to not save the changes.
Label Preview Window

The Label preview window displays the label parameters as it will be displayed on the Star View. Here
again, you can add/insert any text before or after a label parameter. For example, you can type in a
manufacturer name before the label {Manufacturer}, and the text is included in the label. You can also
delete any label by selecting it and clicking the Delete button on the keyboard.

Default
Click the Default button to set default Plot Options. The Default button only applies to the selected
device/element selected in the device list after confirmation. Thus for the Multi-Function Relay, if the
Relay51 setting for Phase element and level OC1 (Phase OC1 Relay51) is selected, clicking the
Default button applies default settings to the Relay51 setting only.
If the Star View name (top level) is selected, then clicking the Default button applies default settings to all
the devices in the Star View.
The default options can be changed globally from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar. (From the
Defaults menu, point to Plot Options and select Star View.) For more information, see section 17.3.7,
Default Plot Options.
Apply
Click the Apply button to implement the settings to the selected Star View. Once you have applied your
changes, you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to defaults by clicking the
Default button.
OK
Cancel
It is important to note that the Default, Apply, OK and Cancel buttons on the Devices page apply to all
three tabs Appearance, Preferences and Label.

Star View Default Plot Options
17.3.7 Default Plot Options

The Default Plot Options Editor allows you to set the default settings for Star View axes, grid, legend,
and device curves at a global (application) level. Thus, every new Star View created in an existing or new
project follow the default settings, unless you customize the display of the Star View or device curves
using the local Plot Options as described in section 17.3.6.
The Default Plot Options for Star Views can be accessed from Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar
(Defaults Plot Options Star View). The Default Plot Options Editor is similar to the Plot Options
Editor as described in section 17.3.6.
The default Star View Plot Options settings are saved in OTIGraph.INI file. The location of
OTIGraph.INI file can be specified in Options (Preferences) Editor (Tools Options) by setting ETAP
Star TCC Plot Options Path located in ETAP Application category. The location of the INI file can be
set to App, User, Common, or Local.

App
Select App to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in ETAP application folder (i.e. ETAP 700 or current
version). The ETAP application folder is set the path chosen during installation.
User
Select User to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Application Data folder. For example, if a
user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\John
Smith\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Common
Select Common to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in All Users Application Data folder. The
OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0
(or current version).
Local
Select Local to access the OTIGraph.INI file located in users Local Settings Application Data
folder. For example, if a user logs in as John Smith, the OTIGraph.INI file is saved in C:\Documents and
Settings\John Smith\Local Settings\Application Data\OTI\ETAPS\7.0.0 (or current version).
Application Data and Local Settings are hidden folders. Windows folder options should be set
accordingly to view these folders and the OTIGraph.INI file
Changing the OTIGraph.INI file location in Options (Preferences) Editor requires ETAP to be restarted
for the changes to take effect. When ETAP application is restarted, a new OTIGraph.INI file, with
default ETAP settings (factory settings) is created in the new location (if it does not already exist).
Note: In order to use your existing/customized Star View Plot Option defaults, it is necessary to manually
copy the OTIGraph.INI file from the old location to the new location.

General Page
The General page allows you to set the following default options:
Show Range
Check this box to display the available ranges for a selected curve in Star TCC View by default. The
available ranges are displayed in gray when an adjustable curve is selected. Refer to the images below.
Show Extended Tooltip

Check this box to display the detail settings of device curves, time difference, cross hair, fault arrows, etc.
plotted on the TCC View by default. The detail settings are displayed when the mouse cursor is moved
over the device curve or label. Refer to the images below.
Extend relay curve to pickup

Check this box to connect the relay inverse and/or definite time curves (Minimum multiple point of the
relay curve) to the pickup marker on the top X-axis of the TCC by default.
Checking the Extend definite time curve connects the definite time curve and the relay pickup with a
straight line. Checking the Extend inverse time curve extrapolates the inverse time curve connects it to

relay pickup. Note that the connection to pickup is displayed using a dotted line style to indicate that it is
not specified in manufacturer published data. Also note that extend to pickup does not apply for
integrated curves (overcurrent or overload function). Refer to the images below.
User Curve Default ID

Enter the default Curve ID to be assigned for a new User Curve in Star View. As shown in the figure
above, clicking on User Curve button for adding a new User Curve displays the Curve ID as UserCurve
followed by number 1, 2, 3
ARTTS Max Test Current

Set the default maximum relay amperes for export of relay curve to the ARTTS test set. The default is
set to 90A and a value between 5 and 250A may be entered. For example, entering a value of 30A does
not export relay curve points greater than 30A (relay amps).
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the General page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the General page default settings. Once you have applied your changes,
you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Cancel

Axis Page
Select the default settings for the Star View X and Y axes.
The options available on the Axis page are described below.

X Axis (Current)
The X Axis (Current) allows you to set the default current multiplier and plot voltage in kV for the
primary and secondary X axes.
Primary
Set the default Current Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the primary X-axis. The Current
Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the primary X-axis are disabled (non-editable) when the
Auto-Scale option is selected. Uncheck the Auto-Scale checkbox to enable the Current Multiplier and plot
Voltage (kV) options for the primary X-axis. Select the desired default current multiplier from the drop-
down list and enter the plot voltage (in kV). Note that the Voltage Reference field is blank for the Star
View Defaults.
Secondary X-axis
Set the default Current Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the Secondary X-axis. The Current
Multiplier and plot Voltage (kV) options for the Secondary X-axis are disabled (non-editable) when the
Display checkbox is unchecked. Check the Display box to enable the Current Multiplier and plot Voltage
(kV) options for the secondary X-axis. Select the desired default current multiplier from the drop-down
list and enter the plot voltage (in kV).
Note that you can set different the X axis current multiplier and voltage for Phase, Ground, Phase
Normalized and Ground Normalized modes for each Star View by using the local Plot Options (Refer to
section 17.3.6, Plot Options for details).
Y Axis (Time)
The Y Axis (Time) option allows you to set the default minimum and maximum time scales in seconds
for the Y axis of the Star View. You can set the default minimum value of 0.1, 0.01 or 0.001 seconds and
a default maximum value of 1000 or 10000 seconds.
Line/Label
Color
Set the default color for X and Y axes lines by selecting a color from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the axes label by clicking the Font
button.

Tick Mark
Style
Choose the default style for tick marks on the X and Y axes from the drop-down list. The options
available are Cross, Inside, Outside, and None.
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the axes tick marks and tick
numbers by clicking the Font button.

Minor Tick Numbers

Choose the default format for minor tick numbers on the X and Y axes from the drop-down list. The
options available are Standard, All, and None. Also, you can enter a customized default format for minor
tick numbers, as a series of numbers separated by commas as shown in the Minor Tick Numbers drop-
down list above. The axis minor ticks for the format of 1, 3, 5, 7, is displayed as shown in the figure
below.
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the Axis page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the Axis page default settings. Once you have applied your changes, you
cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Click the OK button to close the Plot Options (Star Defaults) Editor and save all the changes.
Cancel
Click the Cancel button to close the Plot Options (Star Defaults) Editor and discard all the changes.

Grid Page
Select the default settings for the Star View Grid.
Display
Check this box to display the grid on the Star View by default.
Draw Grid on Top

Check this box to display the grid on top of device curves, by default.
Keep Grid Square

Select this option to maintain a square grid, by default, when resizing the Star TCC View.

Major Grid
Select the default settings for the major grid.
Line Color
Select the default color for major grid lines from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Select the default line style for major grid lines from the drop-down list.
Minor Grid
Select the default settings for the minor grid.
Line Color
Select the default color for minor grid lines from the drop-down list.
Line Style
Select the default line style for minor grid lines from the drop-down list.
Ticks per Decade

Select the default number of ticks per decade from the drop-down list.

Background
Set the default color and transparency for the grid background.
Color
Select the default color for grid background lines from the drop-down list.
Transparency
Select the default transparency for the grid background color by moving the slider.
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the Grid page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the Grid page default settings. Once you have applied your changes, you
cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Click the OK button to close the Plot Options (Star defaults) Editor and save all the changes.
Cancel
Click the Cancel button to close the Plot Options (Star defaults) Editor and discard all the changes.

Legend Page
Select the default settings for the Star View legend.
Display
Click on this checkbox to display the legend on Star Views by default.
Title

Name
Check this box to display the Star View name in the legend by default. This field is non-editable for
defaults as it displays the unique Star View name.
Font (Name)
Choose the default font, font style, font size, and other font effects for Star View name by clicking the
Font button.
Right (Logo or Text)

Check this box to display, by default, the adjacent logo or text information in the upper right corner of the
legend. Define the path for a logo or enter the text to be displayed.
Left (Logo or Text)

Check this box to display, by default, the adjacent logo or text information in the upper left corner of the
legend. Define the path for a logo or enter the text to be displayed.
Info
The fields Project Title, Location, Contract #, Engineer, Serial #, Rev. Data, and Project Remarks are
non-editable and can be changed from the Projects menu on the ETAP menu bar. The Fault field is also
non-editable and is displayed as phase or ground depending on the Star View Mode.
Date / Rev.
Check this box to display, by default, the project date and revision in the Star View legend. Enter the date
and revision.

Circuit
Check this box to display, by default, the details on the circuit plotted in the Star View legend. Enter up to
25 alphanumeric characters.
Study Remarks
Check this box to display, by default, the study remarks in the Star View legend. Enter up to 100
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the Info section by clicking the Font
button.
Default
Click the Default button to apply ETAP defaults for the Legend page.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the Legend page default settings. Once you have applied your changes,
you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset to ETAP defaults by clicking the Default
button.
OK
Cancel

Devices Page
The Devices page in Default Plot Options provides all necessary settings to customize and set the defaults
for all device curves plotted in Star View.
The Devices page includes a graphical tree representation that lists all the elements and functions plotted
in Star View. The Devices page includes three sub tabs: the Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs.
These tabs apply to the device selected in the device list.
The Device window provides a graphical tree representation that lists all the elements plotted in Star
View including crosshairs, time difference, etc. under Star Defaults. For devices such as relays, different
trip elements, levels and settings are layered as sublevels that can be expanded (using the + sign) to
view the individual sub elements or collapsed (using the - sign).
When a device type is selected, the name of device type is displayed as the header along with the name
Star Defaults. In the above example, 3-winding transformer damage curve is selected and hence the
header displays Star Defaults.3W Transformer Damage Curve.

The settings in Appearance, Preferences, and Label tabs can be set for selected device/element in the list.
If Star Defaults (top most level) is selected, the settings in the Appearance and Preferences tabs are
disabled. For the Label tab, all options with the exception of Label ID color Label setting color/properties
are available. Thus, you can set uniform label display options/fonts for all devices, if desired.

Multiple trip / Multiple level elements

The propagation of properties (in Devices page) between different elements/levels for these devices was
described briefly in Plot Options section 17.3.6. This section gives more details on this concept using
Mutli-Function relay as an example.
Devices with multiple trip elements/functions are represented in a tree fashion with the different
elements/functions layered as sub levels. The figure below shows a simplified tree structure for
overcurrent relay with one trip element (Phase) and one OC level (OC1). Each level in the tree is marked
numbers 1 4. Other trip elements and OC levels for the overcurrent relay follow the same structure.
As seen from the simplified tree above, overcurrent relay (Level 1) has a Phase trip element (Level 2).
The Phase element has OC1 level (Level 3) which in turn has 51, 50 and Short-Time settings (Level 4).
The levels (1 4) follow a parent-child relationship for any setting changes in Appearance, Preferences or
Label sub tabs. Any setting changed at a parent level propagates to all child levels. Similarly any setting
changed at child level reflects as an indeterminate state at the parent levels.
Thus checking the Border checkbox on Label tab at the Function level propagates to all elements, OC
levels and settings. Refer to the images below.

On the other hand, un-checking the Border checkbox on Label tab for 51 setting (Phase OC1 51)
changes the Border checkbox on Label tab for OC1, Phase, and Multi-function relay levels to an
indeterminate state (checked and grayed out). Refer to the images below.
The table below shows how different settings in Appearance, Preferences or Label sub-tabs switch to an
indeterminate state from the default state.

Tab Setting Type ETAP Default Indeterminate State

Color Sequence List box * No color selected
Use custom
Checkbox Unchecked Checked, grayed out
color/style
No value displayed
Line Width Number *
(blank)
Appearance Line Style List box * Various displayed
Line Color List box * Various displayed
Fill Style List box * Various displayed
Fill Color List box * Various displayed
Foreground Color List box * Various displayed
Phase Mode Checkbox ** Checked, grayed out
Ground Mode Checkbox *** Checked, grayed out
Preferences
No value displayed
Shift Factor Number 1
(blank)
Display Checkbox Checked Checked, grayed out
Arrow Checkbox Checked Checked, grayed out
Border Checkbox Unchecked Checked, grayed out
In Front of the Radio
Not selected Not selected
curve button
Label Radio
Behind the curve Selected Not selected
button
Label ID Color List box * Various displayed
Label Setting Checkbox Unchecked Checked, grayed out
Label Setting
List box * Various displayed
Color
* - ETAP default as set for the selected device
** - Checked for Phase curves; grayed out for Ground curves.
*** - Checked for Ground curves; unchecked for Phase curves.
The above intelligent feature helps you to correctly choose and set your device options within any sub-
levels for the selected device.

Appearance Tab
The Appearance tab allows you to set the defaults for curve automated color sequence or custom
color/style settings for each device.
Preview
The Preview window allows you to preview the selected color sequence or custom settings.
Color Sequence
The Color sequence displays a list of 10 color settings that can be set as default for the selected device.
Each color (1, 2, 3 10) can be set by using the custom color/style options (Line width, Line style, etc.)
on the right side of the Appearance tab. It is important to note that color sequence functions at a global
level and only color sequence set (1, 2, 3 10) can be defined per device. For example, multi-function
relay device has one color sequence set that applies to all sub-functions, elements, and settings.

As explained in section 17.3.6, the Color sequence feature uses preset color settings in the sequence (1, 2,
3 10) for multiple curves of the same device plotted in a Star View. As an example, if you rubber-band
5 LV breakers and create a new Star View (or append to an existing Star View), the breaker curves are
assigned with color sequence# 1, 2 5.
This automated color sequence functionality facilitates better viewing and also saves time. If the Star
View has more than 10 curves of the same device the sequence repeats itself.
You can also choose to use custom color/style (and not color sequence) for the selected curve by simply
checking the Use Custom color/style.
Use Custom color/style

Check this box to enter custom settings for line width, style, fill color, fill style, etc. for the selected
device. Note that checking this box hides the color sequence list box and displays the custom color/style
options. If a color sequence was selected, the color/style used for the color sequence is transferred to the
corresponding custom options as shown in figures below. Unlike color sequence, custom colors can be set
different for every sub-level in a device. The options available are explained below. Note that for single
line curves (for example, damage curves) the fill style, fill color and foreground color are grayed out as
they are not applicable.

The custom color/style settings available are explained below.
Line Width
Select or enter a value for default line width of the curve.
Line Style
Select the default line style for the curve lines.
Line Color
Select the default color for curve lines from the drop-down list.
Fill Style
Select the default fill style (Solid, Forward Diagonal, etc.) for the curve from the drop-down list.
Fill Color
Select the default fill color from the drop-down list.

Foreground Color
Select the default foreground color for the curve from the drop-down list.
Preferences Tab
Set the default options to Show/Hide and apply Shift Factors to device curves in the Preferences tab.
Phase Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Phase Mode. This box is checked by default for all curves plotted
in Phase Mode. Ground trip elements cannot be displayed in Phase Mode, so this option is grayed out for
those elements. For more information, see section 17.3.1, Phase/Ground Mode.
Ground Mode
Check this box to display the curve in Ground Mode. This box is checked by default for ground trip
elements.

Shift Factor
Enter the default factor to be used for shifting the selected device curve. The Shift Factor is available for
all device curves.
2-Winding Transformers
For 2-winding transformer, the Preferences tab displays options for the transformer damage curve in
addition to the Show/Hide and Shift Factor options.

Select the Show Overload option to display the transformer short-time overload capability curve by
default.
Select either the Protection on Primary Side or Secondary Side option to display the transformer damage
curve as seen for a fault on the secondary and primary sides, respectively.
3-Winding Transformers
The options are similar to the 2-winding transformer except that the Protection on includes the Tertiary
Side. The Fault on side can be any of the other sides, except the protection side.

Label Tab
The Label tab allows you to set the default label of each device/element plotted in the Star View.
Display
Check this box to display the label for the selected device curve by default.
Arrow
Check this box to show, by default the label arrow from the device label to the selected device curve.
Border
Check this box to draw a border around the label with a white background by default. The color of the
label border is automatically set to the line color of the device curve.

In Front of the Curve / Behind the Curve

Select the In Front of the Curve or Behind the Curve radio button to bring the label in front/behind its
corresponding curve by default. Note that this feature applies to the selected label and its corresponding
curve only and not other curves/labels in Star View.
Label ID
Color
Select the default color for the selected device label ID from the drop-down list.
Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device label ID.
Label ID font and

color.
Label setting font

and color.
Label Setting
Check this box to display the Label setting for the selected device curve by default. Label setting displays
an expanded label with all parameters relevant to the selected device curve.
Color
Select the default color for the selected device/element label from the drop-down list.

Font
Choose the default font, font style, font size and other font effects for the selected device label by clicking
the Font button.
Edit
Click on Edit to edit the label properties. Clicking the Edit button opens a Label Setting window which is
divided into two sections Properties and Label Setting. The Properties lists all applicable parameters
that define the device/element selected. Select a property and click the Insert button to add it to the Label
Setting list. You can also type text in the Label Setting window. Click on OK to save the changes to label
or Cancel to not save the changes.
Label Preview Window

The Label preview window displays the label parameters as it will be displayed on the Star View. You
can type text in the Label Setting window. For example, you can type in a manufacturer name before the
label {Manufacturer}, and the text is included in the label. You can also delete any label by selecting it
and clicking the Delete button on the keyboard.

Default
Click the Default button to set ETAP default options. The Default button only applies to the selected
device/element selected in the device list after confirmation. Thus for the Multi-Function Relay, if the
Relay51 setting for Phase element and OC1 level (Phase OC1 Relay51) is selected, clicking the
Default button applies default settings to the Relay51 setting only.
If the Star View name (top most level) is selected, then clicking the Default button applies ETAP default
settings to all the devices.
Apply
Click the Apply button to apply the default settings for the selected device. Once you have applied your
changes, you cannot undo them. You must change them manually or reset the defaults to the ETAP
OK
Cancel
Note: The Default and Apply buttons on the Devices page are common for Appearance, Preferences and
Label tabs.

Star View Display Options
17.3.8 Display Options

The one-line diagram display options for the Star View can be accessed by clicking on the Display
Options button. Note that by default, the selected element display annotations from the OLV in Star Mode
are transferred to Star View upon creation of a new Star View. The Display Options Star View Editor
has the following three pages of properties:
AC
AC-DC
Colors
AC Page

ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the corresponding AC elements on the one-
line diagram.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the corresponding AC elements on the
one-line diagram. The table below describes the different rating parameters that are displayed for the AC
elements:
AC Element Rating
Generator kW/MW
Motor HP/kW
Load/Panel kVA/MVA
Transformer kVA/MVA
Branch, Reactor Continuous amps
Cable/Line # of cables - # of conductor/cable - size
Bus kA bracing
Node Bus bracing (kA)
CB Rated interrupting (kA)
Relay Relays display tag (from the Relay Editor)*
PT & CT Transformer rated turn ratio
* Applies to Overcurrent, Multi-Function, and Motor Relays
kV
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the corresponding
A
of the corresponding elements on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated impedance of the corresponding AC
elements on the one-line diagram. The table below describes the different impedances that are displayed
for the AC elements:
AC Element Impedance

AC Element Impedance
Motor % LRC
Branch, Impedance Impedance in ohms or %
Branch, Reactor Impedance in ohms
Cable/Line Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in ohms or per unit length)
D-Y
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the connection types of the corresponding elements
Use Default Options

Select this option to use default display options. The default display options for Star View can be changed
by selecting Display Options from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar.
Show Eq. Cable

specified as part of the loads. Double-clicking on the equipment cable brings up the Equipment Cable
Editor.

AC-DC Page
This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC elements.
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the corresponding AC-DC elements on the
one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the corresponding AC-DC elements on
the one-line diagram. The table below describes the different rating parameters that are displayed for
corresponding AC-DC elements.

AC-DC Elements Rating

UPS KVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the corresponding
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the corresponding elements on
the one-line diagram. The table below describes the different ampere parameters that are displayed for the
AC-DC elements.
AC-DC Element Amp

Use Default Options

Select this option to use default display options. The default display options for Star View can be
changed by selecting Display Options from the Defaults menu in the ETAP menu bar.

Colors Page
This page includes options for displaying color information annotations for elements and results.
Color Theme
This area is grayed out and not selectable in Star View.
Annotations
Select this option to assign colors to AC, DC, Composite, and AC DC elements, and to Results. The
default display options for Star View can also be changed by selecting Display Options from the Defaults
menu in the ETAP menu bar.

Star View Alert View
17.3.9 Alert View
The Alert View tool logs possible alerts or messages for devices in the selected Star View. When active,
clicking the Alert View button on the Star View (TCC) toolbar displays a summary of alerts that provides
hints as to why a particular device curve is not displayed and informs you of any missing or disabled
parameters for the device. The Alert View button is enabled only if an alert is detected; otherwise, the
button is disabled. The information in the Alert Summary is displayed in two categories:
(a) Alerts: Alerts are issued when data is missing for a device in the Star View. For example, a fuse not
selected from the library or relay CT not defined in Relay Editor is categorized as an alert. Alerts are
designated as Star Alert. When the Alert View Summary includes alerts, the Alert View button is
shown as red in color.
(b) Messages: Messages are lower priority alerts that are issued as a notification means to track the state
of the disabled or hidden trip devices. Star Messages are provided for information purposes. For
example, if you uncheck the Instantaneous element of relay from the Relay Editor it is categorized as
a message. Messages are designated as Star Message. When the summary includes messages, the
Alert View button is shown as yellow in color.
When you double-click an alert or message, ETAP opens the corresponding Device Editor.

Star View Device Coordination Report Manager
17.3.10 Device Coordination Report Manager

Click the Device Settings Reports button to display the Device Coordination Reports Manager. The
manager allows you to preview and print the protective device setting data, as entered in the overcurrent
relay, overload relay, MV solid-state relay, fuse, low voltage circuit breaker, and overload heater using
the Crystal Reports formats:
The Report Manager generates reports using data from the active Star TCC View window.
To print the device settings:
1. Click the Device Settings Reports button.

2. From Device Coordination Report Manager select one of the listed devices or All Device Settings to
print settings for devices plotted in Star View.
3. Select the Base or Revision data, and then click OK.
Your projects database is used to generate these reports. When you select a report, ETAP asks if you
would like to save the project prior to generating the report.

Clicking the OK button saves the latest changes to the database and launches the selected report. Click
Cancel to exit back to the previous editor.
Note: The project database can only be saved in Base revision.
The report displays device settings for the selected devices or all devices on the Star TCC View, including
De-energized and Dumpster elements.
Excel Report
The Report Manager also generates Excel reports using data from the active Star TCC View window.
To generate the excel report of the device settings:
1. Create the STAR TCC view of the device.

2. Click the Device Settings Reports button.
3. From Device Coordination Report Manager select Excel tab and select all device Settings.
An Excel report of all the device settings in the active Star TCC View is generated.

The format of the template of the device setting Excel report can be edited by the user. The location of the
Template is in C:ETAP 700\Formats700\Device Coordination\Excel. (The ETAP folder name may
change depending on the ETAP version number).

Star View Normalized TCC
17.3.11 Normalized TCC Mode

Normalized (Shifted) TCC Mode is an analysis feature in ETAP Star View which is based on Sequence-
of-Operation calculation. This analysis mode provides a graphical view (TCC plot) of the operation times
of protective devices based on their corresponding settings and characteristics for specified fault location
and type. Normalized TCC Mode graphically displays the TCC curves of protective devices in relation to
one and another for a given fault.
Upon performing a Sequence-of-Operation analysis, you can display the Normalized TCC plots by
creating a new Star View. Alternatively, an existing Star View can be toggled to Normalized TCC Mode
by clicking on the Normalized TCC button from the Star View toolbar. Note: Since Normalized TCC is
based on a specific Sequence-of-Operation scenario, the corresponding output report must be selected in
the report list box (refer to the figure below) in order to activate the Normalized TCC Mode button.
In the Normalized TCC Mode, the curves are shifted by a factor calculated based on the ratio of the
through fault current seen by a PD and the total fault current at the point of the fault. The effected TCC
curves are then shifted according to the total fault current. Note: Fixed curves/points (equipment damage
curve, motor starting curve, FLA Marker, Fault Arrow) are not displayed in the Normalized TCC View as

they are not applicable to this mode. The features of the Normalized TCC Mode are explained by the
tutorial below.
1. From the File menu, select Open Project. Browse to the ETAP installation path for the Example-
Other folder, select StarExample.oti, and then click Open.
2. Open the OLV1 presentation by selecting it from the drop-down list for presentations or by double-
clicking the OLV1 presentation in Project Editor.

3. Using the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.
4. Select the StarMode1 Study Case and set the output report to Prompt. Click on the Fault Insertion
(PD Sequence-of-Operation) button on the Star Mode toolbar. Place the fault on Bus2 as shown
below.

5. The calculation asks for an Output report filename. Enter SQOP-Bus2 as the name and click OK.
6. The Sequence-of-Operation calculation displays the through fault current of the devices including
braches, loads, and buses. It also displays a graphical animation of the sequence of PDs that trip for
the fault.

7. Rubber band the section of one-line diagram containing Fuse1, T1, CB4, CB5 and Mtr1.

8. Click on the Create Star View button on Star Mode toolbar to create a new TCC View. The TCC
View opens up in Normalized mode (only if Sequence-of-Operation calculation is active in Star
Mode) with the SQOP output report name (SQOP-Bus2) showing in the Output Report List and the
Normalized TCC Mode set to ON.
9. The different features of the Normalized TCC Mode are marked as A G in the figure above and are
described below:
A The header displaying the Star View title also has Normalized for 3-Phase (Sym) fault at Bus2
added to it. This helps you to clearly identify the normalized TCC View.
B The parameters and description of the Sequence-of-Operation study is shown for a Normalized
fault arrow with the label displaying the fault location, fault type, total current, output report name,
data revision name, status configuration ID, and the date at which the study was preformed.

C For each displayed curve, the shift factor is calculated and displayed in the label. The label also
shows the actual operation times for the device.
D The X-axis scale is displayed as a per unit scale (multiples of device curve current). Note that by
default the normalized fault arrow (B) is placed at 1 per unit mark and all PD currents are normalized.
The per unit value base is the through fault current as seen be each device.
E Add a time difference between Fuse1 and CB4. The current at which a time difference is
measured is displayed in per unit in normalized mode.
F Drop a crosshair on the TCC. Crosshair, in normalized mode displays the current in per unit with
the actual ampere value in parentheses.
G Note that the fault type in Legend changes to Phase (Normalized) for normalized mode.
10. Double click on the per unit X-axis scale to open the plot option axis page in Normalized TCC Mode.
Note that the X-axis header reads X Axis (Current Phase Normalized). The X axis scaling for
normalized TCC Mode (Phase and Ground), with current per unit and voltage in kV, can be
independently set and do not effect the scaling for normal TCC Mode or auto scale.

11. Go to the Devices page. Select any device ID and open the Preferences Tab. Note that the Shift factor
field is hidden for all devices in Normalized TCC Mode. The Auto Shift Factor for the curves that are
shifted in normalized TCC Mode is now displayed.

12. Toggling the Normalized TCC Mode button switches the TCC back to its normal mode. The Star
View can be saved in the normal or normalized TCC Mode.

17.3.12 Sequence Viewer

The Sequence Viewer button is enabled when you perform a Sequence-of-Operation study and select the
output report from the report list box for the active Star View. Clicking the Sequence Viewer button,
displays the Sequence-of-Operation Events dialog box that provides a tabulated sequence summary list of
actions for the applicable protective devices.

Star View Relay Test-Set Interface
17.4 Relay Test-Set Interface

The Relay Test-Set Interface provides a method to obtain actual relay response based on the settings and
fault currents calculated in ETAP. This powerful combination of relay test-set hardware and ETAP Star
facilitates seamless testing of overcurrent, differential and distance relays through ETAP. Because of the
fully integrated interface with ETAP Star, you can simulate and obtain the actual relay response under
steady-state and transient fault currents. The captured relay response can be compared with the
manufacturer published curve in ETAP Star TCC View. All test results are stored in a historical database
that can be retrieved for plotting and comparison. The Relay Test-Set Interface works with ETAP ARTTS
relay testing hardware and test software. The figure below shows a typical relay test system setup with
ARTTS-6 Relay Test Set.
17.4.1 Relay Steady-State Response

The relay actual steady-state response refers to the behavior of the relay under normal conditions. This
behavior is defined by the relay inverse and/or definite time curves as published by the manufacturer,
which can be plotted in Star TCC View. The process to compare the actual relay response with the
manufacturer data (as plotted in Star View) involves four simple steps:
(a) Export the relay curve from Star View to relay testing software (ETAP ARTTS).
(b) Load the exported curve into the relay testing software and test the relay connected to the relay test-
set (ARTTS-6).
(c) Import the results saved from the test to ETAP Star.
(d) Display and compare the results with the manufacturer curve in Star View.
Each step described above can be performed using the tools in the Star View toolbar, i.e. Export Curve,
Launch ARTTS, Import Results, and ARTTS Results.
Relay Test-set Database

The relay test points and results are saved in master database. The database location can be specified from
the Relay Test-Set Database menu item listed under the Project menu bar. The default database path is
set to sub-folder ARTTS under the project name folder.

Export (Relay test points) Databases

The relay test points exported from Star View are stored in a database that follows a fixed name format.
The database name reflects the selected relay ID(s) and trip element/level. This makes it easy for you to
load the database in ARTTS software when testing the relay. The following rules are followed while
naming the database:
(a) The name of the generated database is the ID of the relay along with OC Level name separated by a
dash (i.e. R1-OC2).
(b) If the relay curve is integrated, the database name will be Relay ID Integrated (i.e. R1-
Integrated).
(c) If Independent TOC/IOC is checked for the relay, separate files will be created for 51/50/Short-
Time. The database file will be named in the format Relay ID-OC Level-Element.mdb (i.e. R1-OC1-
50.mdb)
(d) If the relay level names have special characters (i.e. I>, I>>, etc.) it will replaced with an underscore
_ in the database name. For example, the database file for Relay R1, with level I> and 51 curve
will be R1-I_-51.mdb.
Import (Relay test results) Databases

Once the relay is tested using the test software, the results may be saved into the same export database or
a new database. Importing the relay results to Star creates a new database with the name
MasterDB.mdb. This database maintains a historical record of all tests conducted for each relay along
with the result points.
Export Curve
Select a relay curve in the Star View and click on the Export Curve button to export the curve points.
Multiple relay curves can also be selected by using the Ctrl button on the keyboard. Note that all trip
elements (Phase, Ground, Neutral, etc.) are included for each exported relay curve, where available and
enabled on the Relay Editor (not just the plotted curves). The export databases are named as explained in
the Relay Test-set Database section above.
Once the relay curve export is complete, ARTTS Export Summary window appears as shown below. The
ARTTS Export Summary window shows the relay ID(s), element(s), the export database name and path.

If the same relay ID is exported more than once to the database, the existing file will be overwritten.
ETAP will issue a confirmation message prior to overwriting the file.
If the export path defined in Relay test database path is invalid an error message is displayed. Check the
database path to ensure that the correct database path is specified.
ARTTS
Clicking on the ARTTS button launches the ARTTS Test Software Program for overcurrent relays
(OC5051.exe). Selecting a relay curve and clicking on the ARTTS button, launches the OC5150 program
and launches the Load database window pointing to the folder where the selected relay curve is
exported. Click on Open to access the desired database file.

With the relay curve loaded in the ARTTS OC5051 Program, the relay can be tested using the different
Test selections available in the program. Once testing is complete, all tests can be transferred to the
Results page and saved. As mentioned previously, the results may be saved to a new database or with the
same export database for the selected relay.

Import Results
Click on Import results button on Star View toolbar. This imports any new test results and creates a new
database MasterDB.mdb if not already existing. The database maintains a record of the date and time of
the relay test along with the test results.
ARTTS Results
With the desired relay curve selected, click on the ARTTS button to launch the ARTTS Test Results
window. Results can be displayed on Star View by checking the box next to it and clicking on Apply or
OK.

The options available in the ARTTS Results Editor are described below:
Device Window
The device window displays the list of all relays in the selected Star View in a tree structure.
Relay Test Results

The Relay Test Results window displays a list of all the test results available (imported) for the selected
relay. The test result displays the Test Name (ID), Fault type (L-L or L-G), and Date / Time. The
checkbox next to each result allows selection of multiple test results to be displayed on the Star View.
Click on the Test Name to rename it. Note that once renamed, the new name is saved with the database.
Relay Settings
Displays the detailed setting of the tested relay.
Delete
Delete the selected relay test results. Upon confirmation of the delete action, the data is permanently
deleted from the database.
Apply
Click on Apply to save and update the changes in Star View.
OK
Click on OK to close the ARTTS Test Result Editor and save all changes.
Cancel
Click on Cancel to close the ARTTS Test Result Editor without saving.
Note that the relay test results are plotted as a point based User Curve in Star View. Double-clicking on
the relay test result points opens the User Curve Editor.

Note that the relay test results appearance, preference, and label can be customized from the Star View
Plot Options.
17.4.2 Relay Transient Response

The actual response of a relay to transient currents, comprising of AC and DC components may be
considerably different in comparison to operation under steady-state conditions. Transient simulation is
required to obtain the actual relay response time to the through fault current. This can be done using the
ETAP Short-Circuit module and the ARTTS test software. Current waveforms can be obtained from
ETAP Transient short-circuit study. These waveforms can be exported to COMTRADE format using the
Export Comtrade button. For more information, refer to Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Analysis.
These transient current waveforms can be generated and injected into the relay under test using the
ARTTS program R_Pro. R_Pro records the actual operation time of the relay for the test waveform.
This time may be plotted in Star View in order to get a visual interpretation of the relay actual transient
response.

Star View Star Tutorial
17.5 Star Tutorial

This tutorial provides a brief overview of the capabilities available in the Star module. Once you finish
this tutorial, you will be familiar with the key features and capabilities of Star and the various options
available for accessing, navigating, and coordinating curves. Each section in this tutorial is presented in
an interactive format, allowing you to work through each step as it is explained.
Note: Some of the paths shown in the figures below may differ if you have chosen a custom installation
path.
The tutorial is divided into the following sections:
Section 17.5.1: Create a New Star TCC View

Section 17.5.2: Add a Device Curve to the Star View
Section 17.5.3: Star Example
Section 17.5.4: Star View Navigation Tools
Section 17.5.5: Star View (TCC) Toolbar
Section 17.5.6: Normalized TCC Mode
Section 17.5.7: Short-Circuit Clipping, Minimum kA
17.5.1 Create a New Star TCC View

This section shows you how to create a Star TCC View.
1. Start ETAP and, from the File menu, select New Project.

2. Enter a name for the new project file (for example, StarView), and click OK.
3. ETAP prompts you for your user information. Enter the user name and access level information (if
required) and click OK to continue. To learn more about setting up user accounts and access levels,
refer to User Access Management chapter of the User Guide or click the Help button.

4. By default, a one-line diagram view OLV1 opens in ETAP. The toolbars and menus you will be using
for this section of the tutorial are illustrated below.

5. Click the Edit button on the Mode toolbar.
6. Click the Overcurrent Relay button from Edit toolbar and drop it on the OLV1 presentation.
7. Double-click the overcurrent relay element to open the Relay Editor. The Select a project library
dialog to browse and load the library file for the project appears. Select the etaplib550.lib (default)
file and click Open.

8. Click the OCR page, and then click the Library button. This brings up the Library Quickpick - Relay
dialog box as shown below.

9. Select manufacturer GE Multilin and model 735/737 and click OK. GE Multilin 735/737 relay data is
populated in the OCR page. Set the relay as shown in the figure below; ensure that Link TOC + IOC
for this level is checked for OC1. To learn more about relay settings, refer to the Relay section in
Instrumentation Elements chapter of the User Guide or click the Help button.
10. Click the Input page.
11. Enter primary and secondary ratings for Phase CT (800:5) and Ground CT (50:5) as shown below. CT
ratios can be entered directly in the Relay Editor where no CT is connected to the relay. To learn
more about Input page of Relay Editor, see the Relay section in the Instrumentation Elements chapter
of the User Guide or click the Help button.

12. From the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.
13. To create the Star View, select the relay, and then click the Create Star View button on Star Mode
toolbar on the right-hand side.

14. This opens a new Star TCC View with the selected Relay1 curve. Star Views for other protective
devices can be generated in a similar manner. Keep Star1 open for the next section of the tutorial.

17.5.2 Add a Device Curve to the Star View

1. Switch to Edit Mode, and then drop a fuse in the one-line diagram view OLV1.
2. Double-click the fuse symbol to open Fuse Editor.
3. Go to the Rating page and click the Library button to display the Library Quick Pick Fuse dialog
box.
4. Select manufacturer S&C, and model SMU-20, at 27 Max. kV, with Standard speed and size 13E.

5. Switch to Star Mode using the Mode toolbar. Select Fuse1 and click on Append to Star View button
open the Star View Selection Editor.
6. Select Star1 in the Star View Selection Editor to append Fuse1 to Star1 View and click OK.
7. Star1 View opens with the Fuse1 curve added. Element or group of elements on the one-line diagram
can be appended to one or more Star Views in a similar manner. To learn more about Append to Star
View feature, refer to Chapter 16 Star Device Coordination Analysis.

8. Another shortcut to add Fuse1 to Star1 View is to hold the Shift key down, and then select Fuse1 on
the one-line and drag it to the active Star View (Star1).

9. A fuse curve is added to the existing Star TCC View (Star1) as shown below.
10. Go to File menu and select Close project. ETAP will ask if you want save the project data. Select
Yes if you want to save your changes. Keep ETAP window open for the next section of the tutorial.

17.5.3

17.5.4 Star Example

In the previous section, you learned how to create a Star View for a device and append elements to an
existing Star View. In this section, you will learn how to create Star Views for existing ETAP one-line
diagrams.
1. From the File menu, select Open Project.
2. Browse to the ETAP installation path for the Example-Other folder, select STARExample.OTI, and
then click Open.

3. When ETAP displays the Logon dialog box, click OK to continue. ETAP displays the Select Access
Level dialog box.
4. Select Project Editor, and then click OK to load the StarExample file.

5. Open the OLV1 presentation by selecting it from the drop-down list for presentations or by double-
clicking the OLV1 presentation in Project Editor.
6. Using the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.

7. Draw a bounding outline around the elements from Utility U1 to Transformer T1 as shown, for which
the Star TCC View is to be created. The protective device models have been already selected in
STARExample file. You can also select a set of elements on the one-line diagram by holding the Ctrl
key and clicking each element.
8. To create the Star View, click the Create Star View button on Star Mode toolbar on the right-hand
side.

9. The Select a project library dialog to browse and load the library file for the project appears. Select
the etaplib550.lib (default) file and click Open.
10. The Star View generated for the selected one-line diagram is shown below. Keep this Star View
(Star4) open for the tutorial sections below.

17.5.5 Star View Navigation Tools

In this section, you will learn about the tools available to you for working with Star Views. Use the Star
TCC View (Star4) that you created in the previous section for the one-line diagram selected in the
STARExample file.
1. Star TCC Views are saved as presentations in ETAP in the Project Editor. You can access the Star
Views you created from the drop-down list for Star View presentations or by double-clicking on the
Star View name in Project Editor.
2. By default, the elements of the one-line diagram generated in a Star View are ungrouped. To group
the elements, draw a bounding outline around them, and then right-click and select Group.
Note: The default setting for grouping and ungrouping one-line diagram elements in Star View can be
defined in the Options (Preferences) Editor (Tools Options menu), using the entry Group One-line
in Star TCC. For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Preferences.

3. The Right-Click menu for the one-line diagram in Star View includes commands to cut, copy, change
element size, symbols, and orientation, set default annotation position, and edit element properties
(opens the elements editor).

4. The one-line diagram can be moved anywhere in Star View, even placed outside the Star TCC frame
as shown in the figure below.
5. Add existing devices from the one-line diagram to an open Star View using the Append to Star View
button or drag-and-drop operation.
6. The element connections in the one-line diagram are propagated in Star View. As an example, select
CB4 on the one-line diagram (Star Mode) and click on Append to Star View on the Star Mode
toolbar. CB4 connects to T1 secondary in the Star View one-line diagram.

7. Deleting the curve will delete the device from the Star View one-line diagram but not from the main
one-line diagram.

8. The Star TCC View allows you to graphically adjust, zoom in or out, customize the TCC View, print,
etc., using the tools described in the following steps:
Zoom Out One-Line Diagram Purge
Zoom In One-Line Diagram Print Preview
Zoom Fit One-Line Diagram Show/Hide Range
Pointer Show Legend
Pan Show Grid
Zoom In (TCC View) 2nd Axis
Zoom Out (TCC View) Auto-Scale
Zoom Fit (TCC View)
a) Click the Zoom In One-Line Diagram button to zoom in on the one-line diagram in Star View.
Similarly, use the Zoom Out One-Line Diagram button to zoom out from the one-line diagram.

b) Click the Zoom Fit One-Line button to zoom fit the one-line diagram to the left bottom corner of
Star View.
c) Use the Pan button (with the hand icon) to pan around a Star TCC View time-current grid. Hold
the left mouse button to grab the Star View and move the mouse to pan around the Star View.

d) To zoom in on the Star View, click the Zoom In button. Similarly, use the Zoom Out button to
zoom out of a Star View.
e) To fit entire Star layout in the selected window size, click the Zoom Fit button.

f) Click Auto-Scale in phase and ground views to automatically determine the best possible Star
View scaling for all the plotted curves. Toggle the Auto-Scale button to OFF and append Mtr4
from OLV1 to Star4. Note how the Mtr1 curve is partly visible. Now toggle the Auto-Scale
button to ON to see how the scale is adjusted to properly view all curves.
Star4 with Mtr1, Auto-Scale OFF Star4 with Mtr1, Auto-Scale ON
g) Click the 2nd Axis button to display a second axis with different current and voltage scales. Use
Show Grid button to display Log-Log Major/Minor Tics. The legend can be displayed by clicking
the Show Legend button. All three buttons toggle their features on and off.
Star View with 2nd Axis and Grid ON Star View with Legend ON

h) You can graphically display device curves on Star TCC View. Handles are provided on the
device characteristic curves to identify adjustable regions. Use the Show/Hide Range button to
toggle on and off the display of available ranges for a selected curve. The available ranges will be
displayed in gray when an adjustable curve is selected.
9. Keep Star4 open for the next section of the tutorial.

17.5.6 Star View (TCC) Toolbar

In this section of the tutorial, you will learn about the features of the Star View (TCC) toolbar. These
features include options for viewing, coordinating, and customizing the device curves. The toolbar is
shown below. Relay Test-Set Interface features in this toolbar will be covered in the ARTTS Tutorial.

1. Click the Mode button to toggle between phase and ground display. Note that the X-axis scales for
Phase and Ground Modes can be set independently.
Star View Shown in Phase Mode Star View Shown in Ground Mode
2. To zoom into a region on the Star TCC View, click the Zoom to New Window button, and then draw
a bounding outline around the region. Star View opens a Zoomed TCC window to display the
zoomed region. Time and current can also be read from the bottom of the zoom window.

3. Click the Time Difference button to measure the time difference between any two curves in the Star
View. Click the Time Difference button, and then click any two points on the displayed curves
between which you want to know the time difference. Once you have selected the second point, the
time difference value is displayed.
4. Click on the crosshair button to drop a crosshair at any point on the TCC and view the current/time at
that point. Crosshair can also be dedicated to a curve by selecting that curve.

5. Click on the User Curve button to enter a customized curve in Star TCC View. You can enter current
and time points, tolerances, and specify fault arrows. The User Curve parameters once defined and
plotted are saved with the Star View presentation. The User Curve can also be added and saved to the
ETAP Library.

6. Click the Plot Options button to customize plot attributes such as device appearance/label and TCC
axis, grid and legend settings. You can also access Plot Options for a specific device by right-clicking
the device curve or label, and then selecting Plot Options.
7. Customize general attributes such as extended tooltips or extend relay curve to pickup using the
General page in Plot Options Editor.

8. Customize the X and Y axes settings for Star View on the Axis page of Plot Options Editor. For
example, display a secondary X-axis on Star View by selecting Display and then entering the current
and voltage multiplier in the Secondary boxes.
9. Customize the grid settings for Star View on the Grid page of Plot Options Editor. For example, you
can change the number of tics per decade for the minor grid, the line style for the major grid, or the
background transparency.

10. Customize the legend settings for Star View on the Legend page of Plot Options Editor. For example,
add a logo to the legend or change the name of the Star View.
11. Customize the appearance, adjustments, and label settings for a selected device or all devices in the
Star View, using the Devices page of Plot Options Editor. For example, you can choose a different
color sequence for Fuse1 from the pre-defined color sequence list or use custom color settings on the
Appearance Tab of Devices page.

12. You can choose not to display the short-time of the transformer damage curve by unchecking the
Show Overload option for transformer T1 on the Preferences tab of the Devices page.
13. Display the detail settings, label border and Base kV value for relay OCR2 by changing settings on
the Label tab of the Devices page. Check the label setting and border checkboxes. Click on the Edit
button and add Base kV property to Relay OCR2 Phase OC1 label.

14. Close Star4 TCC View. Go to OLV1 (Star Mode) and rubber band the section of one-line diagram
containing Fuse1, T1, CB4, CB5 and Mtr1. Click on Create Star View button on Star Mode toolbar.
15. The Star View generated for the selected one-line diagram (Star5) is shown below. Note that the
Label setting and grid display are turned on.

16. This step describes the right-click options available for device curves/labels. You can perform the
following tasks:
(a) Select CB4 curve, right-click and choose Bring Curve to Front. CB4 is now placed on top of
CB5 (bottom portion).
(b) Select Fuse1 label, right-click and uncheck Arrow. Label arrow for fuse1 is now hidden
(c) Select CB5 label, right-click and check Border. The label now has a border with white
background.
(d) Select T1, right-click and uncheck Setting. T1 label shows only the transformer ID.
(e) Select Fuse1-3P fault arrow, right-click and check Show Label in Front and Border. Notice
how the fault arrow label is now visible on top of the fuse curve.
17. To customize the display annotations for one-line diagram elements in Star TCC View, click the
Display Options button. For example, the transformer T1 rating / %Z and the breaker rating/kV can
be displayed on the one-line diagram in Star View by checking the applicable boxes in Display
Options. (See the figure below.)

18. With ETAP Star, you can troubleshoot your device coordination studies for any Star View TCC. The
Alert View button on the Star View (TCC) toolbar brings up a summary of alerts or messages (low
priority alerts) that provides hints as to how and why a particular device curve is not being displayed
or missing information regarding a device. The Alert View button is active if ETAP Star has detected
errors; otherwise, the button is grayed out.
19. Keep Star5 open for the next section of the tutorial.

17.5.7 Normalized TCC Mode

In this section of the tutorial, you will learn about the features of the Normalized TCC Mode in Star
View. Normalized TCC Mode provides a graphical view (TCC plot) of the operation times of protective
devices, based on their corresponding settings and characteristics, for specified fault location and type.
For more information on this feature, refer to section 17.3.11
1. Go to OLV1 in Star Mode. Select the StarMode1 Study Case and set the output report to Prompt.
Click on the Fault Insertion (PD Sequence-of-Operation) button on the Star Mode toolbar. Place the
fault on Bus2 as shown below.
2. The calculation asks for an Output report filename. Enter SQOP-Bus2 as the name and click OK.

3. The Sequence-of-Operation calculation displays the through fault current of the devices including
braches, loads, and buses. It also displays a graphical animation of the sequence of PDs that trip for
the fault.
4. Select Star5 TCC View. Choose the output report SQOP-Bus2 from the report list above Star5 TCC
View.

5. Click on the Normalized TCC button to view Star5 in normalized (shifted) mode. The parameters and
description of the Sequence-of-Operation study is shown for a Normalized fault arrow. For each
displayed curve, the shift factor is calculated and displayed in the label. The label also shows the
actual operation times for the device. Also note that the Normalized TCC is displayed in per unit
scale (multiples of through fault current in amps as seen by the device).
Note: Fixed curves/points (equipment damage curve, motor starting curve, FLA Marker, Fault Arrow)
are not displayed in the Normalized TCC View as they are not applicable to this mode.
6. Toggle the Normalized TCC button to view Star5 TCC in normal mode.
7. Close Star5 TCC and proceed to next section of the tutorial.
8. Alternatively, while Sequence-of-Operation result is active in the OLV, you can create a new Star
View which will be automatically placed in Normalized TCC View.

17.5.8 Short-Circuit Clipping, Minimum kA

The Run/Update Short-Circuit kA button on the Star Mode toolbar allows you to perform a short-circuit
study to update the time-characteristics curve Clipping kA and Minimum kA for the applicable elements.
The Clipping kA can be used for clipping the TCC curves and are specified on the Short-Circuit page of
element editors. The clipping or minimum currents in kA can be set to Calculated or User-Defined.
1. Calculated option updates the short-circuit kA values for both 3-phase and Line-to-Ground fault fields
based on the Star Mode Short-Circuit Study.
2. To manually enter the clipping/minimum kA, double-click a device to open the Device Editor, and
then select the TCC kA page. For example, open Fuse1 Editor and select User-Defined option from
the TCC kA page to enter the 3-Phase Fault and Line-Ground Fault clipping/minimum kA values.
3. To run/update short-circuit clipping for various protective devices in the one-line diagram, open the
OLV1 presentation in StarExample. Switch to Protective Device Coordination (Star) Mode using the
Mode toolbar.
4. . Select the StarMode1 Study Case and set the output report to Prompt.

5. To update short-circuit clipping kA values; click the Run / Update Short-Circuit Clipping kA button
to perform 3-Phase and Line-to-Ground fault calculations.
6. ETAP will prompt you to enter an output report name for this study. Enter any suitable name (up to
64 characters) for this Short-Circuit Study.
7. Short-circuit calculation results are displayed directly on the one-line diagram. The results obtained
after running short-circuit study for StarExample are shown below.

The cycle symmetrical and asymmetrical fault clipping kA currents for 3-phase and line-ground are
updated for the protective devices. The minimum kA currents can be updated by choosing the 30
cycle kA (or Min kA for IEC) option in the Star Mode Study Case.
8. To view the updated current values, double-click a device adjacent to any faulted bus and go to the
TCC kA page of the Devices Editor. The updated 3-phase and line-ground short-circuit
clipping/minimum currents for Fuse1 are shown in the figure below.

9. Select the Show on TCC option to display the fault arrows in Star View. The examples below show
Fuse1 and circuit breaker CB4 curves with and without short-circuit clipping/minimum fault arrows.
This concludes the tutorial for Star View. To learn more about the features and capabilities of the Star
View Module, refer to the preceding sections in this chapter.

Star View ARTTS Tutorial
17.6 ARTTS Tutorial

This tutorial provides a brief overview of the basic operation of the Relay Test-Set Interface module.
Once you finish this tutorial, you will be familiar with the key features and capabilities of the interface.
Each section in this tutorial is presented in an interactive format, allowing you to work through each step
as it is explained.
Note: Some of the paths shown in the figures below may differ if you have chosen a custom installation
path.
The tutorial is divided into the following sections:
Section 17.6.1: Create a New Star TCC View

Section 17.6.2: Export Curve to Relay Test-Set
Section 17.6.3: Import Results
Section 17.6.4: Compare Relay test results with manufacturer published data
17.6.1 Create a New Star TCC View

This section shows you how to create a Star TCC View.
1. Start ETAP and, from the File menu, select New Project.

2. Enter a name for the new project file (for example, ARTTSInterface), and click OK.
3. ETAP will prompt you for your user information. Enter the user name and access level information (if
required) and click OK to continue. To learn more about setting up user accounts and access levels,
refer to the User Access Management chapter of the User Guide or click the Help button.

4. By default, one-line diagram view OLV1 will open in ETAP. The toolbars and menus you will be
using for this section of the tutorial are illustrated below.
Project View

5. Click the Edit button on Mode toolbar.
6. Click the Overcurrent Relay button from Edit toolbar and drop it on the OLV1 presentation.
7. Double-click the overcurrent relay element to open the Relay Editor. The Select a project library
dialog to browse and load the library file for the project appears. Select the etaplib550.lib (default)
file and click Open.

8. Click the OCR page, and then click the Library button. This opens the Library Quickpick - Relay
dialog box as shown below. Select manufacturer GE Multilin, model 750/760 and click OK.

9. GE Multilin 750/760 relay data is populated in the OCR page. Set the Phase Overcurrent element of
the relay as shown below. Uncheck the Overcurrent and Instantaneous settings for other elements. We
will export/test the Phase Overcurrent element using the ARTTS Relay Test Set.
10. Click the Input page.
11. Enter primary and secondary ratings for the Phase CT terminal (1000:5) as shown below. CT ratios
can be entered directly in the Relay Editor where no CT is connected to the relay. Click OK to close
the Relay Editor.

12. From the Mode toolbar, click the Star Protective Device Coordination button to switch to the Star
Mode.
13. To generate the Star View, select the relay, and then click the Create Star View button from the right-
hand side Star Mode toolbar.

14. The Phase overcurrent element is plotted as shown below. Right click on the relay curve and select
Plot Options to customize the relay curve display / label settings. Keep the Star View (Star1) open for
the next section of the tutorial.

17.6.2 Export Curve to Relay Test-Set

1. The relay test points and results are saved in master database. The database location can be specified
from the Relay Test-set Database menu item listed under the Project menu bar. The Relay Test-Set
database location is set by default to the ARTTS sub-folder within the project folder. Refer to the
image below.
2. The relay test-set software (ARTTS) program location can be defined in Tools Options
(Preferences). The default path is shown below.

3. Go to Star1 TCC View and select the Relay1 curve. Click on the Export curve button on the Star TCC
View toolbar. Multiple relay curves can be selected using <Ctrl> button and exported.
4. Upon clicking the Export Curve button the ARTTS Export Summary window appears as shown
below. The ARTTS Export Summary window shows the relay ID(s), export database name
element(s) exported and the database location. Click OK to complete the export.

5. With the Relay1 selected, click on the Test-Set (ARTTS) button as shown below.

6. This will launch the ARTTS Overcurrent 50-51 program as shown below. Confirm the ARTTS model
(DTRS 6) and type of connection to the computer (Serial/USB).
7. The Load database window is displayed with the database of Relay1 curve selected in Star View.
Click on Open to load the database.

8. The database will load the Relay1 points exported from Star View. Click on Phase fault Tab to view
the curve as shown below to view the curve exported from Star View.

17.6.3 Import Results

1. Test the relay curve using the different Test selections available. Once tested store all tests in the
Results page and click on the Save button (on the Results page). The results may be saved to a new
database or the same export database for Relay1. Refer to the image below.

2. Open Star1 in ETAP and select Relay1 curve. Click on the Import Results button as shown below.
The test results are imported to the Master database.

17.6.4 Relay Test Results

1. With Relay1 curve selected, click on the ARTTS Results button to launch the ARTTS Test Results
Editor. The selected Relay1 curve (Relay-P-51, Phase Time Overcurrent curve) will be automatically
selected with test results shown in the Relay Test Results table. Results can be displayed on Star
View by checking the box next to it and clicking on Apply or OK.

2. Check the test result and click OK to plot it in Star View. The relay response plots as a point based
user curve in Star View.

3. Right click on the test result points or label to access Plot Options. The appearance, label and other
preferences for the test result points can be set using Plot Options.
This concludes the tutorial on ETAP Relay Test-Set Interface. To learn more about the features and
capabilities of the Relay Test-Set Interface, refer to section 17.4 in this chapter.

Arc Flash Analysis Overview
Chapter 18
Arc Flash
The ETAP Arc Flash Analysis Module incorporates the latest software technology available to investigate
a workers potential exposure to arc flash energy, which may be required for the purpose of injury
prevention and determination of appropriate levels of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). The incident
energy and flash protection boundaries are determined based on the following two available standards for
Arc Flash Analysis:
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 70E-2009

IEEE Standards 1584-2002 & IEEE 1584a 2004
CSA Z462
ETAP Arc Flash is a fully integrated module that takes advantage of all the capabilities already built into
ETAP. The program automatically determines the bolted short-circuit current (3-phase and 1-phase). It
also calculates the individual arcing current contributions and arc fault clearing time of all the protective
devices involved in the arc fault by interfacing with ETAP Star (Protective device selectivity and
coordination module). In addition, ETAP determines automatically the system grounding configuration
and other information required to determine the most adequate and conservative Hazard Analysis results.
All the automation dramatically reduces the time required to perform an Arc Flash Analysis according to
the standards.
With ETAP Arc Flash, you can perform an Arc Flash Analysis for a single bus or hundreds at a time. It
has built-in tools like the Arc Flash Report Analyzer and the Arc Flash Quick Incident Energy Calculator
that is available at every bus. ETAP also includes global typical boundaries, equipment gap between
conductors and working distances from IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E, which minimize the data entry
process. The global data options allow you to significantly reduce the AF data entry process to bare
minimum.
ETAP has all the analysis functionality recommended by NFPA 70E and IEEE 1584, including the arcing
current variation for systems with nominal voltage below 1 kV, the ability to change the prefault voltage,
and the ability to select different levels of bolted 3-phase fault current and a robust AC-Decay/Gen
Decrement curve method which allows you to model the decay in incident energy from different AC
sources during the arc fault. Along with the analysis tools, ETAP Arc Flash provides sophisticated
reporting which literally shows the arc flash results for every location on the one-line diagram or in
comprehensive analysis reports for every location. The program gives you the ability to print or create

Arc Flash Analysis Overview
custom MS Excel report by using the export feature from the AF Report Analyzer. It also includes built-
in Summary Crystal Reports for all the faulted buses in the systems, which include the flash protection
boundary and the Hazard/Risk category. The final analysis results can be shown on Arc Flash Labels that
can be placed on the equipment. The labels contain the necessary information to convey the arc flash
danger level in multiple languages or unit systems.

Arc Flash Analysis Bus Editor
18.1 Bus Editor

The Bus Editor contains all the input data fields needed for the arc flash calculation. The pages that have
information related to arc flash are: Info, Rating, and Arc Flash.
18.1.1 Info Page

The only parameters which are related to arc flash on the Bus Info page are the Bus nominal kV and the
Equipment name and ID fields. ETAP uses the nominal kV value to allow you to select the right set of
typical data according to IEEE Standards. The Equipment ID and Equipment name may be displayed on
certain arc flash label templates.
18.1.2 Rating Page

The Rating page contains information about equipment type (i.e., open air, switchgear, MCC, etc.). It also
contains typical data for approach boundaries and equipment gap between conductors based on IEEE
1584 2002. The user also may enter custom data according to equipment manufacturer specifications. The
Rating page also includes information about the required insulated glove classes.

Standard
Select either the ANSI or IEC Standard. There is no IEC Arc Flash Standard, selecting IEC will change
the short-circuit parameters for bracing to peak currents, but the arc flash results are unaffected by this
option. This option only applies for short-circuit 60909-0 2001 device evaluation and not for AF at this
point.
Type
The Type option allows you to select the different types of equipment that are supported for Arc Flash
Analysis. The available equipment types are as follows:
Other
MCC
Switchgear
Switchboard
Switchrack
Panelboard
Cable Bus
Open Air
Note: These types come from IEEE 1584-2002 Table 4. The switchboard and switchrack are handled in
the same fashion as the switchgear. The Type drop-down list plays a very important role in the
determination of the incident energy for systems with voltage levels less than or equal to 15 kV.
Note: For voltages above 15 kV the selection of equipment type does not make any difference in the arc
flash calculations since the Lee Method is used for those voltage levels.
For new buses the default value is Other which is handled in the same manner as a cable bus, since in
previous versions of ETAP the Cable Bus option was tied to this selection.
If the option Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data is enabled, the fields in the
bus editor related to arc flash are immediately populated with typical or user-defined IEEE 1584 and
NFPA 70E 2009 parameters depending on the selection on the Data Options for Bus editor default editor.
Continuous
The Continuous Amp rating field is for new types and is not involved in the arc flash calculation. Do not
confuse this value with the calculated or user-defined bolted fault current values that the Arc Flash
Module uses in the calculation.
Bracing
The short-circuit bracing rating fields (Asymm. ms and Symm. ms) is for new types and is not involved in
the arc flash calculation. Do not confuse these values with the calculated or user-defined bolted fault
current values that the Arc Flash Module uses in the calculation.

Arc Flash Parameters
Gap Between Conductors / Buses

This Gap is defined in IEEE 1584-2002 Section 9.4 as the gap between conductors or buses for the
equipment at the fault location. This value is to be entered in millimeters (mm).
Table 1 shows the default values used for each device type. There is no gap between conductors for buses
lower than 0.208kV or greater than 15.0 kV. This logic is implemented to avoid using equipment gaps
that do not follow Table 4 of IEEE 1584; however, the value can be changed to any other value within the
specified range. Please also note that the gap between conductors is not used if the Lee Method is used to
determine the arc flash results (as is the case for systems lower 0.208kV and above 15 kV). Please refer to
calculation methodology for more details.
Distance X Factor
The Distance X Factor field is for display only. The values it displays are selected according to the
equipment type and voltage as described in Table1, under the column X Factor Value. This value is a
constant for each type of device and is used in equation 5.3 of IEEE 1584-2002 as an exponent. There is
no Distance X Factor for buses lower than 0.208kV or greater than 15.0 kV.
Typical Gap & Boundary

The Typical Gap & Boundary button brings in default values and ranges for the equipment gap, X-factor,
Limited, Restricted, and Prohibited Approach Boundaries. The defaults and ranges are shown in Tables 1,
2, and 3.
If you click this button, the gap, X factor and boundaries are set to the default value selected in the Bus
Arc Flash typical Data editor as shown below:

Please refer to the Arc Flash Analysis Data Editor for a complete list of the typical data values used. Of
course if the user-defined options are used as the source of data for the bus, then the bus values will be
populated with the customized as values as defined by the user.
The following table summarizes the typical default values for the Conductor Gap under the column Gap
Default Value (mm).
Table 1: Range Values and Default Values for Gaps between Conductors and X Factors
Bus Nominal Equipment Typical Gap Gap X Factor

kV Range Type* Range mm. Default Value
Value
(mm)
Open Air 2.000

40
Cable Bus 13 2.000
Bus Nominal MCC 1 to 999 25 1.641
kV <= 1.0 Other 13 2.000
kV* Panelboard 25 1.641
Switchgear 32 1.473
Switchrack 32 1.473
Open Air 102 2.000
Cable Bus 13 2.000
MCC 102 0.973
1.0 kV < Bus Other 13 2.000
Nominal kV 1 to 999
<= 5.0 kV Panelboard 102 0.973
Open Air 153 2.000
Cable Bus 13 2.000
MCC 153 0.973
5.0 kV < Bus Other 13 2.000
1 to 999
Nominal kV
<= 15.0 kV* Panelboard 153 0.973
* Note: Any bus whose nominal voltage is less than 0.208 kV and higher than 15kV has the same
default values as that of a 0.208 kV bus and a 15 kV bus; however the Lee method is used instead
of the empirical IEEE 1584 equations to determine the arc flash result if the voltage is below
0.208 kV and higher than 15kV. This means that the gaps and x-factors are disregarded for such
cases.


The Limited Approach Boundary (LAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2009, as the approach limit at
a distance from an exposed live part within which a shock hazard exists.
approaching a conductor that is not properly braced in a fixed position. The value should be entered in
feet or meter. The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009.
The module will select this value according to the kV of the bus. NFPA 70E 2004 values may also be
used depending on the selection on the Bus Arc Flash Typical Data default editor.
Defaults for Limited Approach Boundaries

The range and default values for the Limited Approach Boundaries are defined according to the values
listed in NFPA 70E-2009 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock Protection). If you
click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated according to the
values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be reset to the default
ones. Tables 2-3 list the limited approach boundaries for the 2004 and 2009 editions of NFPA 70E.
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 10 10 to 30 5 5 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 10 10 to 30 6 6 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV 10.66 10.66 to 30 8 8 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV 11 11 to 30 10 10 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 11.66 11.66 to 30 11.66 11.66 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 13 13 to 45 13 13 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 15.33 15.33 to 45 15.33 15.33 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 19 19 to 45 19 19 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 23.75 23.75 to 45 23.75 23.75 to 45
800 kV

0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 10 10 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 10 10 to 30 5 5 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 10 10 to 30 6 6 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 10 10 to 30 8 8 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV 10.66 10.66 to 30 8 8 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV 11 11 to 30 10 10 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 11.66 11.66 to 30 11.66 11.66 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 13 13 to 45 13 13 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 15.33 15.33 to 45 15.33 15.33 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 19 19 to 45 19 19 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 23.75 23.75 to 45 23.75 23.75 to 45
800 kV
The units of the limited approach boundary can be set to metric units if the project standards are set to
Metric units.

not cross when approaching a conductor that is fixed (not movable). The value should be entered in feet.
The default value is the minimum value allowed in Table 130.2 (C) of NFPA 70E 2009. ETAP will select
this value according to the kV of the bus. This value may be displayed on the Arc Flash Hazard Label if
selected in the appropriate template.
See Table 2 & 3 above for definitions of the range and default values for Limited Approach Boundaries.
Limited Approach Boundary Toggle Radio Button

This toggle radio button allows you to select which limited approach boundary to display on the Label.
Depending on the selection, the label from the Bus Arc Flash page or the global arc flash calculation
labels will show the Exposed Movable Conductor or the Fixed Circuit Part limited approach
boundary.

This toggle radio button basically serves the purpose of telling the program which one of these values
should be passed to the arc flash labels.

The Restricted Approach Boundary (RAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2004 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due to electrical
arc over combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity to the live part.
The value should be entered in feet.
Defaults for Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries

The range and default values of the Restricted and Prohibited Approach Boundaries are defined according
to the values listed in NFPA 70E-2004 table 130.2 C (Approach Boundaries to Live Parts for Shock
Protection). If you click the typical Gap and Boundary button, the values will be automatically updated
according to the values listed in the table below. If you change the Bus nominal kV, the values will be
reset to the default ones.
0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 2.16 2.16 to 30 0.6 0.6 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 2.58 2.58 to 30 0.8 0.8 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 2.75 2.75 to 30 1.41 1.41 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 3.16 3.16 to 30 2.08 2.08 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV 3.25 3.25 to 30 2.66 2.66 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV 3.58 3.58 to 30 3.08 3.08 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 4 4 to 30 3.5 3.5 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 5.25 5.25 to 45 4.75 4.75 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 8.5 8.5 to 45 8 8 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 11.25 11.25 to 45 10.75 10.75 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 14.91 14.91 to 45 14.41 14.41 to 45
800 kV

0.001 kV to 0.300 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.301 kV to 0.750 kV 1 1 to 30 0.1 0.1 to 30
0.751 kV to 15 kV 2.16 2.16 to 30 0.6 0.6 to 30
15.1 kV to 36 kV 2.58 2.58 to 30 0.8 0.8 to 30
36.1 kV to 46 kV 2.75 2.75 to 30 1.41 1.41 to 30
46.1 kV to 72.5 kV 3.25 3.25 to 30 2.16 2.16 to 30
72.6 kV to 121 kV 3.33 3.33 to 30 2.75 2.75 to 30
138 kV to 145 kV 3.83 3.83 to 30 3.33 3.33 to 30
161 kV to 169 kV 4.25 4.25 to 30 3.75 3.75 to 30
230kV to 242 kV 5.66 5.66 to 45 5.16 5.16 to 45
345 kV to 362 kV 9.16 9.16 to 45 8.66 8.66 to 45
500 kV to 550 kV 11.83 11.83 to 45 11.33 11.33 to 45
765 kV to 800 kV 15.91 15.91 to 45 15.41 15.41 to 45
800 kV.
The units of the Restricted and Prohibited approach boundaries can be set to metric units if the project
standards are set to Metric units.

The Prohibited Approach Boundary (PAB) is defined according to NFPA 70E-2009 as the approach limit
at a distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making contact with
the live part. The value should be entered in feet.
For definitions of the range and default values for Prohibited Approach Boundaries, see Table 4 and 5
above.
Insulating Glove Class

The insulating glove class field shows the insulating glove class and voltage rating determined based on
the bus nominal kV. This information is updated automatically as soon as the bus nominal kV is known.
The Table 6 below shows the nominal bus kV ranges and the corresponding insulating glove classes and
voltage ratings according to ASTM D120/IEC903 Standards.
Note: In ETAP 7.0.0 the default values are editable and can be customized to allow only for higher glove
classes than those specified by ASTM D120. To modify the glove classes used by the program you need
to access the user-defined portion of the Shock Hazard Analysis Data editor from the
Project\Settings\Arc Flash menu:

Table 6: ASTM Insulated Glove Voltage Classes: (ASTM D120/IEC903) Standards

Types of Insulating Glove Maximum use Class ETAP Bus nominal kV range
voltage rating AC
Volts L-L
Low Voltage Gloves 500 00 Bus kV 0.500
1000 0 0.500 kV < Bus kV 1.0 kV
High Voltage Gloves 7500 1 1.0 kV < Bus kV 7.5 kV
17000 2 7.5 kV < Bus kV 17.0 kV
26500 3 17.0 kV < Bus kV 26.5 kV
36000 4 26.5 kV < Bus kV 36.0 kV
No available class per ASTM N/A N/A Bus kV > 36.0 kV
Note: ASTM does not define the insulating glove voltage rating or class for voltage higher than 36000
Volts. As a result of this, the voltage rating is set to the bus nominal kV if the bus nominal voltage is
higher than 36 kV and the glove class is omitted in the labels.
Shock hazard when

The Shock hazard when field may be used to provide additional information about electrocution (shock
hazard) so that it may be printed on some label templates or the MS Excel Arc Flash Report. You can use
it to add a description about when there is a shock hazard present. You can type up to 50 alphanumeric
characters and define your own informational message. The following table contains three possibilities
that have been built into the program.
Note: This information is only to be displayed on certain arc flash label templates and will not cause any
effect on the arc flash results (i.e., effect of covers open or closed, etc.). The default for this field is
covers removed.
Table 7: Possible additional descriptions of the Shock Hazard for the AF labels
Field Default Comments
Shock Hazard when covers removed This could read doors are open
enclosure doors are closed This could read covers are on
hinged covers are open This could read opening hinged
doors

Automatically Update Arc Flash and Shock Protection Data

This option configures the bus editor to automatically update arc flash data every time the bus nominal
kV or the equipment type are modified. Selecting this checkbox saves you an extra click to update the
typical or user-defined values for each bus that is configured. This option is selected by default.
Data Options
Data menu:
ETAP brings data into the bus editor according to the selections on the Bus AF Typical Data editor. The
selections on this editor are global defaults and this means that if you change the default at one bus, then
the source of data changes accordingly for all buses. The fact that this editor can be opened from the bus
rating page is purely designed for convenience. The following image illustrates the concept of the global
data options:

Arc Flash Analysis Data Sources
Bus Arc Flash Data
Bus Arc Flash Typical Data

(Global Selection Switch)
Shock Hazard Analysis Data Sources
When clicking on the typical

data button, the parameters
come from any of the sources
as specified by the default Bus
Arc Flash Typical Data editor
Voltage Rated Glove Class Sources


The Bus Arc Flash page contains the quick incident energy calculator, which is a powerful analysis tool
that allows you to perform a quick Arc Flash Analysis at the bus level if you already know some of the
input data necessary to calculate the incident energy. Also, it displays the calculated Arc-Flash Analysis
results from the global calculation. The quick incident energy calculator allows you to perform a
hazard/risk assessment for an individual bus. This tool can be particularly useful in some of the following
cases:
The short-circuit results are already known.

The arc fault clearing time is known or can be conservatively estimated.
You need to modify part of the system and want to know the impact of the changes on the
You want to perform some What if scenarios to help increase the safety margin of the arc flash
You need to produce a label for the equipment, but do not want to run the global calculation.
Operation Technology, Inc. 18-14 ETAP 7.5 User Guide

This page contains several input parameters needed for the global system calculated Arc Flash Analysis.
(See the Running Global Arc Flash Analysis section for more details.)
The Quick Incident Energy Calculator has the capability to perform arc flash calculations based on purely
user-defined parameters or based on system-calculated results. The fields marked as Calculated have been
updated by the global arc flash calculation to this page (as display only values). Those marked as User-
Defined have been manually entered, except for the fault clearing time (FCT) and source PD arcing
current when you have selected a source PD. The quick incident energy calculator can display the
incident energy and flash protection boundary calculated based on either set of parameters.
Calculated
This section displays the results of the global arc flash calculation. The Bus Editor Arc Flash page uses
the update values to determine the incident energy.
Bus Fault Current

This field shows the total bus bolted (3-Phase/1-Phase) fault current in kA which is calculated by the
Short-Circuit Program {1/2 cycle, 1.5 to 4 cycle (ANSI) or initial symmetrical current (Ik for IEC)}.
This field may be updated from the global arc flash calculation if the option Update Fault Currents is
selected from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please note that this field is not updated if the
fault current decay method is used since the there are several short-circuit current values calculated
over time in this case.
Bus Arcing Current

This field shows the total bus arcing current calculated based on the 3-phase short-circuit current (1/2
Cycle Symmetrical RMS or 1.5 to 4 cycle). This field may be updated by the global arc flash calculation
if the option Update Fault Currents is selected from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please
also note that if the fault current decay method is selected, then this value is not updated since it is
changing over time.
Source PD
This is the ID of the source protective device determined by the global arc flash calculation to be the
device which clears the fault at the bus (last operating device to de-energize the fault). If there are
multiple source branches with protective devices, ETAP will select the one that takes the longer to trip
(clear the fault).
The ID of the source PD is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the update options are selected in the Arc
Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case. Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It
is only recalculated and updated by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a
successful global arc flash calculation.

The fault current shown in this field is the actual arcing current in kA passing through the source PD that
clears the fault. Please note that the current shown here is expressed using the base kV of the location of
the protective device. This means that the current shown here could be the arcing current passing through
the protective device on the primary side of a feeder transformer.
This current value is passed to the Bus Arc Flash page if the option Update Fault Currents is selected in
the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Please note that this value is not calculated inside the editor, but
passed by the global arc flash calculation. The value will be updated only upon a successful global arc

flash calculation. Please also note that this value will not be updated if you are using the fault current
decay method since the current is changing over time.

The arc duration is defined in ETAP as the Fault Clearing Time (FCT). This is the calculated time in
seconds, which is needed by the protective device to completely open and clear the arc fault (extinguish
the arc). The FCT value is calculated by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into this field.
The global arc flash calculation will update this value if the option Update Buses FCT is checked in the
Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case Editor.
Note: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by the
global arc flash calculation. Grounding
Grounding
The Calculated system grounding for arc flash calculations is defined as grounded or ungrounded
according to IEEE 1584-2002. Grounded systems are those that have solidly grounded connections.
Ungrounded systems are those that are open (Delta, Wye-open) and those that are high and low resistance
grounded.
This Calculated System grounding is determined by the global arc flash calculations and is updated into
this field if the option Update Grounding is selected in the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. Its
default value is grounded.
Note 1: Once updated, this value is not recalculated by this editor. It is only recalculated and updated by
the global arc flash calculation.
Note 2: As different protective devices operate, the system grounding configuration may change (i.e. if a
source which is solidly grounded trips and the remaining sources are open or resistance grounded). ETAP
assumes that the grounding configuration remains constant during the fault duration. If it is possible that
the system grounding configuration will change during the fault, then assume that the system is
ungrounded. This will yield more conservative results.
Incident Energy
This is the calculated incident energy based on the system calculated parameters. The units for the
incident energy are Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the
empirically derived IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage). This
value is not updated if you are using the fault current decay method. For this method the energy is
determined in multiple stages and it is difficult to represent in this editor as a single value.
The incident energy is used to determine the Hazard/Risk Category and the Flash Protection Boundary
(ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough parameters or the user has no
authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002 Standards.
Note 1: THE RESULTS IN THE CALCULATED SECTION OF THE BUS EDITOR MAY NOT
AGREE WITH THOSE DETERMINED BY THE GLOBAL CALCULATION UNDER THE
FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
1) You are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors

2) You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
Note 2: The incident energy results shown in the bus arc flash page can be determined based on the IEEE
1584 empirical equations or based on the theoretically derive Lee method equations. The Lee method is
used whenever the fault parameters are outside the range of the empirical method. A message indicated
this condition will be shown on the lower left hand side corner of the bus arc flash page.
Protection Boundary
determined from the incident energy and fault clearing time. The unit of this field is in feet. This value is
empty unless the calculation is performed and you have logged into the current project with the access
level to run the Arc Flash Module.
Note 1: The flash protection boundary calculated in the Bus Arc Flash page may be different from the
global arc flash calculated results if the EB value (AF Data Page of the study case editor) is set to a value
higher than 1.2 cal/cm2 or if notes 1& 2 from the incident energy section apply.
Note 2: The bus Arc Flash page always uses EB = 1.2 cal/cm2 to determine the flash protection boundary.
Please also note that the equations used to determine the flash protection boundary is different for the
empirical method or Lee methods. Depending on which method is used, the program automatically
determines the right equation to use.

The Hazard/Risk Category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the system calculated
incident energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C)(11) of NFPA
70E-2009 is used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is
performed and you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash Module.
The value may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA
70E 2009 (40 Cal/cm2).

User-Defined
The user-defined section of the Bus Arc Flash page allows the user to define parameters other than those
automatically calculated by ETAP to perform an Arc Flash Analysis. Some of the user-defined
parameters may also be used for the global arc flash calculation.
Bus Fault Current

This is the total bolted fault current value in kA, which may be known before hand. The quick incident
energy calculator does not differentiate between 3-phase and line-to-ground short-circuit currents for this
field so if desired, a line to ground short-circuit current value could be entered here. The program will
calculate the user-defined bus arcing current based on this value.
Bus Arcing Current

This field displays the total bus arcing current calculated based on the user-defined Bus Fault Current in
kA. This is a useful field since it shows the arcing current based on the available bolted 3-phase fault
current.
Source PD
This drop-down list allows you to select the protective device which you want to use to determine the
fault clearing time (FCT) for a fault at this bus. The drop-down list contains all the overcurrent relays, in-
line relays, reclosers, differential relays, directional relays fuses, and low voltage circuit breakers in the
system. The global arc flash calculation will use this protective device as the source PD to determine the
FCT if the option User-Defined Source PD (Bus Editor) is selected in the Arc Flash page of the Short-
Circuit Study Case, otherwise, it will be ignored when you run the global arc flash calculation.
In ETAP, a relay must be interlocked with a breaker, contactor or switch. If you select a relay from this
list then the program will find the current passing through the current transformer connected to the relay
and then proceed to find the breaker from the interlock list that can actually clear the fault (breaker
connected to a source path to the faulted bus). If you select a fuse or a low voltage breaker with its own
trip device, the program will consider it to be the source PD to be used to determine the FCT.
If the Arc Flash Program uses a PD from this drop-down list, it will use it to calculate the FCT based on
the actual arcing current passing through it. The arcing current is shown immediately below this drop-
down list as a display only field. The FCT can be found from the reports only (i.e., Analysis section or the
Summary Reports).
Note: If no protective device is selected from this drop list (blank option selected), then the user-defined
fault clearing time field becomes editable and you can define your own value. In previous versions of
ETAP (i.e., 5.0.0 to 5.0.3 running the user-defined source PD calculation would overwrite this value. This
is no longer true in version 5.5 since the only way to observe the source PD FCT is through the Crystal
Reports).

This display only field shows the arcing current (in kA) passing through the protective device selected in
the User-Defined Source PD drop-down list. This value can be updated if the update Buses Fault
Currents option has been selected in the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. If the
global Arc Flash Program fails to determine the FCT or the arcing current through this PD, this field will
not be updated.

Fault Clearing Time

This field is the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time in seconds. This value can be defined by the user as
the Fault Clearing Time to be used in the determination of the incident energy for the faulted bus.
The global arc flash calculation will use the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time only if the Fixed FCT
checkbox is selected or if the User-Defined FCT option has been selected from the Study Case Arc Flash
page. This field will be hidden if a User-Defined Source PD has been selected from the drop-down list
right above this field. The default value for this field is 0.1 seconds.
Please note that the minimum time delay for overcurrent relays operating in their instantaneous region is
one cycle. This means that if the arcing current is above the instantaneous pickup of the relay and it has
no specified time delay, then ETAP Arc Flash will add at least one cycle as the operating (trip) time of the
relay. The trip time is then added to the operating time of the circuit breaker interlocked to the overcurrent
relay.
Please note that the minimum operating time for a fuse is 0.01 seconds for a case where the arcing current
is above the total clearing time at the bottom of the curve (based on IEEE 1584 2002 section 4.6).
Please note that the fault clearing time for circuit breakers with integral trip units will be determine solely
based on the manufacturer provided time current characteristic curve since these curves include both the
tripping and clearing time.
Fixed FCT
If this checkbox is selected, then the global arc flash calculation uses the User-Defined Fault Clearing
Time (FCT) value to determine the incident energy of this bus. The calculation would be the same as that
of the situation when the Study Case has the option User-Defined FCT selected. However in this case,
the program does not automatically try to find the FCT from the TCCs for this bus, but it automatically
searches for the FCT of other buses which do not have this checkbox selected.
Using the Fixed FCT feature does not imply that the program will use this set time to evaluate the
incident energy of Source Protective Devices connected directly to the faulted bus. The program will
still try to find the worst-case incident energy for faults on the line side of source PDs by searching
upstream protective devices.
If this checkbox is selected, the fields Source PD ID drop List and Source PD Arcing Current will be
hidden since they are not applicable. The program will indicate that it used the Fixed FCT on the reports
by showing a flag next to the bus FCT field.
Grounding
This drop-down list allows you to define the type of grounding to be used at this bus. The default value
for this drop-down list is grounded. From the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case, you have
the option to use this selection for the global arc flash calculation.
Incident Energy
This is the incident energy based on the User-Defined parameters. The units for the incident energy are
Cal/cm2. This display only field shows the incident energy calculated using either the empirically derived
IEEE 1584 2002 model or the Lee Method (depending on the system voltage).
This incident energy value is used to determine the User-Defined Hazard/Risk Category and the User-
Defined Flash Protection Boundary (ft.). This field is empty if the calculation does not have enough

parameters or the user has no authorization to run Arc Flash Analysis based on IEEE 1584-2002
Standards.

determined from the User-Defined Incident Energy and Fault Clearing Time. The unit of this field is in
feet.

The Hazard/Risk Category (protective equipment class) is determined based on the User-Defined incident
energy for the bus. The possible categories are, 0,1,2,3 and 4. Table 130.7 (C)(11) of NFPA 70E-2009 is
used for the energy levels for each category. This value is empty unless the calculation is performed and
you have logged into the current project with the access level to run the Arc Flash Module. The value
may also be empty if the calculated value exceeds the maximum limit for category 4 of NFPA 70E 2004
(40 Cal/cm2).
Allowable Incident Energy Exposure

In the Allowable field, you can define the incident energy rating of the personal protective equipment
(PPE). This value should be the rating of the equipment with the least protection. The units are in
Cal/cm2. This value is compared automatically by the global arc flash calculation to the calculated
incident energy. If the calculated value exceeds the available PPE protection, the module generates an
alert.
Working Distance
This group provides information about the working distance to be used for the calculation of the incident
energy.
Enter the distance from the possible arc point to the person in inches. This distance is defined as the
distance between the arc point and the persons face and torso. This value has a range of 1 to 999.99 in.
This is the distance value used to determine the incident energy. The default value is dependent on the
voltage level of the device and the equipment type selected in the rating page of the bus editor. When a
new bus is added to the one line diagram, the default equipment type is Other and the default working
distance is set to 18. Once the equipment type is changed, the default value will change according to the
typical values used which are based on IEEE 1584-2002 Table D.7.4. Open the Arc Flash Analysis Data
table to view the working distance values used for the voltage ratings and equipment types.

Note: The Arc Flash Analysis Data table is located in the Project menu under Settings
Arc Flash. Refer to Chapter 10 Menu Bars Section One-Line Diagram Menu Bars for more details.
TCC Plot / Print Label

This section allows you to generate labels or plot the incident energy curves on ETAP Star.
Calculated Input
The system calculated radio box determines what data is to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label and
what energy is to be displayed on the TCC plot. If this option is selected all the corresponding calculated
User-Defined Input
The user-defined radio box allows you to use the user-defined data to generate labels or to show the user-
defined incident energy curve on the TCC. If this option is selected all the corresponding user-defined
Template
This drop-down list allows the user to select the template to be used to generate the Arc Flash Label for
the particular bus. There are several templates available generating the labels. Each one of the templates
has different styles.
Print

The print button starts the Crystal Report viewer. From this viewer, you can a print the generated label for
the same bus.
TCC Plot-Calculated or User-Defined Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the system calculated or user-defined incident energy curve as it
varies over time and fault current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the
corresponding curve will appear on the Star View that contains the same bus.
The curve that appears on the Star View is a function of the incident energy and the parameters that vary
are the time and current. If the incident energy value is kept constant, then any combination of FCT and
bolted fault current that falls below this curve yields an incident energy value that is lower.
TCC Plot-Allowable Energy

This checkbox allows you to display the Allowable Incident Energy Curve as it varies over time and fault
current in the ETAP Star View TCC. If you select this checkbox, the corresponding curve will appear on
the Star View that contains the same bus.
Methodology for Quick Incident Energy Calculator
Method Used
For buses in the range of 0.208 kV to 15.0 kV, the empirically derived IEEE Std. 1584 Method is used.
For buses with kV greater than 15, the Theoretically Derived Lee Method is used. ETAP automatically
determines which method is being used according to the bus nominal voltage (Bus Info page).
Range of Operation
These calculations follow the methodology described in IEEE 1584-2002. The same limitations of this
method apply to the quick incident energy calculator.
1. If any of the following: the Bus Nominal kV, Bolted Fault Current or Fault Clearing Time are set
to zero the calculation is not triggered, and there are no displayed results. This applies to either
set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
2. If the bus nominal kV is less than 0.208 kV, this message is displayed: Lee Method is used
outside empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and
Calculated).
3. If the bolted fault current is outside the range of 0.7 kA to 106 kA and the bus nominal kV is
between 0.208 and 15 kV the following message is displayed: Lee Method is used outside
empirical method range. This applies to either set of parameters (User-Defined and Calculated).
4. If the fault current decay method is used (AF page of SC study case), then only the source PD ID
and the FCT are updated into the calculated results section.
5. If the user-defined source PD is selected, then there are no results updated into the calculated
section. The only item which may be updated is the arcing current variation flag (for systems
rated less than 1.0 kV) if applicable.
6. If you are using global Arc Flash parameters like the working distance, gaps between conductors

7. You have set the option Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source systems = True.
If the IEEE 1584-2002 Arc Flash Method is not licensed, the calculation is disabled, and you will need to
contact Operation Technology, Inc. to get authorization to run this program.
The printing of labels is ruled by the Crystal Reports viewer, which has different export capabilities. You
may need to export the labels to a different file format that is compatible with your label printer. You may
choose to print the labels as templates that can be provided to a label making company.
The following table shows the parameters required to run an arc flash calculation in the Bus Arc Flash
page.
Table 8: Required Parameters for Bus Arc Flash Calculation
Info Page Rating Page Arc Flash Page
Bus Nominal KV Equipment Type Total 3-Phase Fault Current
Gap Between Conductors Fault Clearing Time(FCT)
X-Factor System Grounding
Working Distance

Arc Flash Analysis Short-Circuit Study Case
18.2 Short-Circuit Study Case

The Short-Circuit Study Case has two pages dedicated to Arc Flash Analysis. The structure of the Arc
Flash page is shown below:
Method
This section is used to select which method to use when determining the incident energy for a faulted bus.
The NFPA 70E option uses the equations listed in their 2009 edition. The IEEE 1584 option uses the
equations listed in IEEE 1584-2002, but still uses sections of NFPA 70E-2000, 2004, and 2009 for
determining the Hazard/Risk Categories 0-4 (category, -1 not used by ETAP).
Operation Technology, Inc. 18-24 ETAP 7.5 User Guide

NFPA 70E 2009

If this option is selected, the arc flash hazard calculation will be performed according to incident energy
equations listed in the NFPA 70E-2009 Standard.
Note: The remaining options in the Arc Flash page are hidden if this option is selected. The remaining
options apply only to IEEE 1584-2002. When this option is selected, the look up table from previous
versions will be generated as a result of running arc flash. There is no difference between this version and
the 4.7.6 version except for the new equation for open air equipment added in the 2004 version (Annex D
section D.7). Also note that the symmetrical current is used for this calculation.
IEEE 1584
If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Hazard Calculation will be performed according to the IEEE 1584-
2002 and IEEE 1584a- 2004 equations.
Arc Current Variation %

Enter the arcing current variation in percent (0 to 30%). The Arc Flash Program will consider the arcing
current reduction factor for determining the Fault Clearing Time. The default value for this field is 15%
(or 85% of the original value), but ETAP provides a more flexible analysis tool by allowing you to
analyze the variation up to 30% if desired.
The arc current variation takes the original 100% of Ia value and the reduced Ia value to determine two
Fault Clearing times (FCT). The incident energy is calculated based on both sets of parameters and the
one which produces higher incident energy is selected as the set of values to be reported by ETAP. In
other words, the Arc Flash Program Reports the set of values which yield the higher incident energy (i.e.,
85%Ia and its corresponding FCT or 100%Ia and its corresponding FCT). The program shows in the
reports and the one-line diagram which set of values has been used to determine the incident energy.
Note: The arcing current variation is not considered for faulted buses with nominal kV > 1.
Bus Fault Current

This group of the Arc Flash page indicates the source of the bolted fault current to be used for the Arc
Flash Hazard calculations. ETAP uses the bolted fault current to determine the arcing current to be used
in the determination of the incident energy.
User-Defined (Bus Editor)

Use the Bus Editor User-Defined Fault Current to perform the incident energy calculation. The arc flash
calculation will use all the User-Defined values in the Bus Editor to perform the calculation. ETAP will
only report the bus information along with calculated cal/cm2, boundary and risk category (similar to the
bus quick incident energy calculation).
If this option is selected, some of the options on the editor no longer apply since an actual short-circuit
calculation may be needed to determine or apply such options. The unavailable options are those related
to the calculated short-circuit current, automatic determination of the FCT and updating of the short-
circuit and FCT results back to the faulted buses.
Calculate
Calculate the bolted fault current by means of a short-circuit calculation and use the calculated short-
circuit bolted fault current values in the arc flash calculation.

3-Phase
Calculate the arc flash results at every faulted 3-phase bus. Select whether to use symmetrical cycle 3-
phase (momentary) fault current, symmetrical 1.5 to 4 cycle 3-phase (interrupting) fault, or the fault
current decay to determine the fault clearing time and incident energy level when running an Arc Flash
analysis on 3-phase buses.
1-Phase
If the 1-Phase option is selected, then the program will calculate the arc flash results for the buses
connected below UPS, Phase Adapters and Panels. ETAP will only calculate Arc Flash results for the
elements selected under the Panel/UPS/1Ph Subsystem section on the Info page. If single phase is
selected, ETAP will use the initial symmetrical half cycle bolted short-circuit current to determine the
arcing current.
Symm. Cycle
If this option is selected, ETAP will use the symmetrical cycle 3-phase (momentary) fault current to
determine the fault clearing time and the incident energy.
Symm. 1. 5 to 4 Cycle
If this option is selected, the module will use the symmetrical 1.5 to 4 cycle 3-phase (interrupting) fault
current to determine the fault clearing time and the incident energy for medium voltage elements (above
1.0 kV).
Fault Current Decay

When this option is selected, ETAP will automatically consider motor and generator current decay for the
calculation of the arcing current and fault clearing times. ETAP will use changing arcing current values to
determine the final protective device fault clearing time (FCT). The program determines automatically the
subtransient, transient and steady-state bolted fault currents and uses these currents to determine the
equivalent arcing currentd and final fault clearing time (by integrating the three equivalent arcing
currents).
Steady-State Ibf at
This input field holds the time value in cycles at which the arc flash program will assumme a steady-state
bolted short-circuit current in order to determine the equivalent arcing current. At this time, the program
will assumme that all motor contribution has completely decayed and that the generator contribution is at
a steady state value. This option is hidden unless the option Gen Current Decay has been selected.
Syn. Gen Steady-State Ibf

Select whether to limit the steady-state bolted fault current to a global user-defined value (for all
generators) or have ETAP determine the steady-state bolted fault current based on each generators
decrement curve.
Limit Gen Ibf to

This option allows the program to assumme steady-state short-circuit contribution from synchronous
generators assumming a current boost or forced sustained current value. The systained short-circuit

contribution in %FLA is used to detemine the steady-state arcing current values coming from the
generator.
Determine from Decrement Curve

Specify the generator contribution at steady-state conditions based on its equivalent impedance. This
equivalent impedance is determined based on the generator decrement curve. Please note that the
decreement curve of the generator may already contain sustained field forced current and thus the
program will account for it automatically.
Motor Contributions
This section allows the user to define the time (between 5 & steady-state time which is typically 30
cycles) at which ETAP will not consider motor contribution for the calculation of the incident energy and
allows the user to remove small motor contributions from the simulation. These options are available if
the Fault Current Decay is used to determine the incident energy and fault clearing time.
Remove after
Check the box to remove the motor contribution from the calculation of the incident energy at a time in
between four cycles and the user-defined value for steady-state current conditions. This time value in
cycles has to be higher than 4 cycles and smaller or equal to the steady-state time value defined in the
Bolted Fault Current section.
Please notice that the program will assumme motor current decay at cycle, 1.5 to 4 cycle and at the
final steady-state current value (this value is set to 30 cycles by default). This current contribution decay
is automatically considered in the calculation of the fault clearing time.
Please also note that by default the time value at which the program assummes the motor contribution has
decayed to negligible values is 30 cycles and this happens to be the same default value for the steady-state
current simulation time.
Exclude if Motor
Check this option to entirely exclude small motors from making any contributions to the arcing fault
currents regardless of time (i.e. these small motors are not considered to make any contributions at the
cycle current calculation or any time after that). This value is entered in either Horsepower or kilowatts.
Please note that this option applies to motor loads and lumped loads with motor load ratings in kW less
than the limit.
Set Hazard Cat for LV Equipment

Specify how certain low voltage equipment arc faults should be handled since the equations in NFPA 70E
2009 may not yield adequate results for such locations (i.e. the results could be over conservative using
the IEEE 1584 2002 equations which are included in the NFPA 70E anned D).
Voltage 208 and Xfmr 125 kVA

Identify which transformers have relatively low voltage and relatively low kVA (bolted current capacity)
and thus have a small likelihood of being capable of generating arc flash incidents. Once the check box is
enabled, if any equipment has voltage ratings and is fed from a transformer rated less than 125 kVA (or
less), then the program will automatically assign a hazard category to the faulted equipment. This can be
Category 1 or 0.

Cat 0 if Ibf 5 kA
If this box is selected, you can define which bolted current is the limit to define a Category 0 for the arc
flash hazard for the faulted equipment. You can enter a value which is smaller than the category 1 Ibf
value. This option allows you greater flexibility to define at which point the engineer feels comfortable to
automatically set the risk as cat 0.
Cat 1 if Ibf 10 kA
If this box is selected, you can define which bolted current is the limit to define a Category 1 for the arc
flash hazard for the faulted equipment. You can enter a value which is higher than the category 0 Ibf
value. This option allows you greater flexibility to define at which point the engineer feels comfortable to
automatically set the risk as cat 1. The maximum value which can be entered is 15 kA.
Note: In the options above, Ibf refers to:
Ibf for 1-phase faults

Ibf or Ibf for 3-phase faults depending on Ibf value selected from the bolted fault current
section.
Ibf for these options never stands for steady-state bolted fault current.
Protective Devices (PD)
Total Bus Fault Current

This option allows you to use the Total Arcing Current for calculating the incident energy. Note: The Arc
Flash Program uses the FCT of the source protective device that clears the fault at this location. ETAP
also differentiates between source and load protective devices. The energy for each is calculated using a
different approach (See the Calculation Methodology section for more details). This option is set as
default in the Study Case since it yields more conservative results and is automatically used if Fault
Current Decay is selected for the calculations.
Maximum Through Fault Current

This option allows you to use the Maximum Through Arcing Current through a PD when calculating
the incident Energy.
Please note that this option is no longer used in ETAP 7.0.0 since this version now has the more
advanced decay method plus other options to account for the decay in current contribution.
Note: The program uses the FCT of the source protective device that clears the fault at this location (See
the Calculation Methodology section for more details). The program also differentiates between source
and load protective devices when this option is selected.

This group of the Arc Flash page allows you to set the Study Case options related to the determination of
the Fault Clearing Time.
Auto Select Source PD FCT from TCC

If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Module will automatically determine the FCT from the available
TCC curves of the source protective devices that can clear the fault. If no element TCC information is
available, ETAP will display the message FCT not determined.

If there is more than one protective device that needs to open to clear the fault, ETAP will select the FCT
of the element that takes the longest to open.
User-Defined Source PD (Bus Editor)

If this checkbox is selected, the Arc Flash Program will determine the Fault Clearing Time (FCT) based
on the User-Defined Source Protective Device defined in the Bus Arc Flash page. The program calculates
the FCT automatically for those buses that do not have a selection. If this option is not checked, the Arc
Flash Program will automatically calculate the FCT for all the faulted buses.
Limit Maximum FCT

This option allows you to set a maximum fault clearing time for all the buses. If the FCT determined is
longer than this value, then it will be clipped to this value. The program determines the incident energy
based on the maximum FCT if the actual FCT exceeds it. This maximum FCT value applies to both the
Bus and Source Protective Device FCT Incident Energy Calculations.
In some situations only the FCT for a fault at a source PD may exceed this value. In this situation only the
FCT for a fault at the source PD should is clipped to the Maximum FCT. The FCT for the bus is
unaffected in this case. There is a flag in the Analysis and Summary Reports which indicates that there is
a clipped value for the faulted bus FCT or source PD FCT. Please see the report section to see this flag.
The default of this value is 2 seconds.
Limit Maximum FCT field in Seconds.

Enter the maximum FCT allowed to determine the incident energy for any element in the system (Buses
and Source Protective Devices). The range is from 0.01 to 99 seconds. The default value is 2 seconds.
User-Defined FCT
If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Module will use the FCT values specified in the Bus Editor Arc
Flash page to calculate the incident energy for all the buses in the system. If this option is selected, the
program does not apply the arcing current variation nor update the FCT to the bus Arc Flash page (these
options are grayed out).
Update Buses
This section allows you to specify to the module which calculated parameters to update to the Bus Editor
Arc Flash page. You can choose to update the total bus fault current (bolted and arcing), the system
grounding configuration determined from the one-line diagram and the calculated FCT.
Fault Currents
If this box is checked, then the arc flash calculation will update all the buses in the system with the
calculated bolted arcing fault current values. Please note that the fault currents will not be updated if the
fault current decay method is used.
FCT
If this box is checked, the module will update the FCT (determined from TCCs) value into the Bus Editor
Arc Flash page.
Grounding
If this box is checked, the module will update the calculated system grounding configuration to the Bus
Editor Arc Flash page.

Exceptions on the Arc Flash Page

Depending on the calculation methodology that you select, certain options are not enabled. The following
table gives you a list of all the features which are enabled with for each calculation method:
Method Features Not Available

Fault Current Decay All features can be used
Cycle Motor contributions options are not available
AC decay options are not available
1.5 to 4 Cycle Motor contributions options are not available
1-Phase Arc Flash Motor contributions options are not available
IEC Method Motor contributions options are not available
Set Hazard Cat for LV Equipment options are not available
User-Defined Hazard/Risk Cat Set Hazard Cat for LV Equipment options are not available.
You must use NFPA 70E categories if you want to use this
option.
Please note that the editor will hide the options automatically as the example below shows you when you
select the Cycle method:

18.2.2 AF Data Page

Set the options for the selection of global or individual AF input data for the calculation. Also select a
global selection for the standard that defines the hazard risk categories and PPE ratings you want to use
for the arc flash study.
Gaps, X-factor, Working Distance

Select the source of the arc flash paramters to be used in the global AF calculation. The data can be
defined in every single bus or it can be selected for all the buses depending on the nominal voltage of the
equipment from a global location. Under Project Settings Arc Flash, the Arc Flash Analysis Data table
is used to determine the values for the each parameter if global is selected.
Individual (Bus Editor)

If this option is selected, the program will use the gaps, x-factors and working distances defined in each
bus editor.
Global
If this option is selected, then the program will use the gaps, x-factors and working distances as defined in
the Arc Flash Analysis Data editor. The option to use the default typical IEEE 1584 2002 values can be
selected to use the read-only values from the data editor. If the user-defined option is used, the user has
the option to globally define gaps and working distances and use these gobal user-defined parameters in
the calculation.
This option presents a tremendous adavantage since it may reduce the data entry requirements for all
similar equipment is your system. In essence all you have to define for each individual bus is the Bus

Nominal KV and the Bus Equipment type (i.e. MCC, Switchgear, Open air, etc). Once you define this for
every bus, you can globally control the rest of the arc flash parameters to be used in the global arc flash
calculation.
Note 1: PLEASE NOTE THAT IF THE INDIVIDUAL AF PARAMETERS ARE DIFFERENT AT THE
INDIVIDUAL BUSES, and the global values are different, then the results at the bus arc flash page
calculator may be different from the global af results. this is simply a result of making a different data
source selection for the required parameters.
Typical IEEE 1584 2002 / User-Defined

Select typical or user-defined global arc flash parameters.
PPE Hazard/Risk Categories

This section allows you to select the range of the different risk levels assessed by the module. There are
four basic options. You can toggle among the four options, but you can only select one at a time.
NFPA 70E 2000

If this option is selected the Hazard/Risk Categories will be determined based on NFPA 70E-2000 Table
3-3.9.3.
NFPA 70E 2004

130.7 (C)(11).
NFPA 70E 2009

130.7 (C)(11).
User-Defined Values
If this option is selected the Hazard/Risk Categories will be determined based on the user-defined
Hazard/Risk Categories specified through the project settings menu. This will allow up to 10 different
categories.
Note: The User-Defined category levels are defined according to individual user needs or for different
sites, but it is recommended that they meet or exceed the criteria of NFPA 70E.
System Grounding
The System Grounding group allows you to specify to the Arc Flash Program how to determine the
grounding configuration of the faulted buses.
One-Line Diagram Connection

If this option is selected, the Arc Flash Program automatically detects the faulted bus grounding
connection. The Arc Flash Program runs a grounding system check on the elements connected around the
faulted bus and depending on their grounding connection; the module will return a value of grounded or
ungrounded.
For example, a transformer connected 4.16/0.480 Delta/Wye-solid feeds a secondary bus at 0.480 kV.
The system is purely radial (no alternate source). If you run the Arc Flash Analysis on the secondary bus
and select the option One-Line Diagram Connection, ETAP will consider this bus as grounded for the
arc flash calculation.

Note: High and low resistance grounded systems are considered as ungrounded by the module. This is
according to IEEE 1584-2002 section 9.5.
User-Defined (Bus Editor)

If this option is selected, the module will use the User-Defined System-Grounding configuration specified
in the Bus Editor Arc Flash page.

Select the energy value to use to find the flash protection boundary. The default value is 1.2 cal/cm2. This
is based on the category 1 level from NFPA 70E 2009.
1.2 cal/cm^2
Select to use 1.2 cal/cm^2 as given by NFPA 70E 2009.
User-Defined EB
Enter a user-defined energy value to use to find the flash protection boundary. If your dafety program
requires everyone at all times to wear PPE rated for cat 1 or Cat 2, then based on engineering supervision,
the value of EB can be set to a higher value than 1.2. this will reduce the required flash protection
boundary to a smaller distance. The program only allows you to set this value to a maximum of 4.00
cal/cm2. As an example we can show the difference in the calculated flash protection boundary for two
cases:

As you can see the flash protection boundary is reduced by almost 50% if you set EB to 4.0 cal/cm2.
Shock Hazard Analysis

Configure the parameters used to display the shock hazards for the equipment to the working personnel.
The values of the different boundaries and glove protection is selected based on the nominal bus voltage.
Under Project Settings Arc Flash, the Shock Hazard Analysis Data table is used to determine the values
for the each parameter if global is selected.
Individual
If this option is selected, the program will use the approach boundaries defined in each bus editor.
Global
If global is selected, select to use the approach boundaries set by either NFPA 70E 2004, NFPA 70E
2009, or the User-Defined values as specified in the Shock Hazard Analysis Data table.
NFPA 70E 2004

Select to use the approach boundaries as defined by NFPA 70E 2004 table 130.2(C).
NFPA 70E 2009

Select to use the approach boundaries as defined by NFPA 70E 2009 table 130.2(C).

User-Defined
Select to use the user-defined approach boundaries as set from the Shock Hazard Analysis Data table.
Voltage Rated Gloves

Define which set of gloves to use for a particulat bus nominal voltage. The options allowed are ASTM D
120-02a (2006) or User-Defined. The user-defined option would allow the user to specify a higher glove
class to be used for certain equipment.
Note: Both of these options are global sets of data. There is no individual bus definitions for them.
ASTM D 120-02a (2006)

Select to use the class level for the gloves used as defined by ASTM D 120-02a (2006).
User-Defined
Select to use the class level for the gloves used as defined by the user-defined settins in the Shock Hazard
Analysis Data table.

The adjustment page only has one option related to AF, but it is an important option. It allows you to
configure the program to run arc flash calculations using the maximum and minimum impedance
tolerances.
Apply Pos. Tolerance and Max. Temp. for ANSI Min. Short-circuit & Arc Flash
If you select this option, the program will set all impedance tolerances to a positive value. This means that
you will get a smaller fault current magnitude. This will tend to reduce the arcing currents. It is possible
that the worst case incident energy may occur when the system provides minimum short-circuit currents
because of the inverse overcurrent characteristic of several protective devices. A small reduction in the
arcing current may significantly increase the fault clearing time and thus the fault would release energy
for a longer time.
It may be a good idea to combine the positive tolerances option with the configuration which yields
minimum short-circuit currents in order to estimate smaller fault current magnitudes. This combination
should be considered when performing Arc Flash calculations.


This section describes the display of arc flash results on the one-line diagram (in Short-Circuit Mode).
The Arc Flash Display Options are shown below:
The type of 3-phase

fault that you selected
from the Arc Flash
Study Case Editor
Arc Flash results

shown on the one-line
diagram

Arc Flash Analysis Display Options
Fault Type
This section allows you to display the bolted/arcing fault currents for different types of faults on the one-
line diagram. This section also allows you to switch between the subtransient, transient and steady-state
fault currents when you run AF with the fault current decay method selected.
Logic for Fault Type Section

The display options shown in this section of the display options are determined based on the options
selected under the Bus Fault Current section of the AF page of the SC study case editor. The following
images illustrate this logic:
As can be seen by the image above, when you run the decay method, you can see six different sets of fault
currents displayed on the one-line diagram for any fault location. The AF program utilizes all six sets of
fault current to make the determination of the fault clearing time and the incident energy as the fault
currents reduce over time. Please note that all currents displayed are those obtained assuming that no
protective device operates and that the fault persists until steady-state conditions (i.e. 30 cycles or more).

The following relationships show how ETAP determines the individual arcing current contributions from
the bolted fault current values.
I "
I "= a * I " Subtransient arcingcurrentindividualcontribution
ac I " bfc
bf
I "
I '= a *I ' Transientarcingcurrentindividualcontribution
ac I " bfc
bf
I "
I = a *I Steady- statearcingcurrentindividualcontribution
ac I " bfc
bf
Where:
I " total subtransie nt arcing current

a
I ' total transient arcing current
a
I total steady - state arcing current (typically set to 30 Cycles)
a
I " subtransie nt bolted fault current individual contributi ons
bfc
I ' transie nt bolted fault current individual contributi ons
bfc
I steady - state bolted fault current individual contributi ons
bfc
I " total subtransie nt bolted fault current
bf
I ' total transient bolted fault current
bf
I total steady - state bolted fault current
bf
Ibfc, Ibfc and Ibfc values represent the individual subtransient, transient and steady-state bolted fault
contributions
Arc Flash
This group provides display options for calculated results from an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. The results
are provided for every faulted bus in the system. The program shows both the arcing current and the
equivalent bolted fault currents used to obtain them. The arcing currents are denoted as Ia and the bolted
fault currents are denoted as Ibf.
Incident Energy
If this checkbox is selected, the Arc Flash Module will display the calculated incident energy on the one-
line diagram for each faulted bus. The results are placed next to the faulted bus. The units for this value
are Cal/cm2.

FPB
If the FPB (Flash Protection Boundary) option is selected, the Arc Flash Program will display the
calculated Flash Protection Boundary on the one-line diagram. The results are placed next to the faulted
bus. The units for this value are ft.
Hazard / Risk
This is the Hazard / Risk Category assigned to each bus based on NFPA 70E or User-Defined criteria for
the amount of incident energy calculated at each bus. This is a simple integer number (0-10) and it has no
units. It is preceded by the word Category (for example, Category 3).
Total Arcing Current

This is the total arcing current calculated for each bus. This is the current used to determine the incident
energy at each bus. Its units are kA. It can be displayed in the same fashion as the total 3-phase fault
current for each bus. The arcing current is the same as the bolted fault current for buses with nominal
voltage > 15.0 kV.
Also note that the individual current contributions shown on the one-line diagram are not the arcing
current contributions, but the bolted fault current contributions. The individual arcing current
contributions are shown on the Arc Flash Analysis Crystal Reports for every bus.
Arc Flash Warnings Displayed on the OLD

The Arc Flash Program provides certain warnings on the one-line diagram. The warnings are:
1) The FCT not determined: This message indicates one of the following conditions:
a. The user-defined FCT is set to zero
b. The program failed to determine the bus FCT because there is no TCCs selected for the
source PDs.
c. There is no protection on the source branches.
d. The source protective device is outside the regular search area of the program (one way
to correct this issue is to go to Options (Preferences) and increase the default value across
from Bus Levels Away To Find Source PD).
2) Beyond NFPA 70E Cat. 4: This message indicates that the incident energy calculated is higher
than 40 Cal/cm^2. Either one of the following options must be selected from the Arc Flash page
of the Short-Circuit Study Case:
a. NFPA 70E 2000
b. NFPA 70E 2004
c. NFPA 70E 2009
3) Arcing Current Variation %Ia (Bus only): This message indicates that the incident energy was
determined based on the reduced arcing current value. This may indicate problems with the
coordination in the system or may be corrected with adjustments to the instantaneous pickup
setting of overcurrent protective devices.

Arc Fault Location

This group provides display options for calculated results from an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. The results
are provided for every faulted bus in the system. Select to determine whether arc flash results should
show at the selected location. The same Arc Flash Display Options apply if the IEC short-circuit
calculation is performed.
Bus Load PD
This check box allows you to show the arc flash analysis results for a fault right at the buses. Typically,
the incident energy results for a fault at the load protective device are set the same as those as the bus.
Source PDs
This check box allows you to show the arc flash analysis results for a fault right at source protective
device. Typically, the incident energy results for a fault at the source protective device are a lot worse
than those of the fault at the bus. ETAP automatically determines the results at the source protective
devices assuming that the source protective device itself is not capable of clearing the fault. Usually PDs
upstream from the source PD location end up operating to clear this kind of fault.
Load Terminals
This check box allows you to display the arc flash analysis results for a fault at the load terminal junction
box. ETAP calculates the load terminal fault for every load connected to a faulted bus.
This option is shown only if the Tools/Options (Preferences) Calc Load Terminal Fault Arc Flash entry
is set to TRUE. If the entry is set to False, the option is not displayed in the Arc Fault Location section of
the display options.
The image below shows the location of this preference entry:

The following image shows how the options under the Arc Fault Location section work. You can see that
for a fault at Bus21, the source PD faults, load terminal faults and bus results are all shown at the same
time. Please note that the results for a fault at the source PDs are more severe (higher energy) as expected.

Arc Flash Analysis Alert
18.4 Arc Flash Alert

The Arc Flash Alert is generated whenever the global arc flash calculation is performed. The only alert
available for the 5.5 release is the incident energy (calculated vs. allowable bus incident energy).
Alert View
The Alert View window will display according to the same rules that apply in short-circuit calculations.
The Automatic display option on the Short-Circuit Alert page determines if this window is opened
automatically after the arc flash calculation completes. You can open the Alert View by clicking the Alert
View button on the Short-Circuit toolbar.
Please note that the arc flash alerts only appear if you run the global arc flash calculation using the
Calculate short-circuit current option from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. If you select the
option User-Defined (Bus Editor) the alerts are not generated.
The format of the alert displayed is as follows:
Device ID
The ID of the faulted bus for which the arc flash calculation has found a critical violation

Arc Flash Analysis Alert
Type
The bus type according to its setting on the Rating page of the bus (for example, Panelboard, Switchgear,
Cable Bus, or MCC)
Rating
This is the available protection incident energy level from the Arc Flash page of the bus. The units are
Cal/cm2. The range is the same as the bus field.
Calculated
This is the calculated incident energy level at the faulted bus. This value is compared against the rating on
the Arc Flash page of the bus. Its units are Cal/cm2.
%Value
The percent value for the violation is 100%. This means that you only have critical alerts and those
appear whenever the calculated incident energy is higher or equal to the available protection rating value
in the Arc Flash page of the bus.
Condition
The condition reported for this alert is that the available PPE rating has been exceeded at the faulted
buses.
Phase Type
3-Phase only

Arc Flash Analysis Running Arc Flash Analysis
18.5 Running Arc Flash Analysis

The global arc flash calculation is started by clicking one of the arc flash calculation buttons on the Short-
circuit toolbar (either the ANSI or IEC version). This button runs an arc flash calculation for all the
faulted buses. You can perform a quick arc flash calculation for a single bus if you open the Bus Arc
Flash page that contains a Quick Incident Energy Calculator (See Section 18.2, Short-Circuit Study Case).
Setting Up the Short-Circuit Study Case
To open the Short-Circuit Study Case, click the button highlighted below:
Info Page
To begin, set up an arc flash calculation by selecting the buses to be faulted. You do this by right-clicking
the buses and selecting the Fault option while in Short-Circuit Mode. Or, you can open the Short-Circuit
Study Case, click the Info page, and select the buses to be faulted.
In general, an arc flash calculation depends on the Short-Circuit Analysis results. You can select the
different options for the short-circuit calculation. For Arc Flash Analysis, you want to get accurate, rather
than overly conservative, results. This means you should aim at running a calculation that yields realistic
values. Make sure to consider the equipment cables and overload heaters in the calculation.
Standards Page
The arc flash calculation can be performed using the ANSI or IEC 3-phase short-circuit calculation. You
can determine which standard you want to use to determine the short-circuit current by selecting the
appropriate option from the Standards page of the Short-Circuit Study Case.
Note: IEEE 1584 or NFPA 70E Standards are used to calculate the incident energy. Selecting the IEC
short-circuit calculation does not imply that the Arc Flash Analysis is performed based on any existing
IEC Arc Flash Standard except those standards used for short-circuit calculations. In future releases,
ETAP will implement IEC arc flash standards similar to the IEEE 1584 as they become available.
Please note that IEC and ANSI short-circuit results are different and this will cause the Arc Flash
Program to yield different results for each.
Arc Flash Page

There are two methods for running the arc flash calculation, the IEEE 1584-2002 and the NFPA 70E-
2004. You can select which method to use from the Arc Flash of the Short-Circuit Study Case. See the
Arc Flash page section of the Short-Circuit Study Case for a detailed description of the remaining options.
Note: If you select the NFPA 70E Method, you will only get the look up table report as an output of the
calculation. The remaining features are not supported for this method.
Starting the Global Arc Flash Calculation

To start the calculation, click the Arc Flash button on one of the Short-Circuit toolbars.

Arc Flash Analysis Running Arc Flash Analysis
ANSI Toolbar Arc Flash Calculation

Click the Arc Flash button on the ANSI Short-Circuit toolbar to run an ANSI Short-Circuit-based arc
flash calculation.
IEC Toolbar Arc Flash Calculation

Click the Arc Flash button on the IEC Short-Circuit toolbar to run an IEC Short-Circuit-based arc flash
calculation.

Arc Flash Analysis Calculation Methodology
18.6 Calculation Methodology
18.6.1 IEEE Standard 1584-2002 & IEEE 1584a 2004

The Empirically Derived model is used for voltages in the range of 0.208-15kV. The
Theoretically Derived Lee Model is used for voltage levels above 15kV and below 0.208 kV. The
Lee method is also used if the bolted fault current is outside the range 0.7 kA Ibf 106
The empirically derived model has a bolted fault current range of 0.7- 106kA.
Grounded and Ungrounded (high or low resistance) configurations are considered for faulted
buses with nominal voltage in the range of 0.208-15kV.
The Arc Flash Module determines the bolted fault current from the ETAP Short-Circuit Module.
The 3-phase and 1-phase fault current values are used. Depending on the voltage level and the
type of equipment, ETAP determines the Arc Fault Currents. Whenever the theoretically derived
Lee method is used, the arcing current is set the same as the bolted fault current.
ETAP uses the equipment type information from the Bus Editor Rating page to determine the
incident energy exposure values as a function of distance and location. The results are displayed
on the one-line diagram, the Bus Arc Flash page, AF Report Analyzer and in the Crystal Reports
(including labels).
18.6.2 NFPA 70E-2009 (not including the IEEE 1584 equations of

annex D.7)
The bolted fault current range for the formulae is 16-50 kA.
The calculation of the incident energy exposure is valid for enclosed system voltages below 600
and only for open air equipment when the voltage is greater than 600 Volts (see Annex D section
D.7 of NFPA 70E 2004).
This method does not consider the type of equipment and the distance factors. The output of the
module is in the form of a look up table.
Equations Used to Calculate the Arc Flash Results

The ETAP Arc Flash Analysis Module uses the equations listed in standard IEEE 1584-2002 / IEEE
1584a 2004 and NFPA 70E-2000 and 2004 versions. You can refer to those standards to get all the
equations used by the module.
ETAP does not use the equation listed in sections 5.6 and 5.7 of IEEE 1584-2002 for determining the
energy of protective devices (Current Limiting Fuses and Low Voltage Circuit Breakers). These equations
are not used since the module takes a more conservative approach by interfacing to the actual TCCs of the
devices available in ETAP Star. This is generally considered a more accurate approach and more
conservative for current limiting fuses.
Determination of the Arcing Current Contribution to a Faulted Bus

Once the bolted short-circuit current is calculated by the Short-Circuit Analysis Module, the arcing
current is determined using the equations listed in IEEE 1584-2002. (See the previous section.) The
following steps are taken to calculate the individual arcing current contributions:
1. The total bus bolted short-circuit current is used to calculate the total bus arcing current.

2. The individual arcing currents are determined by distributing the arcing current proportionally
between all the contributing sources (branches, motor loads, sources, etc.).
3. The arcing current contribution ends up being proportional to the calculated bolted short-circuit
contribution.
The following diagram illustrates the process:
Short-circuit contributions
(not the arcing current
contributions)
The total bolted fault current is equal to 33 kA. The total arcing current is equal to 31.36 kA. In this case,
the arcing current distribution is as follows:
Arcing Current Distribution

Bolted SC % of Total Bolted
PD Total Arcing Current (kA)
(kA) (kA)
CB12 15.13 45.85 14.38
CB23 0.623 1.89 0.59
CB4 16.72 50.67 15.89
Cable 4 0.489 1.48 0.46
Only the current magnitudes are considered for the arc flash calculation. Note: For buses with
nominal voltage greater than 15.0 kV, the arcing current contributions is the same as the bolted
fault current.
The arcing currents or bolted fault currents can be displayed on the one-line diagram. To display the
calculated arcing currents on the one-line diagram, simply open the short-circuit display options editor
and select to show the arcing current values (denoted by Ia-Arcing currents) as shown in the image below.

The image above shows the displayed arcing current values based on the fault current decay method being
selected to execute the calculation. ETAP has three different methods to determine the arcing current
contributions. The methods are the Cycle method, 1.5 to 4 Cycle method and the Fault Current Decay
method.
Half Cycle Current Method

This method utilizes the cycle (subtransient) bolted fault current (Ibf) to determine the arcing current
contributions (Ia). Typically this method will yield conservative results for fast operating protective
devices (i.e. devices which operate in their instantaneous region). This is the case with most low voltage
systems. The arcing current determined from either IEEE 1584 equations or directly taken as the bolted
fault current (Lee method) is assumed to be constant throughout the duration of the arc fault.

1.5 to Four Cycle Current Method

This method utilizes the 1 to 4 cycle (transient) bolted fault current (Ibf) to determine the arcing current
contributions (Ia). Typically this method will yield conservative results for longer operating protective
devices (i.e. devices which operate in their inverse overcurrent region). This is the case with medium
voltage systems. The arcing current determined from either IEEE 1584 equations or directly taken as the
bolted fault current (Lee method) is assumed to be constant throughout the duration of the arc fault.
Fault Current Decay Method

This method is very different from the previous two arcing current calculation methods. The program uses
a combination of the subtransient, transient and steady-state short-circuit networks to determine the arcing
current values which would flow throughout the arc fault duration. The program is taking into
consideration the decay in asynchronous and synchronous machine short-circuit current contributions.
The program will determine first the subtransient bolted fault current (Ibf). It will also determine the
transient bolted fault current (Ibf) and finally the steady-state bolted fault current (Ibf). ETAP
manipulates these three values to determine the equivalent Ia, Ia and Ia values which flow in the actual
arc fault event.
In low voltage systems, the change from Ia to Ia to Ia is not very high and thus the cycle method and
the fault current decay methods may yield very similar results for the majority of systems. However in
medium voltage systems with a lot of asynchronous (induction) motor contributions and also with large
generators contributions, the decay from Ia to Ia may be significant. This significant decay in current
allows you to model a slower operation of protective devices which in turn may significantly increase the
operating time of protective devices.
Also, another benefit of the fault current decay method is its removal of arc fault contributions from
motors. This allows the estimation of a more accurate amount of incident energy release. This may have a
significant impact for systems which have a large number of motor loads.
The subtransient and transient fault currents are obtained using the typical cycle and 4 cycle networks
as described in Chapter 15 (Short-circuit calculation methods). The steady-state short-circuit currents are
obtained typically at 30 cycles (this is the default value, but this can be user-defined). The following rules
apply to the determination of the steady-state arc fault currents:
1) No asynchronous motor contribution is considered pass the steady-state short-circuit time.
2) The synchronous generator contribution will be determined from its steady-state reactance (Xd) if
the generator has no decrement curve information available.
3) The synchronous generator contribution will be determined from its individual decrement curve if
the option Determine from Decrement Curve is selected from the Arc Flash page of the short-
circuit study case editor. Only the AC decay component is considered (no DC decay). The
program will determine the equivalent current contribution from the generator at the steady-state
time specified in the study case. Of course, the contribution of the generator to the fault is
determined taking into consideration the impedance of the system in between the fault and the
generator terminal bus. This means that the closer the faulted buses are to the generator terminal
bus, the bigger the decay in current contribution will be and the closer the current will be to the
one specified in the decrement curve.

4) The program will determine the synchronous generator steady-state arc fault current contribution
as a function of the generator full load ampere rating (Gen FLA) if the option Limit Gen Ibf to
is selected from the Arc Flash page of the study case. This feature allows you to specify what will
be the generator steady-state contribution for a fault at the generator terminals. This feature
mimics the forced excitation capability of certain generators to sustain a fault current level for a
few seconds to allow the operation of overcurrent protective devices. Please note that you may
accomplish the same by using the decrement curve feature as long as the decrement curve has
been configured to show the forced excitation steady-state current value (Imp/Model page
Compound Exc. Feature). In a sense, the Limit Ibf to feature is a quicker way to specify the
generator compound excitation contribution.
The following image shows the decrement curve for a generator with a steady-state fault current value of
371.9 amps or (100% FLA). This corresponds to a decrement curve option and the value of Xd = 100%.
The study case option that you would have to configure to obtain the generator steady-state current
contribution would be as shown below:

The steady-state current value is the only value obtained from the decrement curve. The steady-state time
in this case has been set to 103 cycles. The steady-state arcing current contribution is about 377 Amps.
The next image shows the same generator decrement curve, but this time with a forced excitation and a
sustained steady-state short-circuit current of 2.5*Gen FLA:

In the image above the grey color curve represents the compound excitation curve. This forces the current
to a steady-state arcing current value close to 938 A instead of the 377 A (previous case) as shown below:

The next images show that we can get similar generator steady-state arcing current contributions if we use
the global option Limit Gen Ibf to instead of configuring the compound excitation through the
decrement curve:
No excitation applied
Please note that the Ia contribution from the generator is 938 Amps (same as previous case). Please note
that the Limit Gen Ibf to option is a global option and it sets all generator contributions to the same
forced current value whereas the decrement curve option applies to individual generators. Of course this
may not be too much of a problem since similar generator sizes and models are often used in generator
farms/plants.
IMPORTANT: The fault current decay method is not a full transient solution (continuous fault current
calculation). It only determines three fault current values (subtransient, transient and steady-state). The
fault clearing time and the incident energy are determined by integration of these fault current values as
described in the next sections. The purpose of this method is to allow closer simulation to more complex
power system; however, the full transient behavior is not modeled yet and is left for future releases of the
program. This method will yield good approximations for calculating the decay of energy in most power
systems.

Determination of the Fault Clearing Time (FCT) from ETAP Star

The FCT is one of the major factors which affect the calculation of the incident energy. The FCT is the
time required to clear the fault (arc to get extinguished by an opening protective device). This time is
determined from the time current characteristic curves (TCCs) or the definite times of each protective
device that is considered to be a source protective device (source PD)
ETAP classifies protective devices (PDs) as of two types. The first and most important are the source
PDs. These are the devices that energize the faulted bus, and once disconnected, completely isolate the
system from any power source. The other type of protective devices is Load PDs. These are the PDs
which carry power to the loads or subsystems connected to a faulted bus, but do not provide power from a
source (i.e., synchronous generator or power grid).
ETAP takes the most conservative approach when determining the fault clearing time (FCT). If there are
several parallel source PDs feeding the bus, it will select the longest FCT (or the time at which the last
source PD opens). If there is multiple source PDs in series on the same branch, it will take the shortest
opening time of such PDs. The FCT is then used to calculate the incident energy for the bus and load
PDs.
The process of obtaining the fault clearing time is dependent on the method selected to determine the
results. For 3-phase and 1-phase calculation methods with the and 1.5 to 4 cycle methods, the process
is relatively simple. The program determines the arcing current contribution passing through each source
PD and based on its TCC settings, the program automatically determines the estimated fault clearing time
of each PD. For these methods, a single current is obtained and plotted on a TCC to determine the trip
time or total clearing time (fuses). Image 1 shows the process for a simple radial system:

The arcing fault current obtained using the half cycle method is 14.8 kA. This value is held constant over
the duration of the arc fault. The fault clearing times for CB22 and CB23 are taken from the curve at the
highest possible value as shown in the image.
The same process as shown in the previous image would apply if you were using the 1.5 to 4 cycle fault
current method except that the current magnitude would be slightly smaller.
The process of obtaining the fault clearing time is more complicated for the fault current decay method.
As mentioned in the previous section, the fault current decay method calculates three arcing current
values. These values represent a changing short-circuit current value. In order to determine the response
of the source protective device the program needs to account for the inverse overcurrent effect of
protective devices. This means that the higher the current the faster the travel time or melting point of a
fuse will be reached. This requires integration over the three current values which are calculated by ETAP
using the equation given below:
IEEE Std C37.112-1196 equation (3)
T0 is the operating time of the overcurrent device. The function t(I) represents the fault clearing times.
In ETAP T0 can represent the trip time of an overcurrent relay or the total clearing time of a fuse. The
same equation is used for all time-inverse overcurrent protective devices. The following plot illustrates
the concept used by the fault current decay method.

As can be seen in the image above, the subtransient fault current is held constant for 4 cycles, the
transient current is held constant between 5 cycles and the steady-state current time (typically 30 cycles).
The final steady-state arcing current is held constant until the fault is cleared. The image below illustrates
this concept. Of course in this image, the initial fault current values are not high enough to cause the
overcurrent device to operate.
The fault clearing time obtained from equation 3 will most likely predict a clearing time which is shorter
than the longest possible clearing time.
The determination of the fault clearing time is bound by several special rules and assumptions for
different types of protective devices. Also the program can determine the fault clearing time if it can find
it within a specified range or electrical distance from the fault location.
The following applies to the process of determining the FCT at a fault location:
ETAP determines the FCT for a faulted bus by searching up to 20 branch levels away from the
faulted bus. The program will search for source PDs as far away from the fault location as
specified in the option Bus Levels Away To Find Source PD. This option can be configured
from the project preferences window under the Arc Flash section.

The default value of the Bus Levels Away To Find Source PD entry is 10. The maximum level
is 20. It is recommended that this entry be left as default unless the protection for the faulted bus
resides in location that is more than 10 branch levels away (reducing this number speeds up the
calculation). If you know that the protection for all the buses can be found within 5 or less bus
levels away, then reducing this number of levels to search may speed up the calculation
considerably. The following image illustrates the concept of the bus levels away search for source
protective devices:
The protective devices circled in red color are considered part of the protective devices for a fault
at the location indicated above.
If ETAP cannot determine the FCT for any of the connected source protective devices which are
capable of de-energizing the fault, then it displays a warning message on the one-line diagram
and reports FCT not determined.
Protective devices which are considered as Load PDs are not considered in the determination of
the FCT for the bus; however they are considered when you decide to analyze arc faults at the
load terminals. Load PDs are not considered for determining the bus FCT since such devices
cannot isolate the fault at the bus. ETAP considers the Load PD contribution and decay in motor
current according to ANSI and IEC Standards. For example, in the Image below PDs CB16 to
CB18 are not considered in the determination of the FCT, but their contributions are considered
in the determination of the incident energy for a fault at the bus Bus11 as shown below.

Directly connected load

PDs are not considered
when determining the
FCT of the bus (However,
these devices are
considered for load
Protective devices need to have their proper TCC curves selected from the ETAP Library to be
considered in the determination of the FCT. The reason for this requirement is to limit human
error when entering settings into a protective device editor directly. Also the analysis is far more
accurate if you use the actual TCC curves.
If a High Voltage Circuit Breaker is used to clear the fault, then it must be interlocked to a relay
which has the proper current transformer connections and has been selected from the Star relay
library. If any of these elements is missing, then ETAP will not find the FCT for this device.
Other examples of this situation include Low Voltage Breakers which are shunt tripped by relays.
The same is true for switches and contactors operated by relays.
Overcurrent relays cannot operate faster than one cycle. This has been done to keep conservative
results according to IEEE 1584 guidelines. This rule is applied even if the manufacturer TCC
shows no delay for this instantaneous part of the relay or if the instantaneous response is between
zero and 1 cycle. Typical operating times for overcurrent relays should be at least 10 msec.
Fuse total clearing time cannot be less than 0.010 sec. This has been configured per IEEE 1584
guidelines. If the fuse does not have a total clearing time curve (i.e., only average time), the
program applies a 10 or 15% additional time from the average melt time determined from the
manufacturer fuse curve.
The determined FCT may be a combination of several steps involved before the device can
actually open and clear the arc fault. For example for a HVCB may have a rating interrupting
time of three cycles. The Arc Flash Module knows this and will combine this with the actual relay
trip time plus any other possible delay(s). For LVCB, the following times are added on top of the
time determined from a relay (based on IEEE 1584-2002 Table).

Table 9: IEEE 1584-2002: Power Circuit Breaker Operating Timesa

Circuit Breaker Rating Opening Time Opening time Opening Time
and Type at 60 Hz at 50 Hz in Seconds
(Cycles) (Cycles)
Molded Case (<1000 V) 1.5 1.25 0.025
(Integral Trip)
Insulated Case (<1000 V) 3.0 2.5 0.050
(Integral Trip or relay
operated)
Power CB (<1000) (Integral 3.0 2.5 0.050
Trip or relay operated)
a
None of the values listed in this table include the external trip time.
The search algorithm has certain limitations besides the number of levels away from the fault
location. The image below shows the protective devices along paths which energize the faulted
bus that the program can see because of the search limitation.

Also, in previous versions of the program, the arc flash source PD search could not go across
three-winding transformers. The image below shows the PDs which are now visible on the other
legs of 3-winding transformers:
You may also use the User-Defined Source PD from the Bus Arc Flash page to efficiently
determine the FCT. You may select the ID of the source PD that should be used for the
determination of the FCT (Bus Arc Flash page). You must also check the option User-Defined
Source PD (Bus Editor) from the Arc Flash page of the SC Study Case. ETAP will automatically
determine the arcing current passing through this protective device for a fault at the specified bus.
Based on this arcing current, the program finds the FCT and uses it to calculate the bus and load
PD incident energy. The following illustration shows the mechanism of the user-defined source
PD:

Bus Arc Flash Page for Bus1
Arc Flash page of SC Study Case
For the above system, Relay1 takes the longer time to trip in the event of a fault at Bus1. Once
you have selected the source PD, you can execute the arc flash calculation.
A contactor placed along a source branch can clear the fault if it is interlocked with a properly
configured relay. The Relay trip time and the dropout time of the contactor constitute the total
fault clearing time.
Switches can also be used as fault clearing source PDs, only if they are interlocked with a
properly configured relay.
Tie-Protective Devices placed in series cannot be considered to clear the fault for the same bus
level. Only those PDs that lay at least one branch or bus level away can be considered by the
program to be able to clear the fault at a source PD. Please see Image below:
CB10 will be
considered as the
CB134 will Fault Clearing PD
not be
considered as
the Fault
Clearing PD
for a fault at

ETAP is capable of modeling Recloser operation for arc flash. The FCT used for reclosers is
taken to be the total time the device remains closed on the fault for each TCC operation in the
sequence. For example, if the controller sequence is specified as 3 operations on the first TCC,
then the total fault clearing time would be three times the time for the 1st operation on the TCC as
shown in the image below:

Determination of Incident Energy

After the fault clearing times have been determined, the next step is to determine the incident energy for
the fault location. ETAP is capable of determining the incident energy for a fault at any location in the
equipment by simply specifying a fault at the bus. The locations are categorized as follows:
1) Fault at the main bus

2) Fault on the source protective devices
3) Fault on load protective devices (typically the same as the bus fault, but different in some special
cases).
4) Fault on load terminals connected directly to the faulted bus or connected through equipment
cables
The process of determining the incident energy is simple. The program will use equations [D.7.3(c)]
(empirical method) or [D.7.4] (theoretical method) depending on the bus nominal voltage and bolted fault
current value.
[D.7.3(c)]
[D.7.4]
The empirical method is used for the range of parameters specified by IEEE 1584 2002. The Lee method
is used for any system with voltage or bolted fault current outside the range of the empirical method.
The IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E 2009 guidelines do not address how complex electrical system with
multiple sources should be handled. These guidelines only indicate that the incident energy can be
determined based on the fault clearing time of the first upstream protective device which de-energizes the
fault. This methodology is simple enough for radial systems; however, there is no mention on how to
handle looped or meshed systems with multiple source protective devices energizing the fault location.
ETAP has two methods of handling the calculation of the incident energy for power systems which have
more than one energizing source protective device. The first method (existing method before ETAP
7.0.0) takes the total bus arcing current and determines the energy using the fault clearing time of the last
protective device to de-energize the fault. For most power systems having multiple sources, it is likely
that the operating time of each source is similar and thus it is acceptable to use the entire arcing current up
to the final fault clearing time.
The second method was added to ETAP 7.0.0 to handle those situations for which the first method is not
acceptable. Mainly the cases there multiple sources have very different trip times. The new method is
called Subtraction of Incident Energy for Multiple Source Systems. There is an ETAP Options
(Preferences) setting which needs to be set to True in order to activate this method. The following
image shows the entry and its location in the preferences editor:

For example, we can analyze a multiple source system and place an arc fault at Bus 5BM. Bus 5Bm is
fed from two different utility connections with source protective devices (HVCBs) 22 and 12. Each
breaker operates at different fault clearing times.

The difference in the operating times is caused by the different relay time dial settings as shown in the
following TCC:
The time difference averages about 2 to 3 seconds between the relay operations. In this case RelayA1
operates first (at approximately 1 second) and its arcing current contribution is removed at this time. This
constitutes almost 33% of the energy contribution to the fault location. The total incident energy
calculated with the removal of CB 12s contribution is nearly 80 cal/cm2 which is well above the
maximum value described for PPE in NFPA 70E 2009. By comparison if we were to run the same
calculation without using the incident energy subtraction method, the incident energy results would be as
shown in the images below:

The incident energy removed between 1 and 3 seconds (33% of the total fault current) amount to about 20
cal/cm2. The new result is nearly104 cal/cm2.
The previous calculations were executed using the cycle method with/out applying with incident
energy subtraction for the multiple sources. We can also use the fault current decay method to perform
the same calculation. Please note that the asynchronous machine contribution to the fault was nearly 2.0
kA and it comes from substation SUB 5B. This contribution constitutes the only AC decay component
of the fault since the source contributions from CB 22 and 12 come from utility connections and such are
always assumed to be constant.
The result obtained using the fault current decay method with the incident energy subtraction option
enabled is shown below:
Motor Loads

The decay from the asynchronous loads in substation SUB5B is also a significant decrease in the energy
calculation. The calculated energy is now down to nearly 68.9 cal/cm2. For this type of system, the fault
current decay method yields the least conservative results, however, its results should be the most
accurate of all the methods.
The fault current decay method produces many intermediate results. The intermediate results are arranged
according to the stage at which they occur. These intermediate values are usually denoted as E1, E2, E3,
FCT1, FCT2, FCT3, etc. The following table lists these intermediate values and provides a description of
the physical events they represent. These parameters are displayed in the Arc Flash Report Analyzer and
in the Arc Flash Analysis Reports. For the previous example we have the following parameters
generated:
Parameter Description Physical meaning

Incident energy
accumulated over the
first 4 cycles. It is
obtained using the
E1 subtransient fault current
contributions (Ia) from
every source in the
system.
Duration of the first No protective device operates during this stage. The FCT1
FCT1
stage value is set to 4 cycles.
Total subtransient arcing
Total Ia
current
Total subtransient bolted Used to estimate Ia.
Total Ibf
fault current
Incident energy
accumulated between 4
cycles and 30 cycles. It
is obtained using the
transient fault current
contributions (Ia) from
E2
every source in the
system. In our example
the reduction in energy
in this stage comes from
the reduced motor
contribution.
Duration of the second Typically 26 cycles if the steady-state time is set to 30
FCT2 stage. cycles. In our example only the motor contribution is
completely removed at the steady-state time.
Total transient arcing
Ia
current
Total transient bolted Used to estimate Ia.
Ibf
fault current

Incident energy
accumulated between 30
cycles and the final fault
clearing time. In our
example E3 is actually
the sum of two
E3 individual stages. The
motor contribution has
completely decayed in
this stage as can be seen
in the image.
Duration of the third In our example FCT3 is actually composed of two

stage individual stage durations. The first stage is set between 30
cycles to 1 second and the second stage time is set between
FCT3
1 sec and 3 seconds. The difference between these two
stages is that the current from CB 12 is removed as the
protective device operates
Total steady-state arcing The program always displays the total arcing currents for
current any stage; however, internally it may reduce the current for
any stage as each source protective device is de-energized.
Ia
This is the case for Ia for stage E3. It experiences the
reduction because of motor decay and because of CB 12s
operation.
Total steady-state bolted Used to estimate Ia.
Ibf
fault current
This is the sum of In our example the final FCT is determined as (FCT1 = 4
FCT1, FCT2 & FCT3 cycles) + (FCT2= 26 cycles) + (FCT3 = 150 cycles) =
Final FCT
and it represents the (Total Fault Duration = 180 cycles).
total arc fault duration.
This is the sum of E1, In our example the Total Incident energy = (E1=1.9) +
E2 & E3 and it (E2=11.5) + (E3=55.5) 69 cal/cm2. Any stage can be
Total Incident represents the total split into intermediate smaller stages, but such are not
Energy incident energy released reported by the program. In our example this is the case of
throughout the arc fault stage E3 which is internally split into two smaller stages
duration. which are not reported for simplicity.
For a description of all the calculation results displayed in the AF report Analyzer and AF analysis
reports, please refer to the AF Report Analyzer section of this chapter.
Source/Load PD Arc Fault Calculations

The previous examples described the calculation results for a fault at the Bus location. The same
methodology applies if the fault is located on the main protective device which energizes the bus or if it
happens on load protective devices connected to the bus. The difference in the calculation results are
summarized below:

1) In the majority of cases the results of faults on load protective devices are the same as those for
those on the bus. Only for certain cases in differential protection applications, the program may
yield different results for the load PDs (if the Pd is inside or outside the differential protection
zone as defined by the location of the current transformers in the circuit).
2) The fault location for source PDs is almost treated as a completely different fault location. The
results for a fault at the source PDs are in most cases much different than the results for a fault at
the bus.
The following image illustrates how ETAP calculates and displays the results at these locations.
The previous image shows that the program calculates independently the AF results at the source PD,
Load Pd, Bus and Load terminals by simply specifying a fault only on the bus. The results show that the
most dangerous area is the source PD arc fault and that the least dangerous location is the load terminal
box arc fault.

Load Terminal Arc Fault Calculation

ETAP Arc Flash gives you the flexibility to analyze hundreds of possible arc fault locations within the
same equipment without the need to add additional buses. This simple One Click and Fault operation
makes the Hazard Analysis far more efficient by reducing the setup time of the one-line diagrams, by not
having to use a large number of buses to represent every possible arc fault location. This feature works
seamlessly with the existing load equipment cable feature in ETAP.
In a power system, there could be hundreds of different arc fault locations within a large motor control
center or switchgear lineup. With this feature, the Arc Flash Program produces detailed analysis reports
for every faulted location and it can automatically generate AF labels for every incoming main circuit
breaker cubicle, load circuit breaker or for every load terminal point.
The Arc Flash Program can simulate arc faults at the load terminals of the following devices:
1) Induction Motors
2) Synchronous motors
3) Static Loads
4) MOVs
5) Capacitors
The following image illustrates the locations for which ETAP calculates the incident energy. The program
will calculate the incident energy at all of the locations shown below as long as the main bus (LV-MCC)
is faulted and the entries have been configured in the ETAP options (Preferences) Editor.
The load terminal arc fault simulation can be configured from the Options (Preferences) Editor by setting
the option Calculate Load Terminal Arc Flash = True.

Calculate Load Terminal Arc Flash

This entry specifies if the Arc Flash Program will calculate the incident energy in the event of an arc fault
at the load terminals. The default value is set to False and it means that the load terminal arc fault is not
considered. If you set this entry to True, then the program determines the incident energy results for arc
faults at the load terminals.
Load Terminal Arc Fault Equipment Type

This entry specifies what type of equipment to use to determine the arcing current for an arc fault at the
motor terminals. The default is Panelboard = 0. The remaining options are Cable Bus = 1, Open Air = 2,
MCC = 3, Switchgear, Switchboard, Switchrack = 4. The values of the Gap and distance X-factor
parameters used are typical values according to the equipment voltage.
The reason that the panelboard has been set to default for modeling the load terminal faults is that the
program is trying to simulate an arc fault in a small enclosure like a terminal box. The enclosures used by
the IEEE 1584 test group to develop the equations for panelboards were the smallest in size of all the
enclosures tested and thus they are the best fit.
The values of the Gaps and X factor used by the program to simulate the load terminal arc fault are listed
in the following table:
Table 10: Default values for Gaps between Conductors and X factors for Load Terminal Faults
Gap Default X factor
Equipment type*
Value (mm) Value
0.208 1.0 kV Open Air 40 2.000
0.208 1.0 kV Cable Bus 13 2.000
0.208 1.0 kV MCC 25 1.641
0.208 1.0 kV Other 13 2.000
0.208 1.0 kV Panelboard 25 1.641
0.208 1.0 kV Switchgear 32 1.473
0.208 1.0 kV Switchboard 32 1.473
0.208 1.0 kV Switchrack 32 1.473
>1.0 5.0 kV Open Air 102 2.000
>1.0 5.0 kV Cable Bus 13 2.000
>1.0 5.0 kV MCC 102 0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV Other 13 2.000
>1.0 5.0 kV Panelboard 102 0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV Switchgear 102 0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV Switchboard 102 0.973
>1.0 5.0 kV Switchrack 102 0.973

Gap Default X factor

Equipment type*
Value (mm) Value
>5.0 15 kV Open Air 153 2.000
>5.0 15 kV Cable Bus 13 2.000
>5.0 15 kV MCC 153 0.973
>5.0 15 kV Other 13 2.000
>5.0 15 kV Panelboard 153 0.973
>5.0 15 kV Switchgear 153 0.973
>5.0 15 kV Switchboard 153 0.973
>5.0 15 kV Switchrack 153 0.973
>15.1 - 36 kV N/A N/A N/A
The program can generate detailed report for every faulted load terminal or load protective device as
shown in the image below:
The program can automatically generate load terminal and load protective device arc flash labels once the
options have been configured.
Load CB Label Load Terminal Label

Differential Relay Handling for AF

ETAP allows you to model different types of differential relays like bus, line and transformer
differentials. The program allows you to determine the incident energy which could be released for an
internal arc fault while at the same time; the program still considers the locations which may be outside
(or external to the differential relay) protection zone. The following image illustrates a bus differential
relay.
Differential Relay Setup

The differential relay must be configured before it can be used for Arc Flash Analysis. The following
items need to be considered for properly configuring the differential relay to trip on internal faults, but not
on external faults.
1) The Current Transformer (CT) polarities must be pointing away from the element which they
protect. For example, if the relay is a bus differential, then all CT polarity markings must be
pointing away from the protected bus.

Bus Differential CT Polarity
Transformer Differential CT Polarity Configuration

2) All the CTs must be connected to the differential relay and all the circuit breakers must be
interlocked to the device as well.
3) The differential relay operating time must be specified. The default value is zero seconds.
However, it is recommended that you enter a value between 10 to 30 msec. This value should be
obtained from the relay manufacturer documentation and it should be applied in a conservative
fashion. The differential relay operating time may change depending on the severity of the fault.
The operating time of a differential relay may be a lot higher for unbalanced faults. The longest
possible operating time should be used.
4) The total fault clearing time for a differential relay will be the sum of the Operating time plus the
breaker time. In the case of three cycle breakers, the FCT = 0.020 + (3/60) = 0.070 sec.
5) The selection of Percentage or High Impedance from the Differential Type drop-down list does
not make any difference in the way the program determines if an arc fault is internal or external to
the differential relay. This field will be utilized in future versions of the Arc Flash Program as the
internal operation of the differential relay is modeled.
6) The Current Transformer (CT) turn ratio does not affect the operation of the differential relay, but
of course you should enter the turn ratios as configured in the actual device.
7) The calculation of the incident energy for the source protective devices internal to the differential
protection zone is dependent on the fault clearing time of external upstream protective devices.
See the image below:

8) Differential relay internal protection zones may be overlapped. That is, a protective device like a
circuit breaker can reside within the protection zone of two differential relays.

Maintanance Mode Switch

ETAP gives you the ability to simulate the operation of Maintenance Mode switches. Newer Solid State
Trip Units are being equipped by the manufacturer with special Maintenance Mode switches which allow
the override of the normal settings to use instead very fast operation settings with very low pickup values.
The purpose of these trip units is to override normal coordination settings while energized work is being
performed in order to minimize the fault clearing time.
The Arc Flash Program can easily be configured to simulate the incident energy which could be released
under Maintenance or Non-Maintenance conditions. In order to do this, the Maintenance Mode must be
enabled in the ETAP LVSST trip unit library as shown in the image below:
Next, you must select the device from the library for the each low voltage circuit breaker which has the
Maintenance Mode capability:

NORMAL
SETTINGS
CATEGORY 3 PPE
MAINT SWITCH ON
CATEGORY 0 PPE

Troubleshooting FCT not Determined Problems

There are several reasons why the Arc Flash Program may not determine the fault clearing time for a fault
at a particular bus or source protective device. The following are the seven most common issues which
can cause this message to be generated by the program:
1) There are no source protective devices properly configured to protect the arc fault location:
If you have not added the protective devices which actually de-energize the equipment in the
event of a fault, the program may display this error message. In the image below, the utility
connection does not have a protective device, and if there is a fault on the line side of the medium
voltage breakers, there is no physical protective device which can clear the fault. In this case, you
will see the FCT not determined message displayed on the one-line diagram, reports and arc
flash labels.
As you may see, there is no

protective device which can de-
energize the fault at Bus39.
2) The relay interlocks, Current Transformers (CTs) are missing or there is no data selected
from the library: Overcurrent, directional, differential and overload relay protective devices
require circuit breakers to clear the fault. ETAP can determine automatically which relay will trip
and in which order, but it needs you to specify which breaker is interlocked to the relay (which
breaker will be tripped by the relay selected by ETAP). The FCT not determined message will
be displayed as well if you did not select the protective device from the library. This applies to
LVCB, Relays, Fuses, etc.

For Relay48, there is no CT or

output circuit breaker
specified. Once you assign the
CT and breaker, the program
will consider this relays
output to determine the FCT
3) Arcing current is too Low and Source Protective Device does not trip: The arcing current
could be much smaller in magnitude than the available bolted short-circuit current for some
equipment (especially if the equipment is less than 1.0 kV). According to IEEE 1584 equations,
the arcing current may be less than the short-circuit current for systems up to 15 kV. Because of
this phenomenon, the protective devices may not trip at all under an arc fault (i.e., arcing current
is below the long time pickup). ETAP includes the arcing current variation automatically to
further reduce the calculated current. If ETAP detects that the source protective device does not
trip, then it will display the FCT not determined message. The following image shows you how
you can verify this:

1.
In the case of a fault at Bus30, the arcing current is too low on the primary side of Transformer
T9. To determine the arcing current on the primary of T9, take the ratio of the SC contribution
over the total SC current and multiply the total arcing current by this ratio.
(34.33 kA/35.3 kA) * 24.27 kA = 23.59 kA
Then convert to the primary base kV.
23.58 kA * (0.48kV/13.2kV) = 0.857 kA
At this time all that is left to determine is if indeed the calculated arcing current on the primary is
too low for Relay28 to trip. You can confirm this by plotting the relay on a Star view TCC. In
the TCC shown below, the red arrow indicates the arcing current value at the beginning of the
fault. This clearly shows that the relay does not trip.
Sometimes the protective device will still trip, but it will do so in a very long time since it is using
the 51(overcurrent protection section of the relay). In this case, ETAP may calculate a very high
incident energy value. If the cal/cm^2 exceed the limit of Category 4 (based on NFPA 70E), then
it will flag it on the one-line diagram by displaying the message Exceeds Max. PPE Arc Rating.
This is the case at Bus14 in the image above.

4) The Source Protective Device is outside the Search Branch Level Number: In order to reduce
the calculation speed and computer system requirements, certain limits are set by ETAP. The
limitation consists of reducing the number of levels required in the search of the source protective
device. The source protective devices are of course used to determine the Fault Clearing Time.
In previous versions of ETAP (prior to 5.5.0), the number of branch levels away to be searched
was set to 3. For some special systems, the protection would be placed more than three branch
levels away and thus a bigger search number would have to be specified. If the program did not
find all the corresponding source protective devices within 3 branch levels away, it would again
show the message FCT not determined.

5) The source protective device is completely outside the search area of the program: For some
very special cases, the Arc Flash Program will not be able to determine the Fault Clearing Time
since the source protective device cannot be located. This means that the system does not have
protection within the searchable area of the system.
Logic for Determining the System Grounding

The arc flash calculation can automatically determine the grounding configuration of the faulted buses if
this option is selected from the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. IEEE 1584-2002
indicates that the factor K2 (used for the calculation of the incident energy) is zero for ungrounded or
low/high resistance grounded systems and -0.113 for grounded systems (solidly grounded).
ETAP 7.0 uses the following rules to determine if an element is grounded or ungrounded:
If there is any device like a transformer or voltage source (generator or power grid) that is solidly
grounded, then the bus will be considered grounded.
If the system only has low/high resistance grounding connections, then it is considered ungrounded
unless there is at least one path that is solidly grounded. (See the figure below.)
Resistor
Grounded Paths
One Solidly
Grounded Path
If the system is wye-open or delta connected, then the Arc Flash Module will determine this bus to be
ungrounded.
No Solidly Grounded
Connection

Important! Note: The motor grounding connection cannot be considered as the only solidly grounded
source for a bus. Only transformer or voltage sources are considered as solid grounding points.
There may be some situations under which ETAP determines that the bus is ungrounded, but it may
actually be connected to a solidly grounded transformer. This situation may happen around transformers
that are solidly grounded on one side and resistor or reactor grounded on the other side.
Calculating Incident Energy for PDs

ETAP Arc Flash calculates the incident energy once the arcing current, the FCT and the system
grounding configurations have been determined. The module yields the incident energy results for the bus
and individual protective devices.
The main goal of the Arc Flash Module is to provide you with flexibility to determine the correct
calculation of the incident energy. Even for individual cubicles (PDs), the module will assume the worst-
case scenario.
The worst possible arc fault at a PD occurs at the input side of the PD (line side or side facing the feeder).
In this case, the PD itself cannot clear the fault, and it must be cleared by a typically slower operating
feeder PD upstream in the system.
For example, the figure below indicates the worst-case fault.
Arc Fault could

happen here
The upstream breaker will clear the fault in this case. The current used to determine the incident energy
for the PD will be either the maximum through fault current or the total bus fault current depending on the
selection on the Arc Flash page of the Short-Circuit Study Case.
If there are multiple sources, the module will take the longest device operating time as the FCT used to
calculate the incident energy.
The energy of source protective devices is calculated based on the first upstream device that can clear the
fault. If multiple source PDs are connected to the faulted bus, ETAP will use the longest opening time
from the different source PDs, to calculate the energy. Load PD incident energy is always determined
based on the calculated bus FCT.

Hazard/Risk Category Determination

The Hazard/Risk Category level is determined by comparing the calculated incident energy in Cal/cm2
against the ranges specified in the NFPA 70E tables, depending on the option selected on the Arc Flash
page of the Short-Circuit Study Case Editor.
ETAP gives the option of defining your own user-defined categories or to use defined by NFPA 70E. You
can define up to 10 categories. The Hazard/Risk Categories can be accessed from the Project menu by
pointing to Settings Arc Flash and selecting Hazard/Risk Categories. This window also shows the
category levels defined per NFPA 70E Standards.
The Hazard/Risk Category Levels for PPE window will appear as follows:

The Hazard/Risk Category Levels for PPE window has the following sections:
1. Method Selection Section: which includes the 3 pre-defined sets of hazard / risk categories as
described in NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and 2009 and the user-defined categories.
2. PPE requirements section: where you can specify the personal protective equipment list for
each category.
3. Disclaimer section: Where you can enter text that can be used as a disclaimer about the Arc
Flash Analysis results that are printed on a label
NFPA 70E-2000
These ranges are listed on Table 3-2.9.3 of NFPA 70E-2000.
Hazard/Risk Categories based on NFPA 70E 2000

Exposure Cal/cm2 Category
2
0 < Cal/cm <1.2 0
2
5 > Cal/cm 1.2 1
2
8 > Cal/cm 5 2
2
25> Cal/cm 8 3
2
40 > Cal/cm 25 4
2
Cal/cm > 40 N/A
NFPA 70E-2004

2
0 < Cal/cm <2.0 0
2
4 > Cal/cm 2.0 1
2
8 > Cal/cm 4 2
2
25> Cal/cm 8 3
40 > Cal/cm2 25 4
2
Cal/cm > 40 N/A
NFPA 70E-2009


2
0 < Cal/cm <1.2 0
2
4 > Cal/cm 1.2 1
2
8 > Cal/cm 4 2
2
25> Cal/cm 8 3
2
40 > Cal/cm 25 4
2
Cal/cm > 40 N/A
User-Defined Hazard Risk Categories

The User-Defined levels are interpreted by the Arc Flash Module as described in the following table:
Table 8: User Defined Hazard/Risk Category Level Ranges

Category Range (example) Defaults
2
0 0 < Cal/cm <C0 2
2
1 C1 > Cal/cm C0 4
2
2 C2 > Cal/cm C1 8
2
3 C3> Cal/cm C2 25
2
4 C4 > Cal/cm C3 40
2
5 C5 > Cal/cm C4 100
2
6 C6> Cal/cm C5 120
2
7 C7> Cal/cm C6 0
8 C8> Cal/cm2 C7 0
2
9 C9> Cal/cm C8 0
The category ranges are always from low values to higher values. For example, this means that the
category 4 value cannot be equal to or higher than the value in category 3. This is true for all the
categories.
If any category (6, 7, 8, and 9) is left as zero, the module ignores it and uses the 5th category for any value
higher than the maximum value in the 5th category. This will also apply if category 6 is the last one and 7,
8, and 9 are left as zero. You cannot skip a category.
The Hazard /Risk Category Level for the PPE Editor have the following properties and behavior:
a) The NFPA 70E 2000, NFPA 70E 2004 and NFPA 70E 2009 Hazard/Risk Category Ranges are
not customizable and follow the definitions published by NFPA 70E Standards. The only items
that can be customized are the list of equipment (requirements) for each category.

b) If you select the User-Defined Values option, then the Category ID fields become editable and
you can define a name for the each category level, which can be composed of up to 12
alphanumeric characters (i.e., a Cat IV or Cat A, etc.).
c) If you select the User-Defined Values option, the Incident Energy Range fields become editable
you may type the different limits in cal/cm2.
d) You have the option to type in some text for a disclaimer statement. This disclaimer statement
may appear in some selected label templates. This field holds up to 250 alphanumeric characters.
e) You have the ability to create a user-defined text field, which may be used to type in custom
information (such as engineering company name and address). This information is included in
certain label templates or is stored in the output report database. This field holds up to 125
f) You can navigate using the scroll arrows allows you browse the different PPE descriptions for
each category.
g) There are 4 sets of PPE descriptions. One for each of the options NFPA 70E 2000 (5
descriptions), NFPA 70E 2004 (5 descriptions), NFPA 70E 2009 (5 descriptions), and one
for the User-Defined Categories (10 descriptions. The description fields hold up to 250
The Hazard/Risk Category Level for PPE window has some default descriptions based on the simplified
Two-Category Level PPE system published in Table F-1 of NFPA 70E 2000 and Annex H of NFPA 70E
2004 and 2009.
Note: The following descriptions are provided only as examples of PPE requirement descriptions as
described by NFPA 70E Standards. These descriptions are not recommendations made by ETAP on how
to protect personnel from Arc Flash or Shock Hazards. Please exercise caution in applying these
descriptions and follow all the remaining recommendations made in the PPE matrix tables provided in
NFPA 70E 2000, 2004, and 2009.
Table 9: User Defined Hazard Category Default Descriptions based on NFPA 70E 2000, 2004 & 2009
Category group Category Default

NFPA 70E 2000 Category0 Non-melting or untreated natural fiber long-
(Table F-1 Simplified , Two- sleeve shirt and long pants
Category Flame Resistant Category1 FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum ATPV of 5) worn
Clothing System) over an untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum ATPV of 8)
Category2 FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum ATPV of 5) worn
over untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum ATPV of 8)
Category3 Double-layer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls
worn over either FR coveralls (minimum ATPV
of 5) or FR long-sleeve shirt and FR pants (min
ATPV of 5), worn over untreated natural fiber
long-sleeve shirt and pants, worn over an
untreated cotton T-shirt.
Category4 Double-layer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls
worn over either FR coveralls (minimum ATPV
of 5) or FR long-sleeve shirt and FR pants (min
ATPV of 5), worn over untreated natural fiber

long-sleeve shirt and pants, worn over an

untreated cotton T-shirt.
NFPA 70E 2004 Category0 Non-melting or untreated natural fiber long-

(Annex H Simplified, Two- sleeve shirt and long pants.
Category, Flame Resistant Category1 FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4)
(FR) Clothing System) worn over untreated cotton t-shirt with FR pants
(minimum arc rating of 8).
Category2 FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4)
worn over untreated cotton t-shirt with FR pants
(minimum arc rating of 8)
Category3 Multilayer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls
(minimum arc rating of 4) or FR long-sleeve shirt
and FR pants (minimum arc rating of 4) worn
over untreated natural fiber long-sleeve shirt and
pants, worn over an untreated cotton t-shirt.
Category4 Multilayer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls
NFPA 70E 2009 Category 0 Non-melting or untreated natural fiber long-

(Annex H Simplified, Two- sleeve shirt, long pants, safety glasses, hearing
Category, Flame Resistant protection, and leather gloves
(FR) Clothing System) Category 1 FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4),
worn over untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum arc rating of 8) or FR coveralls
Category 2 FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4),
worn over untreated cotton T-shirt with FR pants
(minimum arc rating of 8) or FR coveralls
Category 3 A total clothing system consisting of FR shirt and
pants and/or FR coveralls and/or arc flash coat
and pants (clothing system minimum arc rating
of 4)
Category 4 A total clothing system consisting of FR shirt and
pants and/or FR coveralls and/or arc flash coat
and pants (clothing system minimum arc rating
of 4)
User-defined Cat A Non-melting or untreated natural fiber long-

(You can define your own sleeve shirt and long pants.
incident energy limits and PPE Cat B FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4)
descriptions; however NFPA worn over untreated cotton t-shirt with FR pants
only provides PPE (minimum arc rating of 8)
descriptions up to 40 cal/cm2 ) Cat C FR long-sleeve shirt (minimum arc rating of 4)
worn over untreated cotton t-shirt with FR pants

Cat D Multilayer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls

Cat E Multilayer FR flash jacket and FR bib overalls
Cat F None available based on NFPA 70E
Cat G None available based on NFPA 70E
Cat H None available based on NFPA 70E
Cat I None available based on NFPA 70E
Cat J None available based on NFPA 70E
Note: The default values can be fully customized by simply typing in the new description in the
Hazard/Risk Category Levels for PPE description fields for each set of categories.
Incident Energy Curves in ETAP Star

ETAP has the capability of showing the incident energy curves on the Star Views. The calculated incident
energy can be shown as a function of the fault clearing time and the bolted fault current. Any combination
of clearing time and bolted fault current that lies below the calculated incident energy curve can be
considered to yield less incident energy.
ETAP can also show the allowable incident energy level curve on the Star Views. The calculated incident
energy curve should always be below the available incident curve since this would mean that the
equipment protection ATPV rating is adequate for protecting personnel working on this equipment.
The calculated and allowable incident energy curves can be shown on the TCCs if you select them from
the Bus Editors Arc Flash page.

18.7 Required Data

The data required for an arc flash calculation is in essence the same data required for a 3-phase fault
analysis minus the device short-circuit capability ratings (i.e., device duty evaluation) and plus the
grounding and connection types for all source and branches (i.e., Y-solidly grounding, Delta connections,
resistor-grounded, etc.).
Bus Data
Required data for short-circuit calculation for buses include:
X-factor
Gap between conductors
Working Distance
Equipment Name (not actually required, but is displayed by the program on arc flash labels)
Insulated Glove Class (required for some labels)
Insulated Glove V-rating in Volts (required for some labels)
Branch Data
Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and Impedance). Required data for short-circuit calculations for
branches include:

Overload Heater Resistance (recommended to consider this resistance for Arc Flash calculations)
Equipment Cable Impedance (recommended to consider this resistance for Arc Flash calculations)
For determination of the incident energy you will also need:
Transformer winding connections, grounding types, and grounding parameters to determine the K2
factor per IEEE 1584.
Power Grid Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for utilities include:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle
Grounding types and parameters to determine the K2 factor per IEEE 1584.


Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous generators include:

Xd, Xd, and X/R
Generator type (i.e., Salient Pole, Round Rotor)
Data required for generator decrement curves.
Inverter Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for inverters include:


Required data for short-circuit calculations for synchronous motor includes:

Xd, Xd and X/R
% LRC, Xd, and Tdo for IEC short-circuit calculation

Required data for short-circuit calculations for induction motors include:
Rated kW/hp and kV

X/R plus one of the following:
% LRC, and Td for IEC short-circuit calculations

Lumped Load Data

Required data for short-circuit calculations for lumped load includes:
Rated MVA and kV

% motor load
% LRC, X/R, and Xsc for cycle and 1.5-4 cycle
X and Td for IEC short-circuit calculation

Required data for short-circuit calculations for high voltage circuit breakers include:
Max kV
Cycle (not the contact parting time but the rated interrupting time)
Rated kV
ETAP needs to know the opening time of the circuit breakers only. The SC Duty parameters are required
only for device evaluation (please see Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Required Data for device evaluation).

Required data for short-circuit calculations for low voltage circuit breakers include:

Type (power, molded case, or insulated case). This information is needed based on IEEE 1584 2002
Table1 (Power Circuit Breaker Operating Times).
Rated kV

Type (power, molded case, or insulated case). This information is needed based on IEEE 1584 2002
Table1 (Power Circuit Breaker Operating Times).
Rated kV
Trip Device
Trip device type library parameters
Device settings / TCC curves

Fuse Data
Required data for short-circuit calculations for fuses include:
Fuse ID
Fuse library data including Size and TCC curves
ANSI Standard Fuse:

Fuse rated kV
IEC Standard Fuse:

Fuse rated kV
Overload Heater/49
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for OLH/49
includes:
Resistance / Tolerance
OLH library parameters
CT/PT Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for CT and PT
includes:
Bus or Branch or Source or Load Connections

Rating (Ratio)
Relay/MVSST Data
Required data for short-circuit (Clipping kA and Sequence-of-Operation) calculations for Relay includes:
CT/PT Connections / Assignments

Interlocked Devices, Device ID, Action, Delay, Setting, Unit
Relay/MVSST Library parameters including settings and TCC curves
Other Data
There are some Study Case related data, which must also be provided, and you can enter this data into the
Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The data includes:
Standard (ANSI/IEC)
Prefault voltage
Machine X/R (machine X/R modeling method)
Faulted buses
Cable/OL Heater (select this option to include cable and overload heater elements for Arc Flash)

Arc Flash Analysis NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002
18.8 NFPA 70E-2000 vs. IEEE 1584-2002
18.8.1 Comparison of NFPA 70E-2000 and IEEE 1584-2002 Stds

NFPA 70E-2000 IEEE 1584-2002
Unit of Measure Calories / Cm2 Calories / Cm2
Voltage Range 208 V 600 V 208 V 15kV (empirical)
15kV+ (Lee Method)
Current Range 16 kA 50 kA 0.7 kA 106 kA
cycle 120 cycles cycle 120 cycles
Arc Duration Range
Installations Open Air, Cubic Box Open Air, Cubic Box
Arc Distance
18.8.2 Summary of a Results Comparison Between NFPA 70E-2000

and IEEE 1584-2002 Standards
Calculations using the NFPA 70E-2000 and IEEE 1584-2002 Standards were done on the same system.
The system contained buses at voltage levels varying from 208 volts to 35,000 volts. Based upon the
above table, the NFPA Standard is designed to specifically handle 208 - 600 volts and 16 - 50 kAsc.
Therefore, values shown in the 208V case, 4.16 kV case, and 35 kV case are all extrapolated results for
NFPA 70E-2000.
Summary Table
NFPA 70E-2000 IEEE 1584-2002
208 V, 18 Open Air, 12.96 kAsc Conservative Non-Conservative
Cubic Box, 12.96 kAsc Conservative Non-Conservative
208 V, 18
480 V, 18 Open Air, 28.99 kAsc Similar Similar
480 V, 18, Cubic Box, 28.99 kAsc Non-Conservative Conservative
600 V, 18, Open Air, 19.50 kAsc Non-Conservative Conservative
600 V, 18, Cubic Box, 19.50 kAsc Non-Conservative Conservative
4.16 kV, 18 Open Air, 27.71 kAsc Non-Conservative Conservative
4.16 kV, 18 Cubic Box, 27.71 kAsc Non-Conservative Conservative
For 15 kV and above, the results for open air and cubic box calculations are similar; therefore, we
are displaying only the open air values during this comparison.
35 kV, 18 28.01 kAsc Non-Conservative Conservative

Calculation Results Trends

Regardless of the standard selected, the incident energy exposure increases as a function of increased
voltage, and decreases as a function of increased distance from the source.
The variation in results due to an enclosure (cubic box) is most severe at lower voltages. As the voltage
levels increase, the results become similar. Mathematically, above 15 kV, the formulas become so similar
that only the open-air results are displayed.
At fixed distance of 18, NFPA is conservative at lower voltage levels, and becomes less conservative as
voltage is increased. The crossover point between NFPA and IEEE is seen in the test case at 480 volts in
open air. IEEE results become conservative at the higher voltage levels.
Graphical Comparisons

For voltage levels above 15000 Volts IEEE 1584-2002 uses the theoretically derived Lee Method. The
incident energy exposure equations used for the NFPA 70E are only valid below 600 Volts. The values
shown below are well outside the allowable range.

Arc Flash Analysis Arc Flash Report
18.9 Arc Flash Reports
18.9.1 Opening the Arc Flash Report

To open the Arc Flash Report, do the following:
1. Click the Report Manager button on the ANSI or IEC Short-Circuit toolbar. ETAP displays
the Arc Flash Report Manager.
2. Click the Result page tab, select Arc Flash Analysis, and click OK to generate the report.
You may also start the Arc Flash Crystal Reports by selecting them from the Report Manager
located on the upper right-hand corner of ETAP as shown below:

18.9.2 Types of Arc Flash Output Reports

Arc flash calculations are performed using ANSI Short-Circuit, IEC Short-Circuit, or User-
Defined values. Each type of arc flash calculation has Crystal Report databases with different
extensions. They are *.AAF (for ANSI), *.IAF (for IEC) and *.UAF (for user-defined).
The ANSI and IEC Reports are generated when you have selected either option from the Short-
Circuit Study Case Standards page. You must also select the Calculate Fault Currents option from
the Arc Flash page. If you select the user-defined option, the report generated is not linked to any
standard regardless of which toolbar button (ANSI or IEC) you use to start the arc flash
calculation.
18.9.3 Structure of the Arc Flash Report Manager

The Report Manager is structured into different sections and each one of them contains some
information about the arc flash calculation.
Input
The Report Managers Input page also shows the input data for the short-circuit and arc flash
calculations. The Bus Arc Flash Input Data and the Hazard/Risk Categories can be accessed from
this group.

The bus input data for arc flash has the following information for the bus arc flash ratings:
Equipment type (Bus Rating page)

Gap (Bus Rating page)
X Factor (Bus Rating page)
Approach Boundaries
The following footnote may appear at the bottom of the Bus Arc Flash Input Data section. This
message indicates that for some locations, the program used the theoretically derived Lee method
instead of the empirical IEEE equations method.
The Gap and X-Factor are not utilized if the theoretically derived Lee method was used to
determine the incident energy and flash protection boundary. The Lee method is used if the bus
voltage and/or short-circuit parameters are outside the range covered by the IEEE 1584
empirical equations.
The gap and x-factor are not shown in this report if the any of the following conditions are true:
0.208 > Bus Nom kV, Bus Nom kV > 15, Ibf < 0.7 or Ibf >106)
The Hazard/Risk Categories Report contains information on the incident energy levels used to
determine the risk level. The report will contain information on the following:
NFPA 70E-2000
NFPA 70E-2004
NFPA 70E-2009
User-Defined Hazard/Risk Levels

Complete
The Report Manager Complete page shows only the Arc Flash Complete Report (it does not
include the Short-Circuit Reports). The Complete Report contains the arc flash input data, the
analysis results (not including look-up tables), and the summary.

Summary
From the Report Manager Summary page, you can generate the Incident Energy Summary
Report. It does not include any Short-Circuit Summary Reports.
Result

The Report Manager Result page has two reports. The first one is the new ETAP 7.0 report
format called Arc Flash Analysis. The second is called the Arc Flash Look-Up Table. No Short-
Circuit Reports can be accessed from the Result page.
Analysis
The Analysis section contains information about the arc flash results. The report contains
information about the calculated fault currents, prefault voltage, system grounding, total arcing
current, working distance, and flash protection boundary. The report also contains the incident
energy results for the bus or for individual PDs.
The report has many flags that indicate special conditions found for the faulted buses in the Arc
Flash Analysis. The flags that may appear on the footer of the Analysis Reports are:
If the option to use the User-Defined Fault Clearing Time (FCT) from the bus is selected,
then the following flag will appear:
The User-Defined Fault Clearing Time value is used.
If the user has selected the option to use the User-Defined Fault Current, the following
flag will appear:
The User-Defined Fault Clearing Time and Bolted Fault Current values are used
for calculations.
If the user has selected the User-Defined System Grounding Configuration option rather
than letting the module determine it automatically, then the following flag will appear:
The User-Defined System Grounding is used.
Depending on the Hazard/Risk Category option selected on the Study Case Editor Arc
Flash data page, one of the following flags will appear:

NFPA 70E 2000 Table 3-3.9. Protective Clothing Characteristics, is used to

determine the Hazard/Risk Level
NFPA 70E 2004 Table 130.7 (C)(11) Protective Clothing Characteristics, is used
to determine the Hazard/Risk Level
NFPA 70E 2009 Table 130.7 (C)(11), Protective Clothing Characteristics, is used
to determine the Hazard/Risk Level
User-Defined Levels are used to determine the Hazard/Risk Level
When the program forces the category to either 0 or 1because of it is small

low voltage equipment, the following message will appear. This message and flag
are tied to the options for Hazard Cat for LV Equipment in the Arc Flash page
of the study case.
The arc flash calculation at this location was not performed since it is fed by a
radial low voltage transformer rated less than or equal to 125 kVA. The hazard
category has been automatically assigned a low hazard level.
The following footnote appears in the arc flash analysis crystal reports when the
following condition occurs ((0.208 <= Bus Nom kV and Bus Nom kV <=15) and (0.7>
Ibf or Ibf >106)) or (Bus Nom kV < 0.208).
The theoretically derived Lee method was used to determine the incident energy
and flash protection boundary for this location since the bolted fault current or
nominal voltage are outside the empirical method range
If the calculated incident energy exceeds the limit for category 4 of NFPA 70E (2000 or
2004), then the category will not be reported and the following message will appear in the
reports:
Beyond the limit specified in NFPA 70 E Std. for Category 4
If the arcing current variation set of values was used to determine the incident energy at
the faulted bus, then the report will show the percent current variation next to the bus
source protective device. This indicates that there is some device whose FCT settings
could potentially cause a large incident energy exposure if the arcing current variation
occurs. The report will show:
For Protective Device: SOURCE PD ID @ %Variation Ia = Arcing current in

kA. (i.e., For Protective Device: CB3@ 85% Ia = 3.45 kA).
A is shown next to the individual source/load terminal faults to indicate that
variation was applied for the results at this location.
The arcing current variation will not be shown for faulted buses with kV higher than 1.0.

The following message will appear at the footer of the Analysis Report if the user-defined
source protective device specified in the Bus Editor is not within the region that the
program can view and search.
**The User-Defined Fault Clearing PD, as specified in the Bus Editor, is outside
the region for calculating short-circuit contributions.
The following message will appear in the Analysis Report footer if the user-defined
source PD is a relay that is not connected to an energized Current Transformer or has not
been interlocked with a breaker, contact or switch.
**The User-Defined Relay, as specified in the Bus Editor, is not connected to an

energized phase CT nor has no interlock PDs.
The following message will appear in the Analysis Report footer if the user-defined
source PD is not energized.
**The User-Defined Fault Clearing PD, as specified in the Bus Editor, is not
energized.

Arc Flash Analysis Report Structure

The Analysis Report is structured as follows:
SC input Data
Bus Arc Flash Results
Current Contributions Incident Energy for

(Bolted and Arcing) Individual PDs
3-Phase Bolted SC current Corresponding Arcing

passing through this PD (kA) current passing through
the same PD (kA)
Opening or tripping time (FCT)

for this source PD (Cycles)

PD that clears the fault at this location

(upstream PD)
Arc Flash results

Arcing Current: Bus Total Fault clearing time for a fault at this
for this location
or Maximum thru (kA) location

Look Up Table Report

The Arc Flash Reports for the tabulated information, also known as Look-Up Tables, remain the
same as those of previous versions of ETAP. This approach of this report is to show incident
energy results for various working distances and for different fault clearing times.
The Fault Clearing Time (FCT) is varied from 0.025 seconds all the way up to 2 seconds. The
plotted arc duration can be extended well beyond this point by changing the default value of the
option Look-up Report Time Duration in the Options (Preferences) menu to a value higher than
2 seconds (default value). This option is not to be confused with the option Limit Maximum
FCT from the Arc Flash Study Case. The Look-up Report Time Duration option only affects the
amount of plotted arc duration points in the Look-up Tables Report.
Sample of the Look-up Tables Report:
Arc Flash MS Excel Reports

ETAP can generate MS Excel Arc Flash Reports. The reports contain two sheets, one for the bus
arc flash results and the second sheet for the protective device arc flash results (both load and
source protective devices).
The MS Excel Report can be generated when the following ETAP Preferences Option is selected:
Export Results to Excel = True from the Options (Preferences) Editor.
Once this option has been selected, the program will generate Excel Output Reports which have
the same name as the Output Report name you specify for your Crystal Reports. The Excel
Reports may only be accessed by using Windows Explorer. You need to navigate to the project
directory to view the generated Excel Reports. The following image illustrates this process for
the ETAP Example-ANSI project file.
MS Excel Report
Project Directory
The MS Excel Arc Flash Bus Report sheet has the following fields:
Table 12: MS Excel Bus_Report Format

Field Name Data Type Description Source of Field Data

in ETAP
Bus ID Bus Identification Bus Info page
Equipment Name Name field Bus Info page
Bus Nominal kV Voltage in kV Bus Info page
Equipment Type MCC, Switchgear, etc Bus Rating page
Gap Gap between conductors in mm. Bus Rating page
X factor constant defined by IEEE (dimensionless) Bus Rating page
Grounding Type based Grounded or ungrounded (high/low One-line diagram
on IEEE 1584 resistance/delta are considered as connection or Bus Arc
ungrounded) Flash page
Limited Approach Limited approach boundary to Exposed Bus Rating page
Boundary to Exp. Mov. Movable conductors based on NFPA 70E
Conductor Standards in ft.
Limited Approach Limited approach boundary to fixed circuit Bus Rating page
Boundary to Fixed Part parts based on NFPA 70E Standards in ft.
Restricted Approach Restricted Approach Boundary based on Bus Rating page

Boundary NFPA 70 Standards in ft.
Prohibited Approach Prohibited Approach Boundary based on Bus Rating page

Boundary NFPA 70 Standards in ft.
Available PPE Available personal protective equipment Bus Arc Flash page
Protection ATPV rating in cal/cm2.
Total Bus Bolted Total 3-phase Short-circuit (SC) current for Global AF calc or Bus
a fault at the bus in kA. Arc Flash page
Total Bus Arcing Calculated arcing current at the faulted bus Global AF calc or Bus
in kA. Arc Flash page
Source PD Bolted Amount of the total bus short-circuit current Global AF calc
that passes through the upstream source PD
in kA.
Source PD Arcing Amount of the total bus arcing current that Global AF calc
passes through the upstream source PD in
kA.
Source Trip Device ID Identification of the protective device Global AF calc
considered to be the last one to trip the fault
Trip Time Time it takes a relay to send the tripping Global AF calc
signal to breaker or fuse and LVCB tripping
time in cycles.
Open Time Time it takes the breaker to open once it has Global AF calc
received the relay trip signal in cycles.
Total FCT Total arc fault clearing time (sum of relay Global AF calc
tripping and breaker opening times) in
cycles.
FPB Flash protection boundary in ft. Global AF calc
Incident Energy Incident energy value based on the total Global AF calc
fault clearing time and total arcing current

in cal/cm2.
Working Distance (in) Working distance from the energized Global AF calc
conductors to the face and torso in inches.
Hazard /Risk Category Category level selection based on the Global AF calc
amount of incident energy (i.e. 0, 1, 2, 3,
etc.).
PPE Description Description of the required personal Hazard/Risk Category
protective equipment based on the Levels for PPE Editor
determined Hazard/Risk Category. from the project
settings.
Insulated Glove V- Insulated glove voltage rating in volts AC. Bus Rating page
rating
Insulated Glove Class Insulated glove class rating (i.e., 00, 01, etc) Bus Rating page
Sample of the MS Excel Arc Flash Report Bus_Report worksheet:
The MS Excel Arc Flash PD Report sheet has the following fields:
Table 13: MS Excel PD_Report Format

Field Name Data Type Description Source of Field Data
in ETAP
PD ID Load or Source PD Identification PD Info page
Equipment Name Name field PD Info page
Connected Bus ID ID of faulted bus to which the PD is Bus Info page
connected to.
PD Type LVCB, Fuse, HVCB, etc Global AF calc
Limited Approach Limited approach boundary to Exposed Connected Bus Rating
Boundary to Exp. Mov. Movable conductors based on NFPA 70E page
Conductor Standards in ft.

Limited Approach Limited approach boundary to fixed circuit Connected Bus Rating
Boundary to Fixed Part parts based on NFPA 70E Standards in ft. page
Restricted Approach Restricted Approach Boundary based on Connected Bus Rating

Boundary NFPA 70 Standards in ft. page
Prohibited Approach Prohibited Approach Boundary based on Connected Bus Rating

Boundary NFPA 70 Standards in ft. page
PD Bolted Total 3-phase Short-circuit current Global AF calc

contribution passing through this device
towards the faulted bus in kA.
PD Arcing Calculated arcing current contribution Global AF calc
passing through this device towards the
faulted bus in kA.
PD FCT Total opening time for this PD based on its Global AF calc
actual arcing current contribution to the
faulted bus in cycles.
Hazard /Risk Category Category level selection based on the Global AF calc
amount of incident energy (i.e., 0, 1, 2, 3,
etc.).
PPE Description Description of the required personal Hazard/Risk Category
protective equipment based on the Levels for PPE Editor
determined Hazard/Risk Category. from the project
settings.
Insulated Glove V- Insulated glove voltage rating in volts AC. Bus Rating page
rating
Insulated Glove Class Insulated glove class rating (i.e. 00, 01, etc.) Bus Rating page
Arcing kA for Incident This field shows the total bus arcing current Global AF calc
Energy or the maximum through arcing current to
be used in the determination of the PD
incident energy.
Upstream Source PD Identification of the Source Protective Global AF calc
Device
Upstream Source PD Total opening time of the upstream PD in Global AF calc
FCT the event of a fault at the line side of source
PDs or load PDs.
FPB Flash protection boundary in ft. Global AF calc
Incident Energy Incident energy value based on the total Global AF calc
fault clearing time and total arcing current
in cal/cm2.
Working Distance (in) Working distance from the energized Global AF calc
conductors to the face and torso in inches.

Sample of the MS Excel Arc Flash Report PD_Report worksheet:

Arc Flash Analysis Arc Flash Labels
18.10 Arc Flash Labels

The arc flash label templates can be accessed through the Arc Flash Report Manager Label page.
These templates are pre-designed. If you select the template that you want, all the buses will be
displayed with the same label template. The same is true for the Protective Device Arc Flash
labels.
You will notice from the image below that there are two templates for the same label format. One
template has an extension -Bus and the other template has an extension -PD and as their
name extensions imply one template is dedicated for the arc flash results at every faulted bus and
the other template is dedicated for the arc flash results for every protective device (PD) directly
connected to the faulted buses. The PD template shows the results for both Source and Load
protective devices for every faulted bus.
Note: Certain labels may be generated in Spanish and Portuguese. Each language has been
separated into different sections on the Report Manager.
ETAP labels can be printed to a Brady Label Printers or to DuraLabel printers as well. Some
templates are designed for Avery label templates. The Brady and DuraLabel machines have rolls
of label media that come with pre-printed headers like WARNING and DANGER. You can
select among three different sizes of labels for the Brady and DuraLabel (3x3, 4x4 and
4x6).

18.10.1 Arc Flash Label Formats

This section describes some of the features of the arc flash label templates available in ETAP 7.0.
The following templates can be printed to an 81/2 X 11 sheet of label media like the Avery
White Permanent Durable I.D Labels (6575). This media is used for labeling applications and it is
a full sheet. ETAP supports the following templates besides the 6575. You can also print the arc
flash labels to non-permanent durable I.D. Media as long as the label has the proper lamination
and adhesives (to ensure that the labels will endure harsh weather / chemical environments).
6579 Permanent ID labels (portrait) (color laser)

6575 Permanent ID labels (landscape) (color laser)
6575 Permanent ID (portrait) (color laser)
6878 Color Printing labels (landscape) (color laser)
6575 (portrait)
Full 8 x 11
6579 (portrait)
6878 (landscape)
6575 (Landscape)
Full 8 x 11
6575 (portrait)
Full 8 x 11

Three Labels per Page

The following labels are designed to print three per page. You will need a color laser printer to
print to this media. Once the labels have been printed, then you can cut them to make them
individual labels.
3.5X7 Danger1-Bus 3.5X7 Danger1-PD
Arc Flash
Results
Shock
Hazard
Boundaries

The following images illustrate how ETAP generates these labels when you print to an 81/2 by
11 sheet of label media:
Note: that the unit of measurement of every label template is in inches.

3.5X7 Danger2-Bus 3.5X7 Danger2-PD

3.5X7 Warning1-Bus 3.5X7 Warning1-PD

3.5X7 Warning2-Bus 3.5X7 Warning2-PD

3X6 Danger1-Bus
3X6 Danger1-PD

3X6 Danger2-Bus
3X6 Danger2-Bus

3X6 Danger3-Bus
3X6 Danger3-PD

3X6 Danger4-Bus
3X6 Danger4-PD

3X6 Warning1-Bus
3X6 Warning1-PD

3X6 Warning2-Bus
3X6 Warning2-PD
3X6 Warning3-Bus

3X6 Warning3-PD
3X6 Warning4-Bus

3X6 Warning4-PD

Two Labels per Page (6575 and 6579)

The following labels are designed to print two per page. You will need a color laser printer to
print to this media. Once the labels have been printed, then you can cut them to make them
individual labels. Again these labels can be printed to the Avery White Permanent Durable I.D
Labels (6575).
4X6 Danger1-Bus
4X6 Danger1-PD

4X6 Warning1-Bus
4X6 Warning1-PD

Avery-6579 Danger-Bus
Avery-6579 Danger-PD

Avery-6579 Warning-Bus
Avery-6579 Warning-PD

The 4X6 Danger1-Bus and PD labels would print to the 8 1/2 X 11 as shown in the image
below:
The Avery-6579 Danger-Bus and PD labels would print to the 8 1/2 X 11 as shown in the
image below:

Four Labels per Page (6878)

The following labels are designed to print four to a page. You will need a color laser printer to
print to this media. Avery Label Template 6878 can be used to generate this label. The Avery
White Permanent Durable I.D. 6575 can be used as well, but the individual labels would have to
be cut to size. Please note that this label is formatted to print in landscape format.
Avery-6878 Danger-PD

Avery-6878 Warning-Bus

Printing AF Labels to Brady and DuraLabel Printers

Some of the available templates in ETAP have been formatted for printing to three different
media sizes in Brady and DuraLabel printers. The available sizes are 3X3, 4X4 and 4X6. These
labels are made from special materials that are weather and chemical resistant.
ETAP labels are formatted for the following Brady Label Printers:
Tagus T300
Tagus T200
300 MVP Plus
200 MVP Plus
ETAP labels are formatted for the following DuraLabel Printer
DuraLabel Pro 300

DuraLabel Pro
DuraLabel 4TTP
You must install the printer drivers for your printer prior to being able to print the labels from
your ETAP software. You must also select the Brady or DuraLabel printers as the default printer
prior to opening ETAP Crystal Reports to ensure that the format is opened using the correct
printer drivers.
The following are the catalog numbers for the Brady label rolls for which you have available arc
flash label templates in ETAP:
THTEL-25-483-1-WA = 4x6 labels with pre-printed Warning header

THTEL-25-483-1-DA = 4x6 labels with pre-printed Danger header
The recommended printer ribbon to print to these labels is the R6007.
The following are the catalog numbers for the DuraLabel label rolls for which you have available
arc flash label templates in ETAP:
70406-2 4x6 Danger Arc Flash Labels

70406-3 4x6 Warning Arc Flash Labels
70406-5 4x6 Black / Red DIE cut Arc Flash Labels
The recommended printer ribbon to print to these labels is the 7433010

The following image illustrates the concept of a pre-printed header arc flash label. The orange or
red header already contains the word Warning or Danger enclosed by an orange or Red
section. ETAP will print to the empty blank space below the header.
Pre-printed
label header

18.10.2 Labels from the Bus Arc Flash Page

You can also generate Arc Flash Labels for individual buses if you need to. You can go to the
Bus Arc Flash page, setup the arc flash calculation, and click the Print button in the Label group.
Please note that you can only generate arc flash labels for the bus itself from this page (no labels
for protective devices). The same rules apply to labels generated from the Bus Editor as those
generated by the global AF calculation.
Click on this button to generate the

Arc Flash label for this bus only

18.10.3 Arc Flash Labels Portuguese

You can generate Arc Flash labels in Portuguese. Here are the labels you can produce in
Portuguese.
3.5X7 Ateno1-Barra 3.5X7 Ateno2-Barra

3.5X7 Perigo1-Barra 3.5X7 Perigo2-Barra

3X6 Ateno1-Barra
3X6 Ateno2-Barra

3X6 Ateno3-Barra
3X6 Ateno4-Barra

3X6 Perigo1-Barra
3X6 Perigo2-Barra

3X6 Perigo3-Barra
3X6 Perigo4-Barra

4X6 Ateno1-Barra
4X6 Perigo1-Barra

4X6 Perigo1-Barra1

Avery-6579 Perigo-Barra
Avery-6579 Ateno-Barra

Avery-6878 Ateno-Barra
Avery-6878 Perigo-Barra

Arc Flash Labels Spanish

You can generate Arc Flash labels in Spanish. Here are the labels you can produce in Spanish.
3X6 Advertencia1-Bus
3X6 Advertencia1-PD

3X6 Peligro1-Bus
3X6 Peligro1-PD

18.10.4 Arc Flash Labels French

You can generate Arc Flash labels in French. The French labels are created from the English
labels and translated in French. To preview the French labels, see the English labels with the
same size and name above.

Arc Flash Analysis Arc Flash Report Analyzer
18.11 Arc Flash Report Analyzer

The purpose of the arc flash result analyzer is to provide an easy way for the electrical engineer to
analyze the arc flash results from several scenarios. It is a difficult task to determine which
scenario produces the worst case results and thus manipulation of the results from several reports
is needed in order to find the desired final results to be placed on arc flash labels or summaries.
The Arc Flash Report Analyzer has the ability to bring to view the results of all the different
output reports and to filter them based on different conditions of special interest. The analyzer is a
powerful tool for exporting results to MS Excel in any fashion that you want since it allows you
to select different input/output fields.
Please note that the AF report analyszer only shows reports generated using ANSI AF studies.
Once IEC has an available guideline or adopts a guideline for AF calculations, the IEC results
will be added to the analyzer.
18.11.1 Report and Result Selections

Output Report
Select which Arc Flash study reports to compare by clicking on the check box. The results of the
selected study report(s) will appear in the display table.
Project Report

Select which project report(s) you would like active.
Ref
This radio button selection allows you to set which output report should be considered reference
for the comparisons. When comparing multiple reports, the reference report serves as the source
of data for all the fields shown under the Info section of the analyzer.
All Projects in Active Directory

This selection allows the user to compare reports from different projects that are located within
the directory that the current (open) project file resides.
Active Project
This selection is defaulted to the open project file. This will limit you to all the reports generated
from this project.
Sort
The arc flash report analyzer has some very powerful sorting capabilities which can be applied
using different techniques. The sorting techniques which can be applied are described below:
You are able to sort the data according to each column or by combination of columns in
ascending or descending order. You can launch the sort utility from the Sort Button. For example,
one very useful way to present your results is to apply the maximum incident energy filter and
then sort the results by Hazard Category first, then by ID as second criteria. This process is shown
below:

Sorting by a double click on the column name is also possible and sometimes much faster. The
image below shows the double clicking process on the ID column.
Copy
The AF report analyzer has some very powerful copy/paste features to MS Excel. Simply select
any combination of rows or cells and right click or press Ctrl+C to copy. Open a spreadsheet and
paste accordingly. The process is shown below:
First select the fields or cells you want to copy and right click and select the Copy command:

Next open a spreadsheet and select the paste command. The data will be transferred exactly as it
was selected.
Please note that a better way to send results to MS Excel is to use the Export function.
Export
Export Data to MS Excel from the AF report analyzer. With this tool you can perform your
filtering of the results and then proceed to export the results to MS Excel by simply clicking on
the Export button. The process is described below:
First click on the export button. The AF report analyzer export function editor will come up:

Second enter the name of the MS Excel Spreadsheet that you want to create
Last, click on the OK button and the analyzer will take care of the rest.

Please note that you must have installed MS Excel 2003 or higher for this feature to work
properly.
Find
The program can find any of the faulted elements listed in the ID column. In order to do this,
you can select a cell and click on the Find button as shown below:

Please note that selecting any other single cell on any row will find work similarly as selecting
the cell on the ID column. The find function will not work if you select the entire row. Please
note that the find function locates the element in the active one-line diagram view.
Bus
Select the Bus check box to display the bus arc fault results in the display table.
Protective Device
Select the Protective Device check box to display the arc fault results for individual protective
devices in the display table. This includes load and source protective devices.
Please note that you may choose not to show the load protective device results since they have
typically the same results as those of the connected bus. To accomplish this, you can set the
following setting from the Options (Preferences):
Report only Bus and Source PD = True
This setting must be configured prior to generating the arc flash results. All Load protective
device results will be ignored if this setting is enabled. The default setting is False.

Load Terminals
Select Load Terminals to display the results for arc faults at load terminals. The analyzer will
report the load terminal results for all scenarios for which you included to generate load terminal
results. Please note that to include the load terminal results in the analyzer, you must generate the
arc flash results with the following Options (Preferences) setting enabled:
Calculate Load Terminal Arc Flash = True
If you set this option to False (default setting), then ETAP will not generate arc flash results for
load terminal locations.
Info
View general information pertaining to the devices selected. This information is typically the
information that is reported in the input and summary pages of the study reports. The information
displayed for the protective devices and loads may come from the connected bus of that device.
Please also note that when multiple reports are selected, the info fields are taken from the
reference report. The following image shows you how to select the reference report. Of course, it
is highly unlikely that the input AF properties like the Gap and X-factor will be set differently for
different scenarios. Most likely the variations occur on protective device settings and/or fault
current levels or system configurations. This is why it is practical to include only the reference
report input data when comparing multiple reports.
kV
Display the voltage rating of the element. This may be the bus nominal voltage, protective device
rated voltage or the load rated voltage.
Type
Display the specific type of bus, protective device, or load (i.e. MCC, Switchgear, HVCB,
Induction Mtr, etc).
Connected Bus
Display the bus ID of the bus connected to the protective device or load.
Bus Gap

Display the bus gap of each bus or connected bus. This is the gap between conductors or buses
for the equipment at the fault location.
X Factor
Display the distance X Factor for each bus or connected bus. This value is a constant for each
type of bus. There is no Distance X Factor for buses greater than 15 kV.
Grounding
Display if the bus or connected bus is grounded or not grounded.
Equipment Name
Display the equipment name of the device.
Working Distance
Display the working distance, which is used to calculate the incident energy, for each bus or
connected bus.
LAB to Exp. Mov. Conductor

Display the limited approach boundary of exposed movable conductors for each bus or connected
bus. This is the approach limit at a distance from an exposed live part that is movable within
which a shock hazard exists.
LAB to Fixed Part

Display the limited approach boundary of fixed circuit parts for each bus or connected bus. This
is the approach limit at a distance from an exposed live part that is fixed within which a shock
hazard exists.
RAB
Display the restricted approach boundary of the bus or the connected bus. This is the approach
limit at a distance from an exposed live part within which there is an increased risk of shock due
to electrical arc combined with inadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity
to the live part.
PAB
Display the prohibited approach boundary of the bus or the connected bus. This is the approach
limit at a distance from an exposed live part within which work is considered the same as making
contact with the live part.
Available PPE Protection

Display the maximum Allowable ATPV rating of the personal protective equipment which is
used for tasks at this location. Typically this value should be set to Cat 2 or 4 levels. The program
will generate a warning flag if the incident energy calculated from the arc flash study exceeds this
limit. This value of energy is also very useful for plotting on a TCC curve. The units for this field
are cal/cm2.
Glove V-rating
Maximum Insulated glove voltage rating per ASTM D120-02a (2006) standard. Please note that
if your safety program requires a higher voltage rating to be used, then the user-defined voltage-
rated glove feature can be used.

Glove Class
Insulated glove class per ASTM D120-02a (2006) standard
Results
This section determines which calculation values are displayed in the results windows. The
results displayed are determined by either the output reports selected or the different analysis
filters selected.
The following are descriptions of each field which can be displayed in the results window:
Total Incident Energy

Display the total incident energy (cal/cm2). This value is the most important piece of information
which is obtained from the calculation. It represents the total energy released by the fault up to
the final fault clearing time (Final FCT).
Incident Energy 1
Incident energy accumulated during the first stage (0 to 4 cycles) (cal/cm2). This energy
represents the energy accumulated during the subtransient current stage. If you are running AF
using the half cycle method, then this is the only value that will be reported.
Incident Energy 2
Incident energy accumulated during the second stage (4 to typically 30 cycles) (cal/cm2). This
energy value represents the energy accumulated during the transient current stage. If the fault
clearing time is less than 4 cycles, then this result may be zero (i.e. the arc fault did not last long
enough to accumulate energy during this stage). If you are running AF using the 1.5 to 4 cycle
method, then this is the only value that will be reported.
Incident Energy 3
Incident energy accumulated during the third stage (typically 30 to final fault clearing time)
(cal/cm2). This energy value represents the energy accumulated during the steady-state current
stage. If the fault clearing time is less than the steady-state current time in cycles, then this result
may be zero (i.e. the arc fault did not last long enough to accumulate energy during this stage).
PPE Description
Description of the required Personal Protective Equipment required for performing energized
work based on the determined hazard category. This PPE is determined based on the total
incident energy accumulated during the arc fault.
FPB
The Flash Protection Boundary (ft/m) is the distance at which the energy exposure is less than or
equal to 1.2 cal/cm2 (typically the onset of a second degree burn). This boundary is always
determined based on the total incident energy accumulated over all stages of the fault.
Hazard Category
Hazard/Risk category based on either NFPA 70E or user-defined tables. The risk category is
always determined based on the total incident energy.
Final FCT

The Final Fault Clearing Time (FCT) is the time at which the final source protective device
operates to completely de-energize the arc fault. ETAP assumes that all sources must be
completely de-energized before the arc fault can be completely extinguished.
Ia at FCT
Total Fault Location Arcing current magnitude (without subtraction) flowing at the stage in
which the fault extinguished. Depending on the estimated fault clearing time, this current
magnitude is the total current which could flow in the circuit assuming that no protective device
has operated. Of course ETAP will reduce the current as each protective device operates if you
use the incident energy subtraction method, but this value is always printed as the total value for
reference purposes only.
Source PD ID
This is the ID of the last source protective device to operate to de-energize the fault. For radial
systems, this is the first device which operates which is capable of de-energizing the fault.
%Ia Variation
This is the arcing current variation in percent. It is only applied for systems with nominal voltage
less than 1.0 kV. The variation is considered for faults at the bus, source protective devices or
load terminals.
FCT 1
Duration of the first stage of incident energy collection (sec/cycles)
FCT 2
Duration of the second stage of incident energy collection (sec/cycles)
FCT 3
Duration of the third stage of incident energy collection (sec/cycles)
Exceeds Max FCT

This is a warning flag which indicates if the final fault clearing time exceeds the maximum
allowed value which was entered by the user in the Arc Flash page of the short-circuit study case
editor.
Not All PDs have FCT

This check box will be used in a future release of ETAP. Currently, this option is not handled.
Total Ibf at FCT

Total bolted current at the stage in which the arc fault is expected to clear (kA)
Total Ibf
Total bolted fault subtransient current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ibf
Total transient bolted fault short-circuit current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ibf
Total steady-state bolted fault short-circuit current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal
(kA)

Total Ia
Total subtransient arcing fault current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ia
Total transient arcing fault current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Total Ia
Total steady-state arcing fault current for a fault at the bus/source pd/load terminal (kA)
Source PD Ibf at FCT

Bolted short-circuit current which would flow through the last operating source protective device
at the time it de-energizes the fault (kA)
Source PD Ibf
Subtransient short-circuit current which would flow through the source protective device for a
bolted fault
Source PD Ibf
Transient short-circuit current which would flow through the source protective device for a bolted
fault
Source PD Ibf
Steady-state short-circuit current which would flow through the source protective device for a
bolted fault
Souce PD Ia at FCT
Arcing current which flows through the last operating source protective device at the time it de-
energizes the fault (kA)
Source PD Ia
Subtransient arcing current which flows through the source protective device (kA)
Source PD Ia
Transient arcing current which flows through the source protective device (kA)
Source PD Ia
Steady-state arcing current which flows through the source protective device (kA)
Source Trip Relay ID

ID or name of the relay which operates the protective device which clears the arc fault
Source Trip Relay Type

Type of relay that trips the source protective device (i.e. overcurrent, differential, etc)
Trip Time
Time it takes the relay to operate (sec/cycles)
Open Time
Rated opening time of the source protective device breaker/contact

PD Ibf at FCT
Bolted fault current which would flow through the protective device during the expected fault
clearing time stage (kA)
PD Ibf
Bolted fault Subtransient current contribution used to determine the equivalent arcing current
which would flow/come from this element (kA)
PD Ibf
Bolted fault Transient current contribution used to determine the equivalent arcing current which
would flow/come from this element (kA)
PD Ibf
Bolted fault steady-state current contribution used to determine the equivalent arcing current
which would flow/come from this element (kA)
PD Ia at FCT
Arcing current contribution passing through the protective device during the stage at which the
arc fault is expected to clear (kA).
PD Ia
Subtransient arcing current contribution which flows from this element towards a fault at the bus
(kA)
PD Ia
Transient arcing current contribution which flows from this element towards a fault at the bus
(kA)
PD Ia
Steady-state arcing current contribution which flows from this element towards a fault at the bus
(kA)
Total PD FCT
Total opening time of the protective device for the arc fault (sec/cycles)
PD FCT 1
Time duration of stage one of the arc fault (sec/cycles)
PD FCT 2
Time duration of stage two of the arc fault (sec/cycles)
PD FCT 3
Time duration of stage three of the arc fault (sec/cycles)
Force Cat for LV Equip

Warning flag which indicates that the program assigned a default NFPA 70E risk category for
this low voltage location.

Filter Results By
This section allows you to filter results based on special conditions which the program
determined during the calculation.
Incident Energy
Filter the results based on incident energy values. Only available if multiple reports are being
compared.
Max
Show only the results of the scenario which produced the worst-case incident energy exposure for
each location.
Min
Show only the results of the scenario which produced the minimum incident energy exposure for
each location
The following logic applies to the incident energy filter:
1) If the check box Incident Energy is selected, then the Max and Min Radio toggle field
should be enabled. The default position of the Incident Energy check box should be as
unchecked. Selecting this box should enable the Max/Min filters.
2) The default position of the filter is set to Max. This means that the filter will find the
highest incident energy values for every bus, protective device and or load terminal
amongst all the different output reports (scenarios).
3) The Min Incident Energy Filter is designed to do exactly the opposite of the Max filter. It
is looking for the minimum incident energy value (not including 0) amongst all the
selected output reports for every faulted element.
4) When the Incident Energy Filter Max or Min filters are enabled, the name of the
configuration and the output report ID are always displayed. This hleps to identify which
configuration or scenario produces the worst or minimum incident energy values.
5) By DEFAULT the following fields should be checked and displayed when the Incident
Energy Max/Min filter is enabled:
a. Total Incident Energy
b. Hazard Category
c. FPB
d. Output Report
e. Configuration
f. Total FCT
g. Source PD ID (even though the image above does not show it as selected)
h. % Ia Variation
6) If the Incident Energy Filter is selected, the Ref. toggle radio box on the Output Report
window is hidden. However, if you choose to show information from the Info window,
it will come from the reference report.

FCT Not Determined

Indicate which arc fault locations are potential hazards because the protective device did not
operate. This applies to arc faults at the bus, source protective devices or load terminals.
The following logic applies to the FCT Not Determined filter:
1) If the FCT Not Determined filter is enabled and the Bus result selection check box
is selected, then the program only shows the bus elements for which the program failed to
find a fault clearing time (FCT).
2) If the FCT Not Determined filter is enabled and the Protective Device and/or
Load Terminals result selection check boxes are selected, then the program only
shows the results for the PDs and load terminals for which the program failed to find a
fault clearing time.
%Ia Variation
Indicate which locations were determined to yield higher incident energy results because of
potential arcing current variation (LV only).
The following logic applies to the %Ia Variation filter:
1) This filter is designed to detect problems caused by the posible variation of the arcing
current magnitude for an arc fault at the buses. If the program determines that reduced
current may cause worse (or a lot higher) incident energy results, it generates a flag and
lists this bus in the results window. The variation is only applied to low voltage buses.
2) The filter will also check for arcing current variation problems for an arc fault at the
source protective devices or load terminals. Each one of these locations is treated
separately. This means that the program may indicate that the arcing current variation
causes problems for a fault at the main source protective device, but not for a fault at the
bus or load terminals below. Each location is treated separately.
3) The program indicates that the variation flag or warning has been raised by printing the
%Ia variation in the column called % Ia Variation. Typically the value will be 15% which
means 85% of the original current was used to determine the incident energy (as
recommended by IEEE 1584 guidelines).
FCT by Secondary PD
Indicate which locations have potential coordination problems under arc fault conditions (i.e. first
upstream protective device does not trip the first).
The following logic applies to the FCT by Secondary PD filter:
1) This filter applies for a fault at the bus, source PD, and load terminal.

Exceeds Max. FCT

The arc flash analysis Exceeds Max. FCT filter is designed to easily filter out any bus,
protective device or load terminal fault which has a Fault Clearing Time higher than the
maximum allowed. Typically the maximum value is set by default to 2.0 seconds or 120 cycles.
The following logic applies to the Exceeds Max. FCT filter:
1) The filter detects this condition for faults at the bus, source PDs and load terminals. In
other words the program generates a warning flag for each location with a clearing time
greater than the maximum.
2) The program displays the message > Max. FCT in the Exceeds Max FCT column of
the result window whenever this condition is present.
3) The maximum FCT feature must be enabled in the AF page of the short-circuit study case
editor for the flag and the filter to work.
Filter Reports By Hazard Category

The Hazard Category filter allows the user to filter out and color the incident energy results
according to the category level ranges defined in NFPA 70E 2000, 2004 and 2009 guidelines.
This filter obtains its current category level definitions from the Project\Settings\Hazard/Risk
Category editor definitions as shown below:
Hazard Category Level Drop List

This drop list allows the user to select which group of category definitions to use and show in the
filter selection window below. The Image below shows the Hazard Category drop list. The
default selection of this drop list is the new NFPA 70E 2009 categories.

Show Colors Check Box

The show colors check box enables the coloring of the results according to the selected filter
colors from the category filter selection window. If this checkbox is not selected, then the
coloring is not enabled.
NFPA 70E 2000

Show only the results for the scenarios which were categorized using NFPA 70E 2000 risk levels.
NFPA 70E 2004

NFPA 70E 2009

User-Defined Values
Show only the results for the scenarios which were categorized using user-defined risk levels.
CAT 0
Show the incident energy results for locations with risk category 0
CAT 1
CAT 2
CAT 3
CAT 4
>CAT 4
Show the incident energy results for locations with risk category higher > 4.
Not Det.

Show the incident energy results for locations for which a hazard/risk assessment could not be
determined.
Show Colors
Display the colors for each category in the results window of the analyzer.
Hazard Category Filter Selection Window

This window displays the category ID, the Category Max limit (cal/cm2) and the color selection
buttons for each category. To enable the colors, click in the color box to open the color selection
editor as shown in the image below:

The default colors for the each of the categories are displayed in the following table:
Default Category ID (cal/cm2) Color

NFPA 70 2009
Cat 0 1.2 Yellow
Cat 1 4 Yellow
Cat 2 8 Orange
Cat 3 25 Orange
Cat 4 40 Red
> Cat 4 > 40 Red
Not Det. N/A Red
NFPA 70 2004
Cat 0 2 Yellow
Cat 1 4 Yellow
Cat 2 8 Orange
Cat 3 25 Orange
Cat 4 40 Red
> Cat 4 > 40 Red

Default Category ID (cal/cm2) Color

Not Det. N/A Red
NFPA 70 2000
Cat 0 1.2 Yellow
Cat 1 5 Yellow
Cat 2 8 Orange
Cat 3 25 Orange
Cat 4 40 Red
> Cat 4 > 40 Red
Not Det. N/A Red
User-Defined
Values
Cat A 1.2 Yellow
Cat B 5 Yellow
Cat C 8 Orange
Cat D 25 Orange
Cat E 40 Red
Cat F 100 Red
Cat G 120 Red
Cat H 0 (disabled) No Color
Cat I 0 (disabled) No Color
Cat J 0 (disabled) No Color
> Last Enabled Cat
Not Det. N/A Red
The following specific logic applies to the hazard/risk category filter:
1) The results window filters out any result which does not match with the category levels
selected in the Hazard Category Drop List and Selection Window. This means that if you
ran some studies with the NFPA 70E 2000 and and some other studies with the NFPA
70E 2004 category levels, but the drop list selection is NFPA 70E 2009, then the program
only displays the reports which were generated using the NFPA 70E 2009 selection in the
AF Data Page of the short-circuit study case editor.
2) The Not Det option of the filter shows all the results for which the hazard category
could not be determined. One common cause of this condition is when the program fails
to determine the fault clearing time (i.e. FCT not determined condition). This means
that enabling the results of the FCT not determined filter will most likely produce similar
results to those of this filter option.
Display Options
This section will be enabled in a future release of the program.
Actual Value
Actual operating values of the incident energy results
Differences with Ref

Show the result difference between two scenarios
Skip if Same
Do not show results if they are the same in multiple scenarios.
FCT Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the fault clearing time. Choose
between cycles, seconds, or milliseconds.
Cycles
Display the fault clearing times in cycles.
Seconds
Display the fault clearing times in seconds.
Milliseconds
Display the fault clearing times in milliseconds.

18.11.2 AF Report Analyzer Reporting Tools

Standard Label
The label button is a very powerful tool which allows you to make selections for printing labels.
Before ETAP 7.0, you had to go to navigate through each output report and print each label
depending on which report had the highest incident energy. With the Arc Flash Report analyzer,
this task has been tremendously simplified.
Now you can select to print individual labels from amongst dozens of different reports. The most
common case for printing labels is described below:
1) Select the Filter Results By Maximum Incident Energy Filter

2) Select the locations for which you want to print labels
3) Click on the Label button to open the Arc Flash Label Manager.
4) Select the language and template to user for printing. There are hundreds of predefined
templates available and several languages to choose from depending on your location.
5) Click OK to generate the label.
6) Send the print job to your label printer (Brady or DuraLabel) or color laser jet printer.

The following logic applies for printing labels from the Arc Flash Report Analyzer:
1) If the maximum incident energy filter is not enabled and you are displaying results from
multiple results, then the selection for printing the labels should be done either selecting a
column or only individual cells from each column. Selecting more than one result for
each element caused the Label button to be disabled. Pleae see the image below:


2) If the Maximum Incident Energy Filter is enabled, then you can select the labels to be
printed in almost any way you want. As long as a single cell or multiple cells are selected
for any element (row), causes the program to generate a label.
3) Pressing the Esc key on the keyboard allows you to deselect the cells. Pressing the Ctrl
key on the keyboard allows you to select individual cells, rows or columns.
4) Simply selecting the entire ID column will force the program to generate labels for all
elements displayed in the results window.
Custom Labels
Labels are the end result of Arc Flash Studies. Many labels need to be customized according to
different regulations or preferences (i.e. CSAZ462, NFPA 70E, NEC, ANSI Z535, etc).
Unfortunately, NFPA 70E has not standardized on any label template and thus there may be
different interpretations of the same content.
To enable this button, valid fields must be selected. The logic to select valid fields is the same as
printing standard labels. See above under Standard Label for logic on how to select valid fields.

Click Custom Label to open the Custom Label template interface.
Custom Label Database

During the process of opening an Arc Flash Custom Template, ETAP creates an Excel Database
Spreadsheet. The database contains fields needed to create a label. See below for details on all
fields exported to this database.
A message will appear that the Custom Label database is generating in the Arc Flash Report
Analyzer.

Note- This feature might take several minutes to generate depending on the amount of fields
selected.
The Custom Arc Flash Label templates and the Custom Label Database are saved in the ETAP
folder. (By default, ETAP 7.5.0 is installed in the C Drive.)
C:\ETAP 750\Formats750\AF Custom Label Templates
Under this location, there is a folder called BACKUP. Inside the BACKUP folder, there are
duplicates of the templates in case a user wants to revert back to the original label template.
C:\ETAP 750\Formats750\AF Custom Label Templates\BACKUP
In order to open a new template and use the same Custom Label Database generated previously,
navigate to the location listed above using Windows Explorer. To see previews of the label
templates, see below under Custom Arc Flash Label Templates.
Once the label database is created from ETAP, the database and the label templates can be stored
in any location. As long as the label template is linked to the database, the template will import all
the information from that label database. From there, ETAP is not needed to create new label
templates.

Exported Fields in Custom Database

Below is the list of results generated to the Arc Flash Custom Database in chronological order.
The description of each field is located in the Info section under the Arc Flash Report Analyzer.
Note- Units for each field are updated based on the selection of the Project/Settings/Standards
section in ETAP.
Fields that are Exported to the Custom

Label Database Fields in chronological order
Device ID 1
Arc Flash Protection Boundary (ft) 2
Total Energy (cal/cm) 3
Final FCT (cycles) 4
Working Distance (in) 5
Device Nominal or Rated kV 6
Hazard Category Level 7
Hazard Category ID 8
PPE Description 9
LAB to Exp. Mov. Conductor (ft) 10
LAB to Fixed Part (ft) 11
Restricted Approach Boundary (ft) 12
Prohibited Approach Boundary (ft) 13
Source PD ID 14
Source Trip Relay ID 15
Source Trip Relay Type 16
Glove Class 17
Glove V-rating (VAC) 18
Shock Hazard Present When 19
Print Mov or Fixed LAB 20
Project File Name 21
Date 22
Engineer 23
Contract Number 24
Equipment Name 25
System Frequency 26
Unit System 27
User Defined Text 28
Avail. PPE Protection (cal/cm) 29
Hazard Disclaimer 30
Trip Time (cycles) 31


Open Time (cycles) 32
Total Ibf'' (kA) 33
Total Ia'' (kA) 34
% Ia Variation 35
Energy 1 (cal/cm) 36
Equipment Type 39
Exceeds Max FCT 40
FCT 1 (cycles) 41
FCT 2 (cycles) 42
FCT 3 (cycles) 43
Not All PDs connected have FCT 44
PD Ia (kA) 45
PD Ia' (kA) 46
PD Ia'' (kA) 47
PD Ia at FCT (kA) 48
PD Ibf (kA) 49
PD Ibf' (kA) 50
PD Ibf'' (kA) 51
PD Ibf at FCT (kA) 52
Total Ia at FCT (kA) 53
Total Ia (kA) 54
Total Ia' (kA) 55
Total Ia" (kA) 56
Total Ibf at FCT (kA) 57
Total Ibf (kA) 58
Total Ibf' (kA) 59
Total Ibf" (kA) 60
Bus Gap (mm) 61
Connected Bus 62
Grounding 63
Hazard/Risk Categories 64
LV Equipment Forced Category Flag 65
Not First Upstream PD Clears Fault 66
PD FCT 1 (cycles) 67


Source PD Ia (kA) 70
Source PD Ia' (kA) 71
Source PD Ia'' (kA) 72
Source PD Ia at FCT (kA) 73
Source PD Ibf (kA) 74
Source PD Ibf' (kA) 75
Source PD Ibf'' (kA) 76
Source PD Ibf at FCT (kA) 77
Total PD FCT (cycles) 78
X Factor 79
Base kV 80
Nominal kV 81
Prefault Voltage in % Base kV 82
Prefault Voltage in % Bus Nom kV 83
Custom Arc Flash Label Templates

Below are previews of some of the Arc Flash Label Templates that are provided.
Note- The templates seen below are duplicated for different types of headers. There are blank
headers, danger headers and warning headers provided in the AF Custom Label Templates folder.
4x6 Warning Header

4x6 Warning Header_NoHRC
4x6 Warning Header_Q3CanadianNoHRC

4x6 Warning Header_Q4CanadianNoHRC
4x6 Warning Header_Z462Q3Canadian

4x6 Warning Header_Z462Q4Canadian
4x6 Warning Text Header_SafetyPro
Create a New Custom Template

Open Microsoft Word and create a new document.
Go to Page Layout/Size/More Paper Sizes. Verify that the paper size is Custom Size.
Enter the width and height.
Note-There is a preview on the bottom to ensure the correct paper size is selected.

Select OK after entering paper size.
Note- If the default printer is selected to a standard printer, a message will appear about how the
margins are set outside of the printable area of the page. Select Ignore.

Go to Margins/Custom Margins and change the margins to 0.
Note- The error pertaining to the margins and the printable area of the page will appear again.
Select Ignore.

Verify a 4x6 word document has been created for the label.
Link the AF Custom Label Database To a New Template
Go to Mailings/ Select Recipients/Use Existing List.
The program will ask to select a Data Source. Navigate to the Label Database which is
located in:
C:\ETAP 710\Formats710\AF Custom Label Templates

Note- This location assumes that ETAP was installed in the C: Drive.

A window named Select Table will appear. Select the Arc Flash Report Analyzer table
and select OK. This will link the AF Custom Label Database to the new template.
Insert Fields to the Label
To insert fields to the label, draw a text box. The text box allows for easier formatting.
Note- Notice that there is an outline around the text box. To make the outline of the text box
invisible, right click on the outline and select no color.
Go to Mailings and select the Insert Merge Field drop down menu. This will give a list of
the fields that can be added to the label.

Notice that the field is now entered in the text box. To view the results, select the Preview
Results button. To navigate to all entries, use the arrows located in the top toolbar.

View the Label Database:

In order to view the label database that was created from the Arc Flash Report Analyzer, select
Edit Recipient List. This brings a window that contains the Custom Label database that is
currently linked to the Custom Label Template.
This window allows the user to view all the results listed in the database. Each field has a drop
down option which allows the user to sort or hide certain fields.

To print the labels in alphabetical order, click on the Device ID arrow. A drop down menu will
appear. Select Sort Ascending and click OK. Notice all the labels are in alphabetical order.
In order to not print any label that has a result FCT Not Determined, go to Edit Recipient List.
From there, Sort Ascending the Hazard Category Level field. Uncheck all the fields that have
the result FCT Not Determined and click OK. Navigate to all fields and notice that any label that
has FCT Not Determined is no longer in the collection of labels.
Rules Applied to Each Custom Label

Placed in the header of each template is a rule that skips all records that have the Hazard Category
listed as FCT Not Determined.
To add rule:
Place cursor in the upper most portion of the label template

Go to Rules/Skip Record If

Preview results and navigate to all existing labels. Notice that you will still see a label
that states FCT Not Determined. This is correct. Select Finish & Merge/ Edit
Individual Documents.

Increase the amount of significant figures

Insert field into text box.
Highlight field, right click and select Toggle Field Codes
Insert \#0.0 at the end of the field name. (There is a space after the field name. The
bold simply indicates the field name.)
Note- The 0 is a place holder. That means more significant figures can be inserted. For example,
to have two decimal places, type in \#0.00).
See below for example:
{ MERGEFIELD LAB_to_Exp_Mov_Conductor_ft \#0.0 }
Automatically change the units from English to Metric standard

Draw a text box
Type ft in the text box.
Highlight the text, select Rules/IfThen Else.
Set the rule and click OK.

Highlight the text once more, right click and select Toggle Field codes. The entry should
match as seen below.
{ IF { MERGEFIELD Unit_System } = English ft m }
Add a Picture to the Label

First, the layout of the picture must be In Front of Text. This allows the picture to be placed
anywhere in the label without moving or shifting the text. To set the label to default, go to Word
Options/Advanced. There is a section called Cut, copy and paste. Change the setting for the
Insert/paste pictures as: field to In Front of Text.

Work Permit
A work permit is part of the NFPA 70E Guidelines. It is required when performing work on
energized equipment. It contains information about the shock hazard and the arc flash analysis
results. The work permit needs to be generated for individual bus arc flash results. It is launched
from the Arc Flash Report Analyzer. Customize the report analyzer to fit the requirements of each
project.

The Energized Electrical Work Permit Editor can be accessed from the Arc Flash Report
Analyzer by clicking on the Work Permit Button. Please note that the work permit will be printed
for several buses, protective devices, and load terminal arc flash results if they are selected;
however, typical work permits would be created one at a time. The following image shows how
to access the work permit editor from the AFRA:

Note: The two rows that were selected, represent two different work permits.
Once clicking on the Work Permit button, a Save As window will generate. This allows to create
a new or open an existing work permit template. If creating a new template, type the name in the
file name path and click Save. This will save the work permit document based on the name given
in the file name. If opening an existing work permit template, navigate to the file and click Save.
An alert message will appear stating to overwrite the existing file. What this means is that the
buses, protective devices, or load terminals arc flash analysis results that have been highlighted in
the Arc Flash Report Analyzer will be updated in Part II in the work permit editor. Note that the
description in the editor will not be changed.
Reset
The reset button will bring back the original settings of the work permit. In other words, this
deletes all the descriptions in the Work Permit. This information cannot be retrieved once this is
selected.
Open
To open an existing work permit template.
Save
To save all edits made in the work permit editor.
Print

Click to print document. If there was more than one row selected in the Arc Flash Report
Analyzer window, more than one work permit will be printed.
OK
To navigate out of the work permit editor. This automatically saves any changes made.
Cancel
When clicking Cancel, this does not save any changes made to the editor window and navigates
back to the Arc Flash Report Analyzer window.
Electrical Work Permit PART I:

Part 1 of the electrical work permit can contain up to five different questions and answers. The
first three questions must be included by default into the editor since they correspond to the
wording of the questions as they appear in NFPA 70E 2004 Annex J Energized Electrical Work
Permit.
The user is free to modify the items as needed for their particular application of the work permit.
The user is capable of enabling (selecting the check boxes) three additional items to be shown in
the editor for this section. Note that 3000 characters are allowed in each question and answer
field.
Electrical Work Permit PART II:

Part II of the electrical work permit can contain up to 15 different questions and answers. The
first 9 questions must be included by default into the editor since they correspond to the wording
of the questions as they appear in NFPA 70E 2004 Annex J Energized Electrical Work Permit.
The user is free to modify the items as needed for their particular application of the work permit.
In fact, the user is capable of enabling (selecting the check boxes) six additional items to be
shown in the editor for this section.
The data for the bus or PD selected in the work permit editor includes the following fields:
BusID
Incident Energy
Hazard/Risk Category
FPB (ft)
Nominal Voltage
Output Report Name
Limited Approach Boundary
Required PPE Level
Glove V-Rating
Glove Class
Working Distance
Part II of the electrical permit can contain up to 3 different Electrically Qualified Person
signatures.
Electrical Work Permit PART III:

Part III of the electrical work permit can contain up to 4 different approval signatures and one
general note field. The format correspond to the Approval section as they appear in NFPA 70E
2004 Annex J Energized Electrical Work Permit.
Data Sheet
The Data Sheet is an enhanced version of the arc flash analysis report. It gives detailed
description of what selections were made in the SC study case and how the bus results were
obtained.
To access the Data sheet, navigate to the Arc Flash Report Analyzer. Select the entire row of any
bus and click on the Data Sheet button located on the bottom right corner. From there, an Arc
Flash Data Sheet Report Manager window will generate. Select the report and click OK. A report
will be created based on how the bus arc flash results were obtained such as what type of bus
fault current method was used, what type of system grounding, what PPE Hazard/Risk Categories
were chosen and so forth. More details are listed below.
Note: If multiple reports are filtered by Incident Energy Max or Min, the data sheet button will
not be active.
Below is the generated Data Sheet report. There are 6 sections that describe how the bus results
were obtained.


Project/System Data
Describes how the project data was set based on the project settings. Information such as project
location, the project standard, unit system of the project, what date the report was ran, and report
name are located in this section.
Arc Flash Summary Results for this Location

The bus arc flash analysis results described are based on the Data Sheet in the Project/System
Data. It states Shock Hazard Voltage, Incident Energy, FCT, Source PD, Flash Protective
Boundary, Working Distance, Hazard Risk Category, the PPE description, and the Approach
Boundaries for the particular bus chosen.
If there are unique results for the bus, The Abnormal Condition descriptions will be shown.
These unique results are arc current variation, if second level protective devices clears the fault, if
the FCT exceeds the maximum specified in the Arc Flash page of the Short Circuit Study case,
and if the PPE Arc Rating has exceeded the maximum. Below are the flags that will be shown if
any of the conditions are met.
Arcing Current Variation of xx% was used.

Not the first upstream protective device clears the fault.
Fault Clearing Time Exceeds the Maximum!
Incident Energy Exceeds the Maximum. No PPE Available!
Note-xx% is the arcing current variation specified in the SC study case.
Arc Flash Input Data

This information was gathered from the AF Data page of the Short Circuit Study Case. The Gaps,
X-Factor, Working Distance, Flash Protection Boundary, PPE Hazard/Risk Categories, and
Shock Hazard Analysis selections are displayed.
System Impedance Adjustments

Impedance tolerances and adjustments are displayed based Adjustment page of the SC Study
case.
Short-Circuit Contributions
This shows what type of bus fault current method was used, what type of motor contribution the
study was ran in, the prefault voltage and if the synchronous generator model was used.
Arc Flash Methodology

This shows what method the arc flash calculation was used to determine the results, the system
ground and if the Hazard Category for LV equipment was selected.

Chapter 19
Load Flow
The ETAP Load Flow Analysis Module calculates the bus voltages, branch power factors, currents, and
power flows throughout the electrical system. ETAP allows for swing, voltage regulated, and unregulated
power sources with multiple power grids and generator connections. It is capable of performing analysis
on both radial and loop systems. ETAP allows you to select from several different methods in order to
achieve the best calculation efficiency.
This chapter defines definitions and explains the usage of different tools you will need to run load flow
studies. Theoretical background for different load flow calculation methods is also provided.
The Load Flow toolbar section explains how you can launch a load flow calculation, open and view an
output report, or select display options. The Load Flow Study Case Editor section explains how you can
create a new study case, what parameters are required to specify a study case, and how to set them. The
Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system parameters
and the output results on the one-line diagram, and how to set them. The Load Flow Calculation Methods
section shows formulations of different load flow calculation methods. Comparisons on their rate of
convergence, improving convergence based on different system parameters and configurations, and some
tips on selecting an appropriate calculation method are also found in this section. The Required Data for
Calculations section describes what data is necessary to perform load flow calculations and where to enter
them. The Load Flow Study Output Report section illustrates and explains output reports and their format.
Finally, the Load Flow Result Analyzer allows you to view the results of various studies in one screen so
you can analyze and compare the different results.

Load Flow Analysis Toolbar
19.1 Load Flow Toolbar

The Load Flow toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Load Flow Study Mode.
Run Load Flow Studies
Run Control Auto Simulator
Load Flow Display Options
Alert View
Load Flow Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Load Flow Comparator
Load Flow Result Analyzer
Load Analyzer
Run Load Flow Studies

Select a Study Case from the Study Case Editor. Then click on the Run Load Flow Study icon to
perform a load flow study. A dialog box will appear to specify the output report name if the output file
name is set to Prompt. The study results will then appear on the one-line diagram and in the Output
Report.
Run Control Auto Simulator

The Control Auto Simulator capability allows the ETAP program to generate operating values and
emergency conditions of a power system and feeds the information to actual control systems of
generators. You can specify emergency conditions to be simulated, including generator governor and
exciter control modes and associated causes as well as circuit breaker status changes and associated
causes from the Emergency page of the Load Flow Study Case. This feature can be used to test and tune
the setting and reaction time of the physical control systems of your generators.
Note: ETAP Real-Time is needed in order to enable this feature.

Load Flow Display Options

The results from load flow studies are displayed on the one-line diagram. To edit how these results look,
click on the Load Flow Display Options icon. For more information see Load Flow Display Options.
Alert View
After performing a load flow study, you can click on this button to open the Alert View, which lists all
equipment with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the study case.
Load Flow Report Manager

Load Flow Output Reports are provided in the form of a Crystal Report. The Report Manager provides
four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report for
Crystal Reports. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report Manager
for load flow studies. You can view the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF,
MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click
the Set As Default checkbox.
Choosing any format in the Report Manager activates the Crystal Reports. You can open the whole load
flow output report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection. The format names and
corresponding output report sections are given below:
Adjustments Indicates tolerance and temperature correction adjustments

Alert-Complete Provides complete report of system alerts
Alert-Critical Provides summary of critical alerts only
Alert-Marginal Provides summary of marginal alerts only
Branch Loading Branch loading results

Branch Branch input data

Bus Loading Displays overloaded bus information
Bus Bus input data
Cable Cable input data
Complete Complete output report including all input and output
Cover Title page of the output report
Equipment Cable Equipment cable input data
High Voltage DC Link High Voltage DC Link input data
Impedance Provides detailed information about impedance elements in the system
Line Coupling Displays Transmission Line coupling impedance data
Load Flow Report Load Flow calculation results
Losses Branch loss results
NO Protective Devices Displays Normally Open protective devices
Panel Report Load Flow calculation results for panel systems
Reactor Reactor input data
Summary Summary of load flow calculation
SVC Static Var Compensator (SVC) input data
Transformer Transformer input data
UPS Report Load Flow calculation results for UPS systems
toolbar. A list of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for load flow calculations. To
view any of the listed output reports, click on the output report name, and then click on the View Output
Report button.

The Stop Sign button is normally grayed-out. When a Load Flow calculation has been initiated, this
button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the calculation.
Get Online Data

When ETAP Real-Time is set up and the Sys Monitor presentation is online, you can bring real-time data
into your offline presentation and run a Load Flow by pressing on this button. You will notice that the
Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the online data.
Get Archived Data

When ETAPS Playback is set up and any presentation is on Playback Mode, you can bring this data into
your presentation and run a Load Flow by pressing on this button. You will notice that the Operating
Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the playback data.
Load Flow Comparator

When ETAP Real-Time is set up and after you run a Load Flow study with online data, you can press this
button to bring up the Load Flow Comparator view. It lists comparison of all system operating values
between ETAP Real-Time output and Load Flow calculations.
Load Flow Result Analyzer

The Load Flow Result Analyzer allows you to view the results of various studies in one screen so you can
analyze and compare the different results.
Load Analyzer
The Load Analyzer tool and its associated reports are designed for load schedule reporting of
ETAP models. This module allows the user to report loads of multilevel-connected elements in a
system directly (called Connected Loads), or by applying different multiplying factors (called
Operating Loads).

Load Flow Analysis Study Case Editor

The Load Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, and a variety of
options for output reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases. Load
flow calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the study case selected in
the toolbar. You can easily switch between study cases without having to reset the study case options each
time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
As a part of the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, study cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system toolbar components, i.e. for any configuration status, one-line
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision data.
When you are in Load Flow Analysis Mode, you can access the Load Flow Study Case Editor by clicking
on the Study Case button from the Load Flow Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from
the Project View by clicking on the Load Flow Study Case folder.
There are two ways you can create a new study case. You can click on the New Study Case button in the
Study Case toolbar, as shown above. It will open the Duplicate Study Case dialog box for you to specify
names of an existing Study Case and the new study case you want to create.
You can also create a new Study Case from the Project View, by right-clicking on the Load Flow Study
Case folder and selecting Create New. ETAP will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the
default Study Case, and adds it to the Load Flow Study Case folder.


19.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and
entering the new ID. Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator button at
the bottom of the editor to go from one study case to the next existing Study Case.
Method
In this group you can select a load flow solution method. Three methods are available: Newton-Raphson,
Fast-decoupled, and Accelerated Gauss-Seidel.
For the Newton-Raphson, a few Gauss-Seidel iterations are made first to establish a set of sound initial
values for the bus voltages (since convergence of the Newton-Raphson Method is highly dependent on
the initial bus voltages).

Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number for iterations in this field. If the solution has not converged before the
specified number of iterations, the program will stop and inform you. The recommended and default
values are 2000 for the Gauss-Seidel Method, and five for the Newton-Raphson and Fast-Decoupled
Methods.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision in this field, which is used to check for convergence. This value
determines how precise you want the final solution to be. For the Gauss-Seidel Method, precision is
applied to check the difference between the bus voltages after each iteration. For the Newton-Raphson
and Fast-Decoupled Methods, the precision is compared with the difference in power for each bus (MW
and Mvar) between iterations. If the difference between the iterations is less than or equal to the value
entered for precision, the desired accuracy is achieved.
If the solution converges but the mismatch values are high, reduce the value of the precision to make your
results more precise and run the program again (you may need to increase the number of iterations).
Note: A smaller precision value results in lower mismatch (higher accuracy), as well as a longer run time.
The default (and recommended) values are 0.000001 pu volts for the Gauss-Seidel Method, and .0001 pu
power for the Newton-Raphson and Fast-Decoupled Methods.
Accel. Factor
This field is present if the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method is used. Enter the convergence acceleration
factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 1.2 and 1.7; the default is 1.45.
Apply XFMR Phase-Shift

Check this box to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found in the Transformer Editor.
Calc. Panel/UPS Systems

Check this box to include panel and/or UPS system load flow calculations as part of the whole system
load flow calculation. A panel/UPS system is defined as a radial sub-system that is powered through a top
panel, UPS, or a phase adaptor connected to a 3-phase bus. A power system may contain several
panel/UPS systems. Each panel/UPS system has a top element that is a 3-phase panel, 3-phase UPS, or a
phase adapter.
If this box is checked, bus voltages and branch flows in panel/UPS systems will be calculated in a load
flow run and calculation results will be reported in the one-line diagram and the crystal report. If this box
is not checked, the load for each panel/UPS system will be summed up to its top element for the loading
specified in the study case. This load summation is based on the load rated voltage and does not consider
any branch losses. The top element will be treated as a single load in the system.
The panel/UPS system must be a radial system. ETAP checks loop configurations in panel/UPS systems
when performing load flow calculations. Should a loop configuration be detected, the load flow
calculation will be terminated and a message will be posted.
Update
In this group, you can decide to update initial conditions of the buses and/or set the transformer taps to the
calculated value of LTCs. The selected options will be updated after the subsequent load flow run.

Initial Bus Voltage

Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of the load flow run.
Bus voltage update will result in a faster convergence of the subsequent load flow solutions since the
initial bus voltages will be closer to the final values.
Inverter Operating Load

In an AC load flow study, an inverter is represented as a constant voltage source. When this option is
checked, the load provided by the inverter will be updated to the inverter element, which can be used later
as DC load of the inverter in a DC Load Flow Study.
Operating Load & V

The option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the calculation
results will be updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for later studies.
These values are also displayed in element editors. If your ETAP key does not have the online feature,
you can see the operating P, Q, and V in only element editors, and they cannot be used in a later study.
Transformer LTCs
Select this option to update the transformer taps to reflect the result of load tap changer (LTC) settings,
i.e., transformer taps will be set to values determined from the load flow solution for LTCs. This feature is
useful when you want to consider the impedance of the LTC taps for short-circuit calculations. Selecting
this option will also display the LTC settings on the OLV.
Cable Load Amp

Select this option to transfer cable load current data from the previously run load flow study. The data is
transferred to the Operating Load Current in the Cable Editor for each cable associated with the load flow
study.
Report
Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference by clicking on in Percent or in kV. For graphical display of bus voltages
see Load Flow Display Options.
Equipment Cable Losses and Vd

Select this option to print an equipment cable losses and voltage drop report. Once this option is selected,
you will have the option to Exclude Load Diversity Factor. Checking this option will exclude the load
diversity factor in the calculations of equipment cable losses and voltage drop in the report only. For more
information on load diversity factors, see the Loading page of the Load Flow Study Case Editor.
Initial Voltage Condition

Initial conditions for all bus voltages and angles can be specified in this section for load flow calculation
purposes.
Bus Initial Voltages

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editors. Using this
option, you can simulate load flow studies with different initial conditions for bus voltage.

User-Defined Fixed Value

This option allows you to simulate load flow studies using a fixed bus voltage and angle for all buses.
When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage value as the percent
of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude and zero degree for
bus voltage angle.
Determination of Initial Bus Voltage Angle

When transformer phase-shift is considered in the load flow calculation, the initial bus voltage angle
should be taken into account. Otherwise, very poor initial bus voltage angle may be used and which may
affect load flow convergence. To resolve this issue, the ETAP Load Flow Module calculates the bus
voltage angle-based on transformer phase-shift and compares the calculated value against the initial bus
voltage angle from user selected option. If the difference between the two values is larger than the
specified MaxIniAngDiff, ETAP uses the calculated the values as the initial bus voltage angle, where
MaxIniAngDiff is an ETAP.INI file entry defaulted at 10. According to the selection for the initial bus
voltage and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift field, there are four different situations:
When the Use Fixed Values is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is also checked, the
calculated initial bus voltage angles are used in the load flow calculation.
When the Use Bus Voltages is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is also checked, the initial
bus voltage angle from the Bus Editor is compared against the calculated bus voltage angle. If the
difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the initial bus voltage angle from the Bus Editor is used;
otherwise the calculated value is used in the load flow calculation.
When the Use Fixed Values is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is not checked, the initial
voltage angle entered in the Load Flow Study Case is used in the load flow calculation. In this case,
all the buses have the same initial voltage angle.
When the Use Bus Voltages is checked and the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is not checked, the initial
bus voltage angles from the Bus Editor are used in the load flow calculation.
When the operating load is specified as the system load, the operating voltage angles are used as the
initial value. In this case, if the Apply XFMR Phase-Shift is checked, the operating voltage angle is
compared against the calculated bus voltage angle. If the difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the
operating voltage angle is used; otherwise the calculated value is used in the load flow calculation.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remarks field. Information entered in this
location will be printed on the second line of every output page header line. These remarks can provide
specific information for each study cases. The first line of the header information is global for all study
cases and is entered in the Project Information Editor.

19.2.2 Loading Page
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories for the current Load Flow Study. With the selection of any
category, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified for the selected
category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Induction
Machine Editor and Synchronous Motor Editor and the Loading or Rating page of other load component
editors.
Operating P, Q
This option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the operating
loads updated from online data or a previous Load Flow Study will be utilized in the Load Flow Study.
Generation Category

Select one of the ten Generation Categories for the current Load Flow Study. With the selection of any
category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating page of
the Generator Editor. The generator controls will be different depending on the mode that the generator is
operating under. The mode of generation is selected on the Info page of the Generator Editor. The table
below shows the generation controls with respect to the mode of generation.
Mode Generation Category Control

Swing %V and Angle
Voltage Control %V and MW
MVAR Control MW and MVAR
PF Control MW and PF
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if your ETAP key has the online feature. When this box is checked, the generator
operating values updated from online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load Flow
Study.

This section allows you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the loading category load. When
the Operating Load is selected, a diversity factor is not considered.
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Minimum
When the minimum bus loading option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each
bus will be multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow
studies with each bus having a different minimum diversity factor.
The minimum bus loading study option may be used to see the effect of transformer taps and capacitors
(if any) on the system voltages under a minimum (light) loading condition.
Bus Maximum
When the Maximum Loading option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus
will be multiplied by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow
studies with each bus having a different maximum diversity factor.
This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be considered and each
bus may be loaded at a different maximum value.
Global Diversity Factor

Enter the diversity factors for all constant kVA, constant Z, generic, and constant I loads. When you
select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all motors, static loads, constant current loads, and generic
loads of the selected Loading Category with the entered values for the respective load diversity factors.
Constant kVA
Constant kVA loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, conventional and unbalanced lumped
loads with % motor load, UPSs, and chargers.

Constant Z
Constant impedance loads include static loads, capacitors, harmonic filters, MOVs, and conventional and
unbalanced lumped loads with % static load.
Constant I
Constant current loads include unbalanced lumped loads with % constant current load.
Generic
Generic loads include lumped loads modeled using either the exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive
model.
Please refer to the Section 15.4 (Calculations Methods) for the load-modeling concepts used in ETAP.
Note: A motor load-multiplying factor of 125% implies that the motor loads of all buses are increased by
25 percent above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100 percent.
Charger Loading
You have the option to use the Loading Category or the Operating Load for chargers. The operating load
for a charger can only be updated from a DC Load Flow Study.


This page allows you to specify tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and impedance.
Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance setting or
based on a globally specified percent value.
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to impedance values for transformer, reactor, and
overload heater.

This adjustment is applied to transformer impedance. The net effect of the transformer impedance
adjustment in load flow calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent tolerance value.
For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used
in the load flow calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.
The Impedance Adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by using the tolerance percent value
specified in the Transformer Editor Rating page. A global Transformer Impedance Adjustment can be

of Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Load Flow Module increases the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor impedance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
The Impedance Adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by using the tolerance percent value
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Load
Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any individual
Overload Heater Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the overload heater (OH) resistance. The Load Flow Module increases the
OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
corresponding field of Short Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Length Tolerance
This section allows you to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line lengths.

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Load Flow Module increases the cable length by the
specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop. For
the load flow calculation is 210 ft.
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Load Flow Study Case

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Load Flow Module increases the
transmission line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently
a larger voltage drop. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the tolerance is
2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the load flow calculation is 2.05 miles.

of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any

This group allows you to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature for
the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Temperature Correction for Cable Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Load Flow Module adjusts the
conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by using the maximum operating
specified as well by selecting and specifying a global maximum temperature value in the corresponding
field of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature correction value
overrides any individual Cable Impedance page maximum temperature. Please refer to the Cable Editor
Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).
Temperature Correction for Transmission Line Resistance

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Load Flow Module adjusts
the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the resistance is increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by using the maximum operating
correction can be specified as well by selecting and specifying a global maximum temperature value in
the corresponding field of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature
correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum temperature.
Please refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).

19.2.4 Alert Page

The Alert page in the Load Flow Study Case Editor is used to specify the setup of all the Simulation
Alerts that are provided to notify you of an abnormal loading condition based on predetermined,
allowable, percent values and system topology. The functional capability of the Simulation Alert
System is to generate alerts when there is an overload in protective devices, buses, transformers, cables,
lines, panels, DC links, reactors, generators, and power grid. The alerts are reported by the generation of
different types of alerts, either graphically in the one-line diagram display or in the Alert View window.
Critical and Marginal Alerts

There are two types of simulation alerts generated after a Load Flow Study. The difference between
Marginal and Critical Alerts is their use of different percent value conditions to determine if an alert
should be generated. If a condition for a Critical alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the Alert
View window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for
Marginal Alerts, except that the overloaded component will be displayed in magenta color. Also, the
Marginal Alerts checkbox must be selected if you wish to display the Marginal Alerts. If a device alert
qualifies it for both Critical and Marginal alerts, only Critical Alerts are displayed. It should be noted that
in order for ETAP to generate alerts for an element type, both the element rating and the percent value

entered in this page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the following
sections.
Loading
This set of value fields allows you to enter the condition percent values of the monitored parameters used
to determine if an alert should be reported based on loading conditions determined by a load flow
calculation. The Load Flow Loading Alerts generate overload alerts.
Bus Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Bus Loading Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of
rated continuous current in the bus is exceeded. The rated continuous current in the bus is specified in the
Rating page of the Bus Editor.
Cable Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Cable Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of allowable
ampacity in the cable is exceeded. The allowable ampacity of the cable is specified in the Ampacity page
Line Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Line Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of derated
ampacity in the transmission line is exceeded. The derated ampacity of the transmission line is calculated
in the Ampacity page of the Transmission Line Editor.
Reactor Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Reactor Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of rated
current in the reactor is exceeded. The rated current in the reactor is specified in the Rating page of the
Reactor Editor.
Transformer Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Transformer Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of
maximum MVA of the transformer is exceeded. The maximum MVA of the transformer is specified in
the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. The simulation alerts work for both 2 and 3-winding
transformers.
Panel Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Panel Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of rated
current in the panel is exceeded. The rated current of the panel is specified in the Rating page of the Panel
Editor.

The Load Flow Module will generate Protective Device Alerts when certain predetermined parameter
value ratings are exceeded. The following table contains a list of the conditions used by the Alert
Simulation program to determine when to report an alert. Load flow results are compared to the
monitored parameters listed in the following table:

Protective Devices Monitored parameters in percent of Condition reported
Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Continuous rated Current OverLoad

High Voltage Circuit Breaker Continuous rated Current OverLoad
Fuses Rated Current OverLoad
Contactors Continuous rated Current OverLoad
SPDT/SPST switches Continuous rated Current OverLoad
The Load Flow Module will generate Protective Device Alerts only if the monitored parameter rating is
larger than zero.
Generator Alert
The Load Flow Module will generate a Generator Alert if the Critical or Marginal percent limit of rated
MW of the generator is exceeded. The rated MW of the generator is specified in the Rating page of the
Generator Editor.
Bus Voltage Alerts

Bus Voltage Simulation Alerts generate alerts if the voltage magnitude percent results from the load flow
calculation exceed or are below the specified nominal kV rating percent values. Bus Voltage Alerts report
over voltage and under voltage alerts.
Generator/Power Grid Excitation Alerts

Simulation Alerts for generator and power grid excitation monitor the percent rated var limits. An alert
for Over Excitation is reported if the Upper Excitation percent limit (Qmax) for the generator is exceeded
according to a load flow calculation. An alert for Under Excitation is reported if the generator Mvar result
from the load flow calculation is below the specified Lower Excitation percent limit (Qmin). You have
the option to run the load flow calculation without monitoring Under Excitation conditions. An alert for
Under Excitation will be reported if the UnderExcited (Qmin) checkbox is selected. The Under Excitation
percent limit for the generator is 100% of Qmin.
ETAP also has two alerts for the generator built into the load flow calculation. ETAP will produce an
Under-Power alert if the real power output of the generator, from the load flow calculation, is less than
the value of Pmin. You can specify Pmin in the Capability page of the Generator Editor. Pmin must be non-
zero in order for ETAP to generate the alert. Also, if the generator is modeled in Swing Mode, it will
absorb real power in load flow if necessary; therefore, ETAP will produce a Pout<0 alert for Swing Mode
generators if the real power output from the load flow calculation is negative.
Marginal Limit
If the Marginal Limit option is checked, the Alert View window will display the marginal alerts as well. If
not selected, the Alert View window will display only the critical alerts.
Auto Display
If the Auto Display option is checked, the Alert View window automatically opens after the load flow
calculation completes. If not checked, the Alert View window can be opened by clicking the Alert View
icon on the Load Flow toolbar.

Load Flow Analysis Calculation Methods

19.3.1 Results Page
The Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for Results, AC, AC-
DC, and Colors information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
Show Units
Select this option to show units for power flow and current displayed on the one-line diagram.
Check All
Select this option to show all available result annotations. When this box is unchecked, the previous
settings are restored.

Voltage
Voltage
Select kV or percent for voltage display on the one-line diagram from the list.
Bus Mag.
Select this option to display bus voltages on the one-line diagram. Bus voltages are displayed at 15
degrees.
Bus Angle
Select this option to display bus angles in degrees on the one-line diagram. Bus angles are displayed at
-15 degrees.
Load Term. Mag.

Select this option to display load (motors and static loads) terminal voltages on the one-line diagram.
Load terminal voltages are displayed at 15 degrees. Load terminal voltages can be displayed based on
load rated kV or bus nominal kV, depending on the selection in Load Term. Base kV.
Load Term. Base kV

This group allows you to select base kV for load terminal magnitude, when the voltage is selected to be
displayed in percent. This group will be disabled if it is selected to display voltage in kV.
Load Rated kV
Select this option to use load rated kV as the base for load terminal voltage display.
Bus Nom. kV
Select this option to use bus nominal kV as the base for load terminal voltage display.
Voltage Drop
Line/Cable
Select this option to display line and cable voltage drops on the one-line diagram.
Load FDR
Select this option to display the load feeder voltage drops.
Panel/UPS Systems
Results
Select this option to display results for panel systems in the one-line diagram, assuming that the Calc.
Panel/UPS System option has been checked in the study case when the load flow calculation was carried
out. If the Calc. Panel System option has not been checked in the load flow study case or the panel system
display option is not checked, no results will be displayed in the one-line diagram.
Average Values
Select this option to display average values for panel system results as shown in the following table.

Panel System Load Flow Results Displayed in Average Values

Phase Type Voltage Current Power
3-Phase Average Value Average Value Total Power
1-Phase, 3-Wire LL Value Average Value Total Power
1-Phase, 2-Wire Phase Value Phase Value Phase Value
All Phases
Select this option to display individual phase values for panel system results. For 3-phase elements,
voltage, current, and power for phases A, B, and C are displayed in sequence, and for one-phase three-
wire elements, voltage, current, and power for phases LL, L1, and L2 are displayed in sequence.
Panel System Load Flow Results Displayed in All Phases

Phase Type Voltage Current Power
3-Phase Phase A, B, & C Phase A, B, & C Phase A, B, & C
1-Phase, 3-Wire Phase LL, L1, & L2 Phase LL, L1, & L2 Phase LL, L1, & L2
1-Phase, 2-Wire Phase Value Phase Value Phase Value

Power Flows
You can specify how the flows will be displayed in this area.
Units
Select the unit (kVA or MVA) to be used to display power flow on the one-line diagram.
kW + jkvar
Select the kW + jkvar radio button to display power flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar.
kVA
Select the kVA radio button to display power flow in kVA or MVA.
Amp
Select the Amp radio button to display current flow in amperes.
%PF
When the Amp or kVA radio button is selected, you can check this box to show power factor of power
flow along with the current.

Flow Results
Branch
Select this option to display power flow through all branches on the one-line diagram. ETAP displays the
power flow at one end of a branch, i.e., the end that has a positive kW value flowing into the branch. For
3-winding transformers, all three power flows are displayed.
Source
Select this option to display power flow for generators and power grids on the one-line diagram.
Load
Select this option to display power flow for motors, MOVs, capacitors, lumped loads, and static loads on
Composite Motor
Select this option to display power flow into composite motors.
Composite Network
Select the checkbox to display power flow into composite networks.
Branch Losses
Select this option to display branch losses on the one-line diagram. Losses are displayed inside a bracket
in [kW+jkvar] or [MW+jMvar].
Meters
Ammeter
Check this option to display primary current for the branch to which an ammeter is attached.
Voltmeter
Check this option to display primary voltage for the bus to which a voltmeter is attached.
Multi-Meter
Check this option to display the measurements of a multi-meter, including bus voltage, branch current,
branch power flow, power factor, and frequency.

19.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating

Generator kW/MW
Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Panel Connection Type (# Phases - # Wires)
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
Relay Display Tag, entered in Info Page of Relay Editor
kV
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z

Generator Subtransient Reactance Xd
Motor % LRC
Branch, Impedance Impedance in Ohms or %
Branch, Reactor Impedance in Ohms
Cable/Line Positive Sequence Impedance (R + j X in Ohms or per unit length)
D-Y
one-line diagram.

For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings are also
Composite Mtr
Use Default Options

Click on this checkbox to use ETAPs default display options. The checkboxes on this page will be
grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable

Click on this checkbox to display equivalent cables.

19.3.3 AC-DC Page

networks.
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating

UPS KVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Use Default Options


19.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Annotations
Theme
applied globally throughout all diagrams. When the option is selected, the name assigned to the applied
color theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.

User-Defined
Select this option to specify a color for element annotations. When this option is chosen, the DC element
annotation color selection list will appear.
Theme Button
Theme Editor
selected.

19.4 Calculation Methods

ETAP provides three load flow calculation methods: Newton-Raphson, Fast-Decoupled, and
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel. They possess different convergent characteristics, and sometimes one is more
favorable in terms of achieving the best performance. You can select any one of them depending on your
system configuration, generation, loading condition, and the initial bus voltages.
Newton-Raphson Method
The Newton-Raphson Method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:
P J 1 J 2
=
Q J
3 J 4 V
where P and Q are bus real power and reactive power mismatch vectors between specified value and
calculated value, respectively; V and represents bus voltage magnitude and angle vectors in an
incremental form; and J1 through J4 are called Jacobian matrices.
The Newton-Raphson Method possesses a unique quadratic convergence characteristic. It usually has a
very fast convergence speed compared to other load flow calculation methods. It also has the advantage
that the convergence criteria are specified to ensure convergence for bus real power and reactive power
mismatches. This criterion gives you direct control of the accuracy you want to specify for the load flow
solution. The convergence criteria for the Newton-Raphson Method are typically set to 0.001 MW and
Mvar.
The Newton-Raphson Method is highly dependent on the bus voltage initial values. A careful selection of
bus voltage initial values is strongly recommended. Before running load flow using the Newton-Raphson
Method, ETAP makes a few Gauss-Seidel iterations to establish a set of sound initial values for the bus
voltages.
The Newton-Raphson Method is recommended for use with any system as a first choice.
Fast-Decoupled Method
The Fast-Decoupled Method is derived from the Newton-Raphson Method. It takes the fact that a small
change in the magnitude of bus voltage does not vary the real power at the bus appreciably, and likewise,
for a small change in the phase angle of the bus voltage, the reactive power does not change appreciably.
Thus the load flow equation from the Newton-Raphson Method can be simplified into two separate
decoupled sets of load flow equations, which can be solved iteratively:
[ P ] = [J1 ][ ]
[ Q] = [J 4 ][ V ]
The Fast-Decoupled method reduces computer memory storage by approximately half, compared to the
Newton-Raphson method. It also solves the load flow equations using significantly less computer time
than that required by the Newton-Raphson method, since the Jacobian matrices are constant.
As with the Newton-Raphson Method, convergence criteria of the Fast-Decoupled Method is based on
real power and reactive power mismatches, which are typically set to 0.001 in the order of MW and Mvar.

Although for a fixed number of iterations it is not as accurate as the Newton-Raphson Method, the
savings in computer time and the more favorable convergence criteria makes for a very good overall
performance.
In general, the Fast-Decoupled Method can be used as an alternative to the Newton-Raphson Method, and
it should definitely be given a try if the Newton-Raphson Method has failed when dealing with long radial
systems or systems that have long transmission lines or cables.
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method

From the system nodal voltage equation
[I ] = [YBUS ][V ]
the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method derives the following load flow equation and solves it iteratively:
[P + jQ] = [V T ][YBUS
*
][V * ]
where P and Q are specified bus real and reactive power vectors, V is the bus voltage vector, and YBUS is
the system admittance matrix. Y*BUS and V* are the conjugates of YBUS and V respectively. VT is the
transpose of V.
The Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method has relatively lower requirements of the bus initial voltage values
compared to the Newton-Raphson Method and the Fast-Decoupled Method. Instead of using bus real
power and reactive power mismatch as convergence criteria, the Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method
checks bus voltage magnitude tolerance between two consecutive iterations to control the solution
precision. The typical value for bus voltage magnitude precision is set to 0.000001 pu.
The Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method has a slower convergence speed. When you apply appropriate
acceleration factors, a significant increase in the rate of convergence can be obtained. The range for the
acceleration factor is between 1.2 and 1.7, and is typically set to 1.45.
Load Flow Convergence

As in any iterative solution method, the convergence of the load flow solution is affected by a number of
factors specific to power systems.
Negative Impedance
Negative resistance and reactance should be avoided. For example, the traditional method of modeling 3-
winding transformers by a Y equivalent model using one impedance and two 2-winding transformers,
could sometimes result in a negative impedance value for one of the impedance branches. In this case, the
negative impedance should be combined with other series circuit elements so that the result is a positive
impedance value. Load flow calculations may not converge if a large value of negative impedance is
used. ETAP can now model 3-winding transformers directly with no need for you to do any conversions.
Zero or Very Small Impedance

A zero or very small impedance value of any branch is not allowed, since this will result in infinity or a
huge number in the system admittance matrix. You should represent this type of impedance by a tie
circuit breaker to solve the problem.

Widely Different Branch Impedance Values

Widely different branch impedance values on the same per unit base may result in a slow convergence.
To avoid this situation, various techniques, such as combining series branches with low impedance
values, ignoring short length transmission lines and/or cables, or modeling a small impedance branch with
tie circuit breakers, can be employed.
Long Radial System Configurations

Long radial system configurations usually take a longer time to converge than loop configurations. In
general, the Fast-Decoupled Method works faster than the Newton-Raphson or the Accelerated Gauss-
Seidel Method for radial system.
Bad Bus Voltage Initial Values

Solution convergence speed and computing time are functions of the initial voltages for load-type buses.
The closer the initial voltages are to their final profile, the faster the solution converges. The solution may
not converge if the initial voltages are too far from the final profile, thus it is recommended that the
Update Bus Voltage option be used to obtain a set of sound initial bus voltages.
Modeling of Loads
Constant Power Load

Constant power loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, conventional and unbalanced
lumped loads with % motor load, UPSs, and chargers. The power output remains constant for all changes
in input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant power load:
Constant Impedance Load

unbalanced lumped loads with % static load. The input power increases proportionally to the square of the
input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant impedance load:
Constant Current Loads

Constant current loads include unbalanced lumped loads with % constant current load. The current
remains constant for all changes in voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant
current load:

Generic Load
Generic loads include lumped loads using either the exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive model.
A generic load model expresses the characteristics of the load at any instant of time as algebraic functions
of the bus voltage magnitude and frequency at that instant. Refer to section 8.12 for more information.
Modeling of AC-DC Converters

In a Load Flow Study, chargers and UPSs are represented as constant kVA loads connected to their AC
input bus. An inverter is represented as a swing machine, which can maintain its terminal bus angle and
voltage magnitude constant. If you have more than one inverter connected to a bus, they will equally
share the load.
ETAP uses the efficiency of the Variable Frequency Drive to calculate the losses of the VFD. Losses
associated with VFDs are included as part of the connected load.
Modeling of HV DCs
In a Load Flow Study, the HV DC link is represented as a branch, which consists of a Rectifier, a DC
line, and an Inverter. Both the Inverter and the Rectifier of the HVDC link require a connection either
directly to a swing bus or to a system containing a swing bus.
Modeling of SVCs
In a Load Flow Study, the SVC is represented as a variable static load. The SVC regulates voltage at its
terminal by controlling the amount of reactive power injected into or absorbed from the power system.
When running load flow on a system containing an SVC, load flow will first determine the system
voltages without the SVC. If the initial voltage of the bus connected to SVC is lower than the reference
voltage, the SVC will inject reactive power. And if the initial voltage of the bus connected to SVC is
higher than the reference voltage, the SVC will absorb reactive power. Refer to section 11 for more
information.
Different Factors Considered in Load Calculation

ETAP provides you with great flexibility in modeling load variations through different load factors, such
as demand factor, load percent, service factor, and application factor, etc. Depending on your
specifications, these factors are used differently in calculating loads under several circumstances:
Load Editor Calculation of load for loading categories and voltage drop
Input for Studies Calculation of load specification for load flow and initial load for motor starting
and transient stability studies
Studies Results Calculation of load displayed in one-line diagram from load flow, motor starting,

Bus Editor Sum of load connected to a bus
The following two tables describe how these factors are used in these cases:
Factors Used for Motor Load Calculation

Load Editor Input to Studies Results from Studies Bus
Load Loss Vd Load Loss Load Loss Vd Editor
Bus Nominal kV x x x x x x x x
Bus Operating V x x x x x
Demand Factor x x x x x x x x x
Loading % x x x x x x x x x
Service Factor *
App. Factor *
Load Quantity x x x x x x x
Bus Diversity Factor * * * * *
Global Diversity Factor * * * * *
Factors Used for Static Load Calculation

Bus Nominal kV x x x x x x x x x
Bus Operating V x x x x
App. Factor *
* Indicates the factor is used in calculation if specified by the user in the related Load Editor or Study
Case.
Notes:
Motor load includes induction motor and generator, synchronous motor, and motor load portion of
lumped load.
Static load includes static load, capacitor, MOV, and static load portion of conventional and
unbalanced lumped loads.

19.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation

When the Calc. Panel/UPS System option is checked in the Study Case, the panel/UPS system load flow
will be carried out along with the 3-phase system in a load flow run. Due to special conditions for
panel/UPS systems, the calculations are performed with a different method from the one used for the 3-
phase system.
When the Calc. Panel/UPS System option is not checked in the Study Case, loads from a panel/UPS
system is summed up for the specified load category to the top element (a panel, a phase-adaptor, or an
UPS) of the panel/UPS system and this top element is treated as a load to the 3-phase system. In this load
summation, loads are added up under rated voltage without considering losses and voltage drop.
Panel/UPS Systems
A panel system is defined as a radial sub-system that is powered through a top panel, a phase adaptor, or
an UPS connected to a 3-phase bus. A power system may contain several panel systems. Each panel
system has a top element that is either a 3-phase panel or a phase adapter.
Special Conditions for Panel System Load Flow Calculation
Looped Panel System

A panel system should be a radial sub-system. There should be no loops involved. Before load flow
calculation, ETAP checks for loop configurations. In case any loops are detected in a panel system, an
error will be posted.
Transformer LTC
Transformer LTC is not considered for any transformer in panel systems. Even if the LTC field is
checked in the Transformer Editor, it will be ignored in panel load flow calculation.
Branch Shunt Impedance

Shunt impedance for branches such as cable, transmission line, and impedance are not included in the
panel system load flow calculation.
Feeder Cable for Panel Internal Loads

In the load flow calculation, internal loads for a panel are lumped into an equivalent load. As a result,
losses caused by feeder cables of panel internal loads are not considered in panel system load flow
calculation. However, feeder cables for external loads are included in the calculation.
Calculation Method
The panel system load flow calculation is carried out sequentially with 3-phase load flow to achieve
accurate result. The calculation involved three stages.
Before the 3-phase system load flow calculation is performed, a load flow computation is carried out for
each panel system for the loading category and diversity factors specified in the study case. In this
computation, the terminal bus voltage of the top element is assumed to be fixed at its initial value entered
in the Bus Editor. The purpose of this pre-load-flow calculation is to accurately calculate panel system
load, including branch losses and effect of voltage drop on various types of loads.

Once the panel system load is calculated, it is stored in the top element. The 3-phase system load flow
calculation is then carried out, in which the top element of each panel system is represented as a single
load connected to a 3-phase bus.
After the 3-phase system load flow is completed, a load flow calculation is carried out again for each
panel system with the updated terminal bus voltage of the top element just calculated from the 3-phase
system load flow. The results of the calculation are reported on the one-line diagram and in Crystal
Report.

Load Flow Analysis Required Data
19.6 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for load flow calculations for buses includes:
Nominal kV
%V and Angle (when Initial Condition is set to use Bus Voltages)
Load Diversity Factor (when the Loading option is set to use Diversity Factor)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors, i.e., Transformer, Transmission Line, Cable, Reactor, and
Impedance Editors. Required data for load flow calculations for branches includes:
Branch Z, R, X, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperature, if applicable

Cable and transmission line, length, and unit
Transformer rated kV and kVA/MVA, tap, and LTC settings
Impedance base kV and base kVA/MVA
Power Grid Data

Required data for load flow calculations for power grids includes:
Operating Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control, or PF Control)

Nominal kV
%V and Angle for Swing Mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode
MW and Mvar loading, and Mvar limits Mvar Control Mode
MW loading and PF, and Mvar limits for PF Control Mode

Required data for load flow calculations for synchronous generators includes:
Operating Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, or Mvar Control)

Rated kV
%V and Angle for Swing Mode of Operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax and Qmin) for Voltage Control Mode
MW and Mvar loading, and Mvar limits Mvar Control Mode
MW loading and PF, and Mvar limits for PF Control Mode
Note: The Mvar limits (Qmax and Qmin) can also be calculated from the capability curve. The required
additional data for this calculation includes:
All data on the Capability page

Synchronous reactance (Xd)

Inverter Data
Required data for load flow calculations for inverters includes:
Inverter ID
DC and AC rating data
AC output voltage regulating data

Required data for load flow calculations for synchronous motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loadings
% Loading for desired Loading Category
Equipment cable data

Required data for load flow calculations for induction motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Static Load Data

Required data for load flow calculations for static loads includes:
Static Load ID
Rated kVA/MVA and kV
Power factor
Capacitor Data
Required data for load flow calculations for capacitors includes:
Capacitor ID
Rated kV, kvar/bank, and number of banks

Lumped Load Data

Required data for load flow calculations for lumped loads includes:
Conventional
Load ID
Rated kV, kVA/MVA, power factor, and % motor load
Unbalanced
Load ID
Rated kV, kVA/MVA, power factor, % motor load, and % static load
Exponential
Load ID
Rated kV, P0, Q0, a, and b
Polynomial
Load ID
Rated kV, P0, Q0, p1, p2, q1, and q2
Comprehensive
Load ID
Rated kV, P0, Q0, a1, a2, b1, b2, p1, p2, p3, p4, q1, q2, q3, and q4
Charger and UPS Data

Required data for load flow calculations for chargers and UPSs includes:
Element ID
Rated AC kV, MVA, and power factor, as well as DC rating data
HV DC Link Data
Required data for load flow calculations for HV DC links includes:
Element ID
All data on the Rating page is required for Load Flow calculations
Inverter current margin (Im)

SVC Data
Required data for load flow calculations for SVCs includes:
Element ID
Rated kV
Inductive Rating (Either QL, IL, or BL)
Capacitive Rating (Either QC, IC, or BC)
Max Inductive Rating (Either QL(Max), or IL(Max))
Max Capacitive Rating (Either QC(Min), or IC(Min))
Note: QC, QC(Min), and BL must be entered as a negative value
Panel Data
Required data for load flow calculations for panels includes:
Element ID
Rated kV and Amps
Number of Branch Circuits
Loading and %Loading
Phasing, Number of Poles, and State
Connection Type, i.e. Internal, External, Spare, etc.
Other Data
There are some Study Case related data, which must also be provided. This includes:
Method (Newton-Raphson, Fast-Decoupled, or Accelerated Gauss-Seidel)

Max Iteration
Precision
Acceleration Factor (when Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method is selected)
Loading Category
Update (for bus voltages and transformer LTCs using load flow result)
The Study Case related data is entered into the Load Flow Study Case Editor.

Load Flow Analysis Output Reports
19.7 Output Reports

The load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal Reports
format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows and voltage
drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be
displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and over- or under
voltage buses, in different colors.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a Load Flow Analysis. You can
utilize the Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the Output Report.
19.7.1 View from Study Case Toolbar

automatically opens the Output Report listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format. In the
picture shown below, the Output Report name is LF 100A and the selected format is Complete.
19.7.2 Report Manager

To open the Report Manager, simply click on the Report Manager button on the Load Flow toolbar. The
editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different sections of the
output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different portions of the
report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to every page, as
described below.
Output Report Name


Path
Help
OK/Cancel
of the Output Report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to close
the editor without viewing the report.
19.7.3 Complete
The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
Viewer and File Options

You can view the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
Format, or Excel format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default
checkbox.


19.7.4 Input Data

This page allows you to select different formats for viewing input data, grouped according to type. They
include:
Adjustments
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Equipment Cable
High Voltage DC Link
Impedance
Line Coupling
NO Protective Devices
Reactor
SVC
Transformer


19.7.5 Results
This page allows you to select the desired Output Report.



19.7.6 Summary
This page allows you to select different portions of the load flow summary to view.
Note: Some portions of the summary are available only when you have selected specific options in the
study case, such as Critical and Marginal Voltage options.
Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Branch Loading
Bus Loading
Losses
Summary


Load Flow Analysis Alert View
19.8 Alert View

The functional objective of the Alert View is to provide an immediate list of all the alerts generated by the
load flow calculation. The Alert View window may be configured to automatically display as soon as the
load flow calculation is over by selecting the Auto Display checkbox in the Alarm page of the Load Flow
Study Case. It may also be accessed by a left-click on the Alert View icon. The Alert View provides
several tabulated sections of information about the reported alerts. You may refer to Section 15.2.3 Alert
page for detailed information on alerts for each type of elements.
Device ID
The Device Identification group of the Alert View lists the names of all the components that qualified as
alerts after the load flow calculation.
Type
The Type group of the Alert View displays information about the type of the device having the displayed
alert.
Condition
The Condition group of the Alert View provides a brief comment about the type of alert being reported.
In the case of load flow alerts, the different conditions reported are Overloads, Over Voltage, Under
Voltage, Over Excited, and Under Excited.

Load Flow Analysis Alert View
Rating/Limit
The Rating group of the Alert View provides the rating information being used by the Load Flow Module
to determine whether an alert should be reported and of what kind. Section 15.2.3 Alert Page provides
detailed information on alerts for each type of elements.
Operating
The Operating group of the Alert View displays the results from the Load Flow calculation. The results
listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to determine the operating
percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the Alert page of the Load Flow Study
Case Editor.
%Operating
This group displays the percent operating values calculated based on the load flow results and the
different element ratings/Limits. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of
monitored parameters entered directly into the Alert page of the Load Flow Study Case Editor. Based on
the element type, system topology and given conditions, the Alert Simulation program uses these percent
values to determine if and what kind of alert should be displayed.
Phase Type
This group displays whether the alert being displayed is for a Single-Phase or 3-Phase component.

Load Flow Analysis Result Analyzer
19.9 Load Flow Result Analyzer

The Load Flow Result Analyzer allows you to view the results of various load flow studies in one screen
so you can analyze and compare the different results. You can compare the results of general information
about the project or more specific information such as the results contained from buses, branches, loads or
sources in a load flow study. The Load Flow Result Analyzer is a time saving tool that allows you to
compare and analyze different reports coming from different projects, within the same directory, in a
single display.
Export
Export Load Flow Analyzer Data and create a report in Microsoft Excel format.

19.9.1 Report and Result Selections

Study Reports:
Select which Load Flow Study Reports to compare by clicking on the checkbox. The results of the
selected study report(s) will appear in the display table.
Ref
Select the study report that is used as the reference. The Display table also indicates which study
report is used as the reference by a green highlight on the study report name.
Report Type
Select which Report Type you would like displayed.

General Info
Selecting General will display the general information contained in the study report such as number of
elements, system generation, loads and losses, and conversion parameters.
Bus Results
Selecting Bus will display the bus information contained in the study report.
Branch Results
Selecting Branch will display the branch information contained in the study report.
Loads
Selecting Load will display the load information contained in the study report.
Sources
Selecting Source will display the source information contained in the study report.
Project Report
Select which project report(s) you would like active.
Active Project
The first selection is defaulted to the open project file. This will limit you to all the reports generated
from this project.
All Projects in Active Directory

This allows the user to compare reports from different projects that are located within the directory that
the current (open) project file resides.

19.9.2 General Info

Under this category, general information that summarizes the study and the information that is reported in
the first and last page of the output reports are displayed. When General Info is selected, the Display
Table is changed to show the following:
Study Case ID
Study case ID: unique name up to 25 characters.
Data Revision
This field indicates the name of the Data Revision used for the selected study report.
Configuration
This field indicates the configuration status being used for the selected study report.
Loading Cat
Display the name of the Loading Category used for the selected study report.
Generation Cat
Display the name of the Generation Category used for the selected study report.
Diversity Factor
Display the Load Diversity Factor used for the selected study report.
Buses
Display the total number of Energized Buses that exist in the selected study report.

Branches
Display the total number of Branches that exist in the selected study report.
Generators
Display the total number of Generators that exist in the selected study report.
Power Grids
Display the total number of Power Grids that exist in the selected study report.
Loads
Total number of Loads that exist in the selected study report.
Load-MW
Total Load in MW that exists in the selected study report.
Load-Mvar
Total Load in Mvar that exists in the selected study report.
Generation-MW
Display the total Generation in MW that exists in the selected study report.
Generation-Mvar
Display the total Generation in Mvar that exist in the selected study report.
Losses-MW
Display the total losses in MW that exist in the selected study report.
Losses-Mvar
Display the total losses in Mvar that exist in the selected study report.
Mismatch-MW
Display the total mismatch in MW that exists in the selected study report.
Mismatch-Mvar
Display the total mismatch in Mvar that exist in the selected study report.

19.9.3 Bus Results

Under this category, bus information and the load flow results for the buses are displayed. When Bus
Results is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Bus Type
This section determines what type of buses to display in the table.
Source Buses
These are Buses that are connected to a Generator or Power Grid.
Nodes
These are Buses that have been graphically displayed as Nodes.

MCC & SWGR

These are Buses that have MCC or SWGR as the type selected in the Rating page.
Load Buses
Buses that have loads connected to them.
Bus Info
This section determines which bus information to display in the table.
Nominal kV
Display the bus nominal voltage in kV of the selected bus.
Amp Rating
Display the ampere rating of the selected bus.
Type
Display the bus type information: Gen, SWNG, or Load.
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the bus loading results and operating bus
voltages.
Load Flow Results

This section determines which results to display in the table.
Note: When multiple study reports are selected, Calculated Results section becomes Radial buttons.

Voltage
Display operating voltage based on the result voltage unit (kV, % of Bus nominal kV, or Volts).
kW Loading
Display total bus loading (kW or MW).
kvar Loading
Display total bus loading (kvar or Mvar).
Amp Loading
Display Ampere Loading of the load directly connected to the bus.
% Loading
Displays the percent loading based on the calculated ampere loading and ampere rating of the bus.
Alert
This section allows you to enter the marginal and critical limits on the display table.
Note: The results will be highlighted based on these limits, not based on the limits set from the study
case.
Loading
Highlights bus loading alerts.
OverVoltage
Highlights bus over voltage alerts.

UnderVoltage
Highlights bus under voltage alerts.
Display Options
Actual Value
Display the actual value of the results.
Differences with Ref.

Display the delta differences between the calculated results with respect to the values from the reference
report.
Skip if Same
Data that has the same results as the reference study will not be displayed.
Find
Select any bus from the Bus ID list and click find to locate that bus on your one-line diagram.

19.9.4 Branch Results:

Under this category, branch information and the load flow results for the branches are displayed. When
Branch Results is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Branch Type
Select the Branch type(s) to display on the table. The list of branch types is below:
Transformer
Cable
Line
Reactor
Impedance
Equipment Cable
Branch Info
This section determines which branch information to display in the table.

From Bus
Display From Bus connection for that element.
To Bus
Display To Bus connection for that element.
Type
Display the element type on the display table.
Rating 1 and Rating 2

Display the Rating for each branch. See table below for each Rating:
Type Rating 1 Rating 2

2-W Transformer Primary kV / Secondary kV Primary Winding Rating MVA/kVA
3-W Xfmr Primary Rated kV Primary Winding Rating MVA/kVA
3-W Xfmr Secondary Rated kV Primary Winding Rating MVA/kVA
3-W Xfmr Tertiary Rated kV Primary Winding Rating MVA/kVA
Cable Length Meters Size
Line Length Meters Size
Reactor Positive sequence impedance ohms Reactor rating Amps
Impedance Positive sequence resistance Positive sequence reactance
ohms/percent ohms/percent
Equipment Cable Length Meters Size
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the branch loading results and operating
branch voltages.
Load Flow Results


kW Flow
Display power flow (kW or MW)
kvar Flow
Display power flow (kvar or Mvar)
Amp Flow
Display ampere flow from one bus to another.
% PF
Display Power Factor (%)
% Loading
Display loading (%)
% Voltage Drop
Display voltage drop (%)
kW Losses
Display branch losses (kW or MW)
kvar Losses
Display branch losses (kvar or Mvar)
Alert
Note: The results will be highlighted based on these limits, not based on the limits from the Study Case.
Loading
Highlight branch loading alerts.

Voltage Drop
Highlight branch voltage drop alerts.
Display Options
Actual Value

report.
Skip if Same
Find
Select any branch from the ID list and click find to locate that element on your one-line diagram.

19.9.5 Loads
Under this category, load information and the load flow results for the loads are displayed. When Loads
is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Load Type
Select the load type(s) to display on the table. The list of load types is below:
Induction
Synchronous
Lumped
Static
MOV
Capacitor
SVC
Filter
Load Info
This section determines which load information to display in the table.

Terminal Bus
Bus connected to the load.
Type
Display the load type on the display table.
Rating and Rating kV

Display the Rating for each load. See table below for each Rating:
Type Rating Rating kV

Induction HP/ kW Rated voltage
Synchronous HP/ kW Rated voltage
Lumped MVA/kVA Rated voltage
Static MVA/kVA Rated voltage
MOV HP/kW Rated voltage
Capacitor Capacitor rated Mvar/kvar Rated voltage
SVC Rated inductive/capacitive var kvar/Mvar Rated voltage
Filter Capacitor rated Mvar/kvar per phase Rated voltage
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the operating load and load terminal voltage
results.
Load Flow Results


kW Loading
Total operating load (kW or MW)
kvar Loading
Total operating load (kvar or Mvar)
Amp Loading
Display the current loading results.
% PF
Display the Power factor (%).
% Loading
Displays the percent loading based on the calculated ampere loading and ampere rating of the load.
Terminal Voltage
Display the load terminal voltage results.
Alert
Note: The results will be highlighted based on these limits, not based on the limits from the study case.
Loading
This highlights loading alerts for loads.
OverVoltage
This highlights over voltage alerts for loads.
UnderVoltage
This highlights under voltage alerts for loads.

Display Options
Actual Value

report.
Skip if Same
Find
Select any load from the ID list and click find to locate that load on your one-line diagram.

19.9.6 Sources
Under this category, source information and the load flow results for the sources are displayed. When
Sources is selected, the Result Analyzer display is changed to show the following:
Source Type
Select the Source type(s) to display on the table. The list of source types is below:
Power Grid
Synchronous
Wind Turbine
Source Info
This section determines which source information to display in the table.

Terminal Bus
Display the bus connected to the source.
Type
Display the source type.
Rating and Rating kV

Display the rating for each source. See table below for each Rating:
Type Rating Rating kV

Power Grid 3 phase Short Circuit MVAsc Contribution Rated voltage
Synchronous Rated Real Power MW/ kW Rated voltage
Wind Turbine Rated Real Power MW/kW Rated voltage
Unit
This section determines the measurement unit used to display the total operating source generation and
the rating for each source.
Load Flow Results

kW Generation
Total operating source generation (kW or MW).
kvar Generation
Total operating source generation (kvar or Mvar).
Amp
Source current results

% PF
Power factor of the source (%)
% Generation
Source generation (%)
Display Options
Actual Value

report.
Skip if Same
Find
Select any source from the ID list and click find to locate that source on your one-line diagram.

19.10 Load Analyzer

The Load Analyzer module is designed as a generalized load-list to report load-schedules for power
system components such as switchgear, MCC, transformers, cables, lines, panels, etc. Different reports
provide informative data regarding all loads connected downstream to equipments.
This tool is helpful during the operating phase of a project, as well as design/planning phase where system
studies may not be possible due to incomplete one-line diagram or data.
Reports include the following user options:
1. Base or Revision Data

2. Configuration
3. Loading Category
4. Connected / Operating Loads
5. Continuous / Intermittent / Spare Loads
6. Continuous / Non-Continuous Loads
7. Load Demand Factors
8. Global and Individual Bus Diversity (Deviation) Factors
In addition and in contrast with the regular Load Flow analysis, the Load Analyzer allows a deeper study
of the different loads present in a system. This gives the user more flexibility in analyzing individual
loads using Minimum/Maximum Bus Loading, or to simply determine the actual connected and operating
loads in a given system.
Notes:
Looped configurations or systems with two swing sources (utility or generator) are not currently
handled by the Load Analyzer. Only radial systems are handled.
In case the load voltage from the nameplate of an element is different from the upstream Bus
voltage, the Load Analyzer will not adjust the voltage of the element. Therefore, the Load
Analyzer results will be different from the Load Flow results.
Wind turbines, MG sets, Harmonic Filters (HF), and Static var Compensators (SVC) loads are not
considered by the Load Analyzer. These loads will be added in the future.
3-phase and 1-phase loads below an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) are not considered by
the Load Analyzer. Only the internal load of the UPS is considered.
Feeder losses and branch losses are ignored by the Load Analyzer. The Load Flow program
considers all branch losses.
19.10.1 Load Analyzer Editor

The Load Analyzer module is launched from the Load Flow mode and by clicking on the Load Analyzer
icon, which is located on the right hand side toolbar.

Once the module is launched, the Load Analyzer Editor opens. Following is a list and description of the
different fields available in this editor.
Project
The project name is displayed in this field. This filed is for your information and cannot be edited.

Revision
The project revision is displayed in this field. This field is for your information and cannot be edited. To
change the revision you must close this editor, go to the Revision toolbar and select another revision.
Configuration
The project configuration is displayed in this field. This field is for your information and cannot be
edited. To change the configuration you must close this editor, go to the Configuration toolbar and select
another configuration.
Output File Name

Enter the output report database filename. By default, ETAP enters the same name as the project name.
The output file name can contain upto 250 characters.
Note: Very long filenames can cause text wrapping on the report headers and affect the report format. It
is recommended to use up to 25 characters for the filename.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories for the current Load Analyzer study. With the selection of any
category, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified for the selected
category. Note that you can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of
the induction machine and synchronous motor editors and the Loading or Rating page of other load
component editors.


In the Load Analyzer editor, you can choose the desired Load Diversity Factor applied to each of the
three Demand Factors for each load (i.e. Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare). The different Load
Diversity Factors are the following:
None (no load diversity factor is applied)

Bus Max (individual Bus Max diversity factor is applied to directly connected loads)
Bus Min (individual Bus Min diversity factor is applied to directly connected loads)
Global Value (Global load diversity factor is applied to all loads)
For each Bus in the system, the user can define the upper and lower bounds of the Load Diversity Factor
that will apply to the loads directly connected to that Bus. These individual Load Diversity Factors are
applied when Bus Max or Bus Min is selected from the Load Analyzer editor under each category -
Continuous, Intermittent, and Spare. These values will not be taken into account for loads since Load
Diversity Factors are set to a Global Value. For instance, if the user selects Continuous Load to have a
Global Value equal to 90%, then all Continuous Loads in the system will be multiplied by that unique
Global Value.
Demand Factor
In ETAP, operation of loads fall under three status categories:
Continuous (default is set to 100%, which means the load operates continuously)
Intermittent (default is set to 50%, which means the load operates for 12 hours)
Spare (default is set to 0%, which means the load is not operating)
The accounted percentage of the load falling under each category, called the Demand Factor, can be set
for individual loads from each editor in the Info page.

Apply Bus Diversity Factor to Non-Directly Connected Loads

The Load Analyzer program allows the user to apply Load Diversity Factor to non-directly connected
loads in the system. This means that if the Apply Bus Diversity Factor to Non-Directly Connected Load
option is checked, then the Load Diversity Factor of all buses in the system will be considered (i.e.
multiple dipping is applied at all levels).
PF & EFF
For all induction and synchronous motors in the system, the user can select to either use the Rated Power
Factor (PF) and Efficiency of motors, or to use interpolated values for the specified motor % loading.
If the Rated PF and/or Eff options are selected, then Rated PF and Eff will be used for synchronous
motors, and PF and Eff of 100% loading will be used for induction machines.
If the Interpolate at Specified % Loading option is selected, then the program interpolates the Power
Factor and Efficiency entered for both induction and synchronous motors at the specified % Loading. The
interpolation occurs linearly based on the Power Factor and Efficiency values entered at 100, 75, and 50
% Loadings. The Power Factor and Efficiency values can be entered for individual motors from their
editor and Nameplate page.
19.10.2 Reports
Once the different settings have been selected from the Load Analyzer interface, click OK and the Load
Analyzer Report Manager will open to display the results of the study. The user has the choice to select
different reports from the following tabs:

Bus Loading
Bus Summary
Load List
Schedules
Report Manager also displays the Output Report Name and the Path where project files are located. As a
reminder, Load Analyzer is the only module that skips reporting of nodes in some of its reports. For other
ETAP modules, nodes and buses are treated the same way in output reports.
Load Analyzer reports can export into Viewer (Crystal Reports format), PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
Format, and MS Excel and allows choosing any of these formats to be Set As Default.
For the Load Analyzer reports, ETAP creates Access databases with the extension of <filename>.LA1.
This database is used to produce load analyzer output reports.
All reports include a header, which displays project name, business location, contract number, the
engineers name, filename, ETAP logo, ETAP version number, report name, page number, date, serial
number (SN), revision number, configuration, and remarks with up to 120 characters. The project name,
location, contract number, engineers name, and remarks can be set from the ETAP toolbar
Project/Information. The filename is set in the Output Filename given in the Load Analyzer Editor.
Bus Feeder (FDR) Loading Reports

The Bus FDR Loading-1, 2 & 3 reports are sorted alphabetically by Bus ID.

Bus FDR Loading-1 Report selected from Bus Loading tab in the Report Manager


Bus Loading Summary Reports

The Bus Loading Summary-1 & 2 reports provide the sum of all loads for all Buses including Connected
and Operating Loads. These reports are sorted alphabetically by Bus ID.
Bus Loading Summary-1 report selected from Bus Summary tab of the Report Manager

Bus Loading Summary-2 report selected from Bus Summary tab of the Report Manager
Load List Reports

The Load List reports provide load information ordered by Bus Loading Summary, by Bus, by Status, and
by Load. As a note, Panels are not included in Load List by Status Report. These reports are sorted
alphabetically by Bus ID.

Load-List Bus Summary report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager
Load-List by Bus report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager

Load-List by Status report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager
Load-List report selected from Load List tab of the Report Manager

Schedule Reports
The Bus Loading Schedule report displays the total load at each Bus including the effect of all
multiplying parameters (i.e. % Loading, Demand Factor, and Load Diversity Factor). This Report
tabulates only downstream Buses and Loads (no equipment). This report is sorted by Bus kV first and
then Bus ID.
The Cable Schedule Report tabulates all Equipment and Branch Cables present in the system. This report
also provides information about the Connected Buses, kV, and other physical parameters for each Cable.
Transformer Loading Schedule-1 & 2 reports tabulate all Transformers present in the system. These
reports also provide information about the Connected Buses, Impedance, and other electrical parameters
for each transformer.
Bus Loading Schedule Report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager

Cable Schedule Report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager
Transformer Loading Schedule-1 report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager

Transformer Loading Schedule-2 report selected from Schedules tab of the Report Manager

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Overview
Chapter 20
Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis
Many applications of distribution systems require a robust and efficient power flow solution method.
Such a power flow solution method must be able to model the special features of distribution systems in
sufficient detail. Distribution systems have a relatively unbalanced nature, which results from a mixture of
3-phase, 2-phase, and single-phase network components, including unbalanced loads and shunts.
Therefore, an Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis has become the preferred solution.
The ETAP Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Program calculates the bus voltages, branch power factors,
currents, and power flows for individual phases throughout the electric power system. The module allows
for swing, voltage regulated, and unregulated power sources with multiple utility and generator
connections. It handles both radial and loop systems. A powerful current injection method is provided in
order to achieve the best calculation efficiency.
This chapter gives definitions and explains how to use the various tools you will need to run Unbalanced
Load Flow Studies. It also provides theoretical background for the unbalanced load flow calculation
method. The chapter consists of the following sections:
Section Description
Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar This section explains how you can launch an
unbalanced load flow calculation, open and view an
Output Report, or select display options.
Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor This section explains how you can create a new Study
Case, what parameters are required to specify a Study
Case, and how to set them.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Overview
Section Description
Display Options This section explains what options are available to

you for displaying some key system parameters and
the output results on the one-line diagram, and how to
set them.
Unbalanced Load Flow Calculation Method This section shows formulations of current injection
load flow calculation method.
Required Data for Calculations This section describes what data is necessary to
perform unbalanced load flow calculations and where
to enter them.
Unbalanced Load Flow Study Output Report This section illustrates and explains Output Reports
and their format.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Toolbar
20.1 Unbalanced Load Flow Toolbar

The Unbalanced Load Flow toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Unbalanced Load Flow
Study Mode.
Run Unbalanced Load Flow Studies

Running an Unbalanced Load Flow Study is a simple, two-step process:
1. Select a Study Case from the Study Case Editor.

2. Click the Run Unbalanced Load Flow Study button to perform an Unbalanced Load Flow Study.
A dialog box appears. Specify the Output Report name if the output file name is set to Prompt. The
study results appear on the one-line diagram and in the Output Report.
Unbalanced Load Flow Display Options

The results from Unbalanced Load Flow Studies are displayed on the one-line diagram. To edit how these
results look, click the Unbalanced Load Flow Display Options button. For more information, see Section
20.3, Display Options.
Alert View
After performing an Unbalanced Load Flow Study, you can click this button to open the Alert View,
which lists all equipment with critical and marginal violations based on the settings in the Study Case.

Unbalanced Load Flow Report Manager

Unbalanced Load Flow Output Reports are provided in the form of Crystal Reports Report. The Report
Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of
the Output Report from Crystal Reports. Available file types for Crystal Reports are displayed in each
page of the Report Manager for Unbalanced Load Flow Studies.
Choosing any format in the Report Manager activates Crystal Reports. You can open the whole
Unbalanced Load Flow Output Report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection. You can
view the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or
Excel format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
The following table explains the format names and their corresponding Output Reports.

This format Provides this information

Adjustments Tolerance and temperature correction adjustments
Alert-Complete Complete report of system alerts
Alert-Critical Summary of critical alerts only
Alert-Marginal Summary of marginal alerts only
Branch Branch input data
Branch Loading Branch loading results
Bus Bus input data
Bus Loading Overloaded bus information
Cable Cable input data
Complete Complete Output Report, including all input and output
Cover Title page of the Output Report
Equipment Cable Equipment cable input data
Impedance Detailed information about impedance elements in the system
Losses Branch loss results
NO Protective Devices Displays Normally open protective devices
Reactor Reactor input data
Summary Summary of the load flow calculation
Transformer Transformer input data
Unbalanced LF Report Unbalanced load flow calculation results
You can view Output Reports by clicking the Report Manager button on the Study Case toolbar. The List
Output Report window lists all of the output files in the selected project directory for unbalanced load
flow calculations. To view any of the listed Output Reports, select the Output Report name and click the
List Output Report button.

The Halt Current Calculation button is normally grayed-out. When an unbalanced power flow calculation
has been initiated, this button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will
terminate the calculation.
Get On-line Data

When Real-Time is installed and the Sys Monitor presentation is on-line, you can bring real-time data
into your offline presentation and run an unbalanced load flow calculation by clicking the Run
Unbalanced Load Flow button. The Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be
updated with the on-line data.

Get Archived Data

When ETAPS Playback is installed and any presentation is in Playback mode, you can bring this data into
your presentation and run an unbalanced load flow calculation by clicking the Run Unbalanced Load
Flow button. The Operating Loads, Bus Voltages, and Study Case Editor will be updated with the
playback data.
Unbalanced Load Flow Comparator

When ETAP Real-Time is set up and after you run a Load Flow Study with on-line data, you can click
this button to bring up the Load Flow Comparator view. It lists comparison of all system operating values
between ETAP Real-Time output and Load Flow calculations.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Study Case Editor

The Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions,
and a variety of options for Output Reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of
Study Cases. Unbalanced load flow calculations are conducted and reported using the settings of the
Study Case selected in the toolbar. You can switch between Study Cases without resetting the Study Case
options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
As a part of the multi-dimensional database concept of ETAP, Study Cases can be used for any
combination of the three major system toolbar components (that is, for any configuration status, one-line
diagram presentation, or base/revision data).
When you are in Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis mode, you can access the Unbalanced Load Flow
Study Case Editor by clicking on the Edit Study Case button from the Study Case toolbar when in
Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis mode. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking
on the unbalanced load flow project in the Study Case folder.
To create a new Study Case, go to the Project View, right-click the unbalanced load flow project in the
Study Case folder, and select Create New. The module will then create a new Study Case, which is a copy
of the default Study Case, and adds it to the unbalanced load flows Study Case folder.

20.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
In the Study Case ID group, you can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and entering the new ID.
The Study Case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use the arrow buttons at the bottom of the
editor to go from one Study Case to another.
Method
The currently available method is the Newton-Raphson Current Injection Method.
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged before the specified number of
iterations, the module will stop and inform you. The recommended and default values are 99.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision (used to check for convergence). This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. The precision is applied to check the difference between the bus

voltages after each iteration. If the difference between the iterations is less than or equal to the value
entered for precision, the desired accuracy is achieved.
If the solution converges but the mismatch values are high, reduce the value of the precision to make your
results more precise and run the module again.
Note: You may need to increase the number of iterations. A smaller precision value will result in lower
mismatch (higher accuracy), as well as a longer run time. The default value of 0.0001 pu volts is
recommended.
Update
In the Update group, you can decide to update the initial conditions of the buses and/or set the transformer
taps to the calculated value of load tap changers (LTCs). The selected options will be updated after the
subsequent unbalanced load flow run.
Initial Bus Voltages

Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of the load flow run.
Bus voltage update will result in a faster convergence of the subsequent load flow solutions, since the
initial bus voltages will be closer to the final values.
Inverter Operating Load

In an AC Load Flow Study, an inverter is represented as a constant voltage source. When this option is
checked, the load provided by the inverter will be updated to the inverter element, which can be used later
as DC load of the inverter in a DC Load Flow Study.
Operating Load & V

This option is available if your ETAP installation has the on-line feature. When you select this option, the
calculation results will be updated to sources, loads, and buses, so that they can be utilized as input for
later studies. These values are also displayed in Element Editors. If your ETAP installation does not
include the on-line feature, you can only see the operating P, Q, and V in Element Editors, and they
cannot be used in a later study.
Transformer LTCs
Select this option to update the transformer taps to reflect the result of the Load Tap Changer (LTC)
settings (that is, transformer taps will be set to values determined from the load flow solution for LTCs).
Use this feature when you want to consider the impedance of the LTC taps for short-circuit calculations.
Cable Load Amp

Select this option to transfer cable load current data from the previously run Unbalanced Load Flow
Study. The data is transferred to the Operating Load Current in the Cable Editor for each cable associated
with the Unbalanced Load Flow Study.
Report
Bus Voltage in Percent or kV

Calculated bus voltages in the Output Report can be printed in kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference by selecting either Bus Voltage in Percent or Bus Voltage in kV. For
the graphical display of bus voltages, see Section 20.3, Display Options.

Equipment Cable Losses and Vd

Select this option to report losses and voltage drop associated with equipment cables in the Output
Report.

Initial conditions for all bus voltages and angles can be specified in this group for unbalanced load flow
calculation purposes.
Bus Initial Voltages

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editors. You can
simulate Unbalanced Load Flow Studies with different initial conditions for bus voltage using this option.

Select this option to simulate Unbalanced Load Flow Studies using a fixed bus voltage and angle for all
buses. When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage value as the
percent of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude and zero
degree for bus voltage angle.
Determination of Initial Bus Voltage Angle

The ETAP Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module calculates the bus voltage angle based on
transformer phase-shift and compares the calculated value against the initial bus voltage angle from
the user selected option. If the difference between the two values is larger than the specified
MaxIniAngDiff, ETAP uses the calculated values as the initial bus voltage angle, where
MaxIniAngDiff is an ETAP.INI file entry that is defaulted at 10.
When the operating load is specified as the system load, the operating voltage angles are used as the
initial value. In this case, the operating voltage angle is compared against the calculated bus voltage
angle. If the difference is less than MaxIniAngDiff, the operating voltage angle is used; otherwise, the
calculated value is used in the unbalanced load flow calculation.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this field. Information entered here will be printed on
the second line of every output page header line. These remarks can provide specific information for each
Study Case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all Study Cases and is entered in the Project
Information Editor.

20.2.2 Loading Page
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories in the Loading Category group for the current Unbalanced Load
Flow Study. ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified the category
you select.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Induction
Machine Editor and Synchronous Motor Editor and the Loading or Rating page of other Load Component
Editors.
Operating P, Q
This option is available if your ETAP installation has the on-line feature. When you select this box, the
operating loads updated from on-line data or a previous Unbalanced Load Flow Study will be utilized in
the Unbalanced Load Flow Study.

Generation Category
Select one of the ten Generation Categories in the Generation Category group for the current Unbalanced
Load Flow Study. When you select a category, ETAP uses the generator controls for that category, as
specified on the Rating page of the Generator Editor. The generator controls will be different depending
on the mode in which the generator is operating. The mode of generation is selected on the Info page of
the Generator Editor. The table below shows the generation controls with respect to the mode of
generation.
Mode Generation Category Control

Swing %V and Angle
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if your ETAP installation has the on-line feature. When you select this box, the
generator operating values updated from on-line data or a previous Load Flow Study will be utilized in
the Unbalanced Load Flow Study.

The options in this group allow you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the Loading
Categorys load. When you select the Operating Load option, no diversity factor is considered.
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Minimum
When you select the Minimum Bus Loading option, all motors and other loads directly connected to each
bus will be multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate Load
Flow Studies with each bus having a different minimum diversity factor.
The minimum Bus Loading Study option may be used to see the effect of transformer taps and capacitors
(if any) on the system voltages under a minimum (light) loading condition.
Bus Maximum
When you select the Maximum Loading option, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus
will be multiplied by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate Load Flow
Studies with each bus having a different maximum diversity factor.
Global
Enter the global diversity factors for all constant kVA, constant Z, generic, and constant I loads. When
you select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all motors and static loads of the selected Loading
Category with the entered values for the motor and static load diversity factors. For information about
load-modeling concepts used in the module, see section 20.4, Calculation Method.

25% above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100%.
Const. kVA
Constant kVA loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, and conventional lumped loads with
% motor load, UPS, and chargers.
Const. Z
Constant impedance loads include static loads, capacitors, harmonic filters, MOVs, and conventional
lumped loads with % static load.
Const. I
Constant current loads include lumped loads operating in Unbalanced Node.
Generic
Generic loads include lumped loads operating in either exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive mode.
Charger Loading
For chargers, you can select the Loading Category or the Operating Load.
Note: The operating load for a charger can only be updated from a DC Load Flow Study.

The Impedance Tolerance, Length Tolerance, and Resistance Temperature Correction groups on the
Adjustment page allow you to consider tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and
impedance. Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent tolerance
setting or based on a globally specified percent value.
Impedance Tolerance
Transformer
The net effect of the transformer impedance adjustment in unbalanced load flow calculations is to
increase the impedance by the specified percent tolerance value. For example, if the transformer
impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used in the unbalanced load flow
calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.

The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual transformers by selecting the Individual option.
This option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. To
make a global transformer impedance adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance
other than 0% in the displayed text box. The global impedance adjustment overrides any individual
transformer tolerance value.
Reactor
This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module
increases the reactor impedance by the specified percent tolerance, resulting in a larger impedance and
consequently a larger voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its
tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted reactor impedance used in the unbalanced load flow calculation is 0.105
Ohm.
The impedance adjustment can be applied to individual reactors by selecting the Individual option. This
option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Rating page of the Reactor Editor. To make a
global reactor impedance adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance other than 0%
in the displayed text box. The global impedance adjustment overrides any individual reactor tolerance
value.

This adjustment is applied to the overload heater (OH) resistance. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis
Module increases the OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and
consequently a larger voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance
is 5%, then the adjusted OH resistance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
The resistance adjustment can be applied to individual overload heaters by selecting the Individual option.
This option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Rating page of the Overload Heaters Editor.
To make a global overload heater resistance adjustment, select the Global option and type a global
tolerance other than 0% in the displayed text box. The global resistance adjustment overrides any
individual overload heater tolerance value.
Note: The adjustments only apply if the Cable/OL Heater option is selected for MV and/or LV motors.
Length Tolerance
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module increases the
cable length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the length of the cable is 200 ft. and the tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted
cable length used in the unbalanced load flow calculation is 210 ft.
The length adjustment can be applied to individual cables by selecting the Individual option. This option
uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Info page of the Cable Editor. To make a global cable
length adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance other than 0% in the displayed text
box. The Global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable tolerance value.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module
increases the transmission line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and
consequently a larger voltage drop. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the

tolerance is 2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the unbalanced load flow calculation
is 2.05 miles.
The length adjustment can be applied to individual transmission lines by selecting the Individual option.
This option uses the tolerance percent value specified on the Info page of the Transmission Line Editor.
To make a global transmission line length adjustment, select the Global option and type a global tolerance
other than 0% in the displayed text box. The Global Length Adjustment overrides any individual
transmission line tolerance value.

This group allows you to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature for
the individual the cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis
Module adjusts the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum
operating temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is
increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual cables by selecting the Individual option. This
option uses the maximum operating temperature value specified in the Cable Editor. To make a global
temperature correction, select the Global option and type a global maximum temperature value in the
displayed text box. The global temperature correction value overrides any individual Cable Impedance
page maximum temperature. For more information, see the Cable Editor Impedance Page section in
Chapter 8, AC-Editors.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Unbalanced Load Flow
Analysis Module adjusts the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the
maximum operating temperature is greater than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then the
resistance is increased.
The temperature correction can be applied to individual lines by selecting the Individual option. This
option uses the maximum operating temperature value specified on the Impedance page of the
Transmission Line Editor. To make a global temperature correction, select the Global option and type a
global maximum temperature value in the displayed text box. The global temperature correction value
overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum temperature. For more
information, see the Transmission Line Editor Impedance Page section in Chapter 8, AC-Editors.

20.2.4 Alert Page

The Alert page in the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor is used to setup primary simulation alerts
that notify users about an abnormal loading condition based on allowable percent values and system
topology. The functional capability of the Simulation Alert System is to generate alerts when there is an
overload in protective devices, buses, transformers, cables, lines, panels, reactors, generators, or the
power grid. The alerts are reported either graphically in the one-line diagram display or in the Alert View
window.

Simulation alerts generated after a Unbalanced Load Flow Study are either critical or marginal. Critical
and marginal alerts use different percent value conditions to determine if an alert should be generated. If
the condition for a critical alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the Alert View window and the
overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for marginal alerts, except that
the overloaded component will be magenta instead of red. Also, you must select the Marginal Limit
option if you want marginal alerts displayed. If a device alert qualifies as both a critical and a marginal
alert, only a critical alert is displayed.

Note: For ETAP to generate alerts for an element type, both the element rating and the percent value
entered on the Alert page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the
following sections.
Loading
This group of options allows you to enter the condition percent values of the monitored parameters used
to determine if an alert should be reported based on loading conditions determined by an unbalanced load
flow calculation. Unbalanced load flow loading alerts generate overload alerts.
Bus
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a bus loading alert if the critical or marginal
percent limit of rated continuous current in the bus is exceeded. The rated continuous current in the bus is
specified on the Rating page of the Bus Editor.
Cable
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a cable alert if the critical or marginal percent
limit of allowable ampacity in the cable is exceeded. The allowable ampacity of the cable is specified on
the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor.
Reactor
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a reactor alert if the critical or marginal
percent limit of rated current in the reactor is exceeded. The rated current in the reactor is specified on the
Rating page of the Reactor Editor.
Line
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a line alert if the critical or marginal percent
limit of allowable ampacity in the transmission line is exceeded. The allowable ampacity of the
transmission line is specified on the Ampacity page of the Transmission Line Editor.
Transformer
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a transformer alert if the critical or marginal
percent limit of maximum MVA of the transformer is exceeded. The maximum MVA of the transformer
is specified on the Rating page of the Transformer Editor. The simulation alerts work for both two and
three winding transformers.
Panel
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a panel alert if the critical or marginal percent
limit of rated current in the panel is exceeded. The rated current of the panel is specified in the Rating
page of the Panel Editor.
Generator
The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Module will generate a generator/power grid alert if the critical or
marginal percent limit of rated MW of the generator is exceeded. The rated MW of the generator is
specified on the Rating page of the Generator Editor.
Bus Voltage
The options in this group allow you to set bus voltage simulation alerts in situations where the voltage
magnitude percent results from the unbalanced load flow calculation exceed or are below the specified
nominal kV rating percent values. Bus voltage alerts report over- and under-voltage.

Generator/Motor Excitation
Simulation alerts for generator excitation monitor the percent rated Mvar limits. An alert for over-
excitation is reported if the upper excitation percent limit (Qmax) for the generator is exceeded in an
unbalanced load flow calculation. An alert for under-excitation is reported if the generator Mvar result
from the unbalanced load flow calculation is below the specified under-excitation percent limit (Qmin).
You have the option to run the unbalanced load flow calculation without monitoring under-excitation
conditions. An alert for under-excitation will be reported if you select the UnderExcited option. The
under-excitation percent limit for the generator is 100% of Qmin.
Marginal Limit
If the Marginal Limit option is selected, the Alert View window will display the marginal alerts as well
critical alerts. If this option is not selected, the Alert View window will display only critical alerts.
Note: The critical and marginal alerts will not be displayed if the percent setting is set to zero.
Auto Display
If the Auto Display button is selected, the Alert View window automatically opens after the unbalanced
load flow calculation is completed. If Auto Display is not selected, you can open the Alert View window
by clicking the Alert View button on the Unbalanced Load Flow toolbar.

20.2.5 Adv Alert Page

The Adv Alert page of the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor is used to specify the setup of some
advanced simulation alerts provided to notify you of an abnormal loading condition based on allowable
percent values and system topology. The Simulation Alert System generates alerts when there is an
overload in buses, transformers, cables, lines, panels, reactors, generators, power grid, and meters. The
alerts are reported either graphically in the one-line diagram display or in the Alert View window.

Simulation alerts generated after a Unbalanced Load Flow Study are either critical or marginal. Critical
and marginal alerts use different percent value conditions to determine if an alert should be generated. If
the condition for a critical alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the Alert View window and the
overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for marginal alerts, except that
the overloaded component will be magenta instead of red. Also, you must select the Marginal Limit
option if you want marginal alerts displayed. If a device alert qualifies as both a critical and a marginal
alert, only a critical alert is displayed.

entered on the Alert page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the
following sections.
Voltage Unbalanced (Bus)

Voltage unbalanced (bus) alerts are generated if the percent voltage unbalance ratios resulting from the
unbalanced load flow calculation exceed the specified percent values. These percentage voltage
unbalanced ratios include those of line voltages, phase voltages, negative sequence voltages, and zero
sequence voltages. Voltage unbalanced (bus) alerts report over-voltage unbalance ratio alerts.
Note: The voltage unbalance ratio (VUR) is the ratio of the maximum voltage deviation from the average
voltage to the average voltage with the assumption that the average voltage is always equal to the nominal
value.
LVUR
Select LVUR to use the unbalance ratio of line voltages.
The NEMA (National Equipment Manufacturers Association) definition of voltage unbalance, also
known as the line voltage unbalance rate (LVUR) is given by:
Max voltage deviation from the avg line voltage

LVUR = 100(%)
Avg line voltage
PVUR
Select PVUR to use the unbalance ratio of phase voltages.
The IEEE definition of voltage unbalance, also known as the phase voltage unbalance rate (PVUR) is
given by:
Max voltage deviation from the avg phase voltage

PVUR = 100(%)
Avg phase voltage
VUF 2
An index used in European Standards to indicate the degree of unbalance is the voltage unbalance factor
(VUF), which is the ratio of the negative sequence voltage to the positive sequence voltage and is given
by:
V2
VUF2 = 100(%)
V1
VUF 0 (VUF 0)
The zero sequence voltage unbalance factor of phase voltages, which is given by:
V0
VUF0 = 100(%)
V1
Current Unbalanced (Branch)

Current unbalanced (branch) alerts are generated if the percent branch current unbalance ratios resulting
from the unbalanced load flow calculation exceed the specified percent values. These percent current

unbalance ratios include those of branch currents, negative, and zero sequence branch currents. Current
unbalanced (branch) alerts report over-current unbalance ratio alerts.
LIUR (IUR)
Branch current unbalance ratio (IUR), which is given by:
Max branch current deviation from the average

IUR = 100(%)
Average of branch currents
IUF 2 (IUF2)
The negative sequence branch current unbalance factor, which is given by:
I2
IUF2 = 100(%)
I1
IUF 0 (IUF0)
The zero sequence branch current unbalance factor, which is given by:
I0
IUF0 = 100(%)
I1
Meters
Meter alerts are generated if the percent meter measurements exceed the specified percent values. These
percent meter measurements include those of Current, Voltage, MW, Mvar, PF, and Freq. meter alerts
report over-meter measurements alerts.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Display Options
20.3.1 Results Page

The Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC,
AC-DC, and Colors information annotations.
Note: The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are specific to that study.
Show Units
Select this option to show units for power flow and current displayed on the one-line diagram.
Check-ALL
Select this option to show all available result annotations.
Note: When this box is unselected, the previous settings are restored.

Voltage
In the Voltage list, select kV or % for voltage display on the one-line diagram.
Bus Mag.
Select this option to display bus voltages on the one-line diagram. Bus voltages are displayed at 15
degrees.
Bus Angle
Select this option to display bus angle in degree on the one-line diagram. Bus voltages are displayed at
-15 degrees.
Load Term. Mag.

Select this option to display load (motors and static loads) terminal voltages on the one-line diagram.
Load terminal voltages are displayed at 15 degrees. Load terminal voltages can be displayed based on
load rated kV or bus nominal kV, depending on the option selected in the Load Term. Base kV group.
L-N
Select this option to display bus phase voltages on the one-line diagram.
L-L
Select this option to display bus line voltages on the one-line diagram.
Load Term. Base kV

This group allows you to select base kV for load terminal magnitude, but only when voltage is displayed
in percent (% is selected in the Voltage list). This group will be disabled if voltage is displayed in kV.
Load Rated kV
Bus Nom. kV
Voltage Drop
Line/Cable
Load FDR
Select a unit for power flow or current flow from the list to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Average/Phases
Average Values
Select this option to display average values as shown in the following tables.

Unbalanced Load Flow Results Displayed in Average Values
Voltage Current Power

Phase Type
Single Phase Phase Value Phase Value Phase Value

Phase Type
Single Phase 3-Wire L-L Value Average Value Total Power
Single Phase 2-Wire Phase Value Phase Value Phase Value
Load Flow Results Displayed in Average Values
All Phases
Select this option to display individual phase values. For 3-phase element, voltage, current, and power for
phases A, B, and C are displayed in sequence and for single-phase 3-wire element, voltage, current, and
power for phases LL, L1, and L2 are displayed in sequence.

Unbalanced Load Flow Results Displayed in All Phases

Phase Type
3-Phase Phases A, B, & C Phases A, B, & C Phases A, B, & C
2-Phase Phases A&B, B&C, Phases A&B, B&C, Phases A&B, B&C,
or C&A or C&A or C&A
Single Phase Phase Value Phase Value Phase Value

Phase Type
3-Phase Phases A, B, & C Phases A, B, & C Phases A, B, & C
Single Phase 3-Wire Phase LL, L1, & L2 Phase LL, L1, & L2 Phase LL, L1, & L2
Single Phase 2-Wire Phase Value Phase Value Phase Value
Load Flow Results Displayed in All Phases
Power Flows
In this group, you specify how the power flows will be displayed. From the Power Flows list, select the
units (kVA or MVA) to be used to display power flow on the one-line diagram.

kW + jkvar
Select the kW + jkvar option to display power flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar, depending on the power
flow units you are using.
kVA
Select the kVA option to display power flow in kVA or MVA, depending on the power flow units you are
using.
Amp
Select the Amp option to display current flow in amperes.
%PF
When the Amp or kVA option is selected, you can select this option to show power factor of power flow
along with the current.
Flow Results
Branch
power flow at the end of the branch that has a positive kW value flowing into the branch. For three-
winding transformers, all three power flows are displayed.
Source
Load
Composite Motor
Composite Network
Select this option to display power flow into composite networks.
Branch Losses
Select this option to display branch losses on the one-line diagram. Losses are displayed inside a bracket
in [kW+jkvar] or [MW+jMvar].
Meters
Ammeter
Select this option to display primary current for the branch to which an ammeter is attached.
Voltmeter
Select this option to display primary voltage for the bus to which a voltmeter is attached.

Multi-Meter
Select this option to display the measurements of a multi-meter, including bus voltage, branch current,

20.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
Select the AC elements for which you want to display the ratings on the one-line diagram. The following
table shows the ratings for each element.

AC Elements Rating
Generator kW/MW
Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Panel Connection Type (# Phases - # Wires)
Transformer kVA/MVA
Cable/Line # of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable - Size
Bus kA Bracing
Relay 50/51 for Over-current Relays
kV
Select the elements under this heading for which you want to display the rated or nominal voltages on the
one-line diagram.
line diagram.
A
Select the elements under this heading for which you want to display the ampere ratings (continuous or
full-load ampere) on the one-line diagram.
line diagram.
Z
Select the AC elements under this heading for which you want to display the rated impedance on the one-
line diagram.

Generator Subtransient Reactance Xd
Motor % LRC

D-Y
Select the elements under this heading for which you want to display the connection types on the one-line
diagram.
displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of the Load Tap
Changer (LTC).
Composite Mtr (Motor)

Select this option to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options

Select this option to use ETAPs default display options. The checkboxes on this page will be grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable


20.3.3 AC-DC Page

networks.
ID
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the IDs on the one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the ratings on the one-line diagram.
Device Type Rating


Device Type Rating

UPS KVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages on the one-line
diagram.
A
Select the AC-DC elements under this heading to display the ampere ratings on the one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

UPS Input, Output, & DC FLA
Composite Network
Select this option to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
Use Default Options

Select this option to use ETAPs default display options.

20.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for displaying information annotations for DC elements.
Color Theme
Annotations

Theme
This option allows the color theme selected in the color Theme list for element annotations to be applied
globally throughout all diagrams. When the option is selected, the name assigned to the applied color
theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
The Theme Editor allows you to select existing color themes or define a new color theme.
Note: Color themes are applied globally within a project file. Changes made on a color theme displayed
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously
selected.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Calculation Method
20.4 Calculation Method

ETAP provides a novel and powerful technique of Newton-Raphson 3-phase power flow calculations
using the current injection method. The 3-phase current injection equations are written in rectangular
coordinates. An efficient sparse matrix technique for ordering, factorization, and forward/backward
substitution is applied. This method has been used to compute power flows on real balanced and
unbalanced distribution systems and has been shown to be very robust and to converge in less iterations
than other methods, especially for heavily loaded systems.
The current injection method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:
[Vrmabc ][Y abc ] = [I mr

abc
]
where Vrmabc is a 3-phase bus voltage vector in an incremental form, and Imrabc is a 3-phase bus current
injection mismatch vector between specified value and calculated value; and Yabc is the corresponding
Jacobian matrix. The off-diagonal elements of Yabc are identical to the corresponding elements of the node
admittance matrix; and the diagonal elements of Yabc are dependent on both the corresponding elements of
the node admittance matrix and the load model adopted for each phase at a given bus.
The current injection method has relatively lower requirements of the bus initial voltage values compared
to the Newton-Raphson Method and the fast-decoupled method. Instead of using bus real power and
reactive power mismatch as convergence criteria, the current injection method checks bus voltage
magnitude tolerance between two consecutive iterations to control the solution precision. The typical
value for bus voltage magnitude precision is set to 0.0001 pu.
Unbalanced Load Flow Convergence

As in any iterative solution method, the convergence of the unbalanced load flow solution is affected by a
number of factors specific to power systems.
Negative Impedance
Negative resistance and reactance should be avoided. As an example, the traditional method of modeling
three-winding transformers by a Y equivalent model, using one impedance and two two-winding
transformers, sometimes results in a negative impedance value for one of the impedance branches. In this
case, the negative impedance should be combined with other series circuit elements so that the result is a
positive impedance value. Load flow calculations may not converge if a large value of negative
impedance is used. ETAP can now model three-winding transformers directly with no need for users to
do any conversions.
Zero or Very Small Impedance

A zero or very small impedance value of any branch is not allowed, since this will result in infinity or a
huge number in the system admittance matrix. You should represent this type of impedance by a tie
circuit breaker to solve the problem.
Widely Different Branch Impedance Values

Widely different branch impedance values on the same per unit base may result in a slow convergence.
To avoid this situation, various techniques, such as combining series branches with low impedance
values, ignoring short length transmission lines and/or cables, or modeling a small impedance branch with
tie circuit breakers, can be employed.

Long Radial System Configurations

Long radial system configurations usually takes more time to converge than loop configurations.
Bad Bus Voltage Initial Values

Solution convergence speed and computing time are functions of the initial voltages for load-type buses.
The closer the initial voltages are to their final profile, the faster the solution converges. The solution may
not converge if the initial voltages are too far from the final profile, thus it is recommended that the
Update Bus Voltage option be used to obtain a set of sound initial bus voltages.
Modeling of Power Sources

Power sources include generators and utilities with a mode of swing, voltage control, or Mvar/PF control.
The internal sequence impedances of power sources are employed to represent the inherent source phase
imbalance due to distribution system imbalance. The sequence models of a power source are quite simple,
shown below, where y0, y1, and y2 are respectively the positive-, negative-, and zero-sequence
admittances, and II is an equivalent current source.
I0 I1 I2
V1 V2
V0
y0 y1 y2
II
Zero Positive Negative

Sequence Sequence Sequence
Sequence Models of a Power Source
Swing Mode
The specified constraints for a swing power source are the magnitude and the phase angle of the positive
sequence voltage at the swing source terminal. The use of positive sequence representation for voltage
magnitude regulation makes it possible to properly represent the automatic voltage regulation (AVR)
mechanism of a power source, where in most cases, the average of voltage magnitudes of all three phases
is the voltage magnitude that is regulated. Under unbalanced conditions, the negative and zero sequence
voltages may be non-zero.
Voltage Control Mode

The constants for a power source of voltage control mode are the total output of 3-phase real powers and
the magnitude of the positive sequence terminal voltage.
Mvar/PF Control Mode

The constants for a power source of Mvar/PF control mode are the total output of 3-phase real powers and
the total output of 3-phase reactive powers.
Modeling of Loads
Constant Power Load

Constant power loads include induction motors, synchronous motors, conventional and unbalanced
lumped loads with % motor load, UPS, and chargers. The power output remains constant for all changes
in input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant power load:

Note: The constant power loads of 3-phase induction motors, synchronous motors, and conventional and
unbalanced lumped loads with % motor load are all treated as the Mvar control mode sources with
negative power generations. These types of loads have the same structures as the synchronous and
induction generators of Mvar control mode, and only the total of 3-phase power outputs / inputs for such a
load remains constant for unbalanced situations. Because of the difficulty of multiple solutions, ETAP
does not allow for the constant power unbalanced lumped loads (with % motor load) connected in Y with
open neutral.
Constant Impedance Load

unbalanced lumped loads with % static load. The input power increases proportionally to the square of the
input voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant impedance load:
Constant Current Loads

Constant current loads include lumped loads operating in unbalanced mode. The current remains constant
for all changes in voltage. Below are the respective I-V and P-V curves for a constant current load:

Generic Load
Generic loads include lumped loads operating in either exponential, polynomial, or comprehensive mode.
A generic load model expresses the characteristics of the load at any instant of time as algebraic functions
of the bus voltage magnitude and frequency at that instant.
Exponential Model:
( ) (1 + K
P = P0 V
a
pf f )
Q = Q (V ) (1 + K f )
b
0 qf
For this and other generic models,

V
V =
V0
where P and Q are active and reactive components of the load when the bus voltage magnitude is V
and f is the frequency deviation ( f f 0 ) . The subscript 0 identifies the values of the respective
variables at the initial operating condition. Typically K pf ranges from 0 to 3.0, and K qf ranges from 2.0
to zero.
The parameters of this model are the exponents a and b . With these exponents equal to 0, 1, or 2, the
model represents constant power, constant current, or constant impedance characteristics, respectively.
[ ]
Polynomial Model:
P = P0 p1V + p 2 V + p 3 (1 + K pf f )
2
Q = Q [q V + q V + q ](1 + K f )
2
0 1 2 3 qf
The polynomial model is composed of constant impedance, constant current, and constant power
components. The parameters of the model are the coefficients p1 , p 2 , p3 , q1 , q 2 , and q3 , which define
the proportion of each component.
Comprehensive Model:
P = P0 [PPOLY + PEXP1 + PEXP 2 ]

where:
2
PPOLY = p1V + p 2 V + p3
PEXP1 = p 4 V ( ) (1 + K
a1
pf 1 f )
= p (V ) (1 + K f )
a2
PEXP 2 5 pf 2
The expression for the reactive component of the load has a similar structure. The reactive power
compensation associated with the load is represented separately.
Modeling of Transmission Lines

A transmission line can be modeled as 3-phase, 3-phase, or single phase with any geometry configuration,
and can be coupled with other transmission lines. Currently, a transmission line can belong to one
coupling group only. The Kron Method is used to handle neutral wires, as the average grounding model is
typically used in distribution systems. The Kron Reduction Method makes the assumption that the neutral
voltage at a branch end is equal to zero.
Modeling of Transformers
ETAP uses a combined model of common transformers and regulating transformers. This model can
accommodate any phase shift, grounding impedance, and different positive/negative and zero sequence
impedance.
Note: ULF does not currently handle center-tap transformers connected below a phase-adapter. The
center-tap transformer can be modeled below panel systems in ULF calculations. If the ULF program
detects a center-tap transformer connected below a phase-adapter it generates an error message.
Modeling of AC-DC Converters

In a Load Flow Study, chargers and UPSs are represented as constant kVA loads connected to their AC
input bus. A 3-phase charger or UPS is treated as equally constant individual phase kVA loads of delta
connection. An inverter is represented as a swing machine, which can maintain its terminal bus positive
sequence angle and voltage magnitude constant. If you have more than one inverters connected to a bus,
they will equally share the load.
Variable frequency drives are not considered in the Load Flow Study. The load behind a variable
frequency drive is directly added to its terminal bus.
Modeling of HVDC
An HVDC Link is not considered in the Unbalanced Load Flow Study. In the event any HVDC Link is
detected, an error will be posted.
Modeling of SVC
The voltage support capability of the SVC deteriorates with decreasing system voltage. The 3-phase SVC
is connected in Delta.

Different Factors Considered in Load Calculation

ETAP provides you with great flexibility in modeling load variations through different load factors, such
as demand factor, load percent, service factor, and application factor. Depending on your specifications,
these factors are used differently in calculating loads under several circumstances:
Load Editor Calculation of load for Loading Categories and voltage drop
Input for Studies Calculation of load specification for load flow and initial load for motor starting
Studies Results Calculation of load displayed in one-line diagram from load flow, motor starting,
and Transient Stability Studies
Bus Editor Sum of load connected to a bus
The following two tables describe how these factors are used in these cases:
Factors Used for Motor Load Calculation

Bus Nominal kV x x x x x x x x
Bus Operating V x x x x x
Service Factor *
App. Factor *

Factors Used for Static Load Calculation

Bus Nominal kV x x x x x x x x x
Bus Operating V x x x x
App. Factor *
* Indicates the factor is used in calculation if you have specified it in the related Load Editor or Study
Case.
Notes:
Motor load includes induction motor and generator, synchronous motor, MOV, and motor load
portion of lumped load.
Static load includes static load, capacitor, and static load portion of lumped load.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Panel System Calculation
20.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation

The panel system load flow will be carried out along with the unbalanced system in an unbalanced load
flow run. Due to special conditions for panel systems, the calculations are performed with a different
method from the one used for the unbalanced multi-phase system.
The loads from a panel system are summed up for the specified Load Category to the top element (a
panel) of the panel system, and this top element is treated as a load to the up system. In this load
summation, loads are added up under rated voltage without considering losses and voltage drop.
Panel Systems
A panel system is defined as a radial sub-system that is powered through a most top panel. A power
system may contain several panel systems.
Special Conditions for Panel System Load Flow Calculation
Looped Panel System

A panel system should be a radial sub-system. There should be no loops involved. Before load flow
calculation, ETAP checks for loop configurations. If any loops are detected in a panel system, an error
will be posted.
Transformer LTC
A transformer load tap changer (LTC) is not considered for any transformer in panel systems. Even if the
LTC field is checked in the Transformer Editor, it will be ignored in panel load flow calculation.
Branch Shunt Impedance

Shunt impedance for branches such as cable, transmission line, and impedance are not included in the
panel system load flow calculation.
Feeder Cable for Panel Internal Loads

In the load flow calculation, internal loads for a panel are lumped into an equivalent load. As a result,
losses caused by feeder cables of panel internal loads are not considered in panel system load flow
calculation. However, feeder cables for external loads are included in the calculation.
Calculation Method
The panel system load flow calculation is carried out sequentially with 3-phase load flow to achieve
accurate results. The calculation involved three stages.
Before the 3-phase system load flow calculation, a load flow computation is carried out for each panel
system for the Loading Category and diversity factors specified in the Study Case. In this computation,
the terminal bus voltage of the top element is assumed to be fixed at its initial value as entered in the bus
Editor. The purpose of this pre-load flow calculation is to accurately calculate panel system load,
including branch losses and the effect of voltage drop on various types of loads.
Once the panel system load is calculated, it is stored in the top element. The 3-phase system load flow
calculation is then carried out, in which the top element of each panel system is represented as a single
load connected to a 3-phase bus.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Panel System Calculation
After the 3-phase system load flow is completed, a load flow calculation is carried out again for each
panel system with the updated terminal bus voltage of the top element just calculated from the 3-phase
system load flow. The results of the calculation are reported on the one-line diagram and in Crystal
Reports.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Required Data
20.6 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for buses includes:
Nominal kV
%V and angle (when Initial Condition is set to use bus voltages)
Load diversity factor (when the Loading option is set to use diversity factor)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors (that is, the Transformer, Transmission Line, Cable,
Reactor, and Impedance Editors). Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for branches
includes:

Zero sequence impedances
Power Grid Data

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for power grids includes:
Operating Mode (swing, voltage control, Mvar control, or PF control)

Nominal kV
%V and angle for swing mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode
MW loading and PF for PF mode
Single-phase MVAsc and X/R

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for synchronous generators includes:
Operating Mode (Swing, voltage control, or Mvar control)

Rated kV
%V and angle for swing mode of operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode of operation
MW loading and PF for PF mode
Xd, X2, X0, and X/R

Inverter Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for inverters includes:
Inverter ID

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for synchronous motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Loading Category ID and % loading
Phase type
Xd, X2, X0, and X/R (when 3-phase)
Grounding types and parameters (when 3-phase)

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for induction motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV

Phase type
Xsc, X2, X0, and X/R (when 3-phase)
Static Load Data

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for static loads includes:
Static load ID
Power factor
Phase type
Grounding types (when 3-phase)
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID


Phase type
Grounding types (when 3-phase)
Lumped Load Data

Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % motor load
Phase type
Xsc and X/R (when 3-phase)
Charger & UPS Data

Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for chargers and UPSs includes:
Element ID
SVC Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for SVC includes:
Element ID
Rated kV
Vmax
Vmin
Vref
Rated Ql and Qc
Qlmax and Qcmin
Panel Data
Required data for unbalanced load flow calculations for panels includes:
Element ID
Rated kV and amps
Number of branch circuits
Phasing, number of poles, and state
Connection type (such as internal, external, or spare)
Other Data
There are some Study Case-related data, which must also be provided. These include:

Maximum iteration
Precision
Loading Category
Initial condition
Update (for bus voltages and transformer LTCs using load flow result)
The Study Case-related data is entered into the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case Editor.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Output Reports
20.7 Output Reports

The unbalanced load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in Crystal
Reports format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows, and
voltage drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the
content to be displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and over-
or under-voltage buses, in different colors.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for an Unbalanced Load Flow
Analysis. You can utilize the Unbalanced Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the Output
Report.

This is a shortcut for the Report Manager. When you click the View Output Report button, ETAP
picture shown below, the Output Report name is ULF and the selected format is Cable.


To open Report Manager, click the Report Manager button on the Unbalanced Load Flow toolbar. The
editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different portions of the
Output Report. The Report Manager allows you to select file types available for different portions of the
report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to every page, as
described below.

checkbox.
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the Output Report you want to view.
Path
Help
Click this button to access Help.
OK/Cancel
Click OK to close the editor and open the Crystal Reports view to show the selected portion of the Output
Report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click Cancel to close the editor without viewing
the report.

20.7.3 Input Data

This page allows you to select different file types for viewing input data, grouped according to type. They
include:
Adjustments
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Equipment Cable
Impedance and Line
Line Coupling
Line Impedance Matrices
Reactor
SVC
Transformer


20.7.4 Result
This page allows you to select file types to view the load flow result portion of the Output Report.


20.7.5 Summary
This page allows you to select different portions of the load flow summary to view.
Note: Some portions of the summary are available only when you select specific options in the Study
Case, such as critical and marginal voltage options.
Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Branch Loading
Bus Loading
Losses
Summary

20.7.6 Complete
The only file type available on this page is Complete, which brings up the Complete Report for the Load
Flow Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.


Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Alert View
20.8 Alert View

The Alert View contains a list of all the alerts generated by the unbalanced load flow calculation. The
Alert View window may be configured to automatically display as soon as the unbalanced load flow
calculation is over, by selecting the Auto Display option on the Alert page of the Unbalanced Load Flow
Study Case. It may also be accessed by clicking the Alert View button. The Alert View provides tabulated
columns of information about the reported alerts. For information about the alerts for each element type,
see the Alert View section in Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Device ID
The Device Identification column of the Alert View lists the names of all the components that qualified as
alerts after the unbalanced load flow calculation.
Type
The Type column of the Alert View displays information about the type of device having the displayed
alert.
Condition
The Conditions column of the Alert View provides a brief comment about the type of alert being reported.
In the case of unbalanced load flow alerts, the different conditions reported are Overloads, Over Voltage,
Under Voltage, Over Excited, and Under Excited.
Rating/Limit
The Rating/Limit column of the Alert View provides the rating information being used by the unbalanced
load flow program to determine whether an alert should be reported and whether it is marginal or critical.
For detailed information on alerts for each type of element, see the Alert Page section in Chapter 15, Load
Flow Analysis.

Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis Alert View
Operating A, B, and C
The Operating A, B, and C columns of the Alert View display the results from the unbalanced load flow
calculation. The results listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the Rating/Limit
column to determine the operating percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the
Load Flow Study Case Editor Alert page.
%Op. A, B, C
The %Value column displays the percent operating values calculated based on the unbalanced load flow
results and the different element ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of
monitored parameters entered directly into the Alert page of the Unbalanced Load Flow Study Case
Editor. Based on the element type, system topology, and given conditions, the Alert Simulation program
uses these percent values to determine if and what kind of alert should be displayed.

Chapter 21
Motor Acceleration
During the motor starting period, the starting motor appears to the system as small impedance connected
to a bus. It draws a large current from the system, about six times the motor rated current, which therefore
results in voltage drops in the system and imposes disturbances to the normal operation of other system
loads. Since the motor acceleration torque is dependent on motor terminal voltage, in some cases the
starting motor may not be able to reach its rated speed due to extremely low terminal voltage. This makes
it necessary to perform a Motor Starting Analysis. The purpose of performing a motor starting study is
twofold: to investigate whether the starting motor can be successfully started under the operating
conditions, and to see if starting the motor will seriously impede the normal operation of other loads in
the system.
ETAP provides two types of motor starting calculations: Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor
Starting. In the Dynamic Motor Acceleration calculation, the starting motors are represented by dynamic
models and the Motor Acceleration Module simulates the entire process of motor acceleration. This
method is used to determine if a motor can be started and how much time is needed for the motor to reach
its rated speed, as well as to determine the effect of voltage dips on the system. In Static Motor Starting,
the starting motors are modeled by the locked-rotor impedance during acceleration time, simulating the
worst impact on normal operating loads. This method is suitable for checking the effect of motor starting
on the system when the dynamic model is not available for starting motors.
The Motor Acceleration Chapter is divided into the following sections:

The Motor Starting Toolbar section explains how to start a motor starting calculation, to open and
view an Output Report, and to select display options.
The Motor Starting Study Case Editor section explains how you can create a new Study Case, what
parameters are required to specify a Study Case, and how to set the parameters.
The Display Options Section explains available options for displaying some key system parameters
and the output results on the one-line diagram.
The Motor Starting Calculation Methods section describes calculation methods used by the module.
The Required Data for Calculations section describes what data are necessary to perform motor
starting studies and where to enter them.
The last three sections describe how to view calculation results.

Motor Acceleration Motor Starting Toolbar
21.1 Motor Starting Toolbar

Run Dynamic Motor Starting
Run Static Motor Starting
Display Options
Alert View
Report Manager
Motor Starting Plots
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
Run Dynamic Motor Starting

Click this button to perform a time-domain simulation for starting and/or switching off motors and static
loads. Accelerating motors are modeled dynamically for this study; therefore, related motor parameters
such as dynamic model (or LR model for synchronous motors), inertia, and starting load must be
specified. Motors (induction and synchronous) and static loads can be switched off and on in any event
created.
Run Static Motor Starting

Click this button to perform a time-domain simulation for starting and/or switching off motors and static
loads. For this study, starting motors are modeled as constant impedance loads calculated from their
locked-rotor currents with a user-defined acceleration time. Required parameters for this study include the
locked-rotor current and power factor, acceleration time at no-load and full-load, and starting load.
Motors (induction and synchronous), MOVs, and static loads can be switched off and on in any event
created.
Display Options
Click this button to customize the information and results annotations displayed on the one-line diagram
in Motor Starting Mode.
Alert View
Click this button to bring up Motor Starting Analysis Alert View, which lists all critical and marginal
alerts for a study based on the set up in the Alert page of the Study Case used.

Report Manager
Motor acceleration output reports are provided in Crystal Reports. The Report Manager provides four
pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the different parts of the output report for both
text and Crystal Reports. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed in each page of the Report
Manager for motor starting (dynamic and static) studies.
Crystal Reports formatted reporting is activated by choosing a format in the Report Manager. You can
open the whole study output report or only a part of it, depending on the format selection. You can view
the report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel
format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
You can also view Output Reports by clicking the Output Report button on the Study Case toolbar. A list
of all output files in the selected project directory is provided for motor starting calculations. To view any
of the listed Output Reports, click the Output Report name, and then click the List Output Report button.
Motor Starting Plots

To view plots of accelerated motors, click this button to bring up a dialog box to select motors from a
drop-down list.


The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. When a motor acceleration calculation has been initiated, this
button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking this button will terminate the current
calculation. One-line diagram display will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it
completes; but the Output Report and plots do store the calculation results up to the time when you
terminate the calculation.
Get On-Line Data

If your ETAP installation has the on-line feature (Real-Time Module), you can copy the on-line data to
the current presentation.
Get Archived Data

If your ETAP installation has the on-line feature (Real-Time Module), you can copy the archived data to
the current presentation.

Motor Acceleration Study Case Editor

The Motor Starting Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, prestart loading conditions,
motor starting events, and a variety of options for output reports. The Study Case is used for both
dynamic and static motor acceleration studies.
ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases. Motor starting calculations are
conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the Study Case selected in the toolbar. You can
switch between Study Cases without resetting the options each time. This feature is designed to organize
your study efforts and save you time.
As part of the multi-dimension database concept of ETAP, Study Cases can be used for any combination
of the three major system toolbar components (Configuration Status, One-Line Diagram Presentation, and
Base/Revision Data).
The Motor Starting Study Case Editor can be accessed by first selecting the Motor Starting Analysis
Mode from the Status/Mode toolbar, then clicking the Study Case button from the Motor Starting toolbar.
You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking the Motor Starting Study Case folder.
To create a new Study Case, go to the Project View, right-click the Motor Starting Study Case folder, and
select Create New. The Motor Acceleration module will then create a new study case, which is a copy of
the default Study Case, and adds it to the Motor Starting Study Case folder.

21.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
The Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by deleting the old ID and
entering the new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters in length. Use the
Navigator button at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to the next existing Study Case.
Solution Parameters
This option allows you to choose solution control values for the load flow and motor starting solutions as
well as the plot resolution.
Max. Iteration
This value determines the maximum number of iterations ETAP can make while solving the load flow
equations. This means that the load flow should quit if it has not converged after the number of iterations

you specify here. Since dynamic and static motor starting calculation methods use the Newton-Raphson
algorithm, typical systems are solved within two to three iterations. We recommend choosing a minimum
of five iterations. If the solution does not converge, you may want to increase this number, as well as
decrease the value you have specified for precision.
Precision
The load flow algorithm works by an iterating procedure until the motor loads it calculates for each bus
match the motor loads which are scheduled for each bus. The difference is called system mismatch.
Solution Precision tells ETAP how many mismatches are allowed for a solution to be considered valid.
When the mismatch for the motor MW and Mvar on each individual bus is below the value you enter for
precision, ETAP halts the load flow solution and declares that the solution has converged. Try using a
value of 0.001 to begin. If your system will not converge, try increasing this value incrementally (for
example, to 0.005, etc.) until it converges.
Simulation Time Step

Enter the simulation time step for motor starting calculations. The recommended simulation time step is
0.001 second. If the simulation time step is too small, accumulation of the round off errors can cause
inaccurate results. On the other hand, if this value is too large, calculation results may not capture the
dynamic characteristics corresponding to very small time constants of the control equipment or system.
Plot Time Step

This value determines how often ETAP should record the results of the simulation for plotting. For
instance, if you specify 20 steps, ETAP will plot points at every 20 X simulation time step (for example,
for a simulation time step of 0.001 plot time step will be .02 seconds). The smaller this number is, the
smoother your plots will look, but also remember that the plot files on your hard disk may grow quite
large. The main thing to keep in mind is that ETAP records plot information at this interval throughout
the simulation. So if you specified a simulation time step of 0.001 seconds, plot time step of 10, and a
total time of 20 seconds, ETAP will write 20/(0.001*10)= 2000 points to disk, which is a large plot file.

Select this option to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found in the Transformer Editor.
Prestart Loading Category

This option allows you to specify how the system is loaded prior to starting any motors and/or switching
on any static loads. You can select prestarting loads by loading categories or from operating load.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for prestart loading in the motor starting study case. With the
selection of any category, ETAP uses the percent loading of all motors and other loads as specified for
that category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Motor
Editors and the Loading page of the Static Load Editors.
Operating P, Q
This option is enabled only if your installation of ETAP has the on-line feature (Real-Time Module).
When this option is selected, the operating load will be used as the prestart load instead of the Loading
Category.

Prestart Generation Category

This option allows you to specify how the generators and power grids are operating prior to starting any
motors and/or switching on any static loads. You can select prestarting generation by generation
categories or from operating values.
Generation Category
Select one of the 10 generation categories for prestart generation. With the selection of any category,
ETAP uses the generation values as specified for that category in the Rating page of a generator or a
power grid. Depending on the operating mode of the source, the generation values may include voltage
magnitude and angle, real and reactive power, or power factor.
Operating P, Q, V
When this option is selected, the operating values will be used as the prestart generation instead of the
Generation Category.
Note: The operating values for a generator or a power grid can be entered from the Rating page of its
editor or be updated automatically from a load flow calculation.
Prestart Charger Loading

This group allows you to select the charger loading source.
Loading Category
When this option is selected, the load from the category specified in the Category field will be used to
calculate the charger load for the prestarting load flow.
Operating Load
When this option is selected, the charger operating load will be used for the prestarting load flow.
Note: The charger operating load is updated from DC Load Flow Studies when the Updating Charger
Load option has been selected in the DC Load Flow Study Case.

This group allows you to specify load diversity factors to be applied on the loading category load. When
the Operating Load is selected, no diversity factor is considered.
None
Select this option to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Maximum
When this option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied
by the bus maximum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow studies with each bus
having a different maximum diversity factor.

Bus Minimum
When this option is selected, all motors and other loads directly connected to each bus will be multiplied
by the bus minimum diversity factor. Using this option, you can simulate load flow studies with each bus
having a different minimum diversity factor.
Global
Enter the diversity factors for all Constant kVA, Constant Z, Constant I, and Generic loads. When you
select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all loads of the selected category with the entered load
diversity factors according to load types.
25 percent above their nominal values. This value can be smaller or greater than 100 percent.
Report
Bus Voltage in Percent

Prints Calculated bus voltages in the Output Report as a percentage of the bus nominal voltages. For
information about graphical display of bus voltages, see Section 21.3, Display Options.
Bus Voltage in kV
Prints Calculated bus voltages in the Output Report in kV. For information about graphical display of bus
voltages, see Section 21.3, Display Options.
Skip Tabulated Plots

Check this box to skip generating tabulated plots in the Output Report. This will significantly reduce the
calculation time.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remark box. Information entered here will be
printed on the second line of every Output Report page header. These remarks can provide specific
information regarding each Study Case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all Study Cases and entered in the Project
Information Editor.

21.2.2 Time Event Page

ETAP allows you to set up unlimited number of events to simulate switching actions in a single Motor
Starting simulation. You can start or switch off individual loads or categorized motor groups with the
Action by Load and Action by Starting Category features, respectively. You can also change the
operating load by clicking the Load Transitioning option to change from one loading category to another.
You can start or switch off multiple loads by starting category and/or by individual load.
Note: The Motor Acceleration Module assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the
loads that are started or switched off in time events.
If you start an already running load, ETAP will ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an
already switched off load, ETAP will ignore the second switch off action.

Note: You can specify conflicting actions on a motor during the same time event by using the Action by
Starting Category and Action by Load options. In such an event, the Motor Acceleration module checks
the action specified by Action by Load first, and then checks the Action by Category event. The first valid
action gets executed in the simulation and the rest are ignored.
Events
The Events Group lists all the events you specified in the study case according to their time of occurrence.
The active events are flagged by a * sign and are listed before inactive events. In the calculation, only
active events are simulated. For each event, it displays the event name and the time of occurrence. When
you click an event from the list, all the actions defined for the event are displayed in the other groups on
the page.
You may Add, Edit or Delete an event by clicking the corresponding buttons.
Add
When you click the Add button, it brings up the Event Editor for you to add a new event.
Active
Select this option to activate the event. When an event is inactive, it will not be considered in the motor
starting calculations.
Event ID
Enter a name for the event. It can be an alphanumeric string up to 12 characters long. This name does not
have to be unique, but it is suggested to use a unique name for each event within a given Study Case.
Time
Enter the time for each time event in seconds.
Note: ETAP lists events in the order of the time defined here.
Edit
When you click the Edit button while an event is selected from the Events list, it brings up the Event
Editor with all the information for the event for you to modify. For description of the Event Editor, see
the Add Section above.
Delete
When you click the Delete button while an event is selected from the Events list, it removes the events
and associated actions from the Study Case.

Note: All changes, including removing an event, will not be effective until you click the OK button or
navigate to another Study Case.
Total Simulation Time

Total Simulation Time is the amount of time, in seconds, that you want the simulation to run. For
instance, let's say you set up the following scenario:
t1 = 0.00 Nothing happens during this time event

t2 = 0.10 Start motor Mtr10 and switch on static load Stat2 on bus 20
t3 = 0.20 Switch off Mtr8 on bus 10
Total Simulation Time = 2.00
This simulation will go as follows: at time t1 = 0, ETAP will run a load flow, using the prestart loading
you selected, to find the initial conditions of the system. At time t2 = 0.1 seconds, ETAP will begin
accelerating motor Mtr10 and switch on static load Stat2 on bus 20. At time t3 = 0.2 seconds, ETAP will
switch off the motor Mtr8 on bus 10. The simulation will continue for 1.8 more seconds, until time T =
2.0 seconds, when the simulation ends and the plots and summary reports are generated. As you can see,
the total time must be greater than your last event time.
Action by Load
This feature allows you to switch on/off any existing motor or static load or change Generation Category
of a generator/power grid in a time event. The list of loads and sources that have been selected is
displayed in the Action by Load list box.
Add
To add a switching action for a motor, MOV, static load, generator, or power grid, click the Add button to
open the Add Action By Element Editor. This editor allows you to add and/or modify a motor, MOV,
static load, generator, or power grid specifications, such as start/switch off, starting categories and
generation categories. Click the OK button and the specifications of the selected elements will be
displayed in the Action by Element list box.

Element Type
Motor Starting studies simulate switching of three types of loads: induction/synchronous motor, static
load and capacitor, and MOV. ETAP also simulates change of Generation Category for a generator or a
power grid.
Action
Select this option to switch/stop motor, switch on/off a static load or a capacitor, start an MOV, or change
Generation Category for a generator or a power grid. If you start an already running load, ETAP will
ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an already switched off load, ETAP will ignore the
second switch off action.
Note: ETAP assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the loads that are started or
switched off in time events.
Motor, Load, MOV, Generator
ID
Select an element ID from the drop-down list. The content in this list varies according to element type
selected. For motor load, it contains all induction and synchronous motors; for static load, it contains all
static loads and capacitors; for MOV, it contains all the MOVs; and for Gen/Power Grid, it contains all
the generator and power grids in the system.
Starting Category
When Motor is selected from Element Type, this field shows up for you to specify a predefined starting
category from the list box. This list contains all ten motor starting categories. Information for starting
categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of Induction and Synchronous Motor Editors, including
starting and final loading percent, as well as begin and end time of load change. When starting a motor by
element, you do not need to select the Starting Category option to use the loading and time data defined
for the Starting Category.
Note: The Starting Category is not applicable to static loads.
Loading Category
When Static Load is selected from Element Type and the selected action is Switch On, this field shows up
for you to specify a predefined Loading Category from the drop-down list. This list contains all ten

loading categories. The loading percent of the specified Loading Category, as defined in the Loading page
of Static Load Editor, will be used to determine the amount of load to be switched on.
Generation Category
When Gen/Power Grid is selected from Element Type, this field shows up for you to specify a predefined
generation category from the list box. This list box contains all ten generation categories. The
generator/power grid operating data from the selected category, as defined in the Rating page of
Synchronous Generator Editor or Power Grid Editor, will be used to simulate its operating condition.
Edit
To edit an action, click its action item and then click the Edit button. The Edit button opens the Edit
Action By Element editor. This editor allows you to modify the data. The options in this editor are the
same as those for the Add Action by Element Editor. For information about the Add Action by Element
Editor, see the Add Section above.
Delete
To delete an action from the Action by Element list, select the element by clicking its action item and then
click the Delete button. The selected load will be removed from the action list.
Action by Starting Category

This feature allows you to start motors by predefined motor starting categories.
Note: Motor starting categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of the Induction Motor, Synchronous
Motor, and MOV Editors. The selected motor groups are displayed in the Action by Starting Category list
box.
Add
To start or switch off a predefined group of motors, click on the Add button to open the Add Action By
Starting Category Editor. This editor allows you to add and/or modify motor group specifications, such as
start/switch off, starting categories, and connected bus IDs. Click the OK button and the specifications of
the motor groups selected in this editor will be displayed in the Action by Starting Category list box.

Action
Select Start or Switch Off for the selected motor group. If you start an already running load, ETAP will
ignore the second starting action. If you switch off an already switched off load, ETAP will ignore the
second switch off action.
Note: ETAP assumes that all In Service loads are operating, except for the loads that are started in time
events.
By Category
Starting Category
Select a predefined Starting Category from the list box. This list box contains all ten motor starting
categories. Motor starting categories can be defined in the Start Cat page of Induction and Synchronous
Motor Editors.
Bus ID
Select a bus ID to define the motor starting group from the drop-down list. This list contains all bus IDs
created for the electrical system under study. In addition, you can choose Start or Switch Off for all buses
defined by a Starting Category by selecting All Buses from the Bus ID list.
Edit
To edit a selected group of motors, click its action item and then click the Edit button. The Edit button
opens the Add Action By Starting Category Editor. This editor allows you to modify the data. For
information about the Add Action by Element Editor, see the Add Section above.
Delete
To delete a motor group from the Action by Starting Category listing, select the motor group by clicking
its action item, and then click the Delete button. The selected motor group will be removed from the
action list.
Action by Load Transitioning

This feature allows you to change operating load from one Loading Category to another. In changing the
loading category, if a motor load is changed from a zero percent to a non-zero percent load, it will create
an action to start the motor. However, once a motor is started by an action from Load Transition, the Load
Transition option will not apply to the motor anymore. Furthermore, once a load, including motors, static
loads, and capacitors, has been switched on or off through Action by Load or Action by Starting
Category, the Load Transition option will not apply to this load from that point on.

Active
Select this option to activate load transitioning in this event.
Loading Category
Select a new Loading Category from the list.
Exclude MV Load >=

Select this option to enable the kVA field at right. Enter the kVA limit in the field for medium voltage
loads to be ignored in the Load Transition. If this option is cleared, medium voltage loads of all sizes will
be considered in the Load Transition. Loads with rated voltage higher than 1 kV are considered as
medium voltage loads.
Exclude LV Load >=

Select this option to enable the kVA field at right. Enter the kVA limit in the field for low voltage loads to
be ignored in the Load Transition. If this option is cleared, low voltage loads of all sizes will be
considered in the Load Transition. Loads with rated voltage not higher than 1 kV are considered as low
voltage loads.
kVA
Once enabled, you can enter a limit for load capacity rating in this text box.
Note: A value of zero means that no loads are considered in the Load Transition.

21.2.3 Model Page

In the Model page specify model information for transformer LTCs and motor loads.
Transformer LTC
Include Automatic Action

In this group you can specify the transformer LTC feature to be simulated in motor starting studies.
For Prestart Load Flow

If this option is selected, automatic voltage regulation actions and LTCs of transformers, if there are any,
will be simulated in the prestart load flow calculation.
During & After Motor Acceleration

If this option is selected, LTCs of transformers, if there are any, will be simulated in calculations after the
prestart load flow.

Time Delay
During motor starting, the Motor Acceleration module will check the voltages of the LTC regulated buses
and set up an internal clock with a time delay. If a voltage is out-of-range and stays out-of-range, at the
end of the initial delay time (Ti), the module will check the voltage again and decide whether to reset the
clock or initiate an LTC tap adjustment. In the latter case, it will take a time duration equal to the
operating time (Tc) to complete the LTC tap change. This process will continue until the final voltage
falls within the regulating range or the LTC has reached its limits.
In this group you specify the LTC time delay used in the calculation. The information in this group is
applied in the study only when the During & After Motor Acceleration option is selected.
Use Individual LTC Time Delay

If this option is selected, the initial time delay and the operating time entered in the individual
Transformer Editor will be used in the calculation.
Use Global Time Delay

When this option is selected, the values entered in the Initial Time Delay and Operating Time fields will
be used in the calculation. This means that all of the LTCs in the system will assume the same initial time
delay and operating time.
Initial Time Delay

In this field you can enter the global initial time delay in seconds.
Operating Time
In this field you can enter the operating time in seconds.
Starting Load of Accelerating Motors

In the motor acceleration calculations, the difference between the motor torque and the load torque is the
motor acceleration torque and a non-zero changes acceleration torque the motor speed. In ETAP, the load
torque model is specified as torque in percent as a function of normalized motor speed. This load torque
may be based on motor electrical rating or on mechanical load. In this group, you indicate to the Motor
Acceleration Module which base you want to use.
Based on Motor Electrical Rating
When this option is selected, it is assumed that the load torque model you selected in the Motor Editor
only represents the shape of the load as a function of speed. The load torque values will be adjusted so
that at the synchronous speed the torque is equal to 100%. This means that, with the modified load curve,
the motor will consume the rated electrical power at 100% starting load, under the rated voltage and at the
rated speed. When this option is selected, the torque base used to construct load torque model has no
effect on calculation results.
Based on Motor Mechanical Load
represents the actual load based on rated output torque. The load curve will be applied as it is without any
adjustments.

To illustrate the implication of this selection, consider a motor that has a start load of 50% and rated
output torque Tr. On the Load page of the motor, the load torque curve is Model 1 given below, which has
a load torque of 80% at operating speed and the curve is based on Tr.
Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Loading
In this case, the load torque curve will be shifted so that the torque at rated speed is 100% of the motor
rated torque. This means that the torque at each point on the load curve will be multiplied by a factor of
1.25 (equal to 1/0.8). This modified the curve will be used as the load torque curve for the study. Note
that the modified curve is given as Model 2 above.
Since the starting load is 50%, the actual load will be 50% of the load based on the modified curve
(Model 2) as described above. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5 Tr.
Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load
In this case, the load torque curve will not be shifted because it is assumed to represent the actual load.
However, since the starting load is 50%, the load torque curve will be adjusted so that the torque at each
point of the curve is multiplied by 0.5. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5*0.8 Tr = 0.4 Tr.
Note: If the motor has a load model as given in Model 2 above, there is no difference in calculation
results between the two options.


This page allows the User to specify tolerance adjustments to transformer, reactor, and overload heater
impedance, cable and transmission line length, and cable and transmission line temperature effect on their
resistance values. Each tolerance adjustment can be applied based on the individual equipment percent
tolerance setting or based on a globally specified percent value.
Impedance Tolerance
In this group, you can specify impedance tolerance values for transformer, reactor, and overload heater.
Transformer
adjustment in motor starting calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent tolerance
value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted
impedance used in the motor starting calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.

specified in the Transformer Editor Rating page. Alternatively, a global Transformer Impedance
Adjustment can be applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the
corresponding field.
Reactor
This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Motor Starting module increases the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger impedance value and consequently a
larger voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then
the adjusted reactor impedance used in the Load Flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
specified in the Reactor editor Rating page. Alternatively, a global Reactor Impedance Adjustment can be
applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding.
Overload Heater
This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Motor Starting module increases
the OH resistance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in a larger resistance and consequently a
larger voltage drop. For example, if the resistance of the OH is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted OH resistance used in the motor starting calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
value specified in the Overload Heaters Editor Rating page. Alternatively, a global Overload Heater
Resistance Adjustment can be applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than
0% in the corresponding field.
Length Tolerance
You can specify length tolerance values for cables and transmission lines in this group. If Ohms is
selected as the unit for a cable in the Impedance page of Cable Editor, the length tolerance will not be
applied to the cable. Likewise, if Ohms is selected as the unit for a transmission line in the Impedance
page of Transmission Editor, the length tolerance will not be applied to the transmission line.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Motor Starting Module increases the cable length by
the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop. For
the motor starting calculation is 210 ft.
in the Cable Editor Info page. Alternatively, a global Cable Length Adjustment can be applied as well by
selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Motor Starting Module increases the
2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the motor starting calculation is 2.05 miles.

in the Transmission Line Editor Info page. Alternatively, a global Transmission Line Length Adjustment
can be applied as well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding
field.

This group allows the User to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating
temperature for cable and transmission line conductors. Each temperature resistance correction can be
applied based on the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified
value.
Cable
This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Motor Starting Module adjusts the
field. For more information, see the Cable Editor Impedance Page section in Chapter 11, AC-Editors.
Transmission Line
This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Motor Starting Module
adjusts the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
the corresponding. For more information, see the Transmission Line Editor Impedance Page section in
Chapter 11, AC-Editors.

21.2.5 Alert Page

You can specify the limits for ETAP to raise critical and marginal alerts for a Motor Starting simulation
from the Alert page. The alerts consist of three categories: alerts on starting motor and MOV, alerts on
generator operating conditions, and alerts on bus voltage. Each category also consists of several types.
Select an alert type to have ETAP perform an alert check for that type. If an alert type is not selected,
ETAP will skip the alert check for that alert type.
Critical and Marginal

There are two levels of alerts for a Motor Starting Study: Critical Alert and Marginal Alert. The alert limit
values are set in the Critical and Marginal columns. The difference between Marginal and Critical Alerts
is their use of different percent value conditions to determine if an alert should be generated. If a
condition for a Critical Alert is met, an alert will be generated in the Critical Alert group of the Alert
View window. The same is true for Marginal Alerts. Also, the Marginal Alerts option must be selected to

display the Marginal Alerts. If a device alert qualifies it for both Critical and Marginal Alerts, only
Critical Alerts are displayed.
entered in this page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the following
sections.
Starting Motor/MOV
ETAP checks alert for motor terminal voltage and fail to start for starting motors and MOVs.
MOV Terminal Voltage

ETAP checks the terminal voltage of a starting MOV against the limit you set in the Study Case. The alert
limit is a percentage based on MOV rated voltage.
Motor Terminal Voltage

ETAP checks the terminal voltage of a starting motor against the limit you set in the Study Case. The alert
limit is a percentage based on motor rated voltage.
Motor Slip (Fail To Start) >=

Motor slip alert is for identifying fail to start condition for a starting motor. It is applicable only for
Dynamical Motor Acceleration calculations. The alert limit is motor slip in percent. If after a motor is
switched on, its slip is always higher than this limit until the end of simulation, an alert will be generated
by ETAP.
Generator
In this group, you can specify alert limits for operating values of a generator, generator engine and
generator exciter.
You can specify a minimum time of violation for generating an alert for each type of alert in this group.
When a non-zero value is entered in this field, ETAP will generate an alert only when a continuous
violation lasts longer than the minimum time of violation.
Generator Rating
A generator rating alert is generated when the output power (MVA) from a generator is larger than the
alert limit. The alert limit is in percent based on generator rated MVA.
PrimeMover Continuous Rating

As the Prime Mover rating of a generator may not be the same as the generator itself, a separate alert for
Prime Mover rating is needed. A Prime Mover continuous rating alert is generated when the output real
power (MW) from a generator is larger than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent, based on
generator Prime Mover continuous rating, entered in the Prime Mover Rating group of the Rating page in
the Synchronous Generator Editor.
PrimeMover Peak Rating

A Prime Mover peak rating alert is generated when the output real power (MW) from a generator is larger
than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent, based on generator Prime Mover peak rating, entered in
the PrimeMover Rating group of the Rating page in the Synchronous Generator Editor.

Mvar Peak Rating

ETAP provides an alert on the maximum var peak rating for generators. A var peak rating alert is
generated when the output reactive power from a generator is larger than the alert limit. The alert limit is
in percent, based on generator peak var, entered in the Mvar Limits group of the Rating page in the
Synchronous Generator Editor.
Bus Voltage
Due to large and heavily reactive currents drawn from starting motors, system under-voltage is always of
great concern in maintaining normal operations during motor starting. To quickly identify any potential
under-voltage problems, ETAP provides different levels of alerts for starting motor terminal buses,
generator and power grid terminal buses, and other buses with different voltage levels.
You can specify a minimum time of violation for generating an alert for each type of alert in this group.
When a non-zero value is entered in this field, ETAP will generate an alert only when a continuous
violation lasts longer than the minimum time of violation.
Starting Motor Term. Voltage

An under-voltage alert for starting motor terminal voltage is generated when the motor terminal voltage is
less than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent based on motor rated voltage. This alert helps you to
identify possible fail to start condition, especially for Static Motor Starting studies which do not simulate
motor acceleration process. The alert limit can be set based on the manufacturer provided minimum
voltage requirement for a motor to start.
Generator/Grid Term. Voltage

As a power source delivers heavy starting current, its terminal voltage can also suffer serious drop. It is of
great importance to monitor and maintain acceptable voltage level for a generator or power grid during
motor starting because it can affect a far larger area of loads than voltage drop on a starting motor
terminal bus. An under-voltage alert for generator or power grid terminal voltage is generated when the
source terminal voltage is less than the alert limit. The alert limit is in percent based on the generator or
power grid rated voltage.
HV Bus, kV >=
An under-voltage alert for a high voltage bus is generated when the bus voltage is less than the alert limit.
The alert limit is in percent based on the bus nominal voltage. A bus is considered as a high voltage bus if
its nominal kV is larger than or equal to the value entered in the field on the same line.
MV Bus, kV Between
An under-voltage alert for a medium voltage bus is generated when the bus voltage is less than the alert
limit. The alert limit is in percent based on the bus nominal voltage. A bus is considered as a medium
voltage bus if its nominal kV is between the voltages limits set for high and low voltage buses.
LV Bus, kV <=
An under-voltage alert for a low voltage bus is generated when the bus voltage is less than the alert limit.
The alert limit is in percent based on the bus nominal voltage. A bus is considered as a low voltage bus if
its nominal kV is less than or equal to the value entered in the field on the same line.

Auto Display
After the motor starting calculation is completed, ETAP checks for any abnormal operating conditions
according to alert limits you set in the Alert page of Motor Starting Study Case. If any abnormal
conditions have been determined, alerts will be generated and reported in Alert View as well as in the
Crystal Reports format report. If you select the Auto Display option and alerts are generated by the
calculation, the Alert View will open automatically. For information about the Alert View window, see
section 21.8, Alert View.
Marginal
Select the Marginal option if you want the Alert View to display Marginal Alerts.

Motor Acceleration Display Options

The Motor Starting Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
and color information annotations.
21.3.1 Results Page

Select the result information to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Voltage Magnitude
From the drop-down list, select a unit for bus voltage display. It can be in percent or kV.

Bus Magnitude
Select this option to display bus voltage magnitude in the selected unit. When the option is cleared, a bus
voltage will not be displayed on one-line diagram.
Load Term. Magnitude

Select this option to display the load terminal voltage magnitude in the selected unit. When the option is
cleared, a load terminal voltage will not be displayed on one-line diagram.
Load Term. Base kV

This group allows you to select base kV for the load terminal voltage when voltage magnitude is to be
displayed as a percentage. If the voltage is to be displayed in kV, this group is disabled.
Load Rated kV
Select this option to use the load rated kV as the base voltage.
Bus Nom. kV
Select this option to use the load terminal bus nominal kV as the base voltage.
Power Flows
Select a unit of measure for power flow from the drop-down list to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
This can be in kVA or MVA. The display unit options listed below change depending on this selection.
kW + j kvar or MW + jMvar
Select the kW + j kvar option (for kVA units) to display power flow in kW and kvar or MW + jMvar (for
MVA units).
KVA or MVA
Click the kVA button to display power flow in kVA or the MVA button to display power flow in MVA.
Amp
Click the Amp button to display the current flow in amperes.
%PF
Select the %PF option to display the power factor in percent.
Show Units
Select this option to show units for voltage and power flow annotations.

21.3.2 AC Page
ID
Select the options under this heading to display the ID of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select the options under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.

Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Panel Connection Type (# of Phases - # of Wires)
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
Relay Display Tag, entered in Info page of Relay Editor
kV
Select the options under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements on
line diagram.
A
Select the options under this heading to display the ampere ratings (continuous or full-load ampere) of the
selected elements on the one-line diagram.
line diagram.
Z
Select the options under this heading to display the rated impedance of the selected AC elements on the
one-line diagram.

Motor % LRC

D-Y
Select the options under this heading to display the connection types of the selected elements on the one-
line diagram. For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary windings is
also displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of the LTC.
Composite Motor
Select this option to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
Use Default Options

Select this option to use ETAPs default display options. The checkboxes on this page will be grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable


21.3.3 AC-DC Page

This page includes options for displaying info annotations for AC-DC elements and composite networks.
ID
Select the options under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select the options under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-
line diagram.

Device Type Rating

UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
Click the options under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements on
A
Click the options under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the one-line
diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Select this option to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color in
Use Default Options


21.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Annotations

Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
selected.

Motor Acceleration Calculation Methods

ETAP provides two methods for motor starting: Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor Starting.
Both methods perform time-domain simulations and report results in both text report and plot formats.
The purpose of performing a motor starting study is twofold: to investigate whether the starting motor can
be successfully started under the operating conditions and to see if starting the motor will seriously
impede the normal operation of other loads in the system.
The Dynamic Motor Acceleration and Static Motor Starting differ in the way the starting motors are
modeled.
21.4.1 Dynamic Motor Acceleration

In Dynamic Motor Acceleration, a dynamic model throughout the whole simulation models the
accelerating motor. For this study, you also need to specify a load torque model for the load that the
motor is driving.
From the Model page for induction motor, or the LR Model page for synchronous motor, you can specify
motor dynamic model from one of the five different types:
Single1 - Equivalent (Thevenin) circuit model with constant rotor resistance and reactance
Single2 - Circuit model with deep-bar effect, rotor resistance and reactance change with speed
DBL1 - Double cage circuit model, with integrated rotor cages
DBL2 - Double cage circuit model, with independent rotor cages
TSC - Torque slip characteristic curve model

While the Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2 models are all based on an electrical circuit representation
of the motor, the TSC model allows you to model a starting motor directly from the manufacturers
performance curves. You can choose one of the existing library models or create your own motor model
in the Motor Library.
ETAP also allows you to model the load torque curve for each individual motor. You can choose one of
the existing library models or create your own motor model in the Motor Load Library.
Due to the difference in modeling of starting motors, you may perform the static motor starting study if
you are more concerned with the effect of motor starting on other operating loads in the system or if
information on dynamic model for the starting motor is not available. On the other hand, if you are
concerned with the actual acceleration time or whether the starting motor can be successfully started, a
dynamic motor acceleration study should be performed.
21.4.2 Static Motor Starting

In the Static Motor Starting method, it is assumed that the starting motor can always be started. You
specify from the Motor Editor motor acceleration time at 0% and 100% of the load, and the module
interpolates the acceleration time for the motor load based on these two values.
During the acceleration period, the motor is represented by its locked-rotor impedance, which draws the
maximum possible current from the system and has the most severe effect on other loads in the system.
Once the acceleration period has passed, the starting motor is changed to a constant kVA load and ETAP
simulates the load ramping process according to the starting and final loads specified in the Motor Editor.
Refer to Motor Starting Category page in the Motor Editor for more information.
21.4.3 Load Transition

In an event, you can specify a load transition to transfer system operating load from one Loading
Category to another. This allows you to globally adjust the system load during motor starting studies. You
may apply a load transition to all operating loads or to a group of loads by setting an upper limit of
capacity on loads to be involved in the load transition. Additionally, you can start motors through load
transition if the load percent is changed from zero to a non-zero value.
Due to the complexity involved in the interaction between normal motor starting actions and load
transition, the following rules are implemented to resolve conflicts in motor starting action preparation.
1. If, in an event, both action by Load or Starting Category and action by load transition call for change
of status or loading of a load, the action by Load or Starting Category takes priority.
2. If a load, whether a motor, an MOV, a static load, or a capacitor, is switched on/off through actions
by load or starting category in one event, the load transition will not apply to this load from that point
on.
3. If, in a load transition, the load percent of a motor (or an MOV) is changed from zero percent to a
non-zero value, this motor (or MOV) will be started at the new load percent (non-zero value). And
from this point on, the load transition will not apply on this motor (or MOV) any more.
4. Load transition does not apply on MOVs that have initial status as either Open or Closed.
5. In calculating load for a load transition, it takes into consideration the options for load diversity
factors entered in the Motor Study Case Editor for prestart load flow.

21.4.4 MOV Motor Starting

MOVs are specially designed motors that have different operational characteristics from regular motors.
Since these motors behave close to constant impedance load during operation, they are modeled as
constant impedance load in motor starting calculations.
The operation mode of an MOV may be opening or closing a valve, depending upon its initial status. To
start an MOV motor, its status has to be either open or closed. If the initial status of an MOV is open, its
operation mode will be closed and if the initial status is closed, its operation mode will be open. Both
modes involve several stages of operation as defined in the Characteristic group of the Nameplate page in
MOV Editor. For each stage, the impedance to represent the MOV is calculated based on the current and
power factor for the stage and the rated voltage.
For one motor starting simulations, a MOV is allowed to start only once due to infrequent operations of
MOV.
21.4.5 Starting Device

A starting motor can have one of thirteen types of starting devices modeled in the Motor Starting Studies,
including four general models for soft starter. You can specify starting device type and its control
characteristics from the Start Dev page of Induction Motor Editor or Synchronous Motor Editor.
Depending on the model type selected to represent a starting motor, certain types of starting device may
not apply. The following table gives applicable starting devices for each type of motor models.
Starting Device Modeled in Motor Starting Studies
Motor Model
Starting Device Static Motor
Model Starting Dynamic Motor Starting
LRZ Single 1 Single 2 Double 1 Double 1 TSC
Auto-XFMR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Stator R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Stator X Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Capacitor @ Bus Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Capacitor @ Term Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Rotor R Yes No Yes No No No
Rotor X Yes No Yes No No No
Y/D Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Partial Winding Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Current Limit Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Current Control Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Voltage Control Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Torque Control No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

21.4.6 Generation Category Change

In power system operations, it happens sometimes that while a larger motor is in the process of starting
up, a major source such as a power grid suddenly changes its operating values for the magnitude of
voltage at the interface point between the power grid and your electrical system. To simulate this
situation, ETAP allows you to change the Generation Category for generators and power grids. In any
event, you can change generation category from the existing one to any category. The operating values for
the ten generation categories are entered from the Rating page of Synchronous Generator Editor or Power
Grid Editor.
If a system contains multiple power sources (generators and power grids), change of generation for any
power source will potentially alter operating conditions of other power sources. In motor starting
calculation , whenever there is a change of Generation Category for a generator or a power grid, ETAP
uses the prestart system loading to determine internal voltage magnitude and angle of all generators and
power grids. These internal voltage magnitude and angle values stay constant until there is a new change
of Generation Category.
21.4.7 Motor Starting vs. Transient Stability Studies

The motor starting calculation is intentionally directed to investigate the behavior of a starting motor and
its effect on system operations, as facilitated by starting devices, etc. The transient stability calculation
can also simulate the motor starting process, with emphasis on the dynamic behavior of the whole system
under the impact of motor starting. The differences in objectives of the two types of calculation lead to
different modeling of system elements, as shown in the table below.
Comparison of System Element Models
Dynamic Static
Element Load Flow Transient Stability Motor Acceleration Motor Starting
Generators Infinite Bus Dynamically Modeled Constant Voltage Constant Voltage
Behind Xd Behind Xd
Exciter/Governors Not Dynamically Modeled Not Modeled Not Modeled

Applicable
Utility Ties Infinite Bus Constant Voltage Constant Voltage Constant Voltage
Behind X Behind X Behind X
Operating Motors Constant kVA Modeled Dynamically Constant kVA Constant kVA
or Constant kVA
Starting Motors Not Single1, Single2, Single1, Single2, Locked-Rotor Z and

Applicable DBL1, & DBL2 DBL1, DBL2, & TSC Power Factor
Models Models
Starters Not Modeled Modeled Modeled

Applicable

21.4.8 Other Features of Motor Starting Study

Many features are included in the motor starting study to facilitate system design and analysis, including
the following:
A static load can be switched on and off repeatedly at any time during a simulation with user
specified Loading Category.
A motor can be started and switched off repeatedly at any time during a simulation.
The motor switching can be specified by an individual Load or by Bus and Starting Category.
In static motor starting, after the acceleration period is passed, it will be modeled as a constant power
load. The load level can vary at a rate specified by the user. Please see the Motor Starting Category
page for a detailed description on the model for load changes.
An MOV can be started at any time during the simulation.
21.4.9 Modeling of SVC

In the initial load flow calculation, an SVC is modeled the same way as in a standard load flow
calculation. It will adjust terminal bus voltage as specified in the SVC Editor and provide or absorb
reactive power as needed. However, after the initial load flow, it will be represented as a constant
impedance load with the value set based on the initial load flow.
21.4.10 Modeling of Induction Generator

There is an option in the Info page of the Induction Machine Editor to set the Application Type as Motor
or Generator. If an Induction Machine is set as Induction Generator, its modeling can be different
depending on whether the machine is started in a Motor Stating simulation. For all operating induction
generators, the ones that are not started in a simulation, they are modeled the same way as in load flow
calculation. The induction generator provides real power to the system and draws reactive power from
the system. This rule applies to initial load flow as well as load transitions.
For induction generators that are started during a simulation, either through action by element, action by
Starting Category, or action by load transition, it is modeled differently before and after the induction
generator is started. In the initial load flow and during load transitions before the machine is started, it is
modeled as in induction generator in the same way as in the load flow calculations. Once the machine is
started, it will be modeled as an induction motor from that point on in the simulation. When modeled as
an induction motor, its rated kVA will be the same value as displayed in the editor, but its output
horsepower (or kW) will be recalculated based on the machine rated kVA, efficiency and power factor.

Motor Acceleration Required Data
21.5 Required Data

Bus Data
Required data for motor starting calculations for buses includes:
Bus ID
Nominal kV
%V and Angle (when Initial Condition is set to use Bus Voltages)
Load Diversity Factor (if the Loading option is set to use the Maximum or Minimum load)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the Branch Editors, including the 3-Winding Transformer Editor, 2-Winding
Transformer Editor, Transmission Line Editor, Cable Editor, Reactor Editor, and Impedance Editor.
Required data for motor starting calculations for branches includes the following:
Branch ID
Branch Z, R, X, or X/R values and units, tolerance, and temperatures, if applicable
Transformer rated kV and kVA/MVA, tap and LTC settings
Power Grid Data
Required data for motor starting calculations for power grids include:
Utility ID
Mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kV, and short-circuit MVA and impedance
Generation category data (%V and Vangle)
Required data for motor starting calculations for synchronous generators include:
Synchronous Generator ID
Mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kW, kV, and power factor
Xd and X/R ratio
Generation category data, ( V%, MW and Mvar)
Required data for motor starting calculations for synchronous motors include:
Synchronous Motor ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading for operating motors
Loading Category IDs and % Loading for operating motors


Required data for motor starting calculations for induction motors include:
Induction Motor ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Power factors and efficiencies at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading
Loading Category ID and % Loading
Static Load Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for static loads include:
Static Load ID
Power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% loading
MOV Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for MOV includes:
MOV ID
Rated kW/hp and kV
Current, PF, and time for each operation stage
Capacitor Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for capacitor includes:
Capacitor ID
Rated kV, kvar/bank and number of banks
Loading category ID and % Loading
Lumped Load Data
Required data for motor starting calculation for lumped load includes:
Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % for motor load
Loading category ID and % Loading
Additional Data for Starting Motors

For Static Motor Starting studies, the additional data includes:
Motor locked-rotor impedance and power factor

Motor acceleration time at no load and full load
Start and final percent loading and begin and end of load change time

Starting device data when needed

No load and full load accelerated time (for static motor starting)
For Dynamic Motor Acceleration Studies, the additional data includes:
Dynamic motor model for induction motors

LR model for synchronous motors
Load torque model
Motor inertia
Study Case Data

There are some Study Case-related data, which must also be provided. This data includes:
Study Case ID
Maximum number of iteration
Precision of solution
Total simulation time, simulation time step, and plot time step
Prestart loading (Loading Category)
Initial condition
Transformer LTC data
Equipment adjustment options
Alert options
Report (Report Format)
The Study Case related data is entered into the Motor Starting Study Case Editor.

Motor Acceleration Output Reports
21.6 Output Reports

The motor starting calculation results are reported in four different formats: Crystal Reports, a one-line
view display, and plots. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be displayed.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a Motor Acceleration Analysis.
You can utilize the Report Manager to help you view the output report.
The Output Report consists of several sections, as summarized in the following Section.
21.6.1 Output Report Sections

System Input Data
The beginning of the Output Report prints the system input data that is used in the Motor Starting Study,
including bus input data with the operating load connected to each bus, system branch data, branch
connection summary, and generator and utility machine data.
Initial Load Flow Report

An initial Load Flow Study is performed with the specified prestarting load. This load flow calculation is
carried out using the Newton-Raphson Method. The load flow result is printed for you to inspect system
operating conditions.
Switching Motor and Static Load Data

The switching motor and static load data printed include the motor nameplate data, equivalent cable data,
and the switching static load data.
For dynamic acceleration studies, the motor dynamic model and load model data are also printed in this
section.
Switching Event Data

This section of the Output Report lists every load-switching action, Generation Category change, and bus
loading change from load transitions in the sequence of time events. It provides you with a summary of
all the actions that are to be simulated in the study.
Event Load Flow Report

For each specified time event, whether there are switching actions or not, the module will run a load flow
calculation and report the result in this section. This feature provides you with a way to inspect system
operating conditions at any time during motor starting simulation. The module also runs a load flow at the
end of the total simulation time and prints the results in this section.
Tabulated Simulation Results

This section tabulates, the simulation results, for each switching motor, as functions of time at the
specified plot time step. The tabulated results include motor slip, motor terminal voltage, bus voltage,
motor current, and motor real power input.


This is a shortcut for the Report Manager. When you click the View Output Report button, ETAP
automatically opens the Output Report, which is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format.
In the picture shown below, the Output Report name is MS-Stat and the selected format is Complete.
21.6.3 Motor Starting Report Manager

To open the Report Manager, click the View Report Manager button on the Motor Acceleration toolbar.
The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different sections of
the Output Report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different portions of
the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to every page, as
described below.
Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the Output Report you want to view.
Path
This field displays the path of the project file based on which report was generated, along with the
Help

OK/Cancel
Click the OK button to dismiss the editor and bring up the Crystal Reports view to show the selected
portion of the Output Report. If no selection is made, it will dismiss the editor. Click the Cancel button to
dismiss the editor without viewing the report.

include:
Acceleration Report Events
Adjustments Impedance
Alert Complete Inverter
Alert Critical Load Flow Report
Alert Marginal Load Torque Model
Branch Machines
Bus Reactor
Cable SVC
Complete Switching Loads
Cover Torque Slip Curve
Equipment Cable Transformer


21.6.5 Result Page

This page allows you to select formats to view the result portion of the Output Report.

21.6.6 Summary Page

This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the Output Report, including various
alerts, sequence of events, and switching motors and static loads.


In this page there is only one format available, Complete, which brings up the Complete Report for a
Motor Acceleration Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.


Motor Acceleration One-Line Diagram Displayed Results
21.7 One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

In addition to the report in Crystal Reports format, ETAP displays the calculation results on the one-line
diagram. Once a Motor Starting Study is finished, ETAP will display a Motor Starting Time-Slider in the
toolbar, as shown below. The ruler ranges from zero seconds to the final simulation time. Initially, the
reference pointer is at the far left, corresponding to t = 0 second. You may click either end of the ruler to
move the pointer one grid at a time, or hold the mouse button down to move the pointer continuously.
You may also click the pointer, hold the mouse button down, and then drag the pointer to the desired
position. The time corresponding to the pointer position is also displayed next to the ruler in seconds.
The one-line diagram displays the bus voltages and the current (or kW + jkvar or kVA) of the starting
motors for the simulation time specified on the ruler. As you move the pointer along the ruler, the
displayed results change accordingly, providing you with a quick way to examine the calculation results.
In the example one-line diagram shown below, the starting motors Pump 1 is drawing 644 kW and 2266
kvar, while the voltage of bus Sub3 Swgr is 97.58%.

Motor Acceleration Alert View
21.8 Alert View

After the motor starting calculation is completed, ETAP checks any abnormal operating conditions
according to alert limits you set in the Alert page of Motor Starting Study Case. If any abnormal
conditions have been determined, alerts will be generated and reported in Alert View as well as in the
Crystal Reports format report. The Alert View can be brought up by clicking the Alert View button in the
Motor Starting toolbar. If you have selected the Auto Display option in the Alert page of Motor Starting
Study Case, the Alert View will open automatically when alerts are generated. The following is a sample
Alert View, which displays alerts for various bus Under Voltage and Motor Fail To Start alerts.

Motor Acceleration Plots
21.9 Plots
ETAP also provides simulation plots for you to examine calculation results graphically. To view the
simulation plots, click the Motor Acceleration Plots button in the Motor Starting toolbar. It will bring up a
Motor Starting Plot Selection dialog box, where you can specify devices and types of plots to view.
Device Type
There are five types of devices for which you can plot: generators and power grids, starting motors,
starting MOVs, static loads and capacitors, and buses.
Device ID
This list contains IDs of all devices for the selected device type. Click a device ID to view its plots.
Clicking again will deselect it. Plots for up to 16 devices can be displayed on one plot view. If more than
16 devices have been selected, plots for the first 16 devices will be displayed.
Plot Type
The Plot Type group provides a selection of plots for the selected device type. The following table lists
available plots for the five device types. Plots for slip and starting motor torques are generated only by
dynamic motor starting calculations. The motor torque is in percent, based on motor rated torque.

Available Plot Types for Motor Starting Studies
Generator Power Starting Motor Starting MOV Static Load Bus

Grid Capacitor
Current Slip Current Current Voltage
Vt (Machine Base) Current Vt (MOV Base) Vt (Load Base)
MW Vt (Motor Base) Vt (Bus Base) Vt (Bus Base)
Mvar Vt (Bus Base) Vbus Vbus
MVA Vbus kW kW
PF Accel. Torque kVar kVar
Motor Torque kVA
Load Torque
kW, Electrical
kvar
kW, Mechanical
The Check All button allows you to check all available plot types for the selected plot type. Clicking the
Uncheck All button will clear all available plot types for the selected plot type.
Combine Plots
Select this option to plot curves for the selected plot types on one graph. This feature allows you to
compare different types of plots (for example, voltage, slip, and starting motor torque) on the same graph.
Close All Plots

Clicking the Close All Plots button will close all existing open plots.
When you click the OK button, ETAP will open plot views for all the selected plot types. ETAP opens
one plot view for each selected plot type to display the type of plots for the selected motors.
For information about viewing plots, see section 7.7, Plots.

Modifying Plot Parameters

Plot parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the plot view.
For example, to modify plot line type, double-click the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameters Editor. For more information about modifying plot parameters, see section 7.7.1, Modify Plot
Parameters.

Chapter 22
Transient Stability Analysis

The ETAP Transient Stability Analysis Program is designed to investigate the system dynamic responses
and stability limits of a power system before, during, and after system changes or disturbances. The
program models dynamic characteristics of a power system, implements the user-defined events and
actions, solves the system network equation and machine differential equations interactively to find out
system and machine responses in time domain. You can use these responses to determine the system
transient behavior, make stability assessment, set protective device settings, and apply the necessary
remedy or enhancement to improve the system stability.
This chapter describes different tools to assist you in running Transient Stability Studies. An overview on
the basics of Transient Stability Study is also provided.
This chapter is organized into 9 sections:
1. The Transient Stability Toolbar section explains how you can launch a transient stability calculation,
open and view an Output Report, select display options, view plots, view actions that are taken in the
study and perform Sequence of Operation playback.
2. The Study Case Editor section explains how to create a new Study Case, to define parameters for a
Study Case, to create a sequence of switching events and disturbances, to globally define machine
dynamical modeling method, to select plot/tabulation devices, and to set device tolerance adjustments,
etc.
3. The Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system
parameters and the output results on the one-line diagram, and how to set them.
4. The Calculation Methods section provides some theoretical backgrounds and quick reference for the
fundamentals on Transient Stability Study, which are very helpful for users who do not have extensive
experience on running Transient Stability Studies.
5. The Required Data section is a very good reference for you to check if you have prepared all necessary
data for transient stability calculations. These data range from the system side, such as bus and branch
information, to the machine side, such as machine model and parameters, exciter model and parameters,
and governor model and parameters.
6. The Output Reports section explains and demonstrates the format and organization of the Transient
Stability Text Reports.

7. The One-Line Diagram Displayed Results section explains the available one-line displaying results and
provides one example.
8. The Plots section explains what plots for transient stability are available and how to select and view
them.
9. The Action List section explains how to view the actions that are implemented in the study, and how to
observe the system sequence of operation by moving the time-slider.

Transient Stability Analysis Toolbar
22.1 Transient Stability Toolbar

The Transient Stability toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Transient Stability Study
Mode.
Run Transient Stability
Display Options
Alert View (Available in a future release of ETAP)
Report Manager
Action List
Transient Stability Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run Transient Stability

Select a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar. Then click on the Run Transient Stability button to
perform a Transient Stability Study. A dialog box will appear to ask you to specify the Output Report
name if the output file name is set to Prompt. When the calculation completes, the Transient Stability
Study results will appear on the one-line diagram and are stored in the Output Report, as well as in the
plot file.
Display Options
Click the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation options under the
Transient Stability Study Mode and to edit the one-line diagram display for transient stability calculation
results. See Display Options for more information.
Alert View
This button is disabled for ETAP 5.0. This feature will be available in a future release of ETAP.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view transient stability output reports.
Transient stability analysis reports are provided in Crystal Report Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich Text,

MS Excel formats. A number of predefined reports are found from here in Complete, Input, Results and
Summary pages respectively.
You can also select output files in Crystal Report Viewer format from the Output Report list box on the
Study Case toolbar.
The Output Report database for Transient Stability Studies has a. TS1 extension.
Action List
Click on the Action List button to view actions in the Study Case. The action list is updated every time
when a new Study Case is done. The information in the Action List will be also available in Action
Summary Report. The action list contains a complete list of actions including those defined in the
Transient Stability Study Case and those from relay operations. The invalid actions due to system
constraints are also reported in this list. Use the time-slider to observe the system Sequence-of-Operation.
Left and right arrow keys will advance the time-slider to the previous/next action or the previous/next plot
point.

Transient Stability Plots

Click on the Transient Stability Plots button to select and plot the curves of the last plot file. The plot
file name is displayed on the Study Case toolbar. The transient stability plot files have the following
extension: .tsp. For more information see Plots section.

The stop sign button is normally disabled. When a transient stability study, this button becomes enabled
and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the current calculation. The one-line
diagram displays and plots will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it completes, and
the output report will be incomplete.
Get On-Line Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is enabled in your ETAP. Press this
button to use Real-Time values such as loading, bus voltages, etc as your initial conditions for Transient
Stability.
Note: Operators can use this module to predict system response before taking an action in the real
system.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is enabled in your ETAP. Press this button
to use Archived values such as loading, bus voltages, etc as your initial conditions for OPF.
Note: Using archived values gives you the opportunity to study previous operating conditions from any
of ETAP modules and define alternate solutions.

Transient Stability Analysis Study Case Editor

The Transient Stability Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, event
and action specifications, machine modeling selections and a variety of options for output reports and
plots. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases. Transient stability
calculations are conducted and reported in accordance to the settings of the Study Case selected in the
Study Case toolbar. You can easily switch between Study Cases without the trouble of resetting the
Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision Data.
When you are in the Transient Stability Analysis mode, you can access the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Transient Stability Study Case toolbar. You can also
access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Transient Stability subfolder under the Study
Cases folder.
There are two ways to create a new Study Case. You can click on the New button on the Transient
Stability Study Case toolbar to copy an existing Study Case to the new Study Case.
Or you can go to the Project Editor, right-click on the Transient Stability Study Case folder, and select
Create New. The program will then create a new Study Case, which is a copy of the default Study Case,
and adds it to the Transient Stability Study Case folder.

The Transient Stability Study Case Editor consists of five pages: Info Page, Events Page, Plot Page, Dyn
Model Page and Adjustment Page.

22.2.1 Info Page

This page is provided for you to specify some general solution parameters and Study Case information.
Study Case ID
The Study Case ID is shown in this entry field. You can rename a Study Case by simply deleting the old
ID and entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the
Navigator button at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to another.
Initial Load Flow

In this section you can specify the solution parameters for initial load flow calculation in transient
stability analysis.

Newton-Raphson
Choose Newton-Raphson Method for initial load flow calculation.
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel
Choose Accelerated Gauss-Seidel Method for initial load flow calculation.
Max Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged at the specified number of
iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default value is 2000.
Solution Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision that is used to check for convergence. This value determines
how precise you want the final solution to be. The default (and recommended) value is 0.0000000001.
Accel. Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 1.2
and 1.7. The default value is 1.45.

Select this option to include the transformer phase-shift specified in the Transformer Editors in both the
transient stability initial load flow calculation and the time simulation calculation. Otherwise, transformer
phase-shift will be ignored (i.e., 0 degree phase-shift regardless of the transformer winding connections).
Loading Category
In the Loading Category block, you can specify the system initial operating loads by selecting a loading.
The initial loading conditions will establish an initial normal operation condition for the transient stability
studies.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for this Study Case. With the selection of any category, ETAP
uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as specified for the selected category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the ten categories in the Nameplate page, Loading page, or
Rating page for most load components. Harmonic Filter loading is calculated from its parameters. SVC
loading is computed from the initial load flow.
Operating P, Q
Check this option to use operating P and Q as specified in the editors for load component. Operating P
and Q for loads are from ETAP on-line data.
Generation Category
Select one of the ten generation categories for the current optimal power flow study. With the selection of
any category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating page
of the Generator and Power Grid Editors. The generator controls will be different depending on the
Operating Mode that the generator and the power grid are operating under. The Operating Mode of a
generator and a power grid is selected on the Info page of the Generator and Power Grid Editors.

The table below shows the generation controls with respect to the Operating Mode.
Operating Mode Generation Category Control

Swing %V and Angle
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if your ETAP key has the on-line feature. When this box is checked, the generator
operating values update from the online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load
Flow Study.

Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for transient stability initial load flow calculation. The choices
are:
None
Select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected Loading Category, i.e., no
diversity factor is considered.
Bus Maximum
When the Bus Maximum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied
by the maximum diversity factor of the bus, which they are directly connected to. Using this option, you
can define the initial loading for Transient Stability Studies with each bus having a different maximum
diversity factor. This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system has to be
considered.
Bus Minimum
When the Bus Minimum option is selected, the loading of all motors and other loads will be multiplied by
the bus minimum diversity factor of the bus that they are directly connected to. Using this option, you can
define the initial loading for Transient Stability Studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.
This study option may be useful in some cases where the effect of light loading condition needs to be
investigated.
Global
Enter the diversity factors for all Constant kVA, Constant Z, Generic, and Constant I loads. When you
Constant kVA

Constant Z
Constant I
Generic
model.
Charger Loading
Loading Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category section of the Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load section of the Charger Editor. If
this option is selected, a DC load flow calculation is required to run first in order to estimate the charger
load.

purposes.
Bus Initial Voltage

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editor. Using this
option, you can set load flow initial conditions to use bus voltages.

This option allows you to set initial load flow conditions using a fixed bus voltage magnitude and phase
angle for all buses. When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage
value as the percent of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude
and zero degree for bus voltage angle.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in the Remarks box. Information entered in this
location will be printed on the second line of the header information in every page of the output report.
These remarks can provide specific information and conditions for each Study Case.
Information Editor.

22.2.2 Events Page

This page is provided for you to design and store transient stability study scenarios and events, as well as
some solution parameters.
Events
In this list, all user-defined events are displayed in their time order to give you a clear picture of the
sequence of events in this study. The active events are marked by '*' and are listed first, followed by
those which are inactive.
Event ID
The Event ID is a unique name with a maximum length of 12 alphanumeric characters.

Time
This is the time when the associated event occurs. The unit is in second. To enter the time for an 8 Cycle
breaker opening on a 60Hz system, simply enter time as 0.133 seconds.
Add (Event)
A new event can be added by clicking on the Add (Event) button and opening the Event Editor.
Active
Select this option to make an event active. Clicking on the box again will make the event inactive. Only
active events will be included in the study. Use the active option to temporarily disable certain actions
without deleting them from the Study Case.
Edit (Event)
Click on the Edit (Event) button to open the Event Editor and edit an existing event. You can also
double-click on an event in the Event list to activate the Event Editor.
Delete (Event)
Delete an existing event from the list.
Actions
Each event can encapsulate a number of actions (system changes or disturbances). When you select an
event by highlighting that event in the Events list, the actions associated with that event will be displayed
in the Actions list.

Each action is composed of the information of the Device Type, the Device ID, an Action, Setting 1 and
Setting 2.
Note: The event ID is displayed on top of the Actions list for your reference.
Device Type
This shows the type of device that is going to take an action.
Device ID / Bus Zone #

This shows the ID of the device or bus zone number (for Wind Turbine (Zone)) that is going to take an
action.
Action
This option defines the action to be taken by the specified device and the device type. The following
table shows the device types and their associated actions:

Device Type Actions Setting 1 Setting 2

Bus 3 Phase Fault / Clear - -
Fault/
LG Fault 1
Cable Fault / Clear Fault % of total length -
Line Fault / Clear Fault % of total length -
Impedance Fault / Clear Fault % of total length -
Circuit Breaker Open / Close - -
SPST Switch Open / Close - -
Fuse Trip - -
Contactor Open / Close - -
Generator Ref. Machine - -

Droop - -
Isoch - -
Start - -
Loss Excitation - -
Generation Impact % change in electrical power -
Generation Ramp % change in electrical power Time (sec) for % change
Voltage Impact % change in reference voltage -
Voltage Ramp % change in reference voltage Time (sec) for % change
Delete - -
Utility Ref. Machine - -
Voltage Impact % change in reference voltage -
Voltage Ramp % change in reference voltage Time (sec) for % change
Delete - -
Syn. Motor Accel - -
Load Impact % change in loading -
Load Ramp % change in loading Time (sec) for % change
Delete - -
Ind. Motor Accel - -
Load Impact % change in loading -
Delete - -
Lumped Load Load Impact % change in loading -
Delete - -
MOV Start - -
Wind Turbine U-D Wind Disturbance
Wind Gust
Wind Ramp
Wind Turbine U-D Wind Disturbance
(Zone)
Wind Gust
Wind Ramp
None Load Flow (no action, - -
print load flow at the
event time)
1
LG Fault is only for non-frequency dependent models

Setting1 and Setting 2

These columns display settings are for the action being performed. For example, for an induction motor,
you can define and load increase using the load ramp function. Setting 1 would be the percentage by
which the load needs to be ramped and Setting 2 would be the time it takes to ramp the load. Together,
Setting 1 and Setting 2 define the slope of the load ramp.
Add (Action)
A new action can be added by clicking on the Add (Action) button and opening the Action Editor. Select
a device type from the Device Type drop-down list. Select the device ID from the Device ID drop-down
list. Select an action from the Action drop-down list.
Edit (Action)
Click on the Edit (Action) button to edit an existing action. You can also double-click on a listed action
to bring up the Action Editor.
Delete (Action)
Delete an existing action.
Solution Parameters

The total simulation time for a Transient Stability Study. The unit is in seconds. The maximum value for
this field is 9999.

This is the integration time step in seconds in transient stability simulation. You should set this number
smaller than the smallest time constant in the system so you can see all the exciter and governor
responses.
Note: The smaller this number is, the more calculations are required, so the calculation time increases.
The recommended value is 0.001 seconds. If you feel you need higher resolution, decrease this number.
However, if the integration time step is too small, accumulated round up errors may increase.
Plot Time Step

This value determines how often ETAP should record the results of the simulation for plotting. For
instance, if you specify 20 steps, ETAP will plot points at every 20 simulation time step, i.e., for a

simulation time step of 0.001, the plot time step will be .02 seconds. The smaller this number is, the
smoother your plots will look, but also remember that the plot files on your hard disk may grow quite
large. Keep in mind that ETAP records plot information at this interval throughout the simulation. For
example, if you specified a simulation time step of 0.001 seconds, plot time step of 10, and a total time of
20 seconds, ETAP will write 20/(0.001*10)= 2000 points to disk, which may be a very large plot file,
depending on the number of machines and buses being plotted. The maximum value for this field is
1000.
Notes on Transient Stability Actions:
1. Opening and closing of a protective device (CB, Switch, or Fuse) that connects a
composite motor to a bus is not allowed.
If such a device is in the Transient Stability Study Case Action List (from the converted project from a
version prior to ETAP 3.0), the device will be removed from the list and ignored by the program.
The same rule applies to devices in the Voltage Relay or Frequency Relay Editor Interlock list.
2. Static loads cannot be added or deleted by the Transient Stability Program.
Static loads are not included in the Transient Stability Editor Action List. They must be added or deleted
from the system through protective device actions.
For projects converted from versions prior to ETAP 3.0 that include such actions, ETAP at the time of the
transient stability study will purge them from the list and ignore them.
3. Single-Pole Double-Throw (SPDT) Switch action is not allowed in the Transient

Stability Program.
For projects converted from versions prior to ETAP 3.0 that include such actions, ETAP will purge them
from the Transient Stability Study Case Editor Action List and ignored them.

4. Operation of the protective devices connected to an outside pin of the old composite
network is ignored.
Composite Networks included in converted files from versions prior to ETAP 3.0 need to be replaced if
the opening and closing actions of the protective devices connected to outside pins are desired.
Note: ETAP does not convert Composite networks automatically. To replace the composite networks, a
new composite network needs to be added. The content of the old composite network needs to be Cut
and then Moved from Dumpster into the new composite network.
5. Addition of a source element (Synchronous Generator or Power Grid) to a system when

directly connected to a protective device is not allowed.
A source must be connected to a terminal bus in order to be added to the system during the Transient
Stability Studies.
6. All actions to the devices in a completely de-energized subsystem are ignored.
Device actions in a portion of a system that is de-energized during the Transient Stability Simulation are
ignored.
7. Loads for a de-energized panel or a single-phase feeder are ignored.
When for an initially de-energized panel or a single-phase feeder, its loads are not calculated by ETAP.
Therefore, when such an element is switched on, it will not carry any loads.

8. Switching device operations for devices connected to a SPDT switch are ignored
When a SPST switch or breaker is connected to a SPDT switch without a bus in-between, the switching
action for the SPST switch or breaker is ignored. Therefore, a bus must be inserted to consider these
actions.
9. Loads for a de-energized panel or a single-phase feeder are ignored.
When for an initially de-energized panel or a single-phase feeder, its loads are not calculated by
PowerStation. Therefore, when such an element is switched on, it will not carry any loads.
10. Induction Motor will not be modeled dynamically under the following conditions:
a. Motor is defined as None in the Induction Machine Model page

b. Motor is defined as Torque Slip Curve model in the Induction Machine Model page
c. Motor is less than the HP/kW for its kV class defined in the Model page of the Study
Case
d. Motor is connected to a bus through a VFD
11. Synchronous Motor will not be modeled dynamically under the following conditions:
a. Motor is defined as None in the Induction Machine Model page

b. Motor is less than the HP/kW for its kV class defined in the Model page of the Study
Case
c. Motor is connected to a bus through a VFD

22.2.3 Plot Page

The Plot page is used to plot/tabulate those devices whose results need to be displayed on the one-line
diagram at the end of the simulation.
Device Type
Select a device type or category.
Syn. Generators
This machine group consist all synchronous generators.

Syn. Motors, MV
This machine group consists of all dynamically modeled synchronous motors, which are rated above 1.0
kV.
Syn. Motors, LV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled synchronous motors which are rated equal to
or less than 1.0 kV.
Ind. Machines, MV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled induction machines, which are rated above 1.0
kV.
Ind. Machines, LV
The machine group consisting of all dynamically modeled induction machines which are rated equal to or
less than 1.0 kV.
Buses
This device group consists of all buses.
MOVs
This device group consists of all MOVs with initially open or closed status.
Branches
The device groups, consisting of all different types of branches, with the exception of tie circuit breakers
(protective devices).
Lumped Loads
This device group consists of all lumped loads.
Note: The lumped load plot is available even if it is not dynamically modeled.
Wind Turbine
This device group consists of all wind turbines.
Plot Options
Once a machine or device group is selected, all devices in that group will be displayed in the Plot Options
list for you to select.
Device ID
Device IDs for the selected machine or device group, excluding the non-dynamically modeled machines.
Plot/Tabulation (column)
You can click on this column to select or deselect the plot/tabulation option for a particular device. Once
this option is set, an X will show in this column next to the selected device. By selecting this option,
information for the selected device will be tabulated at the end of the transient stability output report and
stored in the plot file to be plotted.
Plot/Tabulation (checkbox)
This provides another way to set the plot/tabulation option for the highlight device.

22.2.4 Dyn Model Page

This page is provided to globally assign dynamic modeling of synchronous and induction machines, and
lumped loads in the system. Motors are subdivided into medium voltage (above 1.0 kV) and low voltage
(less than or equal to 1.0kV) synchronous motor and induction machine groups.
A machine or a lumped load will be dynamically modeled if you have specified a dynamic model in its
editor and you select to globally model that motor group from this page.
Note: All synchronous generators and wind turbines are dynamically modeled.

Dynamic Modeling
Syn. Motors, MV
The machine group consisting of all synchronous motors, which are medium voltage (rated above 1.0
kV).
Syn. Motors, LV
This machine group consists of all synchronous motors that are low voltage (rated less than or equal to
1.0 kV).
Ind. Machines, MV
This machine group consists of all induction machines that are medium voltage (above 1.0 kV).
Ind. Machines, LV
This machine group consists of all induction machines that are low voltage (rated less than or equal to 1.0
kV).
Lumped Loads
This group consists of all lumped loads that are connected in the system.
Do Not Model Dynamically

If selected, the corresponding machine group will not be dynamically modeled in the transient stability
study for this Study Case, regardless of dynamic models specified for individual machines.
Model Machines Larger or Equal To

If selected, machines that are in the corresponding machine group and rated larger than the size specified
in the HP/kW field will be dynamically modeled, and machines in the same group that are rated less than
the size specified will not be dynamically modeled.
Note: For the machine to be dynamically modeled, it should also have a dynamic model specified for it
from its editor.
HP/kW (for Machines) or MVA (for Lumped Loads)

Specify the size of machines (HP or kW) or lumped loads (rated MVA) for the selected group to be
dynamically modeled.
Dynamic Modeling During Simulation (Time>0)
Include LTC Action

Check this option if you want to globally include or exclude LTC operation for time > 0 seconds. When
checked, ETAP will consider the individual LTC initial time delay and operating time specified for
transformers with LTC option (Tap page).
Include Starting Device

Check this option if you want to globally include or exclude starting device for accelerating motors.
When checked, ETAP will consider starting device control scheme for accelerating motors.

Starting Load of Accelerating Motors

In the motor acceleration calculations, the difference between the motor torque and the load torque is the
motor acceleration torque. In ETAP, the load torque model is specified as torque in percent as a function
of normalized motor speed. This load torque may be based on motor electrical rating or on mechanical
load. In this group, you indicate to the Motor Acceleration Module which base you want to use.
Based on Motor Electrical Rating

only represents the shape of the load as a function of speed. The load torque values will be adjusted so
that the synchronous speed of the torque is equal to 100%. This means that, with the modified load curve,
the motor will consume the rated electrical power at 100% starting load, under the rated voltage and at the
rated speed. When this option is selected, the torque base used to construct the load torque model has no
effect on the calculation results.
Based on Motor Mechanical Load

represents the actual load based on the rated output torque. The load curve will be applied as it is without
any adjustments.
To illustrate the implication of this selection, consider a motor that has a start load of 50% and rated
output torque Tr. On the Load page of the motor, the load torque curve is Model 1 given below, which has
a load torque of 80% at operating speed and the curve is based on Tr.
Case 1: Load Model Based on Motor Electrical Loading
In this case, the load torque curve will be shifted so that the torque at rated speed is 100% of the motor
rated torque. This means that the torque at each point on the load curve will be multiplied by a factor of
1.25 (equal to 1/0.8). This modified curve will be used as the load torque curve for the study. Note that
the modified curve is given as Model 2 above.
Since the starting load is 50%, the actual load will be 50% of the load based on the modified curve
(Model 2) as described above. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5 Tr.

Case 2: Load Model Based on Motor Mechanical Load
In this case, the load torque curve will not be shifted because it is assumed to represent the actual load.
However, since the starting load is 50%, the load torque curve will be adjusted so that the torque at each
point of the curve is multiplied by 0.5. The starting load torque is equal to 0.5*0.8 Tr = 0.4 Tr.
Note: If the motor has a load model as given in Model 2 above, there is no difference in calculation
results between the two options.
Constant Power Load
Threshold Voltage (VLC Limit)

This field is used to control the automatic conversion of a constant kVA load to a constant Z load for
Transient Stability calculations. If the connected bus voltage is below this value, a load type conversion
will occur for all applicable loads (constant kVA and constant Z). VLC Limit is specified in percent. Its
typical value is 80%. The allowable range is 0 to 200%.
Delta V
To avoid a sudden jump during the load type conversion, a 5% of voltage margin may be added to make
an undetermined region of VLCLimit +/- 5%, which means if the connected bus voltage drops below
VLCLimit 5%, a constant kVA load is to be converted to constant Z load. On the other hand, if the
connected bus voltage recovers about VLCLimit + 5%, the load is to be converted back to constant kVA
load.
Reference Machine
Auto Assign A Reference Machine for each Sub-system
By default this option is checked and disabled.
Synchronous Machine Damping
Use Nominal System Frequency

System nominal frequency will be used in the swing equation to calculate the machine damping power.
This option assumes the actual network frequency remains constant during the transient, which is usually
the case when the system has a power grid.
Use Weighted Machine Frequency

An equivalent network frequency will be calculated by taking the weighted average of the speed of the
synchronous generators that are in the same subsystem. This equivalent frequency is then used in the
swing equation to calculate machine-damping power. This option is more accurate for the system that
does not have a power grid and thus the network frequency is not guaranteed to remain constant during
the transient.
Frequency Dependent Model
Use Dependent Models for Machines and Network

Use frequency-dependent models for subtransient synchronous machines, induction machines and
networks. Transient Stability utilizes the change in impedance based on the operating frequency for the
subtransient synchronous machines, induction machines and network if this option is selected. This option
has to be checked in order to perform the generator start-up study.

Synchronization Check to Close Tie CBs
Auto-Sync. Phase Angle

If selected, when merging sub-electrical systems by Transient Stability Study Case actions or relay
operations, voltage phase angles as well as machine internal angles in the merged systems will be
synchronized. By default this option is selected.
Phase Angle Deviation <

If selected, when merging sub-electrical systems by Transient Stability Study Case actions or relay
operations, voltage phase angles as well as machine internal angles in the merged systems will be
synchronized if the voltage phase angle difference across the closing CB (or any other valid protective
devices) is less than the specified value; otherwise, the action will be invalid.
Frequency Deviation <

If selected, additional validation for merging action is required by checking the frequency difference in
the percentage of the system frequency across the closing CB (or any other valid protective devices).
Bus Voltage Deviation <

If selected, additional validation for merging action is required by checking the voltage magnitude
difference in percentage of the bus nominal voltage across the closing CB (or any other valid protective
devices).
Salient-Pole Machine Modeling

Method 1 is using an enhanced IEEE model for silent-pole synchronous machine. This method in general
provides a faster convergence during a Transient Simulation Study.
Method 2 uses a regular IEEE model for salient-pole synchronous machine. Its convergence during a
Transient Simulation Study in general is slower.
Apply Saturation Factor Sbreak
Non-Freq. Dependent Model

When checked, the synchronous machine saturation break point Sbreak will be used to define the
machine saturation curve, together with the other two pieces of input data S100 and S120; otherwise, only
S100 and S120 are used. Please note that this option is only for non-frequency dependent model studies.
For frequency-dependent model studies, Sbreak is always used.


This page allows the user to specify tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to impedance values for transformer, reactor,
and overload heater.

adjustment in load flow calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent tolerance value.

For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted impedance used
in the load flow calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.
of Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. The Load Flow Module increases the reactor
impedance by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the
adjusted reactor impedance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Load
Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any individual

This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Load Flow Module increases the
corresponding field of Short Circuit Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Length Tolerance
This section allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line lengths.

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. The Load Flow Module increases the cable length by the
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Load Flow Study Case

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. The Load Flow Module increases the

2.5%, then the adjusted transmission line length used in the load flow calculation is 2.05 miles.
of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any

This group allows the user to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature
on the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. The Load Flow Module adjusts the
temperature value specified in the Cable Editor Impedance Page. A global temperature correction can be
field of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment Page. The global temperature correction value
overrides any individual Cable Impedance Page maximum temperature. Please refer to the Cable Editor
Impedance Page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. The Load Flow Module adjusts
the conductor resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating
the corresponding field of the Load Flow Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature
correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum temperature.
Please refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance Page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).

Transient Stability Analysis Display Options

The Transient Stability Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-
DC, and Colors information annotations.
Results Page
The Results page allows you to define options for one-line diagram calculation results display. These
results can be displayed for each plot time step as selected from the time-slider at the Action List. The
results include bus voltage and frequency, synchronous machine power angle and speed, induction
machine speed, and power flows for the selected plot devices. The bus, machine and branch data that are
displayed on the one-line diagram are the same data as those are stored in the plot file, i.e., to show
calculation results for a device on the one-line diagram, you need to plot/tabulate that device from the
Transient Stability Study Case Editor Plot page.

Bus
Display the calculated voltage and frequency of buses selected for plotting.
Voltage
Bus and machine terminal voltages in kV or in percent of the bus nominal kV.
Frequency
Bus frequency in hertz or in percent of system frequency.
Syn. Machine

Display the calculated power angle and frequency of synchronous generators and motors, which are
selected for plotting from the Study Case.
Power Angle
Machine power (rotor) angle in degrees or radians.
Speed
Display speed of synchronous machine as RPM or % speed
Ind. Machine
Speed
Display speed of induction machines (RPM or % Slip), which are selected for plotting from the Study
Case.
S -M
% Slip = 100 x
S
Power Flows
Specify how the flows will be displayed in (kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar), or (kVA or MVA) with or without
PF, or Amp with or without PF.
Show Units
Select the checkboxes under this heading to show units for the displayed results.

Transient Stability Study Results Displayed on the One-Line Diagram at Time 0.701 Seconds

AC Page
ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ID of the AC elements on the one-line diagram.
Rating
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the AC elements on the one-line
diagram.

Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
Relay Automatic for Voltage, Reverse Power, Frequency
Relay. For Multifunction relay or UR, use the Display
Tag field in the Info Page to display the appropriate
designations
kV
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z

Motor % LRC

D-Y
one-line diagram. For transformers, the operating tap setting for primary, secondary, and tertiary
windings are also displayed. The operating tap setting consists of the fixed taps plus the tap position of
the LTC.
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable


AC-DC Page
ID
line diagram.

Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type Rating

UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Use Default Options


Colors Page
Color Theme
Annotations

Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button

Theme Editor
selected.

Transient Stability Analysis Calculation Methods

Performing the power system transient stability study is a comprehensive task. It requires knowledge of
machine dynamic models, machine control system models (such as excitation system and automatic
voltage regulators, governor and turbine/engine systems, and power system stabilizers), electric network
modeling, numerical computations, and power system electromechanical equilibrium theory. The full
discussion on this topic is far beyond the scope of this manual. In this section, we will brief you with
some fundamentals and underlying principles on the power system transient stability study, with the focus
on applications with ETAP.
Standard Compliance
ETAP Transient Stability Analysis Module fully complies with the latest version of the following standards:
IEEE Standard 1110-2002, IEEE Guide for Synchronous Generator Modeling Practices and
Applications in Power System Stability Analyses
IEEE Std 421.5-2002, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power System
Stability Studies
Purpose for Performing Transient Stability Study

Dynamic performance of a power system is significant in the design and operation of the system. The
transient stability study determines the machine power angles and speed deviations, system electrical
frequency, real and reactive power flows of the machines, power flows of lines and transformers, as well
as the voltage levels of the buses in the system. These system conditions provide indications for system
stability assessments. The results are displayed on the one-line diagram, and also can be printed or
plotted. For Transient Stability Studies, you should model particular groups of machines in the system,
which are known to have important influences on the system operation. The total simulation time for
each Study Case should be sufficiently long to obtain a definite stability conclusion.
Power System Stability Definition

Power system stability is the property of a power system that insures the system remains in
electromechanical equilibrium throughout any normal and abnormal operating conditions.
Because the power system stability is an electromechanical phenomenon, it is thus defined as the ability
of designated synchronous machines in the system to remain in synchronism with one another following
disturbance such as fault and fault removal at various locations in the system. It also indicates the ability
of induction motors in the system to maintain torque to carry load following these disturbances.
Synchronous Machine Power Angles

Synchronous machines play a decisive role in the power system stability because during and after
disturbances their power angles (also referred as rotor angles) will oscillate to cause power flow
oscillations in the system. Depending on the level of these oscillations, the electromechanical equilibrium
in the system could be destroyed and the instability could occur. Therefore, power system stability is
sometimes also referred to as synchronous machine power angle stability.

The following two equations are often referenced in power system Transient Stability Studies:
Torque Equation (Generator Case)
P 2
T= F sin
8 air r
where
T = mechanical shaft torque
P = number of poles
air = air-gap flux
Fr = rotor field MMF
= power (rotor) angle
The torque equation defines the relationship between the mechanical shaft torque, the stator voltage, the
excitation system, and the power angle. Changes in any one of them will cause the power angle to
readjust itself to a new position.
Swing Equation (Generator Case)
d 2 d
M +D =P P
2 dt mech elec
dt
where
M = inertia constant
D = damping constant
Pmech = input mechanical power
Pelec = output electrical power
The swing equation shows that the solution of the power angle is a function of balance between the
mechanical power and the electrical power. Any change in the system that breaks this balance will cause
the power angle to undergo a transient and reach a new position in an oscillatory manner. This oscillation
is usually called the power angle swing.
Stability Limits
There are two types of stability limit for a power system, namely steady-state stability limit and transient
stability limit.
Steady-State Stability Limit

The steady-state stability is defined as the stability of a system under conditions of gradual or small
changes in the system. This stability can be either found by the load flow calculation for a steady-state
operation, or determined by a transient stability study if there are system changes or disturbances
involved. The system is said to be steady-state stable if, following any small and/or gradual disturbances,
all synchronous machines reach their steady-state operating condition identical or close to the pre-
disturbance operating conditions. The steady-state stability limit for any synchronous machine is when its
power angle is less than 90 degrees.
Transient Stability Limit

Transient or dynamic stability is defined as the stability of a system during and after sudden changes or
disturbances in the system, such as short-circuits, loss of generators, sudden changes in load, line tripping,

or any other similar impact. The system is said to be transient stable if following a severe disturbance, all
synchronous machines reach their steady-state operating condition without prolonged loss of synchronism
or going out of step with other machines. The transient stability limit for any synchronous machine is its
power angle is less than 180 degrees.
Causes of Instability Problems

The major causes to industrial power system instability problems include, but are not limited to:
Short-circuits
Loss of a tie connection to a utility system
Loss of a portion of in-plant co-generation (generator rejection)
Starting a motor that is large relative to the system generating capacity
Switching operations of lines, capacitors, etc.
Impact loading (motors and static loads)
A sudden large step change of load or generation
Consequences of Instability Problems

The consequences of power system instability problems usually are very severe and can range from
permanent damage on equipment and shutting down processes, all the way to causing a whole area power
outage. Some typical consequences are listed below:
Area-wide blackout
Interruption of loads
Low-voltage conditions
Damage to equipment
Relay and protective device malfunctions
Power System Transient Stability Enhancement

Depending on the causes of instability problems in a particular system, a number of enhancements can be
made to improve the system stability. Typical enhancements include:
Improve configuration and system design.

Increase synchronizing power
Design and selection of rotating equipment use induction motors, increase moment of inertia,
reduce transient reactance, improve voltage regulator and exciter characteristics
Application of Power System Stabilizers (PSS)
Add system protection fast fault clearance, system separation, etc.
Add load shedding scheme
However, note that each of the above remedies requires careful consideration and we recommend that you
re-run all system studies again, because changes brought by those remedies very likely will impact system
load flow, short-circuit, and motor starting results.
Simulation of Time Events and Actions

Transient Stability Study is essentially an action driven time-domain simulation. Actions should be
specified at different time instants (events). There are two ways to specify events and actions. One way
is to use the Event Editor and Action Editor in the Transient Stability Study Case Editor. Another is to
use relay-controlled dynamic actions.

When using actions specified in the Transient Stability Study Case Editor, Action List, the exact time
instant for the action to take place needs to be given. Type of actions in this category includes all the pre-
scheduled operations such as generator start-up and shutdown, generator control mode change, load
addition and rejection, motor acceleration, MOV start and others. When to simulate the system response
for existing events, such as a recorded fault in the system, user also can use this type of action, because
the recorded fault occurring time and duration are known. To specify this type of action, you would first
create a new event and the event occurring time in the Event Editor of the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor, Event page, as shown below.
Secondly, you can use the Action Editor in the same page to add as many actions as desired for this event.


Relay Operation
In power systems, many actions occur without any pre-acknowledgment, instead, they are controlled by
sensors and relays. For instance, a current relay will trip off circuit breakers once the measured current by
relay exceeds a pre-set value. In another case, a voltage relay can be used to open or close circuit
breakers based on its monitored voltage and comparison with an upper and lower setting. These types of
action do not have a definite time of happening and are solely depending on the system dynamic
responses and relay settings. They, therefore, have to be implemented using the second method, i.e., relay
controlled actions. To use relay-controlled actions, user needs to add a relay and connect it to the one-
line diagram via a PT or CT, depending on type of the relay. Next in the Relay Editor, user specifies
relay-controlled circuit breaker ID, control settings, time delay, and other data related to relay operations.
During the transient stability simulation in time-domain, if a relay setting is met, then its controlled circuit
breaker will take an automatic action. This method avoids requesting to give a pre-defined action time
and is a true resemblance to real power system operating conditions.
The following two pictures give an example of how you can use relay-controlled actions. In the first
picture, it is assumed that CB2 and/or CB11 are tripped off due to a fault in transformer T2, causing
substation Sub2A-N to lose power. To make a bus transfer for Sub2A-N to the adjacent bus Sub2B, you
can place a voltage relay (27) on bus Sub2A-N to monitor the bus voltage magnitude and close a
normally opened tie circuit breaker Tie CB when it is necessary.
To do this, you can set the voltage relay to pick up under-voltage at 65% and close Tie CB after 0.1 relay
delaying time and whatever the closing cycle by Tie CB itself. The settings for the voltage relay are
shown in the second figure down below.

Other relays like Reverse Power Relay, Frequency Relay, MV Solid State Trip Relay, Overcurrent Relay
and Motor Relay follow certain connection logic in the program for correct operation.
Operation of Reverse Power Relay (Device 32)

Device 32 uses a predefined reference direction for sensing the current flow in the one-line diagram.
Relay Connection Normal Flow

32-1 Generator From the Generator to the Bus
32-2 Branch From Bus to the Branch
32-3 Branch From Bus to the Branch
32-4 Load From Bus to the Load
32-5 & 32-6 Tie-CB From Polarity (Dot) to other end
The diagram below shows the reference current direction for relays connected to sources, branches, loads
and tie circuit breakers.

Consider the following setting for Relay 32-1

Operate Operate
Normal Flow
MW or Mvar
0.0
% Pickup %Pickup
Under Power Over Power
-10% 100%
(-1MW) (10MW)
Therefore, the relay will not operate between the region of 10MW and -1 MW. It will operate outside this
region.
Operation of Directional Relay (Device 67)

Device 67 like Device 32 uses a predefined reference direction for sensing the current flow in the one-line
diagram along with the polarity of the CT (dot). Consider a UR element with Device 67 enabled.
Irrespective of where the Device 67 is connected, it will follow the polarity of the CT. The reference
direction is always from the CT polarity (dot) to the other end for forward and into the CT polarity (dot)
for reverse direction.
Therefore, if the relay were set in the forward direction, its operation region would be as shown below
based on the instantaneous setting.
Operate
Forward
Direction
0.0
Instantaneous
Setting
Operation of Multifunction Relays (Device 49/50/51)

For transient stability trip signals are send based on Any, Phase and 49/50 elements only. Multifunction
relays such as UR use the following logic for sensing tripping current. Note: Multifunction relays only
trip based on instantaneous settings. Overcurrent settings are ignored by transient stability. OCR(x)
denotes Overcurrent Level being used. For example OCR(1) means OCR with OC1 setting.

Relay Element Level/Zone Trip (if instantaneous selected)

Any Any Trip OCR(1) & OLR
Phase Any Trip OCR(1)
Any or Phase OCR(1) Trip OCR(1)
49/50 Any Trip OLR
49/50 OCR(1) None
Any, Phase or 49/50 OCR(2) None
No Library Selected
Any or Phase Any or OCR(x) Trip OCR(1)
49/50 Any or OCR(x) Trip OLR
If library data is not selected then OC levels are not considered. The trip signal is sent based on only
Phase or 49/50 settings.
If library data has been selected then ETAP considers only two Level/Zone - Any or OC1
If library data has been selected and the relay is not active, the trip signal is not sent. For example, if
output is 49/50, Level = (Any) and 49/50 is not active then no trip signal is sent.
If output is Any, Level = (Any orOC1) and Instantaneous (Phase and 49/50) is not active then no trip
signal is sent.

Transient Stability Analysis Required Data
22.5 Required Data

To run a Transient Stability Study, you need to provide all the data required for load flow calculation. In
addition to that, you need to provide machine dynamic model data, load model data, and any control
units, such as exciter and governor data. Required data for transient stability calculations include:
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factor (when Loading option is set to Maximum or Minimum diversity factor)
Branch Data
2-Winding and 3-Winding Transformers
Transform ID
Bus connections
Rated kV and MVA
Positive sequence impedance and X/R ration
Z Variation
Z Tolerance
Fixed Tap and LTC settings
Phase Shift as in Standard Positive or Negative Sequence connections, or User-Defined
configurations
Cable
Cable ID
Bus connections
Length, unit and tolerance
# conductors per phase
Cable type, rated kV and size if library data is used
Cable's positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if based on user entered data
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Minimum temperature
Transmission Line
Transmission Line ID
Bus connections
Phase conductor, ground wire and configuration parameters (from library or user enter) if the
calculated value is used
Lines positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if a user-defined value is used
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Minimum temperature

Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus connections
Positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Units and associated parameters
Reactor
Reactor ID
Bus connections
Positive sequence impedance, X/R ratio
Tolerance
Protective Device Data
Protective Device ID
Bus and branch connections
Status
CT/PT Data
CT/PT ID
Bus or branch or source or load connections
Primary and secondary ratings
Relay Data
Relay ID
CT/PT connections
Setting, Unit, CB ID, Action, Delay for Voltage Relay (27) and Frequency Relay (81)
Device, ID, Action, Setting, Pickup, Time Delay for Reverse Power Relay (32)
Trip Element, Device, ID, Action, Instantaneous Pickup for MV Slid State Trip Relay (SST)
Relay Element, Level/Zone, Device, ID, Action, Instantaneous Trip Range, Trip, Time Delay for
Motor Relay (MR) and Overcurrent Relay (OCR)
Power Grid Data
Power Grid ID
Bus connections
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control or PF Control)
Rated kV
Generation Category ID and associated data for each category
%V and Angle for Swing mode
%V, MW generation, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Voltage Control mode
MW and Mvar generation, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for Mvar Control mode
MW generation, operating %PF, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for PF Control mode
3-Phase MVAsc and X/R values

Synchronous generator ID
Bus connections
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control or PF Control)
Rated MW
Rated kV
Rated %PF
Rated MVA
Rated %Eff
Number of poles
Dynamic model type (None, Equivalent, Transient, or Subtransient)
Rotor type (Round-Rotor or Salient-Pole)
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xq, Xdu, Xqu, Xd, XL, Tdo for Equivalent
model
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo, Tqo for
Transient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo, Tdo,
Tqo, Tqo for Subtransient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo for
Transient model Salient-Pole machine type
Tqo for Subtransient model Salient-Pole machine type
Sbreak, S100, S120, and Damping
Prime Mover RPM, WR2 or H
Coupling RPM, WR2 or H
Generator RPM, WR2 or H
Damping coefficients D1 and D2, Spring coefficients K1 and K2 for if include tensional effect
Fixed excitation, or exciter type and all associated parameters, or UDM exciter model ID
Governor type and all associated parameters or UDM governor model ID or No governor (None)
PSS type and all associated parameters or UDM PSS model ID or No Power System Stabilizer (PSS)
(None)
Synchronous motor ID
Bus connections
Status and the associated Demand Factors
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated power factor and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% loadings
Rated efficient and efficient factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% loadings

Loading Category ID and % Loading for each category

Dynamic model type (None, Equivalent, Transient or Subtransient)
Rotor type (Round-Rotor or Salient-Pole)
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xq, Xdu, Xqu, Xd, XL, Tdo for Equivalent
model
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo, Tqo for
Transient model Round-Rotor machine type
Tqo, Tqo for Subtransient model Round-Rotor machine type
Xd, Xd/Ra, Ra, X2, X2/R2, R2, Xo, X0/R0, R0, Xd, Xd, Xq, Xq, XL, Xdu, Xqu, Tdo for
Transient model Salient-Pole machine type
Tqo for Subtransient model Salient-Pole machine type
Sbreak, S100, S120, and Damping
Motor RPM, WR2 or H
Load RPM, WR2 or H
Fixed excitation, or exciter type and all associated parameters, or UDM exciter model ID
Load Torque type (None, Polynomial, or Curve)
Load model from library if select Polynomial or Curve load torque type
Starting Category ID and Start % Loading for each category
Starting device type and associated parameters
Induction Machine Data
Induction machine ID
Bus connections
Application type (Motor or Generator)
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated % Slip or RPM
Number of poles
Model type (None or CKT)
Xlr, Xoc, X/R, and Tdo for Single1 CKT model
Rs, Xs, Xm, Rr,fl, Rr,lr, Xr,fl, and Xr,lr for Single2 CKT model
Rs, Xs, Xm, Rrl, Rr2, Xr1, and Xr2 for DBL1 and DBL2 CKT models
Motor RPM, WR2 or H
Load RPM, WR2 or H
Load Torque type (None, Polynomial, or Curve)

Load model from library if select Polynomial or Curve load torque type
Starting Category ID and Start % Loading for each category
Starting device type and associated parameters
HV DC Link Data
Element ID
All data on the Rating page is required for transient stability calculations
Inverter current margin (Im)
SVC Data
Element ID
Rated kV
Inductive Rating (Either QL, IL, or BL)
Capacitive Rating (Either QC, IC, or BC)
Max Inductive Rating (Either QL(Max), or IL(Max))
Max Capacitive Rating (Either QC(Min), or IC(Min))
Note: QC, QC(Min), and BL must be entered as a negative value
Wind Turbine Generator Data
Wind Turbine Generator ID

Bus connections
Quantity
Rated kW/MW , kV, %PF, %Eff, and Number of poles
Model type (None or CKT)
Note: If None is selected, then it is modeled as constant Power Generator
Rs, Xs, Xm, Rr,fl, Rr,lr, Xr,fl, and Xr,lr for Single2 CKT model
Turbine Aerodynamics and Power Coefficient Cp
Wind Disturbance and Avg. Base Speed
Converter and Pitch control
Motor RPM, WR2 or H
Load RPM, WR2 or H
MOV Data
MOV ID
Bus connection
Initial Status & associated Demand Factors
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated Power Factor

Rated Efficiency
Rated Torque
Hammer Blow & Micro Switch Flags
Locked Rotor (LR), No Load (NL), Normal, & Rated Torque (Rated T) % Current, %PF and Time
Duration
Loading Category ID & % Loading for each category
% Voltage Limits for Start, Seating/Unseating and Travel
Static Load Data
Static Load ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Status & associated Demand Factors
Rated kV
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated Power Factor
Lumped Load Data
Lumped Load ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Model type
Rated kVA/MVA and rated %PF or rated kW/MW and rated kvar/Mvar and Load Type (% Constant
kVA and % Constant Z) for Conventional model
Ratings for phase A, B, and C or phase AB, BC, and CA load in terms of kVA/MVA, kW/MW,
kvar/Mvar and %PF, and Load Type (% Constant MVA, % Constant Z and % Constant I) for
Unbalanced load
P0, Q0, a, b, Kpf and Kqf for Exponential load
P0, Q0, p1, p2, p3, q1, q2, q3, Kpf and Kqf for Polynomial load
P0, Q0, a1, a2, b1, b2, p1, p2, p3, p4, p5, q1, q2, q3, q4, q5, Kpf1, Kpf2, Kqf1, and Kqf2 for
Comprehensive load
Dynamic model parameters Ta and
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Mvar/Bank and # of Banks

Panel Schedule
Panel Schedule ID
Phase connection
Rating per phase (circuit) for internal link (load)
Connection and loads for each external link (load)
Loading Category ID and % Loading for each loading category for each phase (circuit)
Harmonic Filter
Harmonic Filter ID
Bus connection
Status
Filter Type
Rated kV & 1-Phase kvar for capacitors
Xl & Q factor for reactors
R, if applicable
Grounding connection
UPS Data
UPS ID
Bus connections
Rated AC kW/MW
Rated AC Input and Output kV
Rated % PF & % EFF
VFD Data
VFD ID
Bus and load connections
VFD is Modeled as a Transparent Device in the Transient Stability Study
Charger Data
Charger ID
Bus connections
Rated AC kVA/MVA
Rated AC kV
Rated % PF and % EFF

Inverter Data
Inverter is not modeled in the Transient Stability Study
Study Case Parameters
Study Case ID
Max. number of iterations
Solution Precision
Acceleration Factor
Apply transformer phase-shift flag
Initial Loading Category
Initial Loading Condition (Operating P, Q flag)
Initial Generation Category
Initial Generation Condition (Operating P, Q, V flag)
Load Diversity Factor (None, Bus Maximum, Bus Minimum, or Global)
Const. kVA, Const Z, Const. I and Generic load for Global Load Diversity Factor
Charger Loading Condition (from Loading Category of from Operating Load)
Initial Voltage Condition (use Bus Initial Voltage or use User-Defined Fixed Value)
Voltage magnitude and phase angle if use User-Defined Fixed Value
Events & Actions
Plot Time Step
Devices/elements to be plotted
Dynamic Modeling Information
Dynamic Modeling During Simulation (for transformer LTC) information
Starting Load for Accelerating Motor information
Constant Power Load conversion information
Reference Machine selection flag
Synchronous Machine Damping modeling information
Frequency Dependent Models flag
Adjustment information
Study Case parameters are entered into the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.

Transient Stability Analysis Output Reports
22.6 Output Reports

ETAP provides Transient Stability Study results at all different levels of detail, depending on your
requirements. The results are represented in three different ways: a Crystal Report output, a one-line
view display, and plots. Crystal Reports can be exported into a number of formats using the Crystal
Report export function.
Transient Stability Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Transient Stability toolbar to open the Transient Stability
Report Manager. The Transient Stability Report Manager provides five formats for report text. They are
Crystal Reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and MS Excel
formats. The Transient Stability Report Manager consists of four pages.
Complete Page
From this page you can select the report that gives you the complete output report.
Complete Report
The Complete Report gives the complete information for the system and the Study Case. It includes the
system summary, buses, branches, and machine input data, initial load flow and intermittent load flow
results, tabulated transient responses of the selected plot components and a list of actions. Below is the
first page from the Complete Report.


Input Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the input data Output Report. There are
twenty-one reports available under the Input Report page.
Action Summary Report

The Action Summary Report gives a complete list of actions taken during the study.
Adjustments Report
The adjustments Report gives the tolerance settings used during the study.
Branch Zero Sequence Z Report

This report gives the zero sequence impedance values for all branches.
Branch Report
The Branch Report gives all branch impedance in per unit and the branch connections.
Bus Report
The Bus Report gives all buses input data, including ID, voltage rating, generation, and loading.
Cable Report
The Cable Report gives all cable input data, including ID, length, impedance, and susceptance.
Cover Report
The Cover Report gives the system and the study overall information.

Exciter Report
The Exciter Report gives the excitation and AVR systems input data.
Governor Report
The Governor Report gives the engine/turbine and speed governor systems input data.
High Voltage DC Link Report

The HVDC link Reports gives the HVDC input data related to rating as well as dynamic model data.
Impedance Report
The Impedance Report gives all impedance branches input data.
Induction Machines Report

The Induction Machines Report gives all induction machine input data, including their rated, machine
model and load model parameters.
Lumped Load Report

The Lumped Load Report gives all lumped load input data including lumped load dynamic model data.
PSS Report
The PSS Report gives all PSS systems input data.
Reactor Report
The Reactor Report gives all reactor branches input data.
Relay Report
The Relay Report gives all relays input data, including their controlled protective device information.
Starting MOVs Report

The Starting MOVs Report gives input data for all MOVs to be started.
SVC Report
The SVC Report gives input data for all Static Var Compensators.
Synchronous Machines Report

The Synchronous Machines Report gives all synchronous machine input data, including their rated,
machine model, exciter and governor or load model parameters.
System Islanding Index Report

The System Islanding Index Report contains information about the zones considered for each subsystem.
Transformer Report
The Transformer Report give input data for all 2-winding and 3-winding transformers.
A sample report from the Synchronous Machines Report is displayed below.


Result Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the study result Output Report. There are
two reports available under the Result Report page.
Dynamic Stability Report

The Dynamic Stability Report lists dynamic responses of the selected components during the time
simulation.
Load Flow Report

The Load Flow Report gives the initial and intermittent load flow results.
A sample report from the Dynamic Stability Report is presented below.


Summary Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the summary Output Report. There are
two reports available under the Summary Report page.
Action Summary Report

The Action Summary Report gives the summary of all actions taken during the study.
Below is a sample report from the Action Summary report.
System Islanding Index Report

The System Islanding Index Report contains information about the zones considered for each subsystem.

Transient Stability Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

In addition to the text report, ETAP displays the transient stability calculation results on the one-line
diagram.
Transient Stability Time-Slider

Once a transient stability study is completed, a Transient Stability Time-Slider, as shown below, will
appear next to the Configuration & Mode toolbar. The slider ranges from zero to the total simulation
time. Initially, the reference pointer is at the far left, corresponding to t = 0 seconds. You may click on
Forward/Backward arrow buttons to move the pointer one grid at a time, or click on Next/Previous TS
Action arrow buttons to move the pointer to the next/previous action. You may also click on the pointer,
hold the mouse button down, and then drag the pointer to the desired position. The time corresponding to
the pointer position is also displayed one the top of the ruler in units of seconds. As you move the pointer
along the slider, the displayed results on the one-line diagram change accordingly, providing you with a
quick way to examine the calculation results.
The one-line diagram displays are only available for those devices that are selected for plot options.
Depending on the device type, different calculation results are displayed as defined below:
Buses
Voltage bus voltage magnitude in kV or percent

Frequency bus frequency in Hz or percent
Syn. Generators
Relative Power Angle synchronous generator power (rotor) angle in degree or radian
Speed synchronous generator speed in RPM or percent
Efd synchronous generator field voltage in per unit
Real and Reactive Power synchronous generator electrical power generation in kW+jkvar or
MW+jMvar
Apparent Power synchronous generator electrical power generation in kVA or MVA
Current synchronous generator terminal current in Amp
PF synchronous generator generation power factor when either apparent power or current display is
selected
Syn. Motors, MV
Relative Power Angle synchronous motor power (rotor) angle in degree or radian
Speed synchronous motor speed in RPM or percent

Voltage synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
when there exists an equipment cable)
Real and Reactive Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current synchronous motor terminal current in Amp
PF synchronous motor load power factor when either apparent power or current display selected
Syn. Motors, LV
Relative Power Angle synchronous motor power (rotor) angle in degree or radian
Speed synchronous motor speed in RPM or percent
Voltage synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
Real and Reactive Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power synchronous motor electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Ind. Machines, MV
Speed induction machine speed in RPM or percent slip

Voltage induction machine terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
Real and Reactive Power induction machine electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power induction machine electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current induction machine terminal current in Amp
Ind. Machines, LV
Speed induction machine speed in RPM or percent slip

Voltage induction machine terminal voltage in kV or percent of bus nominal kV (displayed only
Real and Reactive Power induction machine electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power induction machine electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
MOV
Real and Reactive Power MOV electrical power loading in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar
Apparent Power MOV electrical power loading in kVA or MVA
Current MOV terminal current in Amp
Branches


Lumped Load
The units for the displayed results are defined in the Results Page of the Transient Stability Display
Options.
The following is a sample of a one-line diagram display from the Transient Stability Study.

Transient Stability Analysis Plots
22.8 Plots
ETAP also provides simulation plots for you to examine transient stability calculation results in a graphic
form. To view the plots, click on the Transient Stability Plots button on the Transient Stability toolbar. It
will bring up a dialog box for the Transient Stability Plot Selection, as shown below, from which you can
specify the devices and types of plots to view.
Device Type
Select a device type for plotting.
Device ID
From this list, select the devices (up to 16 devices at a time) to be plotted. This list contains the devices
that have been selected for plots from the Study Case Editors.
Plot Type
Check Plot Type(s) for plot. Different device types have different plot types.

Syn. Generators
Power Angle (Relative) synchronous generator power (rotor) angle with respect to the reference
machine in degree equals the generators absolute power (rotor) angle subtracting the reference
machines absolute power (rotor) angle; the relative power (rotor) angle is the indicator of the
generator stability
Power Angle (Absolute) synchronous generator absolute power (rotor) angle is solved from the
generator swing equation in degree
Speed synchronous generator speed in RPM
MW mechanical synchronous generator shaft mechanical power generation in MW
MW synchronous generator electrical power generation in MW
Mvar synchronous generator reactive power in Mvar
Current synchronous generator terminal current in Amp
Efd synchronous generator field voltage in per unit
Ifd synchronous generator field current in per unit
Machine Z synchronous generator terminal impedance in % on machine base
Syn. Motors, MV (medium voltage motors)
Power Angle (Relative) synchronous motor power (rotor) angle with respect to the reference
machine in degree equals the motors absolute power (rotor) angle subtracting the reference
machines absolute power (rotor) angle; the relative power (rotor) angle is the indicator of the motor
stability
Power Angle (Absolute) synchronous motor absolute power (rotor) angle is solved from the motor
swing equation in degree
Speed synchronous motor speed in RPM
MW mechanical synchronous motor mechanical power in MW
MW synchronous motor electrical power in MW
Mvar synchronous motor reactive power in Mvar
Vbus synchronous motor connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z synchronous motor terminal impedance in % on machine base
Syn. Motors, LV (low voltage motors)
Power Angle (Relative) synchronous motor power (rotor) angle with respect to the reference
machine in degree equals the motors absolute power (rotor) angle subtracting the reference
machines absolute power (rotor) angle; the relative power (rotor) angle is the indicator of the motor
stability
Power Angle (Absolute) synchronous motor absolute power (rotor) angle is solved from the motor
swing equation in degree
Speed synchronous motor speed in RPM
MW mechanical synchronous motor mechanical power in MW
MW synchronous motor electrical power in MW
Mvar synchronous motor reactive power in Mvar
Vbus synchronous motor connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal synchronous motor terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z synchronous motor terminal impedance in % on machine base
Ind. Machine, MV (medium voltage machines)
Slip induction machine slip in %

Accel Torque induction machine acceleration power in MW
MWm induction machine mechanical power in MW
MWe induction machine electrical power in MW
Mvar induction machine reactive power in Mvar
Vbus induction machine connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal induction machine terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z induction machine terminal impedance in % on machine base
Ind. Machine, LV (low voltage machines)
Slip induction machine slip in %

Accel Torque induction machine acceleration power in MW
MWm induction machine mechanical power in MW
MWe induction machine electrical power in MW
Mvar induction machine reactive power in Mvar
Vbus induction machine connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal induction machine terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Machine Z induction machine terminal impedance in % on machine base
Buses
Voltage Angle bus voltage angle in degree

Frequency bus frequency in % of system frequency
MW bus real power loading in MW
Mvar bus reactive power loading in Mvar
Voltage/Hz bus voltage per Hz in % of bus nominal volt/system frequency in Hz
Voltage bus voltage magnitude in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
MOVs
kvar MOV reactive power loading in kvar

kW MOV electrical power loading in kW
Current MOV current in Amp
Vbus MOV connected bus voltage in kV or % of the bus nominal kV
Vterminal MOV terminal voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Branches
MW (From) - Branch real power flow on From side in MW

Mvar (From) - Branch reactive power flow on From side in Mvar
I (From) - Branch current flow on From side in Amp
MVA (From) - Branch apparent power flow on From side in MVA
MW (To) - Branch real power flow on To side in MW
Mvar (To) - Branch reactive power flow on To side in Mvar

I (To) - Branch current flow on To side in Amp

MVA (To) - Branch apparent power flow on To side in MVA
Lumped Load
MW Lumped load electrical power loading in MW

Mvar Lumped load reactive power loading in Mvar
Current Lumped load current in Amp
Voltage Lumped load connected bus voltage in kV or % of bus nominal kV
Wind Turbine
MW Wind Turbine machine electrical power in MW

Mvar Wind Turbine output reactive power in Mvar
Current Wind Turbine output current
Vterminal Wind Turbine Terminal Voltage
Speed Wind Turbine Speed in RPM
Wind Speed Wind speed in meters / Second
MW Mechanical Wind Turbine machine mechanical power in MW
Pitch Angle Rotor Blade Pitch Angle in degree
Note: Terminal voltages are also displayed on the one-line diagram for synchronous motors and induction
machines.
The following is a set of sample plots from the Transient Stability Study for synchronous motors:

Time Base
Select an option for the plot base in seconds or cycles.
Voltage Plots
Select an option for the voltage plot unit in kV or % of the bus nominal kV.

Plot the Difference between 2 Selected Devices

This section will be activated only when there are two buses are selected.
Active Diff.
Check this box to plot the difference for all potable curves between the selected two buses.
Pressing this button will toggle positions of the two buses in calculating the difference.
Plot Segment
A segment of plots can be selected by defining T begin and T end. Combination of several plots is also
available.
T begin
Enter the beginning of the time in second for a new plot. This value has to be greater or equal to 0. sec.

T end
Enter the ending of the time in second for a new plot. This value has to be less or equal to the total
simulation time.
Combine Plots
Curves for the selected item will be plotted on the same graph. Multiple scales will be used.

Transient Stability Analysis Action List
22.9 Action List

Clicking on the Toggle Action List button on the Time-Slider will turn it into the Action List as
shown below.
This list shows all actions that are taken in the study, including those defined form the Study Case Editor,
Events page and those initiated by relays actions. Invalid actions, for example, an operation to a de-
energized device, are also listed in this list with a special action type of Invalid action.
Using two pairs of arrow buttons on the list will guide you through the entire action list. Next and
Previous Transient Stability Action arrow buttons moves the pointer to the time for the next or previous
action. Forward and Backward arrow buttons advances the pointer one plot time step in the forward
direction or the backward direction. The list will display all actions that are taken up to the time where
the pointer is at.
Note: The one-line diagram will also change the display of study results dynamically corresponding to the
changes of the pointer, including the bus, machine and branch displays, as well as the protective device
status and the system continuity check results. Thus a sequence of operation display is truly available for
ETAP Transient Stability results from the Action List.

Chapter 23
Generator Start-Up
ETAP Generator Start-Up Analysis is a special feature of the ETAP Transient Stability Program. This
type of analysis is particularly necessary for nuclear generation plants and for special conditions when the
connection to a power grid is lost and recovery of the power supply to some critical loads is mandatory.
In these cases, a cold stand-by generator is started up as an emergency condition and progresses through
acceleration and load acceptance stages, before finally reaching steady state condition.
Generator frequency and motor kW power results from the ETAP Generator Start-Up Program compared
against field measurement data for an actual system are shown below.

Generator Start-Up Overview
The generator start-up analysis is a very distinctive study for several reasons. First, at the time the
generator receives the emergency starting signal and is ready to start, its in a zero speed/zero voltage
state. There is no voltage on the generator terminal to feed the excitation system, thus an alternative
source has to be used. This alternative source usually stays online until the generator terminal voltage has
built up to a high enough level to support the excitation system. At this point, the alternative source is
withdrawn and the excitation source is switched to the generator terminal voltage. Second, the generator
parameters are not constant during the starting process; rather, they change significantly with the
generator speed. This fact must be considered and the generator parameters have to be re-calculated from
the generator instantaneous speed. Furthermore, the saturation effect also needs to be accounted for in
adjusting the generator parameters. Third, once the generator has reached the designated speed (or
frequency) and/or terminal voltage, the emergency loads are switched on. A frequency and/or voltage
controlled action is required to close the system circuit breakers. These actions are usually initiated by
frequency relays and voltage relays. Fourth, when the emergency system is energized, motors in the
emergency system are started at that point.
Note: At this time, system frequency and voltage are still under their nominal values, which mean a
special modeling technique must be developed to handle the motor starting at under frequency and under
voltage conditions. Finally, all system impedances must be adjusted according to system instantaneous
frequency.
The generator start-up analysis can simulate the entire process of a synchronous generator during start-up,
from the cold stand-by mode to the full operation mode. The synchronous generator and all of its
associated controls, including turbine/engine and governor system, excitation/AVR system, and other
associated controls, are modeled in a very detailed and extensive way, including both frequency
dependency and saturation correction. The Event and Action editors in the Transient Stability Study Case
Editor, along with Frequency and Voltage Relays, allow you to start the generator and operate circuit
breakers exactly the same as in a real system. Induction motors are dynamically modeled with frequency
dependent models to allow acceleration at under frequency and under voltage conditions. Other system
components are also correctly and accurately modeled.
Key features of the ETAP Generator Start-Up Analysis include:
Accurate Synchronous Generator Model with Completely Frequency Dependent Parameters

Synchronous Generator Parameter Correction Due to Saturation Effect
Initial Field Flashing Circuit & Switching Time
Sophisticated Turbine Model to Include Special Dynamics During the Generator Start-Up
Detailed & User-Programmable Speed Governor System Control
System Switching Actions Controlled by Relay Actions
Variety of Relay Settings (Volt, Hz, V/Hz, dHz/dt)
Frequency Dependent Network Impedance Model
Frequency Dependent Induction Machine Model
Induction Motor Starting at Under Voltage & Under Frequency Conditions
Full Text Report of Study Results for Viewing and Printing
One-Line Display of Study Results with Time Slider to Recapture the System Dynamic Responses
Graphic Plots of Study Results for Viewing & Printing

Generator Start-Up Study Case Editor

The Generator Start-Up Analysis is part of the ETAP Transient Stability Program. To run a generator
start-up analysis, you need to be in Transient Stability Mode. The functions of all buttons on the
Transient Stability toolbar and the Study Case toolbar remain the same just as if you were performing a
Transient Stability Study. Here is a list of the additional settings that are required to run a generator start-
up analysis. These settings are made within the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.
Time Step
Because of the complexity involved in a generator start-up analysis, many differential equations need to
be solved. To ensure the accuracy of the solution, it is recommended that you use a smaller value for
simulation time step, for example, 0.0003 second. Consequently, a relatively large value can be used for
the plot time step, say 100.

Generator Start-Up Study Case Editor
Event & Action

When performing a generator start-up analysis, it is very import to remember that starting the generator
should be the first action to take place. The generator start action is specified in the Transient Stability
Study Case Editor, as shown below. You need to create a time event and add one action with the Device
Type specified as Generator and the Action type as Start.
Dynamic Model
The generator start-up analysis requires that all system components be modeled with frequency
dependency. You can ensure this by putting a check in the Frequency Dependent Models for Network,
Motors, & Generators box in the Dyn Model page of the Transient Stability Study Case Editor.

Generator Start-Up Calculation Methods

The major difference between the regular Transient Stability Study and a generator start-up analysis is
that in the latter case, the system frequency undergoes a drastic change from 0 Hz to an overshoot
(normally 20 to 30 percent of the nominal frequency,) and finally settles down at the nominal value. This
situation requires all power system components, especially rotating machines, be modeled correctly to
account for the frequency changes. The impedance of other components should also be able to be
adjusted to the true instantaneous system frequency. The ETAP Generator Start-Up Analysis can make
all these adjustments spontaneously if the correct models are selected. This section describes what you
need to do to select the right models for different components and how those components are being
modeled.
Starting Generator
To perform a generator start-up analysis, the following synchronous generator model needs to be selected.
This model is adapted from the latest IEEE Standard 1110 IEEE Guide for Synchronous Generator
Modeling Practices in Stability Analyses. It has one damping winding on each of the direct and
quadratic axis.

The equivalent circuit for this model is illustrated below.
q
Ra - + Ll Lfd - Lad
id
Ld Lfd
Lad
Vd
Rfd
+
Rd
Vfd
-
Direct-Axis Equivalent Circuit
Ra +
d - Ll
iq
Lq
Laq
Vq
Rq
Quadrature-Axis Equivalent Circuit

Turbine Governor Models

Practically any type of turbine-governor model in ETAP can be used in the generator start-up study,
provided there are no other special control functions required. For example, a hydro turbine and speed
governor model is shown in the example below. It includes water tunnel and penstock dynamics and a
very complex gate opening control scheme.

Exciter/AVR Models
The exciter/AVR system requires special controls in the Generator Start-Up Study. For example,
exciter/AVR model ST1D is shown below and can be used for the Generator Start-Up Analysis. This
model includes a special field flashing circuit to supply the initial DC excitation voltage to the generator
field winding. A voltage per Hz relay is also included to switch the excitation source from the initial DC
source to the normal source once the generator has built up enough voltage.

Induction Machine Model

Induction machines, which are accelerated during the generator start-up process, should be modeled by
their frequency dependent circuit models. ETAP automatically uses the frequency dependent circuit
models that are selected from the Motor CKT Model Library Quick Pick Editor inside the Induction
Machine Editor. All four types of induction machine circuit models, namely Single1, Single2, DBL1, and
DBL2, can be used as the frequency dependent models for a Generator Start-Up Analysis.
Synchronous Motor Models

Accelerating synchronous motors in the system are modeled with their LR models just like induction
machines with frequency dependent circuit models, since they behave like induction motors during start-
up.

Other Components
Other system components such as transforms, lines, and cables are modeled identically to Transient
Stability Studies except that the program will adjust their impedance according to the system
instantaneous frequency.

Generator Start-Up Output Reports
23.3 Output Reports

Three types of outputs are available for a Generator Start-Up Analysis. They include Crystal Reports,
one-line display, and plots. Please refer to the Transient Stability chapter for more information on how to
access and manage the Output Reports.
Crystal Report
The Crystal Report for the generator start-up analysis is the same format as the Transient Stability
Analysis.
One-Line Display
The one-line display for the generator start-up analysis is the same format as the Transient Stability
Analysis.
Plots
The plots for the generator start-up analysis are the same format as the Transient Stability Analysis.
Representative sample plots from a Generator Start-Up Analysis are shown here.

Chapter 24
Dynamic Models
Motor dynamic models are required for dynamic motor starting, transient stability, and generator starting
studies. Generator dynamic models and the associated control units (exciters, governors, and Power
System Stabilizer [PSS]) are only needed for Transient Stability Studies. In addition, load torque
characteristics for different types of models are required for both motor starting and Transient Stability
Studies. Wind turbine generator dynamic models and the associated controls are required to do dynamic
simulation studies involving the wind turbine generators. Lumped load dynamic models are needed if the
dynamics for a lumped load in a study is desired. ETAP provides a variety of induction and synchronous
machine models, wind turbine generator models, lumped load dynamic models, plus extensive libraries
for exciters, governors, and PSS for you to select from to perform your studies.
When performing dynamic Motor Acceleration Studies using the Motor Starting Module, only the motors
that are accelerated must have a dynamic model, i.e., generators, exciters, and governors are not
dynamically modeled. For transient stability studies, all generators, exciters, and governors are
dynamically modeled. Motors, which have dynamic models and are designated to be dynamically
modeled from the Study Case, will be dynamically modeled. For generator starting and frequency
dependent Transient Stability Studies, all generators, exciters, governors, and motors have to use
frequency dependent models.
This chapter describes the different types of machine models, machine control unit models, load models,
and explains their applications in motor starting and Transient Stability Studies. It also describes tools
that assist you in selecting those models and specifying model parameters.
The induction machine models section describes five different types of induction machine models and the
frequency dependent forms of these models. These are Circuit Models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, and
DBL2) and Characteristic Curve Models, Descriptions of five different types of synchronous machine
models and the frequency dependent forms of these models are provided in the synchronous machine
models section. These consist of an Equivalent Model, Transient Model for round-rotor machines,
Subtransient Model for round-rotor machines, Transient Model for salient-pole machines, and
Subtransient Model for salient-pole machines. Motor starting and Transient Stability Studies also require
the utility tie system to be modeled as an equivalent machine. A description of the modeling of power
grid systems is found in the section Power Grid. Different types of exciter and automatic voltage regulator
(AVR) models, including standard IEEE models and vendor special models, are defined in the Exciter

and AVR Models section. Governor-turbine models that are also based on both IEEE standards and
vendors product manuals are listed in the Governor-turbine Models section. PSS models that are also
based on both IEEE Standards and vendors product manuals are listed in the PSS Models section.
Finally, the types of load models are described in the Mechanical Load section. Dynamics of lumped load
is described in the Dynamic Lumped Motor Load Model section. Please contact OTI for wind turbine
generator models.

Dynamic Models Induction Machine
24.1 Induction Machine

ETAP provides six different types of induction machine models, which cover all commonly, used
induction machine designs. These models consist of:
Single1 CKT Model

Single2 CKT Model
DBL1 CKT Model
DBL2 CKT Model
Characteristic Curve Model
In general, Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2 are referred to as CKT (circuit) models, because they all
use equivalent circuits to represent an induction machine stator and rotor windings. These models can be
used for both dynamic motor starting and transient stability studies. Characteristic models use machine
performance curves specified at some discrete points to represent an induction machine. This model can
be used for dynamic motor starting studies, but is not suitable for Transient Stability Studies.
Note: The models described in this section are also employed by synchronous motors for Motor Starting
Studies since, during starting, synchronous motors behave similar to induction motors. This modeling
procedure is an accepted method according to current industry standards.
Notations and Symbols

The following notations are used in defining various parameters for induction machine models:
Rs = Stator resistance
Xs = Stator reactance
Xm = Magnetizing reactance
Rr = Rotor resistance
Xr = Rotor reactance
Xlr = Locked-rotor reactance ( = Xs + XmXr/(Xm + Xr) )
Xoc = Open-circuit reactance ( = Xs + Xm )
Tdo = Rotor open-circuit time constant ( = (Xm + Xr)/(2fRr) )
X/R = Machine X/R ratio
These additional notations are used in the machine electrical and mechanical equations:
E = Machine internal voltage

It = Machine terminal current
s = Machine synchronous speed
m = Machine mechanical speed
s = Machine slip ( = (s - m)/s )
f = Synchronous frequency
H = Machine shaft inertia
D = Damping factor (this value is negligible)
Pm = Mechanical output power
Pe = Electrical input power

24.1.1 Single1 Model

This is the least complex model for a single-cage induction machine, with no deep-bars. It is essentially
using a Thevenin equivalent circuit to represent the machine. The rotor circuit resistance and reactance
are assumed constants; but the internal voltage will change depending on the machine speed.
Parameters for this model are:

E Machine internal voltage
X Transient reactance ( = Xlr = Xs + XmXr/(Xm + Xr))
Xoc Open-circuit reactance ( = Xs + Xm )
Tdo Rotor open-circuit time constant ( = (Xm + Xr)/(2fRr) )
X/R Machine X/R ratio ( = X/R)
Note: The X/R value is obtained from the library and is not the same X/R used for short-circuit
calculations.

24.1.2 Single2 Model

This is the standard model for induction machines, representing the magnetizing branch, stator, and rotor
circuits, and accounts for the deep-bar effect. The rotor resistance and reactance linearly change with the
machine speed.
Rs Stator resistance
Xs Stator reactance
Xm Magnetizing reactance
Rrfl Rotor resistance at full load
Rrlr Rotor resistance at locked-rotor
Xrfl Rotor reactance at full load

Xrlr Rotor reactance at locked-rotor
The actual rotor resistance and reactance are calculated based on the full load and locked-rotor values and
machine operating slip. The relationships of rotor impedance with slip are shown below:

24.1.3 DBL1 Model

This CKT model represents double-cage induction machines with integrated bars. The rotor resistance
and reactance of each cage are constant for all machine speeds; however, the equivalent impedance of the
two rotor circuits becomes a non-linear function of the machine speed.
Xs Stator reactance
Rr1 Rotor resistance for the first rotor circuit
Rr2 Rotor resistance for the second rotor circuit
Xr1 Rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit
Xr2 Rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit

24.1.4 DBL2 Model

This is another representation of double-cage induction machines with independent rotor bars. Just as in
the DBL1 model, the rotor resistance and reactance of each cage are constant for all machine speeds, and
the equivalent impedance of the two rotor circuits is a non-linear function of the machine speed. The
DBL2 model has a different characteristic than the DBL1 model.

Xs Stator reactance
Xr1 Rotor reactance for the first rotor circuit
Xr2 Rotor reactance for the second rotor circuit

24.1.5 Characteristic Curve Model

This model provides the capability to model induction machines directly based on machine performance
curves provided by the manufacturer. Although only a discrete set of points is required to specify each
curve, ETAP uses advanced curve fitting techniques to generate continuous curves for calculation
purposes.
Curves specified in this model include:
Torque vs. Slip

Current (I) vs. Slip
Power Factor (PF) vs. Slip
Note: This model is only used for Motor Starting Studies. For Transient Stability Studies you can use the
Machine Parameter Estimation Program to convert this model into one of the CKT models.

24.1.6 Frequency Dependent Model

The frequency dependent models of induction machines are used in Transient Stability Studies. ETAP
provides the frequency dependent forms for the four types of circuit models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, and
DBL2). In these models, the stator and rotor reactance and slip of machine are functions of system
frequency. The following is the equivalent circuit for a double-cage induction machine model with
independent rotor bars (DBL2).
Rs sLs
is
sLr1 sLr2
Vs sLm
Rr1/s Rr2/s
The parameters for this model are:
Ls Stator inductance
Lm Magnetizing inductance
Lr1 Rotor inductance for the first rotor circuit
Lr2 Rotor inductance for the second rotor circuit
s System speed
s Motor slip
The data interface and library for the frequency dependent forms of the four types of induction machine
models (Single1, Single2, DBL1, and DBL2) are the same as the corresponding regular induction
machine models. ETAP internally converts the reactance in machine interface to inductance.
The model also can be expressed as the following equivalent circuit in terms of transient inductance and
transient internal electromagnetic-force.
Rs sL
is
sE
Vs
The parameters in this circuit are:
Ls Transient inductance
E Transient internal electromagnetic-force

24.1.7 Shaft Torsion Model

If the torsion effect is included for the multiple mass shaft of machine, a shaft torsion model is used in
ETAP. The shaft model can be represented in a general form as follows:
Coupling Gear Swing Equation:
d C
2H C = D1 ( C M ) K 1 ( 2 1 ) D2 ( C L ) K 2 ( 2 3 )
dt
Load Swing Equation:
d L
2H L = TL D2 ( L C ) K 2 ( 3 2 )
dt
Parameters for the induction machine shaft model are:
M Motor speed
C Coupling gear speed
L Load speed
1 Motor angle displacement
2 Coupling gear angle displacement
3 Load angle displacement
HC Inertia constant of coupling gear
HL Inertia constant of load
D1 Damping coefficient between motor and coupling gear
D2 Damping coefficient between coupling gear and load
K1 Spring coefficient between motor and coupling gear
K2 Spring coefficient between coupling gear and load
TL Load torque

Dynamic Models Synchronous Machine
24.2 Synchronous Machine

ETAP provides five different types of synchronous machine models to choose from for Transient
Stability Studies and frequency dependent models for generator starting and frequency dependent
Transient Stability Studies. The complexity of these models ranges from the simple Equivalent Model to
a model that includes the machine saliency, damper winding, and variable field voltage. These models
are:
Equivalent Model
Transient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
Transient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
Subtransient Model for Round-Rotor Machine
Subtransient Model for Salient-Pole Machine
Synchronous generators and synchronous motors share the same models. In the following discussion, the
generator case is taken as an example.
Notations and Symbols

The following notations are used for defining various parameters for synchronous machine models:
Xd = Direct-axis subtransient synchronous reactance

Xd = Direct-axis transient synchronous reactance
Xd = Direct-axis synchronous reactance
Xq = Quadrature-axis subtransient synchronous reactance
Xq = Quadrature-axis synchronous reactance
Xq = Quadrature-axis transient synchronous reactance
Xl = Armature leakage reactance
Ra = Armature resistance
X/R = Machine X/R ration (= Xd/Ra)
Tdo = Direct-axis subtransient open-circuit time constant
Tdo = Direct-axis transient open-circuit time constant
Tqo = Quadrature -axis subtransient open-circuit time constant
Tqo = Quadrature -axis transient open-circuit time constant
S100 = Saturation factor corresponding to 100 percent terminal voltage
S120 = Saturation factor corresponding to 120 percent terminal voltage
H = Total inertia of the shaft
D = Shaft damping factor

General Concept of Modeling Synchronous Machines

A synchronous machine is, in general, modeled by an equivalent internal voltage source and its equivalent
resistance and reactance. The equivalent internal voltage source is connected to the machine internal bus
behind the equivalent resistance and reactance, as shown in the diagram.
Depending on the structure (round-rotor or salient-pole) and design (with or without damper windings),
the equivalent internal voltage and equivalent impedance are calculated differently. These differences are
reflected in differential equations describing different types of synchronous machine models.
Parks transformation is adopted and the following notations and symbols are employed in the differential
equations for synchronous machine models:
Efd = Term representing the field voltage acting along the quadrature-axis. It is
calculated from the machine excitation system
f() = Function to account machine saturation effect
Eq = Quadrature-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine
subtransient reactance
Ed = Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine subtransient
reactance
transient reactance
Ed = Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine transient
reactance
reactance
Ed = Direct-axis component of the voltage behind the equivalent machine reactance
Ei = Voltage proportional to field current
It = Machine terminal current
Id = Direct-axis component of machine terminal current
Iq = Quadrature-axis component of machine terminal current

Saturation
The synchronous machine saturation effect needs to be considered in the modeling. This effect is
represented by two parameters S100 and S120, as defined in the following figure and equations:
I f 100
S100 =
If
I f 120
S120 =
1.2 I f
where
If100 = Field current corresponding to 100% terminal voltage on the open-circuit saturation
curve
If120 = Field current corresponding to 120% terminal voltage on the open-circuit saturation
curve
For Generator Starting Studies, another factor, Sbreak, is required to correct machine inductance as shown
in the above generator saturation curve. The factor Sbreak is defined as %Vt at the saturation break point.

24.2.1 Equivalent Model

The screen below shows the equivalent model, its parameters, and the typical data.
This model uses an internal voltage source behind the armature resistance and quadrature-axis reactance
to model a synchronous machine. The voltage source is proportional to the machine field flux linkages.
The model includes the effect of variable field voltage and the effect of saliency in the case of salient-pole
machines.
For this model, Req and Xeq are defined as:
Req = Ra
Xeq = Xq
Differential equations to describe this model are:


24.2.2 Transient Model for Round-Rotor Machine

The screen below shows the transient model for a round-rotor machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model uses an internal voltage source behind a fictitious impedance Rh + jXh. Rh and reactance Xh
that are used to replace Req and Xeq to achieve a faster calculation convergence, i.e.:
Req= Rh
Xeq= Xh
where
Ra 2 + X 'd X 'q
R h + jX h =
Ra - j(X 'd X 'q ) / 2

This model is more comprehensive than the equivalent model because it includes flux changes on the Q-
axis. The following differential equations are involved to describe this model:

24.2.3 Subtransient Model for Round-Rotor Machine

The screen below shows the subtransient model for a round-rotor machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model also consists of an equivalent internal voltage source and a fictitious impedance Rh + jXh. This
model is a more comprehensive representation of general type synchronous machines. In addition to the
machines transient parameters, the subtransient parameters are included to model the machines
subtransient characteristics. This model is particularly useful for machines with damper windings.
The models differential equations are shown below:


24.2.4 Transient Model for Salient-Pole Machine

The screen below shows the transient model for a salient-pole machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model is IEEE 2.1 model as defined in IEEE Std. 1110-2002, IEEE Guide for Synchronous
Generator Modeling Practices and Applications in Power System Stability Analyses, with the damper
winding in the Q-Axis ignored.

The model circuit diagrams are shown below:

q
Ra Xl Xf1d - Xad
id
X1d Xfd
Vd Xad
Rfd
R1d
Vfd
D-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Transient Model
d
Ra Xl
iq
X1q
Xaq
Vq
R1q
Q-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Transient Model
Model circuit parameters are:
Xl Stator leakage reactance
Xad Direct-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Xaq Quadrature-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Xf1d Field to direct-axis rotor mutual reactance
X1d Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R1d Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Xffd Field leakage reactance
Rfd Field resistance
X1q Qaudrature-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R1q Qaudrature-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Vfd Field voltage
d Direct-axis flux linkages
q Quadrature-axis flux linkages

24.2.5 Subtransient Model for Salient-Pole Machine

The screen below shows the subtransient model for a salient-pole machine, its parameters, and the typical
data.
This model is IEEE 2.2 model as defined in IEEE Std. 1110-2002, IEEE Guide for Synchronous
Generator Modeling Practices and Applications in Power System Stability Analyses, with one damper
winding in the Q-Axis ignored.

The model circuit diagrams are shown below:
q
Ra Xl Xf1d - Xad
id
X1d Xfd
Vd Xad
Rfd
R1d
Vfd
D-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Subtransient Model
d
Ra Xl
iq
X1q X2q
Xaq
Vq
R1q R2q
Q-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Subtransient Model
Model circuit parameters are:
Xl Stator leakage reactance
Xad Direct-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Xaq Quadrature-axis stator to rotor mutual reactance
Xf1d Field to direct-axis rotor mutual reactance
X1d Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R1d Direct-axis rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Xffd Field leakage reactance
X1q Qaudrature-axis first rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R1q Qaudrature-axis first rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
X2q Qaudrature-axis second rotor damper circuit equivalent leakage reactance
R2q Qaudrature-axis second rotor damper circuit equivalent resistance
Vfd Field voltage



24.2.6 Frequency Dependent Model

A subtransient synchronous machine model with frequency dependency in ETAP is developed based on a
standard IEEE 2.1 synchronous generator model. An equivalent circuit diagram of the model is shown
here:
sq
Ra - + Ll Lf1d - Lad
id
L1d Lffd
Lad
Vd
Rfd
+
R1d
Vfd
-
D-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Frequency Dependent Model
Ra sd
+ - Ll
iq
L1q
Laq
Vq
R1q
Q-Axis Equivalent Circuit for Frequency Dependent Model
Parameters in the circuits are:
Ll Stator leakage inductance
Lad Direct-axis stator to rotor mutual inductance
Laq Quadrature-axis stator to rotor mutual inductance
Lf1d Field to direct-axis rotor mutual inductance
L1d Direct-axis rotor equivalent leakage inductance

R1d Direct-axis rotor equivalent resistance

Lffd Field leakage inductance
L1q Qaudrature-axis rotor equivalent leakage inductance
R1q Qaudrature-axis rotor equivalent resistance
Vfd Field voltage
s System speed
The data interface for the frequency dependent subtransient synchronous machine model is the same as
the regular subtransient model with a salient-pole. ETAP internally calculates the required parameters for
the frequency dependent model from the data in generator interface.

24.2.7 Shaft Torsion Model

If the torsion effect is included for the multiple mass shaft of machine, a shaft torsion model is used in
ETAP. The shaft model can be represented in a general form as follows:
Synchronous Generator
Turbine Swing Equation:
d T
2H T = TT D1 (T C ) K 1 (1 2 )
dt
Coupling Gear Swing Equation:
d C
2H C = D1 ( C G ) K 1 ( 2 3 ) D2 ( C G ) K 2 ( 2 3 )
dt
Generator Swing Equation:
d G
2H G = TG D ( G Re f ) D2 ( G C ) K 2 ( 3 2 )
dt
Synchronous Motor

Motor Swing Equation:
d M
2H M = TM D ( M Re f ) D1 ( M C ) K 1 (1 2 )
dt
Gear Swing Equation:
d C
2H C = D1 ( C M ) K 1 ( 2 1 ) D2 ( C L ) K 2 ( 2 3 )
dt
Load Swing Equation:
d L
2H L = TL D2 ( L C ) K 2 ( 3 2 )
dt
Parameters for the induction machine shaft model are:
G Generator speed
Ref Reference machine speed
M Motor speed
C Coupling gear speed
T Turbine speed
L Load speed
1 Motor angle displacement
2 Coupling gear angle displacement
3 Load angle displacement
HG Inertia constant of Generator
HM Inertia constant of motor
HC Inertia constant of coupling gear
HL Inertia constant of load
D Damping coefficient of generator
D1 Damping coefficient between turbine (motor) and coupling gear
D2 Damping coefficient between coupling gear and generator (load)
K1 Spring coefficient between turbine (motor) and coupling gear
K2 Spring coefficient between coupling gear and generator (load)
TG generator torque
TM Motor torque
TL Load torque

Dynamic Models Excitation System
24.3 Power Grid

A power grid (utility system) must be modeled with an equivalent machine for Motor Starting and
Transient Stability Studies. This is due to the fact that a power grid is generally considered as an
interfacing point to the power grid whose voltage and frequency is supported by a larger system and
therefore unlikely to change. It is valid to assume this equivalent machine has a constant internal voltage
source and an infinite inertia. Thus the power grid is modeled in ETAP with the following Thevenin
equivalent:
where Ei is calculated from the initial terminal bus voltage and Req and Xeq are from positive sequence R
and X of the Power Grid Editor, as shown below:

24.4 Excitation System

To accurately account for dynamics from exciter and AVR systems in power system transient responses,
complete modeling of these systems is usually necessary.
ETAP provides the following exciter and AVR models:
IEEE Type 1 IEEE Type AC3

IEEE Type 2 IEEE Type AC4
IEEE Type 3 IEEE Type AC5A
IEEE Type 1S Basler SR8F & SR125A
IEEE Type DC1 HPC 840
IEEE Type DC2 JEUMONT Industrie
IEEE Type DC3 IEEE Type ST1D
IEEE Type ST1 IEEE Type AC8B
IEEE Type ST2 IEEE Type AC1A
IEEE Type ST3 IEEE Type ST4B
IEEE Type AC1 User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
IEEE Type AC2
For IEEE type exciter and AVR systems, the equivalent transfer functions and their parameter names are
in accordance with the IEEE recommended types from the following references:
IEEE Committee Report, Computer Representation of Excitation System, IEEE Trans. on PAS,
Vol. PAS-87, No. 6, June 1968, pp 1460-1464.
IEEE Committee Report, Excitation System Models for Power System Stability Studies, IEEE
Trans. on PAS, Vol. PAS-100, No. 2, February 1981, pp 494-509.
IEEE Std. 412.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992.
Excitation System Saturation

The following is a typical block diagram used for exciters:

This diagram shows the output of the AVR is applied to the exciter after a saturation function SE is
subtracted from it. The exciter parameter KE represents the setting of the shunt field rheostat when a self-
excited shunt field is used.
It should be noted that there is a dependency between exciter ceiling Efdmax, AVR ceiling VRmax,
exciter saturation SE and exciter constant KE. These parameters are related by the following equation (the
sign of KE is negative for a self-excited shunt field):
VR ( KE + SE ) Efd = 0 for Efdmin < Efd < Efdmax
At excitation ceiling ( Efd = Efdmax ) the above equation becomes:
VRmax = (KE +SEmax ) - Efdmax
Therefore, it is important that the exciter parameters entered satisfy the above equation, when applicable.
ETAP will check this condition at run time and flag any violations.
The exciter saturation function (SE) represents the increase in exciter excitation due to saturation. It is
defined as:
where the quantities A and B are defined as the exciter field currents which produce the exciter output
voltage on the constant-resistance-load saturation curve and air gap line, respective, as shown in the
exciter saturation curve below
ETAP assumes that SE is specified at the following exciter voltages:
Saturation Factor Exciter Voltage

SEmax Efdmax
SE.75max 0.75Efdmax

IEEE Type (1)
24.4.1 IEEE Type 1
IEEE Type 1 - Continuously Acting Regulator and Exciter (1)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents a continuously acting regulator with a rotating exciter
system. Some vendors' units represented by this model include:
Westinghouse Brushless Systems with TRA, Mag-A-Stat, Silverstat, or Rotoroal Regulator

Allis Chalmers Systems with Regulex Regulator
General Electric Systems with Amplidyne or GDA Regulator
Parameters and Sample Data

Parameters for this model and their sample data are shown in this screen capture of the Exciter page:

IEEE Type (1)
Parameter Definitions and Units

Parameter definitions and their units are provided in the following table:
Parameter Definition Unit

VRmax Maximum value of the regulator output voltage p.u.
VRmin Minimum value of the regulator output voltage p.u.
SEmax The value of excitation function at Efdmax
SE.75 The value of excitation function at 0.75 Efdmax
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage p.u.
KA Regulator gain p.u.
KE Exciter constant for self-excited field p.u.
KF Regulator stabilizing circuit gain p.u.
TA Regulator amplifier time constant Sec.
TE Exciter time constant Sec.
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant Sec.
TR Regulator input filter time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (2)
24.4.2 IEEE Type 2
IEEE Type 2 - Rotating Rectifier System (2)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents a rotating rectifier exciter with static regulator system. Its
characteristics are similar to IEEE Type 1 exciter, except for the feedback-damping loop. This system is
applicable to units where the main input to the damping loop is provided from the regulator output rather
than the exciter output. To compensate for the exciter damping which is not included in the damping loop,
the feedback transfer function contains one additional time-constant.
An example of such a system is the Westinghouse Brushless System, which was in service up to 1966.

Parameters for this model and their sample data are shown in the following screen capture:

IEEE Type (2)


TF1 Regulator stabilizing circuit first time constant Sec.
TF2 Regulator stabilizing circuit second time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (1S)
24.4.3 IEEE Type 3

Ifd (1 A)
A = (0.78X1I fd / Vthev )
2
It
Vthev = KPVt + jKI It
VB = 0 for A > 1.8
Vref
VRmax VBmax
1 + +
- KA 1
Vt
1 + sT R 1 + sT A +

K E + sT E
Efd
-
VRmin 0.0
sK F
1 + sT F
IEEE Type 3 - Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (3)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents static excitation systems with compound terminal voltage
and current feedback. The regulator transfer function for this model is similar to IEEE Type 1. In this
model, the regulator output is combined with a signal, which represents the self-excitation from the
generator terminals.
An example of such a system is the General Electric SCPT System.


IEEE Type (1S)


VBmax The value of excitation function at Efdmax p.u.
KI Current circuit gain coefficient (on system base 100MVA) p.u.
KP Potential circuit gain coefficient
XL Reactance associated with potential source
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit second time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (1S)
24.4.4 IEEE Type 1S
IEEE Type 1S - Controlled Rectifier System with Terminal Voltage (1S)
In this type of exciter and AVR system, excitation is obtained through terminal voltage rectification. In
this model, the maximum regulated voltage (VRmax) is proportional to terminal voltage Vt.


IEEE Type (1S)


Efdmax The value of excitation function at Efdmax p.u.
KF Exciter constant for self-excited field p.u.
KP Regulator stabilizing circuit gain p.u.
TF Regulator stabilizing circuit second time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (DC1)
24.4.5 IEEE Type DC1
IEEE Type DC1 - DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation (DC1)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used to model field-controlled DC-Commutator exciters with
continuous voltage regulators. Examples of this model are:
Allis Chalmers Regulex regulator

General Electric Amplidyne and GDA regulator
Westinghouse Mag-A-Stat, Rototrol, Silverstat, and TRA regulators


IEEE Type (DC1)

TB Voltage regulator time constant Sec.
TC Voltage regulator time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (DC2)
IEEE Type DC2 - DC Commutator Exciter with Continuous Voltage Regulation and Supplies from
Terminal Voltage (DC2)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for field-controlled DC commutator exciters with continuous
voltage regulators supplied from the generator or auxiliarys bus voltage. Its only difference from IEEE
Type DC1 is the regulator output limits, which are now proportional to terminal voltage Vt.


IEEE Type (DC2)


TC Voltage regulator time constant Sec

IEEE Type (DC3)
EEE Type DC3 - DC Commutator Exciter with Non-Continuous Voltage Regulation (DC3)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for the older DC commutator exciters with non-continuously
acting regulators.
Examples of this model are:
General Electric exciter with GFA4 regulator

Westinghouse exciter with BJ30 regulator

IEEE Type (DC3)



KV Fast raise/Lower contact setting p.u.
TRH Rheostat travel time Sec.

IEEE Type (ST1)
24.4.8 IEEE Type ST1
IEEE Type ST1 - Potential-Source Controlled-Rectifier Exciter (ST1)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used to represent potential-source, controlled-rectifier excitation
systems. This model applies to all systems supplied through a transformer from the generator terminals.
Examples of this model include:
Canadian General Electric Silcomatic exciters

Westinghouse Canada Solid State Thyristor exciters
Westinghouse type PS static excitation systems with type WTA or WHS regulators

IEEE Type (ST1)



VImax Maximum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
VImin Minimum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
KC Regulator gain p.u.
TB Voltage Regulator amplifier time constant Sec.
TC Voltage Regulator amplifier time constant Sec.

IEEE Type (ST3)
IEEE Type ST2 - Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (ST2)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for compound source rectifier excitation systems. These
systems use both current and voltage sources.
An example of this model is General Electric static exciter SCT-PPT or SCPT.

IEEE Type (ST3)



KC Regulator gain p.u.
KP Potential circuit gain coefficient p.u.

IEEE Type (ST3)
Ifd I fd IN
IN = K C FEX = f (IN ) FEX
VE
VE = KPVt + j(KI + KP X L )It

It

VE
VRmax
Vref
VImax Efdmax
1 -
+
1 + sTC KA
Vt KJ Efd
1 + sT R 1 + sT B + 1 + sT A
-
VImin
VRmin
VGmax
KG
IEEE Type ST3 - Compound Source-Controlled Rectifier Exciter (ST3)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents compound-source rectifier excitation systems. These
exciters utilize internal quantities within the generator as the source of power.
Examples of this model are:
General Electric GENERREX exciter

Shunt-Thyristor exciter

IEEE Type (ST3)



VGmax Maximum inner loop voltage feedback p.u.
VImax Maximum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
VImin Minimum internal signal within voltage regulator p.u.
KC Rectifier loading factor related to commutating reactance p.u.
KG Inner loop feedback constant p.u.
KJ First stage regulation gain p.u.
KPreal Real part of potential circuit gain coefficient p.u.
KPimg Reactive part of potential circuit gain coefficient p.u.
TB Exciter time constant Sec.
TC Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant Sec.
XL Reactance associated with potential source p.u.

IEEE Type (AC1)
24.4.11 IEEE Type AC1
IEEE Type AC1 - Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System with Non-Controlled Rectifiers and Field
Current Feedback (AC1)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents alternator-rectifier excitation systems with non-
controlled rectifiers and exciter field current feedback. There is no self-excitation and the source of
voltage regulator power is not affected by external transients.
Westinghouse Brushless Excitation Systems fall under this type of exciter model.

IEEE Type (AC1)



KD Demagnetizing factor p.u.

IEEE Type (AC2)
IEEE Type AC2 - High-Initial-Response Alternator-Rectifier Exciter System (AC2)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents high-initial-response, field-controlled alternator-rectifier
excitation systems. The model uses an alternator main exciter and non-controlled rectifiers. It is similar to
IEEE Type AC1 exciter model but has two additional field current feedback loops.
An example of this model is Westinghouse High-Initial-Response Brushless Excitation System.

IEEE Type (AC2)



VAmax Maximum regulator internal voltage p.u.
VAmin Minimum regulator internal voltage p.u.
KB Second stage regulator gain p.u.

IEEE Type (AC2)

KH Exciter field current feedback gain p.u.
KL Gain of exciter field current limit p.u.
TC Regulator stabilizing circuit time constants Sec.
VLR Exciter field current limit reference

IEEE Type (AC3)
IEEE Type AC3 - Field-Controlled Alternator-Rectifier Exciter (AC3)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents field-controlled, alternator-rectifier excitation systems. It
can model systems that derive voltage regulator power from the exciter output voltage and simulate their
non-linearity.
An example of this model is General Electric ALTERREX excitation system using static voltage
regulators.

IEEE Type (AC3)



EFDN Value of Efd at which feedback gain changes p.u.
VAmax Maximum regulator internal voltage p.u.
VAmin Minimum regulator internal voltage p.u.
VLV Exciter low voltage limit reference p.u.
KLV Gain of the exciter low voltage limit signal p.u.

IEEE Type (AC3)

KN Exciter control system stabilizer gain p.u.
KR Constant for regulator and alternator field power supply p.u.

IEEE Type (AC4)
IEEE Type AC4 - High-Initial-Response Alternator-Supplied Controlled Rectifier Exciter (AC4)
This type of exciter and AVR system represents alternator-supplied, controlled-rectifier excitation
systems. A high-initial response excitation system, it has a Thyristor bridge at the output circuit.
General Electric ALTHYREX and Rotating Thyristor excitation systems are examples of this type of
exciter.


IEEE Type (AC4)

VImax The value of excitation function at Efdmax p.u.
VImin The value of excitation function at 0.75 Efdmax p.u.

AC5A
24.4.15 IEEE Type AC5A
IEEE Type AC5A - Simplified Rotating Rectifier Excitation System (AC5A)
This type of exciter and AVR system is a simplified model for brushless excitation systems. The regulator
is supplied from a source, such as a permanent magnet generator, which is not affected by system
disturbances.
This model can be used to represent small excitation systems such as those produced by Basler and
Electric Machinery.


AC5A


TA1 Voltage regulator time constant Sec.
TF1 Exciter control system time constant Sec.

Basler SR8F & SR125A
24.4.16 Basler SR8F & SR125A
Basler SR8F & SR125A Excitation System (SR8F)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used to represent Basler SR8F and SR125A Exciter Systems.

Basler SR8F & SR125A



TF1 Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant Sec.
TF2 Regulator stabilizing circuit time constant (Rot. Rec.) Sec.

HPC 840 (HPC)
24.4.17 HPC 840
HPC 840 Excitation and AVR System (HPC)
This type of exciter and AVR system includes both forward gain and feedback damping loops. There are
three compensation signals that regulate excitation voltages. These signals are terminal voltage
magnitude, real power generation, and reactive power generation.

HPC 840 (HPC)



Amax Regulator internal maximum limit (Amax = VImax * Ka) p.u.
Amin Regulator internal minimum limit (Amin = VImin * Ka) p.u.
Bmax Integrator upper limit (Bmax = LIMmax * Ka) p.u.
Bmin Integrator lower limit (Bmin = LIMmin * Ka) p.u.
C Combined excitation system (C = Kg * kp * Ka) p.u.
D Combined stabilizing feedback gain (D = Kd * Kf/Kp) p.u.
Efdmax Maximum Exciter output voltage p.u.
Kpow Active power compensation factor p.u.
KQ Reactive power compensation factor p.u.
SE .75 Value of excitation saturation function at 0.75 Efdmax
SEmax Value of excitation saturation function at Efdmax

HPC 840 (HPC)
TL Integration time constant Sec.
T4 Excitation system total delay Sec.
TD Stabilizing feedback time constant Sec.
Tdsty Voltage transducer filter time constant Sec.
TP Active power compensation time constant Sec.
TQ Reactive power compensation time constant Sec.
Control Bus Voltage feedback bus ID

JEUMONT Industrie (JEUM)
24.4.18 JEUMONT Industrie
JEUMONT - JEUMONT Industrie (JEUM)
This type of exciter and AVR system consists of a voltage block, a current block, a voltage regulator
block, and an excitation block. It uses a rotating rectifier for the excitation system.




AV1 Gain of voltage control loop
AV2 Constant of voltage control loop Sec.
AV3 Constant of voltage control loop Sec.
AV5 Gain of reference voltage
AV7 Time constant of voltage control loop Sec.
AV11 Parameter of voltage control loop
Ai1 Gain of current control loop


Ai2 Gain of supply voltage to current control loop
Ai7 Time constant of current control loop Sec.
AR1 Gain of regulator
AR2 Regulator reference
KU1 Gain of terminal voltage feedback V
KU2 Gain of regulator
Vres Supply voltage of thy-bridge V
VSUP Supply voltage of current control loop V
Te Time constant of exciter loop Sec.
Ke Gain of exciter loop
SEmax Saturation coefficient at maximum field voltage
SE.75max Saturation coefficient at 0.75 maximum field
voltage
Efdmax Maximum field voltage V
Kae Gain of field current feedback loop
Kif Gain of field current feedback V
Max1 Maximum value 1 of voltage control loop V
Min1 Minimum value 1 of voltage control loop V
Max4 Maximum value 4 of current control loop V
Min4 Minimum value 4 of current control loop V
Control Bus Voltage feedback bus ID

24.4.19 IEEE Type ST1D
IEEE Type ST1D- Static System with Terminal Potential and Current Supplies (ST1D)
This type of exciter and AVR system is used for compound source rectifier excitation systems with volts-
per-hertz limiter. These systems use both current and voltage sources.




RC Resistive part of reactive droop compensation p.u.
XC Inductive part of reactive droop compensation p.u.
TR Transducer time constant Sec.
TC Transient gain reduction lead time constant Sec.
TB Transient gain reduction lag time constant Sec.
KA Amplifier gain p.u.
TA Amplifier time constant Sec.
KF Stabilizing feedback signal gain p.u.
TF Stabilizing feedback signal time constant Sec.
KC Field current gain p.u.
VVLR Set point of V/Hz limiter p.u.
KVL Over-excitation feedback signal gain p.u.
TVL Over-excitation feedback signal time constant Sec.


KVF Stabilizing feedback signal gain p.u.
TH Measurement time constant Sec.
VImax Maximum error limit p.u.
VImin Minimum error limit p.u.
VRmax Maximum regular output p.u.
VRmin Minimum regular output p.u.
Vdc Field flashing battery voltage Volts
Rf Field flashing battery and external circuit resistance Ohms
Vref Voltage reference p.u.
TD Pickup delay time Sec.
VHZ V/Hz pickup value p.u.
Ifb Exciter base current Amps
Vfb Exciter base voltage Volts

IEEE Type (AC8B)
24.4.20 IEEE Type AC8B


IEEE Type (AC8B)


VRmax Maximum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
VRmin Minimum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
SEmax Saturation value of exciter at Efdmax p.u.
SE.75 Saturation value of exciter at 0.75 Efdmax p.u.
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage in pu p.u.
KP Proportional control gain in pu p.u.
KI Integral control gain in pu p.u.
KD Derivative control gain in pu p.u.
KA Regulator gain in pu p.u.
KE Exciter constant for self-excited field in pu p.u.
TD Derivative control time constant in sec Sec.
TA Regulator amplifier time constant in sec Sec.
TE Exciter time constant in sec Sec.

IEEE Type (AC1A)
24.4.21 IEEE Type AC1A
IEEE Type AC1A Exciter (AC1A)

IEEE Type (AC1A)



VAmax Maximum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
VAmin Minimum value of the regulator output voltage in pu p.u.
VRmax Maximum regulator internal voltage in pu p.u.
VRmin Minimum regulator internal voltage in pu p.u.
VUEL Underexcitation limiter in pu p.u.
VOEL Overexcitation limiter in pu p.u.
SEmax Saturation value of exciter at Efdmax in pu p.u.
SE.75 Saturation value of exciter at 0.75 Efdmax in pu p.u.
Efdmax Maximum exciter output voltage in pu p.u.
KA Regulate gain in pu p.u.

IEEE Type (AC1A)

KC Rectifier loading factor in pu p.u.
KD Demagnetizing factor in pu p.u.
KF Regulate stabilizing circuit gain in pu p.u.
KE Exciter gain in pu p.u.
TA Regulator amplifier time constant in sec Sec.
TC Internal signal lead time constant in sec Sec.
TB Internal signal lag time constant in sec Sec.
TE Exciter time constant in sec Sec.
TF Regulate stabilizing time constant in sec Sec.
TR Regulate input filter time in sec Sec.
a1 Rectifier regulation characteristic coefficient in pu p.u.
a2 Rectifier regulation characteristic coefficient in pu p.u.
b1 Rectifier regulation characteristic coefficient in pu p.u.

IEEE Type (ST4B)
24.4.22 IEEE Type ST4B
IEEE ST4B Exciter

IEEE Type (ST4B)



VRmax Maximum AVR output p.u.
VRmin Minimum AVR output p.u.
VMmax Maximum inner loop output p.u.
VMmin Minimum inner loop output p.u.
VBmax Maximum Source Voltage p.u.
VOEL Over excitation limit input p.u.
VUEL Under excitation limit input p.u.
KC Rectifier loading factor p.u.

IEEE Type (ST4B)
KG Field voltage feedback gain p.u.
KI Current source constant (on system base 100MVA) p.u.
KPM Inner loop proportional gain p.u.
KIM Inner loop integral gain p.u.
KPR AVR proportional gain p.u.
KIR AVR integral gain p.u.
KPreal Real part of potential source constant p.u.
KPimg Imaginary part of potential source constant p.u.
TA AVR time constant sec
TR AC sensor time constant sec
XL Source leakage reactance p.u.

User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
24.4.23 User-defined Dynamic Model (UDM)

You can access the UDM models that have been created and saved using the exciter type list.
Details on how to use UDM models are described in User-defined Dynamic Models chapter.

Dynamic Models Governor-Turbine
24.5 Governor-Turbine
Modeling of a governor-turbine system in transient stability studies is essential for simulation time frames
of more than a second.
ETAP provides the following governor-turbine models:
Steam-Turbine (ST)
Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST1)
Tandem-Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)
Tandem-Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)
IEEE General Steam-Turbine (STM)
Gas-Turbine (GT)
Gas-Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
General Purpose (GP)
Diesel-Engine (DT)
Woodward Steam-Turbine 505
Woodward UG-8
Woodward Governor 2301
GE Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTH)
GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTS)
Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set (MARS)
Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)
GHH BROSIG Steam-Turbine Governor (GHH)
Woodward Hydraulic Governor-turbine (HYDR)
IEEE Gas -Turbine (SGT)
PowerLogic Governor-turbine Model A (PL-A)
Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine/Governor (ST60)
Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine/Governor (ST70)
Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-2)
Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-3)
Combustion Turbine and Governor (CT251)
GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers (GGOV3)
For IEEE type governor-turbine systems, the equivalent transfer functions and their parameter names are
in accordance with the IEEE recommended types from the following reference:
IEEE Committee Report, "Dynamic Models for Steam and Hydro Turbines in Power System
Studies", IEEE Transaction on Power Apparatus and System, Vol. PAS-92, No. 6, Nov./Dec. 1973,
pp. 1904-1915.
IEEE Committee Report, "Dynamic Models for Fossil Fueled Steam Units in Power System Studies",
IEEE Transactions on Power Systems, Vol. PS-6, No. 2, May 1991, pp. 753-761.

Steam Turbine (ST)
24.5.1 Steam-Turbine (ST)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple steam-turbine and speed governing system.
ST Governor System Representation (ST)


Steam Turbine (ST)


Mode Droop or Isoch
Droop Steady-state speed droop %
Fhp (Shaft capacity ahead of reheater)/(Total shaft capacity) p.u.
Pmax Maximum shaft power (rated MW) MW
Pmin Minimum shaft power ( > = 0) MW
Tc Governor reset time constant Sec.
Tch Steam chest time constant Sec.
Trh Reheater time constant Sec.
Tsr Speed relay time constant Sec.

24.5.2 Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST1)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a two-stage steam-turbine with a reheat and speed
governing system. It consists of a speed relay, a control amplifier, a steam chest, and a reheater.




Mode Droop or Isoch
Pmax Maximum shaft power MW
Pmin Minimum shaft power MW
Tch Steam time constant Sec.
Tdrp Load sensor time constant Sec.
Tsr Speed relay time constant in second Sec.

Compound Single-Reheat Steam (ST2)
24.5.3 Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a tandem-compound, single-reheat steam-turbine, and
speed governing system. It is a type ST1 model with a block representing crossover piping to the low-
pressure turbines.
Compound Single-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST2)

Compound Single-Reheat Steam (ST2)



Mode Droop or Isoch
Fip Intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Flp Low pressure turbine power fraction p.u
Tco Crossover time constant Sec.
Trh Reheater time constant Sec.

Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)
24.5.4 Compound Double-Reheat Steam-Turbine (ST3)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a tandem-compound, double-reheat steam-turbine, and
speed governing system. It is similar to type ST2 model except for the added block representing reheated
steam between the very-high pressure and high-pressure turbines.




Mode Droop or Isoch
Fip Intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Flp Low pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Fvhp Very high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
Tco Crossover time constant Sec.
Trh1 First reheater time constant Sec.
Trh2 Second reheater time constant Sec.

24.5.5 IEEE General Steam-Turbine (STM)

This type of governor-turbine system represents an IEEE suggested general steam-turbine and speed
governing system. It may be used for modeling the steam systems represented by ST, ST1, ST2, and ST3,
as well as the cross-compound, single-reheat and cross-compound, double-reheat systems.




Mode Droop or Isoch
Droop Steady-state speed droop in second %
DB Speed deadband p.u.
K1 Partial very high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K2 Partial very high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K3 Partial high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K4 Partial high pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K5 Partial intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K6 Partial intermediate pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K7 Partial low pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
K8 Partial low pressure turbine power fraction p.u.
T1 Amplifier/Compensator time constant Sec.


T4 Load sensor (droop) time constant Sec.
T5 Control Amp./current driver time constant Sec.
T6 Actuator time constant Sec.
T7 Engine dead time constant Sec.
UC Limit of value closing
UO Limit of value opening

Gas Turbine (GT)
24.5.6 Gas-Turbine (GT)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple gas-turbine and speed governing system.
Gas-Turbine (GT)


Gas Turbine (GT)


Mode Droop or Isoch
Tt Turbine relay time constant Sec.

Gas Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)
24.5.7 Gas-Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a steam-turbine and speed governing system, with the
inclusion of the fuel system.
Gas-
Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)


Gas Turbine including Fuel System (GTF)


Mode Droop or Isoch
Ff Minimum fuel flow
KD Governor gain
Kf Fuel system feedback gain Kf = 0 or 1
Kr Fuel system transfer function gain
T4 Load sensor (droop) time constant Sec.
T8 Fuel value time constant Sec.
T9 Fuel system lead time constant Sec.
VL Lower incremental power limit p.u.
VU Upper incremental power limit p.u.

24.5.8 General Purpose (GP)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a general-purpose governor-turbine system.



Parameter definitions and their units are given in the following table:

Mode Droop or Isoch
Ta Actuator time constant Sec.
Tdrp Load sensor time constant Sec.
Tt Turbine relay time constant Sec.

Diesel-Engine (DT)
24.5.9 Diesel-Engine (DT)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a simple diesel-engine and speed governing system.
Diesel-Engine (DT)

Diesel-Engine (DT)



Mode Isoch only
T4 Load sensor time constant Sec.
T8 Fuel valve time constant Sec.

Woodward Steam-Turbine 505 (505)
24.5.10 Woodward Steam-Turbine 505

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward 505 and 505E PID governor for
extraction steam-turbine system.
Speed
Ref
-
+
1 + sD1
Speed e 1.5Ts
1 + sT f 1
Speed Ctrl Loop
HP Turbine Shaft
L1
1 1
P1 1 Ratio/ Pm
+ +
Limiter
1 + sT a 1 1 + sT m 1
- +
L2
Dr 1 1
1 + s / I1 Steam
Map
L3
+ Inverse
P2 1 Ratio/ 1 1
+ EF
- + Limiter 1 + sT a 2 1 + sT m 2
L4
LP Extraction Flow
Dr 2 1
1+ s / I2
Extraction Ctrl Loop

- 1 + sD2
Ext Press e 1.5Ts
1 + sT f 2
+
Ext Pres
Ref
Woodward 505 and 505E Steam-Turbine (505)




Mode Droop or Isoch
Droop1 Steady-state speed droop %
Droop2 Extraction loop droop %
Efmax Max. extraction flow T/Hr
ExtFlow Turbine extraction flow %
ExtPress Extraction pressure %
Hpa Min. extraction @ max. power T/Hr
HPb Max. extraction @ min. power T/Hr
HPc Min. extraction @ min. power T/Hr
Hpmax Max. HP flow T/Hr
I1 <D> Speed loop integral (Droop mode) %
I1 <I> Speed loop integral gain in (Isoch mode) %
I2 Extraction loop integral gain %
L1 Up limit for speed loop output %
L2 Low limit for speed loop output %
L3 Up limit for extraction loop output %
L4 Low limit for extraction loop output %


P1 <D> Speed loop proportional gain (Droop mode) %
P1 <I> Speed loop proportional gain (Isoch mode) %
P2 Extraction loop proportional gain %
RampRate Speed reference ramp rate %
Sa Max. power @ min. extraction %/Sec.
Sb Min. power @ max. extraction kW
Sc Min. power @ min. extraction kW
SDR1 Speed loop parameter (Droop mode) %
SDR1 <I> Speed loop parameter (Isoch mode) %
SDR2 Extraction loop parameter %
Smax Max. power kW
Ta1 HP valve actuator time constant Sec.
Ta2 LV valve actuator time constant Sec.
Tm1 Turbine time constant (shaft power output) Sec.
Tm2 Turbine time constant (extraction flow) Sec.
TS Controller sample time Sec.

Woodward UG-8 (UG-8)
24.5.11 Woodward UG-8

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward UG-8 governor, used mainly for diesel
generators. This model includes a representation for a ball head filter, amplifier/compensator, and a diesel
engine.
Woodward UG-8 (UG-8)

Woodward 2301 (2301)



Mode Droop or Isoch
A1 Compensator constant rad/Sec.
Ad Permanent droop constant rpm/in
B1 Ball head filter constant
B2 Ball head filter constant
C1 Governor drive ratio
K1 Partial very high pressure turbine power fraction Deg/in
T8 Fuel value time constant Sec.

24.5.12 Woodward Governor 2301

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward 2301 and 2301A speed governing systems
with a diesel turbine system and load sharing capability.
Woodward Governor 2301A and 2301 (2301)


Load Sharing (MW Sharing)

To share load (MW) between generators, you must set LS GP# (Load Sharing Group Number) of 2301
governors to the same group number.
Note: in order to use this capability, load sharing governors must be in Isochronous Mode.


Mode Droop or Isoch
LS GP# Load sharing group number
max Min. shaft position in degrees Deg
min Max. shaft position in degrees Deg
Gain setting
Reset setting
Actuator compensation setting
K1 Partially very high pressure power fraction Deg/A

Actuator time constant Sec.
T1 Engine Dead Time constant Sec.
T2 Amplifier/compensator time constant Sec.
k Internal variable ( 1.0 p.u. Pm/(max-max)) Pm p.u./Deg

GE Heavy Duty Governor Gas Turbine (GTH)
24.5.13 GE Heavy Duty Governor - Gas Turbine (GTH)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the GE heavy-duty gas turbine speed governing system.
Note: For Isoch: W=KD, and for Droop W=KI where KD = 1/Droop (pu)
f1 = (Tr - 700 (1 - WF) + 550 (1 -N))/[1+.0027(59-Ta)] Deg F

f2 = 1.3 (WF - 0.23) + 0.5 (1 -N) Deg F
GE Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTH)




Mode Droop or Isoch
Max Fuel upper limit (VCE' upper limit) p.u.
Min Fuel lower limit (VCE' lower limit) p.u.
Term.Ctrl Flag to include temperature control loop p.u.
Acc.Ctrl Flag to include acceleration control loop p.u.
X Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Y Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Z Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
a Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
b Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.

c Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
Kf Fuel system feedback gain, Kf = 0 or 1 p.u.
K1 Gain for Isoch mode p.u.
Tf Fuel system time constant Sec.
Tcr Combustion reaction time delay Sec.
Tcd Compressor discharge volume time constant Sec.
Ttd Turbine & exhaust system transportation delay Sec.
T Transportation delay Sec.
Tt Temperature controller integration rate Sec.
Tr Turbine rated exhaust temperature Deg.F
ta Ambient Temperature DegF

GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor Gas Turbine (GTS)
24.5.14 GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor - Gas Turbine (GTS)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the GE simplified single shaft gas turbine speed
governing system.
GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor and Gas Turbine (GTS)

GE Simplified Heavy Duty Governor Gas Turbine (GTS)



Mode Droop or Isoch
Max Fuel upper limit p.u.
Min Fuel lower limit p.u.
X Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Y Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
Z Governor transfer function coefficient p.u.
A Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
B Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
C Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
D Fuel system transfer function coefficient p.u.
R Fast load pickup operating zone limit p.u.
S Fast load pickup operating zone limit p.u.
T Fast load pickup operating zone limit p.u.

24.5.15 Solar Turbine MARS Governor Set (MARS)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Turbine MARS governor set for gas turbine and
speed governing systems.





Mode
Droop Speed droop %
MaxGov Governor maximum at no load p.u.
MinGov Governor minimum at no load p.u.
Max2 Maximum mechanical power p.u.
Min2 Minimum mechanical power p.u.
Max3 Maximum gas producer p.u.
Min3 Minimum gas producer p.u.
Maxo Maximum overspeed control p.u.
Mino Minimum overspend control p.u.
Wover Over speed reference p.u.
Tref Temperature reference p.u.
Ks Speed control gain p.u.
Kt Temperature control gain p.u.
Ko Overspeed control gain p.u.
Ku Loader delta maximum fuel p.u.
Kl Loader delta minimum fuel p.u.
T1 Governor reset time Sec.
T2 Combustor time constant Sec.
T3 Gas producer time constant Sec.
T4 Controller delay time constant Sec.
T5 Speed Lead/Lag lead time constant Sec.
T6 Speed Lead/Lag lag time constant Sec.
T7 Thermocouple time constant Sec.
Th1 Controller recursion time constant Sec.

Detroit Diesel (DDEC)
24.5.16 Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Detroit Diesel turbine with DDEC controller and the
Woodward DSLC unit system.
Detroit Diesel DDEC Governor Turbine (DDEC)


Detroit Diesel (DDEC)


Mode Droop or Isoch
PMmax Maximum shaft power (rated MW/kW) MW/kW
PMmin Minimum shaft power (>=0) MW/kW
K1 PL control gain p.u.
K2 Lead/Lag controller gain p.u.
R1 PL control constant p.u.
Ts Load share system sampling time constant Sec.
T1 PTO filter time constant Sec.
T2 Filter and Delay delay constant Sec.
T3 Filter and Delay time constant Sec.

GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor (GHH)
24.5.17 GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor (GHH)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the GHH BROSIG steam turbine governor system.
GHH BROSIG Steam Turbine Governor System (GHH)




KP1 Generator load control gain
KP2 Extraction 1 control gain
KP3 Extraction 2 control gain
KP4 Speed control gain
GL Low pressure steam valve control gain
GM Medium pressure steam valve control gain
GH High pressure steam valve control gain
Tn1 Time constant of generator load control Sec.
Tn2 Time constant of extraction 1 control Sec.
Tn3 Time constant of extraction 2 control Sec.


Tn5 Time constant of medium pressure steam valve control Sec.
Tn6 Time constant of low pressure steam valve control Sec.
TL Time constant of low pressure steam valve control loop Sec.
TM Time constant of medium pressure steam valve control loop Sec.
TH Time constant of high pressure steam valve control loop Sec.
HP Extraction 1 pressure bar
MP Extraction 2 pressure bar
VLmax Maximum value of low pressure valve control signal mm/Sec.
VLmin Minimum value of low pressure valve control signal mm/Sec.
VMmax Maximum value of medium pressure valve control signal mm/Sec.
VMmin Minimum value of medium pressure valve control signal mm/Sec.
VHmax Maximum value of high pressure valve control signal mm/Sec.
VHmin Minimum value of high pressure valve control signal mm/Sec.
PLmax Maximum value of low pressure valve position mm
PLmin Minimum value of low pressure valve position mm
PMmax Maximum value of medium pressure valve position mm
PMmin Minimum value of medium pressure valve position mm
PHmax Maximum value of high pressure valve position mm
PHmin Minimum value of high pressure valve position mm
Pa Power output value at point A of steam map MW
Pb Power output value at point B of steam map MW
Pc Power output value at point C of steam map MW
Pd Power output value at point D of steam map MW
Pe Power output value at point E of steam map MW
Pf Power output value at point F of steam map MW
LFa Maximum value of live steam flow t/h
LFc Live steam flow value at point C of steam map t/h
LFd Minimum value of live steam flow t/h
EX2f Extraction 2 steam value at point F of steam map t/h
LFv1 Valve position value at point 1 of live steam flow characteristics mm
LF1 Flow value at point 1 of live steam flow characteristics t/h
KFM0 Exponential coefficient of medium pressure steam flow characteristics 1/mm
FM0 Minimum flow value of medium pressure steam flow characteristics t/h
FM1 Coefficient of medium pressure steam flow characteristics t/h
KFL0 Exponential coefficient of low pressure steam flow characteristics 1/mm
FL0 Minimum flow value of low pressure steam flow characteristics t/h
FL1 Coefficient of low pressure steam flow characteristics t/h

m1 Valve control parameter
e1 Valve control parameter
e2 Valve control parameter
Esf1 Initial extraction 1 steam flow t/h
Esf2 Initial extraction2 steam flow t/h
Initia2
Steam Map Diagram

Woodward Hydraulic (HYDR)
24.5.18 Woodward Hydraulic Governor-turbine (HYDR)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Woodward hydraulic governing systems.
Woodward Hydraulic Governor-Turbine (HYDR)




VO Gate opening speed p.u.
VC1 Gate closing speed inside of the buffer zone p.u.
VC2 Gate closing speed outside of the buffer zone p.u.
GMAX1 Max gate position (RPM>RPM2) p.u.
GMAX2 Max gate position.(RPM<RPM2) p.u
GMIN Min gate position p.u.
Q Servo gain p.u.
RP Permanent droop p.u.
RT Temporary droop p.u.
TP Pilot and servo motor time constant p.u.


TG Main servo time constant p.u.
TR Dashpot time constant p.u.
Zt Surge impedance of tunnel p.u.
Zp1 Surge impedance of penstock p.u.
ft Head loss coefficient of tunnel p.u.
fp1 Head loss coefficient of penstock p.u.
Tt Travel time constant of tunnel in p.u.
Tp1 Travel time constant of penstock p.u.
At1 Proportionality factor p.u.
QNL No load flow in first unit p.u.
Q2 Flow rate in second unit p.u.
Wref Speed reference p.u.
Href Head reference p.u.
GC Gate conversion factor p.u.
Damp Damping coefficient p.u.
RPM1 Gate limit speed set point 1 p.u.
GBUFF Buffer zone gate limit p.u.
m Partial shutdown gate position coefficient p.u.
B Partial shutdown gate position coefficient p.u.

IEEE Gas-Turbine (SGT)
24.5.19 IEEE Gas-Turbine (SGT)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the IEEE gas-turbine governing systems.




Pref Load reference p.u.
Pmax Maximum power limit p.u.
Pmin Minimum power limit p.u.
K1 Gain 1 p.u.
K2 Gain 2 p.u
K3 Gain 3 p.u.
T1 Governor time constant 1 Sec.
T2 Governor time constant 2 Sec
T3 Governor time constant 3 Sec.
T4 Turbine time constant 1 Sec.
TR Load setting time constant Sec.

24.5.20 PowerLogic Governor-Turbine Model A (PL-A)

This type of governor-turbine system represents the Siemens Westinghouse PowerLogic model A
governing systems.
PowerLogic Turbine/Governor Model A (PL-A)

PowerLogic Governor-Turbine Model A (PL-A)



Model Liquid fuel or Gas fuel
Plimit Turbine base load p.u.
TP Load transducer time constant Sec.
TL Filter time constant in sec Sec.
TQ Speed transducer time constant Sec.
TLD Lead time constant Sec.
TLG Leg time constant Sec.
TA Speed/load controller time constant Sec.
TC Speed/load controller time constant Sec.
TD Current to pneumatic pressure transmitter time constant Sec.

PowerLogic Governor-Turbine Model A (PL-A)

TV Valve servo time constant Sec.
TPL Liquid piping time constant Sec.
TPG Gas piping time constant Sec.
TC1 Combustion time constant Sec.
TC2 Combustion time constant Sec.
TX1 Temperature controller time constant Sec.
KL Speed droop p.u.
KI Speed/load controller gain p.u.
KA Temperature controller gain V/F
KC Temperature controller gain V/V
KT Temperature controller gain V/BTU/Sec
DL Decel limiter p.u.
JRL1 Jump rate limiter1 %/Sec
JRL2 Instantaneous jump rate limiter1 %/Sec
TFLD Loading time from no-load to full load min
Tref Temperature reference p.u./100
GovBase Governor base MW

Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel (ST60)
24.5.21 Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor

(ST60)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel systems.
Solar Taurus 60 Solonox Gas Fuel Governor-Turbine System




Mode
T2 Speed compensator lead time constant Sec.
T3 Speed compensator lag time constant Sec.
T4 Governor reset time constant Sec.

KS Speed control gain p.u.
KT Temperature control gain p.u.
Kmax Loader delta maximum fuel gain p.u.
Kmin Loader delta minimum fuel gain p.u.
MinGOV Governor minimum at no load p.u.
Pmax Maximum mechanical power p.u.
Pmin Minimum mechanical power p.u.
Gmax1 Maximum gas producer p.u.
Gmin1 Minimum gas producer p.u.
Gmax2 Maximum fuel p.u.
Gmin2 Minimum fuel p.u.
Psolo Solonox control threshold p.u.
R Speed droop p.u.

24.5.22 Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Turbine-Governor

(ST70)
This type of governor-turbine system represents the Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel systems.
Solar Taurus 70 Solonox Gas Fuel Governor-Turbine System





Mode
T2 Speed compensator lead time constant Sec.
T3 Speed compensator lag time constant Sec.
T4 Governor reset time constant Sec.
Gp Gas producer constant Sec.
KS Speed control gain p.u.
KT Temperature control gain p.u.
Pmax Maximum mechanical power p.u.
Pmin Minimum mechanical power p.u.
Gmax1 Maximum gas producer p.u.
Gmin1 Minimum gas producer p.u.
R Speed droop p.u.

Gas-Turbine (GT-2)
24.5.23 Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT-2)

This type of governor-turbine system represents gas turbine with windup limits.
Gas-Turbine and Governor System (GT-2)


Gas-Turbine (GT-2)


Plimt Ambient temperature load limit p.u.
Vmax Maximum fuel valve opening p.u.
Vmin Minimum fuel valve opening p.u.
Base Governor base MW
R Speed droop p.u.
TR Load sensing time constant sec
T1 Governor time constant sec
T2 Combustion-chamber time constant sec
T3 Turbine thermal time constant sec
KT Load limit thermal sensitivity gain p.u.

Gas-Turbine (GT3)
24.5.24 Gas-Turbine and Governor (GT3)

This type of governor-turbine system represents gas-turbine with non-windup limits.
Gas-Turbine and Governor-Turbine System (GT3)


Gas-Turbine (GT3)

Parameter Description Unit

Plimt Ambient temperature load limit p.u.
Vmax Maximum fuel valve opening p.u.
Vmin Minimum fuel valve opening p.u.
Base Governor base MW
R Speed droop p.u.
T1 Governor time constant sec
T2 Combustion-chamber time constant sec
T3 Turbine thermal time constant sec
KT Load limit thermal sensitivity gain p.u.

Combustion Turbine (CT251)
24.5.25 Combustion Turbine-Governor (CT251)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a combustion turbine-governor.
Combustion Turbine and Governor System (CT251)


Combustion Turbine (CT251)


R Speed droop p.u.
T1 PID Integral time constant sec
TV Throttle valve time constant sec
TE Piping combustion time constant sec
K1 PID input scaling factor sec
K2 PID output scaling factor p.u.
KP PID proportional gain p.u.

GE Mark V/Mark VI Turbine Controllers (GGOV3)
24.5.26 GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers-Governor

(GGOV3)
This type of governor-turbine system represents a gas turbine or single shaft combined cycle turbine as
seen at the generator terminals.
GE Mark V and Mark VI Turbine Controllers (GGOV3)



Parameter Definition Units

R Permanent droop p.u.
Rselect Feedback signal for governor droop
= 1 electrical power
= 0 none (isochronous governor)
= -1 fuel valve stroke (true stroke)
= -2 governor output (requested stroke)
Ldref Load limiter reference value p.u.
Tpelec Electrical power transducer time constant, sec. sec
Kimw Power controller (reset) gain p.u.
Pmwset Power controller setpoint, MW p.u.
Kpgov Governor proportional gain p.u.
Kigov Governor integral gain p.u.

Kdgov Governor derivative gain p.u.
Tdgov Governor derivative controller time constant sec
Kpload Load limiter proportional gain for PI controller p.u.
Kiload Load limiter integral gain for PI controller p.u.
Ka Acceleration limiter gain p.u.
Ta Acceleration limiter time constant, sec. sec
Aset Acceleration limiter setpoint p.u./sec
Dm Speed sensitivity coefficient p.u.
Vmax Maximum valve position limit p.u.
Vmin Minimum valve position limit p.u.
Ffa Frequency filter low break speed p.u.
Ffb Frequency filter high break speed p.u.
Ffc Frequency filter gain high speed p.u.
Ffd Frequency filter gain low speed
Dnrate Fuel transient limiter rate limit p.u.
Dnhi Fuel transient limiter high speed limit p.u.
Dnlo Fuel transient limiter low speed limit p.u.
Ropen Maximum valve opening rate p.u./sec
Rclose Maximum valve closing rate p.u./sec
Rup Maximum rate of load limit increase p.u.
Rdown Maximum rate of load limit decrease p.u.
Maxerr Maximum value for speed error signal p.u.
Minerr Minimum value for speed error signal p.u.
Kturb Turbine gain p.u.
Wfnl No load fuel flow p.u.
Tact Actuator time constant sec
Tb Turbine lag time constant sec
Tc Turbine lead time constant sec
Db Speed governor dead band p.u.
Tsa Temperature detection lead time constant, sec. sec
Tsb Temperature detection lag time constant, sec. sec
Tfload Load limiter time constant sec
Tbd Fuel system lag time constant sec
Tcd Fuel system lead time constant sec
Teng Transport lag time constant for diesel engine sec
Cp Power Controller Gain sec
Cf Speed Controller Gain sec
Flag Switch for fuel source characteristic
0 fuel flow independent of speed
1 fuel flow proportional to speed
Turbrate Turbine Rating MW

Solar Turbine Governor Model (SGOV1)
24.5.27 Solar Turbine Governor Model (SGOV1)

This type of governor-turbine system represents a solar gas turbine with DLN (Dry Low NOx)
combustion systems.


Parameters for this model and the sample data are shown in the following screen capture:


Tpelec Electrical power transducer time constant sec
Kpg Governor proportional gain p.u.
Kig Governor integral gain p.u.

Tc Speed controller lead time constant sec
tb Speed controller lag time constant sec
Tvalve Fuel valve time constant sec
tref Temperature limit setting p.u.
Tgv Guide vane actuation time constant sec
Gvmin Minimum guide vane opening sec
Kpt Temperature limiter proportional gain p.u.
Ttmp Temperature measurement time constant sec
Dlnmin Minimum fuel command for DLN operation p.u.
Dlndel DLN turn on delay sec
Dlntset DLN exhaust temperature setting p.u.
Cp Selector for power control (normally 0 or 1)
Cf Speed bias/gain for power/speed control p.u.
Ldb Load controller dead band p.u.
Pmwset Power controller setpoint (initialized internally) MW
Nref Reference speed setpoint (Read-Only) p.u.
Turbine base power (ISO rated power of the turbine, base for per unit
Tbase parameters MW

Westinghouse Turbine Governor Model (WGOV1)
24.5.28 Westinghouse Turbine Governor Model (WGOV1)

The WGOV1 is an implementation of a turbine control model presented by Westinghouse.


Parameters for this model and the sample data are shown in the following screen capture:


Tpelec Electrical power transducer time constant sec
Kpgov Governor proportional gain p.u.
Tact Actuator time constant sec

Tb Turbine lag time constant sec
Tc Turbine lead time constant sec
Tload Temperature limit controller time constant sec
Kpload Load limiter proportional gain for PI controller p.u.
Ldref Load limiter upper limit p.u.
Dm Speed sensitivity coefficient p.u.
Ropen Maximum valve opening rate p.u./sec
Rclose Maximum valve closing rate p.u./sec
Pmwset Supervisory power controller setpoint MW
Tgov Governor controller time constant sec
Tth Thermocouple time constant sec
Ttr Temperature limit reset rate p.u./sec
Kpjrl JRL controller proportional gain p.u.
Tjrl JRL controller time constant sec
Pjrl JRL reference setting (per unit of MCR) p.u.
Kjrl JRL load dependent value gain p.u.
Mjrl JRL minimum step setting p.u.
Tjrf JRL generator power filter time constant sec
Rjrl JRL loading rate setting p.u.
Tsa Temperature detection lead time constant sec
Tsb Temperature detection lag time constant sec
Tbf Fuel system lag time constant sec
Tcf Fuel system lead time constant sec
Turbine base power (ISO rated power of the turbine, base for per unit
Turbrate parameters) MW
Cp Selector for power control (normally 0 or 1)
Cf Speed bias/gain for power/speed control p.u.
Ldb Load controller dead band p.u.

User-Defined Dynamic Model (UDM)
24.5.29 User-Defined Dynamic Model (UDM)

You can access UDM models that have been created and saved from the governor type list.
Details on how to use the UDM model are described in User-defined Dynamic Models chapter.

Dynamic Models Power System Stabilizer (PSS)
24.6 Power System Stabilizer (PSS)

Power system stabilizer (PSS) is an auxiliary device installed on synchronous generator and tuned to help
with system stability.
ETAP provides two standard IEEE type models:

The reference for these two types of PSS is from:
IEEE Std. 412.5-1992, IEEE Recommended Practice for Excitation System Models for Power
System Stability Studies, IEEE Power Engineering Society, 1992

24.6.1 IEEE Type 1 PSS (PSS1A)




VSI PSS input (speed, power or frequency) in pu p.u.
KS PSS gain p.u.
VSTmax Maximum PSS output p.u.
VSTmin Minimum PSS output p.u.
Vtmin Terminal undervoltage comparison level p.u.
TDR Reset time delay for discontinuous controller sec
A1 PSS signal conditioning frequency filter constant p.u.
A2 PSS signal conditioning frequency filter constant p.u.
T1 PSS lead compensation time constant sec
T2 PSS leg compensation time constant sec
T5 PSS washout time constant sec
T6 PSS washout time constant sec

24.6.2 IEEE Type 2 PSS (PSS2A)





VSI1 PSS first input (speed, power or frequency) p.u.
VSI2 PSS second input (speed, power or frequency) p.u.
KS1 PSS gain p.u.
KS2 PSS gain p.u.
KS3 PSS gain p.u.
VSTmax Maximum PSS output p.u.
VSTmin Minimum PSS output p.u.
VTmin Terminal undervoltage comparison level p.u.
TDR Reset time delay for discontinuous controller sec
Tw1 PSS washout time constant sec
N Integer filter constant
M Integer filter constant
T6 PSS transducer time constant sec
T7 PSS transducer time constant sec
T8 PSS filter time constant sec
T9 PSS filter time constant sec

Dynamic Models Mechanical Load
24.7 Mechanical Load

When you are simulating accelerating motors in motor starting studies and dynamically modeled motors
in Transient Stability Studies, the connecting mechanical loads should be modeled so that the calculation
determines the motors acceleration and deceleration characteristics. Mechanical loads are modeled based
on load torque curves that are either curves based or point based, as shown in the following screen
capture:
When Polynomial type of load toque curve is selected, the following editor is available to select the
mechanical load model.

Dynamic Models Mechanical Load
A load curve is expressed by a third order generic polynomial equation:
T=A0+A1 +2 2+3 3
where
T = Load torque in percent of the rated torque of the driving motor

= Per unit speed of the load ( = m/s)
A0, A1, A2, A3 = Coefficients
When the Curve type of load torque curve is selected, the following editor is available to select the
mechanical load model. Curve type can be used to create any custom shaped load torque curve that cannot
be expressed in the form of a polynomial equation.
ETAP provides a number of the most common load models for you to choose from. Load torque curves
can be added to the ETAP Motor Load Library and are made accessible from the Load Model pages in the
Induction Machine and Synchronous Motor Editors.

Dynamic Models Static Var Compensator Type 1
24.8 Static Var Compensator Models

The Static Var Compensator Control model can be accessed from the SVC Editor, Model page. It is
imperative that you model this control when performing Transient Stability Studies to determine the
dynamic response of the SVC under different conditions.
ETAP contains the following SVC control models:
Type1
Type2
Type3

24.8.1 SVC Control Model Type1



K Voltage regulator gain p.u.
A1 Additional control signal gain p.u.
T Voltage regulator time constatnt Sec
Tm Measurement time constant Sec
Tb Thyristor phase control time constant Sec
Td Thyristor phase control delay Sec
T1 Voltage regulator time constant Sec
TBmax Maximum susceptance limit p.u.
TBmin Minimum susceptance limit p.u.
Parameter Model Calculations

Type
K 1 if Vini > Vref then K = 100 / SLL
if Vini Vref then K = 100 / SLC
TBmax All TBmax = 1.0
TBmin All if (abs(Bc) < 0.00001 ) TBmin = -1.0
else TBmin = BL / Bc





Ks Synchronizing control gain p.u.
A1 Additional control signal gain p.u
Ts Synchronizing control time constant Sec
Xsl Slope p.u.

Type




Ks Synchronizing control gain p.u.
Ksr Susceptance regulator gain p.u.
VSRmax Maximum voltage limit p.u.
VSRmin Minimum voltage limit p.u.
Bset Susceptance set point p.u.
Ts Synchronizing control time constant Sec
Xsl Slope p.u.



Type

Dynamic Models Lumped Motor Load Model
24.9 Dynamic Lumped Motor Load Model

The motor load portion of lumped loads for conventional load type and unbalanced load type can be
modeled dynamically with system frequency variations. This dynamic model can be accessed from the
Lumped Load Editor, Dyn Model page.
Ta Motor load time constant

Motor load frequency coefficient

Dynamic Models Wind Turbine Generator
24.10 Wind Turbine Generator
24.10.1 Wind Turbine Generator Model

The Wind Turbine Generator (WTG) is modeled by a doubly-fed induction machine. Its circuit model is
the same as Single2 induction machine model.
Doubly Fed Induction

Generator Grid
Pturbine Pstator Pout
Gear
Box
Converter Protor

24.10.2 Wind Turbine Model

The Wind Turbine Model page is shown below:
Wind turbine is modeled by the following function:
v = wind speed
= blade pitch angle

= rotor speed P= Ar v 3C p (, )
2 Pmech = shaft power
R
=
v
= air density
tip-speed ratio Ar = swept area of blade
R = radius of blade

Typical curves of Cp vs. are shown below:
The Wind Turbine Model Editor provides a Cp generic model to represent the Cp curve, which is shown
below:
C7
C2 i
C p = C1 C3 C4 C6 e
C5
i
where
C1
i =
1 C
39
+ C8 + 1
= turbine blade tip speed ratio

= turbine blade pitch angle

24.10.3 Wind Model

The Wind Model page is shown below:
The Wind Model Editor allows you to specify the simulation wind pattern which includes wind ramp,
wind gust and wind noise.

24.10.4 Converter Control Model
Q and P Order Controller Parameters
The Converter Control Model Editor is shown below:



Rc Load compensate resistance p.u.
Xc Load compensate reactance p.u.
Ti Convert time constant sec
Tr Voltage control time constant sec
Tv Voltage control time constant sec
Tpc P order controller time constant sec
Ki Convert integral gain p.u.
Kpv Voltage PI control gain p.u.
Kiv Voltage PI control gain p.u.
Kp Convert proportional gain p.u.
Pmax P order controller power maximum limit Sec
Pmin P order controller power minimum limit Sec
Qmax var control maximum limit Sec
Qmin var control minimum limit Sec
Vmax Maximum rotor voltage %
Vmin Minimum rotor voltage %
Rate_max P order controller maximum change rate %/sec
Rate_min P order controller minimum change rate %/sec

Converter control model is shown in the following block diagram:
PRref QRref VGref QGref
Qgen
Vdc Qgrid
Pgen Grid-Side
Control

iR a, b, c iG a, b, c
uR a, b, c uG a, b, c
Rotor-Side Grid-Side
Converter Converter
The converter controller is mainly used to control the generator output power based on the wind speed
and rotor speed. When wind speed is between cut-in and rated speed, the generator power is controlled to
reach to optimal Cp mode. When wind speed is beyond turbine rated wind speed and the rotor speed is
between rated and maximum speed, the generator power is controlled at constant power mode. The power
is governed by the controller limiter Pmx and Pmin. Also, the converter controller can regulate the
generator terminal voltage under the limit of Qmax and Qmin. The generator output power profile is
shown below.
Power
Max Cp Control Constant Power Pitch Angle

Control Control
Wind
Cut-in Rated Wind Max Rotor Cut-off Speed
Speed Speed

24.10.5 Pitch Angle Control Model

The Pitch Angle Control Model Editor is shown below:
The Pitch angle control model is shown in the following block diagram:
Rotor Speed Pitch Angle Pitch Angle

max Limit Check Controller Limit Check
The Pitch angle controller is used to adjust turbine blade pitch angle. So that the generator can operate at
rated power and maximum rotor speed under a higher wind speed having not reached to cut-off speed.
The adjustable pitch angle is limited by the max and min.

Pitch Angle Controller Type 1


K Speed input gain p.u.
Ts Speed input time constant sec
Rmax Angle maximum change rate %/sec
Rmin Angle minimum change rate %/sec
Theta_max Maximum angle limit %
Theta_min Minimum angle limit %
Wmax Maximum generator operation speed %
Pitch Angle Controller Type 2


Kpp Speed PI control gain p.u.
Kip Speed PI control gain p.u.
Rmax Angle maximum change rate %/sec
Rmin Angle minimum change rate %/sec
Theta_max Maximum angle limit %
Theta_min Minimum angle limit %
Tp Control time constant sec
Phmax Speed PI control maximum limit %/sec
Phmin Speed PI control minimum limit %/sec
Wmax Maximum generator operation speed %

Chapter 25
User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM)
The ETAP User-Defined Dynamic Models (UDM) program is an interpreter tool that links user-defined
governor, exciter, and Power System Stabilizer (PSS) models for synchronous generators and exciter
models for synchronous motors. ETAP compiles these dynamic models at run time when conducting
Transient Stability Studies. The UDM control blocks can be created using the Matlab Simulink
interface tool.
ETAP includes a number of internally modeled turbine/governor, exciter/AVR, and PSS block diagrams
such as IEEE types and manufacturer specified models. The UDM program is applied in situations when
a specific model is not represented internally in ETAP.
Using Simulink, Create UDM Template File

Create a custom dynamic model (block diagram/transfer function).
Save the model in a specific directory in ETAP, creating a UDM Template file.
From ETAP Editors, Create UDM Equation File

Select the UDM Template Model (governor, exciter, or PSS) for any synchronous generator.
Select the UDM Template Model (exciter) for any synchronous motor.
Press the Compile button to create the UDM Equation file, which is specific for that machine.
ETAP gives you options to map input and output variable names as well as test the model.
From ETAP Transient Stability Mode, Run Studies

Run Transient Stability Studies and the UDM models will be automatically used.

User-Defined Dynamic Models Select UDM Models
25.1 UDM Template File

Open the Simulink Editor and build your control block diagram, such as a governor, exciter, or PSS
model, using the applicable block components provided by Simulink. When you save the control block
diagram as XYZ, Simulink will automatically generate a scripting file XYZ.mdl. We refer to this file
as the UDM Template file. You can use this Template file for any applicable machines in multiple ETAP
project files.
25.1.1 Create Template File Using Simulink

The rules and requirements for creating UDM Template files that are applicable to the current version of
ETAP are specified below.
The blocks and components of Simulink, which are recognized by ETAP applications are as
follows:
The maximum order of a transfer function (Transfer Fcn) block is a third order function.
The function types that can be used in an Fcn block consist of: sin, cos, tan, atan, abs, exp, sqrt, and
log.

The input/output variable names that you specify for your block diagrams in Simulink can be
specified arbitrarily and then mapped to ETAP input/output variable names using the System Variable
Selection Editor. However, to simplify your work, we recommend using the following key words for
the input/output variable names. The appropriate key words reserved for ETAP UDM
Turbine/Governor, Exciter/AVR, and PSS models, are provided in the following tables:
Turbine/Governor Model
Key Word Description
Pe Generator Real Electrical Power
Input
W Generator Speed
Output Pm Turbine Output Mechanical Power
Exciter/AVR Models
Vt Machine Terminal Voltage
CVt Machine Terminal Voltage in complex form
It Machine Terminal Current
CIt Machine Terminal Current in complex form
Pe Machine Real Power
Input
Qe Machine Reactive Power
Vs PSS Signal
Ifd Machine Field Current
Fre Machine Terminal Voltage Frequency
PF Machine Power Factor
Output Efd Exciter Output Voltage
PSS Model
Vt Generator Terminal Voltage
W Shaft Speed
f Generator Terminal Voltage Frequency
Input
Pe Generator Real Power
Pm Generator Mechanical Power
Ang Generator Rotor Angle
Output Vs PSS Output Signal

Examples of block diagrams showing the input and output variables for turbine/governor, exciter/AVR,
and PSS models are shown below:

25.1.2 Saving UDM Template File

The control block diagram file (XYZ.mdl) created by Simulink must be saved under the following
folders:
Governor Models ETAP a.b.c\UDM\Gov

Exciter Models ETAP a.b.c\UDM\Exc
PSS Models ETAP a.b.c\UDM\Pss
Where a.b.c is the installed ETAP version
The following figure shows two UDM exciter models saved in the directory in which the ETAP Program
is installed. These two models can then be selected from the Exciter page of synchronous generators and
motors.
Note: When naming the device and the UDM file, do not include backward slash, forward slash or
underscore characters in the name: \, /, or _.

25.2 Select UDM Models

Once an UDM Template file is created and saved in the applicable folder, ETAP will automatically add it
to the list box of Governor, Exciter, or PSS models for synchronous machines. You can select the desired
UDM Template file in the Exciter, Governor, or PSS page of the Synchronous Machine Editors.
Note: The same Template file can be used for multiple machines in multiple ETAP project files. The
Compile UDM button becomes active once you select a UDM Template file.
25.2.1 UDM Models for Synchronous Generator Exciter/AVR

Use the Type pull-down list to select an Exciter UDM Template file for a synchronous generator,
as shown in the example below.

25.2.2 UDM Models for Synchronous Generator Turbine/ Governor

Use the Type pull-down list to select a Governor UDM Template file for a synchronous generator.
UDM Models for Synchronous Generator PSS

Use the Type pull-down list to select a Power System Stabilizer UDM Template file for a synchronous
generator, as shown in the example below.

25.2.3 UDM Models for Synchronous Motor Exciter/AVR

Use the Type pull-down list to select an Exciter UDM Template file for a synchronous motor.

25.2.4 UDM Model Parameter Report

After compile an UDM model, a report file with Microsoft Word format (.doc) for UDM model
parameters will be generated in the same folder as project files. The name of report file is combined with
generator ID and UDM name, as shown as follows:

User-Defined Dynamic Models Compile UDM Equation File
25.3 Compile UDM Equation File

After you select a UDM Template file from an Editor, click on the Compile UDM button to create a
compiled equation file for the selected machine and UDM model. This compiled equation file is
automatically linked to this machine and will be used from now on whenever you run the Transient
Stability Studies.
When you click the Compile UDM button, the UDM Compiler dialogue box will appear. This Compiler
dialogue box provides three functions that allow you to specify the initial condition parameters, compile
the UDM script file to the equation file, and to test the equation file.
25.3.1 UDM Compiler

User-Defined Dynamic Model
Type
This indicates the model type (Governor, Exciter, or PSS) represented by the UDM Template file.
Element
This indicates the ID of the machine that the UDM Template file will be compiled as an Equation file.
UDM Template File

This indicates the name and the path of the UDM Template file (the script file created by Simulink).
Initialization Method
Select one of these two-initialization methods.
Direct
Select this option to use an algebraic method to calculate the models initial condition.
Iterative
Select this option to use an iterative method to calculate the models initial condition.
Compile UDM Template File to Equation File

This area allows you to complete the Equation file or change the Advanced Setting.
Advanced Setting (Direct Method)

Using this Advanced Setting Editor you can specify the initial condition parameters: Max. Iteration,
Precision, and Increment Step. These parameter settings will affect the convergence of initialization
calculation.
Max. Iteration
This parameter defines the maximum iteration of initialization calculation. The default value is 2000.
Note: It is recommended that you not change this parameter for most cases.
Precision
This parameter defines the precision in per unit for the convergence of initialization calculation. The
default value is 0.0001.

Increment Step
This parameter defines the increment step for the convergence of initialization calculation. The default
value is 0.0035.
Advanced Setting (Iterative Method)

Using this Advanced Setting Editor you can specify the initial condition parameters: Iteration Time, Settle
Time, and Time Step. These parameter settings will affect the convergence of initialization calculation.
Iteration Time (sec)

This parameter defines the maximum iteration time of initialization calculation. The default value is 100.
Settle Time (sec)

This parameter defines the starting time to check the convergence of initialization calculation. The
default value is 30, which is always less than Iteration Time.
Time Step
This parameter defines the simulation time step of initialization calculation. The default value is 0.002.
UDM Equation File

This indicates UDM Equation file name and path.
Test Model
Click this button to test the UDM Equation file with different test modes in a Stand-Alone Mode. See the
section on Test Model.

User-Defined Dynamic Models System Variable Name Mapping
25.4 System Variable Name Mapping

When you click on the Compile button, the Variable Name Mapping Editor will appear. This editor
consists of Governor, Exciter, and PSS Editor pages, which allows you to select the appropriate system
input, output, and reference variable names represented by block names in the model block diagram.
This editor allows you to map the variable names of the input, output, and reference of the Template file
to the keyword that are used by ETAP. If the correct key words (as explained in previous sections) are
used in model block diagram (Template file), the proper variable names corresponding to ETAP key
words are automatically picked up in the selection list box, otherwise it shows None. Click the OK
button in an editor page to perform the compiling process. Once the file has been successfully compiled,
the UDM Template file is converted to a UDM Equation file with the name and format as
UDM_GENID_XYZ.bin, where GENID is the ID of the machine and XYZ is the name of the Template
file. This Equation file is saved to the same folder where the project file resides.
25.4.1 Governor Page

This page displays the variable names of the input, output, and reference variables for governors.

System Input
Speed (W)
Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of the governor input speed to the ETAP key word (W).
Speed is measured in per-unit of the generator synchronous speed.
Elec Power (Pe)

Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of the governor input electrical power to the ETAP key
word (Pe). This is the generator real electrical power in per-unit of the generator MW.
System Output
Mech Power (Pm)

Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of the governor output power to the ETAP key word
(W). This is the generator output mechanical power measured in per-unit of the generator MW.
System Reference
Speed Ref (Wref)

Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of the speed reference to the ETAP key word (Wref).
This is the governor speed reference in per-unit of the generator synchronous speed.
Power Ref (Pref)

Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of the power reference to the ETAP key word (Pref).
This is the governor power reference in per-unit of the generator MW.
Temp Ref (Tref)

Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of the temperature reference to the ETAP key word
(Tref). This is the governor temperature reference in per-unit of the governor base temperature.
Load Sharing
Load Share (Psh)

Use this pull-down list to map the variable name of load sharing to the ETAP key word (Psh). This is the
governor load sharing power reference in per-unit of generator MW.
Group Number
The group number allows you to take several generators and group them together for load sharing. In the
image above, you would select Gen1,2,3 as Group Number 1 and Gen4,5,6 as Group Number 2,
otherwise this pull-down list will be grayed out. The default group number 0 means no load sharing
available.

25.4.2 Exciter Page

The following example displays the exciter system variable selection page and shows the exciter system
input, system output, and system reference variables.
System Input
Terminal Voltage (Vt)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input terminal voltage to the ETAP
key word (Vt). This is the machine terminal voltage magnitude in per-unit of the nominal machine
terminal bus voltage.
Terminal Current (It)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input terminal current to the ETAP
key word (It). This is the machine terminal current magnitude in per-unit of the rated machine current.

Complex Terminal Voltage (CVt)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input complex terminal voltage to
the ETAP key word (CVt). This is the complex machine terminal voltage in per-unit of the nominal
machine terminal bus voltage.
Complex Terminal Current (CIt)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input complex terminal current to
the ETAP key word (CIt). This is the complex machine terminal current in per-unit of the rated machine
current.
Real Power (Pe)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input real electrical power to the
ETAP key word (Pe). This is the machine real electrical power in per-unit of the machine MVA.
Reactive Power (Qe)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input reactive power to the ETAP
key word (Qe). This is the machine reactive power in per-unit of the machine MVA.
PSS Signal (Vs)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input PSS signal to the ETAP key
word (Vs). This is the PSS output signal in per-unit of nominal machine terminal bus voltage.
Field Current (Ifd)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter input field winding current to the
ETAP key word (Ifd). This is the machine field winding current in per-unit of machine base.
Terminal Frequency (Fre)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter Terminal Frequency to the ETAP
key word (Fre). This is the generators terminal frequency in per-unit.
Power Factor (PF)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter Power Factor to the ETAP key
word (PF). This is the Power Factor in per-unit.
System Output
Field Voltage (Efd)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the exciter output voltage to the ETAP key
word (Efd). This is the machine exciter output voltage in per-unit of the nominal machine terminal bus
voltage.
System Reference
Voltage Ref (Vref)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the voltage reference to the ETAP key word
(Vref). This is exciter voltage reference in per-unit of the nominal machine terminal bus voltage.

var Controller
Reactive Power Ref (Qref)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the voltage controller to the ETAP key word
(Qref). This reactive power reference is in per-unit of the nominal machine terminal bus voltage.
Power Factor Controller
Power Factor Ref (PFRef)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the voltage controller to the ETAP key word
(Pfreq). This power factor reference is in per-unit of the nominal machine terminal bus voltage.
Cross Current Compensation

For the exciter cross current compensation model, the number (ID) of group in which the generator
participates in var sharing need to be specified in UDM Exciter Editor, as shown in the example below.
The default group number 0 means no var sharing available and the selection box is grayed out.
var Share Group Number

The group number allows you to take several generators and group them together for var sharing. In the
image above, you would select Gen1,2,3 as var Share Group Number 1 and Gen4,5,6 as var Share Group
Number 2, otherwise this pull-down list will be grayed out. The default group number 0 means no var
sharing available.

PSS Page
The following displays the PSS system variable selection page and describes the PSS input and output
variables.
System Input
Shaft Speed (W)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the PSS input shaft speed to the ETAP key
word (W). This is generator shaft speed increment in per-unit of the generator synchronous speed.

Voltage Frequency (f)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the PSS input voltage frequency to the ETAP
key word (f). This is the generator terminal voltage frequency increment in per-unit of the nominal
system frequency.
Real Power (Pe)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the PSS input real power to the ETAP key
word (Pe). This is the generator real electrical power increment in per-unit of the machine MW rating.
Rotor Angle (Ang)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the PSS input rotor angle to the ETAP key
word (Ang). This is the generator rotor angle increment in radius.
Mech Power (Pm)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the PSS input mechanical power to the ETAP
key word (Pm). This is the generator mechanical power increment in per-unit of the generator MW rating.

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the PSS input terminal voltage to the ETAP
key word (Vt). This is the generator terminal voltage magnitude increment in per-unit of the nominal
machine terminal bus voltage.
System Output
PSS Signal (Vs)

Select from the pull-down list to map the variable name of the PSS output signal to the ETAP key word
(Vs). This is the PSS output signal in per-unit of nominal machine terminal bus voltage.

User-Defined Dynamic Models Test Model
25.5 Test Model

The UDM Program also allows you to perform a stand-alone test for your UDM equation files.
Depending on the model type that you have selected, click the Test Model button, and the Governor Test
Model Editor, the Exciter Test Model Editor, or the PSS Test Model Editor, will appear. These editors
are provided to allow you to specify the appropriate system input variable values and the test types like
Load Shedding, Load Acceptance, and Fault Bus for a simple power system. The test power system
consists of a single generator connected to a single load via a transmission line as shown below. The
parameters of the power system are built into the program.
Governor
Vt
Generator
Exciter
ZL
25.5.1 Governor Model Test

The following example displays the Governor Model Test Editor and describes the test input/output
values, simulation time, and test types.

System Input (pu)
Speed (W)
This parameter defines the generator speed in per-unit. The default value is 1.0.
Elec Power (Pe)

This parameter defines the generator real electrical power in per-unit. The default value is 1.0 for testing
load shed and fault bus, and 0.5 for testing load acceptance.
Simulation Time
Time Step (sec)

This parameter defines the simulation time step in seconds. The default value is 0.005.
Total Time (sec)

This parameter defines the total simulation time in seconds. The default value is 40.0.
System Output (pu)
Mech Power (Pm)

This field displays the governor output mechanical power in per-unit.
Test Type
Load Shed
Select this option to simulate a power system load shed of 50%.
Load Acceptance
Select this option to simulate a power system load addition of 50%.
Fault Bus
Select this option to simulate short-circuit fault on the generator terminal bus.
Test
When the test input values and simulation times are specified and a test type is selected in the Governor
Model Test Editor, you can implement the governor model testing by clicking the Test button.
Plot
When the testing is successfully completed, the results are available for plot. Click the Plot button in the
Test Model Editor, the plot window will appear as shown below:

An Example of a Governor Test Result Plot on Load Shed
25.5.2 Exciter Model Test

The following example displays the Exciter Model Test Editor, which provides fields for the system test
input/output values, simulation time, system output and test types.

System Input (pu)

This parameter defines the generator terminal voltage in per-unit. The default value is 1.0.
Terminal Current (It)

This field displays the generator terminal current in per-unit.
Real Power (Pe)

This field displays the generator real electrical power in per-unit.
Reactive Power (Qe)

This field displays the generator reactive electrical power in per-unit.
PSS Signal (Vs)

This parameter defines the PSS input signal in per-unit. The default value is 0.
Field Current (Ifd)

This parameter defines the generator field winding current in per-unit. The default value is 0.
Terminal Frequency (Fre)

This parameter defines the terminal frequency of the generator. The default value is 1.
Power Factor (PF)

This parameter defines the power factor of the generator.
Complex Terminal Voltage (CVt)

This field displays the generator terminal complex voltage in per-unit.
Complex Terminal Current (It)

This field displays the generator terminal complex current in per-unit.
Simulation Time
Time Step (sec)

Total Time (sec)

System Output (pu)
Filed Voltage (Efd)

This field displays the exciter output voltage in per-unit.

Test Type
Load Shed
Select this option to simulate a power system load shed of 50%.
Load Acceptance
Select this option to simulate a power system load adding of 50%.
Fault Bus
Select this option to simulate a short-circuit fault on the generator terminal bus.
Test
Once the test input values and simulation times are specified and a test type is selected in the Exciter
Model Test Editor, you can implement the exciter model testing by clicking the Test button.
Plot
When the testing is successfully completed, you can view the results as plots. Click the Plot button in the
Test Model Editor, the plot window will be displayed as shown below:
An Example of an Exciter Test Result Plot on Load Shed

25.5.3 PSS Model Test

The following example shows the PSS Model Test Editor. The test input/output values, simulation time,
and test types are described.
System Input (pu)
Shaft Speed (W)

This parameter defines the generator speed increment value in per-unit. The default value is 0.005.

This parameter defines the terminal voltage in per-unit.
Real Power (Pe)

This parameter defines the increment value of the generator real electrical power in per-unit. The default
value is 0.01.
Rotor Angle in rad (Ang)

This parameter defines the generator rotor angle increment value in radius. The default value is 0.01.
Mech Power (Pm)

This parameter defines the increment value of the generator mechanical power in per-unit. The default
value is 0.01.

Voltage Frequency (f)

This parameter defines the increment value of the generator terminal voltage frequency in per-unit. The
default value is 0.01.
Simulation Time
Time Step (sec)

Total Time (sec)

System Output (pu)
PSS Signal (Vs)

This field displays the PSS output signal in per-unit.
Test
Once the test input values and simulation times are specified in the PSS Model Test Editor, you can
implement the PSS model testing by clicking the Test button. The PSS model test is conducted by
placing a pulse disturbance only on input signals.
Plot
When the testing is successfully completed, you can view the results as a plot. Click the Plot button in
the Test Model Editor, the plot window will show up as shown below:
An Example of a PSS Test Result Plot showing a Pulse Disturbance of Shaft Speed

25.6 Advanced Topics
25.6.1 Report of middle state variables of UDM model

If you want to see the outputs of some middle state variables of UDM model, you can use Scope block
to connect to the point you are interested in the UDM model as shown below in an example of UDM
block diagram.
After the simulation is completed, a report file with Microsoft Excel format (.csv) for the specified middle
state variable outputs will be generated in the same folder as the project file. The name of report file is a
combineation of the generator ID and UDM name, as shown as follows:

25.6.2 Switching governor operating mode between Droop and

Isochronous
If a governor has Droop and Isochronous Operation Mode options, the UDM can allow you to simulate
the switch behavior between Droop and Isochronous Modes. In order to do that, first, you need to use an
ETAP reserved key word Drp block to flag the initial operation mode in the UDM model. The
following diagram shown below is an example to set up the switch options between the Droop and
Isochronous Modes.
Then, you need to create in the ETAP Transient Stability Study Case Editor an action event to switch the
Operation Mode for the generator. The event setting is shown as follows:

25.6.3 By-pass some blocks during initialization process

If you use Iterative method for UDM initialization, for some models a special setting for some control
blocks such as MinMax or Saturation blocks may cause the UDM initialization to failure. In order to
successfully initialize such an UDM, these blocks need to be by-passed during initialization process. An
ETAP reserved key word iniCnst block can be used to control the path for initialization loop or
simulation loop. The following diagram is an example to show how to set up the control structure. The
initial value of iniCnst block is set to 1; the initialization loop is on during initialization process. Once
the initialization is successfully completed, the value of iniCnst block will be automatically changed to
0 and the normal simulation loop will be switched to on.

Chapter 26
Parameter Estimation
The ETAP Parameter Estimation Module calculates equivalent circuit model parameters for induction
machines and synchronous motors at starting condition. This calculation is based on an advanced
mathematical estimation and curve fitting technique, which requires only the machine performance
characteristic data. This data is readily available from machine manufactures or can be obtained from
field tests. The estimated model parameters include the resistance and reactance representing the machine
stator, rotor and magnetizing branches characteristics. The estimated model, together with its parameters,
can be used to represent the machine dynamics during motor starting and Transient Stability Studies.
This chapter describes the interfaces, input and output data involved in running the Parameter Estimation
Program. All other related operations including data update, plot and print will also be explained. An
overview of the calculation algorithm is provided for your reference.
This chapter is organized into five sections. The Start Parameter Estimation section describes how to start
the parameter estimation calculation. The Parameter Estimation Editor section explains each input data
and the calculated data for and from the calculation, as well as additional output information. The Motor
Parameter Update Editor section details the updateable data provided to the Machine Editor when using
the estimated model and its parameters. The Calculation Method provides some technical background on
the algorithm used for the estimation calculation. And finally, the Output Reports section provides a
detailed description of the available Output Reports, their various formats and how to view and print
them.

Parameter Estimation Start Parameter Estimation
26.1 Start Parameter Estimation

To launch a Parameter Estimation, click on the Parameter Estimation Start button located in the Model
page of the Induction Machine Editor.
Click this button to open the Parameter Estimation Editor.

Parameter Estimation Parameter Estimation Editor
26.2 Parameter Estimation Editor

The Parameter Estimation Editor consists of a Parameters page and a Curve page.
26.2.1 Parameters Page

This page provides entry fields for all input data necessary to run a parameter estimation calculation.
Estimated parameters and other output data is also displayed on this page.
Requirement
In this area, there are three sets of data: input, calculated and deviation. The input fields are user-defined,
while the remaining fields are calculated by ETAP.
Input
The Input section contains machine performance characteristic data, which is available from the machine
manufacturer, machine nameplate, or derived from field tests. This data must be provided in order to run
a parameter estimation calculation. The first time this page is opened, the input data fields will be
automatically filled using data contained in the Machine Editor Nameplate and Model pages. However,
you can modify any of this automatically input data independently of the Machine Editor.

Calculated
If the calculation converges, the machine performance characteristic data using the estimated model
parameters will be displayed here. This data is provided for comparison purposes.
Deviation
The deviation fields show the percent deviation between the input data and the calculated data.
Locked Rotor I
The machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV). The input and calculated data are a percentage of
the rated full load current of the machine, and the deviation is also a percentage.
Locked Rotor PF
The machine locked-rotor power factor in percent.
Locked Rotor T
The machine locked-rotor torque. The input and calculated data is in percent of the machine rated power
and synchronous speed. The deviation is in percent.
Tmax
The machine maximum torque. The input and calculated data are in percent of the machine rated power
and synchronous speed. The deviation is in percent.
Full Load Slip

The machine full load slip, in percent.
Full Load PF
The machine full load power factor, in percent.
Full Load Eff

The machine full load efficiency, in percent.
Refresh Button
Every time the Parameters page of the Parameter Estimation Editor is opened, the input data will be
compared with the Machine Editor data. If any difference exists, this button will be enabled; otherwise it
is disabled (grayed out). Press this button to re-compare all input data with the Machine Editor data.
Solution Parameters
This section defines and displays the solution parameters of the calculation.
Max Deviation
Displays the maximum allowed value among all deviations in the Requirement section. The value is a
percentage.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision (in percent) that is used to check for calculation convergence.
The calculation stops when all deviations are less than, or equal to this value. The recommended value
for this setting is between 1.0 and 5.0 percent. The default is 2 percent.

Acceleration Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor to be used between iterations. Typical values are between 0.1
and 0.5. The default value is 0.25.
Estimated Parameters
This section displays the estimated (calculated) machine equivalent circuit model parameters.
Xs
Displays the machine stator reactance in percent on the machine base.
Rs
Displays the machine stator resistance in percent on the machine base.
Xm
Displays the machine magnetizing branch reactance in percent on the machine base.
Xr lr
Displays the machine rotor reactance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Xr fl
Displays the machine rotor reactance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.
Rr lr
Displays the machine rotor resistance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Rr fl
Displays the machine rotor resistance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.
Estimate Button
Press this button to run the parameter estimation calculation.
Update Button
When a calculation is completed successfully, the Update button will be enabled. Click this button to
open the Motor Parameter Update Editor whose functions will be described separately in its own section.
Parameter Estimation Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the parameter estimation calculations in the current project
folder. Select a file to view the report or to run a new calculation.
Note: In the latter case, the existing file will be over written. When Prompt is selected, a new file will be
created.

Parameter Estimation Report Manager Button

The Parameter Estimation Report Manager button is used to access the various Output Reports. The
functions of the Parameter Estimation Report Manager will be described separately in its own section.
Help
This opens the Help file topic for the Parameter Estimation section.
Close
This closes the Parameter Estimation Editor and saves all data.
Cancel
This closes the Parameter Estimation Editor without saving any modified data.

26.2.2 Curves Page

This page displays the machine equivalent circuit model, its parameters, and the characteristic curves
generated from the model.
Update Button
When a calculation is completed successfully, the Update button will be enabled. Click this button to
open the Motor Parameter Update Editor, whose functions will be described separately in its own section.
Parameter Estimation Report Selection List

This list contains all the output files from the parameter estimation calculations that are included in the
current project folder. Select a file to view the report or to run a new calculation.
Note: In the latter case, the existing file will be over written. When Prompt is selected, a new file will be
created.
Parameter Estimation Report Manager Button

The Parameter Estimation Report Manager button is used to access the various Output Reports.
Functions of the Parameter Estimation Report Manager will be described separately in its own section.
Help
Cancel
This closes the Parameter Estimation Editor without saving any modified data.

Parameter Estimation Parameter Estimation Update Editor
26.3 Motor Parameter Update Editor

This editor provides options that allow you to update machine data that were based on the calculated
equivalent circuit model.
Model Data
The data in the lower portion (non-boxed area) is from the machine Model page under the Model section.
This data is compared with the calculated data (boxed area) from the estimated model.
Rs
The machine stator resistance in percent on the machine base.
Xs
The machine stator reactance in percent on the machine base.
Xm
The machine magnetizing branch reactance in percent on the machine base.
Xr lr
The machine rotor reactance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Xr fl
The machine rotor reactance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.

Rr lr
The machine rotor resistance at the locked-rotor condition in percent on the machine base.
Rr fl
The machine rotor resistance at the full load condition in percent on the machine base.
Nameplate Data
The Existing data is from the machine Nameplate page under the Ratings section, which is compared with
the calculated data list from the estimated model (located above the Existing data).
kVA
The machine rated kVA.
FLA
The machine rated full load current in amperes.
PF
The machine rated power factor at 100% loading in percent.
Eff
The machine rated efficiency at 100% loading in percent.
H
The machine total inertia in MW-Sec/MVA.
Torque
The machine rated torque in ft-lb in English unit system or in N-m in Metric unit system.
Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Nameplate Data.
Loading Data
The Existing data is derived from the machine Nameplate page under the Ratings section, which is
compared with the calculated data list above from the estimated model (located above the Existing data).
PF 50%
PF 75%
Eff 50%
Eff 75%

Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Loading Data.
Short-Circuit Data
The Existing data is from the machine Model page under the Locked Rotor section, ANSI Short-Circuit Z
section, and Parameters section respectively. This data is compared with the calculated data list above the
estimated model (located above the Existing data).
LRC
The machine locked-rotor current (at motor rated kV) in percent of the rated full load current of the
machine.
PFlr
The machine locked-rotor power factor in percent.
cy X
The machine short-circuit impedance in percent on machine base; used for ANSI cycle fault
calculation.
1.5-4 cy X
The machine short-circuit impedance in percent on machine base; used for ANSI 1.5-4 cycle fault
calculation.
X/R
The machine X/R ratio (Xsc/Ra).
Td'
The machine transient time constant in seconds.
Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Short-Circuit Data.
Characteristic Data
The Existing data is generated from the machine Nameplate page under the Ratings section and Model
page under the Torque section, respectively. This data is compared with the calculated data list above the
estimated model (located above the Existing data).
LRT
The machine locked-rotor torque in percent.
MaxT
The machine maximum torque in percent.
FLT
The machine full load torque in percent.
S@MaxT
The machine slip at the maximum torque in percent.

Sr
The machine rated slip in percent.
Update Checkbox
Check this box if you wish to update the Characteristic Data.
Help Button
Update Button
This updates the data in any of the sections that have their Update boxes checked.
Cancel Button
This closes the Motor Parameter Update Editor without updating any data.

Parameter Estimation Calculation Method

Reference Paper
The machine equivalent circuit model parameter estimation calculation method uses an algorithm based
on limited available data, which is described in the following reference paper:
Sonchai Ansuj, Farrokh Shokooh, and Roland Schinzinger, Parameter Estimation for Induction
Machines Based on Sensitivity Analysis, IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, Vol. IAS
25 pp. 1035-1040, Nov./Dec. 1989.
Equivalent Circuit Model

This algorithm estimates the parameters in the following equivalent induction machine circuit model.
Xs Stator reactance
Rr lr Rotor resistance at locked-rotor
Rr fl Rotor resistance at full load
Xr lr Rotor reactance at locked-rotor
Xr fl Rotor reactance at full load
This data is indicated in the machine steady-state performance curve below:

Parameter Estimation Calculation Method
The algorithm starts with a simplified equivalent circuit that omits the magnetizing branch. Using this
simplified model, the model parameters are evaluated first. These parameters are then used to arrive at
the more accurate values using the detailed equivalent circuit model. At this stage, a sensitivity analysis
is applied using an iterative process that continuously adjusts the estimated parameters until the percent
deviations fall within a specified tolerance between the calculated values for the input parameters and the
actual input.
Both rotor parameters Rr and Xr are functions of slip and their respective cage factors. Therefore, two
sets of Rr and Xr are estimated, with Rr lr and Xr lr representing the values at the locked-rotor condition,
and Rr fl and Xr fl representing the values at the full load condition. The induction machine equivalent
circuit described above can actually represent any type of rotor design. Single-cage, double-cage, and
even wound-rotor types are accurately accounted for by the two sets for Rr and Xr.
The program requires that the machine nameplate data, along with two specific points from the machine
performance curves, are available. These points, which include the locked-rotor torque, locked-rotor
current, locked-rotor power factor and breakdown torque, may be obtained from actual machine tests or
from curves supplied by the manufacturer. Indeed, these points are often the only reliable information
available from the performance curves, since the rest of the curve might have been provided merely as an
indication of the machines generic behavior.

Parameter Estimation Required Data
26.5 Required Data

The input data for the algorithm is the machine performance characteristic data, grouped according to the
three loading conditions usually specified for the machine, described as follows:
Locked-Rotor
Ilr Locked-rotor current
PFlr Locked-rotor power factor
Tlr Locked-rotor torque
Full Load
Sr Rated full load slip
PFfl Full load power factor
Eff fl Full load efficiency
Maximum Torque
Tmax Maximum torque

Parameter Estimation Output Reports
26.6 Output Reports

If the current calculation succeeds or a valid output file name is selected from the Parameter Estimation
Report Selection List, the Output Reports can be accessed by pressing the Parameter Estimation Report
Manager button. The Parameter Estimation Report Manager button is located next to the Parameter
Estimation Report Selection List as shown in the figure below.
26.6.1 Parameter Estimation Report Manager

Click the Parameter Estimation Report Manager button to open the Parameter Estimation Report
Manager. The Parameter Estimation Report Manager offers various report formats and consists of four
pages.
Complete Page
Use this page to select the Complete Output Report.
You can view the file using the Viewer, or create a file that can be printed or emailed (PDF, MS Word,
Rich Text Format, MS Excel). Your selection can also be assigned as the default report format if you
check the Set As Default box. These selection buttons are offered on all four pages of the Report
Manager.

The first page of the Complete Report provides input data, estimated model parameters and a
comparison between the input data and similar data generated by the estimated model.
The second page of the Complete Report tabulates the machine characteristics for all key quantities as a
function of machine slip. These quantities include machine speed, torque, current, power factor, and
efficiency. It also reports the machine power factor and the efficiency at different loading conditions.


Input Page
This page allows you to select the Input Data Report.
The Input Report displays the input data, and is equivalent to the input data section in the Complete
Report.
Result Page
This page allows you to select different data formats for your calculation results.

The Estimated Parameters Report is equivalent to the Estimated Parameters and Input & Results sections
in the Complete Report.
The Loading Characteristics Report is the same as the loading section of the second page of the
Complete Report.
The Motor Characteristics Report is equivalent to the tabulation portion of the second page of the
Complete Report.
Summary Page
This page provides the data format for calculation summary.
The Summary Report is equivalent to the Input & Results sections in the Complete Report.

Chapter 27
Harmonics
Because of the wide and ever increasing applications of power electronic devices and other electronic and
digital controllers, such as variable speed drives, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), static power
converters, rectifiers, Static Var Compensator (SVC), etc., power system voltage and current quality has
been severely affected in some areas. In these areas components other than that of fundamental frequency
can be found to exist in the distorted voltage and current waveforms. These components usually are the
integer multipliers of the fundamental frequency, called harmonics. In addition to electronic devices,
some other nonlinear loads, or devices including saturated transformers, arc furnaces, fluorescent lights,
and cyclo-converters are also responsible for the deterioration in power system quality.

Harmonic Analysis Overview
The presence of harmonics in a power system can give rise to a variety of problems including equipment
overheating, reduced power factors, deteriorating performance of electrical equipment, the incorrect
operation of protective relays, interference with communication devices, and in some cases, circuit
resonance to cause electric apparatus dielectric failure and other types of severe damage. Even worse,
harmonic currents generated in one area can penetrate into the power grid and propagate into other areas,
resulting in voltage and current distortions for the entire system. This phenomenon has become a major
concern for power quality due to the ever-increasing usage of electronic devices and equipment in power
systems.
Using computer simulation, the phenomena of power system harmonics can be modeled and analyzed.
The ETAP Harmonic Analysis Module provides you with the best tool to accurately model various power
system components and devices to include their frequency dependency, nonlinearity, and other
characteristics under the presence of harmonic sources. This module employs two analytical methods,
Harmonic Load Flow Method and Harmonic Frequency Scan Method. Both methods are the most popular
and powerful approaches for power system harmonic analysis. By using those two methods in
combination, different harmonic indices are computed and compared with the industrial standard
limitations, existing and potential power quality problems, along with security problems associated with
harmonics can be easily revealed. Causes to those problems can be identified and different mitigation and
corrective schemes can be tested and finally verified.
Some of the main features of the ETAP Harmonic Load Flow Study are summarized below:
Common and integrated database

Fully inherited 3-D data structure, including infinite presentations, unlimited configurations, &
multiple data revisions
Handles Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with multiple swing buses
Systems with isolated subsystems
Systems with zero impedance branches (tie circuit breakers)
Systems with de-energized buses and branches
Automatic adjustment of cable/line resistance according to operating temperatures
Automatic adjustment of overload heater resistance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of cable/line length according to their tolerance
Automatic adjustment of transformer impedance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of current limiting reactor impedance according to tolerance
Multiple Loading Categories
Multiple Generation Categories
Load diversity factors
Complete fundamental load flow calculation
Automatic LTC settings for fundamental load flow
Modeling of frequency dependency of rotary machine impedance
Modeling of nonlinearity and frequency dependency of cable/line and transformer impedance
Modeling of frequency dependency of other power system components and loads
Effect of transformer phase shifting to harmonic flow
Effect of machine and transformer winding connections and grounding types to harmonic flow
Short-line and long-line model for cable and transmission line
Harmonic Current Injection Method
Positive, negative, and zero sequence harmonics
Harmonic order up to 73rd

Harmonic Analysis Overview
Model harmonic voltage source

Model harmonic current source
User-expandable harmonic source library
Harmonic source defined by either spectrum or device parameters
Generation of harmonic source based on device parameters for VFD, UPS, charger, inverter, SVC
and HVDC
User-selected harmonic source inclusion by device categories
Calculation of various harmonic indices based on IEEE standards
Total Harmonic Distortions (THD) for both bus voltages and branch currents
Total RMS value for both bus voltages and branch currents
Total arithmetic summation value (ASUM) for both bus voltages and branch currents
Telephone Influence Factors (TIF) for both bus voltages and branch currents
I*t product for branch currents
Built-in harmonic filters in different types
Automatic filter sizing based on different criteria
Check and flag filter overloading
Verifying performance of harmonic filters
Graphic one-line display of study results
Slider bar to display fundamental load flow, total and individual harmonic distortion
Graphic plots of voltage and current waveform for viewing and printing
Graphic plots of voltage and current spectrums for viewing and printing
Text report for input data, fundamental load flow results, voltage and current harmonic indices,
tabulated voltage and current harmonic
Crystal Reports for preformatted reports
Flag violations of bus total and individual harmonic distortion limits
Transformer K-factor rating
Alert for VTHD, VIHD, transformer, filter, capacitor, cable
One-line display for capacitor and filter current
Some of the main features of the ETAP Harmonic Frequency Scan Study are summarized below:
Same system and component modeling capabilities for harmonic load flow and fundamental load
flow
Modeling of frequency dependency of rotary machine impedance
Modeling of nonlinearity and frequency dependency of cable/line and transformer impedance
Modeling of frequency dependency of other power system components and loads
Transformer phase shifting
Machine and transformer winding connections and grounding types
Built-in harmonic filters in different types
Automatic filter sizing based on different criteria
User-definable frequency scan range and step
Graphic one-line display of study results
Slider bar to display bus driving point impedance magnitude and phase angle at selected frequencies
Graphic plots of bus driving point impedance in ohms for viewing and printing
Graphic plots of bus driving point impedance phase angle for viewing and printing
Text report for input data, fundamental load flow results, tabulated bus driving point impedance
magnitudes and phase angles
Report resonance frequencies and magnitudes

Harmonic Analysis Study Toolbar
27.1 Study Toolbar

The Harmonic Analysis Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in the Harmonic Analysis
Study Mode. This toolbar has eight function keys as shown below:
Run Harmonic Load Flow
Run Frequency Scan
Display Options
Alert View
Report Manager
Harmonic Analysis Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run Harmonic Load Flow

Select a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar when you are in Harmonic Analysis Study Mode. Click
on the Run Harmonic Load Flow button to perform a Harmonic Load Flow Study. A dialog box will
appear for you to specify the output report name if the output file name is set to Prompt in the Output
Report list box. The Harmonic Load Flow Study results will appear on the one-line diagram and can be
viewed in output report text and plot formats after the calculation completes.
Run Frequency Scan

After selecting a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar, click on the Run - Frequency Scan button to
perform a Harmonic Frequency Scan Study. A dialog box will pop up asking you the output file name if
Prompt is set in the Output Report list box. As in the Harmonic Load Flow Study, study results are
displayed on the one-line diagram and can be viewed in output report text and plot formats after the
calculation completes.
Display Options
Click on the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation display options under
the Harmonic Analysis Study Mode. See Display Options for more information.

Alert View
After performing a Harmonic Load Flow Study or Harmonic Frequency Scan, you can click on this
button to open the Alert View, which lists all equipment with critical and marginal violations based on the
settings in the Study Case.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view optimal power Output Reports.
Transient Stability Analysis Reports are provided in CrystalReport Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich Text,
Summary pages respectively.
The Report Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the
different parts of the report. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed on each page of the
Report Manager.
The preformatted Crystal Reports names are:
Complete Harmonic Source

Adjustments Impedance
Branch Zero Seq Z Line
Branch Machine
Bus Reactor
Cable SVC
Cover Transformer
Filter Load Flow Report
Harmonic Library Results

Alert Freq Scan Filter Overloading

Alert-Complete Summary
Alert-Critical VIHD Report
Alert-Marginal VTHD Report
You can also select output files from the Output Report pull-down list.
This list contains all the output files in the current project folder with the same file extension specified.
The output reports for harmonic load flow studies have an extension of .HA1.

Click on the Harmonic Analysis Plots button to select and plot the curves from the selected output plot
file. The plot file name is the same as the output text file displayed in the Output Report pull-down list.
Plot files for harmonic load flow have .hfp as an extension. Plot files for harmonic frequency scan have
.fsp as an extension.

The stop sign button is normally disabled. When a harmonic load flow or a harmonic frequency scan has
been initiated, this button becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will
terminate the current calculation. The one-line diagram displays and plots will not be available if you
terminate the calculation before it completes, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get Online Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature, you can copy the online data from the
online presentation to the current presentation.
Get Archived Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature, you can copy the archived data to the
current presentation.

Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor

The Harmonic Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, loading conditions, and a variety of
options for Output Reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases.
Load flow calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings of the Study Case
selected in the toolbar. You can easily switch between Study Cases without the trouble of resetting the
Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
diagram presentation, and Base/Revision data.
When you are in Harmonic Analysis mode, you can access the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor by
clicking on the Study Case button from the Harmonic Analysis Study Case toolbar. You can also access
this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Harmonic Analysis Study Case folder.
There are two ways you can create a new Study Case. You can click on the New Study Case button in the
Study Case toolbar, as shown above. It will open the Duplicate Study Case dialog box for you to specify
names of an existing Study Case and the new Study Case you want to create.
You can also create a new Study Case from the Project View, by right-clicking on the Harmonic Analysis
Study Case folder and selecting Create New. ETAP will then create a new Study Case, which is a copy of
the default Study Case, and adds it to the Harmonic Analysis Study Case folder.

When you are in the Harmonic Analysis Mode, you can access the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor
by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from the
Project View by clicking on the Harmonic Analysis subfolder under the Study Cases folder.
The Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor consists of five pages: Info, Plot, Model, and Adjustment,
Alert.

27.2.1 Info Page

This page is provided for you to specify some general solution parameters, loading conditions, report
options, and Study Case information.
Study Case ID
entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the navigator button
at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to another.
Initial Load Flow

In this group you can select a load flow calculation method. The methods available are Newton-Raphson
and Accelerated Gauss-Seidel.
For the Newton-Raphson, a few Gauss-Seidel iterations are made first to establish a set of sound initial
values for the bus voltages (since convergence of the Newton-Raphson Method is highly dependent on
the initial bus voltages).

These settings are used for the fundamental load flow calculation solution control, and apply to both
Harmonic Load Flow and Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number for iterations. If the solution has not converged before the specified number
of iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. When using Accelerated Gauss-Seidel, the
recommended and default value for maximum iteration is 2000. When using Newton-Raphson, the
recommended and default value for maximum iteration is 99.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision, which is used to check for the fundamental load flow
convergence. This value determines how precise you want the final solution to be. When using the
Accelerated Gauss-Seidel method, the default and recommended value for precision is 0.000001. When
using Newton-Raphson, the recommended and default value for precision is 0.0001.
Accel. Factor
Enter the convergence acceleration factor for the fundamental load flow calculation. Typical values are
between 1.2 and 1.7. The default value is 1.45. Note that the Acceleration Factor is not used for Newton-
Raphson.
Frequency Scan
These values are only used for harmonic frequency scan calculations.
From
Specify the starting frequency in Hz for frequency scan. The default is the system fundamental frequency.
To
Specify the finishing frequency in Hz for frequency scan. This value should be greater than the From
frequency and is an integer multiplier of the system fundamental frequency.
Step (df)
Specify the frequency step in Hz. This value is the interval between two adjacent frequency points during
a harmonic frequency scan study, and is a positive integer number.
Plot Step
This value determines the resolution of the frequency scan plot. The smaller it is, the smoother the plot
will look, but requires more data to be recorded. The default value for it is 1, which means every point
calculated from the harmonic frequency scan study will be plotted.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten loading categories for this Study Case. With the selection of any category, ETAP
Rating page for most load components. Harmonic filter loading is calculated from its parameters.
Operating P, Q
loads updated from online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load Flow Study.

Generation Category
Select one of the ten generation categories for the current Optimal Power Flow Study. With the selection
of any category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating
page of the Generator and Power Grid Editors. The generator controls will be different depending on the

Swing %V and Angle
Operating P, Q, V
operating values update from the online data or a previous Load Flow Study will be utilized in the Load
Flow Study.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category group of the Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load group of the Charger Editor.
Note: If this option is selected, it is required that a DC load flow calculation is run first in order to
estimate the charger load.

Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for the fundamental load flow as well as Harmonic Load Flow
and Frequency Scan Analysis. The choices are:
None
Bus Maximum
can define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different maximum
considered.

Bus Minimum
define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.
investigated.
Global
Constant kVA
Constant Z
Constant I
Generic
model.
Study Remarks
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all Study Cases and entered in the Project
Information Editor.

27.2.2 Plot Page

Select the components you want to display on the one-line diagram and in plot format. The selections are
applied to both the Harmonic Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
Device Type
Select the type of components or devices from the list. Only the components associated with the listed
types can be selected for plotting.
Plot Options
Device ID
This table provides a list of the devices or components for the given Device Type.
Plot/Tabulate
You also can include a device or component in the plot list by first selecting that device or component,
and then checking this box. An X will be placed next to this device or component in the Plot/Tabulate
column.

27.2.3 Model Page

This page is provided for you to choose the modeling methods for different types of components.
Skip Harmonic Source

In this group, you can specify globally what types of components you do NOT want to model as harmonic
sources. The results will affect both the Harmonic Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
For example, if a type of component is selected to not be modeled as a harmonic source, then all
components of this type will be modeled as impedances with the appropriate values in both the Harmonic
Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Studies.
Utility
If this box is checked, then all the power grid (utility) components will not contribute harmonics to the
system. This corresponds to the situation where the grid has no or negligible harmonic contamination.

Generator Saturation
If this box is checked, then all synchronous generator components will not be considered as harmonic
sources. This corresponds to the situation that generators are not significantly saturated; thus, they
generate near-ideal sinusoidal voltages.
Transformer Saturation
If this box is checked, then all transformer components, both 2-winding and 3-winding, will not be
considered as harmonic sources. This is true for transformers, which are close to their rated loading
conditions.
Charger/Converter
If this box is checked, then all charger and converter components will not be considered as harmonic
sources.
Inverter
If this box is checked, then all inverter components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
UPS
If this box is checked, then all UPS components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
VFD
If this box is checked, then all VFD components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
Static Load
If this box is checked, then all static load components will not be considered as harmonic sources.
Transmission Line/Cable
This section allows you to select and model transmission line and cable using either the short line model
or the long line model. The short line model is the simple lumped circuit model in Pi equivalent circuit,
whereas the long line model is the distributed circuit model by considering the propagation effect of
current wave and voltage wave. For a 60 Hz system, a line or a cable that is longer than 250 km or 150
mi is considered as a long line or cable.
In this section, first select a type of element, Transmission Line or Cable, then to set up the appropriate
parameters to work with it.
Use Short Line Model

If this option is checked, then the selected category of element will be modeled in a short line model.
Use Long Line Model

If this option is checked, then the element in the selected category will be modeled as a long line model if
the criteria for the length are met.


This page allows the user to specify tolerance adjustments to length, equipment resistance, and
Impedance Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to impedance values for transformer, reactor,
and overload heater.

adjustment in harmonic analysis calculations is to increase the impedance by the specified percent
tolerance value. For example, if the transformer impedance is 12% and the tolerance is 10%, the adjusted
impedance used in the load flow calculation will be 13.2%, resulting in higher losses.

of Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides
any individual transformer tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the reactor impedance. Harmonic Analysis increases the reactor impedance
by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger voltage drop.
For example, if the impedance of the reactor is 0.1 Ohm and its tolerance is 5%, then the adjusted reactor
impedance used in the load flow calculation is 0.105 Ohm.
well by selecting and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the
Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Impedance Adjustment overrides any
individual reactor tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the Overload Heater (OH) resistance. The Load Flow Module increases the
corresponding field of Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Resistance
Length Tolerance
This group allows the user to consider tolerance adjustments to cable and transmission line lengths.

This adjustment is applied to the cable length. Harmonic Analysis increases the cable length by the
and specifying a global tolerance other than 0% in the corresponding field of the Harmonic Analysis
Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides any individual cable
tolerance value.

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line length. Harmonic Analysis increases the transmission
line length by the specified percent tolerance resulting in larger impedance and consequently a larger
voltage drop. For example, if the length of the transmission line is 2 miles and the tolerance is 2.5%, then
the adjusted transmission line length used in the load flow calculation is 2.05 miles.

of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global Length Adjustment overrides
any individual transmission line tolerance value.

This group allows the user to consider resistance correction based on the maximum operating temperature
on the individual cable/line maximum temperature setting or based on a globally specified value.

This adjustment is applied to the cable conductor resistance. Harmonic Analysis adjusts the conductor
resistance based on the maximum operating temperature. If the maximum operating temperature is greater
than the rated base temperature of the conductor, then its resistance is increased.
field of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global temperature correction
value overrides any individual Cable Impedance page maximum temperature. Refer to the Cable Editor
Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).

This adjustment is applied to the transmission line conductor resistance. Harmonic Analysis adjusts the
the corresponding field of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor Adjustment page. The global
temperature correction value overrides any individual Transmission Line Impedance page maximum
temperature. Refer to the Transmission Line Editor Impedance page section in Chapter 12 (AC-Editors).

27.3.4 Alert Page

The Alert page in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor is used to specify the setup of all the
Simulation Alerts provided to notify the user of an abnormal loading condition based on predetermined,
allowable, percent values and system topology. The functional capability of the Simulation Alert
System is to generate alerts when there is an overload in transformers, cables, filters and capacitors. The
alerts are reported either graphically on the one-line diagram or via the Alert View window.

There are two types of simulation alerts generated after a Harmonic Analysis Study. The difference
between Marginal and Critical Alerts is their use of different percent value conditions to determine if an
alert should be generated. If a condition for a Critical Alert is met, then an alert will be generated in the
Alert View window and the overloaded element will turn red in the one-line diagram. The same is true for
Marginal Alerts, except that the overloaded component will be displayed in magenta color. Also, the
Marginal Alerts checkbox must be selected if the user desires to display the Marginal Alerts. If a device
alert qualifies for both Critical and Marginal Alerts, only Critical Alerts are displayed. It should be noted
that in order for ETAP to generate alerts for an element type, both the element rating and the percent

value entered in this page must be non-zero. The element ratings for alert checking are given in the
following groups:
Bus VTHD / VIHD

A Critical or Marginal Alert will be generated based on acceptable bus VIHD/VTHD settings. These
VIHD and VTHD limits are given in IEEE 519-1992 (Recommended Practices and Requirements for
Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems) page 85.
Individual
When this option is selected, ETAP uses VIHD and VTHD limits specified in every individual Bus
Editor.
Global
When this option is selected, VTHD and VIHD limits can be specified globally for all buses. ETAP will
then use these values irrespective of what has been included in individual Bus Editors.
Transformer
A Critical or Marginal Alert will be generated after Harmonic Load Flow Analysis has been run if the
transformer current exceeds the specified percent value. The critical and marginal current ratings are
entered on transformer K factor base.
Filter
Critical or Marginal Alerts will be generated if any filter in the electrical system is subjected to overload
conditions.
Capacitor kV
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if capacitor peak voltage rating is being exceeded in the
harmonic filter. The critical and marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the capacitor rated
maximum kV.
Inductor Amps
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if inductor rms current rating is being exceeded in the harmonic
filter. The critical and marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the inductor allowable maximum
current rating in amps.
Capacitor kV
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if capacitor peak voltage rating is being exceeded. The critical
and marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the capacitor rated maximum kV.
Cable Ampacity
Critical or Marginal Alerts are generated if cable rms current rating is being exceeded. The critical and
marginal alert settings are specified in percent of the cable allowable ampacity. (Cable Editor Ampacity
page).
Frequency Scan
The following conditions are monitored and reported when harmonic frequency scan is run for an
electrical system.

Parallel Resonance
ETAP checks the impedance plot of the bus being plotted to determine possible existence of parallel
resonance in the system.
Generally, the inductive reactance of that power system increases and the capacitive reactance decreases
as the frequency increases. At a given frequency there will be a crossover point where the inductive and
capacitive reactances are almost equal in magnitude but opposite in sign. This point is called the parallel
resonant point. Because industrial system is primarily inductive, every industrial system with a capacitor
has a parallel resonant point. ETAP detects these points of resonance at all buses being plotted and reports
them as alerts.
Parallel resonance causes problems only if a source of harmonics exists at a bus where the frequency of
the harmonic matches or is close to the resonance frequency. This is typically called harmonic resonance.
Harmonic resonance normally results in very high harmonic voltages at the resonant frequency since most
the parallel resonance generates very high impedance at the bus. Harmonic resonance is a steady-state
phenomenon triggered by an event in which the harmonic source changes or the source impedance or
capacitor size changes, such as if capacitors are switched on or off in steps.
IEEE Standard 18-2002, standard for shunt power capacitors, states that power capacitors must withstand
a maximum continuous RMS over voltage of 110% and an overcurrent of 180%, based on the nameplate
rating. This over voltage and overcurrent includes both the fundamental frequency and any harmonic
contributions. The standard also states that the VA rating of the capacitor can't exceed 135%.
Recommended capacitor protection may be done at 135% of its full load current. Protection at a higher
percentage will prevent overcurrent protection from operating during capacitor energizing.

Harmonic Analysis Calculation Methods

The Harmonic Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and
Colors information annotations.
27.3.1 Results Page

Select the result information to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Bus
Select kV or % to display bus voltages in kV or percent of the bus nominal voltage.
Show Units
Click on this checkbox to include or hide bus display units.
Flows
Branch Current
Click on this checkbox to include or suppress one-line displays for branch current and other information
for branches from the harmonic load flow and the harmonic frequency scan calculations.
Show Units
Click on this checkbox to include or hide branch display units.
Total Harmonic Info

In this group, you can select specific information to display for buses and branches. The information is
related to the total harmonic distortion, etc.
Bus Voltage
RMS or ASUM
Choose to display the bus total voltage in RMS or ASUM (Arithmetic Summation) including
contributions from the fundamental component and all harmonic components.
THD or TIF
Choose to display the bus voltage THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) or TIF (Telephone Influence Factor).
Branch Current
RMS or ASUM
Choose to display the branch total current in RMS or ASUM, including contributions from the
fundamental component and all harmonic components.
THD or TIF
Choose to display the branch current THD or TIF.
Frequency Scan
This group sets the option for one-line display of the harmonic frequency scan results.
Z Magnitude
Click on this checkbox to display the bus driving point impedance magnitude.
Z Angle
Click on this checkbox to display the bus driving point impedance phase angle.
Show Unit
Click on this checkbox to show units for the bus display from the harmonic frequency scan study.

27.3.2 AC Page

ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
Relay Display Tag, entered in Info Page of Relay Editor
PT and CT Transformer Rated Turn Ratio
kV
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the impedance values of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.

Motor % LRC

D-Y
one-line diagram.
Composite Mtr
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable


27.3.3 AC-DC Page


ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Charger AC kVA and DC kW (or MVA/MW)
Inverter DC kW and AC kVA (or MW/MVA)
UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Charger AC FLA and DC FLA
Inverter DC FLA and AC FLA
UPS Input, output, and DC FLA
Composite Network
Use Default Options


27.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements on the one-line diagram
Color Theme
A previously-defined color theme can be selected from the list. The selected color theme will be used
Annotations

Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button

Theme Editor
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the global color themes option has been
previously selected.


Power System Harmonic Analysis involves modeling the frequency characteristics of different
components of power systems, computing harmonic indices at given buses and branches, identifying
problems associated with the existing harmonics, and providing an environment to simulate and test any
mitigation methods. This section briefly discusses these topics and prepares you to use the ETAP
Harmonic Analysis Module to carry on your projects or analyze your systems in a most effective way.
27.4.1 Standards Compliance

ETAP Harmonic Analysis Module fully complies with the latest version of the following standards:
IEEE Standards 519-1992, IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in
Electrical Power Systems
ANSI/IEEE Standard 399-1997, IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power
System Analysis (Brown Book)
IEEE Standard 141-1993, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial
Plants (Red Book)
27.4.2 Component Modeling

For Harmonic Analysis, frequency characteristics, and the nonlinearity of power system components must
be recognized and modeled appropriately. Depending on their nature and behavior, these components are
modeled in very different ways.
Nonlinear loads in power systems are essentially either injecting harmonic currents into the system or
applying harmonic voltages at the given points. Therefore, they are conventionally modeled as current
sources and voltage sources with harmonic frequencies. Normal power sources such as power grids or
generators, if they contain harmonic components in their fixed voltages, are modeled as voltage sources
with harmonic frequencies.
Harmonic Current Source

Nonlinear loads that can be modeled as a harmonic current source in ETAP are:
Static Load
UPS
Charger/Converter
VFD
SVC
Transformer
Static loads, chargers/converters and VFDs, if they are modeled as a harmonic current source, will inject
harmonic current into the connected buses.
A saturated transformer can also be modeled as a harmonic current source when it contributes significant
harmonic current into the system (most likely when the transformer is lightly loaded). Harmonic current
source generated by a transformer is normally placed at the primary side; however, if there is a triple nth
harmonic current specified for a transformer and the transformer winding and ground connections do not

allow the triple nth harmonic current to flow in the primary winding, the secondary side and then the
tertiary side will be considered as the location for the harmonic current source.
When a UPS is modeled as a load, it injects harmonic current into the connected bus. On the other hand,
if a UPS is modeled as a branch, then it will inject harmonic current into both the AC input bus and the
AC output bus. As a result, the path from the AC input bus to the AC output bus inside the UPS would be
opened in harmonic load flow calculations.
To model a component as a harmonic current source, go to the Harmonic page of that component and
select an appropriate harmonic current library via the Library button and Harmonic Library Quick Pick
Editor. Magnitudes of harmonic current from a harmonic current source are in percentage of the
component rated fundamental current.
Harmonic Voltage Source

The following components can be modeled as a harmonic voltage source in ETAP:
Power Grid
Synchronous Generator
Inverter
Charger/Converter
Static Load
Polluted power grids (utilities) or saturated synchronous generators can be modeled as harmonic
voltage sources if they contain significant voltage distortion.
Inverters, chargers/converters, and static loads can also be modeled as harmonic voltage sources if they
primarily cause voltage distortion instead of current distortion.
To model a component as a harmonic voltage source, go to the Harmonic page of that component and
select an appropriate harmonic voltage library via the Library button and Harmonic Library Quick Pick
Editor. Magnitudes of harmonic voltage from a harmonic voltage source are in percentage of the nominal
voltage at the connected bus.
Harmonic Impedance for Rotating Machines

If a rotating machine is not modeled as a harmonic source, its equivalent harmonic impedance is its
negative impedance.
Harmonic Impedance for Load Components

For a load or a shunt component, when it is not modeled as a harmonic source, its equivalent harmonic
impedance is calculated from its fundamental loading using an equivalent parallel R and X circuit.
The reactance part of the harmonic impedance for rotating machines and load components are adjusted
linearly based on the order of harmonic.
Harmonic Impedance for Branch Components

Harmonic impedance of a branch component is computed from the impedance at the fundamental
frequency by considering adjustments due to harmonic frequency. For an impedance branch, the
adjustment is linear and only applies to the reactive part. For cable, transmission line, transformer, and
reactor components, the adjustment applies to both the resistive and reactive parts. This is because of the
skip effect and nonlinear change in their reactance under high frequency.

Zero Sequence Impedance

If tripling harmonics (3rd, 6th, 9th, etc.) exist in the system, then zero sequence impedance of a component
is used for the calculation. For rotating machines and some of the branch components, if their zero
sequence impedances are specified in their editors, these impedances will be used with the adjustment to
the harmonic frequency. For other components, their equivalent zero sequence impedances are assumed
to be the same as their positive counterpart. It is very important to point out that for rotating machines
(including the utility grid), transformers and harmonic filters, Delta or Wye connections, grounding
methods, and grounding impedances will all affect the tripling harmonic flow in the system.
Harmonic Indices
The effect of harmonics is usually measured in terms of several indices that are defined below.
Note: The definitions are applied to both voltage and current.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD), also known as Harmonic Distortion Factor (HDF), is the most popular
index to measure the level of harmonic distortion to voltage and current. It is a measure that shows the
ratio of the mean-square-root of all harmonics to the fundamental component. For an ideal system, THD
is equal to zero. THD is determined by:
F i
2
THD = 2
F1
where Fi is the amplitude of the ith harmonic, and F1 is that for the fundamental component.
Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD)

Individual Harmonic Distortion (IHD) simply calculates the ratio of a given harmonic component to the
fundamental component. This value is sometimes used to track the effect of each individual harmonic and
examine its magnitude. IHD is determined by:
Fi
IHD =
F1
Root Mean Square (RMS) - Total

This is the square root of the sum of the squares of the magnitudes of the fundamental plus all harmonics
in the system. For a system with no harmonics at all, the total RMS should be equal to the fundamental
component RMS. The total RMS is determined by:

RMS = F 1
i
2

Arithmetic Summation (ASUM)

This is the arithmetic summation of the magnitudes of the fundamental and all harmonics. It adds the
magnitudes of all components directly to have a conservative estimation of the crest value of voltage and
current, and is useful for the evaluation of the maximum withstanding ratings of a device. ASUM is
determined by:

ASUM = Fi
1
Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)

Telephone Influence Factor (TIF) is a variation of the THD with a different weight given to each of the
harmonics based on its amount of interference to an audio signal in the same frequency range. Normally,
the current TIF has a more significant impact on adjacent communication systems. The TIF is determined
by:
(W F ) i i
TIF = 1
Fi
1
where Wi is the TIF weighting factor. The values for the weighting factors for different harmonic
frequencies are given in the IEEE Standard 519.

ASUM = Fi
1
I*T Product (I*T)

I*T Index is a product of current components (fundamental and harmonics) and weighting factors, as
shown in the formula below:
H
I T = (I
h =1
h Th ) 2
where Ih = current component

Th = weighting factor
h = harmonic order (h=1 for fundamental)
H = maximum harmonic order to account

27.4.3 Harmonic Load Flow Study

The Harmonic Load Flow Study first carries out a load flow calculation at the fundamental frequency.
The results of the fundamental load flow sets the base for the fundamental bus voltages and branch
currents which are used later to calculate different harmonic indices. Then, for each harmonic frequency
at which any harmonic source exists in the system, a direct load flow solution is found by using the
Current Injection Method. The harmonic frequencies considered are all the low order frequencies from
the 2nd to the 15th, plus the characteristic harmonics from the 17th up to the 73rd. Impedance of components
is adjusted based on the harmonic frequencies and the types of components. For a tripling harmonic
frequency, zero sequence impedance is adjusted to the actual frequency, and the zero sequence network is
used.
From the harmonic load flow calculation, the harmonic components for bus voltages and branch currents
are found, and then all harmonic indices are computed accordingly. The computed bus THD and IHDs are
compared with their limits as specified by the user in the Bus Editor and, if any violations are detected,
flags are placed in the text report next to the associated bus in the Harmonic Information section.
The Harmonic Load Flow Study generates output reports showing the system input data, fundamental
load flow results, system harmonic information, and tabulation of bus voltages and branch currents with
all harmonic contents. These results can also be viewed directly from the one-line diagram using the
Harmonic Load Flow Slider and the Harmonic Display Options Editor. Along with the text report and
one-line display, bus voltage and branch current plots are also available to show both voltage and current
waveforms in time domain and the harmonic spectrums in a bar chart.
27.4.4 Harmonic Frequency Scan Study

One particular concern with harmonics is the resonance condition in the power system. Because of the
existence of both inductive components and capacitive components in the system, at certain frequencies,
resonance conditions might occur at some buses. If the resonance occurs at a bus where a harmonic
current is injected into the system, an over voltage condition will be observed.
The ETAP Frequency Scan Program is the best tool to investigate the system resonance problem. It
calculates and plots the magnitudes and phase angles of bus driving point impedance over a frequency
range specified by the user; thus, any parallel resonance condition and its resonance frequency can be
clearly identified. The harmonic frequency scan study also allows users to tune their harmonic filter
parameters and test the final results.
The frequency range for scanning is defined by the user, which starts from the fundamental frequency and
can go as high as the user needs.
The results from the Frequency Scan Study are reported in reports which includes the system input data,
the fundamental load flow results, and a tabulation listing bus driving point impedances. The same
tabulated information is also given on the one-line diagram, as well as in a plot format.

27.4.5 Harmonic Filter

Harmonic filters are extensively used to mitigate harmonic problems. A properly designed harmonic filter
can prevent the harmonic current from injecting into the system, or it can provide a low impedance path at
the tuned frequency to remove a parallel resonance.
The Harmonic Filter Editor provides all the practical and popular filter structures for you to choose from.
A Filter Sizing program is also available in this editor for the Single Tuned filter type, with which users
can optimize the filter parameters based on different installation or operation criteria.
Harmonic filter loading is usually a concern in practical application. Two loading conditions are to be
checked: capacitor Max. kV and inductor Max. I, both of those values are specified in the Harmonic Filter
Editor, Parameter page. The capacitor Max. kV is a peak value, calculated by considering voltage drop
across the capacitor, and the inductor Max. I is an RMS value, calculated by considering current flow
through the inductor.
Note: When calculating these values, all voltage and current components of the fundamental and
harmonics are included. If Filter Overloading is to be considered, check the Filter Overloading checkbox
in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor, Info page. Comparisons will be made between the
calculated values and the specified values by Harmonic Load Flow study. The percentage of overloading
will then be computed and reported in the Filter Overloading report.
27.4.6 Transformer Phase Shift

Properly configuring transformer phase-shift can be helpful for cancellation of certain harmonics, thus
improving system power quality.
The ETAP Harmonic Analysis Module uses transformer phase-shift to adjust network impedance phase
angle in the Harmonic Load Flow study. Transformer phase-shift is specified in the Transformer Editor
Tap page based on transformer connection convention, namely Standard Positive Sequence connection
and Standard Negative Sequence connection. In addition, a user also can specify special phase-shift for a
transformer.

27.5 Required Data

To run a Harmonic Analysis Study, you need to provide all the data required for load flow and short-
circuit calculations. In addition to that, you need to provide some harmonic related data, such as harmonic
sources, modeling methods, and filters. A summary of these data for different types of components is
given in this section.
Note: Except for the harmonic library information, which is required only for the harmonic load flow
study, all other data are mandatory for both the Harmonic Load Flow and the Harmonic Frequency Scan
Studies.
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factors (when Loading is set to Maximum or Minimum Diversity Factor)
Harmonic Limit Category
VTHD (Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion) Limit
VIHD (Voltage Individual Harmonic Distortion) Limit
Branch Data
2-Winding and 3-Winding Transformers

Transformer ID
Bus connections
Rated kV and MVA
Positive and zero sequence impedance and X/R ratios
Z Variation
Z Tolerance
Fixed Tap and LTC settings
Winding connections for all windings
Grounding type and parameters for all windings
Phase Shift as in Standard Positive or Negative Sequence connections, or User-Defined
configurations
Harmonic Library Information, if any
Cable
Cable ID
Bus connections
Cable type, rated kV and size if use library data
Cable's positive and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use user entered
data
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Max temperature

Harmonic Analysis Required Data
Transmission Line
Bus connections
Phase conductor, ground wire and configuration parameters (from library or user enter) if use
calculated value
Lines positive, negative and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use user-
defined value
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Maximum temperature
Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus connections
Positive and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Reactor
Reactor ID
Bus connections
Positive and zero sequence impedance and X/R ratios
Impedance Tolerance
Protective Device Data

Protective Device ID
Bus and branch connections
Status
Machine Data
Power Grid Data

Power Grid ID
Bus connection
Operating Mode (Swing, Voltage Control, Mvar Control or PF Control)
Rated kV
3-Phase and 1-Phase MVAsc and X/R values
Harmonic Library information, if any

Bus connection

Rated MW
Rated kV
Rated %PF
Rated MVA
Rated %Eff
Number of poles
Negative Sequence Impedance X2
Zero Sequence Impedance X0
Machine Negative Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X2/R2
Machine Zero Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X0/R0
Negative Sequence Resistance R2
Zero Sequence Resistance R0
Winding connection
Grounding connection type and parameters

Synchronous Motor ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated power factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings
Rated efficient and efficient factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings
Negative Sequence Impedance X2
Zero Sequence Impedance X0
Machine Negative Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X2/R2
Machine Zero Sequence Impedance X/R Ratio X0/R0
Negative Sequence Resistance R2
Zero Sequence Resistance R0
Winding connection

Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP

Rated kV
Negative sequence impedance X2
Zero sequence impedance Xo
X/R Ratio
Winding connection
MOV Data
MOV ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated Power Factor
Rated Efficiency
Load Data
Static Load Data

Static Load ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Status and associated Demand Factors
Rated kV
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated Power Factor
Lumped Load Data

Lumped Load ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Model type

Unbalanced load
Comprehensive load
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Panel Schedule
Panel Schedule ID
Phase connection
Rating per phase (circuit) for internal link (load)
Connection and loads for each external link (load)
Loading Category ID and % Loading for each loading category for each phase (circuit)
Harmonic Filter Data

Harmonic Filter ID
Bus connection
Status
Filter Type
Rated kV and 1-Phase kvar for capacitors
Xl and Q factor for reactors
R, if applicable
AC-DC Device Data
UPS
UPS ID
Bus connections
Rated AC kW/MW
Rated % PF & % EFF

Harmonic Library information, if any and Harmonic Library option is selected

Harmonic related parameters, if any and UPS Parameters option is selected
VFD
VFD ID
Input Bus and Load connections
Harmonic Library Information, if any and User Library Data option is selected
Harmonic related parameters, if any and Calculated Based on Parameters option is selected
Charger
Charger ID
Bus Connections
Status and Associated Demand Factor
AC Ratings
Harmonic Library information, if any and Use Library Data option is selected
Harmonic related parameters, if any and Calculate Based on Parameters option is selected
Inverter
Inverter ID
CC Bus connection
AC Bus connection
AC Rating: rated AC output kV, rated AC power rating kVA/MVA or FLA, rated power factor
CD Rating: rated DC input voltage, rated DC power rating kW/MW or FLA, rated efficiency
AC Output Voltage in %
Harmonic Library information, if any and Harmonic Library option is selected
Harmonic related parameters, if any and Inverter Parameters option is selected

Study Case ID
Max. Iteration
Precision
Accel. Factor
From frequency (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
To frequency (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Step (df) (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Plot Step (for Harmonic Frequency Scan)
Loading Category
Loading Condition (Operating P, Q flag)
Const. kVA, Const Z, Const. I and Generic load for Global Load Diversity Factor
Charger Loading condition (from Loading Category or from Operating Load)
Devices/elements to be plotted
Exclude Harmonic Source information
Transmission Line/Cable information
Adjustment information
Alert information

Harmonic Analysis Output Reports
27.6 Output Reports

Output Reports for Harmonic Analysis Studies are available in different levels and are arranged into three
formats: Crystal Report, one-line diagram displays, and plots.

picture shown below, the Output Report name is HA-LF and the selected Output Report is the Complete
Crystal Report.

27.6.2 Harmonics Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar to open the Harmonics Report
Manager. The Harmonics Report Manager provides five formats for report text. They are Crystal
Reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and MS Excel formats. The
Harmonics Report Manager consists of four pages.
Complete Page
From this page you can select the report format that gives you the Complete Output Report.

A sample of the Complete Report is shown below:

Input Page
This page provides the reports for different input data. The following reports are available:
Adjustments
Branch Zero Seq Z
Branch
Bus
Cable
Cover
Filter
Harmonic Library
Harmonic Source
Impedance
Line
Machine
Reactor
SVC
Transformer

A sample of the Harmonic Library Report is shown below.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results. The following two formats are available:
Load Flow Report

Results

A sample of the Results Report is shown below.

Summary Page
This page provides the formats for different summaries from both input data and calculation results. The
following formats are available:
Alert Freq Scan

Alert-Complete
Alert-Critical
Alert-Marginal
Filter Overloading
Summary
VIHD Report
VTHD Report

A sample of the Summary Report is shown below.

Harmonic Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results
27.6.3 Harmonic Frequency Scan Report

If the last study you have run is the harmonic frequency scan, then by clicking on the Report Manager
button on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar you will be able to open and view the Crystal Report for the
Harmonic Frequency Scan Study.
The Harmonic Frequency Scan Report shares the same sections for Cover Page, Adjustments, Bus Input
Data, branch input data, Branch Connections, Machine Input Data, as the Harmonic Load Flow Report. It
does not have Harmonic Library Data and Harmonic Source Data, since the harmonic frequency scan
does not actually use any harmonic source information. The main results from the Harmonic Frequency
Scan Study are listed in Frequency Scan section.
Frequency Scan
This section of the repot shows the driving point impedance, and its magnitude and phase angle, at each
frequency point as specified in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor.
Note: Only the buses that are selected for plotting are tabulated. Below is a
sample from this section of the report.


The one-line diagram displays the study results after the current calculation is complete. Based on the
study type and selected options from the Display Options, different results are displayed.
27.7.1 Harmonic Load Flow Display

By using the Harmonic Load Flow Slider and the Harmonic Analysis Display Options Editor, you can
choose different results to be displayed on the one-line diagram for the harmonic load flow analysis study.
Harmonic Order Slider

The Harmonic Order Slider is located on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar. It will be shown automatically
after a harmonic load flow study is done. To make it visible, you need to check the Harmonic Order
Slider option under the View menu. This slider has three sections. They are: Total, 1 (fundamental
frequency), and h (a harmonic order from 2 to 73 depending on which harmonic sources existing in the
system). To set the slider to different positions, put your mouse pointer on top of the pointer, hold the left
mouse button down, and then drag it to the desired location on the slider.
Position Total
At this position, harmonic information of buses and branches is displayed. The information displayed is:
Bus Voltage RMS or ASUM, and Bus Voltage THD or TIF

Branch Current RMS or ASUM, and Branch Current THD or TIF
Position 1 (Fundamental Frequency)
At this position, the fundamental load flow results are displayed. The information displayed is:
Bus Voltage Magnitude in kV or in Percent of the bus nominal voltage base

Bus Voltage Phase Angle in Degree
Branch Current in Amperes
Branch Current in Percent of fundamental current base

Positions Harmonic Order h (h from 2 to 73)
At this position, the bus voltages and branch currents for the given harmonic order are displayed. The
information displayed is:
Bus Voltage Magnitude in kV or in Percent of the bus nominal voltage base

Bus Voltage phase angle in degree
Branch Current in Amperes
Branch Current in Percent of the fundamental current base
The following screen capture shows a one-line diagram display with the slide position at Total.

27.7.2 Harmonic Frequency Display

By using the Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider and the Harmonic Analysis Display Options Editor, you
can choose different results to display on the one-line diagram for the Harmonic Frequency Scan Analysis
Study.
Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider

The Harmonic Frequency Scan Slider is located on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar. It will be shown
automatically after a harmonic frequency scan is done. To make it visible, you need to check the
Harmonic Frequency Slider option under the View menu. This slider goes from the From frequency to
the To frequency with a step change of the Plot Step specified by the user. The values of From frequency,
To frequency, and Plot Step are all specified in the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor. You can use
the same technique as described for the Harmonic Order Slider to move the pointer to any available
frequency and see the one-line diagram display changes.
The Harmonic Frequency Slider displays the magnitude and phase angle of the bus driving point
impedance for the selected frequency. Only those buses, which are selected in the Harmonic Study Case
Editor for plotting, are available to display. The following is a screen capture of a Harmonic Frequency
Scan one-line display.

27.8 Plots
Plots are available for both the Harmonic Load Flow Study and the Harmonic Frequency Scan Study.
27.8.1 Harmonic Analysis Plot Selection

The plot files share the same name as the output files. To select a plot, click on the Harmonic Analysis
Plots button located on the Harmonic Analysis toolbar.
Harmonic Load Flow

Check this option button for plots of the Harmonic Load Flow Study.
Frequency Scan
Check this option button for plots of the Harmonic Frequency Scan Study.
Device Type
Select a device type from the list.
Device ID
Select the devices that you want to plot from the list. This box lists all the devices, which are selected in
the Harmonic Study Case Editor, Plot page, for the selected device type. Multiple devices can be selected.
Plot Type
For Harmonic Load Flow plots, the following curves are available:
Waveform
Plot voltage or current waveforms for the selected devices. Curves are plotted in the time domain for one
cycle duration. The scale for voltage waveform is in percent of the nominal bus voltage. The scale for
current waveform is in percent of the fundamental branch current.

Spectrum
Plot voltage or current harmonic spectrum. Voltage is in percent of the bus nominal voltage base and
current is in percent of its fundamental component base.
The following curves are available for harmonic frequency scan plots:
Z Magnitude
Plot the driving point impedance magnitudes for buses in Ohms.
Z Angle
Plot the driving point impedance angles for buses in radians.
Display
The harmonic plot X-axis can be set to the following:
Order
Display Harmonic Spectrum from Harmonic Load Flow or Z magnitude and Z Angle from Harmonic
Frequency Scan with respect to harmonic order.
Hz
Display Harmonic Spectrum from Harmonic Load Flow or Z magnitude and Z Angle from Harmonic
Frequency Scan with respect to harmonic frequency in Hz.

27.8.2 Harmonic Load Flow Plots

A set of sample plots for a Harmonic Load Flow Study is shown below.

27.8.3 Harmonic Frequency Scan Plots

A set of sample plots for a Harmonic Frequency Scan Study is shown below.

27.8.3 Alert View

The functional objective of the Alert View is to provide an immediate list of all the alerts generated by the
Harmonic Analysis calculation. The Alert View window may be configured to automatically display as
soon as the Harmonic Analysis calculation is over by selecting the Auto Display checkbox in the Alarm
page of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case. It may also be accessed by a left-click on the Alert View
icon. The Alert View provides several tabulated sections of information about the reported alerts.
Device ID
The Device Identification group of the Alert View lists the names of all the components that qualified as
alerts after the load flow calculation.
Type
The Type group of the Alert View displays information about the type of the device having the displayed
alert.
Condition
The Condition group of the Alert View provides a brief comment about the type of alert being reported.
In the case of harmonic alerts such exceeding limits.
Rating/Limit
The Rating group of the Alert View provides the rating information being used by the Harmonic Analysis
Module to determine whether an alert should be reported and of what kind.
Operating
The Calculated group of the Alert View displays the results from the Harmonic calculation. The results
listed here are used in combination with those displayed in the ratings section to determine the operating

percent values. These values are then compared to those entered in the Alert page of the Harmonic
Analysis Study Case Editor.
%Operating
This group displays the percent operating values calculated based on the harmonic results and the
different element ratings. The values displayed here are directly compared to the percent of monitored
parameters entered directly into the Alert page of the Harmonic Analysis Study Case Editor. Based on the
element type, system topology and given conditions, the Alert Simulation program uses these percent
values to determine if and what kind of alert should be displayed.
Harmonic
Displays the Harmonic Order for which the alarm is generated.

Chapter 28
Optimal Power Flow Analysis

The ETAP Optimal Power Flow (OPF) Module is an extremely powerful simulation program for power
system design, planning, and operation. It solves power system load flow, but at the same time can
optimize system operating conditions and automatically adjust control variable settings, while ensuring
system operating constraints are not violated. The optimized system will reduce the installation and/or
operating cost, improve system overall performance, and increases its reliability and security. Besides
minimizing the operating and installation cost, the program also provides a variety of other choices of
optimization objectives, which covers virtually all the optimization criteria for a real power system. Any
practical control means in a power system such as transformer LTC, generator AVR control, shunt and
series compensations, and load shed can all be considered in the calculation. Constraints for bus voltage,
branch flow in different types (MVA, MW, Mvar, and Amp), as well as control variable adjustable
bounds are also available for users to select and enforce. By using state-of-the-art optimization
algorithms and advanced programming techniques, this program is proven very capable, robust, and
effective. Systems with over 20,000 buses can be solved at incredible speed.

Optimal Power Flow Overview
Some of the key features of the Optimal Power Flow Program are summarized below:
Common and integrated database

Fully inherited 3-D data structure, including infinite presentations, unlimited configurations, &
multiple data revisions
Handles Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with multiple swing buses
Systems with isolated sub-systems
Systems with zero impedance branches (tie circuit breakers)
Systems with de-energized buses and branches
Automatic adjustment of cable/line resistance according to operating temperatures
Automatic adjustment of overload heater resistance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of cable/line length according to their tolerance
Automatic adjustment of transformer impedance according to tolerance
Automatic adjustment of current limiting reactor impedance according to tolerance
Multiple loading categories
Multiple generation categories
Load diversity factors
Accurate AC modeling
State-of-the-art Interior Point Algorithm
Logarithmic Barrier Function (handles both equality & inequality constraints)
Primal-Dual Direction Search Method
Controlled solution parameters
Minimize system real power losses
Minimize system reactive power losses
Minimize swing bus power
Minimize shunt Mvar devices
Minimize fuel cost
Minimize series compensation
Minimize generation cost
Minimize control movement
Minimize control adjustment
Maximize voltage security indexes
Maximize line flow security indexes
Flatten voltage profile
User-defined objective functions
Bus voltage constraint
Line flow constraint
Control limit constraint
Generator Var limit constraint
Transmission interface limit constraint
Smooth function of any variables
Generator MW & Mvar control
Transformer LTC control
Transformer phase-shifter control
Shunt compensation control
Series compensation control
Switching capacitor control

Optimal Power Flow Study Toolbar
28.1 Study Toolbar

The Optimal Power Flow Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in Optimal Power Flow
Study Mode. This toolbar has six function keys, as shown below:
Run Optimal Power Flow
Display Options
Report Manager
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
Run Optimal Power Flow

Select a Study Case from the Study Case toolbar when you are in Optimal Power Flow Analysis Study
Mode. Click on the Run Optimal Power Flow button to perform an Optimal Power Flow Study. A
dialog box will appear for you to specify the Output Report name if the output file name is set to Prompt
in the Output Report drop-down list. The Optimal Power Flow Study results will appear on the one-line
diagram and can be viewed in output report text and plot formats after the calculation completes.
Display Options
Click on the Display Options button to customize the one-line diagram annotation display options under
the Optimal Power Flow Analysis Study Mode. See Display Options for more information.
Report Manager
Click on the Report Manager button to select a format and view Optimal Power Flow Output Reports.
Transient Stability Analysis reports are provided in Crystal Report Viewer, PDF, MS Word, Rich Text,
Summary pages, respectively.
The Report Manager provides four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) for viewing the
different parts of the report. Available formats for Crystal Reports are displayed on each page of the
Report Manager.

You can also select output files from the Output Report drop-down list.
This list contains all the output files in the current project folder with the same file extension specified.
To change output file extensions, you can click on the List Output Reports button next to the Output
Report drop-down list, which will allow you to select a different output file extension.
The Output Reports for Optimal Power Flow Studies have an extension of .OP1.


The stop sign button is normally disabled. When an optimal power flow has been initiated, this button
becomes enabled and shows a red stop sign. Clicking on this button will terminate the current calculation.
The one-line diagram displays and plots will not be available if you terminate the calculation before it
completes, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get On-Line Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is enabled in your ETAP. Click this
button to use Real-Time values such as loading, bus voltages, etc., as your initial conditions for OPF.
Note: This function can allow you to optimize the existing operation of your system. EMS uses OPF
calculations for optimization on-line. See the EMS chapter for more details.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is enabled in your ETAP. Click this button
to use Archived values such as loading, bus voltages, etc as your initial conditions for OPF.
Note: Using archived values gives you the opportunity to study previous operating conditions from any
of ETAP Modules and define alternate solutions.

Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor

The Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, objective selections,
constraint settings, control variable activation, system loading conditions, and report options. ETAP
allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases for each type of study. Like any other
study types, you can easily switch between different Optimal Power Flow Study Cases. This feature is
designed to organize your study efforts and save you time.
A Study Case can be used for any combination of configuration status, one-line diagram presentation, and
Base/Revision Data.
To create a new Optimal Power Flow Study Case, go to the Project Editor, right-click on the Optimal
Power Flow sub-folder inside the Study Cases folder, and select Create New. The program will then
create a new Study Case, which is a copy of the default Study Case, and adds it to the Optimal Power
Flow sub-folder.
When you are in Optimal Power Flow Study Mode, you can access the Optimal Power Flow Study Case
Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor
from the Project Editor by clicking on the Optimal Power Flow sub-folder under the Study Cases folder.
The Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor consists of the following nine pages: Info page, Objective
page Bus Voltage Constraint page, and Branch Flow Constraint page, LTC page, Generator AVR page,
Generator MW page, Shunt Comp page, and Adjustment page.

28.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
ID and entering a new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Use the
Solution Parameters
Barrier Factor
This is the fixed value of barrier factor used in the barrier function. It is defaulted to 0.0000001. The
program starts the barrier factor at 1 and will automatically reduce it during the calculation iteration.

Power Mismatch
This is the power flow mismatch. The default value is 0.001 per unit on 1 MVA base.
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number of iterations. If the solution has not converged at the specified number of
iterations, the program will stop and inform the user. The recommended and default value is 50.
Advanced
Click on this button to open up the Advanced Solution Parameter Editor and set additional solution
parameters for the Optimal Power Flow Study.
Advanced Solution Parameter Editor

Currently there is only one parameter available in this editor.
Objective Precision
This parameter defines the precision for the objective function convergence. The default value is 0.001.
It is recommended that you do not change this parameter in most cases.
Loading Category
Select one of the ten Loading Categories for this Study Case. With the selection of any category, ETAP
Rating page for most load components. Harmonic filter loading is calculated from its parameters.
Operating P, Q
loads updated from online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the Load Flow Study.
Generation Category
Select one of the ten generation categories for the current Optimal Power Flow Study. With the selection
of any category, ETAP uses the generator controls for the selected category, as specified in the Rating
page of the Generator and Power Grid Editors. The generator controls will be different depending on the


Swing %V and Angle
Note: In optimal power flow calculation, a generator or a power grid can be set as an AVR (voltage)
control and/or a MW control. In such a case, the generation controls from the Generation Category will
be superseded by the optimal power flow control settings.
Operating P, Q, V
operating values update from the online data or a previous load flow study will be utilized in the load
flow study.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category group of the Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load group of the Charger Editor.

Apply appropriate load diversity factor(s) for the fundamental load flow as well as Harmonic Load Flow
and Frequency Scan Analysis. The choices are:
None
Bus Maximum
can define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different maximum
considered.
Bus Minimum

define the initial loading for Harmonic Analysis Studies with each bus having a different minimum
diversity factor.
investigated.
Global
Constant kVA
Constant Z
Constant I
Generic
model.
Initial Condition
purposes.
Use Bus Voltage

Select this option to use bus voltages and angles as entered in the Info page of the Bus Editor. Using this
option, you can set load flow initial conditions to use bus voltages.
Use Fixed Voltage

This option allows you to set initial load flow conditions using a fixed bus voltage magnitude and phase
angle for all buses. When you select the fixed initial condition option, you must enter the initial voltage
value as the percent of the bus nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude
and zero degree for bus voltage angle.
Fuel / Energy Cost

This section is for selecting a generator and/or a power grid fuel/energy cost category.
Cost Profile
Select a fuel/energy cost category from the list. The fuel/energy functions in the selected category will be
used for fuel minimization calculation.

Update
This section is for updating the control settings from Optimal Power Flow Study results.
Note: Only those controls, which are activated for the present Study Case, will be updated if their settings
are ever changed.
Generator Voltage
If this box is checked, the generator and the power grid operating voltage will be updated.
LTC
If this box is checked, the transformer operating LTC will be updated.
Generator var
If this box is checked, the generator and the power grid operating kvar/Mvar will be updated.
Generator MW
If this box is checked, the generator and the power grid operating kW/MW will be updated.
Shunt Compensation
If this box is checked, the operating kvar/Mvar for the shunt compensation components (capacitor and
SVC) will be updated.
Infeasibility Handling Editor

Click on the Infeasibility Handling button to open this editor.

Strategy
This section provides different strategies for handling infeasibility due to various conflicts in objective
functions, constraints, and power balancing equations that might be encountered during the optimal power
flow calculation. The selected strategy will be automatically enforced if an infeasible condition occurs
during the calculation.
Relax Generator Voltage Constraints

Select this option to remove constraints on the generator and the power grid voltages.
Relax Load Bus Voltage Constraints

Select this option to remove constraints on the load bus voltages.
Relax All Voltage Constraints

Select this option to remove voltage constraints on all buses, including the generator and the power grid
buses and the load buses.
Ignore and Continue

Select this option to continue the optimization without any of the constraint relaxation. The calculation
will continue until either a feasible solution is reached within the given number of iterations or the
maximum number of iterations is reached.
Quit Calculation
Select this option to quit the calculation once infeasibility is encountered.

28.2.1 Objective Page

This page is provided for you to choose the objectives for this Study Case.
Objective Selection
Select objectives for this Study Case. You can select multiple objectives and use the weight factors to
combine them.
Minimize Real Power Losses

Select this option to minimize the real power losses in the system.
Minimize Reactive Power Losses

Select this option to minimize the reactive power losses in the system.

Minimize Swing Bus Power

Select this option to minimize the real power generation at the swing bus(es).
Minimize Shunt var Devices

Select this option to minimize the utilization of the var generation from available shunt var control
devices.
Note: When this objective is selected, you must specify some shunt devices (capacitors) on the Shunt
Comp page.
Minimize Fuel Cost

Select this option to minimize the total generation cost from the available generators.
Note: When this objective is selected, you must specify some generator MW controls on the Generator
MW page.
Minimize Series Compensation

Select this option to minimize the utilization of the var generation from the available series var control
devices. This objective is temporarily disabled.
Minimize Load Shedding

Select this option to minimize the load to be shed from the available bus load shed schedule. This
objective is temporarily disabled.
Minimize Control
There are two ways to minimize controls. One is to minimize control movement. In this case, the total
number of controls to be adjusted is minimized. Another way is to minimize the control adjustment. In
this case, the overall adjustment from all controls is minimized. All the controls selected in the Study
Case such as LTC, Shunt Comp., etc are affected.
Optimize Voltage Security Index

Select this option to optimize bus voltage security index. The following bus voltage security index
function will be minimized:
2n
All Buses
Vi Vi ,avg
J=
i dVi
where
Vi,avg = (Vi,max + Vi,min)/2

dVi = (Vi,max Vi,min)/2

Optimize Line Flow Security Index

Select this option to optimize line flow security index. The following line flow security index function
will be minimized by:
2n
All Branches Pj
J=
F

j j
where Pj is the line real power flow and F j is the line (branch) flow constraint maximum limit.
Flat Voltage Profile

Select this option to optimize the system control variable settings for a flat bus voltage profile, i.e., the
voltage magnitude differences for all the buses are minimal.
Weight
Assign weighting factors for the each objective. A larger weighting factor represents a higher weight and
will be given to its associated objective.
Exponent
Variable n in the associated bus voltage and line flow index functions.

28.2.2 LTC Page

This page allows you to choose the LTC controls and set weighting factors. Min Tap and Max Tap are
directly from the transformer LTC parameters.
Active Controls
This box lists the information on all of the selected transformer LTCs, including their associated
transformer ID, location (primary, secondary, or tertiary), maximum and minimum taps, and weighting
factor. Only the selected LTCs are treated as active controls in the optimization process.
Select / Deselect Buttons

First highlight a generator from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the generators
in the system for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted
generator into the Active Controls box. Highlighting a generator in the Active Controls box and clicking

on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button to become an inactive
control.
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available generators in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the available generators in the system. Select the By Category option
to show the available generators by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories
can be chosen. For generator AVR control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone.
An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option
is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Weight
This sets the weighting factors for the selected LTC controls. You need to set the weighting factor first
before you click on the Select button to activate an LTC. This number determines the weight between
different LTC controls, with 100% being the maximum and highest weight.

28.2.3 Generator AVR Page

This page allows you to choose the generator voltage (AVR) controls and set weighting factors, Vmax
and Vmin values. MVA rating is directly from the Generator Editors.
Active Control
This box lists information on the entire selected generator AVR controls, including the generator ID,
MVA rating, voltage control range, and weighting factor. Only the selected generators are treated as
active controls in the optimization process.


on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button to become an inactive
control.
Selection Option
All / By Category
can be chosen. For generator AVR control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone.
An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option
is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Vmax / Vmin
This option sets the maximum and minimum voltage limits (in %) for the selected generator AVR
controls. You need to set Vmax and Vmin first before you click on the Select button to activate a
generator AVR control.
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected generator AVR controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a generator AVR control. This
number determines the weight between different generators AVR controls, with 100% the maximum and
the highest weight.

28.2.4 Generator MW Page

This page allows you to choose the generator and/or utility real power control and set weighting factors.
MVA, Max MW and Min MW are directly for the Generator Editors.
Active Control
This box lists information on the entire selected generator/power grid MW controls, including the
generator ID, MVA rating, MW control range, and weighting factor. Only the selected generators/power
girds are treated as active controls in the optimization process.


on the Deselect button will move that generator into the box underneath the button and become an
inactive control.
Selection Option
All / By Category
can be chosen. For generator MW control, there are two categories available: By Area and By Zone. An
area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for By Zone. The By Category option is
temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected generator MW controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a generator MW control. This
number determines the weight between different generator MW controls, with 100% being the maximum
and the highest weight.

28.2.5 Shunt Comp Page

This page allows you to choose the shunt compensation controls and set their associated parameters.
Active Controls
This box lists information on all the selected shunt compensation controls, including the device ID, Mvar
range, initial Mvar, and weighting factor. Only the selected shunt compensation devices are treated as
active controls in the optimization process.

First highlight a shunt compensation device from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists
all the generators in the system for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move
the highlighted generator into the Active Controls box. Highlighting a shunt compensation device in the

Active Controls box and clicking on the Deselect button will move that device into the box underneath
the button and become an inactive control.
Capacitor and SVC are the shunt compensation devices.
Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the available shunt compensation devices in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the available shunt compensation devices in the system. Select the By
Category option to show the shunt compensation devices by category. Either one or any number of
combinations of the categories can be chosen. For shunt compensation control, there are two categories
available: By Area and By Zone. An area number needs to be given for By Area and a zone number for
By Zone. This option is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Min Mvar
This option sets the minimum Mvar limit for the selected shunt compensation controls. You need to set
Min Mvar before you click on the Select button to activate a shunt compensation control. This value
should be 0 or negative for the capacitive power compensation (reactive power into the system).
Max Mvar
The same as Min Mvar, but the Max Mvar option sets the maximum Mvar limit for the selected shunt
compensation controls. This value should be negative for the capacitive power compensation (reactive
power into the system).
Initial Mvar
The same as Min Mvar and Max Mvar, but the Initial Mvar option sets the initial Mvar for the selected
shunt compensation controls. This value should be negative for the capacitive power compensation
(reactive power into the system).
Weight
This sets the weighting factors for the selected shunt compensation controls. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to activate a shunt compensation control. This
number determines the weight between different shunt compensation controls, with 100% being the
maximum and the highest weight.

28.2.6 Bus Voltage Constraint Page

This page allows you to set the bus voltage constraints and their associated parameters.
Enforced Constraints
This box lists information on all the enforced bus voltage constraints for load buses, including the bus ID,
bus kV rating, range of variation and weighting factor. Only the selected buses are constrained in the
optimization process.

First highlight a bus from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all buses in the system
for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted bus into the
Enforced Constraints box. Highlighting a bus in the Enforced box and clicking on the Deselect button
will move that bus into the box underneath the button and become an unconstrained bus.

Selection Option
Specify a category to show all the load buses in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the load buses in the system. Select the By Category option to show
the load buses by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories can be chosen.
For bus voltage constraints, there are three categories available: By Area, By Zone and By kV. An area
number needs to be given for By Area, a zone number for By Zone, and a kV rating for By kV. This
option is temporarily disabled.
Default Settings
Max. V
This option sets the maximum voltage limit in percent of bus nominal voltage for the selected bus
voltages. You need to set Max. V first before you click on the Select button to enforce that bus voltage
constraint.
Min. V
The same as Max. V, but this option sets the minimum voltage limit in percent of bus nominal voltage for
the selected bus voltages.
Weight
This option sets the weighting factors for the selected bus voltage constraints. You need to set the
weighting factor first before you click on the Select button to enforce a bus voltage constraint. This
number determines the weight between different bus voltage constraints, with 100% being the maximum
and the highest weight.

28.2.7 Branch Flow Constraint Page

This page allows you to set the branch (line) flow constraints and their associated parameters.
Enforced Constraints
This box lists information on all the enforced branch flow constraints for load buses, including the branch
ID, branch type, constraint type, base rating, maximum and minimum allowable branch flow, and
weighting factor. Only the selected branches are constrained in the optimization process.

First highlight a branch from the box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all branches in the
system for the specified Select option. Then click on the Select button to move the highlighted branch
into the Enforced Constraints box. Highlighting a branch in the Enforced box and clicking on the
Deselect button will move that branch into the box underneath the button and become an unconstrained
bus.

Selection Option
Specify a category to show all branches in that category.
All / By Category
Select the All option to show all of the branches in the system. Select the By Category option to show the
branches by category. Either one or any number of combinations of the categories can be chosen. For
bus branch flow constraints, there are three categories available: Xfmr, Cable, and Reactor.
Default Settings Button

Click on this button to bring up the Branch Flow Constraint Editor.
From this box you can set and edit constraint parameters for different types of branches. All the
parameters need to be set before clicking on the Select button to enforce constraints for any branches.
Constraint
Choose a type of branch flow to constrain. There are four types of branch constraints available: MW,
Mvar, MVA, and Amp.
Max.
Maximum branch flow limit in percent of the base of branch rating for the given branch type and
constraint type.
Min.
Minimum branch flow limit in percent of the base of branch rating for the given branch type and
constraint type.

Optimal Power Flow Display Options

The Optimal Power Flow Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and
Colors info annotations.
28.3.1 Results Page

This page controls the result annotations of the OPF which are displayed on the one-line diagram.

Voltage
Voltage
From the dropdown list, select either % (percent of bus nominal kV) or kV.
Bus
Click on this checkbox to display bus voltages.
Power Flows
kVA or MVA
Select kVA or MVA from the dropdown list.
KW + jkvar, kVA, and Amp

Select the kW + jkvar, kVA, or Amp option to display the corresponding power flows.
%PF
Check this box to display branch flow units.
Meters
Select from the checkboxes in this section to display readings for the corresponding meters. Meter
readings available for display are:
Ammeter
Voltmeter
Multi-Meter
Show Units
Check this box to show units for all flow displays.
Required Setting
Select options in this section to display the required control changes/updates. Controls whose required
settings can be displayed are:
Generator V
Generator Mvar
LTC
Shunt Compensation
Show Final Results

Click on this option to display the final value of the control variables.
Show Requested Changes

Click on this option to display the delta changes of the control variables. This option is temporarily
disabled.
Elements
Click on any or all of the checkboxes in this section to display annotation information.

28.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.

Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z
one-line diagram.

Motor % LRC
D-Y
one-line diagram.

Composite Motor
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable


28.3.3 AC-DC Page

ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.

Device Type Rating

UPS KVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Use Default Options


28.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements on the one-line diagram
Color Theme
whenever the Global Theme option button is selected.
Annotations

Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
selected.

Optimal Power Flow Calculation Methods

In traditional load flow studies, the final settings of many system control parameters are based on the
engineers experience and judgment. Sometimes an iterative process is required to reach the final overall
satisfactory settings. This process can be very exhaustive for large systems. These system control
parameters are typically transformer LTC settings, generator MW generation or fuel cost, generator AVR
settings or reactive power generations, series and shunt static var compensation device settings, the
amount of load shed, and some others. In practice, any of those control settings or any combination of
them can be used in a particular system. The Optimal Power Flow Study can be understood as an
intelligent load flow. It employs an optimization technique to automatically adjust the power system
control settings while it solves the load flow equation at the same time. Moreover, it allows you to
specify a wide range of optimization criteria for your system and enforce limits on system quantities (bus
voltage, line flow, etc.) during the optimization process. These optimization criteria are called objectives,
usually the system performance indexes, and the limits are called constraints.
Mathematically, the optimal power flow study can be expressed as:
Min = f(x,u) (1)
subject to the equality constraints:
P(x,u) = 0 (2)
Q(x,u) = 0 (3)
and the inequality constraints:
umin u umax (4)

y(x,u)min y(x,u) y(x,u)max (5)
where:
x = Bus voltage vector, called state variable set

u = System control vector, called control variable set
f = Objective functions, expressed in terms of x and u
y = System output vector, a variable set typically including line flows, etc.
as a function of x and u
P = Real power, expressed in terms of x and u
Q = Reactive power, expressed in terms of x and u
Equation (1) indicates the specified objective function to be minimized or optimized. Equations (2) and
(3) show the system power balance equation (load flow equation) to be solved. Equation (4) specifies the
control upper and lower limits, and equation (5) sets the upper and lower limits for output variables.
The ETAP Optimal Power Flow Analysis uses the state-of-the-art interior point optimization technique
with the logarithm barrier function and the prime-dual direction searching method. The algorithm is very
efficient and robust, suitable for large size systems with both equality and inequality constraints. On the
power system modeling side, a true AC model is used, which makes it possible for this program to
achieve the ultimate accuracy and capability in solving power system optimal power flow problems of
any size under any feasible conditions.

Optimal Power Flow Required Data
28.5 Required Data

The Optimal Power Flow Study essentially requires all the data needed for a regular Load Flow Study,
plus a few additional data specific for the optimal power flow calculation, and all the settings in the
Optimal Power Flow Study Case Editor. A summary of the required data for different types of
components for OPF calculations is given in this section.
Bus Data
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Load Diversity Factors (Loading Option is Set to Max or Min Diversity Factor)
Area number & Zone number
Branch Data
2-Winding & 3-Winding Transformers

Transformer ID
Bus connections
Rated kV
Rated MVA
Positive sequence impedance and X/R ration
Z Variation
Z Tolerance
Fixed tap settings
LTC Settings, if the transformer LTC is used as a control
Max MVA, if the transformer flow is constrained
Cable
Cable ID
Cable type, rated kV and size if use library data
Cable's positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use user entered data
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Max temperature
Allowable Ampacity, if the cable flow is constrained
Transmission Line
Bus connections
Phase conductor, ground wire and configuration parameters (from library or user enter) if use
calculated value
Lines positive sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values if use user-defined value
Impedance unit
Base temperature and Maximum temperature
Allowable Ampacity, if the line flow is constrained

Impedance
Impedance ID
Bus connections
Positive and zero sequence resistance, reactance, and susceptance values
Reactor
Reactor ID
Bus connections
Positive sequence impedance and X/R ratio
Impedance Tolerance
Amp Rating, if the reactor flow is constrained
Machine Data
Power Grid Data

Power Grid ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Energy price data (Min MW, Max MW, MW and $/MWh points)

Bus connection
Rated MW
Rated kV
Rated %PF
Rated MVA
Rated %Eff
Number of poles
Fuel cost data (Model Type, Profile category, Curve Type, Min MW, Max MW, MW, $/hr and
$/MWh points)

Bus connection

Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated power factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings
Rated efficient and efficient factors and power factors at 100%, 75%, and 50% Loadings

Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
MOV Data
MOV ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kW/HP
Rated kV
Rated Power Factor
Rated Efficiency
Load Data
Static Load Data

Static Load ID
Bus connection
Quantity
Rated kV
Rated kVA/MVA
Rated Power Factor

Lumped Load Data

Lumped Load ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Model type
Unbalanced load
Comprehensive load
Capacitor Data
Capacitor ID
Bus connection
Rated kV
Harmonic Filter Data

Harmonic Filter ID
Bus connection
Status
Filter Type
Rated kV and 1-Phase kvar for capacitors
Xl and Q factor for reactors
R, if applicable
AC-DC Device Data
UPS
UPS ID
Bus connections
Rated AC kW/MW
Rated % PF & % EFF

VFD
VFD ID
Input Bus and Load connections
Charger
Charger ID
Bus Connections
Status and Associated Demand Factor
AC Ratings
Inverter
Inverter is not considered in the Optimal Power Flow Study.

Study Case ID
Barrier Factor
Power Mismatch
Max. Iteration
Objective Precision
Loading Category
Loading Condition (Operating P, Q flag)
Charger Loading condition (from Loading Category or from Operating Load)
Generation Category
Generation condition (Operating P, Q, V flag)
Fuel / Energy Cost Profile
Infeasibility Handling Option
Objectives & Weight Factors; Exponents, if Applicable
LTC Controls & Associated Parameters
Generator AVR Controls & Associated Parameters
Generator MW Controls & Associated Parameters
Shunt Compensation Controls & Associated Parameters
Bus Voltage Constraints & Associated Parameters
Branch Flow Constraints & Associated Parameters

Optimal Power Flow Output Reports
28.6 Output Reports

The OPF calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the text format. You can
use the Optimal Power Flow Report Manager (from the Study toolbar) or View Output Report button
(from the Study Case toolbar) to view the Output Reports.
28.6.1 Optimal Power Flow Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Optimal Power Flow toolbar to open the Optimal Power Flow
Report Manager. The Optimal Power Flow Report Manager provides five formats for report text. They
are Crystal reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and MS Excel
formats. The Optimal Power Flow Report Manager consists of four pages.


A sample of the Complete Report is shown below.

28.6.3 Input Page

This page provides the reports for different input data. The following reports are available:
Adjustments
Branch
Bus
Cable
Controls and Constraints
Cover
Fuel Cost
Generator
Impedance
Objectives
Power Grid
Reactor
SVC
Transformer

A sample of the Input Report is shown below.

28.6.4 Result Page

This page provides the formats for different calculation results. The following two formats are available:
Load Flow Report

Optimal Settings

A sample of the Optimal Settings Report is shown below.

28.6.5 Summary Page

This page provides the formats for different summaries from both input data and calculation results. The
following formats are available:
Summary

A sample of the Summary Report is shown below.

automatically opens the output report listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format. In the
picture shown below, the output report name is OPF and the selected output report is the Complete
Crystal Report.

Optimal Power Flow One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

The one-line diagram display shows study results after the current calculation is completed. Different
results can be chosen and displayed by setting appropriate options in the Optimal Power Flow Display
Option Editor. A sample one-line diagram display for an Optimal Power Flow Study is shown here.

Chapter 29
The majority of power systems operate at a lagging power factor due to inductive loads and delivery
apparatus (lines and transformers). Power systems are inductive in nature, and require additional reactive
power flow from the power grid. But excessive reactive power demands result in reduced system
capacity, increased losses, and decreased voltage, as well as higher operating costs. Shunt capacitor banks
are able to compensate for var requirements, but bank size, location, the capacitor control method, and
cost considerations are important issues that need to be optimized during the design phase. An ideal
solution would be a capacitor placement tool able to weigh all these factors and that considers load levels.
This solution should also be able to place capacitors for voltage support and power factor correction,
while minimizing the total cost of installation and operation. ETAP now provides just such an application
in its Optimum Capacitor Placement (OCP) Module.
As described in the IEEE Standard 1036-1992 (IEEE Guide for Application of Shunt Power Capacitors),
the purposes of shunt capacitor applications are:
Purpose Benefits
Var support Yields a primary benefit for transmission systems and a
secondary benefit for distribution systems.
Voltage control Yields a primary benefit for both transmission and
distribution systems.
System capacity increase Yields a secondary benefit for transmission systems and a
primary benefit for distribution systems.
System power loss reduction Yields a secondary benefit for transmission systems and a
Billing charge reduction Does not apply to transmission systems, but yields a
To place shunt capacitors in power systems, it is necessary to:
Determine bank size in kvar

Determine connection location
Determine a control method

Optimal Capacitor Placement Overview
Determine a connection type (wye or delta)
The capacitor size and the appropriate location for voltage support and power factor correction can be
determined in different ways. A common method applies rules of thumb techniques, and then runs
multiple load flow studies to fine-tune the size and location. Unfortunately, this method may not yield the
optimal solution. And it can also be very time consuming and impractical for large systems.
It is also important to minimize cost, while mathematically determining the capacitor size and location.
Because this is an optimization issue, an optimization approach should be employed. This is where the
ETAP OCP module excels. It is an extremely powerful simulation tool specifically designed for this
application. The OCP module allows you to place capacitors for voltage support and power factor
correction while minimizing total cost. The advanced graphic interface provides the flexibility to control
the capacitor placement process, while allowing you to view the results instantly. The precise calculation
approach automatically determines the best location and bank sizes. In addition, it reports the branch
capacity release and savings during the planning period due to var loss reduction. The capabilities of the
OCP module are summarized below:
Key Features
Calculate the most cost-effective installation locations and best bank size
Minimize total installation and operation cost
Consider voltage support and power factor correction
Evaluate Capacitor control method
Allow review of capacitor impact on the system
Employ most advanced optimum techniques
Flexible Operation
Show available locations

Apply user-selected load categories
Utilize individual and global constraints
Handle unlimited network configurations
Use only user selected installation locations
Constrain maximum capacitors installed at a location to user specified quantity
Capability
Advanced graphic user interface

User friendly input and output
Instantly view new capacitors
Speed and precision control
Integrated load flow results
Standard Crystal reports
Plotting
Loss reduction savings during the planning period

Capacitor operation cost during the planning period

Optimal Capacitor Placement Overview
Profit during the planning period
Reporting
Capacitor properties
Capacitor locations and sizes
Load flow results for maximum, average and minimum loads
Branch capacity release
Cost summary

Optimal Capacitor Placement Study Toolbar
29.1 Study Toolb ar

The Optimal Capacitor Placement (OCP) toolbar appears when ETAP is in OCP mode. The OCP toolbar
command icons are shown and described below.
Run Optimal Capacitor Placement
Display Options
Alert View
Report Manager
Optimal Capacitor Placement Plots
Get On-Line Data
Get Archived Data
Run Optimal Capacitor Placement

Clicking this icon launches the OCP calculation. All required data must have been entered into the device
and study case pages prior to running an optimal capacitor placement calculation; otherwise an error
report will be generated. The error report will list the problems encountered. When these issues are
resolved, the calculation will be processed automatically.
To generate OCP reports for a study:
1. In OCP Mode, select an output report name from the Output Report List, then select a report
format from the Report Manager.
2. Click the Report Manager button.
Display Options
You can customize the OCP one-line diagram annotation display options:
1. In OCP mode, click the Display Options button.

2. For detailed information on using these Display Options, section of this chapter.
Alert View
The Alert View button is not enabled for this release.

Report Manager
Clicking on the OCP Report Manager icon provides access to the following report configuration pages:
Complete
Input
Result
Summary
For example, to open the OCP Report Manager and select a specific report for review, follow these steps:
1. Click the Report Manager button from the Study toolbar to display the OCP Report Manager.
Select a format for the output files by clicking on its button in the right-hand column.
2. Click the Result page.
3. Select one of the report types displayed. (Clicking Set as Default sets the selected format for all
subsequent reports.
4. Click OK to display the output report.
For a detailed explanation of the OCP Report Manager, see section 29.6, Output Reports.
Optimal Capacitor Placement Plots

To view optimal capacitor placement plots, follow these steps:
1. Click the OCP Plots button on the Study toolbar. The selection dialog box appears.

2. Select from the combination of plots to view; Loss Reduction Saving During Planning Period,
Capacitor Operation Cost During Planning Period, and Profit During Planning Period.

To stop the current OCP calculation, click the Halt Current Calculation button (a red circle with an X icon
on the OCP toolbar).
Note: The Halt Current Calculation button is normally disabled. When an OCP calculation begins, this
button becomes enabled and appears as a button with a red circled X icon. If you terminate the calculation
before it completes, one-line diagram displays will not be available, and the output report will be
incomplete.
Get On-Line Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is online. Click on this button to use
the current real-time data as initial conditions.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is online. Click on this button to use the
selected archived data as initial conditions for this analysis.

Optimal Capacitor Placement Study Case Editor

The Optimal Capacitor Placement (OCP) Study Case Editor contains solution control variables. ETAP
allows you to create and save an unlimited number of study cases for each type of study. Just as in other
study types, it is possible to switch between different OCP Study Cases. This feature allows you to
organize study efforts and save time.
In the OCP mode, the Capacitor Placement Study Case Editor can be accessed by:
1. Clicking on the Edit Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar shown above.
Note: The Study Case Editor can also be accessed from the Project View by clicking the Capacitor
Placement subfolder in the Study Case folder.
A Study Case can be used for any combination of configuration status; one-line diagram presentation, and
base/revision data. The Capacitor Placement Study Case Editor consists of the following pages:
Info
Loading
Bus kV Constraint
Power Factor Constraint
Capacitor
Adjustment
To create a new OCP study case, simply:
1. Go to the Project View.

2. Right-click on the Capacitor Placement subfolder inside the Study Case folder.
3. Select Create New.
Note: A new Study Case can also be created by clicking the New button on the OCP Study Case toolbar.
The module creates a new Study Case, which is a copy of the default Study Case. This can be added to
the Optimal Capacitor Placement subfolder.

A graphic example of this is shown below:

Info Page
The Info page of the OCP Study Case Editor lets you enter general solution parameters and Study Case
information for the OCP study case.
A graphic of the Info page and descriptions of the information required for these sections are presented
below:
Study Case ID
The study case ID (OCP) is shown in the field in this example. To rename a study case, highlight the text,
delete the old ID and enter a new ID. The study case ID field is limited to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Use the arrow buttons at the bottom-right of the editor to go from one study case to another.
Objective

In the Objective group select the capacitor placement objective. This allows the OCP module to place
capacitors to perform voltage support, power factor correction, or perform both at the same time.
Voltage Support
With this option selected the OCP Module checks only voltage limits and places capacitors to meet the
voltage limits when minimizing the cost.
Power Factor Correction
With this option selected the OCP Module checks only load power factor limits and places capacitors to
meet the load power factor limits when minimizing the cost.
Both
With this option selected, the OCP Module checks voltage limits and load power factor limits, and places
capacitors to meet the voltage limits and load power factor limits when minimizing the cost.
Load Flow Parameters
In this group you can set parameters for load flow calculations to control load flow solutions.
Max. Iteration
Enter the maximum number of load flow iterations used to attempt convergence. If the solution does not
converge before the specified number of iterations completes, the load flow calculation will stop. If it is
running initial load flow calculations, the OCP module will inform you, just as it does in the load flow
analysis. However, during the capacitor placement process, the OCP module will abandon the solution if
a reasonable capacitor placement does not result.
Precision
Enter the value for load flow solution precision. The OCP module uses this value to check for
convergence. For more information, see Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Precision / Speed Ratio
Move the slider to adjust the precision to speed ratio of the OCP study case. Precision and speed are
linked inversely. The precision setting decreases from 10 to 1 when the speed setting increases from 1 to
10. The upper value shows the current speed setting. The lower value shows the current precision setting.
Position the slider to the left to obtain the optimal solution. Moving the slider to the right will speed up
the solution but may yield a less than optimal result.
General Parameter
You can specify cost and control parameters in the General Parameter group.
Source Energy Cost
If you select this option, the energy cost in $/kWh will be calculated from the generation sources. For
more information, see the Energy Cost pages of Power Grid and Generator in Chapter 8, AC Elements.
Average Energy Cost
If you enable this option, an average energy cost value will be used.
Cost
Enter the value for average energy cost ($/kWh) in the Cost field.
Planning Period
Enter the period (years) required to get the maximum benefit by installing capacitors. The OCP
module analyzes the cost, saving, and profit achieved during these years.
Interest Rate
Enter the interest rate (%/year) that will be used to calculate the cost, saving, and profit by years.

Initial Condition
Initial conditions for all bus voltages and angles can be specified in this section.
Use Bus Voltages
Select this option to use the bus voltages and angles entered on the Info page of the bus editors. This
option allows OCP studies with different initial voltage conditions for different buses.
Use Fixed Value

This option permits simulation of OCP studies using a fixed bus voltage and angle for all buses. When the
fixed initial condition option is selected, the initial voltage value must be entered as a percent of the bus
nominal voltage. The default values are 100% for bus voltage magnitude and zero degrees for bus voltage
angle.
Enable this option to consider transformer phase-shift in load flow calculations. The phase-shift of a
transformer can be found in the transformer editor.
Study Remarks
Annotate your output pages in the Study Remarks group. Enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters
in this field. Information entered here will be printed on the second line of every output page header line.
These remarks can provide specific information for each study case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all study cases and is entered in the Project
Information editor.

Loading Page
The Loading page is where you specify the system loading information.
Loading Category
System loading can be specified by selecting a loading category in the Loading Category group of the
OCP Study Case Editor.
Average Load
Select one of the loading categories from the Average Load drop-down list for the OCP Study Case.
For any category selected, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and other loads as
specified for the selected category.
Note: Assign loading to each one of the ten categories from the Nameplate page of the Induction Machine
editor and Synchronous Motor editor and from the Loading or Rating page of the other Load Component
Editors.

Operating P, Q
This option is available if the ETAP installation has the Real-Time module activated. When this box is
checked, the operating loads uploaded from on-line data, or the previous Load Flow Study, is utilized in
the Load Flow Study.
Generation Category
Generation Category
Select one of the ten-generation categories for the OCP Study Case. For more information, see Chapter
15, Load Flow Analysis.
Operating P, Q, V
This option is available if the ETAP installation has the Real-Time Module. When this box is checked,
the operating generations uploaded from on-line data, or the previous load flow study, is utilized in the
load flow study.
Charger Loading
The option to use loading category load or operating load is available for chargers.
Note: The operating load for a charger can only be updated from a DC Load Flow Study.
This group allows specific load diversity factors to be applied on the Loading Category load.
Individual Bus Min. & Max.
When this option is selected, the OCP module uses the individual bus Load Diversity Factor that is
specified for each bus. For more information, see the descriptions of the Bus editor in Section 8.1, Bus.
Global
When this option is selected, the OCP Module uses a global load diversity factor for all buses. Enter the
maximum and minimum global load diversity factor in percentage.
Time Distribution of Load
Enter the load duration for maximum and minimum load in a percentage of hours per year. The hour for
average load is calculated, since the total hour percentage is 100.
Note: You can use the load duration to investigate capacitor placement effects on a power system. When
the maximum load duration is not zero, OCP places capacitors to meet a maximum load requirement and
displays load flow results for maximum load. If maximum load duration is zero, OCP places capacitors to
meet an average load requirement. OCP displays load flow results for an average load. If load durations
for both maximum and minimum loads are zero, OCP places capacitors to meet the maximum load
requirement, and displays load flow results for a maximum load. In all cases OCP outputs load flow result
reports for maximum, minimum and average load.
Example for Using Load Duration to Investigate Capacitor Placement Effect
The load duration may be set for minimum load to 100 so that OCP finds the fixed capacitor banks and
sizes for minimum load conditions. Then, the setting may be changed to actual load durations for
maximum, minimum, and average loads to find the switched capacitor banks for load levels above the
minimum condition up to peak load.

Voltage Constraint
The Voltage Constraint page allows you to specify the bus kV constraints.
General Constraint
In this group, you can specify general voltage constraint for maximum and minimum voltages.
General Constraint
When General Constraint is selected, enter the percentage values for maximum and minimum
voltages.
Maximum Voltage

The Maximum Voltage is the global limit (in percent) for the maximum voltage of all buses, except the
ones selected for the Individual Constraint list.
Minimum Voltage
The Minimum Voltage is the global limit (in percent) for the minimum voltage of all buses, except the
ones selected for the Individual Constraint list.
Individual Constraint
This group displays information on all the selected buses, including the Bus ID, kV rating, and maximum
and minimum voltage. The global constraint does not apply to these buses.
Select/Deselect Buttons
1. Highlight a bus from the list box underneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the buses in
the system for the specified Available Bus option.
2. Click the Select button to move the highlighted bus into the Individual Constraint box.
Note: Highlighting a bus in the Individual Constraint box, and clicking the Deselect button,
moves that bus into the list box underneath the button to let the bus use global constraints.
Available Bus
You can specify which of the available buses will be visible in this group.
All
Show all buses in the system.
High Voltage
Show all buses in the system whose rated voltage is higher than 1 kV.
Low Voltage
Show all buses in the system whose rated voltage is equal to or lower than 1 kV.
Include Nodes
Check this box to include nodes as buses.
Default Settings
This group sets the voltage limits for the buses that are selected for the Individual Constraint list.
Max. Voltage
This option sets the maximum voltage limit in percent.
Min. Voltage
This option sets the minimum voltage limit in percent.

Power Factor Constraint

The Power Factor Constraint page allows a specific bus power factor constraint.
Allow Over Compensation

If this option is selected, when it is economically justified the OCP Module may place capacitors to
supply a level of reactive power that is more than the loads reactive power demand at that bus. If this
option selected, the maximum power factor constraint is not applied.
General Constraint
This group allows you to specify general constraints for the maximum and minimum power factor. By
selecting General Constraint, you can enter the values for maximum and minimum power factors.
Max. PF
The maximum power factor is the global limit for the maximum power factor of all buses, except the ones
selected for the Individual Constraint list. Max Power Factor is not available when you enable Allow
Over Compensation.

Min. PF
Min Power Factor is the global limit for the minimum power factor of all buses, except the ones selected
for the Individual Constraint list.
Individual Constraint
This box lists information about all the selected buses, including the Bus ID, kV rating, and maximum
and minimum power factor in percentage. The global constraint does not apply to these buses.
Select/Deselect Buttons
1. Highlight a bus from the box beneath the buttons. This box initially lists all the buses in the
system for the specified Available Bus option.
2. Click the Select button to move the highlighted bus into the Individual Constraint box.
Note: Highlighting a bus in the Individual Constraint box and clicking the Deselect button moves
that bus into the box beneath the button so that the bus uses global constraints.
Available Bus
Use this group to specify which of the available buses will be visible.
All
Shows all buses in the system.
High Voltage
Shows all buses in the system with rated voltage higher than 1 kV.
Low Voltage
Show all buses in the system with rated voltage equal to, or lower than 1 kV.
Include Nodes
Select this box to include nodes as buses.
Default Settings
This group allows the power factor limits for the buses which will be selected for the Individual
Constraint to be specified.
Max. PF
Specify the maximum power factor limit (in percent).
Min. PF
Specify the minimum power factor limit (in percent).

Capacitor
This page lets you specify the capacitor parameters.
Capacitor Info
Allow entering specific capacitor related information in this group. Each numbered row provides rating,
bank size and pricing information organized from lowest to highest Max. kV for each type of capacitor.
Max. kV
Enter the maximum possible rated voltage level (in kV) to which this type of capacitor can be used.
Bank Size (kvar)
Enter the bank size in kvar for this type of capacitor.
Max#Banks
Enter the maximum number of banks that can be installed at a bus using this type of capacitor. The
default maximum value is 30. However, this limit can be increased using the MaxCapOCP setting
accessible through ETAP Preferences.

Purchase ($/kvar)
Enter the purchase cost in $/kvar of this type of capacitor.
Install ($)
Enter the installation cost of this type of capacitor for one location.
Operating ($/BankYr)
Enter the operating cost in $ per bank, per year, of this type of capacitor.
Note: The cost is for the current year and the Interest Rate is considered during the planning period.
Bus Candidates
Buses
Shows all available buses in the Bus Category option.
Bus Category
All Buses Shows all buses in the system.
HV Buses Shows all buses in the system whose rated voltage is higher than
1 kV.
LV Buses Shows all buses in the system whose rated voltage is equal to or
lower than 1 kV.
HV SWGR Shows all switchgear buses in the system whose rated voltage is
higher than 1 kV.
LV SWGR/MCC Shows all switchgear and MCC buses in the system whose rated
voltage is equal to or lower than 1 kV.
Candidates
Lists all candidates for capacitor installation.
Note: Use the Add and Remove buttons to add or remove bus candidates.

Adjustment
The page allows you to specify the adjustment settings. Adjustments are typically used for load flow
studies. For more information, see Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.

Optimal Capacitor Placement Display Options

There are four pages in the Optimal Capacitor Placement (OCP) Display Options Editor:
1. Results
2. AC
3. AC-DC
4. Color annotations
Results Page
Assign display annotations for each study on the Results page.

Show Units
Select this option to show units for displaying power flow and current on the one-line diagram.
Check All
Select this option to show all available result annotations.
Note: When this box is cleared, all previous settings are restored.
Voltage
This group defines how the voltage is displayed.
Voltage
To select how the voltages will be displayed on the one-line diagram, select either kV, or percent, from
the drop-down list.
Bus Mag.
Select this option to display bus voltages on the one-line diagram.
Note: Bus voltages are displayed at 15 degrees.
Bus Angle
Select this option to display bus angle (in degrees) on the one-line diagram.
Note: Bus voltage angles are displayed at -15 degrees.
Load Term. Mag.
Select this option to display load (motors, lump loads, and static loads) terminal voltages on the one-line
diagram.
Note: Load terminal voltages are displayed at 15 degrees. Load terminal voltages based on load rated kV
or bus nominal kV can be displayed, depending on the selection in Load Term. Base kV.
Load Term. Base kV
This group allows a base kV for load terminal magnitude to be selected, when the voltage is displayed as
a percentage.
Note: This group will be disabled if kV is selected as the voltage display.
Load Rated kV
Bus Nom. kV
Voltage Drop
This group lets you configure how the voltage drop is displayed.
Line / Cable
Load FDR
Select a unit for power flow, or current flow from the list to be displayed on the one-line diagram.
Power Flows
This group lets you configure how the power flows are displayed.
Units
Select the unit (kVA or MVA) to be used to display power flow on the one-line diagram.
kW + jkvar

Select the kW + jkvar option to display power flow in kW+jkvar or MW+jMvar.
kVA
Select the kVA option to display power flow in kVA or MVA.
Amp
Select the Amp option to display current flow in amperes.
%PF
When either the kVA or Amp option selected; the power factor of power flow shows along with the
current.
Flow Results
This group lets you configure how the flow results are displayed.
Branch
power flow at one end of a branch (the end that has a positive kW value flowing into the branch). For 3-
winding transformers, all three power flows are displayed.
Source
Load
Composite Motor
Composite Network
Select this option to display power flow into composite networks.
Panel System
Select this option to display results for panel systems on the one-line diagram, assuming the Calc. Panel
System option is selected, in the study case when the load flow calculation was performed.
Note: If the Calc. Panel System option was not enabled in the load flow study case, or in the Panel
System display option, no result will be displayed on the one-line diagram. For more information, see
Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Branch Losses
Select this option to display branch losses on the one-line diagram.
Note: Losses are displayed inside a bracket in [kW+jkvar] or [MW+jMvar].
Meters
This group lets you configure how the meters are displayed.
Ammeter
Select this option to display the primary current for the branch to which an ammeter is attached.
Voltmeter
Select this option to display the primary voltage for the bus to which a voltmeter is attached.
Multi-Meter
Select this option to display the measurements of a multi-meter, including bus voltage, branch current,

AC Page
This page permits displaying specific information annotations for AC elements.

ID
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.
Device Type Rating
Generator kW / MW
Motor HP / kW
Load / Panel kVA / MVA and connection type ( # of phases - # of wires)
Transformer kVA / MVA
Branch, Reactor Continuous amps
Cable / Line # of cables - # of conductor / cable - size
Bus kA bracing
Node Bus bracing (kA)
CB Rated interrupting (kA)
Relay 50/51 for over-current relays
PT & CT Transformer rated turn ratio
kV
Select the appropriate checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the
selected elements on the one-line diagram.
Note: For cables/lines, the kV checkbox is replaced by a T button. Click this button to display the
cable/line conductor type on the one-line diagram.
A
Select the appropriate checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings (continuous or full-
load ampere) of the selected elements on the one-line diagram.
Note: For cables/lines, the Amp checkbox is replaced by an L button. Click this button to display the
cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
Z


Generator Subtransient reactance Xd"
Power Grid (Utility) Positive sequence impedance in % of 100 MVA (R + j X)
Motor % LRC
Transformer Positive sequence impedance (R + j X per unit length)
Cable / Line Positive sequence impedance (R + j X in ohms or per unit length)
D-Y
Select the appropriate checkboxes under this heading to display the connection types of the selected
Composite Mtr
Select this option to display the AC composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, and then select the
color for displaying the IDs.
Use Default Options

AC-DC Page
This page allows the display options to be specified for information annotations for
AC-DC elements and composite networks.

ID
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected AC-DC elements on the one-
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Charger AC kVA & DC kW (or MVA / MW)
Inverter DC kW & AC kVA (or MW / MVA)
UPS kVA
VFD HP / kW
kV
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected elements on
A
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the one-
line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
ID
Select this option to display the composite network IDs on the one-line diagram
Color
Select the color for displaying the IDs.
Use Default Options

Colors Page

Color Theme
Annotations
Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously selected.

Optimal Capacitor Placement Calculation Method

ETAP currently utilizes the genetic algorithm for optimal capacitor placement. The genetic algorithm is
an optimization technique based on the theory of natural selection. A genetic algorithm starts with a
generation of solutions with wide diversity to represent characteristics of the whole search space. By
mutation and crossover, good characteristics are selected and carried to the next generation. The optimal
solution can be reached through repeated generations.
OCP uses the present worth method to perform alternative comparisons. It considers initial installation
and operating costs, which include maintenance, depreciation, and loss reduction savings.
Objective Function of OCP

The objective of optimal capacitor placement is to minimize the cost of the system. This cost is measured
in four ways:
1. Fixed capacitor installation cost
2. Capacitor purchase cost
3. Capacitor bank operating cost (maintenance and depreciation)
4. Cost of real power losses
Cost can be represented mathematically as:
Min objective function =

N bus N load
(x C
i =1
i 0i + Q ci C 1i + B i C 2 i T) + C 2 T P
l =1
l L
l
N bus - Number of bus candidates

x 0 / 1, 0 means no capacitor installed at bus i
i
C Installation cost
0i
C Per kVar cost of capacitor banks
1i
Qci - Capacitor bank size in kVar
Bi Number of capacitor banks
C 2i Operating cost of per bank, per year
T - Planning period (years)
C 2 - Cost of each kWh loss, in $/kWh

l - Load levels, maximum, average and minimum
Tl - Time duration, in hours, of load level l
PLl - Total system loss at load level l

Optimal Capacitor Placement Calculation Method
Constraints
The main constraints for capacitor placement are to meet the load flow constraints. In addition, all voltage
magnitudes of load (PQ) buses should be within the lower and upper bars. Load Power Factor (PF) should
be greater than the minimum. It may be a maximum power factor bar.
The constraints can be represented mathematically as:
1) Load Flow: F ( x, u ) = 0
Vmin V Vmax , PFmin PF PFmax for all PQ buses

Optimal Capacitor Placement Required Data
29.5 Required Data

Bus Data
The data required for optimal capacitor placement (OCP) is the same required for load flow calculations.
Bus data must include:
Nominal kV
%V and angle (when the Initial Condition option is set to Use Bus Voltages)
Load diversity factor (when the Loading option is set to Use Bus Diversity Factor on the Load
page of the Study Case Editor)
Branch Data
Branch data is entered into the branch editors (Transformer, Transmission Line, and Cable, Reactor, and
Impedance editors). The data required for OCP is the same as that needed for load flow calculations. Data
for a branch must include:
Power Grid Data

The data required for OCP calculations includes:
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control, or Mvar Control)
Nominal kV
%V and angle for swing mode
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode of operation
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode
Energy cost data (Min MW, Max MW, MW and $Cost Points, if the Use Source Energy Cost
option is selected on the Info page of the Study Case Editor)
The data required for OCP calculations for synchronous generators includes:
Operating mode (Swing, Voltage Control or Mvar Control)
Rated kV
%V and angle for swing mode of operation
%V, MW loading, and Mvar limits (Qmax & Qmin) for voltage control mode of operation
MW and Mvar loading for Mvar control mode of operation
Fuel cost data (Min MW, Max MW, Model Type, MW and $Cost Points, if the Use Source
Energy Cost option is selected on the Info page of the Study Case Editor)
Inverter Data
The data required for OCP calculations for inverters includes:
Inverter ID

The data required for OCP calculations for synchronous motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV
Loading category ID and % loading

Optimal Capacitor Placement Required Data
The data required for OCP calculations for induction motors includes:
Rated kW/hp and kV
Static Load Data

The data required for OCP calculations for static loads includes:
Static load ID
Power factor
Existing Capacitor Data

The data required for OCP calculations for an existing capacitor includes:
Capacitor ID
Lumped Load Data

The data required for OCP calculations for lumped load includes:
Load ID
Rated kV, MVA, power factor, and % motor load
Charger and UPS Data

The data required for OCP calculations for chargers and UPSs includes:
Element ID
Other Data
There are some study case related data that must also be provided. See the Study Case editor for study
case data requirements.
Note: On the Capacitor page, a bus candidate for the OCP module must be selected in order to run the
simulation successfully.

Optimal Capacitor Placement Output Reports
29.6 Output Reports

Optimal capacitor placement calculation results are reported on the one-line diagram and in Crystal
Reports format. The one-line diagram displays bus voltages, branch flows and voltage drops, and load
power consumption for maximum, minimum, or average load that are generated as a result of the
calculation.
Use the Display Options editor to specify the content to be displayed. The one-line diagram also displays
new capacitor information, which includes the total number of banks, rated kV, rated kvar, operating
kvar, and amps.
The Crystal Reports format provides reports containing detailed information about capacitor installation
and Load Flow Analysis. Use the OCP Report Manager to view the Output Report.
Crystal Reports
Study Case Toolbar
The Study Case toolbar provides a shortcut for the OCP Report Manger options.
1. Click the List Output Reports button.
ETAP automatically opens the List Output Report dialog box, and displays the output report listed in the
Study Case toolbar in your selected format. In the example toolbar shown below, the output report name
is OCP and the selected format is Cable.
Report Manager
The OCP Report Manager includes four pages, which represent different sections of the output report.
They are as follows:
Complete
Input
Result
Summary
Click the Report Manager button on the Optimal Capacitor Placement toolbar. The OCP Report Manager
lets you select from the listed formats for each section of the report.
Use the column of radio buttons on the right of the dialog to select the report format in which to view
(Viewer, PDF, MS Word, and more).
Several fields and buttons are common to every page.

Output Report Name

This field displays the name you entered for the output report. .
Path
This field displays the name of the project file, depending on which report was generated, along with the
Help
OK / Cancel
1. Click OK to close the OCP Report Manager and display the Crystal Reports view. This shows the
selected section of the output report.
Note: the OCP Report Manager will close if no selection is made.
2. Click Cancel to close the OCP Report Manager without viewing the report.
Complete Page
Selecting Complete in the left column of this page will cause all reports to be printed in the format you
have selected.
Input Page
The input data is grouped according to the data types listed below.
Adjustments
Branch
Bus Constraints
Bus
Cable
Capacitor Info Data
Cover
Impedance
Reactor
SVC
Transformer
Sample 1: Input Data

This section lists system input parameters for buses, transmission lines and cables, transformers, reactors,
impedances, and all connections including tie circuit breakers, fuses, and switches. For more information,
see Chapter 15, Load Flow Analysis.
Result Page
This page allows different formats to be selected to view the result report. These formats include:
LF Report Average
LF Report Maximum
LF Report Minimum
OCP Results

Sample 2: Load Flow Report

This section of the report tabulates detailed load flow results. The results reported include:
Bus ID and nominal kV
Calculated voltage magnitudes and angles
MW and Mvar generation and loading
Branch flows from the bus to all buses connected to it
Flows are given in MW and Mvar, amps, and %PF measured at the bus. Flows into 3-winding
transformers are indicated as flows from one of the bus windings to the other two bus windings (from
Main Bus to Sub 2B and Sub 3).
The settings of tap-changing transformers are also indicated at buses to which a tap side is connected.
These tap settings include the fixed taps and results from the LTCs. Regulated (voltage-controlled) buses
are flagged with an asterisk (*).
Load flow results are reported for average, maximum, and minimum loads.

Sample 3: OCP Results Report

This section of the report tabulates capacitor placement results. The results reported include:
Bus ID
Nominal kV
Calculated voltage magnitudes and angles
Power factor and capacitor bank information (capacitor rated kV, rated kvar per bank, total
number of banks installed, installation cost, total purchase cost, and total operation cost)
Summary Page
This page allows different formats to be selected to view the Result Summary Report. They are as
follows:
Branch Capacity Release
Branch Loading
Bus Loading
Losses
OCP Cost Summary
Summary

Sample 4: OCP Cost Summary Report

This section of the report tabulates the system cost information. The information summarizes the cost for
each year during the planning period. The costs include installation cost, operation cost, savings, and
profit.
Note: The interest rate is considered for the calculation.

Sample 5: Branch Capacity Release Report

Branch capacity release is the MVA difference of the branch before and after the capacitors are installed.

Plots
Report data can be plotted using three different curves. These curves consist of:
Loss Reduction Saving During Planning Period ($)
Capacitor Operation Cost During Planning Period ($)
Profit During Planning Period ($)
Click the Plot button on the Optimal Capacitor Placement toolbar to plot report data.
The Optimal Capacitor Placement Plot Selection dialog box appears. A combination of plots may be
selected from the list of checkboxes.

Loss Reduction Saving During Planning Period

This plot shows savings in dollars due to loss reduction vs. years. When interest is considered, the actual
saving will increase as a function of time.
Capacitor Operating Cost During Planning Period

This plot shows the operating cost in dollars vs. years. When interest is considered, the actual cost will
increase as a function of time.

Profit During Planning Period

This plot depicts profit in dollars vs. years. The savings accrued each year will be used to pay off the
operating cost and installation cost. Any unpaid dollars is considered as fixed cost for the following year.
A positive profit can be yielded when the loss reduction saving is bigger than the operating cost for each
year.
Note: The purpose of placing capacitors is not entirely about making profit. It is possible that profit may
be negative during the entire planning period for some systems.

One-Line Diagram
When OCP finishes a capacitor installation calculation, the Calculation in Progress dialog box disappears.
Capacitor installation and load flow results are then displayed on the one-line diagram. The loading
condition depends on the load duration setting.
For more information, see Section 23.3.2, Loading page.
In the following example, one 4.16 kV, 200 kvar capacitor is installed at bus Sub 3.

Chapter 30
Reliability Assessment Analysis
Distribution system reliability assessment deals with the availability and quality of power supply at each
customers service entrance. Analysis of customer failure statistics show that, compared to other portions
of electrical power systems, distribution system failures contribute as much as 90% towards the
unavailability of supply to a load. These statistics show how important the reliability evaluation of
distribution systems can be.
The basic reliability indices normally used to predict or assess the reliability of a distribution system
consist of three reliability indices:
Load point average failure rate

Average outage duration r
Annual unavailability U
In order to evaluate the severity or significance of a system outage, using the three basic indices
mentioned above, two expanded sets of indices listed below must also be calculated. The two expanded
sets of indices include the number and average load of customers connected at each load point in the
system, and the customer interruption cost. The first set is the system reliability index, which consists of:
System Average Interruption Frequency Index (SAIFI),

System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI),
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index (CAIDI),
Average Service Availability Index (ASAI),
Average Service Unavailability Index (ASUI)
These additional indices can be used to assess the overall behavior of the distribution system. The second
set includes the reliability cost/worth index:
Expected Energy Not Supply (EENS),

Expected Interruption Cost (ECOST),
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate (IEAR)

Reliability Assessment Analysis Overview
The indices EENS, ECOST, and IEAR can be those specifically for each load point or for the overall
system. All of these indices can be used to evaluate the reliability of an existing distribution system and
to provide useful planning information regarding improvements to existing systems and the design of new
distribution systems. Moreover, in order to analyze the sensitivity of a reliability index EENS or ECOST
with respect to failure rate of different elements, element contributions to that index and their rankings
can be used. The rankings can be for a load point or the overall system.
All of the indices and rankings given above can be evaluated using the ETAP Reliability Analysis
module. This module provides you with the best tool to efficiently model various power system elements
and devices to include their effects on the distribution system reliability, such as fault isolation and load
restoration through the operation of switching devices. This module is suitable for reliability analysis of
large-scale systems of general configurations. By using this module you can assess the distribution
system reliability, and the merits of various reinforcement schemes that are available to the planner can be
quantitatively evaluated to ensure that limited capital resources are used to achieve the greatest possible
improvement in system reliability.
Some of the main features of the ETAP Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study are summarized
below:
Common & Integrated Database

Fully Inherited 3-D Data Structure, Including Infinite Presentations, Unlimited Configurations, &
Multiple Data Revisions
Looped, Radial, or Combined Systems
Systems with Multiple Source Buses (Generators/Utilities)
Systems with Isolated Sub-Systems
Systems with De-Energized Buses & Branches
Fault Isolation and Load Restoration
Modeling of single and double contingencies
Modeling of Single-Pole Double-Throw Switches
Modeling of Normally Closed/Open Tie Circuit Connections
User-Expandable Sector Interruption Cost Library
Three Basic Reliability Indices (, r, U) for each load point
Overall System Reliability Indices (SAIFI, SAIDI, CAIDI, ASAI, ASUI)
Reliability Cost/Worth Indices EENS, ECOST and IEAR for each load point
Reliability Cost/Worth Indices EENS, ECOST and IEAR for the Overall System
Element Contributions to the Load Point EENS and ECOST and Their Rankings
Element Contributions to the Overall System EENS and ECOST and Their Rankings
Graphic One-Line Display of Study Results
Graphic Plots of Element Contributions and Their Rankings for the Load Point EENS and ECOST for
Viewing & Printing
Graphic Plots of Element Contributions and Their Rankings for the Overall System EENS and
ECOST for Viewing & Printing
Tabulated Input Data, Load Point Reliability Indices, Overall System Reliability Indices, Element
Contributions and their rankings

Reliability Assessment Analysis System Analysis Toolbar
30.1 Reliability System Analysis Toolbar

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis toolbar appears on the screen when you are in the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Mode. This toolbar has six function keys as shown
below.
Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options
View Distribution System Reliability Output File
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis

Select a study case from the Study Case toolbar when you are in Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Study Mode. Click on the Run Distribution System Reliability Analysis button to perform a
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study. A dialog box will appear that allows you to specify the
output report name if the output file name is set to the Prompt in the Output Report list box. The
Distribution System Reliability Analysis study results will appear on the one-line diagram and can be
viewed in an output report in both tabulated formats and plot formats.
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options

Click on the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options button to customize the one-line
diagram annotation display options under the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study mode, and
to specify the load point reliability indices you wish displayed. See Display Options for more
information.
View Output File

Click on this button to open up the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager dialog box,
from which you can select a variety of pre-formatted output files. Select a file type and click on the OK
button to bring up the output file. A detailed explanation of the Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Output Report Manager is provided in section 30.6.

Reliability Assessment Analysis System Analysis Toolbar
You can also select output files from the Output Report list box.
This list contains all the output files in the current project folder.
Distribution Reliability Analysis Plots

Click on this icon to view plots of EENS/ECOST rankings, and bring up a dialog box that allows you to
select load points/buses/system from a list.

The Stop Sign button is normally disabled. Only when a distribution system reliability analysis has been
initiated does this button becomes enabled as a red stop sign. Click on this button to terminate the current
calculation. If you terminate the calculation before it completes one-line diagram displays will not be
available, and the output report will be incomplete.
Get Online Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Advanced Monitoring is online. Click on this button to use
real-time data as initial conditions for this analysis.
Get Archived Data

This button is active when ETAP Real-Time Event Playback is online. Click on this button to use
archived data as initial conditions for this analysis.

Reliability Assessment Analysis Study Case Editor

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, report
options, and permits component/system plot display selection. ETAP allows you to create and save an
unlimited number of study cases for each type of study. Just like any other study types, you can easily
switch between different distribution system Reliability Analysis Study Cases. This feature is designed to
organize your study efforts and save you time.
A Study Case can be used for any combination of any configuration status, one-line diagram presentation,
and Base/Revision Data.
To create a new distribution system reliability analysis study case, go to the Project View, right-click on
the Distribution System Reliability Analysis sub-folder inside the Study Case folder, and select Create
New. The module will then create a new study case, which is a copy of the default study case, and it can
be added to the Distribution System Reliability Analysis sub-folder.
When you are in the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Mode, you can access the Distribution
System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor by clicking on the Study Case button on the Study Case
Toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Distribution System
Reliability Analysis sub-folder under the Study Cases folder.
The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor consists of three pages: Info page,
Sensitivity Analysis Report page, and the Plot page.

30.2.1 Info Page

This page permits you to specify general solution parameters and Study Case information.
Study Case ID
ID and entering a new ID. Study Case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters long. Use the
Method
This section allows you to specify whether you wish to use the single or double contingency levels for the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis.
Single Contingency Level

Check this box to use the single contingency for the Distribution System Reliability Analysis.
Double Contingency Level

Check this box to use the double contingency for the Distribution System Reliability Analysis.

Loading
You can specify the system loading conditions for the Distribution System Reliability Analysis in this
section.
Loading Category
Select one of the 10 loading categories for this study case from the pull-down list. Upon selection of any
category, ETAP uses the percent loading of individual motors and static loads as specified for the selected
category.
Note: You can assign loading to each one of the 10 categories in the Nameplate page, Loading page, or
Rating page for induction machines, synchronous motors, static loads, lumped loads, MOVs, capacitors,
UPSs, inverters, and chargers, respectively.
Operating P, Q,V
Check this option to use operating P and Q as specified in the relevant Component Editors.
Note: If this option is selected, you must run a load flow calculation first to obtain the operating load.

You can specify the load diversity factors in this section.
None
Click on this button to select None to use the percent loading of each load as entered for the selected
loading category, i.e., no diversity factor is considered.
Bus Maximum
When the Maximum bus loading option is selected, the loading of all motors and static loads will be
multiplied by the maximum diversity factor of the bus to which they are directly connected. Using this
option, you can define the different loading for reliability analysis studies with each bus having a different
maximum diversity factor. This study option is helpful when the future loading of the electrical system
has to be considered.
Bus Minimum
When the Minimum bus loading option is selected, the loading of all motors and static loads will be
multiplied by the bus minimum diversity factor of the bus to which they are directly connected. Using
this option, you can define the different loading for reliability analysis studies with each bus having a
different minimum diversity factor.
This study option may be useful in cases where the effect of light loading condition needs to be
investigated.
Global
When this option is selected, ETAP will ask you to enter global diversity factors for motors and static
loads, respectively. When you select this option, ETAP will globally multiply all motors and static loads
of the selected loading category with the entered values. When using this option, you can define the
different loading for reliability analysis studies with fixed diversity factors for all loads.

25% above their values as specified by the selected loading category. This value can be smaller or greater
than 100%.
Charger Loading
Load Category
Select this option to use the P and Q specified in the Loading Category section of Charger Editor for
chargers.
Operating Load
Select this option to use the P and Q as specified in the Operating Load section of the Charger Editor.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remarks box. Information entered here will be
printed on the second line of every output report page header. These remarks can provide specific
information regarding each study case.
Note: The first line of the header information is global for all study cases and entered in the Project
Information Editor.

30.2.2 System Index Report Page

You can use this page to specify the numbers of elements that contribute most to system reliability indices
EENS and ECOST and their rankings will be reported.
System Contribution Ranking for Reporting
No of Most Contributing Elements to EENS

Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index EENS from the pull-down list.
No of Most Contributing Elements to ECOST

Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index ECOST from the pull-down list.

30.2.3 Load Index Report Page

Using this page, you can specify the numbers of elements that contribute most to load point reliability
indices EENS and ECOST and their rankings will be reported.
Element Contribution Ranking for Reporting
No of Most Contributing Elements to EENS

Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index EENS from the drop-down list.
No of Most Contributing Elements to ECOST

Select the number of the elements that contribute most to the index ECOST from the drop-down list.

30.2.4 Plot Page

Select the elements you want to display in plot format.
System Index
Plot/Tabulate System Reliability Indices
Check this box to plot/tabulate system reliability indices.
Element Index
You can specify the load points that will be plotted in this section.
Element Type
Select types of components or devices from the list. Only the components associated with the listed types
can be selected for plotting/tabulating.

Plot Options
Device ID
This table provides a list of the devices or components for the given Device Type. Select a device or
component and click next to it to place an X under the Plot/Tabulate column.
Plot/Tabulate
You also can include a device or component in the plot list by first selecting that device or component,
and then checking this box. An X will be placed next to this device or component in the Plot/Tabulate
column.

Reliability Assessment Analysis Modeling and Calculation Method

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages
for AC, AC-DC, and DC info annotations.
Note: The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study case are specific to that study
30.3.1 Results Page

Select the information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

Load Point Reliability Indices
Average Failure Rate

Check this box to display the average failure rate for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Display Results below.
Average Outage Duration r

Check this box to display the average outage duration for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Annual Outage U
Check this box to display the annual unavailability for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from
Expected Energy Not Supplied EENS

Check this box to display the EENS for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display Results
below.
Note: The EENS for a bus is defined as the EENS of the loads that are directly connected to the bus
owing to the interruption of this bus.
Expected Interruption Cost ECOST

Check this box to display the ECOST for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display
Results below. Note that the EENS for a bus is defined as the ECOST of the loads that are directly
connected to the bus owing to the interruption of this bus.
Interruption Energy Assessment Rate IEAR

Check this box to display the IEAR for the Buses/Generators/Load Points checked from Display Results
below.
Display Results
Buses
Check this box to display the reliability indices checked from the section of Load Point Reliability Indices
for buses.
Generators
for generators.
Load Points
for load points.

30.3.2 AC Info Page

This page allows you to check the boxes for element and information annotations that you wish to be
displayed on the one-line diagram.

ID
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected AC elements on the one-line
diagram.
Rating
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load/Panel kVA/MVA / Conn. Type (# of Phases - # of Wires)
Bus kA Bracing
Switch
Meter
Branch Base MVA
Transformer kVA/MVA
Line # of lines - # of conductor/ size
Cable # of Cables - # of Conductor/Cable - Size
kV
A
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ampere ratings of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
Z
one-line diagram.
D-Y
one-line diagram.
Line/Cable: click on the appropriate checkboxes to display the size, type and length of the line or cable.
Composite Motor
Click on this checkbox to display the composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color
in which the IDs will be displayed.

Composite Network
Use Default Options

Show Eq Cable
Click this checkbox to display equivalent cables.

30.3.3 AC-DC Info Page

Color
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram.

AC/DC
ID
line diagram.
Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type
Charger
Inverter
UPS
VFD
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Z
Select the checkbox under this heading to display the impedance values of the selected elements on the
one-line diagram.
Line/Cable: click on the appropriate checkboxes to display the size, type and length of the line or cable.
Composite Network
Use Default Options

Click on this checkbox to use PowerStations default display options.
DC
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the ratings of the selected DC elements on the one-
line diagram.
Device Type
Battery
Motor
Load
Composite CSD
Converter
Bus

Node
CB
Fuse
Switch
Branch
Cable
kV
on the one-line diagram. Click on this button to display the cable/line conductor type on the one-line
diagram.
A
one-line diagram. Click on this button to display the cable/line length on the one-line diagram.
Z
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Click on this checkbox to display the composite motor IDs on the one-line diagram, then select the color
in which the IDs will be displayed.
Use Default Options


30.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Select the color theme for information annotations to be displayed on the one-line diagram from the drop-
down list. If you wish to create a new theme click on the Theme button and a color palette will appear that
permits you to assign colors and specify a name for this unique theme. You can also select an existing
theme in the pull-down list, make modifications to the theme, and then save it under a new theme name.
Annotations
Click on the Theme button to assign the ETAP theme for annotations, or click on the User-Defined button
and select colors from the pull-down lists to assign your own unique theme to the annotations for AC,
DC, Composite, AC DC, and Results.

30.4 Modeling and Calculation Method

Electric distribution system reliability analysis involves modeling different components of distribution
systems, computing reliability indices at load points and for the overall AC system, and ranking the
elements that contribute to the load point/bus/system indices EENS and ECOST. This section briefly
discusses some fundamentals and underlying principles of the ETAP Distribution System Reliability
Analysis Module.
30.4.1 AC Component and System Modeling

A two-state up/down representation is used for the operation/repair cycle of an element (such as lines,
cables, transformers, breaks, fuses, switches, loads and bus bars).
Normally open tie circuit connections can be taken into account. Currently, a normally open tie
circuit connection is defined in the ETAP as the connection that satisfies: (i) the two buses that it is
connected are energized (ii) it is composed of only the components of PDs, (iii) the connection is in
service and (iv) it contains at least one normally open PD.
As a default option of a sector interruption cost library, a Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) is
used to divide customers into seven categories: large user, industrial, commercial, agriculture,
residential, government & institutions and office & buildings. You can modify this cost library.
The sector interruption cost library gives the Sector Customer Damage Functions (SCDF), i.e., the
interruption costs for several discrete outage durations. A log-log interpolation of the cost data is
used where the interruption duration lies between two separate times. In the case of durations greater
than the largest duration, a linear extrapolation with the same slope as that between the second largest
and largest durations will be used to calculate the interruption cost.
Any switching device, such as breaker, fuse, contactor, and switch, has the function of fault isolation.
Only an overcurrent protective device (such as breaker and fuse) can interrupt fault currents.
A fault in a radial sub-system is interrupted by the nearest overcurrent PD on its source side; a fault in
a meshed sub-system is interrupted by its surrounding nearest overcurrent PDs. The associated set of
interrupted load points (LPs) is called the interrupted LP zone of the faulted element.
A fault in a radial sub-system is isolated by the nearest switching device of any kind on its source
side; a fault in a meshed sub-system is isolated by its surrounding nearest switching devices. The
associated set of isolated load points is called the isolated LP zone of the faulted element.
The affected load points in the isolated LP zone of an element will be connected after the repair of the
faulty component, while the ones contained in its interrupted LP zone but outside its isolated LP zone
will have the supply restored after a short switching or sectionalizing time.
The switching time for a load is internally set to the switching time of the component that is the
nearest to this load. The component may be an equivalent cable, switching device, or bus.
The EENS and ECOST for a bus are respectively defined as the Expected Energy Not Supply and
Expected Interruption Cost of the loads that are directly connected to that bus due to the outage of
that bus.
30.4.2 AC-DC Converter Models

In the current version of ETAP, the distribution system reliability analysis involves only AC systems.
The AC-DC converters are modeled below.
Charger & UPS

In the current version of ETAP, when performing AC Reliability Analysis, chargers and UPSs are
considered as loads connected to their input AC buses.

Inverter
An inverter is treated as a power supply source like a generator or utility.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

A VFD can only be inserted between a motor or a lump load and its terminal bus, and is treated as a
branch between the terminal bus and the motor.
30.4.3 Modeling Assumptions/Limitations

The current distribution system reliability analysis makes the following assumptions:
Only AC systems are considered.

All switching devices operate successfully when required.
Switching devices can be opened whenever possible to isolate a fault. Power supply can be restored
to provide power to as many load points as possible using appropriate switching actions and available
alternative supplies.
All failures are statistically independent. Second-order faults can be considered.
30.4.4 Distribution System Reliability Indices

The distribution system reliability is usually measured in terms of several indices that are defined below.
Average Failure Rate at Load Point I, i(f/yr)
i =
jNe
e, j
Where e,j is the average failure rate of element j; Ne is the total number of the elements whose faults will
interrupt load point i.
Annual Outage Duration at Load Point i, Ui(hr/yr)
Ui =
jNe
r
e , j ij
where rij is the failure duration at load point i due to a failed element j.
Average Outage Duration at Load Point i, ri(hr)
ri =Ui / i

Expected Energy Not Supplied Index at Load Point i, EENSi(MWhr/yr)
EENSi = Pi U i
where Pi is the average load of load point i.
Expected Interruption Cost Index at Load Point i, ECOSTi(k$/yr)
ECOSTi = Pi f ( r )
jNe
ij e, j
where f(rij) is the SCDF.
Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate Index at Load Point i, IEARi($/kWhr)
ECOSTi
IEARi =
EENS i
System Average Interruption Frequency Index, SAIFI(f/customer.yr)
SAIFI =
Total number of customer interruptions
=
N i i
Total number of customer served N i
where N i is the number of customers at load point i; the symbol means the summation for all load
points.
System Average Interruption Duration Index, SAIDI(hr/customer.yr)
SAIDI =
Sum of customer interruption durations
=
U N i i
Customer Average Interruption Duration Index, CAIDI(hr/customer interruption)
CAIDI =
Sum of customer interruption duration s
=
U N i i
Total number of customer interruptions N i i

Average Service Availability Index, ASAI(pu)
Customer hours of available service

ASAI =
Customer hours demanded
=
N i 8760 N iU i
N 8760
i
Where 8760 is the number of hours in a calendar year.
Average Service Unavailability Index, ASUI(pu)
ASUI = 1 ASAI
System Expected Energy Not Supplied Index, EENS(MWhr/yr)
EENS = Total energy not supplied by the system = EENS i
System Expected Interruption Cost Index, ECOST(k$/yr)
ECOST = ECOSTi
Average Energy Not Supplied Index, AENS(MWhr/customer.yr)
AENS =
Total energy not supplied by the system
=
EENS i
System Interrupted Energy Assessment Rate Index, IEAR($/kWhr)
ECOST
IEAR =
EENS

30.4.5 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study

The Distribution System Reliability Analysis employs a new analytical algorithm to assess the reliability
indices of mixed radial and meshed distribution systems. This algorithm basically uses the algorithm for
radial distribution systems since the meshed network, if any, is first converted to a radial network.
Therefore, the employed algorithm is quite efficient and suitable for large-scale distribution systems of
general configurations.
The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study generates crystal output reports showing the system
input data, reliability indices results, element ranking information, and tabulation of the results. Some of
these results can also be viewed directly from the one-line diagram using the Distribution System
Reliability Display Options Editor.

Reliability Assessment Analysis Required Data
30.5 Required Data

To run a Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study, you need to provide reliability-related data, such
as failure rates, repair times, and switching times of network elements. A summary of these data for
different types of elements is given in this section.
Note: Maintenance Outage Rate and Maintenance Outage Time are not used in reliability calculation for
this version.
Bus Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Branch Data
2-Winding & 3-Winding Transformers

Active Failure Rate
Passive Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Cable/Transmission Line
Length
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Impedance & Current-Limiting Reactor

Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Power Grid (Utility) & Synchronous Generator Data

Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time


Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Quantity (No. of Loads)

Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Static Load Data

Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Lumped Load Data

Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
UPS Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
VFD Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time

Charger Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time
Load Sector
Inverter Data
Active Failure Rate
Repair Time
Switching Time
Replacement Time

Study Case ID
Report Option (for Plots and Crystal Reports)

Reliability Assessment Analysis Output Report
30.6 Output Report

Output reports for Distribution System Reliability Analysis Studies are available in different levels and
are arranged into two formats: Crystal Output Report, One-Line Diagram Display.
30.6.1 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager

Click on the View Output File button on the Distribution System Reliability Analysis toolbar to open the
Distribution System Reliability Analysis Report Manager. The Distribution System Reliability Analysis
Report Manager provides different formats for Crystal Reports and consists of four pages.
Complete Page
This page allows you to select the Complete Output Report. All four pages give you the option of viewing
the selected reports in Crystal Reports, or creating a file for printing or emailing in PDF, MS Word, Rich
Text Format, MS Excel format. You can set this choice as the default format for any reports that are
generated.
Input Page
This page provides the formats for different input data.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results.
Summary Page
This page provides the summary from calculation results.

30.6.2 Distribution System Reliability Crystal Report

If the last study run is the distribution system reliability analysis, then if you click on the Report Manager
button on the Study Case toolbar or by select the Crystal Report format from the Reliability Analysis
toolbar, you will be able to open and view the Crystal Output Report for the distribution system reliability
analysis study. The Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Crystal Report contains the following
major sections:
Cover Page
This is the first page of the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Study Crystal Report. It includes the
information from a number of different types of buses, branches, unit system, project file name, and the
output file name and its location.

Bus Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system buses, including their ID, nominal kV, failure rate,
repair time, switching time and replacement time.
Load Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system loads that include synchronous motor, induction
machine, static load, lumped load, UPS, charger, capacitor, and filter. The input data reported are load ID
and type, connected bus ID, average load, user sector ID, # of loads, failure rate, repair time and
replacement time.

Source Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system sources that include power grid (utility) and
synchronous generator. The input data reported are source connected bus ID, source ID and type, failure
rate, repair time, switching time and replacement time.
Branch Input Data

This section reports the input data related to system branches that include cables, transmission lines,
impedances, reactors, and 2-winding and 3-winding transformers. The input data reported are branch ID,
branch type, length (if any), total failure rate, active failure rate, repair time, switching time, and
replacement time.

Branch Connection
This section reports branch connection information for all branches in the system. It shows the branch
ID, the branch type, and the bus that it originates from and to which bus it is connected.

Sector Interruption Cost Library Data

This section lists the library data of sector interruption cost.

Switching Device Input Data

This section reports the input data related to protective devices. The input data reported are switching
device ID, switching device type, active failure rate, passive failure rate, repair time, switching time and
replacement time.

Load Point Report

In the Load Point Report section, the load point ID, user sector, load point connected bus ID (if any),
average (active) failure rate, average outage duration, annual outage duration, EENS, ECOST and IEAR
are reported.
Note: Only the buses that are selected for plotting in the Reliability Analysis Study Case Editor are
tabulated.

EENS Sensitivity Analysis

In the EENS Sensitivity Analysis section, the system/bus/load point ID and type, corresponding
contributing element ID, type and EENS are reported.

ECOST Sensitivity Analysis

In the ECOST Sensitivity Analysis section, the system/bus/load point ID and type, corresponding
contributing element ID, type and ECOST are reported.

Summary
The Summary section incorporates the information from a number of different types of buses, branches,
system frequency, unit system, project file name, output file name, and its location.

30.6.3 Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display

You can choose how the results are displayed on the one-line diagram for the Distribution System
Reliability Analysis Study by using the Distribution System Reliability Analysis Display Options Editor.
The following screen capture shows a one-line diagram display.

Reliability Assessment Analysis Plots
30.7 Plots
Plots are available for EENS ranking and ECOST ranking of system/load points. Click on the Reliability
Analysis Plots button located on the Reliability Analysis toolbar to select a plot.
Device Type
Select a device type.
Device ID
Select the devices that you wish to plot. This box lists all the devices that are selected in the Reliability
Study Case Editor, Plot page, for the selected device type. Multiple devices can be selected.
Plot Type
For Reliability Analysis plot, the following curves are available.
EENS
Plot EENS ranking for the selected devices.
ECOST
Plot ECOST ranking for the selected devices.

Reliability Assessment Analysis Plots
A set of sample plots is shown below.

Chapter 31
Transformer MVA Sizing

In power systems, there are many devices whose proper size is critical to the design of a power delivery
system. One of the most important is the power transformer. There are several factors involved in the
process of sizing a transformer. ANSI and IEC Standards provide a set of guidelines that list these factors
and how they can be used to determine if a transformer can handle its required operating load.
Inadequately sized transformers may shorten the equipments operating life or cause overloading failures.
ETAP has compiled the information contained on standards ANSI/IEEE C57, IEC 60076-2 & 60726 into
a program that can easily determine the proper size of a power transformer. The method used by the
program considers several factors like ambient temperature, altitude, cooling stage and type (dry or liquid
fill). When sizing a transformer, it is also very important to consider the expected future growth of the
required load. The MVA sizing module uses adjusting factors to take this into account. The transformer
short-circuit requirement transformer impedance and basic impulse level (BIL), are also considered by
the MVA sizing module. The module has built in functions that compare the calculated size and
impedance against the minimum values recommended by the standards.
The ETAP Transformer Sizing Module provides two sizing calculations. One calculation is to size the
transformer MVA rating (both rated and maximum) and %Z for single-phase and 3-phase 2-winding
transformers, based on ANSI and IEC standards. Another calculation is to optimize a generator unit
transformer tap ratio based on ANSI standards. The first calculation is hereafter referred to as
Transformer MVA Sizing, whereas the second calculation is referred to hereafter as Transformer Tap
Optimization. Transformer Tap Optimization is explained in detail in Chapter 27.
This chapter describes the interfaces, input, and output data involved in running the Transformer MVA
Sizing Module. Other associated operations including data update will also be explained. A brief view of
the related standards is included as well.
The Transformer MVA Sizing chapter describes how to start the transformer MVA sizing calculation, the
input data and output results of the calculation, and how to use the sizing results to update the transformer
editor. The section on calculation methods provides some technical background on the calculations
involved with transformer MVA sizing.

Transformer Sizing 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing
31.1 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing

The 2-Winding Transformer MVA Sizing calculation sizes the transformer rated MVA, maximum MVA,
and %Z based on the transformer loading, installation, insulation level, and short-circuit duties. Load
variation factors can also be included in the sizing calculation. This section describes how to access the
Transformer MVA Sizing calculation, sizing options, required input data, and available results.
To access the Transformer MVA Sizing Module, double-click on the transformer icon in the one-line
diagram to access the Transformer editor. Next, select the Sizing page.
You may access the Transformer editor from the Project view as well.
On the Sizing page, you can select or enter the transformer loading data, transformer installation, and
transformer insulation data to run the sizing calculation, select the recommended sizing results and update
the transformer ratings based on the calculated size.

Transformer Loading
The Transformer Loading group allows you to find the operating load or the connected load to this
transformer and then use either load for sizing purposes. Also, you can manually enter a loading for the
transformer.
MVA
Enter the loading seen by the transformer. The loading MVA can be entered manually or updated
automatically by clicking on the Operating or Connected Load buttons. This value is used as the
transformer load MVA in the sizing calculations.
Operating MVA, MW and Mvar

If you run Load Flow Analysis and select the option to update Operating Load & V from the Load Flow
Study Case Editor, the transformer operating MVA, MW and Mvar will be updated and displayed in these
fields and the Operating button will be enabled.
The operating MVA is the maximum value of the MVA calculated on the From or To side of the two-
winding transformer.
Load Flow Study Case Info Page
Two Winding Transformer Sizing Page
Clicking on the Operating button will update the MVA field and at the same time run the sizing
calculations.
Connected MVA, MW and Mvar

If the loading on a transformer is due to a radial system, the connected loading can then be automatically
computed and displayed in these fields and the Connected button. If a non-radial or looped configuration
is encountered, a message displaying Loop configuration detected. No Calculations! will appear.
Click on the Connected button to update the load MVA field and run the sizing calculations.
Spare Loads
You can use this option while calculating the total connected load downstream to a transformer to include
all spare loads to determine the final connected load to the transformer. A spare load is defined as having
a configuration status set to spare in the respective Element Editor.

Configuration Status Demand Factor
Load Variation
This section defines load variation factors that affect MVA sizing calculation.
Growth Factor
The growth factor is an allowance for future growth. This percent value indicates how much of a future
load increase should be expected for the given transformer. The growth factor is used for calculating the
required Rated MVA of the transformer. If you select the option Use GF for Max. MVA, then the growth
factor will be used for calculating the Max MVA size.
Load Factor
The load factor is defined as the ratio of the average load to the peak load over a designated period of
time. You may calculate the Load Factor as a percentage from the following relation:
kWi * Ti
% Load Factor = 100 *
kWp * Tt
where:
i Interval of time when the load is non-zero

kWi Load at interval i
Ti Number of hours of interval i
kWp Peak load
Tt Ton + Toff
Ton Total hours when the load is on
Toff Total hours when the load is off
If the transformer carries load at every interval, then the relationship may be simplified to:
Ton
% Load Factor = 100 *
Tt
The Load Factor is equal to 100% if the transformer carries the required load continuously all the time.
Installation
This group defines the transformer installation conditions that affect MVA sizing calculations.

Altitude
Enter the altitude of the transformer installation in feet or meters. ETAP adjusts the calculated Required
Rated MVA based on this altitude value.
ETAP uses the following derating factors, per Standards C57.92-1981 and C57.96-1986, for every 330 ft.
(100 m) above 3300 ft. (1000 m), for transformers installed at an altitude greater than 3300 ft. (1000 m).
Types of Cooling Derating Factor (%)

Liquid-immersed air-cooled 0.4
Liquid-immersed water-cooled 0.0
Liquid-immersed forced-air-cooled 0.5
Liquid-immersed forced-liquid-cooled
With liquid-to-air cooler 0.5
Liquid-immersed forced-liquid-cooled
With liquid-to-water cooler 0.0
Dry type, Self-Cooled (AA) 0.3

Dry type, Forced-Air-Cooled (AA/FA and AFA) 0.5
For IEC rated transformers, naturally cooled, the limit of average winding temperature rise is reduced by
1k for every 400m above 1000m. For forced cooled transformers, the reduction shall be 1k for every
250 m.
Ambient Temp.
Enter the ambient temperature of the transformer location in degrees Celsius. ETAP adjusts the Required
Rated MVA based on the ambient temperature value.
Impedance
This data section defines the transformer Basic Impulse Level (BIL) and primary and secondary short
circuit duties that affect calculations of the transformer impedance.
BIL Limit
Enter the Basic Impulse Level of the transformer. ETAP utilizes this value for determining the
transformer minimum impedance according to ANSI/IEC standards.
Limit Short-Circuit kA
If you select this option, ETAP will use the short circuit current contribution, the BIL value, and the
transformer type to determine the impedance of the transformer.
@ Prim.
Enter the primary winding short-circuit current requirement in kA. ETAP will use this value to calculate
the transformer impedance. This value indicates the short circuit current contribution for the transfer from
secondary to primary.
@ Sec.
Enter the secondary winding short circuit current requirement in kA. This value indicates the short circuit
current contribution for the transfer from primary to secondary.
ETAP will determine either the primary or secondary short circuit current contribution if either value is
known based on the rated voltage ratio.

Options
This group defines additional options used for Transformer MVA Sizing calculation.
Use GF for Max. MVA

If you select this option, ETAP will use the Growth Factor to adjust the required Max MVA value
calculated by the program.
Result
This data section displays all the results from the Transformer MVA Sizing calculation.
One Size Larger (Standard)
Required Size (Non-Standard)
One Size Smaller (Standard)
Larger Size
The calculated Rated MVA, Max MVA, and %Z will be displayed in these fields for the One Size
Larger Transformer. ETAP first will calculate the Required Rated MVA, Max MVA, and %Z. Then,
based on the ANSI or IEC Standard Tables, ETAP will select a standard larger size from the required
values.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Larger Size values by pressing on the
Larger Size button.

Required Size
ETAP calculates the required Rated MVA, Max MVA, and % Z. And then, the calculated values are
displayed in these fields.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Required Size values by pressing on the
Required Size button.
Smaller Size
Calculated Rated MVA, Max MVA, and %Z will be displayed in these fields for the One Size Smaller
Transformer. ETAP first will calculate the Required Rated MVA, Max MVA, and %Z. Then, based on
the ANSI or IEC Standard Tables, ETAP will select a standard smaller size from the required values.
You can update the Transformer Ratings using the calculated Smaller Size values by pressing on the
Smaller Size button.

Transformer Sizing Calculation Method

Standard Compliance
ETAP Transformer MVA Sizing calculation complies with the following standards:
ANSI/IEEE C57-1994
IEC 60076-2 (liquid)
IEC 60726 (Dry)
ETAP Transformer MVA Sizing Module follows recommended transformer sizing procedures as
described in ANSI/IEEE C57, IEC 60076-2, and IEC 60726. The standard transformer sizes used by the
program are taken from transformer size tables described by these standards. The MVA sizing module
determines the transformer required size based on the use of several multiplying factors. The different
multiplying factors are based on the transformer installation altitude, ambient temperature, and insulation
/encapsulation type, number of phases, cooling stage, and transformer size. For example, a transformer
installed at an ambient temperature of 20 degrees Celsius will have a higher MVA capacity than a
transformer installed at a 30 degrees Celsius location. ANSI/IEEE Standards require that the transformer
be sized based on the output MVA requirement. IEC Standards require that the transformer be sized based
on the output MVA requirement plus the transformer losses. This means that when you size a transformer
based on IEC Standards, the losses of the transformer are included in the calculated required size.
ETAP will show N/A for the next larger MVA or next smaller MVA if the value is not available from the
standard ANSI/IEC transformer sizes.
The Transformer MVA Sizing module also provides the user with the typical percent impedance values
for the calculated required size, next larger size, and next smaller size. If the Limit Short-Circuit kA
option is enabled, the %Z value is determined based on the primary short circuit current and the full load
current of the required MVA load. The BIL rating of the transformer is used to determine the minimum
impedance that the transformer should have in case the required short circuit current is too high.

Transformer Sizing Required Data
31.3 Required Data

Input Data
The input data required for the Transformer MVA Sizing calculation is found in the Transformer Editor.
The data are located in three pages.
2-Winding Transformer Editor Info page:

Standard
Type
Subtype
Class
Temp. Rise
2-Winding Transformer Editor Rating page:

Primary Winding kV rating
2-Winding Transformer Editor Sizing page:

Growth factor
Load Factor
Altitude
Ambient Temperature
BIL
Primary/Secondary SC kA requirement
Operating load
Connected load

Chapter 32
Transformer Tap Optimization

The purpose of the ETAP Transformer Tap Optimization is to optimize a step up generator unit
transformer tap ratio based on ANSI/IEEE Standard C57.116-1989. This module is used to determine the
optimal transformer tap (turns ratio) so that the transformer is capable of delivering the maximum Mvar
output range within the expected system and generator operating voltage variation ranges. This module
can also be used to check the Mvar delivering range for a given transformer tap setting (turns ratio).
This chapter describes the interfaces, input, and output data necessary to run the Transformer Tap
Optimization Module. Other associated operations including data update, plotting, and printing will also
be explained, along with a brief view of the related standard. The calculation method and the data
required for the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation will be outlined as well.
Auxiliary Load
Unit Transformer
and Tap
Transformer Transformer
Primary Secondary
Cable Cable
System
Unit Generator

Transformer Tap Optimization Transformer Tap Optimization
32.1 Transformer Tap Optimization

The Transformer Tap Optimization calculation optimizes a unit transformer tap, or equivalently, its turn
ratio, to ensure that the generator unit voltage remains within its upper and lower variation range
(typically 95% to 105%), while producing its full MW and Mvar capability under the system voltage
variation.
The following sections describe how to perform the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation, enter
required input data, and view available output results. To access the Transformer Tap Optimization
calculation, go to the Tap page of the 2-Winding Transformer editor. Check the Unit Transformer for
Generator check box and the Tap Optimization button will appear on the right of this page. Select a
generator from the pull-down list, and then click on the button to launch the Transformer Tap
Optimization Editor.
To start Transformer
Tap Optimization
The Transformer Tap Optimization editor has two pages:

Tap Optimization
Mvar Delivery Curve

Transformer Tap Optimization Tap Optimization Page
32.2 Tap Optimization Page
Transformer
Enter the transformer data or click Get Data to select the transformer rated MVA, % Z, and X/R to be
used in the optimization calculation. The Update button will only be enabled if there is an existing
difference between the values shown on this page and the values contained on the Rating page.
Use Z Tolerance
Check this box to include the Z tolerance for the selected transformer in the calculation.
Step Sizes
This button opens the Tap Optimization Step Editor to enter the Min, Max, and Step values for the tap.
These parameters are initially defaulted to the following values.

Transformer Tap Optimization Tap Optimization
Rated MVA
Enter the transformer Rated MVA or click Get Data to enter the transformer rated MVA from the Rating
page.
%Z
Enter percent impedance or click Get Data to enter the transformer positive sequence impedance from the
Rating page, with the transformer rated MVA and kV ratings as the base values.
X/R
Enter transformer X/R ratio or update X/R ratio from the Rating page.
Get Data
Click the Get Data button to substitute the Rated MVA, % Z, and X/R into these fields. The transformer
ID is displayed alongside this button.
Primary Side Cable Impedance (Ohms)

Enter or click Get Data to select the transformer primary side cable impedance.
R
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer primary side cable resistance in Ohms.
Note that this value should include the following factors:
Actual primary side cable resistance
Any equivalent system internal resistance
X
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer primary side cable reactance in Ohms.
Actual primary side cable reactance
Any equivalent system internal reactance
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute cable R and X values into the Primary Side Cable Impedance
section from the connected primary cable. The primary cable ID is displayed alongside this button. None
will be displayed if there is no cable connected to the primary side of the transformer.

Secondary Side Cable Impedance (Ohms)

Enter or select the transformer secondary side cable impedance.
R
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer secondary side cable reactance in ohms.
Actual secondary side cable resistance
X
Enter or click Get Data to automatically select the transformer secondary side cable reactance in ohms.
Actual secondary side cable reactance
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute cable R and X values into the Secondary Side Cable Impedance
section from the connected secondary cable. The secondary cable ID is displayed alongside this button.
None will be displayed if there is no cable connected to the secondary side of the transformer.
System
Enter the data or click Get Data to automatically update the system kV.
System kV
Enter or update the system voltage in kV. This voltage is also the transformer primary bus voltage if the
primary side cable does not exist.
%Variation (+) / % Variation (-)

Enter the system voltage variations in percent. These two values are used to generate Mvar delivery
curves corresponding to the upper and lower voltage variation from the system operating voltages. The
default value is +/- 5.
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute the transformer primary side bus nominal kV into the System kV.
The transformer primary side bus ID is displayed alongside this button.
Generator
Enter or click Get Data to update the generator rated kV, MW, Max, and Min Mvar.
Rated kV
Enter or update the generator rated voltage in kV from the one-line diagram.
%Variation
Enter the generator voltage variation in percent. This value is used to calculate the upper and lower
voltage variation from the rated voltage. The default value is 5.
MW
Enter or update generator MW rating from the generator Rating page.

Max Mvar
Enter or update generator Max Mvar limits from the generator Rating page.
Min Mvar
Enter or update generator Min Mvar limits from the generator Rating page.
Get Data Button

Click the Get Data button to substitute the generator rated kV, MW, Max Mvar, and Min Mvar fields into
the Generator group of this page. The generator ID is displayed alongside this button, if there exists a
generator connecting to the transformer secondary side through no more than one cable. If there is no
generator that matches the criteria, then None will be displayed.
Auxiliary Load
Enter the generator unit auxiliary load. The auxiliary load is treated as a motor load (constant power). The
generator unit auxiliary load MVA is computed from the MW and Mvar and is a display-only field.
MW
Enter the generator unit auxiliary load MW.
Mvar
Enter the generator unit auxiliary load Mvar.
MVA
MVA is computed from MW and Mvar and is a display-one filed.
Optimization and Results

ETAP displays the calculation results if the calculation succeeds in this group.
Optimization Primary Tap

Select this option to calculate the optimal transformer primary tap and generate the Mvar delivery curve.
Use Existing Primary Tap

Select this option to generate the Mvar delivery curve using the existing transformer primary tap. When
this option is selected, the existing transformer primary tap will display in the Prim % Tap and kV Tap
fields.
% Tap
This column displays the calculated optimal transformer tap on the primary side and the tap used in the
calculation on the secondary side, both in percent. Note that the transformer tap on the secondary side
used in the calculation is always zero.

kV Tap
This column displays the calculated optimal transformer tap on the primary side and the tap used in the
calculation on the secondary side, both in kV. Note that the transformer tap on the secondary side used in
the calculation is always zero.
Calculate
Click this button to run the calculation once all required input data has been entered. Successful
calculation returns the optimized transformer % Tap and kV Tap on the primary side in the %Tap and kV
Tap fields and the Mvar delivery curve if the Optimize Primary Tap is selected, or just generates the Mvar
delivery curve if the Use Existing Primary Tap option is selected.
Update Button
Click this button to update the Transformer Tap page with the calculation results, as shown below.
Transformer Tap Optimization Page
Transformer Tap Page

Mvar Delivery Curve Page

This page displays the results of the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation in a graphical format. The
plot depicts generator voltage vs. the generator reactive power output. This format is also called the
generator reactive power (Mvar) delivery capability, because it shows the generator reactive power output
range at the calculated transformer tap and system operating voltages. The plot below contains three
delivery curves at three different system-operating voltages. The first voltage is the actual system rated
voltage while the other two plots are based on the voltage variation (max and min) specified in the editor.
Print Graph
Click this button to send a copy of the Delivery Curve to the default printer. The default printer can be
configured in your Windows Operating System.

Transformer Tap Optimization Calculation Method

Standard Compliance
The ETAP Transformer Tap Optimization calculation complies with the latest ANSI/IEEE Standard, cited
below:
- ANSI/IEEE Standard, C57.116-1989, IEEE Guide for Transformers Directly Connected to Generator
ANSI/IEEE Std. C57.116-1989 requires that the generator be capable of operating at a rated KVA,
frequency, and power factor within a defined rated voltage range, typically 5%. This program addresses
the optimal selection of the generator unit transformer tap in order to let the generator fully utilize its
reactive power generation capability. The program performs a series of load flow calculations for the
system under consideration, including the system voltage level, transformer primary and secondary
cables, transformer rating and impedance, generator design MW and Mvar range, as well as generator unit
auxiliary power. As a result, the program calculates a transformer tap setting on the transformer primary
side that will allow the generator to acquire the widest range of reactive power generation. This result is
corresponding to the line in the Mvar Delivery Curve marked for Vs = System Nominal kV. To check the
conditions while the system varies, two additional lines in the Mvar Delivery Curve marked for Vs =
System Nominal kV + Variation and Vs = System Nominal kV Variation are also given.
Note: The final calculation result depends on the user-defined tap step. If the tap step is specified as 1%,
then the final optimal tap will be calculated to 1% precision, e.g., 4.0%, 5.0%, 6.0%, etc. On the other
hand, if the tap step is chosen as 0.5%, then the final optimal tap will be calculated with 0.5% precision,
e.g., 4.0%, 4.5%, 5.0%, 5.5%, 6.0%, etc. The tap step is set in the Tap Optimization page of the 2-
Winding Transformer Editor.

Transformer Tap Optimization Required Data
32.4 Required Data

The input data for the Transformer Tap Optimization calculation includes system, transformer, and
generator unit (including the auxiliary load) data, as listed below:
System
Nominal kV System nominal operation voltage
% Variation (+) System operating voltage positive variation
% Variation (-) System operating voltage negative variation
Transformer
Rated MVA Transformer rated MVA
%Z Transformer rated positive sequence impedance
X/R Transformer rated positive sequence X/R ratio
Use Z Tolerance Flag to use or not use Z Tolerance along with the values of Z Variation
Step Sizes Transformer step sizes including Min, Max, and Step
Cables (Optional)
Primary Cable R Transformer primary side cable resistance
Primary Cable X Transformer primary side cable reactance
Secondary Cable R Transformer secondary side cable resistance
Secondary Cable X Transformer secondary side cable reactance
Generator
Rated kV Generator rated voltage
kV % Variation Generator voltage variation
MW Generator design active power generation
Max Mvar Generator maximum reactive power generation
Min Mvar Generator minimum reactive power generation
Auxiliary Load (Optional)

Auxiliary Load MW Generator unit auxiliary real power
Auxiliary Load Mvar Generator unit auxiliary reactive power

Transformer Tap Optimization Output Reports
32.5 Output Reports

The Transformer Tap Optimization calculation results are reported both in the Transformer editor as well
as in Crystal Reports format. The Crystal Reports format provides you with the detailed information of a
Transformer Turn Optimization calculation. The Transformer Tap Optimization Report Manager gives
you access to the Output Reports.
32.5.1 Transformer Tap Optimization Report Manager

Click on the Transformer Tap Optimization Report Manager button to open the Report Manager. The
report manager allows you to select formats available for different portions of the report and view it via
Crystal Reports. The editor includes three pages (Complete, Input, and Result) representing different
sections of the Output Report.
Complete Page
You can select the Complete Output Report from this page. The complete report consists of input and
result sections of the report.
You can view the report in the viewer, or select a format to print to e-mail by clicking one of the selection
buttons (PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or MS Excel).

The first page of the Complete Report gives the system input data and other cover page information as
shown below:

The second page of the Complete Report displays the calculated optimal transformer tap both in % and in
kV. It then tabulates the system operating conditions under different system voltage and generator
voltage. The covered system operating voltage range is from 95% to 105% of its nominal operating
voltage, and the covered generator operating voltage range is also from 95% to 105% of its rated voltage.
In this table, generator MW and Mvar generation, generator terminal voltage, and the transformer input
power and output power are reported at the optimal tap setting.

Input Page
This page provides the data format for input data. You can view the report in the viewer, or select a
format to print to e-mail by clicking one of the selection buttons (PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or
MS Excel).
The Cover Data Report gives the input data. This report is the same as the first page of the the Complete
Report.

Result Page
This page provides different data formats for calculation results.

The following is a sample of the Results Report:

Chapter 33
DC Short-Circuit Analysis
To assure the safe operation of DC systems, whenever there are any changes in the system related to
sources, loads, and power transmission components, a DC Short-Circuit Analysis must be carried out to
evaluate system conditions under a fault and assess protective device ratings. A complete short-circuit
calculation should provide details of fault current variations at the fault location as well as for
contributing branches, from the initiation of the fault to its end. Due to the complexities involved in
source behaviors and the nonlinearity characteristics of the equipment, such calculations are very
extensive and therefore the maximum short-circuit current is often calculated for examination of
protective device ratings.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Overview
In compliance with IEEE Standard 946, the ETAP DC Short-Circuit Module calculates the total fault
current, current contributions from different sources, and the rise time constant of the total fault current. It
can conduct calculations on both radial and looped systems. The fault under consideration is a short-
circuit between the positive and the negative terminals at the fault location. The contributing sources to
the short-circuit current include charger/rectifier, UPS, battery, and DC motor. These sources can be
modeled as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind an impedance. For a
charger/rectifier source, the AC system equivalent impedance on the AC side can also be considered.
For each DC protective device, ETAP calculates the bus fault current as well as the maximum current that
flows through the device and flags the user in a prominent color for underrated devices.
The calculation results are reported in a Crystal Reports format as well as in a one-line diagram display.
The Crystal Reports format provides detailed information about the study, including all the input data
used in the calculation, fault current, contributions from different sources, and device rating validation
summary, etc. The user can customize the format and content of the Crystal Reports output report. The
one-line diagram display provides you with a direct visual representation of the system under fault
conditions. It displays the short-circuit current at the faulted bus, fault current contributions on
surrounding branches, as well as the system voltage profile under the fault.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Study Toolbar
33.1 Study Toolbar

The DC Short-Circuit Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in DC Short-Circuit Study
Mode.
Run DC Short-Circuit Analysis
DC Short-Circuit Display Options
DC Short-Circuit Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run DC Short-Circuit Analysis

Click on this button to run a DC short-circuit calculation.
Display Options
Click on this button to customize the information and results annotations displayed on the one-line
diagram in DC Short-Circuit mode.
DC Short-Circuit Report Manager

Click on this button to open the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager. You can specify the Crystal Reports
format for your output reports here. A detailed explanation of the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager is in
the Output Reports section.

Click on the Stop Sign button to halt the current calculation.
Get Online Data

Get Archived Data


DC Short-Circuit Analysis Study Case Editor

The DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains parameter settings required to perform a short-circuit
calculation. The calculation results are dependent on these settings. When a new study case is created,
ETAP provides you with the default parameters. However, you should check these parameters to make
sure that they are set as required.
The DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor contains two pages: the Info page and the Source Model page.
On the Info page, you can select faulted buses and specify contribution level, etc. In the Source Model
page, you specify the type of model for chargers and batteries, as well as what loads need to be
considered in a study.
33.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 12 characters.
Report
Specify the contribution level the report should encompass.
Bus Selection

Use this area to select which buses to Fault, Dont Fault, or click on the All Buses checkbox to fault all
buses.
Note: You can fault buses (or remove faults) directly from the one-line diagram by right-clicking on the
desired bus.
Study Remarks
You can enter up to 120 alphanumeric characters in this remark box. The information entered here will be
information regarding each study case. The first line of the header information is global for all study cases
and entered in the Project Information editor.
33.2.2 Source Model Page

This page allows you to specify the type of models you wish the program to use in a short-circuit
calculation.
Charger Contributions Based on

A charger can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects a constant current into the system when a fault occurs.

Editor Selection
Click on this option to select the model type as specified in the editor for individual chargers.
Fixed SC Contribution
Click on this option to use the constant current model for all the charges in the system.
AC System Impedance
Click on this option to use the constant voltage model for all the charges in the system.
Battery Contributions Based on

A battery can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects a constant current into the system when a fault occurs. The current
injected into the system is equal to a constant multiplied by its 1-minute discharge rate.
Editor Selection
Click on this option to select the model type as specified in the editor for individual batteries.
Constant Current (K*1-Min-Rating*String)

Click on this option to use the constant current model for all the batteries in the system.
Voc Behind Battery Impedance

Click on this option to use the constant voltage model for all the batteries in the system.
Motor Internal Voltage

A motor, or the motor load portion of a lump load, is modeled as a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. You can specify the internal voltage value by selecting one of the following two options:
100% of Motor Rated Voltage

Click on this option to use the motor rated voltage as the internal voltage.
Percent of Motor Rated Voltage

Click on this option to specify the motor internal voltage in percent based on the motor rated voltage.
Short-Circuit Contributions Based on

This group provides you with an option to skip certain load elements in a short-circuit analysis.
Static loads are also considered in a DC Short-Circuit Analysis and their presence reduces total fault
current.
Load Status Only

Select this option to include loads in the Short-Circuit Study based on load status. For the current system
configuration, loads that have either the Continuous or Intermittent status will be considered in the study.
Loads that have the Spare status will be excluded from the study. When this option is selected, all of the
Composite CSD loads will be included in the study.
Load Category Only

Select this option to use the loading percent to determine which loads will be included in the short-circuit
calculation. Once this option is selected, you can specify a loading category in the Loading Category
selection box. All loads that have non-zero loading percent for the selected Loading Category will be
included in the short-circuit calculation.

Use Both Above Options

Select this option to use both load status and loading category to determine loads to be included in the
short-circuit calculation. When this option is selected, all the loads that satisfy either or both of the above
two criterions will be included in the Short-Circuit Study.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options

The DC Short-Circuit Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-
DC, and Color information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
33.3.1 Results Page

Show Units
When this box is checked the unit for the calculation results will be displayed on the one-line diagram
along with the results.
Voltage
Bus
Click on this checkbox to display bus voltage on the one-line diagram.
Bus Voltage Unit Selection

From the drop-down list you can select to display bus voltage as a percentage or in volts.
Display Faulted Bus
Fault Current Rise Time-Constant

Click on this option to display the fault current rise time-constant in ms for faulted buses.
Equivalent Fault R
Click on this option to display the equivalent fault resistance in ohms for faulted buses.
Display Contribution
Converter, Battery, & Load

Click on any or all of these checkboxes to display short-circuit contribution from these components on the
one-line diagram.

33.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.

Rating
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Panel Connection Type Number of Phases - Number of Wires)
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z

Motor % LRC

D-Y
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Use Default Options


DC Short-Circuit Analysis Calculation Methods
33.3.3 AC-DC Page

ID
line diagram.

Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type Rating

UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Use Default Options


33.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme
Annotations

Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button
Theme Editor
may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously selected.


The ETAP DC Short-Circuit module can perform fault analysis for a radial or a looped system. It
calculates the maximum system fault current and contributions from individual sources. The fault under
consideration is assumed to be a short-circuit between the positive and negative terminals at the fault
location. Fault current contributing sources include chargers/rectifiers, UPS, batteries, and DC motors.
These sources can be modeled either as constant current sources or constant voltage sources behind
impedance, as specified by the user. It is assumed that these sources will reach their maximum
contribution level at the same time, which results in a conservative solution. ETAP also calculates the rise
time of fault current based on the equivalent R and L at the fault location. When calculating short-circuit
current, inductance values for all of the system components are neglected. These inductance values are
used in calculating fault current rise time.
33.4.1 Procedure for DC Short-Circuit Calculation

In a DC short-circuit calculation, a contributing source may be represented by different models, either as a
voltage source or as a current source. Even the sources that are represented as constant voltage sources
may have different per unit values. This is different from the AC short-circuit calculation by the IEEE
method, where a prefault voltage is specified and a circuit network is solved to find the fault current. In
the DC short-circuit calculation, a two-step procedure is adopted that applies the superposition theorem to
calculate fault current. The two steps are voltage profile calculation and short-circuit current calculation.
In the first step of the calculation, the short-circuit current sources such as charger, UPS, battery, and
motor are modeled as specified in the study case editor and individual element editors. They may be
modeled as constant current sources or as constant voltage sources behind impedance. Based on this
system, a load flow calculation is conducted to determine system voltage profile and current flows. These
voltage values will be used in the second step as the prefault voltage for short current calculation.
In the second step of the calculation, the program calculates fault current and contributions for each bus to
be faulted with the bus voltage calculated in the first step as the prefault voltage.
In addition to fault current, the program also calculates the equivalent R and L at the faulted bus, based on
the separate R and L network. Using the equivalent R and L, it calculates the current rise time constant for
the fault.
33.4.2 Short-Circuit Current Rise Time Constant Calculation

The short-circuit current reaches its maximum value at a rate depending on the system configuration and
the resistance and inductance values of all the elements in the system. For a radial system, it depends on
the system R/L ratio, which is simple to calculate. However, for a looped network with multiple sources,
it is rather complicated to determine the rise time constant of the short-circuit current.
ETAP calculates the rise time constant based on the equivalent R and L at the fault location.

33.4.3 Device Rating Evaluation

One of the major purposes of conducting a short-circuit calculation is to evaluate the device rating under
fault conditions, such as bus rating and protective device ratings. For each DC protective device, ETAP
calculates the bus fault current and the maximum current that flows through the device. The program then
compares the device rating against the maximum through current. If an underrated condition occurs,
ETAP will flag the underrated condition in the text report as well as in the one-line display.
33.4.4 Component Models

Charger
A charger can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. As a constant current source, it injects into the system a constant current equal to its rated
current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of the charger editor.
When modeled as a constant voltage source behind impedance, the rated voltage is used as the internal
voltage. The AC system Z specified in the Short-Circuit page of the Charger editor is converted to the DC
side and used as the impedance in the model.
UPS
A UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) is represented as a constant current source. It injects into the
system a constant current equal to its rated current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of
the UPS editor.
Battery
A battery can be represented as a constant current source or a constant voltage source behind impedance.
As a constant current source, it injects into the system a constant current equal to its 1 minute discharging
current multiplied by a K factor specified in the Short-Circuit page of the Battery Editor.
When modeled as a constant voltage source behind impedance, the internal voltage depends on the option
selected in the Battery Editor. These options include using the rated voltage or the value calculated based
on the battery specific gravity and minimum operating temperature.
DC Converter
A DC converter is used to change the voltage level in a DC system. If a fault occurs on the output side of
the system, the DC converter is modeled as a constant current source injecting into the system a constant
current. This current is equal to its rated current multiplied by the Imax specified in the Rating page of the
DC Converter Editor.
When calculating fault current contributions, the calculation does not extend into the input side of the
system. In case a DC converter has the same input and output rated voltage values and is involved in any
loop as the only DC converter, the calculation will stop and post a message to inform the user.

DC Motor
A DC motor is modeled as a constant voltage source behind impedance. The internal voltage value can be
specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case Editor. The impedance is specified in the Short-Circuit page
of the DC Motor Editor.
DC Lumped Load
The constant power portion of a DC lumped load is modeled as a constant voltage source behind an
impedance. The internal voltage value can be specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case editor. The
impedance is specified in the Short-Circuit Imp page of the DC Lumped Load editor.
Note: Only the motor loads of the lumped loads contribute short-circuit currents, i.e., if the percent motor
load of a lumped load is greater than zero, the motor load part will be modeled the same as a DC motor.
The static load part will be represented as a static load and the constant current load portion will be
ignored in the short-circuit calculation.
DC Static and Composite CSD Loads

DC static loads are included in short-circuit calculations. The presence of static loads provides shunt paths
for short-circuit current and hence reduce the total fault current. A Composite CSD (CCSD) load is
treated the same as a static load.
DC Cable
In order to achieve conservative results, in a DC short-circuit analysis, the cable resistance is calculated at
the minimum temperature entered in the Cable editor.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Required Data
33.5 Required Data
33.5.1 Source
Charger
Info Page
Charger ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page is required for DC Load Flow calculations
SC Page
Data in the SC Contribution for DC System section
AC System Z data is required if the Based on AC System Z option is selected
UPS
Info Page
UPS ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
AC rating data
DC rating data
Auction diode option
SC Imp Page
SC Contribution to DC System section data
Battery
Info Page
Battery ID
Bus connection data
Number of strings
Rating Page
Number of cells
SC Page
Battery Library type data: Rp, time constant, SG, VPC, and 1-min-rating
Short-circuit model data
External impedance data
Voc per cell data

33.5.2 Load
DC Motor
Info Page
Motor ID
Bus connection data
Configuration status
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating data
Load category data
SC Page
SC parameters
Lump Load
Info Page
Lump load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Motor/static load percent
Load category data
SC Imp Page
SC parameters
Static Load
Info Page
Static load ID
Bus connection data
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data

CCSD Load
Info Page
CCSD load ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data
33.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
Info Page
Cable ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Number of cables per phase
Impedance Page
Cable resistance and inductance
Units section data
Base and minimum operating temperature
DC Impedance
Info Page
DC impedance ID
Bus connection data
Impedance resistance and inductance
33.5.4 DC Converter
Info Page
DC converter ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
SC contribution data

33.5.5 Protective Device

If the data for a protective device has been entered by the user, the DC short-circuit calculation will
compare the short-circuit current against device rating and flag the user if the device is underrated.
DC CB
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
SC kA
DC Fuse
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rated V
Interrupting kA
DC Single-Throw Switch
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
Momentary kA
DC Double-Throw Switch
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
Rated V
Momentary kA
33.5.6 Study Case

Similar to any other study, you are always required to run a DC short-circuit calculation. When a DC
short-circuit calculation is initiated by the user, ETAP uses the study case currently showing in the study
case editor in the calculation. Every field in a study case has its default value. However, it is important to
set the values in the study case correctly to meet your calculation requirements.

DC Short-Circuit Analysis Output Reports
33.6 Output Reports

The DC short-circuit calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal
Reports format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated fault currents, time constant for
current rise, equivalent resistance at the faulted bus, as well as fault contributions from neighboring buses.
You can use the Display Options editor to specify the content to be displayed. It also flags underrated
protective devices in red.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a DC Short-Circuit Analysis. You
can utilize the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager to help you view the output report.
33.6.1 DC Short-Circuit Report Manager

To open the DC Short-Circuit Report Manager, click on the Report Manager button on the DC Short-
Circuit toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing
different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for
Output Report Name

Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel
of the output report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click on the Cancel button to close the
editor without viewing the report.

Complete Page
On this page there is only one format available, Complete, which opens the complete report for the DC
Short-Circuit Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
Format, or Excel formats. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default
checkbox.

Input Data Page

include:
Battery
Branch
Bus
Cable
Converter
Cover
Impedance
Loads
checkbox.

Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the short-circuit result portion of the Output Report.
checkbox.

Summary Page
This page allows you to select formats to view summary reports of the Output Report. The only summary
report format available is the Interrupting Current format.
checkbox.


automatically opens the output report, which is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format.
In the picture shown below, the output report name is DCSC and the selected format is Complete.
33.6.3 Input Data

Input data are grouped together according to element type. The following are some samples of input data.
Cable & Impedance Data

The cable and impedance input data page prints resistance and inductance values for these branches,
along with connection information. The resistance value for cables has been adjusted to the minimum
operating temperature. The inductance value is used to calculate time constant for fault current rise.

Converter Input Data

The converter input data section includes converter rating and the model used in the study. UPS and DC
converters are always represented as constant current sources. A charger may be modeled as a constant
voltage source behind system Z or a constant current source, depending on the selection in the DC Short-
Circuit Study Case Editor and the Charger Editor. When modeled as a constant V behind system Z, the
constant V is the charger AC input bus voltage converted to the DC side based on the rated voltage ratio.
The value is printed in the Vsys column.
Load Data
The load data section prints input data for motors, lump loads, static loads, and CCSD loads. The Vin
column shows the internal voltage of motors and the motor load portion of lump loads.

33.6.4 Short-Circuit Report

This section of the report shows the calculation results, arranged in such a way that each faulted bus is
started from a new page. It shows the total fault current as well as bus voltage and short-circuit
contributions from the neighboring buses up to the level specified in the DC Short-Circuit Study Case
editor. It also prints the equivalent R and L at the faulted bus and the time constant for fault current rise.

33.6.5 Short-Circuit Summary

The Summary page presents the comparison between fault current and protective device capability. In
order for the program to make the comparison, the interrupting capability has to be entered from the
editors of individual protective devices. The kA Fault Current column prints the total bus fault current as
well as the maximum fault current flowing through the protective device. If the device capability is less
than the maximum fault current for a device, a flag will be raised for the device.

Chapter 34
DC Load Flow Analysis
The DC power system is an integral part of the entire electric power system, providing power to control
circuits and backup power during emergency conditions. It includes DC power sources, their distribution
systems, and vital supporting systems that supply power to critical equipment.
Due to lack of analytical tools in the past, DC power system design and validation studies have been
mainly done by hand-calculations, limited to simplified calculations on simple system configurations.
Such simplified hand-calculations cannot meet todays requirement for DC system analysis, especially for
the nuclear power industry. The ETAP Load Flow Analysis Module is the perfect tool to perform DC
system studies. It provides a diversity of DC components and calculations required for conducting DC
power system design and validation studies. It can handle any system configuration at ease, including
radial system; loop system and AC-DC interconnected system.
A variety of DC components and AC-DC power conversion components are available for you to model
the DC power system, including:
DC battery
DC bus and node
DC cable
DC machine, static load, lumped load, and Composite CSD (CCSD) load
DC protective devices, such as circuit breaker, fuse, switch, and contact
DC composite network and DC composite motor
DC-DC converter
AC-DC power conversion components, such as charger/rectifier, inverter, and UPS
DC load flow analysis is an essential study for DC system design and operating condition assessment.
The ETAP Load Flow Program calculates bus voltage profile and branch power flows for a user-specified
loading category. It validates the calculated operating conditions against element operating limits, such as
bus maximum/minimum operating voltage, branch allowable current, and source maximum output, etc. In
case any abnormal operating condition occurs in the system, ETAP flags the user in the one-line diagram
by showing the element in an outstanding color.

DC Load Flow Analysis Overview
In order to simulate correctly various operating modes for AC-DC interface components in actual
operations, ETAP provides different models to represent them in load flow studies. It automatically
selects the one that is suitable for the actual operating condition. For example, a charger may be operating
in constant voltage, constant current or non-effective modes, depending on its terminal bus voltage and
loading conditions.
The calculation results are reported in a Crystal Reports format as well as in the one-line diagram display.
The Crystal Reports format provides detailed information about the study, including all the input data
used in the calculation, system voltage profile, branch power flows, and overloading validation results,
etc. The one-line diagram display provides you with a direct visual representation of system operating
conditions.

DC Load Flow Analysis Study Toolbar
34.1 Study Toolbar

The DC Load Flow Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in DC Load Flow Study Mode.
Run DC Load Flow Studies
DC Load Flow Display Options
DC Load Flow Report Manager
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Run DC Load Flow Studies

Click on this button to run a DC load flow calculation using the parameters currently selected in the DC
Load Flow Study Case Editor. ETAP will give you error message list indicating missing information if
your system is not set up properly.
DC Load Flow Display Options

diagram in DC Load Flow Mode.
DC Load Flow Report Manger

Click on this button to open the DC Load Flow Report Manager. The Report Manager allows you to
select the Crystal Reports format for your output reports. A detailed explanation of the DC Load Flow
Report Manager is in the Output Reports section.

Get On-Line Data

Get Archived Data


DC Load Flow Analysis Study Case Editor

The DC Load Flow Study Case Editor allows you to specify variables related to DC load flow
calculations and Output Reports.
Study Case ID
ID, which consists of the letters DCLF plus an integer, starting with the number 1 and increases as the
number of study cases increases.
Solution Parameters (Newton-Raphson)

The ETAP DC load flow study uses the Newton-Raphson Method for calculation.
Max. Iteration
of iterations, a message will show up to flag the user.

Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision to be used to check for convergence. This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. A load flow solution is considered reached if, between two
iterations, the maximum bus voltage difference in per unit is less than the specified precision value.
Loading
Loading Category
Select one of the 10 Loading Categories for this Load Flow Study. The selection applies to all DC load
elements and UPS.
None
Select Normal to use the percent loading of each load for the selected Loading Category.
Bus Max.
When the maximum loading option is selected, each load will be multiplied by the Maximum Load
Diversity Factor entered in the Bus editor for the bus where the load is connected.
Bus Min.
When the minimum loading option is selected, each load will be multiplied by the Minimum Load
Diversity Factor entered in the Bus editor for the bus where the load is connected.
The minimum bus loading study option may be used to check system voltages under a minimum (light)
loading condition.
Global Diversity Factor

When this option is selected, the Constant kVA and Constant Z edit boxes will be enabled, allowing you
to enter the diversity factors in percent for constant kVA and constant impedance loads.
These factors are global throughout the whole system. A motor load multiplying factor of 125% implies
that the motor loads of all buses are increased by 25% above their nominal values. This value can be
smaller or greater than 100%.
Constant kVA
Enter the global diversity factor in percent for constant kVA loads.
Constant Z
Enter the global diversity factor in percent for constant impedance loads.
Inverter Loading
There are two options for including inverter loads: Operating Load and Loading Category.

Operating Load
Select this option to use the load displayed in the operating load section on the Loading page of the
Inverter Editor. When the operating load is used, the diversity factor will not be applied to the inverter
load. These operating loading values can only be updated by running an AC load flow calculation. They
cannot be edited directly by the user.
Loading Category
Select this option to use the loading category selected in the Category list.
Motor Load
A motor normally behaves as a constant power load when its terminal voltage is close to its rated voltage.
However, when its terminal voltage deviates considerably from its rated voltage, its behavior becomes
similar to a static load. This group allows you to set the voltage range within which you want a motor to
be modeled as a constant power load.
Constant kW if V is within Range

Click on this checkbox for setting VMin and VMax. If this box is not checked, all of the motor loads will
be modeled as constant power loads regardless of their terminal voltage. Please note that when only
constant current sources in the system are present, this can prohibit load flow calculations from reaching a
solution.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage as a percentage, below which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage as a percentage, above which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Initial Condition
Use Bus Voltage

Select this option to use the initial voltage value in the Bus editor as the initial voltage in a load flow
calculation. The bus initial voltage can be updated automatically in load flow studies.
Use Fixed Value

This option allows you to specify a flat initial voltage for all buses in a load flow calculation.
Report
Critical Voltage
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum voltages that any bus may achieve before it is
flagged and included in the critical undervoltage and overvoltage bus summary report.
Marginal Voltage
flagged as a marginally undervoltage or overvoltage bus.

Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages seen in the output report can be printed in kV or in percent of the bus nominal
voltages. Select your preference by clicking on Percent or kV.
Update
The selected options will be updated after the subsequent load flow run.
Initial Bus Voltage

Select this option to update the values of the bus voltage magnitudes with the result of this load flow run.
Charger/UPS Operating Load

Select this option to update the load provided by chargers/rectifiers. When a UPS is operating as a source
to the DC system, its operating load will also be updated. The AC loads for these sources are calculated
based on the DC power they provide, the losses involved, and their operating power factor.
Study Remarks
information regarding each study case. The first line of the header information is global for all study cases
and entered in the Project Information editor.

DC Load Flow Analysis Display Options

The DC Load Flow Analysis Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC,
and Color information annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are
34.3.1 Results Page

Show Units
When this box is checked the unit for the calculation results will be displayed on the one-line diagram
along with the results.
Voltage
Bus
Click on this checkbox to show the bus voltage in the one-line diagram.
Bus Display Unit

From the drop-down list box, you can select to display the bus voltage in percent or in volt.
Power Flows
Power Flow Display Units

Select to display the power flow in kW or MW.
kW and Amp
Select the kW to display power flow Amp to display current in ampere.
% Voltage Drop
Click on the Cable/Z checkbox to display voltage drop across cables and impedance.
Branch Losses
Click on the kW checkbox to display branch losses in kW.
Flow Results
Click on these checkboxes to display load flow results for different types of elements, including Branch,
Source, Load/UPS, Composite Motor, and Composite Network.

34.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.

Rating
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z

Motor % LRC

D-Y
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Use Default Options

grayed out.
Show Eq. Cable


34.3.3 AC-DC Page

ID
line diagram.

Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type Rating

UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
Use Default Options


34.3.4 Colors Page

Color Theme

Annotations
Theme
User-Defined
Theme Button

Theme Editor
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the global color themes option has been
previously selected.

DC Load Flow Analysis Calculation Methods

The ETAP DC Load Flow calculation is an iterative process, due to the presence of constant power loads
and power converter components. The objective of a load flow calculation is to find bus voltage values
with specified system loads and sources. Based on the obtained bus voltage results, branch flows can then
be calculated. The Newton-Raphson method is used in solving DC load flow calculations. This method is
fast in convergence speed, bus it has a relatively high requirement on initial bus voltage values.
In a DC load flow calculation, the loads involved in the system are constant power loads and constant
impedance loads. The sources include constant voltage source and constant current source. A constant
voltage source maintains its terminal bus voltage at a fixed value, while a constant current source injects a
fixed value of current into the system.
Because a converter component, such as a charger, has a maximum current limit, it is a constant voltage
source only when its output current is not larger than its current limit. Once the output current is over the
limit, it becomes a current source. Therefore, the operating mode of a converter component and its model
cannot be predefined. It varies depending on system loads and configurations, and is determined during
the process of calculation.
Newton-Raphson Method
The Newton-Raphson method formulates and solves iteratively the following load flow equation:
J V = I
where I is a vector for bus current injection mismatch between the specified value and the calculated
value. Here the constant power loads are converted to current injections using the calculated voltage. V
is a vector for bus voltage incremental and J is a coefficient matrix called the Jacobian Matrix.
The Newton-Raphson method possesses a unique quadratic convergence characteristic. It usually has a
very fast convergence speed compared to other load flow calculation methods. However, the method is
highly dependent of the initial value of bus voltages. A careful selection of bus voltage initial values is
strongly recommended.
When the system contains constant power loads and a charger (or a UPS) is the only source in the system,
and the source is overloaded and changes to a constant current source, there may be problems in reaching
a solution. This can occur when the source switches to a constant current source; it provides less current
than it would as a constant voltage source. For a constant power load, its terminal voltage increases when
it draws less current in order to maintain a constant power. It can lead to abnormally high voltage values
as the calculation resolves. At such high voltage values, the motor loads actually behave as constant
impedance loads. In order to resolve this situation, you may check the option of Constant kW if V within
Range in the study case and properly set the VMin and VMax values.

34.4.1 Component Models and Operations

Charger
Model
In DC load flow calculations, a charger can be represented in one of three models: constant voltage source
model, constant current source model, and inactive mode model.
A charger is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus voltage at the
regulated value specified in the Charger editor. However, when the current drawn from the charger is
more than Imax, the maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage constant at the
same time, it becomes a constant current source. The current drawn from the charger is then kept at Imax,
while the terminal voltage drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.
Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a charger, it will try to raise the
voltage to the regulated value until the charger current reaches Imax. On the contrary, if for some reason,
such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher than the
charger regulated voltage, the charger becomes inactive as if it is switched off from the system.
Operating Mode
As a constant voltage source, a charge can operate in either the Constant Vdc Mode or the Fixed Firing
Angle mode, depending on the selection made in the Rating page of the Charger Editor.
In the Constant Vdc Mode, the charger output voltage is regulated at either the floating voltage or the
equalizing voltage, as selected in the Rating page of the Charger Editor.
In the Fixed Firing Angle Mode, the output voltage depends on the firing angle and the input bus voltage
value. When the load to the charge varies, its output voltage should change accordingly. However, since
the internal voltage drop of a charger is not considered in the calculation, the charger output voltage is
assumed to be constant in the load flow studies.
Converter
From the Information page of the Charger Editor, you may select the type of charger as Converter, which
means it is actually a rectifier. As a rectifier, it behaves almost the same as a charger, except that it does
not have floating and equalizing voltage values. When operating in the Constant Vdc Mode, the regulated
voltage is equal to its rated output voltage.
UPS
UPS as Source or Load

To the DC system, a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) can be a source or a load. When a UPS is
connected to an energized input AC bus and it does not have an auction diode (the Auction Diode option
in the Rating page of the UPS Editor is not checked), it is considered as a source to the DC system.
When a UPS is not connected to an energized AC input bus, it becomes a load to the DC system.

When a UPS is connected to an energized input AC bus, but it has an auction diode, the diode prevents
the flow from entering into the DC system, so the UPS will not be a source to the DC system. In this case,
either the DC system or the AC input bus may provide the power to loads connected to the UPS output
AC bus, depending on the voltage values of the AC input bus and the DC bus. After converting to the
UPS AC output terminal using the UPS rated voltage ratio, if the DC bus voltage is higher than the AC
bus voltage, the DC system will provide the power to the UPS output load; otherwise, the AC input bus
provides the power to the load.
UPS as Source to the DC System

A UPS behaves very similarly to a charger when operating as a source to the DC system. It can be
represented in one of three models: constant voltage source model, constant current source model, and
inactive mode model.
As a source, a UPS is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus
voltage at its rated voltage. However, when the current drawn from the UPS is more than Imax, the
maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage constant at the same time, it becomes
a constant current source. The current drawn from the UPS is then kept at Imax, while the terminal voltage
drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.
Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a UPS, it will try to raise the
voltage to the regulated value, until the UPS current reaches Imax. On the contrary, if for some reason,
such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher than the
charger regulated voltage, the UPS becomes inactive as if it is switched off from the system.
Constant Voltage Source Operating Mode

As a constant voltage source, a UPS can operate in either the Constant Vdc mode or the Fixed Firing
Angle mode, depending on the selections made in the Rating page of the UPS Editor.
In the Constant Vdc mode, the UPS output voltage is regulated at its rated DC voltage.
In the Fixed Firing Angle mode, the output voltage depends on the firing angle and the input bus voltage
value. When the load to the charge varies, its output voltage should change accordingly. However, since
the internal voltage drop of a UPS is not considered in the calculation, the UPS output voltage is assumed
to be constant in Load Flow Studies.
UPS as Load to the DC System

When a UPS is a load to the DC system, it is a constant kW load. The loading category load is used in
Load Flow Studies.
Battery
Under normal operation conditions, a battery serves as a backup source. It actively provides power to
loads only when other sources, such as chargers, become de-energized or fail to maintain system voltage
at the required level.
In DC load flow analyses, a battery can be represented in one of two models: a constant voltage source
model or an inactive mode model. When the terminal bus voltage is higher or equal to the rated voltage of
a battery, it is in the inactive mode and is not supplying any power to the system. A battery that has just
been discharged is actually a load to the DC system. Due to the complexity in determining quantitatively
the load for a charging battery, it is not considered as a load in the DC load flow analysis. It is considered
in the battery sizing calculation.

When the terminal bus voltage of a battery is lower than its rated voltage, the battery becomes an active
source. It is represented by a constant voltage source (at battery rated voltage) behind battery resistance.
DC Converter
A DC converter can change DC voltage from one level to another, either increasing or decreasing the
voltage value. It has the capability of regulating the output voltage as long as it is not overloaded. It is
unidirectional in terms of power flow, allowing the current flowing from the input terminal to the output
terminal only.
In DC load flow calculations, a DC converter can be represented in one of three models: constant voltage
source model, constant current source model, and inactive mode model.
A DC converter is normally operating as a constant voltage source, maintaining its terminal bus voltage at
the regulated value specified in the DC converter editor. However, when the current drawn from the DC
converter is more than Imax, the maximum current it can provide while keeping its terminal voltage
constant at the same time, it becomes a constant current source. The current drawn from the DC converter
is then kept at Imax, while the terminal voltage drifts, depending on system loads and other sources.
Whenever the terminal bus voltage is lower than the regulated voltage of a DC converter, it will try to
raise the voltage to the regulated value, until the DC converter current reaches Imax. On the contrary, if for
some reason, such as other sources being connected to the same buses, the terminal bus voltage is higher
than the DC converter regulated voltage, the DC converter becomes inactive as if it is switched off from
the system.
When a DC converter is operating as a source, either a constant voltage source or a constant current
source, it is a constant power load to its input bus, with a load equal to output power plus converter losses.
34.4.2 Factors Considered in DC Load Flow Calculations

Load Flow Convergence
DC load flow may have convergence problems for some ill-conditioned systems and some special
operating conditions due to the iterative process used for solving load flow and the Newton-Raphson
Method used.
You should consider a system that contains motor loads and a charger (or a UPS) as the only source in the
system. If the source is overloaded and it changes to a constant current source, there may be problems in
reaching a solution. This is because when the source switches to a constant current source, it provides less
current than it would as a constant voltage source. For a constant power load, its terminal voltage
increases when it is drawing less current in order to maintain a constant power. It can lead to abnormally
high voltage values and causes the calculation process to fail to converge.
In the real world, at such high voltage values, the motor loads actually behave as constant impedance
loads. In order to resolve this situation, the DC load flow study case provides you with the opportunity to
set a voltage range for motor loads to be modeled as constant power loads. In the DC Load Flow Study
Case Editor, you can check the option of Constant kW if V within Range and properly set the VMin and
VMax values. Once the motor terminal voltage is outside this range, the motor will be modeled as a
constant impedance load. However, inverter or UPS loads are always modeled as constant power loads.

DC Load Flow Analysis Required Data
34.5 Required Data
34.5.1 Source
Charger
Info Page
Charger ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page are required for DC load flow calculations
UPS
Info Page
UPS ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
All data in this page are required for DC load flow calculations
Loading Page
Loading data. If a UPS is a load to the DC system, that is, when it is not connected to an energized
AC input bus or the Auction Diode option in the Rating page is checked, the data entered is used to
determine the UPS load to the DC system.
Battery
Info Page
Battery ID
Bus connection data
Number of strings
Battery Library type data. The resistance per positive plate (Rp) is used to calculate battery internal
resistance.
Rating Page
Number of cells
Rated voltage
SC Page
External resistance R

34.5.2 Load
DC Motor
Info Page
Motor ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data
Lumped Load
Info Page
Lumped load ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Rating Page
Rating section data
Motor/static load percent
Load category data
Static Load
Info Page
Static load ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Quantity
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data
CCSD Load
Info Page
CCSD load ID

Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Load category data
Inverter
Info Page
Inverter ID
Bus connection data
Demand factor
Rating Page
AC rating section data
DC rating section data
Loading Page
Loading Category data
34.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
Info Page
Cable ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Number of cables per phase
Impedance Page
Cable resistance
Units section data
Base and maximum operating temperature
DC Impedance
Info Page
DC impedance ID
Bus connection data
Impedance resistance

Tie PD (CB, Fuse, Single-Throw, and Double-Throw Switches)
Info Page
ID
Bus connection data
34.5.4 DC Converter
Info Page
DC converter ID
Bus connection data
Rating Page
Rating section data
Operating Vout
34.5.5 Study Case

Similar to any other study, you are always required to run a DC load flow calculation. When a DC load
flow calculation is initiated by the user, ETAP uses the study case currently showing in the Study Case
Editor for the calculation. Every field in a study case has its default value. However, it is important to set
the values correctly in the study case to meet your calculation requirements.

DC Load Flow Analysis Output Reports
34.6 Output Reports

The DC load flow calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal Reports
format. The graphical one-line diagram displays the calculated bus voltages, branch flows and voltage
drops, load power consumption, etc. You can use the Display Options Editor to specify the content to be
displayed. It also flags abnormal operating conditions, such as overloaded cables and over or under
voltage buses, in different colors.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a DC Load Flow Analysis. You
can utilize the DC Load Flow Report Manager to help you view the output report.
34.6.1 DC Load Flow Report Manager

To open the DC Load Flow Report Manager, click on the View Report File button on the DC Load Flow
toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing different
sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for different
portions of the report and view it via Crystal Reports. There are several fields and buttons common to
every page, as described below.
Output Report Name

Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel

checkbox.

Complete Page
On this page there is only one format available, Complete, which opens the complete report for the DC
Load Flow Study. The Complete Report includes Input Data, Results, and Summary Reports.
checkbox.

Input Data Page

include:
Battery
Branch
Bus
Cable
Charger
Cover
DC Converter
Impedance
Inverter
Loads
UPS
checkbox.

Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the load flow result portion of the Output Report.
checkbox.

Summary Page
This page allows you to select different portions of the load summary to view. Note that some portions of
the summary are available only when you selected specific options in the study case, such as Critical and
Marginal Voltage options.
Branch Flow Summary

Overvoltage & Undervoltage Buses
Summary
Total Sources and Demands
checkbox.


This is a shortcut for the Report Manger. When you click on the View Output Report button, ETAP
automatically opens the Output Report, which is listed in the Study Case toolbar with the selected format.
In the picture shown below, the output report name is DCLoadFlow and the selected format is Cable.
34.6.3 Input Data

Input data are grouped together according to element type. The following are some samples of input data.
Bus Input Data

Cable and Impedance Input Data
Converter Input Data

Load Input Data
34.6.4 Load Flow Results

The result section of the output report includes the calculated results of a DC Load Flow Analysis,
including bus voltage, bus loading, and branch flows.

34.6.5 Summary Reports

The load flow summary portion of the output report includes the Branch Flow Summary, the bus over-
/undervoltage summary, and the summary of total system sources and demands.

Chapter 35
Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis
Batteries are an essential part of a critical DC power system, serving as the backup power source under
emergency conditions. During normal operating conditions, a DC system is generally powered by AC
sources through chargers or other AC-DC interface components. However, the battery has to provide
power to the system under one of the following conditions:
1. Load on the DC system exceeds the maximum output of the battery charger
2. Output of the battery charger is interrupted
3. Auxiliary AC power is lost
The battery should be sized to meet the most severe of these conditions, which most likely is the third
condition. When the AC power is lost, batteries will provide power to critical loads and control circuits
for a specified time period so that the AC power source can be recovered or the critical equipment can be
adequately shut down. For example, in U.S. nuclear power plants, it is required that batteries have
sufficient capacity to supply the required load during a loss of AC power for field flashing, control
circuits, DC fuel oil booster pumps, and DC lube oil pumps for a period of four hours. In order to meet
this requirement, battery sizing calculations need to be carried out to determine the appropriate battery
size.
The ETAP Battery Sizing Module provides you with a powerful tool to accomplish this task. In
complying with IEEE Standard 485, it determines the number of strings, number of cells, and cell size of
a battery for a designated duty cycle. The number of cells is determined to satisfy the maximum system
voltage during the battery charging period and the minimum system voltage during the battery
discharging period. The number of strings and cell size is determined to provide sufficient power to the
load cycle considering the minimum system voltage and the minimum operating temperature. It also
considers different factors that affect battery performance, such as design margin, aging compensation,
initial capacity, and temperature, etc.
The duty cycle for the battery can be a summation of the duty cycles of all the loads that the battery is to
supply power for. It can also be calculated using DC load flow, which considers different characteristics
of constant power load and constant impedance load, their variations to voltage changes, branch voltage
drops and losses.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Overview
The battery duty cycle includes both random load and non-random load from individual loads. In
compliance with IEEE Standard 485, the load impulses in the battery duty cycle that are less than one
minute are automatically extended to one minute.
ETAP also provides a Battery Discharging Analysis Module to verify the performance of an existing or a
sized battery. The module calculates the battery capacity, voltage, current, and output power as the battery
discharges through a duty cycle. The battery duty cycle can be calculated from either load current
summation or load flow calculations. When the battery duty cycle is calculated from load flow, the
Battery Discharging Analysis also provides bus voltage and branch power along with battery output
results. Several correction factors used in battery sizing calculation, such as battery temperature, aging
and initial capacity, can also be considered in the battery discharge calculations.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Battery Sizing Toolbar
35.1 Battery Sizing Toolbar

The Battery Sizing Study toolbar will appear on the screen when you are in Battery Sizing Study Mode.
Run Battery Sizing Calculation

Click on this button to initiate a battery sizing calculation. If the battery size is determined, a battery
discharging calculation will automatically follow to verify the battery capability. An error message
indicating missing information will appear if you have not entered all of the data required for the
calculation.
Run Battery Discharge Calculation

Click on this button to initiate a battery discharge calculation on an existing battery using the method
specified in the Battery Study Case. Just like in battery sizing, ETAP will give you an error message if
any required data is still missing.
Display Options
diagram in Battery Sizing Mode.
Battery Sizing Report Manager

Click on this button to open the Battery Sizing Report Manager. You can also view output reports by
clicking on the View Output Report button on the Study Case toolbar.
Battery Sizing Plots

Click on this button to view output plots.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Battery Sizing Toolbar

Get Online Data

Get Archived Data


Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Study Case Editor

The Battery Sizing Study Case Editor contains parameter settings required to perform a battery sizing
calculation. The calculation results are dependent on these setting. When a new study case is created,
ETAP provides the default parameters. However, it is important to set the values correctly in the study
case to meet your calculation requirements.
The Battery Sizing Study Case Editor includes six pages: Information, Sizing, Discharge, Adjustment,
CSD, and (when the Report CSD Voltage Drop Results box is checked) Alert. You specify the battery to
be sized on the Information Page, select the duty cycle to be considered, and enter the diversity factor that
allows you to globally adjust system load.
On the Sizing page you specify sizing requirements and correction factors for the calculation.
The Discharge page contains parameters for battery discharging calculations and will be available in
future versions of ETAP.
The Adjustment page allows you to specify modification of equipment and device parameters, such as
resistance adjustment for operating temperature and length tolerance for cable and wire, etc.
On the CSD page, select the options related to Control System Diagrams.
The Alert page allows you to specify options for alerts on Control System Diagrams. This page becomes
enabled only when you have clicked the checkbox to report voltage drop calculation results in the CSD
page.

35.2.1 Info Page
Study Case ID
ID
ID for a new Study Case.
Battery
ID
Select a battery to be sized from the drop-down list.

Battery Characteristic Curve

In the battery discharge calculation, the battery voltage at a given time is calculated based on the battery
characteristic curves entered in the battery library. As the battery characteristics are represented by a
limited number of discrete points in the library, interpolation and extrapolation of the battery
characteristic curves are needed in battery voltage calculations. This group provides you with different
options for extracting data from battery characteristic curves. In the previous version of ETAP, these
options were provided as ETAP INI file entries.
Use Time-Amp Curve Interpolate at Fixed Amp

With this option, the Time vs. Amp type curves from battery library will be used directly for interpolation
and extrapolation, and they are always done at fixed ampere value.
Use AH-Amp Curve

With this option, the Time vs. Amp type curves from battery library will first be converted to AH vs.
Amp curves and the converted curves are then used for interpolation and extrapolation. The interpolation
and extrapolation can be done at either fixed AH value or fixed Amp value.
Use AH-Amp Curve Interpolate at Fixed Amp

With this option, the Time vs. Amp type curves from battery library will be used directly for interpolation
and extrapolation, and they are always done at fixed ampere value.
Calculation Method
In this group, you specify the method used for determining the battery duty cycle based on duty cycle of
individual loads.
Load Summation
Select this option to determine the battery duty cycle by using the load summation method. The battery
duty cycle will be equal to the sum of the load duty cycles for all the loads powered by the battery. This
method treats all loads as constant current type loads.
Load Flow Calculation

Select this option to determine the battery duty cycle by performing DC load flow calculations. This
method considers branch losses and voltage drops in determining battery duty cycle. When this option is
selected, the Load Model section will be enabled to allow you to specify how to model a load for its duty
cycle.
Load Model
In this group, you specify how to determine load types, such as constant power, constant impedance, or
constant current, for each duty cycle section of a load. This group is applicable only when the Load Flow
Calculation option is selected in the Calculation Method group, since when the Load Summation is
chosen all loads are considered as constant current loads.
Based on Type of Elements

When this option is selected, a load is modeled of the same type for the whole duty cycle and the type is
the same as determined in a DC Load Flow Study. For example, a DC motor will be modeled as a
constant power load and a static load will be modeled as a constant impedance load for the whole duty
cycle. The Type specified in the Duty Cycle page of a load editor is ignored when this option is selected.

Based on Duty Cycle Type

When this option is selected, the Type specified for each section in the duty cycle of a load will be used to
represent the load for that section. For example, as shown in the picture below, load section stage1 will
be modeled as constant current load, load section stage2 will be modeled as constant power load, and
load section stage3 will be modeled as a constant impedance load.
Load
Duty Cycle
Select the duty cycle from the drop-down list for battery sizing. Every load has five different duty cycles.
Duration
Select either the Hours or Duty Cycle Span option to specify the length of time to size the battery. If the
Hours option is selected, you must specify the length of duration (number of hours) by either selecting a
value from the drop-down list or entering a value.
If the Duty Cycle Span option is selected, the Duration will be the longest time span of individual load
duty cycles from all loads involved in the calculation.
Diversity Factor
Specify the load diversity factor in percent. The load used in battery sizing will be multiplied by this
diversity factor.
Correction Factor
Battery Min. Temperature

Click on this option to use the battery minimum temperature from the Battery Editor for battery
temperature correction factor calculation.
User-Defined Temperature
Click on this option to specify a temperature to be used for battery temperature correction factor
calculation.
Aging Compensation
Use this field to enter the aging compensation correction factor in percent to be used in sizing and
discharge calculations.

Initial Capacity
Use this field to enter the initial capacity correction factor in percent to be used for the battery sizing and
discharge calculations.
Study Remarks
information regarding each study case. The first line of the header information is global for all Study
Cases and entered in the Project Information Editor.

35.2.2 Sizing Page
Voltage Requirements
Max. System Voltage Deviation

Specify the maximum system operating voltage as a percentage based on the nominal voltage of the
terminal bus of the battery selected for sizing.
Min. System Voltage Deviation

Specify the minimum system operating voltage as a percentage based on the nominal voltage of the
terminal bus of the battery selected for sizing.
Battery Charge Voltage

Specify the required voltage in V/Cell to charge the battery to be sized.

Battery Min. Discharge Voltage

Specify the minimum discharge voltage in V/Cell for the battery to be sized.
Correction Factor
Use this group to specify the correction factors to be considered in battery sizing calculations.
Temperature
Click on this checkbox to use the temperature correction factor in battery sizing calculations. Once the
box is checked, the temperature value specified in the Info page is displayed here.
The temperature correction factor is applied according to the IEEE Method described in standard 485 for
correcting cell size in sizing calculations. IEEE provides values between 4C and +52C. Any value
outside of this range is curve fitted using the IEEE recommended curve-shifting method (ETAP checks
the temperature value and provides a user message indicating that the entered temperature is out of
normal range). When the box is not checked, the temperature correction factor is assumed to be 100%.
Aging Compensation
Click on this checkbox to use the aging compensation correction factor specified in the Info page.
Initial Capacity
Click on this checkbox to use the initial capacity correction factor specified in the Info page.
Design Margin
Click on this checkbox to use the design margin correction factor specified in the edit box.
Battery Library
Use Sizes Given in Library Only

Select this option to use only the sizes given in the library. For example, if the library has battery curves
for 11, 13, and 21 plates, then only these three sizes will be considered in the battery sizing calculation.
Use Sizes in Library as Min/Max Range

Select this option to use the sizes given in the library as the maximum and minimum limits. For example,
if the library has battery curves for 11, 13, and 21 plates, then it is assumed that batteries with 15, 17, and
19 plates are also available and the characteristic curves of these sizes are assumed to be the same as that
for the 21-plate battery.
Options
Desirable Number of Cells

When this box is checked, in the battery sizing calculation, the value entered in the edit box will be the
number of cells for the battery, if this number is within the acceptable range determined based on the
voltage requirements. In case this number is outside the acceptable range, the number of the cells will be
selected so that the battery rated voltage is closest to the terminal bus rated voltage.
Update Battery Size

When this box is checked, the battery size will be replaced by the calculated new size after Battery Sizing
calculation. This option is enabled only when the option of Use Sizes Given in Library Only has been
selected in the Battery Library group.

35.2.3 Discharge Page
Vd Calc Parameters
The battery discharge calculation uses the information included in these fields in order to determine how
the voltage drop calculation will be performed.
Time Step
The Time Step parameter is the time interval at which a plot point is to be generated. A plot point is also
generated at the times when load changes occur. This value will affect time of calculations, especially in
the case that the battery duty cycle is obtained by the load flow method.
Vmax Limit
This feature allows the user to specify the maximum voltage value at the battery terminal. The default
value is 100% of the battery rated voltage. The calculated battery voltage will be limited at this value.

Duty Cycle Span Option

The duty cycle for a battery is an aggregation of all the loads connected, including DC motor, static load,
and control system diagram load. These loads can show variations within seconds or even intervals less
than a second. Considering battery discharging characteristics, IEEE Standard 485 requires that when
sizing a battery, if a discrete load sequence can be established, the load for a one-minute period should
assume the maximum current at any instant within that minute. Hence, the maximum load is expanded to
the whole minimum time span of one minute.
Figure 1 show 3 loads in a duty cycle: 40 amperes for 5 seconds, 80 amperes for 10 seconds and 30
amperes for 20 second. Figure 2 is the one-minute span of the duty cycle. 80 amperes is spanned to the
whole minute.
Actual Time Span of Duty Cycle
One-Minute Span for Battery and Load

If this option is selected, in ETAP calculations of battery discharge and load flow, the one-minimum span
will be applied to the battery duty cycle as well as load duty cycles used for load flow. This option gives
the most conservative voltage results.
The figure below shows the one-minute span of the duty cycle. 80 amperes spans the entire minute.
One-minute Span of Duty Cycle

Load Duty Cycle - No One-minute Span

If this option is selected, in ETAP calculations of battery discharge and load flow, the actual load time
span of duty cycle will be used for both battery duty cycle and loads. This means that one-minute span
will not be applied to either battery duty cycle or individual load duty cycle. This option gives the least
conservative voltage results.
One-minute Span for Battery Only

If this option is selected, in ETAP calculation of battery discharge, the one-minimum span will be applied
to battery duty cycle, while the actual load time span of duty cycle will be used for system load flow
calculation. In other words, the battery duty cycle for discharge will be the same as in option 1. The
calculated battery voltage is then used to perform system load flow computations with the actual load
duty cycles at each time step specified in the study case. This option gives voltage results between the
previous two options.
Note: For battery sizing calculations, the one-minimum span is always applied on battery duty cycle.
Correction Factors
This group of the battery discharge page provides a set of correction factors to be used during the battery
discharge cycle. Similar to battery sizing calculations, the correction factors have either a positive or a
negative effect on the battery AH capacity (Amp Hour) or the battery duty cycle. With these features, the
user is able to simulate the effect of temperature, battery maintenance conditions, and aging factor on the
battery. The user has the choice of applying the correction factors to the battery duty cycle or to the
battery initial AH capacity. The program calculates a total correction factor by multiplying the
temperature CF and the Aging Compensation CF and then dividing by the initial Capacity CF.
Adjust Battery Duty Cycle

If you select this option, the correction factor is applied directly on the duty cycle of individual loads
when carrying out load flow calculations. Based on the load flow calculation results, the battery duty
cycle is formulated and used to discharge the battery without any further correction.
Note: This is equivalent to applying diversity factor to the loads. The load diversity factor field is located
in the Info page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case Editor.
Adjust Battery Capacity

When this option is selected, the correction factors are used to modify the battery capacity. The battery
initial ampere-hour capacity is the rated capacity divided by the total correction factor.
Temperature
Click this checkbox if you want the temperature correction factor to be used in battery discharge
calculations. This factor has the effect of either increasing or decreasing battery capacity. The temperature
correction factor is applied according to the IEEE method described in standard 485 for correcting cell
size in sizing calculations. The same standard applies for discharge calculations. IEEE provides values
between 4C and +52C. Any value outside of this range is curve fitted using the IEEE recommended
curve-shifting method. (ETAP checks the temperature value and provides a user message indicating that
the entered temperature is out of normal range.) When the box is not checked, the temperature correction
factor is assumed to be 100%.

Aging Compensation
Click this checkbox if you would like to use the aging compensation correction factor in battery discharge
calculations. When this factor is applied, the battery discharge simulation includes a decrease in battery
capacity due to aging. When the box is not checked, the aging correction factor is assumed to be 100%.
Initial Capacity
Click this checkbox to use the initial capacity correction factor percent specified in the Information page.
When the box is not checked, the initial capacity correction factor is assumed to be 100%.
LF Parameters (Newton-Raphson)
This group of the Discharge page becomes active if the Load Flow duty cycle calculation method is
selected form the Info page. If the Current Summation method is used, this group remains grayed out.
Max. Iteration
of iterations, a message will appear to flag the user.
Precision
Enter the value for the solution precision to be used to check for convergence. This value determines how
precise you want the final solution to be. A load flow solution is reached if, between two iterations, the
maximum bus voltage difference in per unit is less than the specified precision value.
Initial Condition
Similar to the LF Parameter group, this part of the discharge page only has an effect if the Load Flow
Method for battery discharge is selected from the Info page. If the load flow method is indeed selected,
then the information entered in this area is used to initialize the Newton-Raphson load flow calculation.
Use Bus Voltage

The Newton-Raphson calculation method is highly dependent on initial conditions. If this radio button is
selected, the initial bus voltage will be set according to the bus nominal voltage multiplied by the initial
voltage entered in the Bus editor. It should be noted that the DC Load Flow calculation performed for
battery discharge does not update the initial bus voltage values. If initial bus voltage values are required,
then the user should run a DC Load Flow study to update the initial bus voltages, and then select this
option to run the discharge calculation using bus initial voltage values.
Use Fixed Value

When this option is selected, the voltage values used to initialize the Newton-Raphson calculation are
equal to the flat fixed voltage percent value specified here.
Motor Load
A motor normally behaves as a constant power load when its terminal voltage is close to its rated voltage.
However, as the battery terminal voltage deviates considerably from its rated voltage, its behavior
becomes similar to a static load. This group allows you to set the voltage range within which you want a
motor to be modeled as a constant power load.
Similar to the LF Parameter group, this part of the Discharge page only has an effect if the Load Flow
Method for battery discharge is selected from the Info page.

Constant kW if V is within Range

Click on this checkbox for setting Vmin and Vmax. When the motor terminal voltage is within this
range, it is represented as a constant power load. However, once the voltage is outside this range, it is
automatically converted to a constant impedance load.
If this box is not checked, all of the motor loads will be modeled as constant power loads regardless of
their terminal voltage. When there are only constant current sources in the system, this may prohibit load
flow calculations from reaching a solution.
Vmin
Enter the minimum voltage as a percentage, below which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Vmax
Enter the maximum voltage as a percentage, above which the motor load will be modeled as a constant
impedance load.
Report
Similar to DC Load Flow Calculations, if at any point during the specified battery discharge cycle (using
DCLF method) a bus voltage falls below the percent value specified in the Under Voltage field, this
information will be flagged in the one-line diagram. The same is true for buses exceeding the over voltage
limit.
Critical Voltage
flagged. The buses violating the critical voltage limits will be flagged in red color in the one-line diagram.
Marginal Voltage
flagged as a marginally undervoltage or overvoltage bus. The buses violating the marginal voltage limits
will be flagged in pink color in the one-line diagram.
Bus Voltage
Calculated bus voltages displayed in the plot and one-line diagram can be given in kV or in percent of the
bus nominal voltages. Select your preference by clicking on Percent or V options.


In this page, you select the options for equipment adjustment. Some of the options are for equipment in
the DC system and others are for devices in a Control System Diagram, which are applicable only when a
Control System Diagram is involved in the calculations. These options include resistance temperature
correction for wires and cables, length tolerance adjustment for wires and cables, resistance tolerance for
control relays and solenoids, and resistance for contacts, circuit breakers, fuses, switches, and push
buttons located in a Control System Diagram.

Equipment resistance varies according to temperature, normally increasing as the temperature elevates.
You specify the temperature used for equipment resistance correction in this group.
Wire / Cable
Check this box to apply temperature correction on resistance of wires and cables. Once this box is
checked, you can specify the temperature used for the correction. There are two choices available. You

can select to use the individual maximum temperature entered in the Wire or Cable editor, so that each
wire or cable uses its own operating temperature for correction. Alternatively, you can also specify a
global temperature applied to all wires and cables.
Tolerance
Wire / Cable Length

When the length of a wire or a cable is not certain, the length tolerance can be used to account for this
uncertainty in the calculation. In Battery Sizing and Discharge calculation, ETAP considers wire and
cable tolerance as a positive value, so that a non-zero length tolerance will increase the length and hence
the resistance of a wire or cable.
Check the box to apply length tolerance on wires and cables. Once this box is checked, you can specify
the tolerance to be used. There are two choices available. You can select to use the individual tolerance
entered in the Wire or Cable editor, so that each wire or cable uses its own length tolerance for correction.
Alternatively, you can also specify a global length tolerance applied to all wires and cables.
Control Relay / Solenoid Burden

This option allows you to adjust the burden of a control relay or solenoid located in a Control System
Diagram. The burden of control relay or solenoid is specified by a power rating under the device rated
voltage. In order to obtain conservative calculation results, this tolerance is considered to be a positive
value. For example, a non-zero tolerance value will give a higher burden power than you entered in the
device editor.
Check the box to apply a burden tolerance on control relays and solenoids. Once this box is checked, you
can specify the tolerance to be used. There are two choices available. You can select to use the individual
tolerance entered in the Rating page of Control Relay editor or Solenoid editor. Alternatively, you can
also specify a global burden tolerance applied to all control relays and solenoids.
Resistance for CSD Elements

This group provides you with options on including in calculation the resistance of contacts, push buttons
and other switching devices in a Control System Diagram. Since the resistance value for these devices are
normally very small, you can select to include or exclude them in the calculation. If you decide to include
them in the calculation, you can specify the resistance value for these devices as well.
Contact
Check the box to include contact resistance in the calculation. Once this box is checked, you can specify
the resistance to be used. There are two choices available. You can select the individual contact resistance
entered in the Contact page of the Control Relay or Solenoid editor, so that each contact uses its own
resistance. Alternatively, you can also specify a global resistance to be applied to all contacts.
CB, Switch, Push Button
Check the box to include resistance values for circuit breakers, switches, and push buttons in a Control
System Diagram in the calculation. Once this box is checked, you can specify a global resistance value
for all these devices.
Fuse
Check the box to include resistance values for circuit fuses in a Control System Diagram in the
calculation. Once this box is checked, you can specify a global resistance value for all these devices.

35.2.5 CSD Page

Similar to the AC system representation, ETAP uses a layered model to represent DC systems and
Control System Diagrams. A Control System Diagram (CSD) contains a number of devices and wires.
These devices are connected in a certain way between the positive and negative DC buses. In ETAP, all
these devices are modeled in a Control System Diagram View, in which you set up a control system
similar to an AC system in a One-Line View. In a DC System, a Control System Diagram is aggregated
by a Composite CSD element. The Composite CSD element sums up the total load for all devices in a
Control System Diagram. It also serves as an equivalent source to all the devices in the Control System
Diagram. In a sense, the Composite CSD element makes a link between the Control System Diagram and
the DC system. Since a Composite CSD element can also be a simple DC load, to make a distinction, a
Composite CSD element that serves as an equivalent source in a Control System Diagram is called a
composite CSD element in ETAP. If there are composite CSD elements in the DC system, you can use
this page to set up options related to Control System Diagrams.
Duty Cycle of Composite CSD Elements

The duty cycle displayed in the Duty Cycle page of a composite CSD element (Composite CSD element)
represents the total load for all devices in the Control System Diagram that the composite CSD element is
associated. The duty cycle can be entered from the Duty Cycle editor. It can also be updated

automatically by ETAP based on calculations from the Control System Diagram. This group allows you
to specify options for the duty cycle of composite CSD elements.
Calculate and Update Duty Cycle Based on Individual Element Inside CSD
When this option is selected, the duty cycle of a composite CSD element will be calculated based on the
individual element inside the Control System Diagram that the composite CSD element is linked to. The
calculation is carried out according to the sequence defined in the duty cycle entered in all devices in the
Control System Diagram. The total load will be summed up and updated to the composite CSD element
and used in the Battery Sizing or Discharge calculation.
When this option is selected, the other sections on this page are enabled.
Use Duty Cycle of Composite CSD Elements

When this option is selected, the duty cycle displayed in the Duty Cycle page of a composite CSD
element will be used in the Battery Sizing or Discharge calculation.
Note: The duty cycle can be entered from the Duty Cycle editor directly, or automatically updated by
ETAP from a previous study.
When this option is selected, the other sections on this page are not applicable and are hidden.
Report CSD Voltage Drop Results

When you checked the option of Calculate and Update Duty Cycle Based on Individual Element Inside
CSD for the duty cycle of composite CSD elements, the checkbox of Report CSD Voltage Drop Results
becomes enabled. If you check this option, ETAP will report voltage drop results for all devices for the
whole duty cycle based on the calculated battery voltage during discharging calculation.
Note: This check box will enable the Alert tab in the study case editor.
Device Model
There are two ways provided in the device editor to model the behavior of a device: burden and inrush
rating model and duty cycle model. This section allows you to specify the model type to use in the
calculation.
Burden & Inrush Rating

When this option is selected, the burden and inrush rating model will be used in calculation for all
devices, disregarding the model type selected in the Info page of individual devices.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, the duty cycle model will be used in calculation for all devices, disregarding
the model type selected in the Info page of individual devices.
Note: In the current version of ETAP, if the duty cycle model is used for a device, the control logic
between the device and the controlled contacts will not be simulated in the simulation.
Individual Editor
When this option is selected, the model type used for each device in calculation is dependent on the
Calculation Model selected in the Info page of individual device editor.

Note: In the current version of ETAP, if the duty cycle model is used for a device, the control logic
between the device and the controlled contacts will not be simulated in the simulation.
Pickup Voltage
Pickup voltage of a device is a limit of minimum voltage value across the device in order for it to
successfully change the state of controlled contacts from normal state to off-normal state. After a device
become energized, if the voltage across the device remain equal to or higher than the pickup voltage for a
time duration equal to or longer than the operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will switch to
its off-normal state. This voltage limit is used in simulation of sequence operation of a control system as
well as alert checking. This section allows you to specify pickup voltage for control relay, solenoid, and
general load. For a general load, the pickup voltage is only used for alert checking.
Individual Vpickup
When this option is selected, the pickup voltage for a control relay or a solenoid will be the value defined
in the Rating page of device editor.
Global V if Individual Vpickup = 0

When this option is selected, the pickup voltage for a control relay or a solenoid will be the value defined
in the Rating page of device editor, if this value is greater than zero. For devices with this value being
zero in the editor, the global value for pickup voltage will be used. This option is useful for cases where
some of devices are lack of pickup voltage values from manufacturer.
Global Vpickup
When this option is selected, the global value for pickup voltage will be used for all control relays and
solenoids. The global Vpickup can be entered in the edit box next to the selection and is defined in
percent of device rated voltage.
Dropout Voltage
Dropout voltage of a device is a limit of voltage across the device. While a device has been energized, if
the voltage across a device is below this voltage limit, the device will not be able to keep its controlled
contacts at off-normal state. Under this condition, a controlled contact will return to its normal state if the
voltage across the device remains below Vdropout for a time duration equal to or longer than the release
time of the contact. This voltage limit is used in simulation of sequence operation of a control system as
well as alert checking. This section allows you to specify dropout voltage for control relay, solenoid, and
general load. For a general load, the dropout voltage is only used for alert checking.
Individual Vdropout
When this option is selected, the dropout voltage for a control relay or a solenoid will be the value defined
in the Rating page of device editor.
Global V if Individual Vdropout = 0

When this option is selected, the dropout voltage for a control relay or a solenoid will be the value defined
in the Rating page of device editor, if this value is greater than zero. For devices with this value being
zero in the editor, the global value for dropout voltage will be used. This option is useful for cases where
some of devices are lack of dropout voltage values from manufacturer.
Global Vdropout
When this option is selected, the global value for dropout voltage will be used for all control relays and
solenoids. The global Vdropout can be entered in the edit box next to the selection and is defined in
percent of device rated voltage.

35.2.6 Alert Page

CSD simulation generates two groups of alerts. The first group includes pickup and dropout voltages for
control relays and solenoid. The second group provides current alerts for control relays, solenoids,
contacts, switch devices, and wires.
Marginal
Two checkboxes in this page allow for device marginal alerts, one for device voltage alerts and another
for device current alerts. Check these boxes if you want ETAP to generate marginal alerts.
Note: If the Marginal box is not checked, the corresponding percentage fields for marginal limit will not
be editable.

Pickup Voltage
For this selection group, specify the pickup voltage alert limits for the control relay, solenoid, and general
load. The pickup voltage alert check is applied to devices that are to be energized to execute a given task,
such as changing the state of a controlled contact. Since pickup voltage alerts are under-voltage alerts, the
limit for a marginal alert must be higher than for critical alerts.
Control Relay
Check the box to enable alert checking on pickup voltage for control relays. Once it is checked, the
critical voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a
percentage value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked.
The limits are percentages based on the control relay pickup voltage previously specified for Vpickup
option on the Model page. For example, if the global Vpickup was specified at 80% and you entered
110% for the Marginal Limit for Control Relay pickup voltage, the voltage limit for a marginal alert is
88% of the rated voltage of control relays. When a control relay becomes energized and the voltage across
it is less than 88% of its rated voltage, a marginal alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the control
relay.
Solenoid
Check this box to enable alert checking on the pickup voltage for solenoids. Once checked, the critical
voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a percentage
value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked.
These limits are percentages based on the solenoids pickup voltage specified for Vpickup option on the
Adjustment page. For example, if the global specification for Vpickup was 80% and a percentage of
100% for the Critical Limit for solenoid pickup voltage was set, the voltage limit for a critical alert will be
80% of the rated voltage of the solenoids. When a solenoid becomes energized and the voltage across it is
less than 80% of its rated voltage, a critical alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the solenoid. In
such an instance, the solenoid will not be able to execute the task it is supposed to accomplish.
General Load
This checkbox enables alert checking on pickup voltage for general loads. Once checked, the critical
voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a value for
marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked. The limits are a percentage
based on the general load pickup voltage previously specified for Vpickup option on the Adjustment
page.
Dropout Voltage
In this selection group you can specify the dropout voltage alert limits for the control relay, solenoid, and
general load. The dropout voltage alert check is applied to a device that is energized. If the voltage across
the device is below the dropout voltage limit, the device will not be able to continue its normal function,
such as keeping a controlled contact in a certain state. Since dropout voltage alerts are under-voltage
alerts, the limit for the marginal alert should be higher than that for critical alerts.
Dropout Voltage Limit for Control Relay

Check this box to enable alert checking on the dropout voltage for control relays. Once checked, the
critical voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a
percentage value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box must also be checked.

These limits are percentages based on the control relay dropout voltage previously specified for the V
dropout option on the Adjustment page. For example, if a global percentage for Vpickup of 30% and a
percentage of 100% were specified for the Critical Limit for Control Relay dropout voltage, the voltage
limit for a critical alert is 30% of the rated voltage of control relays. When a control relay is energized and
the voltage across it is less than 30% of its rated voltage, a critical alert on dropout voltage will be
generated for that control relay. In this instance, the control relay will not be able to execute the task it is
supposed to accomplish.
Dropout Voltage Limit for Solenoid

Check this box to enable alert checking on the dropout voltage for solenoids. Once checked, the critical
voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a percentage
value for marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked.
The limits are percentages based on the solenoids dropout voltage specified previously for the V dropout
option on the Adjustment page. For example, if it was specified to use a global V dropout of 30% and
110% was entered for the Marginal Limit of the solenoid dropout voltage, the voltage limit for a marginal
alert is 33% of the rated voltage of solenoids. When a solenoid is energized and the voltage across it is
less than 33% of its rated voltage, a marginal alert on pickup voltage will be generated for the solenoid.
General Load
Check this box to enable alert checking for dropout voltage on general loads. Once checked, the critical
voltage limit will show a value of 100 percent, which cannot be changed. In order to enter a value for
marginal voltage limit, the Marginal alert box above must also be checked. The limits are a percentage
based on the general loads pickup voltage specified previously for the Vdropout option on the Adjustment
page.
Loading
In this selection group, specify the critical and marginal alert limits for device overload alerts.
Control Relay
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for control relay overload alerts. The limits are a percentage
based on the rated burden current entered on the Rating page of the Control Relay Editor.
Solenoid
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for solenoid overload alerts. The limits are a percentage based
on the rated burden current entered on the Rating page of the Solenoid Editor.
Contact
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for contact overload alerts. The limits are a percentage based on
the rated inductive current entered on the Contact page of the Control Relay Editor or Solenoid Editor.
Switching Device
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for switching devices, such as circuit breakers, fuses, and
switches. The limits are a percentage based on the rated inductive current entered on the Contact page of
the Control Relay Editor or Solenoid Editor.
Wire / Cable
Enter the critical limit and marginal limit for wires and cables. The limits are a percentage based on the
rated continuous current of the wire or cable.

Auto Display
This is a two-state button that can be clicked on or off. When Auto Display is activated the Alert View
will display automatically after a simulated sequence-of-operation is completed.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Display Options

The Battery Sizing Display Options consist of a Results page and three pages for AC, AC-DC, and DC
info annotations. The colors and displayed annotations selected for each study are specific to that study.
35.3.1 Results Page
Voltage
Bus Display Unit

Select whether to display the bus voltage as a percentage or in volts from the drop-down list.
Battery
Click on this checkbox to show the battery voltage in the one-line diagram.
Bus
Click on this checkbox to show the bus voltage in the one-line diagram.
Note: Bus voltage results are available for display only when the Load Flow Calculation Option is
selected for Calculation Method in the Info page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case.
Show Units
Click this checkbox to show units along with results in the one-line diagram.
Power Flows
Power flow results are available for display only when the Load Flow Calculation Option is selected for
Calculation Method in the Info page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case.
Power Flow Display Units

Select the power flow to be displayed in kW or MW.
kW and Amp
Select kW to display power flow or select Amp to display the current in amperes.
Show Units
Check this box to show the unit with calculation results displayed on the one-line diagram.
Flow Results
Click on these checkboxes to display load flow results for different types of elements, including Branch,
Battery, Composite Motor, and Composite Network. These results are available for display only when the
Load Flow Calculation Option is selected for Calculation Method in the Info page of the DC Battery
Sizing Study Case.

35.3.2 AC Page
ID
diagram.

Rating
line diagram.
Device Type Rating

Motor HP/kW
Load kVA/MVA
Transformer kVA/MVA
Bus kA Bracing
kV
line diagram.
A
line diagram.
Z

Motor % LRC

D-Y
one-line diagram.
Composite Motor
Use Default Options


35.3.3 AC-DC Page

networks.
ID
line diagram.

Rating
one-line diagram.
Device Type Rating

UPS kVA
VFD HP/kW
kV
A
one-line diagram.
Device Type Amp

Composite Network
For cables, click the checkboxes to display the cable/line and the size, length and type on the one-line
diagram.
Use Default Options


35.3.4 Colors Page

This page includes options for assigning colors to annotations for elements and results on the one-line
diagram.
Color Theme
.

Theme Button
Theme Editor
on this page may also affect other modes and presentations if the color themes option has been previously
selected.
Annotations

Theme
User-Defined

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Calculation Methods

The ETAP Battery Sizing and Discharging calculations comply with IEEE Standard 485-1997, the IEEE
Recommended Practice for Sizing Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations.
Based on the characteristic curves from the Battery Library, it determines the number of strings, number
of cells, and cell size of a battery for a designated duty cycle.
35.4.1 Battery Duty Cycle

The duty cycle of a battery is the combination of the duty cycles of all the loads supplied by the battery.
The duty cycle of a battery can be determined by two different methods: load duty cycle summation and
load flow calculation. The first method simply sums up duty cycles for all the loads, with the conversion
of load current from the load rated voltage to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus. The load
flow calculation method runs a series of load flow calculations to determine battery load that considers
system losses and branch voltage.
Individual Load Duty Cycle

The individual load supplied by a battery can generally be classified into continuous and non-continuous
loads. Continuous loads are the ones that last for the whole duty cycle. Typical continuous loads include
lighting, continuously operating motors, inverters, indicating lights, continuously energized coils, and
annunciator loads, etc.
Non-continuous loads are on only during a portion of the duty cycle. Typical non-continuous loads
include emergency pump motors, critical ventilation system motors, communication system power
supplies, and fire protection systems, etc. Some of the non-continuous loads can occur repeatedly in a
duty cycle but are of short duration, less than one minute in any occurrence. These loads are called
momentary loads. Typical momentary loads include switchgear operations, motor-driven valve
operations, isolating switch operations, field flashing of generators, motor starting currents, and inrush
currents, etc.
If the time of occurrence of a non-continuous load cannot be predetermined, it is called a random load.
The random loads should be shown at the most critical time of a duty cycle. In battery sizing calculations,
these loads are treated differently from non-random loads.
In order to explain how the program determines the battery duty cycle, let us consider a sample case, in
which a battery supplies power to two loads: Load 1 and Load 2. The following two tables list the
load duty cycle as entered in the Duty Cycle page of the Load editor. Notice that the tables have two
columns: Non-Random Load and Random Load. The Non-Random Load includes continuous, non-
continuous, and momentary loads.
Load Items for Load 1 Duty Cycle (Time in Seconds)
Non-Random Load Random Load

Item Name Amp St Time Duration Item Name Amp Duration
L1 280 0 12 Ld 100 60
L2 60 60 7140
L3 80 1800 1800

Load 2 Duty Cycle (Time in Seconds)

Non-Random Load Random Load
Item Name Amp St Time Duration Item Name Amp Duration
Stage1 40 0 1800 Ld1 50 120
Stage2 140 1800 5400
Stage3 40 7200 3540
Stage4 120 10740 60
The load duty cycle for Load 1 is plotted in the following figure. In figure A, it is plotted in load items
as entered in the Load Editor, while in figure B it is the combination of all load items plotted as a function
of time. Notice that the random load is also displayed in the curve.
Duty Cycle Diagram for Load 1
The following figure displays load duty cycle curve for Load 2.
Duty Cycle Diagram for Load 2

Battery Duty Cycle Current Summation Method

When using the summation method, the battery duty cycle is the sum of all load currents at every time
moment in the duty cycle, with the current value converted from the load rated voltage to the bus nominal
voltage of the battery terminal bus. This is equivalent to assume that the all loads are constant current
loads. The non-random loads and random loads are summed up separately, as shown in the figure below.
Battery Duty Cycle Diagram Load 1 Plus Load 2
Battery Non-Random Load

The summation of non-random loads for the battery duty cycle is very straight forward, as seen in the
battery duty cycle diagram. It should be noted that at the beginning of the duty cycle, the duration for the
320-ampere load section is extended from 12 seconds to one minute. According to IEEE Standard 485,
the load for a one-minute period shall be assumed to be the maximum current at any instant. After
summing up the non-random loads from individual loads, ETAP searches through the duty cycle for
current peaks. If the duration for any peak is less than one minute, the peak current value will be used as
the load for the one-minute period from the beginning of the peak.
Battery Random Load

The summation of random loads for the battery duty cycle is different from that of non-random loads. The
duration of the battery random load is equal to the longest duration of all random loads from individual
loads. The random loads from individual loads are summed up so that they are aligned at the end of the
duration of the battery random load. This ensures that the maximum random load value occurs at the end
of the duration, to produce the severest duty cycle for the battery.
After summing up random loads, if there is any peak with duration less than one minute, it will also be
extended to a one minute time period, similar to the process applied on the non-random load.

Battery Combined Duty Cycle

In the battery sizing calculation, the non-random and random loads are handled separately. The battery
total capacity is equal to the sum of the capacity that can provide power to the non-random load and
random load respectively. However, in the battery discharge calculation, the load applied on the battery is
the combined duty cycle, in which the random load is add on top of the non-random load. Per IEEE
Standard 485, to consider the worst case, the random load should be added to the non-random load at the
time where the battery has the lowest voltage value. In the example case, assuming that at 120 minutes the
battery has the lowest voltage value when the load consists of only the non-random load, the combined
battery duty cycle will be constructed by adding the random load backward at the 120-minute time, as
shown below.
Battery Combined Duty Cycle Diagram
Battery Duty Cycle Load Flow Method

When using the load flow method to determine battery duty cycle, the load current at each moment is
determined by the DC load flow calculation, with the battery being the only constant voltage source. In
the battery sizing calculation, since the parameters are not available, the battery is modeled as a constant
voltage source at the nominal voltage of the terminal bus. In the battery discharging calculation, the
battery voltage is calculated based on the battery characteristic curves and duty cycle in previous steps.

The battery duty cycle determined based on the load flow method will give more accurate representation
of the actual load. With the load flow calculation, the load can be modeled as constant power or constant
impedance load depending on the load type. As the responses of these two types of load with respect to
voltage variations are very different, correctly modeling these loads provides more accurate battery load
current. In the load flow calculation, the battery load can also include losses on cables and other branches.
Additionally, when the load flow method is used in the discharge calculation, ETAP calculates bus
voltages and loads and branch flows for the whole system along with battery results.
35.4.2 Battery Library Data

The battery sizing calculation is based on the battery characteristics from the library of the battery to be
sized. Therefore, in order to size a battery, the battery has to be linked with the Battery Library, which is
done from the Battery Editor by clicking on the Library button in the Rating page and selecting a battery
from the Battery Library Quick Pick Editor. Once you have selected a battery from the library, the battery
is linked to the Battery Library and the battery type information appears in the Battery Type section in the
editor. The battery type information includes manufacturer, voltage per cell, resistance per positive plates,
etc. The same section also displays information on the selected size for the battery including number of
plates, cell capacity, and one-minute-discharge rate.
In the battery sizing calculation, ETAP retrieves the battery characteristic curves according to the battery
type information. Since this link between the battery and the library is dynamic, any changes you make on
the battery characteristics in the library may affect the battery sizing results afterward.
The ETAP Battery Library provides two types of battery characteristic curves: Time vs. Amp type and
Time vs. Kt type. The following figure displays sample curves for both types, taken from IEEE Standard
485. On the left is the Time vs. Amp type and on the right Time vs. Kt type. The Time vs. Amp type
curves provide values for Rt, which is the number of amperes that each positive plate can supply for a
specified time, at 25 C and to a definite end-of-discharge voltage. Time vs. Kt type curves provide
values for Kt, which is the ratio of rated ampere-hour capacity (at a standard time rate, at 25 C, and to a
standard end-of-discharge voltage) of a cell, to the amperes that can be supplied by that cell for a
specified time, at 25 C and to a definite end-of-discharge voltage.

In the above sample curves, the set of curves may apply to batteries of different sizes or to only one size.
In ETAP, you specify a set of characteristic curves for a given size. If you want to use a given set of
curves for batteries of different sizes, you can indicate this in the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor. Please
see the Study Case Editor section for more information.
Estimated Battery Characteristic Curves

In Battery Sizing calculation, according to IEEE Standard 485, a battery is sized so that at end of the duty
cycle, the battery terminal voltage will not be less than the battery minimum discharge voltage. In ETAP,
this minimum discharge voltage is specified in the Sizing page of the Battery Sizing Study Case. During
calculations, the battery characteristic curve, that has end-of-discharge voltage equal to this minimum
discharge voltage, will be used to size the battery.
When you size a battery to a specific end-of-discharge voltage, i.e. 1.75V per cell, your battery library
should normally contain characteristic curves at an end-of-discharge voltage at 1.75V. In case the battery
library does not contain the characteristic curve at 1.75V, ETAP will estimate a characteristic curve at
1.75V based on curves in the library for other end-of-discharge voltage values. Since the behavior of
battery discharging is very nonlinear, this estimation can only provide approximate results.
Several methods for battery characteristic estimation have been developed and the best one has been used
in ETAP to match actual manufacturer curves more accurately. However, the estimated curve is always
an approximation of the actual battery behavior. When estimated battery characteristic curves are used for
battery sizing calculations, the results may be different from that obtained from manufacturer provided
battery characteristic curves. Various tests have been conducted on estimation of battery characteristic
curves from a limited number of manufactures. In each of the test, a manufacture curve at a specific end-
of-discharge voltage was first removed from the battery library and ETAP is used to estimate the curve
based on the rest manufacturer curves. The ETAP estimated curve was then compared against the
manufacture curve removed. It should be pointed out that noticeable differences have been observed, and
in some cases the estimated curves were less conservative.

In order to obtain accurate battery sizing results, we suggest that when you size a battery, make sure that
the battery library contains a battery characteristic curve with end-of-discharge voltage equal to the
Battery Min. Discharge Voltage you have entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case.
It should be stressed that estimation of battery characteristic curves is needed only when the calculation
performed is Battery Sizing, and the battery library used does not contain a characteristic curve of end-of-
discharge voltage equal to the Battery Min. Discharge Voltage value that you have specified in the
Battery Sizing Study Case. If you perform battery discharge calculation for an existing battery,
estimation of battery characteristic curves will not be required at all.
35.4.3 Battery Sizing Method

The battery sizing calculation includes determining the number of cells to meet the system voltage
requirement and determining the battery size and number of strings to meet the load duty cycle
requirement.
Number of Cells
The number of cells should be determined to satisfy system minimum and maximum voltage
requirements:
1. When charging the battery, the voltage to be applied to the battery should not be greater than the
maximum system voltage.
2. When discharging the battery, the battery minimum discharge voltage should not be smaller than the
minimum system voltage.
Let N be the number of cells. The voltage requirements can be given in the following equation
V sys, min N
V sys, max
V cell, disch V cell, ch
Where
Vsys,min is the minimum system voltage that is equal to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus
multiplied by the minimum system voltage deviation entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
Vsys,max is the maximum system voltage that is equal to the nominal voltage of the battery terminal bus
multiplied by the maximum system voltage deviation entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
Vcell,ch is the battery charge voltage in V/Cell entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
Vcell,disch is the battery discharge voltage in V/Cell entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor.
It is clear that the number of cells of the battery is dependent on the four values for voltage requirement
entered in the Battery Sizing Study Case editor. It can happen that for some incompatible values, we
cannot determine a value for N to satisfy the above equation. When this situation occurs, ETAP will
display a message indicating that it cannot determine the number of cells.
In practical cases, there is often a range of values that N can take to satisfy the above equation. In this
case, ETAP will select the value for N that results in the battery rated voltage being closest to its terminal
bus nominal voltage.

Cell Size
In determining the battery size, ETAP will find the smallest size that can provide sufficient power for the
specified duty cycle. The capacity of a battery can be increased either by using a larger size or by adding
more strings. Since ETAP allows you to enter different characteristic curves for different sizes of
batteries, in the battery sizing calculation, the program starts with one string and the smallest size
available for the calculation. If it fails to meet the load requirement, the program first increases the size
and performs calculations with the characteristic curves for the new size. When no available sizes can
meet the load requirement for the given number of strings, it then increases the string number and
performs the calculation with the smallest size again. This process continues until a battery size and a
string number are found to meet the load requirement.
Load Sections in Battery Duty Cycle

A battery duty cycle generally can be represented as a square waveform. It consists of a number of time
periods, with a constant current value during a period. The figure below shows a sample duty cycle for a
battery. It consists of six periods, designated as P1, P2, P6. A load section Si is a combination of a
number of load periods, defined as:
i
S i =
j =1
P j

In the sample duty cycle there are six load sections.
Load Sections for a Sample Battery Duty Cycle
Determination of Cell Size Based on Battery Characteristic Curves

Based on a given set of battery characteristic curves, we can determine the required battery size for a
specified duty cycle. Let F represent cell size. It is equal to:
F= Max Fi i=1,..Sm
where Sm is the total number of load sections and Fi is the size calculated for the ith load section. The
calculation of Fi depends on the type of battery library curves.
For the Time vs. Amp type battery library, the cell size Fi is the number of positive plates, which is
calculated as:
P =i A A

P 1
Fi =
p
P =1 R t
where Ap is the load current value in period P. RT is the value obtained from the battery characteristic
curve, which is the number of amperes that each positive plate can supply for t minutes, at 25 C, and to
the end-of-discharge voltage specified in the Study Case.

For the Time vs. Kt type battery library, the cell size Fi is the capacity in ampere-hours, which is
calculated as:
P =i
Fi = (A
P =1
p A P 1 ) K t
where Ap is the load current value in period P. Kt is the value obtained from the battery characteristic
curve, which is the ratio of rated ampere-hour capacity (at a standard time rate, at 25 C and to a standard
end-of-discharge voltage) of a cell, to the amperes that can be supplied by that cell for t minutes, at 25 C,
and to the end-of-discharge voltage specified in the study case.
Random Load and Non-Random Load

In general, the duty cycle for a battery consists of random loads and non-random loads. ETAP determines
the cells for random and non-random loads separately in the same way as described in the previous
section. The sum of the two cell size values is the uncorrected cell size for the given duty cycle.
Adjusting Factors
In the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor, you can select several adjusting factors to be considered in
calculating battery size. These factors include temperature factor, design margin factor, aging
compensation factor, and initial capacity factor. The uncorrected battery size is adjusted by multiplying
the first three factors and dividing that value by the initial capacity factor.
Calculation Cycle
It is clear from the equations for determining cell size that the cell size is calculated based on a given set
of battery characteristic curves, which is for a given cell size. If the calculated cell size is different from
the one corresponding to the characteristic curves used. We have to do the calculation again with the
battery characteristic curves for the calculated cell size, which may again result in a new size because of
different characteristic curves used. This process continues until the calculated size matches with the
curves used in the calculation. Sometimes the calculation may get into a cycle of changing cell size and
characteristic curves, especially if the curves were not entered correctly. ETAP has implemented a
scheme to break the cycle.
35.4.4 Battery Discharging Calculation Method

The purpose of battery discharge calculation is to determine battery performance for a specified duty
cycle. One of the key parameters for battery performance is the battery terminal voltage. When the battery
is supplying the load as the sole source, it should be able to maintain voltage level for the whole period of
the specified duty cycle.
Battery Characteristic Curves for Voltage Interpolation

The terminal voltage of a battery is dependent on the current drawing from the battery and the ampere-
hour capacity contained in the battery. This relationship is described by the battery characteristic curve
and is very nonlinear. In ETAP, the battery characteristics are described in the battery library as discrete
points. Because no closed form equation is available to describe the battery characteristics, numerical
interpolation methods have to be used to find the points missing in the curves. Apparently, the more
curves are entered in the battery library, the more accurate the calculated results will be. The minimum
number of the characteristic curves entered in the library is two. ETAP will post an error message if the
number of curves in the library for the battery to be discharged is less than two.

In this release of ETAP, the discharge calculation is performed only when the battery is linked to the
Time vs. Amp type library. The Library data required by the discharge calculation for the characteristic
curves is described in section 26.4.2. The battery characteristic curves can be used to interpolate voltage
values in different ways. Because of the nonlinearity of battery characteristics and often limited curves
available, voltage values interpolated from battery curves sometimes may not seem reasonable. For
example, the interpolated voltage value for a very small current at the beginning of discharging could be
larger than the rated voltage of battery. The method used in ETAP first convert the curves from Time vs.
Amp curves to equivalent AH vs. Amp curves, and then interpolate for voltage values at a fixed
current value. This method is chosen for ETAP due its consistent results for a constant discharging
current.
Battery Combined Duty Cycle

When the load powered by the battery includes random load, the random load should be added to the non-
random load at the worst point, or when the battery has the lowest voltage value when only the non-
random load is considered. To identify this time moment, ETAP first performs a battery discharge
calculation excluding the random load. It then determines the worst point, adds the random load to the
non-random load and performs discharge calculation from the time when the random load takes effect all
the way to the end of the battery duty cycle.
Battery Voltage Calculation

An iterative process is conducted to calculate battery discharge voltage values. A battery voltage value is
reported at each time step specified in the battery sizing study case and at each moment when there is a
change in the load duty cycle. By changing the step size from the battery sizing study case, the user can
adjust the level of detail information on discharge calculation to be reported.
If the battery duty cycle is calculated by the load current summation method, the battery current will
change only when there is a change in any load duty cycle. When the load flow method is selected in the
study case, even if there is no change in the load duty cycle, the battery current will change due to
decrease in the battery voltage. In this case the battery current is calculated by a full load flow calculation,
considering different types of loads and system losses. In this load flow calculation, the battery is
modeled as a constant voltage source with the voltage calculated in the previous step. The calculated
battery current will be used in the current step for battery voltage calculation.
Along with battery voltage and current, the battery discharge module also calculates battery discharge
capacity. When there is change in the load current, two values of voltage and current are calculated, at t -
and t+, one for before the load change and one for after the load change.
When the battery is calculated using the load flow method, the battery discharge calculation also provides
considerable information on the system performance, including bus voltage, bus loading, branch power
and current, etc.
35.4.5 CSD in Battery Sizing and Discharging Calculation

ETAP provides options to integrate Control System Diagram with DC system in battery sizing and
discharge calculations. Hence, it extends DC system calculation down to the control system device level.
The involvement of CSD in the calculation has two aspects: calculation of CSD duty cycle and simulation
of CSD sequence of operation with battery discharge voltage. Both apply the Load Flow Method to
simulate CSD sequence of operation.

Calculating and Updating CSD Duty Cycle

If, the Calculate and Update duty Cycle Based on Individual Element Inside CSD option is selected in the
CSD page of the DC Battery Sizing Study Case, ETAP will simulate sequence of operation for each CSD
powered by the battery under consideration. As results of these simulations, duty cycles for all composite
CSD elements are calculated and automatically updated to the Composite CSD element in the DC system.
The updated duty cycle is separated into constant power, constant impedance, and constant current groups
in order to accurately represent CSD devices at any voltage level. This duty cycle will be used for battery
sizing and discharge calculations.
In calculating CSD duty cycle, the sequence of operation simulated is dependent on other options in the
CSD page of DC battery Sizing Study Case, as well as the logical set up in the CSD. These options
include Device Model, Pickup Voltage and Dropout Voltage. Different options selected can result in very
different sequence of operation and therefore different duty cycles.
Calculating CSD Voltage Drop

If, the Report CSD Voltage Drop Results option is selected in the CSD page of DC Battery Sizing Study
Case, as part of the battery discharge calculation, Voltage Drop calculation will be carried out for each
CSD with DC bus voltage calculated from battery discharge. This process allows the CSD voltage drop
calculation to be integrated into battery discharge calculation to simulate control operations in real system
under emergency conditions. Using this tool, you can accurately size the battery and predict system
behavior down to the control system diagram level.
The voltage drop calculation results for all CSDs are placed in a single output report, which can be open
from any CSD view involved in the calculation. The CSD Events View and Alert View are also provided
for you to verify operation sequence and identify abnormal conditions.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Required Data
35.5 Required Data
35.5.1 Source
In battery sizing calculation, the only source is the battery to be sized. Batteries may only be
sized/discharged one at a time as specified in the study case. A UPS may be considered as a load to the
system when its input bus is not connected to an energized bus.
Battery
ID
Bus connection data
Battery library type data. This information is used to retrieve library data for calculations.
If only the battery discharge calculation is conducted, the following additional information is also
required:
Battery number of plates and capacity

Number of cells
Number of strings
SC page battery external resistance
35.5.2 Load
UPS
When a UPS is not connected to an energized input AC bus, it is considered a load in battery sizing
calculations.
ID
Bus connection data
DC rated voltage
kW and kVA
Duty Cycle page
(If duty cycle data is not entered, this load will be assumed to be zero.)
DC Motor
ID
Bus connection data
Quantity
Rated voltage
kW or HP and efficiency
Duty Cycle page

Lumped Load
ID
Bus connection data
Rated voltage
kW Rating
Duty Cycle Page
Static Load
ID
Bus connection data
kW rating
Rated voltage
Duty Cycle page
Composite CSD (CCSD) Load

ID
Bus connection data
Rated voltage
kW rating
Duty Cycle page
Inverter
ID
Bus connection data
DC rated voltage
kVA, PF, DC kW rating
Duty Cycle page
Control System Diagram

When you select the option to include CSD simulations in the study case, all the data for CSD elements is
required for a simulation of sequence of operation when using the Load Flow Method.
35.5.3 Branch
DC Cable
ID
Bus connection data
Cable length
Resistance and inductance and cable length units

DC Impedance
ID
Bus connection data
Resistance and inductance impedance information
Tie PD (CB, Fuse, Single-Throw and Double-Throw Switches)

ID
Bus connection data
DC Converter
ID
Bus connection data
kW rating and rated kV input and output
35.5.4 Other
Library
Library type data
Battery characteristic curve data
Study Case
When you initiate a battery sizing calculation, ETAP uses the study case currently selected from the
Study Case toolbar. Every field in the Study Case editor is set to its default value. However, it is
important to set the values in the study case correctly to meet your calculation requirements.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Output Reports
35.6 Output Reports

The battery sizing calculation results are reported graphically on the one-line diagram, in plots and in the
Crystal Reports format. The graphical one-line display shows the number of cells, number of strings, cell
size, etc. You can use the Display Options editor to specify the content to be displayed.
The Crystal Reports format provides you with detailed information for a battery Sizing Study. You can
utilize the Battery Sizing Report Manager to help you view the output report.
35.6.1 Battery Sizing Report Manager

To open the Battery Sizing Report Manager, click on the View Output File button on the Battery Sizing
Study toolbar. The editor includes four pages (Complete, Input, Result, and Summary) representing
different sections of the output report. The Report Manager allows you to select formats available for
Output Report Name

This field displays the name to the output report you want to view.
Project File Name

Help
OK/Cancel

Complete Report Page

In this page there is only one format available, Complete Report, which opens the complete report for the
Battery Sizing Study. The Complete Report includes Input data, Results, and Summary Reports.
checkbox.

Input Page
This page allows you to select categories to view different input data, grouped according to type. These
include the following available categories:
Battery Characteristics
Branch
Bus and Connected Load
Cable
Cover
DC Converter
Impedance
Inverter
Load Duty Cycle
UPS
You can view these reports in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
Formats, or Excel format. If you wish this selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default
checkbox.

Result Page
This page allows you to select formats to view the result portion of the output report, including
Calculation Results, Battery Load Profile, Battery Characteristics, Battery Tabulation, Bus Tabulation,
and Sizing Results. The Calculation Results portion prints the uncorrected cell size for each load section
in non-random load and random load. The Battery Load Profile is the battery duty cycle generated based
on load duty cycles. The Battery Characteristics are mostly data entered by the user. However, if the
characteristic data does not contain a curve corresponding to the minimum discharge voltage specified in
the Battery Sizing Study Case Editor, the calculation program will generate a new curve based on data
entered by the user. Therefore, the Battery Characteristics portion is placed in both the Input and Results
lists of the report manager. The Battery Tabulation and Bus Tabulation are battery discharge calculation
results. The Sizing Results show the results of battery sizing stages in the same format as given in the
IEEE Standard 485.
You can view these reports in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
checkbox.

Summary Page
This page allows you to select available formats to view the result summary portion of the report. The
summary portion contains the final result for battery sizing calculations.
You can view this report in the Crystal Reports viewer, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text
checkbox.


This is a shortcut for the Report Manger. When you click on the View Output Report button, ETAP
the example shown below, the output report name is BattSizing and the selected format is Complete.
35.6.3 Input Data

Input data are grouped together according to element type. The bus and branch connection data for battery
sizing are similar to DC load flow input data. The following are some samples of input data specific for
battery sizing calculations.
Load Duty Cycle

In battery sizing calculations, the load comes from the duty cycle of all the connected loads. In order for a
load to be considered in the study, you must enter load duty cycle data in the Duty Cycle page of the Load
editor.
In the sample below, there are duty cycles for a lump load, a static load, and a CCSD load. The lump load
and the static load are continuous load, maintaining constant load current over the whole duty cycle. The
CCSD load has both non-random and random loads. Notice that in the report the non-random load is the
combination of all load items entered in the Duty Cycle page, shown as a series of square waveforms as a
function of time. The random load is printed in load items, each with different load duration. If you have
entered two random load items that have the same load duration, they will be summed up and shown as
one item in the report.

Battery Duty Cycle

The battery duty cycle is the total load used to size the battery. In this page, the battery name (ID) is
shown, the method used for obtaining the battery duty cycle, and the battery duty cycle. Notice that for
the battery duty cycle, both the non-random and random load profiles are printed as a function of time. In
the load profiles, any peaks that last less than one minute have been extended to one minute.
Depending on the options you selected in the Correction Factor section of the Discharge page of the DC
battery Sizing Study Case, the battery duty cycle used for battery sizing and discharge calculation may
not be the same. For example, if you selected the option of Adjust Battery Duty Cycle in the section, the
correction factors for temperature, aging and initial condition will be used to change the battery duty
cycle used in the battery discharge calculation. In the report, ETAP prints the duty cycle lists for both
sizing and discharge calculations, if you run the battery sizing calculation. When you run the discharge
calculation, only one duty cycle will be reported.

Battery Characteristics
In this page, the information from the Battery Library is printed. It starts with the library type information
including battery manufacturer, model, characteristic curve type, base temperature, V/Cell, resistance per
positive plate, etc. It is then followed by the information for the final battery size used. In the Battery
Library there may be a set of characteristic curves for each battery size, but only one set of curves is
printed in the report, and it is the one used to determine the cell size. In this sample, curves for the battery
size with 21 plates are printed, including four curves with final discharge voltages at 1.75, 1.91, 1.84, and
1.88 volts, respectively. This page also prints the option you selected in the Battery Sizing Study Case
editor on how to use the battery library data: as Sizes Given in Library Only or as Min/Max Ranges. In
this case, the Min/Max ranges option was selected.

35.6.4 Results Report

The cell sizes for each load section are printed on this page. There are two columns, one for non-random
load, and one for random load. The maximum value from each column is selected and the sum of the two
values is the uncorrected cell size.
It can be seen that for some load sections, such as sections 2 and 5, the cell size is printed as zero. This is
because the calculation skipped these sections. If the load current for the last load period of a load section
is less than the current of the next load period, the calculation for the load section is skipped, because its
size is surely smaller than the size for the next load section. In this sample case, it can be seen from the
Battery Load Profile in the Battery Duty Cycle section above that, for load periods 2 and 5, their load
currents are smaller than their next load period. Therefore, the calculation for load sections 2 and 5 are
skipped and the report prints zero for those sections.

35.6.5 Battery Sizing Summary

This page summarizes the results of a battery sizing calculation. It shows the battery to be sized, the
requirements applied, and the final results.
The Correction Factors group prints the individual and total adjusting factors used in the calculation. If
you have indicated in the Study Case Editor not to use one or more adjusting factors, they will be printed
as 100 in this section.
The Cell Size group prints the curve used in the calculation. In this sample case, the curves for cell size 21
were used in the calculation. It also prints the cell sizes for maximum non-random and maximum random
load, as well as the uncorrected and the recommended sizes. When the curves used are the Time vs. Amp
type, the first three values are the number of positive plates, while the last is the total number of plates.
When the curves used are the Time vs. Kt type, all four values are capacity in ampere-hour.


Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

ETAPs Battery Discharge module displays the results from a battery discharge calculation on the one-
line diagram. The Battery Discharge Time Slider is a tool that may be used to change the displayed results
as they change throughout the discharge cycle. The user may click or move the time slider to any desired
position, and the results corresponding to that particular time are displayed on the OLV. The range of the
time slider is set from the beginning to end of the simulation time duration. If the pointer position is
clicked and dragged, the numerical time displayed is updated throughout the motion. The numerical value
displayed has units of minutes.
If the Current Summation Method for battery discharge is used, the displayed results are the discharged
Battery AH Capacity, Terminal Current (Amps), and the Terminal Voltage. These three results vary with
the time slider. When the time is equal to zero, the capacity displayed in the one-line diagram as the
sizing result is the rated capacity. Furthermore, ETAP will also display the number of positive plates,
strings, and cells it used for the discharge calculation. The following diagram provides an example of how
the parameters are displayed in the one-line diagram. The Battery Discharge Time Slider displays the
results at time equal to 59 minutes.
If the DCLF Method of Battery Discharge is used, branch flow results along with bus voltages may be
displayed on the one-line diagram. Branch flows displayed are Current (Amps) and Power (kW or MW).
Bus Voltage may be displayed in terms of kV or %Nominal Voltage.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis One-Line Diagram Displayed Results

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Plots
35.8 Plots
ETAPs Battery Discharge Module provides Simulation Plots for the purpose of examining calculation
results graphically. To view the Battery Discharge plots, click on the Battery Sizing Plots icon located on
the Battery Sizing toolbar. This will open a Battery Sizing Plot selection window. You can select the
Device by its ID and chose from one of several plots generated by the program. The device types
currently plotted by the program are Batteries, Battery Duty Cycles, Battery Characteristics, Branches and
Buses.

Battery Sizing & Discharge Analysis Plots
Plots generated for the battery includes:
Battery voltage, amp, and discharged AH

Battery duty cycle for non-random load, random load, and combined duty cycle
Battery characteristic curves used for the discharge calculation
If the load flow method is used to generate battery duty cycle, ETAP also generates a plot for system bus
and branch, including:
Bus voltage and load

Branch load current
Plot parameters such as the plot line type, axis, legend, and text may be modified directly from the plot
view. For example, to modify the plot line type, double-click on the plot line and change the line type
from the Plot Parameters Editor.

Chapter 36
Panel Systems
Panel Systems are an integral part of ETAP used for representing power and lighting panels in electrical
systems. ETAP provides a comprehensive model for designing and scheduling AC panel systems
including 3-Phase and 1-Phase panels. 3-Phase panels can be either 3-Wire or 4-Wire panels. 1-Phase
panels can be set up as 2-Wire or 3-Wire.
A panel is a collection of branch circuits feeding system loads. ETAP supports an unlimited number of
circuits within a panel. A branch circuit in a panel is modeled with complete details, which includes
connected load information, protective device ratings, and feeder data. The ETAP panel model is
supported by comprehensive breaker, fuse, and cable libraries. Default and typical data are provided to
save you time and money when designing and scheduling panels. ETAP allows you to graphically
connect subpanels to upstream panels. There is no limit to the number of subpanels you can connect.
In ETAP, a panel branch circuit load can be modeled as an internal or external load. If the load is
connected physically to a panel on the one-line diagram, for example the motor BLR-MTR in the diagram
below, it is considered an external load. Loads that are not connected physically to the panel are referred
as Internal Loads.
The total load fed by branches connected to a panel circuit are calculated and displayed on the panel
schedule. The system connected to a panel circuit may itself represent a complete subsystem with all
ETAP elements. For example, in the diagram below, one of the Main-Panel circuits is connected to the
Panel-67 through a cable and a transformer. In this case, ETAP calculates the total load of the Panel-67
and displays it on the corresponding circuit in the Main-Panel schedule. ETAP performs the calculation to
include all downstream loads. Connections forming loops between branches emanating from panel
circuits are not allowed.

Panel Systems Overview
ETAP maintains the electrical integrity of the system while allowing you to make panel connections. For
example, ETAP will not allow connection of a 3-Phase 4-Wire panel to a panel circuit that is 1-Phase.

Panel Systems Graphical User Interface (GUI)
36.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

ETAP provides a fully Graphical User Interface (GUI) for adding a panel to your one-line diagram. Using
this interface, you can graphically add, delete, relocate, connect elements, zoom in or out, display grid on
or off, change element size, change element orientation, change symbols, hide or show protective devices,
enter properties, set operating status, etc.
36.1.1 Add Panels

To add a panel to a one-line diagram, click the panel symbol from the AC Edit toolbar, which
changes the mouse pointers shape to a panels icon. Now you can drop the panel at any position on the
one-line diagram by clicking the mouse. After dropping the panel, the mouse pointer goes back to its
original arrow shape. If you double-click the Edit toolbar, you can place multiple copies of the panel in
36.1.2 Panel Pins

Each panel has one or more (5, 9, 13, 17, 21 or 25) pins. A pin is a graphical tool (represented by a small,
red square indicating the connection point) to connect elements together. You can right click a panel in
the one-line diagram to select the number of pins (external connections) allowed from a panel as shown
below. ETAP allows up to 24 external load connections. The default is four external connections.

The figure below shows the panel pin assignment. The pin assignments are not necessarily the same as the
panel circuit numbers. Pin 0 is the top pin of the panel. This pin is used to connect the panel to its source
element. The top pin of a panel can be connected only to a bus or to any pin other than the top pin of
another panel. The connection may include protective devices.
External loads including a subpanel can be connected to Pins 1 through 24 of a Panel. These pins can be
connected to all ETAP elements excluding DC elements, three-winding transformer, power grid,
synchronous generator, and composite motor.

36.1.3 Panel Connections

ETAP maintains electrical integrity while making connections in the one-line diagram. The panel top pin
can be connected to a bus or another panel circuit (through an external load pin) only when the connection
is electrically feasible.
The following are the rules of connecting the top pin of a panel to a bus or another panel circuit.
Connecting a panel refers to connecting the top pin of the panel.
3-Phase Panels
A 3-Phase 3-Wire or 3-Phase 4-Wire panel can be connected to a 3-Phase bus. It cannot be
connected to a 1-Phase bus.
A 3-Phase 3-Wire or 3-Phase 4-Wire panel can be connected to a panel circuit with 3 poles. It
cannot be connected to Panel circuits with 1 or 2 poles.
1-Phase 3-Wire Panels

A 1-Phase 3-Wire panel can be connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus. It cannot be connected to a 3-
Phase or 1-Phase 2-Wire bus.
A 1-Phase 3-Wire panel cannot be connected directly to a panel circuit.

A 1-Phase 2-Wire panel can be connected to a 3-Phase, 1-Phase 3-Wire or 1-Phase 2-Wire bus.
A 1-Phase 2-Wire panel can be connected to a panel circuit with 1 or 2 poles. It cannot be
connected directly to a panel circuit with 3 poles.
36.1.4 External and Internal Loads

There are two types of loads linked to ETAP Panels: External and Internal loads. ETAP provides these
two options to make data entry easier and system representation more concise. There is no physical
difference between internal and external loads.
External loads are graphically connected to a panel through external pin on the one-line diagram. ETAPs
graphical representation of a panel allows for up to 24 connections externally. For example, in the
diagram below, AC, Mtr9, and Panel-15 are the external loads connected to Panel-21.

Internal loads are embedded in the Panel Schedule Editor and are not graphically connected to the panel
on the one-line diagram. For example, in the diagram below, Load1, Load2, Main-Pump, Load5, and
Load6 are internal loads in the panel.

Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor
36.2 Panel Schedule Editor

The Panel Schedule Editor provides a user-friendly graphical interface with a lot of suitable default values
and built-in electrical intelligence. The editor fields are designed in a manner to minimize data entry
errors, while eliminating the repetitive task in completing panel schedules.
The properties associated with a panel can be entered in the Panel Schedule Editor. The Panel Schedule
Editor contains the following six pages:
Info for entering panel id, phase connection, status of main disconnect
Rating for entering panel rating, main disconnect rating, # of circuits
Schedule for entering rating/loading/pd/feeder of individual circuits
Summary for entering loading summary, total connected, continuous, non-continuous and code
demand load
Remarks for entering remarks and other user information
Comment for entering text comment
The header on each page of the Panel Schedule Editor displays the rated kV and rated Amps of the panel.

Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor Info Page
36.3 Panel Schedule Editor - Info Page

You can specify the panel ID and connected bus; whether the panel is in or out of service; the equipment
feeder tag, name, description, data type, and load priority; the configurations main disconnect status; the
phase connection; and the phase arrangement within the Info page.
Info
ID
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each panel. The assigned IDs consist of default panel ID plus
an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of panels increase. The default
panel ID (Pnl) can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Bus
This is the ID of the connecting bus or upstream element for the panel. If the terminal is not connected to
any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID. To connect or reconnect a panel to a bus, select a bus
Note: You can only connect to buses that reside in the same view where the panel resides. For example,
If a panel is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the panel to a
new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus, as shown below
where Aux-Loads is reconnected from Bus4 to Bus5.

A panel can also be connected to another panel as shown below. In this case, ETAP displays the ID of the
upstream panel.
In Service or Out of Service

The operating condition of a panel can be selected by choosing either the In-Service or Out-of-Service
options. The properties of an Out-of-Service panel can be edited like an In-Service panel; however, an
Out-of-Service panel will not be included in any system studies. When the continuity check is activated,
an Out-of-Service panel automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
Configuration
Main Disconnect Status

You can change the status of the panel main disconnect (for the selected configuration) by clicking the
manipulation of the status will be saved under the specified configuration.
If the Main Disconnect on the Rating page is set to None (Lugs Only), the status is set to close and
disabled (grayed out).
Status is not a part of the panel engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the configuration
status is shown above the Main Disconnect Status of the panel to indicate that this is the main disconnect
status under the specific configuration.

For example, you can have different operating status under different configurations. In the following
example, status of a panel is shown as Close under Normal configuration and Open under Emergency
configuration.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
typical, vendor, final, etc.) from the list box. As the data is updated, this field can be changed to reflect the
source of the latest data. There are a total of 10 load types. Their names can be changed. From the ETAP
Project menu, point to Settings and select the Data Type command.
Priority
Select the load priority of this panel from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load-shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from. Priorities may be
chosen from the ETAP Project menu by pointing to Settings and selecting the Load Priority command.
Connection
ETAP classifies panels into the following four types depending on their connection:
3-phase 4-wire panel

1-phase 2-wire Panel
ETAP has built-in electrical intelligence that allows a panel to be connected to buses or elements that
have compatible phase connections. For example, a 3-Phase 4-Wire panel cannot be connected to a 1-
Phase bus, and a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel cannot be connected to a 3-Phase bus.
A panel connection can be changed only if there are no external connections from the panel. When panel
connection is changed the data for all circuits on the Schedule page is reset.

1-Phase or 3-Phase
This is the phase connection of the panel. Select either 1-Phase or 3-Phase connection.
Wire
For a 3-Phase panel, select 3 Wires or 4 Wires. For a 1-Phase panel, select 2-wires or 3 Wires.
1-Phase 2-Wire Phase

When a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel is connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus, the options for panel connection are
L1, L2, and LL.
When a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus, the options for panel connection are:
A AB
B BC
C CA
This option is not displayed for any other type of panel connection.
Upstream Connection
The Upstream Connection display box displays the connection phase type of the upstream element for a
1-Phase 3-Wire Panel connected to a 1-Phase 3-Wire bus, or a 1-Phase 2-Wire Panel connected to a 1-
Phase 2-Wire bus. If the panel is not connected to an upstream element the display box shows
Unknown.
The display box is not shown for a 3-Phase panel and 1-Phase 2-Wire panel connected to a 3-Phase bus
the display box is not shown.
Phase Arrangement
Select from the following phase arrangements for a 3-Phase panel:
ABC
CBA
NEC
If NEC is selected, the phase arrangement shall be on A, B, C from top to bottom or left to right from the
front of the panel. Also, for this option phase B shall be the highest voltage (LG) on a 3-phase, 4-wire
delta connected system (midpoint grounded).
1st Ckt
Select one of the following phase designations of the first circuit in the panel:
A
B
C
This option is disabled (grayed out) if the NEC phase arrangement is selected.

Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor Rating Page
36.4 Panel Schedule Editor - Rating Page

You can specify the panel Rated kV, Rated Amps, ANSI, or IEC Standard, number of Branch Circuits,
Layout, and Main Disconnect information on the Rating page.
Rating
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the panel in kV. The panel rated voltage can also be selected from the list box.
If this is a 3-Phase panel, kV is the line-to-line voltage. For 1-Phase panels, the rated voltage must be
consistent with the way this panel is connected to the system. For example, if the bus nominal kV is 4.16
and this load is connected between phase A and neutral, and then the rated voltage of the panel must be in
the neighborhood of 2.4 kV (4.16/1.73). If the bus nominal kV is 4.16 and this panel is connected
between phase A and phase B, then the rated voltage of the panel must be in the neighborhood of 4.16
kV.
If a 3-Phase panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus or another 3-Phase panel, the default rated voltage of the
panel is set to the nominal kV of the upstream bus. For example, if a 3-Phase panel is connected to
another 3-Phase panel that is connected to a 3-Phase bus having a nominal voltage equal to 0.48 kV, the
default rated kV of both the panels is set to 0.48 kV.
The default rated voltage of a 1-Phase panel connected to a 3-Phase bus is set to the line to neutral kV of
the bus. For example, if a 1-Phase panel is connected to a 3-Phase bus having a nominal voltage equal to
0.48 kV, the default rated kV of the panel is set to (0.48/1.732 =) 0.277 kV.

Panel rated voltage is for information purposes only and it is not used in calculation of the connected
panel load.
Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the panel in Amperes. The rated amps can also be selected from the
list box.
Standard
Click either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard.
If ANSI is selected, all the applicable libraries within the panel are based on ANSI Standard. If IEC is
selected, all the applicable libraries within the panel are set to IEC Standard.
Branch Circuits
# of Circuits
Select a panel circuit size from the list or enter the total number of circuits (panel size). Panel size should
be an even integer. If an odd number is entered, panel size is reset to the next largest even number.
For panels with external connections, the number of circuits cannot be decreased. The data on the
Schedule page is deleted if the number of circuits in a panel is reduced.
Layout
Standard or Column
Select either the Standard or Column layout type.
Standard layout has its protective devices on both sides (1, 3, 5, 7 and 2, 4, 6, 8). Column layout has
its protective devices on one-side only (1, 2, 3, 4, 5). The circuits on the Schedule page are arranged per
the selected layout.
The layout of a panel having externally connected branches or loads cannot be changed. Data on the
Schedule page is reset, if the panel layout is changed.
Mounting
Enter the mounting type of the panel in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively,
select one of the following options:
Flush
Surface
Switchboard
The default mounting type is Flush.
Feed
Enter panel incoming feed location in this field, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively,
select one of the following options:
Top

Bottom
Left
Right
The Default panel incoming feed location is Top.
Enclosure
Enter panel enclosure in this field, using up to 10 alphanumeric characters. Alternatively, select one of the
following options:
For ANSI Standard the options are:
NEMA 1 NEMA 3R
NEMA 3S NEMA 4
NEMA 4X NEMA 5
NEMA 12
For IEC Standard the options are:

IP10 IP11
IP14 IP52
IP54 IP67
Main Disconnect
Select the type of main disconnect for the panel from the following options:
None (Lugs Only)

Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through lugs only.
Breaker
Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through a circuit breaker.
Fusible Switch
Select this option if a panel is connected to a bus or an element through a fuse.
The default option is None when the panel is connected to a bus or an element through lugs only.
The Main Disconnect Status on the Info page is set to Close and disabled (grayed out) if option None
is selected.
Library
To access ANSI Standard library data, click the ANSI selection and then click the Library button. Use the
same procedure for accessing IEC Standard library data. As you change the standard from ANSI to IEC,
the data fields change accordingly.
To select a circuit breaker or a fuse from the corresponding Libraries, click the Library button and the
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker (Molded Case, with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device) or the
Library Quick Pick Fuse will appear depending on the type of Main Disconnected selected. If the type
of Main Disconnect is None, the Library button is disabled (grayed out).

From the Library Quick Pick, select a circuit breaker or a fuse by highlighting the manufacturer name and
model/class ID. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it to
the editor.
Note: After you select library data, the manufacturer's name and model number is displayed in the fields
above the Library button.
STAR Plot
After selecting a main disconnect protective device, the user can plot the selected device in a STAR view
by clicking on the panel and adding it to a STAR View. For more information on adding an element to a
STAR View, see Chapter 16 STAR Device Coordination Analysis.
Breaker Rating, ANSI Standard

Click ANSI Standard and Main Disconnect Breaker to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in
accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards. To view and make changes to the ratings and settings click on
the Rating/Setting button.

Library
Click the library button to open the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker. Note: The selection is
limited to Molded Case with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device.
Size
Select the breaker size, as stated by the manufacturer, from the list.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the low voltage circuit breaker in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down
list.

Cont. Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes, or select the rating from
the drop-down list.
Interrupting kA
Enter the rated interrupting capability in rms kA, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Test PF
This is the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the circuit breaker has been established.
Breaker Rating, IEC Standard

Click IEC Standard and Main Disconnect Breaker to enter the ratings for this circuit breaker in
accordance with the IEC Standards. To view and make changes to the ratings and settings click on the
Rating/Setting button.

Library
Click the library button to open the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker. Note: The selection is
limited to Molded Case with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device.
Size
Select the breaker size, as stated by the manufacturer, from the list.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the low voltage circuit breaker in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down
list.

Rated Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the low voltage circuit breaker in amperes, or select the rating from
the drop-down list.
Making
Enter the rated making capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in peak kA, or select the rating from the
list box. The rated making capacity for a circuit breaker is determined by evaluation of the maximum
possible peak value of the short-circuit current at the point of application of the circuit breaker.
Min. Delay
from the drop-down list.
Ultimate Breaking
Enter the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA, or select
the rating from the drop-down list.
Service Breaking
Enter the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA, or select
the rating from the drop-down list.
Tkr
Enter the value of the short time (Tkr) of the low voltage circuit breaker in seconds, or select the rating
ST Withstand
Enter the rated short-time withstand current of the low voltage circuit breaker in kA, or select the rating
Breaker Trip Device

The trip device settings can be modified here. Note: The trip device type is limited to Thermal Magnetic.
To view and make changes to the ratings and settings click on the Rating/Setting button.

Trip Device Type

Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the trip device types. In this case, Thermal Magnetic
TM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the manufacturer name for Thermal Magnetic trip
type.
TM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list, and display the model name for selected manufacturer.

TM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list and display TM ID for the selected Thermal Magnetic trip model.
Next to TM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected TM ID.
Thermal
Fixed
be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the Thermal group displays FIXED in the thermal Trip field.
Adjustable
can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the Thermal group displays a drop-down list of the
available adjustable thermal trip in percent of trip device ampere rating. Also, next to the adjustable Trip
drop-down list, the actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable, or
continuous adjustable. The settings available are described below.
Fixed
maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed, the Magnetic group displays
FIXED in the magnetic Trip field.

Discrete Adjustable
values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a drop-down list of the
available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable Trip drop-down list.
adjustable, the Magnetic group displays a Trip field to enter the magnetic setting in multiples trip device
ampere rating or in actual amperes. Next to the Trip field, the actual value of the trip in amperes is
displayed. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed. Note: the Trip field is
bounded by the Trip Range.
Fusible Switch Rating, ANSI Standard

Click ANSI Standard and Main Disconnect Fusible Switch to enter the fuse ratings according to the
ANSI standards.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the fusible switch in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down list.

Size
Enter the size of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Cont. Amp
Enter the continuous current rating of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the drop-
down list.
Interrupting
Enter the rated interrupting capability of the fusible switch in symmetrical rms kA, or select the rating
Test PF
Enter the power factor of test equipment on which the rating of the fusible switch has been established.
Fusible Switch Rating, IEC Standard

Click IEC to enter the fuse ratings according to the IEC standards.
Rated kV
Enter the rated voltage of the fusible switch in kV, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Size
Enter the size of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
Cont. Amps
Enter the continuous current rating of the fusible switch in amperes, or select the rating from the drop-
down list.
AC Breaking
Enter the rated breaking capacity of the fusible switch in kA, or select the rating from the drop-down list.
TRV
Enter the transient recovery voltage of the fusible switch in kV.

Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor Schedule Page
36.5 Panel Schedule Editor - Schedule Page

The properties associated with each circuit in the panel can be entered on the Schedule page. The
Schedule page contains the following six tabs of properties:
Description
Rating
Loading
Protective Device
Feeder
Some properties of a panel circuit are shown on all the tabs for reference.
Action Buttons
ETAP provides action buttons to facilitate data entry on the Schedule page. These options can be used to
print, copy, paste, and erase rows on the Schedule page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
Print
Copy the content of the selected row to clipboard. Circuit number, Phase, Pole, Load Name, Link and
State are not copied.
Copy
Copy the content of the selected row to clipboard. Circuit number, Phase, Pole, Load Name, Link and
State are not copied.

Paste
Paste the entire content (of the copied row) in the selected row. This will work when the Link Type is
other than space or unusable, and only for fields which are not blocked.
Erase
Blank out the contents of the entire selected row.
#
Indicates the panel circuit number. Circuits (rows) in the Panel Schedule page are analogous to the slots in
a physical panel board. The order of circuit numbers is based on the panel layout type, Standard or
Column. This is not editable. For a panel with Standard Layout, the odd circuit numbers are laid out first
followed by the even circuit numbers. Panel circuit numbers for Standard and Column Layouts are shown
in the below figure.
Circuit Numbers with Circuit Numbers with

Standard Layout Column Layout
Phase
This represents the phase of the circuit. This column is not shown for 1-Phase, 2-Wire connection. For 1-
Phase, 3-Wire connection this column may have one of the following values, depending on the number of
poles:
Poles Phase
1 L1 or L2
2 LL
L1 or L2 phase connection implies that the circuit is connected between the center tap and one of the
lines. LL phase connection implies that the circuit is connected between the two lines.
For 3-Phase, 3-Wire and 3-Phase, 4-Wire panels, the value for this column is determined using the Phase
Arrangement and 1st Circuit information from the Info page. For example, if the Phase Arrangement is
CBA and the 1st Ckt is C, the phase for the first circuit will be C, followed by B and A for the consecutive
circuits. This phase order will be repeated for other circuits.

Pole
Specify number of poles for the circuit. ETAP uses the built in electrical intelligence to determine the
number of poles for a circuit. For example, the last row of a panel circuit is not allowed to have a number
of poles greater than 1.
The number of poles for a circuit depends on the phase of the load connected to the circuit. If a 3-Phase
load is connected to a panel circuit, the number of poles for this circuit will be 3. For a load connected
between two phases of a 3-Phase system, the number of poles will be 2. For a load connected between
one of the phases of a 3-phase system and the neutral wire, the pole is set to 1
Name
Enter load name (ID) in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Link
Select from the following options:
Internal
Ext-#
Spare
Unusable (row is blocked)
Space (row is blank and blocked)
The default option set is Space (blank)
Internal
These are loads specified internally and not connected externally to the panel on the one-line diagram.
Loads for which Link is set to Internal are referred as Internal Loads.
External
External loads are those connected to the panel externally via the one-line. Sub panels are considered
external loads to the upstream panel. In calculations, ETAP will include loads connected externally.
Once the link option is set to External (for example Ext. 1), placing the mouse pointer over the external
pin displays the pin number and phase connection.
When an external load is connected to a panel:
Data is automatically updated on the Rating Tab and Loading Tab of the Schedule page, from the
External Load Editor.
A protective device can be specified on the Protective Device Tab of the Schedule page.
On the Description Tab a Load Description can be entered. The Load Type and Status fields are
blocked.
The fields on Feeder Tab are blocked.
When an external load is deleted from a pin, the load type assignment is changed to Space and the
external connection is removed.

Spare
A panel circuit with link option set to Spare is intended to be used as a spare circuit. Protective device
data can be entered on the Protective Device Tab of the Schedule page. Other than this, data cannot be
entered for fields on other tabs of the Schedule page.
Unusable
A circuit may become unusable due to its phase connection and the number of poles. In this case, data
cannot be entered on any tab of the Schedule page. For example, in case of 3-Phase 3-Wire connection, if
Pole = 1, the Link is set to Unusable and cannot be changed. This is because a 1-Phase load cannot be
connected to a 3-Phase 3-Wire panel.
Space
A blank circuit in a panel that is a circuit to which a load has not yet been assigned and has Link option
set to Space. This is the default value for Link option. In this case, data cannot be entered on any tab of
the Schedule page.
Changing Links
If link is changed to Spare, data is blanked on Description, Rating, Loading, and Feeder pages.
If link is changed to Unusable or Space, data is blanked on Description, Rating, Loading, Protective
Device, and Feeder pages.
If link is changed to Ext.#, data is blanked on Description (except Load Description field), Rating,
Loading, and Feeder pages.
When link is set to Ext.# and an external connection exists, the link cannot be changed to any other type
before deleting the external connection.
State
Specify the state (status) of the circuit. This also applies to the state of the protective device for the given
circuit. Click the button to change the state.
Note: The state of the protective device is not related to the status configuration. The default state of a
circuit is on.
36.5.1 Heading Tab

Enter data for Load Type, Status, and Load Description of a panel circuit within the Description tab.

Load Type
Select load type from the list. The first 15 load items in the list are based on NEC 1999. The next ten
items in the list are user definable.
You can specify the last ten load types in the Panel Code Factor Table. The Panel Code Factor table can
be edited from the ETAP Project menu by pointing to Settings and selecting the Panel Code Factors
command. Load Type is used to determine the Code Factors used in calculating the total panel load.
Load Type options are available for internal links only. External loads are classified as motor load or
static load according to the element types.
Status
This field is enabled only for internal loads, that is, for circuits whose Link field is Internal. There are two
options available:
Continuous
Non-Continuous
For the purpose of panel code demand calculations, all circuits in a panel maintain the same Load Status
for a particular Load Type. For example, consider a panel having three circuits (say 1, 7 and 9) with Load
Type being Hospital and Load Status being Continuous. If the Load Status for circuit 1 is changed to
Non-Continuous, the Load Status for circuits 7 and 9 will also be changed to Non-Continuous.
The load status is used for the panel load calculations. The load status is determined from the connected
loads demand factor status for external links.

Load Description
Enter the load description in this field, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
36.5.2 Rating Tab

You can specify the connected load ratings for each panel circuit within the Rating Tab.
VA, W, kV, and A

Enter the connected load in VA, Watts, or Amperes and the rated kV for an internal load. ETAP
calculates the fields accordingly based on the %PF and kV for each load. For external load, these fields
are calculated based on the connected load.
When you first define a load to be internal for a panel that is connected to an upstream bus with valid
nominal kV, ETAP automatically calculates and sets the defaults for the circuit kV based on the following
criteria:
Panel Number kV
Connection of Poles
3-phase 3 or 1 Bus nominal kV / 3
3-phase 2 Bus nominal kV
1-phase 3-wire 1 Bus nominal kV /2
1-phase 3-wire 2 Bus nominal kV
1-phase 2-wire 1 Bus nominal kV
When you first define a load to be internal, if a panel is not connected to an upstream bus or bus nominal
kV is not specified, the default branch circuit kV is set based on the panel rated kV (as defined in the
Rating page of the Panel) using the following criteria:
Panel Number kV
Connection of Poles

Panel Number kV
Connection of Poles
3-phase 3 or 1 Panel Rated kV / 3
3-phase 2 Panel Rated kV
1-phase 3-wire 1 Panel Rated kV /2
1-phase 3-wire 2 Panel Rated kV
1-phase 2-wire 1 Panel Rated kV
Note: The rated kV of a branch circuit is user-definable. If both the bus nominal kV and panel rated kV
are not specified (zero), panel calculation are not preformed.
A 3-phase load that has Pole = 3, is represented by three panel circuits. Enter per phase VA, W, or
Amperes for this load. For example, if total Watts for a 3-phase load are 1200, enter W as 400 (=1200/3).
The next two rows after a row with Pole = 3 on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page in a panel are
disabled (grayed out) and have VA, W, A and %PF values same as the Row with Pole = 3.
The row next to a row with Pole = 2, on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page in a panel is blocked.
The Amp value for a panel circuit depends on the circuit VA and the circuit kV.
Amps = Circuit VA per phase/( kV 3 1000)
For external loads, the Amp values are calculated based on upstream connected bus nominal voltage
(adjusted for phase connection, where applicable).
%PF
Enter the percent power factor for the selected circuit for internal loads in this field. This power factor
applies to all three phases of the circuit. The default value of %PF is 100. For external loads, this is the
calculated power factor of the connected external loads and is disabled (grayed out).
QTY
Enter the quantity of internal load in this field. This is used to calculate the total connected load. This is
blocked for external loads.

36.5.3 Loading Tab

This tab is used to assign a percent loading to each one of the ten loading categories for the loading of
each panel circuit that is each panel circuit can be set to have a different operating loading level for each
Loading Category. You can select any of these loading categories when conducting AC Load Flow
Studies.
Loading Category
Select the desired Loading Category (up to ten loading categories) from the drop-down box on the top of
the Schedule page. These are the same loading categories used by other loads in ETAP. To edit the
Loading Category names from the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the Loading Category
command.
VBus
This field displays the upstream connected bus nominal kV. The panel loading is calculated based on this
value (adjusted for phase connection, where applicable).
% Loading
For an external load this field is blank and cannot be edited. For internal loads, enter the % loading for the
selected Loading Category.
VA, W, A, %PF
These display columns show the total calculated loading in VA, W, and A, including the %loading and
QTY (on Rating Tab) for both external and internal loads. For an external load, the PF column displays
the rated % PF (at 100% load for motors). For internal loads, the %PF displayed is the same as entered in
the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
VA operating (Loading Tab) = Connected VA (Rated VA Rating Page) X QTY X %Loading
For Example, if Connected VA = 500, QTY = 3, % Loading = 90,

VA operating = 500 X 3 X 90% = 1,350 VA

Amp values are calculated based on the upstream connected bus nominal kV for both internal and
external loads.
36.5.4 Protective Device Tab

You can enter information about the protective device used with each panel circuit within the Protective
Device tab.
Lib
To select a circuit breaker or a fuse from the corresponding Libraries, click the Library button and
the Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker (Molded Case, with Thermal Magnetic Trip Device)
or the Library Quick Pick - Fuse will appear depending on the Type of protective device selected.
Select a circuit breaker or a fuse by highlighting the manufacturer name and model/class ID from the
Library Quick Pick. Then click the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the library and transfer it
to the editor. After you make a selection from library data, the manufacturer's name and model number
are displayed in the fields MFR and Model, respectively.
Lock
If this box is checked, then breaker/fuse sizing will not be allowed for this circuit. This feature is not
currently available. It will be available in future releases of ETAP.
Type
Select the type of PD for the selected circuit from a drop-down menu from the following options:
Fuse
Breaker
MFR
This field displays the protective device manufacturer. This field is filled out based on the selected library
manufacturer.
Model
This field displays the protective device model. This field is filled out based on the selected library model.

Cont. Amps
Select a rating from the drop-down list of ratings or enter a value. Default is set per the selected library
continuous amp rating.
Int. kA
Select a rating from the drop-down list of values or enter a value. The default is set according to the
selected interrupting rating of the device based on the library selection.
STAR Plot
After selecting all the protective devices for all the circuits, the user can plot the protective devices in a
STAR view by clicking on the panel and adding it to a STAR View. To remove any protective devices
within the Panel from STAR View, go to the preference tab of STAR View Plot Options and uncheck
Phase. For more detailed information on adding an element to a STAR View, see Chapter 16 STAR
Device Coordination Analysis. For more detailed information on removing protective devices from the
STAR View, see Chapter 17 STAR Views.
36.5.5 Feeder Tab

Within the Feeder tab enter Feeder Tag, Type, #/Phase, Size, and Length of cables feeding each panel
circuit with internal loads. Feeder information for external loads is entered in the external Load Editor.
The row in Feeder tab is blocked for circuits with external loads.
Lib
To select cables from the Cable Library, click the Lib button at the top of the Schedule page and
the Cable Library Quick Pick will appear. From the Library Quick Pick select the Cable Library
type and size at the same time. The selected Cable Library type, size, and parameters are
transferred to the Feeder tab.
Cable Z Button
Click this button on the top of the Schedule page to launch Cable Impedance Data Editor for
viewing and editing the cable impedance data. The default values impedance values displayed are
based on the cable selected from the library. See the Cable Impedance Data Editor Section below,
for a description of the editors options.

Note 1: To be able to enter an impedance for the cable, first select the cable from the library, and then
you will be able to change the impedance by clicking on this button.
Note 2: Base temperature for the cable resistance is displayed next to the impedance (static). Default is 75
degrees Celsius. The impedances are adjusted based on the system frequency.
feet or meter
Select the unit of measure for cable length from the following options:
Feet
Meter
FDR Tag
Enter or change Cable ID in this field using up to 25 Characters.
Type
This field displays the cable type selected from the library.
#/Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase in this field.
Size
This field displays the cable size selected from the library.
Length
Enter the cable length in this field.
Vd
This field displays the % voltage drop for internal loads based on the cable data.
GND Wire
Enter the Ground wire description in this field using up to 25 Characters.
Conduit
Enter or select from the drop-down list the Conduit size and description using up to 25 Characters.
Notes
Enter notes related to the selected panel circuit using up to 25 Characters.
Cable Impedance Data Editor

Cable Header
This information is displayed on top of the Cable Impedance Data Editor to reflect the cable type and size
selected from the Cable Library. This is a partial list of the library header which includes the library
source name (ICEA, NEC), rated voltage (0.6, 5, 15 kV), voltage class (100%, 133%), # of conductors
per cable (1/C, 3/C), conductor type (CU, AL), insulation type (Rubber, XLPE), installation type
(Magnetic/Non-Mag.), and cable size (350 kcmil, 180 mm2). The unit for cable sizes will be in
AWG/kcmil for English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables.
Impedance (per conductor)

Pos. and Zero Sequence Resistances (R & R0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence resistances at the base temperature, in ohms or ohms per unit length,
per conductor. This is for each line or cable, not the total resistance per phase. ETAP corrects these
resistances for different studies based on the specified temperature limits.
Positive and Zero Sequence Reactances (X & X0)
Enter the positive and zero sequence reactances, in ohms or ohms per unit length, per conductor. This is
for each line or cable, not the total reactance per phase. These reactances must be entered at the system
operating frequency specified for this data file. When data is recalled from English (60 Hz) or Metric (50
Hz) libraries, ETAP automatically corrects for the system operating frequency. After this value is entered
here, ETAP will not make any adjustment to this value.
Base Temp.
Enter the conductor base temperature (in degrees Celsius) at which the cable resistances are entered.
Units
Select impedance units as ohms per unit length or ohms. With the selection of ohms per unit length, a
length should also be designated, including a unit from the list box. Units available are: feet, miles,

Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor Summary Page
36.6 Panel Schedule Editor Summary Page

The Summary page displays information pertaining to panel loading. The information is divided into two
sections. The first section on the left side shows the continuous and non-continuous load on each phase,
total continuous load, total non-continuous load, connected load on each phase, total connected load, code
demand load on each phase, total continuous code demand load, total non-continuous code demand load
and total code demand load.
The second section on the right-side of the Summary page shows the operating load of the panel for all
ten Loading Categories.
Connected Load
The connected load for a panel circuit is the rated load specified on the Rating tab of the Schedule page.
Note: Connected loads are calculated based on the upstream connected nominal bus kV.
Continuous A/Continuous B/Continuous C

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase A/B/C for internal loads with Load
Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Continuous and for external loads connected to
the panel with Status on the Info page set to Continuous. Loads in OFF state are not included. These
fields are displayed for 3-Phase panels.
Continuous L1/Continuous L2/Continuous LL

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase L1/L2/LL for internal loads with
Load Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Continuous and for external loads

connected to the panel with Status on the Info page set to Continuous. Loads in OFF state are not
included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase 3-Wire panels.
Total Continuous
This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included. This field is displayed for 1-Phase and 3-Phase panels.
Non-Continuous A/Non-Continuous B/Non-Continuous C

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase A/B/C for internal loads with Load
Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Non-Continuous and for external loads
connected to the panel with Status on the Info page set to Intermittent/Spare. Loads in OFF state are not
included. These fields are displayed for 3-Phase panels
Non-Continuous L1/Non-Continuous L2/Non-Continuous LL

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for phase L1/L2/LL for internal loads with
Load Status on the Description Tab of the Schedule page set to Non-Continuous and for external loads
connected to the panel with Status on the Info page set to Intermittent/Spare. Loads in OFF state are not
included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase 3-Wire panels.
Total Non-Continuous
This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for non-continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included. This field is displayed for 1-Phase and 3-Phase panels.
Connected A/Connected B/Connected C

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase A/B/C. Loads in OFF state are not included.
Connected L1/Connected L2/Connected LL

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase L1/L2/LL. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed only for 1-
Phase 3-Wire panels.
Total Connected
This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for loads connected to all the phases. Loads in
OFF state are not included.
Code Demand A/Code Demand B/Code Demand C

This row displays the total code demand VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase A/B/C. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed for 3-Phase
panels.
Code Demand L1/Code Demand L2/Code Demand LL

This row displays the total code demand VA, W, A and %PF for all internal loads and external loads
connected to Phase L1/L2/LL. Loads in OFF state are not included. These fields are displayed for 1-Phase
3-Wire panels.
Total Code Demand Continuous

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included.

Total Code Demand Non-Continuous

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for non-continuous loads connected to all the
phases. Loads in OFF state are not included.
Total Code Demand

This row displays the total connected VA, W, A and %PF for loads connected to all the phases. Loads in
OFF state are not included.
Operating Load
This section displays the VA, W, A and %PF for all the ten loading categories of 3-Phase and 1-Phase 2-
Wire panels. For 1-Phase 3-Wire panels the operating load for phases L1, L2, and LL is displayed,
corresponding to each Loading Category.
Load Calculation
The load values displayed in the Summary page include both internal and external loads. The calculations
are performed based on the equations given below.
Connected Load
Total Continuous Load
= (Internal ckt continuous VA load X QTY) + External ckt continuous VA load
Total Non-Continuous Load

= (Internal ckt Non-continuous VA load X QTY) + External ckt Non-continuous VA load
Total Connected Load

= (Continuous VA + Non-Continuous VA)
Code Demand Load

Total Continuous Code Demand Loading
= Continuous Load Multiplier X (Continuous Code Demand Load)
Total Non-Continuous Code Demand Loading

= Non-Continuous Load Multiplier (Non-Continuous Code Demand Load)
Code Demand Loading

= (Total Continuous Code Demand Load) + (Total Non-Continuous Code Demand Loading)
Operating Load
Operating Load (per Loading Category)
= Connected VA X %Loading (per Loading Category)
Note: The calculations on this page are only performed when the panel is energized.

Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page
36.7 Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed. From the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the
User-Defined Fields command.





Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor Remarks Page
UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

Panel Systems Panel Schedule Editor Comment Page
36.8 Panel Schedule Editor Comment Page


Panel Systems Calculation Methods

This section discusses the assumptions made in panel calculations, method used to calculate the panel
loading per phase, panel connected load, panel code demand load and the panel model used in ETAP
Study Modules.
36.9.1 Assumptions
Following are the assumptions made in panel calculation methods:
The rated voltage of an internal load connected to the panel is equal to the rated panel voltage. If
a 1-Phase load is connected to a 3-Phase panel circuit, the rated voltage of the panel circuit is
(1/3) times the rated panel voltage.
The voltage of L1 or L2 phase in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is (1/2) times the rated voltage of the
panel.
There are no losses in the feeders connecting a load to the panel.
Static loads are calculated based on their rated voltage then adjusted based on the upstream
connected bus nominal bus kV.
36.9.2 Loading Per Phase

3-Phase 4-Wire or 3-Phase 3-Wire Panels
3-Phase Load
In case of a 3-phase load connected to a panel circuit, the load per phase is calculated based on load
rating, rated voltage, and rated power factor, loading percent. The rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power
factor for each phase of a 3-Phase load are displayed on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Neutral)

For a 1-Phase load connected between one of the phases of a three 3-Phase system and the neutral wire,
the load per phase is same as the values specified on the rating page. The rated VA, Watts, Amps and
power factor for a 1-Phase are displayed on the Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Line)

In case of a 1-Phase load (load connected between two phases of a 3-Phase system) connected to a panel
circuit, the method used to calculate the per phase load, is described below. For a 1-Phase load (with Pole
= 2), the total rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor (instead of per phase values) are displayed on the
Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
Consider a case when a panel circuit feeds a 2-Phase load (that is a load connected between two phases of
a 3-Phase system). Assume that the load is connected between phases B and C, as shown in the below
figure.
A
B
C
IBC

However, in the Summary page, this load needs Load

to be spilt into phases B and C to be added to individual
phase loads. ETAP splits the load in such a way that under the rated current phase load current and the
total load power are the same as the original load. Considering the following circuit, let
A
B
C
IB = IBC IC = -IBC
LoadB LoadC
The line voltage between phases B and C = VBC
Phase A voltage = VA
Phase B voltage = VB
Phase C voltage = VC
Load current = IBC
The current flowing into the load connected to phase B = IB = IBC

And the current flowing into the load connected to phase C = IC = -IBC
Angle by which load current IBC lags the load voltage =
Therefore, for load connected between phases B and C:
SBC = VBC.IBC
PBC = VBC.IBC.cos
QBC = VBC.IBC.sin
We can represent this case by the phasor diagram shown in the below figure. The phasor diagram shows
that the load current IB leads the phase B voltage VB by an angle of ( - 30). Also the phase current IC
lags the phase C voltage VC by an angle of ( + 30).
Therefore, for load connected to phase B
SB = VB.IB
PB = VB.IB.cos ( - 30)
QB = VB.IB.sin ( - 30)
And, for load connected to phase C
SC = VC.IC
PC = VC.IC.cos ( + 30)
QC = VC.IC.sin ( + 30)

VC IC = -IBC
( + 30)
( - 30)
VA
30

IB = IBC VB
VBC
Similar calculations are made for loads connected between phase A and phase B, phase C and phase A, or
any two phases.
1-Phase Load (Line-to-Neutral)

For a 1-Phase load connected between one of the phases of a three 3-Phase system and the neutral wire,
the load per phase is same as the values specified on the rating page
The rated VA, Watts, Amps and power factor for a 1-Phase are displayed on the Rating Tab of the
Schedule page.

A typical 1-Phase 3-Wire system in ETAP is shown in the below diagram.
L1
VL1 = 120 V Load1

Load1-2
VLL = 240V
Load2
VL2 = 120 V
L2

Line-to-Center Load
An example of a line-to-neutral load, in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is Load1 shown in the above figure. For a
load connected between line L1 or line L2 and the neutral wire, the voltage applied on the load is equal to
half of the Line-to-Line voltage.
The rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor for a load connected to L1-phase are displayed on the
Rating Tab of the Schedule page.
Line-to-Line Load
An example of a line-to-line load, in a 1-Phase 3-Wire panel is Load1-2 shown in the above figure. The
rated VA, Watts, Amps, and power factor for a load connected to LL phase are displayed on the Rating
Tab of the Schedule page.
36.9.3 Connected Load

This section describes the method used to calculate the total connected load, connected continuous load
and connected non-continuous load (VA, Watts, Amps and power factor) on the Summary page of the
Panel Schedule Editor.
The connected load is calculated as the sum of all connected loads, both internal and external ones, which
have the ON State. The load rating values are used in calculating Connected Load, such as VA, W, and
PF for internal loads and rated KVA and PF for external loads. The Amp values are calculated based on
the nominal kV of panel terminal bus (upstream connected bus).
When calculating connected continuous load, either individual phases or the total load, it excludes:
Internal loads with Status set to Non-Continuous

External loads with Status set to Intermittent or Spare.
When calculating connected non-continuous load PA, PB and PC will exclude internal loads and external
loads with Status set to Continuous.
The connected load is sum of the connected continuous load and connected non-continuous load.
36.9.4 Operating Load

The operating load for the panel is calculated for each of ten loading categories. It summarizes total load
power, current, and power factor, including both internal and external loads for all phases. Loads with
OFF State are not included in the operating load.
The operating load is calculated similar to the connected load. In additional to the factors used in
calculating the connected load, load percent for each individual load is considered, and for external loads
the demand factor is also considered. The Amp value is calculated based on the panel terminal bus
nominal kV. For a three-phase panel, this current is an average value.

Code Demand Load

This section describes the method used to calculate the total connected continuous code demand load,
connected non-continuous code demand load and total connected code demand load parameters (VA,
Watts, Amps and power factor) on the Summary page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
Panel Code Factors

Code demand load depends on Panel Code Factors that are specified on the Panel Code Factor Editor. To
display the Panel Code Factors Editor, from the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the
Panel Code command.
Continuous Load Multiplier

This value is used for code load calculation for all continuous designated panel loads. The default value is
1.25.
Non-Continuous Load Multiplier

This value is used for code load calculation for all non-continuous designated panel loads. The default
value is 1.
Load Type
Each panel circuit load has a load type. The load types are based on NEC 1999. The first 14 load type ID
defined as per National Electric Code and cannot be changed. The remaining 10 load type fields are by
default User Defined 1 through User Defined 10. These load types can be changed. The Load Types are
displayed under the Description Tab of the Schedule page under Load Type column for each panel circuit.

Notes:
NDU = Non Dwelling Unit
DU = Dwelling Unit
Ltg = Lighting
HCF = Health Care Facility
Units
Select from following options.
Volt-Amps
Largest Unit
# of Units
The first fourteen have fixed formats per NEC 1999.
Limit & Code Factors (CF)

The limit columns represent the VA limit, largest unit limit, or number of unit limit for a specified load
type based on selected format. There are five limit columns (Limit 1 through Limit 5). Corresponding to
each of the five limits there are five Code Factors. The sixth Code Factor is used for values exceeding the
fifth limit.
Note: By default, the code demand factors are based on NEC 1999 version. The demand factors are
user-editable and can be modified as applicable.
VA
Enter typical VA for the load type in this field. This value appears as default value on the VA column of
the Rating Tab in the Schedule page of the Panel Schedule Editor whenever that particular load type is
selected.
%PF
Enter typical power factor for the specified load type in this field. This value appears as default value on
the %PF column of the Rating Tab in the Schedule page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
This section lists the steps used to calculate the code demand load for a panel. In the following discussion
a panel load is a panel circuit with Link Type set to Internal or Ext.# and in ON state.
In calculating code demand load for internal loads, code factors as well as multiplication factors are
applied. However, for external loads, only multiplication factors are applied, which means that the code
factor for all external loads is assumed equal to 1.
Because ETAP allows you to define different code factors for various types of internal loads. Code
demand load calculation for internal loads are done for each types of load separately and then summed up.
A given load type can be associated with one of three different code factor units: Volt-amps, Largest Unit,
and # of Unit. Each of the three code factor units has a special way of applying the code factors, as
described below.

Rules for Code Demand Load with Volt-Amps Units

The limits set for Volt-Amps load type are in VA. The following rules are applied to this type of loads.
For load VA up to Limit 1, multiply the load VA by CF1.

If Limit 2 is greater than zero, then for load VA greater than Limit 1 and less than Limit 2,
multiply the load VA by CF2; otherwise for multiply load VA greater than Limit 1 by CF2 and
stop.
multiply the load VA by CF3; otherwise multiply load VA greater than Limit 2 by CF3 and stop.
For load VA greater than Limit 5 multiply the load VA by CF6.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by
Continuous Load Multiplier else multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous Load
Multiplier.
For example, let

Load Type = Generic
Load Status = Continuous
Continuous Load Multiplier (CLM) = 1.25
Load VA = 120,000
Limit 1 = 30000 CF1 = 1.0
Limit 2 = 50000 CF2 = 0.5
Limit 3 =0 CF3 = 0.3
Limit 4 =0 CF4 =0
Limit 5 =0 CF5 =0
CF6 =0
Therefore
Code Demand Load = (Limit 1 X CF1 + Limit 2 X CF2 + (Load VA Limit 1 Limit 2) X CF3) X CLM
= (30000 X 1 + 50000 X 0.5 + (120,000 50000 30000) X 0.3) X 1.25
= 83750

Rules for Code Demand Load with Largest Unit

The limits set for Largest Unit loads are in number of units. In calculation, all loads are first sorted in
descending order of rated VA and then multiply by a code factor according to the limits. Let
Limit 1 = N1
Limit 2 = N2
Limit 3 = N3
Limit 4 = N4
Limit 5 = N5
The following rules apply in the calculation:
Starting from the first panel load, if N1 > 0 then up to N1 panel loads multiply each panel load
VA by CF1; otherwise multiply each panel load by CF1 and stop.
Starting from the (N1 + 1) panel load, if N2 > 0 then up to N2 panel loads multiply each panel
load VA by CF2; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF2 and stop.
load VA by CF3; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF3 and stop.
load VA by CF4; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF4 and stop
load VA by CF5; otherwise multiply each remaining panel load by CF5 and stop
Starting from (N5 + 1) panel load, multiply each panel load by CF6 and stop.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by
Continuous Load Multiplier; otherwise multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous
Load Multiplier.
For example, let

Load Type = Motor (for all loads below)
Load Name VA Quantity

Load 1 3000 2
Load 2 5000 1
Load 3 3400 1
Load 4 2500 1
Load 5 6200 1
Load 6 2000 1
Load 7 1900 1
Load 8 2200 1
Load 9 3300 1
Load 10 4300 1
Load Status for Load Type Motor = Continuous

Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Motor are:

Limit 1 =3 CF1 = 1.25

Limit 2 =2 CF2 = 1.05
Limit 3 =1 CF3 = 0.75
Limit 4 =0 CF4 = 0.5
Limit 5 =0 CF5 =0
CF6 =0
Sort the loads in descending order by VA, as shown below.
Load Name VA
Load 5 6200
Load 2 5000
Load 10 4300
Load 3 3400
Load 9 3300
Load 1 - 1 3000
Load 1 - 2 3000
Load 4 2500
Load 8 2200
Load 6 2000
Load 7 1900
For simplicity, assume that the power factor is 100% for all the loads, ETAP will perform complex
addition while adding up the load VA, that is it will take into account the power factor of individual loads
while adding the VA of loads.
Load with Code Factors = 1.25 (6200 + 5000 + 4300) +

1.05 (3400 + 3300) +
0.75 (3000) +
0.5 (3000 + 2500 + 2200 + 2000 + 1900)
= 7750 + 7035 + 2250 + 5800
= 22835
Code Demand Load = Load with Code Factors X CLM

= 22835 X 1.25
= 28543.75

Rules for Code Demand Load with # of Units

Similar to the Largest Unit loads, the limits for # of Units are also in number of load units. However,
in calculation, total load VA is multiplied by a coded factor according to total number of internal load
circuits connected. Let
Limit 1 = N1
Limit 2 = N2
Limit 3 = N3
Limit 4 = N4
Limit 5 = N5
and
N = Number of panel loads for the load type
Total_VA = Sum of all panel loads for the load type
The following rules apply in calculation:
If N1 > zero and N <= N1 then multiply Total_VA by CF1 and stop.
If N2 > 0 and N > N1 and N <= N2 then multiply Total_VA by CF2 and stop.
If N5 > 0 and N > N5 then multiply Total_VA by CF6 and stop.
If for the given load type the status is Continuous, multiply the resulting total load VA by Continuous
Load Multiplier or else multiply the resulting total load VA by Non-Continuous Load Multiplier.
One special case for # of Units load is that if the load type is Kitchen NDU, the code factor load
calculated as described above is compared to the sum of first two largest loads. If the sum of the first two
largest loads is larger than the calculated code factor load, then this load sum will be used in place of the
code factor load to be multiplied by the applicable Load Multiplier.
For example, let

Load Type = Motor (for all loads below)
Load Name Load Type VA Quantity

Load 1 Motor 3000 2
Load 2 Motor 5000 1
Load 3 Motor 3400 1
Load 4 Motor 2500 1
Load 5 Motor 6200 1
Load 6 Motor 2000 1
Load 7 Generic 1900 3
Load 8 Generic 2200 2
Load Status for Load Type Motor = Continuous

Load Status for Load Type Generic = Non-Continuous


Non-Continuous Load Multiplier (NCLM) = 0.75
Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Motor are:
Limit 1 =2 CF1 = 1.25

Limit 2 =3 CF2 = 1.05
Limit 3 =5 CF3 = 0.75
Limit 4 =0 CF4 = 0.5
Limit 5 =0 CF5 =0
CF6 =0
Limits and Code Factor for Load Type Generic are:
Limit 1 =4 CF1 = 1.5

Limit 2 =5 CF2 = 1.25
Limit 3 =7 CF3 = 1.15
Limit 4 =0 CF4 = 0.5
Limit 5 =0 CF5 =0
CF6 =0
For simplicity, assume that the power factor is 100% for all the loads, ETAP will perform complex
addition while adding up the load VA, that is it will take into account the power factor of individual loads
while adding the VA of loads.
For Load Type = Motor

Number of loads, N = 7
For Load Type = Generic

Number of loads, N = 5
Motor Load
As N = 7, we will use CF3 = 0.75
Load with Code Factors = 0.75 (2 X 3000 + 5000 + 3400 + 2500 + 6200 + 2000)
= 18825
Code Demand Load = Load with Code Factors 3 CLM
= 18825 X 1.25
= 23531.25
Generic Load
As N = 5, we will use CF2
Load with Code Factors = 1.25 (1900 X 3 + 2200 X 2)
= 12625
Code Demand Load = Load with Code Factors X NCLM
= 18825 X 0.75

Panel Systems Panels in System Studies
36.10 Panels in System Studies

This section describes how the panel loads are considered in System Studies. In the current version of
ETAP, the downstream elements from a top panel are not considered in details in a system study. Instead,
all the loads connected downstream from the top panel are summed up to the top panel. A top panel must
be one that is connected to a three-phase bus and is not powered from another upstream panel.
36.10.1 Load Flow Type System Studies and Reliability Study

The load flow type System Studies are the ones that are required to perform load flow calculations,
including load flow, motor starting, harmonic load flow, transient stability, optimal power flow. In these
studies as well as reliability study, the downstream loads connected to a top panel are aggregated to get
the total panel load. And this top panel is considered as a single load in the System Studies.
Radial System
To sum up load for a top panel, in the current version of ETAP, It is required that the system powered by
a top panel must be a radial system. It is not allowed for downstream elements from a top panel to form
any loops. Furthermore, the top panel must be the only source for all the downstream elements. Before
carrying out a System Study, ETAP checks if loops are involved in any top panels. If a loop is detected,
an error message will be displayed and the calculation is stopped.
Top Panel Load

The load aggregated to a top panel includes panel internal loads as well as all the connected external
loads. Since external connections to a panel may involve any elements except three-winding transformers,
utilities, and generators, it can form a full radial system. In summing up the load for the top panel, ETAP
considers all the loads connected. Because no load flow calculations are conducted, the load summation
does not include losses on the branches and equipment cables.
The aggregated load values are displayed in the Summary page of the Panel Schedule Editor. Depending
on the Study Case options, appropriate load diversity factors can also be applied.
Panel System Load Flow Calculation

When performing load flow calculations, if the Calc. Panel System option is checked in the load flow
Study Case, the load flow calculation will be carried out for all the panel systems. Bus voltages and
branch flows for panel systems will be reported on the one-line diagram and the output report. Section
15.5 Panel System Load Flow Calculation provides detailed information on the calculation method for
panel systems.
36.10.2 Short-Circuit Type System Studies

Because panels are mostly involved in low voltage power equipment, in the current version of ETAP, it is
assumed that top panels do not make any short-circuit contributions to any fault occurred in the system.

Panel Systems Output Reports
36.11 Output Reports

The panel load schedule and load summary are reported in the Panel Schedule Editor and in Crystal
Reports format.
The Crystal Reports format provides a summary of the panel information. The Panel Schedule Report
Manager helps you to view the output report.

To access the Report Manager, open the Panel Schedule Editor and click the Print button located on the
Schedule page. The Report Manager allows you to select different sections of the report and view it via
Crystal Report, or save the report in PDF, MS Word, Rich Text Format, or Excel formats. If you wish this
selection to be the default for reports, click the Set As Default checkbox.
The header of the Report Manager displays the type of panel connection for which the report is being
generated.
There are several fields and buttons available on this page, as described below.
Panel Schedule
This page allows you to select different formats for viewing load data. They include Loading Schedule
and Loading Summary.

Output Report Name

This field displays the name of the output report you want to view. This name will be the same as the
project file name.
Project File Name

This field displays the name of the project file from which the report is being generated, along with the
Help
OK/Cancel
Click the OK button to close the editor and open the Crystal Reports view to show the selected portion of
the output report. If no selection is made, it will close the editor. Click the Cancel button to close the
Sample Panel Loading Schedule - 3-Phase 3-Wire

Report Header
The report header contains information about ETAP Version, Project Name, Location of Company,
Contract Number, Engineer Name, File Name, Page Number, Date, Revision, and Configuration. This
information can be changed. From the ETAP Project menu, point to Settings and select the Information
command.
Panel Rating
This section contains the rating information for the panel including the Main Disconnect used for the
panel. This information can be changed on the Rating page of the Panel Schedule Editor.
Panel Rating Table

The Panel Rating Table is prepared from the Rating tab on the Schedule page and is only a summary of
the actual table in the Panel Schedule Editor. The values entered in the Watts column are the rating of the
connected load and do not take quantity into consideration. The columns displayed are Load Name, Watts
(shown per phase), FDR Size, Number of Poles, CB Amp Rating, and Circuit Number. The table below
the rating table lists the Total Watts, Total Continuous Watts, and Total Non-Continuous Watts per phase.
Total Watts/phase = Total Continuous Watts/phase + Total Non-Continuous Watts/phase

Sample reports for 3-Phase 3-Wire and 1-Phase 3-Wire panel systems are shown below:
Sample Panel Loading Schedule 1-Phase 3-Wire

For 1-Phase 3-Wire systems the Line-Neutral and Line-Line Ratings are displayed in the Output Report
as shown below.

Sample Panel Loading Summary - 3-phase 3-Wire

The loading summary contains the same header and rating information as in the loading schedule. The
other data displayed is connected, continuous and non-continuous Volt-Amps, Watts, Amps, and %PF, all
displayed per phase as well as totals.
Loading Category
The Loading Category page is included in the Loading Summary page and displays Volt-Amps, Watts,
Amps (avg), and %PF for the ten user-defined Loading Categories.

Sample Panel Loading Summary - 1-Phase 3 Wire

The Loading Summary contains the same header and rating information as in the loading schedule. The
other data displayed is connected, continuous and non-continuous Volt-Amps, Watts, Amps, and %PF, all
displayed as Line-Neutral or Line-Line depending upon the load connection.

Loading Category
The Loading Category page is included in the Loading Summary page and displays Volt-Amps, Watts,
Amps (avg) and %PF for the ten user-defined Loading Categories based on Line-Neutral or Line-Line
load connections.

Chapter 37
Ground Grid Systems
Since the early days of the electric power industry, the safety of personnel in and around electric power
installations has been a primary concern. With ever increasing fault current levels in todays
interconnected power systems, there is renewed emphasis on safety. The safety of personnel is
compromised by the rise in the ground potential of grounded structures during unbalanced electric power
faults. At such times, humans touching grounded structures can be subjected to high voltages. However,
the magnitude and duration of the electric current conducted through the human body should not be
sufficient to cause ventricular fibrillation
Years of research on the effects of electric current on the human body have lead to the development of
standards of permissible values to avoid electrocution. The Ground Grid Systems Module utilizes the
following four methods of computation:
FEM - Finite Element Method

IEEE 80-1986
IEEE 80-2000
IEEE 665-1995

Ground Grid Systems Ground Grid Systems Presentation
The Ground Grid Systems Module calculates the following:
The Maximum Allowable Current for specified conductors. Warnings are issued if the specified
conductor is rated lower than the fault current level.
The Step and Touch potentials for any rectangular/triangular/L-shaped/T-shaped configuration of a
ground grid, with or without ground rods (IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
The tolerable Step and Mesh potentials and compares them with actual, calculated Step and Mesh
potentials (IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
Graphic profiles for the absolute Step and Touch voltages, as well as the tables of the voltages at
various locations (Finite Element Method).
The optimum number of parallel ground conductors and rods for a rectangular/triangular/L-shaped/T-
shaped ground grid. The cost of conductors/rods and the safety of personnel in the vicinity of the
substation/generating station during a ground fault are both considered. Design optimizations are
performed using a relative cost effectiveness method (based on the IEEE Std 80 and IEEE Std 665).
The Ground Resistance and Ground Potential rise (GPR).
Some of the main features of the Ground Grid Systems Analysis Study are summarized below:
Calculate the tolerable Step and Touch potentials

Compare potentials against the actual, calculated Step and Touch potentials
Optimize number of conductors with fixed rods based on cost and safety
Optimize number of conductors and rods based on cost and safety
Calculate the maximum allowable current for specified conductors
Compare allowable currents against fault currents
Calculate ground system resistance
Calculate ground potential rise
Allow a two-layer soil configuration in addition to the surface material
Ground grid configurations showing conductor and rod plots
Display 3-D/contour touch voltage plots
Display 3-D/contour step voltage plots
Display 3-D/contour absolute voltage plots
Calculate Absolute, Step and Touch potentials at any point in the configuration
Conductor/Rod can be oriented in any possible 3-D direction
Handle irregular configurations of any shape

37.1 Ground Grid Systems Presentation

The GGS presentation is composed of a Top View, a Soil View, and a 3-D View. The Top View is used
to edit the ground conductors/rods of a ground grid. The Soil View is used to edit the soil properties of the
surface, top, and lower layers of soil. The 3-D View is used for the three-dimensional display of the
ground grid. The 3-D View also allows the display of the ground grid to rotate, offering views from
various angles. The GGS presentation allows for graphical arrangement of the conductors and rods that
represent the ground grid, and to provide a physical environment to conduct Ground Grid Design Studies.
Each GGS presentation is a different and independent ground grid system. This concept is different from
the multi-presentation approach of the one-line diagram, where all presentations have the same elements.
There is no limit to the number of GGS presentations that can be created.
37.1.1 Create a New Ground Grid Presentation

To create a ground grid system in ETAP, click on the Ground Grid tool and drag-and-drop a ground grid
from the AC Elements toolbar in the one-line diagram:
The AC Elements toolbar is only available on the Edit Mode.
After placing the ground grid on the one-line diagram, you can double-click on the grid to invoke the
ETAP Ground Grid Design Editor.
Select the method of Study Model you wish to use and click OK. This will take you to the Ground Grid
Systems Module. After you create your model and save it, you can double-click on the ground grid in
your one-line diagram, the Ground Grid Systems Module will come up automatically.

37.1.2 Grid Editor

You may right-click any location inside an OLV grid box and select Properties to open the Grid Editor.
The editor is composed of the following pages:
Info
Results
Remarks
Comment
37.1.3 Info Page
Info
ID

Current Symbol
This area displays the symbol that was selected for the grid in the one-line diagram. This symbol can be
changed by going into the one-line diagram, right-clicking on the grid and selecting symbol from the
menu that appears. You can then select a new symbol or reselect the same symbol from the Grid Style
drop-down list.
Grid Style
This allows you to select a grid style in which the OLV grid box will be displayed. Once a grid style is
selected, the corresponding symbol also will show up in the Current Symbol on this page.
Grid Presentation
Press the Grid Presentation button to invoke a GRD presentation.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Enter the grid tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description
37.1.4 Results Page

This page displays the results of the Ground Grid System Analysis. The results are updated from the
Ground Grid Graphical User Interface window once you perform a calculation using IEEE or FEM
Methods. If you performed a FEM calculation, the Method Field will be updated and the corresponding
results are displayed.

Calculated Potentials
The Grid Editor Results page displays the calculated potentials from the ground grid system calculation.
Touch Potential
This field displays the Calculated Touch Potential in units of Volts.
Step Potential
This field displays the Calculated Step Potential in units of Volts.
Tolerable Potentials
The Grid Editor Results page displays the Tolerable Potentials. ETAP determines the Tolerable Potentials
based on the information provided on the Ground Grid Study Case Editor. Please refer to the Modeling
and Calculation Methods section for more information on how to calculate the Tolerable Step and Touch
Potentials.
Touch Potential
This field displays the Tolerable Touch Potential calculated by the Ground Grid calculation in units of
Volts.
Step Potential
This field displays the Tolerable Step Potential calculated by the Ground Grid calculation in units of
Volts.

Calculated Ground Resistance and Potential Rise

The Grid Editor Results page also displays the Calculated Ground resistance and Ground Potential Rise
values.
Ground Resistance (Rg)

This field displays the calculated Ground Resistance Value in units of Ohms ().
Ground Potential Rise (GPR)

This field displays the calculated Ground Potential Rise in units of Volts.
X-Y Coordinates of Maximum Potentials

If you performed a finite element calculation, the Grid Editor Results page will also display the (X,Y)
coordinates of the Maximum Calculated Step and Touch Potentials.
X-Y for Maximum Touch Potential

The Grid Editor displays the location of the Maximum Calculated Touch Potential. The Same result may
be obtained from the GRD Analysis Alert View window, from the FEM Report and the Step Potential
Plot.
X-Y for Maximum Step Potential

The Grid Editor displays the location of the Maximum Calculated Step Potential. The Same result may be
obtained from the GRD Analysis Alert View window, from the FEM Report and the Step Potential Plot.
Method
The Grid Editor Results page has a display field called the Method. This field tells you what calculation
method was used for the Ground Grid Analysis. If it is an IEEE Method, the X-Y coordinates of
Maximum Step and Touch Potentials are not displayed.

Ground Grid Systems FEM Editor Toolbar
37.2 FEM Editor Toolbar

The FEM Editor Toolbar appears when the FEM Study Model is selected, and when you are in the
Ground Grid Systems Edit Mode. This toolbar has the following function keys:
Pointer
Conductor
Rod
FEM Rectangular Shape
FEM T-Shape
FEM L-Shape
FEM Triangular Shape
Pointer
The cursor takes the shape of the element selected from the Edit toolbar. Click on the Pointer icon to
return the cursor to its original arrow shape, or to move an element placed on the Top View of the GGS
presentation.
Conductor
Click on the Conductor icon to create a new conductor and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See
the Conductor/Rod Editor section (for FEM) for more information on conductors.
Rod
Click on the Rod icon to create a new rod and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See the
Conductor/Rod Editor section (for FEM) for more information on rods.
FEM Rectangular Shape

Click on the FEM Rectangular Shape icon to create a new FEM grid of rectangular shape and to place it
on the Top View of the GGS. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.
FEM T-Shape
Click on the FEM T-Shape icon to create a new FEM T-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of
the GGS. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.
FEM L-Shape
Click on the FEM L-Shape icon to create a new FEM L-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of
the GGS. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.
FEM Triangular Shape

Click on the FEM Triangular Shape icon to create a new FEM grid of triangular shape and to place it on
the Top View. See the FEM Group Editor section for more information on grids.

Ground Grid Systems IEEE Editor Toolbar
37.3 IEEE Editor Toolbar

The IEEE Editor Toolbar appears when the IEEE Study Model is selected, and when in the Ground Grid
Systems Edit Mode. This toolbar has the following function keys:
Pointer
IEEE Rectangular Shape
IEEE T-Shape
IEEE L-Shape
IEEE Triangular Shape
Pointer
The cursor takes the shape of the element selected from the Edit toolbar. Click on the Pointer icon to
return the cursor to its original arrow shape, or to move an element placed on the Top View of the GGS
presentation.
IEEE Rectangular Shape

Click on the IEEE Rectangular Shape icon to create a new IEEE grid of rectangular shape and to place it
on the Top View of the GGS. See the IEEE Group Editor section for more information on grids.
IEEE T-Shape
The IEEE T-Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Standard. 80-2000 Method. Click on the IEEE T-Shape
icon to create a new IEEE T-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See the IEEE
Group Editor section for more information on grids.
IEEE L-Shape
The IEEE L-Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Standard 80-2000 Method. Click on the IEEE L-Shape
icon to create a new IEEE L-shaped grid and to place it on the Top View of the GGS. See the IEEE
Group Editor section for more information on grids.
IEEE Triangular Shape

The IEEE Triangular Shape grid is valid only for the IEEE Standard 80-2000 Method. Click on the IEEE
Triangular Shape icon to create a new IEEE grid of triangular shape and to place it on the Top View. See
the IEEE Group Editor section for more information on grids.

Ground Grid Systems Edit A GGS
37.4 Ground Grid Study Method Toolbar

The Ground Grid Study Method toolbar appears when the GGS Study Mode is selected. This toolbar has
the following function keys:
Ground-Grid Calculation
Optimized Conductors
Optimized Conductors and Rods
Summary and Warning
Plot Selection
Report Manager
Stop
Ground-Grid Calculation
Click on the Ground-Grid Calculation button to calculate:
Step and Touch (mesh) Potentials

Ground Resistance
Ground Potential Rise
Tolerable Step and Touch Potential Limits
Potential Profiles (only for the FEM method)
Optimized Conductors
Click on the Optimized Conductors button to calculate the minimum number of conductors (that satisfy
the tolerable limits for the Step and Touch potentials) for a fixed number of ground rods. This
optimization function is for IEEE Standard methods only.
Optimized Conductors and Rods

Click on the Optimized Conductors button to calculate the optimum numbers of conductors and ground
rods needed to limit the Step and Touch potentials. This optimization function is for IEEE Standard
methods only.
Summary and Warning

Click on this button to open the GRD Analysis Alert View dialog box of Summary and Warning for the
Ground Grid Systems Calculation.

Plot Selection
This function is valid only for the FEM method. Click on this button to open the Plot Selection dialog box
to select a variety of potential profile plots to review, and click OK to generate the output plots.

Export Plot Data

The data from the 3-D plot can be exported using a metafile, bitmap, or text file format by right-clicking
on the 3-D plot and selecting the export dialog option.
Export
Plot data can be exported using either image file formats like metafile (.wmf) or bitmap (.bmp). The data
can also be exported using the text (.txt) or data (.dat) file formats.

Export Destination
Once the file format is selected, the export destination option can be used to select the location of the
exported data. The data can be placed either on the clipboard (system memory) to be used later by some
other program, physical file, or sent directly to a default printer.
Object Size
Use this option to adjust the size of the exported image file. When metafile format is used, the image can
be scaled during export by adjusting in millimeters, inches, or points. When bitmap format is used, the
image can be scaled during export by adjusting the pixels only.

Report Manager
Click on this button to open the Ground Grid Design Report Manager dialog box to review and select
from a variety of pre-formatted output plots. Select a plot type and click OK to open the output plot. A
detailed explanation of the Ground Grid Design Report Manager is provided in section 37.15.
Output Report files can be selected from the Output Report list box on the Study Case toolbar shown
below.
Study Case Toolbar
Stop
The Stop Sign button is normally disabled, and becomes enabled once a Ground Grid Systems
Calculation is initiated. Clicking on this button will terminate calculations in progress, resulting in
incomplete Output Reports.

37.5 Edit A GGS

You can add conductors, rods, and grids of various shapes to the Top View of the Ground Grid Systems
presentation. These elements are located on the Edit toolbar of the GGS Module.
37.5.1 Select Elements

Place the cursor on an element located on the Edit toolbar and click the left mouse button.
Note: When a grid shape is selected, regardless of the number of conductors or rods it contains, the shape
is considered to be one element. If a selected shape is deleted or copied, the shape and its contents will
also be deleted or copied. You can control-click on multiple elements to either select or de-select them.
37.5.2 Add Elements

To add a new element to the GGS presentation, select a new element from the Edit toolbar by clicking on
the appropriate element button. Notice that the shape of the cursor changes to correspond to that of the
selected element.
Place the selected element by clicking the mouse anywhere in the Top View section of the GGS
presentation, and note that the cursor returns to its original shape. Double-click on any element in the Edit
toolbar to place multiple copies of the same element in the Top View section of the GGS presentation.
Rules
Elements can be added ONLY in Edit mode

Two conductors/rods cannot overlap each other
Only one IEEE shape can be added in the Top View
FEM group shapes can overlap each other
Add Conductors
Click on the Conductor button on the FEM Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and
click to place the conductor on the Top View. ETAP creates the new conductor using default values.
Add Rods
Click on the Rod button on the FEM Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and click to
place the rod on the Top View. ETAP creates the new rod using default values.
Add Grid Shapes

Click on the desired Shape button on the FEM Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the GGS presentation, and
click to place the element on the Top View. ETAP creates the new grid shape using default values.
Add Conductors by Ungrouping FEM Shapes

An FEM shape added on the Top View of a GGS presentation can be ungrouped into individual
conductors. To ungroup, move the cursor inside the selected shape, right-click, and select Ungroup.

37.5.3 Move / Relocate Elements

When an element is added to a GGS presentation its position coordinates (x, y, and z) are updated
automatically in the editor/spreadsheet and in the Help line at the bottom of your screen. The element may
be relocated to new coordinates by changing the coordinate values at the editor/spreadsheet (x, y, and z
coordinates for conductors/rods, and Lx, Ly, Depth, # of Rods and # of Conductors in X/Y Directions for
various typical grid shapes) or by dragging the element and watching the Help line change to the desired
position.
To drag an element, first select the element to be moved. Place the mouse cursor on top of the selected
element; drag the element to the desired position, and release.
Move Conductors/Rods
Select the element; drag the element to the new position, and release.
Move Shapes
Shapes can be graphically moved within the Top View. Select the shape, drag the shape to the new
location, and release.
37.5.4 Cut (Delete) Elements

Select the element or group of elements and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
37.5.5 Copy Elements

Select an element or group of elements, right-click, and select Copy from the pop-up menu.
37.5.6 Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cells from the Dumpster into the GGS presentation.
37.5.7 Size of Elements

When an element is added to a GGS presentation, its size is set by default. The width and height of grid
shapes and the length of conductors can be graphically changed. Select the element and move the cursor
to a corner or edge of the element. Once the cursor changes its form, drag the element to its new size.
Conductor/rod sizes can be changed from the spreadsheet or shape editors. When the length is altered, X1,
Y1, and Z1 will remain unchanged, and X2, Y2, and Z2 will change accordingly. The cross-sectional area of
a conductor, the outside diameter, and/or length of a rod can only be changed from the Conductor or Rod
Editor.
Rules
Sizing elements can ONLY be done in Edit Mode.

Elements cannot overlap each other.

Ground Grid Systems Study Case Editor

The GGS Study Case Editor contains Average Weight, Ambient Temperature, Current Projection Factor,
Fault Current Durations, option to input or compute Fault Current Parameters (i.e., fault current to
ground, current division factor, and X/R ratio), and Plot Parameters (for the Finite Element Method only).
ETAP allows for the creation and saving of an unlimited number of Study Cases for each type of study,
allowing the user to easily switch between different GGS Study Cases. This feature is designed to
organize the study efforts and to save time. To create a new GGS Study Case, go to the Study Case menu
on the toolbar and select Create New to open the GGS Study Case Editor.
37.6.1 Study Case Page
Study Case ID
A Study Case can be renamed by deleting the old Study Case ID and entering a new one. The Study Case
ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use of the navigator buttons at the bottom of the Study Case
Editor allows the user to go from one Study Case to another.

Options
In this group, select the average body weight for the person working above the ground grid and the
ambient temperature. The weight is used to calculate the Tolerable Step and Touch Potentials.
50 kg
Click on this option to select an average body weight of 50 kg.
70 kg
Click on this option to select an average body weight of 70 kg.
Ambient Temperature
Enter the soil ambient temperature in 0C. This parameter is used for determining the ampacity of the
ground conductors.
Reports and Plots

Specify the report/plot parameters.
Auto Display of Summary and Alert

Check this box to automatically show the result window for Summary and Warning.
Report Details
Check this box to report intermediate results for an IEEE standard method or voltage profiles for the
Finite Element method.
Plot Step
Plot Step is valid only for the FEM Study Model. This value is entered in meters or feet, and it is used to
find the points (or locations) where Absolute/Step/Touch potentials need to be computed and plotted.
Note: The smaller this number, the more calculations are required, increasing calculation time, but
yielding smoother plots. The recommended value is 1 meter. If higher resolution is needed, decrease this
number.
Boundary Extension
Enter the boundary extension in meters or feet. This value is used to extend the grid boundaries inside
which the Absolute/Step/Touch potentials need to be computed.
Fault Durations
Allows the user to specify fault current durations.
tf
Enter the duration of fault current in seconds to determine decrement factor. The fault duration (tf) (tc) and
shock duration (ts) are normally assumed to be equal, unless the fault duration is the sum of successive
shocks.

tc
Enter in seconds the duration of fault current for sizing ground conductors.
ts
Enter in seconds the duration of shock current to determine permissible levels for the human body.
Grid Current Factors

In this group, the Corrective Projection Factor and the Current Division Factor can be specified.
Sf
Enter the Current Division Factor in percent, relating the magnitude of fault current to that of its portion
flowing between the grounding grid and the surrounding earth.
Cp
Enter the Corrective Projection Factor in percent, accounting for the relative increase of fault currents
during the station lifespan. For a zero future system growth, Cp = 100.
Update
Check this box to update/replace the number of conductors/rods in the Conductor/Rod Editor with the
number of conductors/rods calculated by using optimization methods. This box is only valid with the
IEEE Methods.
Ground Short-Circuit Current

This group is used to specify the fault current conditions for the GGS.
User Specified
Click on this option to input and display values for 3I0 and X/R specified by the user.
Short-Circuit Study
Click on this option to use and display the 3I0 and X/R values obtained from a Short-Circuit Study
performed on a one-line diagram.

Ifg
Enter the rms value of the fault current to ground in kA. The Maximum Grid Current is determined from
this rms value, the Decrement Factor, Current Projection Factor, and Current Division Factor.
X/R
Enter the ratio of Inductive Reactance to Resistance. This value is used to calculate the decrement factor.
Remarks 2nd Line

Up to 120 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this remark box. Information entered here will be
Information Editor.

Ground Grid Systems Ground Short-Circuit Current Values
37.7 Ground Short-Circuit Current Values

This feature allows the user to link the Ground Grid Systems Module with the one-line diagram, to update
and use the total 3I0 and the equivalent X/R values obtained directly from the one-line diagram
representation of the power system.
Updating Ground Short-Circuit Current

To update and use the 3I0 and X/R values, with values obtained by performing an Unbalanced Fault
Short-Circuit Study on a one-line diagram, select the Short-Circuit Study option located in the Ground
Short-Circuit Current group of the GRD dialog box, and follow these steps:
Perform an Unbalanced Fault Short-Circuit Study

An Unbalanced Fault Short-Circuit Study must be performed on the one-line diagram power system
representation. The following conditions must be met:
For the ANSI SC Unbalanced Fault Calculation only the half-cycle values are transferred.
For the IEC SC Unbalanced Fault Calculation only the IEC 909 values are transferred.
Select a Grid to be Updated

At the one-line diagram, right-click on the grid of interest, and choose the Update Fault kA option from
the menu. This option is only available when successful Unbalanced Fault Current Calculation results are
obtained, for the ANSI and IEC Standards specified. All the buses covered by the grid are considered by
the update function. However, only the results for the bus with the highest total short-circuit current will
be used.
The GRD Short-Circuit Current Updating dialog box will be displayed. The new short-circuit current
values will be used only if the user clicks on the Replace button, located on this dialog box.

37.7.1 Update Ground Grid Short-Circuit Current

All the fields in this dialog box are for display only.
GRD ID
This field displays the ID of the selected grid.
Faulted Bus
Bus ID
This field displays the ID of the faulted bus used for the Study Case.
Fault Type
This field displays the type of fault used to calculate the New SC kA value. Currently only Line-Ground
faults are used, but additional fault types will be added in future versions of ETAP.
Ground Fault Current

Existing Value - kA
This field displays the existing short-circuit kA value used with the selected grid.
Existing Value - X/R

This field displays the existing short-circuit X/R value used with the selected grid.
New Value - kA
This field displays the new Short-Circuit kA value to be updated for the selected grid.
New Value - X/R

This field displays the new short-circuit X/R value to be updated for the selected grid. The Range and
format are the same as those for the X/R field in the Induction Motor Editor.
Replace
Click on this button to update the New SC kA and X/R values for the selected grid.
Cancel
Click on this button to close the dialog box and retain the existing SC kA and X/R values.

Ground Grid Systems Soil Editor
37.8 Soil Editor

Double-click at any location inside the Soil View to open the Soil Editor to specify earth/surface
materials, soil resistivity and depths for various layers.
Surface Material
These fields are used to specify the resistivity, depth, and material type for the surface layer.
Resistivity
Enter the Resistivity of the Surface Material in ohm-m in this field.
Material
Select the type of Surface Material from the drop-down list.
Depth
Enter the Surface Material depth in meters or feet.
Top Layer
Used to specify the resistivity, depth, and material type for the top layer soil.
Resistivity
Enter the material resistivity of the Top Layer soil in ohm-m in this field.
Material
Select the type of material of the Top Layer soil from the drop-down list.
Depth

Ground Grid Systems Soil Editor
Enter the depth of the Top Layer soil in meters or feet, referenced from the bottom of the Surface
Material.
Lower Layer
Used to specify the resistivity and material type used for Lower Layer soil.
Resistivity
Enter the resistivity of the material of the Lower Layer soil in ohm-m.
Material
Select the type of material of the Lower Layer soil from the drop-down list.
The table below provides some typical thermal resistivity of common types of soil (Source: Electric
Power Distribution Equipment and Systems).
United Soil Soil Thermal Resistivity Thermal Resistivity

Classification System (Wet) (Dry)
(USCS)
Degrees C-cm/W Degrees C-cm/W
GW Well graded gravel 40 120
GP Poor graded gravel 45 190
GM Silty gravel 50 140
GC Clayey gravel 55 150
SW Well graded sand 40 130
SP Uniform sand 45 300
SM Silty sand 55 170
SC Clayey sand 60 180
ML Silt 65 240
CL Silty clay 70 210
OL Organic silt 90 350
MH Micaceous silt 75 300
CH Clay 85 270
OH Soft organic clay 110 400
Pt Silty peat 150 > 600

Ground Grid Systems IEEE Group Editor
37.9 IEEE Group Editor

When an IEEE Study Model is used, double-click on any location inside the selected grid shape in the
Top View of the GGS to open the IEEE Group Editor. The editor is used to specify conductor/rod
parameters for the grid shape.
37.9.1 Conductors Page

You can specify the parameters of the conductors and the grid size within the Conductors page.
Grid Size
Lx/Lx,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet. Show Lx if the rectangular/triangular
shape is selected; show Lx,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.
Ly/Ly,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet. Show Ly if the rectangular/triangular
shape is selected; show Ly,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.

Lx,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet in this field. Lx,short appears only if the
L-shape or T-shape is selected.
Ly,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet in this field. Ly,short shows only if the
# of Conductors
X Direction
Enter the number of the conductors in the X direction in this field.
Y Direction
Enter the number of the conductors in the Y direction in this field.
Conductors
Depth
Enter the depth of the conductor grip in meters or feet in this field.
Type
Select the type of the conductor material from the drop-down list.
Size
Select the conductor size in AWG/kcmil or mm2 from the drop-down list
Cost
Enter the cost of the conductor in $/m or $/ft in this field.
Material Constants
This information is displayed on the Conductors page to reflect the selected conductor type (the conductor
constants are from an internal conductor library/file GRDLib.mdb which can be modified using Microsoft
Access). It includes Material Conductivity (%), Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity at 20 0C (1/0C), K0
Factor (0C), Fusing Temperature (0C), Resistivity of the Ground Conductor at 20 0C in cm, and the
Thermal Capacity Factor in J/cm3/0C.

37.9.2 Rods Page

You can specify the parameters of the rods within the Rods page.
Rods
# of Rods
Enter the number of rods in this field.
Diameter
Enter the diameter of the rod in inches or centimeters in this field.
Length
Enter the length of the rod in meters or feet in this field.
Arrangement
Select the arrangement of the rods throughout the grid area using the pull-down list

Type
Select the type of rod material from the drop-down list.
Cost
Enter the cost of the rod in $/rod in this field.
Material Constants
This information is displayed on the Rods page to reflect the selected rod type (the conductor constants
are from an internal conductor library/file GRDLib.mdb which can be modified using Microsoft Access).
It includes Material Conductivity (%), Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity at 20 0C (1/0C), K0 Factor (0C),
Fusing Temperature (0C), Resistivity of the Ground Conductor at 20 0C in cm, and the Thermal
Capacity Factor in J/cm3/0C.

Ground Grid Systems FEM Group Editor
37.10 FEM Group Editor

When an FEM Study Model is used, double-click on any location inside the selected grid shape in the
Top View of the GGS to open the FEM Group Editor. The editor is used to specify conductor/rod
parameters and grid size for the shape.
37.10.1 Group Conductors Page
Grid Size
Lx/Lx,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet in this field. Show Lx if the
rectangular/triangular shape is selected; show Lx,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.
Ly/Ly,long
Enter the long length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet in this field. Show Ly if the
rectangular/triangular shape is selected; show Ly,long if the L-shape or T-shape are selected.

Ground Grid Systems FEM Group Editor
Lx,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the X direction in meters or feet in this field. Lx,short appears only if the
Ly,short
Enter the short length of the grid in the Y direction in meters or feet in this field. Ly,short appears only if the
# of Conductors
X Direction
Enter the number of conductors in the X direction in this field.
Y Direction
Enter the number of conductors in the Y direction in this field.
Conductors
Depth
Enter the depth of conductor grip in meters or feet in this field.
Size
Select the conductor size in AWG/kcmil or mm2 from the drop-down list.
Type
Select the type of conductor material from the drop-down list.
Insulation
Select the type of conductor insulation (Bare or Insulated) from the drop-down list. If Insulated is
selected, this grid group will not be reconsidered for calculation/plotting.
Cost
Enter the cost of the conductor in $/m or $/ft.

Ground Grid Systems Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM)
37.11 Conductor/Rod Editor (FEM)

The Conductor/Rod Editor is used with the FEM study model only. To edit the data for a conductor/rod, a
conductor/rod must be selected from the FEM Edit toolbar and placed on the Top View of the GGS.
Double-click on a conductor/rod on the Top View to open the Conductor/Rod Spreadsheet Editor.
The Material Constants of the conductor/rod are displayed at the top of the spreadsheet according to the
material type. Each conductor/rod record (row) is a unique set of data. Each conductor/rod record must
have a unique identifier: ConID. Duplicate records with the same data are overwritten.

Label
This is the symbol representing a conductor/rod.
Length
This is the length of the conductor/rod in m/ft. If the length is altered, X2, Y2, and Z2 are changed
accordingly. If X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, and Z2 values are entered, the length is changed accordingly.
X1
This is the X coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Y1
This is the Y coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Z1
This is the Z coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet, referenced from the top edge of
the top layer.
X2
This is the X coordinate of the other end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Y2
This is the Y coordinate of the other end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet.
Z2
This is the Z coordinate of one end of the conductor/rod in meters or feet, referenced from the top edge of
the top layer.
Diameter
This is the Rod diameter in cm or inches, used only in the Rod Editor.
Type
This is the type of conductor/rod material.
Size
This is the conductor cross-sectional area in AWG/kcmil or mm2, used only in the Conductor Editor.
Insulation
This is the conductor insulation type, used only in the Conductor Editor.
Cost
This is the cost in $/m or $/ft for a conductor, cost in $/rod for a rod.
Ascent/Descent Function

You may sort a column by ascending or descending order. To do so, place the mouse on the title of a
column and right click to bring up the menu. All columns will be sorted based off of the column selected.

Ground Grid Systems Calculation Methods

The Ground Grid Systems Module includes the following methods of computation:
Finite Element Method

ANSI/IEEE Std 80-1986
IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
ANSI/IEEE Std 80-2000
IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
ANSI/IEEE Std 665 - 1995
IEEE Guide for Generating Station Grounding
Optimization of Conductors
ANSI/IEEE Std Based Methods
Optimization of Conductors and Rods
ANSI/IEEE Std Based Methods
37.12.1 Finite Element Method

The Finite Element method (FEM) is based on a method of images, and assumes that the grounding
system is an equipotential structure. The uniform or two-layer soil view is also used with the FEM
method.
37.12.2 IEEE Std Methods

IEEE Std 80-2000, IEEE Std 80-1986, or IEEE Std 665-1995 is optional for the calculation of Step and
Touch (mesh) Potentials, Ground Resistance, Ground Potential Rise, Tolerable Step and Touch Potential
Limits. IEEE Std 80-1986 or IEEE Std 665-1995 is used only for the Square/Rectangular shapes of
ground grids; IEEE Std 80-2000 can be used for Square/Rectangular, Triangular, L-Shaped, or T-Shaped
ground grids.
When computing step and touch potential in a two-layer soil structure using the IEEE-80 Method, ETAP
uses the soil resistivity defined for the layer where the ground grid is located, and the formulas in IEEE-
80 for single layer soil model. This is because IEEE-80 does not provide formulas for step and touch
potential calculations for two-layer soil structure.
37.12.3 Optimization of Conductors

ETAP determines the minimum number of conductors that satisfy the tolerable limits for the Step and
Touch potentials for a fixed number of ground rods. The GGS Module begins calculations with a grid
consisting of only two conductors on each side, and increases the number of conductors (keeping the
mesh almost square) until a solution is reached. This optimization function applies to IEEE Std methods
only.

37.12.4 Optimization of Conductors and Rods

The GGS Module performs a cost optimization routine to determine the optimum number of conductors
and ground rods needed to limit the Step and Touch potentials. ETAP begins the optimization routine
with a minimum of two parallel conductors horizontally, two parallel conductors vertically, and four rods.
With each iteration, the number of rods and conductors is increased based on their cost effectiveness in
reducing unwanted potential levels. This optimization function is for IEEE Standard methods only.
37.12.5 Fundamental Formulas

Some fundamental formulas are given below.
Reflection Factor, K
s
K=
+ s
Where is the resistivity of the earth beneath the surface material in ohm-m; s is the surface layer soil
resistivity in ohm-m.
Surface Layer Derating Factor, Cs
For IEEE Std 80-2000
0.09(1 / s )
Cs = 1
2hs + 0.09
Where hs is the thickness of the surface layer in meters.
For IEEE Std 80-1986, IEEE Std 665-1995
1
Kn
Cs = 1 + 2
0.96 n =1 1 + (2nh / 0.08)
2
s
Cs is 1 when K=0
Decrement Factor, Df
Df = 1+
Ta
tf
( 2t / T
1 e f a )
Where Ta is the equivalent system subtransient time constant in seconds.
Tolerable Step Potential, Estep and Etouch

For body weight of 50 kg
0.116
Estep 50 = (1000 + 6Cs s )
ts
0.116
Etouch 50 = (1000 + 1.5Cs s )
ts
For body weight of 70 kg
0.157
Estep 70 = (1000 + 6Cs s )
ts
0.157
Etouch 70 = (1000 + 1.5Cs s )
ts
Maximum Grid Current, IG
I G = S f C p D f (3I 0 )

Ground Grid Systems Required Data
37.13 Required Data

The following related data is necessary to run a Ground Grid Systems Study: Soil Parameters, Grid Data,
and System Data. A summary of these data for different types of calculation methods is given in this
section.
System Data
System Frequency
Average Weight of Worker
Ambient Temperature
Short-Circuit Current
Short-Circuit Current Division Factor
Short-Circuit Current Projector Factor
Durations of Fault
System X/R Ratio
Plot Step (for FEM model only)
Boundary Extension (for FEM model only)
Soil Parameters
Surface Material Resistivity
Surface Material Depth
Upper Layer Soil Resistivity
Upper Layer Soil Depth
Lower Layer Soil Resistivity
Ground Conductor Library

Material Conductivity
Thermal Coefficient of Resistivity
K0 Factor
Fusing Temperature
Ground Conductor Resistivity
Thermal Capacity Factor
Grid Data (IEEE Standards Only)

Shape
Material Type
Conductor Cross Section
Grid Depth
Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction
Maximum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction
Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (for IEEE Std. 80-2000 L-shaped or T-shaped grids
only)
Minimum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction (for IEEE Std. 80-2000 L-shaped or T-shaped grids
only)
Number of Conductors in the X Direction
Number of Conductors in the Y Direction
Cost

Ground Grid Systems Required Data
Rod Data (IEEE Standards Only)

Material Type
Number of Rods
Average Length
Diameter
Arrangement
Cost
Conductor Data (FEM Model Only)

Material Type
Insulation
Cross Section
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of Other End of Conductor
Cost
Rod Data (FEM Model Only)

Material Type
Insulation
Diameter
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Rod
X, Y, and Z Coordinates of Other End of Rod
Cost
Optional FEM Model Grid Group Data

Shape
Material Type
Conductor Cross Section
Grid Depth
Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction
Maximum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction
Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (for L-shaped or T-shaped grids)
Minimum Length of the Grid in the Y Direction (for L-shaped or T-shaped grids)
Number of Conductors in the X Direction
Number of Conductors in the Y Direction
Cost

Ground Grid Systems Output Report
37.14 Output Report

Output reports for the Ground Grid Systems Studies are available in different levels and are arranged in
two formats: Crystal Output Report and Pop-Up Window display.
The naming procedure for the Ground Grid Systems Output Reports has been changed in ETAP 4.7.0.
The new method automatically attaches the name of the Ground Grid System presentation to the front of
the Output Report name. For example, if the report name is Rpt1, and the GGS presentation name is
Grid1, then the report name will be Grid1_Rpt1. The sections of the report name are separated by an
underscore.
If you convert a GGS project into ETAP version 4.7.0 or higher, any old Crystal Reports will not be listed
on the report name drop-down list because they do not have the name of the presentation as a prefix. To
correct this situation you need to add the name of the presentation and the underscore to each existing
Output Report. If you correctly renamed the existing reports, you will see them listed on the report name
drop-down list. You need to rename both of the GGS Output Report files (with extensions *.GR1 and
*.grp).
For example, if the existing GGS presentation and Output Report names are Grid2 and Rpt2
respectively, then you can browse for the location of the *.grp and *.GR1 files and rename them using
Windows Explorer.

Ground Grid Systems Ground Grid Systems Report Manager
37.15 Ground Grid Systems Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Ground Grid Study Method toolbar to open the Ground Grid
Systems Report Manager dialog box. The Ground Grid Systems Report Manager consists of four pages
and provides different formats for the Crystal Reports.
checkbox.
Complete Page
Selects a report format that provides the Complete Output Report.

Input Page
Provides the format for different input data.
Result Page
Provides the format for different calculation results.

Summary Page
Provides the summary from the calculation results.
37.15.1 Ground Grid Systems Crystal Report

After running the Ground Grid Systems Study, click on the Report Manager button located on the Study
Case toolbar, or select the Crystal Report format from the Ground Grid Systems toolbar, to open and view
the Crystal Report output. The Ground Grid Systems Study Crystal Report contains the following major
sections:
Cover Page
This is the first page of the Ground Grid Systems study Crystal Report. It includes information from the
number of conductors and rods, unit system, project file name, and the output file name and its location.

Input Data
This section reports the input data related to the System, Soil, Grid, and Conductor Library.
System Input Data

This section reports the input data related to the system including the System Frequency, Average Weight
of Worker, Ambient Temperature, Short-Circuit Current, Short-Circuit Current Division Factor, Short-
Circuit Current Projector Factor, Durations of Fault, System X/R Ratio, Plot Step (for FEM model only),
and Boundary Extension (for FEM model only).

Soil Input Data

This section reports the input data related to Soil including the Surface Material Resistivity, Surface
Material Depth, Upper Layer Soil Resistivity, Upper Layer Soil Depth, and Lower Layer Soil Resistivity.
Conductor Library
This section reports Conductor Library information. It shows the Material Conductivity, Thermal
Coefficient of Resistivity, K0 Factor, Fusing Temperature, Ground Conductor Resistivity, and Thermal
Capacity Factor.
Grid Data (for IEEE Standards)

This section reports the input data related to the grid including the Shape, Material Type, Conductor Cross
Section, Grid Depth, Maximum Length of the Grid in the X Direction, Maximum Length of the Grid in the
Y Direction, Minimum Length of the Grid in the X Direction (only for IEEE Std. 80-2000 L-shaped or T-
shaped grid).
Rod Data (for IEEE Standards)

This section reports the input data related to the grid including the Material Type, Number of Rods,
Average Length, Diameter, Arrangement, and Cost.

Conductor Data (for FEM model)

This section reports the conductor input data for the FEM model including Material Type, Insulation, Cross
Section, X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor, X, Y and Z Coordinates of Other End of
Conductor, and Cost.
Rod Data (for FEM model)

This section reports the rod input data for the FEM model including the Material Type, Insulation,
Diameter, X, Y, and Z Coordinates of One End of Conductor, X, Y, and Z Coordinates of Other End of
Conductor, and Cost.
Cost Data
Lists the cost data of conductors/rods.

Result
This section reports the results related to Intermediate Constants, Potential Profiles, Summary, and
Warning.
Report of Intermediate Constants for IEEE Standards

In this section the intermediate results Kim, Kis, Km, Ks, Kii, K1, K2 are reported, if the Report Details box
in the Study Case Editor dialog box is checked.
Summary for IEEE Standards

In this section, the Ground Resistance Rg, GPR, Step and Touch potentials, Reflection Factor K, Derating
Factor Df, and Maximum Grid Current and Warning information are reported.

Report of Potential Profiles for the FEM Model

The three Potential Profiles are reported if the Report Details box in the Study Case Editor is checked in
this section.
Summary for the FEM Model

The Ground Resistance Rg, GPR, Step and Touch Potentials, Reflection Factor K, Derating Factor Df, and
Maximum Grid Current and Warning information are reported in this section.

37.15.2 Summary and Warning

After running the Ground Grid Systems Study, click on the Summary and Warning button located on the
Ground Grid System toolbar, to open the GRD Analysis Alert View dialog box. If the Auto Display of
Summary and Warning box located on the Study Case Editor dialog box is checked, this view will open
automatically after the Ground Grid Systems calculations are executed.

Ground Grid Systems Plot Selection
37.16 Plot Selection

Plots are used only with the FEM method, and are available for Absolute/Step/Touch Voltages. To select
a plot, open the Plot Selection dialog box by clicking on the Plot Selection button located on the Ground
Grid Systems toolbar.
Plot Selection
The following 3-D Potential profiles are available for analysis of GGS Study Case results:
Absolute Voltage
Check this to plot an Absolute Potential profile.
Touch Voltage
Check this to plot a Touch Potential profile.
Step Voltage
Check this to plot a Step Potential profile.
Plot Type
The following plot types are available for analysis of GGS Study Case results:
3-D
Plot a 3-D Potential profile for the Absolute/Touch/Step voltage.
Contour
Plot a Contour Potential profile for the Absolute/Touch/Step voltage.
Display Over Limit Voltage

Show areas with potentials exceeding the tolerable limits for 3-D Touch/Step Potential profiles. This
function is disabled when the Contour plot type is selected. A set of sample plots is shown below.



Chapter 38
Underground Raceway Systems
Cable derating analysis is an important part of power system design and analysis. When you are designing
a new system, this determines the proper size of cables to carry the specified loads. When performing an
analysis of an existing system, it examines cable temperatures and determines their ampacities.

Underground Raceway Systems Overview
ETAP provides five types of calculations for cable derating analysis, namely, steady-state temperature
calculation, uniform-ampacity cable ampacity calculation, uniform-temperature cable ampacity
calculation, cable sizing, and transient temperature calculation. The steady-state temperature calculation is
based on the IEC 60287 or the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath Method.
The IEC 60287 steady-state temperature calculation fully complies with the latest standards as listed
below:
Standard Title
IEC 60287-1-1 Ed. 1.2 b:2001 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 1-1:
Current rating equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of
losses - General
IEC 60287-2-1 Ed. 1.1 b:2001 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 2-1:
Thermal resistance - Calculation of thermal resistance
IEC 60287-2-1 Amd.1 Ed. 1.0 b:2001 Amendment 1
IEC 60287-2-1 Amd.2, 2006-03 Amendment 2
I EC 60287-3-1 Ed. 1.1 b:1999 Electric cables - Calculation of the current rating - Part 3-1:
Sections on operating conditions - Reference operating
conditions and selection of cable type
IEC 60287-3-1 Amd.1 Ed. 1.0 b:1999 Amendment 1
The cable ampacity calculation and cable sizing are based on the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath Method
only. The transient temperature calculation is based on a dynamic thermal circuit model. All of these
calculations can handle multi-raceway systems and consider the effect of heat generated by neighboring
cables and external heat sources.
This chapter contains the following sections:
The GUI section explains the various toolbars and their functions, how to launch calculations, open
and view an Output Report, and how to select display options.
The Editor section explains how to add/edit elements of the system, how to create a new Study Case,
and what parameters are required to specify a Study Case, and how to set them.
The Display Options section explains what options are available for displaying some key system
parameters and the output results on the UGS diagram, and how to set them.
The Calculation Methods section briefly describes calculation methods for steady-state temperature
calculation, cable ampacity calculation, cable sizing, and transient temperature calculation.
The Required Data section describes what data is necessary to perform Cable Ampacity Derating
calculations and where to enter them.
The Output Reports and Plots section illustrates and explains the data contents of the Output Report
and how to interpret results on the plots.
The Tutorial section provides an overview of the operation and of some key functions of the
Underground Raceway Systems Module.

Underground Raceway Systems Graphical User Interface (GUI)
38.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

The UGS presentation is conceptually a cross-section of desired raceways, conduits/locations, cables, and
heat sources, which are in the same vicinity. The UGS presentation allows you to graphically arrange
raceways, conduits, cables, and external heat sources to represent cable routing and to provide a physical
environment to conduct cable ampacity derating studies.
Each UGS presentation is a different cross-section of the underground system. This is a different concept
than the multi-presentation of the one-line diagram, where all presentations have the same elements.
You can create as many UGS presentations as you wish. There is no limit on the number of raceways and
heat sources that can be created/added in one presentation. In UGS, each presentation acts independently.
If you add a raceway to a UGS presentation, this raceway will not be shown in the other UGS
presentations. However, raceways from any UGS presentation can be added to the other UGS
presentations as existing raceways. Also, if you delete a raceway from a UGS presentation into the
Dumpster, this raceway can be added to other UGS presentations as an existing raceway.

38.1.1 Create a New UGS Presentation

When a new project is created, by default, a UGS presentation is not created. You must create UGS
presentations as necessary. There are two methods of creating new UGS presentations. The first method
involves right clicking on U/G Raceway System in the Project View, then clicking on Create New.
Creating A UGS Presentation
The second method involves clicking on the UGS System Icon on the System toolbar. If this is new
project with no existing UGS presentations, the following window will appear.
If there are existing UGS presentations in the ETAP project then click on the New Presentation icon to
create additional UGS presentations.

In either method, a graphical user interface window with a UGS presentation will be displayed on your
screen. The ID (name) of the displayed presentation is UGS1 by default (default name appended with a
number). The name may be changed to any unique name (maximum 12 characters) that you choose.
Double-click anywhere inside the UGS1 presentation to change the name.
Change ID (Name) of a UGS Presentation
Another way you can change the name of a UGS presentation is to right-click on UGS1 in the Project
View, then click on Properties, as shown below. Enter a new name from the dialog box.
Right-Click on UGS1, to View, Save, Rename, or Purge UGS1

38.1.2 Edit Toolbar
Add Existing Heat Sources Add New Heat Sources
Add Existing Cables Add New Cables
Add Existing Duct Bank RWs Add New Duct Bank RWs
Add Existing Direct Buried RWs Add New Direct Buried RWs
Add New Conduits for Duct Banks RWs Add New Locations for Direct Buried RWs
Display Options
UGS Edit Toolbar
Pointer
The mouse pointer allows you to select or move items. Clicking on the Pointer icon returns the cursor to
its original shape after an element icon has been clicked on, displaying an element to be placed into the
UGS.
Existing External Heat Source

Click on the Existing External Heat Source icon to open a drop-down list from which you can choose an
external heat source that has been previously created.
If no existing external heat sources are available a message box will appear. These external heat sources
can be found either in the Dumpster or in other underground systems. For more information on external
heat sources see the External Heat Source Editor.

New External Heat Source

Click on the New External Heat Source icon to create a new external heat source. This will enable you to
place it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on external heat sources see
External Heat Source Editor.
Existing Cable
Click on the Existing Cable icon to open a drop-down list from which you can choose a cable that has
been previously created. This list includes one-line, equipment, and UGS cables.
The cables in this list can be found in the one-line diagram (either as a one-line or equipment cable),
Dumpster (deleted cables), or in other underground raceway systems (UGS cables). Cables selected from
the one-line diagram will be converted from one-line or equipment cables to compound cables. A
compound cable represents a cable that exits in the one-line diagram and UGS. For more information on
cables, see Cable Editor Overview.
Note: You can graphically add existing one-line cables to any location (conduit) in UGS. To do this, press
and hold Control+Shift and drag the cable from the one-line diagram into a location in UGS.
A message will appear if no existing cables are available. These cables can be found in the one-line
diagram, Dumpster, or in other underground raceway systems. Cables selected from the one-line diagram
will be converted from one-line cables to compound cables. For more information on cables, see Cable
Editor Overview.
New Cable
Click the New Cable icon to create a new cable. This will enable you to place it in the UGS wherever
there is space available. This cable will be a UGS cable since it only exists in the UGS. To add this cable
(or any other cable in the UGS) to the one-line diagram press and hold Control+Shift and drag the cable,
using the mouse, from the UGS into the one-line diagram. For more information on cables see the Cable
Editor Overview.
Existing Duct Bank Raceway

Click the Existing Duct Bank Raceway icon to open a dialog box from which you can choose a duct bank
raceway that has been previously created.

A message will appear if no existing duct bank raceways are available. These duct bank raceways can be
found either in the Dumpster or in other underground systems. For more information on duct bank
raceways, see Duct Bank Raceway Editor.
New Duct Bank Raceway

Click the New Duct Bank Raceway icon to create a new duct bank raceway. This will enable you to place
it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on duct bank raceways, see Duct
Bank Raceway Editor.
Existing Direct Buried Raceway

Click the Existing Direct Buried Raceway icon to open a dialog box from which you can choose a direct
buried raceway that has been previously created.
A message will appear if no existing direct buried raceways are available. These direct buried raceways
can be found either in the Dumpster or in other U/G Systems. For more information on direct buried
raceways, see Direct Buried Raceway Editor.
New Direct Buried Raceway

Click the New Direct Buried Raceway icon to create a new direct buried raceway. This will enable you to
place it in the UGS wherever there is space available. For more information on direct buried raceways,
see Direct Buried Raceway Editor.
New Conduit
Click the New Conduit icon to create a new conduit. This will enable you to place it in any duct bank
raceway wherever there is space available. For more information on conduits, see Conduit Editor.
New Location
Click the New Location icon to create a new location. This will enable you to place any Direct Buried
Raceway wherever there is space available. For more information on locations, see Location Editor.

Display Option
Click on the Display Options icon to change the appearance of element IDs and ratings in the UGS. For
more information, see Display Options.

Underground Raceway Systems Study Toolbar
38.2 Study Toolbar
Steady-State Cable Temperature Calculation
Cable Ampacity Calculation, Uniform-Ampacity
Cable Ampacity Calculation, Uniform-Temperature
Cable Sizing
Transient Cable Temperature Calculation
Display Options
View Output Report
Cable Temperature Plots
Get Online Data
Get Archived Data
Click on this icon to calculate the steady-state temperature of cables in the raceway system under the
specified loading conditions. ETAP uses the IEC 60287 or the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath Method for
these calculations. It determines steady-state conductor temperature for the specified cable loading and
raceway system configuration, considering the effect of heat generated by neighboring cables and external
heat sources.
Uniform-Ampacity Cable Ampacity Calculation

Click on this icon to calculate cable ampacity under uniform ampacity conditions for all cables in the
raceway system. This calculation assumes that the loading of all cables is increased/decreased uniformly
based on cable base ampacity, which is defined in the cable library. The cable ampacity is calculated by
increasing the loading of all cables until the temperature of the hottest cable reaches the maximum
allowable limit. ETAP uses the Neher-McGrath Method for this calculation. This icon is disabled when
the IEC 60287 Method is used.
Uniform-Temperature Cable Ampacity Calculation

Click on this icon to calculate cable ampacity under uniform temperature conditions for all cables in the
raceway system. This calculation adjusts individual cable loading to maintain uniform temperature
throughout the raceway system. The cable ampacity is obtained when the cable temperature reaches its
maximum allowable limit. ETAP uses the Neher-McGrath Method for this calculation. This icon is
disabled when the IEC 60287 Method is used.

Cable Sizing
Click on this icon to automatically optimize cable sizes for the specified cable loading and cable
temperature limit. The result of this study yields the smallest possible sizes for all cables in the raceway
system that can carry the specified loading within the temperature limit. ETAP uses the Neher-McGrath
Method for this calculation. This icon is disabled when the IEC 60287 Method is used.
Transient Cable Temperature Calculation

Click on this icon to calculate cable transient temperatures as a function of time. The cables carry time-
varying loads, as defined in the Load Profile of the Cable Editor. This study allows you to investigate
cable transient operating conditions and verify cable temperatures against time for determining the short-
time loading limit. This calculation is based on a dynamic thermal circuit model. This icon is disabled
when the IEC 60287 Method is used.
Display Options
Click on this icon to open the Cable Derating Display Options dialog box to display calculation results.
Report Manager
Click on this button to open the Cable Derating Report Manager dialog box to select a variety of pre-
formatted output files to review. Select a file type and click OK to open the output file. A detailed
explanation of the Cable Derating Report Manager is given in Section 38.11, Output Reports.

Output Report files can be selected from the Output Report List Box on the Study Case toolbar shown
below.
Study Case Toolbar
Cable Transient Temperature Plot

Click on the Plot icon to select and plot the calculated temperatures of the cables in the raceway.
Get Online Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature (ETAP Real-Time), you can copy the
online data to the cables in the current U/G system.
Get Archived Data

If the ETAP key installed on your computer has the online feature (ETAP Real-Time), you can copy the
archived data to the current U/G system.

Underground Raceway Systems Study Case Editor
The Cable Derating Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, cable loading parameters, and
options for Output Reports. ETAP allows you to create and save an unlimited number of Study Cases.
Cable derating calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings you have specified
in the Study Case Editor.
Note: You can have an unlimited number of Study Cases and can easily switch between the Study Cases
without the trouble of resetting the Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize
To conduct studies, you first need to switch to the Calculation Mode by clicking on the U/G Cable
Raceways button on the Mode toolbar.

The Cable Derating Study Case Editor can be accessed by clicking on the Study Case button located on
the Study Case toolbar. You can also access this editor from the Project View by clicking on the Cable
Derating Study Case folder.
There are two methods to create a new Study Case. The first method involves going to the Project View,
right clicking on the Cable Derating Study Cases folder, and selecting Create New. A new Study Case is
created, which is a copy of the default Study Case and it is added to the Cable Derating Study Case folder.
The second method involves clicking on the New Study Case button on the Study Case toolbar.

Study Case ID
entering the new ID. The Study Case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Use the Navigator
button at the bottom of the editor to move between Study Cases.
Methods
Use this area to specify the Calculation Method by clicking one of the two buttons.
Neher-McGrath
When this option is selected, the Neher-McGrath Method is employed.
IEC 60287
When this option is selected, the IEC 60287 Method is used for the steady-state temperature calculation.
Initial/Steady-State Amp
Use this area to specify the cable loading for the Study Case by clicking one of the two buttons. The
loading amps are entered into the Loading page of the Cable Editor. The cable current specified in the
Cable Editor is the phase current, and the current each conductor carries is equal to the phase current
divided by the number of conductors per phase.
Load Profile
When this option is selected, the first current value in the Transient Load Profile list in the Loading page
of the Cable Editor will be used as the initial load current for the transient temperature calculation, and as
the load current for the steady-state temperature calculation.
Operating Load
When this option is selected, the operating load in the Loading page of the Cable Editor will be used as
the initial load current for the transient temperature calculation and as the load current for the steady-state
temperature calculation. The operating load current can be updated with the load flow calculation result
by clicking on the Update Cable Load Current button on the Load Flow toolbar.
Multiplication Factor
ETAP provides several multiplication factors, which allow you to vary the cable loading both individually
and globally. These options furnish flexibility in raceway system design and allow you to project future
load variation.
Use Application MF
When this box is checked, the Application MF selected in the Ampacity page of the Cable Editor will be
utilized to modify the cable load. Prior to performing the cable derating calculation, the cable load current
is multiplied by the Application MF.
Individual GF
Select this option to apply the individual load projection multiplication factor that you have entered in the
Loading page of the Cable Editor. The cable load will be multiplied by this factor prior to calculation.
Global GF
The cable load, which you have specified in the Cable Editor, is multiplied by this factor prior to
calculation, allowing you to globally change the system load.

Transient Temperature Study

Enter the time limit and plot time step for a Cable Transient Temperature Study in this section.
Max. Time
Maximum Time is the length of time, at the unit selected, for which the transient temperature calculation
will be performed.
Output Step Size

Output Step Size specifies the time step, at the unit selected, at which plot points will be generated. The
total number of plot points generated is approximately equal to the Max. Time divided by the Output Step
Size.
Units
The Units list box allows you to select time units for the Max. Time and Output Step Size. Time unit
options include days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Update
This group is provided for you to flag ETAP to update your cable data.
Currents from Ampacity Calculation

If the box is checked, after running a UT ampacity or UA ampacity calculation, ETAP will update the
allowable current for each cable involved with the calculated ampacity.
Size from Cable Sizing Calculation

If the box is checked, ETAP will update all the cables involved with the calculated optimal size after
running a cable sizing calculation.

Underground Raceway Systems Display Options
38.4.1 Cable Derating Result Display Options

This dialog box allows you to specify the format for information annotations associated with an
Underground Raceway Systems presentation.
Default
This checkbox is used to edit the display options specified by the Project Default Display Options. When
this option is selected, the Info group in this dialog box will be disabled and all the customized selections
displayed will be ignored and replaced by the default settings.
Info
This group becomes accessible only when the Use Default Display Options box is not checked; otherwise,
the information in this group will not apply.
Color
This selection box allows you to select one of the sixteen available colors for information annotations.
Cable ID
Select the checkbox to display the cable ID in the raceway view.
Conduit/Location ID
Select the checkbox to display the conduit/location ID in the raceway view.
Raceway ID
Select the checkbox to display the raceway ID in the raceway view.
Heat Source ID
Select the checkbox to display the external heat source ID in the raceway view.

38.4.2 U/G Raceway Display Options

This dialog box is used to specify the format and content of the annotations to be displayed for each
individual element on the Underground Raceway Systems presentation.
Default
If the Use Project Default Options box is selected, the project default settings will be used on the UGS
presentation.
Options
Color
Select from a variety of colors to display annotations for each element.
ID
For each element type (cable, conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to
display their ID in the UGS presentation.
Size
For each element type (conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to display
their size (in inches or cm) on the UGS presentation.

38.4.3 Default Display Options - UGS

This dialog box is used to specify the default format and content of the annotations to be displayed for
each individual element on UGS presentations.
Underground Raceway System Annotations
Color
Select the color for information annotations to be displayed.
ID
For each element type (cable, conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to
display their ID on the UGS presentation.
Size
For each element type (conduit/location, raceways, and heat sources) choose whether or not to display
their size (in inches or cm) on the UGS presentation.
Annotation Font
IDs
Select the font, style, and size to display all IDs selected in Display Options.

Ratings
Select the font, style, and size to display all ratings selected in Display Options.
Results
Select the font, style, and size to display all study results selected in their respective Display Options.

Underground Raceway Systems Editing a UGS
38.5 Editing a UGS

This section addresses editors for elements in the U/G Raceway Systems (UGS). Except for the elements
ID, all other data that appear in the editors are considered engineering properties.
The elements that are included in this chapter are shown below.
Add Elements
Duct bank raceways and direct buried raceways, conduits for duct bank raceways, locations for direct
buried raceways, external heat sources, and cables are the elements that can be adding to an underground
raceway system. This is done by clicking on the Edit toolbar.
Rules
Elements can be added ONLY in Edit Mode when the Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT be added when you are in Study Mode or in a Revision level of the database.
You CANNOT drop two raceways on top of each other.
You CANNOT drop an external heat source inside a raceway.
Cables can ONLY be placed inside of a conduit or location.
Conduits and locations can ONLY be added inside of their respective raceway types.
Conduits and raceways CANNOT overlap each other.

A UGS Presentation
To add a new element to your UGS presentation, select a new element from the Edit toolbar, which
changes the cursor symbol to a picture of that element. You may place the element anywhere in the UGS
(where there is room) by clicking the mouse. After dropping the element, the cursor goes back to its
original arrow shape. If you double-click on an element in the Edit toolbar, you can place multiple copies
of the same element in the UGS.
To add an existing element to a UGS presentation, select an existing element in the Edit toolbar (red
symbols), which changes the cursor shape to a picture of that element. Move the cursor into the UGS
presentation and click. It will open an editor (dialog box), which allows you to select an element from the
list box to be added as an existing element, and then click on OK. The element will be added with the
same ID (name) with all of the engineering properties preserved.
External Heat Source Cable Duct Bank Raceway Direct Buried Raceway
Dialog Boxes for Adding Existing Elements to UGS Presentations
Add Raceways and External Heat Sources

Click on the Raceway or External Heat Source button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor to the UGS
presentation, and drop it into place by clicking. If a new raceway or heat source is selected from the
toolbar, ETAP creates the new raceway or external heat source using the default values. If an existing
raceway or heat source is selected, ETAP prompts you with a drop-down list to select an element from the
already existing ones.

Add Cables
Click on the Cable button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor inside of a conduit or location, and drop it
into place by clicking. If you select new cables from the toolbar, a new cable (UGS cable) is created with
a dummy cable diameter. If an existing cable is selected, ETAP provides a drop-down list that you can
use to select a one-line cable, equipment cable, or UGS cable.
Add Conduits
Click on the Conduit button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor inside of a duct bank raceway, and drop
it into place by clicking. Conduits are always created. You cannot add existing conduits to a raceway. The
drop point of a conduit or location is its center. The cursor is marked with an X if your drop point is too
close to the raceways edge causing it to overlap the outside of the raceway.
Add Locations
Click on the Location button on the Edit toolbar, move the cursor inside of a direct buried raceway, and
drop it into place by clicking. Locations are used for placing and locating cables in direct buried raceways
and do not physically exist. Locations are always created. You cannot add existing locations to a raceway.
The drop point of a location is its center. The cursor is marked with an X if your drop point is too close to
the raceway edge causing it to overlap outside of the raceway.
Add One-Line Cables

You can graphically add cables from one-line diagrams (one-line cables) to underground raceways. To do
this from a one-line diagram presentation, use <Ctrl><Shift>+Drag to select and graphically drag a one-
line cable to a conduit or location in a UGS presentation. At first, the cursor becomes a cable symbol with
a big X marked on top of it. Once the cursor inside a conduit or location, the X disappears and you can
drop it. The cable that you have just placed inside a U/G raceway appears both in the one-line diagram
and the UGS presentations. The property of this cable can be changed from either presentation.
Note: You can also use <Ctrl><Shift> + Drag to add UGS cables to the one-line diagram.
Select Elements
To select an element, click the left mouse button while the cursor (arrow shape) is on top of the element.
To rubber band multiple raceways, click the left mouse outside the raceway and drag the mouse across the
raceways you want to select. It will show you a dotted rectangle. When the mouse is released, only the
raceways inside the rectangle will be selected.
Note: When a raceway is selected, no matter how many conduits, locations, or cables it contains, the
raceway is considered to be one element. For example, if you cut or copy a selected raceway, the raceway
and its contents will be cut or copied.
Selecting & Deselecting Multiple Elements

<Ctrl>+Click on the elements that you want to select or deselect.
Move/Relocate Elements
When an element (other than a cable) is added to a UGS presentation, according to the drop point, its
coordinates (x and y) are updated automatically in its editor and in the Help Line at the bottom of your
screen. You may relocate the element to new coordinates, either from its editor (Ref. X and Ref. Y for
raceways and external heat sources, and Horiz. Dist. and Vert. Dist. for conduits and locations relative to

their raceways reference point) or by dragging the element and watching the Help Line change to the
desired position, as shown below.
X and Y Coordination of an Element in the Help Line
To drag an element, first select the element that you want to move, place the cursor on top of the selected
element. Click and hold the left mouse button, drag the element to the desired position, and release the
left button.
Move Raceways, Heat Sources, and Locations (Conduits)

Select the element, hold the left button, drag it to the new position, and then release the left button. When
the cursor is placed on a selected element, the cursor becomes a movement symbol.
The following graph shows the relationship between raceway reference points and other elements.
The value of the reference Y for raceways and heat sources represents the depth of the elements below the
earths surface. The value of the reference X determines the relative horizontal distance between
raceways and heat sources. The reference X is irrelevant for a UGS presentation that has only one
raceway.
Rules
Elements CANNOT be relocated in Study Mode or in a Revision level of the database.
Elements CANNOT be overlapped.
All three phases of a cable must be routed through the same raceway, i.e., if you move one of the
conductors, ETAP prompts you to move all conductors (placed together).

You can also move a raceway (reference X and Y) or a location/conduit (horizontal and vertical distance)
from its editor as shown below.
Move Cables
You can graphically move any cable within a UGS. To move a cable, select the cable, hold the left button,
drag it to the new location (conduit), and then release the left button. When you move a cable from one
raceway to another raceway, all conductors for that cable will be moved.
Move Cable2 from One Conduit to Another

Move Cable4 from Raceway RW1 to RW2
Cut (Delete) Elements

When elements are cut, they are placed into the Dumpster (inside a Dumpster Cell). You can cut elements
in Edit Mode only. When you cut an element or group of elements, they are deleted from UGS and placed
in the Dumpster with the same IDs (engineering properties are preserved).
Elements can be cut (deleted) three ways:
Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then click on Cut.

Click on the Cut button on the Project toolbar.
Press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Rules
Elements can be cut in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Elements have to be selected in order for them to be Cut (deleted).
When a conduit or location that contains cables is cut, the cables are not deleted. They are moved into
a container attached underneath of the raceway. This container is used to hold cables that belong to
this raceway but are not assigned to a specific conduit or location.
When one or more raceways, cables, or heat sources are placed in the Dumpster, ETAP forms a new
Dumpster Cell (element group) that holds these elements. ETAP automatically assigns the name of
the Dumpster Cell.
Copy Elements
Elements are copied into the Dumpster (inside a Dumpster Cell). To copy an element or group of
elements, right-click on top of the element and select Copy. When you copy an element or group of
elements, they get copied into the Dumpster with new IDs while the engineering properties are preserved.
Elements can be copied two ways:
Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then select Copy.

Click on the Copy button in the Project toolbar.
Rules
Element can be copied in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Date is active.
Element must be selected before they can be copied.

When one or more raceways, cables, or heat sources are placed in the Dumpster, ETAP forms a new
Dumpster Cell (element group) that holds these elements. ETAP automatically assigns the name of
the Dumpster Cell.
Select a raceway and <Shift>+Drag to graphically copy raceways from a UGS presentation to the
Dumpster. At first, the cursor becomes a preventive symbol (a red circle with a line across it). When you
move the cursor on top of the Dumpster, it becomes a box symbol with a plus sign indicating that you can
copy it to the Dumpster.
Paste
Use the Paste command to copy the selected cell from the Dumpster into the UGS presentation. To paste
a copy of the elements from a Dumpster Cell, first select the Cell from the Dumpster, activate the UGS
presentation view you want the element to be pasted into, and then click on Paste. When you paste
elements, they get copied into the UGS presentation with new IDs (engineering properties are preserved).
Elements can be pasted two ways:
Click on Edit in the menu bar, and then select Paste.

Click on the Paste icon in the Project toolbar.
Rules
You CANNOT paste if there are no Cells (element groups) in the Dumpster.
Pasting can be done in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Conduits or locations in the Dumpster CANNOT be deleted or purged unless the raceway containing
these conduits or locations is deleted or purged.
You can paste any Dumpster Cell you wish to by making it active from the Dumpster presentation.
When you cut or copy elements to the Dumpster, the newly created Dumpster Cell becomes the
active Cell.
You CANNOT paste part of a Dumpster Cell; the entire contents of a Cell are pasted.
You CANNOT paste Dumpster Cells that contain one-line diagram elements in UGS presentations.
A UGS presentation can contain multiple raceways but not a duplicate raceway (i.e., a raceway
CANNOT be placed twice in the same UGS presentation).
Size Elements
When an element is added into a UGS presentation, its size is set to the default. You can graphically
change the width and height of raceways, as well as, the outside diameter of conduits, locations, and heat
sources. To change the size, select the element, move the cursor to the corner or edges of the selected
element, and, when the cursor changes its shape, release the mouse button. You can see the new sizes on
the Help Line.
Note: You can also change the sizes from the Raceway Editor. Outside diameter (OD) of cables can only
be changed from the Cable Editor.
Rules
Sizing elements can be done in Edit Mode ONLY when Base Data is active.
Elements CANNOT overlap each other.
Hyperlinks
You can add hyperlinks to the raceway presentation or cables.

Underground Raceway Systems Underground System Editor
38.6 Underground System Editor

The Underground System (UGS) Editor provides details regarding the overall layout of the underground
system. This includes global properties such as soil type and temperature.
ID
ID to each UGS. The IDs consist of the word UGS plus an integer starting with the number one and
increasing with the addition of each UGS. The default ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in the
Soil
Soil refers to the surrounding earth for the raceway system. Backfill soil or concrete for raceways is
specified in the Raceway Editor.
Type
Select the soil type from the drop-down list.
Average Dry
Average Wet
Clay Dry
Clay Wet
Sandy Dry
Sandy Wet
Note: The selection of soil type will not affect the value of RHO.
RHO
Enter the thermal resistivity of the earth (soil) in degrees C-cm/Watt.

The table below provides some typical thermal resistivity of common components. (Source: Electric
Components Thermal Resistivity

Degrees C-cm/W
XLPE Insulation 350
EPR Insulation 500
Paper Insulation 700
PE Jackets 350
PVC Jackets 500
Plastic ducts 480
Concrete 85
Thermal Fill 60
Soil 90
Water 160
Air 4000
The table below provides some typical thermal resistivity of common types of soil (Source: Electric
United Soil Soil Thermal Resistivity Thermal Resistivity

Classification System (Wet) (Dry)
(USCS)
Degrees C-cm/W Degrees C-cm/W
GW Well graded gravel 40 120
GP Poor graded gravel 45 190
GM Silty gravel 50 140
GC Clayey gravel 55 150
SW Well graded sand 40 130
SP Uniform sand 45 300
SM Silty sand 55 170
SC Clayey sand 60 180
ML Silt 65 240
CL Silty clay 70 210
OL Organic silt 90 350
MH Micaceous silt 75 300
CH Clay 85 270
OH Soft organic clay 110 400
Pt Silty peat 150 > 600
Temperature
Ambient
Ambient refers to the soil ambient temperature specified in degrees Celsius. The soil temperature is a
constant from the surface of the soil to the deepest point considered in the underground raceway system.

Warning
Warning refers to the conductor warning temperature specified in degrees Celsius. Each conductor, whose
temperature is above the warning level and below the alarm level, will be shown in magenta after a cable
temperature calculation study has been performed.
Alarm
Alarm refers to the maximum allowable conductor temperature specified in degrees Celsius. Each
conductor, whose temperature is above the alarm level, will be shown in red after a cable temperature
calculation study has been performed.
Heat Sources
This is the list of all external heat sources located in this underground raceway system. Each heat source
is specified by an ID as well as its (center-point) X and Y coordinates. X and Y coordinates are specified
from the upper left corner of your underground raceway system.
Raceways
This is the list of all raceways (direct-buried or duct bank) located in this underground raceway system.
Each raceway is specified by its ID, as well as, its reference point X and Y coordinates. The reference
point is the upper-left corner of the raceway.

Underground Raceway Systems Raceway Editor
38.7 Raceway Editor

The Raceway Editor consists of three separate pages or screens. These are the Raceway, Location, and
Cable pages. The Location and Cable pages will not be displayed if there are no conduits/locations or
cables in the raceway.
38.7.1 Raceway Page
Raceway Info
ID
ID to each raceway (direct buried or duct bank). The default ID consists of RW plus an integer starting
with the number one and increasing as the raceway numbers increase. The default ID can be changed
from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Ref.X
Ref.X is the X coordinate for the reference point in inches or cm. The reference point is the upper left
corner of the raceway. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground
raceway system.
Ref.Y
Ref.Y is the Y coordinate for the reference point in inches or cm. The reference point is the upper left
corner of the raceway. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground
raceway system.

Width
Width specifies the raceway width in inches or in centimeters. The width of the raceway begins from the
raceway reference point and extends to the right.
Height
Height specifies the raceway height in inches or in centimeters. The height of the raceway begins from the
raceway reference point and extends down.
Fill Type
Select the type of fill (material) from the list of options used in the construction of the raceway. Light
Aggregate and Heavy Aggregate are options for duct bank raceways, and Average Dry, Average Wet,
Sandy Dry, Sandy Wet, Clay Dry, and Clay Wet are options for direct buried raceways.
Fill RHO
Fill RHO specifies the thermal resistance of the fill material. Units are specified in degrees Celsius
centimeters per watt.
Cables in Raceway
Displays a list of all the cables located in this raceway. Each cable is described with its ID, the number of
conductors per phase, the number of conductors per cable, and which location (conduit) the cable is
located in.
38.7.2 Location Page

Conduit/Location Info
Conduit
ID to each location or conduit. The default IDs consist of Loc (for direct buried locations) or Cond (for
duct bank conduits) plus an integer starting with the number one and increasing as the location/conduit
numbers increase. The default ID can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View.
Horiz.Dist
Horiz. Dist specifies the horizontal distance of the center point of the location (conduit) from the raceway
reference point. The horizontal distance is specified in inches or in centimeters.
Vert. Dist
Vert. Dist specifies the vertical distance of the center point of the location (conduit) from the raceway
reference point. The vertical distance is specified in inches or in centimeters.
Type (Conduit)
Type specifies the type of material used in the fabrication of the conduit for duct bank raceways. This
field is not active for direct buried raceways. You can select from a variety of options including:
Metal
Fiber
Transite
PVC-40
PVC-80
PVC-A
Other
Size (Conduit)
Size specifies the standard diameter of a conduit in inches or centimeters. There are a variety of sizes to
choose from including:
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
4.00
5.00
6.00
OD (Conduit)
OD specifies the outside diameter of a conduit in inches or centimeters. For standard size conduits, ETAP
provides the outside diameter of the conduit based on the conduit type.

Thickness (Conduit)
Thickness specifies the thickness of the material used to fabricate the conduit in inches or centimeters.
For standard size conduits, ETAP provides the conduit thickness based on the conduit size and type.

38.7.3 Cable Page
Cable Type
Cable type specifies details regarding the selected cable header and size. The details include
manufacturer, type, voltage rating, loading factor, number of conductors per cable, conductor material
type, and magnetic or non-magnetic installation type.
Size
Size specifies the cable size using international standards. The units for cable sizing are AWG/kcmil for
English unit cables and mm2 for Metric unit cables.
Note: For rapid selection, ETAP provides the list of all available cable sizes from the selected library.
Changing the cable size will update pertinent cable data from the library.
Cable Editor
Clicking on the Cable Editor button will open the editor for the selected cable. The Cable Editor contains
electrical and physical data used in both the one-line diagram and the underground raceway systems. Any
changes made in the Cable Editor will be reflected on the Cable page of the Raceway Editor.
Cable Routing
Cable routing specifies the conduit or location where this cable is installed (routed) in every underground
raceway system for this project. Details include the raceway ID, the type of raceway, i.e., direct buried or
duct bank, and which underground raceway system the raceway is located in.

Underground Raceway Systems External Heat Source
38.8 External Heat Source
External heat sources can be placed in underground raceway systems to simulate steam pipes or other
sources of heat in the vicinity of raceways.
Info
ID
ID to each external heat source. The IDs consist of HS plus an integer starting with the number one and
increasing as the external heat source numbers increase. The default ID can be changed from the Defaults
menu in the menu bar or from the Project View.
Ref. X
Ref. X is the X coordinate reference for the focal (center point) of the external heat source in inches or
cm. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground raceway system.
Ref. Y
Ref. Y is the Y coordinate reference for the focal (center point) of the external heat source in inches or
cm. X and Y coordinates are specified from the upper left corner of your underground raceway system.
Outside Diameter
Outside diameter specifies the diameter of the external heat source in inches or cm. The thermal energy
produced by the external heat source uses a constant temperature for the entire external heat source. The
larger the diameter, the greater the thermal energy provided by the external heat source. The outside
diameter is specified in inches or in centimeters.
Operating Temp.
Operating Temp. specifies the surface operating temperature of the external heat source in degrees
Celsius. The temperature is constant throughout the external heat source.

Underground Raceway Systems Calculation Methods

ETAP provides five types of cable derating calculations, namely, steady-state temperature calculation,
uniform-ampacity ampacity calculation, uniform-temperature ampacity calculation, cable sizing, and
transient temperature calculation.
In the calculations, all conductors from the same cable branch are presumed to equally share the total line
current. They can be located in the same conduit/location or different conduits/locations in the same
raceway.
Note: The cables located in different conduits/locations in general will not have the same temperature,
even though they carry the same load current. However, if they are located in the same conduit/location,
the calculated temperature will be the same.
The raceway system can contain several raceways and external heat sources. The calculation considers
the mutual heat effect of cables in the same raceway as well as in different raceways. It also considers the
heat effect from external heat sources.
Raceway Width and Height Ratio

Based on the Neher-McGrath calculation method, and as indicated in Appendix II of The Calculation of
the Temperature Rise and Load Capability of Cable System, formulas used for determining the
geometric factor Gb for duct bank apply to Y/X ratios less than 2; where the X and Y quantities are the
smaller and larger dimensions of the duct bank cross section, respectively.
According to IEC 60287-2-1, section 2.2.7.3, formulas for external thermal resistance of the duct are only
valid for Y/X ratios less than 3; where the X and Y quantities are the shorter and longer dimensions of the
duct bank cross section, respectively.
Cables with De-Energized Conductors

For a DC or a single-phase cable branch, it is possible that some of the cable conductors may not carry
current. For example, consider that a single-phase branch needs five conductors per phase to carry its
load. Since a single-phase circuit has a forward and a return path, it requires ten conductors in total. If for
some reason three-conductor cables are used for this branch, four, three-conductor cables will be needed,
which equals a total of twelve conductors. This leaves two of the twelve conductors as non-current-
carrying (de-energized) conductors. ETAP will spread non-current-carrying conductors among individual
cables for the branch. In this case, two of the four cables will have only two conductors carrying current.
In the Cable Temperature section of the Output Report, ETAP reports the number of energized conductors
for each individual cable.
Voltage Used for Calculating Cable Dielectric Losses

Since the cable dielectric losses are directly related to the voltage applied on the insulation layer, the cable
operating voltage should be used for this calculation. In ETAP, if a cable is a branch cable or an
equipment cable, the nominal kV of the cable terminal bus will be used. For an underground cable (no
terminal bus), the cable rated voltage is used. In the report, the voltage applied on the insulation layer is
printed under the Insulation Layer kV column.
Modeling of DC Cables
A DC cable is handled in a similar way to that of an AC cable in cable derating calculations. However,
since the current flowing through and the voltage applied on a DC cable are DC current and voltage, the
losses in an AC cable due to AC current nature do not apply to a DC cable. These losses include loss due

to conductor proximity and skin effect, losses in shield, sheath, and armor layer, loss in a steel conduit,
and cable die-electric loss. For a DC cable, all these losses are equal to zero.
38.9.1 Steady-State Temperature Calculation

The Steady-State Cable Temperature calculation determines the temperature of all the cable conductors
involved in the raceway system under a specified loading condition. The calculation is based on the IEC
60287 standard or the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath approach, which employs a thermal circuit model to
represent heat flow situations. It is assumed that the cables have been carrying the specified load long
enough that the heat flow has reached its steady-state and no more changes of temperature will occur
throughout the raceway system. The cable temperature calculated is dependent on raceway system
configuration, cable loading, and the location of each particular cable.
The most important differences between the IEC 60287 and Neher-McGrath approaches are listed below.
1. The Neher-McGrath approach uses a user defined load factor, whereas the IEC 60287 approach
assumes a unity load factor.
2. IEC 60287 gives analytical expressions for the computation of the geometric factor of three-core
cable insulation, whereas the Neher-McGrath approach makes a reference to the paper by Simomons
(1932).
3. The Neher-McGrath approach uses the thermal resistivity, power/loss factors and dielectrical
constants as defined in the file insullib.mdb, located in the Table directory under the ETAP
installation directory. The relevant values used in IEC 60287 are as defined in the standard. When a
material is not given in IEC Table, a conservative value of 6.0 is used for IEC cable derating.
4. Calculation of losses in magnetic armor is treated only qualitatively in the Neher-McGrath approach
with references to the literature for complex computational methods. Relevant approximations are
proposed in IEC 60287.
5. The insulation resistance calculation for three-conductor cables is different between the Neher-
McGrath approach and IEC 60287 standard, which may result in significant difference in cable
thermal resistance value.
Due the differences between the Neher-McGrath and IEC 60287 Methods as mentioned above, it is
expected that for the same underground system, the two methods may produce different results.
Calculate 3/C Cable G1 by IEC Method

When the NeherMcGrath Method is selected in the Cable Derating Study Case for UGS calculations, the
geometric factor G1 for insulation thermal resistance can be calculated using the same method specified
in IEC 60287 by setting the Preferences option Calculate 3/C Cable G1 by IEC Method to 1. Note that
the Option (Preference) dialog box can only be opened from the Tools menu when an OLV presentation
is on focus.
Maximum Number of Iterations

The maximum number of iterations for the steady-state and transient temperature calculations is set to 50.
To modify, change the value for the Max. No. of Iterations for Temperature Calculations entry in Options
(Preferences).

38.9.2 Cable Ampacity Calculation

The Cable Ampacity calculation determines the maximum allowable load current that the cables in a
raceway system can carry under the specified system conditions and the cable conductor temperature
limit. ETAP provides two approaches to ampacity calculation: Uniform-Ampacity calculation and
Uniform-Temperature calculation. Both approaches employ the NEC accepted Neher-McGrath Method to
calculate cable temperature, but they differ in the criteria used to determine the maximum allowable load
current.
38.9.3 Uniform-Ampacity (UA) Ampacity Calculation

This approach is based on the equal loading criterion for ampacity calculation. It determines the
maximum allowable load currents when all the cables in the system are equally loaded to the same
percentage of their base loading. The base load is obtained from the Cable Library for the appropriate
system configuration type, such as duct bank or directly buried raceways.
The calculation involves an iterative process of cable temperature calculation and load adjusting, as listed
below.
1. Determine an initial loading level based on the base ampacity from the Cable Library and using cable
derating factors for the given configuration.
2. Calculate cable temperature as in the steady-state temperature calculation described above.
3. Check cable temperature values against the cable temperature limit.
4. If the temperature of the hottest cable is within close range of the temperature limit, the solution has
been reached. If not, adjust the cable loading uniformly at the same percentage, either increasing or
decreasing the loading in order to make the highest cable temperature come closer to the temperature
limit. Then go to back to step 2 to recalculate cable temperature.
If the Update Currents from Ampacity Calc option is checked in the Study Case, the cable allowable
current is updated by the calculated ampacity.

The maximum number of iterations for uniform-ampacity and uniform-temperature calculations is set to
200. To modify, change the value for the Max. No. of Iterations for UT and UA Calculations entry in
Options (Preferences).
Cables with Fixed Current

If the Fixed Current box in the Leading page of the Cable Editor is checked for a cable, the load current
for this cable will be held constant in the ampacity calculation. The cable current used in the calculation
depends on the Initial/Steady-State Amp selection in the Study Case.
38.9.4 Uniform-Temperature (UT) Ampacity Calculation

This approach is based on the equal temperature criterion for ampacity calculation. It determines the
maximum allowable load currents when all the cables in the system have their temperature within a small
range of the temperature limit. Since all the conductors in a cable branch are assumed to equally share the
load current, in the case where these conductors are not located in the same conduit/location, they may
not have the same temperature. When this situation occurs, the temperature of the hottest conductor in this
cable branch will be used to represent this cable branch.

The calculation involves an iterative process, which adjusts cable loading current in each iteration so that
the cable temperature approaches the temperature limit. The load adjustment in each step is determined
based on the gradient of cable temperature change and therefore offers fast convergence to the solution.
The following steps are involved in the calculation:
1. Determine an initial loading level based on the base ampacity from the Cable Library and using cable
derating factors for the given configuration.
2. Calculate cable temperature as in the steady-state temperature calculation described above.
3. Check cable temperature values against the cable temperature limit. If the temperature values of all
the cables are within close range of temperature limit, the solution has been reached. If not, determine
the load change required for the cable temperature to approach the temperature limit based on the
gradient of cable temperature change.
4. Update the cable loading and go back to step 2 to recalculate cable temperature.
If the Update Currents from the Ampacity Calculation option is checked in the Study Case, the cable
allowable current will be updated by the calculated ampacity.
If for any of the cables the Fixed Current option from the Loading page of the Cable Editor is checked
then Uniform Temperature calculations cannot be conducted. In this situation ETAP stops the
calculations and provide an error message informing the user that UGS contains a cable with fixed
ampacity.

The maximum number of iterations for uniform-ampacity and uniform-temperature calculations is set to
200. To modify, change the value for the Max. No. of Iterations for UT and UA Calculations entry in
Options (Preferences).
Acceleration Factor
The uniform-temperature ampacity acceleration factor has a range between 0.0 and 2.0. The value can be
set higher than the default setting of 0.5 to speed up the calculation; however, the calculation may
diverge. To modify, change the value for the UT Ampacity Acceleration Factor entry in Options
(Preferences).
38.9.5 Cable Sizing

The Cable Sizing calculation determines the minimum size for each cable that will carry the specified
load current without violating the cable temperature limit. The cables considered as candidates for cable
sizing are the ones that are flagged as available cables in the Cable Library of the same cable type, that is,
they have the same voltage, insulation, conductor type, etc., as the cable to be sized.
The calculation is an iterative process involving repetitively adjusting the cable size and calculating cable
temperature. The cable temperature calculation is done in the same way as the steady-state temperature
calculation described above. If there are no available alternative sizes for a cable, the cable will be
considered not changeable.
If a solution is reached, calculation results will be reported in the Output Report and the cables involved
in the study will be changed to the new sizes if the Update Size option is checked in the Study Case.


The maximum number of iterations for cable sizing calculations is set to 1000. To modify, change the
value for the Max. No. of Iterations for UGS Cable Sizing entry in Options (Preferences).
Cables with Fixed Size

If the Fixed Size box in the Loading page of the Cable Editor is checked for a cable, the size of this cable
will not be changed in the Cable Sizing Studies.
38.9.6 Transient Temperature Calculation

The transient temperature calculation yields cable temperature variations as a function of time in
accordance to load changes. While the steady-state temperature calculation can be used to check the cable
temperature under constant loading, the transient temperature calculation provides a tool to verify
operation conditions of the raceway systems against the cable short-time or emergency temperature limits.
In most cases, the short-time maximum allowable temperature of a cable is considerably higher than its
steady-state temperature limit. For loads that have high peak values for only a short period of time, the
transient temperature calculation can be used to determine the cable peak temperature and its duration,
and to compare against its short-time maximum allowable temperature, resulting in a more economical
design of your raceway systems.
The transient temperature calculation is based on a dynamic thermal model of the raceway system,
constructed mainly from thermal resistance, thermal capacitance, and heat sources. The thermal resistance
is used to represent different thermal layers from the cable conductor to ambient soil. The thermal
capacitance is used to represent the capability of each layer to absorb the heat. When you change the
cable loading, the heat generated by the loss in the conductor will change accordingly, resulting in a
variation of the heat flow dissipated from the cable conductor to the ambient soil. As a result, the cable
conductor temperature will vary to follow the load change pattern, at a rate of temperature change that
depends on the resistance and capacitance values of the circuit.

The cable load variations are defined in the Load Profile of the Cable Editor. The initial state of the
raceway system is based on the initial load specified in the Cable Derating Study Case, either the load
profile (the first current value in the profile list) or the operating load. It is assumed that all cables initially
carry the initial load and have reached the steady-state.

The maximum number of iterations for the steady-state and transient temperature calculations is set to 50.
To modify this value, change the value for the Max. No. of Iterations for Temperature Calculations entry
in Options (Preferences).
Maximum Transient Steps

Maximum number of transient steps is set to 5000. To modify this value, change the value for the Max.
No. of Steps for Transient Temp Calculations entry in Options (Preferences).

Underground Raceway Systems Required Data
38.10 Required Data
38.10.1 Underground Raceway System Data

The data for the underground raceway system can be entered from the Underground System Editor. The
minimum requirement for underground system data includes soil type, soil thermal resistivity, and
ambient temperature.
38.10.2 Raceway Data

Two types of raceways are supported in the current version of ETAP: Duct Bank Raceway and Direct
Buried Raceway. Raceway data can be entered from the Raceway page of the Raceway Editor. The
minimum requirement for raceway data includes raceway dimension, raceway fill type, and its thermal
resistivity.
You can run studies with raceways that contain no cables. However, you cannot run studies if the raceway
contains unassigned cables (cables that are assigned to a raceway but are not located in a specific conduit
or location).
Conduit/Location Data
The data for conduit/location can be entered into the Location page of the Raceway Editor. A
conduit/location can be empty (contain no cables).
Conduit
A conduit can only be placed in a duct bank raceway. The minimum requirements for conduit data
include location, type, outside diameter, and thickness.
Location
A location is a specified space in a direct buried raceway in which cables are placed. Location can only be
assigned to a direct buried raceway. The only requirement for location data is its location.
Cable Data
Cable data is entered into several pages of the Cable Editor.
Data from the Info Page

The cable type data must be available before performing any cable derating calculation. You can select
cable type from the Cable Library by clicking on the Library button.
Other data that are needed for cable derating calculations and that can be entered into the Info page
include the cable size and the number of conductors per phase.
Special attention should be given to the Link to Library box. When this box is checked, the cable derating
calculation will extract the cable physical data directly from the Cable Library; otherwise it will use the
data from the Physical page of the Cable Editor.

Underground Raceway Systems Required Data
Physical Page
This page is designed especially for entering parameters employed in cable derating calculations. These
parameters describing the physical aspect of a cable are required to calculate cable electrical resistance,
thermal resistance of different layers, dielectric losses, etc.
Loading Page
The data entered in this page describe the loading condition of a cable. The Transient Load Profile data is
used for transient temperature calculation. The Operating Load or the first current value in the Transient
Load Profile list are used, depending on the selection in the Cable Derating Study Case, as the initial or
steady-state load current in the transient temperature calculation, steady-state temperature calculation, and
cable sizing.
The Load Factor is used in all types of cable derating calculations to represent cyclic load conditions.
The Projection Multiplication Factor is used to modify cable loading in the transient temperature
calculation, steady-state temperature calculation, and cable sizing, if the corresponding option is checked
in the Cable Derating Study Case.
The Sheath/Armor Current is specified as a percentage of the load current. It represents the situation
where the sheath/armor is intentionally utilized to carry part of the load current. In all other situations,
sheath/armor current should be set to zero. The Sheath/Armor Current is considered by the Neher-
McGrath Method only.
Ampacity Page
The Application Multiplication Factor is used to modify cable loading in the transient temperature
calculation, steady-state temperature calculation, and cable sizing, if the corresponding option is checked
in the Cable Derating Study Case.
External Heat Source Data

The external heat source data required for cable derating calculations include the location of the external
heat source, its outside diameter, and its temperature.
Study Case
Prior to performing any type of cable derating calculations, a Cable Derating Study Case must be
selected. The Study Case contains information necessary to carry out the calculation.

Underground Raceway Systems Output Reports

The UGS calculation results are reported both on the one-line diagram and in the Crystal Reports format.
You can use the UGS Report Manager (from the Study toolbar) or View Output Report button (from the
Study Case toolbar) to view the Output Reports.
checkbox.
38.11.1 Cable Derating Systems Report Manager

After running the Cable Derating Systems Study, click on the Report Manager button located on the
Study Case toolbar, or select the Crystal Report format from the Cable Derating Systems toolbar, to open
and view the Crystal Report output. The Cable Derating Systems Study Crystal Report contains the
following major sections:
Complete Page
Selects a report format that provides the Complete Output Report.
Input Page
Provides the format for different input data.
Result Page
Provides the format for different calculation results.
Summary Page
Provides the summary from the calculation results.

38.11.2 Cable Derating Systems Crystal Report

After running the Cable Derating Systems Study, click on the Report Manager button located on the
Study Case toolbar, or select the Crystal Report format from the Cable Derating Systems toolbar, to open
and view the Crystal Output Report. The Cable Derating Systems Study Crystal Report contains the
following major sections:
Input Page
This section reports the input data related to the System, Cable, External Heat Source, Conduit and
Raceway.
Cover Data
The Cover Data includes the general information about the project, the Study Cases, the version of ETAP,
and the underground raceway system, such as the numbers of raceways and external heat sources, etc. It
also reports the Type, RHO and ambient temperature of Soil, and temperature limits.

External Heat Source Data

This section reports the External Heat Source information. It shows the Locations, ODs, and
temperatures of external heat sources.
Duct Bank Raceway Data

This section reports the Duct Bank Raceway information. It shows the physical information of the Duct
Bank Raceways, such as their Locations, Dimensions, Fill Materials, and Numbers of Conduits and
Cables.
Conduit Data
This section reports the Conduit information. It shows the physical information of conduits, such as their
Locations, Type, Size, Thickness, OD, RHO, Thermal Resistance, and Fill%.

Cable Data
This section reports the Cable information. It mainly shows the physical information of cables, such as
Size, Rated kV, Current, and parameters of Conductor, Insulation, Sheath, and Jacket.
For the Steady-State Temperature calculation, the Size and Current columns are cable existing size and
load current respectively. For the Cable Sizing calculation, the Size column is the calculated cable size.
For the Ampacity calculation, the Current column is the calculated cable ampacity.
Result Page
This section reports the results related to Cables. The Output Reports of calculation results are formatted
according to the types of calculation being performed.
Steady-State Temperature Calculation

This section of the Output Report starts with cable ID, followed by conduit/location ID. It then presents
the main result information for cables, including cable dielectric losses and conductor temperatures from
the steady-state temperature calculation
The calculation results are listed for each individual cable. For example, in the sample report given below,
Cable8 is a three-phase, one-conductor AC cable with one conductor per phase, which results in three
individual one-conductor cables. In the report, individual cables are identified with a specific suffix, such

as 1A, 1B, and 1C, to identify its phase and location. The suffix attached is the same as the one displayed
in the Underground Raceway View.
Ampacity Calculation
The ampacity calculation results are reported in the same format as the steady-state temperature
calculation, the only difference being that the cable current value reported is the cable maximum
allowable load instead of the actual cable load current.
Cable Sizing Calculation

The cable sizing calculation results are reported in the same format as the steady-state temperature
calculation, the only difference being that the cable size reported is the smallest cable size that can carry
the specified load current without violating the cable temperature limit.
Transient Temperature Calculation

The results of the transient temperature calculation are represented in both Crystal Report and plot
formats. The Crystal Report has the same format as the report generated by the steady-state temperature
calculation. The current printed is the final current value at end of the simulation. As the cable
temperature varies with time, the temperature values reported is the highest temperature value during the
simulation period.

The temperature plots can be viewed by clicking on the View Cable Temperature Plots button on the
Cable Derating toolbar. The Printing and Plotting Chapter describes features that will be helpful in
viewing the plot.
Summary Page
This page summarizes calculation results for each individual cable, including cable location, size, current,
and temperature. For the Transient Temperature calculation, the current printed is the final current value
and the temperature is the highest temperature value during the simulation period.


Underground Raceway Systems Plots
38.12 Plots
Click on the Plot icon to open the Cable Selection dialog box, which contains all the cables in the raceway
system. Clicking on a cable will select the cable for plotting its temperature. If a cable is already selected,
clicking on it again will deselect that cable. Clicking the OK button will open the Plot View, which will
display the transient temperature for the selected cables.
The Cable Selection dialog box displays the cable ID along with the conduit/location ID in which the
cables are located and the raceway ID.
Note: You can have more than one raceway in a U/G system, and the same cable can be placed in more
than one raceway.
Temperatures for up to sixteen cables can be displayed in one plot. If more than sixteen cables are
selected, the temperature for the first sixteen cables will be displayed in the plot. The Cable Transient
Temperature plot indicates temperatures of selected cables as functions of time. You can change the size
and font of the text (labels) by double-clicking on the labels. You can also change the type and color of
plots (curves) by double-clicking on them. For more details, refer to Printing and Plotting.

Underground Raceway Systems Plots
Plots, which are generated as a result of transient temperature calculations, can be printed by any printer
supported by your Windows platform. To print a plot, display the plot view, make formatting
modifications, if required, and select the Print command from the File menu. You may have several plot
views displayed on your screen; however, only one plot can be active at any time. The printed plot size is
currently set to the size of the paper on which it is being printed.

Plot parameters such as plot line type, axis, legend, and text can be modified directly from the plot view.
For example, to modify plot line type, double-click on the plot line and change the line type from the Plot
Parameter Editor. For more details see the chapter on Printing and Plotting.

Underground Raceway Systems Tutorial
38.13 Tutorial
This tutorial provides a brief overview of the operation of the Underground Raceway System (UGS).
Once you finish this tutorial, you will be familiar with some the key features and capabilities of the
program and the various options available for performing cable derating analysis.
Cable derating analysis is an important part of power system design and analysis. For designing a new
system, it determines the proper size of cables to carry the specified loads. For analysis of an existing
system, it examines cable temperatures and determines their ampacities.
Launching ETAP and Opening the Example Project
Start the ETAP program by double-clicking on the icon.
ETAP organizes your work on a project basis. Each project provides all the necessary tools and support
for modeling and analyzing an electrical power system. A project consists of an electrical system that
requires a unique set of electrical components and interconnections. In ETAP, each project provides a set
of users, user access controls, and a separate database in which its elements and connectivity data are
stored.
Follow these simple steps to open the EXAMPLE project file.
Enter your User Name in the Logon Editor and select the Project Editor option in the Select
Access Level Editor.

The Example project includes a one-line diagram of an electrical system. Notice the UGS1 view located
behind the Study View. Click on the UGS1 view to bring it to the foreground or click on the UGS button
on the System toolbar.

38.13.1 Cross-Section Diagrams and Editors

ETAP provides a fully graphical Underground (U/G) Raceway System. Each ETAP project supports a
unique U/G raceway system with multiple views of the U/G system. Each view is conceptually a cross-
section of the desired raceways and heat sources that are in the same vicinity.
Notice the toolbars on the top and the right-hand side of the U/G raceway cross-section view.

Editors
Double-click on the raceway RW1 and view the Raceway Editor. This editor includes
Raceway, Location, and Cable information. Flip through the pages and familiarize yourself
with the Raceway Editor.
Note: The Help button is available on each page of all editors.
Click on OK and close the editor.

Double-click on the underground system (soil) and view Underground System Editor. This editor
provides details regarding the overall layout of underground raceways, which includes global
properties such as soil type and temperature.


Double-click on the External Heat Source. External heat sources can be placed in underground
raceway systems to simulate steam pipes or other sources of heat in the vicinity of raceways.
38.13.2 Menu Bars and Toolbars

ETAP Menu Bar
The ETAP Menu Bar contains a comprehensive collection of menu options.
This menu bar is displayed when a UGS view is active. The ETAP menu bar contains a list of menu
options which, when an option is selected, activates a drop-down list of commands. Some of the menu
options also activate an additional list of menus (an arrow pointing to the right denotes an additional
menu). For example, select Project, Settings, and Data Type.
Project Toolbar
The Project toolbar contains icons that allow you to perform shortcuts of many commonly used functions
in ETAP.

Mode Toolbar
Underground raceway system has two modes of operation: Edit and U/G Cable Raceway.
Edit Mode
Edit Mode allows you to create a cross-section view of your underground raceway system.
Click on the Edit Mode of the UGS Mode toolbar.
To add elements to the UGS view you click on the elements on the Edit toolbar
and add it to the UGS view.
Lets start by adding a New Duct Bank Raceway to the UGS view. Then add two
New Conduits to the raceway.
Resize a conduit as follows:
Click once on one of the conduits so it is selected.

Then move your cursor to one corner of the selection box. A double-end
arrow appears.
Left-click, hold, and drag the cursor.
Release the cursor when the desired conduit size is reached.
Note: You can also resize a conduit from its editor.


Next click on the New Cable icon on the Edit toolbar and add a cable to the conduit. Then double-
click on the cable cross-section and select a cable from the library.
Select different cable sizes and notice how the cross-section size of the cable changes
accordingly.
Click on one conductor and notice the cable phase annotation.
Select a conductor and drag it to the second conduit.
Study Mode
Cable Derating Study Mode enables you to create and modify Study Cases, perform system analysis, and
view Output Reports and plots.
Click on the U/G Cable Raceway icon on the Mode toolbar to go to the Cable Derating Study
Mode. Cable Derating Study toolbar and Cable Derating Study Case toolbar are available in the
Study Mode of operation.
Cable Derating Study Toolbar

When a Study Mode is active (selected), the Study toolbar for the selected study is displayed on the right
side of the screen.
You can run studies, view Output Reports, view plots, and change display options by clicking on the
buttons on the Study toolbar.
Cable Derating Study Case Toolbar and Editor

When ETAP is in Study Mode, the Study Case toolbar appears on the top toolbar. This toolbar contains
Cable Derating Study Case, Output Report name, and viewer.

Click on the Edit Study Case icon on the Study Case toolbar.
The Cable Derating Study Case Editor contains solution control variables, cable loading parameters,
and options for Output Reports. ETAP allows you to create and save unlimited numbers of Study Cases.
Cable derating calculations are conducted and reported in accordance with the settings you have specified
Note: You can have an unlimited number of Study Cases and can easily switch between the Study Cases
without the trouble of resetting the Study Case options each time. This feature is designed to organize

38.13.3 Exercise
Lets do an exercise to get the feel of how UGS works. You learned how to add elements to the UGS
view earlier in this tutorial. In this exercise you can run a study and study the calculation results.
Steps
1. Go to the Project View and open UGS2 view. This is a working example and you can perform all
Cable Derating Analyses for learning purposes.
This example consists of one Raceway (RW2), six conduits, and six routed cables. There is a steam pipe
in the close vicinity of this raceway.
2. Activate UGS2 view by clicking once on the view. The Study toolbar appears on the right-hand side.
3. Run Steady-State Temperature Analysis by clicking on its icon.

4. View the Output Report for the calculated results.
5. Perform other calculation methods and view the Output Report.

Cable Temperature
_________________
Conduit Cable Calculated
Cable Location Temp Results
No. ID ID (C)
___ ____________________ ____________ ______
1 Cable10 Loc1 54.84
2 Cable2 Loc2 70.41
3 Cable4-1A Loc3 66.08
Temperature
Warning

Chapter 39
Cable Pulling Systems

The accurate prediction of cable pulling force is essential for the design of cable conduit systems.
Application of this knowledge makes it possible to avoid over-conservative design practices and achieve
substantial capital savings during construction.
The Cable Pulling (CP) Presentation of ETAP is used to determine the tensions and the sidewall pressures
a cable is subjected to when pulled into a conduit. The Cable Pulling Module is a fully integrated part of
ETAP, enabling it to use existing cables within the one-line diagram or the underground cable raceway
systems. It can account for cables of different sizes with complex pulling path geometry. A point-by-point
calculation method is performed at every conduit bend and pull point. Both the forward and reverse
pulling tensions are calculated to determine the preferred direction of pull.
Some of the main features of the Cable Pulling Module of ETAP are listed below:
Pull existing one-line diagram cables and/or equipment cables

Create and pull new cables (cables not contained in the one-line diagram)
Calculate the pulling tension at every conduit bend and pull point
Calculate the forward and reverse pulling tensions
Calculate the maximum tension limited by the sidewall pressure at every conduit bend
Compare the maximum tension limitations against the calculated pulling tensions
Calculate the maximum total allowable pulling tension
Calculate the total length of run (pull)
Calculate the conduit percent fill
Check the conduit jamming situation
Account for the equivalent tension for the cables pulled from the reel
Allow the segments to have both nonzero slopes and horizontal bends (at the ends of segments)
Pull Path Geometric View configuration showing segment and bend plots
Conduit Cross-Section View configuration showing conduit and cable plots
Display and print 3-D diagram of pulling path geometry

Cable Pulling Presentation
39.1 Presentation
The CP Presentation is composed of three views. They are:
1) Pull Path Geometric View

2) Conduit Cross-Section View
3) 3-D View
The Pull Path Geometric View allows you to edit the pulling segments/bends of a cable pull. The
Conduit Cross-Section View is provided primarily to edit the properties of the cables and the conduit
(which the cables will be pulled into). The 3-D View is a specialized application for the three-
dimensional display of pulling path geometry. The CP Presentation allows you to graphically arrange
cables, segments, and bends, for the purpose of providing a physical layout of the conduit system for
Cable Pulling Design Studies.
Each CP Presentation depicts a different conduit and cable arrangement. You can create an unlimited
number of CP Presentations, where each presentation acts independently. As with the other elements in
ETAP, the CP Presentation supports all of the Base/Data Revisions with checker capability. The active
revision is controlled from the main ETAP window.

Cable Pulling Toolbar
39.2 Toolbar
The Cable Pulling toolbar will appear on the screen when you open a CP Presentation by clicking the
Cable Pulling Systems icon on the System toolbar. This toolbar has seven function keys as shown below.
Existing Cable
New Cable
New Segment
Cable Pulling Calculate Cable Pull

Systems Icon
Report Manager
Summary and Warning
Display Options
Existing Cable
Click on the Existing Cable button to place a cable from the one-line diagram or the underground
raceway system inside the Conduit Cross-Section View. After a cable is dropped inside the conduit, a
dialog box will be displayed. Using this dialog box, you can select a cable from the list of cables that exist
in the one-line diagram or the underground raceway system.
New Cable
Click on the New Cable button to create a new cable that will appear only in the cable pulling system.
This will enable you to place it in the Conduit Cross-Section View. For more information on new cables,
see CP Cable Editor.

New Segment
Click on the New Segment button to automatically add a new segment and bend to the Pull Path
Geometric View. For more information on segments/bends, see Pull Path Geometric View.
Calculate Cable Pull

Select a Study Case from the Study Case menu. (See Study Case Editor for details.) Click on the Calc
Cable Pull button to perform the point-by-point calculation at every conduit bend and pull point. Both the
forward and reverse pulling tensions are calculated. The Cable Pulling study results will appear in the Pull
Path Geometric View and can be viewed in Output Report tabulated formats.
Report Manager
Click on this button to open the Cable Pulling Report Manager dialog box. From here you can select a
variety of pre-formatted Output Reports to review. The Report Manager provides five formats for report
text. They are Crystal Reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and
MS Excel format. Select a report type and click the OK button to display the Output Report. See Output
Reports for details.
You can also select output files from the Output Report pull-down list on the Study Case Editor.

Summary and Warning

Click on the Summary and Alert button to view the alarms and warnings for the Cable Pulling
calculation. See Cable Pulling Analysis for additional details.
Display Options
Click on the Display Options button to change the appearance of the Conduit Cross-Section View. See
Cable Pulling Display Options for details.

Cable Pulling Study Case Editor

The CP Study Case Editor contains the tolerances for cable weight and diameter, 3-cable configuration
and the equivalent length of cable for pulling off the reel. ETAP allows you to create and save an
unlimited number of Study Cases for each type of study. Just like all other ETAP study types, you can
easily switch between different CP Study Cases. This feature is designed to organize your study efforts
and save you time.
To create a new CP Study Case, go to the Study Case menu in the CP Presentation window, and select
Create New to open the CP Study Case Editor, which is a copy of the default Study Case. The new Study
Case will be added to the navigator inside the Study Case Editor.
Study Case ID
entering a new ID. A Study Case ID can be up to 25 alphanumeric characters long. Use the navigator
button at the bottom of the editor to go from one Study Case to another.
Alert
Check this box to automatically show the result window for Summary and Warnings.
Cable Tolerance
In this group, you can enter the tolerances for cable weight and diameter in percent (%).

Cable Pulling Study Case Editor
Weight
The CP calculation will increase the cable weight by the tolerance value specified here. You may enter a
value ranging from negative 20% to 20%. The default value is 5%.
Outside Diameter
The CP calculation will increase the cable diameter by the tolerance value specified here. You may enter
a value ranging from negative 20% to 20%. The default value is 5%.
3/C Cable Configuration

You can specify the configuration type for 3/C (three conductor) cables in the conduit in this group. The
cradled configuration usually occurs when the cable ratio D/d >= 3, while the triangular configuration
normally occurs for D/d <= 2.51. D/d is the conduit to cable ratio, or the ratio of the internal diameter of
the conduit to the cable diameter. When D/d is between 2.51 and 3.0, the cables can have either of these
two formations. The CP Presentation provides the cradled/triangular option feature so that you can
simulate either formation, particularly for this range. You may however, specify either configuration, for
any cable ratio in order to find out the maximum possible cable tension. Ratios between 2.74 and 2.95 are
best avoided however, to prevent jamming.
Cradled
Check this button to use a cradled cable configuration.
Triangular
Check this button to use a triangular cable configuration.
Max. Allowable Tension

You can specify the Reduction Factors for computing pulling tension limits in this group. In case of a
multiple-conductor cable, the entered permissible maximum pulling tension (in lbs/kcmil or kg/mm2) is
for each conductor. In the Cable Pulling calculation, the cable permissible maximum pulling tension will
be computed by multiplying this value by the number of conductors. See Modeling and Calculation
Method for their usage.
RF1
Enter the reduction factor in %, for the cables whose number is less than or equal to 3.
RF2
Enter the reduction factor in %, for the single-core cables whose number is greater than 3.
RF3
Enter the reduction factor in %, for the multiple-core cables whose number is greater than 3.
Reel to Conduit
Enter the equivalent length of cable for pulling off the reel in ft/m.
Pulling Method
The default method by which the cable is pulled is the Pulling Eye Method.

Cable Pulling Create a New Presentation
39.4 Create a New Presentation

There are two methods of creating new CP presentations. The first method of creating a new CP
Presentation is to go to the Project View, right-click on the Cable Pulling Systems folder, and select
Create New. Double-click on the new button that appears to open the graphical user interface window
with a new CP Presentation. When a new ETAP project is created, a default CP Presentation does not
exist.
The second method is to switch back to the main ETAP application window and click on create new
presentation as shown below.
The unit system for a new CP Presentation is determined by the project file settings. That is, when a new
CP Presentation is created, its default unit is that of the project from which it was created. Once a
Presentation has been created, its unit system is fixed.

Cable Pulling Cable Pull Editor
39.5 Cable Pull Editor

The Cable Pull Editor can be accessed from the Project View by right-clicking on the Cable Pulling
presentation and selecting properties from the appearing menu.
39.5.1 Info Page

ID
Enter the ID for your cable pulling presentation using a maximum of 25 alphanumeric characters.
Cable Pulling Presentation Button

Press this button to open the cable pulling presentation. In this presentation, you will be able to design
your cable pulling system.
39.5.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date
39.5.3 Comment Page

Enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or studies associated with
this element. This field can be up to 64KB with a default size of 4KB. To increase the size of this field,
refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file. When entering information in the page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a
new paragraph. Standard key combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy,
and paste information.

Cable Pulling Pull Path Geometric View
39.6 Pull Path Geometric View

Using the Pull Path Geometric View, you can specify the names, lengths, and slopes for straight
segments, and specify the location IDs, horizontal angle changes, and radii for conduit bends.
The Pull Path Geometric View is the template for the geometry through which the pulled cable will travel.
39.6.1 Input Data

Any pull path geometry segment can have both different slopes and horizontal bend angles. This means
that there are absolutely no limitations on the pull path geometry.
Straight Segment
In this group, you can specify the names, lengths, and slopes for straight segments.
Segment Name
Enter the name of the conduit segment in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters. Each conduit
is made up of a user-defined number of segments.
Length
Specifies the length of each straight conduit segment in ft/m. The total length of the conduit is comprised
of the sum of the segment lengths, as well as the bend lengths.
The length of a bend between two segments is calculated by ETAP, based on the bend radius and
horizontal bend angle between the two segments.

Slope
The slope refers to the angle deviation from the horizontal in degrees. This angle is measured from the
horizontal plane, having possible values between -90 and 90 degrees.
Note: An uphill (+) slope will increase the forward pulling tension due to the effects of gravity. The
reverse is true for downhill (-) slopes.
ID
The starting location and ending location name can be entered in these fields.
Bend Segment
In this group, you can specify the location names, horizontal angle changes, and radii for bend segments.
Bend Location
Enter the name of the location where each bend occurs, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Horizontal Angle
This is the turning or bending angle of the conduit at each bend in degrees. The angle is measured in the
horizontal plane, from the original cable direction. The possible values for this angle are between -90 and
90 degrees.
Bend Radius
The individual bend radius of each conduit bend in ft/m.

39.6.2 Modifying the Pull Path Geometry

Select Segment
To select an existing segment in the Pull Path Geometric View, click on the segment button, and the
selected segment will turn blue. The properties of each segment appear in the fields directly above the
segment, and can be modified there.
Note: Every bend in the conduit is attached to the segment that appears immediately to the right of the
bend in the Pull Path Geometric View. The properties of each bend are listed directly below the bend, and
can be modified there.
Add Segment
Using the Cable Pulling toolbar, you can add new segments by clicking on the New Segment button. If a
segment is not selected (selected segments are blue in color) in the Pull Path Geometric View, new
segments will be placed at the end of the pull path. New segments are placed immediately to the left of a
selected segment.
Delete Segment
To delete a segment, click on the segment to select it, and then press Delete. The segment properties,
including the bend segment immediately to its left, will be permanently deleted.
39.6.3 Creating a Pull Path

Creating a pull path using the Pull Path Geometry View is simple. Here is an example of a simple pull
path.
The geometry for the pull path can be outlined in the Pull Path Geometric View. Begin with a new (one
segment) path, and add three more. Then add the segment and bend data until the Pull Path Geometric
View appears as below. These two methods of presenting the pull path are equivalent.


Cable Pulling Conduit Cross-Section View
39.7 Conduit Cross-Section View

The Conduit Cross-Section View allows you to select conduit and cable characteristics for a Cable
Pulling Study. New cables, as well as cables existing in the one-line diagram to be pulled can be added
here.
39.7.1 Conduit
The single conduit displayed in the Conduit Cross-Section View is the conduit that will be used for
pulling calculations.
Conduit Editor
Double-click any location inside the conduit in the Conduit Cross-Section View to bring up the Conduit
Editor from which you can specify ID, type, size, diameter, thickness, and friction factors of the conduit.

Info
Conduit ID
Enter the conduit name in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Type
Select the type of conduit material from the pull-down list. The type of material selected will affect the
outside diameter (OD) and thickness of the conduit. Material types are listed below:
DB (Direct Burial)
EB (Encasement Burial)
Fiber
Transite
PVC
Other
Dimension
In this group, you can specify the trade size, outside diameter, and thickness of the conduit.
Size
Select the conduit trade (nominal) size in inch/cm from the pull-down list. Depending on the material
type, OD and thickness will be adjusted automatically.
OD
Enter the conduit outside diameter inch/cm in this field. This measurement can be adjusted independently
of the nominal size and thickness.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of conduit in inch/cm in this field. This measurement can be adjusted independently of
the nominal size and OD.
Friction Factor
In this group, you can specify the friction factors for straight segments and bends of conduit.
Segments
Enter the friction factor for straight segments of conduit, in percent. The following is a table of typical
friction factor values for straight segments with adequate lubrication.
Cable Exterior Conduit Type

Material PVC Metallic Fiber Transite Concrete
Rubber 0.30 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.50
Lead 0.20 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.60
PVC 0.15 0.35 ---- ---- ----
Polyethylene 0.13 0.20 ---- ---- ----
Braid 0.13 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.50
Neoprene 0.13 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50
Skidwire ---- 0.173 ---- ---- ----

Bends
Enter the friction factor for conduit bends, as in percentage. This entry is provided for the cases where
different conduit materials are used for bends and straight segments.
% Fill
This field displays the fill percentage of the conduit.
39.7.2 Cables
No limit is placed on the number of cables that can be placed in a conduit in the Conduit Cross-Section
View. However, you cannot run a Cable Pulling calculation unless the cable(s) fit in the conduit.
Existing Cable
Select Existing Cable from the Cable Pulling toolbar. Click anywhere inside the conduit in the Conduit
Cross-Section View to place the cable. A prompt window will appear, with a drop-down menu containing
the cables that are present in the one-line diagram and U/G Raceways. Select the cable to be pulled, and
click OK. The engineering properties of the cable as they appear in the one-line diagram or U/G Raceway
will automatically be transferred to the CP Presentation. To change these properties, return to the one-line
diagram or U/G Raceway and modify them.
New Cable
Select New Cable from the Cable Pulling toolbar. Click anywhere inside the conduit in the Conduit
Cross-Section View to place the cable. A new cable will have no ties to the one-line diagram; its
properties can be modified directly from the CP Presentation, by means of the CP Cable Editor.

CP Cable Editor
Double-click on a cable in the Conduit Cross-Section View to open the CP Cable Editor from which you
can specify the characteristics of the cable.

39.7.3 Info Page

The Info page is where you enter a cable ID, application type, connection type, length, and whether or not
the cable is to be included in the pulling calculation on this page.
Info
Enter cable name and application type in this section.
ID
Enter a unique ID with up to 25 alphanumeric characters in this field.
Cable
Select the cable application type. Choose from Power, Control, or Ground from the pull-down list.
For Ground Conductor, ETAP places one conductor in the conduit.
For 3-phase Power cables the program places 3 1/C Conductors or 1 3/C conductor.
For Power cables, 1-phase the program places 2 1/C (Forward and return) conductors or 1 3/C
conductor (forward, return, and a spare).
Not included
Check this box to ignore the selected cable in the Cable Pulling calculation.

Connection
Click on the appropriate button to specify the connection type of the cable in this group.
3 Phase
Check this box to choose a 3-phase cable.
1 Phase
Check this box to choose a single-phase cable.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Enter an equipment name in this field, using up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Units
Length
Enter the length of the cable and select the unit from the pull-down list.
# /Phase
Enter the number of conductors per phase, i.e., if 2-3/C cables or 6-1/C cables are used, then the number
of conductors per phase is equal to two.


You can specify the engineering properties of the cable on this page.
Dimensions
Size
Select the cable size in AWG/kcmil or mm2 from the pull-down list.
kV
Enter the nominal kV of the cable in this field.
# of C/C
Enter the number of conductors per cable in this field.
Cable OD
Enter the cable outside diameter inch/cm in this field.
Jacket Type
Select the jacket type from the pull-down list.

Max. Tension
You can specify the maximum allowable pulling tension and sidewall pressure in this group.
Pull
Enter the maximum allowable total tension in kg/mm2 or lbs/kcmil in this field.
Sidewall
Enter the maximum allowable sidewall pressure in kg/m or lbs/ft in this field.
Weight
Enter the cable weight in kg/km or lbs/1000ft. The weight will be adjusted for calculation conservatism
by the tolerance value specified in the Study Case Editor.

Cable Pulling 3-D View
39.8 3-D View

The 3-D View is a three-dimensional, graphical summary of the data entered in the Pull Path Geometry
View. This view can be rotated 360 degrees around the vertical axis, and can be rotated around a
horizontal axis slightly for better perspective. The 3-D View is a graphical aid only, allowing the pull path
to be interpreted spatially. If a segment is selected from the Pull Path Geometric View, it will be
displayed in red in the 3-D View.
The 3-D View can also be plotted using a logarithmic scale, where each segment length shows as the log
of its actual length. Click on the display options button on the Cable Pulling toolbar to toggle between
Linear and Log scale.
The segments displayed in the 3-D can be color coded to visibly show the changes in orientation of the
conduit. Right-click on the 3-D view and select customize dialog for customizing the 3-D view.

Cable Pulling Cable Pulling Analysis
39.9 Cable Pulling Analysis

To calculate the pulling tensions for an active configuration, click on the Calc Cable Pull button on the
Cable Pulling toolbar. The results of the calculation are displayed in the Pull Path Geometric View.
39.9.1 Results
Tensions
These are the calculated tensions for a cable being pulled through the conduit. The tension at each bend
location, as well as the total linear tension is displayed. Any results exceeding the maximum allowable
tensions will be flagged in red.
FWD Pull
Results are displayed for a cable being pulled in the forward direction (as entered in the Pull Path
Geometric View). The tension is measured in lbs/kg.
REV Pull
Results are displayed for a cable being pulled in the reverse direction in lbs/kg.
Max. Sidewall
The maximum calculated sidewall pressure at each bend location is displayed here. If any calculated
results exceed the maximum allowable sidewall pressure, they will be flagged in red.

Cable Pulling Cable Pulling Analysis
39.9.2 Summary and Warning

Once a cable pulling calculation has completed, you can click on the Summary and Warning button on the
Cable Pulling toolbar. This will open the CP Alert View. A brief overview of the calculation results will
be displayed here. If the calculation resulted in any tensions that exceed specified limits, they will also be
displayed in the lower portion of the window in red.
Any limit or condition that has been exceeded will be shown in red in this window. The Alert View can
also be automatically displayed after a calculation completes, by clicking on the Auto Display checkbox

Cable Pulling Display Options
39.10.1 Info Page

Select the information annotations to be displayed on the Conduit Cross-Section View of Presentations.
Color
Select the color for the Cable/Conduit annotations to be displayed on the Conduit Cross-Section View of
Presentations.
Cable ID
Check this box to display the cable annotations.
Conduit ID
Check this box to display the cable annotations.
3D
Normal Scale
Check this button to plot the 3-D pulling path view in normal scale.
Log Scale
Check this button to plot the 3-D pulling path view in the Log scale.

Cable Pulling Calculation Methods

The Cable Pulling Presentation of ETAP uses a general tension model and a comprehensive solution
method, which eliminates the limitation that non-horizontal segments cannot have horizontal bends. The
Cable Pulling Presentation is used to determine tensions and sidewall pressures that a cable is subjected to
when pulled through conduits. ETAP can account for cables of different sizes and allows complex pulling
path geometry. A point-by-point calculation method is performed at every conduit bend and pull point.
Both the forward and reverse pulling tensions are calculated to determine the preferred direction of pull.
In addition, the Cable Pulling Presentation uses the Pulling Cable Method of a pulling eye on a conductor.
Some fundamental formulas are shown below.
Maximum Allowable Pulling Tension, Tmc
Tmc = A RF N S m
Where A is the cross-sectional area of conductor; N is the number of conductors; Sm is the maximum
allowable pulling stress; RF is the reduction factor for the maximum allowable tension. Values of RF are
determined as follows:
RF = (100 - RF1)/100 if the number of cables is less than or equal to 3

RF = (100 - RF2)/100 if the number of cables is greater than 3 and all cables are single-core
RF = (100 - RF3)/100 if the number of cables is greater than 3 and all cables are multiple-cores
RF = min {(100 - RF2)/100, (100 - RF3)/100} if the number of cables is greater than 3 and the cables
include both single-core and multiple-cores
Where RF1, RF2, RF3 are the input reduction factors in the Study Case Editor.
Pulling Tension
Pulling tensions for a horizontal section of conduit can be calculated by using:
T = N V FB W L
Where V is cable position factor; FB is the basic friction factor; W is the weight of conductor; L is the
length of conduit.
Maximum Tension Limited by the Sidewall Pressure

When a cable is pulled around bends, the snubbing effect may cause considerable sidewall pressure
against the inner arc of curvature. The maximum tension limited by the sidewall pressure can be given by:
Tmb = N R ( Pm / B) 2 W 2

Cable Pulling Calculation Methods
Where R is the radius of bend curvature; Pm is the maximum allowable sidewall pressure for a specific
type of insulation; B is the sidewall correction factor, and N is the number of cables.
Jamming
When three cables are pulled into a conduit, they change their relative position in the conduit, especially
when being pulled around bends. When D/d is slightly less than 2.8, a jamming condition may occur,
which causes severe pressures on the cable insulation. Jamming obviously cannot occur when D/d > 3.0
and normally does not occur when D/d < 2.8. Because of a slight increase in conduit diameter when it is
bent, the D/d between 2.74 (40-percent conduit fill) and 2.95 (34.5-percent conduit fill) should be avoided
to eliminate jamming.
In ETAP, alerts are generated when the jamming ratio (D/d) is between 2.74 and 2.8. Warnings are
generated if the jamming ratio (D/d) is between 2.8 and 3.2.

Cable Pulling Required Data
39.12 Required Data

To run a cable pulling study, you only need to provide CP related data, such as path geometry, conduit
characteristics, and cable properties. A summary of this data is given in this section.
Conduit Data
Conduit outside diameter
Thickness of conduit
Friction factor for straight segments of conduit
Friction factor for conduit bends
Cable Data
Cable connection (3-phase or 1-phase)
Cable outside diameter
Cable weight
Maximum allowable tension
Maximum allowable sidewall pressure
Pulling Configuration
Individual lengths of straight segments of conduit
Individual vertical slopes of straight segments of conduit
Individual horizontal bend angles between two corresponding connected straight
Individual radius of bend segments of conduit
System Data
Tolerance for cable weight
Tolerance for cable diameter
Configuration type (cradled or triangular) for 3 cables
Equivalent length of cable for pulling off the reel
Three reduction factors

Cable Pulling Output Reports

Output Reports for the Cable Pulling Studies are available in different levels and are arranged into three
formats: Crystal Reports output format, display in the Pull Path Geometric View, and in the Summary and
Warning window display. Report Manager provides five formats for report text. They are Crystal
Reports format Viewer, PDF format, MS Word format, Rich Text format and MS Excel format.
39.13.1 Cable Pulling Report Manager

Click on the Report Manager button on the Cable Pulling toolbar to open the Cable Pulling Report
Manager. The Cable Pulling Report Manager provides different formats for Crystal Reports and consists
of three pages.
Complete Page

Input Page
This page provides the formats for different input data.
Result Page
This page provides the formats for different calculation results.

39.13.2 Cable Pulling Crystal Report

If you have run a Cable Pulling calculation by clicking on the Report Manager button on the Study Case
toolbar or by selecting the Crystal Report format from the Cable Pulling toolbar, you will be able to open
and view the Crystal Reports output for the Cable Pulling Study.
The cable pulling study Crystal Report contains the following major sections:
Complete
This section contains the complete report, which contains all of the below reports in one document.
Input
This section reports the input data related to cables and conduit.
Cable Input Data

This section reports the input data related to cables that include the cable application type, number of
conductors per phase, cable size, cable outside diameter, cable weight, maximum allowable tension, and
maximum allowable sidewall pressure.
Conduit Input Data

This section reports the input data related to the conduit, which includes the conduit outside diameter,
thickness of conduit, friction factor for straight segments of conduit, and friction factor for conduit bends.
Input Parameters
This section reports the input data related to the study.

Result
This section reports the input data and results related to pulling configuration segments/bends, summary,
and warnings.

Chapter 40
ETAP DataX (Data Exchange)

ETAP DataX represents a rich set of customizable ETAP interfaces used to bridge gaps between ETAP
and external software. The data exchange program works in three different levels:
Level 1: Importing Data into an ETAP Project
Level 2: One-Way Synchronization of Data
Level 3: Two-Way Synchronization of Data
Furthermore the Data Exchange Modules can be categorized into three groups:
ETAP Built-In Data Exchange Capabilities
ETAP Add-On Data Exchange Modules
ETAP Data Exchange Consulting Services
In ETAP, the following data exchange options are available under the base package:
Export to DXF (AutoCAD / MicroStation)
Export to Metafile
Import ETAP DOS Projects
Import CSV
Import PowerPlot Projects
Export Report to MS Excel
Export Report to MS Word
Export Report to PDF
Export Configuration Status
Export to COMTRADE Format (IEC 363)
ETAP Add-On Data Exchange Modules

ETAP GIS Map
ETAP Equipment List Data Exchange
ETAP e-DPP Data Exchange
ETAP SmartPlant Electrical Data Exchange
ETAP Excel Data Conversion
Configuration Status Import
ETAP Data Exchange Consulting Services Available:

Bus Reducer
Third Party Data Conversions

Data X DataX Levels of Exchange
40.1 DataX Levels of Exchange

Level 1: Importing Data into an ETAP Project:
One time data conversion involves conversion of the data from a third party database into an ETAP
project. The conversion program automatically generates a multi-layered graphical one-line diagram. A
multi-layered one-line consists of multiple nested composite networks.
Level 2: One-Way Synchronization of Data
One-way data synchronization consists of all the capabilities in Level 1. In addition, it has the capability
to transfer data multiple times from a third party database into an ETAP project. The program recognizes
out-of-sink data and provides you with Add, Modify, and Delete Actions.
Level 3: Two-Way Synchronization of Data
Two-way data synchronization consists of all the capabilities in Level 2. In addition, it also provides the
capability to transfer data multiple times from ETAP to the third party database.

Data X ETAP Data Exchange Services
40.2 ETAP Data Exchange Services

OTIs Consulting Services supports clients worldwide in the performing and model validation of database
conversions and data exchange projects. We have a staff of engineers and database specialists dedicated
to conduct database conversions and synchronization between your existing data files and ETAP project
databases.
We have developed conversion programs for interpreting, automating, integrating, and quality checking
of your system information that can minimize the time and cost of re-entering the system data from
existing data files into ETAP. The conversion programs can import available electrical data and network
connections from IEEE, ASCII, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft SQL Server, Microsoft Access, Oracle,
Sybase IBM DB2, Informix, and other commercially available third party databases.
Our services can be employed for converting and setting up data files as well as the development of new
conversion and data exchange programs for ETAP based on your specific needs. The following services
are available:
Database Conversion
Convert the existing electrical power system database to ETAP. The conversion program will
automatically generate a multi-layered graphical one-line diagram.
Data range checking

Typical data substitution for missing parameters
Data validation
Data consistency checking
Library data addition
One-line diagram generation
Database Verification & Validation

As the next step, load flow and short circuit runs are performed for validation of the converted data.
Results are compared with the original database. For data verification purposes, the pre-existing load
flow and short circuit results must be provided along with the database.
Model Presentations Setup

The auto-generated one-line diagram is based on logical layout. Some cosmetic layout changes may be
required for various study requirements and engineering uses. Where applicable, the ETAP model will be
arranged to include nested networks (substations) and will be setup for proper impedance, relay, and
study presentations of the one-line diagram.
Model Expansion
The system model can be expanded and modified to include new substations or subsystems that have not
already been modeled in the existing database / system model. This also can include as-built model
validation.

Data X ETAP Data Exchange Services
Database Synchronization
Our database services also provide data automation and exchange with other databases such as GIS,
Project Master Database, and Plant Historians. These services include:
Data interpretation
Data integration
Format conversion and mapping
Procedures development
Turnkey database synchronization
Quality assurance services
Project and technical management
Contact Operation Technology, Inc. (www.etap.com) for more information about data exchange products
and services.

Data X PowerPlot to ETAP Star Migration
40.3 PowerPlot to ETAP Star Migration

ETAP 5.x features a fully integrated and completely redesigned protective device coordination/selectivity
package called ETAP Star. This document is provided to assist you with the migration from PowerPlot to
ETAP Star.
The PowerPlot - ETAP Star Conversion program is designed to facilitate the conversion of protective
device settings modeled in PowerPlot to ETAP Star. Every effort has been taken to make this transition as
comprehensive as possible through automated tools. However, given that PowerPlot project data is stored
in a separate database than that of ETAP as well as the fact that the two programs were not fully
integrated and synchronized, for some cases a direct conversion and transfer of data from PowerPlot to
ETAP Star is not practical hence requiring manual data transfer. As for any data conversion process, it is
vital that the converted data is verified for completeness and correctness. A detailed conversion log and
report are provided to aid you in this process.
40.3.1 Conversion Procedure

ETAP provides an import program for conversion of Time Current Curve (TCC) data from existing
PowerPlot projects to ETAP Star. The program converts the PowerPlot settings to ETAP Star for the
Base revision of ETAP. This process is implemented in two stages - (1) Import of PowerPlot device
data and (2) Conversion of the data to ETAP Star.
The outcome of the conversion depends on the manner in which the PowerPlot project was created and
maintained. This can be categorized into two cases:
1. PowerPlot projects which were created via ETAP using the data link between the ETAP and
PowerPlot programs.
2. PowerPlot projects created independent of ETAP (stand-alone).
In the first case, the device IDs were used as the only link between the two programs, i.e., in order for a
protective device to share properties between ETAP (4.x version and earlier) and PowerPlot, it must have
had the same ID in both programs. Therefore, even if PowerPlot was used as a stand-alone program and
the PowerPlot project contained device IDs identical to the ETAP project device IDs, the integrity of the
data link would still be maintained between the two programs.
Data Categories
The PowerPlot ETAP Star conversion procedure can be better understood by a closer examination of
the data in PowerPlot project files. A PowerPlot project consists of one file with a .plt extension. Each
PowerPlot project file (*.plt) may consist of a number of TCC files. Each TCC file may include the
number of protective device characteristic curves created and added to the TCC file. The data contained
in PowerPlot project files can be classified into four data categories:
(I) Protective Device Settings / Parameters (i.e., Relay, LVSST, etc.)

(II) Fixed Points / Damage Curves (i.e., Motor Starting Curves, Cable Damage Curve, etc.)
(III) TCC Plot Settings (i.e., Voltage / Current Scale, Legend, etc.)
(IV) Special Devices / Features (i.e., Typical Overload Heater Curves, Custom Labels, etc.)

The conversion of each data category in a PowerPlot project to ETAP Star is summarized in the table
below:
Data Converted ETAP Star

PowerPlot Device Conversion Procedure
Category Device(s)
II Cable (Damage Curve) Cable If an identical device ID is found, ETAP data is
retained, else new cable created with PowerPlot
data.
I Overcurrent Relay Overcurrent Relay (OCR) If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
settings are imported, else new overcurrent relay
created with PowerPlot settings.
I MV Solid State Trip MV Solid State Trip If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
(MVSST) settings are imported, else new MVSST created
with PowerPlot settings.
I Fuse Fuse If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
settings are imported, else new fuse created with
PowerPlot settings.
II Transformer (Damage Transformer If an identical device ID is found, ETAP data is
Curve) retained, else new transformer created with
PowerPlot data.
I LV Solid State Trip LVCB with LV Solid State If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
Trip (LVSST) Device settings are imported to Trip Device page of
LVCB, else new LVCB created with PowerPlot
settings.
I Electro-Mechanical Trip LVCB with Electro- Manufacturer and model conversion only. Trip
Mechanical Trip (EM) Settings require manual transfer.
Device
I Thermal-Magnetic Trip LVCB with Thermal- If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
Magnetic Trip (TM) settings are imported to Trip Device page of
Device LVCB, else new LVCB created with PowerPlot
settings.
I Motor Circuit Protector LVCB with Motor Circuit If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
Unit without Typical Protector Unit (MCP) settings are imported to Trip Device page of
OLR Curve Device LVCB, else new LVCB created with PowerPlot
settings.
I, IV Motor Circuit Protector LVCB with Motor Circuit For MCP, If an identical device ID is found,
Unit with Typical OLR Protector Unit (MCP) PowerPlot settings are imported to Trip Device
Curve Device and Overload page of LVCB, else new LVCB created with
Heater PowerPlot settings. For OLR curve, a new
overload heater created with PowerPlot settings.
II Motor (Starting Curve) Motor If an identical device ID is found, ETAP data is
without Typical OLR retained, else new motor created with PowerPlot
Curve data. If the full load starting time in ETAP is zero,
PowerPlot starting time is mapped over.
Otherwise, starting time remains as is.
II, IV Motor (Starting Curve) Motor and Overload Heater For Motor, If an identical device ID is found,
with Typical OLR Curve ETAP data is retained, else new motor created
with PowerPlot data. For OLR curve, a new
overload heater created with PowerPlot settings. If
the full load starting time in ETAP is zero,
PowerPlot starting time is mapped over.
Otherwise, starting time remains as is.
I Motor Relay Motor Relay (MR) If an identical device ID is found, PowerPlot
settings are imported, else new motor relay created
with PowerPlot settings.

Data Converted ETAP Star

PowerPlot Device Conversion Procedure
Category Device(s)
I Recloser Recloser If an identical device ID is found, ETAP data is
retained, else new cable created with PowerPlot
data.
IV User Curve User Curve A new User Curve is created. If an identical device
ID is found in ETAP Star View, then the
PowerPlot User Curve data is mapped over. Note
that User Curve ID in ETAP has to be unique.
III TCC Scale (Voltage and Primary X-Axis Voltage PowerPlot TCC Scale values imported to Primary
Current) and Current Multiplier Axis voltage and current multiplier for the specific
TCC ID
III Legend Legend PowerPlot Legend fields imported to
corresponding Legend fields in Star View for the
specific TCC ID
IV Custom Label Added to Device Label Custom label from PowerPlot imported and added
to device label
- One-Line - Not converted to ETAP
Category I Protective Device Settings / Parameters

The PowerPlot devices that fall in this category include Low Voltage Solid State Trip (LVSST), Thermal-
Magnetic Trip (TM), Electro-Mechanical Trip (EM), Motor Circuit Protector Trip (MCP), Fuse,
Overcurrent Relay (OCR), Motor Relay (MR), and MV Solid State Trip (MVSST). A mapping database
with tables for each device library is provided to cross-reference the PowerPlot device library to the
ETAP Star library. The conversion program imports and reads the device ID from PowerPlot and then
searches the mapping table (of corresponding device) to find the match for the device heading (i.e.,
Manufacturer, Model, Type, etc.) with the equivalent ETAP Star device library.
If the program finds a match in the table, the PowerPlot settings for the mapped device are transferred to
the corresponding ETAP device type. A summary of the device settings imported from PowerPlot is listed
in the Comment page of the specific device, as shown below.
If no match is found, the program generates a log entry for the device (under the appropriate device type)
and provides a detailed explanation as to the status of the converted device and the reason for no
conversion. The log file TCCConvert_Log.xml located in the same folder as the PowerPlot project
report files (*.CSV) by default and can be opened using Internet Explorer.

Category II Fixed Point / Damage Curves

The PowerPlot devices that fall in this category include Cable Damage Curves, Motor Starting Curves,
and Transformer Damage Curves. The conversion program retains the ETAP data, if an identical device
ID exists in ETAP.
For the case of Motor Starting Curves, if the motor full load acceleration time is not defined in ETAP and
the conversion program finds identical motor IDs in PowerPlot and ETAP projects, it uses the motor
acceleration time as defined in the PowerPlot project.
Category III TCC Plot Settings

PowerPlot TCC settings such as TCC Scale and Legend fall in this category. The conversion program
imports the PowerPlot TCC Plot settings to the applicable Plot Option (Primary Axis Scale / Legend) in
the ETAP Star view for each TCC ID.
Category IV Special Devices / Features

For the Typical OLR Curve (included in MCP, and Motor Starting Curve in PowerPlot), the conversion
program creates a new Overload Heater device in ETAP with PowerPlot OLR data. User Curve is created
in ETAP Star View based on the PowerPlot User Curve parameters.

40.3.2 Importing to New / Existing ETAP Projects

When a PowerPlot project is imported into a New ETAP Project (no one-line diagram or elements), the
conversion program creates a Composite Network with ID in the format PP_Star_Date_Time and adds
an element for each device, with device IDs as defined in PowerPlot. Note that in this case, all devices
imported will have PowerPlot data (no ETAP devices defined).
When a PowerPlot project is imported to an Existing ETAP Project, the data conversion will be as per
the table in Section 1.2.1 for different PowerPlot Data categories. It is recommended to check the device
IDs is identical on the PowerPlot and ETAP projects to ensure a more accurate conversion. A few
scenarios are given below for better understanding:
1. If an ETAP project has a fuse element with ID Fuse1 and a PowerPlot project has a fuse curve
with ID Fuse1, the conversion program will import the PowerPlot Fuse1 data in ETAP fuse
element Fuse1.
2. If a PowerPlot project has a unique Cable ID, not existing in an ETAP project, the conversion
program adds a cable in a composite network (with ID in the format PP_Star_Date_Time), with
cable ID and cable data as defined in PowerPlot.
3. If an ETAP project has an induction motor with ID Motor1 and a PowerPlot project has a relay
curve with ID Motor1 (identical ID but different devices), the conversion program detects two
different elements during conversion and hence will create a composite network (with ID in the
format PP_Star_Date_Time) and add a New Relay element with ID Motor1-1 as Motor1
already exists ID in ETAP.
Note: In either case, the conversion program creates Star TCC Views with the same TCC IDs and device
curves as defined in a PowerPlot project. If the devices in a PowerPlot project are not included in TCC
views, the program still converts the device data to ETAP.
Setup for PowerPlot Star Conversion

Prior to importing a PowerPlot project into ETAP Star, ensure the following:
1. PowerPlot projects are upgraded to PowerPlot Release 183 or above.
2. Where applicable, convert the old relay elements (created in ETAP version 3.0.2 and earlier) to
the new relay format via ETAP prior to converting the PowerPlot file.
3. The project reports (*.CSV) are created for all applicable devices to be imported. It is
recommended to save the project reports in the same folder as the PowerPlot project. This greatly
helps during conversion, as the same folder will be used for the selection of projects and reports
in the TCC Import window shown below and the resulting LOG file will be saved in the same
folder.
4. For the case of importing PowerPlot project to an existing ETAP project, check to ensure that the
data link between ETAP and PowerPlot projects is maintained.

5. You should also review the various options listed in the TCC Import window shown above,
such as Fuse Short Circuit Ratings, CT Ratios, etc., and select them after careful evaluation of
your conversion scenario. Refer to Section 1.3 for a detailed explanation of these options.
40.3.3 Device Conversion Details

The conversion details for different PowerPlot devices and features, when imported to New / Existing
ETAP projects is described below. Refer to Sections 1.2.1 and 1.2.2 for general information on the
conversion procedure.
Cable Damage Curve
Import to New Project

The conversion program adds a cable with the ID and data as defined in PowerPlot in a composite
network.
Import to Existing Project

If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical Cable ID, the conversion program retains the ETAP Cable
Editor data, even if the PowerPlot cable data is different compared to ETAP data. This is because the
ETAP cable library data is given precedence, considering the data and modeling accuracy in ETAP.
Further, if the I2t checkbox in the Cable Editor Protection page is not checked, the program will check it
during conversion.
The LOG file will record a message Device(s) below already exist in ETAP, properties from PowerPlot
were NOT overwritten to ETAP properties and list the cable IDs that apply to this case.
Transformer Damage Curve

The conversion for Transformer Damage Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the Cable
Damage Curve.

Motor Starting Curve

The conversion for Motor Starting Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the Cable Damage
Curve.
In addition, when importing to an existing ETAP project, if PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical
Motor ID and if the motor full load acceleration time is not defined in ETAP, then the conversion
program uses the motor acceleration time as defined in a PowerPlot project. Also, if the Draw Typical
Thermal OLR Curve option is checked for a MCP device in PowerPlot as shown below, the conversion
program will create an Overload Heater element (in the composite network) with the same device ID as
specified in PowerPlot and import the data for the Overload Thermal Curve. If the full load starting time
in ETAP is zero, PowerPlot starting time is mapped over. Otherwise, starting time remains as is.
Fuse Curve

The conversion program adds a fuse with the ID and data as defined in PowerPlot in a composite
network. The options Fuse Short Circuit Ratings Update using ETAP 5.x Library Values OR Keep
Existing Values do not have any effect on the conversion of fuse data for this case.

If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical Fuse ID, the conversion program replaces the ETAP Fuse
Editor data with the fuse data in PowerPlot.
It should be noted that in this case, the conversion program imports the PowerPlot fuse Manufacturer,
Model, Type, and Size data only. Other fuse parameters in ETAP such as Continuous Amp, Short Circuit
Rating, Test PF, etc. will depend on the option selected Update using ETAP 5.x Library Values OR
Keep Existing Values, on the TCC Import window prior to conversion. Selecting the Update using ETAP
5.x Library Values option overwrites these existing (user modified) parameters with values from the
ETAP 5.x library. Selecting the Keep Existing Values option preserves existing (user modified)
parameters.

LV Solid State Trip (LVSST) Curve

The conversion program adds a LV circuit breaker with the ID and LVSST settings (on the Trip Device
page) as defined in PowerPlot, in a composite network.

If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical device IDs, the conversion program replaces the ETAP
Breaker Editor data (Trip Device page) with the LVSST settings in PowerPlot.
It should be noted that the conversion replaces the ETAP breaker trip device data, even if the existing trip
device in ETAP is pre-assigned to the breaker. As an example, if ETAP has a CB6 breaker defined as
ABB E1 power breaker with SACE PR111 trip unit and PowerPlot has a CB6 LVSST device with
General Electric RMS-9 trip, the conversion replaces the SACE PR111 trip with GE RMS-9 trip data. In
such cases, a separate log file will be generated indicating the mismatch between the imported PowerPlot
trip unit and the selected breaker in ETAP. This logic will apply to other breaker trip units, i.e., Thermal-
Magnetic, Electro-Mechanical, and Motor Circuit Protector devices.
LVSST Ground Curve in PowerPlot

If the LVSST device in PowerPlot has a ground element (for the same device ID; refer LVSST curves
CB1 and CB1-Ground as shown below), the conversion program will detect this case, check the ground
element and import the ground settings for the corresponding LV breaker (Trip Device page) in ETAP.
Thus, for the PowerPlot LVSST units CB1 and CB1-Ground shown below, the conversion will result in
Long-Time, Short-Time, Instantaneous, and Ground settings of CB1 and CB1-Ground units imported to
Phase and Ground elements in CB1 breaker (Trip Device page) in ETAP. Further, a Star View with ID
TCC-1 will be created with the Long-Time, Short-Time, and Instantaneous settings plotted in Phase
Mode and Ground settings plotted in Ground Mode.
Electro-Mechanical (EM) Curve

Electro-Mechanical trip units have been modeled as per manufacturer specifications in ETAP
and differ in structure and design from the modeling technique implemented in PowerPlot. Hence the
conversion program will import PowerPlot Manufacturer and Model only for the EM trip unit and
remaining parameters are to be set manually. This is to avoid any discrepancies during conversion.
The conversion for Electro-Mechanical Trip Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the LV
Solid State Trip Curve; with the exception of the Ground Curve case.
Thermal-Magnetic Trip (TM) Curve

The conversion for Thermal-Magnetic Trip Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the LV Solid
State Trip Curve; with the exception of the Ground Curve case.
Note: PowerPlot models the Adjustable Instantaneous Trip as a continuous adjustable ampere setting
for all models. However, many thermal-magnetic trip units such as Cutler-Hammer HKD (shown below
as continuous adjustable in PowerPlot) have discrete adjustable instantaneous settings. In such cases, the
conversion program will set the instantaneous setting to the closest discrete value (multiple or amperes)
available for the model in ETAP.

Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) Curve

The conversion for Motor Circuit Protector Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the LV Solid
State Trip Curve with the exception of the Ground Curve case.
In addition, similar to Thermal-Magnetic Trip, PowerPlot models the Instantaneous Trip as a continuous
adjustable ampere setting for all models. In such cases, the conversion program will set the instantaneous
setting to the closest discrete value (multiple or amperes) available for the model in ETAP.
Also, if the Draw Typical Thermal OLR Curve option is checked for a MCP device in PowerPlot as
shown below, the conversion program will create an Overload Heater element (in the composite network),
with the same device ID as specified in PowerPlot and import the data for the Overload Thermal Curve.
Relay / Motor Relay Curve

Overcurrent and Motor relays are modeled in great detail and true-to-the-form per manufacturer
specifications in ETAP. The Overcurrent Relay Editor in ETAP includes settings for all elements that
may be available for the relay such as Phase, Ground, Sensitive Ground, Neutral, and Negative Sequence
along with Directional and Voltage Control/Restraint features. Similarly the Motor Relay Editor includes
data for Thermal, Jam, Instantaneous, and Ground elements.
PowerPlot, however, does not distinguish different elements and levels available in relays and models
relay curves with 51/50 pickup settings only. Hence, importing of relay settings should be done after a
careful evaluation of the relay IDs used (check if identical to ETAP) and the type of protection intended
for (Phase, Ground, etc.), while modeling in PowerPlot. Two possible scenarios are described below for
better understanding.

1. Assume that the ETAP one-line has two relays R1 and R2; R1 for the Phase function and R2 for
the Ground function respectively. If the PowerPlot file to be imported into ETAP also has relays
R1 and R2, the conversion will import the relay settings in PowerPlot to R1 and R2 relays in
ETAP.
2. Assume that the ETAP one-line has two relays R1 and R2; R1 for the Phase function and R2 for
the Ground function respectively. However, there are two PowerPlot projects RelayP.plt, with
device R1 for Phase function and RelayG.plt, with device R1 for Ground function. In this case,
the R1 data imported in ETAP will depend on the PLT file imported first. Thus in this case it
must be ensured that the device IDs for the relays in the two PLT files are identical to those
defined in ETAP.

The conversion program adds an overcurrent/motor relay with the ID and settings as defined in PowerPlot
in a composite network. The options CT Ratios Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot OR Keep Existing
ETAP 5.x CT Ratio on the TCC Import window do not have any effect on the conversion of relay data
for this case.


If PowerPlot and ETAP projects have identical Relay IDs, the conversion program replaces the ETAP
Relay Editor data with the relay data in PowerPlot.
The Relay CT ratios in ETAP after conversion will depend on the option selected (Update CT Ratios
from PowerPlot OR Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio) on the TCC Import window prior to conversion.
Selecting the Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot option will overwrite the existing ratios (user modified)
of current transformers connected to relay with the ratio specified on the Relay / Motor Relay Editor in
PowerPlot. Selecting the Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio option will preserve the existing CT ratios
(user modified) in the ETAP project.
Note: Cascaded connected relays do not support the conversion of CT ratio from PowerPlot.
CT Ratios
While importing an overcurrent/motor relay, the following should be noted regarding CT Ratio
conversion, when the Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot option is selected:
1. If there is a physical CT connected to the relay, then the conversion will overwrite the CT ratings
in the Input page of the Relay Editor and the Info page of the CT Editor.
2. If there is no physical CT connection to the relay, the conversion will overwrite the CT ratings for
all available terminals on the Input page of the Relay Editor.
Migrating Old OC Relays

For Relay elements created in ETAP version 3.0.2 and earlier, there is a special conversion tool provided
to move the old overcurrent relays to the new relay format. This option is provided from the File menu
for an ETAP project where old overcurrent relays are detected. For such cases, you must first convert the
old relay elements to the new relay format from ETAP prior to converting the PowerPlot project.

MV Solid State Trip (MVSST)

The conversion for MV Solid State Trip Curve follows the same logic as stated above for the relays.

One-Line Connectivity
It should be noted that the one-line drawing that can be created in PowerPlot is purely graphic. The
elements in the one-line do not carry any data or connectivity logic, as is the case with ETAP.
Thus, when a PowerPlot project is imported into a new ETAP project, the one-line diagram connectivity
is not imported to the one-line or Star TCC View. ETAP creates new elements in a composite network,
which may be connected once the conversion is complete.
When a PowerPlot project is imported into an existing ETAP project, the connected one-line diagram may
be already available in ETAP. For this case, any Star TCC Views with curves imported from PowerPlot
would not reflect the connectivity.

40.3.4 Conversion Tutorial

The tutorial below provides a step-by-step procedure on how to convert a sample PowerPlot file to a new
ETAP 7.0 (or current version) project.
Convert PowerPlot Sample Project File to ETAP Star

1. Launch PowerPlot and from the File menu, select Open Project. Browse to the PowerPlot
installation path, select the Sample project Sample.plt, and then click Open.
2. The Sample project in the PowerPlot window appears as shown below.

3. From the Tools menu, select the Project Report option. Browse the path for saving the reports and
click OK to generate reports for selected (checked) devices. It is recommended to use the same
folder location of the PowerPlot project file. Note that devices from PowerPlot will not be
converted to Star without the project reports.
Steps 1 3 can be skipped, if the PowerPlot projects report (*.csv) is already available.
4. Launch ETAP and from the File menu select New Project. Enter a name for the new project file
(for example, PowerPlotconvert), and click OK. Note that PowerPlot files can also be imported to
an existing ETAP project. Refer to section 1.2 for more details on conversion to existing ETAP
projects.

5. ETAP will prompt you for your user information. Enter the user name and access level
information (if required) and click OK to continue. To learn more about setting up user accounts
and access levels, refer to User Access Management chapter of the User Guide or click the Help
button.
6. The one-line diagram view will open in ETAP. From the ETAP File menu, select Data Exchange,
and then select Import PowerPlot Project.

7. If a library file is not associated with the ETAP project prior to using the Import PowerPlot
Project command, ETAP will ask you to select a library file. Browse to the location of the library
file, select it and click Open.
Note: The Import PowerPlot Project program requires an ETAP 5.x library file that has information
related to time current characteristics of protective devices. Lower versions of ETAP library files do not
have this information.
8. Once the library file is selected, ETAP will launch the PowerPlot Project Import Program as
shown below.

The various fields available in the PowerPlot Import program are briefly described below.
Select PowerPlot Project

Select the PowerPlot project file, which has the Time Current Curves (TCCs) to be imported into
the ETAP project. PowerPlot project files have the extension .PLT.
Select Location of Project Reports

Select the location of PowerPlot project reports. PowerPlot project report files have the extension
.CSV.
Star TCC Labels - Label ID / Label ID + Setting

Select this option to show only the ID or the ID and settings of different devices in ETAP Star
TCC View.
System Frequency
Select the system frequency to be used in the ETAP project. This is used to convert seconds to
cycles for time delays.
Fuse Short Circuit Ratings Update using ETAP 5.x values / Keep existing values
This option is applicable when PowerPlot projects are imported into an existing ETAP project.
Selecting the Update using ETAP 5.x values option will overwrite the existing (user modified)
Fuse Short Circuit Ratings with values from ETAP 5.x library. Selecting the Keep existing
values option will preserve the existing (user modified) Fuse Short Circuit Ratings in ETAP
project.
CT Ratios Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot / Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio
This option is applicable when PowerPlot projects are imported into an existing ETAP project.
Selecting the Update CT Ratios from PowerPlot option will update the ratios of current
transformers connected to relays with the ratio specified on the Relay / Motor Relay Editor in
PowerPlot. Selecting the Keep Existing ETAP 5.x CT Ratio option will preserve the existing
CT ratios in the ETAP project.
9. Select the different options as desired and click OK to import and convert the PowerPlot project.
Note that the importing time depends on the number of TCCs and devices in the PowerPlot
project.

10. Once the conversion is complete, ETAP generates a composite network containing the devices in
the selected PowerPlot project. Refer to section 1.2 for more details on PowerPlot conversion to
existing ETAP projects.
11. A Star TCC View is also generated with the TCC curves of the devices as was plotted in
PowerPlot. The Star View is as shown below. The Star View can be accessed from the Project
Editor.
12. ETAP also generates a detailed log file in XML format that is saved in the same directory
location as the PowerPlot Project file.

40.4 Import IEEE Format

The Import IEEE Format File command can be invoked by going to the File menu, Data Exchange
sub menu as shown below:
As the tools are used to add or modify data in the ETAP project, they are active only in the Edit mode.
Clicking on the command displays the ETAP IEEE Data Converter Editor as shown below.

Data X Import IEEE Format
40.4.1 Selecting IEEE Data File (text)

Type or select the IEEE data file and click it on the OK button to convert it into an ETAP project. Once
the conversion is done, it will display the Exchange successful dialog box as shown below.
40.4.2 IEEE Data File

ETAP IEEE Data Converter reads data from IEEE format files which are space delimited files and have
three main sections:
The title data section provides the base MVA

The bus data section provides generation, load and shunt impedance information
The branch data section provides the impedance of branches
Title Data Section

The main information available in this section is the base MVA specified in the columns 31 through 37.
The base MVA read from this section is used to convert per unit quantities specified in the other sections
of the file to actual values.
Bus Data Section

This section provides the final bus voltages and angles calculated by load flow. These values are mapped
to Initial Voltage and Angle fields on the Info page of the ETAP Bus Editor. The nominal bus voltage in
ETAP is set to 1 kV, for cases were the base voltage is not specified. Note that the comment page of the
Bus Editor provides the information read from the IEEE data file.
The information in this section is also used to create lumped loads with 100% motor load (constant kVA
load) in ETAP. Nameplate ratings of the lumped load are calculated from per unit load MW and load
Mvar values and the base MVA.
Synchronous generators nameplate ratings are set based on per unit generation MW and Mvar values and
the base MVA.
The shunt impedance values are used to create static loads at buses. Static load nameplate ratings are
calculated based on the shunt impedance values and the base MVA.
Branch Data Section

A branch in IEEE format data file may represent an impedance or a transformer depending on the
specified branch type. Transformers may be modeled as fixed tap or with on-line tap changers as
specified in the IEEE format file.

Data X Import Raw Data Files
40.5 Import Raw Format

The Import Raw Data File command can be invoked by going to the File menu and the Data
Exchange sub menu as shown below:
As the tools are used to add or modify data in the ETAP project, they are active only in the Edit mode.
Clicking on the command displays the ETAP Raw Data Converter Editor as shown below.

40.5.1 Selecting Raw Data File

Select Raw Data File
Type or select the raw data file. Raw data files are files with extension raw (*.raw) and exported
represent a solved load flow case. They are text formatted files with data fields separated by blank spaces
or commas. If there are any sequence and dynamic data files in the same folder as the raw data file, the
sequence and dynamic data files would also be imported. The sequence files are files with extension
seq (*.seq) and dynamic files are the files with extension dyr (*.dyr). Note that all three files, the raw
data file, sequence file, and dynamic file, must all have the same name to be imported.
Impedance Tolerance (p.u.)

This value is the Zero Impedance Line Threshold Tolerance (THRSHZ). If branch reactance is less than
this value and resistance is 0, the conversion program will create a switch in ETAP instead of impedance.
Raw Data File Version

Presently the conversion program supports version 29 and later of the raw data files.
Delimiter
Select the delimiter used in the raw data file; this may be comma or blank space.
OK
Click on the OK button to convert the raw data file into an ETAP project. Once the conversion is done, it
will display the Exchange successful dialog box as shown below.
Cancel
Click on the cancel button to cancel the conversion.

40.5.2 Raw Data File

ETAP Raw Data File Converter reads data from raw data format files. Data in raw data files is arranged in
the following sections:
Case Identification Data

Bus Data
Load Data
Generator Data
Non-Transformer Branch Data
Transformer Data
Switched Shunt Data
Area Interchange Data *
Two Terminal DC Line Data *
Voltage Source Converter DC Line Data *
Transformer Impedance Correction Table Data *
Multi-Section DC Line Data *
Multi-Section Line Grouping Data *
Zone Data *
Inter Area Transfer Data *
Owner Data *
FACTS Control Device Data *
*
Currently these sections are not considered during conversion. The log file created by the conversion
program logs a message to indicate that data in these sections was not converted.
Case Identification Data

This section includes information about the change code, system base MVA and remarks. For cases when
the change code is 1, implying that the file was created to add information to a working case, ETAP raw
data file will log a message and conversion will not be performed. Conversion is performed for cases
which represent data for base case. The remarks present on the second and third line of this section are not
used by the conversion program.
Bus Data
Bus data includes information about buses and shunts. Bus IDs are assigned by concatenating bus names
and base voltages. If this results in a bus ID that already exists, a unique number is suffixed at the end of
the ID.
Static load or lumped loads are used to model shunt admittances and susceptances represented by non-
zero values of GL and BL parameters in the bus data section of the raw data file. For positive values of
GL static loads are created, whereas for negative values of GL, lumped loads with negative percentage
loadings are created.
Load Data
For each record in the load data section a lumped load is created in ETAP. Load IDs are assigned by
prefixing the ID specified in the raw data file with Load_UniqueNumber, where UniqueNumber is a
unique number. For cases where the total real power is negative, the lumped load percentage loading is
set to -100%. If the total MVA specified is 0, the lumped load is set out of service.

Generator Data
Generator IDs are assigned by prefixing the ID specified in the raw data file with Gen_ UniqueNumber,
where UniqueNumber is a unique number. For cases when the real power specified for a generator is
negative, a lumped load is created instead of a generator. The IDs of lumped loads is assigned in a manner
similar to generator IDs. The efficiency for a generator is set to 100%. Generator step up transformer data
is presently not used. For cases where the step up transformer impedance is non zero a message is logged.

Data X Import a Ground Grid in AutoCAD to ETAP
40.6 Import a Ground Grid in AutoCAD to ETAP

AutoCAD drawings representing a Ground Grid may be imported into an ETAP project. An overview of
the process is shown below:
Select & export

Ground Grid in entities representing XML file with New ETAP
Import XML
AutoCAD conductors and rod
conductor and File into ETAP Ground Grid
Drawing (DWG) rod location and Presentation in
File dimensions FEM mode
The process involves two steps:
Creating an ETAP Extended Markup Language (XML) file from AutoCAD

Importing the ETAP XML file into an ETAP project
40.6.1 Creating an ETAP XML File from AutoCAD

This section explains the process of exporting the ETAP XML file from an AutoCAD drawing with the
ground grid laid out.
Setting up the ETAP Tools Menu in AutoCAD

The ETAP tools menu allows you to access the command for exporting the Ground Grid in an AutoCAD
drawing into an ETAP XML file. Following are the steps to set up the tool in AutoCAD.
For AutoCAD Versions prior to 2006

On the command line type the command MENULOAD and press the Enter key. This will show the Menu
Customization Editor as shown below:

Click on the Browse button and select the file ETMenu.mnu located in the folder C:\ETAP 7.0
\AutoCAD_GGS(1). Click on the Load button to load the file as an item in Menu Groups
(1)
The location may vary for each version or if ETAP is installed in a folder different from the default
installation folder. In this case the contents of the file ETMenu.mnu also needs to be changed.
The contents of the file ETMenu.mnu are:

//ETAP Menu
***POP17
**ETAPTOOLS
M_ETAPTools [ETAP Tools]
M_ExportGGS [Export Ground Grid] -vbarun C:/ETAP 7.0 /AutoCAD_GGS
/ExportToETAP.dvb!ThisDrawing.ExportGridAndRods;
If ETAP is installed in a folder different from the default installation folder, replace the underlined
portion with the fully qualified location of the file ExportToETAP.dvb.
Click on the page Menu Bar and select the Menu Group C:\ETAP 7.0 (or current
version)\AutoCAD_GGS\ETMenu.mnu. This will add the menu ETAP Tools to the Menus list as shown
below:

Select the last item Help in the list Menu Bar and click on the Insert button. Finally click on the Close
button. This will add the ETAP Tools menu to the AutoCAD main menu, as shown below:
For AutoCAD 2006 or later Versions

On the command line type the command MENULOAD and press the Enter key. This will show the Menu
Customization Editor as shown below:

The Menu Customization editor for AutoCAD 2009 is shown below:

Click on the Browse button and select the file ETMenu2006.cui located in the folder C:\ETAP 7.0 (or
current version)\AutoCAD_GGS. Click on the Load button to load the file as an item in Menu Groups.
Finally click on the Close button. This will add the ETAP Tools menu to the AutoCAD 2006 main menu
as shown below:
The AutoCAD main menu is displayed differently for the 2009 version but after the previous steps will
still include ETAP Tools as shown below:
Creating up the ETAP XML File

Open the drawing file having the Ground Grid. Use the command Export Ground Grid in the ETAP
Tools menu in AutoCAD to export the ground grid data into an ETAP XML file.
Clicking on the command Export Ground Grid will prompt for selection of entities in the AutoCAD
drawing that represent Ground Grid Elements as shown below.

Once the entities representing ground grid elements are selected, press the Enter button, the Default
Parameters Editor is shown.

Conductor Type
Select the type of conductor material. The ground grid created in ETAP will have all conductors with this
type of material.
Rod Type
Select the type of rod material. The ground grid created in ETAP will have all rods with this type of
material.
AutoCAD Drawing Unit

Select the current unit of measurement. The unit of rods and conductors created in ETAP will be
converted into feet, inches, meters, and centimeters according to the unit systems.
Offset (in ETAP Drawing Units)

Type the X and Y coordinates of the top left corner of the ground grid in ETAP.
OK
Click on the OK button to create the ETAP XML file with the name ETAP_GGS.XML in the same
location as the AutoCAD drawing file. If the file already exists, a dialog box is displayed to confirm
overwriting it. Once the file is created a message as shown below is displayed.
Cancel
Click on the Cancel button to cancel the creation of ETAP XML file.

AutoCAD Entity to ETAP Element Mapping

Following table shows the mapping of AutoCAD entities to ETAP Ground Grid elements.
AutoCAD Entity ETAP Ground Grid Element

Line One conductor
Polyline One or more conductors
Polygon 3-1024 conductors
Rectangle 4 conductors
Revision Cloud One or more conductors
Circle One rod
Ellipse One rod
Ellipse Arc One rod
Blocks will be broken down into one or more
Blocks
AutoCAD entity types listed above.
Other than above Disregard
For example, a polyline in an AutoCAD drawing will be converted to one or more conductors in an ETAP
project.
40.6.2 Importing the ETAP XML File into an ETAP Project

Import the XML file created in the first step into ETAP. Open an ETAP project and drop a ground grid
element on the ETAP one-line diagram. Double-click on the element to create a new ground grid
presentation by selecting Finite Element Method (FEM) study model. IEEE Method study model does not
support import of ground grids.
Use the command Import From XML File shown below to import the ETAP XML file and create a
Ground Grid.


Chapter 41
CSD Elements
This chapter describes the editors for Control System Diagram (CSD) elements. Except for an element ID
and element connections, all remaining data that appears in the editors are engineering properties. Each
element available on the CSD Edit toolbar has its own customized editor.
Pointer Display Options

Bus Node
Fuse CB
Switch Push Button
Contact Double Contact
Macro-Controlled Contact Wire
Impedance
General Load Light
Control Relay Solenoid

Control System Diagram Simulation Pointer
41.1 Pointer
The pointer is the basic selection and editing tool in a control system presentation. When you are finished
using any of the CSD options, click this button to return to the pointer.

Control System Diagram Simulation Display Options
41.2.1 Device Page

This page presents the options for displaying info annotations for CSD elements. These settings can be
specified for each individual CSD view and for different modes.
ID
Select any of the checkboxes under this heading to display the IDs of the selected CSD elements that are
in use on the control system diagram. If a box is not checked, the element information will not appear on
the diagram (CSD).
V
Select any of the checkboxes under this heading to display the rated or nominal voltages of the selected
elements on the CSD.
When you wish to check wire information, the V checkbox is replaced by an S button. Click on this
button to display the size of your wires on the CSD.

Continuous Rating
Select checkboxes under this heading to display the Burden VA rating of the selected CSD devices on the
CSD.
To show the conductor type for wires, the Continuous Rating checkbox is replaced by a button. Click
on this button to display the conductor type on the CSD.
A
CSD.
Device Type Rating

Control Relay Burden Amp
Solenoid Burden Amp
Light Burden Amp
General Load Burden Amp
Contact Current Rating for Inductive Load (Amp, I)
CB Continuous Amp
Fuse Continuous Amp
Switch Continuous Amp
To show wire length, the A checkbox is replaced by a button. Click on this button to display the wire
length on the one-line diagram.
Z
Select the checkboxes under this heading to display the burden impedance values for control relays,
solenoids, lights, and general loads, and the impedance values of the wires and impedance branches on
the CSD.
For contacts, CBs, fuses, and switches, the Z checkbox is replaced by the button. Click on this button
to display the NO (Normally Open) annotation for contacts, CBs, and switches on the CSD, if their
normal status is open.
Inrush A
Click on this checkbox to display the inrush amp rating on CSD for control relays, solenoids, lights, and
general loads, providing they have an inrush rating entered in the editor.
Note: In the Rating page of the Device Editor, there is an Inrush Rating checkbox to enable/disable the
Inrush Rating section.
Use Default Options

41.2.2 Colors Page

This page allows you to select a pre-defined global color theme by name from the drop-down list, or to
create and name your own unique color themes for device annotations.
Color Theme
If you have already created one or more previously defined color themes, you can select one from the list
by its name. The selected color theme will apply whenever the Global Theme option button is selected.
Theme
Clicking on the Theme button brings up the Theme Editor, where existing color themes can be edited and
saved under a new name or an entirely new color theme can be defined. Color themes are applied
globally within a project file.
Note: Changes made to any color theme displayed on this page and saved under the same name could
affect the appearance of other modes and presentations if the color theme has been previously applied in a
global fashion.

Theme
This option specifies that the color theme selected in the color Theme list for element annotations is to be
applied globally throughout all CSD diagrams. When this option is selected, the name assigned to the
applied color theme is also displayed in a box at the right of the button.
User-Defined
Use this option to specify a color for CSD element annotations. When this option is selected, the DC
element annotation color selection list appears and allows you to choose a new annotation color.
DC Element Annotation Color

When the User-Defined annotation color option is selected, this field is enabled, allowing you to define a
color for DC element annotations in the CSD.

CSD Elements DC Bus Editor
41.3 DC Bus Editor

Enter the properties of the DC buses in your control system diagram in this Data Editor. A DC bus in a
CSD always appears in a paired presentation that includes a positive bus and a negative bus. The buses
can be stretched and moved together. They share the same property editor. You can connect CSD
elements, such as devices, wires, and protective devices, between the positive and negative buses to create
a control system circuit.
41.3.1 Info Page

The Info page is where you specify the bus ID, In/Out of Service, FDR Tag, Equipment Name and
Description. The ETAP program automatically updates Nominal kV and Initial/Operating Voltage.
Info
ID
ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (dcBus) plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.
The default ID (dcBus) for the DC bus can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from

Nominal V
The Nominal V of a bus is automatically updated by ETAP from the connected CSD source, which is
normally an Elementary Diagram element in the DC system. The rated voltage of the connected CSD
source is placed in this field. If a bus is connected to multiple sources, the rated voltage of one of the
sources will be set to this field. If a bus is not connected to any source, the Nominal V will be zero.
Note: This value will not affect CSD calculations.
In Service /Out of Service

The operating condition of a bus is specified by selecting either the In Service or Out of Service option.
The properties of an Out of Service bus can be edited just like an In Service bus; however, an Out of
Service bus will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service bus automatically becomes dimmed in the CSD presentation.
Initial Voltage
%
Enter the initial bus voltage in percent of the bus nominal voltage. This value is not used in CSD
calculations. The voltage defaults to 100 percent.
Operating Voltage
After CSD studies are run, the operating voltage of the bus is displayed in this field. This value will not
change until a new simulation study is run, i.e., the operating voltage of the bus for the last steady state of
the CSD simulation is displayed.
Polarity
Positive & Negative
This radio button pair indicates the bus from which the editor is opened. When the editor is opened from
Positive (or Negative) bus on CSD, the Positive (or Negative) option will appear to be selected. Both
buttons are shown as semi-transparent since they are not user selectable.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Enter the feeder tag in this field, which allows up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter an equipment name in this field, which allows up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter the equipment description in this field, which allows up to 100 alphanumeric characters.

41.3.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
These fields permit you to track additional data associated with this component. The names of the User-
equipment reference number or any other number here, use up to five digits.
and enter any additional data for this element here, use up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
enter any additional data for this element here, use up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element; use up to 50
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, use up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element in this field, use up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchasing Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element in this field, use up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

41.3.3 Comment Page

refer to entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard keys such as
Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste information.

CSD Elements Node Editor
41.4 Node Editor

Click on one of the nodes on the CSD View to activate the CSD DC Node Editor.
Info
ID
This field allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters. ETAP
automatically assigns a unique ID to each CSD Node. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID Node
plus an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.
Operating Voltage
After CSD studies are run, the operating voltage of the node is displayed here. This value will not change
until a new simulation study is run, i.e., the operating voltage of the node for the last steady state of the
CSD simulation is displayed.

DC Elements Fuse Editor
41.5 Fuse Editor

You can enter the properties associated with DC fuses of the CSD in this editor. The process is very
similar to that of the DC Fuse Editor for a DC fuse in a DC system. DC fuse protection devices are
available for a full range of voltages. However, in the current version of ETAP, the information relating
to protection specified in this editor is not used in CSD calculations.
The Fuse Editor consists of header information and tabs for the seven pages listed below:
Info Page
Rating Page
TCC kA Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected fuse model on each page of the DC Fuse Editor.
Fuse Selected Fuse

Manufacturer Fuse Max. Volts Size ID Lock Icon
Fuse Model Speed Short-Circuit data

for selected size
Manufacturer
Manufacturer name of the fuse selected from the library.
Max. Volts
Displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected fuse in Volts.
Size
Displays the ID of the selected size for the fuse.
Lock
specified).
Model
This field displays the model name of the fuse as selected from the library.
Speed
This field displays the speed classification of the selected fuse.

Interrupting data
This field displays the short-circuit interrupting kA for the selected fuse size.
41.5.1 Info Page

Specify the DC fuse ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and
Description, Configuration Status, and view the DC fuse online status in the Info page.
Info
ID
This field allows you to enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters. ETAP
automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC fuse.
The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer, which starts with the number one and increases
as the number of DC fuses increases. The default ID (dcFuse) for DC fuses can be changed from the
From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC fuse are designated as From and To buses. If a terminal of a
DC fuse (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry is shown for its bus ID. If a terminal of a

DC fuse is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be displayed for the
terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC fuse to a bus, select a bus from the list box. The one-
line diagram will update to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the fuse to other dc elements that reside in the same view where it
resides or you can connect them to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot establish connections to elements that have been
deleted and reside in the Dumpster.
If a DC fuse is connected to a bus through a number of protective devices, reconnection of the DC fuse to
a new bus from this editor will also reconnect the last protective device in the circuit to the new bus, as
shown below, where DCFuse1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
As a convenience, ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses in close proximity to the From and To bus
IDs.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC fuse can be specified by selecting either the In Service or the Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC fuse can be edited just like an In Service DC
fuse; however, an Out of Service DC fuse will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity
Check is activated, an Out of Service DC fuse is automatically grayed out in the one-line diagram. All
loads and branches energized solely through an Out of Service DC fuse will also be de-energized and
shown as grayed out.
status. Therefore, you can set a DC fuse to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service in
Revision Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC fuse (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close or Open
of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will save under the specified
configuration.
Note: Status is not included as part of the engineering properties. For this reason, the name of the
configuration status appears above the status of the fuse to indicate that this is the fuse status under this
specific configuration, i.e., you can have a different operating status under other configurations. In the

following example, the status of a fuse shows as closed in the Normal configuration and open in the
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the feeder tag in this field, use up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter equipment name in this field, use up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description in this field, use up to 100 alphanumeric characters.

41.5.2 Rating Page
Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select that standard. Note that once the fuse is selected from
the fuse library Quick Pick the standard is set based on the library entry and is for display only (the
selection is grayed out and cannot be edited, as shown above).

Click on the ANSI Standard button to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE
Standards. When a DC Fuse is selected from library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set
to their corresponding values chosen from the Quick Pick. With the exception of Size, changing the
value(s) after selecting a fuse from library Quick Pick will cause the header to turn a blue color indicating
that the substituted library data has been modified.

Voltage
Select a voltage from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in Volts. When
a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. voltage selected from library
Quick Pick.
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse. Note that the Size
field will be empty when no fuse is selected from the library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amps
Select an Amps value from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC Fuse in
amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the fuse size when a fuse is selected from
library Quick Pick.
Interrupting
Select an Interrupting kA rating from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the DC
Fuse in kA. Note that when a Fuse is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value
for the selected fuse size from library Quick Pick.

Click on IEC Standard to enter the ratings for DC Fuse in accordance with IEC Standards. When a DC
Fuse is selected from the library Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their
Voltage
Select a voltage from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC Fuse in Volts. When
a Fuse is selected, the Rated voltage value will be set equal to the Max. Voltage selected from library
Quick Pick.
Size
Select from the drop-down list and display the size in amperes for the selected DC fuse.
Note: The Size field will be empty when no fuse is chosen from the library Quick Pick.

Rated Amps
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the rated continuous current for the DC Fuse in
amperes. When you select a fuse from the library Quick Pick, the Continuous Amp value will be set
equal to the fuse size.
Breaking
Make a selection from the drop-down list or enter the breaking for the DC Fuse in kA.
Note: When a Fuse is selected, the breaking value will be set equal to the kA value for the fuse size
selected from the library Quick Pick.
Library (Quick Pick)

To select a Fuse from the Fuse Library click on the Library button and the Library Quick Pick Fuse
window will appear. Select a Fuse from the Library Quick Pick by highlighting the Manufacturer name
and fuse Model-Max V-Speed, which are unique records. Then select the desired size and short-circuit
interrupting kA. Now click on the OK button. This will retrieve the selected data from the library and
transfer it to the editor.
Note: When a selection is made from library data, the fuse manufacturer and model name along with
other details are displayed on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data
afterwards, the text in the header area will change from black to a dark blue color to indicate that the
The information available in the Fuse Library Quick Pick is described below.

Standard
Click on either the ANSI or IEC option to select a device standard.
Note: The Standard selection in the Fuse library Quick Pick (and hence the fuse models displayed) will
default to the selection made for the standard on the Rating page. You can change the standard selection
on the Quick Pick if you so desire.
AC/DC
Displays that the Fuse is DC. This option is shown grayed out and is non-editable.
Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This area displays a list of all DC Fuse manufacturers that are included in the library for the selected
standard. Click the manufacturer name to highlight it and select.

Lock
The lock icon indicates whether the selected library entry is ETAP issued (and therefore locked) or
unlocked (meaning user-specified). Only unlocked entries can be modified.
Reference
This area displays the Manufacturer reference, if one is available, for the selected manufacturer. For
example, Siemens is the reference manufacturer for ITE.
Link
This area displays the Manufacturer web link or URL address.
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays a list of all fuse models for the selected standard and fuse manufacturer.
These models are displayed in the format of Model Max V Speed, which forms a unique record name
in the fuse library. Click on the preferred Model Max V Speed entry to highlight it and select it.
Lock
Size and Short-Circuit data

Size
This column displays a list of all the sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Speed record for
DC fuse. To select a size from the Quick Pick, click on it to highlight it. Note that the sizes listed for the
selected Fuse model is not the ampere value, but the ID for the ampere value provided by the
manufacturer.
Cont. Amp
This column displays the ampere value corresponding to each size for the selected fuse model.

This column displays the short-circuit interrupting rating in kA that corresponds to each size for the
selected ANSI fuse model.

This column displays the short-circuit breaking in kA corresponding to each size for the selected IEC
fuse model.

Lock
Model Info
The five areas to the right of the three Quick Pick libraries provide additional reference information about
your fuse selection:
Class
This field displays the Class (Fuse link, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Type
This field displays the Type (Power Fuse, etc.) for the selected fuse model.
Brand Name
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Application
This field displays the application for the selected fuse model


The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC fuse curves in Star View are specified in the TCC kA
page of the DC Fuse Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be set to Calculated or User-Defined, the
default setting being the User-Defined option.
User-Defined
Selecting the User-defined option allows you to enter the short-circuit kA values for TCC clipping.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value. This value
will not be updated by ETAP for a fuse in CSD, since no short-circuit calculation is available for CSD.

Check this box to enable the fault arrow in Star view.
Fault kA
If the Calculated option has been selected, this field displays the short-circuit current in kA. The fault kA
field is editable if the User-Defined option is selected.

Base V
Base V is for display only if the Calculated option is selected. In the User-Defined option, Base V is
editable.
base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device curve will shift
by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.

Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values for the selected fuse.

Model Info
This page displays information regarding the selected fuse model.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available, for selected fuse model.
Brand Name
Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected fuse model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number of the selected fuse model.
Description
This field displays the description of the selected fuse model.

Application
This field displays the application of the selected fuse model.

41.5.5 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
This field displays the name of the last person making modifications to the data.
Date
This field displays the date of the last change. The format for the date can be modified from the Projects
menu in the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
This field displays the name of the person logging in as a Checker to check the data.
Date
This field displays the date when the data was checked. The format for the date entry can be modified
from the Projects menu in the menu bar.

41.5.6 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be modified from the Settings option in the Project menu in the menu bar.

the equipment reference number or any other number here, entering up to five digits.

and enter any extra data for this element here, entering up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

and enter any extra data for this element here, use up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

and add any extra data for this element here, entering up to 12 alphanumeric characters.

UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element, entering up to 50
alphanumeric characters. For example, the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, entering up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Enter the manufacturers name for this element here, entering up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Purchase Date
Enter the date of purchase for this element here, entering up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

41.5.7 Comment Page
This field allows you to enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or
studies, that you want associated with this element. The additional text can be up to 64kb with a default
size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
When entering information in this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key
combinations, such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V, can be used to cut, copy, and paste new information.

DC Elements Circuit Breaker Editor
41.6 Circuit Breaker Editor

Use this editor to enter the properties associated with DC circuit breakers. This editor functions much the
same as the DC Circuit Breaker Editor for a DC fuse in a DC system. DC circuit breaker protection
devices are available for a full range of voltages. However, in the current version of ETAP, the
information related to protection can be specified in the editor, but it is not used in CSD calculations.
The DC Circuit Breaker Editor contains eight pages of information and the header information for each
page.
Header Information
Info Page
Rating Page
Trip Device Page
TCC kA (Short-circuit clipping) Page
Model Info Page
Checker Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
Header
The header displays the selected breaker model and trip device information on each page of the DC
Circuit Breaker Editor.

Manufacturer Volts Interrupting data Lock Icon
Breaker Model
and Pole Breaker
available sizes
Trip device Trip device Trip device

Manufacturer Model ID
Manufacturer
This field shows the Manufacturer name of the breaker as selected from the library.
V max.
This field displays the maximum rated voltage for the selected breaker in Volts.
Interrupting data
This field displays the selected short-circuit interrupting kA at the applied voltage for the breaker.

Lock
Model
This field shows the model name of the breaker that you have selected from the library.
Pole
This field displays the breaker pole that you have selected from the library.
Size
The drop-down list displays the size choices in amperes available for the selected breaker. Click
on an entry to highlight it and select.
Trip device manufacturer

This field displays the name of the manufacturer of the selected trip device.
Trip device model

This field displays the model name of the selected trip device.
Trip device ID
This field displays the trip ID for the device you have selected from the library.

41.6.1 Info Page

You specify the DC circuit breaker ID, connected bus/load, In/Out of Service, Ratings, Equipment FDR
(feeder) Tag, Name, Description, and Configuration Status in the Info Page.
Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID with a maximum of 25 characters in this field.
ETAP automatically assigns a unique ID to each DC circuit breaker. The assigned IDs consist of the
default ID plus an integer, starting with the number one and incrementing as the number of CBs increases.
The default ID (dcCB) for DC circuit breakers can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or

From & To
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC circuit breaker are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a breaker (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for its bus ID.
If a terminal of a DC breaker is connected to a branch, directly or indirectly, the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a DC breaker to a bus, select a bus from
Note: You can connect the terminals of the circuit breaker to other dc elements that reside in the same
view as it, or you can connect it to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and
internal pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that are currently residing in the
Dumpster.
If a DC breaker is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices, reconnection of the
DC breaker to a new bus from this editor will reconnect the last existing protective device to the new bus,
as shown below where DCCB1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
For your convenience, ETAP displays the nominal V of the buses connected to the From and To bus IDs.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC circuit breaker can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out
of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC circuit breaker can be edited like an In Service
DC circuit breaker; however, an Out of Service DC circuit breaker will not be included in any system
studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC circuit breaker automatically
becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized solely through an Out
of Service DC circuit breaker will also be de-energized and be shown as grayed out.
Note: The In/Out of Service option is an engineering property that is independent of the configuration
status. Therefore, you can set a DC circuit breaker to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of Service
in Revision Data.
Configuration
You can change the status of a DC circuit breaker (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the Close
or Open options. Once the configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any subsequent
manipulation of the status of an element (circuit breaker, fuse, motor, or static load) will save under the
specified configuration.

status is shown above the status of the DC circuit breaker to indicate that this is the breaker status under
the specific configuration, i.e., you can have different operating status under different configurations. In
the following example, the status of a DC circuit breaker shows as closed under Normal configuration and
open under Emergency configuration.
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the feeder tag in this field, use up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Enter equipment name in this field, use up to 50 alphanumeric characters.
Description
Enter equipment description in this field, use up to 100 alphanumeric characters.

41.6.2 Rating Page
Standard
To select an electrical standard click on either the ANSI or IEC option.
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the Breaker Library Quick Pick, the standard field is set based on
the library entry, shows grayed out, and non-editable.

Type
Select the type of breaker from the drop-down list. DC circuit breakers include Molded Case, Power, and
Insulated case breakers.
Note: Once the breaker is selected from the Breaker Library Quick Pick, the LVCB type is set based on
the library entry and is non-editable.

Click on the Library button to select the DC circuit breaker data for a selected standard and type.
Exclude Trip Device

Check this box to exclude the trip device selection from DCCB Library Quick Pick. The Breaker Library
Quick Pick will launch without the trip device information.
Note: The Exclude Trip Device checkbox is not a saved property of the editor and hence will reset to
unchecked once the Rating page is refreshed.
To select a circuit breaker from the DC Circuit Breaker Library click on the Library button and the
Library Quick Pick - LV Circuit Breaker window will appear. Select a DC circuit breaker from the
Library Quick Pick by highlighting the Manufacturer name and breaker Model-Max V-Pole, which is a
unique record. Select the desired applied voltage and short-circuit interrupting kA. Select the size and
the desired trip device for that size. Then click on the OK button to retrieve the selected data from the
Note: Upon selection of library data, the breaker manufacturer, model and trip device details will display
on the editor header. Should any changes be made in the retrieved library data, the library header text
will change to a dark blue color to indicate that the substituted library data has been modified.
The information available in the Breaker Library Quick Pick is described below.
Standard

Note: The Standard selection in the Breaker Library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed)
will default to the standard selected on the Rating page. The standard selection can be changed on the
Quick Pick if desired.
AC/DC
This field indicates that the breaker is DC. This option is grayed out and is non-editable.
Type
Select the breaker type from the drop-down list. The DC breaker types include Molded Case, Power and
Insulated Case breakers.
Note: The Type selection in the Breaker Library Quick Pick (and hence the breaker models displayed)
will default to what you have selected as the breaker type on the Rating page. The breaker type selection
can be changed on the Quick Pick if desired.

Manufacturer
Manufacturer Name
This field displays a list of all DC breaker manufacturers included in the library for the selected breaker
standard and type. Select the manufacturer by highlighting the manufacturer name.
Reference
Link
Lock
The lock indicates if the selected library entry is locked (ETAP issued) or unlocked (user-specified).
Model
Model Name
The Model section displays a list of all models available for the selected standard, breaker type and
breaker manufacturer. The models are displayed in the form of Model Max V Pole, which forms a
unique record name in the breaker library. Select the Model Max V Pole by highlighting it.
Lock
specified).
Short-Circuit data
ANSI Short-Circuit data
When you select ANSI standard, the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts and the short-
circuit interrupting current for the applied voltage in kA for all breaker types. The short-circuit parameters
are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and short-circuit data
by highlighting the entry, as shown below.
IEC Short-Circuit data

When the IEC Standard is selected the short-circuit data shows the applied voltage in Volts, the ultimate
breaking capacity in kA (Icu) and the service breaking capacity in kA (Ics) for all breaker types. Short-

circuit parameters are explained in more detail in the Ratings section. Select a desired applied voltage and
short-circuit data by highlighting it.
Fused/UnFused
This field displays whether the breaker is fused or unfused.
Size
Size
This area lists all sizes available for the selected Model Max. V Pole record for the breaker. Highlight
a size from the Quick Pick to select it.
Lock
Model Info
Additional information about the selected breaker is displayed according to the parameters described
below.
Reference
This field displays the reference, if available, of the selected breaker model.
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, of the selected breaker model.
Application
Trip Device
The trip device(s) assigned to the selected breaker can be selected by highlighting the trip device type,
manufacturer name, model name and trip ID. The trip device types for a DC breaker include Thermal
Magnetic, Solid state, Motor Circuit Protector and Electro-Mechanical.

Trip Device Type

Select a trip device type from the drop-down list for the selected breaker.

Highlight a trip device manufacturer for the selected trip device type to select it from the list.
Trip Device Model

Highlight the trip device model for the selected trip device to select it from the list.
ID
Highlight the trip device ID for the selected trip device model from the list to select it.
Note: The ID is labeled as TM ID for Thermal Magnetic trip, Sensor ID for Solid-State trip, MCP ID for
When the Exclude Trip Device box is checked on the Rating page, the Breaker Library Quick Pick
appears as shown below.


Click the button to select the ANSI standard and choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for DC
circuit breaker in accordance with the ANSI/IEEE standards. When a breaker is selected from the library
Quick Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values as assigned from the
Quick Pick. With the exception of the Size field, changing any of these value(s) after selecting a breaker
from library Quick Pick will cause the header text to turn a dark blue color indicating that the substituted
Size
Select a breaker size in amps from the drop-down list.
Note: The Size field will be empty if a breaker is not chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.
Continuous Amps
You can select a rating from the drop-down list or enter the continuous current rating for the DC circuit
breaker in amperes. The Continuous Amps value will be set equal to the breaker size when a breaker is
selected from the library Quick Pick.
Rated V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the rated voltage rating for the DC circuit
breaker in Volts. When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Rated V value will be set
equal to the applied voltage.
Fused
Click on the provided selection box to select a fused or unfused category for all breaker types.
Note: When a DC breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, the Fused checkbox is set to the same
status as that selected from the Quick Pick.
Max. V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC circuit
breaker in Volts. When a breaker is selected, the Max.V value will be set equal to the maximum voltage
for the selected breaker.
Interrupting kA
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Interrupting kA rating for the DC circuit breaker in
kA.

Note: When a breaker is selected, the interrupting kA value will be set equal to the kA value for the
selected applied voltage indicated by the library Quick Pick.

If you click on the IEC standard button, you can choose the breaker type to enter the ratings for DC
circuit breaker in accordance with the IEC standards. When a breaker is selected from the library Quick
Pick, all parameters shown below will be set to their corresponding values according to the Quick Pick
values. With the exception of the Size field, changing the value(s) once a breaker has been selected from
the library Quick Pick will cause the header text to turn a dark blue color to indicate that the substituted
Size
You must select an entry from the drop-down list to display the size in amperes for the selected breaker.
Note: The Size field will be empty if a breaker is not chosen from the breaker library Quick Pick.
Rated Amps
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the ampere rating of the DC circuit breaker.
When a breaker is selected from library Quick Pick, the Rated Amps value will be set equal to the breaker
size.
Rated V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the voltage rating for the DC circuit breaker in
kV. When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Rated V value will be set equal to the
applied voltage selected.
Max. V
You can select an entry from the drop-down list or enter the maximum voltage rating for the DC circuit
breaker in kV. When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Max.V value will be set equal
to the maximum voltage for the selected breaker.
Ultimate Breaking
The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity of a circuit breaker is the value of the short-circuit
conditions.
Select an entry from the drop-down list or enter a value for the Ultimate breaking capacity for the DC
circuit breaker in kA.

Note: When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Ultimate breaking kA value will be set
equal to the Icu (breaking capacity) kA value for the selected applied voltage.
Service Breaking
breaking capacity in kA, provided by the manufacturer for the rated operational voltage under specified
test conditions.
Select from an entry from the drop-down list or enter the value of the Service breaking capacity for the
DC circuit breaker in kA.
Note: When a breaker is selected from the library Quick Pick, the Service breaking kA value will be set
equal to the Ics (service capacity) kA value for the selected applied voltage.
Fused
For all breaker types, select fused or unfused by clicking on the provided selection box.
Note: The Fused checkbox is displayed only when a breaker is not selected from the library Quick Pick.

41.6.3 Trip Device Page

The trip devices for a DC circuit breaker include Thermal Magnetic, Solid-state, Motor Circuit Protector
and Electro-mechanical types. The Trip device page allows you to select and set these trip units.
CB & Trip Device selection logic

The selection of the circuit breaker on the Rating page, affects the data displayed on the Trip Device page.
The logic for this is as described below.
Case 1 DC Circuit Breaker & Trip Device

When a DC circuit breaker is selected along with its associated trip unit from the library Quick Pick on
the Rating page of the Circuit Breaker Editor, the Trip Device page displays the selected trip unit
(Manufacturer, Model, ID).
Case 2 Circuit Breaker only (Exclude Trip device)

When a circuit breaker is selected from the Breaker Library Quick Pick on the Rating page, with Exclude
Trip Device box checked, the Trip Device page will not include the trip device information. A No Trip
device selected message will appear in the Trip Device page status line.


This section describes the settings available for a Thermal Magnetic trip unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type

Select a type from the drop-down list. In this case, Thermal Magnetic trip type is selected.
TM Manufacturer
Select the manufacturer from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for a Thermal
Magnetic trip device.
TM Model
Select model from the drop-down list to display the model name for the selected manufacturer.
TM ID
Select an ID from the drop-down list to display a TM ID for the selected Thermal magnetic trip model.
Beside the TM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected TM ID.

Thermal
The Thermal element of a Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as either a fixed or an adjustable trip.
The available settings are described below.
Fixed Thermal
be adjusted. When the thermal trip is fixed, the thermal section displays FIXED in the thermal trip field.
Adjustable Thermal
The term adjustable thermal indicates that the thermal element of the trip curve follows a fixed curve
shape that can be adjusted. When the thermal trip is adjustable, the thermal section displays a drop-down
list of the available adjustable thermal trip in a percent of the trip device ampere rating. In addition, the
actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the adjustable trip drop-down list.
Magnetic
The Magnetic element of Thermal Magnetic trip unit can be set as fixed, discrete adjustable or continuous
adjustable. The available settings are described below.
Fixed Magnetic
The term fixed magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by fixed
minimum and maximum settings that cannot be adjusted. When the magnetic trip is fixed, the magnetic
section displays FIXED in the magnetic trip field.

The term discrete adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is defined by
discrete values. When the magnetic trip is discrete adjustable, the magnetic section displays a drop-down
list of the available discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating, or in actual
amperes. The actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the discrete adjustable drop-down
list.

Continuous Adjustable Magnetic

The term continuous adjustable magnetic indicates that the magnetic element of the trip curve is
defined by continuously adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is
continuously adjustable, the magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in
multiples trip device ampere rating or in actual amperes. The actual value of the trip in amperes is
displayed next to the Trip field. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed. Note
that the Trip field is bounded by the Trip Range.


This section describes the settings available for Low Voltage Solid State Trip unit (LVSST) on the Trip
Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select the trip device type from the drop-down list to display the Trip device type. In this case, the Solid
State trip type is selected.
SST Manufacturer
Select a manufacturer from the drop-down list to display a manufacturer name for a Solid State trip.

SST Model
Select a model from the drop-down list to display the model name for a selected manufacturer.
Sensor ID
Select an ID from the drop-down list to display the Sensor ID for the selected Solid State trip model. The
actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected Sensor ID next to the Sensor ID field.
Rating Plug
Rating plugs can be defined in amperes, multiples or percent. Select an entry from the drop-down list to
display the Rating Plug for the selected Sensor ID. The Rating plug unit (amperes/multiples/percent) and
the actual value of the trip in amperes are displayed next to the Rating Plug Field for the selected Rating
plug. An example of Rating plugs in multiples and the actual trip displayed is shown below.
Phase Settings
The Phase settings for Solid State trip unit includes three elements Long-Time, Short-Time, and
Instantaneous (or Override). Each element is defined by its pickup and band settings. The available
settings are described below.
Long -Time
Check this box to enable the Long-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Long-Time
Long -Time Pickup

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time pickup setting for the selected sensor ID.
amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-Time
pickup field.
Long -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Long-Time band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For your convenience, the

continuously adjustable Long-Time band, the range of the band, the multiple at which the band is defined
and band step are displayed next to the Long-Time band field.
Short -Time
Check this box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Short-Time element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then Short-Time
Short-Time Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter a Short-Time pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID.
These pickup settings can be either discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time
pickup in amperes and the pickup step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the
Short-Time pickup field.
Short -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected sensor ID.
The band settings can be either discrete values or continuously adjustable. For your convenience, for the
continuously adjustable Short-Time band, the band step is displayed next to the Short-Time band field.
Short-Time I2T Band

Select the Short-Time I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Short-Time I2T band has two settings,
i.e. IN and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Short-Time band curve inward
(sloped line) and the OUT setting shifts the Short-Time band curve outward (L-shaped).
Instantaneous
Check this box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element remains unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then
Instantaneous settings are not displayed in the editor.
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter an Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Instantaneous pickup in
amperes and pick up step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous
pickup field.

Check this box to enable the Instantaneous Override setting. Checking this box displays the actual
instantaneous override in amperes, for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous Override is enabled, the Instantaneous pickup is grayed out and vice versa.
Ground Settings
The Ground element settings for a Solid State trip unit includes the Ground Pickup, Band and I2T settings.
The available settings are described below.
Ground
Check this box to enable the Ground element setting for the selected Sensor ID.
Note: If the Ground element is unchecked in the library for the selected Sensor ID, then the Ground tab is
not displayed in the editor.
Ground Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Ground pickup setting for the selected Sensor ID. The
pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Short-Time pickup in
amperes and the pickup step (for continuously adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time
pickup field.
Ground Band
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Ground band setting for the selected sensor ID. The
band settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. For your convenience, the band step of
the continuously adjustable Ground band is displayed next to the Ground band field.

Ground Band I2T

Select the Ground I2T band setting from drop-down list. The Ground I2T band has two settings, i.e. IN
and OUT, the default being set to OUT. The IN setting shifts the Ground band curve inward (sloped line)
and the OUT setting shifts the Ground band curve outward (L-shaped).

This section describes the settings available for the Motor Circuit Protector (MCP) unit on the Trip
Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the Trip device type. In this case, the Motor Circuit
Protector type is selected.

MCP Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for Motor Circuit Protector.
MCP Model
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the model name for selected manufacturer.
MCP ID
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the MCP ID for the selected Motor Circuit Protector
model. The actual value of the trip in amperes is displayed next to the MCP ID field for the selected MCP
ID.
The Motor Circuit Protector unit can be set as discrete adjustable or continuous adjustable. The available
settings are described below.
Discrete Adjustable
The Discrete Adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by discrete values. When
the magnetic trip is discretely adjustable, the magnetic section displays a drop-down list of the available
discrete magnetic settings in multiples of trip device ampere rating, or in actual amperes.
The Continuous Adjustable setting indicates that the magnetic element is defined by continuously
adjustable values between the low and high trip. When the magnetic trip is continuously adjustable, the
magnetic section displays a Trip field for user to enter the magnetic setting in multiples of trip device
ampere rating or in actual amperes. The trip range available for the selected trip unit is also displayed.


This section describes the settings available for the Electro-Mechanical unit on the Trip Device page.
Trip Device
Trip Device Type
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the Trip device type. In this case, the Electro-
EM Manufacturer
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the manufacturer name for Electro-Mechanical trip unit.
EM Model
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the model name for the selected manufacturer.

EM ID
Select an item from the drop-down list to display the EM ID for the selected Electro-Mechanical trip
model. Next to the EM ID field, the actual value of trip in amperes is displayed for the selected EM ID.
Long-Time
Long -Time
Check this box to enable the Long-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Long-Time element remains unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Long-
Time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Long -Time Pickup

Select an item from the drop-down list, or enter the Long-Time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID.
amperes and the pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Long-Time
pickup field.
Long -Time Band

Select the Long-Time band curve label from drop-down list for the selected EM ID. Each label for the
Long-Time band is associated with a fixed-point based curve that defines the shape of the Long-Time
band curve.
Short-Time
Short-Time
Check this box to enable the Short-Time element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Short-Time element remains unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Short-
Time settings are not displayed in the editor.
Short-Time Pickup
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time pickup setting, for the selected EM ID.
amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Short-Time pickup
field.
Short -Time Band

Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Short-Time band setting for the selected EM ID. The
band settings can be discrete or continuously adjustable. For your convenience, the band step is displayed
next to the Short-Time band field for the continuously adjustable Short-Time band.

When the Short-Time band is discrete, it can be defined as a Horizontal band (Minimum/Maximum
clearing times) or as a point based Curve. The example below shows the discrete Short-Time band
defined as a Horizontal band.
Note: The term for this field is Horizontal Band.
Another example with discrete Short-Time band defined as a curve is shown below.
Note: The term for this field is Band.
Instantaneous
Instantaneous
Check the box to enable the Instantaneous element for the selected EM ID.
Note: If the Instantaneous element is unchecked in the library for the selected EM ID, then Instantaneous
Select an item from the drop-down list or enter the Instantaneous pickup setting for the selected EM ID.
The pickup settings can be discrete values or continuously adjustable. The actual Instantaneous pickup in
amperes and pickup step (for continuous adjustable pickup) are displayed next to the Instantaneous
pickup field.


The short-circuit currents used for clipping the DC breaker trip unit curves in Star View are specified in
the TCC kA page of DC Circuit Breaker Editor. The clipping currents in kA can be set to Calculated or
User-Defined, the default setting is the User-Defined option.
User-Defined
When you select the User-defined option you are able to enter the short-circuit kA values for TCC
clipping.
Calculated
Selecting the Calculated option displays the system calculated, short-circuit fault kA value. Currently,
this value will not be updated from ETAP, since short-circuit is not available in CSD.


Check this box to enable the fault arrow in Star view.
Fault kA
This field displays the short-circuit current in kA for the Calculated option. When using the User-defined
option, the fault kA field is editable.
Base V
The Base V text is display only when using the Calculated option. For the User-Defined option, Base V is
editable.
base voltage equals 250V and the Star View Plot kV is set to 0.5 kV (500V), the device curve will shift
by a factor of Base kV / Plot kV or 0.5.

Check this box to disable updating of the system calculated short-circuit kA values for the selected
breaker only.

Model Info
Additional information regarding the selected breaker model is displayed on this page.
Reference
This field displays the model reference, if available, of the selected breaker model
Brand Name
This field displays the brand name, if available, of the selected breaker model.
Catalog #
This field displays the catalog number of the selected breaker model.

Issue Date
This field displays the date of issue of the catalog for the selected breaker model.
Description
This field displays a description of the selected breaker model.
Application
41.6.6 Checker Page
Edited by
User Name
This field displays the name of the last person who made modifications to the data.

Date
This field displays the date of that change. The format for the date can be changed from the Projects
menu in the menu bar.
Checked by
User Name
Date
41.6.7 Remarks Page

User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to maintain additional data associated with this component. The names of the

the equipment reference number, or any other number here, up to five digits in length.



UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Enter the name or ID of a one-line drawing or diagram associated with this element in this field, up to 50
alphanumeric characters. An example is the title of a manufacturer diagram or the titles and part numbers
of specifications for this element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name

Purchase Date
41.6.8 Comment Page

DC Elements Switch Editor
41.7 Switch Editor

The properties associated with a switch used in the CSD can be entered in this editor. This is the same
editor as the DC Single-Throw Switch Editor for a Single-Throw Switch in a DC system.
The Single-Throw Switch Editor contains three pages of information.

Info Page
Remarks Page
Comment Page
41.7.1 Info Page

Within the Info page, specify the DC single-throw switch ID, connected bus ID, In/Out of Service,
Ratings, Equipment FDR (feeder) Tag, Name and Description, Configuration Status, view the online
status of the DC single-throw switch (closed or open), and its application or association and that ID. The
field at the bottom of the Info page is a pull down list of all the DC switches in the CSD.

Info
ID
Enter a unique alphanumeric ID having a maximum of 25 characters in this field. ETAP automatically
assigns a unique ID to each DC switch. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID plus an integer,
starting with the number one and increasing as the number of DC single-throw switches increases.
The default ID (dcS) for DC single-throw switches can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu
bar, or from the Project View.
To & From
Bus IDs for the connecting buses of a DC single-throw switch are designated as From and To buses. If a
terminal of a switch (From or To) is not connected to any bus, a blank entry will be shown for the bus ID.
If a terminal of a switch is connected to a branch (directly or indirectly), the ID of the branch will be
displayed for the terminal connection. To connect or reconnect a switch to a bus, select a bus from the list
box. The one-line diagram will be updated to show the new connection after you click on OK.
Note: You can connect the terminals of the switch to other dc elements that reside in the same view where
it resides or you can connect to elements that reside in other views by connecting the external and internal
pins of the composite networks. You cannot connect to elements that are currently residing in the
Dumpster.
If a DC single-throw switch is connected to a bus through a number of other protective devices,

to the new bus, as shown below where DCSPST1 is reconnected from DCBus10 to DCBus4.
In/Out of Service
The operating conditions of a DC single-throw switch can be selected by choosing either the In Service or
Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service DC single-throw switch can be edited like an
In Service DC single-throw switch; however, an Out of Service DC single-throw switch will not be
included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service DC single-throw
switch automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram. All the loads and branches energized
solely through an Out of Service DC single-throw switch will also be de-energized and become grayed
out.
status. Therefore, you can set a DC single-throw switch to be In Service for the Base Data and Out of

Configuration
You can change the status of a DC single-throw switch (for the selected configuration) by clicking on the
Closed or Open options. Once a configuration status is selected for a one-line presentation, any
subsequent manipulation of the status of an element (switch, fuse, motor, or static load) will save under
following example, the status of a DC single-throw switch shows as closed under Normal configuration
and open under Emergency configuration.
Rating
V
Enter the rated voltage of the DC single-throw switch in volts in this field, or select the rating from the
drop-down list box.
Cont. Amp
Enter the rated continuous current of the DC single-throw switch in amperes in this field, or select the
rating from the drop-down list box.
BIL
Enter the basic impulse levels in kV. This value is not used in any calculations at this point.
Momentary
Enter the rated short-circuit withstand capability of the DC single-throw switch in kA or select the rating
from the list box. This value represents the momentary capability (making or bracing) of the switch and
is used in DC short-circuit studies to compare against the calculated fault duty of the connected bus.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description

41.7.2 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info





UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date

41.7.3 Comment Page

CSD Elements Push Button Editor
41.8 Push Button Editor
41.8.1 Info Page
ID
assigns a unique ID to each pushbutton element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (PB) plus an
integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.
The default ID (PB) for the pushbutton can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from
From / To
This two fields display the ID of the connected elements of a pushbutton. A pushbutton can be connected
between two nodes, a bus and a node, a bus and a device, or a bus and a branch.
In Service / Out of Service
The operating condition of a pushbutton can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of
Service option. The properties of an Out of Service pushbutton can be edited like an In Service

pushbutton; however, an Out of Service pushbutton will not be included in any system studies. When
Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service pushbutton automatically becomes grayed out in the
CSD presentation.
Operating Time
The pushbutton represented in ETAP is of the momentary contact type. Without external force, it is at the
Initial (Normal) state, which can be defined by the user. When pressed, it will stay in the Off-Normal
state for a short time and then return to the Normal state. Operating time is the time duration in
millisecond that the pushbutton stays in the Off-Normal state once pressed.
Initial (Normal) State
A pushbutton takes this state when no external force is applied. There are two options to choose from:
Normally Open and Normally Closed.
Normally Open
When the Normally Open is selected, the pushbutton will stay open when no external force is applied.
Once pressed, it will be closed for a short time defined in the Operating Time field and then returns to an
open state.
Normally Closed
When the Normally Closed is selected, the pushbutton will stay closed when no external force is applied.
Once pressed, it will be open for a short time defined in the Operating Time field and then returns to a
closed state.
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the tag number in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description

41.8.2 Remarks Page
User Defined Info


UD Field 5
UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

41.8.3 Comment Page


CSD Elements Control Relay Editor
41.9 Control Relay Editor

In ETAP, four elements in the Control System Diagram are called devices. They are Control Relay,
Solenoid, General Load, and Light. The Property Editors for these devices have a similar set up.
41.9.1 Info Page
Info
ID
ID to each control relay element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (Dev) plus an integer, starting
with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.

The default ID (Dev) for the control relay can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control System
diagram submenu, Device item) in the menu bar or from the Project View by entering a new name with
up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From Node
A device, such as a control relay, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field shows the
ID of the node/bus connected at the From side of the control relay.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the control relay.

The operating condition of a device can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service device can be edited like an In Service device; however, an
Out of Service device will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an
Out of Service device automatically becomes grayed out in the CSD presentation.
Calculation Model
ETAP provides two methods to model a control relay: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle. The
method can be selected from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control System Diagram
Study Case.
When this option is selected in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Rating page of the Device
Editor will be used to represent the device. The model includes burden rating and inrush rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of the
Device Editor will be used to represent the device.
Note: In the current version of ETAP, if this option is selected, the control logic between this control
relay and the contacts listed in the Contact page will not be simulated in the calculations. These contacts
will stay in their normal state during CSD simulations.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Enter an equipment description in this field, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are ten data types and you can change their name from the Project

Priority
Select the load priority of this battery from the list box. This field can be used for load priority, operating
priority, load shedding priority, etc. You can select from ten different priorities provided in the list and
you can change their names by using the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
41.9.2 Rating Page

The Rating page holds parameters for voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush rating of a control relay.
The parameters can be entered manually, or retrieved from the Control Relay Library. The rating
parameters consist of three sections: voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
Library Quick Pick

Click the Library button to retrieve control relay parameters from the Control Relay library. When the
library button is clicked, the CSD Library Quick Pick dialog box will appear. It displays all control relays
entered in the library associated with the project. The Quick Pick dialog includes a Manufacturer list,
Model list, and Device list. When a new Manufacturer is selected, the Model list will be filled with all

model types for the selected manufacturer. Once a specific model is selected from the Model list, all the
control relays for the model will be listed in the Device list.
1. To select a device from the library, click on its entry in the device list and press the OK button.
The control relay data will then be substituted in the Control Relay Editor.
2. Note: The control relay selected from library may have contacts associated with it. These
contacts are controlled by the control relay. If this is the case, the contact information will also be
retrieved from the library and substituted in the Contact page of the Control Relay Editor.
3. The Quick Pick dialog also contains several other buttons. Clicking on the Help button will bring
up ETAP online help. Clicking on the Cancel button will close the Quick Pick dialog without any
data being transferred.
4. If the None button is clicked, the library data information located next to the Library button in the
Rating page of the Control Relay Editor will be blanked out. However, the data in the Control
Relay Editor that may have been retrieved previously from the library will not be changed.
Additionally, when the None button is clicked, if there are unassigned contacts on the Contact
page that has Relay Lib as a Source, these contacts will be removed from the contact list.
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the control relay. This value serves as the base for other voltage
values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the control relay. The value is a percentage based on
the rated voltage.

%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the control relay. The value is a percentage based on the rated
voltage. This is the minimum voltage across the relay required to change the state of controlled contacts
from their normal state to off-normal state when the control relay becomes energized. If the voltage drop
on the relay becomes less than the Vpickup value anytime from the moment that the relay becomes
energized up to the operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will fail to operate and stay in the
normal state.
%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the control relay. The value is in percent based on the rated
voltage. This is the maximum voltage across the relay that will result in changing the state of controlled
contacts from their off-normal state to normal state. While the control relay is energized, if the voltage
drop on the relay becomes less than the Vdropout value for a duration of the release time of a controlled
contact, the contact will change from its off-normal sate to normal state.
Operating Temp.
Tmin
This field allows you to enter the minimum operating temperature in degree of Celsius. This value is
currently not used in CSD calculations.
Tmax
This field allows you to enter the maximum operating temperature in degree of Celsius. This value is
currently not used in CSD calculations.
Burden Rating
Burden rating is the continuous rating of the control relay. When a control relay is energized, for a short
time the inrush current flows through the control relay, which can be several times higher than the burden
current. After this initial inrush period, the behavior of a control coil is defined by the burden rating.
The burden rating values are related to each other and to the rated voltage. Once a rating value, such as
the Amp value, is changed, the other rating values will be automatically updated to keep the integrity of
parameters based on Ohms law.
W
Enter the power rating in watts. This is the continuous power rating of a DC control relay.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a DC control relay.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere. For a DC control relay, the VA rating is the same as
the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the control relay under normal operating conditions, that is, when the
rated voltage is applied across the control relay.
%Tol
Enter the burden rating tolerance as a percent. This value is used to adjust the burden load of a control
relay. In CSD calculations, the burden is adjusted in a conservative way. When a 10% tolerance is
entered, for a constant Z device its resistance will be reduced by 10% and for a constant VA (or I) device
its VA (or I) will be increased by 10%.

Burden Load Type Constant VA, Constant Z, or Constant I

In CSD calculation, a control relay can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant I device
as a burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to make this selection.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a control relay applies to the initial short duration (in milliseconds) after it becomes
energized. In general, the inrush rating of a control relay is several times higher than its burden rating.
Being similar to the burden rating parameters, the inrush rating values are also related to each other and to
the rated voltage. Once one rating value, such as the Amp value, is changed, the other rating values will
be automatically updated to keep the integrity of parameters based on Ohms law.
Inrush Rating
Because many control relay manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of their control
relays, ETAP provides this checkbox to indicate availability of inrush parameters. If this box is checked,
non-zero inrush rating parameters (such as power and current) must be entered. Otherwise, the CSD
calculations will be blocked. If no inrush rating data is available, simply uncheck this box.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the inrush power rating of a DC control relay.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the inrush current rating of a DC control relay.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere. For DC control relay, the VA rating is the same as
the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms for the control relay during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, it is equivalent to the
case that the Inrush Rating box is not checked.

41.9.3 Contact Page

A control relay controls the states of multiple contacts in order to achieve its control objectives, such as
motor starting control or power circuit breaker operations. The data related to the contacts controlled by a
control relay is entered in the Contact page. From this page, you can add/delete contacts, associate an
unassigned contact with this control relay, and modify contact parameters.
The link between a control relay and its contacts is established by assigning the contacts to the relay. The
assignment can be done either from the CSD view or from the Contact page. When a new contact is
added to a CSD, it is not assigned to any controlling device initially. Double clicking on the contact will
open the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog, where you can select a controlling device, such
as a control relay or a solenoid, to make this assignment. Once a contact has been assigned to a
controlling device, double clicking on the contact will open the Contact page of the controlling device.

Contact List
The contact list in the Contact page contains all the contacts controlled by the control relay. These
contacts may or may not be associated with assigned contact elements in the CSD view. You can make
an assignment from this list for an unassigned contact in CSD view, change contact type, change contact
source type, and modify a contact parameter.
When you are retrieving control relay data from a library, if the selected control relay library data has
controlled contacts, these contacts will be added to the contact list with all contact parameter values.
Each contact will generate a new row with contact parameters displayed in the fields on the row. Initially,
the Contact ID will be blank for these contacts, indicating that no contact element in the CSD view has
been assigned to it. Once a contact element in a CSD view is assigned to a contact in the list, the ID of
the contact element will be displayed in the Contact ID field.
#
This is the order number of contacts controlled by the control relay. When assigning a contact to a relay,
this number is used to identify the individual contact. Once assigned, it becomes part of the ID for the
contact.
Contact ID
For contacts in the list that have been assigned to contact elements in a CSD view, this field displays the
ID of that contact element. The contact element ID is a combination of the controlling device and the
order number of the contact in the contact list.
The assignment of a contact can also be carried out from the Contact ID field. To make an assignment,
click on the Contact ID field of a contact that has not been assigned to a contact element, as an example,
contact number 5 has been selected below. If the CSD view that contains this control relay has unassigned
contact elements, a list will appear when you click the Contact ID field. All unassigned contacts that have
the same type (Convertible or Form C) as contact number 5 are shown in the list. Selecting a contact
from the list will complete the assignment.
Type
There are two types of contacts in ETAP: Convertible contacts and Form C contacts. For contacts that
have data from a library, either the Control Relay Library or the Contact Library, their type is provided by
the manufacturer and therefore it cannot be changed. These contacts have Relay Lib or Relay Lib
Overwrite displayed in the Source field.
For contacts that are added to the list by clicking on the add button, their type can be changed from the
Type field. Clicking on the Type field brings up a selection list where you can choose the required type.
Source
This field shows the data source of a contact. When a contacts data comes from a library, either from the
Control Relay Library or from the Contact Library, this field shows Relay Lib or Contact Lib. In general,
if the parameters of a contact originate from a library, they cannot be modified. There are two exceptions.

One is the Status field, since it is operating related. The second exception is the Type field when the
Source is Contact Lib, because the Type information is not part of Contact Library data.
If you have retrieved contact data from the library and you wish to modify it, change the source type from
Relay Lib (or Contact Lib) to Relay Lib Overwrite (Contact Lib Overwrite). This change allows you to
modify contact parameters. However, if the Source is Relay Lib Overwrite, the contact Type still cannot
be changed, since the manufacturer of the control relay has fixed the type of a contact.
For the contacts added from the page by clicking on the Add button, the Source is initially set as User
Defined. For these contacts, all contact parameters can be modified from the editor.
Status
This field defines the normal status of a contact, which is the state of the contact when the controlling
device is not energized. For a Form C contact, the Status can be either Pos A or Pos B. For a Convertible
or a Fixed contact, the Status can be either NO (Normally Open) or NC (Normally Closed). The Status
field can be changed except when the data Source is Relay Lib and the contact Type is Fixed.
Vrated
Enter rated voltage of the contact in volts. This is the rated operating voltage of the contact.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum contact operating voltage in a percentage based on rated voltage.
R
Enter contact resistance in milliohms. This is the resistance value to be considered in CSD calculations.
In the CSD Study Case, there are options to use individual contact resistance or global contact resistance.
Many contact manufacturers do not provide this value. Since contact resistance is so small comparing to
the resistance values of other elements in ETAP, neglecting contact resistance does not cause a significant
difference in calculation results.
Amp,r
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for resistive load. This rating is for control systems that do not
contain any inductive coils.
Amp,i
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for inductive load. This rating is for control systems that have
a substantial amount of loads as inductive coils. For control systems in electrical power systems, this
rating will be used since most of the loads are control relays and solenoids.
Top
Enter the operating time in milliseconds for the contact. This is one of the most important parameters of
contacts in CSD simulations. Top is the time for a contact, initially at its normal state, to change to off-
normal state, assuming that during the period of Top the voltage drop across the controlling device (a
control relay) of the contact is maintained higher than or equal to the pickup voltage of the controlling
device. It should be noted that different contacts controlled by the same device might have different
operating times.
Trelease
Enter the release time in milliseconds for the contact. This is one of the most important parameters of
contacts in CSD simulations. Trelease is the time for a contact, initially at its off-normal state, to change
to normal state, assuming that during the period of Trelease the voltage drop across the controlling device
(a control relay) of the contact is maintained below the dropout voltage of the controlling device. It
should be noted that different contacts controlled by the same device might have different release times.

Contact Lib
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Part ID from the Contact Library.
Otherwise, the field is blank.
Remark
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Remark from the Contact Library.
When the Source for the contact is User Defined or Lib Overwrite, this field becomes editable, where you
can enter text for up to 50 characters as long as the field width is set wide enough.
Note: The field width can be adjusted from the top of the contact list.
Data Rev.
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Data Revision from the Contact
Library. When the Source for the contact is User Defined or Lib Overwrite, this field becomes editable,
where you can enter text for up to 25 characters as long as the field width is set wide enough.

Reference
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Reference from the Contact Library.
When the Source for the contact is User Defined or Lib Overwrite, this field becomes editable and you
can enter up to 25 characters of text as long as the field width is set wide enough.
Contact Library
The Contact Library button allows you to retrieve contact data for the selected contact from the Contact
Library, assuming that the Source of the contact is User Defined, Contact Lib, or Contact Lib Overwrite.
When the Source of the contact is Relay Lib or Relay Lib Overwrite, the button is disabled.
To retrieve contact data from the Contact Library, select a contact from the list that has the Source of the
contact displayed as User Defined, Contact Lib, or Contact Lib Overwrite and then click the Contact
Library button. This will bring up the Contact CSD Library Quick dialog box, as shown below. This
Quick Pick dialog allows you to make a selection from a list of all contacts in the library.
When an entry in the Contact Quick Pick dialog is selected, clicking on the Ok button will substitute the
selected data to the Contact page of the Control Relay Editor. Pressing the None button will close the
dialog and set the data to zero for the selected contact in the Contact page as well as setting the Source for
the contact to User Defined. When the Cancel button is pressed, ETAP will close the Contact Library
Quick Pick dialog without any data transfer.
Unassign
The Unassign button allows you to remove the link between a CSD contact element and this control relay.
This button becomes enabled when an assigned contact is selected in the contact list of the Contact page.
Clicking the button will convert the contact into an unassigned contact and the Contact ID will become
blank. The data in the in the contact list will stay the same. The contact element in the CSD view can
then be assigned to another controlling device or another unassigned contact in the contact list.
Add
When the Add button is clicked, a new contact will be added to the end of the contact list in the Contact
page. The newly added contact is unassigned and has User Defined as its Source.

Delete
When the delete button is clicked, the selected contact from the contact list will be removed from the list.
If it is an assigned contact, the corresponding contact element in CSD will change to an unassigned
contact.
Revisions for Data in the Contact Page
In the current release of ETAP, the data revision feature is not supported for the data in the Contact page
of the Control Relay Editor. This means that information in the Contact page can only be modified while
the ETAP project is in the Base revision. The information contained in the Contact page includes two
categories: contact assignment and contact engineering data. When switched to a revision other than the
Base, the entire Contact page is disabled, so that neither category of the contact information can be
changed. Accordingly, while the project is in a revision other than the Base, you cannot make an
assignment for an unassigned contact. When you double-click on an unassigned contact, the Contact
Controlling Device Assignment dialog will not appear.


You can specify the duty cycle category and load profile for each duty cycle within the Duty Cycle page.
ETAP displays the load profile for viewing and printing.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify a load profile for each one of the five duty cycle categories. A load profile
defined by a duty cycle consists of a number of consecutive load segments. Each segment is a square
form and is entered in a line in the duty cycle list.
Duty Cycle Category
Select a duty cycle category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each load can
have up to five duty cycle categories with independent load profiles. You can name the duty cycle
categories from the Project menu bar.

Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When this field is clicked, a list of
load types appears. The options include Other, Load, Motor, solenoid, Control Relay, Contact, Constant
P, Constant Z, and Constant I. If Constant I is selected, the device will behave as a constant current load
for the load segment. If Constant P or Motor is selected, the device will behave as a constant power load
for the load segment. If any other option is selected, the device will behave as a constant Z load for the
load segment.
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in this field, which allows you to identify a load segment. It is not
necessary to assign different names for different sections.
%Load
Enter the load for a segment as a percent of the rated burden Amps of the device in this field. When a
new value is entered in this field, the Amp field for the same section will update automatically.
Note: The %Load field for the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must end
with zero value.
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes in this field. When a new value is entered in this field, the
%Load field for the same segment will update automatically.
Note: The Amp field for the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must end with
a zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds in this field. This is the time when the current load
segment starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the St Time of the
following load segment.
Load Profile
To add a load section to the load profile, click on the Ins button to create a new row in the load profile
table. Each row represents a segment of the load profile for this duty cycle.
or press the Delete key.
Click on the Print-> button, and the displayed load profile curve for the selected duty cycle will print.
Note: You can select any of the duty cycle categories when conducting CSD studies. To edit the loading
category names, select Duty Cycle Category from the Project menu.

41.9.5 Remarks Page
User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
alphanumeric characters. An example is the title of a manufacturers diagram or the part number or title
of a specification for this element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date

41.9.6 Comment Page

Enter any additional data or comments regarding the condition, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated
with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field,

CSD Elements Solenoid Editor
41.10 Solenoid Editor

Solenoid is a control device in ETAP used to control valves and contacts.
41.10.1 Info Page
Info
ID
assigns a unique ID to each solenoid element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (Dev) plus an
The default ID (Dev) for the solenoid can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control System

From Node
A device, such as a solenoid, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field shows the ID
of the node/bus connected at the From side of the solenoid.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the solenoid.

Calculation Model
ETAP provides two methods to model a solenoid: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle. The method
can be selected from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control System Diagram Study
Case.
When this option is selected, the model entered in the Rating page of the Device Editor will be used to
represent the device in a CSD simulation. The model includes burden rating and inrush rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of the Device Editor will be used
to represent the device in a CSD simulation.
Note: In the current version of ETAP, if this option is selected, the control logic between this solenoid
and the contacts listed in the Contact page will not be simulated in the calculations. These contacts will
stay in their normal state during CSD simulations.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
Select the load priority of this battery from the list field box. This field can be used for load priority,
operating priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided to select from list and
you can change their name from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.

41.10.2 Rating Page

The Rating page presents the parameters for voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush rating of a solenoid.
These parameters can be entered manually or retrieved from the Solenoid Library. The rating parameters
consist of three sections: voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
Library
Click the Library button to retrieve solenoid parameters from the Solenoid library. When the library
button is clicked, the CSD Library Quick Pick dialog box will appear. It displays all solenoids entered in
the library that are associated with the project. The Quick Pick dialog includes Manufacturer list, Model
list, and Device list. When a new Manufacturer is selected, the Model list will display all model types for
the selected manufacturer. Once a specific model is selected from the Model list, all the solenoids for that
model will be listed in the Device list.
1. To select a device from the library, click on its row in the device list and press the OK button.
The solenoid data will then be substituted in the Solenoid Editor. The solenoid you select from
the library may have contacts associated with it. These contacts are controlled by the solenoid. If

this is the case, the contact information will also be retrieved from the library and substituted in
the Contact page of the Solenoid Editor.
2. The Quick Pick dialog also contains several other buttons. Clicking on the Help button will bring
up ETAP online help. Clicking on the Cancel button will close the Quick Pick dialog without
3. If the None button is clicked, the library data information that appears next to the Library button
in the Rating page of the Solenoid Editor will be blanked out. However, the data in the Solenoid
Editor that may have been previously retrieved from the library will not change. Additionally,
when the None button is clicked, if there are unassigned contacts in the Contact page that has
Solenoid Lib as Source, these contacts will be removed from the contact list.
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the solenoid in this field. This value serves as the base for other
voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the solenoid in this field. The value is a percent based
on the rated voltage.
%Vpickup
Enter the minimum pickup voltage for the solenoid in this field. The value is a percent based on the rated
voltage. This is the minimum voltage across the solenoid that is required to change the state of controlled
contacts from their normal state to an off-normal state when the solenoid becomes energized. If the
voltage drop on the solenoid becomes less than the Vpickup value starting from the moment that the
solenoid becomes energized up to the operating time of a controlled contact, the contact will fail to
operate and will stay in the normal state.

%Vdropout
Enter the maximum dropout voltage for the solenoid in this field. The value is a percent based on the
rated voltage. This is the maximum voltage across the solenoid that will result in changing the state of
controlled contacts from their off-normal state to normal state. While the solenoid is energized, if the
voltage drop on the solenoid becomes less than the Vdropout value for a duration of the release time of a
controlled contact, the contact will change from its off-normal sate to normal state.
Operating Temp.
Tmin
Enter the minimum operating temperature in degrees Celsius in this field. This value is not currently used
in CSD calculations.
Tmax
Enter the maximum operating temperature in degrees Celsius. This value is not currently used in CSD
calculations.
Burden Rating
The Burden rating is the continuous rating of the solenoid. When a solenoid is initially energized, for a
brief period the inrush current can be several times higher than the burden current. After the initial inrush
period, the behavior of a control coil is defined by the burden rating.
The burden rating values are related to each other and to the rated voltage. Once one rating value, such as
the Amp value, is changed, the other rating values will automatically update to keep the integrity of
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the continuous power rating of a DC solenoid.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the continuous current rating of a DC solenoid.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-amperes. For DC solenoid, the VA rating is the same as the
W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the solenoid under normal operating condition in this field, that is,
when the rated voltage is applied across the solenoid.
%Tol
Enter the burden rating tolerance as a percentage in this field. This value is used to adjust the burden load
of a solenoid. In CSD calculations, the burden is adjusted in a conservative way. When a 10% tolerance
is entered, the resistance of a constant Z device will reduce by 10% and for a constant VA (or I) device its
VA (or I) will increase by 10%.
In CSD calculations, a solenoid can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant I device as a
burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to select one of the three choices.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a solenoid applies to the initial short duration (in milliseconds) just after it becomes
energized. In general, the inrush rating of a solenoid is several times higher than its burden rating.

Similar to the burden rating parameters, the inrush rating values are also related to each other and to the
rated voltage. Once one rating value, such as the Amp value, is changed, the other rating values will
automatically update to keep the integrity of parameters based on the Ohms law.
Inrush Rating
Because many solenoid manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of their solenoids,
ETAP provides a checkbox to indicate availability of inrush parameters. If this box is checked, non-zero
inrush rating parameters (such as power and current) must be entered. Otherwise, the CSD calculations
will be blocked. If no inrush rating data is available, simply uncheck this box.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the inrush power rating of a DC solenoid.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the inrush current rating of a DC solenoid.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere. For DC solenoid, the VA rating is the same as the W
rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the solenoid during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, this is equivalent to a
case where the Inrush Rating box is not checked.
Duty
Select the duty of a solenoid from the list or enter the duty in percent in the box. This is the percentage of
time that a solenoid is in service. This field is for user information only, as CSD calculation does not
utilize it.

41.10.3 Contact Page

A solenoid can control the states of multiple contacts in order to achieve its control objectives, such as
valve control operations. The data related to the contacts controlled by a solenoid are entered in the
Contact page. This page allows you to add/delete contacts, associate unassigned contacts with this
solenoid, and modify contact parameters.
The link between a solenoid and its contacts is established by assigning the contacts to the solenoid. This
assignment can be accomplished either from the CSD view or from the Contact page. When a new
contact is added to a CSD, it initially is not assigned to any controlling device. Double clicking on the
contact will open the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog, where you can select a controlling
device, such as a solenoid or a solenoid, to make the assignment. Once a contact has been assigned to a
controlling device, double clicking on the contact will open the Contact page of the controlling device.

Contact List
The contact list in the Contact page contains all the contacts controlled by the solenoid. These contacts
may or may not be associated with assigned contact elements in the CSD view. You can make an
assignment from this list for an unassigned contact in CSD view, change the contact type, change the
contact source type, and modify a contact parameter.
When retrieving solenoid data from a library, if the selected solenoid library data has controlled contacts,
these contacts will add to the contact list with all contact parameter values. Each contact will generate a
new row with contact parameters displayed in the fields on the row. Initially, the Contact ID will be blank
for these contacts, indicating that no contact element in the CSD view has been assigned to it. Once a
contact element in a CSD view is assigned to a contact in the list, the ID of the contact element will
display in the Contact ID field.
#
This is the order number of contacts controlled by the solenoid. When assigning a contact to a relay, this
number is used to identify individual contacts. Once assigned, it becomes part of the ID for the contact.
Contact ID
This field displays the ID of the contact element for contacts in the list that have been assigned to contact
elements in a CSD view. The contact element ID is a combination of the controlling device and the order
number of the contact in the contact list.
The assignment of a contact can also be carried out from the Contact ID field. To make an assignment,
click on the Contact ID field of a contact that has not been assigned to a contact element, for example
contact number 5 as shown below. If the CSD view that contains this solenoid has unassigned contact
elements, a list will appear as you click the Contact ID field. All unassigned contacts that have the same
type (Convertible or Form C) as contact number 5 are included in the list. Selecting a contact from the
list will implement the assignment.
Type
There are two types of contacts in ETAP: Convertible contact and Form C contact. For contacts that have
data from library, either the Solenoid Library or the Contact Library, their type is provided by the
manufacturer and therefore it cannot be changed. These contacts have Solenoid Lib or Solenoid Lib
Overwrite displayed in the Source field.
The type of contacts that were added to the list by clicking on the add button can be changed from the
Type field. Clicking on the Type field brings up a selection list from which you can select the required
type.
Source
This field shows the data source of a contact. For contacts whose data comes from the Solenoid Library
or the Contact Library, this field indicates Solenoid Lib or Contact Lib. In general, if the parameters of a
contact originate from a library, they cannot be modified. There are two exceptions. One is the Status

field, since it is operating related. The second exception is the Type field when the Source is Contact
Lib, because the Type information is not part of Contact Library data.
If you have retrieved contact data from the library and you wish to modify it, change the source type from
Solenoid Lib (or Contact Lib) to Solenoid Lib Overwrite (Contact Lib Overwrite). This change allows
you to modify contact parameters. However, if the Source is Solenoid Lib Overwrite, the contact Type
still cannot be changed, since the manufacturer of the solenoid has fixed the type of a contact.
For the contacts added from the page by clicking on the Add button, the Source is initially set as User
Defined. For these contacts, all contact parameters can be modified from the editor.
Status
This field defines the normal status of a contact, which is the state of the contact when the controlling
device is not energized. For a Form C contact, the Status can be either Pos A or Pos B. For a Convertible
or a Fixed contact, the Status can be either NO (Normally Open) or NC (Normally Closed). The Status
field can still be changed except when the data Source is Solenoid Lib and the contact Type is Fixed.
Vrated
Enter the rated voltage of the contact in volts in this field. This is the rated operating voltage of the
contact.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum contact operating voltage in percent based on rated voltage in this field.
R
Enter contact resistance in milliohms in this field. This is the resistance value considered in CSD
calculations. In the CSD Study Case, there are options to use individual contact resistance or global
contact resistance. Many contact manufacturers do not provide this value. Since it is so small comparing
to the resistance values of other elements in ETAP, neglecting contact resistance does not cause a
significant difference in calculation results.
Amp,r
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for resistive load in this field. This rating is for control
systems that do not contain any inductive coils.
Amp,i
Enter the contact current rating in amperes for inductive load in this field. This rating is for control
systems that have a substantial amount of loads as inductive coils. For control systems in electrical power
systems, this rating will be used since most of the loads are control relays and solenoids.
Top
Enter the operating time in milliseconds for the contact in this field. This is one of the most important
parameters for contacts in CSD simulations. Top is the time for a contact, initially at its normal state, to
change to off-normal state, assuming that during the Top interval the voltage drop across the controlling
device (a solenoid) of the contact is maintained higher than or equal to the pickup voltage of the
controlling device. It should be noted that different contacts controlled by the same device might have a
different operating time.
Trelease
Enter the release time in milliseconds for the contact in this field. This is one of the most important
parameters for contacts in CSD simulations. Trelease is the time for a contact, initially at its off-normal
state, to change to normal state, assuming that during the interval of Trelease the voltage drop across the
controlling device (a solenoid) of the contact is maintained below the dropout voltage of the controlling
device. It should be noted that different contacts controlled by the same device might have a different
release time.

Contact Lib
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Part ID from the Contact Library.
Otherwise, the field is blank.
Remark
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Remark from the Contact Library.
can enter text for up to 50 characters provided the field width is set wide enough.
Data Rev.
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Data Revision from the Contact
Library. When the Source for the contact is User Defined or Lib Overwrite, this field becomes editable,
where you can enter text for up to 25 characters provided the field width is set wide enough.
Reference
If the contact data is retrieved from a library, this field displays the Reference from the Contact Library.
can enter text for up to 25 characters provided the field width is set wide enough.

Contact Library
The Contact Library button allows you to retrieve contact data for the selected contact from the Contact
Library, assuming that the Source of the contact is User Defined, Contact Lib, or Contact Lib Overwrite.
When the Source of the contact is Solenoid Lib or Solenoid Lib Overwrite, the button is disabled.
To retrieve contact data from the Contact Library, select a contact from the list that has the Source of the
contact displayed as User Defined, Contact Lib, or Contact Lib Overwrite and then click the Contact
Library button. This will bring up the Contact CSD Library Quick Pick dialog box, shown below. The
Quick Pick dialog lists all the contacts in the library from which you can make a selection.
When an entry in the Contact Quick Pick dialog is selected, clicking on the Ok button will substitute this
selected data to the Contact page of the Solenoid Editor. Pressing the None button will close the dialog
and the data for the selected contact in the Contact page will be set to zero as well as setting the Source
for the contact information to User Defined. When the Cancel button is pressed, ETAP will close the
Contact Library Quick Pick dialog without transferring any data.
Unassign
The Unassign button allows you to remove the link between a CSD contact element and this solenoid.
This button becomes enabled when an assigned contact is selected in the contact list of the Contact page.
Clicking on the button will make the contact an unassigned one and the Contact ID will become blank.
The data in the in the contact list will stay the same. The contact element in the CSD view can then be
assigned to another controlling device or another unassigned contact in the contact list.
Add
When the Add button is clicked, a new contact will be added to the end of the contact list in the Contact
page. The newly added contact is unassigned and has User Defined as its Source.
Delete
When the delete button is clicked, the selected contact from the contact list will be removed from the list.
If it is an assigned contact, the corresponding contact element in CSD will change to an unassigned
contact.

Revisions for Data in the Contact Page

In the current release of ETAP, the data revision feature is not supported for the data in the Contact page
of the Control Relay Editor. Therefore, any item of information in the Contact page can only be modified
while the ETAP project is in the Base revision. The information contained in the Contact page includes
two categories: contact assignment and contact engineering data. When switched to a revision other than
the Base, the whole Contact page is disabled, so that neither category of the contact information can be
changed. Accordingly, while the project is in a revision other than the Base, you cannot make assignment
for an unassigned contact. When double-clicking on an unassigned contact, the Contact Controlling
Device Assignment dialog will not appear.


You can use the Duty Cycle page to specify the duty cycle category and load a profile for each duty cycle.
Duty Cycle
This section is used to specify the load profile for each of the five duty cycle categories. A load profile is
defined by a duty cycle that consists of a number of consecutive load segments. Each segment is a square
form and is entered in a line in the duty cycle list.
Duty Cycle Category
Select a duty cycle category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each load can
Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When the field is clicked, a list of
load types shows up. The options include Other, Load, Motor, Solenoid, Control Relay, Contact,

Constant P, Constant Z, and Constant I. If Constant I is selected, the device will behave as a constant
current load for the load segment. If Constant P or Motor is selected, the device will behave as a constant
power load for the load segment. If any other option is selected, the device will behave as a constant Z
load for the load segment.
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in this field. It allows you to identify a load segment. The names
for different sections do not have to be different.
%Load
Enter the load for a segment in percent of the rated burden Amps of the device in this field. When a new
value is entered here, the Amp field for the same section will update automatically. The %Load field for
the last load segment is always zero, indicating that a load profile must end with zero value.
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes. When a new value is entered in this field, the %Load field for
the same segment will update automatically. The Amp field for the last load segment is always zero,
indicating that a load profile must end with zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds. This is the time when the current load segment
starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the St Time of next following load
segment.
Load Profile
To add a load section to the load profile, click on the Ins button to create a row in the load profile table.
Each row represents a segment of the load profile for this duty cycle.

User-Defined Info




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
alphanumeric characters. For example, the title of a manufacturers diagram or specifications for this
element.
Reference
Enter the name or ID of a reference drawing or document for this element, up to 50 alphanumeric
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date



CSD Elements Light Editor
41.11 Light Editor

Lights are visual indicating devices used to draw an operators attention to various conditions in the
system, such as the status of a circuit breaker. Lights are common devices in a control system diagram.
41.11.1 Info Page
Info
ID
assigns a unique ID to each light element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (Dev) plus an

The default ID (Dev) for the light can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control System diagram
submenu, Device item) in the menu bar or from the Project View by entering a new name having up to 25
From Node
A device, such as a light, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field shows the ID of
the node/bus connected at the From side of the light.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the light.
Calculation Model
ETAP provides two methods to model a light: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle. The method can
be selected from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control System Diagram Study
Case.
When this option is selected, in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Rating page of the Device
Editor will be used to represent the device. The model includes burden rating and inrush rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, in a CSD simulation, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of the
Device Editor will be used to represent the device.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Enter an equipment description in this field, using up to 100 alphanumeric characters.
Data Type
Priority
priority, load shedding priority, etc. Ten different priorities are provided in the list and you can change
their name from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.

41.11.2 Rating Page

The Rating page holds parameters for voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush rating of a light. The
parameters can be entered manually. The rating parameters consist of three separate sections: voltage
rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the light. This value serves as the base for other voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the light. The value is a percentage based on the rated
voltage.

Burden Rating
Burden rating is the continuous rating of the light. When a light is first energized, for a brief interval it
takes an inrush current that can be several times higher than the burden current. After this initial inrush
period, the behavior of a control coil is defined by the burden rating.
parameters based on the Ohms law.
W
Enter the power rating in watts. This is the continuous power rating of a DC light.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes. This is the continuous current rating of a DC light.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-amperes. For a DC light, the VA rating is the same as the W
rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms for the light under normal operating condition, that is, when the rated
voltage is applied across the light.
In CSD calculation, a light can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant I device as a
burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to select the load type you prefer.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a light applies to the initial brief interval (in milliseconds) after it becomes energized.
In general, the inrush rating of a light is several times higher than its burden rating.
Very similar to the burden rating parameters, inrush rating values are also related to each other and to the
automatically update to keep the integrity of parameters based on the Ohms law.
Inrush Rating
Because many light manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of their lights, ETAP
provides a checkbox to indicate availability of inrush parameters. If this box is checked, non-zero inrush
rating parameters (such as power and current) must be entered. Otherwise, the CSD calculations will be
blocked. If no inrush rating data available, simply uncheck this box.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the inrush power rating of a DC light.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the inrush current rating of a DC light.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere in this field. For DC light, the VA rating is the same
as the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the light during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, it is the equivalent of
leaving the Inrush Rating box unchecked.


You can use the Duty Cycle page to specify the duty cycle category and load profile for each duty cycle.
Duty Cycle
This section allows you to specify a load profile for each one of the five duty cycle categories. A load
profile defined by a duty cycle consists of a number of consecutive load segments. Each segment is a
square form and is entered in a line in the duty cycle list.
Duty Cycle Category
Select a duty cycle category from the list box to view the load profile for it on this page. Each load can

Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When this field is clicked, a list of
load types appears. The options include Other, Load, Motor, Solenoid, Control Relay, Contact, Constant
for the load segment. If any of the remaining options are selected, the device will behave as a constant Z
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in the field. This allows you to identify a load segment. The names
%Load
Enter the load for a segment in percent of the rated burden Amps of the device. When a new value is
entered in this field, the Amp field for the same section will update automatically. The %Load field for
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes in this field. When a new value is entered in this field, the
%Load field for the same segment will update automatically. The Amp field for the last load segment is
always zero, indicating that a load profile must end with zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds in this field. This is the time when the current load
segment starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the St Time of next
following load segment.
Load Profile
To delete a row of data, highlight the row by clicking on the number of that row, then click on the Del
button or press the Delete key.

User-Defined Info
These fields allow you to enter additional data associated with this component. The names of the User-




UD Field A5
UD Field A6
This is an alphanumeric field with the default name UD Field A6. You can change the name of
this field and enter any additional data for this element here, using up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
alphanumeric characters. For example, a manufacturers diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


This page allows you to enter any additional data or comments regarding condition, maintenance, tests, or
studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase
the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.

CSD Elements General Load Editor
41.12 General Load Editor

A general load is a catch-all category for a generic type of elements used to represent devices in a CSD
that are not control relays, solenoids, or lights. For example, a spring charging motor for a circuit breaker
can be represented by a general load.
41.12.1 Info Page
Info
ID
assigns a unique ID to each general load element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (Dev) plus
an integer, starting with the number one and increasing as the number of buses increases.

The default ID (Dev) for the general load can be changed from the Defaults menu (the Control System
From Node
A device, such as a general load, is graphically connected between two nodes/buses. This field shows the
ID of the node/bus connected at the From side of the general load.
To Node
This field shows the ID of the node/bus connected at the To side of the general load.
Calculation Model
ETAP provides you with two methods to model a general load: Burden & Inrush Rating or Duty Cycle.
You select the method from the editor. It can also be globally selected from the Control System Diagram
Study Case.
If this option is selected, the model entered in the Rating page of the Device Editor will be used to
represent the device in the CSD simulation. The model includes burden rating and inrush rating.
Duty Cycle
When this option is selected, the model entered in the Duty Cycle page of the Device Editor will be used
to represent the device in a CSD simulation.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
the source of the latest data. There are ten data types and you can change their names from the Project
Priority
priority, load shedding priority, etc. You can select from ten different priorities in the list and you can
change their names from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.

41.12.2 Rating Page

The Rating page lets you set the parameters for the voltage rating, burden rating, and inrush rating of a
general load. These parameters can be entered manually. The rating parameters are grouped in three
sections: voltage rating, burden rating and inrush rating.
Voltage Rating
Vrate
Enter the rated voltage in volts for the general load in this field. This value serves as the base for other
voltage values.
%Vmax
Enter the maximum allowed operating voltage for the general load in this field. The value is a percentage
based on the rated voltage.

%Vpickup
Enter the pickup voltage as a percentage of the rated voltage of the general load. Since a general load
does not control other devices, the Vpickup value serves to alert you to possible problem areas. For
example, when the voltage across a spring charging motor is too low, the CB may fail for the next
operation. In CSD simulation, a alert can be generated when the voltage across a general load is less than
the Vpickup value, if this option is selected in the CSD Study Case.
%Vdropout
Enter the dropout voltage as a percentage of the rated voltage of the general load. Since a general load
does not control other devices, the Vdropout value serves to alert you to possible problem areas. In CSD
simulation, an alert can be generated when the voltage across a general load is less than the Vdropout
value, if this option is selected in the CSD Study Case.
Burden Rating
Burden rating is the continuous rating of the general load. When a general load is first energized, for a
brief interval the inrush current can be several times higher than the burden current. After this initial
inrush period, the behavior of a control coil is defined by the burden rating.
W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the continuous power rating of a DC general load.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the continuous current rating of a DC general
load.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-ampere in this field. For DC general load, the VA rating is
the same as the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms for the general load under normal operating conditions. That is, when the
rated voltage is applied across the general load.
In a CSD calculation, a general load can be represented as a constant VA, constant Z, or constant I device
as a burden load. This group of radio buttons allows you to select your preference.
Inrush Rating
The inrush rating of a general load applies to the initial brief interval (in milliseconds) after it becomes
energized. In general, the inrush rating of a general load is several times higher than its burden rating.
Very similar to burden rating parameters, the inrush rating values are also related to each other and to the
automatically update to maintain the integrity of parameters based on Ohms law.
Inrush Rating
Because many general load manufacturers do not provide parameters for the inrush rating of their general
loads, ETAP includes a checkbox that lets you indicate the availability of inrush parameters. If this box is
checked, non-zero inrush rating parameters (such as power and current) must be entered. Otherwise, the
CSD calculations will be blocked. If no inrush rating data are available, simply uncheck this box.

W
Enter the power rating in watts in this field. This is the inrush power rating of a DC general load.
Amp
Enter the current rating in amperes in this field. This is the inrush current rating of a DC general load.
VA
This field displays the power rating in volt-amperes. For DC general load, the VA rating is the same as
the W rating.
Ohm
Enter the DC resistance in ohms of the general load during inrush period in this field.
Duration (ms)
Enter the inrush duration in milliseconds in this field. If the inrush duration is equal to zero, it is the
equivalent of leaving the Inrush Rating box unchecked.


Using the Duty Cycle page, you can specify the duty cycle category and load profile for each duty cycle.
Duty Cycle
This section allows you to specify a load profile for each of the five duty cycle categories. A load profile
defined by a duty cycle consists of a number of consecutive load segments. Each segment is a square
form and is entered on a line in the duty cycle list.
Duty Cycle Category
You can select a duty cycle category from the list box and view the load profile for it in this page. Each
load can have up to five duty cycle categories with independent load profiles. You can name the duty
cycle categories from the Project menu bar.

Type
The Type field defines the load type of a segment of the load profile. When the field is clicked, a list of
load types appears. The options include Other, Load, Motor, Solenoid, Control Relay, Contact, Constant
for the load segment. If any of the remaining options are selected, the device will behave as a constant Z
Name
Enter a text string up to 25 characters in the field. This allows you to identify a load segment. The names
%Load
Enter the load for a segment as a percentage of the rated burden Amps of the device. When a new value
is entered in this field, the Amp field for the same section will update automatically. The %Load field for
Amp
Enter the load for a segment in amperes. When a new value is entered in this field, the %Load field for
the same segment will update automatically. The Amp field for the last load segment is always zero,
indicating that a load profile must end with zero value.
St Time
Enter the starting time for a segment in milliseconds. This is the time when the current load segment
starts. The duration of a load segment starts at its St Time and ends at the St Time of next following load
segment.
Load Profile

User-Defined Info
User-Defined (UD) fields can be changed from the Settings option in the Project menu of the menu bar.

equipment reference number or another number here, using up to five digits.



UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
Reference
characters.
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


When entering information on this page, use Ctrl+Enter to start a new paragraph. Standard key

CSD Elements Contact Editor
41.13 Contact Editor

A contact is a controlled switch whose status is dependent on the operating condition of its controlling
devices, such as a control relay or a solenoid. The logic established between contacts and their
controlling devices is the essential part of control system that supports the functioning of the entire
control mechanism.
In ETAP, there are two types of contacts: regular contact and Form C contact. A regular contact has two
terminals. A Form C contact has three terminals and is similar to two regular contacts connected back to
back, with one always being open and the other always being closed.
Due to the natural logic relationship between a contact and its controlling device, a contact does not have
its own property editor. The engineering property of a contact is entered through the Contact page of the
Property Editor of the controlling device of the contact. When a new contact is added to a CSD view, it is
called an unassigned contact because its controlling device has not yet been determined. When you
double click on the unassigned contact, the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog will open,
allowing you to select a controlling device for the contact. Once its controlling device is selected, the
contact becomes an assigned contact. When you double-click on an assigned contact, ETAP opens the
Property Editor of the controlling device. The contact information will be located in the Contact page of
this editor, and you can obtain contact data from Contact Library or manually specify this information.
41.13.1 Contact Controlling Device Assignment Dialog

The Contact Controlling Device Assignment Dialog allows you to assign an unassigned contact to a
controlling device.
Controlling Device Type
Select a type of controlling device from the list. There are two types of controlling devices in the current
version of ETAP: Control Relay and Solenoid. Once you have selected a controlling device type, the
Controlling Device list will update automatically with all the devices of the selected device type.
Controlling Device
This list presents all device IDs of the selected device type in a CSD View. Clicking on an ID will
highlight that row and the Available Contacts list will update with all unassigned contacts that appear in
the Contact page of the Device Editor.
Available Contacts
This list presents available contacts from the controlling device that you selected in the Controlling
Device list. An available contact is one that appears in the Contact page of the controlling Device Editor
that does not have a contact element assigned to it from the CSD view. The Contact ID field is blank for
available contacts in the Contact page of the Controlling Device Editor.
The contacts displayed in the list are also determined by the type of the contact element from which this
dialog was opened. If the contact element is a regular contact, the list will include all unassigned Fixed
and Convertible contacts, plus the Form C contacts that have User Defined or Contact Lib Overwrite
shown as their data source. If the contact element is a Form C contact, the list will include all unassigned
Form C contacts, plus the Fixed and Convertible contacts that have User Defined or Contact Lib
Overwrite shown as their data source.

CSD Elements Contact Editor
If a CSD contact element is assigned to a contact in the list that has different type, the type of the CSD
element will overwrite the type in the Contact page of the Device Editor. For example, when the Contact
Controlling Device Assignment dialog shown above is opened from a Form C contact, the Available
Contact list includes two Form C contacts (5 and 8) and one Convertible contact (9). If number 9 is
selected for the assignment, the type of this contact in the Contact page of control relay M will change
from a Convertible contact to a Form C contact.
Select
Clicking on the Select button completes the assignment of the contact element in CSD to your selected
available contact from the controlling device. The Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog will
close.
Select/Editor
Clicking this button completes the assignment of the contact element in CSD to the selected available
contact from the controlling device. The Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog will close and
the editor of the controlling device for the contact that was just assigned will be brought up as the Contact
page.
Cancel
If you click on this button the Contact Controlling Device Assignment dialog closes without making any
contact assignment.

CSD Elements Macro Controlled Contact
41.14 Macro Controlled Contact

A Macro Controlled Contact is an element in ETAP used to simulate a time-controlled switch. Its
primary purpose is to represent the control logic of a CSD when device duty cycle model is chosen to
represent devices. In this case, a controlling device cannot control the state of contacts, but macro
controlled contacts can be utilized to simulate the same logic to change system configurations. The
behavior of a macro controlled contact is defined by its duty cycle where its status, open or closed, can be
flexibly defined as a function of time.
41.14.1 Info Page
Info
ID
assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (MC)

The default ID (MC) for the DC bus can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View by entering a new name of up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From / To
These two fields display the ID of the connected elements of a macro controlled contact. A macro
controlled contact can be connected between two nodes, a bus and a node, a bus and a device, or a bus
and a branch.
The operating condition of a macro controlled contact can be selected by choosing either the In Service or
the Out of Service option. The properties of an Out of Service macro controlled contact can be edited just
like an In Service macro controlled contact; however, an Out of Service macro controlled contact will not
be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of Service macro
controlled contact automatically becomes grayed out in the CSD view.
Initial (Normal) State
This is the state a macro controlled contact takes when the CSD view is in the Edit mode and when ETAP
determines the initial steady state of the CSD in the Study mode. There are two options: Normally Open
and Normally Closed.
Equipment
Tag #
Enter the tag number in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description


The behavior of a macro controlled contact is defined by its duty cycle, which specifies the state of the
macro controlled contact in a time sequence.
Duty Cycle
The duty cycle of a macro controlled contact consists of a number of states in a sequence of increasing
time intervals. The duty cycle list is presented in three columns: Name (of the duty cycle step), State (On
or Off), and Time (interval). Each state is defined as a row of this duty cycle list.
Duty Cycle Category
Select one of the five duty cycles from the list box to establish the category. States for each category can
be added and named. When a duty cycle is selected, the data will display in the duty cycle list and can be
modified.
Name
Enter a description of a step of the duty cycle in this field, using up to 25 alphanumerical letters.

State
Select the state of the macro controlled contact. When you click on this field, an arrow for a drop-down
list appears; click on it and two options appear: ON and OFF. Click on your choice.
Time
Specify time for a state. The duty cycle list is refreshed when you change a page or duty cycle category
and it is sorted according to the time column in increasing order when the list is refreshed.
Ins
The Insert button becomes enabled when a row (other than row 1) is selected in the duty cycle list.
Clicking this button will insert an empty row in the duty cycle list above the selected row.
Add
Clicking on the Add button will add an empty row underneath the selected row of the duty cycle list.
Del
The Delete button becomes enabled when a row is selected in the duty cycle list. Clicking on this button
will delete the selected row.
Print
Clicking on this button sends the duty cycle curve to the selected printer.

User-Defined Info


UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
to 50 alphanumeric characters. An example is the manufacturer diagram or specifications for this element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date


combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste.

CSD Elements Control Cable Schedule
41.15 Control Cable Schedule

Wires in a control system are typically much smaller than power cables. A control cable installed
between locations A and B can contain a number of wires being used in a control system. In ETAP, all
control cables are created in the Control Cable Schedule, which is a holding place located at the ETAP
project level for all control cables. Using the Control Cable Schedule, you can create/delete control
cables, modify control cable parameter, and assign CSD wires to control cables. Any cables created in
the Control Cable schedule will not appear in an ETAP one-line view, since the Control Cable Schedule is
primarily a place that defines the properties for CSD wires that physically form a control cable.
41.15.1 Control Cable Schedule Dialog

To open the Control Cable Schedule, go to the Project menu and select the Control Cable Schedule
option. This opens the CSD Control Cable Schedule dialog, which presents a list of all control cables in
the project and several buttons for adding, deleting, and modifying cable parameters.
Control Cable List

The Control Cable List displays all control cables in the project. These are display only fields and the
data can be modified in the Control Cable Schedule Editor. The list shows the cable information and wire
assignment information for each cable. A detailed explanation of each field is given in the Control Cable
Schedule Editor section.
Add
Clicking the Add button will bring up a blank Control Cable Schedule Editor, where you can create a new
control cable.

Delete
Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected control cable.
Edit
Clicking the Edit button will bring up the Control Cable Schedule Editor and allow you to modify the
parameters for the selected control cable.
Print Schedule
Clicking the Print Schedule button will send the displayed control cable list to the selected printer.
41.15.2 Control Cable Schedule Editor

Using the Control Cable Schedule Editor, you can enter cable parameters, change the number of wires for
a cable, and set the status of an unassigned wire.
Connection
Enter the cable ID and the two physical locations of the cable in this section.
ID
ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (CtrlCable) plus an

From Loc
Enter an alphanumeric location with a maximum of 22 characters or select an existing location from the
list. This is the physical From location of the control cable. This information is for your reference only
and does not affect a CSD calculation.
To Loc
Enter an alphanumeric location with a maximum of 22 characters or select an existing location from the
list. This is the physical To location of the control cable. This information is for your information only
and does not affect a CSD calculation.
Length
Enter the cable length in this field. This length value will be used to calculate wire impedance.
Unit
Select a unit of measure for the cable length from the drop-down list. There are four options available: ft,
mile, m, and km.
%Tol.
Enter cable length tolerance as a percentage. This tolerance value will be used in CSD calculations to
increase wire length.
Z
Enter or modify cable impedance values in the Z section in this field. If Impedance values originate from
the Cable Library, when the values are modified, the cable header information will change to a dark blue
color, indicating that the original data from the Cable Library has been modified.
R
Enter the cable DC resistance value in Ohms at the specified length unit and base temperature in this
field.
L
Enter the cable DC inductance value in Henries at the specified length unit in this field.
Length Unit
Select length unit for cable resistance and inductance. There are two options: total Z value or Z per unit
length. When the total Z value option is selected, the R and L values entered are for the entire cable, no
matter what the length of the cable. When the Z per unit length option is selected, the R and L values
entered are for the specified unit length. ETAP will calculate the cable impedance automatically for the
study based on the cable length.
Unit Length
When the Z per unit length option is selected, this field and the field for the unit for Unit Length become
enabled. Enter unit length at the unit for Unit Length.
Unit for Unit Length
When the Z per unit length option is selected, this field and the Unit Length field become enabled. Select
a unit of measure for Unit Length from the drop-down list. There are four options available: ft, mile, m,
and km.
Base Temp.
Enter a temperature or select from the drop-down list a base temperature for cable DC resistance. This is
the temperature value at which the DC resistance is specified. In CSD calculations, the cable resistance
value will automatically adjust to the operating temperature based on the specified Study Case and Wire
Editor options.

Wire
This section includes fields for specifying number of wires contained in the cable and a list of all wires
with status. For assigned wires, it also displays the name of the assigned wire element and its CSD
location.
Status
This column identifies the status of a wire contained in the cable. A wire can have one of three different
statuses: Assigned, Reserved, and Free.
The Assigned status indicates that this wire has been assigned to a CSD wire element. Such an
assignment can only be made from the Wire Editor. In addition, a wire can only be assigned to one CSD
wire element. Once assigned, the CSD wire element takes all of its wire parameters from the cable
specifications in the Cable Schedule for CSD calculations.
A Reserved status indicates that this wire has been set aside for future use and cannot be assigned to any
CSD wire element. The Free status indicates that this wire is available for assignment or can be defined
as reserved for future use.
You may change the wire status between Free to Reserved. To make this change, click on the status field
of a wire that shows either Reserved or Free and a list with two options will appear that allows you to
make the selection.
Name
This column applies to wires that have Assigned status and displays the ID of the CSD wire element to
which this wire has been assigned.
CSD
This column applies to wires that have Assigned status and displays the ID of the CSD view in which the
assigned wire element is located.
Total
Enter the total number of wires contained in the cable in this field.
Note: If changing this quantity to a smaller value, the value cannot be less than the number of wires that
have Assigned or Reserved status.
Assigned
This display only field shows the total number of assigned wire in the cable. The assigned wires are
identified in the wire list.
Reserved
This display only field shows the total number of reserved wire for the cable. The reserved wires are
identified in the wire list.
Free
This display only field shows the total number of free wires for the cable. The free wires are identified in
the wire list.
Cable Library
Clicking the Cable Library button will bring up the Cable Library Quick Pick dialog shown below to
retrieve cable data from the library. The data retrieved from Cable Library includes cable header
information and parameters in the Z section. If any parameter in the Z section is changed, the cable
header text will turn a dark blue color to indicate that the cable data extracted originally from the library
has been modified.

41.15.3 Revisions for Control Cable Schedule

Due to the complexity of the Control Cable Schedule and the required flexibility in control cable
assignments, the procedure for revisions to the Control Cable Schedule follows specific rules, which are
explained in this section.
Rules for Control Cable Schedule Revisions

The data contained in Control Cable Schedule classifies into two groups: the cable engineering
parameters and the wire assignment information. These two groups of data behave differently in
revisions.
Cable Engineering Data
The cable engineering data includes parameters in the following sections: Cable Header, Connection,
Length, and Z. In the current version of ETAP, these parameters are not supported by revisions. This
means that these parameters cannot be changed in a revision. In any revision, they are always the same as
the values in the Base revision.
Wire Assignment Data
Wire assignment data includes assignment table, number of free and total wires. The data revision of
wire assignment works on individual wire slot basis.
1. A revision for a wire slot is created when the status of the wire slot is changed. After the status of a
wire slot is changed in a revision, any change on the same wire slot in Base will not affect the status
of the wire slot in the revision.
2. A change in the status of a wire slot is made when the status is changed from Free to Reserved or vise
versa, when the status is changed from Assigned to Free by un-assigning a wire, or when the status is
change from Free to Assigned by assigning a wire to the wire slot.
Note: When an assigned wire slot is reassigned with a different wire, the revision for the slot is also
made, since the process requires you to un-assign the wire slot first.

3. When implementing a revision, the number of Total or Free wires can be changed, as long as the
Total wire number is not less than the last assigned or reserved wire number. However, after you
have made changes to these numbers in a revision, if you increase the Total wire number in Base to a
value larger than the Total wire number in the revision, the Total and Free wire number in the
revision will update accordingly. This is because as the Total wire number is changed in Base, new
wire slots are added to the system in both Base and revisions.
Rules for Wire Editor Revision Related to Control Cable Schedule

Parameters in the Impedance page of the Wire Editor are related to Control Cable Schedule. Revisions of
these parameters follow some specific rules as described below. Revisions for parameters on other pages
behave the same as other elements.
1. If a wire element is not assigned to a control cable and the impedance page data has been changed in
a revision, when you make assignment of this wire to a control cable in Base, the same assignment
will take effect in the revision. In the revision, this wire will assume control cable impedance
parameters.
2. If a wire element is not assigned to a control cable and, in a revision, it has retrieved impedance data
from a Cable Library, when you make assignment of this wire to a control cable in Base, the
assignment will not take effect in the revision. In the revision, this wire will still use the impedance
parameters from the Cable Library, even though in the Control Cable Schedule it may show that the
wire is assigned to a wire slot.
3. If a wire has been unassigned from a control cable in a revision, when you assign this wire to the
same or a different wire slot in Base, the assignment will not take effect in the revision. In the
revision, this wire will use the impedance parameters displayed in the Wire Editor, even though in the
Control Cable Schedule it may show that the wire is assigned to a wire slot.
4. If a wire has been assigned to a control cable in a revision, when you make assignment of additional
wire slots from the same control cable to the wire in Base, the additional assignment will take effect
in the revision, as long as these additional wire slots have no revision data in the revision.
5. In some cases, an assignment made in Base may cause a conflict in a revision. For example, in Base
a wire element (wire-A) is assigned to a wire slot (slot-1) of a control cable, but in a revision the same
wire slot (slot-1) has already been assigned by another wire element (wire-B). Even though wire-A
may have no revision data in the revision, the wire slot (slot-1) has revision data already and hence it
does not follow the change in the Base.
6. When such conflicts occurs, if wire-A is only assigned to s single slot (slot-1) in Base, a message will
be displayed in the revision. If wire-A has multiple wire slots assigned in Base, ETAP will keep only
non-conflict assignments for wire-A in the revision.
7. In some special cases, the Cable Schedule assignment list may not agree with what is shown in the
Wire Editor, as in the cases discussed in items 2 and 3. Under all conditions, the impedance data
displayed in the Wire Editor will be used in the CSD calculation.
Revision Merge for Control Cable Schedule and Wire Impedance Data
When merge control cable schedule and wire impedance data from one revision to another, conflicts in
wire assignments may occur. If this occurs, the assignments with conflicts will drop in the destination
revision (the To Revision). However, under all conditions the impedance data displayed in the Wire
Editor will be used in the CSD calculations.

CSD Elements Wire Editor
41.16 Wire Editor
41.16.1 Info Page
Info
ID
assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (Wire)
The default ID (Wire) for the wires can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or from the
Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From / To
These two fields display the buses or nodes connected at two terminals of the wire.


The operating condition of a wire can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of an Out of Service wire can be edited like an In Service wire; however, an Out of
Service wire will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is activated, an Out of
Service wire automatically becomes grayed out in the CSD view.
Equipment
Tag
Enter the tag in this field, using up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Name
Description


Wire impedance parameters are specified in the Impedance page of the CSD Wire Editor. There are three
ways to enter wire impedance data. You can enter wire impedance parameter directly to the fields in the
editor, you can assign the CSD wire to a control cable to utilize the parameters from the Control Cable
Schedule, or you can retrieve parameters from the Cable Library.
Library Header
The top of the page displays library header information, which includes cable library source, insulation
type, voltage level, conductor type, and cable size, etc. If the wire impedance data originates from the
Cable Library, or from a Cable Schedule that retrieved data from the Cable Library, the library
information will display in the header section. Otherwise, the library header section will be blank.
Size
If the wire parameters have been retrieved from the Cable Library, the wire size can be changed by
selecting a new size form the list. If the wire parameters are from the Cable Schedule, this field is
disabled, since the size of the cable can only be changed form the Cable Schedule.

Control Cable Schedule

Clicking on the Control Cable Schedule opens the CSD Control Cable Quick Pick dialog. You can assign
the CSD wire to different wires slots in a cable from the Control Cable Schedule from this dialog. Once a
wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this wire becomes part of the cable and all
impedance parameters of the wire will come from the Cable Editor in the Control Cable Schedule.
Wire Name
This field displays the name of the CSD wire for which you opened the Quick Pick dialog. Any wire
assignment changes done from the dialog applies to this wire.
Cables
This list itemizes all control cables entered in the Control Cable Schedule. When a cable is selected by
clicking on its ID in the list, all the wire assignments for the cable displays in the Wires list at right.
Wire Slot (Wire Number)

This column in the Wires list gives the order number of all wires contained in the selected cable (CCable-
B). The numbers are not necessarily in sequence. Each number represents a wire in the cable. As given
in the example above, CCable-B has ten wires in total, five assigned wires, two reserved wires and three
free wires.

Status
Each wire can be in one of the three different statuses: Assigned, Reserved, and Free. You can use the
CSD Control Cable Quick Pick dialog to change a Free status wire to Assigned, but the Assigned and
Reserved status cannot be changed. By changing the status of a wire from Free to Assigned, you are
assigning the wire from the control cable to the CSD wire. For example, wire number 9 has been assigned
to Wire2. This can be seen from the Name column of wire number 9 as well as the number displayed in
the Selected Wires field. Note that multiple wires can be assigned to the same CSD wire element.
Name
For the assigned wires, this field displays the name of the CSD wire element to which the wire has been
assigned.
CSD
For the assigned wires, this field displays the CSD name of the wire element to which the wire has been
assigned.
Selected Wires
This field displays all the wires that are to be assigned to the CSD wire element (Wire 2).
Select
Clicking this button will accept the assignment made from the CSD Control Cable Quick Pick dialog and
return to the CSD Wire Editor.
Note: Wires assigned to a CSD wire element must be from the same control cable. If the CSD wire
element has been assigned with wires from another control cable other than the currently selected cable,
clicking the Select button will remove the previous assignment and set the status of the wires previously
assigned to the CSD wire element to Free.
None
Clicking this button will remove all assignment to the CSD wire element, close the CSD Control Cable
Quick Pick dialog, and return to the CSD Wire Editor. The impedance data in the CSD Wire Editor will
remain unchanged.
Cancel
Clicking this button will close the CSD Control Cable Quick Pick dialog without making any assignment
changes.
Cable Library
Clicking on the Cable Library button will bring up the Cable Library Quick Pick, where you can select
cable impedance data for the CSD wire. The selected cable impedance data will be copied to the wire
Editor. The data includes parameters in the Impedance section, Unit section, and the wire Base
Temperature.
The data retrieved from a Cable Library may also be modified in the Wire Editor. If any data retrieved
from Cable Library is changed in the editor, the Library Header text will turn to a dark blue color,
indicating that the original library data has been modified. You may also select a new size from the Cable
Library from the Size list in the Cable Header section.

Link to Library
This checkbox becomes enables when the wire has complete cable header information. The wire will
have cable header information under one of the two conditions: one, the wire data have been retrieved
from a Cable Library; and two, the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule and that
cable has retrieved data from the Cable library.
When the Link to Library box is checked, the impedance data displayed in the wire Editor are directly
from the Cable Library as described in the cable header. These are the data used in CSD calculations.
Control Cable
No. of Wires
This field shows the number of physical wires that form the wire element. When assigned to a cable in
the Control Cable Schedule, this is a display field only. Otherwise, it is an editable field for you to enter
number of wires for the wire element. In CSD calculations, ETAP will automatically adjust wire total
impedance accordingly.
Cable ID
When the wire element is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this field displays the ID of
the assigned cable. Otherwise, the field is hidden.
Wire No.
When the wire element is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this field displays the wire
slot number of the cable the wire element has been assigned to. Otherwise, the field is hidden.
Length
Length
Enter the length of the wire at the unit in this field. If the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable
Schedule, this field becomes a display only field.

Unit
Select a unit for wire length from the drop-down list. The available options include foot, mile, meter and
kilometer. If the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this field becomes a display
only field.
Tolerance
Enter the length tolerance in percent for the wire in this field. The CSD Study Case also provides an
option to apply length tolerance for the wire. When applied, the tolerance will be used as positive value
to increase the length of the wire. If the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, this
field becomes a display only field.
Impedance (per conductor)
R
Enter the wire resistance per conductor in Ohms at the unit specified in the Unit section in this field.
When the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is checked,
this field becomes display only.
L
Enter wire inductance per conductor in Henrys at the unit specified in the Unit section. When the wire is
assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is checked, this field
becomes display only.
Unit
Z per / Z
There are two ways to specify the unit for wire impedance. When the Z per option is selected, the R and L
of the wire are entered at the unit specified in the Unit Length and Unit for Unit Length next to the
selection. The actual per conductor impedance value for the wire will be calculated considering the wire
length. If the Z option is selected, the impedance value specified in the Impedance section will be the
total wire impedance per conductor.
When the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is checked,
this field is grayed out and is non-editable.
Unit Length
When the Z per option is selected, this field becomes enabled. Enter the unit length at the unit in the next
field. When the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is
checked, this field is grayed out and is non-editable.
Unit for Unit Length
When the Z per option is selected, this field becomes enabled. Select a unit for unit length. The available
options include foot, mile, meter and kilometer. When the wire is assigned to a cable in the Control
Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is checked, this field is grayed out and is non-editable.
Wire Temperature
Base
Enter the base temperature in Celsius for the wire resistance in this field. When the wire is assigned to a
cable in the Control Cable Schedule or the Link to Library box is checked, this field becomes display
only, showing the based temperature from the cable or the library.
Min.
Enter the minimum temperature in Celsius for the wire resistance in this field.

Max.
Enter the maximum temperature in Celsius for the wire resistance in this field. This temperature may be
used to adjust wire resistance depending on the option selected in the CSD Study Case.
Revision Data for Wire Impedance
When the wire is not assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, the revision data for the
impedance page behaves the same as the data in any other page and the same as other elements in ETAP.
However, if the wire is assigned or has been assigned to a cable in the Control Cable Schedule, specific
rules apply. For details, see section Revisions for Control Cable Schedule in Control Cable Schedule
(42.15.3).
User-Defined Info


UD Field A5
UD Field A6
UD Field A7
Drawing / Diagram
One-Line
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchasing Date


You can use this page to enter any additional data or comments regarding conditions, maintenance, tests,
or studies, associated with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To
increase the size of this field, refer to the entries in the ETAPS.INI file.
combinations such as Ctrl+X, Ctrl+C, and Ctrl+V can be used to cut, copy, and paste.

CSD Elements Impedance Editor
41.17 Impedance Editor
41.17.1 Info Page
Info
ID
assigns a unique ID to each impedance branch element. The assigned IDs consist of the default ID (dcZ)
The default ID (dcZ) for the DC Impedance can be changed from the Defaults menu in the menu bar or
from the Project View by entering a new name with up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
From / To
This two fields display the buses or nodes connected at two terminals of the impedance.
The operating condition of impedance can be selected by choosing either the In Service or Out of Service
option. The properties of Out of Service impedance can be edited similar to an In Service bus; however,

Out of Service impedance will not be included in any system studies. When Continuity Check is
activated, Out of Service impedance automatically becomes grayed out in the one-line diagram.
Equipment
FDR Tag
Name
Description
Data Type
Priority
priority, load shedding priority, etc. You can select from ten different priorities on the list and you can
change their name from the Project menu under Settings and Load Priority.
Impedance
R
Enter impedance resistance in Ohms.
L
Enter wire inductance in Henrys.

User Defined Info

UD Field 5

UD Field 6
UD Field 7
Drawing/Diagram
One-Line
element.
Reference
Manufacturer
Name
Purchase Date


Enter any additional data or comments regarding conditions, maintenance, tests, or studies, associated
with this element. This field can be up to 64kb with a default size of 4kb. To increase the size of this field,

Chapter 42
Control System Diagram (CSD)
ETAP now provides the ability to create a Control Systems Diagram (CSD) as a separate presentation.
The icon for this feature, shown below, is accessed on the System (left) toolbar.
The CSD presentation feature allows you to construct a control systems diagram and simulate
complicated sequences of control operations, such as motor starting control and power circuit breaker
operations. In a CSD, any number of devices, wires, and other components can be placed and connected
in the same manner as a real control system inserted between the positive and negative buses. This highly
flexible tool allows the user to establish control logic between the controlling devices (control relays and
solenoids) and the controlled switches (contacts). This technique is the key to simulating a sequence-of-
operations in a control system. Using the ETAP Control System Diagram, the user can model and
simulate control systems just as ETAP can model DC and AC systems. This is a powerful tool for design
and verification of control system diagrams.
This chapter is organized into seven sections:
1. The Control System Diagram Presentation section describes the creation of a CSD. There are several
ways you can create new CSD presentations and this section covers each method.
2. The Edit Mode section describes the functions and display options in the Edit Mode.
3. The Voltage Drop Mode section covers items related to CSD calculations, including the Study
toolbar, CSD Study Case Editor, display options, and CSD Calculation Methods.
4. The Required Data section lists the parameters necessary to perform CSD calculations.
5. The Output Reports section describes the reporting schemes available to the user after performing
CSD calculations, which include Crystal Reports, the Event Viewer, and the Alert Viewer.

Control System Diagram Simulation Control System Diagram Presentation
42.1 Control System Diagram Presentation

A Control System Diagram (CSD) Presentation is an interactive diagram view generated by ETAP. All
the different CSD devices can be inserted and connected in this presentation to form complex logical
diagrams. The motor starter control circuit shown below is a typical example of such a diagram.
Using ETAP you can create as many CSD presentations as needed. However, it should be noted that,
unlike elements in One-Line-Diagram presentations, the elements contained in any two CSD
presentations are completely different physical elements. That is, ETAP does not permit the same
element to appear in more than one CSD presentation. Each CSD presentation models a separate control
circuit diagram.
The following sections describe the three methods available to create a CSD presentation.
From the ETAP System toolbar

From the New Presentation button
From the ETAP Project view

42.1.1 Creating a CSD Presentation from the System Toolbar

If the ETAP project does not have any CSD presentations, clicking on the Control System Diagram
button will bring up the Create Presentation dialog box shown below. This dialog box provides a
suggested ID for a new CSD presentation. The default name is (CSD) with a number suffix. This ID can
be modified to meet your specific needs.
42.1.2 Creating a CSD Presentation from the CSD Presentation

Toolbar
If there is at least one CSD presentation in the project, the CSD Presentation toolbar will display its name
as shown below. This toolbar also contains a New Presentation button. Clicking on the New Presentation
button will bring up the Create Presentation dialog box, which permits the user to create more CSD
presentations if needed.
Note: The Create Presentation dialog has a Copy option. When the Copy option is selected, the user can
specify the From and To CSD presentation files. The Copy function means the new CSD (CSD6) will
have the same types of elements and connections as the source CSD1 (except for the sources).
Note: A CSD source can only appear in one CSD presentation. Sources in a CSD presentation must be
brought in by separate actions (see Section 42.2.1, Element Connections in CSD Presentations, CSD
Source).

42.1.3 Creating a CSD Presentation from the ETAP Project View

The third way to create a CSD presentation is from the ETAP Project View. In this view, you will find a
folder named Control Systems. Right mouse clicking on this folder will bring up the Create New
option. When this option is selected, it brings up the Create Presentation dialog box.

Control System Diagram Simulation Edit Mode
42.2 Edit Mode

The CSD presentation can be placed under two modes. Edit Mode and Voltage Drop Mode. In the Edit
Mode, a control system can be constructed and modified. This includes adding and deleting elements,
making connections, and changing element parameters. A variety of elements are provided by ETAP for
inclusion in the control system diagram, as listed below:
CSD Bus
CSD Node
CSD Control Relay
CSD Solenoid
CSD Light
CSD General Load
CSD Contact
CSD Double Contact (Form C Contact)
CSD Macro Controlled Contact
CSD Push-Button
CSD Fuse
CSD Breaker
CSD Switch
CSD Wire
CSD Impedance
Adding, deleting (cutting), and copying elements in a CSD presentation is done in an identical manner as
in the regular One-Line Diagram (OLD) presentations. The right-mouse-click menu also provides the
same options as the OLD presentation tools.
The control logic between the controlling devices (control relays and solenoids) and the controlled
switches (contacts) can be set up by assigning contacts to a controlling device (a control relay or a
solenoid). Once assigned, the status of a contact will be determined by the state of the controlling device
(i.e., energized or not energized).
42.2.1 Element Connections in CSD Presentations

Bus and Node
Each CSD bus element consists of two separate parallel lines when drawn on the CSD. These two CSD
buses share the same Bus Editor and move as if locked together when extended in a horizontal
direction. However, a selected bus can be moved independently of the other, up or down, when it is
shifted in a vertical direction, as shown below.
A bus can be connected to a CSD source directly, or through a protective device, or a branch, which
might

ETAP User Guide 7.5.2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETAP User Guide 7.5.2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETAP 7.5.

Operation Technology, Inc.

Certification No. 10002889 QM08

Operation Technology, Inc.

(949) 462-0100 Sales

Operation Technology, Inc. ii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 5 Database and Project Management

Chapter 6 User Access Management

Chapter 7 Printing and Plotting

Chapter 8 Engineering Libraries

Operation Technology, Inc. iii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 9 One-Line Diagram GUI

Chapter 10 Menu Bars

Operation Technology, Inc. iv ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 12 Instrumentation Elements

Chapter 13 AC-DC Elements

Operation Technology, Inc. v ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 15 Short-Circuit Analysis

Chapter 16 STAR Device Cordination Analysis

Chapter 17 STAR View

Chapter 18 Arc Flash Analysis

Chapter 19 Load Flow Analysis

Operation Technology, Inc. vi ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 20 Unbalanced Load Flow Analysis

Chapter 21 Motor Starting Analysis

Chapter 22 Transient Stability Analysis

Chapter 23 Generator Start-Up

Chapter 24 Dynamic Models

Operation Technology, Inc. vii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 25 User Defined Dynamic Models

Chapter 26 Parameter Estimation

Chapter 27 Harmonic Analysis

Chapter 28 Optimal Power Flow

Chapter 29 Optimal Capacitor Placement

Operation Technology, Inc. viii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 30 Reliabitliy Analysis

Chapter 31 Transformer MVA Sizing

Chapter 32 Transformer Tap Optimization

Chapter 33 DC Short-Circuit Analysis

Chapter 34 DC Load Flow Analysis

Chapter 35 Battery Sizing and Discharge

Operation Technology, Inc. ix ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 37 Ground Grid Systems

Chapter 38 Underground Raceway Systems

Operation Technology, Inc. x ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 40 ETAP DataX (Data Exchange)

Chapter 41 CSD Elements

Chapter 42 Control System Diagram (CSD)

Operation Technology, Inc. xi ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Chapter 44 ETAP DataX (GIS Map)

Operation Technology, Inc. xii ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Virtual Reality Operation

Operation Technology, Inc. 1-1 ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Total Integration of Data

Simplicity in Data Entry

ETAPs one-line diagram supports a number of features to assist you in

Operation Technology, Inc. 1-2 ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Operation Technology, Inc. 1-3 ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Operation Technology, Inc. 1-4 ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

Interchangeable ANSI and IEC element symbols

Time-Current Device Coordination/Selectivity Plots (ETAP Star)

Operation Technology, Inc. 1-5 ETAP 7.5.2 User Guide

3-D touch, step, and absolute potential plots